Micro Station V8 XM Users Guide

What's New?
Page 1 of 113
What's What's New? New?

New in SELECT Update #2 New in SELECT Update #1 New in MicroStation V8 XM Edition
New in SELECT Update #2

While the primary purpose of SELECT updates is increasing software stability, SELECT Update #2 offers several new features and enhancements. The following topics summarize the new features and enhancements. AutoCAD Interoperability Conceptual Modeling Tools Enhancements Microsoft Windows Vista Logo Certification Viewing Enhancements Visualization
AutoCAD Interoperability
In this SELECT Update, MicroStation extends its support for reading and writing the DWG file format to AutoCAD 2008. Configuration variables for all settings in DWG Open/Save dialogs All of the settings in the DWG Open/Save dialog boxes are controllable through configuration variables.
Conceptual Modeling Tools Enhancements

Conceptual modeling tools let you interactively push-pull solids to modify their faces, edges, or vertices. These tools were introduced in were introduced in SELECT Update #1 and are enhanced in this SELECT Update. Modify Solid Entity tool The Modify Solid Entity tool gives you options to specify the item that you want to manipulate, plus the option to extrude a face.
Option to select face, edge, vertex, or all
The Modify Solid Entity settings window contains icons for choosing:

All Lets you select a visible face, or any edge or vertex on a solid in the view. Face Lets you select a face on any identified solid in the view. By default the nearest face is selected, with Resets letting you select hidden faces on the same solid. Edge Lets you select any edge on any solid in the view. Vertex Lets you select any vertex on any solid in the view.
Additional options for full dynamics and extrude faces
Other new settings for the Modify Solid Entity tool are as follows:
Extrude Faces Lets you extrude a selected face of a solid. F ll D i L t d fi h th th difi d l t di l i t ti l (F ll D i ) d i t h
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm
3/24/2010
What's New?
the direction and extent of the modification.
Page 2 of 113
Microsoft Windows Vista Logo Certification

Effective with this SELECT Update, Microsoft certifies that MicroStation qualifies for their Certified for Windows Vista logo and benefits. Default "WorkSpace" directory structure location The default location of the "WorkSpace" directory on Windows Vista systems is "C:\ProgramData\Bentley". The default location on Windows XP systems is unchanged: "C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley".
Viewing Enhancements
This SELECT Update includes viewing enhancements. Performance optimization of large, complex models This SELECT Update optimizes the speed with which large, complex models are displayed in smooth shaded or hidden line views. Navigate View view control Enhancements to the Navigate View view control include:

Navigate View displays a simplified view cone in other open views. Only the eyepoint, target, and move handles are available. When Navigate View is selected for a view in which the camera is not turned on, the camera is turned on automatically.
Define Camera tool The Define Camera tool displays the front and back clip shapes in the camera cone only if they are turned on for the view.
Visualization
Visualization functionality is enhanced in this SELECT Update. Rendering enhancements Ray Tracing adds the option of soft shadows.
Ray traced soft shadows
Ray Tracing adds support for soft shadows for all source lighting and Solar. Soft shadows are produced by ray tracing samples from each light source. The Ray Tracing dialog box includes a new setting for shadows that lets you select from:

Per Light Samples are controlled by the shadows setting for each light source. Sharp Number of samples 1. Soft - Coarse Number of samples 16.
3/24/2010
What's New?

Page 3 of 113
Soft - Fine Number of samples 160. Soft - Very Fine Number of samples 256.
Each source light has a similar setting for selecting the type of shadow, as does Solar lighting. Animation enhancements The Animation Producer utility adds support for ProjectWise Schedule Simulation and for animating actors present in references.
Support for ProjectWise Schedule Simulation
This update includes support for ProjectWise Schedule Simulation. In order to use ProjectWise Schedule Simulation, you must first obtain a separate ProjectWise Schedule Simulation license using the License Management Tool.
Animating actors in references
Parametric animation of actors present in references (DGN and DWG) is supported. Using the Script Actor tool, you can select actors present in the active model and in references to the model. As well, you can use the Define Actor Path tool to define paths for actors located in DGN and DWG references.
New in SELECT Update #1

While the primary purpose of SELECT updates is increasing software stability, SELECT Update #1 brings many new features and enhancements. The following topics summarize the new features and enhancements. Menu Changes 3D Modeling Enhancements AccuDraw Enhancements AutoCAD Interoperability Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS) Enhancements B-spline Curves Enhancements Cells Enhancements Design History Enhancements Dimensioning Enhancements Distributed DGN Support Drawing Scale Window Enhancements Drawing Tools Element Information Enhancements Fence Enhancements Fields Enhancements Google 3D Warehouse Interface Google Earth Tools Enhancements Levels Enhancements License Management Enhancements Measuring Enhancements Models Enhancements Multi-core/multi-processor Support Multi-lines Enhancements OBJ File Support OLE Enhancements Place Note Enhancements Printing Enhancements Raster Manager Enhancements Saved View Enhancements Standards Checker Enhancements Tags Enhancements Text Enhancements User Interface Enhancements Viewing Enhancements Visualization
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 4 of 113
Menu Changes
The following sections list changes in the menu structure for MicroStation V8 XM Edition SELECT Update #1. The Edit, Element, Tools, Workspace, Window, and Help menus are unchanged. File menu changes Choosing Export > SketchUp lets you export geometry to SketchUp files. The Google Earth (KML) File item in the Export submenu is shortened to Google Earth. Choosing Export > Collada lets you export geometry to Collada (version 1.4) files. Settings menu changes The Camera submenu is removed. Camera setup is integrated into the Change View Perspective view control. Utilities menu changes The items in the 3D Warehouse submenu are entry points to the 3D Warehouse Interface added in this SELECT update.
3D Modeling Enhancements
Enhancements to the 3D modeling tools include added lofting capabilities in the Construct Surface by Section and Loft Block to Circle tools, and the addition of push-pull modeling technology. Conceptual Modeling tools The 3D Modify task has been enhanced with the addition of a new tool and push-pull modeling technology. This technology lets you quickly create and modify solids interactively.
Draw geometry on face of solids
The Draw on Solid tool is an addition to the 3D Modify task. It lets you draw lines, shapes, and circles, directly onto the face of an existing solid, or you can imprint a curve onto the face. These additions to the solid become faces that may be modified with the Modify Solid Entity tool. In operation, the tool recognizes the nearest face under the pointer and matches the AccuDraw drawing plane to the selected face. Where a drawn line does not intersect with an existing edge, it is extended to the edge.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Drawing a single line on the solid (left) and modifying the new edge (right).
Page 5 of 113
Drawing lines (like a line string) on the solid to divide the face (left) and modifying the new face (right).
Drawing a block on the solid (left) and modifying the new face (right).
Direct manipulation of solids
The Modify Solid Entity tool in the 3D Modify task lets you modify solids by identifying a vertex, an edge, or a face, and moving it interactively. For precision adjustments, you can use its Distance setting or AccuDraw.
Identify the vertex (left) and move it (right).
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 6 of 113
Identify the edge (left) and move it (right).
Identify the face (left) and move it (right).
The Delete Solid Entity tool in the 3D Modify task replaces the Remove Faces and Heal tool and lets you delete vertices, edges, or faces, of an existing solid.
Deleting a vertex: Identify the vertex (left) and accept (right).
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 7 of 113
Deleting an edge: Identify the edge (left) and accept (right).
Deleting faces: Identify the face (left) and accept (right).
Loft Block to Circle tool The Loft Block to Circle tool is added to the 3D Construct task. With this new tool you can create a surface/solid transition from a rectangular to a circular section. The surface/solid can be defined graphically, or you can use tool settings to define it.
Surface created with the Loft Block to Circle tool.
Construct Surface by Section tool I th C t S f t k th C t tS f b S ti N t kt li l d b th C t tS f b N t k d
3/24/2010
What's New?
Construct Surface by Section tools. The latter is enhanced for this SELECT update.
Control start and end tangencies
Page 8 of 113
The Construct Surface by Section tool's Start and End Continuity settings let you control how the surface is constructed. When set to Tangent and an edge of a surface is selected, for example, the tangency of the surface is considered. This creates a smoother transition from the original surface to the new surface.
Reverse section direction during selection
You now can reverse the direction of a section element by entering a <Ctrl> -data point. Previously, you had to exit the tool and use the Change Element Direction tool to reverse the direction of these elements.
Choose edges of faces or surfaces as cross sections
Section elements that may be chosen as cross sections include the edges of solids or surfaces. Using the Construct Surface by Section tool, you can create a surface between selected edges of two existing surfaces. Multiple edges are selected with <Ctrl> -data points.
Selecting the edges on both surfaces (left) and the resulting surface (right).
Extend Surface tool Operation of the Extend Surface tool is simplified, and the tool supports SmartSurfaces.
AccuDraw Enhancements
AccuDraw is enhanced to provide additional functionality for working with auxiliary coordinate systems (ACS), which themselves have been significantly enhanced. ACS-related shortcut key-ins AccuDraw has the following additions all related to auxiliary coordinate systems to its shortcut key-ins:
Key <L>,<A> Toggles ACS Plane Lock. <L>,<S> Toggles ACS Plane Snap Lock. <L>,<Z> Toggles Sticky Z Lock, which is used in conjunction with ACS Plane Snap Lock to force a series of snap points to lie on the active ACS' XY plane (Z=0). Effect
<L>,<P> Toggles ACS Grid Plane lock, which toggles the ACS Plane and ACS Plane Snap locks, and the Grid view attribute for all views.
3/24/2010
What's New?
<R>,<C> Rotates the drawing plane to the current ACS.
Page 9 of 113
The Lock Index (<L>) shortcut is changed to <L>,<I>
Perpendicular and tangent snap modes enabled by default By default, both Tangent Snap and Perpendicular Snap now are enabled for all tools for which they can be used. Previously, they were enabled for only a few drawing tools.
In SELECT Update #1, MicroStation extended its support for reading and writing the DWG file format to AutoCAD 2007.
Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS) Enhancements

Enhancements to auxiliary coordinate systems include a re-working of the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box, a new tool to align an ACS with that of a reference, and integration with AccuDraw. Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box enhancements The Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box (formerly the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box) has been updated. It includes a list box that displays each ACS present in the model, plus the current active ACS.
Other features include an icon bar menu that lets you:

Access the tools used to work with ACS. Create, copy, delete, or import, an ACS.
To make an ACS active, you can right-click on the ACS in the list box and choose Set Active from the pop-up menu or you can simply double-click the list box entry. Other items in the pop-up menu let you:

Match the coordinate system for the selected ACS to the active ACS, or to the global coordinates for the model. Delete or rename an ACS.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Define ACS (Aligned with Reference) tool The Define ACS (Aligned with Reference) tool is added to the ACS tool box, .
Page 10 of 113
This tool lets you create an ACS that aligns with a selected reference. ACS interaction with AccuDraw The ACCUDRAW LOCK GRIDPLANE key-in lets you quickly toggle the ACS Plane and ACS Plane Snap locks, as well as turning on the grid for each view. This key-in is available as an AccuDraw shortcut <L>,<P> and, if you use the default function key menu, via the <F8> key. With AccuDraw Grid Plane Lock active, the AccuDraw drawing plane rotation shortcuts for Top, Front, and Side, relate to the ACS rather than the default DGN file coordinate system.
B-spline Curves Enhancements

The Curve Calculator tool is enhanced for this SELECT update. Redesigned Curve Calculator interface The Curve Calculator tool and its dialog box are redesigned to make it easier to define mathematical formulas on which to base planar curves.
Cells Enhancements
Cells-related functionality is enhanced.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 11 of 113
You can attach and place the model stored in an OBJ file as a cell.
Cell placement options There are additional placement options available when you use the Place Active Cell tool:
Mirror When you place a cell you can mirror it mirror it about the horizontal axis, about the vertical axis, or about both the horizontal and vertical axes.
From left: Mirror off, Mirror Horizontal, Mirror Vertical, Mirror Both

Interactive When you place a cell, the scale, rotation angle, or both scale and rotation can be defined graphically by data points. Scale Multi-line Offsets If on, applies the active scale to multi-line offsets. Scale Dimension Values If on, applies the active scale to dimension values. Scale Annotations If on, applies the active scale to elements that are scaled by the annotation scale.
If the applicable setting is off, the active scale is not applied. These settings are also available in the Scale tool.
These scale settings do not affect shared cells; elements in shared cells always scale.
Cell index The Cells task includes a tool Place Cell Index tool for creating and placing a cell index A cell index contains all of the models in the
3/24/2010
What's New?
open DGN file that are designated as Can be placed as cell.
Page 12 of 113
The tool has settings for the size of the box in which each cell appears; the number of cells per row; displaying grid lines, names, descriptions, and insertion points (cell origins); and creating the cell index as a screen menu.
Autodesk i-Drop Indicator support Some Web pages contain DWG content that is i-Drop enabled. This means that you can drag the content from the Web page and drop it into a MicroStation model. When you drop this content into a model, it is placed as a cell. The Place Active Cell tool becomes active and you can apply its tool settings to the content being placed. The Web-Drop Settings dialog box also contains settings for content dragged from a Web page and dropped in a model.
In order to place content from a Web page as a cell, you must download the i-Drop Indicator. It is installed as a plug-in to your browser.
Design History Enhancements

Design history is enhanced for this SELECT update. Distributed DGN files and design history Design history is the area having the most visible changes resulting from the support for distributed DGN files. Specifically:

Checking out a DGN document from ProjectWise as shared initiates design history in the DGN file, if it was not already active. Changes made to the distributed DGN file by you and by others appear in the Design History dialog box. The design history field on the status bar changes, depending on the status of a distributed DGN file. If the distributed DGN file's design history is up to date, an icon showing two people superimposed on a scroll appears in the design history field. If you have changed the distributed DGN file locally but have not yet committed it to the server, its revision entry in the Design History dialog box has a four-part revision number, rather than the usual two-part number. A blue upward-pointing arrow icon identifies it as a pending revision In addition the status bar's design history field displays a blue arrow icon
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 13 of 113
If another user has made a change to this distributed DGN file and has committed it to the server, but you have not yet merged it into your local copy, the revision's entry in the Design History dialog box has a two-part number and a green downward-pointing arrow icon. The status bar's design history field displays a green arrow icon. If you and another user have made changes to this distributed DGN file but you have not yet committed your change to the server and you have not merged the user's change into your local copy, the revision entries appear in the Design History dialog box. The status bar's design history field displays a blue and green arrow icon. If users have made changes in the distributed DGN file that conflict with one another, the status bar's design history field displays a conflicts icon. The Design History tool box also contains a Conflicts icon. Clicking this icon opens the Conflicts dialog box, in which you can see all elements that are marked as conflicts and you can resolve them. When editing a distributed DGN file, you cannot delete design history, combine design history revisions, or retire revisions from the start of design history to a selected revision. The corresponding menu items on the Utilities menu's Design History submenu are dimmed.
In the MicroStation V8 XM SELECT Update #1, distributed DGN functionality is intended for evaluation and workflow testing only. It is not recommended that this functionality be used in production workflows at this time.
Zoom to changes in non-active models The behavior of the Zoom to changes view control (icon labeled Fit View) in the Design History dialog box and the Element Changes dialog box, is enhanced. Selecting this view control will switch models, if necessary, so that you can see the selected elements or revisions. This view control is also in the Conflicts dialog box.
Dimensioning Enhancements
For this SELECT update dimensioning is significantly enhanced. Angular dimension fit options Fit options apply to angular dimensions as well as to linear dimensions. The Extended Dim Line Under Text fit option is added as a Graphics property on the Advanced tab in the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles). If this option is on, the dimension line under angular dimension text is extended when the text is pushed to the outside. AutoCAD dimensions in MicroStation Previously, when a dimension is set to have text over the first extension line in AutoCAD, all the dimension text displayed over the first extension line. When opening the same file in MicroStation, the dimension text shifts to the second extension line. You can ensure the dimension text stays on the first extension line when working in MicroStation by adjusting two settings on the Advanced tab of the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles):

In the section Text > Format, set Justification to Left or Right. In the section Tool Specific > Size Arrow, set Text to Vertical (if using Size Arrow or the default tool).
DIN dimensioning Three dimension style properties are added to the Units section on the Advanced tab in the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles) to control how DIN dimensions are displayed.

Superscript If on, the least significant digit is displayed in superscript. Superscript Character Choosing Automatic generates the superscript from the dimension font; this choice is recommended. To
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 14 of 113
Rounding If on, the dimension is rounded to the closest half-unit and zero is not displayed.
Dimension style remapping The Remap Elements function lets you change the dimension style of all elements having a particular dimension style to another dimension style. This function is accessible via the pop-up menu in the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles).
Choosing Remap Elements opens the Remap Elements to Dimension Style dialog box.
Non-Stacked Fraction Space The Non-Stacked Fraction Space dimension style property is added to the Units section of the Advanced tab of the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles). This property controls whether dimension text is placed with a space between the fraction and the unit symbol (for example, " for inches). By default this property is on; this causes the space to be included. To prevent the space
3/24/2010
What's New?
Show Sign for Zero
Page 15 of 113
The Show Sign for Zero dimension style property is added to the General section of the Advanced tab in the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles). This property lets you to turn on the sign symbol (+/) when dimension tolerance is zero.
Distributed DGN Support

Using the distributed DGN functionality in MicroStation V8 XM SELECT Update #1, and integrated with the same functionality in ProjectWise XM Edition, users can participate in true distributed engineering. When a file in ProjectWise is marked as shared, more than one user is permitted to modify that file at the same time. ProjectWise users can distribute multiple copies of a distributed DGN file to many users, contractors, or partners. These users can then edit their copies in parallel in MicroStation V8, commit their revisions in the Design History dialog box, and check the DGN file back into ProjectWise, where the distributed DGN file contains a complete change history.
Design History is enhanced to accommodate distributed DGN functionality.
To work with distributed DGN files in MicroStation, you must be using ProjectWise XM Edition client software connected to a ProjectWise server. For more information about setting up and using distributed DGN files in ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise Explorer help document.
Drawing Scale Window Enhancements

Settings for Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS) are added to the Drawing Scale window (Settings > Drawing Scale).
Lock ACS Turning on Lock Auxilary Coordinate System in the Drawing Scale window locks AccuDraw's compass to the active ACS. Choose ACS and ACS scale When Lock ACS is on in the Drawing Scale window, two option menus let you select the active ACS and the scale factor to apply to the active ACS.
Drawing Tools
3/24/2010
What's New?
MicroStation's venerable element manipulation and modification tools are enhanced:

Page 16 of 113
Operation of an existing tool, Delete Part of Element, becomes more efficient. A new option, Along Path, is added to the Construct Array tool. Two long requested tools are added, Move to Contact and Break Element.
Move to Contact tool Both in 2D and 3D models, the Move to Contact tool, added to the Manipulate tool box, lets you move one or more elements in a defined direction until they make contact with another element.
Before moving elements (left) and after moving to contact a B-spline surface (right).
Delete Part of Element tool enhancements When deleting a part of a closed element using the Delete Part of Element tool in the Modify tool box, it is no longer necessary to enter a data point to define the direction of the deletion. The direction and the extent of the deletion is defined solely by the position of the pointer relative to the first data point. Break Element tool The Break Element tool, added to the Modify tool box, lets you break an existing linear element at a defined point.
Left: Placing break points in a shape. Right: After placing break points, the two sections can be manipulated individually.
Construct Array tool enhancements The Construct Array tool has an additional setting, Along Path, for constructing an array of elements directly along a path element or relative to it.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 17 of 113
Left: Identify the element to array (1), and the start point for the path element (2). Right: Accept at the required end point along the path element (3).
Element Information Enhancements

TheElement Information dialog box has three browse modes: Selection, Model or File. Modes can now be displayed simultaneously via the use of tabs. Right-click the working file in the selection tree and select Dialog Properties to view the Browse and Organize by Name categories in the bottom frame. You can set your browse mode to File, Selection, Model or All. You can also set organization of categories by Name, Level, Color, Style, Weight or None.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 18 of 113
Tags now appear hierarchically under the associated element in the top frame of the dialog box.
Fence Enhancements
Popular MicroStation fence functionality that previously was accessible only by key-in is now accessible in the Fence tool box. Copy/Move Fence Contents to New Design File tool The Copy/Move Fence Contents to New Design File tool, added to the Fence tool box, lets you copy or move the contents of a fence to a new file (DGN or DWG).
You can still use a key-in FENCE FILE (FF=) for copying or FENCE SEPARATE (SF=) for moving to perform this operation.
Fields Enhancements
3/24/2010
What's New?
Fields, a new feature in the XM Edition, are enhanced in this SELECT update. Reassign a field to new element
Page 19 of 113
A menu item is added to the pop-up menu in the Word Processor text editor window that lets you reassign a field from one element to another.
Automatic updating of fields Turning on Update Fields Automatically for a model in the Model Properties dialog box will cause fields in that model to automatically update when the DGN file that contains the model is opened.
The configuration variable MS_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS affects automatic field updating; the options are always, never or according to a model's Update Field Automatically property.
Inserting fields with NULL values You can insert a field associated with a property whose value is NULL (blank). The field is inserted with #### text as a placeholder. When the value of the property is set and the field is updated, the field text reflects the new value. The timing of the update depends on the Update Fields Automatically setting in the Model Properties dialog box and the configuration variable MS_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS . Annotation scale displays logical name When you insert a field derived from a model's annotation scale property, the logical name of the scale displays instead of the raw scale value. For example, Full Size 1=1 displays instead of 1.0.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 20 of 113
Google 3D Warehouse Interface

MicroStation's 3D Warehouse interface lets you open and place Sketchup models in your designs. Through this interface you can directly access the growing collection of 3D models available from the Google 3D Warehouse, or you can upload your models to 3D Warehouse (in SketchUp format). Access to these features is via the Utilities > 3D Warehouse submenu, which give you the following functions:

Open a sketchup model, in read-only mode, from 3D Warehouse. Place As Cell a sketchup model from 3D Warehouse. Place As Model a sketchup model from 3D Warehouse. Share Model to upload your models as sketchup files to 3D Warehouse.
Support for SketchUp files SketchUp format files are supported, both via the 3D Warehouse interface and, for exporting, via File > Export > SketchUp.
Google Earth Tools Enhancements

Enhancements to the Google Earth tools include support for Google Earth v4.0, KML v2.1, and export to Collada format, including support for textures. The Google Earth tool box includes two new tools, Capture Google Earth Image and Play Camera Animation in Google Earth. Support for Google Earth v4.0 Google Earth v4.0 introduced support for textures. MicroStations Google Earth tools take advantage of this support. In order to export your geometry with textures intact, set Google Earth Version to 4 in the Google Earth Tools Settings dialog box.
KML v2.1 support
Google Earth KML v2.1 files are supported.

Export to Collada format includes support for textures
You can export geometry to Collada (v1.4) files, by choosing File > Export > Collada. Collada files include support for textures and may be used in other applications that support Collada files, such as Google Earth. Capture terrain and imagery from Google Earth The Capture Google Earth Image tool in the Google Earth tool box lets you capture Google Earth imagery, and terrain. Images are captured in black and white (Google Earth limitation) and terrain may be captured as a mesh or a B-spline surface. Play camera animations in Google Earth The Play Camera Animation in Google Earth tool in the Google Earth tool box lets you play a MicroStation camera animation in Google Earth. You can play the camera animation whether or not you have exported geometry to the location of the camera animation.
Levels Enhancements
3/24/2010
What's New?
This SELECT update enables you to more easily move elements between levels. Level remapping
Page 21 of 113
The Remap Elements function lets you move elements from a level (or levels) to a different level. This function is accessible via the pop-up menu in the Level Manager dialog box (Settings > Level > Manager).
Choosing Remap Elements opens the Remap Elements to Level dialog box.
Named reference level masks The view display (on/off) settings of attachment levels remain consistent irrespective of how the attachment levels are modified or rebuilt in the attachments source file. This implies that even if the attachment source file is replaced by the user without the knowledge of MicroStation , the view display settings of attachment levels remain consistent. This change deprecates the use of the REFERENCE FILECHANGED key-in that one previously had to use in order to bring back the view display settings back to a consistent state.
License Management Enhancements

A wizard is added to smooth the product activation process.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Product Activation wizard
Page 22 of 113
The Product Activation wizard is added to step users through the product activation process. After a product is installed, you must obtain a license and then activate that license. Previously some users thought that obtaining a license meant the product was active. This wizard was created to make it clear that obtaining a license and activating a product are two separate steps. On the last page of the product installation wizard, a check box, if turned on, will cause the Product Activation wizard to open upon the completion of installation. Another way to open the Product Activation wizard is to choose Tools > Product Activation Wizard in the License Management Tool dialog box (Utilities > License Management).
The Product Activation wizard steps you through the appropriate screens based on the installation type selected on the first page of wizard.
Measuring Enhancements
Frequently requested enhancements to the measuring tools are included in this SELECT update. True or projected modes Mode options are added to the measuring tools to enable easier measuring of distances and areas in 3D models. Tools affected are Measure Distance, Measure Angle Between Lines, Measure Length, and Measure Area. The added options are as follows:

True measures true distances in 3D models. View measures distances between projections of the elements on to the view plane (no allowance for the depth component). AccuDraw/ACS measures distances between projections of the elements on to the AccuDraw drawing plane, or on to the active ACS.
Additional unit options for measuring area and volume
3/24/2010
What's New?
A setting for units is added to the Measure Area and Measure Volume tools. When measuring areas, you can choose from:

Page 23 of 113
square (master units) Hectare for metric units Acre (US) for English units
When measuring volumes, you can choose from:

cubic (master units) Liter for metric units Gallon (US), Gallon (UK), or Barrel, for English units
Models Enhancements
Model management is improved in this SELECT update. Filter capability in Models dialog box You can filter the models list in the Models dialog box by Type, 2D/3D, Name, and/or Description. The filter icon lets you enable/disable a filter row at the top of the list box.
Cell, Cell Type, and Annotation model identification in Models dialog box Columns are added to the list box in the Models dialog box to make it easy to identify models designated as cells and annotation cells and to determine the cell types of such models. The Cell Type and Is Annotation Cell columns are not displayed by default. To enable their display, right-click the list heading row and turn on Cell Type and Is Annotation Cell from the pop-up columns menu.
Multi-core/multi-processor Support
MicroStation V8 XM Edition can take advantage of the hyper-threading capability of multi-core or multi-processor systems by performing graphics processing in a separate thread. However, because MicroStation may perform better with hyperthreading disabled, MicroStation will notify you upon startup if hyperthreading is enabled. Use your system's BIOS configuration facility to disable or enable hyperthreading.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Multi-lines Enhancements
This SELECT update makes it easier to change the styles of existing multi-lines. Multi-line style remapping
Page 24 of 113
The Remap Elements function lets you change the multi-line style of all multi-lines having a particular multi-line style to another multi-line style. This function is accessible via the pop-up menu in the Multi-line Styles dialog box (Element > Multi-line Styles).
Choosing Remap Elements opens the Remap Multi-line Elements dialog box.
OBJ File Support

This SELECT update adds support for the OBJ file format. OBJ is an open geometry definition file format that is available in various software applications. OBJ files can be attached as references and placed as cells. OBJ files open in read-only mode and can be saved as DGN files. There are several options available when you open an OBJ file.
OLE Enhancements
Mi St ti ' bilit t h d t i OLE C t i ith th Wi d li ti i h d
3/24/2010
What's New?
Copy/Paste formatted text
Page 25 of 113
The Word Processor text editor window supports the copying and pasting of text from external applications that support the RTF format, such as Microsoft Word, Word Pad and Internet Explorer, into MicroStation with formatting intact. The following RTF attributes are supported:

bold italic underline color font subscript superscript tabs paragraph indents international text
Place Note Enhancements

The versatility of the Place Note tool increases in this SELECT update. Callout placement An alternate mode of the Place Note tool, Place Callout, lets you more easily place the callout style of annotation.
Printing Enhancements
This SELECT update adds several features to the printing subsystem. Print dialog box enhancements
3/24/2010
What's New?
The Print dialog box (File > Print) is enhanced.
Print status dialog box
Page 26 of 113
When you send printed output directly to a printer, the Print in Progress dialog box displays the print job's status. This dialog box lets you cancel the print job. For rasterized and rendered print jobs, a progress bar shows the progress of the rasterization process.
Display of the Print in Progress dialog box is controlled by the Show print status dialog setting in the Print Preferences dialog box.
It is not possible to show the progress of non-rasterized print jobs because the amount of processing is not known in advance.
Thumbnail preview time-out
When you open the Print dialog box, the thumbnail preview paints for up to 10 seconds by default before stopping to allow the rest of the dialog box to refresh. If the print preview is not complete within that time period, a message appears in the status bar. You can adjust the maximum painting time by changing the Thumbnail preview timeout setting in the Print Preferences dialog box.
New Print dialog preferences
Two settings are added to the Print Preferences dialog box:

Show print status dialog Thumbnail preview timeout (sec.)
Color mode and plot to 3D
When Plot to 3D is on in the Print dialog box, the color is set to True Color and cannot be changed. Pen table enhancements There are pen table-related enhancements in this SELECT update.
Support for regular expressions in level selection criteria
On the Element Selection Criteria tab in the Modify Pen Table dialog box, you can use regular expressions to select levels. For example, if you key in a.* in the Level regular expression field, the pen table section will match every level beginning with a. The comparisons are not case-sensitive. If a pen table contains a list of levels and a regular expression, all must match the element level name for the pen table section's output actions to be applied.
Support for tag element type selection criteria
Previously pen tables did not provide a way to resymbolize a tag element as a single unit. You could not select tags as part of your element selection criteria and tag elements were always exploded. Tags have been added to the list of element types available on the Element Selection Criteria tab in the Modify Pen Table dialog box. In the Pen Table Options dialog box, you can specify whether tag elements should be treated individually or as a group
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 27 of 113
When reading a pen table created in earlier editions of MicroStation, the Explode tags setting is on by default. This ensures compatibility between the two editions.
Batch Print enhancements In this SELECT update there are enhancements to the Batch Print utility.
Read-only mode Batch Print preference
The Batch Print Preferences dialog box contains a check box for opening DGN files in read-only mode. Previously this option could be selected only by setting the configuration variable MS_BATCHPRINT_NO_READONLY.
Additional Batch Print filename formats
The following commonly used batch print filename formats are added to the list of available formats in the Print Filename Format dialog box:

<DGN>-<print counter>.<extension> <DGN>-<model>-<print counter>.<extension> <job>-<DGN>-<model>-<print counter>.<extension>
Print engine Print color modes have increased significance.

Color modes applied to non-index colors
The monochrome and grayscale print color modes are applied to elements that use true color or color book color symbology. Previously only raster data and vector color tables were affected by the print color. Printer drivers MicroStation printer driver development keeps pace with evolving output technologies.
New TIFF and CALS printer drivers
Two additional printer drivers are available: TIFFDRIVER and CALSDRIVER. These are specialized printer drivers that replace the generic LORIP driver for producing TIFF and CALS raster print files. TIFFDRIVER is capable of producing both monochrome and true color TIFF files. TIFFDRIVER generates output one scan line at a time, rather than storing the entire print in memory as LORIP does This enables you to use larger output sizes and/or resolutions than you
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 28 of 113
could previously using the LORIP driver. CALSDRIVER still requires a complete print frame buffer in memory, but it is compressed much better than the LORIP RGB memory frame buffer. The delivered "tiff.plt" printer driver configuration file is rewritten to use TIFFDRIVER instead of the LORIP driver. Several TIFF-specific properties (compression type, photometric flag, document name, document description, page name, and artist name) are available. The "cals.plt" printer driver configuration file is new to MicroStation.
If you want to take advantage of TIFFDRIVER functionality you must switch to the version of "tiff.plt" supplied in this SELECT update. If you continue to use an older version of "tiff.plt", MicroStation will continue to reference the LORIP driver, which is supplied in this SELECT update only for backward compatibility.
Default PDF now Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5)
The default PDF Version record in the delivered "pdf.plt" printer driver configuration file is changed from "Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5)/Viewable in Acrobat 5" to "Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5)". XML-based printer driver configuration file format With the introduction of the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box, the ".plt" printer driver configuration file format is superseded by the XML-based ".pltcfg" format. MicroStation continues to support legacy .plt files, therefore, two sets of default printer driver configuration files are delivered:

One set in .pltcfg file format One set in .plt format
Migration to .pltcfg files is strongly encouraged. The currently delivered .plt files will be removed in a future edition of MicroStation.
Both sets of printer driver configuration files are stored in the "..\Workspace\System\Plotdrv" directory. All dialog boxes in which you select a printer driver configuration file list files with the .plt and .pltcfg extensions. You can open and view both types of files in the Print dialog box, the Batch Print dialog box, and the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. If you want to continue to use .plt files you must edit them with a text editor, such as Notepad. The .pltcfg files are edited with the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box.

When you open a .plt file for editing, MicroStation opens it in Notepad. When you open a .pltcfg file for editing, MicroStation opens it in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box.
Printer driver configuration editor The Printer Driver Configuration dialog box allows you to add and edit printer driver configuration files that are stored in XML format. These files have the extension ".pltcfg". This dialog box lets you pick values from lists and use check boxes to turn properties on or off. This is much easier and less error prone than the alternative of editing a configuration file's XML markup with a text editor, such as Notepad. To open the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box, choose File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration in the Print dialog box.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 29 of 113
You can use the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box to open a printer driver configuration file that is stored as a .plt file. However, if you edit the file, you must save it as a .pltcfg file.
Raster Manager Enhancements

Raster Manager features an addition to its list of supported file formats. GIF support You can attach or create (Save As) GIF files using Raster Manager.
Saved View Enhancements

There is an important enhancement to saved views in this SELECT update. Level state recalled in nested references Saved views now store the on/off state of levels in nested references. Previously, only the level on/off state for direct attachments were stored in saved views.
Standards Checker Enhancements

When using the Standards Checker to check element templates, you can check all template properties. You also can add elements that fail the standards check to a named group. Support for all element template properties
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 30 of 113
When defining standards checks for element templates, you can check any or all of the properties stored in an element template. Previously you could check only the Level, Color, Line Style, Line Weight, and Class properties. You can select these properties in the Element Template Checker Settings dialog box. Isolate non-standard elements in named groups When running the Standards Checker to check element templates, you can add all elements that fail the standards check to a named group. The default name for this group is Nonstandard Elements. If you want to keep track of the results of your standards checks, you can enter a different name in the Named Group field each time you do a standards check.
Tags Enhancements
Tags are enhanced to support annotation scale and double-click editing capabilities. Double-click to edit tags Double-clicking a tag with the Element Selection tool pointer opens the Edit Tags dialog box for editing the tag's name, value and display status. Annotation scale support Tags now support annotation scale. When a model's annotation scale is changed, the new annotation scale is automatically applied to tags in the model.
Text Enhancements
There are many enhancements to text placement and editing capabilities in this SELECT update
3/24/2010
What's New?
Enter data field editing enhancements The Edit Enter Data Field dialog box makes it easier to fill in individual enter data fields.
Page 31 of 113
To open this dialog box from within the Word Processor text editor window, double-click the character _ by default that represents the enter data field you want to edit. Stacked fractions editing enhancements The Edit Stack Fraction dialog box simplifies the editing of stacked fractions.
To open this dialog box from within the Word Processor text editor window, double-click the fraction you want to edit. Text style remapping The Remap Elements function allows you to change the text style of all text elements having a particular text style to another text style. This function is accessible via the pop-up menu in the Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles).
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 32 of 113
Choosing Remap Elements opens the Remap Elements to Text Styles dialog box.
Find/Replace Text enhancements The Find/Replace Text functionality supports dimensions, tags, notes, and symbols in addition to text and text node elements. You can reset the view after a piece of text is located using the Find/Replace tool by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Reset. Spell Checker enhancements
3/24/2010
What's New?
In this SELECT update the power and flexibility of the Spell Checker tool are enhanced.
Spell check entire model
Page 33 of 113
The Spell Checker tool checks text in tags, dimensions, notes and symbols in addition to text in text and text node elements.
Zoom factor
Spell Checker identifies and zooms the view in on the exact location in the model of each spelling error upon detection. The Zoom Factor slider in the Spell Checker dialog box lets you adjust the factor by which the view is zoomed when highlighting erroneous text.

The higher the value, the more view area displays and the smaller the text. The smaller the value, the less view area displays and the larger the text.
Word Processor text editor window enhancements There are enhancements to the Word Processor text editor window in this SELECT update.
The Word Processor text editor window supports the copying and pasting of RTF-format text from external applications via OLE Container into MicroStation with the formatting intact.
RSC to TrueType font conversion
Previously the Word Processor text editor window did not recognize traditional MicroStation (RSC) fonts. RSC fonts were replaced with a TrueType Font (TTF). This solution was satisfactory in most cases but not all. In this SELECT update, when text with an RSC font is placed or edited, the font information is extracted and converted to a TTF. The TTF is loaded with the RSC information.
Symbol insertion
The Symbols dialog box provides a convenient way to insert symbols and uncommon characters in text. You can even create a list of favorite symbols for faster access.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 34 of 113
This dialog box opens when the Insert Symbol icon is clicked in the Word Processor text editor window's icon bar.
Macro support in the Word Processor
Actions captured in the Word Processor can be recorded as a MicroStation BASIC macro. Previously MicroStation BASIC macros could only capture commands, data points, Resets and key-ins.
User Interface Enhancements

The user interface was the subject of much attention for the initial commercial release of the XM Edition. More enhancements in this area are introduced in this SELECT update. Dialog box option for task navigation Task navigation is enhanced to give you the option to navigate tasks in the Tasks dialog box. The default interface continues to be the Task Navigation tool box. Using the Tasks dialog box provides greater flexibility when working with tasks. You can:

See and navigate among tasks more easily. Work with a greater number of tasks, tool boxes, and tools, some of which may have long names and may have been imported from Settings Manager (STG) files. Resize and minimize the Tasks dialog box. View all tasks in a hierarchical tree. Select one task to be the root task, which moves it to the top of the Tasks dialog box and hides the other tasks. Choose the size of the tasks' tool icons. Choose an icon for each task. Use position mapping with the tools in the Tasks dialog box. View a task's tools as icons only (Icon); view the icons, position mappings, and names (List); or view position mappings and icons (Panel). The selected view can be set per task or for all tasks.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 35 of 113
To select the dialog box option for task navigation
1. In the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences), select the Task Navigation category. 2. From the Presentation option menu, choose Dialog. 3. (Optional) From the Icon Size option menu, choose an icon size. 4. Click OK.
To reopen the Tasks dialog box if closed
1. Choose Tools > Task Navigation. Icon contrast An additional preference Increase contrast of icon edges in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences) will improve icon visibility for some users. This preference is off by default. Window docking enhancements Several changes in the way tool boxes and dialog boxes are moved and docked give MicroStation a more modern look and feel.
Moving and docking tool boxes
A single dragging operation can be used to undock and re-dock a tool box. As the tool box approaches a dockable area, it automatically moves to the closest available space that it will fit. Previously a gray rectangle showed the target location of the move until the left mouse button was released. Effective with this SELECT update, the tool box moves dynamically. Multiple column tool boxes (up to four columns) can be docked. Tool boxes with fewer columns will dock underneath multiple column tool boxes. For example, you could have a four column tool box docked with a two column tool box and two single column tool boxes docked below
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 36 of 113
Two single column tool boxes docked along side a two column tool box
Moving dialog boxes
Previously when you moved a dialog box, a gray outline of the box moved to the target location. Effective with this SELECT update, the dialog box moves dynamically.
A notable exception is the Tool Settings window, which while being moved appears as a light blue opaque box.
ACS dialog box access via the Primary Tools tool box An icon that, when clicked, opens the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box is added to the Primary Tools tool box.
This icon is hidden by default. To make it visible, right-click in the tool box and turn on Auxiliary Coordinates in the pop-up tools menu.
Several enhancements to view controls make it easier to control camera views and to create saved views with references. Simplified Navigate View view control The Navigate View view control has a new setting Continuous Mouse Movement, which reduces the amount of movement of the mouse when navigating a view.
If Continuous Mouse Movement is on, mouse movement controls the direction and the speed with which the camera will move/turn. After you move the mouse initially, the motion of the camera will continue, even if the mouse is stationary, until you enter a second
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 37 of 113
If Continuous Mouse Movement is off, mouse movement controls the direction and the amount that the camera will move/turn. The camera moves/turns only when the mouse is moved.
Walk view control The Walk view control is used to interactively walk through a 3D model. The key characteristic of the Walk operation is that the elevation (Z position) of the camera (eye point) generally does not change as you move or turn.
This view control is hidden by default. To make it visible, right-click in the view control bar and turn on Walk in the pop-up view controls menu.
Fly view control The Fly view control is used to fly interactively through a 3D model. Once you initiate movement, the camera automatically moves forward along its line of sight.
This view control is hidden by default. To make it visible, right-click in the view control bar and turn on Fly in the pop-up view controls menu. Simplified camera setup The Change View Perspective view control now includes options for selecting from a range of camera lenses, Extra Wide, Normal, and Telephoto, Two Point Projection. Other options let you turn off the view camera, or set perspective using the traditional interactive method. These may be opened as a tool box.
Visualization
This SELECT update provides several rendering enhancements. Rendering enhancements Enhancements to rendering include revisions to materials, environment map handling, and distributed rendering support.
Area light performance improvements
Ray tracing with Area lights and Sky Openings is optimized. Processing speed is increased, with ray tracing producing better quality soft shadows in a shorter time.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 38 of 113
Top: Ray tracing with lighting from a single point light shadows are very stark. Bottom: Ray tracing with lighting from a single area light shadows are soft.
Multi-layered materials
Materials can have multiple pattern maps and or bump maps applied. The Map Editor dialog box is re-worked to accommodate the new features. You can add layers to your material definitions, with various blend modes. The layers can be turned on or off as required.
Multi-layered materials are not backward compatible with MicroStation V8 XM Edition v8.9.2 and earlier.
The following additional enhancements are added to the materials tools in this SELECT update:
New projection modes for patter/bump maps.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 39 of 113
New tools for adding and manipulating material projections on design geometry.
When you open an OBJ file, the OBJ file's materials can be imported. They appear in the Material Editor dialog box.
Projection modes for materials
Several projection modes are added:

Directional Drape Cubic Spherical Cylindrical
Projection modes are assigned to elements, rather than the material. This lets you use the same material with various projection modes depending on the geometry. Control of projection modes is via the Materials task.
Material projection modes are not backward-compatible with MicroStation V8 XM Edition v8.9.2 and earlier.
New tools for controlling material projections
The Materials task adds five tools for handling material projections.
Attach Projection Lets you attach a projection to an element. Mapping options are Directional Drape, Cubic, Spherical, or Cylindrical.
Edit Projection Lets you edit the projection parameters for an element.
Match Projection Lets you match the projection of a selected element to that of an existing element.
Create Projection Group Similar to elevation drape, except that this tool lets you select a group of elements to be treated as a single entity onto which a material is projected.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 40 of 113
Remove Projection Lets you remove a material projection from an element. The material remains attached; just the projection parameters of the material are removed.
Support for distributed rendering
Distributed rendering is supported. Control of this function is accessible from both the Save Image and the Record Script dialog boxes.
Environment maps and Visible Environment
There is a change to the way that environment maps are handled. Previously, when you had Environment Mapping on, but Visible Environment off, the environment maps would be visible both in reflections and through transparent materials. Now, with these settings, only reflections will display the environment maps. When a view is ray traced, the Environment Mapping and Visible Environment settings control whether the map image are visible:
Where both Environment Mapping and Visible Environment settings are enabled environment map images are seen wherever the background color of the view normally would be visible. This applies also in reflections and through transparent surfaces. Where Environment Mapping is enabled, but Visible Environment is disabled environment map images are seen in reflections only.
New in MicroStation V8 XM Edition

The changes and enhancements in MicroStation V8 XM Edition are designed to elevate the capabilities of the V8 platform for addressing the vast information space in the AECO (architecture, engineering, construction, and owner-operator) industry while providing a simpler, more task-appropriate user experience. Application Window Layout Changes Menu Changes 3D Content in PDF Files AccuDraw Enhancements Annotation Tools -- Revision Clouds AutoCAD Interoperability Cells Enhancements Color Enhancements Database Interface Enhancements Design History Enhancements Detailing Symbols Dimensioning Enhancements Drawing Tools Element Info (Properties) dialog box Element Templates Example Files Export Visible Edges Enhancements Fence Enhancements Fields File Protection Enhancements Google Earth Tools Graphics Handles Enhancements Installer Levels Enhancements License Management Enhancements Line Styles Enhancements Mesh Modeling Tools Models Enhancements Place Note Enhancements Printing Enhancements Project Explorer and Link Sets ProjectWise StartPoint Integration Raster Manager Enhancements References Enhancements S d Fil S l ti Utilit
3/24/2010
What's New?
SDK for MicroStation V8 XM Edition User Interface Enhancements Utility Enhancements Viewing Enhancements Visualization
Page 41 of 113
Application Window Layout Changes

When you open your first DGN file in MicroStation V8 XM Edition, you will note significant changes to the default layout of the MicroStation V8 application window:
Default MicroStation application window layout
Here is a rundown of these changes:
The Main tool box partially replaces the Main tool frame. The Main tool box has fewer child tool boxes than the Main tool frame and appears in the default application window layout as one column of icons rather than two columns. Some tool boxes and tools that were formerly accessible from the Main tool frame are instead accessible from a tool box docked on the right-hand side of the application window. This is the Task Navigation tool box. The two-column Main tool frame from previous editions has been converted for the XM Edition to a hierarchical tool box and renamed Main Classic. It can be accessed in the Tool Boxes dialog box (Tools > Tool Boxes) or via the DIALOG TOOLBOX MAINCLASSIC key-in.
The Attributes tool box has three additional icons, all with associated pop-downs: Active Element Template, Active Element Transparency, and Active Element Priority. Docked to the right-hand edge of the application window is the Task Navigation tool box.
3/24/2010
What's New?

Page 42 of 113
There are additional fields in the status bar. Tool icons have sharper edges, higher quality shading, and more vibrant colors than in previous editions. There are numbers and letters superimposed on the lower left corner of tool icons. These numbers and letters are optionally displayed and associated with positional keyboard navigation. In view windows, the view control bar appears at the top instead of the bottom (but you can change this), and the view controls are different than in the previous edition. When the selected tool is the default tool, Element Selection, the Tool Settings window is no longer empty. The Standard tool box is no longer in the default application window layout.
A separate section highlights the full inventory of the XM Edition's user interface enhancements.
Main tool box The Main tool box is docked to the left-hand edge of the application window like the Main tool frame in previous editions.
To access any of the Main tool box's child tool boxes, click and press on the icon that represents the child tool box, such as Place Fence for the Fence tool box. A pop-up menu opens from which to select a tool. Alternatively, to tear off and float a child tool box from the Main tool box, choose Open as ToolBox from the pop-up menu. The Main tool box's set of tools and child tool boxes is as follows:

Element Selection Fence tool box, represented by Place Fence
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 43 of 113
Manipulate tool box, represented by Copy Element
View Control tool box, represented by Update View
Change Attributes tool box, represented by Change Element Attributes
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 44 of 113
Groups tool box, represented by Drop Element
Modify tool box, represented by Modify Element
Delete Element
As in previous editions, the icon of the tool selected in a child tool box automatically becomes the representative of the tool box in the parent tool box. This occurs regardless of whether the tool was selected using the pop-up menu or by clicking its icon in the floating tool box. Task Navigation tool box The Task Na igation tool bo is docked in the defa lt application indo la o t to the right hand edge of the application indo This tool
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 45 of 113
box contains the Task List and the tools of the active task. The active task in the default application window layout is the Drawing task.
The Task List
The Task List lists the available tasks. The list is hierarchical.
Task Navigation tool box, docked with default Task List for 3D files, all tasks collapsed
Changing the active task causes the new active task's tools to be displayed below the Task List icon instead of the previous task's tools. Active Element Template The Active Element Template icon in the Attributes tool box is associated with the V8 XM Edition's template functionality.
Active Element Template icon in Attributes tool box
Status bar changes The three fields on the right-hand end of the status bar are additions for the V8 XM Edition:

the open DGN file's design history status MicroStation V8's input focus status the open DGN file's digital rights status
Menu Changes
The following sections list changes in the menu structure for MicroStation V8 XM Edition. The Workspace menu is unchanged. File menu changes Choosing Project Explorer opens the Project Explorer dialog box. Choosing Export > Google Earth (KML) File lets you export your model to Google Earth. This performs the same task as the Export Google Earth (KML) File tool in the Google Earth tool box
3/24/2010
What's New?
Edit menu changes <Ctrl-A> is a keyboard shortcut for Select All. The Show/Hide Clipboard item is removed. Element menu changes
Page 46 of 113
Choosing Dimension Styles opens the reorganized Dimension Styles dialog box that was initially available in SELECT Update V8.5.2 as an alternate to the old version of the dialog box. Choosing Detailing Symbol Settings opens the Detailing Symbol Settings dialog box. Settings menu changes Choosing Color Books opens the Color Book Editor dialog box. Choosing Drawing Scale opens the Drawing Scale window, which in the previous edition was accessible only by key-in or through the MDL dialog box. The Rendering > View Attributes item is removed. The settings previously in the Rendering View Attributes dialog box are in the View Attributes dialog box. Tools menu changes The Main submenu is supplanted by the pop-up menus in the Main tool box and the Drawing Task. Choosing Main toggles the display of the Main tool box, which by default is docked to the left-hand edge of the application window. Choosing Task Navigation opens the Task Navigation tool box. This tool box contains the Task List icon and tools associated with the active task. The Annotation > Drafting Tools item is replaced by Annotation > Detailing Symbols. Choosing this item opens the Detailing Symbols task as a tool box. Choosing Annotation > Cloud opens the Cloud tool box, which is an alternate means to the Drawing Composition task of accessing the revision cloud tools. Choosing Google Earth opens the Google Earth tool box, which contains tools for interacting with Google Earth. The Dimensioning item, which opens the Dimensioning task, replaces the Dimension Tools submenu. The Dimension Tools tool box (formerly tool frame) and its child tool boxes are accessible through the Tool Boxes dialog box. Choosing Surface Modeling > Mesh Modeling opens the Meshes task as a tool box. The Visualization > Animation Preview item is removed. In the XM Edition, animation preview controls are relocated to the Animator Preview window. Utilities menu changes The Design History submenu contains items used to perform design history management tasks. The License Check Out/In menu item is replaced by License Management. Choosing this item opens the License Management Tool dialog box. Window menu changes The Task Navigation in Views and View ToolBox items are related:
In the default application window layout, Task Navigation in Views is off and View ToolBox is on. As a result the view control
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 47 of 113
If both settings are on, the Task Navigation tool box is docked in the open view windows. If View ToolBox is off, the open view windows do not have any docked tool boxes regardless of the Task Navigation in Views setting.
Turning on Task Navigation in Views and View ToolBox causes the Task Navigation tool box to be docked in the open view windows. Help menu changes Choosing Bentley Institute Training opens your Web browser to the Bentley Institute website. The MicroStation on the Web menu item is replaced by Online Support. Choosing this item opens your Web browser to the SELECTservices KnowledgeBase.
3D Content in PDF Files

Several enhancements have been incorporated in the options for creating 3D content in PDF files. These include an additional setting for Mesh Tolerance and support for Engineering Links, clip volumes, clip masks, reference clip boundaries, and raster references. Additionally, the 3D content generated using the PDF printer driver can include global lighting solutions radiosity or particle trace. Support for clip volumes, clip masks, and reference clip boundaries Clip volumes, clip masks, and reference clip boundaries and clip masks are supported and will be present in the PDF document. Support for raster references Raster references are supported and will appear in the PDF document. Mesh Tolerance The Mesh Tolerance setting is added to give you more precise control of the meshing tolerance for curved surfaces. If you set Mesh Tolerance to a non-zero value it will override the Mesh Resolution setting and directly control the maximum distance from the mesh to the surface it approximates. A small tolerance value will produce a higher precision mesh with subsequently larger files. Engineering Links support If a URL is present within an engineering link it will be published to the PDF document. Within Adobe Reader, the web page indicated then can be opened by selecting the Follow Link tool and clicking on the linked geometry. Publish global lighting solutions MicroStations Particle Trace and Radiosity rendering modes calculate the effects of lighting for every surface within a model. They are, therefore, commonly referred to as global solutions. Global lighting solutions can be considerably more useful than other visualization methods (such as ray tracing) as they can be viewed from any angle or camera location. MicroStation XM supports the publishing of these global lighting solutions directly to PDF (or U3D) by exporting both the model geometry and the precalculated lighting values at the model surfaces. This allows the highly accurate and visually appealing lighting effects, from the global lighting solutions, to be viewed within Adobe Acrobat or other U3D clients. Publishing a particle-trace or radiosity solution is extremely simple. If either a particle-trace or radiosity solution has been loaded at the time the U3D or 3D PDF document is printed then that solution will automatically be used to generate the 3D content.
Printing settings that control PDF output
In the 3D Plotting Options dialog box, the settings in the Global Lighting Solutions section enable you to control the export of global lighting (particle tracing or radiosity) solutions. The controls for adjusting these settings are enabled only if either a particle tracing or radiosity solution is loaded.
3/24/2010
What's New?

Page 48 of 113
If Export Solution is on, the lighting solution will be exported. The output will include both the geometry and the lighting. The Quality setting controls the accuracy of the mesh when a particle trace solution is being exported. Particle trace solutions typically contain a very large number of lighting values on a very dense mesh. In order to produce a reasonably sized output, it is necessary to discard unnecessary grid points. If Quality is set to 0, a very coarse mesh will be saved. This will minimize the output size but produce a poor representation of the lighting solution, particularly if there is subtle lighting of large, flat surfaces. If Quality value is set to 1, the result will be a large but highly accurate representation of the lighting solution. In most cases, the default value of 0.85 produces an acceptable balance between quality and output size.
The Quality setting also controls the mesh quality when a particle trace solution is exported to DGN using the Render tool's Save Solution To DGN option.
Global lighting settings that affect PDF output
The following items affect the generation of the published solution:
The brightness and contrast settings currently selected for the screen display are used to control these settings in the published model. As the published model will be viewable from any camera location, the Visible Surfaces Only option should not be selected when a Particle Trace solution is calculated.
Limitations
When publishing global lighting solutions to PDF, the following limitations are present:
Earlier versions of Adobe Acrobat (prior to version 7.07) will display the global lighting solutions only when the Software renderer is used. This can be set, in the Acrobat Preferences dialog box, by choosing the 3D category and then setting the Preferred Renderer to Software. While the published global lighting solutions do not support animated geometry, animation of the camera location (walk or flythroughs) is supported. The Ray Trace lighting effects (such as specular effects and reflectance) are not supported. Luminance solutions can be published, but Illuminance is not currently supported. The viewing display modes (such as illustration) and level controls are not available within a published global lighting solution.
Publish reference and level structure to Acrobat v7.07 model tree Models published to PDF from MicroStation V8 XM Edition are automatically compatible with Acrobat v7.07. Reference and level structure for the model is accessible in Acrobat v7.07 via the Model Tree controls. This includes a hierarchy such that the display of levels and reference files can be accessed directly.
AccuDraw Enhancements
For the XM Edition AccuDraw features increased configurability, a more flexible Polar mode, and several added shortcut key-ins.
In the XM Edition, the check boxes for X, Y, Z, Dist, and Angle fields have been replaced with push-buttons.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Configurable compass fill color
Page 49 of 113
You can set the AccuDraw compass fill color using the Fill option menu on the Display tab in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. Configurable window size You can adjust the width of the AccuDraw window using the Dialog Size option menu on the Display tab in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. Display coordinates with pointer If Display Coordinates is on in the Display tab of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, MicroStation dynamically displays AccuDraw drawing plane coordinates with the pointer. Polar mode enhancements In Polar mode the AccuDraw window's fields for distance and angle are labeled with icons rather than text. If the open file is 3D, a field for the Z-value is available in Polar mode as well as Rectangular mode. Expanded shortcut key-ins The following AccuDraw shortcut key-ins are added in the XM Edition:

<R>,<E> Rotate Element <R>,<V> Rotate View <H>,<A> AccuDraw on Hold <H>,<S> AccuSnap Toggle <H>,<U> AccuSnap Suspend
Annotation Tools Revision Clouds

Using the XM Edition you can easily annotate models with revision clouds. There are two tools for this purpose in the Drawing Composition task:
Cloud By Points
Cloud By Element
A revision cloud is a cloud-shaped closed element (complex shape). Revision clouds are commonly used to call attention to design revisions.
In the XM Edition, MicroStation V8 extends its support for reading and writing the DWG file format to AutoCAD 2006. There are additional enhancements that increase MicroStation V8's interoperability with AutoCAD. Default units when opening DWG files now Design Center Units
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 50 of 113
A very important change in the XM Edition is to the default units setting when opening DWG files. The default Decimal, Scientific, or Fractional Units LUNITs setting is changed to Design Center Units rather than Meters as it was in the previous edition. The background to this change is that with the introduction of AutoCAD's Design Center (R2000) an additional setting was added to DWG files to indicate their true unit setting. Prior to this addition, unless a file had its units set to Architectural or Engineering - which strongly implied Feet/Inches, there was no way of knowing the true size of objects. If this value is set correctly then there is no ambiguity in a file's units and it can be referenced, used as a cell, and so forth, using MicroStation's True Scale capability. In general, this change to the default setting should reduce unit mismatches when the default settings are used to open DWG files. When MicroStation creates a DWG file, it always sets the Design Center units correctly. When opening a DWG file created by MicroStation, therefore, the units will always be correct. Now, as long as files from other sources have the Design Center units set correctly, they also will open with the correct units. It still is possible, however, to have the Design Center units value set to Unitless or Unspecified. When this is the case (as in previous editions) an alert box is displayed to allow the correct units to be selected. Expanded DWG workmode unit format options In DWG workmode, the units format can be set to Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, or Scientific. Save As DWG/DXF changes to General options The following settings are added to the General tab in the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box for the XM Edition. These settings were accessible in the previous edition only as configuration variables.
The Save Active Dimension Settings is moved from the Advanced category to the Dimensions category.
Basic > Units
The XM Edition adds an additional option to the Units setting for saving DWG files. This option, Arch./Engineering (Feet/Inches) lets you specify that the file be saved with either Architectural or Engineering units (based on whether fraction or decimal readout is used). In previous edition, the Architectural or Engineering units would be used only if the file had Master and Sub units set to Feet-Inches and coordinate readout set to Master-Sub units. Now, by selecting this option, the file will be saved with these units even if the current units do not match this criteria.
Advanced > Create True Color From DGN Color Indices
MicroStation supports arbitrary, custom color tables, whereas AutoCAD supports only a fixed table. When a color from a MicroStation table is saved to AutoCAD, it can use either the closest color in the AutoCAD table, or a True color. If this setting is on and there is not an exact match in the AutoCAD table, a True (RGB) color is used. This setting is off by default.
Advanced > Force Zero Z-Coordinate
If on, the resulting DWG entities will have z-coordinates of zero value. This should only be used to save a 3D DGN file that represents a 2D drawing but in which some geometry may contain non-zero values in their z-coordinate. In addition to zero z-coordinate values, group hole cells will get dropped to block references and planar mesh elements will get dropped to visible edge entities (usually boundary edges). If the configuration variable MS_DWG_FORCE_ZERO_ZCOORDINATE is defined, this setting is on by default. Otherwise, it is off by default.
References > Set Viewport Layer From Clip Element
If on, the layer for a viewport will be set to match the layer of the clip element (if present) from its reference attachment. This setting is off by default
3/24/2010
What's New?
References > Set Viewpoint Locked From Locate Off
Page 51 of 113
If on, the Locked status of a Viewport will be set to the Locate Off setting from its reference attachment This setting is off by default.
Dimensions > Always Create an In-line Leader for Notes
If on, a non-empty note without an in-line leader will result in a leader entity with an in-line leader. If off, such a note will remain as a leader without an in-line leader in DWG, but will cause an AutoCAD Audit error. If the configuration variable MS_DWG_LEADER_HOOKLINE is defined, this setting is on by default. Otherwise, it is off by default.
Cells Enhancements
MicroStation's cells functionality is enhanced in the XM Edition. Annotation cells The XM Edition extends the annotation scale concept to cells with the introduction of annotation cells. When you change the active model's Annotation Scale factor, annotation cells in the model are automatically scaled by the new factor. The Place Active Cell tool is used to place annotation cells. The tool's settings window has a Annotation Scale Lock icon similar to the one for the Place Text tool and dimensioning tools. When you set the Active Cell to a cell that can be placed as an annotation cell, this icon is enabled. The icon's tool tip tells you the active model's annotation scale factor and the off/on state of the Annotation Scale Lock. If this lock is on, the model's Annotation Scale factor will be applied to the cell you are placing. To turn on the Annotation Scale Lock, click the icon. When the settings Can be placed as a cell and Can be placed as an annotation cell are enabled in a model's properties, the model may be placed as an annotation cell.
You can change the annotation scale of annotation cells in the active model using the key-ins ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD, ANNOTATIONSCALE CHANGE, and ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE. These key-ins are useful should you place a cell with the Annotation Scale Lock in the wrong off/on state.
Attach a directory of cell libraries You can attach all the cell libraries in a directory by choosing File > Attach Folder in the Cell Library dialog box (Element > Cells). Attach V7 DGN, 3D Studio, and DXF files as cells You can attach and place the model stored in a V7 DGN, 3D Studio (.3DS), or DXF file as a cell.
Color Enhancements
The XM Edition has significantly enhanced capabilities in the usage of color in models, including the availability of PANTONE and RAL colors and gradient fills. Expanded element color options In previous editions element colors were selected exclusively from a table of 256 indexed colors that was stored in the DGN file. In the XM Edition, element colors are not restricted to the color table values, and the color selection interface is updated to support the lifting of hi i i
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 52 of 113
Non-indexed colors should not be used in DGN files that will need to be opened in a previous edition.
Color selection interface
In parts of the XM Edition user interface that are used to specify element color, such as the Active Color drop-down in the Attributes tool box, a tabbed interface is used:
The first tab is the default indexed color tab, which lets you select a color from a color table. The second tab is the True Color tab, which lets you select a color by specifying components in the context of a color model. Such colors are commonly referred to as true colors. The following color models are supported: RGB (Red, Green Blue, 0-255 or 01), HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value), and CMY (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow).
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 53 of 113
By pressing on the eye dropper icon and dragging the pointer, you can select any color visible on the screen, even from within areas outside the application window.
The third tab is the Color Book tab, which lets you select a named color from a color book.
A fourth tab, Gradient Fill, is available when you set Fill Color.
Color books Color books are introduced in the XM Edition to provide a convenient container for collections of named colors. Naming colors and categorizing them into books lets you select colors by convenient names rather than cryptic number triplets. Additionally, when a color from a color book is assigned to an element, the book name and color name are stored in the element and obtainable through the Element Info dialog box. Color books are stored in DGN files, or more appropriately, DGN libraries. A set of DGN libraries containing color books is provided with the XM Edition. You can create additional books that are customized for your company, discipline, project, or task. The Color Book Editor dialog box (Settings > Color Books) is used to create and maintain color books.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 54 of 113
Standard PANTONE and RAL color books In addition to the Standard color book, which defines a standard set of colors, standard PANTONE and RAL color books are provided with the XM Edition.
The PANTONE and RAL color books provided for use within MicroStation are copyrighted materials. Neither the books nor the colors specified within the books can be renamed or modified.
Database Interface Enhancements

The XM Edition can interface with an external database through a Bentley Universal Database Connection (BUDBC) connection as an alternative to Oracle, OLE DB, and ODBC connections. The addition of BUDBC support opens the MicroStation V8 database interface to Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) applications.
With BUDBC support in place, new database connections will become easier to add in future editions of MicroStation. Also, BUDBC is part of the foundation for possible future support for multiple simultaneous database connections.
The MS_LINKTYPE value for BUDBC linkages is BUDBC. There are three types of BUDBC connections:

OLE DB This type of connection will take a connection string from a .UDL file. SQL Server The connection string for this type of connection is as follows:
Password=[yourpassword]; UserID=[yourusername] Oracle The connection string for this type of connection is as follows:
Password=[yourpassword]; User ID=[yourusername];Data Source=[yourdatasource]
3/24/2010
What's New?
Design History Enhancements
The design history functionality in MicroStation is significantly enhanced for the XM Edition. Utilities > Design History submenu The Design History submenu of the Utilities menu provides entry points for the following design history utility functions:
Page 55 of 113
Initialize (in previous editions the entry point for this function was an icon in the Design History tool box) Delete Combine Retire Audit Trail Set Revision Number (In previous editions this function was available only via key-in HISTORY SETVERSION. That key-in is deprecated in the XM Edition; use HISTORY MANAGE SET REVISIONFORMAT.)
Tags
Status bar icon Design history status is indicated by an icon in the status bar.
If design history is not initialized, the icon is dimmed If design history is initialized but there are uncommitted changes, a pencil is superimposed on the scroll.
Clicking this icon opens a design history pop-up menu.
Initialize design history When you initialize design history for the open DGN file (Utilities > Design History > Initialize) you are prompted to key in a description.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 56 of 113
File-specific revision number format You can set the design history revision number format for individual DGN files. If a DGN file has a custom revision number format, it overrides the format set in the configuration variable MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_REVISION_NUMBER_FORMAT. If custom formatting is not specified in either the file or by the configuration variable, the default #.# formatting is used. Delete design history The XM Edition lets you remove design history (Utilities > Design History > Delete) from the open DGN file. This function is available only if configured via the configuration variable MS_DESIGN_HISTORY. Combine revisions You can delete a range of revisions, replacing them by a single, net revision by choosing Utilities > Design History > Combine. Retire revisions Another design history management option in the XM Edition is to delete all revisions from the start of history to a selected revision (Utilities > Design History > Retire). Tag revisions You have the option to name revisions by applying tags. Choosing Utilities > Design History > Tags opens the Design History Tags dialog box, which is used to add and remove tags. The Tags column in the Design History dialog box shows, for each revision, all tags that refer to that revision
Audit trail The audit trail is a record of design history management actions, such as initialize, combine, and retire. Each entry in the audit trail
3/24/2010
What's New?
contains the type of action, a timestamp, and the user's name. To access the audit trail for the open DGN file, choose Utilities > Design History > Audit Trail.
Page 57 of 113
The audit trail is automatically deleted when the design history is removed. Review element change history You can review the change history for an element by selecting the element in the Element Changes dialog box and clicking the Show History icon. This icon is particularly useful for reviewing the changes to an element leading up to its deletion. Like the Isolate icon in the Design History dialog box, the Show History icon changes the operating mode of the Design History dialog box to show an individual element's history. After you are done using the Show History icon, click the Isolate icon to restore the Design History dialog box to its normal mode. Configuring design history capabilities The syntax of the configuration variable MS_DESIGN_HISTORY is expanded to support design history functionality added in the XM Edition. The added keywords are tag (enabled by default), changedesc (disabled by default), combine (disabled by default), retire (disabled by default), and autoupgrade. The autoupgrade keyword determines whether you will be prompted to confirm the upgrading of design history data created using a pre-XM edition to the XM Edition design history format; by default this prompting will occur. For the full list of supported MS_DESIGN_HISTORY keywords and syntax examples, select Design history capabilities in the Design History category of the Configuration dialog box (Workspace > Configuration), and review the Description field. Modify revision descriptions You can change the author and description of a previously recorded revision using the Revision Properties dialog box. An icon in the Design History dialog box opens the Revision Properties dialog box for the selected revision.
3/24/2010
What's New?
There is no limit on the length of a revision description. Print revision markup
Page 58 of 113
Design history revision markup is printable with the V8 XM Edition. If you issue a print request while there are revisions selected in the Design History dialog box, the markup highlighting and/or color-coding associated with those revisions will be printed.
Design history can be printed only from the Print dialog box. You cannot print design history from the Batch Print dialog box.
Detailing Symbols
The Detailing Symbols tools and the task in which they are grouped replace the Drafting Tools tool box. These tools include and extend the functionality of the old tools. You can place detailing symbols that target links in a link set. You can also leverage the contents of fields.
The Detailing Symbols task is a child task of the Drawing Composition task. The settings for Detailing Symbols tools can be set in the Detailing Symbol Settings dialog box (Element > Detailing Symbol Settings) as well as each tool's settings window.
Dimensioning Enhancements
Enhancements to dimensioning include a new setting for the Match Dimension Settings tool, Match Annotation Scale, and a reorganized Dimension Styles dialog box. Match dimension including annotation scale The Match Dimension Settings tool now has a setting that lets you match the annotation scale of the selected dimension element. When the Match Annotation Scale setting is enabled, it modifies the annotation scale for the model to that of the selected dimension element. At the same time it checks and, if necessary, turns on Annotation Scale lock. Once the Annotation Scale has been modified, you then can use the Change Dimension tool, with Annotation Scale lock turned on, to modify other dimension elements to match the new annotation scale.
A similar setting, Match Annotation Scale, is available for the Match Text Attributes tool. Additionally, the Change Text Attributes tool now has annotation scale settings that let you change, remove, or add, annotation scale for existing text elements.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Reorganized Dimension Styles dialog box
Page 59 of 113
Choosing Element > Dimension Styles opens the reorganized Dimension Styles dialog box that was initially available as an alternate to the old version in SELECT Update V8.5.2. The reorganized dialog box provides a tree view of all dimension styles, plus groups of settings for geometry, units, text, and symbology. On the Advanced tab you can compare two dimension styles and review their differences. You can also compare a dimension style in the open DGN file with its DGN library version.
Drawing Tools
Creating primitive geometry is easier with the XM Edition due to a number of improvements in much-used placement tools. Place Line/Place Arc/Place Circle enhancements During constrained line, arc, or circle placement, MicroStation helps you distinguish and choose between possible results.
When you are applying a constraint snap such as Tangent or Perpendicular and more than one result is possible, MicroStation displays icons representing each possible result. When you are constraining a distance or angle and more than one result is possible, MicroStation prompts you to select the desired result.
In either case to specify the desired result either move the pointer or make a choice from the Solution option menu in the Tool Settings
3/24/2010
What's New?
window. Place Arc enhancements
Page 60 of 113
In addition to the enhancements the Place Arc tool shares with Place Line and Place Circle, there are the following enhancements specifically related to arc placement.
You can place an arc by positioning its center before its starting point.
Placing an arc with Method: Center, Start. Enter the center point (1), the start point (2), then define the sweep arc and direction (3).
You can constrain an arc's sweep direction either explicitly as a tool setting or implicitly by the direction in which you move the pointer.
When you are constraining a distance or angle and the result will be dependent on the sweep direction, MicroStation prompts you to choose the sweep direction. To do this either constrain the direction in the tool settings or indicate the direction by moving the pointer.
Place Multi-line style scale A new setting, Style Scale, has been added to the tool settings for the Place Multi-line tool. This lets you specify a scale for the offset distances of the multi-line components. Element rotation Using the Element Selection tool and the Element Info dialog box, you can check and change the rotation of an element. The Geometry section of the dialog boxes contains the applicable controls:

For an element selected in a standard view, there is an editable Angle field and a non-editable Orientation field. For an element selected in a non-standard view, there are editable Rotation X, Rotation Y, and Rotation Z fields.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Element Info (Properties) dialog box
Page 61 of 113
The Element Info(rmation) dialog box is reworked for the XM Edition to improve its usability and expand its functionality.
You can modify geometry properties of primitive elements, such as keypoint coordinates, orientation, and dimensions. The properties displayed in the dialog box automatically update as you select and deselect elements using the Element Selection tool. You can dock the dialog box to the edge of the application window. You can hide and reveal categories of properties as needed. You can access model and file properties as well as element properties.
As a shortcut for opening the Element Info dialog box, you can point at an element with the Element Selection pointer and choose Properties from the Reset pop-up menu. Quick Info dialog box An alternative to using the Element Info(rmation) dialog box to review and change the general properties of an element, such as level and color, is to do the following:
3/24/2010
What's New?
1. Regardless of the selected tool, point at the element. 2. Press and hold down the <Alt> key. 3. Press the Reset button on your graphical input device, typically the right mouse button. Doing this opens the Quick Info dialog box, a more compact version of the Element Info dialog box.
Page 62 of 113
Element Templates
Element templates are named sets of element properties that can be applied to existing elements or can be used to set the active settings for element placement. Elements can retain an association to the template that was active when they were placed. Elements that contain an association to their template can be resymbolized when properties in the template are modified. Templates are stored in hierarchical groups within a DGN file. Generally, a DGN library is created (or an existing DGN library is used) to hold standard templates. You can store templates in multiple DGN libraries. Templates stored in all DGN libraries specified by the MS_DGNLIBLIST or _USTN_SYSTEMDGNLIBLIST configuration variables, as well as the open DGN file, are available for use during a design session. When you place an element that is associated with a template, and if the Active Element Template icon is locked, the template definition is added to the open DGN file if it is not already in the file. Templates are defined and maintained in the Templates tab of the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize).
Once templates are set up in the Customize dialog box you can use them when you are placing elements or you can apply them to existing elements. The Active Element Template icon in the Attributes tool box provides a drop-down list of available templates. You can use it to:

Determine which template is active. Set the active element template, which changes the active element attribute settings to the properties defined in the template. Lock the active element template while placing an element, which means that the element can be resymbolized if its properties in the template are modified.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 63 of 113
Associate a template with an existing element, which changes the selected element's properties to those specified in the template.
Using the Element Selection tool, you can select only those elements associated with a particular template.
Import Settings Manager files The Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) provides the capability to import settings from existing Setting Manager files (.STG). Import/export element templates from/to XML format The Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) provides the capability to import and export template definitions using XML files and to generate HTML reports on templates Plug-in for the Standards Checker utility There is an Element Template plug-in for the Standards Checker utility (Utilities > Standards Checker).
Standards Checker Settings dialog box with Check Element Templates option
You can use this utility to check

the open DGN file's templates against the templates defined in the DGN libraries, by using the Check Local Templates check box. the open DGN file's elements against the templates to which they are associated, by using the Check Elements check box.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 64 of 113
Element Template Checker Settings dialog box
Example Files
A completely new set of example files is provided with MicroStation V8 XM Edition. Each data set includes DGN libraries that contain examples of shared resources and link sets for use with Project Explorer. General data set The General data set illustrates product features such as base geometry, change tracking, element manipulation, meshes, photorealistic rendering, and solids modeling. The DGN files in this data set have clickable links to relevant topics in the help document. This data set is in the "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\General" directory. Building data set The Building data set illustrates a building design project done using functionality in the base MicroStation product. The DGN files in this data set include the master 3D model, plans, elevations, sections, and details. This data set is in the "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Building" directory.
For information about MicroStation-based building solutions, see the Bentley Web site.
Civil data set The Civil data set illustrates a road improvement project done using functionality in the base MicroStation product. The DGN files in this data set include the master 3D model, survey, profiles, contours, sections, and details. This data set is in the "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Civil" directory.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 65 of 113
For information about MicroStation-based civil solutions, see the Bentley Web site.
Geospatial data set The Geospatial data set illustrates a mapping project done using functionality in the base MicroStation product. This data set is in the "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Geospatial" directory.
For information about MicroStation-based geospatial solutions, see the Bentley Web site.
Plant data set The Plant data set illustrates a plant design project done using functionality in the base MicroStation product. The DGN files in this data set include the master 3D model, plans, piping and other schematics, assemblies, and sheets. This data set is in the "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Plant" directory.
For information about MicroStation-based plant solutions, see the Bentley Web site.
Export Visible Edges Enhancements

The Export Visible Edges dialog box has been reorganized and enhanced. It has several additional settings and an Export Visible Edges Preview window. As well, the settings for both the Visible and Hidden Edge Overrides are contained in the one tab Symbology.
Preview Window When you click the Preview button in the Export Visible Edges dialog box, the visible edges file displays in a resizable preview window. You then can change the settings and click the Preview button to update the display to see the effects of the new settings.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 66 of 113
Additional settings Several additional settings are included in the General tab of the Export Visible Edges dialog box.
Tiling lets you specify that the Visible Edges file is processed in tiles, to reduce the amount of memory required. Two settings, X and Y, let you specify the number of blocks (or tiles) in the X and Y directions. Facet All surfaces all surfaces are converted to facetted surfaces in the visible edges DGN file. Expand Custom Linestyles If on, any modifications to Line Style Attributes are processed and appear in the generated visible edges. Expand Hatch if on, any hatching present in the source view/file/fence is processed and appears in the generated visible edges.
Fence Enhancements
Named fences, a long-requested feature, makes its debut in the XM Edition. Multiple, named fences The Place Fence tool is enhanced to include options for creating and recalling named fences. That is, you can place a fence and then save its location for later recall. Where you have saved several named fences, a display toggle lets you display them all on screen, simultaneously. Options in the expanded Place Fence settings window let you:

Recall and activate a named fence. Delete a named fence. Create a named fence from the active fence.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 67 of 113
Place Fence settings window, expanded
Fence manipulation tool enhancements The Manipulate Fence Contents tool is enhanced as follows:

In the tool settings window, an icon bar replaces the Operation option menu for selecting the manipulation operation to perform. Array is added as an operation option. The Array operation works identically to the Construct Array tool with the setting Use Fence on.
Stretch Element tool The fence stretch functionality from the previous edition is moved from the Copy Element and Move Element tools into a separate tool, Stretch Element. You do not need to place a fence (block) before selecting this tool.
Fields
As you place or edit text you can insert fields in the text whose content is derived. The following types of data can be used as sources for field content:

attributes of an element properties of the active model properties of the open file
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 68 of 113
Fields Editor dialog box for insertion of a field derived from Element Properties
Fields based on element attributes are updated to reflect changes whenever a change to the element causes the attribute to change. Fields based on file or model properties are updated when the file is opened. For example, it is possible to place a piece of title-block text that contains a field whose text is derived from the current filename and have this field be automatically updated if the file is renamed. Another useful example would be text that includes the area of a closed element; the area text would be automatically updated to reflect any modifications to that element. A field can appear anywhere within a piece of text and can span multiple words or lines within multiple line text. You can edit an inserted field in the Word Processor Text Editor window regardless of whether you are in the act of placing a text element, with the Place Text tool, or editing an existing text element, with the Edit Text tool.
The Word Processor Text Editor window is the only style of text editor in which you can insert and edit fields. To select this style text editor, set Text Editor Style to Word Processor in the Text category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Fields in MicroStation and AutoCAD are very similar. A MicroStation field will be saved to DWG format as long as the underlying field property exists within AutoCAD.
File Protection Enhancements

File protection is enhanced for the XM Edition to improve security and flexibility. Enhanced security File protection has the following security enhancements:
Screening of certificates for their intended purpose is improved to ensure only valid certificates are presented for selection. This enhancement relates to digital signature creation as well as file protection. The Key? column is added to the File Protection and Digital Rights dialog boxes. When you are prompted to select a certificate, the Key? column indicates whether a certificate has a private key in cases where the key is optional
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 69 of 113
The Restricted Apps setting in the Digital Rights dialog box is on only if the Export right is denied.
Support for 2048-bit public/private keys For file protection and digital signatures, the XM Edition supports 2048-bit public and private keys. Create protected files compatible with previous editions As delivered, the XM Edition uses an algorithm for generating the "key" that is stronger than the one used in the previous edition. (Both algorithms are industry standard.) A DGN file protected using the default XM Edition key generation algorithm cannot be opened in the previous edition. If you require compatibility with the previous edition, you can set the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_V8_COMPATIBILITY to force MicroStation to use the weaker algorithm. Identify trusted .NET assemblies With the XM Edition, you, as owner of a DGN file, can identify not only trusted digital certificates but also trusted .NET assemblies. This enables you to use .NET add-ins with protected DGN files without undermining digital rights checking.
Google Earth Tools

Google Earth is an application that provides you with a 3D interface to planet Earth. It is complemented by a large range of geographical data and the ability to access this data through the Google search engine. MicroStation's Google Earth tools let you export geometric data to Google Earth so that it can be viewed in the context of satellite data, aerial photography, maps and other geographical data. You can download a free version of the Google Earth Viewer from Google. Define Placemark Monument You use the Define Placemark Monument tool to associate a geographical location from a Google Earth Placemark file to a Monument point in a model. Export 2D and 3D KML files Once you have created a placemark file and defined a placemark monument in your model, you can export your 2D/3D design geometry to Google Earth with the Export Google Earth (KML) File tool. Another tool Google Earth Export Settings provides a dialog box with settings that control how the geometry is exported. This includes settings for:

Levels Raster References Transparency Render mode
Synchronize MicroStation and Google Earth Views With the view synchronizing tools you can quickly move to the same view location and orientation in either MicroStation or Google Earth. You can do this with the following tools:

Synchronize Google Earth View to navigate Google Earth to the location and orientation of the active view in MicroStation. Follow Google Earth View to navigate the active view in MicroStation to the location and orientation of the current Google Earth view.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 70 of 113
Graphics
For the XM Edition MicroStation's graphics display subsystem, the part of MicroStation that controls the display of your models in view windows, is completely reworked leveraging Microsoft DirectX technology. The display subsystem is noticeably faster and smoother, particularly in the rendered display modes. In addition, it supports new concepts that are useful for both 2D layouts and 3D modeling:

transparency dialog boxes, as well as elements, levels, and references display priority gradient fills
Improved interactive performance for camera/view navigation The following view control enhancements take advantage of specific capabilities of the XM Edition display subsystem:

camera navigation smooth interpolations for viewing operations
Element, level, and reference transparency Transparency can be set for elements, levels, and references attributes. Transparency may vary from 0% to 100%. A value of 0 indicates no transparency at all, while a value of 100% indicates almost complete transparency.
Element, level, and reference display priority Display priority is a technique for specifying the relative front-to-back order in which 2D elements appear in a 2D model (only) when they are displayed in a view. Essentially, display priority adds a calculated Z value for these co-planar elements. Display priority is only useful or necessary for 2D models, since all elements in 3D models have their own explicit 3D coordinate space. In 3D models, elements closer to the eye are always drawn in front of elements further from the eye so display priority is not necessary.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 71 of 113
In 2D models, you can assign display priority values to references, levels, and to individual elements. The hierarchy for display priority is reference : level : element. That is:
All elements in a reference with a higher reference display priority will appear in front of all elements from references with a lower value. Within a single model, or from references with the same reference display priority, elements on levels with higher level display priority will appear in front of those with a lower value. Where elements have the same reference and level display priority, then element display priority determines those that will appear in front of others. Where two elements have the same reference, level, and element display priorities, then the one that appears later in the display order (that is, file position and update sequence) appears on top.
Display priority is not supported in editions prior to XM. Files created using display priority, therefore, will appear unsorted when displayed in previous editions of MicroStation V8, or when saved to DGN V7 or DWG.
Gradient fills You can apply gradient fills to closed elements, either directly or by applying an element template. A gradient fill takes multiple colors and interpolates them across the element surface.
Handles Enhancements
Element manipulation and modification using handles has been updated. There are no longer two sets of handles. Now, by default, when you drag a handle to modify an element, the geometric relationships are preserved (angle, radius ratios, and so on). You can toggle this off by pressing the <Alt> key while dragging, which results in the selected vertex only being modified. As previously, to move a selected element, you simply drag any part of the selected element, other than a handle. However, in the XM Edition, you can copy the selected element rather than move it by pressing and holding down the <Ctrl> key. As well as modifying geometry in a model, you can use the handles to:

Modify reference clip boundaries and clip masks. Modify named fences (when named fence is displayed in view).
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 72 of 113
Installer
MicroStation V8 XM Edition uses Windows Installer 2.0, which provides the capability for silent installation.
In previous editions, the Software Development Kit (SDK) was a MicroStation installation option. The SDK for the XM Edition is offered separately.
System requirements Hardware and software requirements are changed for the XM Edition and can be found in the product ReadMe document.
Readiness utility
To see if your system is optimized to run MicroStation V8 , download and run the Bentley Desktop Analyzer. Silent installation Silent installation is the process of installing MicroStation without interacting with the installation wizard. This capability is particularly useful for site administrators. To perform a silent installation, run the Windows Installer, msiexec at a system command prompt, specifying appropriate installation parameters. Directory structure conforms with Microsoft Windows standards The installed MicroStation directory structure for the XM Edition conforms with Microsoft Windows standards. The most noticeable aspect of the change are the separate default locations for program files and document files. Document files are installed by default to "C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley" (Windows XP) or "C:\ProgramData\Bentley" (Windows Vista) while program files are installed by default to "C:\Program Files\Bentley".
Levels Enhancements
Level management is enhanced as follows:

Capability to selectively control the levels that are imported. Capability to selectively control the level filters that are imported. Capability to control Display Priority, Transparency and Materials through level attributes. Out-of-Sync asterisk and level library name are displayed in separate columns. Icons are used for column headings in the Level Manager and Level Display dialog boxes. When clicked, the Dialog Properties icon allows you to set the preferences for the Level Manager and Level Display dialog boxes. The Level Display dialog box identifies new reference levels. Capability to format the string that is displayed in the level combo boxes. The configuration variable MS_LEVEL_DISPLAY_FORMAT controls this capability.
3/24/2010
What's New?
License Management Enhancements
Page 73 of 113
The License Management Tool dialog box (Utilities > License Management) is a simple utility for manipulating checked out licenses and setting your license client configuration. You can use this utility to check out a license when your system is offline or you are otherwise unable to connect to Bentley SELECT Server. The license is stored locally and is valid for the requested time period. The default is 90 days, but this is configurable in SELECT Server.
License Management Tool dialog box
The License Management Tool dialog box provides some new functionality that did not exist in the License Check Out/In dialog box that it replaces:

Choose File > Import to import a checked out license from a file into the system registry. Choose File > Backup to export the license(s) selected in the checked in list to the specified file. Choose Tools > Options to define the Server Name and Site Activation key for your SELECT Server or to enable and configure the use of a proxy server.
Line Styles Enhancements

There are enhancements in the XM Edition related to modifying custom line style attributes and scaling line styles. Redesigned Modify Line Style Attributes tool
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 74 of 113
The Modify Line Style Attributes tool is redesigned. You can modify custom line style attributes by entering a precise value, or by modifying the attribute interactively in the view.
Model-based line style scale Every model can have a global line style scale factor that is applied to every line style within the model. The scale of line styles within a reference can be affected by the global line style scale of either the active model, the referenced model, both, or neither. A model's global line style scale factor can easily be set to be the same as the annotation scale factor.
Mesh Modeling Tools

Mesh modeling tools are added to the surface modeling tool set. As well, processing of mesh elements is much faster. Mesh modeling tools let you create and manipulate mesh elements. These tools are grouped in the Meshes task, which is a child task of the Surface Modeling task.
Meshes task (opened as tool box)
The Meshes task contains the following tools:
Construct Mesh for creating a faceted element, either as shapes or as a mesh element, from existing elements in a model. Options let you select that the mesh be created from existing surfaces or solids, from selected contours, or from selected point elements.
Mesh Boolean for creating a mesh element from the union, intersection, or subtraction, of existing mesh elements, or to project a profile onto a mesh element. When a profile is projected onto a mesh element, you have options to merge the projected profile, trim the mesh element, or just imprint the profile onto the mesh element.
Modify Mesh for reducing, stitching, splitting, simplifying, unfolding, reversing, or extracting the boundary of existing mesh elements.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Enhanced mesh clipping Mesh clipping is enhanced and provides much faster fence clipping, particularly of large mesh elements.
Page 75 of 113
If Workspace > Preferences > Operation > Optimized Fence Clipping is on, solid mesh elements will remain solid after a fence clip. This is analogous to turning off the Use Second as Trimmer Only option in the Mesh Boolean Subtract tool.
Models Enhancements
With the XM Edition you can create a Project Explorer link when you create a model in the Create Model dialog box. This edition also introduces the concept of a model-specific line style scale. Additional enhancements to models are covered in the following subtopics.
Left: Create (sheet) Model dialog box. Right: Create (design) Model dialog box.
Associate border attachments with sheet models When you associate a border attachment to a sheet model, any changes to the annotation scale for the sheet, automatically are propagated to the border attachment. If, for example, you have an A4 title border associated to an A4 sheet model, and you change the annotation scale to 1:50, then the associated border file also is scaled by the same amount. To associate a border attachment with a sheet model, use the SHEET SET BORDERATTACHMENT key-in. Sheet N mber propert for sheet models
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 76 of 113
Sheet models have an adjustable Sheet Number property. This enhancement makes it easy to order sheet models for presentation, printing, cataloging in a project, or generating PDFs. History navigation During a MicroStation session you may activate many models, and those models may reside in multiple DGN files. To enable you to more easily navigate the current session's model history that is, switch between models you have activated regardless of the files in which those models reside, there are three icons added to the View Groups window:
The first two icons, Previous Model and Next Model, enable you to navigate backward and forward sequentially through the models you have activated. Clicking the downward-pointing arrow next to the third icon, All Models Visited, presents the entire model history, enabling you to reactivate any model you have visited during the current session.
When you select a model that resides in a different file using these icons, that file is automatically opened. Further enhancements let you use keyboard modifiers to control the view configuration when the selected model is opened.
In the default MicroStation window layout, the View Groups window is open and docked to the bottom of the MicroStation window, just above the status bar.
Place Note Enhancements

The Place Note tool is enhanced. Additional types of frames You can choose from among the following shapes, as alternatives to a line or box, to frame note text:

rotated box circle capsule hexagon rotated hexagon triangle pentagon octagon
Scale frames You can set a scale factor to apply to note text frames. To enable frame scaling, turn on Frame Scale on the Text tab in the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles). Place notes with multiple leaders When placing a note you can attach multiple leader lines to a single text string.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 77 of 113
To do this you must first set Start At to Text in the Place Note settings window. Then after you position the text, to define multiple leader lines press and hold down the <Ctrl> key. Each data point you enter while <Ctrl> remains pressed will define a new leader line.
Printing Enhancements
MicroStation's print engine required many changes for the V8 XM Edition to ensure compatibility with this edition's reworked graphics display subsystem. In addition, there are a number of other upgrades to printing functionality.
Due to constraints imposed by the improved display subsystem, and other factors, the V8 XM Edition supports fewer printer drivers than previous editions. Unsupported drivers will not function and therefore are not included in the product installation. In addition, some delivered PLT files have been consolidated. The following table shows the V8 XM status of the supported PLT files delivered with the 2004 Edition. 2004 Edition .PLT "printer.plt" "emf.plt" "wmf.plt" "printer.plt" merged with "printer.plt" obsolete V8 XM Edition .PLT
"ripwin32_gray8.plt" obsolete; use "printer.plt" with Rasterized on "ripwin32_rgb24.plt" obsolete; use "printer.plt" with Rasterized on "hpgl2.plt" "hpglrtl.plt" "drftprop.plt" "hp650c.plt" "hpdjet.plt" "novajet2.plt" "hpljet3.plt" "hpljet4.plt" "hpljet4v.plt" "hppcl5.plt" "epson24.plt" "hp5xxc.plt" "hpljet.plt" "jpeg.plt" "png.plt" "tiff.plt" "cgm.plt" "pdf.plt" "epscripc.plt" "epscripm.plt" "ps650c.plt" "psc650c.plt" "pscript.plt" "pscriptc.plt" "hpgl2.plt" "hpglrtl.plt" merged with "hpgl2.plt" merged with "hpgl2.plt" merged with "hpgl2.plt" merged with "hpgl2.plt" obsolete, use "printer.plt" obsolete, use "printer.plt" obsolete, use "printer.plt" obsolete, use "printer.plt" obsolete, use "printer.plt" obsolete, use "printer.plt" obsolete, use "printer.plt" "jpeg.plt" "png.plt" "tiff.plt" not delivered "pdf.plt" merged with "pscript.plt" merged with "pscript.plt" merged with "pscript.plt" merged with "pscript.plt" "pscript.plt" merged with "pscript.plt"
Design history revision markup is printable with the V8 XM Edition.
Print engine
Background color for rendered images
Wh
i i
di
d fi
db
3/24/2010
Th
What's New?
default is to use the printer-defined background color.
Rasterized printing
Page 78 of 113
Rasterized printing works by generating a display list from the model, with all printer and pen table resymbolization applied, then rendering that display list up into raster tiles or bands before writing them to the plot file. Hardware acceleration is used during rendering whenever possible. The printer driver determines whether tiles or bands are used. The size of the tiles or bands plays a large role in printing performance. The larger the tile, the faster the plot, but the larger the memory overhead. Tile sizes are also limited by the capabilities of, and available memory on, your video card. Your system's display settings must also be set to use 24-bit color (true color) or higher. Print dialog box enhancements The Print dialog box (File > Print) is enhanced for the V8 XM Edition.
The format of the Print dialog box's saved configuration (.INI) files is changed for the V8 XM Edition. Configuration files written by previous editions of MicroStation remain valid, but once a configuration file is written by the V8 XM Edition, it will not be usable with previous editions.
Optional rasterization
The Rasterized setting in the Print dialog box is no longer read-only, unless it is restricted by the view render mode, printer driver configuration file, or other factors. Typically, you may choose to output the print as a single raster image to the driver (similar to the BSIRIP drivers in the 2004 Edition), or as a mix of vectors and raster data. Rasterized mode is the most capable for visualization purposes.
If the area to print is rendered, the Rasterized check box label changes to Rendered and the setting is forced to on.
This setting can also be adjusted with a key-in: PRINT RASTERIZED <OFF | ON>.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Non-orthogonal rotation
Page 79 of 113
Using the Rotation field in the Print dialog box, you can specify any rotation in the 0-360 degree range for prints that are not rendered, do not contain a camera definition, and do not use the View plot area.
To enable non-orthogonal rotation, turn off Hide advanced layout controls in the Print - Preferences dialog box. If Hide advanced layout controls is on, the Rotation control is an option menu as in the 2004 Edition, rather than a field.
This setting can also be adjusted with a key-in: PRINT ROTATION <rotation_in_degrees>.
Mirroring
Using the Mirror option menu in the Print dialog box you can mirror printed output about the x- and/or y-axis.
To display the Mirror option menu, turn off Hide advanced layout controls in the Print - Preferences dialog box.
This setting can also be adjusted with key-ins:

PRINT XMIRROR <OFF | ON>. PRINT YMIRROR <OFF | ON>.
Print preferences dialog box
Many printing settings that were previously available only via configuration variables are stored in the user preference file and can be set in the Print - Preferences dialog box.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 80 of 113
The configuration variables are still honored and those defined override the corresponding preferences. Preferences for which an override is in effect are disabled in the dialog box.
To open the Print - Preferences dialog box
1. In the Print dialog box, choose Settings > Preferences.

Print attributes
In conjunction with the addition of the Transparency view attribute, there is a corresponding Transparency print attribute in the Print Attributes dialog box. Transparency is applicable only to rasterized printing.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 81 of 113
The Camera and Reference Boundary Display view attributes no longer have corresponding print attributes. Reference boundaries, like the grid and ACS triad, are considered view decorations and are never printed. The camera setting is always obtained from the view and cannot be altered for printing.
The Transparency setting can also be adjusted with a key-in: PRINT ATTRIBUTES TRANSPARENCY <OFF | ON>.
Default usage of plot style tables in DWG files
MicroStation checks to see whether an AutoCAD plot style table (.CTB or .STB) is specified in the active layout of a DWG file. If a plot style table is present and enabled, by default MicroStation converts it into a memory-resident MicroStation pen table and attaches it to the print.
Specify print destination
The print destination Send to printer, Create plot file, or Create (enhanced Windows) metafile is selectable from the Print dialog box, instead of only in the Windows print dialog.
When printing with a Bentley driver, Create plot file is the only available choice. For this purpose, if the PLT is configured to write directly to an LPT port, this is still considered Create plot file.
This setting can also be adjusted with a key-in: PRINT DESTINATION <DEVICE | METAFILE | PLOTFILE>.
Raster options
The Print - Raster Options dialog box shows the printer resolution in dots per inch and the raster resolution that results from the specified raster Quality Factor.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 82 of 113
Printer driver configuration file enhancements The following subtopics highlight printing enhancements you can control by editing printer driver configuration files.
The CHANGE_PEN record is no longer supported, and is ignored if present in the PLT file.
ANSI and ISO paper sizes
The V8 XM Edition permits both ISO and ANSI paper sizes to be defined simultaneously in a PLT file. Each delivered PLT file contains a single resolution line, defined in inverted DPI, that is not necessarily tied to the SIZE records. Each SIZE record contains a units qualifier that indicates how the form size and offset should be interpreted. For example:
size=(1189,841) /units=mm /name="ISO A0" For legacy PLT files, where the SIZE records do not contain a units qualifier, the resolution units are used instead. As before, PLT files should not contain multiple resolution records.
Paper size margins
MicroStation has historically used a printable area model in PLT paper size definitions. The SIZE record specified the dimensions of the printable area, and the /offset qualifier specified the exterior distance from the physical paper corner to the printable area corner. For example, for an ANSI A sheet with 0.5" margins on each side, the SIZE record would be: size=(10,7.5) /offset=(0.5,0.5). This specification method was different from that used by system printers, where the physical sheet size was defined along with an interior margin. In the V8 XM Edition, SIZE records have the capability of using either page model.

If the SIZE record contains the existing /offset qualifier, then the form size is assumed to be the printable area. If the SIZE record contains the new /margin qualifier, then the form size is assumed to be the physical sheet size.
3/24/2010
What's New?
right_margin and top_margin values are omitted, the left and bottom margins will be symmetrical across the page. For example, the three SIZE records below are equivalent:
Page 83 of 113
size=(10, 7.5) /offset=(0.5, 0.5) /units=in size=(11, 8.5) /margin=(0.5, 0.5, 0.5, 0.5) /units=in size=(11, 8.5) /margin=(0.5, 0.5) /units=in
Paper size-specific line weight and line style scales
You can control line weight and line style scaling on an individual paper size basis by specifying one of the following qualifiers for the SIZE record:
/weightScale=<scale> scales the widths defined in the WEIGHT_STROKES record. /styleScale=<scale> scales the pattern lengths defined in the STYLE record. /penScale=<scale> sets both line weightScale and line styleScale.
Each qualifier takes a value greater than zero, with 1.0 indicating no scaling. An example of where this feature may be useful is where WEIGHT_STROKES is set correctly for an ANSI C paper size. When creating an ANSI A half-size plot, the output widths would be too wide. Rather than create a new, half-size, PLT file, you could add /weightScale=0.5 to your ANSI A paper size definition.
System printer paper sizes
The MicroStation V8 V8 XM Edition system printer driver supports SIZE records in the PLT file. When printing to drivers that support application-defined paper sizes, you can set up the PLT SIZE records without regard to the paper sizes published by the drivers (although you are still restricted to the driver's non-printable margins you cannot override these). In most cases, since many drivers do not support such ad-hoc definitions, the PLT SIZE records serve to filter and rename the Windows paper sizes. They may also be used to specify per-paper-size weight and line style scale factors. For more information, refer to the section in the delivered "printer.plt" file that begins as follows:
; If uncommented, the custom paper size definitions below replace the ; paper size list obtained from Windows printer driver You can disable this feature by removing or commenting out the 10 SIZE records that follow the narrative.
System printer border offset
With the MicroStation V8 V8 XM Edition you can control the border text position for system printers using the /OFFSET=(X,Y) qualifier on the BORDER record. The offset is interpreted as the distance from the lower left corner of the physical page. By changing the /offset option you can place border text anywhere on the page bottom left corner, top right corner, etc. You must specify the X and Y values in centimeters. For example, a setting of /offset=(2.50, 2.50) will start your border text 2.5 cm from the bottom and 2.5 cm from the left side of the page. You must specify X and Y values that are greater than zero, otherwise the offset will not be applied. If you do not specify an offset, the printer driver calculates an offset. This calculation depends on whether full sheet mode is specified and it places the border text just inside the lower-left corner of the printable area. When you specify an offset that is smaller than the calculated offset, the border text may move closer to the lower-left corner of the page and could be partially clipped.
Default line join and caps
The PLT records LINEJOIN and LINECAP, while still supported, are supplanted by the DEFAULT_LINEJOIN and DEFAULT_LINECAP records. Whereas the legacy records require numeric values that are closely tied to the plotter language the driver writes, the new records use keywords to indicate the types of caps and joins desired. Note that not all caps and joins are valid for every device; refer to the PLT file for the list of valid choices.
3/24/2010
What's New?
For example, from "hpglrtl.plt":
Page 84 of 113
; Valid values for default_linecap: flat, square, triangle, round default_linecap = flat ; Valid values for default_linejoin: miter, mitrbevel, triangle, round, bevel, none default_linejoin = round
Maximum miter angle
The PLT record MITER_LIMIT, while still supported, is supplanted by the MAX_MITER_ANGLE record. The print engine clips miter line joins to bevels at angles sharper than max_miter_angle. The value is specified in degrees, with a range of 45180. Smaller values result in longer spikes. This specification method is easier to visualize than MITER_LIMIT.
Output mode
You can use the OUTPUT_MODE PLT record to specify a driver-specific default setting for the Rasterized check box in the Print dialog box. You can also indicate whether the setting is a preference, in which case one can change it after the driver loads, or a requirement, in which case the check box is disabled. The syntax is output_mode = < force_rasterized | prefer_rasterized | force_nonrasterized | prefer_nonrasterized >.
You cannot use OUTPUT_MODE to override an output mode enforced by the driver itself, such as LORIP and rasterized mode, or a rendering mode requiring rasterization.
Optimize raster color depth
When printing in rasterized mode, all output is in true color unless optimized into 256 colors. More time is required for optimized color plotting, but it produces more compact plotfiles for typical drawings. This setting also affects how raster data in non-rasterized mode is handled. Optimization is enabled by default in the appropriate printer drivers but may be changed by editing the OPTIMIZE_RASTER_COLOR_DEPTH record in the PLT file:
; If true, RGB raster is converted to a color palette when possible. ; Note that this generally results in smaller plot files, at the ; expense of plot processing time and memory requirements. optimize_raster_color_depth = true
Raster parameters
While most of the legacy PLT records related to raster plotting are still supported, in the delivered PLT files they have all been consolidated into a single record: RASTER_PARAMETERS:
raster_parameters /quality=<quality_value> /contrast=<contrast_value> /brightness=<brightness_value> /grayscale=<grayscale_value> /ignore=<ignore_value>
Quality_value is the ratio of device resolution to raster resolution, as a percentage. That is, /quality=100 (the default in almost all cases), means that raster data should plot at the device resolution. Setting /quality=50 results in raster data plotted at half the available resolution, which may be desirable if plot file size is a bigger concern than output quality. Note that in place of /quality, you can substitute /dpi=<DPI_value>. DPI_value is the desired raster output resolution in dots per inch. Use of /quality is preferred in most cases, since in addition to being easier to calculate, it will automatically track any changes that might be made to device resolution.
Contrast value is the raster contrast in the range 100 100
even numbers only
where 0 is neutral
3/24/2010
What's New?

Page 85 of 113
Brightness_value is the raster brightness in the range -100100 even numbers only where 0 is neutral. Grayscale_value is either 0 or 1. If 1, all raster data is printed in grayscale. Ignore_value is either 0 or 1. If 1, no raster data is printed.
LORIP %include
The delivered LORIP printer driver's PLT files "jpeg.plt", "png.plt", and "tiff.plt" make use of an %include statement to consolidate many of their common settings. Note that, as with the PostScript prolog files, you will need to copy this include file along with its parent PLT files to your custom MS_PLTR directory. Refer to the comments in the header section of "lorip_common.inc".
LORIP full sheet mode
The delivered LORIP common include file ("lorip_common.inc") contains a CmdName record that permits you to create raster offline files whose sizes are equal to the sheet size. Plot origins are correctly reflected inside the image data. Previous editions only supported raster file sizes equal to the plot size, with no plot origin.
; Uncomment the line below to create raster file sizes equal to the sheet size ; instead of the plot area size. Note that this line should be commented out when ; using this driver with Bentley Publisher. ;CmdName /appname="lorip" /command="fullSheet" /qualifier="ON" Pen table enhancements There are several enhancements to pen table-related functionality in the V8 XM Edition.
Support for pen table transparency extended to all printer drivers
Pen table transparency is supported for any printer driver capable of printing in rasterized mode. If pen table transparency is used when printing in non-rasterized mode, the transparency values do not have any effect.
Priority
Pen table priority does not have any effect for printing 3D files. Priority is implemented for printing 3D files through Z depth, using hardware acceleration when possible, so the pen table is no longer required to make multiple passes through the element list. This permits some actions that were not possible with the 2004 Edition, such as assigning different priorities to individual components of a shared cell.
CTB color mapping
When converting a CTB file into a MicroStation pen table, AutoCAD color numbers 1254 are mapped to MicroStation colors 1254. However, the CTB file has an additional assignment for AutoCAD color number 255. Since MicroStation users expect colors 0 and 7 to be pure white when working with DWG files, the V8 XM Edition pen table processing ignores the CTB color 255 mapping, and instead makes pen map colors 0 and 7 the same (with output assignments taken from color 7).
Pen table options dialog box
The Pen Table - Options dialog box is used to control the following pen table options:

element symbology comparison mode applying multiple sections to elements complex/compound elements
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 86 of 113
Element symbology comparison mode
In the V8 XM Edition the Element symbology comparison mode setting in the Pen Table - Options dialog box affects only the manner in which the input criteria treats level symbology. There are two modes from which to choose:

As stored in element header the element header symbology is matched against the input criteria. As displayed in view the view symbology is matched against the input criteria.
The pen table output actions are always applied, regardless of whether level symbology is enabled.
Apply more than one section to an element
You can set up a pen table to apply more than one section to an element.
If Match multiple element sections is on in the Pen Table - Options dialog box, the sections will be selected and applied in descending order, starting at the top of the list and working downwards. If this setting is off (the default), once a section has been selected by its input criteria and its output actions applied, pen table processing on that element stops.
Treat cells, shared cells, dimensions, and multi-lines as single units or individual elements
In the V8 XM Edition, you can control whether the pen table processing will treat any or all of the following types of elements shared cells, dimensions, and multi-lines, as well as unshared cells as single units or as individual elements.
When treating as a single unit, which is the default for all four types, only the complex/compound header is processed by the pen table; all of its children inherit any output actions applied to the header. When treating as individual elements, the complex/compound header is ignored by the pen table.
To adjust these settings, use the check boxes in the Complex/Compound Element Options section of the Pen Table - Options dialog box.
Complex chains and complex shapes are always treated as single units.
Individual elements cannot be processed by the pen table more than once.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Batch Print enhancements The Batch Print utility is enhanced for the V8 XM Edition.
Page 87 of 113
The format of Batch Print specification (.SPC) files is changed for the V8 XM Edition. Specification files written by previous editions of MicroStation remain valid, but once a specification file is written by the V8 XM Edition, it will not be usable with previous editions.
PLT-defined paper sizes allowed in system printer specification
Batch Print permits use of PLT-defined paper sizes in the system printer specification, as well as the plot file output and post-processing options previously only available with Bentley printer drivers. When using Batch Print with a system printer, it is strongly recommended that you create a version of "printer.plt" for each target system printer, and specify the desired Windows printer name in each PLT file using the sysprinter /name qualifier. Doing so allows Batch Print to present the list of paper sizes that are appropriate for the target printer. If you use the generic "printer.plt" without an embedded Windows printer name, Batch Print obtains the paper size list from the default Windows printer.
Batch Print preferences dialog box
Many Batch Print job creation settings that were previously available only via configuration variables are stored in the user preference file and can be set in the Batch Print - Preferences dialog box.
The configuration variables are still honored and those defined override the corresponding preferences. Preferences for which an override is in effect are disabled in the dialog box.
To open the Batch Print - Preferences dialog box
1. In the Batch Print dialog box, choose File > Preferences.
Project Explorer and Link Sets

Using Project Explorer (File > Project Explorer) can help you manage project data within MicroStation. Project data refers primarily to design and sheet models and the files in which models are stored (DGN and DWG), but can also include

saved views references supporting documentation stored in Microsoft Office files as well as other data file formats
To group project data you create link sets, which contain links to project data. For example, you can create a link in a link set that points to a DGN file's design model or to a DWG file's layout. A link set can be stored in any DGN file or DGN library. Link sets are created in the Link Sets dialog box. Links are added to link sets in the Project Explorer dialog box. Within a link set, you can organize links into a hierarchy of folders. You l li k ithi f ld t diff t f ld F ld d th i li k i d i th P j t E l di l b
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 88 of 113
When you are working in a DGN file you can go to Project Explorer to see the linked files. To follow a link you simply right-click the link and choose Open.
In addition to opening links in a link set, you can:

Add links to elements Add links to detailing symbols Renumber sheet models to which there are links View the properties of links Validate that the target to which the link points still exists in the location to which the link points
ProjectWise StartPoint Integration

ProjectWise StartPoint integrates Microsoft SharePoint technology with MicroStation and AutoCAD to allow teams to manage, find, and share their design documents. With ProjectWise StartPoint, Bentley has enabled MicroStation and AutoCAD to access design documents located in the SharePoint environment and ensures the proper management of all related reference/x-ref files. B b ildi Sh P i tt h l i P j tWi St tP i t ll t ll b t th i d i d t i th
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 89 of 113
familiar SharePoint team sites that they use with Microsoft Office documents. This approach exploits the Windows Server 2003 and SharePoint Products and Technologies already in place at many corporate networks. It provides a simple and easy to use solution to address the challenges of managing, finding, and sharing design data. Information about ProjectWise StartPoint can be found at http://www.bentley.com/ProjectWiseStartPoint.
Raster Manager Enhancements

Raster file handling is significantly enhanced in the V8 XM Edition.
The reworked MicroStation graphics display subsystem in the V8 XM Edition supports raster attachments and manipulations.
View draped rasters in shaded display modes When "dcdrape.pal" is added to a material table (.mat) which is attached to a DGN file, and the Drape is on for these files in Bentley Descartes, the draping is preserved and can be viewed directly in MicroStation and rendered by MicroStation's rendering engine. Enhanced Raster Manager dialog box The Raster Manager dialog box (File > Raster Manager) is updated and optionally displays a menu pane, in which the opened DGN and its attached references are listed in a hierarchical tree view, and a properties pane which provides information about the selected attachment. The presence and configuration of these panes is controlled through items in the dialog box's View menu. Additional Raster Manager dialog box enhancements are covered in the subtopics that follow.
Raster tool icons
Raster Manager's attachment and manipulation tools are now easily accessible through the icon bar in the Raster Manager dialog box.
Raster attachments list box enhancements
The list of raster attachments in the Raster Manager dialog box is enhanced as follows:

Column names are replaced by icons. You can drag and drop columns to change their order. The Plane column shows the plane Background/ Design/Foreground in which raster attachments are displayed. To change this setting, double-click in the column. The Plane dialog box will then display. The Display Priority column shows the display priority value for raster attachments displaying in the Design Plane. To change this setting, double-click in the column. The Display Priority dialog box will then appear. For 2D rasters, the display priority manages the display order of DGNs. For 3D rasters, the Z elevation manages the display order of DGNs.
Cache Manager
The Cache Manager dialog box is used to manage raster image cache files generated on your hard disk. To open the Cache Manager dialog box, choose Settings > Cache Manager in the Raster Manager dialog box.
Enhance Binary setting
When the view is zoomed out sufficiently to cause a loss of detail in the display of binary raster attachments, turn on Settings > Enhance Binary to enhance their display. The effect is similar to a bold foreground. Raster placed on level
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 90 of 113
Upon attachment a raster is automatically assigned to the Active Level. Raster attachments are treated as standard elements with regard to level-related operations, such as display, Freeze, Lock, Plot and Viewport Freeze. AccuSnap compliance Rasters are now AccuSnap compliant and can be snapped on. Attachment settings in Element Info(rmation) dialog box The Attachment Settings menu from previous versions is now found under the MicroStation Element Info(rmation) dialog box when doubleclicking on the raster attachment New Transform tool The new Transform Raster tool replaces the old Modify tool from previous editions. Multi-page PDF support Raster Manager supports the Adobe PDF multi-page format.
Password protected PDF files are not supported.
I/RAS B raster formats support Raster Manager supports all I/RAS B raster formats, such as CLR, LRD, MPF, and RST. JPG 2000 format support You can attach or create (Save As) JPG 2000 files using Raster Manager. ECW format support You can create (Save As) ECW files using Raster Manager.
References Enhancements
MicroStation V8 XM Edition provides many new features with references. These include the ability to manipulate references as you would elements, using the standard manipulation tools. Attachment settings include options for selecting Saved Views and Named Fences, Named Group, Revision (if Design History is on), and Global Line Style Scale. New reference display settings include Transparency, Priority, and Plot as 3D (PDF). Choose named fence as attachment view The XM Edition introduces the option to attach as a reference only the portion of a model defined with a named fence. You can also change the orientation of an attachment by selecting standard views, sometimes combined with a saved view or named fence. Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation While legacy, specialized reference manipulation tools, such as Move Reference, remain available in the XM Edition, you also have an additional attachment option, Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation. When enabled, this option lets you manipulate attached references using the same tools and methods as for standard elements.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 91 of 113
In the Attachment Settings dialog box, the checkbox corresponding to this attachment setting is labeled Manipulate as Element.
Optionally move boundary with reference The Move Reference tool has a new option Move Boundary with Reference. Where a reference has clip boundaries/masks, this setting lets you define whether or not the reference boundaries/masks move with the reference, or if they remain static while the reference slides through them. Enhanced References dialog box The References dialog box has these additions:

Rotation Displays and sets the rotation for the selected reference. Offset Displays and sets the distance between the global origin of the reference and the global origin of the parent file, measured in units of the parent file. Plot as 3D (PDF) icon (PDF printer driver only) If on, when the PDF printer driver is used, the reference is plotted as 3D data in Universal 3D (U3D) format. Overrides menu Controls how override settings are saved for nested references. For a specific nested reference, overrides allow you to control the settings for reference display, locate, snap, raster reference display, and level display. New Level Display menu Specifies whether a reference displays new levels. The setting also applies to new levels in nested references that are attached to the reference. Tools > Open in New Session Opens the selected reference in a new session of MicroStation. This can also be done by selecting the reference in either the dialog box or with the Element Selection tool and keying in REFERENCE NEWSESSION.
References list The References list has additional columns for Status, Named Group, Revision, Transparency, Priority, and Plot as 3D (PDF). Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation lets you manipulate references with the same tools as used for elements.
Enhanced Reference Attachment Settings dialog box The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box has these additions:
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 92 of 113
Under Orientation, you can select Saved Views and Named Fences. Under those categories, you can also select from a standard view to apply to the view attachment, instead of the rotation stored with the saved view or named fence. The Options button, which opened the Attachment Options dialog box, is removed. The options from this dialog box are displayed as toggles on the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box. They are the same toggles as on the References dialog box. Named Group Identifies a named group used to limit the elements displayed in the reference. Revision If Design History is on in the referenced model, lets you choose the revision to the reference. Clip Boundary Element When a reference is attached with a saved view that includes a clip boundary, controls whether the clip boundary element is copied into the master file or associated directly to the clip boundary element in the reference's saved view. Display Overrides Controls how overrides are saved for nested references. For each nested reference, overrides let you control the settings for reference display, locate, snap, raster reference display, and level display. New Level Display Specifies whether a reference displays newly created levels. The setting also applies to new levels in nested references that are attached to the reference. Global LineStyle Scale Lets you define how Line Styles in the reference are scaled.
Enhanced Copy/Fold Reference tool
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 93 of 113
The tool settings for the Copy/Fold Reference tool include Projection, which can be set to First Angle or Third Angle.
Reference Exchange/Edit You now can exchange to a reference, or open the reference in a new session for editing, via the Reset pop-up menu. When you choose Exchange to open an attached reference, the elements from the reference are displayed in exactly the same position within the views as before you initiated the Exchange. When you choose Edit Reference, the reference is opened in a new session of MicroStation, with the views set up as they were last saved (with File > Save Settings). Set default attachment options as user preferences The Reference category in the Preferences dialog box is expanded to include the expanded set of attachment options (from the Reference Attachment dialog box).
Modify attachment settings with REFERENCE SET key-ins Many reference attachment settings, such as display, snap, and locate, now can be modified with the new REFERENCE SET key-ins. This can simplify the task of modifying the settings on a group of references, and gives you the option of using a batch process.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Seed File Selection Utility
Page 94 of 113
With the addition of the Set Seed File utility, MicroStation becomes more tightly integrated with Windows Explorer. Using this utility, you can specify the seed file that will be copied when you choose New > Bentley MicroStation Design File in Windows Explorer. The MicroStation XM program group (Start > All Programs > Bentley > MicroStation XM) contains a shortcut to the Set Seed File utility.
The utility is a dialog box that supports the following options for specifying the seed file:

prompt you to browse the file system use MicroStation's current seed file use the seed file you selected in this dialog box
Set Seed File utility dialog box
SDK for MicroStation V8 XM Edition
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 95 of 113
The MicroStation Software Development Kit (SDK) for the XM Edition is offered separately and can be requested or downloaded from the Downloads/MYSELECT CD area of SELECTservices. The SDK contains utilities and APIs needed by software developers wanting to develop MDL applications for MicroStation. Numerous examples are also included. In previous editions, the SDK was a MicroStation installation option.
User Interface Enhancements

The addition of tasks, expanded button assignments, more intuitive input focus behavior, optional positional keyboard navigation, contextual shortcuts for element manipulation, expanded window docking options, and Windows XP-style tool icons, among other user interface enhancements, make the XM Edition the most simple to use edition ever. Task-based user interface In MicroStation V8 XM Edition a task is a set of tools grouped to facilitate a particular workflow. By defining and grouping tasks, you can create a task-based interface. The tools grouped into a given task can be standard MicroStation tools, custom tools, or a mixture of both types. Tasks can use overlapping sets of tools. For example, a custom Drafting task and a Drawing Composition task likely would both use the text tools. The Task Navigation tool box contains the task list, from which the active task is selected, and the tools for the active task. The list of available tasks comes from the configured DGN libraries. Custom tools, tool boxes, and tasks should be created and stored in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to customize tools, tool boxes, and tasks in one place and to distribute the customizations to many users.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 96 of 113
Drawing Task expanded in Task List
If Window > Task Navigation in Views is off (the default), only one task is active at a given time. Turning on this setting causes a Task Navigation tool box to be docked to each view window. This enables you to activate different tasks in different views. Some tasks and tools are delivered with the application. Others are created and customized by users. All tasks and tools are stored in DGN libraries. Each tool can define an icon image, a key-in string, an element template, placement settings, and lock settings. You can also define settings for custom tools. Tools are defined in tool boxes, which can be nested within other tool boxes.
Tool boxes are designed to organize and own the tools within them. It is not recommended that you have the same tool in multiple tool boxes that is the purpose of tasks.
You should consider the defined Application Tasks to be an example of a task-based interface. You are encouraged to modify these tasks or create your own tasks to better serve your own workflow. Custom tools, tool boxes, and tasks are defined in the Tools tab of the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize). If the open DGN file is not a configured DGN library, you will be unable to use the features on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box while that DGN file is open. The MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST configuration variable (set by default to point to MS_DGNLIBLIST and to the DGN libraries in the active interface component's folder) and the _USTN_SYSTEM_GUIDGNLIBLIST configuration variable specify which files can be used for task, tool box, tool, icon, and menu customizations.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 97 of 113
Tools tab of the Customize dialog box
Expanded button assignments Button assignments are expanded in the MicroStation V8 XM Edition to allow a greater degree of customization and more efficient 3D view navigation.
Customizing button assignments
Using the Button Assignments dialog box (Workspace > Button Assignments), it is possible to assign any MicroStation key-in and to add key combinations to buttons, thus creating additional button assignments. Many button-key combinations are assigned by default, but even these assignments are customizable.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 98 of 113
For example you could assign <Alt> + Tentative to send the key-in PLACE FENCE. 1. In the Button Assignments dialog box, turn on Altl and select Tentative in the list box. 2. In the Action text box, type place fence and press the <Enter>key. 3. Click OK. Before making button assignments, you should review the Button Mappings dialog box to ensure that the current physical button mappings are set to meet your needs. More intuitive input focus behavior A managed focus model is implemented for the XM Edition. The model is hierarchical. The top level consists of a single position home. While the focus is home, you can use positional keyboard navigation if enabled (the default). A field in the status bar indicates the focus level and position. Positional keyboard navigation Positional keyboard navigation lets you use the keyboard to select tools and change settings while the input focus is in the home position. The keyboard is divided into zones, and each zone is mapped to a tool box or the Tool Settings window. Positional keyboard navigation is enabled by default. To disable it, turn off the preference Use Position Mapping in the Position Mapping category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences). Updated default function key assignments The default function key menu is reworked for the XM Edition to enable you to easily navigate the task-based user interface and access frequently used tool boxes and dialog boxes such as the
Task Navigation tool box task list, <F2>
3/24/2010
What's New?

Page 99 of 113
Main tool box, <F3> Task Navigation tool box tools of the active task, <F4> View Attributes dialog box, <F5> Tool Settings window, <F10> AccuDraw window, <F11>
As with previous editions you can customize function keys using the Function Keys dialog box (Workspace > Function Keys). Contextual shortcuts for element manipulation The Reset pop-up menu, in conjunction with the Element Selection tool pointer, provides convenient, contextual access to tools for manipulating elements: Copy Element, Move Element, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, and Delete Element.
On the same pop-up menu is Properties, which provides access to information about the element. For an element in a reference the pop-up menu includes options to Exchange to the reference or to open it in a new session. Click or press and hold for Reset pop-up menu You can choose between the following techniques for opening the Reset pop-up menu:
Press and hold the Reset button (the default) by selecting this technique you will be able to Reset by clicking the Reset button, as with previous editions. Click the Reset button by selecting this technique you will be able to Reset by choosing Reset from either the Reset pop-up menu or the view control pop-up menu.
During your first MicroStation session, the first time you press the Reset button, the First Reset dialog box will open for you to select your preferred technique.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 100 of 113
You will subsequently be able to change this selection in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences). Drag and drop operations with selected elements In previous editions you could move elements selected with the Element Selection tool by dragging and dropping them. In the XM Edition you can perform the following additional drag and drop operations with selected elements:
To copy the selected elements rather than moving them, hold down the <Ctrl> key while dragging. You can even use this technique to copy elements to a different DGN file while that file is open in another instance of MicroStation running on your system. To add the selected elements to a named group, drag the elements into the Named Groups dialog box and drop them on the list box entry for the named group. To change an active attribute setting to match the corresponding property Level, Color, Line Weight, Line Style, Class, Transparency, or Priority of the selected element, drag the selected element into the Attributes tool box and drop it on the icon for that setting. For example, to set the Active Line Weight to 3, select and drag an element whose line weight is 3, and drop it on the Active Line Weight icon in the tool box. To change all of the active attribute settings, drop the element on the Symbology Preview box in the Attributes tool box. You can do this type of operation with multiple selected elements but only if all of the elements have the same value for the property in question (or the same value for all properties in the case of the Symbology Preview box). For example, if you select two elements that both have color 7, you can drop them on the Active Color icon, but if one of them has color 3 and the other color 7, you cannot. (and MicroStation will indicate this with the Not pointer). You can only drag to set the Active Level or set the Active Line Style to a custom line style if the selected element(s) are in the active model.
Expanded window docking options The following dialog boxes can be docked.

Tool Settings window Key-in window View Groups window AccuDraw window Snaps button bar Element Info(rmation) dialog box
3/24/2010
What's New?

Page 101 of 113
Feature Manager window Project Explorer dialog box Link Sets dialog box Drawing Scale window
These dialog boxes can be docked as tabs. The tabs can be torn off to become floating dialog boxes. Dialog boxes can also be resized when docked.
Docked (Element Selection) Tool Settings window and Level Display dialog box with tabs at bottom. Left: Tool Settings tab is selected. Right: Level Display tab is selected.
Windows XP-style tool icons For the XM Edition, MicroStation tool icons are being modernized in the Windows XP style. They are vector-based with 32-bit color. You can resize icons collectively to 16, 24, or 32 pixels square. The preferences for adjusting icon size are Tool Size, 24 by default and View Tool Size, 16 by default in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences). The latter preference controls the size of icons in tool boxes docked to open view windows. Transparent dialog boxes You can make the Tool Settings window or any non-modal dialog box partially transparent in order to see more of your model. You can set the following preferences related to transparent dialog boxes in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences):
Transparent dialog boxes become opaque when receiving focus off by default
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 102 of 113
All modeless dialog boxes use the same transparency off by default.
View windows The name of the active model is displayed in each view window's title bar. Other view window enhancements are described in the subtopics that follow.
View control bar location
The view control bar is an optional feature of view windows in the XM Edition. By default the view control bar is docked to the top of each view window. You can control its location or prevent its display by adjusting the Show View ToolBox preference in the View Options category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Default setting of Scroll Bars on View Windows preference
By default in the XM Edition, view windows do not have scroll bars. To change this, turn on the Scroll Bars on View Windows preference in the View Options category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
View attribute control
You can access a drop-down version of the View Attributes dialog box from the view control bar.
View display mode switching
You can set the view display mode wireframe, hidden line, smooth-shaded, etc. via a drop-down menu on the view control bar.
Active view
MicroStation has an active view which is indicated by a highlighted title bar. A view can be made active by entering a data point within it, clicking its title bar or starting a tool from the view's control bar
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 103 of 113
The active view is used by view controls such as Fit View when selected from the View Control tool box. Previously, when such a tool was selected from the View Control tool box and not the view's control bar, you were prompted to select a view to act on. Now, the active view is automatically acted upon when the view control is selected you are not prompted to select a view. Press <Enter> to open Key-in window When the focus is home, pressing <Enter> pops up the contents of the Key-in window at the pointer location. This is a convenient way to enter key-ins. To dismiss the pop-up without entering a key-in, move the pointer away from the pop-up. Default Windows file selection dialog boxes The XM Edition uses the Windows file selection dialog boxes by default. To revert to the legacy file selection dialog boxes that were the default in previous editions, turn off the preference Use Windows File Open Dialogs in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
In the Windows file Open dialog box, the View Menu setting persists across MicroStation sessions (Windows XP only). This setting determines the manner in which filenames are displayed for selection in the dialog box; the options are Thumbnails, Tiles, Icons, List (the default), and Details.
NEWSESSION key-in You can open a specified file and model in a new MicroStation session by keying in NEWSESSION [filename],[model_name]. Help enhancements Enhancements to the help system are highlighted in the subtopics that follow:
Task-oriented topic structure
Like the interface of MicroStation itself, the top level topic structure of the MicroStation help document is based on functional tasks, such as Getting Started, Setting Up Projects, Creating Drawing Elements, Detailing Designs, etc., rather than a book (User Guide, etc.) paradigm.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 104 of 113
Collapsible/expandable subtopics
To make it easier to browse help content, subtopics within a help topic are collapsed by default.

To display a subtopic's content, click the expand (+) icon to the left of the subtopic heading or the heading itself. To simultaneously expand all subtopics, click the Show All (magnifying glass) icon in the topic pane's top banner.
Element Selection tool incorporates PowerSelector functionality The Element Selection tool in the Main tool box incorporates the functionality of what in previous editions was the PowerSelector tool and introduces support for the following selection criteria:

associated element template associative regions detailing symbols
3/24/2010
What's New?

Page 105 of 113
digital signatures feature solids grouped holes lights area, distant, point, sky opening, and spot notes raster attachments reference attachments RPC cells SmartSolids/Surfaces solar time cells
Also, in the XM Edition the Element Selection tool supports additional drag and drop operations and contextual access to element manipulation tools and the Element Info(rmation) dialog box. Working units settings In the DGN File Settings dialog box, the Working Units category is reorganized, and the Coordinate Readout category is removed. The controls from Coordinate Readout are included in the Working Units category.
DGN File Settings dialog box, Working Units category
PopSet enhancements If PopSet is enabled, its default behavior is such that the Tool Settings window disappears only if the pointer is in the area specified by the Hide Border setting for the number of seconds specified by the Hide Delay setting. These settings are adjustable in the PopSet Properties dialog box. To open this dialog box, right-click on the PopSet icon in the Primary Tools tool box and choose Properties. To restore PopSet's behavior from the previous edition, turn on Auto-Position Tool Settings and set Hide Border to 0.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Screen menus
Page 106 of 113
As an alternative to using the Customize dialog box to create a task-based user interface, you can customize the MicroStation user interface by creating clickable screen menus. A screen menu is similar to a digitizing tablet menu in that it is created as a MicroStation model and can contain menu blocks of varying shapes and sizes. The difference is that whereas a digitizing tablet menu is taped to the surface of a digitizing tablet, a screen menu is displayed on screen in its own resizable window. You can simultaneously display and use up to five screen menus. Snapping and identifying elements The XM Edition lets you enable automatic element identification without also enabling AccuSnap. Attach multiple redlines simultaneously Consistent with the addition for the XM Edition of multiple redline file support in Bentley Redline, MicroStation's Attach Redline File tool enables selection of multiple redline files. When you select the tool, the Display Redline Files dialog box opens. This dialog box lists for selection the files pointed to by the configuration variable RDL_DIR. You can select any or all of the listed redline files to be displayed. Expanded compress options The option to delete unused multi-line styles via compress operations is added to the Compress Options dialog box (File > Compress > Options). Help About enhancements The About MicroStation window (Help > About MicroStation) displays system memory statistics along with the information it displayed in past editions. Also added are buttons that provide entry points to the Licensing Details window; the Properties dialog box, for information about the open file; the Legal and Patent Notices window; and the Windows System Information utility.
Utility Enhancements
The Batch Converter, Save Image, and Save Multiple Image utilities are enhanced. Batch Converter's Save as V8 filtering In the Save as V8 Options dialog box's Filter tab (Batch Convert dialog box, Edit menu > V8 Save Options), you can save design models and/or sheet models, or any subset of these models. The Matching Pattern field uses the same selection criteria as the level filters. If you turn on Design Models and type an e in the Matching Pattern field, all design models with an e in the name are saved. Saved image size and resolution In the Save Image dialog box (Utilities > Image > Save), the Resolution fields are replaced by controls that provide you maximum flexibility in the specification of the size and resolution of the saved image. The image height and width can be specified in pixels, inches, mm, or cm; dots per inch (DPI) is adjustable as well. Automatic adjustment of image dimensions to maintain the aspect ratio is optional. These enhancements also apply to the Edit Script Entry dialog box in the Save Multiple Images utility (Utilities > Image > Save Multiple).
The enhancements to viewing in the XM Edition are, for the most part, by-products of this edition's technological advancements in graphics display
3/24/2010
What's New?
Smooth interpolations for pan, zoom, and rotation
Page 107 of 113
Smoother dynamic display for panning, zooming, and view rotation operations should be evident to users whose systems meet the recommended requirements for running the XM Edition. Refer to the Requirements section of the ReadMe document for information about requirements. View rotation Enhancements have been made to the Rotate View view control, and a new AccuDraw shortcut has been included to assist with view rotation.
Cube/Sphere setting for Rotate View view control
The Rotate View view control, with Method set to Dynamic, now has new graphics and extended settings for selecting cube or spherical rotation. That is rotations about a point (spherical) or about the X, Y, and Z axes of the view (cube). With cube rotation, graphics indicate the center of rotation and the starting point of the rotation. The Preserve World Up setting lets you set left/right mouse movements to rotation about the Z axis. When using spherical rotation, all rotation is about a point. A sphere graphic is displayed as an aid with defining the rotation. Controls let you set the size and transparency of this aid. During rotation, graphics display the center point of the sphere, and the starting point of the rotation.
Define the center of rotation graphically
With both cube and spherical rotation options, the initial rotation reference point is set at the center of the view. This is indicated by a white cross (+) graphic. Where required, you can click on this graphic and move it interactively to relocate the center of rotation.
Rotate to the AccuDraw drawing plane
In situations for which you need precision in rotating views, AccuDraw can help. Specifically, among the AccuDraw shortcut key-ins added for the XM Edition is <R>,<V> (Rotate View), which lets you rotate the view to the current AccuDraw drawing plane orientation. Navigate View view control The new Navigate View view control lets you quickly navigate a 3D view, using:
the mouse. the keyboard. a combination of keys and mouse actions. interactive modification of the view cone.
Display Silhouettes and Clip Edges setting When the View Display Mode is set to Wireframe, and this setting is on, solids and surfaces in 3D models display their outermost edges (silhouettes) in the view, no matter how it is rotated.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 108 of 113
3D surfaces shown with Display Silhouettes and Clip Edges on (top) and off (bottom).
Enhanced View Attributes dialog box The View Attributes dialog box is expanded to include settings previously in the Rendering View Attributes dialog box and settings related to element, level, and reference transparency and display priority. The View Attributes dialog box works differently in the XM Edition: When you change a view attribute setting, the new setting is immediately applied to the view specified by the chosen View Number. To change settings for all views, turn on Apply To All first.
Auto-Locate Display Edges in Shaded Views preference If on, auto-locate displays the edges of elements as they are highlighted in shaded views.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 109 of 113
With setting enabled, edges are displayed for highlighted elements in a shaded view.
Anti-alias Lines If on, angled lines appear smoother (jagged edges are smoothed). Options are:

Auto-Detect turns on hardware anti-aliasing, if available. On lines are anti-aliased and appear smooth, no matter what angle they lie in the view. Off (the default) angled lines can appear jagged along their edges.
Anti-alias Text If on, TrueType fonts appear smoother (jagged edges are smoothed). Options are:

Auto-Detect turns on hardware anti-aliasing, if available. Off TrueType fonts can appear jagged along their edges. On (the default) TrueType fonts are anti-aliased and appear smooth.
Dynamics Transparency Sets the amount of transparency used to display elements in dynamics. Auto-Locate Transparency Set the amount of transparency in the Element Highlight Color used to flash (highlight) elements for auto-locate.
Visualization
Enhancements to the visualization tools include changes to the display system and a reworking of the Animation tools. Rendering enhancements When you render a view (including saving images to disk and plotting), software rendering still is used for modes of Phong and above. For the rendering modes of Smooth and lower, however, hardware rendering is used.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Particle Tracing and specular effects
Page 110 of 113
Previously, when particle tracing with Ray Trace Specular Effects disabled, reflections were ignored along with the specular effects. With XM Edition, only the specular effects are not displayed. Reflections now are displayed, provided that Reflections is enabled in the Ray Tracing Settings of the Ray Tracing dialog box.
Support for 3D Studio file formats
The XM Edition adds support for the 3D Studio (.3DS) and 3D Studio Material Palettes (.MLI) file formats.
Render by fence enhanced to include ray tracing, radiosity, and particle trace
Rendering of fence contents has been enhanced to include ray tracing, radiosity, and particle tracing.
Export a global lighting solution as a model in a 3D DGN file
MicroStations Particle Trace and Radiosity rendering modes calculate the effects of lighting for every surface within a model. They are, therefore, commonly referred to as global solutions. Global lighting solutions can be considerably more useful than other visualization methods (such as ray tracing) as they can be viewed from any angle or camera location. Using the Render view control, you can export the global lighting solution from either a radiosity or particle trace as a model in a 3D DGN file. The exported model will contain mesh geometry with the appropriate lighting values at the vertices but will not display specular or reflective effects. You can view the model from any direction or attach it as a reference. You can control the quality of the exported mesh by adjusting the Quality setting in the Global Lighting Solutions section of the 3D Plotting Options dialog box. To open this dialog box, key in DIALOG U3D, or open the Print dialog box, select the printer driver configuration file "pdf.plt", and choose Settings > 3D Plotting. To export a particle trace solution once loaded, right-click in the Render settings window, and choose Save Solution To DGN from the popup menu.
The Quality setting also controls the mesh quality when a particle trace solution is published in PDF (or U3D) format.
Materials
In the XM Edition, it is possible to specify that the materials for a DGN file be stored within the file itself rather than externally in a palette (.pal) file. Known as local materials, they do not require a material table (.mat) file, nor a palette (.pal) file, at render time. When you attach local materials, a palette file is merely a container for available materials and is needed for any material only the first time that it is used in a DGN file.
Material definitions may incorporate image files that define either pattern or bump maps. These files still are stored externally and must be available when a model is rendered.
Materials can be stored in the DGN file
Storing the materials in the DGN file allows for an elements material definition to be handled in a manner that is more consistent with other element properties such as level, text style, and the like. For example, when an element is copied from a reference file, its level (if it does not already exist) is copied as well it is never possible in normal operation for an element to lose its level. In a similar manner, with the new local materials, copying an element from a reference file causes its material definition to be automatically copied to the master file. By tightly binding a material to an element (or level), it is possible to ensure that the object is always rendered with that material.
Units definition for pattern/bump maps
Pattern and bump maps now have additional options for defining their size. They now may be defined in real world units meters, millimeters, feet, or inches for all Mapping options.
Improved RPC dynamics in rendered views
3/24/2010
What's New?
completed. They then are shaded with the correct image displayed for the new viewing angle. Animation enhancements
Page 111 of 113
There have been extensive changes to the animation tools, and the way that animation is performed. The following are two of the most noticeable enhancements to the animation process:

The Animation Producer dialog box now incorporates the Tree View, Time Line, and Velocity Graph dialog boxes. Animation scripts now are stored in the DGN file, rather than as separate text files.
Animation Producer dialog box enhancements
The Animation Producer dialog box is reorganized and provides access to all the components required for creating, previewing, and recording animation scripts. It incorporates:
An Animation tree view displaying the various components of an animation Actors, View, KeyFrames, Lights, Materials, and Settings. A view that displays either the timeline or the velocity graph. A storyboard panel that displays the script entries.
Animation settings dialog box
The new Animation Settings dialog box incorporates settings from the earlier Preview Settings and General Settings dialog boxes, and adds extra settings. These include the option of selecting in which view(s) the preview is displayed, as well as how time is determined relative to frames.
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 112 of 113
Animator Preview tool
The Animator Preview tool lets you interactively preview your animation sequences. Controls let you play the animation sequence, or interactively go to any time/frame in the animation. You can select the view(s) in which to see the preview. Where required, you can automatically create key frames at the current frame number. Where required, you can open the Animation Settings dialog box to review or change the current settings.
Time-based animation
You now can specify time formats as a base for your animations, where each frame represents a period of time. The required time scale can be specified in the Animation Settings dialog box.
Target scripting options for defining an "object" as well as a "target"
The Script Target tool is enhanced with options for defining an Object as well as a Target. The object follows the target. The target can be any other actor, or a special target element created with the Create Target tool.
Enhanced Define Actor Path tool
3/24/2010
What's New?
Page 113 of 113
Improvements to the way you define a path in MicroStation XM Edition results in less mouse clicks, and a simpler work flow. For example, you no longer have to define the end point of the path, the actor will progress all the way to the end of the path. When selecting the path element, if the actor is near one end of it (within 10% of the total path length) the direction of the actor is automatically calculated and the actor will animate over the entire length of the path. If, however, the closest point of the actor to the path is some distance along the path then you are presented with arrows to select the direction the actor should take along the path. Also the tool settings are changed. The list box and check mark are replaced with a combo box containing a tree of actors, allowing you to select an actor from the tool settings as well as graphically.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 1 of 110
Getting Getting Started Started

Fundamentals Application Window Layout Viewing Designs Models Levels Cells References
Fundamentals
Starting MicroStation Working with DGN Files Using MicroStation Manager Exiting MicroStation MicroStation and Graphical Input MicroStation and Keyboard Input Understanding Drawing Tools Using the Reset Pop-up Menu Using Online Help Preparing to Draw User Preferences
Starting MicroStation
There are several ways to initiate MicroStation.
To start MicroStation
1. In the MicroStation program group, double-click the MicroStation icon. or In Windows Explorer, double-click a DGN file icon (with the extension ".dgn"). or Drag a DGN file icon from Windows Explorer and drop it on the MicroStation icon. or In the Windows Explorer, double-click the icon for the file, "ustation.exe". You can use a command line argument when starting MicroStation to start it in particular mode.
To start MicroStation in a particular mode
1. If MicroStation is running, exit. 2. From the Windows Start button, choose Run. The Run dialog box opens. 3. Click the Browse button. The Browse dialog box opens. 4. Navigate to the location of the MicroStation executable file (ustation.exe) , select it, and click Open. 5. In the Open text box, after the path and executable file name, key in a space followed by a command line argument. For example, if this is the location of the executable file, "C:\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\ustation.exe" and if you want to restore the default settings, you would key in the following in the Open text box: C:\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\ustation.exe -RestoreDefaults. 6. Click OK.
MicroStation can take advantage of the hyper-threading capability of multi-core or multi-processor systems by performing graphics processing
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hhDCCC.htm
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 2 of 110
in a separate thread. However, because MicroStation may perform better with hyperthreading disabled, MicroStation notifies you upon startup if hyperthreading is enabled. Use your system's BIOS configuration facility to disable or enable hyperthreading.
Working with DGN Files

A MicroStation document file is called a DGN file. A DGN file is composed of one or more models, each of which is represented using elements such as lines, arcs, and shapes. MicroStation's File menu has items for creating, opening, and saving DGN files. These file management operations and others can also be performed using the MicroStation Manager dialog box.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 3 of 110
MicroStation's File menu (Default workspace)
You cannot have more than one DGN file open at a time in MicroStation. If you open a DGN file when one is already open, MicroStation automatically closes the first file. You can, however, view the models contained in other DGN files by attaching them as references to the active model in the open DGN file. When you create a DGN file, MicroStation copies one of the provided templates or seed DGN files. The seed file is copied to a new filename that you specify in the New dialog box. With the addition of the Set Seed File utility, MicroStation becomes more tightly integrated with Windows Explorer. Using this utility, you can specify the seed file that will be copied when you choose New > Bentley MicroStation Design File in Windows Explorer. The MicroStation XM program group (Start > Programs > Bentley > MicroStation XM) contains a shortcut to the Set Seed File utility.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
The utility is a dialog box that supports the following options for specifying the seed file:

Page 4 of 110
prompt you to browse the file system use MicroStation's current seed file use the seed file you selected in this dialog box
To open a DGN file
1. From the File menu, choose Open. The Open dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 5 of 110
Open dialog box
The default file filter is CAD Files [*. dgn, *.dwg, *.dxf]. 2. (Optional) To change the filter, select the desired filter from the Files of type option menu. For example, changing the filter to All Files [*.*] displays all files in the current directory. 3. (Optional) To select a different source disk drive or directory, choose the desired drive or directory from the Look in option menu. 4. In the list box, select the desired DGN file. or In the File name field, key in the name of the desired DGN file. 5. (Optional) To open the file for read-only access, in which design modifications cannot be saved to disk, turn on Open as readonly. 6. Click Open.
By default, a thumbnail of the DGN file is created when the DGN file is saved. This thumbnail displays in the preview window on the MicroStation Manager and Open dialog boxes. You can disable the creation of thumbnails by editing the configuration variable MS_THUMBNAIL to NONE (all uppercase). If a DGN file has never been opened in MicroStation, the Bentley insignia displays in the preview window. If the DGN file has been saved in the MicroStation format but no thumbnail was created, the preview window is empty.
To create a DGN file and open it
1. From the File menu, choose New. The New dialog box opens. The default file filter is MicroStation DGN Files [*.dgn].
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 6 of 110
New dialog box
The file specification for the default seed DGN file displays in the Seed field. 2. (Optional) To change the filter, choose the corresponding item in the Save as type option menu. 3. (Optional) To select a different seed DGN file, click the Browse button and use the Select Seed File dialog box. 4. (Optional) To select a different destination disk drive or directory, choose the desired drive or directory from the Save in option menu. 5. In the File name field, key in a name for the new DGN file. The file list is useful for ensuring that the new filename is not that of an existing file, or for selecting an existing filename and amending it. Although the extension .dgn is often used to indicate a MicroStation DGN file, any extension (or no extension) is acceptable. 6. Click Save.
To specify a seed file for creating a DGN file using the Set Seed File utility
1. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Bentley > MicroStation V8 XM > Set Seed File. The Select a MicroStation DGN Seed File for Explorer > New File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 7 of 110
2. Choose the seed file method to be used when creating a new DGN file.
Field name Ask me to pick the seed file each time Description If selected, you are prompted to select a seed file when creating a new DGN file. If the Launch Window Explorer to show me the newly created file check box is enabled, the new DGN file automatically opens upon creation.
Use MicroStation's current seed If selected, the current seed file set in MicroStation is used when creating a new DGN file. file Use the seed file selected from this dialog (currently) If selected, you navigate to the seed file to be used when creating a new DGN file from this dialog box.
3. Click OK. The dialog box closes. When you create a new DGN file using Windows Explorer (i.e., File > New > Bentley MicroStation Design File), the seed file method selected above is used to create the DGN file.
To open a DGN file from a remote location
1. From the Utilities menu, choose MDL Applications. The MDL dialog box opens. 2. In the Available Applications section, click Browse.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
The default location for the file is in the "\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\mdlsys\asneeded" directory. 4. Select the file and click Open. WEBLIB.MSL appears in the list of loaded applications. 5. In the Loaded Applications list box, select WEBLIB.MSL and click Key-ins. The WEBLIB.MSL : Key-in dialog box opens. 6. Key in WEBLIB GETURL. The Select Remote File dialog box opens. 7. In the URL text box, key in the path to the remote DGN file. 8. (Optional) Adjust any other settings as necessary. 9. Click OK.
To close the open DGN file
Page 8 of 110
1. Open another DGN file. or From the File menu, choose Close (or press <Ctrl-W>). In the latter case, the MicroStation Manager dialog box opens. Compressing DGN files Compressing a DGN file reduces its size and clears MicroStation's undo buffer.
Unless you are recording the open DGN file's design history, compressing the file prevents previous changes from being undone.
To cause MicroStation to compress the open DGN file automatically when closing it, turn on Compress File on Exit in the Preferences dialog box (select Workspace > Preferences> Operation).
To compress the open DGN file
1. From the File menu's Compress sub-menu, choose Design.

To compress a DGN file without opening it
1. In the Open dialog box, select the file. 2. Click the Bentley icon. A drop-down menu opens. 3. From the drop-down menu, choose Compress. The selected file is compressed. Saving and backing up your work With regard to saving your work, MicroStation makes it easier on you than most other applications. In fact, MicroStation saves each change to the active model in the open DGN file that is, your drawing as it is made! You need only manually save changes to DGN file settings.
User preference settings are available to change MicroStation's operation with regard to saving design changes and DGN file settings changes.
Save As and Backup
When you choose Save As from the File menu, you can save the open DGN file with a different name, in a different directory, on a different drive. MicroStation also closes the open DGN file and opens the newly saved DGN file.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 9 of 110
BACKUP is a MicroStation key-in. You can specify a different default so that keying in BACKUP creates a backup copy in a different directory, on a different drive, or even on a drive connected to a different system on your network. Here are some examples:
To, by default Give backups the extension .tmp Set the configuration variable MS_BACKUP to .tmp
Save backups in the /temp directory /temp
Any part of a file specification included in a BACKUP key-in overrides the corresponding part of MS_BACKUP. To save as
1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.
Save As dialog box
2. From the Save as type option menu, choose MicroStation V8 DGN Files [*.dgn], if it is not already chosen. 3. (Optional) To select a different destination drive or directory, use the Save in option menu. 4. (Optional) To save the open DGN file under a different name, key in the new name in the File name field. 5. Click Save.
To make a backup copy of the open DGN file
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Key-in. The Key-in Window opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 10 of 110
2. In the window's key-in field, key in BACKUP [file_specification]. File_specification is the path and directory in which to save the backup copy. If file_specification is omitted, a copy of the open DGN file with the extension .bak is saved in the same directory as the open DGN file. The open DGN file is not closed. Recording Design History When working on models in a DGN file, you have the option of creating a design history for the DGN file. Typically, design history will have been initialized when the file was created by the system administrator, so there may be no need for you to initialize design history for a file. With design history, you can track all of the changes to a DGN file by revision number, elements changed, revision type, and other parameters. When necessary, you can restore elements to a prior state through a combination of undoing and redoing historic changes. Changes also can be tracked down to the element level. When you make changes to the design, you can commit them as a revision. How often you commit revisions depends on your personal preference or organizational requirements. To help track the revisions, each is identified with a revision number, date and time, author, description of the change, and tags. When you commit a revision, it records the difference between the current state of the model and the last revision saved. The revisions appear in the Design History dialog box.
DGN files created from a seed file with design history initialized will always have a design history. Merging DGN files The Merge utility is used to merge DGN files. Merging DGN files is essentially (but not entirely) the process of copying all models from one or more DGN files (the source file[s]) to another (the destination file). Reviewing and modifying file properties You can review various DGN file properties in the Properties dialog box (File > Properties) and change the Design Properties in the Summary tab. This tab contains text fields into which you can enter the following details:

Title Lets you give the file a title, as distinct from the filename in the file system. Subject Lets you put a description of the file contents. Client You can input the name of the client for whom the file was created. Keywords This field lets you put keywords that can be used later in a database, for setting search criteria. Comments Comments regarding the file can be put here. Manager Lets you record the name of the manager for the project.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 11 of 110
Properties dialog box, displaying the Summary tab
As well as being accessible from inside MicroStation, much of the information in the Summary tab can be viewed in Windows Explorer, for example, by right-clicking the filename and selecting Properties.
Using MicroStation Manager

When you start MicroStation without designating a DGN file to be opened automatically, the first dialog box you see is MicroStation Manager.
MicroStation Manager dialog box
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 12 of 110
In addition to providing the capabilities of the Open dialog box, MicroStation Manager also lets you select workspace components. A workspace is a custom MicroStation environment or configuration.
Exiting MicroStation
As you work, MicroStation saves all changes you make to the open DGN file to disk (assuming you have not turned off the default Automatically Save Design Changes toggle under Workspace > Preferences > Operation). After you close the DGN file, you can no longer undo changes with MicroStation's Undo feature. Therefore, be sure to undo any unwanted changes to the DGN file before you exit MicroStation.
To exit MicroStation
1. Click the application window's Close icon. or From the File menu, choose Exit. or From the application window menu, choose Close. or In the MicroStation Manager dialog box, click Cancel.
MicroStation and Graphical Input

You can use a mouse, digitizing tablet cursor, or similar pointing device with MicroStation to enter graphical input. Physical buttons on the input device are mapped to logical buttons, which send different types of graphical input to MicroStation. For example, the left mouse button is mapped to a logical button called the Data button, which sends a type of input called a data point to MicroStation when pressed. The Button Mapping dialog box lists the current button mappings for your input device. It shows you how the logical buttons are matched to the physical buttons. In this dialog box you can remap these buttons to meet your needs. You may want to change the buttons if you are left handed or if you use a laptop with a touchpad, for example. Using the Button Assignments dialog box (Workspace > Button Assignments), it is possible to assign any MicroStation key-in and to add key combinations to logical buttons, thus creating additional button assignments. Many button-key combinations are assigned by default, but even these assignments are customizable. Graphical input with a mouse The default MicroStation button mapping listed in the Button Mappings dialog box are appropriate for a two-button mouse, and allow you to simulate having a third mouse button:

The Data button, which is used to enter data points, is mapped to the left-hand mouse button. The Reset button, which is used for resetting and for accessing the Reset pop-up menu and the view control pop-up menu, is mapped to the right-hand mouse button. The Tentative button, which is used to enter tentative snap points, is invoked by clicking the left- and right-hand mouse buttons at the same time. This is called a button chord and serves as a third button.
If you are using a three-button mouse, you may want to change Tentative to use a single button (rather than the two-button chord) for faster operation.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 13 of 110
If you are using a mouse driver that allows you to make button assignments, you must set them back to their default settings. If you do not, your mouse driver's button assignments will override your MicroStation button assignments.
Some mouse devices with three or more buttons require additional configuration in Windows to be recognized appropriately. For specific details choose Help > Online Support.
Using a scrolling mouse
If your mouse has a wheel, you can use the mouse wheel as the middle mouse button or as a wheel for scrolling to manipulate MicroStation view window and dialog box scroll bars. You can also use it to zoom in and out of designs and enter tentative snap points. You can either choose to accept the default settings for the mouse wheel or you can customize the button assignments. You must have the required drivers for your mouse already installed on your system.
Default mouse button assignments and key combinations
Other types of input are possible by combining mouse clicks and mouse wheel movement with key combinations. Here is the list of system default mouse button assignments:
Left mouse button click press and hold doubleclick drag roll . Define start and end points (two data points) . Data button or click Right mouse button Reset button or right-click Displays the Reset pop-up menu . . . . . . FIT VIEW pan . . Dynamically rotate view . . Swivel view camera (3D only) . . . Zoom in/out . . Pan with zoom . . Walk forward/ backward (3D only) . . Tentative button Middle/Mouse wheel button . . Mouse wheel
<Shift> . click <Shift> - Pan scroll (dynamic drag panning) <Shift> . roll <Ctrl> click <Ctrl> drag <Ctrl> roll <Alt> click <Alt> drag <Alt> roll <Shift Ctrl> <Shift Ctrl> drag Reserved for selection logic and following hyperlinks . .
Displays the view control pop-up menu . . . Displays the Main tool box at the pointer location . . . . Sets AccuDraw's origin to the resulting tentative point . .
MATCH ATTRIBUTES FROMCURSOR . . Toggle AccuSnap Selection by overlapping rectangle (Element Selection tool only)
ELEMENT QUICKINFO FROMCURSOR (Displays the Quick Info dialog box a . user-defined subset of the Element Info dialog box at the pointer location) . . Displays the Task List's current task at the pointer location. . . . . .
ROTATE VIEW EXTENDED . . . . Pan left/right . .
Creating alternate button assignments for button-key combinations that already have special meaning in MicroStation is not recommended. For example, you should not change <Ctrl> + the Data button, which is reserved for selection logic, or <Shift> + the Reset button, which displays the view control pop-up menu.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Graphical input with a digitizing tablet
Page 14 of 110
Most digitizing tablet cursors (pucks) have at least four physical buttons. The Command button is used to select commands on a digitizing tablet menu. The default digitizing tablet cursor button mappings are shown in the table below:
MicroStation logical button Physical button on tablet cursor Data Tentative Reset Command Cursor 1-12 1st button 3rd button 4th button 2nd button 5th 16th buttons
Additional default button assignments In the event that your input device has more than two buttons, there are some additional default button assignments for them:
If you have three mouse buttons, the middle button is mapped by default to a logical button called XButton 1. XButton 1 has some additional button assignments. It has assigned to it key-ins that allow you to pan, rotate, or navigate through views, depending on whether you press XButton 1 alone or with the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, or <Shift> key. You can change XButton 1's button assignments to do something other than pan, rotate, or navigation through views, which is why the button has a generic name. If you have more than three physical buttons on your input device, note that buttons four through 15 are mapped to logical buttons XButton 2 through XButton 13. You could add a button assignment to your fourth button, for example, which is mapped to logical button XButton 2. In the Button Assignments dialog box you would assign a key-in to XButton 2. You also could add the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> keys to XButton 2. Pressing your fourth button, plus the other keys if you added them, would execute the keyin.
Remapping buttons The Button Mappings dialog box is used to tell MicroStation how you want to use the physical buttons on your mouse, digitizing tablet cursor, or input device. The dialog box lists the logical buttons and the physical buttons or mouse button combinations that invoke them. For example, in the default setup, the Reset logical button is invoked (that is, the Reset action occurs) when you click the right mouse button. You can map button combinations that use:

A single button Two mouse buttons pressed simultaneously (a button chord)
You cannot map two logical buttons to the same physical button (or button combination). In other words, you cannot assign two different actions to the same physical button. If you attempt to do so, the first logical button will be mapped to the physical button to which the second logical button was previously mapped, and the second logical button will be mapped to the physical button to which the first logical button was previously mapped; that is, the button mappings will be swapped. There is one exception: If you remap a logical button to a physical button that was already mapped, and if the logical button was previously mapped to a button chord, the remapping occurs, the button chord disappears from the list of physical buttons, and the second logical button is mapped to a new button number, Button 16. This allows you to avoid button chords if you do not like to use them.
If you remap your middle mouse button to Tentative, it will no longer be mapped to XButton 1. By default XButton 1 allows you to use the middle button to pan, dynamically rotate a view, swivel a view, and rotate a view from the cursor when you use it alone or with the <Shift>, <Ctrl>, or <Alt> key. If you have only three mouse buttons, they are mapped to Data, Reset, and now to Tentative. If you still want to pan, rotate, etc. you must map a button chord to XButton 1.
Use the Button Mappings dialog box to check the button mappings on your system or to remap them.
To remap a button
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Button Assignments. or From the Workspace menu, choose Digitizing. In the Digitizing dialog box, choose Tablet > button Assignment. The Button Assignments dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
2. Click Remap Buttons. The Button Mappings dialog box opens. 3. In the list box, select the logical button whose mapping you want to change. 4. Put your pointer in the Button Definition Area below the list box where the instructions appear. 5. Press the physical button (or mouse button combination) that you want to map to the selected logical button. The new button mapping appears in the list box. 6. Click OK. 7. (Optional) If the Button Assignments dialog box is open, click OK. Customizing button assignments
Page 15 of 110
Once you have mapped your physical buttons in the Button Mapping dialog box, you can use the Button Assignments dialog box (Workspace > Button Assignments), to assign MicroStation key-ins and to add key combinations to logical buttons, thus creating additional button assignments. The default button assignments can be changed.
For example, you could assign <Alt> + Tentative to send the key-in PLACE FENCE. 1. In the Button Assignments dialog box, turn on Alt and select Tentative in the list box. 2. In the Action text box, type place fence and press the <Enter> key. 3. Click OK. The 3D Data and 3D Tentative logical buttons are not mapped to physical buttons in the Button Mappings dialog box. You can use the Button Assignments dialog box to create your own button assignments for 3D Data and 3D Tentative. The Data, Tentative, and Reset logical buttons are already mapped to physical buttons in the Button Mappings dialog box, however, you may want to create additional button assignments for them. The following table lists the key-ins to use for these logical buttons when you add button assignments for them.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Logical button name Data Tentative Reset 3D Data 3D Tentative Key-in BUTTONACTION DATA BUTTONACTION TENTATIVE BUTTONACTION RESET BUTTONACTION 3DDATA BUTTONACTION 3DTENTATIVE
Page 16 of 110
You could assign a function key to perform these logical button actions, too. For example, you could add the BUTTONACTION RESET keyin to a function key.
Button assignments are stored in button menus. The dialog box's title bar identifies the open button menu. The default button menu in the Default workspace is default.btnmenu, which is installed in Bentley's "Workspace\Interfaces\Buttons" directory.
To add a button assignment
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Button Assignments. The Button Assignments dialog box opens. The title bar identifies the open button menu. 2. In the Buttons group box, turn on the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> check boxes and choose the desired logical button from the list box. If you select a button and key combination that is already assigned, its key-in appears in the Action field and it is selected in the list of button assignments. 3. In the Action text box, type a key-in and press the <Enter> key. The new button assignment appears in the list box. 4. To save the button assignment in the open button menu, choose Save or Save As from the dialog box's File menu. If you choose Save, the open button menu is overwritten. If you choose Save As, the Save Button Menu As dialog box opens for creating a button menu with a different name or location. 5. In the Button Assignments dialog box, click the OK button.
To modify a button assignment
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Button Assignments. The Button Assignments dialog box opens. The title bar identifies the open button menu. 2. Select a button assignment from the list box. or In the Buttons group box, turn on the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> check boxes and choose the desired logical button from the list box. 3. In the Action text box, edit the key-in. 4. To save the changes in the open button menu, choose Save or Save As from the dialog box's File menu. 5. In the Button Assignments dialog box, click the OK button.
To delete a button assignment
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Button Assignments. The Button Assignments dialog box opens. The title bar identifies the open button menu. 2. Select a button assignment from the list box. or In the Buttons group box, turn on the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> check boxes and choose the desired logical button from the list box. 3. Press the <Delete> key. 4. To save the changes in the open button menu, choose Save or Save As from the dialog box's File menu. If you choose Save, the open button menu is overwritten. If you choose Save As, the Save Button Menu As dialog box opens for creating a button menu with a different name or location.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
5. In the Button Assignments dialog box, click the OK button.
Page 17 of 110
MicroStation and Keyboard Input

Due primarily to the precision with which MicroStation lets you create models, issuing keyboard input is a prominent aspect of using the product. The nature and effect of keyboard input depends on its context. Controlling the focus In Microsoft Windows and other graphical computer interfaces, the focus sometimes called the input focus or keyboard focus refers to the window or control to which keyboard input is directed. MicroStation has a hierarchical focus model. The top level is called home. A field in the status bar indicates the focus location:
home When the focus is home, you need not use the mouse to navigate tool boxes, tasks, and the Tool Settings window: You can quickly select tools by pressing keys on your keyboard. This technique is called positional keyboard navigation.
Tool Settings the Tool Settings window has the focus.
Key-in the Key-in window has the focus.
AccuDraw the AccuDraw window has the focus.
(No icon) another window or dialog box has the focus.
To move the focus home
1. Press <Esc>. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F12>.
To move the focus to the Tool Settings window
1. Click inside the window or on its title bar. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F10>.
To move the focus to the AccuDraw window
1. Click inside the window or on its title bar. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F11>. or If the focus is home, press <spacebar> Using positional keyboard navigation When the focus is home, you can use positional keyboard navigation. This technique lets you easily select tools and adjust tool settings controlled through option menus and check boxes.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 18 of 110
Positional keyboard navigation is a technique that utilizes a position-mapped keyboard. Position mapping is the mapping of keyboard zones to logical collections of controls in the user interface. MicroStation position maps your keyboard by default. The following figure shows the default position mapping:
Default position mapping. The blue keys (<1>, <2>, <3>, <4>, <5>, <6>, <7>, <8>, <9>, and <0>) are mapped to the icons in the Main tool box. The yellow keys (<Q>, <W>, <E>, <R>, <T>, <A>, <S>, <D>, <F>, <G>, <Z>, <X>, <C>, <V>, and <B>) are mapped to the icons in the Task Navigation tool box. The green keys (<Y>, <U>, <I>, <O>, <P>, <H>, <J>, <K>, <L>, <;>, <N>, <M>, <,>, <.>, and </>) are mapped to the controls in the Tool Settings window.
For example, if you wanted to select the Rotate tool in the Manipulate tool box using positional keyboard navigation you would do the following: 1. Press <3> to open the Manipulate tool box. Conveniently the tool box opens at the location of your pointer.
The Manipulate tool box opens at the pointer location.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 19 of 110
2. Press <4>. This example assumes the default position mapping. The following points are worth noting related to the first step (press the <3> key):
The Manipulate tool box's parent is the Main tool box. Recall the number keys are mapped to the icons in the Main tool box.
In the Main tool box, the third tool is the current representative of the Manipulate tool box. The number 3 is superimposed on that tool's icon as a navigational aid.
Continuing with the example, suppose you want to use the Rotate tool to rotate an element without copying the element. You would therefore want to turn off the Copies setting, which is on by default, in the Rotate settings window. If the focus is home, you could use positional keyboard navigation to turn off Copies. The Copies check box is the fourth control in the window. Because the <P> key is mapped to the fourth control, you would press <P> to turn off Copies.
Rotate settings window. The Copies check box is mapped to <P> by default. To activate a tool quickly, press the <Shift> key plus the number or letter corresponding to the representative tool in the Main tool box or in the Task Navigation tool box. Continuing with the example above, if the Rotate tool currently represents the Manipulate tool box, pressing <Shift> plus <3> activates the Rotate tool. If the focus is away from home, pressing <Esc> not only moves the focus to home but also displays position mapping aids in the Tool Settings window for a moment. At this point you can press <Esc> as many times as needed to view the aids.
Rotate settings window with position mapping aids displayed.
Special key assignments during positional keyboard navigation
The following keys are enabled during positional keyboard navigation:
<Enter> opens the Key-in window at the pointer location or if the window is already open, puts focus within the browsable lists of keywords if they are visible. <spacebar> moves focus to the AccuDraw window. <Tab> change to the next element under the pointer.
3/24/2010
Getting Started

Page 20 of 110
<PgUp> next task <PgDn> previous task
Customizing position mapping
You can customize your keyboard's position mapping by adjusting the preferences in the Position Mapping category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Position Mapping preferences
Positional keyboard navigation is enabled by default. To disable it, turn off the preference Use Position Mapping.
The display of keyboard key labels as navigational aids on tool icons accessible via positional keyboard navigation is enabled by default. To disable it, turn off the preference Show Position Mapping Aids.
Using key-ins Key-ins are typed instructions entered into the Key-in window to control MicroStation. The effect of nearly all key-ins can be obtained using the graphical user interface. However, a key-in can be quicker at times, especially since MicroStation recognizes abbreviations.
MicroStation lets you assign key-ins to the function keys <F1> through <F12> as well as combinations of those keys and the <Shift>, <Alt>, and <Ctrl> keys. MicroStation stores these assignments in function key menus.
To open the Key-in window
1. With the input focus in the home position, press <Enter>. or From the Utilities menu, choose Key-in. or From the Help menu, choose Key-in Browser. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F9>. The first method, pressing <Enter>, opens the Key-in window as a pop-up window at the pointer location. To dismiss the pop-up without entering a key-in, move the pointer away from the pop-up. The fourth method, pressing <F9>, sends input focus to the Key-in window if it is already docked or open.
Entering a key-in
Before you enter key-ins, the Key-in window must have the input focus. When the Key-in window has the input focus, the blinking text cursor appears in the key-in field, the title bar (if visible) is highlighted, and the Key-in icon appears in the status bar.
Key-in icon in status bar
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 21 of 110
Key-in window. Top: Full-size. Bottom: Resized.
MicroStation recognizes abbreviated key-ins. For example, the key-in MDL LOAD <application_name> can be abbreviated MDL L <application_name>. The abbreviation cannot be ambiguous; that is, it must be unique.
To automatically complete the keyword selected in a list box, press <space bar>.
To scroll through previously entered key-ins, enter the prefix (for example, MDL) and use the cursor keys to scroll through the list. The Key-in window is dockable. Docking the Key-in window automatically resizes it so only the top of the dialog box is visible. When the Keyin window is docked, you can click the Browse Key-in icon to see more of the dialog box.To undock the Key-in window and simultaneously expand it to its full size, choose Help > Key-in Browser. Many key-ins conclude with a parameter, which is either optional, as in the BACKUP key-in, or required. In some cases it is convenient to define a parameter in a key-in with a configuration variable.
To select a tool or view control using a key-in
1. In the Key-in window's key-in field, type the key-in text. As you type, the characters are matched to keywords in the key-in command language. When there is a match, the matched keyword is automatically selected in a list box below the key-in field. 2. If necessary, edit the key-in using the procedures described in Editing key-ins. 3. When done, click the Run Key-in icon or press <Enter>.
The key-in is entered. If the effect is not evident, check the status bar for a message.
Finding and building a key-in
The list boxes in the Key-in window can also be used to find and build key-ins: You scroll through the first words of key-ins, select one, scroll through words that can follow the selected word, select one, and so on. Then you can submit the key-in to MicroStation.
To determine the key-in that corresponds to a particular tool (or view control), use context-sensitive help, the Tool Index (Help > Tool Index), or the Tools tab of the Customize dialog box.
To build a key-in
1. In the left-most list box of the Key-in window, select a keyword. The selected ke ord is displa ed in the ke in field and s bordinate second le el ke
ords are sho n in the Ke in
indo 's
3/24/2010
Getting Started
next list box. 2. As necessary, select additional keywords, one per list box from left to right, until the desired key-in is constructed. 3. To enter (submit) the constructed key-in, click the Run Key-in icon or press <Enter>.
Page 22 of 110
Recalling key-ins
MicroStation stores submitted key-ins in a buffer so you can recall them and, if necessary, edit them. This feature is similar to some operating systems' command line editors. When the buffer is full, the earlier key-ins are deleted as necessary to make room for the latest ones.
To recall and enter (submit) a key-in at the same time, double-click it in the history list box.
To recall a key-in
1. Press the <> key repeatedly until the desired key-in text appears in the key-in field of the Key-in window. or In the large key-in history list box at the bottom of the Key-in window, select the desired key-in.
Editing key-ins
The basic editing keys available for text editing in MicroStation can be used to edit text in the Key-in window, whether the text was recalled from an earlier key-in or entered directly.
To move the insertion point in the key-in field
1. Click with the pointer where you want the insertion point.
To delete text in the key-in field
1. Press the <Del> or <Backspace> key.

To delete a range of text in the key-in field
1. Select the text by dragging across it with the pointer. 2. Press the <Del> key.
To delete all the text in the key-in field
1. Reset or press <Esc>.

To replace a range of text in the key-in field
1. Select the text by dragging across it with the pointer. (If the text is a whole word, you can double-click it to select it.) 2. Key in the new text.
Understanding Drawing Tools

MicroStation has dozens of drawing tools (or tools, for short). These tools are grouped for convenient selection in tasks and tool boxes. Tools grouped in a single task are used to perform a particular task, functionally speaking. For example, the Drawing Composition task t i t l dt d i O l t ki ti i Mi St ti t i ti Th t l i th ti t k
3/24/2010
Getting Started
grouped in a special tool box the Task Navigation tool box.
Page 23 of 110
Each open tool box is either floating in its own window or docked to an edge of the application window. You can change the arrangement of tools in a floating tool box by resizing its window.
Fence tool box (floating)
Tools are represented in tool boxes by icons. For simplicity, the term tool is used to refer both to a tool and its icon. The first time you start MicroStation, the following tool boxes are open and docked:
Main tool box docked to the left-hand edge of the application window
Main tool box (floating)
Attributes tool box top edge
Attributes tool box (floating)
Primary Tools tool box top edge
Primary Tools tool box (floating)
Task Navigation tool box right-hand edge
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 24 of 110
Docked Task Navigation tool box
Docked Main tool box
Docked Attributes and Primary Tools tool boxes
In the Tools menu, check marks indicate open tool boxes.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Showing and hiding tools You can selectively disable and enable the display of individual tools in tool boxes.
To hide or show a tool
Page 25 of 110
1. Open the tool box that contains the tool icon. 2. Position the pointer within the tool box and right-click. A pop-up menu opens. Enabled tools are indicated with check marks. 3. Choose the pop-up menu item for the tool you want to hide or show. Working with tool boxes Tool boxes are hierarchical; that is, there are parent-child relationships between tool boxes. The parent tool box displays one tool from each of its child tool boxes. For example, the Main tool box is the parent of several child tool boxes, including the Fence tool box. The Fence tool box's most recently selected tool Place Fence by default displays as the second tool in the Main tool box. You can select any tool that is a member of a child tool box from that tool box's parent without floating the child tool box. This aspect of tool boxes helps you minimize the screen space they occupy.
Several tool boxes cannot be accessed from the New User user interface.
To open a tool box
1. From the Tools menu, choose Tool Boxes. The Tool Boxes dialog box opens. Its list box contains an entry for each available tool box. The check box next to each entry indicates whether or not the tool box is open.
2. In the list box, click (turn on) the check box for the tool box you want to open and click OK. or In the list box, double-click the list box entry for the tool box you want to open. If the tool box was docked the last time it was opened (or its default is to be docked like, for example, the Main tool box), it will be automatically docked upon opening. Otherwise, the tool box will be floated.
You can open more than one tool box at the same time using the Tool Boxes dialog box by turning on their check boxes.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 26 of 110
To open a child tool box from its parent
1. In the parent tool box, click the tool that is the representative of the child. While holding down the mouse button, move the pointer outside the button to open a pop-up menu immediately, or leave the pointer stationary for a delayed menu open. The pop-up menu contains an item for each of the tools in the child tool box. For example, to open the Fence tool box, click the second tool in the Main tool box (Place Fence in the default tool box configuration) and hold down the mouse button.
Fence tool box (represented as pop-up menu) opens from the Main tool box
The pop-up menu remains open even if you release the mouse button.
To open and float a child tool box from its parent
1. In the parent tool box, click the tool that is the representative of the child. While holding down the mouse button, move the pointer outside the button to open a pop-up menu immediately, or leave the pointer stationary for a delayed menu open. The pop-up menu contains an item for each of the tools in the child tool box. 2. From the pop-up menu, choose Open as ToolBox.
Floating the Fence tool box
The Main and Task Navigation tool boxes support positional keyboard navigation.
To open a child tool box from the Main tool box or the Task Navigation tool box
1. Press the <Esc> key to ensure that your focus is set to home. Th k b d k l b l i th M i d T k N i ti t l b
bl
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 27 of 110
2. Press the number or letter key associated with the tool's parent tool box. The child tool box opens at the pointer location.
Some tool boxes contain view controls, which are used to change the part of the design displayed in view windows.
Using the Task Navigation tool box
The Task Navigation tool box contains the task list, from which the active task is selected, and the tools for the active task. A task is a set of tools grouped to facilitate a particular workflow. The tools grouped into a given task can be standard MicroStation tools, custom tools, or a mixture of both types. The list of available tasks is generated by combining the tasks specified by MS_DGNLIBLIST and system DGN libraries.
The MS_GUITASKTREEROOT configuration variable can be used to control which tasks are available in the Task Navigation tool box.
You also have the option to view the contents of the Task Navigation tool box in the Tasks dialog box.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 28 of 110
The Tasks dialog box
To switch between tasks
1. In the Task Navigation tool box, click the arrow on the Task List icon. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F2>. If you clicked the arrow, the Task List appears below the Task List icon. If you pressed <F2>, the Task List appears at your cursor.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 29 of 110
2. Click the task that you want to use. or Click a plus sign to expand the Task List and then click the task that you want to use.
Drawing Task expanded in Task List
The tools for the selected task appear in the Task Navigation tool box, below the Task List icon.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 30 of 110
Alternative Method To switch between tasks
1. With the focus set to home, press <PgDn> to move to the next task in the task list. or With the focus set to home, press <PgUp> to move to the previous task in the task list.
If the last task in the task list is active, pressing <PgDn> has no effect. If the first task in the task list is active, pressing <PgUp> has no effect.
To display the task selected in the Task List
1. If you are using the default function key menu, press <F4>. The task that is currently selected in the Task List appears at your cursor.
Docking tool boxes
Tool boxes can be docked along the edges of the MicroStation window. When a tool box is docked, its title bar is not displayed and its border becomes narrower. You can undock tool boxes that are docked the first time you start MicroStation, such as the Main tool box, if you wish.
The following windows and dialog boxes are also dockable:

Tool Settings window Key-in window View Groups window AccuDraw window Snaps button bar Element Info(rmation) dialog box
3/24/2010
Getting Started

Page 31 of 110
Level Display dialog box Feature Manager window Project Explorer dialog box Link Sets dialog box Drawing Scale window
Docked tool box movement
A single dragging operation can be used to undock and re-dock a tool box. As the tool box approaches a dockable area, it automatically moves to the closest available space that it will fit. Multiple column tool boxes (up to four columns) can be docked. Tool boxes with lessor columns will dock underneath multiple column tool boxes. For example, you could have a four column tool box docked with a two column tool box and two single column tool boxes docked below.
Two single column tool boxes docked along side a two column tool box
If a tool box is docked at the time it is closed, it is automatically docked when it is reopened.
To dock a floating tool box
1. Drag the tool box by its title bar toward the edge of the MicroStation window to which you want to dock it. As the pointer approaches the edge, the tool box dynamically jumps to an appropriate sized docking area.
To move a tool box or other dockable window to a docking area without docking it, hold down the <Ctrl> key while dragging the title bar.
To undock a docked tool box
1. Starting with the pointer on the tool box's narrow border or on a blank area, drag the tool box away from the edge of the MicroStation window. 2 When the tool box is in the desired location release the mouse button
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Locating and selecting tools
Page 32 of 110
Only one tool is selected at a given time. The name of the selected tool is shown in the status bar, and the tool is highlighted in the tool box. The default selected tool is the Element Selection tool. When locating and selecting a tool, you can mix and match steps in the following procedures. Sometimes it will feel more natural to use either the mouse or keyboard exclusively, and other times it will feel more natural to switch between the two devices.
To locate and select a tool in a tool box
1. Point at a tool in a tool box for a moment. A yellow rectangle with text displays below the pointer. This tool tip identifies the tool by name. (The name may be abridged.) If the tool is in a child tool box, the name of that tool box is included in the tool tip. The status bar also provides information about the tool. If the tool is not in a child tool box, the status bar shows a description of the tool. If the tool is in a child tool box, the status bar shows the same information as the tool tip the name of the tool (possibly abridged) and the child tool box. 2. Move the pointer within the tool box while continuing to refer to the tool tips and/or the status bar. 3. When the pointer is over the desired tool, click the tool to select it.
To locate and select a tool in a child tool box (without floating the child tool box)
1. In the parent tool box, click the tool that is the representative of the child. While holding down the mouse button, move the pointer outside the button to open a pop-up menu immediately, or leave the pointer stationary for a delayed menu open. The pop-up menu contains an item for each of the tools in the child tool box. 2. Choose the menu item that corresponds to the desired tool. The selected tool will be displayed in the parent tool box as the new representative of the child tool box.
To locate and select a tool in a child tool box of the Main tool box or the Task Navigation tool box
1. Press the <Esc> key to ensure that your focus is set to home. The keyboard key labels in the Main and Task Navigation tool boxes appear on a blue background.
2. Press the number or letter key associated with the tool's parent tool box. A pop-up menu opens. This menu contains an item for each of the tools in the child tool box. 3. Press the number key associated with the desired tool. The selected tool will be displayed in the parent tool box as the new representative of the child tool box. You can control whether or not tool tips appear.
To toggle the display of tool tips
1. From the Help menu, choose Tool Tips.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
1. From the Tools menu, choose Tool Boxes. The Tool Boxes dialog box opens. 2. Click the Show Tool Tips check box. 3. Click OK.
Using the Tool Index to locate and select tools
Page 33 of 110
Another way to locate and select a tool is by using the Tool Index in help. The Tool Index is a list of all tools in MicroStation with links to the corresponding help topics. This method can be particularly useful when you are not sure of the name of the tool or the tool box in which it resides.
To locate and select a tool using the Tool Index in help
1. Open the Help window, and in the navigation pane, click MicroStation Tool Index. or Choose Help > Tool Index. The Tool Index window opens.
2. (Optional) Perform a search of the index by typing keywords in the Find field. If you are not sure of the tool's name, type part of what you believe to be its name. You can also use wildcard characters for example, Place* in the Find field. To execute the search, click Apply. When you click Apply, the index is filtered to include only tools that meet the specified search criteria. 3. Click the link that corresponds to the desired tool. The help topic for the tool displays in the Help window's topic pane. 4. In the topic pane, click either the Use it! link or the image of the tool's icon located immediately above that link. The tool is selected. The tool box in which the tool resides opens as well. Working with the selected tool
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 34 of 110
The status bar along the bottom border of the application window displays prompts and messages about the selected tool.
Tool settings
Tool settings affect the operation of a specific tool. For example, the Method setting sets how a rectangle is drawn with the Place Block tool. Rather than forcing you to adjust a tool's settings each time you select that tool, tool settings remain in effect until you change them. This makes MicroStation more efficient to use, but also means you must keep the active tool's settings in mind or displayed on the screen.
Tool Settings window
The Tool Settings window is used to adjust tool settings. For example, if the Place Block tool is selected, controls for adjusting the tool settings Method, Area, Fill Type, and Fill Color are displayed in the window, and the window's title bar reads Place Block. If closed, the window opens automatically when a tool with settings is selected.
Tool Settings window. Above: With Place Block tool selected. Below: With no tool selected.
To open the Tool Settings window
1. If you are using the default function key menu, press <F10>. The Tool Settings window opens. If it is already docked or open, pressing <F10> sends input focus to the Tool Settings window.
The Tool Settings window displays settings specific to the selected tool. Not all settings are specific to particular tools. For example, element attributes and locks affect the placement of elements with many tools.
Temporarily hiding the Tool Settings window
At times as you move the pointer while drawing, the Tool Settings window may inconveniently obscure part of your model. There are a number of ways to remedy this problem. You can certainly close the Tool Settings window (it will reopen when you select a different tool), move it, or adjust its transparency. The most convenient remedy in many cases, though, is to temporarily hide it from view.
To temporarily hide the Tool Settings window
1. Make sure the PopSet icon in the Primary Tools tool box is green, indicating this capability is enabled. This is the default setting. If the icon is red with a diagonal black line across it, click the icon to toggle the setting to the default.
2. Move the pointer to a location just outside the Tool Settings window. The window disappears. To cause it to reappear, move the pointer further away from the window's hidden location. You can customize this capability by adjusting settings in the PopSet Properties dialog box. For example, by adjusting the Hide Border setting you can change the size of the Tool Settings window border in which the presence of the pointer causes the window to disappear.
To open the PopSet Properties dialog box
3/24/2010
Getting Started
1. Right-click the PopSet icon in the Primary Tools tool box, and choose Properties from the pop-up menu.
Page 35 of 110
Popset Properties dialog box
Adjusting the transparency of the Tool Settings window
While the Tool Settings window is opaque by default, you can make it transparent to some degree in order to see more of your model.
To adjust the transparency of the Tool Settings window
1. Right-click in the title bar of the Tool Settings window. 2. From the pop-up menu, choose Transparency. The Window Transparency dialog box opens.
3. Move the slider to adjust transparency. Transparency may vary from 0% to 100%. As you move the slider, the effects are visible in the Tool Settings window. At certain high percentage values, you may not be able to see the Tool Settings window, depending on your system's display subsystem; such values are not recommended. 4. Click OK.
You can apply partial transparency to any non-modal dialog box using the same procedure as above. You can also set the following preferences related to transparent dialog boxes in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences):

Transparent dialogs become opaque when receiving focus off by default. All modeless dialogs use same transparency off by default.
Checking the status bar
It is recommended that you make it a habit to frequently check the status bar at the bottom of the application window (or the screen). It displays a variety of useful information, including prompts, messages, and the name of the selected tool. If you are not sure where you are with a tool, look in the status bar. The status bar is divided into two sections:
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Left-hand section of status bar
Page 36 of 110
The far left section ordinarily shows the name of the selected tool (or view control) followed by a greater-than symbol (>) and message text. Message text that follows the > is the selected tool's prompt; a tool's prompts guide you step by step as you perform an operation with a tool.
As you move the pointer over tools in a tool box, the name of the selected tool and the associated message text are replaced with the name of the tool over which the pointer is located. (The name may be abridged.) If the tool is a representative of a child tool box, that tool box's name is shown as well. Immediately to the right of the tool section of the status bar is the Message Center window icon and message area, which displays various error, warning, and information messages. For example, if you are using the Copy Element tool and you enter a data point in a blank part of the view instead of identifying an element, the message No Elements Found will appear. Clicking the Message Center icon opens the Message Center window, which lets you review the messages that were previously displayed in the status bar.
Message Center window
When you enter a tentative point or request quantitative information for example, distances or angles using tools in the Measure tool box the fields in the section to the right of the Message Center window icon display the values and may be reviewed in the Message Center window.
Right-hand section of status bar
The right-hand section ordinarily consists of a series of fields. From left to right, the status information indicated in these fields is as follows:
Snap Mode setting. Clicking this field provides an alternate means of access to the Settings menu's Snaps sub-menu. The Locks icon does not indicate status information Clicking it provides an alternate means of access to the Settings menu's
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Locks submenu.

Page 37 of 110
Active Level setting. Clicking this field opens the Level Manager dialog box. The count of selected elements. If this field is blank, no elements are selected. If a fence is placed, the icon in this field indicates the fence selection mode. Clicking this icon opens a pop-up menu for adjusting the fence selection mode. If a fence is not placed this field is blank. Whether the configuration variable MS_WORKMODE is set to DGN or DWG. When set to DGN, the field is blank. When set to DWG, the field has a white crosshair on a blue background. Whether changes to the open DGN file are unsaved. If the field is blank, there are no unsaved changes. If the field has a black floppy-disk icon then there are unsaved changes in the DGN. If the field has a red floppy-disk icon with an X through it, the open DGN file is open for read-only access. Whether the open file has design history and if so, the design history status. Indicates the status of the input focus. Indicates if the open file is protected and digitally signed.
Data points
A data point is graphic input that, depending on the context:

Designates a point in a design (for element placement or selection, for example). Designates the view in which it is entered (for fitting or updating, for example). Accepts an operation (deleting an element, for example), rather than rejecting it.
In MicroStation, you do not need first to select a view to work in. You can place and manipulate elements in any open view. This aspect of MicroStation is so powerful that you can even begin placing an element in one view and finish placing it in another view.
MicroStation offers a variety of more precise techniques for entering a data point:

AccuSnap tentative points AccuDraw
To enter a data point
1. Position the pointer at the desired location in a view. 2. Press the Data button.
Resetting
Resetting in MicroStation is similar to pressing the <Esc> key in some other programs. For example, Resetting will back you out of most procedures in MicroStation that have several steps. If a view control is selected, a Reset (or two) will de-select the view control and reselect the drawing tool selected when the view control was selected.
To Reset
1. Click the Reset button. or From either the Reset pop-up menu or the view control pop-up menu, choose Reset.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 38 of 110
During your first MicroStation session, the first time you press the Reset button, the First Reset dialog box will open. This dialog box is used to specify your preferred technique for opening the Reset pop-up menu.
You must choose either to press and hold the Reset button to open the Reset pop-up menu or to merely click the Reset button. Because Resetting is a frequently used type of graphical input in MicroStation, the default selection Press and Hold is recommended. If you select the Click technique, you will have to Reset by choosing Reset from either the Reset pop-up menu or the view control pop-up menu. Once you click the OK button, the dialog box will not display again. If you want to change your preferred technique after this point, you can do so by adjusting the Reset Pop-up Menu preference and optionally, the Hold Delay preference, in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
First Reset dialog box
Coping with mistakes MicroStation supports unlimited undo, which lets you undo drawing operations to recover from a mistake. Similarly, you can use the View Previous and View Next view controls to scroll through viewing operations on a per view basis.
To undo the last operation
1. From the Edit menu, choose Undo <operation>. or Press <Ctrl-Z>. For example, suppose that you just deleted an element with the Delete Element tool. To undo this operation, you would choose Undo delete element from the Edit menu.
After you undo an operation, the operation just before it becomes undoable. You can, therefore, undo a series of operations by repeatedly choosing Undo from the Edit menu. There is no limit to the number of undo's you can perform within a design session. The undo buffer is only limited by your disk storage space. A limitation on undoing is that unless you are recording the open DGN file's design history, you cannot undo operations made before the file was last closed or compressed. You see when you close or compress the file (including saving as), the undo buffer is emptied. A DGN file is compressed by choosing File > Compress > Design .
To undo all operations recorded in the undo buffer
1. From the Edit menu's Undo Other submenu, choose All.

Alternative Method To undo all operations recorded in the undo buffer
3/24/2010
Getting Started
1. If the preference Automatically Save Design Changes is off, close the open DGN file without saving changes. This preference is set in the Operation section of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
To undo the last undo operation
Page 39 of 110
1. From the Edit menu, choose Redo <operation>. or Press <Ctrl-R>.
Using the Reset Pop-up Menu

The Reset pop-up menu provides convenient access to frequently used tools and utilities including

element manipulation tools project data links the Element Selection tool and related utilities Clipboard functions element properties
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 40 of 110
If the Element Selection tool is active, some of the items in the menu are context-sensitive that is, they operate on the element at the pointer location and/or on the selected element(s).
To open the Reset pop-up menu
1. If the Reset Pop-up Menu preference in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences) is set to Press and Hold (the default), press and hold the Reset button. or If the Reset Pop-up Menu preference is set to Click, click the Reset button.
Using Online Help

MicroStation's Help menu and Help window are used to access MicroStation's extensive online help.
Context-sensitive online help is available. The optional Tracking feature lets you see help on each tool as you select it. Hypertext links, which appear in color and are underlined, when you pass the pointer over them, let you move easily between related topics.
Certain Windows DLLs must be present on you computer in order to use Online Help. Make sure you have Microsoft Internet Explorer (Version 5.5 or greater) installed. You do not need to change your default browser as long as Internet Explorer is installed.
The check mark next to the Tracking item on the Help menu indicates whether Tracking is on or off.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
To open the Help window
Page 41 of 110
1. From the Help menu, choose Contents. or Key in HELP. The Help window opens, and the Table of Contents displays.
The Help window consists of two panes the navigation pane on the left and the topic pane on the right.
To see help for each selected tool, or enable Tracking
1. In the Help menu, turn on Tracking. 2. Continue your work the Help window displays help for each tool you select.
To get help on a dialog box control, or turn on context-sensitive help
1. Move the input focus to a dialog box control (check box, option menu, list box, field, etc.) about which you would like to see help. The control that has the input focus is bordered by a rectangle, the active control indicator. 2. Press the <F1> key (unless the HELP key-in has been assigned to a different function key). The Help window opens (if it is not already open) and shows information about the control with the input focus. Subtopics within a help topic are collapsed by default. While a subtopic is collapsed only its heading is visible.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 42 of 110
Help window showing a portion of a topic with collapsed subtopics
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 43 of 110
Same topic with one of the subtopics expanded
To make visible a subtopic's body text and graphics you must expand the subtopic.
To expand a subtopic
1. Click the expand (+) icon to the left of the subtopic heading or the heading itself.
To simultaneously expand all subtopics in a topic
1. Click the Show All (magnifying glass) icon in the topic pane's top banner.
To collapse a subtopic
1. Click the collapse () icon to the left of the subtopic heading or the heading itself.
T i lt l ll ll bt i i t i
3/24/2010
Getting Started
1. Click the Hide All icon in the topic pane's top banner.
Page 44 of 110
The navigation pane has the following tabs:

Contents used for browsing topics. Index index of help content. Search used for full-text searching of the help content. Favorites customizable list of your favorite topics.
To browse topics using the Contents tab
1. On the Contents tab, click the folder symbol next to any book folder (such as Getting Started, Setting Up Projects) to expand its contents. 2. Continue expanding folders until you reach the desired topic. 3. Select a topic to display its content in the topic pane.
To display the next or previous topic according to the topic order shown in the Contents tab
1. To display the next topic, click the downward pointing arrow displayed near the top of the topic pane. or To display the previous topic, click the upward pointing arrow near the top of the topic pane.
To navigate in this manner, it is not necessary to first select the Contents tab.
To use the index of help content
1. Click the Index tab. 2. In the search field, type the word you are searching for. or Scroll through the index using the scroll bar to find a specific entry. 3. Select the desired entry and click the Display button. or Double-click the desired entry. The content that the selected index entry is referencing displays in the topic pane.
If you select an entry that has subtopics, a dialog box opens, from which you can select the desired subtopic. In this case, select the subtopic and click the Display button.
To search for text in the help content
1. Click the Search tab. 2. In the search field, type the word or phrase for which you are searching. 3. Click the List Topics button. Results of the search display in the list box below the search field. 4. Select the desired topic and click the Display button. or Double-click the desired topic. Search results vary based on the quality of the search criteria entered in the Search field. The more specific the search criteria, the more narrow the search results You can improve your search results by improving the search criteria For example a word is considered to be
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 45 of 110
a group of contiguous alphanumeric characters. A phrase is a group of words and their punctuation. A search string is a word or phrase on which you search. A search string finds any topic that contains all of the words in the string. You can improve the search by enclosing the search string in quotation marks. This type of search finds only topics that contain the exact string in the quotation marks.
To add a help topic to a list of favorite help topics
1. In the Contents, Index, or Search tab, select the desired help topic. 2. Click the Favorites tab. The selected help topic automatically displays in the Current topic field at the bottom of the tab. 3. Click the Add button.
To display a topic from your Favorites list
1. Click the Favorites tab. 2. In the list box, select the desired topic and click the Display button. or Double-click the desired topic. The selected topic's content displays in the topic pane.
Each of the links at the bottom of the navigation pane MicroStation Tool Index and MicroStation Key-in Index opens a child window of the Help window.
The Tool Index window is useful for locating help topics associated with tools. Once you locate a tool's help topic, you can select the tool for usage directly from the topic pane. The Key-in Index window is useful for finding key-ins.
Each of these windows provides a filtering capability. Their Find fields accept wildcard characters. For example, to filter the Key-in Index to show only the key-ins containing the equal sign (=), type *= in the Find field and click Apply.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Filtering the Key-in Index using a wildcard
Page 46 of 110
Online help is periodically updated and posted on Bentley's Documentation Web site, http://docs.bentley.com/ for downloading. On this site you can also browse the current help content for this product and other Bentley products.
Preparing to Draw
Except for user preferences, there are no default settings in MicroStation. The settings described in the following subsections can be saved in the DGN file on disk. To preserve changes to these DGN file settings between sessions, you must explicitly save the settings. Seed files When you create a DGN file, you identify a seed file as a template for the DGN file. The new DGN file is actually a copy of the seed file. Seed files do not (necessarily) contain elements, but, like other DGN files, they do contain at least one (default) model, settings, and view configurations. Having a seed file with customized settings frees you from having to adjust settings each time you create a new DGN file. If you wish, you can have a different seed file for each type of drawing you do. A number of discipline-specific seed files are provided with MicroStation, in addition to the generic seed files, seed2d.dgn and seed3d.dgn.
To select a seed file
1. From the File menu, choose New. The New dialog box opens. 2. Click the Browse button adjacent to the Seed field. The Select Seed File dialog box opens. The default filter is MicroStation DGN Files [*.dgn].
Select Seed File dialog box
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 47 of 110
3. (Optional) To list all files, or AutoCAD files in the list box, choose All Files [*.*] or AutoCAD Drawing Files [*.dwg] from the Files of type option menu. 4. (Optional) To select a different source disk drive or directory, choose the desired drive or directory from the Look In option menu. 5. In the list box, select the desired seed file. or In the File name field, key in the name of the desired seed file. 6. Click Open. DGN design environment In 2D drafting, the MicroStation equivalent of a sheet of drafting paper is the design plane. Unlike a sheet of drafting paper, however, the design plane (or cube in 3D) in a DGN file is extremely large, letting you draw your models at full scale. To draw various elements in your model, you enter data points. Each data point placed in the design plane has associated X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) positions or coordinates. The design plane, then, is simply a Cartesian coordinate system upon which your model lies. Coordinates are expressed in the form (X,Y). In the Seed files provided with MicroStation's Default workspace, the point called the Global Origin is set to the design plane's exact center and assigned the coordinates 0,0. For most purposes the Global Origin in the provided seed files is fine. You may, however, wish to change the location or coordinates of the Global Origin. For example, an architect may want all coordinates to be positive values. A mapper or surveyor may need to use a grid system defined by a government agency to reference all locations to a specific point. When you enter a data point, MicroStation saves its coordinates in IEEE 64bit floating point format. The 3D Design cube is similar to the 2D design plane, but with a third axis Z (depth). Points in 2D models are stored as coordinate values expressed in the form (X,Y), while those for 3D models are stored as (X,Y,Z). Working units Working units are the real-world units that you work with in drawing or creating your models in a DGN file. Typically the working units are defined in seed DGN files, from which you create your working DGN file. Normally, they will not require any adjustment. You can choose master units and subunits by name, such as Feet and Inches, or Meters and Centimeters. Changing the working units Unit Names does not affect the size of geometry in your model. In summary:
Working units are set as Master Units (the largest units in common use in a design, such as meters) and fractional Sub Units (the smallest convenient unit to use, such as centimeters or millimeters). Sub Units cannot be larger than Master Units. You can change your working units without affecting the size of elements in the design. That is, you can draw in Meters and Centimeters, for example, and then change the Unit Names to Feet and Inches to get the English measurements.
To select the Unit Names for your Working Units
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list, select Working Units. 3. From the Master Unit option menu, choose the units required. If you change the Master Unit from Metric to English or vice versa, the Sub Unit is changed to a suitable unit also. Similarly, if you specify a Master Unit that is smaller than the current Sub Unit, the Sub Unit is changed to a suitable unit. 4. (Optional) From the Sub Unit option menu, choose the units required.
Format and Accuracy settings
The Format and Accuracy settings control how MicroStation displays coordinates, distances, and angles in the status bar and dialog boxes.
Setting the Format and Accuracy does not affect the accuracy of calculations, only the accuracy with which the results are displayed.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
To set Format and Accuracy
Page 48 of 110
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Working Units. 3. From the Format option menu in the Linear Units section, choose either MU (master units), MU:SU (master and sub units), or MU:SU:PU (master, sub, and positional units). 4. From the Accuracy option menu, choose the number of decimal places, the denominator of fractions, or number of decimal places in scientific units in which fractions of the units chosen from the Format option menu are displayed. 5. From the Format option menu in the Angles section, choose DD.DDDD (for decimal angle readout), DD MM SS (for angle readout in degrees, minutes, and seconds), Gradians, or Radians. 6. From the Mode option menu, choose Conventional, Azimuth, or Bearing. 7. From the Angles Accuracy option menu, choose the number of decimal places to which fractional angle measurements are displayed. 8. Click OK.
Resolution setting
Located in the Advanced Unit Settings dialog box is the Resolution setting, which determines the accuracy of the design plane and does affect the size of existing elements in a model. You should consult with your site administrator before changing the resolution setting. In a DGN file, the Resolution setting is used to set the worst case accuracy for the design environment, which occurs only at the very edge of the (very large) working area. For example, working to a worst case accuracy of 0.0001 meters, the size of the design plane/cube is 900 million kilometers along each axis. Actual accuracy is many millions of times better when drawing near the origin of the design plane, which is the usual situation. In almost all cases, therefore, there is no need to change the Resolution setting.
How working units are expressed
When you are inputting distances in DGN files, typically they are expressed in either of two forms:

As a standard decimal number, such as 1.275. As two numbers separated by a colon, indicating MU:SU. For example, 3:4 means three master units (MU), and four subunits (SU).
The following table has examples of distances expressed in the latter form.
Working Units Feet / Inches Miles / Yards Meters/Centimeters MU:SU 120:10 350:65 5:25 Distance 120 feet, 10 inches 350 miles, 65 yards 5 meters, 25 centimeters
Millimeters / Micrometers 0:500, or :500 One half millimeter Setting the Global Origin
The key-in ACTIVE ORIGIN (GO=) is used to set the Global Origin. This lets you set the coordinate reading of 0,0 at any point in the model that you nominate (with a data point). Saving DGN file settings To preserve changes to DGN file settings such as working units between sessions, you must explicitly save the settings.
To save the current settings to the open DGN file on disk
1. From the File menu, choose Save Settings.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Press <Ctrl-F>.
Page 49 of 110
User Preferences
User preferences are settings that control the operation of MicroStation in ways that are not significant to other members of a workgroup. For example, they affect how MicroStation uses memory on a user's system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screen are laid out and behave , how references are attached by default, and so on. As the name implies, users can adjust these settings to suit their preferences. Setting user preferences The Preferences dialog box is used to set user preferences.
To open the Preferences dialog box
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.
Preferences dialog box
The active set of user preferences is one of three components of the active workspace MicroStation's environment or configuration. Workspaces are typically used to customize MicroStation for a particular discipline, project, or task. As you switch between workspaces, you will probably prefer to keep the same set of user preferences in effect because they configure MicroStation for the way you work. To ensure that the same set of user preferences remain in effect, change your workspace by selecting (or customizing) project and user interface workspace components only.
Categories
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 50 of 110
In the Preferences dialog box, user preferences are divided into categories such as Input, Look and Feel, Operation, Text, and so on to make finding the setting you want to adjust easier. The following table summarizes MicroStation's preferences and shows the as delivered default setting for each.
Category Database Input Preference Description Off On Off On 10 Default
Use Single If on, single AE and MSFORMS tables are maintained. AE/MSFORMS Table Start in Parse All Mode Disable Drag Operations If on, the parsing function is enabled as MicroStation starts. If on, MicroStation disregards Data button-up operations when the pointer is in views.
Allow ESC key to stop If on, you can use the ESC key to exit the current command. current command Locate Tolerance Locate Interiors Pointer Size Pointer Type Click Sensitivity Reset Pop-up Menu Hold Delay Look and Feel Single Click Default Tool Highlight Layout Tool Size View Tool Size Dialog Font Font Auto-Focus Tool Settings Window Borderless Icons Increase contrast of icon edges Use Windows File Open Dialogs Sets the size of the searched area around the pointer for selecting an element.
Allows a closed, surface or solid element to be located by a data point in Rendered or Filled the element interior, not just at the edges. Sets the size of the cross hair pointer. Controls the alignment of the pointer's cross hairs. Sets how the clicks are interpreted as drag operations versus data points. Sets the Reset button action that causes the Reset pop-up menu to appear. Sets the time interval, in ticks (60ths of a second), during which the Reset button must be pressed and held to cause the Reset pop-up menu to appear. Controls how tools are selected with a single click (press) of the Data button. Sets the tool that is automatically selected upon completion of a onetime function. Sets the color with which tools are highlighted to indicate locked selection. Affects the size of tool boxes. Sets the size of tool icons. Sets the size of icons in the View toolbox. Displays the current font and font size used in dialog boxes and view border icons. Opens the Font dialog box, which is used to set the font, font style and font size in dialog boxes and view border icons. If on, the input focus automatically moves to the Tool Settings window when a tool with settings is selected. Unless a tool is selected, its icon appears without a border. Normal Orthogonal Normal Press and Hold 10 ticks (0.17 seconds) Locked Selection (Element Selection) Gray Regular Medium (24 x 24) Small (16 x 16) Microsoft Sans Serif, 9 Microsoft Sans Serif, 9 Off On
If on, image processing increases the clarity of the icons and gives them Off a more definite edge. Uses the standard Windows file open dialogs instead of the MicroStation Off file open dialogs. Off
Transparent dialogs If on and the transparency is set, the dialog becomes opaque when it become opaque when receives the focus. receiving focus All modeless dialogs use same transparency. Mouse Wheel Wheel Ctrl + Wheel Shift + Wheel Alt + Wheel Zoom In/Out Ratio Navigate Distance (Cursor/Wheel)
If on, all modeless dialogs use the same transparency from 0100 as set Off in the slider scale. Sets the mouse wheel to zoom in and out by default. Sets the mouse wheel to pan up and down by default. Sets the mouse wheel to zoom and recenter. Sets the mouse wheel to pan left and right by default. Sets the zoom ratio increment for each turn of the mouse wheel. Obsolete, no longer supported. Zoom In/Out Walk Forwards/Backwards Pan With Zoom Pan Left/Right 1.750
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Navigate Distance (Mouse) Operation Obsolete, no longer supported. Off Off On Off Off On On On On On 1024 256 On On
Page 51 of 110
Open Two Application If on, two MicroStation application windows are opened for the purpose Windows of using MicroStation on a two-screen system. Save Settings on Exit Automatically Save Design Changes Compress File on Exit Enter into Untitled Design Display Broken Associations with Different Symbology Reset Aborts Fence Operations If on, design settings are automatically saved to the DGN file upon closing. If on, MicroStation automatically saves changes to the DGN file. If on, deleted elements are automatically removed from the open DGN file upon closing. If on, when you start MicroStation, it automatically creates and opens a DGN file named untitled.dgn. If on, automatically identifies elements that lose associativity by changing their weight and style. If on, Resetting during a fence manipulation halts the operation.
Level Lock Applies for If off, fence contents manipulations ignore the Level Lock setting. Fence Operations Optimized Fence Clipping Display Active Level in All Views Resource Cache Font Cache Position Mapping If on, maintains closed shapes, solids and surfaces when clipping. If on, the active level displays across all views. Sets the amount of memory, in KB, reserved for resources read from MicroStation resource files and application resource files. Sets the maximum size, in KB, of the section of memory reserved for data used to display text elements.
Use Position Mapping If on, positional keyboard navigation is enabled. Show Position Mapping Aids Main Toolbox Keys View Toolbox Keys Task Toolbox Keys Tool Settings Keys Left Handed Right Handed If on, keyboard key labels display on tool icons as navigational aids on tool icons accessible via positional keyboard navigation. This control is enabled only while Use Position Mapping is on. Sets the keys mapped to the tool icons in the Main tool box. Sets the keys mapped to the view control icons in the view control bar. Sets the keys mapped to the tool icons in the Task Navigation tool box. Sets the keys mapped to the controls in the Tool Settings window. Sets Task Toolbox Keys to the default mappings for Tool Settings Keys and vice-versa. Resets Task Toolbox Keys and Tool Settings Keys to their default mappings. If on, opens raster files as read-only. If on, automatically appends the path of attached raster images to the MS_RFDIR configuration variable. The raster attachments will be searched for in the directories named by the configuration variable.
<1>, <2>, <3>, <4>, <5>, <6>, <7>, <8>, <9>, <0> user defined <Q>, <W>, <E>, <R>, <T>, <A>, <S>, <D>, <F>, <G>, <Z>, <X>, <C>, <V>, <B> <Y>, <U>, <I>, <O>, <P>, <H>, <J>, <L>, <;>, <N>, <M>, <,>, <.>, </> Off On On
Raster Manager
Open Raster Files Read-Only
Update MS_RFDIR Automatically
Off If the toggle is set to off, the paths will not be appended to the variable and the images will be searched for only in the paths already listed in the MS_RFDIR variable. If on, a raster attachment can only be selected by its border. Sets the default Display Plane that is assigned to rasters when they are attached. Specifies the number of filenames, from 110, listed in the Raster Manager File menu. If on, sets the default level, style and weight for the new raster attachments. On Background 4 Off Attachment
Ignore Locate Interiors Display Plane Recent Files List Contains Default Raster Attributes
Default GeoPriority on Sets the GeoPriority of the newly attached rasters. Attach
3/24/2010
Getting Started
File Georeference Has Priority when Raster Is Attached Use Sister File, if Present, for Georeferenced Files If on, gives priority for file location information to georeference over attachment. If on, Raster Manager extracts the geo-location from the associated sister/world file (if it exists) for all formats with header information provided the sister/world file has the same prefix and is in the same folder as the image.
Page 52 of 110
Off
Off
Save Location Info in If on, saves location information only for formats that do not support Sister File if Required georeference in a sister file (HGR or ESRI formats). WorldFile Default Unit Geotiff Default Unit Use Unit Definition Geokey if Present (override PCS unit) Reference Use Color Table Remap Colors on Copy Cache When Display Off Reload When Changing Files Defines each measurement unit used with the WorldFile (TFW) sister file. If Use Unit Definition Geokey if Present (override PCS unit) is on, defines each Geotiff measurement unit. If on, overrides Projected Coordinate System (PCS) unit with Unit Definition Geokey for Geotiff raster file. If off, MicroStation ignores any color table attached to a reference for display purposes.
Off 1 Unit = 1 Meters 1 Unit = 1 Meters On On
If on, uses colors with the closest color match from the master file's color On table when copying elements. If off, memory caching of references that are not displayed is disabled. If off, when possible, cached references are kept in memory when one DGN file is closed and another is opened. Off Off
Save Settings to Save If off, the results of reference manipulations are immediately permanent. Off Changes Ignore Update Sequence Allow Editing of Self References Copy Levels During Copy If on, the Update Sequence menu item is disabled in the Attachment Settings dialog box's Settings menu. Off
If on, you can modify self-attached reference elements, and the changes On will be incrementally displayed. Controls how levels in references are copied to the active model. Copy only levels that don't exist in the active model (If Not Found), copy levels if the active model settings are different from the attachment's settings (If If Not Found Overrides Exist), or copy all levels from a reference into the active model (Always). If on, the capability to snap to elements in a newly attached reference is enabled by default. If on, the capability to identify elements in a newly attached reference is enabled by default. If on, uses the default Manipulate as Element setting when a reference is attached. If on, the capability to align the units in the active model to the units in a newly attached reference is enabled by default. If on, scaling is applied to components of custom line styles in a newly attached reference by default. If on, a newly attached raster reference is displayed by default. If on, the References dialog box does not list nested references in its entry for a newly attached reference by default. If on, source lighting cells in a newly attached reference are processed while rendering by default. If on, uses the default Plot as 3D setting when a reference is attached. If on, the relative path to a newly attached reference is saved in the attachment information by default. On On Off On On On Off On Off Off
Snap Locate Manipulate as Element True Scale Scale Line Styles Display Raster References Ignore When Live Nesting Use Lights Plot as 3D Save Relative Path Nesting Nest Depth Display Overrides New Level Display Spelling Case Sensitive
Allows you to ignore (No Nesting), continuously update (Live Nesting), or No Nesting copy nested attachments. Sets the number of levels of nested attachments that are included when 1 attaching a reference. Controls whether reference settings, such as level display, can be overriden for nested references. Controls how newly created levels display in references. Treats words with different letter-case patterns as different words. Allow Use MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY Configuration Variable On
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Suggest split words Report double words Flags words that appear to be better suited as two words. Flags words that appear twice in the same row. Ignores words with an unusual mixture of upper and lowercase letters. An example of a usual mixture might be words like MicroStation. An unusual mixture might be something like MiCroSTAtioN. Ignores words that contain a mixture of letters, digits, or other symbols. Ignore words consisting of all uppercase letters. Ignores words that begin with an uppercase letter. Sets the supported language that Spell Checker will use. If on, tag is included when a element is moved/copied. If on, when a tag set is attached to an element, all tags in the set become members of the same graphic group. Controls the display and location of the Task Navigation tools in the application window:
Page 53 of 110
On On Off On On Off Off AmericanEnglish On On
Ignore domain names Ignores words that appear to be Internet domain names. Ignore mixed case Ignore words with numbers Ignore words in UPPERCASE Ignore capitalize words Language Tags Include Tags during move/copy operation on base element Place Tags in Same Graphic Group
Task Navigation
Presentation
docked on the right-hand side of the application window (Tool Box) listed in the Tasks dialog box, docked on the left-hand side of the application window (Dialog) docked at the top of the application window (In Views)
Tool Box
Icon Size Text Fit Text by Inserting Space Fixed-Width Character Spacing Preserve Text Nodes Justify Enter Data Fields Like IGDS Hide Field Background ED Character Smallest Text Underline Spacing (%) Degree Display Char (acter) Text Editor Style Missing Fonts Text Editor Font Size View Options Scroll Bars on View Windows Black Background -> White
If Presentation is set to Dialog, sets the size, in pixels, of the tool icons listed in the Tasks dialog box. If off, MicroStation places fitted text by enlarging or shrinking the characters of text so that they fit between two data points. If off, the spacing between characters is measured from the end of one character to the beginning of the next character. If on, any text that was placed as a text node will remain a text node, even if edited down to one line. If off, the odd space in a center-justified enter data field containing an odd number of extra blank spaces is positioned at the beginning of the enter data field. If off, fields are displayed with a light gray background. Sets the text character that denotes each character in an enter data field. Sets the size threshold, in pixels, above which text is drawn. Sets the distance, as a percentage of the text height, between the baseline and underlining. Sets the ASCII character used to display the degree symbol (). Sets the type of text editing interface: Word Processor, Dialog Box, WYSIWYG, or Key-in. Determines how missing fonts are listed in font selection combo boxes. Sets the font size for the Text Editor.
Medium (24 x 24) Off Off Off Off Off _ (underbar) 4 20 176 Word Processor Enable (automatic replacement with available fonts) 16
If on, view windows are displayed with borders, including scroll bars and On view control bars. If on, the view background color, if set to black, is displayed in white. Off Off
If on, MicroStation attempts to open views based on the aspect ratio of Preserve Aspect Ratio views from the last saved version. It only applies if you have changed of Views the size of MicroStation's application area since saving a file. Auto-Locate Display Edges in Shaded Views If on, when flashing elements for auto-locate, MicroStation displays the edges in shaded views.
Off
3/24/2010
Getting Started
If on, angled lines appear smoother (jagged edges are smoothed) in MicroStation views. Options are:

Page 54 of 110
Anti-alias Lines
Auto-Detect turns on hardware antialiasing if available. On turns on antialiasing. Off turns off antialiasing.
Off
If on, TrueType fonts appear smoother (jagged edges are smoothed) in MicroStation views. Options are:

Anti-alias Text
Auto-Detect turns on hardware antialiasing if available. On turns on antialiasing. Off turns off antialiasing.
On
Show View ToolBox Update Refresh Frequency (secs) Frame Rate for View Tools (frames/sec) Gamma Correction Dynamic Transparency Auto-Locate Transparency Line Weights
Sets the position (Top, Bottom, Left, or Right) of where to dock the tools Top in a view window. Sets the frequency (in seconds) of the display update when rendering. Sets the minimum number of frames per second during viewing operations. Affects the brightness of rendered images. Sets the amount of transparency used to display elements in dynamics. Sets the amount of transparency in the Element Highlight Color used to flash (highlight) elements for auto-locate. When set to Opaque, highlighted elements appear in the Element Highlight Color. As you move the slider towards Clear, progressively less of the highlight color and more of the original element color is seen in the highlight color. Sets the display width (in pixels) for each of the 32 line weights. 1.0 10 1.00 moderately opaque
moderately clear
1:1
General Procedure To set user preferences
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. Database is selected in the Category list box.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 55 of 110
Preferences dialog box
2. (Optional) To help you and other users identify these preferences collectively as a workspace component, key in a description of the preferences in the field adjacent to the top of the Category list box. 3. In the Category list box, select a category that contains a preference you want to set. The controls for setting preferences in that Category are displayed in the dialog box. 4. Use the controls to set the desired preferences. Clicking the Line Weights button in the View Options category opens a dialog box for setting the display widths for element line weights. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you finish setting preferences. 6. Click the OK button.
To set all preferences to the defaults for the active workspace user interface component
1. In the Preferences dialog box's Database category, click the Defaults button. 2. Click the OK button.
Line weight translation
Each of the 32 possible values of element line weight can be set to display with any width you want. Display widths are measured in pixels (screen dots).
To set the display widths for element line weights
1. In the Preferences dialog box's View Options category, click the Line Weights button. The Line Weight Translation dialog box opens
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 56 of 110
Line Weight Translation dialog box
2. In the Screen section, select the screen Right (primary) or Left (secondary) for which you want to set display widths (for dualscreen systems). 3. For each line weight in the Design column whose display width you want to change, key in the desired width, in pixels, in the corresponding Display field. or To set the Design: Display values collectively to a 1:1 ratio, click the 1:1 button. or To set the Design: Display values collectively to a 1.5:1 ratio, click the 1.5:1 button. or To set the Design: Display values collectively to a 2:1 ratio, click the 2:1 button. 4. (Optional) To set the display widths for the second screen, select the second screen in the Screen section and repeat step 3. 5. Click the Apply button to save changes without dismissing the dialog box. 6. Click the OK button to save changes and to dismiss the dialog box. This returns you to the Preferences dialog box. The changes will be effective regardless of whether you click OK or Cancel in the Preferences dialog box.
Application Window Layout

The MicroStation application window contains the following special sections by default:

Attributes tool box Primary Tools tool box Main tool box
3/24/2010
Getting Started

Page 57 of 110
Task Navigation tool box Status Bar
If you want to add the Standard tool box, which contains tools common to most Windows applications, turn on Tools > Standard. The following types of windows are commonly used in MicroStation:

View Windows Tool Settings Window
MicroStation Manager dialog box Attributes tool box Active Element Template Active Level Filter Active Level Recall Filter dialog box Active Color Active Color dialog box Active Color dialog box Indexed Color tab Active Color dialog box True Color tab Active Color dialog box Color Book tab Active Color dialog box Gradient Fill tab Active Line Style Active Line Weight Active Element Class Active Element Transparency Active Element Priority Symbology Preview Primary Tools tool box Models Models dialog box Create Model dialog box Copy Model dialog box Model Properties dialog box Select Models dialog box Define Sheet Layout dialog box References References dialog box Reference Attachment Settings dialog box Attachment Settings dialog box Update Sequence dialog box Adjust Reference Colors dialog box Reference File Agent dialog box Select Remote File dialog box Raster Manager Level Manager Level Manager dialog box Level Manager Properties dialog box Level Properties dialog box Level Properties dialog box General tab Level Properties dialog box Styles tab Level Properties dialog box Usage tab Filter Groups dialog box Level Groups dialog box Level/Filter Import dialog box Remap Elements to Level dialog box Level Display Level Display dialog box Level Display Properties dialog box Change Level Cells Auxiliary Coordinates Element Information Element Info(rmation) dialog box Toggle AccuDraw
3/24/2010
Getting Started
AccuDraw window Key-in PopSet Enable/Disable PopSet Properties dialog box Main tool box Element Selection Delete Element Task Navigation tool box Tasks dialog box Task List Drawing task Status Bar Message Center window Message Center Properties dialog box Standard tool box View Groups window Manage View Groups dialog box
Page 58 of 110
Attributes tool box

The Attributes tool box contains controls for setting the active element attributes. By default it is docked to the top of the MicroStation window (directly beneath the menu bar).
Attributes tool box
The Attributes tool box is arranged as follows:

To Use
Set the Active Element Template. Active Element Template
Set the Active Level Filter. Active Level Filter
Set the Active Level.
Active Level
Set the Active Color. Active Color
Set the Active Line Style. Active Line Style
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 59 of 110
Set the Active Line Weight. Active Line Weight
Set the Active Element Class. Active Element Class
Sets the Active Element Transparency. Active Element Transparency
Sets the Active Element Priority (2D models only). Active Element Priority
Demonstrates the active symbology.
Symbology Preview
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ATTRIBUTES [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
If you are operating in DWG workmode, line styles 17 are disabled because they have no dimension that is they don't change when you zoom in or out. These line styles are not valid in AutoCAD. Only custom line styles are enabled in this workmode.
If you are operating in DWG workmode, you can not load a color table. The AutoCAD color table is the only color table loaded.
The Active Level Filter, Active Element Class, and Symbology Preview icons are hidden in the Attributes tool box by default.
Primary Tools tool box

The Primary Tools tool box is a launch point for commonly used MicroStation tools.
Primary Tools tool box
The Primary Tools tool box is arranged as follows:

To Use
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 60 of 110
Manage models using the Models dialog box. Models
Manage reference attachments using the Reference dialog box. References
Manage raster reference attachments using the Raster Manager dialog box. Raster Manager
Manage levels using the Level Manager dialog box. Level Manager
Turn levels on and off using the Level Display dialog box. Level Display
Create and manage cells in a Cell Library. Cells
Manage auxiliary coordinate systems using the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS) dialog box. Auxiliary Coordinates
Review or modify information about an element(s), such as its type, attributes, and geometry. Element Information Display dynamic drawing aids in view windows. and Constrain data points. and Dynamically display relative distances and angles. Toggle AccuDraw
Opens the Key-in window. Key-in Window
Toggle PopSet on or off. PopSet Enable/Disable
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX PRIMARY [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 61 of 110
The following icons are hidden in the Primary Tools tool box, as delivered: Raster Manager, Cells, Auxiliary Coordinates, and Key-in.
Main tool box

Used to select general usage element selection, manipulation, and modification tools. The Main tool box is open when you start MicroStation for the first time. By default, the Main tool box is docked to the left-hand edge of the MicroStation window. It can be undocked or docked to the right-hand edge.
With the exception of Element Selection and Delete Element, the tools in the Main tool box are also members of a child tool box. When one of the other tools is pointed to and the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tool in the child tool box can be selected. The child tool box can be torn off and floated by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in a child tool box (attached or floating), the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child tool box in the Main tool box. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Main tool box and identifies the corresponding child tool boxes.
Element Selection Fence tool box (Place Fence) Manipulate tool box (Copy) View Control tool box (Update View) Change Attributes tool box (Change Element Attributes) Groups tool box (Drop Element) Modify tool box (Modify Element) Delete Element
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MAINTASK [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
If you are using the default function key menu, press <F3> to display the Main tool box at your cursor.
Task Navigation tool box

The Task Navigation tool box contains the Task List and the tools of the active task In the as-delivered application window layout the
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 62 of 110
Task Navigation tool box is docked to the right-hand edge of the application window, and the active task is the Drawing task. To dock the Task Navigation tool box in open view windows, turn on Window > Task Navigation in Views. Use the following key-in to activate a specific task: Key-in: TASK ACTIVE [\task_path] <\task_name>
If you are using the default function key menu, press <F2> to display the Task List. Press <F4> to display the active task.
Drawing task
Contains commonly used drawing tools. The Drawing task is open when you start MicroStation for the first time. By default, the Drawing task is in the Task Navigation tool box docked to the right-hand edge of the MicroStation window. It can be undocked or docked to the right edge.
Each of the tools in the Drawing task is also a member of a child task. When a tool is pointed to and the Data button held down, a dropdown menu opens from which a tool in the child task can be selected. The child task can be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in a child task, the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Drawing task. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Drawing task and identifies the corresponding child tasks and for each, the default representative tool:
Linear task (Place SmartLine)
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Polygons task (Place Block)
Page 63 of 110
Ellipses task (Place Circle)
Patterns task (Hatch Area)
Tags task (Attach Tags)
Text task (Place Text)
Cells task (Place Active Cell)
Measure task (Measure Distance)
Dimensioning task (Dimension Element)
Standard tool box
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 64 of 110
The Standard tool box contains icons that enable quick access to commonly used pull-down menu items.
Selecting this icon Has the same effect as choosing New File > New Creates a file Result
Open File > Open Opens an existing file
Save File > Save Saves the current open file
Print File > Print Prints the contents of the view in the active model
Cut Edit > Cut Deletes selected item(s)
Copy Edit > Copy Copies selected item(s)
Paste Edit > Paste Pastes selected item(s)
Undo Edit > Undo (action) Undoes last operation
Redo Edit > Redo (action) Repeats last action
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Bentley Library (not applicable)
Page 65 of 110
Opens your Web browser and requests the browser to open either the Bentley Library site or a local HTML document delivered with MicroStation which contains a link to Bentley Library. The site provides MicroStation tools, resources, and information you can use in your daily work.
Help Help > Contents Accesses online help
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX STANDARD [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Viewing Designs
Arranging View Windows Using View Controls View Control Bar View Attributes Update View Zoom In Zoom Out Window Area Fit View Rotate View Pan View View Previous View Next Copy View Using the Grid Alternatives to the View Control Bars ALIGN Setting View Attributes Using Saved Views
Arranging View Windows

MicroStation gives you the option of having up to eight view windows open at any time. Also, it lets you customize the arrangement of view windows within the application window. Where multiple views are open, the view that you are working in is known as the Active View.
To open a view window
1. From the Window menu's Views submenu, choose the number of the view window you want to open. Check marks in the submenu indicate the numbers of open view windows.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 66 of 110
Alternative Method To open a view window
1. From the Window menu's Views submenu, choose Dialog. The View Groups window opens. By default, it docks automatically to the bottom of the window. Numbered buttons that are highlighted represent the open views.
View Groups window
2. To open a closed view window, click its numbered button.

To open or close multiple view windows in the View Groups window
1. In the View Groups window, click and drag across a series of view buttons. Whether the view opens or closes depends on the state of the first window. For example, if views 3 and 5 are closed and View 4 is already open, clicking button 3 and dragging in the dialog box from button 3 to button 5 opens views 3 and 5 (but does not close View 4).
To close a view window
1. From the Window menu's Views submenu, choose the number of the view window you want to close. or In the window's title bar, click the close window button at the far right, or double-click the window menu button at the far left. or From the view window's control menu (open by clicking the window menu button at the far left of the view window's title bar), choose Close.
Alternative Method To close a view window
1. From the Window menu's Views submenu, choose Dialog. The View Groups window opens. By default it docks to the bottom of the window. Numbered buttons that are highlighted represent the open views. 2. To close an open view window, click its numbered button.
To arrange open view windows to minimize unused screen area
1. From the Window menu, choose Arrange.

To cascade open view windows
1. From the Window menu, choose Cascade. Each open view window is assigned an equal amount of screen space, but only the lowest numbered view window is entirely visible. The other open view windows are stacked beneath this view window with only their title bars visible.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 67 of 110
To bring a cascaded view window to the front of the stack, click its title bar. When the title bar is not visible, place the pointer over one of the windows' borders, so that a resizing double-arrow appears, and click.
To tile open view windows
1. From the Window menu, choose Tile. Each open view window is assigned an equal amount of screen space, and the view windows are arranged by number from lowest to highest starting in the MicroStation window's upper left corner and progressing from left to right. If more than three view windows are open, the view windows are arranged in an upper and lower row. If view windows are open on more than one screen, each screen's view windows are tiled on the screen in which they are open.
To make an open view window entirely visible without changing its size or location
1. From the Window menu, choose the window you want to see. (The bottom section of the Window menu lists the open windows.)
To maximize a view window
1. Click the view window's Maximize button. or From the view window's control menu, choose Maximize.
Minimize (left) and Maximize (right) buttons at the right of each view window's title bar
To minimize a view window
1. Click the view window's Minimize button. or From the view window's control menu, choose Minimize.
To restore a view window to its former size
1. Click the view window's Maximize or Minimize button. or From the view window's control menu, choose Restore.
To move a view window with the pointer
1. Position the pointer on the title bar of the view window. 2. Press and hold down the Data button. 3. Drag the view window to the desired location. View groups A view group is a set of view window layouts applicable to a model within the open DGN file. View groups thus make it easy to access and navigate through different models. View groups let you set up your MicroStationBentley Redline session to display your view window preferences including the number of open views, view size, and orientation. As well, a view group definition includes the attributes for each view and their level display settings. Using view groups, you can quickly change from one configuration to another. For example, in some stages of the design process, you might prefer to arrange the screen with View 1 showing the Isometric view and covering two-thirds of the screen, while Views 2, 3 and 4 share the remaining part of the screen equally and show the Front, Bottom and Right views respectively. For other stages, you may like to have a single Isometric view, covering the whole work area. When you create a model, you are prompted to create a view group associated with that model by turning on Create a View Group in the Create Model dialog box. When you create a view group from the template for the view group, by default, the view group is the active view group. However, another view group can be designated by setting the configuration variables MS_VIEWGROUPSEEDNAME or MS_VIEWGROUPSEED.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 68 of 110
MS_VIEWGROUPSEEDNAME allows you to set the name of the view group in the current file to use as a template. MS_VIEW GROUPSEED allows you to set the name of the file where the template view group is located.
The View Groups window is open and docked directly above the status bar by default.
When you save settings (File > Save Settings), view groups that have changes are saved.
To create a view group when not creating a model
1. Set up the view windows in your preferred view windows configuration. 2. In the View Groups window, click the Manage View Groups icon. The Manage View Groups dialog box opens.
3. Click the Create View Group icon. The Create View Group dialog box opens. 4. Complete the Name and Description fields. The Model with which this View Group is associated already is noted on the dialog box. 5. Click OK. The new view group is created.
To change the active view group
1. From the View Groups window's option menu, select a different view group. or In the Manage View Groups dialog box, select the View Group and click Apply (or simply double-click the required view group). Your screen updates to show the new display configuration.
To modify a view group
1. In the View Groups window, click the Manage View Groups icon. The Manage View Groups dialog box opens. 2. Click the Edit the properties of the selected View Group icon. The View Group Properties dialog box opens. 3. Make the appropriate changes to Name and Description. 4. Click OK.
To delete a view group
1. In the View Groups window, click the Manage View Groups icon. The Manage View Groups dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
2. Select the required view group. 3. Click the Delete View Group icon. The highlighted view group is deleted. Using the resize borders
Page 69 of 110
The four borders of a view window are called resize borders because dragging them resizes the view window. For example, by dragging the right or left resize border, you can change the width of the view window. Similarly, by dragging the top or bottom resize border you can change the height of the view window. By dragging a corner of the resize border, you can change both the height and width of a view window. The pointer indicates the directions in which you can drag the border or corner.
Some other MicroStation windows (for example, the Select Settings window) also can be resized in this manner.
To resize a view window with the pointer
1. Position the pointer on one of the view window's resize borders or corners.
To change Position pointer on The pointer becomes
Height
Top or bottom resize border Vertical double arrow
Width
Right or left resize border Horizontal double arrow
Height and width simultaneously Any corner
Diagonal double arrow
2. Press and hold down the Data button. 3. Drag the border or corner to resize the view window as desired. Active view When you have a single view open, by default it is the active view. Where you have multiple views open, any one of them can be the active view. The active view is indicated by a highlighted title bar. You can make any open view the active view by:

Entering a data point within it. Clicking its title bar. Starting a tool from the view's control bar.
When you select tools from the View Control tool box, the active view is acted upon automatically. You are not prompted to select a view after selecting view controls, such as Fit View.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Using View Controls
Page 70 of 110
View controls are used to manipulate a view, the portion of the design displayed in a view window. The most commonly used view controls can be selected in the View Control Bar docked to the top of each view window.
Some of the most useful view controls include the following:
The Update View view control is provided to redraw the display when an operation leaves a view with an incomplete display. For example, if you delete an element that crosses in front of (and partially obscures) another element, the part of the underlying element that should be revealed might not be redrawn automatically.
Window Area, which is used to define a smaller area to display in the selected view, or another.
Fit View, which is used to fit the entire model in a view (for the big picture or to get your bearings).
Rotate View, which is used to rotate a view.
View Previous, which is used like an Undo function to negate previous viewing operations, as many as eight per view. View controls and workflow View controls operate much like drawing tools; many even have tool settings. The interaction between view controls and tools results in an intuitive, comfortable workflow: 1. When you select a view control, it becomes active immediately. Any drawing operation in progress is suspended. 2. When you finish using a view control, control returns to the selected drawing tool, thereby letting you continue the drawing operation from the point at which it was suspended.
To de-select a view control and continue a suspended drawing operation
1. Reset. (If you are in the middle of using a multiple-step view control such as Window Area, you will have to Reset a second time.) Locating and selecting view controls View controls are located as follows:
If Task Navigation in Views is off in the Window menu, the view control bar, which contains the most commonly used view l i d k db d f l h f h i i d
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 71 of 110
In any case, view controls are located in the View Control tool box. The procedure for locating a view control in a tool box is the same as that for locating a tool in a tool box.
The operation of the selected view control depends on the manner in which it is selected.

If you select a view control from a particular view's view control bar, you also are selecting that view as the one on which to operate. If you select a view control from a tool box, the tool will apply to the active view, which is the one with the highlighted title bar. You can make a view the active view by entering a data point within it, clicking its title bar, starting a tool from the view's control bar, or rightclicking within it.
See the view control procedures in View Control Bar.
To select a view control
1. In a view control bar or tool box, click the view control icon.
View Control Bar

View controls are arranged in the view control bar docked by default to the top of each view window as follows:
To
In the view control bar for the view in question, select
Adjust view attribute settings. View Attributes
Update (redraw) a view(s). Update View
Increase the magnification of a view. Zoom In
Decrease the magnification of a view. Zoom Out
Window an area in a view. Window Area
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 72 of 110
Display all displayable elements in the active design and attached references in a view. Fit View
Rotate the view. Rotate View
View a different part of the design without changing the view magnification. Pan View
(3D view only) Interactively walk through a 3D model. Walk
(3D view only) Interactively fly through a 3D model. Fly
(3D view only) Interactively navigate a 3D view. Navigate View
Undo the last viewing operation. View Previous
Redo the last undone viewing operation. View Next
Copy contents of one view to another. Copy View
(3D view only) Change the perspective angle of a 3D view. Change View Perspective see footnote 1
(3D view only) Set a view's Display Depth. Set Display Depth
(3D view only) Set a view's Active Depth. Set Active Depth
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 73 of 110
(3D view only) Show the Display Depth setting for a view(s). Show Display Depth
(3D view only) Show the Active Depth setting for a view(s). Show Active Depth
(3D view only) Change the rotation of a view. Change View Rotation
(3D view only) Adjust the view camera. Camera Settings
Render a view(s), the fence contents, or an element(s). Render see footnote 2
(3D view only) Set the view display mode. View Display Mode
Apply a clip volume to a view. Clip Volume
Apply a clip mask to a view Clip Mask
Some of these view controls operate differently when the active model is 3D. Key-in: VIEW ON <1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8>
To dock the view control bars to a different edge of the view windows, choose the desired edge for example, Bottom from the Show View ToolBox option menu in the View Options category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Using the Grid

When working in MicroStation, you have the option of turning on the grid in any view. The grid consists of evenly-spaced points in the design plane. It is a visual measurement and alignment aid at certain magnifications. Defined spacing between grid points and between grid references (highlighted grid points every 12th point, for example) are collectively known as grid units. Grid unit settings are specific to each model in a DGN file. The appropriateness of grid unit settings for a design task is related to the size of the design, working units, and the required precision. When used in conjunction with Grid Lock, the grid can assist in accurate by eye placement of elements. However, the grid can be an impediment to efficiently using AccuDraw
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Grid orientation
Page 74 of 110
You can define the orientation of the grid to suit the task at hand. Once you define a grid, Grid Lock works as expected and input points are constrained to the grid points. The Grid Orientation is controlled from the Grid section of the DGN File Settings dialog (select Settings > Design File). Options are:

View Grid always aligns to the view and passes through the global origin. ACS Grid aligns to the active ACS. Top Grid aligns to a Top view. It extends along the X and Y axes from the global origin. Right (3D only) Grid aligns to a Right view. It extends along the Y and Z axes from the global origin. Front (3D only) Grid aligns to a Front view. It extends along the X and Z axes from the global origin.
For 2D DGN files, only View, ACS, and Top are applicable. When Grid Orientation is set to anything other than View, then any view rotation will cause the grid to rotate as well. A further option is a key-in that lets you rotate the grid about (its) Z-Axis. This key-in, ACTIVE GRIDANGLE <value> is included specifically to provide compatibility with AutoCAD, which supports only a grid in the XY plane, but can include a rotation angle.
To set up grid units
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Grid. Controls for adjusting grid unit settings are displayed.
DGN File Settings dialog box (Grid category). Grid Master means the number of grid points per master unit. Grid Reference means the number of grid points between grid references.
3. In the Grid Master field, enter the distance (in Working units) between points in the grid. 4. In the Grid Reference field, enter the number of grid points between grid references. 5. From the Grid Configuration option menu, choose one of these:
Configuration Orthogonal Isometric Offset For grid points laid out as follows Along lines perpendicular to design plane x-axis and y-axis Along lines at 30 from design plane x-axis and y-axis Rows offset by half the distance between horizontal grid points
6. In the Grid Aspect field, key in the ratio of the distance between the grid points along the design x-axis and the distance between grid points along the y-axis. In the Isometric configuration, this ratio is fixed. 7. From the Orientation option menu, choose ACS, Top, or View (plus, in 3D, Front and Right). 8 Cli k th OK b tt
3/24/2010
Getting Started
To turn on or off the display of the grid in a view
Page 75 of 110
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
View Attributes dialog box
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn Grid on or off.
To turn on or off the display of the grid in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn Grid on or off. Using Grid Lock When Grid Lock is on, all data points and tentative points are forced to fall precisely on a point in the grid.
To set Grid Lock
1. From the Settings menu's Locks submenu (or the pop-up Locks menu in the status bar) choose Full. The Locks dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 76 of 110
Locks dialog box
2. Turn Grid Lock on or off.

Alternative Method To set Grid Lock
1. In the Settings menu's Locks submenu (or the pop-up Locks menu in the status bar), turn on Grid.
Alternatives to the View Control Bars

It may be that you want to the reclaim the screen real estate used by the view control bars. The View Control tool box and view control pop-up menu also provide access to view controls.
To hide the view control bars
1. From the Window menu, turn off View ToolBox. The View Control tool box alternative The same view controls that are in the view control bars also are available in the View Control tool box.
View Control tool box
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 77 of 110
This tool box also contains several view controls that are enabled only while the active model is 3D. The view control pop-up menu alternative Using the view control pop-up menu is an easy way to select view controls.
To use the pop-up menu to select a view control
1. With the screen pointer in a view, press (and hold down) the <Shift> key. 2. Click the Reset button.
View Control pop-up menu
The pop-up menu is activated at the screen pointer location. 3. Choose the item that corresponds to the view control you want to select. The view control is selected.
The key-in MDL LOAD CUSTOMIZ can be used to customize the View Control pop-up menu. The View Pop-up tab contains controls for doing this. Changes to this pop-up menu are stored in your ustn.m01 file.
Setting View Attributes

Views have a number of attributes that you can adjust individually for each view window.
Some view attribute settings determine whether parts of a model elements on particular levels, text, fill, and drawing aids such as the grid are displayed. Others determine the manner in which the model is displayed with or without a background image or dynamic updating, for example.
Selecting and controlling the display of a background image You can select an image in any of the supported image formats and control whether the image is displayed in the background of each view window.
To select a background image and control its display
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens
3/24/2010
Getting Started
2. In the Category list box, select Views.
Page 78 of 110
The Background Image button and other controls are displayed in the main portion of the dialog box. 3. Click the Background Image button. The Display Image File dialog box opens. 4. Select the desired image file, and click OK. The Display Image File dialog box closes, and focus returns to the DGN File Settings dialog box. 5. For each view window in which you want to control the display of the selected image, choose the window by number from the View option menu and turn on the Background check box. 6. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the background images are applied to the chosen views. Other view attributes View attributes other than level display are set in the View Attributes dialog box. Some determine whether parts of a model and drawing aids will be displayed. Others determine how the DGN file is displayed.
To turn other view attributes on or off
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B> or, if you are using the default function key menu, press <F5>). or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 79 of 110
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the view whose attributes you want to change. 3. Turn the desired view attributes on or off by clicking the check boxes to the left of the appropriate items.
To apply the same attributes to all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B> or, if you are using the default function key menu, press <F5>). or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. From the View Number option menu, choose the view whose attributes you want to apply to all views. 3. Turn on Apply To All. 4. Turn the desired view attributes on or off by clicking the check boxes to the left of the items.
Using Saved Views

A saved view is a view definition, which includes the level display for both the active model and references, the clip volume, and other view attributes. The view definition is given a name and saved in the DGN file. You create the definition by setting up a source view as a template and saving it. The saved view can be recalled to a destination view window. The Saved Views dialog box is used to name, save, delete, import, apply and recall saved views. Using the HTML Author dialog box (Utilities > HTML Author), you can publish an image of a saved view on the Internet.
Using saved views in 3D describes special ways to use saved views in 3D.
Saved views store the on/off state of levels in nested references. In the past, only the level on/off state for direct attachments were stored in a saved view.
To name and save a view
1. Set up the source view so that the desired portion of the design is displayed and the view attributes are as desired. 2. From the Utilities menu, choose Saved Views. or From any view window's control menu, choose View Save/Recall. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F6>. The Saved Views dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 80 of 110
Saved Views dialog box
3. In the Saved View dialog box, click the Save View icon. The Save View dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, key in a name for the view. The maximum number of characters in the name is limited to 511. Alphabetic, numeric, and special characters are valid. Lowercase characters are interpreted as uppercase. 5. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description. 6. From the View list box, choose the number of the source view. 7. Click OK.
To recall a saved view
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Saved Views. or From any view window's control menu, choose View Save/Recall. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F6>. The Saved Views dialog box opens. 2. From the View list box, choose the number of the destination view. 3 In the list box select the saved view you want to recall
3/24/2010
Getting Started
4. Click the Apply button.
To delete a saved view
Page 81 of 110
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Saved Views. or From any view window's control menu, choose View Save/Recall. or If you are using the default function key menu, press <F6>. The Saved Views dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the saved view you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete Saved View icon.
To create an HTML document from a saved view
1. From the Utilities menu, choose HTML Author. The HTML Author dialog box opens. 2. Select the Design File Saved Views radio button. 3. Click OK. The Select Design File dialog box opens. 4. Select the file containing the desired saved view and click Open. The Design File Walkthrough dialog box opens.
5. Adjust any settings as necessary and click OK. The Create HTML File dialog box opens. 6. Adjust any settings as necessary and click OK. The HTML document is created and stored in the directory defined in the Create HTML File dialog box's File Name field. If Display File In Browser is checked, clicking OK also opens your default Web browser to display the document. You can publish the document on the Internet by uploading it to a Web server.
Models
When you draw, or place elements, in a MicroStation DGN file, you are creating a model. A model can be either 2D or 3D, and is stored as a discrete object within the DGN file. Each DGN file, therefore, contains one or more models, either 2D or 3D. It may be helpful to think of a DGN file as a box that can contain both 3D and 2D objects models any of which you can view individually.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 82 of 110
When you first create a new DGN file from one of the seed files, this provides the empty container setup with a default model ready for you to create your design. If you use a 2D seed file, then the default setup is 2D, while a 3D seed file defaults to a 3D setup. In either case, you can create both 2D and 3D models in the open DGN file. Every model has its own set of eight views. The model whose views are displayed or available for display at a given time is the active model. You can create two types of models design and sheet.

Design model can be either 2D or 3D and consists of design geometry. Sheet model used to attach references for composing drawings.
Every model has its own unit system. Conversely, levels are DGN file-specific and not model-specific. Using the Models dialog box (File > Models), you can create and switch quickly between models in a DGN file. Alternatively, you can use the View Groups window to rapidly switch between models visited in the current design session. These can include models in other DGN files. Creating Models Referencing Models Cells and Models Importing and Copying Models Deleting Models
Creating Models
Working with design models, you can create one or more discrete models, simply, within a single DGN file. Using the Models dialog box, you can quickly switch between the various models in the DGN file. Where a DGN file contains many models, you can set a filter so that only particular models display in the dialog box. You can toggle the filter on or off, as required, but filters are not saved from one design session to the next. Similarly, you can create sheet models to compose your design drawings. The drawings typically consist of references of the design models. References can be from the open DGN file, or from other DGN files on disk. As with design models, you can use the Models dialog box to switch between the sheet models. At any given time, only one active model can be displayed, either a sheet model or a design model. When you first create a DGN file, it has a default design model ready to place elements. When you open the Models dialog box, the default model has the name Default, with the Description as Master Model. You can use this model and, if necessary, change its name and description to more appropriate values.
To create a new Design or Sheet model
1. From the File menu, choose Models. The Models dialog box opens.
In the Models dialog box click the Create a new model icon
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 83 of 110
The Create Model dialog box opens.
3. From the Type option menu, choose Design, Sheet, Design From Seed or Sheet From Seed. 4. If the Type is Design, choose 2D or 3D from the right option menu. The Seed Model field displays the name of the seed model. 5. In the Name field, key in the required name. 6. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a brief description of the model. 7. In the Ref Logical field, key in a logical name for the model. The logical name is used to uniquely identify the model when it is attached as a reference. 8. (Optional) Turn on Create a View Group (to create a View Group for the model). Creating a View Group lets you change models via the View Groups window also. 9. If you will use the model as a cell, turn on Can be placed as a cell and select a cell type. 10. Click OK.
To set the seed model for the most recently created model type (design or sheet), key-in MODEL SEED. You can set the seed model for design or sheet models. Key-in MODEL SEED DESIGN [File] [Model] to set the seed model for design and MODEL SEED SHEET [File] [Model] for sheet models. To change the name and/or description of a model
1. In the Models dialog box, click the Edit Model Properties icon. or Right-click on the model in the list box and select Properties from the menu.
The Model Properties dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 84 of 110
2. Edit the Name, Description, and Ref Logical fields, as required. 3. If required, turn on/off Can be placed as a cell. 4. Click OK. Where you have a large list of models, you can use the filter option to filter the list box to display only those models that meet a certain criteria. For example, if you type t, or 100, in the name filter, only those models will display whose names contain t, or 100, respectively. You can add filters to multiple columns, to further filter the display.
To filter the list of models
1. In the Models dialog box, click the List Filter icon.
A filter row displays at the top of the list box. 2. In the filter row, click on the field to filter. 3. Enter the filter information and accept with a data point or press <Enter>. The Models list box updates to display the filtered list of models. With the filter defined, you can toggle the filtered display with the List Filter icon. For information on defining filters as string, integer, or boolean expressions, refer to the tables in Defining and Deleting Filters.
Referencing Models
In many cases, particularly on large projects, it may be that a design model consists of the active model, plus one or more references to other models. These references may be to other models contained in the open DGN file, or they may be models contained in other DGN files. When other models are included as references to the active model, they still retain the link to the original model. This means that any changes to the original model will be reflected in the references. Using references gives you the option of having several designers work on a project simultaneously. For example, a civil designer could be working on the earthworks model, an architect on the building model, and a mechanical designer on the plant model. Each could have the other models referenced to their own model to keep abreast of any design changes in the other disciplines.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Cells and Models
Page 85 of 110
When you create models in a DGN file, you have the option of specifying that the model Can be placed as a cell. When this option is turned on, the model can be referenced as a model, or placed as a cell. When placed as a cell, the link to the original model is cut.
To select a model as a cell
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. From the Cell Library dialog box's File menu, choose Attach. The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens. 3. Select the DGN file containing the required model (to be placed as a cell) and click OK. The dialog box closes and the DGN file is loaded as a cell library. Models that can be placed as cells are displayed in the list box. 4. Select the required model and click Placement to make it the active cell. 5. Use the Place Active Cell tool in the Cells task to place the model as a cell.
Importing and Copying Models

As well as creating references to models, you can import a model from another DGN file into the open DGN file. In this case, the link with the original model is cut and the imported model becomes another model in the open DGN file. You can import models via the Import Models icon in the Models dialog box, or you can drag and drop the DGN/DWG file from Windows Explorer, or from the Models dialog box in another session of MicroStation. Additionally, you can make a copy of an existing model in the open DGN file.
To import a model
1. In the Models dialog box, click the Import a model icon.
The Import Model From File dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the dialog box to select the required DGN file. 3. Click OK. The Select Models dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 86 of 110
4. Select the model to import. 5. Click OK.

To import model(s) with drag and drop from Windows Explorer
1. Open the Models dialog box in the active model. 2. From Windows Explorer, drag and drop the DGN file containing the required model(s) into the Models dialog box. Where one or more models in the selected file have the same name as existing models in the open DGN file, then an alert box gives you the option of overwriting the models in the active DGN, or renaming them automatically as they are imported.
To import model(s) with drag and drop from a second session of MicroStation
1. Open the Models dialog box in both sessions of MicroStation. 2. Select one or more models that are to be imported. 3. Drag the selected models to the Models dialog box in the other session of MicroStation. Where one or more models being imported have the same name as existing models in the open DGN file, then an alert box gives you the option of overwriting the models in the active DGN, or renaming them automatically as they are imported.
To copy a model
1. In the Models dialog box, click the Copy a model icon.
The Copy Model dialog box opens. 2. From the Model to Copy option menu, choose the required model. By default, the name of the model appears in the Name field, but with a numerical increment (such as Plan-1). 3. (Optional) Key in a new name and description. 4. Click OK.
Deleting Models
You can delete any model in a DGN file, except the Default model that is present when the DGN file is first created.
To delete a model in the open DGN file
1. In the Models dialog box, select the model to be deleted. 2. Click the Delete a model icon.
You can Undo a model deletion.
Levels
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 87 of 110
Each element in a model is on a drawing level. Levels are analogous to transparent overlays: In different combinations they make it easier to see parts of a model. How Many Levels? Setting the Active Level Controlling Level Display Level Symbology Overrides
How Many Levels?

There can be virtually an unlimited number of levels (4 billion) in a DGN file.
You can set up a level structure to make it easy to manipulate the display of various levels and save the level structure in a separate file to make it easier to use with other designs.
Setting the Active Level

The level on which new elements are placed in a model is that model's Active Level. The Active Level is the same level in all views.
LV denotes the Active Level
The name of the level to which the Active Level is set is shown in the Attributes tool box and the status bar.
If you neglect to save settings in the open DGN file before closing it, changes to its models' Active Level settings will not be in effect the next time you open the file.
To set the Active Level using the Active Level drop-down menu
1. In the Attributes tool box, click the Active Level drop-down menu.
Active Level drop-down menu
3/24/2010
Getting Started
The menu drops down and displays the available levels. 2. Choose the desired level to be the Active Level.
To set the Active Level using the Level Display dialog box
Page 88 of 110
1. Click the Level Display icon on the Primary Tools tool box. or From the Settings menu's Level submenu, choose Display. The Level Display dialog box opens. The active level is highlighted.
Level Display dialog box with the active level highlighted in green
2. Double-click the level you want to make the active level. or Right-click the level you want to make the active level, and choose Set Active from the pop-up menu.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 89 of 110
Level Display pop-up menu showing Set Active Level option
The selected level appears as the active level on the Attributes tool box.
To set the Active Level with a key-in
1. Key in ACTIVE LEVEL <level-spec> or LV=<level-spec>. Level-spec specifies the level.

To set the Active Level using the Level Manager dialog box
1. From the Settings menu's Level submenu, choose Manager. or Click the Active Level field on the status bar. The Level Manager dialog box opens. 2. Double-click the level you want to make the active level. or Right-click the level you want to make the active level, and choose Set Active from the pop-up menu. The selected level appears as the active level in the Level menu in the Attributes tool box.
Controlling Level Display

Use the Level Display dialog box to turn the display of levels on or off on a model by model basis.
If you neglect to save settings in the open DGN file before closing it, changes to its models' level display settings will not be in effect the next time you open the file.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
To open the Level Display dialog box
Page 90 of 110
1. Click the Level Display icon on the Primary Tools tool box. or Press <Ctrl-E>. or From the Settings menu's Level submenu, choose Display. The Level Display dialog box opens listing levels in the open DGN file.
Level Display dialog box
A dimmed entry in the tree indicates that the display of that reference is turned off.
To toggle the display of levels for references
1. In the Level Display dialog box, click the Show Target Tree icon to turn on the display of the target tree. 2. Select the references in the target tree. The levels in the chosen reference display. Notice the File and Logical columns display the reference name and logical name. 3. Click a level that is being used (i.e., highlighted with a dot in the Used column) in the open DGN file to toggle the level on/off. If the level is highlighted black, the level is on in all enabled views. If the level is highlighted light grey, the level is off in all enabled views, and if the level is highlighted dark grey, the on|off status is mixed in the enabled views. The level could be on in one view and off in another view.
To toggle the display of levels in all views
1. Right-click any of the view buttons and choose Select All Views. 2. Select any level(s). You can click only those levels that contains elements, indicated with a dot in the level's Used column. The display of the select level toggles to its opposite state (on/off) in all views. If the level was on, the dot changes from white to black. If the level was off, the dot changes from black to white.
Only reference levels that are used display in the list when the reference target is selected.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
To toggle the display of a level in all views in all models stored in the open DGN file
Page 91 of 110
1. In the Level Display dialog box, choose Global Display from the Mode option menu. 2. Select the level. The display of the selected level toggles (on/off) in all views in all models. This has the same effect as toggling the check mark in the Global column on the Level Manager dialog box.
All views have the same levels on/off while Mode is set to Global Display in the Level Display dialog box.
To toggle the display of a level in all views in all models using the Active Level drop-down menu
1. In the Level Display dialog box, choose Global Display from the Mode option menu. 2. In the Attributes tool box, click the Active Level drop-down menu. The levels in the open DGN file are listed. 3. Click the check mark next to the level on which you want to change the display. The check mark changes to a circle indicating the level display is off. To turn the display back on, click the circle so the check mark reappears.
You cannot turn off the display of the Active Level if the Display Active Level in All Views preference is on (the default) in the Operation category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
To change the display of levels graphically
1. In the Level Display dialog box, select the Change Level tool. 2. Identify an element residing on the level for which you want to change the display setting. 3. Enter a data point anywhere in any view except on an element to accept the element. 4. In the Change Level settings window, choose Display Off from the Level option menu to turn off the level(s) of the identified element. or Choose Display Only from the Level option menu to display only the level(s) of the identified element. or Choose Lock from the Level option menu to lock the level(s) of the identified element. or Choose Unlock from the Level option menu to unlock the level(s) of the identified element.
Alternative Method To change the display of levels graphically
1. Select or fence an element(s) residing on the level(s) for which you want to change the display setting. 2. In the Level Display dialog box, select the Change Level tool. 3. Continue with step 4 in the primary method for this procedure described above the option you choose in the Level option menu will operate on the selected or fenced element(s) rather than the identified element. Filters are useful for grouping associated levels for the purposes of viewing or not viewing as a group.
To toggle the display of a set of levels using filters
1. In the Level Display dialog box, choose the List Filters icon. All filters in the open DGN file are listed. 2. Choose the filter to be applied. Levels that meet the filter criteria display. 3. In the list box, click a level(s). You can click only those levels that contains elements, indicated with a dot in the level's Used column.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Docking the Level Display dialog box
Page 92 of 110
You can dock the Level Display dialog box if Allow Docking is on (the default) in the Level Display Properties dialog box.
Level Symbology Overrides

To make it clearer which elements are on a particular level, you can define an alternative symbology for all elements on a level. You can then display the elements with their normal symbology or with the level symbology overrides.
To display elements using level symbology overrides
(O ti
l) T t
b l
id
ll i
th L
lO
id
tt ib t
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 93 of 110
Cells
Typically, a cell is a small 2D drawing, or a 3D object usually of a frequently-used or complex symbol, notation, detail, or part created in MicroStation. Cells are stored as models in a DGN file called a cell library, which can contain many cells (models). Cell Libraries are exactly like DGN files. Any DGN file can be attached as a cell library and any cell library can be opened as a DGN file.
Sample building cells
Sample cells for civil engineering
Some sample cells for geospatial
Some sample cells for plant
Why Use Cells? Cell Origin Working with Cell Libraries Creating and Editing Cells Placing Cells Annotation Cells Dimension-driven Cells
Why Use Cells?
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Cells are used for these reasons:

Page 94 of 110
To save time drawing patterns and repeated details To make it easy to update details throughout a DGN file To provide uniformity
You can create your own cell libraries.
Cell Origin
Each cell has a cell origin, defined when the cell is created, that can be thought of as the cell's handle. When you enter a data point to place the cell, the origin is placed at that point.
Working with Cell Libraries

Cell libraries are commonly stored in DGN libraries (.dgnlib). Any DGN library can be attached as a cell library, and any DGN library can be opened as a DGN file. Each model in a DGN file becomes a separate cell. When you create a cell library, a blank default model is created. This blank model displays when you first open the cell library as a DGN file. You can change to different models with the Models dialog box (File > Models).
DWG files also can be attached as cell libraries. DWG files may contain blocks, which you can place as shared cells.
Pre-V8 files and cell libraries are not supported as cells. You cannot open a pre-V8 cell library and upgrade it to a V8 DGN file. It must be attached as a cell library.
You can merge cell libraries by importing models into a DGN file.
The following topics describe procedures for creating and attaching a cell library, browsing cells, and publishing a cell library on the Internet.
To create and attach a cell library
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose New. The Create Cell Library dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 95 of 110
Create Cell Library dialog box
3. (Optional) To select a different destination disk drive or directory, choose the desired drive or directory from the Save in list box. 4. In the File name field, key in a name for the new cell library. By convention, cell library files end in the extension .dgnlib. 5. Click the Save button.
To attach an existing cell library file
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose Attach File. The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 96 of 110
Attach Cell Library dialog box
3. From the Files of type list box, choose the type of file to use as a cell library: *.dgnlib, * .cel, *.dgn, or *.dwg. 4. Select the name of the cell library in the list box. 5. Click Open.
Alternative Method To attach an existing cell library file
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Cell Selector. If there is no cell library already attached, the Select Cell Library to Load dialog box opens. 2. Select the name of the cell library in the list box. 3. Click Open. The Cell Selector dialog box opens, displaying a tile for each of the available cells in the attached cell library.
To attach an existing cell library folder
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose Attach Folder. The Browse For Folder dialog box opens. 3. Choose the folder to attach. or Click Make New Folder and choose the new folder. 4. Click OK.
To attach a remote cell library
3/24/2010
Getting Started
1. Key in MDL LOAD CELLSEL. or In the MDL dialog box (Utilities > MDL Applications), load the application CELLSEL. 2. Key in CELLSEL LOADURL. The Specify URL for Cell Library dialog box opens. The controls in this dialog box are analogous to those in the Select Remote File dialog box. 3. In the URL text box, key in the path to the remote cell library. 4. (Optional) Adjust any other settings as necessary. 5. Click OK.
To browse cells
Page 97 of 110
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. If a cell library is attached, its name is in the title bar.
Cell Library dialog box
If no cell library is attached and there are no cells in the DGN file, there is nothing to browse. For information about attaching a cell library, follow the procedure To attach a previously existing cell library. 2. In the list box, select the name of a cell. An image of the cell is displayed to the right of the list box. 3. Browse through the cells by selecting other cells with the mouse or by pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard. As each cell is selected, its image is displayed to the right of the list box.
You can browse the contents of cell libraries when setting the Active Cell using the Place Active Cell settings window. Clicking the magnifying glass icon next to the Active Cell field opens the Cell Library dialog box for browsing.
To create an HTML document from a cell library
1. From the Utilities menu, choose HTML Author. The HTML Author dialog box opens. 2. Select the Cell Library radio button. 3. Click OK. The Select Cell Library to Open dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
4. Select a cell library and click Open. The HTML Cell Page dialog box opens.
Page 98 of 110
5. Adjust any settings as necessary and click OK. The Create HTML File dialog box opens. 6. Adjust any settings as necessary and click OK. The HTML document is created and stored in the directory defined in the Create HTML File dialog box's File Name field. If Display File In Browser is checked, clicking OK also opens your default Web browser to display the document. You can publish the document on the Internet by uploading it to a Web server.
Creating and Editing Cells

This section covers how to create and edit cells.
Instead of creating cells from scratch, consider using the cell libraries supplied in MicroStation's sample workspaces. This could save you substantial time and effort. Also, many cell libraries can be purchased from third-party vendors. These cell libraries can be customized to meet your exact needs. If you need a cell but cannot add one to a cell library (because, for example, a system administrator is in charge of the cell libraries in your company), consider using a group to place the same elements repeatedly in a design. A group is an unnamed cell that is not defined in a cell library.
DWG workmode supports only shared cells.
Cell type When you create a cell, you define the cell origin (the location around which the cell is placed) and the cell type. There are three types of cells: graphic, point, and menu. The symbology (color, line style, and line weight) of a graphic cell is determined when it is created, whereas a point cell assumes the active symbology when placed. A graphic cell rotates when a view is rotated, while a point cell is view-independent. A point cell can be especially useful for text.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 99 of 110
A point cell has one snappable point its origin and is always placed on the Active Level, regardless of the levels on which its components were created. A graphic cell, however, is level-independent. That is, it can be placed on levels relative to the Active Level or on the same levels as when created, depending on whether Relative is on. The differences between graphic and point cells are summarized in this table:
Graphic Cell Level Rotation Snap level independent with view to keypoints Point Cell placed on active level view independent to cell origin
Symbology active settings when created active settings when placed The term point cell as discussed here refers to the cell type, which is assigned when the cell is created. This should not be confused with the Active Point Cell, which refers to a cell in a cell library that is designated for placement using the tools in the Points task . It is possible for a cell of either type graphic or point to be the Active Point Cell.
To create a cell
1. If no cell library is attached, attach one before continuing. 2. Draw the contents of the cell on the desired levels. 3. With the Element Selection tool, select all the elements to be included in the cell. or Place a fence that contains all elements to be included in the cell.
4. In the Cells task, select the Define Cell Origin tool.
The prompt in the status bar is Define origin. The cell origin is the point that is used to position the cell in a design. When a cell is placed in a design, the cell origin will lie on the data point entered to position it. 5. Enter a data point to define the cell origin. The origin stays active and displays until the next time the Define Cell Origin tool is selected. 6. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 7. In the lower right corner of the dialog box, click the Create button. or Right-click the cell and choose New from the pop-up menu. The Create Cell dialog box opens.
Create Cell dialog box
8. In the Name field, key in a name. 9. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description. 10. From the list box, choose the Cell type.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
11. Click the Create button.
Page 100 of 110
Alternatively, you can define the cell origin (steps 45) before selecting or fencing the elements (step 3) to be included in the cell.
One or more cells can be made part of another cell, or nested. Just select the cells to be nested when you create the new cell. If a cell with the same name as the nested cell exists in the library, the nested cell is replaced by a reference to the cell in the cell library. When the cell is placed, the reference is expanded back to the original geometry.
To edit the name or description of a cell
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell. 3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library dialog box, click the Edit button. or Right-click the cell and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. The Edit Cell Information dialog box opens.
4. Edit the name, description, or both. 5. Click the Modify button.

To open a cell for editing
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell. 3. Right-click the cell and choose Open for Editing from the pop-up menu. The cell opens as the active model.
To delete a cell from the attached cell library
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell. 3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library dialog box, click the Delete button. or Right-click the cell and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. Since the deletion cannot be undone, an alert box opens, asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected cell. see footnote 3 4. Click OK.
ByCell
When a cell is created, the symbology (i.e., color, line style, and line weight) of each element is established. When that cell is placed in a DWG file this symbology is used However it is possible to leave the symbology open ended by using ByCell If ByCell is selected as the
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 101 of 110
color, line style, and/or line weight, when the cell is placed the active attributes are used. For example, if a cell is created containing a square with color set to red and a circle with color set to ByLevel, when the cell is placed into a DWG file with color set to yellow, the square appears in red and the circle appears in the active color of yellow.
ByCell is enabled, by default, only in DWG workmode. You can enable ByCell in DGN workmode by enabling the following capability in the standards, project, or user configuration file: _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_BYCELL.
Placing Cells
Before you can place a cell, you must activate it for the desired method of placement:
For general Placement with the Place Active Cell tool or the Place Active Cell Matrix tool in the Cells task. This cell is called the Active Cell.
As a line Terminator with the Place Active Line Terminator tool in the Cells task. This cell is called the Active Line Terminator.
As a Point cell, for placement with the tools in the Points task. This cell is called the Active Point Cell.
For Patterning with the Pattern Area tool in the Patterns task. This cell is called the Active Pattern Cell.
To designate a cell as an active cell
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. (Optional) From the File menu, choose Attach File. The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens. 3. (Optional) Select a cell library and click Open. 4. In the list box, select the name of the cell. 5. Click the button Placement, Terminator, Point, or Pattern in the Active Cells section. or Right-click the cell and choose Place from the pop-up menu. You also can use the Cell Selector dialog box to designate a cell as an active cell. When you use this method not only is the cell activated, but the pre-designated cell placement tool for that cell is automatically selected as well.
Alternative Method To designate a cell as an active cell
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Cell Selector. If a cell library is not already attached, the Select Cell Library to Load dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
The Cell Selector dialog box opens. Each cell in the attached cell library is displayed on its own button.
Page 102 of 110
3. Click the button on which the cell you want to make active is displayed. Cell selector files The Cell Selector dialog box is used to find and place cells and to create cell selector files (.csf). Cell selector files can contain cells from different cell libraries. Each cell in a cell selector file is displayed on a button in the Cell Selector dialog box. The dialog box is resizable and each cell's button can be customized.
For each cell that you add to a cell selector file you can define the following properties of its button:

Color Orientation in which 3D cells appear Whether to show the cell (graphics), cell name, cell description, or cell graphics and name
3/24/2010
Getting Started

Page 103 of 110
Font, if you show the cell name or description A key-in that will be activated when the button is clicked.
After adding a cell selector file you can add to it the entire contents of a cell library and you can add single cells from different cell libraries. You may want to define the properties of each button as you add a cell to it. However, if you want most cells' buttons to have the same properties you can define default properties in the Define Defaults dialog box.
After a cell has been added to a cell selector file you can use the Configure Cell Selector Button dialog box to change the properties of its button.
For each cell selector file, use the Define Button Size dialog box to set the size for all of its buttons and the amount of space between the buttons.
Cell selector files can be edited by copying, moving, deleting, and adding buttons containing cells.
To add a cell selector file
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Cell Selector. If a cell library is not already attached, the Select Cell Library to Load dialog box opens. 2. (Optional) In the Select Cell Library to Load dialog box, select any file and click Open. The Cell Selector dialog box opens. Each cell in the attached cell library is displayed on its own button. 3. From the File menu, choose New. The Define Cell Selector File dialog box opens. 4. Key in a file name and click Save. The Cell Selector dialog box is blank; no cells appear on the buttons. 5 F th Fil h S
3/24/2010
Getting Started
To add a cell library's cells to a cell selector file
Page 104 of 110
1. In the Cell Selector dialog box (Utilities > Cell Selector) select File > Open. 2. Select the cell selector file to which you want to add cells and click Open. 3. From the File menu, choose Load Cell Library. The Select Cell Library to Load dialog box opens. 4. Select a cell library and click Open. 5. (Optional) If the cell selector file already contains cells, to clear them before loading the cell library, click Yes. or (Optional) If the cell selector file already contains cells, to keep them and to add the cell library, click No. The cells from the library are loaded into the cell selector file. 6. From the File menu, choose Save.
To add single cells to a cell selector file
1. In the Cell Selector dialog box (Utilities > Cell Selector), select File > Open. 2. Select the cell selector file to which you want to add cells and click Open. 3. From the Edit menu, choose Insert. The Define Button dialog box opens. 4. (Optional) To select a cell from a different library, click Browse. The Select Cell Library dialog box opens. 5. (Optional) Select a cell library and click Open. 6. Click Select. The Select Cell dialog box opens. 7. Select a cell to add to the cell selector file and click OK. 8. (Optional) Change any of the button settings as necessary. 9. Click OK. 10. Repeat steps 39 to add additional cells. 11. From the File menu, choose Save.
To change the defaults for adding cells to a cell selector file
1. In the Cell Selector dialog box (Utilities > Cell Selector), select File > Open. 2. Select the cell selector file whose defaults you want to change and click Open. 3. From the Edit menu, choose Defaults. The Define Defaults dialog box opens. 4. Set the defaults for adding new buttons to the cell selector file. 5. Click the Close button. 6. From the File menu, choose Save.
To change a cell selector file's button size
1. In the Cell Selector dialog box (Utilities > Cell Selector), select File > Open. 2. Select the cell selector file whose button size you want to change and click Open. 3. From the Edit menu, choose Button Size.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
The Define Button Size dialog box opens. 4. Key in a button size, in pixels. 5. Key in a gap size, in pixels. 6. Click OK. 7. From the File menu, choose Save.
To edit a cell selector file
Page 105 of 110
1. In the Cell Selector dialog box (Utilities > Cell Selector), select File > Open. 2. Select the cell selector file that you want to edit and click Open. 3. To move a cell, select the cell and select Edit > Cut. or To copy a cell, select the cell and select Edit > Copy. 4. Select the button where you want to place the cell and select Edit > Paste. 5. To edit a button's properties, select the button and select Edit > Button. The Configure Cell Selector Button dialog box opens. 6. Change any of the button settings as necessary. 7. Click the Close button. 8. To remove one cell, select it and select Edit > Delete. 9. To remove all cells, select Edit > Clear Configuration. 10. From the File menu, choose Save. Placing content from a Web page as a cell Some Web pages contain DWG content that is i-Drop enabled. This means that you can drag the content from the Web page and drop it into a MicroStation model. When you drop this content into a model, it is placed as a cell. In order to place content from a Web page as a cell, you must download the i-Drop Indicator from http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/index?siteID=123112&id=2753219&linkID=2475161. It is installed as a plug-in to your browser. When you point to content that is i-Drop enabled, your pointer changes to the i-Drop icon. The WEBDROP DIALOG key-in opens the Web-Drop Settings dialog box, which allows you to set options that will affect content dragged from a Web page and dropped in a model.
When you drag content from a Web page it is downloaded to MicroStation, the Place Active Cell tool becomes active and you can apply its tool settings to the content, and the content is placed as a cell. Shared cells If Use Shared Cells is on in the Cell Library dialog box, cells are placed as shared cells.
What is a shared cell?
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 106 of 110
The first time you place a cell with Use Shared Cells on, the shared cell definition (elements comprising the cell) is stored in the DGN file in much the same way as it is stored in the cell library. To place subsequent instances of the shared cell, the cell library does not need to be attached. In other words, a shared cell can have many instances in a DGN but only one definition. When a shared cell instance is replaced using the Replace Cells tool, all instances of the cell are replaced! For an unshared cell, on the other hand, the library definition is stored in the DGN file each time the cell is placed. Using shared cells can therefore be a way to reduce DGN file size. The reduction is greatest in files with cells that have a large number of component elements and/or instances.
It is not necessary to know where the shared cell definition is in the DGN file; identifying any instance of the shared cell identifies the actual definition.
Reasons to use shared cells
The use of shared cells is recommended for these reasons:
Shared cells are faster to place and manipulate than unshared cells. The first time a cell is placed in the DGN file, the cell library in which it is stored must be attached. If the cell is placed as a shared cell, it is not necessary to have the cell library attached to place additional instances of that cell. All instances of a shared cell in the DGN file are replaced when any instance of that shared cell is replaced. Shared cells can be associated with points on other elements, if Association Lock (Settings > Locks > Association) is on. For example, if a shared door cell is placed in a wall and associated with that wall, the door will automatically move if the wall is moved. Shared cells usually reduce DGN file size, thereby improving performance.
Controlling the level on which cells are placed When you place a graphic cell with the Place Active Cell tool or Select and Place Cell tool, the level(s) on which the graphic cell are placed in the open DGN file are determined by first evaluating the level(s) on which the elements in the graphic cell resided when the graphic cell was created and then applying the Relative tool setting. If Relative is off, the Name of the level(s) on which elements in the graphic cell resided when the cell was created determine the level(s) on which the graphic cell is placed, as follows:
If the graphic cell has elements a level with the same name exists in the DGN file, the elements in the graphic cell on that level are placed on the corresponding level in the DGN file, even if the level settings are not the same. If a level with the same name does not exist in the DGN file, the level is copied from the cell library into the DGN file. However, any elements in the graphic cell on the Default level in the cell library are placed on the Active Level.
If Relative is on, the Number of the level(s) on which elements in the graphic cell resided when the cell was created determine the level(s) on which the graphic cell is placed, as follows:
The graphic cell is placed on a level(s) relative to the Active Level's number. For example, consider a graphic cell that was created with elements on levels with the numbers 5, 7, and 8. If the Active Level's number is 1, the cell is placed on levels with the numbers 1, 3, and 4. If the Active Level's number is 45, the cell is placed on levels with the numbers 45, 47, and 48. However, if the graphic cell has elements on any level whose number is not an attribute of a level in the DGN file, the placement operation fails.
Creating cell elements on the Default level When you create a cell's geometry, you typically place elements on the level where you want those elements to ultimately appear when the cell is placed in a design. Using an alternate approach, you can create parts of a cell's geometry on the Default level. To enable element placement on the Default level, set the active level to Default in the Attributes tool box, and set Symbology to ByLevel in the Level Manager dialog box. If you place a cell containing elements that were placed with those settings in effect, those elements take on the attributes of the active level. All other elements in the cell are placed on their defined levels and take on those levels' respective attributes. This technique applies
3/24/2010
Getting Started
only to graphic cells, not point cells.
Page 107 of 110
For example, suppose you created a cell with a line element on the Default level with By Level attributes assigned and an arc element on level Lvlnam1 with By Level attributes assigned. When you place the cell on level Lvlnam3:

The line element is placed on the Lvlnam3 and takes on the By Level attributes of Lvlnam3. The arc element is placed on Lvlnam1 and takes on that level's By Level attributes.
Annotation Cells
Annotation cells are cells that obey the rules of annotation scale. That is, when you place them with annotation scale lock on, they are scaled by the current annotation scale. Similarly, if you change the annotation scale, you have the option of simultaneously scaling all annotation cells in the model. Other options, such as the Element Info dialog box, and several key-ins let you change the annotation scale factor for existing annotation cells in a model. Creating and placing annotation cells When you create a new model, you have options for specifying that it can be placed as a cell and, optionally, as an annotation cell. These options are located in the Cell Properties section of the Create Model dialog box. For existing models, you can use the Model Properties dialog box to modify the cell properties. In the Cell Library dialog box, annotation cells can be distinguished by the Annotation icon in the Annotation column.
To enable a cell for placement as an annotation cell
1. Open the library that contains the cell. 2. In the Models dialog box, select the cell model and click the Edit Model Properties icon. 3. In the Model Properties dialog box, turn on Can be placed as a cell and Can be placed as an annotation cell.
Model Properties dialog box with added Cell Properties
4. Click OK. At placement time, you can turn on its Annotation Scale Lock to place the cell with annotation scale applied. Adding/removing annotation scale for existing annotation cells
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 108 of 110
For previously placed annotation cells, you can enable/disable annotation scale lock with the key-ins ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD and ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE. If a selection set is active, the key-ins apply only to those selected annotation cells. Where no selection set is active, all annotation cells for the model are included.
To add annotation scale to existing annotation cells
1. (Optional) Use the Element Selection tool to select the required cells. If none are selected, then the key-in will apply to all annotation cells. 2. In the Key-in window, key in ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD. The (selected) annotation cells are scaled by the annotation scale factor.
To remove annotation scale from existing annotation cells
1. (Optional) Use the Element Selection tool to select the required cells. If none are selected, then the key-in will apply to all annotation cells. 2. In the Key-in window, key in ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE. Any annotation scaling is removed from the (selected) annotation cells. That is, the scale factor is set back to 1. Changing the scale of existing annotation cells For previously placed annotation cells, you can change the existing annotation scale factor:

In the Models properties dialog box gives you the option of modifying the scale for all annotation cells in the model. In the Element Info dialog box for a single annotation cell, or a selection set. With the key-in ANNOTATIONSCALE CHANGE <value> for all annotation cells in the model, or for a selection set.
To change the scale of existing annotation cells with a key-in
1. (Optional) Use the Element Selection tool to select the required cells. If none are selected, then the key-in will apply to all annotation cells. 2. In the Key-in window, key in ANNOTATIONSCALE CHANGE <value>. The selected cells are scaled by the new annotation scale factor <value>.
Dimension-driven Cells
Cells have many uses: They can save time drawing repeated details, make it easy to update details throughout a design, provide uniformity in a project, and so on. Although they can be modified, most cells are placed as static parts of a DGN file. A dimension-driven cell has special intelligence. It is not static, but dynamically changes based on relationships that were defined when it was created. A cell in the DGN file that is based on a dimension-driven cell is called a derived cell. In DWG workmode, by default, dimension-driven design tools are disabled.
To place a derived cell
1. Make the dimension-driven cell the active cell. 2. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL. 3. Key in PLACE CELL DIMENSION. The Dimension-Driven Design dialog box opens. A list box with each dimension or constant's initial value (the value stored in the library cell) is displayed.
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 109 of 110
Dimension-Driven Design dialog box
4. (Optional) For each dimension or constant you want to change, select it in the list box, press <Tab>, and key in the new value in the Edit field. If the cell is visible in a view, the changes display dynamically. 5. (Optional) To place the cell with active constraints so it can be modified after placement, turn on Save Constraints. 6. Enter a data point to position the cell's origin. The cell is derived and placed. If the cell cannot be derived from the supplied dimension and constant values, the cell is not placed, and you are prompted to enter new values.
Dimensions can be tagged by a constant or, if not, appear in the list labelled as DIMENSION.
To modify a derived cell
1. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL. 2. Key in MODIFY DIMENSIONS. 3. Identify the cell. The Dimension-Driven Design dialog box opens. A list box with each dimension or constant's value is displayed. 4. For each dimension or constant you want to change, select it in the list box, press <Tab>, and key in the new value in the Edit field. 5. Enter a data point to modify the cell. If the cell cannot be derived from the supplied dimension and constant values, the cell is not modified and you are prompted to enter new values.
References
A reference attachment is a model attached to and displayed with the active model for plotting or construction purposes. A reference cannot be modified. You can attach, as a reference, a model that resides in either the open DGN file, some other DGN file, or a DWG file. Elements in a reference display as though they were in the active model. Although you cannot manipulate the elements in a reference, you can snap to them and even copy them into the active model. Common Usages for References Preferences Affecting References
Common Usages for References
3/24/2010
Getting Started
Page 110 of 110
The most common usage of references is in the creation of design compositions. Design compositions are used by engineers and other technical professionals to communicate through the visual content of their designs. To create a design composition using MicroStation, you build a design model consisting of a working collection of references used in the performance of particular engineering tasks. For example, you may attach as references a collection of survey points as a guide for placement of additional geometry. Reference attachments in a design composition are usually coincident.
It is sometimes convenient to refer to one part of a model while drawing in another area by attaching the active model to itself (a selfreference).
You can attach a redline file created using Bentley Redline to your model for reviewing purposes.
Another common usage of references is in the creation of drawings for publication. This task is called drawing composition. Whereas a design composition is typically contained in a design model, a drawing is composed in a sheet model.
To attach a raster image to the active model as a (read-only) reference, use the Raster Manager dialog box (File > Raster Manager).
Preferences Affecting References

User preferences that affect reference operations are set by choosing Preferences from the Workspace menu and selecting the Reference category.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 1 of 387
Setting Setting Up Up Projects Projects

The Level System Workspaces Building DGN Libraries Project Explorer Design History External Database Interface Using DWG Ensuring Standards Compliance
The Level System

In this part, you will find procedures used for organizing and maintaining your data in logical levels. Each level is named and stored in the DGN file. The display of elements residing on particular levels can be turned on or off, as necessary, to display only the desired information. When MicroStation users refer to turning levels on and off or toggling their display, they really mean toggling the display of elements residing on those levels. Managing Levels Level Key-ins Basic Reference Manipulation from Level Manager Sharing Level Definitions
Managing Levels
The Level Manager dialog box is used to create and delete levels, modify level attributes, and define filters for controlling the display of groups of levels based on their attributes.
To open the Level Manager dialog box
1. Click the Active Level field on the status bar. or From the Settings menu 's Level submenu, choose Manager. Creating and Deleting Levels Updating Selected Levels Level Usage Tab Modifying Level Attributes Defining and Deleting Filters Showing/Hiding Columns of Information Performing Operations Across DGNs and Levels
Creating and Deleting Levels

Levels can be created, deleted, imported and/or exported via the menu system or icons on theLevel Manager dialog box.
To create a new level
1. On the Level Manager dialog box, select the active file in the target tree. 2. From the Level Manager dialog box, Levels menu, choose New. or Click the New Level icon. A new level is created in the level list.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh5538.htm
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 2 of 387
Level Manager dialog box with new level displayed
3. Fill in the new level name. 4. Press <Enter>. The new level is created.
Alternative Method To create a new level
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, select the active file in the target tree. 2. From the Level Manager dialog box, select the master file in which you want to add a level. 3. Right-click in the Level list section. A pop-up menu displays.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Choose New. 5. Press <Enter>. The new level is created. 6. Change any of the other attributes by clicking the appropriate column.
Page 3 of 387
The MS_LEVEL_SEED_LEVEL_NAME configuration variable can be set to the name of a seed level. This can be a level in a the master file or a level in a DGNLIB library file. The MS_LEVEL_CREATE_FROM_SEED_ATTRIBUTE_LIST configuration variable can be set to control the attributes of the seed level that are copied into a new level. In MicroStation versions prior to 8.1.2, when a new level was created in a design file, that level was automatically set to ON in all design files that referenced the original design file. From 8.1.2 on, the MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY configuration variable can be used to control how referenced files display in the master file. If the variable is set to 1, newly created levels appear in all files that reference the master file. If the variable is set to 0 or not set (default), newly created levels do not appear in any files referenced to the master file. only if the reference, New Level Display, is set to MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY. Setting this variable only affects the behavior of levels of DGN files that are created in MicroStation V8.1.2 and later versions. DWG files and earlier versions of MicroStation DGN files do not store the necessary creation time of the level.
To copy levels to a different file
1. From the Level Manager dialog box, select the level(s) to be copied in the level list. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Copy. or Right-click and choose Copy from the pop-up menu. 3. Open a model in a different DGN file. 4. Open the Level Manager. 5. From the target tree, select the model. 6. Move the cursor to the level list, and right-click. A pop-up menu displays. 7. From the Edit menu, choose Paste. or Right-click and choose Paste from the pop-up menu. The level appears on the level list.
If the level already exists in the selected target, the level attributes of the target update, if they are different from the level attributes of the level being pasted.
If a reference target is selected and the level does not exist, the new level is not created.
To delete a level
1. From the Level Manager dialog box, select the level to be deleted in the level list. Only levels in the open DGN file can be deleted. 2. Press the <Delete> key. or From the Edit menu, choose Delete. or Right-click and choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
To delete all unused levels
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, from the Edit menu, choose Select All. or Right-click in the level list, then choose Select All. or Press <Ctrl-A>. 2. Press the <Delete> key. or From the Edit menu, choose Delete. or Right-click and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. All unused levels are deleted from the open DGN file. Used levels remain unchanged.
To delete all unused levels with a key-in
Page 4 of 387
1. Key in DELETE UNUSED LEVELS.

To import levels
1. From the Level Manager dialog box, Levels menu, choose Import. The Import Levels dialog opens. This is a standard file selection dialog box. 2. Select the DGN containing the levels to import. You can import only .dgn, .dgnlib, .csv, .dwg and .dxf files. 3. Click Open. The Level/Filter Import dialog box opens. 4. Select the levels to import and click OK. The levels are imported into the open DGN file.
To export levels
1. From the Level Manager dialog box, Levels menu, choose Export. The Export Levels dialog opens. This is a standard file selection dialog box. 2. Select the DGN to export to, or select an existing DGN to overwrite. You can export only .dgn, .dgnlib, .csv, .dwg and .dxf files. The levels in the open DGN file are exported to the library. If you entered a new library name, it is given a .dgnlib extension.
Only unused levels can be deleted.
Updating Selected Levels

You can update selected levels (instead of updating all levels) from a pop-up window in Level Manager.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 5 of 387
To update selected levels
1. Select the target from the tree. 2. Select the level(s) to be updated in the level list. 3. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 4. Select Update Levels. All selected levels are updated in the selected target.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To update selected levels in multiple target files
Page 6 of 387
1. Select the targets in the tree. 2. Select the level(s) to be updated in the level list. 3. Rightclick in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 4. Select Update Levels. All selected levels are updated in the selected targets only.
Level Usage Tab

A Level Usage tab on the Level Properties dialog box provides information on where a level is used and an element count for each type of element that occurs in the level.
Level Usage tab of the Level Properties dialog box
To view the Level Usage of a level
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. From the Level Manager level list, select a level. 2. Right-click on the level. A pop-up menu opens. 3. Choose Properties from the menu. The Level Properties dialog box opens. 4. Select the Usage tab. Information about the select level displays.
Page 7 of 387
Modifying Level Attributes

You can change the properties of a level using the Level Manager dialog box. This includes renaming levels, changing level symbology, and sorting information by column.
A dot appears in the Modified column of the Level Manager, when one or more attribute is modified and it is different from its source.
In DWG workmode, the level symbology overrides are disabled.
To rename a level
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, select the desired level from the level list. 2. Slowly double-click the level's Name column. or From the dialog box's Edit menu, click Rename. or Right-click the level in the list and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. 3. Key in the new level name.
To set up level symbology
1. From the Symbology option menu, choose ByLevel. 2. In the Level Manager dialog box Level list, select the desired level or range of levels. 3. Adjust the symbology using the controls built into the list for the selected level(s). The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those in the Attributes tool box).
To set up display overrides for level symbology
1. From the Symbology option menu, choose Overrides. 2. In the Level Manager dialog box Level list, select the desired level or range of levels. 3. Adjust the symbology overrides using the controls built into the list for the selected level(s). If Level Overrides is on in the View Attributes dialog box (Settings > View Attributes), each changed level attribute (color, line weight, or line style) displays in place of the elements' own attributes.
If Level Overrides is toggled on (Settings > View Attributes), elements display according to the override symbology. However, if override symbology is off for particular level attributes, the elements display per the element attributes. If Level Symbology is toggled off (Settings > View Attributes), the elements display according to the element attributes.
To adjust level properties
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. In the Level Manager dialog box Level list, select the desired level.
Page 8 of 387
2. Right-click the level in the list and choose Properties from the pop-up menu. or From the dialog box's Levels menu, choose Properties. The Level Properties dialog box opens. The General tab displays basic file information and symbology information (both ByLevel and Overrides). The Styles tab displays Custom Line Style information (both ByLevel and Overrides). 3. Click OK.
To sort levels by column headings
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, click the desired heading to sort the levels in ascending order. 2. Click the desired heading again to sort the levels in descending order.
Defining and Deleting Filters

Filters are a useful way to group associated levels for the purposes of viewing or not viewing as a group. For example, you might have a DGN file with several hundred levels. Within these levels could be filters for different disciplines such as Civil, Architectural, Mechanical. Within Civil there might be levels for Civil-Existing, Civil-Proposed, Civil-Annotation, etc. You could easily define a filter called Civil that would show only levels that had the word Civil as part of the description. Filters can be named, saved, and recalled as needed or defined on-the-fly for immediate one-time viewing using the Filter Row in the Level Manager dialog box. Filters can be turned on or off using the Level Display dialog box. Filters can be used to turn on or off levels across a model and all of its attached models. Levels can be filtered by a number of attributes such as filename, color, style, line weight, and level groups, to name a few. Filters use different expression types depending on the column in which the expression is input. There are three basic forms of expressions: string, integer and Boolean. A syntax is provided to filter attributes with wildcards (i.e., *, ?) similar to Windows Explorer search criteria. In addition, set based operations such as | (or), & (and) , and (minus) have been added. String expressions are applied to string values. Integer and Boolean values use integer and Boolean expressions. A short description of each follows:
The string expression format is similar to the format supported in the MS-Windows Explorer's Search dialog. In addition, set based operations such as | (or), & (and) , and (minus) have been added. String expressions are valid for the Name, Description, File, and Logical columns in the Level Manager dialog box. The following table shows examples of string expressions.
String Expression lev lev *1 lev* 1|2 1&2 12 *1 | *2 | *3 ((1 | 2) 3) level 1 | level 2 lev (exactly) ending with 1 starting with lev with the character 1 or 2 with the characters 1 and 2. with the character 1 but not 2 ending with 1, 2, or 3 with the character 1 or 2, but not the character 3 level 1 or level 2 (exactly) Matches String(s) with the substring lev
Integer expressions are applied to integer numbers. For example, 1, 10, 1520. The comparison operators >, >=, <, <=, and != are also supported on integer expressions. Integer expressions are valid for the Number, Color, Style, Weight and Elements in the Level Manager dialog box. The following table shows examples of integer expressions.
Integer Expression 1,10 10, 1520 <20 <=20 1 and 10 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20 less than 20 less than or equal to 20 Matches Integer Value(s)
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
>10, <20 >10, <20, !=15
Page 9 of 387
greater than 10 or less than 20 greater than 10 and less than 20 but not equal to 15
Boolean expressions are applied to check boxes. Boolean expressions can take a value of 0 or 1. Boolean expressions are valid for the Global, Lock, Used, and Library in the Level Manager dialog box. The following table shows Boolean expressions.
Boolean Expression Matches Boolean Value 0 1 off on
In the next-to-last sample string expression above, notice the use of ( and ) to combine the set operators.
To define a named filter
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, select Filters in the tree view. Existing filters are listed. 2. Click the Create Filter icon. A new filter appears in the filter list. 3. Type the name of the new filter in the Filter field, and press <Enter>. 4. Click any category and fill in the desired values to define the filter criteria. This defines a named filter.
To define a filter on-the-fly using the Level Manager dialog box
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, click the List Filter icon. A list of filters displays. 2. Click Untitled. A blank filter line appears at the top of the filter list.
Level Manager with blank filter line showing
3. Click any category and fill in the desired values to create the filter criteria. 4. Press <Enter> on each category to accept the entered value.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
5. (Optional) To name and save the filter, from the Filter menu in the Level Manager dialog box, choose Save As. or (Optional) Right-click the Level list and choose Save Filter. The Filter Save As dialog box opens.
Page 10 of 387
6. (Optional) Enter the name of the filter to be saved in the New field. 7. (Optional) Click OK. The filter is saved.
To combine filters using a filter group in the Level Manager dialog box
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, select Filters in the tree view. Existing filters are listed. 2. Click the Create Filter icon. A new filter appears in the filter list. 3. Enter the name of the new filter in the Filter name field and press <Enter>. 4. Select the new filter name. 5. Right-click and select Filter Group from the pop-up menu. The Filter Groups dialog box opens.
Filter Groups dialog box
6. From the Edit menu, select Insert Filters. 7. From the Select Filters dialog box, select an existing filter, and click OK.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 11 of 387
Select Filters dialog box
8. In the Filter Groups dialog box, key in a set-based operator: | (or), & (and) , or (minus). 9. Select another filter. 10. If desired, continue to select filters and operators. Click OK when finished.
The & (and) can also be used as the intersection of two sets. For example, if Set A contains 1, 2 and 3 and Set B contains 3, 4 and 5 then Set A & B would contain 3.
The | (or) union of two sets. For example, if Set A contains 1, 2 and 3 and Set B contains 3, 4 and 5 then Set A | B would contain 1,2,3,4,5.
Level Groups created in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition are not backward compatible to earlier versions of MicroStation. For example, if you create a group to a DGN in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition and a group by the same name that was created in a earlier version already exists, the group will only exist during the current session and will not overwrite the old group.
To define a filter on-the-fly using the Level Display dialog box
1. Click the Level Display icon on the Primary Tools tool box. The Level Display dialog box opens. 2. Click the List Filter icon (if necessary) to display the filter row. This icon is only active when Show is set to Levels.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 12 of 387
Level Display dialog box with filter row displayed
3. Enter the desired filter criteria in the appropriate categories. 4. Press <Enter> on each category to accept the entered value. This creates a filter on-the-fly. You can toggle this filter on/off by clicking the List Filter icon and selecting none. The filter remains until you exit MicroStation.
To save an on-the-fly filter to a named filter from Level Display
1. Rightclick the filter row of the Level Display dialog box. A pop-up menu displays. 2. Choose Save Filter. The dialog opens.
3. Enter the name of the filter to be saved in the New field. 4. Click OK. The filter is saved.
To delete a named filter
1. From the Level Manager dialog box, select Filters. A list of filters displays in the filter list
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. Select the filter to be deleted. 3. Click the Delete Filter icon. or Right-click in the filter list and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or From the Edit menu, choose Delete. The filter is deleted from the list.
Page 13 of 387
Showing/Hiding Columns of Information

You can control the types of information that displays on the Level Manager and Level Display dialog boxes. Columns of information can be toggled on or off from the column headings.
To toggle on/off columns of information
1. From the Level Manager dialog box, right-click the column heading row. A pop-up list of available columns appears. A check mark appears next to columns that are displayed. 2. Toggle on/off the columns of information you want to display/hide.
Performing Operations Across DGNs and Levels

The Level Manager and Level Display dialog boxes allow you to perform operations that affect multiple selected files and their associated levels. These operations include displaying level names once if multiple occurrences appear in one DGN file and its reference attachments and linking the activities the Level Manager to the display of level information in the Level Display dialog box. Multiple target selection The Level Manager dialog box allows you to perform tasks over multiple levels and multiple design files/reference attachments. You can select multiple design files and/or reference attachments from the tree in the Level Manager by holding the left mouse button down and dragging the cursor over the desired files. The levels for all the selected files display in the level list.
To select multiple targets
1. From the tree of the Level Manager (or Level Display) dialog box, press and hold down the left mouse button on the first file to be selected. 2. Drag the cursor over any addition files to be included in the selection. 3. Release the left mouse button. The selected files are highlighted in the tree and all levels in those files appear in the level list.
Any changes made to a level in the level list affects all the selected files in the tree if MS_LEVEL_EDIT_NESTED_ATTACHMENT_LEVELS is set to 1. If not set to 1, changes to the nested levels are not written.
Merge Names When references are attached to a DGN file, multiple occurrences of the same level name can occur. By default, Merge Names is on, in the Level Manager Properties dialog box, and levels that appear in multiple selected files will only display once in the level list.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 14 of 387
Level Manager with Merge Names on
Level Manager with Merge Names off
The top example shows one occurrence of each of six levels The bottom example shows the same levels with Merge Names turned off
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Each of the six levels is repeated multiple times.
To turn on Merge Names
Page 15 of 387
1. At the top of the Level Manager or Level Display dialog box, select the Properties dialog icon and turn on Merge Names. Linked trees between Level Manager and Level Display The Link Tree Selection property allows you to link together the actions of the Level Manager and the Level Display dialog boxes. When this property is turned on, any target file(s) selected in the tree in Level Manager are also selected in Level Display and vice versa.
Level Manager and Level Display link by the Link Tree Selection property
Level Display Properties dialog box with Link Tree Selection on
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 16 of 387
Level Manager Properties dialog box with Link Tree Selection on
To turn on the Link Tree Selection property
1. Select the Dialog Properties icon. The Dialog Properties menu displays. 2. Turn on the Link Tree Selection check box. Adjusting level symbology in Level Manager Multiple selection of target file(s) provides the ability to override symbology on levels that exist in multiple files. For example, you might have several files that have a level called Border and elements on that level appear in a different color in each file. You can change the color symbology once and the color will be changed in all the selected files. In the example below, displaying the Level Manager dialog box with the relative files selected, Level 1 is green in MainExternal.dgn and yellow in Office.dgn. In the last figure, both files are selected and the color has been changed to blue. The modified Level 1 is marked with a bullet in the [Delta ] column because the color setting is different from the value in the reference source file.
You cannot override a reference level's material attribute.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 17 of 387
To change level symbology across multiple target files
1. Select the desired targets from the tree. The levels from the selected targets display in the level list. 2. Select the Dialog Properties icon in the Level Manager dialog box. 3. Turn on the Merge Names check box. 4. Make the desired symbology changes on the desired level(s). The symbology changed on all selected files in the target tree.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 18 of 387
If Merge Names is off and multiple levels of the same name exist, you must make the symbology change on each level of that name.
Level Key-ins
There are a number of key-ins available to perform the following level functions:

Set level name, number and description Modify level attributes Modify Elements on a level Purge levels Create levels Copy levels Renumber levels Report on levels
Level Key-in Format
Level Key-in Format

Most level key-ins take a level-spec. A level-spec format is very general and can take one of the following forms:

A single level-name, or a level-number. An expression such as lev*. When specified as an expression, then level specification matches all levels that pass the expression. The expression all matches all levels. A level-filter. When specified as a level-filter, then the level specification matches all levels which pass the filter. More than one of the above separated by separated by space.
A single level-name, or a level-number preceded by dest specifies a destination level. Many of the key-ins also take an optional file:file-spec. Such commands have the syntax structure [file:file-spec] level-spec. The filespec format can take one of the following forms:

The word all which matches the master-file and all reference attachments. A file-name or logical-name, which matches one or more of the reference attachments. The file-name may match the master-file also. An expression, which may match a file-name or logical-name of one or more of the reference attachments. The expression may match the master-file also.
Level commands with [file:file-spec] level-spec Description Deletes specified level(s) if they are used
LEVEL DELETE <level-spec>
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
LEVEL DRAW [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL USAGE [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL SET FROZEN <ON|OFF|TOGGLE> [file:file-spec] <levelspec> Draws only the specified level(s) in the specified file(s) on screen.
Page 19 of 387
Returns the usage for specified level(s) in the specified file(s) to the Message Center. Sets the state of the Freeze flag for the specified level(s) in the specified file(s). See Level Manager dialog box for more information.
LEVEL SET DISPLAY <ON|OFF|TOGGLE> [file:file-spec] <level- Sets the state of the Display flag for the specified level(s) in the specified file(s). If on, spec> and level is not frozen, the level displays on the screen. LEVEL SET LOCK <ON|OFF|TOGGLE> <level-spec> LEVEL SET PLOT <ON|OFF|TOGGLE> [file:file-spec] <levelspec> LEVEL SET PRIORITY <new_level_priority> [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL SET TRANSPARENCY <new_level_transparency> [file:file-spec] <level-spec> Sets the state of the Lock flag for the specified level(s). Elements cannot be deleted, manipulated or modified if the level is locked. As reference levels can not be locked, <FILE:FILE-SPEC> is not valid. Sets the state of the Plot flag for the specified level(s) in the specified file(s). When on, the level will plot. When off, the level will not plot but will display. Sets the priority associated with a level. The priority can be an integral value between - 255 and 255. Sets the transparency associated with a level. The transparency can be a double value (real number) between 0 and 100.
Set level name, number and description key-ins The following key-ins are supported for changing level name, numbers and description:
Set Level Name, Number and Description key-ins LEVEL SET NAME <level-spec> <new-level-name> LEVEL SET NUMBER <level-spec> <new-level-number> LEVEL SET DESCRIPTION <level-spec> <new-leveldescription> Description Renames specified level to new-level-name. The level-spec may be a level-name or a level-number. Renumbers specified level to new-level-number. The level-spec may be a level-name or a level-number. Changes the description of specified level to new-level-description. The level-spec may be a level-name or a level-number.
Modify level attributes key-ins The following key-ins are supported for modifying level attributes
Modify Level Attribute key-ins LEVEL SET BYLEVEL COLOR <color-spec> [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL SET BYLEVEL STYLE <style-spec> [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL SET BYLEVEL WEIGHT <weight-spec> [file:filespec] level-spec LEVEL SET OVERRIDE COLOR <ON|OFF|TOGGLE|colorspec> [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL SET OVERRIDE STYLE <ON|OFF|TOGGLE|stylespec> [file:file-spec] <level-spec> Description Sets the bylevel color of all levels specified by [file:file-spec] level-spec to color-spec. The color-spec is the color index. Sets the bylevel style of all levels specified by [file:file-spec] level-spec to style-spec. The style-spec can be the style-number or a style-name. Sets the bylevel color of all levels specified by [file:file-spec] level-spec to weight-spec. The weight-spec is the weight number. Sets the override color of all levels specified by [file:file-spec] level-spec ON or OFF or toggle ON to OFF or vice-versa or to color-spec. The color-spec is the color index. Sets the override style of all levels specified by [file:file-spec] level-spec ON or OFF or toggle ON to OFF or vice-versa or to style-spec. The style-spec can be the stylenumber or a style-name.
Sets the override weight of all levels specified by [file:file-spec] level-spec ON or OFF or LEVEL SET OVERRIDE WEIGHT toggle ON to OFF or vice-versa or to weight-spec. The weight-spec is the weight <ON|OFF|TOGGLE|weight-spec> [file:file-spec] <level-spec> number. LEVEL SET BYLEVEL MATERIAL MATERIAL-SPEC [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL SET OVERRIDE MATERIAL ON|OFF|TOGGLE|MATERIAL-SPEC [file:file-spec] <levelspec> Sets the bylevel material of the levels specified in [file:file-spec] level-spec to materialspec. Sets the override material of the levels specified in [file:file-spec] level-spec ON or OFF or toggle ON to OFF or vice-versa or to material-spec.
Key-ins to modify elements on a level The following key-ins are supported for modifying elements on a level:
Modify Elements on a Level key-ins LEVEL ELEMENT MOVE [d tl l 2] M ll l t l l 1 t Description ifi d d ti ti l l 2 Th d ti ti l l
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
<level-spec1> LEVEL ELEMENT COPY [dest-level-spec2] <level-spec1> LEVEL ELEMENT SELECT [file:file-spec] <level-spec> LEVEL ELEMENT DELETE <level-spec>
Page 20 of 387
specification is optional. If it is not specified, then the elements are moved to the Default level. Copies all elements on level-spec1 to specified destination level-spec2. The destination level specification is optional. If it is not specified, then the elements are copied to the Default level. Selects all elements on level-spec of specified file-spec. The file specification is optional. If it is not specified, then the elements of the active-model are selected. Deletes all elements of specified level-spec of the active-model.
Miscellaneous level key-ins The following key-ins are supported for creating, purging, copying, levels, renaming and reporting on levels:
Miscellaneous Level key-ins LEVEL CREATE <level_name> [level_number] Description Create a new level with name level_name. Optionally, the level-number of the new level can be specified with level-number.
Force deletes specified level-name1. If the level has any elements, then all the elements are moved to LEVEL PURGE dest:[level-spec] <level-spec> specified level-name2. The destination level specification is optional. If it is not specified, then any elements of the level to be purged are moved to the Default level. LEVEL COPY <source-level-name> <destlevel-name> [dest-level-number] LEVEL RENUMBER <increment-value> <level-spec> Creates a new level with name dest-level-name. The color, style, material and line weight attributes of this level are copied from source-level-name. Optionally the level-number of the new level can be specified with dest-level-number. The level-number of all levels as specified by level-spec is incremented by increment-value. The increment-value can be positive or negative.
Basic Reference Manipulation from Level Manager

The Level Manager dialog box tree has a pop-up menu that allows you to do basic manipulation of references. Right-clicking in the selection tree allows you to do the following:
New menu items Open Dialog Attach Detach Display Snap Locate Update Levels Select All Opens the References dialog box.
Description Opens the Attach Reference dialog box to attach references. Detaches the selected reference attachment(s). Toggles the display bit of the selected references. Toggles the display bit of the selected references. Toggles the display bit of the selected references. Updates the display of the selected levels. Selects all attached reference.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Select None Invert Selection Cut Copy Paste Properties Deselects all attached references. Selects all unselected and deselects all selected references attached to the Master file. Cuts a level from its present location on the level list to be placed in a different location. Copies a level from its present location on the levels list to a different location. Places a level in the selected location on the levels list. Opens the DGN File Settings dialog box, which is used to set the preferences of the filter.
Page 21 of 387
Loading Reference Filters Copy and Paste Levels Within the Open File and Reference Attachments
Loading Reference Filters

The MS_LEVEL_LOAD_ATTACHMENT_FILTERS configuration variable, if set, loads level filters of reference attachments when the master file is opened. For every unique attachment by file, a top-level filter is created. This top-level filter represents the reference attachment. All filters of the reference attachment are loaded as children of this new top-level filter. The reference filters may be modified in the context of the current session. These changes are not persisted in the DGN file and are discarded when the session is terminated.
To activate the loading of reference filters
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Levels. 3. In the Modify levels related configuration variables list box, select Load Attachment Level Filters. 4. Click Edit. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 5. Key in 1 in the New Value field and click OK. The Edit Configuration Variable closes. 6. Click OK. 7. Click Yes to save the change to the configuration file.
Copy and Paste Levels Within the Open File and Reference Attachments
There are several ways to copy levels and level attributes within the open file and attached references.

Open file to open file copy Open file to reference copy Reference to reference copy Reference to open file copy
Open file to open file copy You can copy a level and all its attributes in the open file, then rename it to create a new level with the same attributes.
To create a copy of a level in the open file
1. Select the open file from the tree. 2. Select the level(s) to be copied.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
3. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 4. Select Copy from the menu. 5. Select Paste from the menu. A copy of the selected level(s) appears in the level list. 6. Select the copy of the level. 7. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 8. Select Rename from the menu. The level name takes the focus as an input field. 9. Type in the new name of the level and press <Enter> to accept the name. Open file to reference copy
Page 22 of 387
You can copy a level's attributes in the open file to a level of the same name in an attached reference. These attribute changes in the attached reference are for view or plotting purposes but do not change the actual levels in the source file since references are view only. For example, if Level 1 is green in the open file and blue in the attached reference, you can copy the attributes from the open file to any selected reference attachment that contains that level.
To copy level attributes from the open file to attached references
1. Select a level from level list of the open file. 2. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 3. Select Copy from the menu. 4. Select a reference attachment(s) from the tree. 5. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 6. Select Paste from the menu. The attributes in the reference attachment(s) are copied to match the level in the open file. Reference to reference copy You can copy a level's attributes in a reference to a level of the same name in another attached reference(s). These attribute changes in the attached reference are for view or plotting purposes but do not change the actual levels in the source file since references are view only. For example, if Level 1 is green in the selected reference and blue in the another attached reference(s), you can copy the attributes from the selected references to any other reference attachment(s) that contains that level.
To copy level attributes from attached reference to attached reference
1. Select a reference attachment in the tree. 2. Select a level from level list of the selected reference attachment. 3. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 4. Select Copy from the menu. 5. Select a different reference attachment(s) from the tree. 6. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 7. Select Paste from the menu. The attributes in the reference attachment(s) are copied over with the attributes of the level in the originally selected reference
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
attachment. Reference to open file copy
Page 23 of 387
You can copy a level's attributes in a reference to a level of the same name in the open file. For example, if Level 1 is green in the selected reference and blue in the open file, you can copy the color attribute from the selected references to the open file. This copy changes the attributes of the level in the open file.
To copy level attributes from attached reference to the open file
1. Select a reference attachment in the tree. 2. Select a level from level list of the selected reference attachment. 3. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 4. Select Copy from the menu. 5. Select the open file from the tree. 6. Right-click in the level list. A pop-up menu opens. 7. Select Paste from the menu. The attributes in the reference attachment(s) are copied over the attributes of the level in the open file.
Sharing Level Definitions

A set of level definitions, or level structure, can be stored for shared usage in the level library component of a DGN library file, which is simply a special purpose DGN file.
To manually attach a Level Library
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, from the Levels menu's Library submenu, choose Attach. The Attach Level Library dialog box opens. 2. Select the level library to attach and click OK. The levels from the library display at the bottom of the Level List.
To detach a Level Library
1. In the Level Manager dialog box, from the Levels menu's Library submenu, choose Detach. The Libraries dialog box opens. 2. Select the level library to detach and click OK. The levels from the library are removed from the bottom of the Level List. The manual attachment of libraries is useful when attaching a limited number of libraries to a small number of DGN files. If you need to make a larger number of libraries available to a larger number of DGN files, you can use the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable. This configuration variable allows you to define the path to specific level libraries that MicroStation looks for levels. This eliminates the need to attach each level library to each DGN file.
To define the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Primary Search Paths. Configuration variables which specify default search paths for various type of MicroStation files are listed to the right. 3 In that list box select DGN Library List
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Click the Edit button. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 5. Enter the path to the DGN libraries you want available. You can enter multiple paths. 6. From the dialog box's File menu, choose Save. 7. Click OK to accept the changes. Resynchronizing DGN File Levels with Library Levels
Page 24 of 387
Resynchronizing DGN File Levels with Library Levels

While a level library is attached to the open DGN file, when you place an element while the Active Level is set to a library level, the level definition is copied from the library to the open DGN file. Because the copy can be modified independently of the original, the levels can become unsynchronized. Should this happen, you may at some point decide to resynchronize them.
To resynchronize DGN file level definitions with their level library sources
1. In the lefthand pane of the Level Manager dialog box, select the open DGN file. 2. Click the Update Levels icon.
Alternative Method To resynchronize DGN file level definitions with their level library sources
1. In the lefthand pane of the Level Manager dialog box, right-click the open DGN file. A pop-up menu opens. 2. From the pop-up menu, choose Update Levels. Administrators can limit the effects of synchronization to particular level properties by setting the configuration variable MS_LEVEL_EDIT_ATTRIBUTE_LIST.
The MS_LEVEL_AUTO_SYNC_ATTRIBUTE_LIST configuration variable can be set to automatically resynchronize the level attributes (as set in the variable) of library and reference levels each time the file is opened. Library levels are synchronized from the level library while Reference levels are synchronized from their source file.
To activate automatic resynchronization of level attributes of reference and library levels
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Level. 3. In the Modify levels related configuration variable list box, select Level Attribute Auto Synch. 4. Click the Edit button. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 5. Key in one or more (separated by a comma) attributes to be automatically synchronized. 6. Click OK to accept the changes.
When the MS_LEVEL_ALLOW_LIBRARY_LEVEL_EDIT is set, changes to the level attributes will cause the library level to be copied to the open DGN file. This allows the changes to the library level attributes to be saved in the open file.
Workspaces
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Workspace Fundamentals Workspace Configuration Customizing the User Interface V7 File Migration Directory Structure
Page 25 of 387
Workspace Fundamentals
A workspace is a custom MicroStation environment or configuration. By selecting a workspace, you customize MicroStation for a specific discipline, project, or task. The parts of a workspace and basic procedures for selecting them are covered in Workspace Components. For example, MicroStation is delivered with a sample workspace called examples. When the examples workspace is active, the files and tools you need to perform designing and drafting are available by default. In addition, the tools and tool boxes that are unrelated to that discipline are removed from the interface to avoid confusion. You can also create your own MicroStation environments and save them as workspaces. Workspace Components User Component Project Component Interface Component Selecting Workspace Components Supplied Sample Workspace Components
Workspace Components
The following is a list of workspace components: 1. User This component in effect points to the active workspace's Project and Interface components. The user name identifies the user configuration file (.ucf), which is stored in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Users" directory. 2. Project A project consists of customized data files, such as cell libraries and line style libraries, identified by configuration variables in the project configuration file (.pcf). The data files in the sample projects provided with MicroStation are delivered as modules in directories under Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples" directory. 3. Interface A customized user interface can be defined in a personal DGN library that is stored in a directory under Bentley's "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory. The personal DGN library is created when you create a new interface component. 4. (User) Preferences Customized user preferences are defined in a user preference file (<user_name>.upf) in the "..\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\MicroStation\prefs" directory. You can select any available user, project, and interface as the components of the active workspace. The active workspace components are identified by the user configuration file. Setting up the workspace Workspaces are set up in MicroStation Manager. The MicroStation Manager dialog box has list boxes that allow you to select a specific user, project, and interface.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 26 of 387
MicroStation Manager dialog box
Locating the components of the Workspace list boxes
All of the options shown in the User , Project, and Interface list boxes are controlled by the contents of specific directories located under Bentley's "WorkSpace" directory. By default, the following files control what you see in these list boxes:
List box User Project ".\Projects\Examples\*.pcf" Interface ".\Interfaces\MicroStation\<directory_name>\<file_name>.dgnlib or <imported_UI_modification_file_name>" ".\WorkSpace\Users\*.ucf" ".\Projects\*.pcf" Files associated with the list boxes
User Component
The User list box sets the path for saving and loading an environment or configuration for later DGN file sessions. Selecting a user from the list reconfigures MicroStation to use that workspace's components. Selecting a user also resets the search path to a corresponding directory for loading DGN files.
User list box
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 27 of 387
A workspace can contain only one project and one interface. These components are attached to a workspace. So, to use two different projects with the same interface or two interfaces for one project, you would need to create additional workspaces.
Project Component
A project is one component that can be associated with any workspace. It is used to set the location and names of data files associated with a specific design project.
Project list box
Seed files MicroStation lets you create two types of seed files: seed DGN files and seed DWG files. Seed DGN files and seed sheet models are simply DGN files that are copied to create DGN files and sheet models. DGN files can contain one or more design models and or sheet models. Seed DWG files are DWG files that are copied to create DWG files. DWG files can contain one design model and multiple sheet models.
General Procedure To create a seed file
1. Open any DGN or DWG file. It is recommended that you open a copy of an existing seed file. Generic seed files are installed in Bentley's "WorkSpace\System\Seed" directory. 2. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 3. In the Files field, key in the name for the new seed file. 4. Click the OK button. 5. (Optional) Place elements that you want to include in all designs that will be created using the new seed file. Most seed files do not contain any graphical elements. Seed sheet files typically contain a drawing border. 6. Adjust the settings to be appropriate for starting a design. 7. Arrange the view configuration to be appropriate for starting a drawing. 8. From the File menu, choose Save Settings to save the settings and view configuration in the file. 9. Close the file. Color tables An element's color attribute is stored with the element in the DGN file. The color for an element can be defined through the Active Color icon in the Attributes tool box, which provides several ways to select a color, including a color table that assigns a color as a value from 0 255. You can also select a color graphically, by specifying values using a color model, or by selecting a color from a color book.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 28 of 387
You can attach a color table to a DGN file. If a DGN file has a color table attached, the color table is opened (and its colors used to display elements) each time the DGN file is opened. Color tables can be customized and saved in color table files for subsequent attachment to multiple DGN files.
If a DGN file does not have a color table attached, its color table is the MicroStation system default color table. The Default Color Table configuration variable (MS_DEFCTBL) in the Configuration dialog box of the Workspace menu specifies the default color table so it too can be customized.
When the active workmode is DWG, MicroStation's handling of color tables is restricted to maintain compatibility with the DWG format.
Balanced colors
MicroStation uses balanced colors to represent colors in the DGN file. Balanced colors are a representative spread of colors, evenly spaced across the color spectrum. Colors of elements in the DGN file are mapped to the colors that the hardware can display using a closest match algorithm.
If the display hardware supports many colors, then a large balanced color table can be constructed and the colors of elements in the DGN file can be accurately represented on screen. If the display hardware supports only a few colors (especially 16 or less), then a smaller number of balanced colors must be spread more thinly across the spectrum this may cause some colors to be less accurately represented on screen.
The benefits of balanced colors are:

Display hardware that supports a small number of colors can be made to seem to have many more colors than it actually does. Elements in references that have their own color tables can be matched to the balanced colors to more accurately represent their colors. Balanced colors allow MicroStation to create realistic renderings of 3D models regardless of the number of colors in the DGN file, even on hardware that supports a limited number of colors.
Customizing color tables
The Color Table dialog box lets you customize color tables.
General Procedure To customize a color table
1. From the Settings menu, choose Color Table. The Color Table dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 29 of 387
Color Table dialog box
2. If the attached color table (or the default color table if none is attached) is not the color table you want to customize, open a color table file or retrieve the default color table. From the File menu in the Color Table dialog box, choose Open to open a color table file or Default to retrieve the default color table. In the former case, the Open Color Table dialog box opens. It is operated like the Open dialog box. 3. (If opening a color table file) select a file in the Open Color Table dialog box and click the OK button. 4. Use the controls in the Color Table dialog box:
To interpolate colors To duplicate a color elsewhere in the table To individually modify a color
5. When done customizing the colors, choose Save As from the File menu in the Color Table dialog box. The Save Color Table dialog box opens. It operates like the Save As dialog box. 6. Use the Save Color Table dialog box to save the color table in a color table file. 7. To attach the custom color table to the active DGN file and close the Color Table dialog box, click the Attach button. or To simply close the dialog box, click the Cancel button.
To interpolate colors
1. From the Edit menu in the Color Table dialog box, choose Interpolate Colors. The Color Interpolation dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 30 of 387
2. From the Interpolation Style option menu, choose RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value). 3. Turn on Start Color and select the starting color by clicking it in the color palette. 4. Turn on End Color and select the ending color by clicking it in the color palette. 5. To start interpolation, click the Blend button. 6. (Optional) Repeat steps 25 for other color ranges. 7. Click the OK button to accept the color table modifications and return to the Color Table dialog box.
During this procedure, you can double-click colors to manually modify them, using the Modify Color dialog box.
To duplicate a color elsewhere in the table
1. In the Color Table dialog box's color palette, select the color you want to duplicate. 2. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Copy Color. 3. Select the color you want to replace with the duplicate of the copied color. 4. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Paste Color.
To individually modify a color
1. In the Color Table dialog box's color palette, select the color and click the Change button. or In the color palette in the Color Table dialog box or the Color Interpolation dialog box, double-click the color. The Modify Color dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 31 of 387
2. Use the controls in the Modify Color dialog box to adjust the color. 3. When done, click the OK button. Color books Color books are used to contain a collection of named, true (RGB) colors. Naming and categorizing the colors allows you to select colors by name rather than by number triplets. When a color from a book is assigned to an element, the book and color name are stored in the element and can be easily reviewed. Color books can be stored in the open DGN file or more appropriately, as a shared resource in a DGN library. The following DGN libraries contain system color books:

"standardcolors.dgnlib" contains the Standard color book, a set of standard colors "pantone.dgnlib" contains PANTONE color books "ral.dgnlib" contains the RAL DESIGN and RAL CLASSIC color books
PANTONE is a color standard for publishing. PANTONE colors are indexed using the PANTONE naming convention and separated into books to group similar color processes together. The colors are CMYK (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow/Black printing color format) with an RGB (Red/Green/Blue computer color format) equivalent. You can create additional color books that are standardized for your company, discipline, project or task. The configuration variable MS_COLORBOOK_LIBRARIES points to the location of DGN libraries that contain the system color books "\Workspace\System\ColorBooks" by default.
The PANTONE color books are copyrighted by Pantone, and neither the books nor the colors specified in the books can be renamed or modified. The RAL CLASSIC and RAL DESIGN color books are copyrighted by RAL, Sankt Augustin, and neither the books nor the colors specified in the books can be renamed or modified.
To create a color book
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The Color Book Editor dialog box opens.
Page 32 of 387
2. In the dialog box, choose File > New. The Create Color Book dialog box opens.
3. Key in the name for the color book and click OK. The name of the color book displays in the name field of the Color Book Editor. 4. Click the Create Color icon.
The Modify Color dialog box opens. 5. Use the controls in the Modify Color dialog box to adjust the color. 6. In the editable field of the colors list box, name the color.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 33 of 387
7. Repeats steps 46 to add additional colors to the color book.

To modify a color in a color book
1. In the Color Book Editor list box, double-click the color you want to change. The Modify Color dialog box opens. 2. Use the controls in the Modify Color dialog box to change the color.
To rename a color in a color book
1. In the Color Book Editor list box, right-click the name you want to change. 2. Key in the new name in the editable field.
To delete a color from a color book
1. In the Color Book Editor list box, select the color you want to delete. 2. Click the Delete Color icon.
To export a color book
1. In the Color Book Editor dialog box, choose File > Export. The Export Color Book dialog box opens. 2. Name the color book and click Save. The color book is saved in a text file with a .csv extension. You can open an exported color book in a text editor or spreadsheet application (such as Microsoft Excel), make changes, save it and import the modified color book file into the Color Book Editor. In an exported color book (.csv) file, the first line contains column headers. Each subsequent line corresponds to a color in the color book as follows:
<color_name>, <RGB_red_value>, <RGB_green_value>, <RGB_blue_value>
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 34 of 387
To import a color book
1. In the Color Book Editor dialog box, choose File > Import. The Import Color Book dialog box opens. 2. From the list of .csv files, select the color book to import, and click Open.
Interface Component
The interface is another component of the workspace. The Interface list box allows you to select an interface containing a specific set of tools, tool boxes, tasks, and menus.
The default interface provides the as-delivered tool boxes, tools, tasks, and menus, without any modifications by users. However, if the MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST or _USTN_SYSTEM_GUIDGNLIBLIST configuration variable points to files that contain customizations you will see those customizations. The newuser interface provides a subset of the default graphical interface to aid the new MicroStation user. You can create one or more interfaces for your personal use. You can import user interface modification files created in earlier editions of MicroStation.
Interface files are stored in directories under Bentley's "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory.
Interface list box
Creating your own user interface In addition to selecting an existing interface, the Interface list box can be used to create an entirely new interface. Choosing New from the Interface list box opens the Create User Interface dialog box.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 35 of 387
After entering a name and description for your new interface, MicroStation creates an interface directory under the "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory. The interface directory contains a DGN library (*.dgnlib) with the same name as the directory in which it is stored. This personal DGN library is for defining and storing user interface customizations to be used only by you. This includes customizations to tools, tool boxes, tasks, and menus. To define your personal user interface customizations you must navigate to the interface directory that you just created and open the DGN library that was created. Then you can use the features on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) to customize tools, tool boxes, tasks, and menus. These customizations are saved in the open DGN library. Whenever you use the interface that you created, the customizations that you saved in that interface's DGN library are available in your workspace.
The MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST configuration variable is set by default to point to the DGN libraries in the active interface component's directory and to the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable. Therefore, you may see other customizations in addition to those defined in your personal DGN library.
Importing user interface modification files In earlier editions of MicroStation, customizations to tool frames, tool boxes, tools, and menus were defined and stored in user interface modification files. All of these files were stored in directories under Bentley's "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory. Now the only customizations to tool boxes, tools, and menus that are stored in this location are the ones in your personal DGN libraries. All other customizations that are shared among work groups are stored in DGN libraries in a common location that is accessible to all users. If you need to import user interface customizations created in earlier editions of MicroStation, you will place user interface modification files in one of the directories listed above or in a new interface directory that you create. You will select that directory from the Interfaces list box and open the DGN library in which you want to store them. Then you will use the Customize dialog box to copy the customizations into the DGN library and to customize your interface additionally.
Selecting Workspace Components

When the workspace user is changed in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, the active workspace's project component is changed automatically.
Do not delete the examples files and directories. If you do delete them, use the MicroStation installer to reinstall them, with a custom installation.
To change the workspace user
1. From the User list box in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, choose the desired user. The project associated with that user is automatically chosen.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 36 of 387
MicroStation Manager dialog box with the User list box displayed
To change to a different project
1. From the Project list box in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, choose the desired project.
To change to a different interface
1. From the Interface list box in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, choose the desired interface.
To create a user configuration file
1. From the User list box in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, choose New. The Create User Configuration File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 37 of 387
Create User Configuration File dialog box
2. In the Create User Configuration File dialog box's Name text box, enter the name of the new workspace (the name for the new user configuration file). The suffix .ucf is added automatically to the name. 3. Click OK. A Create User Configuration File (workspace name) dialog box opens.
Create User Configuration File dialog box, after naming the workspace
4. (Optional) In the Create User Configuration File dialog box's Description text box, enter a workspace description of up to 32 characters in length. 5. (Optional) Select additional workspace components. 6. Click OK. The user configuration file is saved and is automatically chosen in the User list box in the MicroStation Manager dialog box.
To select a new workspace's project component
1. In the secondary Create User Configuration File dialog box (with the workspace name specified), click the Select button to the right of the Project field. The Select Project Configuration File dialog box opens. The available project configuration files are displayed in the list box.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 38 of 387
2. Select a project and click Open.

To select a new workspace's user interface component
1. In the secondary Create User Configuration File dialog box (with the workspace name specified), click the Select button to the right of the User Interface field. The User Interface dialog box opens. The available user interfaces are displayed in the list box.
User Interface dialog box
2. Select a user interface and click OK.

To create a new project component
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. From the Project list box in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, choose New. The Create New Project dialog box opens.
Page 39 of 387
Create New Project dialog box
2. In the Name text box, key in the name of the new project. The name may be up to 32 characters in length. 3. (Optional) In the Description text box, enter a project description. 4. Click OK. The project configuration directory is created, and the project is automatically chosen in the MicroStation Manager dialog box's Project list box.
To create a new user interface component
1. From the Interface list box in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, choose New. The Create User Interface dialog box opens.
2. In the Name text box, key in the name of the new interface. The name may be up to 32 characters in length. 3. (Optional) In the Description text box, enter an interface description. 4. Click OK. The interface directory is created and stored in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory. The interface directory contains a DGN library with the same name as the directory in which it is stored and in which you can define user interface customizations to be used only by you. The new interface is automatically chosen in the MicroStation Manager dialog box's Interface list box.
In order to open the newly created DGN library, you must navigate to the location in which it is stored, shown above. You must define and save all personal customizations to tools, tool boxes, tasks, and menus in this file.
Sharing an existing MicroStation V8 workspace A MicroStation V8 workspace can be set up on a server and shared with multiple installations of MicroStation. Once the MicroStation directory and .ucf files are copied to the shared workspace, any MicroStation user can access this workspace by pointing to it in the MicroStation shortcut.
To access a shared MicroStation V8 workspace
From your MicroStation installation copy the "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory to the
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
"WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory of the shared MicroStation V8 directory.
Page 40 of 387
2. From your MicroStation installation, copy the contents (specifically the existing .ucf files) of the "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory to the "WorkSpace\Users" directory of the shared MicroStation V8 directory. 3. Right-click your MicroStation shortcut and select Properties from the pop-up menu. The MicroStation V8 Properties dialog box opens. 4. Select the Shortcut tab. 5. In the Target field, append wr and the full path of the shared MicroStation V8 workspace to the existing path to the MicroStation executable. For example, "C:\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\ustation.exe -wrE:\V8_Shared_Workspace\workspace\". In this example, MicroStation V8 is installed on your C drive and is pointing to a shared workspace on an external drive (E:). 6. Click OK to accept the shortcut change. 7. Double-click the MicroStation shortcut and select a user and project from the shared workspace.
If there are spaces in your shared MicroStation V8 workspace path name, the shortcut appendage to your icon may not work.
Supplied Sample Workspace Components

Sample user and project components are supplied with MicroStation.

Examples and untitled user components are in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Users" directory. Each sample project component has its own directory, within Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects" directory, that contains directories for DGN files, seed files, cell libraries, symbology resources, and so on.
This makes it easy to maintain and customize projects.
You can customize workspace components by customizing the user interface and by setting user preferences.
Workspace Configuration
This chapter covers configuration variables and the four types of files that define workspaces:

Basic concepts of configuration variables are covered in Configuration Variables. The User Configuration File determines which workspace (project, user interface, and user preference file) is active; it can also contain a user's overrides of settings in the project configuration file. The user configuration file consists of configuration variable definitions. The Project Configuration File contains configuration variable settings for a particular project. The project configuration file consists of configuration variable definitions. The User Interface Modification Files may contain modifications to MicroStation's default user interface that were created in earlier editions of MicroStation. The User Preference Files contain user preference settings.
Before discussing how the user configuration file and project configuration files are used, some background information about
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Configuration Variables User Configuration File Project Configuration File Standards Configuration File Working with Configuration Variables User Interface Modification Files User Preference Files Configuration Variable Files The Main Configuration Variable File Configuration Variable File Syntax Debugging Variable Definition Files
Page 41 of 387
Configuration Variables
The User Configuration File and the Project Configuration File use configuration variables to select a workspace and to affect MicroStation's behavior. MicroStation's configuration consists of:

The directories in which it finds or stores various types of files The names of special-purpose files Certain default settings Other information about the system on which it runs
This information is stored in configuration variable definitions. How MicroStation processes configuration variables This section covers start-up. determining configuration variable settings, levels and types of configuration variables.
Start-up
When MicroStation is started, it processes a set of files that contain configuration variables in this order: 1. All system-level configuration variable files (in MicroStation's "config\system" directory). 2. All application-level configuration variable files (in MicroStation's "config\appl" directory). 3. All site-level configuration variable files (in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Standards" directory). 4. The user-level configuration variables (in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Users" directory). 5. The project-level configuration variables (in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects" directory tree). As each level is processed, its settings are stored in memory. MicroStation keeps all settings, segregated by level, in memory.
Determining configuration variable settings
When MicroStation needs to determine (resolve) a configuration variable setting, it looks for the setting in the various levels in this order: 1. The user level 2. The project level 3. The site level
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
5. The system level
Page 42 of 387
If the configuration variable is not set at any level, MicroStation looks for an operating system environment variable of the same name. MicroStation uses the value of the configuration variable at the highest level it is set (the first place it finds it). If you compare the order in which the files are processed to the hierarchy of the level settings, you see that the later the level is processed, the higher its priority, with one exception: In order of priority, the project-level configuration variables are on a lower level than the userlevel configuration variables, but MicroStation processes the user-level configuration variables first. MicroStation processes the user-level configuration variables first because the user configuration file determines which project configuration file is to be processed. The user configuration file specifies and reads (includes) the settings in the appropriate Project Configuration File, which specifies configuration variable settings for a project component of the workspace. Therefore, although the project configuration file is the last in time to be processed, the user configuration file has the last word.
In examples of configuration variable definitions in this chapter, unless otherwise noted, the workspace user is assumed to be examples that is, the user configuration file is "examples.ucf".
Levels of configuration variables There are five levels of configuration variables, all of which MicroStation maintains in memory:
System-level configuration variables are the first to be processed by MicroStation when it is started. They are set by MicroStation itself. Settings made at this level can be overridden by settings at any higher level. Application-level configuration variables are the second to be processed by MicroStation when it is started. They are usually set by MicroStation related application programs. Settings made at this level can be overridden by settings at any higher level. Site-level configuration variables are the third to be processed by MicroStation when it is started. They are usually set by a system or site manager to facilitate using MicroStation in workgroups and to share standard configurations. Settings made at this level can be overridden by settings at any higher level. Project-level configuration variables are the fifth to be processed (after user-level configuration variables) by MicroStation when it is started. They are usually set by a site or project manager to facilitate using MicroStation in workgroups. Settings made at this level can be overridden by settings at the user level. User-level configuration variables are the fourth to be processed by MicroStation when it is started. The user configuration file determines which project configuration file is processed. User-level configuration variable settings take precedence over all other level settings.
The first four levels in this list are meant to be set by system, site, and project managers using a text editor and following the Configuration Variable File Syntax. The user-level configuration variables may freely be changed by each user with the Configuration dialog box without fear of disturbing any other user's configuration. Since the user configuration variables are highest in precedence, there is no need for a user to modify configuration variable definitions at any other level. Types of configuration variables The types of configuration variables are as follows:
Path configuration variables tell MicroStation where (in what directory) to find files. For example, if you specify a DGN file to open when starting MicroStation, it searches for the DGN file in the directory or directories specified by the MS_DEF configuration variable. The first time you choose Open from the File menu, the first directory specified by MS_DEF displays in the Open dialog box.
Directory configuration variables tell MicroStation where to save files. For example, MS_PLTFILES tells MicroStation where to save print files. The first time you save a print to a file, the directory specified by MS_PLTFILES displays in the Save Print As dialog box. Filename configuration variables specify a file to use for a particular purpose. For example, MS_DESIGNSEED specifies the seed file MicroStation copies to create a new DGN file (if you do not select a different seed file). Keyword configuration variables specify certain default settings For example MS LINKTYPE specifies the user data linkage types
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 43 of 387
recognized by the database server. The possible values or keywords are BUDBC, DMRS, ORACLE, OLEDB, and ODBC.
User Configuration File

The user configuration file has two basic workspace functions. First, it contains values for any configuration variables set by you, the user, to control MicroStation's behavior. Second, it specifies the active workspace components. For example, the MS_USERPREF configuration variable setting points to the user preference resource file that defines the active user preferences component. (The user configuration file is the file that opens when you choose Configuration from the Workspace menu.) User configuration files have the suffix .ucf and are stored in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Users" directory.
Project Configuration File

A user working alone with MicroStation could conveniently set every configuration variable at the user level. Project configuration files exist in order to facilitate sharing of configurations among users in a workgroup. The settings in each user's user configuration file allow each user in a workgroup to customize MicroStation, while the shared settings of the project configuration file provide uniformity within the workgroup. The project configuration file is the file that is selected when you select the project component of a workspace in the MicroStation Manager dialog box. The role of the project configuration file in a workspace is to specify the data files in a particular module that are used in the workspace. Modules The module data for the sample workspace project components provided with MicroStation are stored in subdirectories of Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples" directory. For example, the architectural module comprises:

Sample architectural DGN files in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Architectural\dgn" directory Sample architectural seed files in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Architectural\seed" directory Sample architectural cell libraries in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Architectural\cell" directory Sample architectural level structure files in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Architectural\data" directory Sample line style libraries in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Architectural\dgnlib" directory
These modules are just examples, and you can use configuration variables to point to various files throughout the modules. The advantage of creating modules this way is that you can place the "WorkSpace\Projects" directory and subdirectories on a network and make them read-only with the exception of the "dgn" subdirectories. Everyone in a workgroup can use the data, but the data's integrity is assured.
Standards Configuration File

The standards configuration file ("standards.cfg") is used to store company-wide configurations and configurations that can be used for multiple projects. They are usually set by the system or site manager. These configurations include: the search paths for cell libraries, Settings Manager files, DGN files, macros, seed files, material palettes, pattern maps, and bump maps; the directories for new cell libraries, new cell selector files, and new Settings Manager files; and the list of symbology resource files. The standards configuration file is found in the directory defined by the _USTN_SITE configuration variable. The default location is in Bentley's "WorkSpace\Standards" directory.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 44 of 387
Working with Configuration Variables

User-level configuration variables can be set in dialog boxes, as described in this section.
System-, application-, site-, and project-level configuration variables must be edited with a text editor using the Configuration Variable File Syntax.
General Procedure To Modify User-level Configuration Variables
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens.
2. In the Category list box, select the category that contains the configuration variable you wish to modify. or In the Category list box, select All (Alphabetical) or All (By Level), scroll through the configuration variables in the list box to the right, and select the desired variable. The controls for setting the definitions of that category of configuration variables are displayed. In the Expansion field, the expansion of the variable is shown. In the Description field, a description of the variable and its name are shown.
If you use a text editor to look at the definition of a configuration variable in a configuration file, you may find that the definition contains other configuration variables and conditional syntax. The definition is often text that must be expanded into the actual names of directories, paths, files, and so on. When you select a configuration variable in the Configuration dialog box, the Expansion field shows the expansion of the variable.
3. Use the controls to modify the definition. The procedure varies for the different types of configuration variables. See one of the following:
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To set a path configuration variable. To set a directory configuration variable. To set a filename configuration variable. To set a keyword configuration variable. (Experienced users familiar with configuration variable syntax, should refer to To edit a configuration variable.)
Page 45 of 387
4. Click OK. If you modified any configuration variable definitions, an alert box opens, asking whether you want to save the changes in the user configuration file, save the changes only in memory for the current session, or cancel the changes. 5. In the alert box, click Yes to save the changes to the user configuration file, click No to save the changes only in memory for the current session, or click Cancel to cancel the changes.
To set a path configuration variable
1. With the path configuration variable selected in the Configuration dialog box, click the Select button. The Select Path dialog box opens. In the Directory List, directories, if any, already included in the configuration variable's expansion are shown.
Select Path dialog box
2. To add a directory to the configuration variable's definition, select the directory from the Directories list box (or key in the directory specification in the Directory field), then click the Add button. 3. To remove a directory from the configuration variable's definition, select it in the Directory List and click the Remove button. 4. Click the Done button.
To set a directory configuration variable
1. With the directory configuration variable selected in the Configuration dialog box, click the Select button. The Browse For Folder dialog box opens prompting you to select the desired directory.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 46 of 387
Browse For Folder dialog box
2. To change the directory in the configuration variable's definition, select the desired directory in the Directories list box (or key in the directory specification in the Directory field). 3. Click OK.
To set a filename configuration variable
1. With the filename configuration variable selected in the Configuration dialog box, click the Select button. The Select File dialog box opens. In the Files list box, the file (if any) already included in the configuration variable's expansion is shown.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 47 of 387
Select File dialog box
2. To change the file in the configuration variable's definition, select the desired file in the Files list box or key in the filename in the Files field. (If necessary, use the Directories list box to select the proper directory.) 3. Click OK.
To set a keyword configuration variable
1. With the configuration variable selected in the Configuration dialog box, click the Edit button. (The Select button is dimmed because keywords cannot be selected.) The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 48 of 387
2. In the Edit Configuration Variable dialog box's New Value field, enter the desired keyword. (Although keywords are not case sensitive, uppercase letters are used by convention.) The keyword is also shown in the Expansion field. 3. Click OK.
To edit a configuration variable
1. With the configuration variable selected in the Configuration dialog box, click the Edit button. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 2. In the Edit Configuration Variable dialog box's New Value field, edit the configuration variable definition. (Although keywords are not case sensitive, uppercase letters are used by convention.) The Expansion field shows the expansion of the definition in the New Value field. 3. Click OK. User configuration variables This table lists user configuration variables by category.
Category Archive MS_ARCHIVE MS_ARCHIVECLASS MS_KEYPAIRLIST Cells MS_CELL MS_CELLLIST MS_CELLSELECTORDIR MS_CELLSELECTOR MS_CELLOUT MS_MENU Variable "Short name" Descr
"Archive Search Path" Search path for archive files "Archive Class Search Search path for archive clas Path" "KeyPair File List" "Cell Library Directories" "Cell Library List" "Cell Selector Directory" "Cell Selector File" "Menu Cells" "Shared Cell Name Conflicts" Digital signature KeyPair file Search path(s) for cell librar List of cell libraries to be sea the current library. Directory for Cell Selector bu files. Default Cell Selector button Cell library file containing me Controls how shared cell na operations like reference me resolution. If set to 1, the de th fli t DWG
"Output Cell Libraries" Default directory for newly c
MS_RESOLVESCNAMECONFLICTS
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 49 of 387
to 2, MicroStation resolves n anonymous shared cells.
Colors
MS_DEFCTBL MS_RMENCTBL MS_LMENCTBL MS_COLORBOOK_LIBRARIES MS_SYSTEM_COLORBOOKS
"Default Color Table" "Right Menu Color Table" "Left Menu Color Table" "Colorbook Library List" "System Color Books Directory" "Universal Data Link directory"
Default color table if DGN fil Default menu colors (dialog right screen specifies a c Default menu colors (dialog screen specifies a color t Displays the list of DGN files for color books. Sets the directory name con books delivered with MicroS Points to the directory that c Link (UDL) files. The UDL fil strings to a particular data s is ..Bentley\WorkSpace\Syst Used to set the path to the O for connecting to the databa not set, MicroStation looks a path to determine the Oracle Search path(s) for database MDL application to load the software. The database interface serv User data linkage types reco interface software. Defines the location of the s can be used when creating s Defines the location of the s be used when creating mod Defines the location of the u used when upgrading pre-V Directory containing templat generate cell images for HT Provides the list of formats a Editor for Date/Time fields. Open settings file. Directory for newly created s Directory containing settings If this variable points to a rem value (CSV) file, the remap f the remapping during the Sa Location of the file that contr diagnostic logging. The defa BSILOG.CONFIG.XML. Allows the logging of diagno
Database
MS_UDLDIR
MS_ORACLE_HOME MS_DBASE MS_SERVER MS_DBEXT MS_LINKTYPE Data Files MS_CUSTOMSHEETSIZEDEF MS_CUSTOMSCALEDEF MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF MS_HTMLDGNDIR MS_DATETIMEFORMATS MS_SETTINGS MS_SETTINGSOUTDIR MS_SETTINGSDIR MS_REMAP_CSVFILE
"Oracle Home" "Database Files" "Server Loader" "Database Server" "Database Linkages" "Sheet Size Definitions" "Scales Definitions" "Unit Definitions for Upgrading" "HTML Template Directory" "Standard Date Time formats" "Settings Resource" "Settings Output Directory" "Settings Directory" "Remap CSV File"
MS_BSILOG_CONFIG_FILE MS_BSILOG_ENABLE DWG/DXF Design Applications Design History
"Logging config file" "Enable diagnostic logging"
The Working in DWG Workmode topic has a complete list of DWG- and DXF-related configuration variables. MS_DGNAPPS MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COMMIT_ON_SAVE MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COMMIT_ON_CLOSE MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COMMIT_ON_MODEL_SWITCH MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_OWNERSHIP_WARNING (not applicable) "Commit on save" "Commit before close" "Commit on model switch" List of MDL applications to lo DGN file is opened. Specifies whether changes a history when the file is saved Specifies whether changes a history before the file is clos Specifies whether changes a history when the model is sw
"Confirm when taking Specifies whether you are p ownership" will take ownership of all unc Specifies the colors to use w elements. The value must b numbers, in the following ord changed, pre-changed, conf tb l i d
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COLORS
"Colors"
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 50 of 387
3 6, which means added in g changed in blue, pre-change yellow.
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_REVISION_NUMBER_FORMAT
"Revision number display format" "Design History capabilities" "Include document properties in" "Commit on save" "Commit before close" "Weblib history" "Image bookmarks" "Resource bookmarks" "Archive bookmarks" "Cell library bookmarks" "DGN bookmarks" "RefAgent data file" "Kiosk mode" "Special filetype handling" "Download directory" "Reparent browser" "External browser name" (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable)
Allows you to change the ap numbers. Allows users to create, delet tags, change descriptions, c retire, set version format, se upgrade design history. If set to 1 (the default), desig document properties such a Comment. Specifies whether changes a distributed DGN when the fil Specifies whether changes a distributed DGN before the f History file for the Weblib sh Bookmark file for remote ima Bookmark file for remote res Bookmark file for remote arc Bookmark file for remote cel Bookmark file for remote DG File containing URL informa Agent. Set to 1 to turn on kiosk mod Specifies a file that contains instructions for various file ty Sets the directory in which W When set to 1, the current b of the MicroStation main win always be seen. Sets an external browser. Defines which tasks are av Navigation tool box. Path to directory that contain Feature Modeling. Path to directory that contain MSMODELER which implem Feature Modeling. URL of Bentley SELECTserv Lists Object Enabler MDL ap currently set to use applicati Architectural Desktop and A (AdtDirectApp and RebisDir need to change this setting. MicroStation exception.log a management.
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COMMIT_DOC_PROPERTIES Distributed DGN MS_DISTRIBUTED_DGN_COMMIT_ON_SAVE MS_DISTRIBUTED_DGN_COMMIT_ON_CLOSE Engineering Links MS_WEBLIB_HISTORY MS_BOOKMARKS_IMAGE MS_BOOKMARKS_RSC MS_BOOKMARKS_ARCHIVE MS_BOOKMARKS_CELL MS_BOOKMARKS_DGN MS_REFAGENTDATA MS_WEBKIOSKMODE MS_WEBTYPESFILE MS_WEBFILES_DIR MS_WEBDOWNLOADDIR MS_BROWSERMAKECHILDWINDOW MS_USEEXTERNALBROWSER Extensions MS_GUITASKTREEROOT MS_DOCKINGPREF MS_FEATURE MS_MODELER MS_SELECTSERVICESHOME MS_DWG_OBJECT_DRX
"Weblib local storage" Directory in which copies of
MS_DWG_OBJECT_APP
(not applicable)
MS_PROCESSEXCEPTIONLOG MS_PROPERTYENABLER_APPS MS_CUSTOMIZE_REPORT_STYLESHEET MS_SELECTBY MS_BUTTONMENU MS_ECFRAMEWORK_SCHEMAS
(not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable)
If absent, there is no Effect MS_RASTER_DEF_DIR (not applicable) If t d fi th d f
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 51 of 387
Attach Raster Reference me raster file open directory).
MS_ACIS MS_VIEWTOOLBOX3D MS_VIEWTOOLBOX2D MS_MAINTOOLBOX MS_ICONRSCLIST MS_ICONLIBRARYLIST MS_ICONPATH MS_MIXEDMODEBUILD File Saving MS_DGNAUTOSAVE
"ACIS Directory" (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) (not applicable) "Design File AutoSave"
Directory containing the ACI
Directories containing .rsc fi Directories containing .dll file Directories containing files fo Determines the frequency, in timer.
MS_V7AUTOSAVE
Determines the frequency, in "V7 Design File Auto- timer for V7 format files. If se done while the file is open. T Save" saved on exit or when switch "V7 Auto-Save Dialog" "V7 create backup in V8 format" Automatically saves the V7 f dialog box to defer the autoAutomatically creates a back format. If set to true, a file is directory with the extension
MS_V7AUTOSAVE_NODIALOG MS_V7BACKUPV8
MS_DWGAUTOSAVE
Determines the frequency, in timer for DWG and DXF form "DWG/DXF File Autoauto save is done while the Save" automatically saved on exit different file. "DWG/DXF AutoSave Dialog" Automatically saves the DW skips the dialog box to defer Specifies the formatting that the level lists display, includ default, the level name is us description is used; if C, the than one value can be speci Defines the default directory levels or importing levels to/ file. If set, lets you edit the attribu reference attachments.
MS_DWGAUTOSAVE_NODIALOG
Levels
MS_LEVEL_DISPLAY_FORMAT
Level Display Format
MS_LEVEL_LIB_DIR MS_LEVEL_EDIT_NESTED_ATTACHMENT_LEVELS MS_V7_LEVEL_NAME_PREFIX MS_V7TOV8_CSVNAME
"Level Library Path" "Edit Nested Attachment Levels"
"V7 to V8 Level Name Defines the prefix to apply to V7 design file is upgraded to Prefix" "V7 to V8 Level CSV File" "V7 to V8 Delete Unused Levels" Defines the .csv file, which c mapped when a V7 design f file. If set to 1, then all unused le design file is upgraded to a V ignored if the "V7 to V8 Leve Can be set to the name of a level in the master file, or a l file. If the variable is not set, level. When a new level is c of the seed level. If defined, then level-filters o loaded.
MS_V7TOV8_DELETE_UNUSED_LEVELS
MS_LEVEL_SEED_LEVEL_NAME
"Seed Level Name"
MS_LEVEL_LOAD_ATTACHMENT_FILTERS
"Load Attachment Level Filters"
MS_LEVEL_CREATE_ FROM_SEED_ATTRIBUTE_LIST
Controls the set of attributes copied to the new level. Attr of the following attributes as "Seed Level Attributes OverrideSymbology, Overrid to use" OverrideWeight, ByLevelSym ByLevelStyle, ByLevelWeigh OverrideMaterial, GlobalFre Controls which level attribute overridden (instead of using for the entire level library). T can be one or more of the fo t d li t O id S
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 52 of 387
OverrideStyle, OverrideWeig (ByLevelColor, ByLevelStyle GlobalDisplay, GlobalFreeze OverrideSymbology encomp OverrideStyle and OverrideW encompasses ByLevelColor ByLevelWeight, ByLevelMat Each attribute accepts a "Lib Without the prefix, the attribu references and library levels Affects the DGNLIB UPDAT REFERENCE SYNCHRONI ins. This variable controls th will sync when any of the ab The attributes can be one or comma separated list: Overi OverrideColor, OverrideStyl ByLevelSymbology, ByLeve ByLevelWeight, ByLevelMat GlobalDisplay, GlobalFreeze This variable controls the lis automatically synchronize w attributes can be one or mor comma separated list: Overi OverrideColor, OverrideStyl ByLevelSymbology, ByLeve ByLevelWeight, ByLevelMat GlobalDisplay, GlobalFreeze above attributes can take a prefix. If the prefix is not use library levels will be synchro Specifies the list of level attr reference is reattached. The more of the following as a co OverideSymbology, Overrid OverrideWeight, ByLevelSym ByLevelStyle, ByLevelWeigh OverrideMaterial, GlobalDis Plot.
MS_LEVEL_EDIT_ATTRIBUTE_LIST
"Control Level Attributes Edit"
MS_LEVEL_SYNC_ATTRIBUTE_LIST
"Control Level Attributes Synch"
MS_LEVEL_AUTO_SYNC_ATTRIBUTE_LIST
"Level Attribute Auto Synch."
MS_REF_REATTACH_LEVEL_SYNC_ATTRIBUTE_LIST
"Ref. Reattach Level Attributes"
MS_UPDATE_KEEP_UNUSED_LIBRARY_LEVELS
If not set or set to 0, then un deleted when keying in DGN set to 1, keying in DGNLIB U "Keep Unused Library delete all unused library leve Levels" DGNLIB UPDATE LEVELS library levels that are not syn DGN file. Allows you to edit library lev master-file. If not set, then a only when if it is used. If set not yet copied into the maste editing, the library level will b file. Sets the width, in pixels, of t Attributes tool box. If set to 1, reference attachm synchronize to an attached l If set to 1, hides the level lib proceeds the level name. Text to be inserted at the be line by the resource compile specify the location of includ Location of source code for MDL debugger). If set, additional debugging p provided when debugging M If set, automatically invoke t detected while an MDL appl If set to an integer with bit 1 Exception handling flag A NONE.
MS_LEVEL_ALLOW_LIBRARY_LEVEL_EDIT
"Edit Unused Library Levels"
MS_LEVEL_PICKER_WIDTH
"Attributes Level Picker Width"
MS_LEVEL_DO_NOT_SYNCHRONIZE_ATTACHMENT_LEVELS_TO_DGNLIB "" MS_HIDE_LIBRARY_SOURCE_NAMES MDL Development MS_RDE_SYSINC MS_DBGSOURCE MS_MDLTRACE MS_DEBUGFAULT MS_DEBUG MS_TRAP "" "Runtime Resource Compiler" "MDL Source" "MDL Trace" "Debug Fault" "Time Out" "Exception Handling"
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
OLE Operation MS_OLESERVE_EMBED_REFFILES MS_COMPRESS_OPTIONS MS_AUTORESTORESTATUSBAR MS_FKEYMNU MS_ACCUDRAWKEYS MS_LEGACYDRAWORDER MS_SAVEMENU MS_APPMEN MS_WORKSPACEOPTS "Embed References" "Compress Options Selections" "Auto-restore Status Bar" "Function Key Menu"
Page 53 of 387
If set, references are embed DGN file. Specifies file compression o options override the selectio Options dialog box. If set to 1, the status bar is r appearance whenever the p Open function key menu file For 3D wireframe views and non-rasterized mode, use a element position. File containing information a Location of application and s Sets how MicroStation Mana options: 0 or not set (default same; 1 = workspace option workspace options hidden, M If set, 0 sets the status bar in Command Window interface in MicroStation Manager det If set to 0 or not set (default) menu bar spans the entire w window. If set to a value oth dockable dialogs can be doc bar. If set, MicroStation saves th directories for each file type If set, the active DGN file is Workmode activates/disable to produce a more compatib this variable to DWG will dis that may result in elements t the DWG file format. Setting full functional capacity in cre restart MicroStation to see th value. If set, view windows will imm windows are moved or resiz Controls MicroStation's beha format design files. If not set with an alert dialog that prov the file to V8 DGN format. If to V8 DGN format and open opened in read-only mode. I in V7 workmode. If set, the Show File Icons ch MicroStation Manager, New Also, the setting is turned of display of file list icons. The you restart MicroStation. If set, the SOURCE file prop of the source file. By default extension of the source file a disable the SOURCE proper full path of the source file. If set, thumbnail images of fi MicroStation Manager and O If set, specifies the number o wait before exiting MicroStat 30 minutes. Specifies the time, in millise a pop-up dialog box. The va seconds). The default value
"AccuDraw Shortcuts" Text file listing AccuDraw sh "Legacy Draw Order" "Attached Menus" "Application Menus" "Workspace Options"
MS_USECOMMANDWINDOW
"Use Command Window"
MS_MAINMENUDOCKINGBESIDE
"Allow Docking Beside Main Menu"
MS_FILEHISTORY MS_READONLY
"File History" "Read Only"
MS_WORKMODE
"Work Mode"
MS_IMMEDIATEUPDATE
"Window Immediate Update"
MS_OPENV7
"Open V7 Files"
MS_DISABLE_FILE_ICONS
"Disable File Open Icons"
MS_SOURCENAME_PROPERTY
"Save the SOURCE file property" "Disable File Open Thumbnail" "Exit MicroStation When Idle" "Popup Dialog Close Delay"
MS_DISABLE_FILE_THUMBNAIL MS_IDLETIMEOUT
MS_POPUPDIALOGCLOSEDELAY
MS_FULLPATHINTITLEBAR
If set, the full file specificatio "Full Path in Title Bar" path, is displayed in the Mic window title bar
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
MS_NO_VIEW_ANIMATION
Page 54 of 387
"Disable Tile/Cascade If on, the animation of view t Animation" "" If set to 0, menus that are la not have top and bottom scr positioning is not available. correctly.
MS_NATIVEMAINMENU
Printing
MS_PLTR MS_PLOTDLG_DEF_PLTFILE MS_PLT_SYSPRT_PLTFILE MS_PLT_SYSPRT_DEFAULT_PRINTER MS_PLT_SYSPRT_DEFAULT_FORM MS_PLT_SYSPRT_DEFAULT_TRAY MS_PLTFILES MS_PLTDLG_FORCEOUTDIR MS_PLOTINI MS_PENTABLE MS_BATCHPLT_SPECS MS_BATCHPLT_JOBSET_DIR MS_BATCHPRINT_LOGFILE MS_BATCHPRINT_ADD_ALL_MODELS MS_BATCHPRINT_ADD_ONLY_SHEET_MODELS MS_BATCHPRINT_ADD_ONLY_DESIGN_MODELS MS_BATCHPRINT_NO_READONLY MS_PLT_USE_MRU_DEFAULTS MS_PLT_PREVIEW_USABLEAREACOLOR MS_PLT_PREVIEW_PLOTBOXCOLOR MS_PLT_PREVIEW_PLOTFENCECOLOR MS_PLTDLG_UNLOADONCLOSE MS_PLTDLG_CLOSE_AFTER_PLOT MS_PLT_ENABLE_SCALE_CLIPPING MS_PLT_ENABLE_PRESERVE_SCALE MS_PLT_ENABLE_AUTO_ROTATE MS_PLT_ENABLE_AUTO_ORIENT MS_PLT_HONOR_SHEET_INFO
Name of default printer drive "Default Printer Driver or .plt) file that is used if a m File" defined. "Force Default Printer Name of printer driver config that loads, rather than last o Driver" "Default Windows Printer Driver" "Default Windows Printer Name" "Default Windows Form Name" "Default Windows Tray Name" "Default Output Directory" "Force Output Directory" "Print Config Search Path" "Pen Table Search Path" "Batch Print Specifications" "Batch Print Job Directory" "Batch Print Log File" "Batch Print Add All Models" "Batch Print Add Sheet Models" "Batch Print Add Design Models" "Batch Print Read/Write Mode" "Enable Last Used Defaults" Name of printer driver config that is used when Windows Name of printer that is used printer opens. Name of form that is used w opens. Name of tray that is used wh opens. Directory for printing output Directory for plot files; overri Directory for print configurat Search path for pen table file Name of the file that contain specifications. Directory containing batch p Name of batch printing log fi If set to 0, does not add mul to the job set when a design If set to 1, only adds sheet m design file is added. If set to 1, only adds design a design file is added. If set to 0, Batch Print opens mode, which is the default. Enables or disables the use default files and directories.
"Preview Usable Area Specifies the color of the us Color" preview window. "Preview Plot Rectangle Color" "Preview Plot Fence Color" "Unload Plot Dialog on Close" "Close Print Dialog After Plot" "Enable Scale Clipping" "Enable Preserve Scale" "Enable Automatic Rotation" "Enable Automatic Orientation" "Honor Sheet Definitions" Specifies the color of the pri the preview window. Specifies the color of the pri preview window. Controls the load/unload of t closing. If set to 1, the Print dialog bo a print job is performed succ If set to 0, does not reduce t to accommodate the specifie If set to 0, does not preserve a new view, fence or paper s If set to 0, does not manipul to achieve the best fit. If set to 0, does not manipul order to achieve the best fit. If set to 0, operates as if no If t t 1 th d f lt P i t d
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
MS_PLT_SET_PRINTER_FROM_SHEET MS_PLT_AREA_PRIORITY MS_PLT_FORM_SCALE_PRIORITY MS_PLT_SET_LAYOUT_FROM_SHEET MS_PLT_SET_PLOT_STYLE_TABLE_FROM_SHEET MS_PLT_MAX_ON_NEW_AREA MS_PLT_FIT_RASTER_REFS MS_PLT_AUTO_FIT_VIEW MS_PLTDLG_SHOW_BASIC_LAYOUT_CONTROLS MS_PLTDLG_ALLOW_FORM_SIZE_EDIT MS_PLT_SHOW_PRINT_STATUS MS_PLT_THUMBNAIL_PREVIEW_TIMEOUT MS_PLTDLG_SHOW_ACCURATE_PREVIEW_ROTATION MS_PLT_SET_UNITS_FROM_SHEET MS_PLTDLG_KEEPVIEWFLAGSONFENCECHANGE MS_PLTDLG_WEIGHTOVERRIDE MS_PLTDLG_TRANSPARENCY_OVERRIDE MS_PLOTDLG_DEF_PENTABLE MS_PLTDLG_SETUPSYSPRT_ENABLE_PRINT MS_PLTDLG_ENABLE_SAVE_CONFIG MS_PLTDLG_DISABLE_PREFERENCES_DIALOG MS_PLT_SCALE_METHOD MS_PENTABLE_IMPORTEMPTYSECTIONS MS_PENTABLE_DISABLECOLOR MS_PENTABLE_SLOTNUM_MATCH_APPLIES_TO_CHILD MS_PENTABLE_SEARCH_LEVEL_LIBRARIES MS_PENTABLE_IMPORTCTB_NOPENMAP MS_PLTFILE_EDITOR MS_PLNONAME MS PLT INVERT WHITE COLORS
Page 55 of 387
"Honor Sheet Printer" from the active sheet definiti "Print Area Priority" "Form Scale Priority" "Honor Sheet Layout Info" "Honor Sheet Plot Style Table" "Maximize on New Print Area" "Fit with Raster Refs" "Automatically Fit View" "Basic Layout Controls" "Allow Form Size Edits" "Show Print Status Dialog" "Thumbnail Preview Timeout" "Preview Accurate Rotation" "Set Units From Sheet" "Keep View Flags on New Fence" "Print Dialog Weight Override" "Plot Dialog Transparency Override" "Default Pen Table" "Enable Setup Sysprinter Print" "Enable Save Configuration" "Disable Plot Dialog Preferences" "Scale Method" "Import Empty Pen Table Section" "Pen Table Disable Color" "Pen Table Slot Number Match" "Pen Table Search Level Libs" "Pen Table Import Pen Maps" If set to 1, sheet definitions i over the active fence. If set to 1, the default form s the paper size changes. If set to 0, the Print dialog bo automatically set when a sh the current print area is She If set to 0, plot style tables s definition are not attached to If set to 1, the print size is m when the print area changes If set to 1, raster references computing the design range Controls the setting for the p If set to 1, the Print dialog bo option menu are hidden. The option menu is displayed ins If set to 1, the size of the sel via the Print dialog box. If on, a print status dialog bo being printed. You can canc Controls how long the thumb dialog box paints before stop dialog box to refresh. The de If set to 1, the Preview dialo current rotation. If set to 0, the Print dialog bo automatically set from the sh current print area is Sheet. When a new fence is placed resetting or preserving curre Sets the Print dialog box's w value other than the one obt Sets the Print dialog box's tr a value other than the one o Defines the default pen table Controls the print behavior o Printer icon. Disables the Print dialog Sav items. If set to 1, the Preferences m on the Settings menu. Determines how the print sc dialog. During AutoCAD plot style ta table sections that have no e sections are created. Controls the color of a disab default is medium gray. Controls how the pen table r applies to the parent referen If set to 0, level libraries are searching for level names de When importing CTB files, a width resymbolization of mu
"Printer Configuration Controls with editor is used w Editor" Printer Driver Configuration "Exclude DGN Name from Plot" "I t Whit t Bl Enables/disables the insertio output file. t id th
k All
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Colors" MS_PLT_FORCE_HARDWARE_TEXT MS_PLT_ABBREVIATE_BORDER_FILENAME MS_PLT_USE_VIEW_BACKGROUND_COLOR_FOR_RENDER "Force Hardware Text" "Abbreviate Border Filename" "Render With View Background Color" "Print Phong using Hardware" "Apply Color Mode to Raster"
Page 56 of 387
inverted from white to black. Text that otherwise would be to the printer driver as hardw If set to 0, the filenames incl are not abbreviated. If set to 1, the print engine d background color for the plo If set to 0, the print engine u software renderer to render reference presentation state to 1, the graphics card is use If set to 0, the print engine d mode specified in the plot de

MS_PLT_USE_HARDWARE_PHONG
MS_PLT_APPLY_COLOR_MODE_TO_RASTER
Set to 0 to disable fi Set to 1 to enable pa protection Set to 2 to enable pa Set to 3 to enable ce Set to 0 to use stron protected files that p open (default) Set to 1 to enable pr protected files and c Set to 0 to disable lic Set to 1 to enable pa Set to 2 to enable ce Set to 4 to enable Ev Set to 7 to enable al
Protection
MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE
"Enable file protection"

MS_PROTECTION_V8_COMPATIBILITY
"Limit encryption strength"

MS_PROTECTION_LICENSE_ENABLE
"Control license creation"
Add individual values togeth license types. MS_PROTECTION_PASSWORD_MIXED MS_PROTECTION_PASSWORD_MIMIMUM MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_THUMBNAIL "Password letters and A password containing a mix numbers. numbers" "Minimum length of password" "Do not encrypt file thumbnail" "Do not encrypt file properties" "DGN Library List" "Design Files" "References" "Visible MDL Applications" "MDL Applications" "AddIns" Sets the minimum length of The default is 5. The thumbnail is an image o design file. The image is dis Explorer and MicroStation M Set to 1, tells the Protect com properties unencrypted or se encrypt file properties. List of DGN libraries. Search path(s) for DGN files Search path(s) for reference Search path(s) for MDL app MDL dialog box. Search path(s) for MDL app programs loaded by MDL ap Search path for managed Ad used outside of MicroStation configured privatePath. Search path for managed as AddIns outside of MicroStati configured privatePath. Dire h d i MS ADDINPAT
MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_PROPERTIES Primary Search Paths MS_DGNLIBLIST MS_DEF MS_RFDIR MS_MDLAPPS MS_MDL MS_ADDINPATH
MS_ADDIN_DEPENDENCYPATH
"AddIn Dependencies"
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
MS_MACRO MS_RSRCPATH MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST MS_LIBRARY_PATH RDL_DIR "Macros" "Resource Files" "User Interface DGN Library List" "Library Path" "Redline Location"
Page 57 of 387
Search path for macros. Search path(s) for resource applications. Directories containing DGN tool box, task, menu, and ico Search path for dynamic link Location and/or extension of generated redline file. Defau DGN file but with the suffix same directory as the open Location and/or extension of generated DWG redline file. open DWG file with _redline the same directory as the op Directory containing filter da Directory containing linestyle If set, the Attach Reference directory, rather than the dir reference. Controls the default settings This variable is set to a com key=value pairs for exam snap=1,locate=0,trueSca Recognized keys and values snap=0|1, locate=0|1, treatA attachMethod=coincident|wo saveRelativePath=0|1, scale ignoreWhenNesting=0|1, dis displayBoundary=0|1, newLevelDisplay=fromconfig nestMode=live|copy|none, nestDepth=<value>,nestOve plotAs3D=0|1. Also, to store the complete p attached references, set the completepathv7=1.
DWGRDL_DIR MS_FILTER_LIB_DIR MS_LINFILELIST Reference MS_REF_DEFAULTATTACHDIRECTORY
"DWG Redline Location" "Filter Library Path" "LIN File Path" "Default Attachment Directory"
MS_REF_DEFAULTSETTINGS
"Default Attachment Settings"
MS_DISALLOWFULLREFPATH
"Disallow Full Ref Path"
If set, MicroStation does not references. By default, Micro abbreviated (portable) path references. If set, MicroStation displays references. By default, when model that is referenced by levels are not displayed whe opened. Newly created mod Save settings is performed works when both the master in the V8 file format. If set to any value, the neste adjustments at each level ar not set, the color adjustment controls the color adjustmen By default, MicroStation high reference file when the refer variable is set to any value, Disabling speeds up the refe makes it more difficult to see being manipulated. If undefined, the default soc If defined, the socket port 19 When exporting to DWG, co displayed.
MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY
"New Level Display"
MS_NEST_COLORADJUSTMENT
"Nested Reference Color Adjustment"
MS_REF_DONTHILITEFORMANIP
"Hiliting References for Manipulation"
Raster
MS_RASTER_DISABLE_IPPCONNECTION
"Disable default server port"
If set to 0 or undefin Vi 1
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 58 of 387
If set to 1 to 8, the ra specified view. If set to 9, the raster view. If set to 10, the raste
MS_RASTER_VIEWSAVEASDWG
"Define view for DWG file"
MS_RASTER_TIFFINVERT
"Invert monochrome tiff"
If defined and set to a non-z foreground/background colo tiff files when the raster is at Enables Raster Manager Au closing a DGN or detaching to 0, Save Auto is off. If set t and the user will not be prom for changes made to the loc
MS_RASTER_SAVEAUTO
"Set Automatic Save mode"
MS_RASTER_NOSHARING
Manages the automatic crea concurrent access of the sam "Creating .sharing.tmp instances of MicroStation. If files" .sharing.tmp files are genera file generation is off. "Display alert dialog upon raster" If set to 0, displays an alert d the raster detachment. If und display the alert dialog box. Enables geotiff positioning u parameters found in ASCII f The required ASCII files are
MS_RASTER_NO_DETACH_CONFIRM
"CoordSysData.txt " "ProjectionData.txt" "UnitsData.txt"
MS_RASTER_EPSGTABLE_PATH
"Set path to EPSG table"
If undefined or set to 0, hard If set to 1, ASCII files are us MS_RASTER_DEFAULTSISTER "Set default sister file" If set to 0 or 1, HGR is the d WorldFile is the default siste If defined and set to 1, a ras that is attached without the u Interactively check box has t assigned: scale factor = MS_RASTER_DEFAULTSC deduced from the scale fact MS_RASTER_DEFAULTSCALE "Set default scale" If undefined, a raster withou attached without the use of t box has the following scale a unit and the scale factor is d DPI. If defined and set to any oth and MS_RASTER_DEFAUL behavior as undefined). MS_RASTER_1BIT_WORKMODE MS_RASTER_DEFAULT_LEVEL "Harmonize monochrome raster display" "Set default display level" If defined and set to 1, harm display so they are handled attachments. If undefined or Defines the level for raster e MicroStation XM Edition. Th If defined and set to 1, Raste background transparency va Raster Manager Transparen values are 0 to 255, where 2 undefined or set to 0, has no Serves the same function as O U t l i th S tti
MS_RASTER_TRANSPARENCY
"Set transparency"
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 59 of 387
Editor dialog box. If set to 1, materials are mad DGN file will default to a loca already (as it would if Copy enabled). If set to zero, or undefined, t materials is controlled by the Use toggle. Local material support is new Edition and is not supported
Rendering/Images MS_LOCAL_MATERIALS
"Local Material Setting"
MS_MTBL MS_MATERIAL MS_PATTERN MS_BUMP MS_IMAGE MS_IMAGEOUT MS_SHADOWMAP MS_LIGHTING MS_LIGHTLIST MS_RENDERLOG MS_PTDIR MS_SHARED_DR_DIR MS_IMAGE_EDITOR MS_MATERIAL_PREVIEW_BACKGROUND MS_RENDERV7MATERIALS MS_DISABLE_RPCBROWSER Security MS_SECURITY_LEVEL
"Material Tables" "Material Palettes" "Pattern Maps" "Bump Maps" "Images" "Image Output" "Shadow Maps" "IES Lighting Files" "Pre-defined Light Sources" "Rendering statistics log"
Search path(s) for material t Search path(s) for material p Search path(s) for pattern m Search path(s) for bump ma Search path(s) for images. Directory in which image file Image > Save and Utilit are stored. Directory where shadow ma written to. Directory where IES lighting Directory that lists the locatio File in which rendering statis
"Particle Tracing Work Working directory for tempo Directory" "Distributed Rendering Directory" "Image Editor" "Material Preview Background" "V7 Material Compatibility" "Disable RPC Thumbnail Browser" "Security level" "Software Publishing Certs" "View Group Seed File" "View Group Seed" "DWG Seed File" "DWG Seed File Override" "Seed File Location" "Default Design File Seed" "Default Translation Seed" Working directory for shared Particle Tracing and Radios Default program to be used program is activated by dou area of the Map Editor dialo Image to be used for the bac previews in the Material Edit If set to 1, materials are rend Most affected are translucen specularity, and diffuse as a If set to 1, the RPC Thumbn Security level for loading an MicroStation. Path where MicroStation can Publishing Certificates used applications that can be load mode. Name of file containing seed without a view group. Name of seed view group fo group. Seed file used to create DW Seed file used to override M selected DWG seed file. Search path(s) for all seed f Default seed file. Default seed file for DWG, C translations. Determines whether a user Fil tti th DWG O
MS_SECURITY_SPC
Seed Files
MS_VIEWGROUPSEED MS_VIEWGROUPSEEDNAME MS_DWGSEED MS_DWGSEED_OVERRIDE MS_SEEDFILES MS_DESIGNSEED MS_TRANSEED
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 60 of 387
When the variable is not set that the dialog box opens, th set by the MS_TRANSEED user can choose a different "Translation Seed Override" When the variable is set to 1 DGN seed file identified by M cannot choose a different se When the variable is set to 2 is set by MS_TRANSEED at session. The user can choos during the session.
MS_TRANSEED_OVERRIDE
MS_CELL_SEEDFILE MS_SHEETSEED MS_USERPREFSEED MS_DESIGNMODELSEED MS_DESIGNMODELSEEDNAME MS_SHEETMODELSEED MS_SHEETMODELSEEDNAME MS_DWGSHEETMODELSEED MS_DWGSHEETMODELSEEDNAME Spelling MS_SPELLINGUSERDICTIONARY
"Cell Library Seed File"
Seed file used when creatin
"Drawing Sheet Seed Seed file used when creatin File" "User Preference Seed" "Design Model Seed File" "Design Model Seed" "Sheet Model Seed File" "Sheet Model Seed" "DWG Sheet Model Seed File" "DWG Sheet Model Seed" "Spelling User Dictionary" "Spelling Language" Name of seed file used to cr resource file. Name of file containing the s design models. Name of seed model for new Name of file containing seed models. Name of seed model for new Name of file containing seed models in DWG files. Name of seed model for new files. Specifies the user dictionary Specifies the language. Vali AmericanEnglish, BritishEng Portuguese), Danish, Dutch Italian, Norwegian, Spanish. Sets the *.dgnlib file used fo variable is set, the specified standards checking. Sets the name of the setting specified by MS_STANDARDSCHECKE variable is set, you cannot s settings. Default directory for standar If this variable is set, it speci that is used to view the Stan This variable can be either a Resource Identifier) that can locate the style sheet. If this style sheet in $(_USTN_WO system/data/standardscheck The list of MDL applications Standards Checker utility is List of symbology resource f highest priority. Main MicroStation configura configuration variables. Text string to be inserted at command line by the resour where to search for include f Text string to be inserted at command line by the MDL c where to search for include f
MS_SPELLINGLANGUAGE MS_SPELLINGDICTIONARYPATH Standards Checker MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_SETTINGSFILE
"Spelling Dictionaries" Specifies the directory to se "Required Standards Checker Set"
MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_SETTINGSNAME
"Required Standards Checker Name" "Standards Checker Report Directory"
MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_OUT
MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_STYLESHEET
"Standards Checker Style Sheet"
MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_APPS Symbology System Env (ironment) MS_SYMBRSRC MS_CONFIG RSC_COMP
"Standards Checker Applications" "Symbology Resources" "Main Configuration File" "Resource Compiler Command Line" "MDL Compiler Command Line"
MDL_COMP
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
BMAKE_OPT MS_DEBUGMDLHEAP Tags MS_TAGOUTPUT MS_TAGREPORTS MS_TAGTEMPLATES Temp and Backup MS_DWG_BACKUP Files MS_NO_DWG_BACKUP MS_BACKUP MS_TMP MS_SCR Translation CGM MS_CGMIN MS_CGMOUT MS_CGMLOG MS_CGMTABLES MS_CGMINSET MS_CGMOUTSET Translation IGES MS_IGESIN MS_IGESOUT MS_IGESLOG MS_IGESINSET MS_IGESOUTSET Translation Step MS_STEPOUT MS_STEPLOG MS_ROSEDB User Commands MS_UCM MS_INIT MS_EXIT MS_NEWFILE MS_APP Visual Basic for Applications MS_VBA_SAVEONRUN MS_VBAAUTOLOADPROJECTS MS_VBASEARCHDIRECTORIES MS_VBANEWPROJECTDIRECTORY "BMAKE Options" "Extended Malloc" "Tag Output" "Tag Reports" "Tag Templates" "Directory for DWG backup files" "Turn off DWG .bak files" "Backup Files" "Temporary Files" "Scratch Files"
Page 61 of 387
Command line options for B bmake include (.mki) files. If set (to the base name of a use extended malloc for deb Output directory for tag data Output directory for tag repo Directory containing tag repo Directory for DWG backup ( not set, the files are placed i DWG file. If set, a .bak file is not create is edited. Default directory for backup Directory for temporary files MicroStation. Directory for scratch files cre
"CGM Input Directory" Input directory for CGM tran "CGM Output Directory" "CGM Log Files" "CGM Configuration Tables" "CGMOUT Settings File" Output directory for CGM tra Output directory for CGM log Directory containing the CG
"CGMIN Settings File" Settings file for the CGMIN a Settings file for the CGMOU
"IGES Input Directory" Input directory for IGES tran "IGES Output Directory" "IGES Log Files" "IGESOUT Settings File" "Step Output Directory." "Step Log Files." "Rose database directory." "User Commands" "Startup User Command" "New File User Command" "Apps from 'TSK' statements" "Automatically save VBA project" "Names of standard projects" Output directory for IGES tra Output directory for IGES lo
"IGESIN Settings File" Settings file for IGES import Settings file for IGES export Output directory for Step tra Output directory for Step log Rose database directory. Search path(s) for user com Name of a user command to
"Exit User Command" Name of a user command to Name of a user command to is opened Search path(s) of application statements. If set to 1, MicroStation auto VBA projects every time it st program. Names of the projects that a dialog box is opened.
"Directories to search Directories that are searche for VBA projects" VBA project. "Directory for new projects" Directory that is used when
This table lists uncategorized configuration variables:

Variable Description
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
HISTORY_MAX_MINOR_VERSIONS MSDIR MSLOCAL MS_80TRUETYPESCALE
Page 62 of 387
The number of minor versions for the Limit History command to preserve in the history file. MicroStation root installation directory. Specifies the base directory path for where the required writable portions (that is, local for a network installation) of MicroStation are installed. If set to 1, TrueType fonts using nonstandard TrueType definitions will display as they did prior to V8. If set, MicroStation uses the V8.1 method for mirroring a selection with Mirror Text turned off. When this option is on, two problems can occur:
MS_81TEXTNODEMIRRORING
some style runs (collections of characters with the same text styles applied) may be reversed when mirrored about the Y axis (vertical) line order is reversed in multi-line text when the element is mirrored about the X axis (horizontal)
MS_ALWAYSRELATIVEREFPATH
If set (to any value), MicroStation always turns on the Save Relative Path toggle and disables it so that it cannot be turned off. It will save relative paths whenever possible. Controls the propagation of a model's annotation scale. If set to PROMPT, you are prompted to accept or reject the propagation to existing annotations. If set to ALWAYS, the scale will be automatically propagated. If set to NEVER, the scale will not be propagated. Specifies the correct aspect ratio of the display screen. This variable should be set to the ratio of the width to the height of the display area.
MS_ANNOTATIONSCALEPROPAGATION
MS_ASPECTRATIO
MicroStation automatically detects the aspect ratio of the display screens on most systems. In some configuration (including dual screen Windows displays), the video driver returns incorrect display size information, causing elements to appear stretched in either the horizontal or vertical direction. Use this variable to correct the aspect ratio. Controls the rules for updating fields in the active model. If set to ALWAYS, the fields are always kept up to date. If set to NEVER, the fields are never updated. If not set or set to FOLLOWMODELFLAG, the model's Update Fields Automatically property determines if fields are updated for that model. List of MDL applications that implement extensions to the BASIC language (MS_BASIC_LOAD). List of MDL applications that will have their key-in tables auto-loaded. Command Window resource file. Default is used if undefined. MDL application for handling multi-byte character sets. If set to 1, MicroStation uses a custom font to render text characters that cannot be rendered using the font with which a text element was placed. Directory for data files created or used by MicroStation. Default character translation table. Allows you to specify a different background color, which is used when you create the first sheet model. Expects an RGB triplet separated by commas. Default file filter for the MicroStation Manager, Open, and Save As dialog boxes. If MS_DESIGNFILTER is not defined, the default filter is *.dgn. Directory containing DGN files created as a result of on the fly translation from other file formats. If set to 1, the dimensioning tools use the legacy data point sequence for placing linear and angular dimensions (StartPoint ExtensionPoint EndPoint). (For use on Windows Vista or later) If set to 1 or ON, disables the window ghosting mechanism in the Windows OS for the MicroStation process. Windows creates a ghost window for the application's windows when it determines that an application has been unresponsive for at least five seconds. Several MicroStation features, such as Print/Plot and Image Save, may require a long span of continuous processing time, resulting in the activation of these ghost windows and the associated undesirable side effects in the user interface. Turning off the window ghosting for the process prevents these undesirable effects. When set to 1, you cannot save a relative path for a reference. The Save Relative Path check box is removed from the Attach Reference dialog box. If t if DGN t i h t d l th h t d l dt t DWG fil
MS_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS
MS_BASICEXT_LOAD MS_CMDTABLE_LOAD MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_CODESET MS_CUSTOMFONTCREATION_ENABLE MS_DATA MS_DEFCHARTRAN MS_DEFAULTSHEETRGB MS_DESIGNFILTER MS_DGNOUT MS_DIMLEGACYPOINTORDER
MS_DISABLEWINDOWGHOSTING
MS_DISALLOWRELATIVEREFPATH
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
MS_DWG_CREATE_SEPARATE_SHEETS MS_DWG_DISCARD_INVAID
Page 63 of 387
with the file name created by appending the model name to the original file name. If not set, the sheets are saved to separate layouts within the DWG file. If set, entities that are outside the DGN design plane are discarded and will not be written back to the DWG file on the next file save. If the variable is not set, MicroStation ignores these entities. If set, when a DGN file with Working Units set to Feet-Inches, Format set to Master Units, and Units on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box set to Master Units, the resulting DWG file has Engineering or Architectural units in AutoCAD. (If not set, the units are Decimal or Fractional.) If set, an inline elbow is displayed on notes.
MS_DWG_FEETUNIT_AS_ARCHENG
MS_DWG_LEADER_HOOKLINE
MicroStation allows a note to be placed without an inline elbow (a hook line in AutoCAD) when the inline toggle is unchecked, but AutoCAD does not. This type of note (for instance, a leader without a hook line) saved to DWG will retain correct graphical presentation, and will operate properly in AutoCAD. Specifies the layer to which normal (unshared) cells and reference attachments are assigned when saving the open DGN file in DWG format. If this configuration variable is not defined, layer 0 is used. Controls the width of the default line weight. The default value is 0 for unweighted default lines. Valid values are 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, 211. If more than one file with the same name is present in the same directory, appends the extension to the output filename when saving the file. Filename containing AutoCAD Pattern Definitions. Sets the color table for DWG files in MicroStation. In version 2004, AutoCAD began displaying indexed colors with a slightly different (generally lighter) colors. MicroStation also uses these new colors unless this variable is set. Controls the display of proxy objects within a DWG drawing. Default setting is 1, display complete graphics. Set to 0 for no graphics and 2 for bounding box display only. Defines how MicroStation uses color tables for DWG/DXF files attached as references. Determines whether a user can modify the DWG Seed File setting on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. When the variable is not set or set to 0, the first time that the dialog box opens, the default DWG seed file is set by the MS_DWGSEED configuration variable. The user can choose a different seed file
MS_DWGINSERTLAYER
MS_DWG_LWDEFAULT MS_DWGOMITUNIQUEEXTENSION MS_DWGPATFILE MS_DWG_PRE2004_COLOR_TABLE MS_DWG_PROXYSHOW MS_DWGREF_ALLOWMASTERCOLORS
MS_DWGSEED_OVERRIDE When the variable is set to 1, the user can only use the DWG seed file identified by MS_DWGSEED. The user cannot choose a different seed file. When the variable is set to 2, the default DWG seed file is set by MS_DWGSEED at the beginning of each MicroStation session. The user can choose a different seed file during the session. Identifies the directory containing the DWG settings file Dwgsettings.rsc. Overrides the directory specified by MS_DWGDATA. MS_DWGSYSTEMDATA The display and plotting color tables (DwgDisplayColor.tbl and DwgPlotColors.tbl) can also be controlled by placing them in this directory. Defines the viewport level in DWG files. MS_DWG_VPORT_LAYER_FROM_CLIP Viewport entities are represented as reference attachments in MicroStation the viewport level is extracted from the reference attachment. If no level is set for the reference attachment then by default the viewport is assigned to layer 0 . However, if this variable is set and a clip element is present, then the viewport layer is extracted from the clip element.
If set, the Display locked status of a viewport entity is mapped to the Locate setting of the reference attachments that represent this viewport. In this case, a viewport with Display MS_DWG_VPORT_MAP_LOCATE_OFF_TO_LOCKED locked off will have Locate turned off and changing the Locate status of the reference attachment will change the Display Locked status of the viewport. MS_GUIHAND MS_HELPLOAD_APPLICATION Identifies auxiliary handlers. Determines which application help is based on. Current options are HTMLHelp (default), or StaticWeb. StaticWeb refers to static HTML pages on a website. Specifies the root location of the help content. Defaults to $(USTN_DOCUMENTATIONROOT), but can be set to a file server or URL. This variable does not determine if you are using uncompiled HTMLHelp content. If you set this variable, the value of MS_HELPLOAD_SERVER should be the location containing the product directory (i e MicroStation)
MS_HELPLOAD_SERVER
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
MS_HELPPATH Path to help resource files. User defined.
Page 64 of 387
MS_INGRFILE_REGISTRATION
Sets File Georeference priority over attachment location for Intergraph raster formats, essentially CIT, C29, C30, C31, COT, RLE, TG4 and RGB raster formats. If undefined or set to 0, there is no effect. If set to 1, enables File Georeference priority for rasters.
MS_INITAPPS
List of initial start-up MDL applications. Modifies the behavior of the Copy Levels During Merge setting on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, References tab. When set to 1, if reference levels are not displayed, the reference elements on those levels are not merged into the output file. If not set, the reference merge process translates elements on levels even when the levels are not displayed.
MS_MERGE_DISPLAYEDLEVELSONLY
MS_NO_POSITION_MAPPING_HINTS MS_NOTEAUTOUPDATE MS_OLDUSERLICENSE MS_OPENDESIGNFILEFILTER MS_OPENREFFILEFILTER
If set to l, the keyboard navigational aids will not display when <Esc> is clicked. Controls the list of settings that will be propagated to existing notes when a dimension style is saved. To propagate all settings, set to All. To control individual settings, list attributes in a comma-separated list. File that contains old user license information. Required for when installing a product upgrade. Initial file filter list for the MicroStation Manager and Open dialog boxes. Initial file filter for the Attach Reference File dialog box. Specifies the number of rows pre-fetched from the database, maximum 65535. For example if MS_ORACLEPREFETCH is set to 1000, there will be 1000 rows of data returned to the client and cached. If this configuration variable is not set, one row is pre-fetched. Setting MS_ORACLEPREFETCH can result in improved query performance over high latency networks, such as Wide Area Networks (WANs). Changes the date and time format for printed outputs from Windows Regional Settings to another format. Set to v7.0 to use the v7.0 format. User defined.
MS_ORACLEPREFETCH
MS_PLOTBORDER_TIME_FORMAT
MS_PLT_NORASTERTRANSPARENCY
If defined, disables raster transparency settings when generating print files with drivers that do not support transparency (mainly postscript drivers). This prevents inflating the size of printed output, thus improving printing speeds. If undefined or set to any value other than 1, will not enter the Raster Modify command after interactively attaching a raster.
MS_RASTER_ INTERACTIVE_MODIFY If defined and set to 1, enters the Raster Modify command after interactively attaching a raster. If set, MicroStation uses clipping elements on frozen levels. MS_REF_USECLIP_FROZENLEVEL Note: If the file is saved to DWG and opened in AutoCAD, it will look different since AutoCAD ignores clip elements on frozen levels. If defined and set to 1, MicroStation always uses the reference's color table. If defined and set to any value other than 1, MicroStation never uses the reference's color table. If not defined, MicroStation uses the user preference to determine whether or not to use the reference's color table. If set to 0, MicroStation skips the circular reference check for DGN files. This variable does not affect DWG files. If set to 1, keyboard input is right to left. Main MicroStation resource file. Typically set to ustation.rsc. Used to start session debug prior to the loading of the database server. By setting this configuration variable, you can receive immediate debug information from the consumer DLL. MS_SESSION_DEBUG can be used with all the database servers. A value of 1 enables receipt of debug information from the database server and the corresponding DLL ORACLE, ODBC, or OLEDB. A value of 0 enables receipt of debug information only from the DLL. Controls how an unverified digital signature is crossed out. Value is color weight style strikeout where: color = a number, specifying the menu color identifier number i ht b if i th li i ht f th t ti
MS_REFCOLORTABLE
MS_REF_CYCLECHECK MS_RIGHTLOGICKB MS_RSRC
MS_SESSION_DEBUG
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
style = a number specifying the style strikeout = how to strike out the signature
Page 65 of 387
X Draw an X over the signature Draw a line through the middle of the signature
MS_SIGNATURE_DISPLAY_UNVERIFIED
The default is a heavy solid red X over the signature. This is represented by 4 7 0 X To draw a heavy solid blue line through the signature, use the following: 1 7 0 . If on, MicroStation displays the full subject and issuer name from the signer's certificate in the element information balloon for a digital signature element. Specifies the directory path for the SmartSolid subsystem. If set to 0 (the default), MicroStation saves the snapmode data to the DGN file. If set to 1, the data is saved to the userprefs file. If set, the SOURCE file property can be set to the name of the source file. By default, only the name and extension of the source file are saved. Set to 0 to disable the SOURCE property. Set to FULL to save the full path of the source file. Sets the alignment for stacked fractions, when the Fractions advanced text style setting is on. Values are: 1 = Top 2 = Center (Normal for DWG files. The default if the configuration variable is not defined.) 3 = Bottom Sets the type for stacked fractions, when the Fractions advanced text style setting is on. Values are: 1 = Normal 2 = Diagonal (Normal for DWG files. The default if the configuration variable is not defined.) Normal Center MS_TEXT_STACKFRACTIONS_SCALE MS_THUMBNAIL MS_USERPREF MS_USERPREF_APPS MS_VBAV8TOV7DIALOG MS_VBAV8TOV7FILTER PZIP_OUT The value is the percentage scale factor for stacked fractions. (70 is normal for DWG files, and is the default if this configuration variable is not defined.) Stores a thumbnail image in each DGN file that can be seen in the MicroStation file open dialog boxes, as well as Windows Explorer. Can be used to control the behavior of thumbnail generation. User preference resource file. Set by application configuration files to add user preferences to standard dialogs. Specifies the name of a VBA macro that opens a dialog to collect information to be used in translating a DGN file from V8 to V7 format. Specifies the name of a VBA macro that sets up a translation filter. Specifies default directory for creation of Packager files.
MS_SIGNATURE_SHOW_FULL_NAME MS_SMARTSOLID MS_SNAPMODE_SOURCE MS_SOURCENAME_PROPERTY
MS_TEXT_AUTOSTACKFRACTIONS_ALIGNMENT
MS_TEXT_AUTOSTACKFRACTIONS_TYPE
Using configuration variables in key-ins As an alternative to using the Configuration dialog box (Workspace > Configuration), you can define a configuration variable from the Key-in window using the key-in EXPAND SET. For example, to create a configuration variable MYFILE having as its value the name of the open DGN file, key in EXPAND SET MYFILE = $(_dgnfile) note that there must be a space both before and after =. You can also use configuration variables as parameters in key-ins. For example, to create a cell whose name is the name of the open DGN file (without the extension), key in $ CREATE CELL $(basename(_dgnfile)). In this example the first $ is an alias for the key-in EXPAND KEYIN. In other words, the key-in EXPAND KEYIN CREATE CELL $(basename(_dgnfile)) is equivalent. The second $ indicates what follows in parentheses is a configuration variable.
To check the value of a configuration variable, key in EXPAND ECHO $(<configuration_variable>) for example, EXPAND ECHO $(MS DESIGNSEED) The value is displayed in Message Center
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 66 of 387
User Interface Modification Files

Customizations of MicroStation's user interface used to be stored in user interface modification files. In the sample workspaces provided with MicroStation, the user interface modification files were grouped in the various directories under Bentley's "WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation" directory. When you chose a user interface in the MicroStation Manager dialog box, you specified a directory from which all user interface modification files were read. User interface modification file names started with ustn and used to have a suffix ending with an m followed by a number. There were three additional categories of interface modification files: project, site, and system. Like user interface modification files, these files had an associated priority and a unique file name suffix consisting of a letter and a number. The table below shows each category, its file name suffix, and its priority.
Category User Project Site System File name suffix .m01 .p01 .s01 .r01 Priority 1 (highest) 2 3 4 (lowest)
In the MicroStation V8 XM Edition, customized user interfaces, including customized tools, tool boxes, tasks, and menus, are created in the Customize dialog box and are stored in shared DGN libraries or in personal DGN libraries, rather than in user, project, site, and system interface modification files. To import user interface customizations created in earlier editions of MicroStation, you will need the user, project, site, and/or system interface modification files described above. Using the Customize dialog box, you will copy the customizations from these files into DGN libraries and then you will be able to make additional customizations to the interface. You can import custom tools, tool boxes, and tool frames and custom menus.
User Preference Files

When you choose Preferences from the Workspace menu, the settings in the active user preference file are displayed in the Preferences dialog box. Generally, user preferences reflect what they are named for, the personal preferences of a user in operating MicroStation, rather than settings that are important to maintain across a workgroup.
Configuration Variable Files

MicroStation uses configuration variable files to get values for settings that vary from system to system and from user to user. From a development standpoint, MicroStation configuration variables are simply a mechanism for expanding, or translating, one text string into another. For example, MicroStation needs to find its main resource file. Rather than always looking for a file named "ustation.rsc" in a specific directory, it expands the configuration variable MS_RSRC (defined in the configuration variable file) to get a filename and location. That way (assuming the configuration variable file is correct) MicroStation finds the file regardless of its name and location. Each configuration variable has two parts its name and its definition. Variable definitions can be literal strings or combinations of strings and references to other variables. When MicroStation needs the value of a variable, it looks in the variables table (kept in memory) to find the definition. If the variable is found, it then expands any nested variable references in the definition. If the variable cannot be found, it then attempts to find an operating system environment variable of the same name. If an operating system environment variable is defined, MicroStation uses that value as if it were defined in the variables table
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 67 of 387
In the Windows operating system, the operating system environment variables are defined using the System utility in the Control Panel or the SET command.
The Main Configuration Variable File

The system environment variable MS_CONFIG must point to "mslocal.cfg", which sets installation-specific values and then processes the main configuration variable file. "Msconfig.cfg" is the main configuration variable file, which sets up all configuration variables."Msconfig.cfg" processes five other levels of configuration files. The five configuration levels are:
Configuration Level System Application Site Project User Defined By MicroStation System manager Project manager Users Configuration Variable Name _USTN_SYSTEM _USTN_SITE _USTN_USER _USTN_PROJECT
MicroStation-related applications _USTN_APPL
The "msconfig.cfg" file assigns the configuration variables above, which define directories in which additional configuration variables files may be located. The directories are set by default but they can be changed. The configuration variables can be overridden with operating system environment variables with the same names. Then the "msconfig.cfg" file processes all of the configuration variable files in each of the directories in a particular order.
For more detailed information, see the comments in "msconfig.cfg", which is installed in Bentley's "MicroStation\config" directory.
Configuration Variable File Syntax

Configuration variable files are text files that consist of a series of lines. Each line contains a configuration variable name and definition in the following syntax:
<VARIABLENAME> <operator> <new_value> # comment or a preprocessor directive in this syntax:
%<preprocessor directive> VARIABLENAME is the name of the configuration variable defined. Nearly all variable names used by MicroStation begin with MS_ or _USTN_. Variables whose names begin with an underscore ( _ ) are not displayed in the Configuration dialog box. Variable names can contain only alphanumeric characters (A-Z, 0-9) and must be at least two characters long. Although variable names are not case sensitive, uppercase letters are used by convention. There is no limit on the length of a variable name, but as a practical matter it should be kept under 32 characters. White space (space or tab characters) before and after the variable name is ignored. Available values for operator are as follows:
Operator = : + Meaning Assign new_value to VARIABLENAME. Overrides all previous definitions at or below the current configuration variable level. Assign new_value to VARIABLENAME only if that variable does not already exist. Append new_value to current value of VARIABLENAME. Uses a space as a separator. see footnote 4
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
> see footnote 5 < see footnote 6
Page 68 of 387
Append directory or file lists defined by new_value to a variable definition that defines a path. If no current value for VARIABLENAME exists, this is equivalent to the = operator. Otherwise, it appends a path separator character, a semicolon (;), and then new_value. Prepend directory or file lists defined by new_value (to the beginning of) a variable definition that defines a path. If no current value for VARIABLENAME exists, this is equivalent to the = operator. Otherwise, it prepends new_value followed by a path separator character, a semicolon (;).
Anything after a number sign (#) on a line is treated as a comment and is ignored.
File path names should be entered using the forward slash (/). Windows converts all forward slashes (/) in new_value to backslashes (\). Also, all directory definitions should end with a trailing forward slash. This is an example of a valid directory definition:
MS_DEF = /network/dgn/ These definitions are not valid:
MS_DEF = /network/dgn #no trailing slash MS_DEF = \network\dgn\ #backslashes

When editing a configuration variable file, insert a carriage return at the end of the last line to ensure the entire file will be processed. Press <Enter> to insert a carriage return.
Variable definition references A variable definition can contain references to other variables. References to other variables are made with the following syntax:
Reference Meaning
$(VARIABLEREF) Expand VARIABLEREF when this variable is used. ${VARIABLEREF} Expand to current value of VARIABLEREF.
MicroStation recognizes the following kinds of variable definition references:

Reference dev() dir() devdir() parentdir() device directory device and directory parent directory filename without extension filename with extension file extension Complete file specification without extension first path from a list of paths concatenated string constructs a definition from pieces of variables Returns
parentdevdir() device and parent directory basename() filename() ext() noext() first() concat() build()
For example, consider configuration variable MS_EXAMPLE_FILE with the definition "d:\Bentley\Workspace\MyProject\3dcells.cel".
$(dev (MS_EXAMPLE_FILE)) expands to "d: " $(parentdir (MS_EXAMPLE_FILE)) expands to "\Bentley\Workspace" $(filename (MS_EXAMPLE_FILE)) expands to "3dcells.cel"
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Now consider configuration variable MS_EXAMPLE_PATH with the definition "d:\cell\mycells\;c:\cell\;g:\mycells\".
Page 69 of 387
$(first (MS_EXAMPLE_PATH)) expands to "d:\cell\mycells\" $(build (c:,first (MS_EXAMPLE_PATH),patterns, ext ( (MS_EXAMPLE_FILE)) expands to "c:\cell\mycells\patterns.cel"
MicroStation-defined variables MicroStation defines one of the following configuration variables to indicate which software is running:
Variable name _MICROSTATION _BENTLEYPOWERMAP _BENTLEYREDLINE _BENTLEYVIEW _MSDRAFT _NAVIGATOR Defined when MicroStation is running. Bentley PowerMap is running. Bentley Redline is running. Bentley View is running. MicroStation PowerDraft is running. ProjectWise Navigator is running.
_BENTLEYPOWERMAPFIELD Bentley PowerMap Field is running.
Preprocessor directives Preprocessor directives control the way that MicroStation processes configuration variable files. Preprocessor directives always begin with %. The following preprocessor directives are available:
Directive Meaning
% Include (process) another configuration variable file. filename can contain variable references. In addition, it can contain the include<filename> wildcard character (*), in which case all files that satisfy the wildcard specification are included. Execute the following lines if expression is true. Expressions can be composed of Boolean combinations of:

defined () - true if variable is defined. exists () - true if file exists. || - logical OR. && - logical AND. ! - negate. ( ) - grouping.
%if <expression>
%else %elif <expression> %endif %error <string> %undef <varName> %lock <varName>
Execute the following lines if the last %if was false. Execute the following lines if the last %if was false and expression is true. End of conditional block. Print string and exit MicroStation. Undefines and deletes the configuration variable varName. (To keep the variable defined with a translation of NULL, use varName = <space>). Locks the configuration variable to its current value.
For example, assume the following system-level configuration variables are defined before MicroStation starts:
Variable name Current value MS_DEF PROJDIR "c:\dgn\" "\project33\"
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
# make sure the project directory is set up PROJDIR:/noproj/ # if no project is active # define my DGN file directories MS_OLDDEF = ${MS_DEF} %if defined (TRAINING) MS_DEF = c:/ustation/dgn/ %endif MS_DEF < f:/usr2/dgn/ # a network drive PROJDGN : $(PROJDIR)dgn/ # set up accounting information ACCNTFILE = $(PROJDIR)accnt.dat
Page 70 of 387
The variables table (stored in memory by MicroStation) contains the information in the first two columns of the following chart. When MicroStation expands a variable definition, it will have the value of the corresponding item in the third column:
Variable name MS_DEF PROJDIR MS_OLDDEF PROJDGN ACCNTFILE "/project33/" "c:/dgn/" "$(PROJDIR)dgn/" "$(PROJDIR)accnt.dat" Definition "\project33\" "c:\dgn\" "\project33\dgn\" "\project33\accnt.dat" Expands to
"c:/Program Files/Bentley/Workspace/standards/dgn/" "c:\Program Files\Bentley\Workspace\standards\dgn\"
Debugging Variable Definition Files

To determine whether your configuration variable files are being processed properly, start MicroStation with the -debug=n command line switch.
At a command prompt, enter: ustation -debug=n or append -debug=n to the Target field in the MicroStation program item's properties dialog box (Shortcut tab).
where n is a value from 1 to 5. MicroStation displays the names of all of the configuration variable files it processes and the names and values for all variable definitions. Then MicroStation exits. Use one of the following values for n:
Value of n 1 2 3 4 5 Type of report Brief report that shows the current string value of each configuration variable as it is processed. In addition, shows the current translation of each configuration variable as it is processed. In addition, shows conditional break information by displaying the line number when each if preprocessor directive is processed. In addition, prints final translations of all configuration variables at the end of the report. This is the default setting. In addition, shows final values of all configuration variables at each level (system, application, site, project, user).
For most purposes, the value 4 (the default setting) gives the most meaningful report: It shows the values of the configuration variables as they exist while MicroStation is running. The information in the report is saved as ASCII text in the file msdebug.txt in the current directory.
Customizing the User Interface

Perhaps the most noticeable way of customizing a workspace is to modify its user interface. You can customize any or all of the parts of h i k ' i f
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects

Page 71 of 387
tools tool boxes tasks pull-down menus
The MicroStation Manager dialog box is used to select and activate user interfaces and other types of workspace components. If you used earlier editions of MicroStation and customized tools, tool boxes, tool frames, and menus, you can import those customizations into DGN libraries to use them with this edition. The following aspects of the MicroStation user interface are not parts of the workspace user interface, but you can also customize them:

AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts Function Key Menus
Tools, Tool Boxes, and Tasks Tools Tool Boxes Tasks Pull-Down Menus Importing Custom Tools, Tool Boxes, and Menus AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts Function Key Menus Capturing MicroStation Screen Images Digitizing Tablet Menus Screen Menus Action Strings
Tools, Tool Boxes, and Tasks

MicroStation allows you to create custom tools and tool boxes. Custom tools can be copies of standard MicroStation tools or tools from DGN libraries, modified to fit your needs, or they can be created by clicking the New Tool icon in the Customize dialog box. Your custom tools can be set up to help you draw elements, adjust settings, run other applications, link to Web sites, and more. Custom tools are placed in custom tool boxes, which are used to organize tools. Custom tool boxes can be copies of standard MicroStation tool boxes or tool boxes from DGN libraries, modified to fit your needs, or they can be created by clicking the New Tool Box icon. You can place custom tool boxes within other tool boxes. Custom tool boxes can be opened and used in your workspace and/or grouped into tasks. A task is a set of tools grouped to facilitate a particular workflow. By defining and grouping tasks, you can create a task-based user interface. The tools grouped into a task can be standard MicroStation tools, custom tools, or a combination of both types. A task's tools can be grouped into standard MicroStation tool boxes, custom tool boxes, or a combination of both types. Therefore the interface will contain all the tools and tool boxes you need to complete your work, grouped the way you want them. You create and manage custom tools, tool boxes, and tasks on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 72 of 387
Tools tab in the Customize dialog box
Custom tools, tool boxes, and tasks are created and stored in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to customize tools, tool boxes, and tasks in one place and to distribute the customizations to many users. When you open or create a DGN file you can see and use all the custom tools, tool boxes, and tasks in the configured DGN libraries. If you create custom tools, tool boxes, or tasks and do not want to make them available to others, you should save them in a personal DGN library, which is created when you create an interface component. If the open DGN file is not a configured DGN library, you will be unable to use the features on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box while that DGN file is open. The configuration variable MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST (set by default to point to MS_DGNLIBLIST and to the DGN libraries in the active interface component's folder) and the configuration variable _USTN_SYSTEM_GUIDGNLIBLIST specify which files can be used for task, tool box, tool, icon, and menu customizations.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 73 of 387
Message that appears on the Tools tab if the open DGN file is not a configured DGN library
If the open DGN file is not a configured DGN library and you want to use the features on the Tools tab, you can open a configured DGN library from the Customize dialog box.
To open a configured DGN library from the Customize dialog box
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), choose File. Below the Import and Export menu items is a list of files in the configured DGN libraries. 2. Choose one of the files. The open DGN file closes and the selected file opens. Now the Tools tab is available.
There also is a capability available, should you need to change the default display of tools, tool boxes, and tasks. To change the default settings, add the following capability to either your user configuration file (.ucf) or your project configuration file (.pcf):
_USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_UI_LOADFROMACTIVEFILE This will give you access to the features on the Tools tab while working in a DGN file that is not specified by the configuration variables listed above. If this capability is set, you will see the custom tools, tasks, and menus in the open DGN file in addition to those in the configured DGN libraries.
When you are defining custom tools and tool boxes, you do not do this directly in tasks. You also should not create the same tool in multiple tool boxes. Instead, you should create one copy of a tool and place it in one tool box. Tasks can use overlapping sets of tools. For example, you can create one custom drawing tool and include it in two tasks.
When you need to perform task number 1, you select the task and the tool appears automatically, along with the other tools that are needed for task 1. When you need to perform task number 2, you select the task and the tool appears automatically, along with a different set of tools that are needed for task 2.
If you need to modify the tool you do so once, and both tasks are automatically updated to reflect the modifications. An analogy is that tool boxes are like the drawers in a tool chest. You have one drawer for screwdrivers, one drawer for pliers, one drawer for wrenches, and one drawer for hammers. Your first task is work on the lawn mower. Your second task is hang a picture. In each task you have already defined which tools are needed from each drawer. You might need the hammer for both tasks. Whenever you are ready to perform one of the tasks, your task is automatically populated with the proper tools from each drawer. You do not have to open every drawer to find the tools you need, nor do you have to roll out the entire tool chest to perform your task. If you used earlier editions of MicroStation to customize tools, tool boxes, and tool frames, you can import your customizations into DGN libraries to use them with this edition. Custom tool box, custom tool, and task definitions also can be imported from and exported to XML
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
files. You can generate HTML reports of all the custom tool box, custom tool, and task available in the open DGN file.
Page 74 of 387
Tools
MicroStation allows you to create custom tools and tool boxes. Custom tools can be copies of standard MicroStation tools or DGN library tools, modified to fit your needs, or they can be created by clicking the New Tool icon in the Customize dialog box. Your custom tools can be set up to help you draw elements, adjust settings, run other applications, link to Web sites, and more.
See Tools, Tool Boxes, and Tasks for more information about custom tool boxes, tasks, and their relation to DGN libraries.
Custom tools are created and managed on the Tools tab of the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize).
Tools tab in the Customize dialog box, with tools in the left pane
Once you add custom tools to the open DGN file (represented by the blue V8 icon), they appear in the left pane on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box. You can name your tools and organize them by moving them up or down within a tool box or by moving them into another tool box. The tools in the open DGN file also can be copied, deleted, renamed, and have properties added to them. Tools cannot be copied or moved from the open DGN file into other DGN libraries or into the Application Tools (represented by the gray V8 icons). However, the tools from any DGN library or from the Application Tools can be copied into the open DGN file. Once they are part of the open DGN file they can be modified and deleted. You cannot add, modify, cut, rename, delete, or rearrange tools in a DGN library G
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 75 of 387
For each tool that you add to the open DGN file, you must decide which properties it will have and you must set those properties. You can add as many properties as needed to a tool. Once properties are added to a tool they appear in the Properties pane when the tool is selected. When you add a new tool it has the following default properties:

Icon Set to the New Tool icon Tool Presentation Set to Icon Only Tool Type Set to Standard Dimension Set to Both Keyin Set to null Balloon Text Set to New Tool Associate Template Set to Use Current Setting Template Path Set to None
If you copy an existing tool to add a new one, the new tool uses the properties of the copied tool. You can add, modify, and delete properties from the open DGN file's tool. When adding properties to a tool you can choose them from the following categories:

Design File Settings Includes tool settings for snaps, angles, grid locks, stream line strings and curves, and others. Lock Settings Includes tool settings that turn on or off different types of locks. General Settings Includes icon, tool presentation, tool type, and dimension settings. Command Data Includes key-in, balloon text, and template settings. Dialog Item Settings You can use these properties to define tool settings.
You cannot change the properties of a few tools that you can copy from the Application Tools to the open DGN file. These tools activate processing in an MDL application; therefore, they do not have a Key-in property and their other properties cannot be changed when you copy them to the open DGN file. Some examples are the View Attributes tool in the 2D View Control tool box and most of the tools in the Primary tool box.
Tool properties The following is a list of properties that can be added to a custom tool. The properties that are required to be set for a custom tool have an asterisk before their name.
Tool Properties Key Point Snap Divisor Snap Mode Override Snap Mode Active Angle Grid Master Grid Reference Unit Lock Roundoff Tag Increment Tab Size for INCLUDE command Stream Delta Distance field related to unit locks.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Stream Tolerance Stream Angle Stream Area Axis Increment Grid Configuration Grid Aspect Grid Angle Grid Orientation Axis Origin Design File Surface Cap Settings Mode Pattern Tolerance Cell Library Unit Lock Roundoff Ratio IGDS Compatible Dimension IGDS Compatible Multi-line Isometric Plane Association Snap Grid Unit Active Angle Text Node Axis Scale Graphic Group Level Locks Fence Overlap Fence Clip Fence Void Stretch Cells ACS Plane Isometric Depth Annotation Scale Use Shared Cells True Scale Cells The Axis Lock's start angle. The grid rotation angle; a value between 0 and 360 degrees.
Page 76 of 387
Choices are Orthogonal or Offset. If you want the grid points aligned isometrically, choose Offset and set Grid Aspect to 0.2886751346.
The type specified when placing slabs, spheres, cylinders, cones, tori, and wedges. If set to Cap, they are considered solids. If set to Uncapped, they are considered surfaces.
Sets the Unit Lock Roundoff by multiplying this value times the Unit Lock Roundoff value. If this value is zero and Unit Lock is on, the Grid Aspect is used.
General Settings
* Icon
When you add a new tool it uses the New Tool icon by default. You can change that icon to an imported bitmap file (BMP file), an imported icon file (ICO file), or a MicroStation icon. An imported BMP file can be no larger than 256 x 256 pixels. If it larger than that it will be clipped so that it does not exceed 256 x 256 pixels. When importing a BMP file you must use an icon editing application (such as Microsoft Paint or Paint Shop Pro) to save the BMP file in three sizes: 16 x 16 pixels, 24 x 24 pixels, and 32 x 32 pixels. Importing the three files in three sizes will allow the icon to appear in the small, medium, and large sizes. Imported ICO files change size automatically so you need to import only one ICO file. If you import an icon from the Import Selected Icons or Import Selected Bitmaps lists, it is copied into the open DGN file. Icons in the open DGN file can be deleted and selected in the Define Icon for Tool dialog box. Icons chosen from the other lists are not copied into the open DGN file because they are already included in the software. If an icon is imported from the Application Tools, the name of its tool box is appended to the beginning of its name so that it is unique from the Application Tool.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Tool Presentation Tool Type
Page 77 of 387
Determines what is presented for the tool in the custom tool box: Icon and Label, Icon Only (the default), or Label Only. Determines the behavior of the tool. Standard (the default) makes the tool active until you select another tool. Push Button is used to adjust settings. For example, the key-in co=3;lv=default;wt=2;as=1 would set the active color, level, line weight, and line style. Specifies whether the tool will be active in 2D DGN models, 3D DGN models, or both (the default).
Dimension
If you try to use a tool whose dimension is not the same as the active model's dimension, you will see an error message in the status bar and the tool will not become active. Enter a key-in for the tool to run. You also can set this to NULL. If a key-in is defined by an MDL application, it is preceded by the MDL application's task ID within brackets. When copying a tool to a DGN library, if you want to use the original key-in be sure to include the task ID within brackets and the key-in. If you want to activate a different key-in, replace the entire string.
* Key-in You can use the following syntax to make a customized tool run multiple MDL applications and key-ins: [taskID_1;taskID_2;] key-in_1;key-in_2;key-in_3. The number of MDL applications does not have to match the number of key-ins. First, each MDL application is loaded if it is not already loaded; second, each key-in is processed. This syntax applies only to DGN library-based tools. Command Data * Balloon Text * Associate Template Tool tip that appears when you pass the pointer over the icon. Sets the status of the Active Element Template icon when the tool is used. Always turns on the icon. Never turns off the icon. Use Current Setting does not change the status of the icon when the tool is used. If the icon is turned on and the Template Path is defined, elements that you place with the tool will be associated with the template. Specifies the template with which the tool is associated and the template group in which the template is located. You can change the template and path or change it to None. If Associate Template is set to Never but a template and path are specified, the elements that you place will use the template's properties but will not be associated with the template.
Template Path
You can assign a default template to a tool. If it is assigned, when you use the tool the default template's properties are activated. Then if Associate Template and Template Path are set, the associated template's properties are applied to Default Template the element. If a property is specified in the associated and default templates, the associated template's property takes precedence. If a property is specified only in the default template, it is applied to the element. Then if a key-in is specified it runs, and if dialog item settings are specified they are applied to the element. You can add tool settings to custom tools. For example, you could create a customized tool that places lines that are constrained to a certain length. Dialog Item Name Dialog Item Settings Type Value The Dialog Item Name is the technical name of the tool setting in the tool settings dialog box. The first part of the dialog item name is always ToolSettings, no matter which tool is currently selected. The dialog and item names are caseinsensitive. Type for the Dialog Item Name above. The supported types are Literal, Distance, Area, and Volume. These values are converted from the open DGN file's working units to meters and are stored in meters. Value for the Type above. For example, if your custom tool places a line that is constrained, one of the dialog items would be the line's length, which is a distance. The value is the pre-set length of the line.
Working with custom tools The following procedures explain how to add and manage custom tools.
To add a tool
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tools section.
3. Expand the open DGN file.
4. Select the tool box into which you want to add the tool.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 78 of 387
5. Click the New Tool icon. or Right-click the tool box and choose New Tool from the pop-up menu. A new tool appears with the name New Tool.
6. Key in a name for the new tool.

To add tool properties
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tools section and expand the open DGN file.
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool to which you want to add properties.
4. Right-click the tool to which you want to add properties and choose Add from the pop-up menu. or Right-click below the tool's existing properties and choose Add from the pop-up menu. A cascading submenu of property categories and properties appears. 5. Choose the property. The chosen property appears in the Properties pane under its tab. If the chosen property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows to the right side of the property's tab. 6. (Optional) To add other properties from the same category, in the Properties pane right-click its tab and choose Add <property>. The chosen property appears in the Properties pane under its tab. 7. For each added property, click the downward pointing triangle to the right of its name and select a value for the property. or Select the existing value and key in a new value.
To delete tool properties
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool whose property you want to delete.
4. Select the tool whose property you want to delete. If the property you want to delete is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the property's tab. 5. In the Properties pane, right-click the name of the property and choose Remove from the pop-up menu.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 79 of 387
You may want to edit the icons in a DGN library or icons from a user interface modification (.m01) file that you have imported into a DGN library. First, use a key-in to export the icons from the open DGN library to a directory. You will need a separate icon editing application to edit the icons. Then use another key-in to import the icons from the directory back into the DGN library.
To export icons from the open DGN library
1. Key in CUSTOMIZE EXPORT ICONS <path\directory\>. For example, CUSTOMIZE EXPORT ICONS c:\my icons\ or CUSTOMIZE EXPORT ICONS c:\temp\. All icons from the open DGN library (shown when you choose Current Design File in the Define Icon for Tool dialog box) are exported to the directory that you specify in the key-in. If a directory is not specified in the key-in, the icons are exported to the directory in which the open DGN library resides. If you specify a directory that does not exist, the directory will be created.
To import icons to the open DGN library
1. Key in CUSTOMIZE IMPORT ICONS <path\directory\>. For example, CUSTOMIZE IMPORT ICONS c:\my icons\*.ico or CUSTOMIZE EXPORT ICONS c:\temp\sample.ico. All icons in the specified directory are imported to the open DGN library. The icons being imported will replace existing icons with the same names in the open DGN library. When you choose Current Design File in the Define Icon for Tool dialog box you will see the icons that you imported. Now you can assign the icons to tools.
To import a BMP file to use as an icon for a custom tool
1. Use an icon editing application (such as Microsoft Paint) to save the BMP file in three sizes: 16 x 16 pixels, 24 x 24 pixels, and 32 x 32 pixels.
An imported BMP file can be no larger than 256 x 256 pixels. If it larger than that it will be clipped so that it does not exceed 256 x 256 pixels.
4. Expand the tool box containing the tool to which you want to assign the icon.
5. Select the tool to which you want to assign the icon. If the tool's Icon property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the General Settings tab. 6. Click the button to the right of the image of the icon. The Define Icon for Tool dialog box opens. 7. In the Look for icons in list box, select Import Selected Bitmaps. 8. Click Browse. The Open dialog box opens. 9. Navigate to the source of the three BMP files, select them, and click Open. The three selected BMP files appear in the Define Icon for Tool dialog box. 10. Press and hold the <Ctrl> key and in the Select an icon from the list below list box, select the three BMP files. 11. In the Name field, type a name for the icon. 12. Click OK. The BMP files are assigned as the tool's icon.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To import an ICO file to use as an icon for a custom tool
Page 80 of 387
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool to which you want to assign the icon.
4. Select the tool to which you want to assign the icon. If the tool's Icon property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the General Settings tab. 5. Click the button to the right of the image of the icon. The Define Icon for Tool dialog box opens. 6. In the Look for icons in list box, select Import Selected Icons. 7. Click Browse. The Open dialog box opens. 8. Navigate to the source of the icon file. or To locate an icon file used by another Windows application, key in %windir%\system32. 9. Select the ICO file and click Open. or Select the Windows application's EXE file (which includes the ICO file) and click Open. The selected file appears in the Define Icon for Tool dialog box. 10. In the Select an icon from the list below list box, select the file. 11. In the Name field, type a name for the icon. 12. Click OK. The ICO file is assigned as the tool's icon.
To select an icon for a tool
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool for which you want to select an icon.
4. Select the tool for which you want to select an icon.
If the tool's Icon property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the General Settings tab. 5. Click the button to the right of the image of the icon. The Define Icon for Tool dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
6. From the Look for icons in list box, choose the source of the icon.
Page 81 of 387
7. (Optional) If you chose Import Selected Icons or Import Selected Bitmaps from the list box, click Browse and navigate to the source of the icon. 8. (Optional) If you chose Applications from the list box, expand the list of MicroStation tool boxes. 9. In the Select an icon from the list below list box, select an icon. 10. Click OK. The icon file is assigned as the tool's icon.
To delete an icon from the open DGN file
3. Expand a tool box in the open DGN file.
4. Select a tool in the open DGN file. If the tool's Icon property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the General Settings tab. 5. Click the button to the right of the image of the icon. The Define Icon for Tool dialog box opens. 6. In the Look for icons in list box, select Current Design File. 7. In the Select an icon from the list below list box, select the icon that you want to delete. 8. Click Delete.
To add a template to a tool
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool to which you are adding a template.
4. Select the tool to which you are adding a template. The Template Path property appears in the Properties pane under the Command Data tab. If the Template Path property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Command Data tab. If the Template Path property does not exist in the Properties pane, complete the next two steps. 5. (Optional) Right-click the tool and choose Add from the pop-up menu. or (Optional) Right-click below the tool's existing properties, and choose Add from the pop-up menu. A cascading submenu of property categories and properties appears. 6. (Optional) Click the Command Data tab, then click Template Path. 7 I th P ti li k th d d i ti ti l t th i ht f T l t P th
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
8. Expand the template group and double-click the template that the tool will use. 9. (Optional) Right-click the tool to which you are adding a default template and choose Add from the pop-up menu. 10. (Optional) Click the Command Data tab, then click Default Template. 11. (Optional) In the Properties pane, click the downward pointing triangle to the right of Default Template. 12. (Optional) Expand the template group and double-click the default template that the tool will use.
Page 82 of 387
In the Properties pane's Associate Template field, ensure that either Always or Use Current Setting is selected. If this is set to Never, the elements that you place will use the template's properties but will not be associated with the template.
To add to a tool a key-in that runs an application
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool to which you are adding the key-in.
4. Select the tool to which you are adding the key-in. If the tool's Key-in property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Command Data tab. 5. In the Key-in field, type a percent sign followed by the name of the application's executable file. For example, to run the Windows calculator you would type %calc or %calc.exe. The application will run when you open the tool box and click the tool.
To add to a tool a key-in that links to a Web site
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool to which you are adding the key-in.
4. Select the tool to which you are adding the key-in. If the tool's Key-in property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Command Data tab. 5. In the Key-in field, type a percent sign, the name of your browser's executable file, a space, and the Web site's address. For example, to run Microsoft Internet Explorer and link to the Bentley Web site you would type %iexplore www.bentley.com. Your browser will open to the Web site when you open the tool box and click the tool. Before you can add tool settings to a custom tool you must find out which tool settings are available. You do this through the Key-in window. Once you have found the available tool settings you can add them to the custom tool.
To add tool settings to a tool
1. In the expanded Key-in window (Utilities > Key-in), enter the key-in that the tool will activate. For example, key in PLACE LINE
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
CONSTRAINED.
Page 83 of 387
2. Type SET ITEM TOOLSETTINGS but do not press the <Enter> key. The fourth column displays the possible settings. For the example above they are: angle, angletoggle, length, lengthtoggle, solutionchoice, and solutiontoggle. Make a note of the settings that you want to set for your custom tool. 3. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 4. Expand the User Tools section and expand the open DGN file.
5. Expand the tool box containing the tool to which you are adding settings.
6. Select the tool to which you are adding settings. If the tool's Key-in property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Command Data tab. 7. In the Key-in field, type the key-in. For example, type PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED. 8. Right-click the tool that will have settings and choose Add from the pop-up menu. or Right-click below the tool's existing properties and choose Add from the pop-up menu. A cascading list of property categories appears. 9. Click Dialog Item Settings. The Dialog Item Settings properties appear in the Properties pane under the Item Settings tab. If the tool's Dialog Item Settings property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward-pointing double arrows on the right side of the Item Settings tab. 10. (Optional) To add multiple settings for this tool, right-click the Item Settings tab and choose Dialog Item Settings from the pop-up menu. Dialog Item Settings(0), Dialog Item Settings(1), etc. appear in the Properties pane. 11. Expand Dialog Item Settings(0). In the Dialog Item Name field, replace ToolSettings.ItemName with the name of the first setting. For example, type ToolSettings.lengthtoggle. This tool setting will turn on the Length check box.
The first part of the dialog item name is always ToolSettings, no matter which tool is currently selected. The second part of the dialog item name is the setting you found in step 2. The dialog and item names are case-insensitive.
12. In the Type field, select Literal, Distance, Area, or Volume. For example, select Literal, because a literal value will turn on the check box in the next step. 13. In the Value field, type a value for the setting. For example, type 1 to turn on the Length check box. 14. Expand Dialog Item Settings(1). In the Dialog Item Name field, replace ToolSettings.ItemName with the name of the second setting. For example, type ToolSettings.length. This tool setting will set a length in the Length field. 15. In the Type field, select Literal, Distance, Area, or Volume. For example, select Distance, because a distance value will be specified in the next step. 16. In the Value field, type a distance. For example, type 20 to put 20 in the Length field. The Place Line Constrained tool will be activated when you open the tool box and click the tool. The Length check box will be turned on and the line that you place will have a length of 20 working units.
To rename a tool
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 84 of 387
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool that you want to rename.
4. Select the tool that you want to rename. 5. Click the tool a second time. or Right-click the tool and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the tool's name. 6. Key in a new name for the tool.
To copy a tool
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tools section and expand the open DGN file. or Expand the User Tools section and expand the DGN library. or Expand the Application Tools section and expand the MicroStation tools.
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool that you want to copy.
4. Select the tool that you want to copy. 5. Click the Copy icon. or Right-click the tool and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
6. Select the open DGN file or the tool box to which you are copying the tool. 7. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location to which you are copying the tool and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To move a tool
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool that you want to move.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 85 of 387
4. Click the tool that you want to move. 5. Drag the tool to the new location. A line appears, showing you where the tool will be placed when you release the mouse button. If you drag it to another tool box, a rectangle appears around the tool box and the tool will be placed in it. 6. Release the mouse button.
Alternative Method To move a tool
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool that you want to move.
4. Select the tool that you want to move. 5. Click the Cut icon. or Right-click the tool and choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
6. Select the open DGN file or the tool box to which you are moving the tool. 7. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location to which you are moving the tool and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To reorder tools
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool whose relative position you want to change.
4. Select the tool whose relative position you want to change.
To move up the tool one position click the Move Up icon
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
or Right-click the tool and choose Move Up from the pop-up menu.
Page 86 of 387
6. To move down the tool one position, click the Move Down icon. or Right-click the tool and choose Move Down from the pop-up menu.
If the tool is the first item in the tool box it cannot move up. If the tool is the last item in the tool box it cannot move down.
To delete a tool
3. Expand the tool box containing the tool that you want to delete.
4. Select the tool that you want to delete. 5. Click the Delete icon. or Right-click the tool and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Press the <Delete> key.
Tool Boxes
Custom tool boxes are used to organize tools. Custom tool boxes can be copies of standard MicroStation tool boxes or DGN library tool boxes, modified to fit your needs, or they can be created by clicking the New Tool Box icon in the Customize dialog box. You can place custom tool boxes within other custom tool boxes. Custom tool boxes can be opened and used in your workspace and/or grouped into tasks.
See Tools, Tool Boxes, and Tasks for more information about custom tools, tasks, and their relation to DGN libraries.
Custom tool boxes are created and managed on the Tools tab of the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 87 of 387
Tools tab in the Customize dialog box, with tool boxes in the left pane
Once you add them, tool boxes appear in the left pane on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box. The tool boxes in the open DGN file appear below the blue V8 icon. You can name your tool boxes and organize them by moving them up or down. A tool box can contain other tool boxes as well as tools. The tool boxes in the open DGN file can be opened, moved, copied, deleted, and renamed. Tool boxes cannot be copied or moved from the open DGN file into other DGN libraries or into the standard Application Tools (represented by the gray V8 icons). However, tool boxes from any DGN library or from the Application Tools can be copied into the open DGN file. Once they are part of the open DGN file they can be modified and deleted. You cannot cut, rearrange, delete, or rename tool boxes in a DGN library without opening that DGN library. You cannot change the standard Application Tools. Each tool box has one property, Dimension, that specifies whether the tool box will be available in the Task Navigation tool box's task list when you are working in 2D DGN models, 3D DGN models, or both (the default). Once you have added a custom tool box it appears in the Tool Boxes dialog box and you can open it in your workspace. You may want to customize some of the standard tool boxes by adding tools from other tool boxes, deleting tools that you do not use, adding a custom tool, or changing the tools in them. For example, you may want to customize the Main tool box. To do this you will copy the Main tool box into a DGN library, give the copy the same name as the original tool box, and change the tools in the copy. When you open the Tool Boxes dialog box you will see in the list Main and Main - Custom. When you turn off the check box next to the Main tool box and turn on the check box next to the Main - Custom tool box, your customized tool box replaces the original tool box in your workspace.
To add a tool box
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab 2. Expand the User Tools section.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 88 of 387
3. Select the open DGN file. or Expand the open DGN file and select the tool box to which you are adding the new tool box.
4. Click the New Tool Box icon. or Right-click the open DGN file or tool box and choose New Tool Box from the pop-up menu.
A new tool box appears with the name New Tool Box. 5. Key in a name for the new tool box. 6. (Optional) Select the new tool box. In the Properties pane, click the downward pointing triangle to the right of the Dimension field to change it from Both to 2D or 3D.
To change a tool box's properties
3. Select the tool box whose properties you want to change.
4. In the Properties pane, click the downward pointing triangle to the right of the Dimension field and select another value.
To rename a tool box
3. Select the tool box that you want to rename.
4. Click the tool box a second time. or Right-click the tool box and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the tool box's name. 5. Key in a new name for the tool box.
To copy a tool box
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tools section and expand the open DGN file. or Expand the User Tools section and expand the DGN library. or Expand the Application Tools section and expand the MicroStation tools.
Page 89 of 387
3. Select the tool box that you want to copy.
4. Click the Copy icon. or Right-click the tool box and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the open DGN file or tool box to which you are copying the tool box. 6. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the open DGN file or tool box and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To move a tool box
3. Click the tool box that you want to move.
4. Drag the tool box to the new location. A line appears, showing you where the tool box will be placed when you release the mouse button. If you drag it to another tool box, a rectangle appears around the tool box and the tool box will be placed in it. 5. Release the mouse button.
Alternative Method To move a tool box
3. Select the tool box that you want to move.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 90 of 387
4. Click the Cut icon. or Right-click the tool box and choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the open DGN file or tool box to which you are moving the tool box. 6. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the open DGN file or tool box and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To reorder tool boxes
3. Select the tool box whose relative position you want to change.
4. To move up the tool box one position, click the Move Up icon. or Right-click the tool box and choose Move Up from the pop-up menu.
5. To move down the tool box one position, click the Move Down icon. or Right-click the tool box and choose Move Down from the pop-up menu.
If the tool box is the first item in the open DGN file or in the tool box it cannot move up. If the tool box is the last item in the open DGN file or in the tool box it cannot move down.
To delete a tool box
3. Select the tool box that you want to delete.
Click the Delete icon
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
or Right-click the tool box and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Press the <Delete> key.
Page 91 of 387
To customize a standard tool box
3. Copy the tool box to customize from the Application Tools to the open DGN file.
The copy of the tool box must have the same name as the original tool box if you want the copy to take the place of the original.
4. (Optional) You can change the tools in the copy of the tool box. 5. From the Tools menu, select Tool Boxes. The Tool Boxes dialog box opens. 6. In the list of tool boxes, turn off the check box next to the tool box that you copied. 7. Turn on the check box next to your copy of the tool box, which has - Custom appended to its name. Your customized tool box replaces the original tool box in your workspace. 8. Click OK.
To open a custom tool box
1. Choose Tools > Tool Boxes. The Tool Boxes dialog box opens. 2. Scroll through the list to find the custom tool box.
Tool boxes are sorted alphabetically by name, with upper case letters sorted before lower case letters. Custom tool boxes have Custom appended to their name.
3. Turn on the check box next to the tool box. The tool box opens in your workspace. 4. Click OK.
Alternative Method To open a custom tool box
3. Select the tool box that you want to open.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Right-click the tool box and choose Open Tool Box from the pop-up menu.
Page 92 of 387
Tasks
A task is a set of tools grouped to facilitate a particular workflow. By defining and grouping tasks, you can create a task-based user interface. The tools grouped into a task can be standard MicroStation tools, custom tools, or a mixture of both types. The task's tools can be grouped into standard MicroStation tool boxes, custom tool boxes, or a combination of both types. Therefore the interface will contain all the tools and tool boxes you need to complete your work, grouped the way you want them.
See Tools, Tool Boxes, and Tasks for more information about custom tools, tasks, and their relation to DGN libraries.
Tasks are created and managed on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize).
Tools tab in the Customize dialog box, with tasks in the right pane
Tasks can use custom tools that use element templates. You can set up templates to define how certain elements should be drawn and then associate them with custom drawing tools. For example, your company could create a set of templates for drawing different types of foundations. You could create custom tools for drawing each foundation with each of the templates. Then your company could group all the custom tools into a Foundations task that is accessible to all employees. Creating templates increases consistency in drawings. Associating templates with custom tools within tasks makes the templates easily accessible.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
tasks stored in the DGN libraries specified by the configuration variables.
Page 93 of 387
Task icon and Task List, with the Construct Chess Board task selected
If you are working with a 2D DGN model you will see all tasks whose Dimension property is set to 2D or Both. You will not see any tasks whose Dimension property is set to 3D. If you are working with a 3D DGN model you will see all tasks whose Dimension property is set to 3D or Both, but you will not see tasks whose Dimension property is set to 2D. When you select a task from the list it becomes the active task and the active task's tools appear in the Task Navigation tool box.
Task icon and the tools for the Construct Chess Board task
The MS_GUITASKTREEROOT configuration variable can be used to control which tasks are available in the Task Navigation tool box.
When you install MicroStation the Task Navigation tool box is docked to the right-hand edge of the application window. You can dock the Task Navigation tool box to the edges of view windows by turning on Task Navigation in Views, which works in conjunction with the View ToolBox menu item. You also can view the contents of the Task Navigation tool box in the Tasks dialog box. You create tasks in the right pane on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box or by clicking and dragging a custom tool box from the left pane to the right pane. Once you add tasks to the open DGN file (represented by the blue V8 icon), they appear in the right pane. You can name your tasks and organize them by moving them up or down or by moving them into another task within the open DGN file. The tasks in the open DGN file also can be copied, deleted, and renamed. Each task has three properties:
Dimension Specifies whether the task will be available in the Task Navigation tool box's task list when you are working in 2D DGN models, 3D DGN models, or both (the default). Icon Used to select an icon for the task, which appears on the task's tab in the Tasks dialog box. Show Icon Used to show or hide the task's icon in the Tasks dialog box.
Custom tools and tool boxes are created in the left pane on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box. They are not created in tasks. Tasks can use overlapping sets of tools. Tools within tasks in the open DGN file can be moved or copied into another task in the open DGN file. You can reorder a task's tools and you can delete them from the task. You cannot rename or change the properties of these tools when they are in a task. If you want to see or change the properties of a tool used by a task, you can navigate to the tool's properties in the left pane. Once you have added a task it appears in the Task Navigation tool box's task list. You also can open it in your workspace.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 94 of 387
Tasks from the open DGN file cannot be copied or moved into tasks in the DGN libraries or in the standard Application Tasks (represented by the gray V8 icons). However, the DGN libraries' tasks and standard Application Tasks can be copied into the open DGN file or opened in your workspace. Once they are part of the open DGN file they can be modified and deleted. You cannot add, modify, cut, rename, delete, or move up or down tasks in a DGN library without opening the DGN library. You cannot change the standard Application tasks. After you have added a task, it appears in the Task Navigation tool box.
To add a task
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tasks section.
3. Select the open DGN file. or Expand the open DGN file and select the task into which you want to add the new task.
4. Click the New Task icon. or Right-click the open DGN file or task and choose New Task from the pop-up menu. or Click and drag a custom tool box from the left pane to the open DGN file or task in the right pane. A new task appears with the name New Task.
5. Key in a name for the new task.

To rename a task
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tasks section and expand the open DGN file.
3. Select the task that you want to rename.
4. Click the task a second time. or Right-click the task and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the task's name. 5. Key in a new name for the task.
To add tools to a task
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 95 of 387
3. Select the task to which you want to add the tool.
4. Click and drag a tool from the open DGN file's tool boxes, a DGN library tool box, or the Application Tools' tool boxes in the left pane to the selected task in the right pane. or Click and drag a tool from a DGN library task or the Application Tasks in the right pane to the selected task in the right pane.
To copy a task
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tasks section and expand the open DGN file. or Expand the User Tasks section and expand the DGN library. or Expand the Application Tasks section and expand the MicroStation tasks.
3. Select the task that you want to copy.
4. Click the Copy icon. or Right-click the task and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the open DGN file or the task to which you are copying the task. 6. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location to which you are copying the task and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To move a task
3. Click the task that you want to move.
4. Drag the task to the new location. A line appears showing you where the task will be placed when you release the mouse button If you drag it to another task a
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
rectangle appears around the task and the task will be placed in it. 5. Release the mouse button.
Alternative Method To move a task
Page 96 of 387
3. Select the task that you want to move.
4. Click the Cut icon. or Right-click the task and choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the open DGN file or the task to which you are moving the task. 6. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location to which you are moving the task and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To reorder tasks
3. Select the task whose relative position you want to change.
4. To move up the task one position, click the Move Up icon. or Right-click the task and choose Move Up from the pop-up menu.
5. To move down the task one position, click the Move Down icon. or Right-click the task and choose Move Down from the pop-up menu.
If the task is the first item in the open DGN file or the task it cannot move up. If the task is the last item in the open DGN file or the task it cannot move down.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 97 of 387
To find the properties of a tool used by a task
3. Select the task that uses the tool whose properties you want to find.
4. Right-click the tool and choose Navigate to Tool from the pop-up menu. The tool is selected in the left pane and its properties appear at the bottom of the dialog box.
To open a task in a floating tool box
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Expand the User Tasks section and expand the open DGN file. or Expand the User Tasks section and expand the DGN library. or Expand the Application Tasks section and expand the MicroStation tasks.
3. Select the task that you want to open.
4. Right-click the task and choose Open Task Tool Box from the pop-up menu.
To delete a task
3. Select the task that you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete icon. or Right-click the task and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Press the <Delete> key.
To select an icon for a task
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. Expand the User Tasks section and expand the open DGN file.
Page 98 of 387
3. Select the task for which you want to select an icon.
If the task's properties are not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Tool Container tab. 4. (Optional) If the task's Icon and Show Icon properties are not visible, right-click the Tool Container tab and choose Add Icon and Add Task Icon Display Settings. 5. Click the button to the right of the image of the icon on the Tool Container tab. The Define Icon for Tool dialog box opens. 6. From the Look for icons in list box, choose the source of the icon. 7. (Optional) If you chose Import Selected Icons or Import Selected Bitmaps from the list box, click Browse and navigate to the source of the icon. 8. (Optional) If you chose Applications from the list box, expand the list of MicroStation tool boxes. 9. In the Select an icon from the list below list box, select an icon. 10. Click OK. The icon file is assigned as the task's icon. 11. Set the Show Icon property to True. Changing the default display of tasks The MS_GUITASKTREEROOT configuration variable can be used to control which tasks are available in the Task Navigation tool box. There are two ways to do this. If you are using MicroStation in a language that uses single-byte characters, like English, Spanish, or French, you can set the MS_GUITASKTREEROOT configuration variable to the names of the tasks that you want to appear. The MS_GUITASKTREEROOT configuration variable can be set to one or more ASCII paths, one or more filenames, or a combination of both. If a task contains subtasks, the sub-tasks will also appear in the Task Navigation tool box. Here are some examples. MS_GUITASKTREEROOT is set to multiple ASCII paths:
MS_GUITASKTREEROOT = Schematic Design\Research;Schematic Design\Building Conceptual Modeling; MS_GUITASKTREEROOT > Schematic Design\Drawing;Schematic Design\Building Visualization;Schematic Design\Compose Drawing Set MS_GUITASKTREEROOT is set to multiple file names:
MS_GUITASKTREEROOT = $(_USTN_PROJECTDATA)data/building_taskroots1.xml MS_GUITASKTREEROOT > $(_USTN_PROJECTDATA)data/building_taskroots2.xml MS_GUITASKTREEROOT is set to ASCII paths and file names:
MS_GUITASKTREEROOT = Schematic Design\Research;Schematic Design\Building Conceptual Modeling; MS_GUITASKTREEROOT > $(_USTN_PROJECTDATA)data/building_taskroots2.xml If you are using MicroStation in a language that uses double-byte characters, like Chinese, Korean, or Japanese, the MS_GUITASKTREEROOT configuration variable must be set to the location of one or more XML files that contain the names of the tasks that you want to appear. The tasks' names are in your language. If a task contains sub-tasks, the sub-tasks will also appear in the Task Navigation tool box Multiple XML filenames must be separated by a semicolon In this example MS GUITASKTREEROOT is set to the
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
location of two XML files:
Page 99 of 387
MS_GUITASKTREEROOT = c:\building_taskroots1.xml; building_taskroots2.xml The "building_taskroots1.xml" file's syntax looks like this:
<ConfigurationRoot> <RootTasks> <TaskPath>Schematic Design\Research</TaskPath> <TaskPath>Schematic Design\Building Conceptual Modeling</TaskPath> </RootTasks> </ConfigurationRoot> The "building_taskroots2.xml" file's syntax looks like this:
<ConfigurationRoot> <RootTasks> <TaskPath>Schematic Design\Drawing</TaskPath> <TaskPath>Schematic Design\Building Visualization</TaskPath> <TaskPath>Schematic Design\Compose Drawing Set</TaskPath> </RootTasks> </ConfigurationRoot>
Pull-Down Menus
MicroStation allows you to customize its main menu bar. You can do this in several ways:

You can change the standard MicroStation menus and menu items by deleting them or adding to them. You can create custom menus and menu items by copying standard ones or by creating new ones.
One purpose of this feature is to allow you to delete or add to the standard MicroStation menus in order to streamline them and to add custom menus to meet your own needs. Another purpose is to allow CAD managers to delete or add to the standard MicroStation menus and add custom menus for their employees. You can add to, copy, and delete MicroStation menus, menu items, and menu separators. You also can copy tool boxes and tools to MicroStation menus so that you can activate tools from menus. Custom menus, menu items, and menu separators can be added, moved, copied, reordered, deleted, and renamed. Once you add custom menus, you are able to add access keys and copy tool boxes and tools to them. Once you add custom menu items, you are able to add access keys, shortcut keys, icons, and key-ins to them. You customize menus on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize). As you make changes to pull-down menus in the Customize dialog box, the changes appear immediately. There is one exception: Any dynamic menu items that were inserted by applications, such as Utilities > Connect Web Browser or Utilities > HTML Author, disappear until you close the DGN file and reopen it through MicroStation Manager or exit and restart MicroStation.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 100 of 387
Tools tab in the Customize dialog box, with menus in the right pane
Custom menus are created and stored in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to customize menus in one place and to distribute the customizations to many users. With this type of customization only additions and deletions to the MicroStation menus are stored. MicroStation does not store a copy of the entire set of menus, as it did in previous editions. If you used earlier editions of MicroStation to customize menus, you can import your customizations into the V8 XM Edition. Menu customizations also can be imported from and exported to XML files. You can generate HTML reports of all the menu customizations in the open DGN file. When you open or create a DGN file you see all the custom menus in the configured DGN libraries. If several files in the DGN libraries contain menu customizations, you see a union of the menu changes in these files. For example, if FileOne.dgnlib has hidden the Help menu and FileTwo.dgnlib has not hidden it, the Help menu will be hidden. If you customize a menu and do not want to make it available to others, you should save it in a personal DGN library, which is created when you create an interface component. If the open DGN file is not a configured DGN library, you will be unable to use the features on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog box while that DGN file is open. The configuration variable MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST (set by default to point to MS_DGNLIBLIST and to the DGN libraries in the active interface component's folder) and the configuration variable _USTN_SYSTEM_GUIDGNLIBLIST specify which files can be used for task, tool box, tool, icon, and menu customizations. If the open DGN file is not a configured DGN library and you want to use the features on the Tools tab, you can open a configured DGN library from the Customize dialog box. Changing the default display of menus There are several capabilities available, should you need to change the default display of menus. To change the default settings, add any of the following capabilities to either your user configuration file (.ucf) or your project configuration file (.pcf):
_USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_UI_LOADFROMACTIVEFILE Used if you want to have access to the features on the Tools tab while working in a DGN file that is not specified by the configuration variables listed above. If this capability is set, you will see the custom tools, tasks, and menus from the open DGN file in addition to those in the specified DGN libraries. _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_UI_IGNOREMENUSFROMDGNLIBS Used if you want to hide all menu customizations in the DGN libraries specified by the configuration variables listed above. _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_UI_IGNOREMENUSFROMRSCMODFILE Used if you want to hide all menu customizations that were loaded from a user interface modification file. This capability takes effect only if the CAPABILITY_UI_IGNOREMENUSFROMDGNLIBS function is NOT set.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Customizing standard MicroStation menus Standard MicroStation menus, menu items, and menu separators can be customized in some ways but not in others.
Page 101 of 387
Standard menus, menu items, and menu separators appear in black typeface and cannot be cut, reordered, or renamed. When you select them their properties appear in the Properties pane, but you cannot change their properties. You can add menus, menu items, and menu separators to standard menus. Custom menus, menu items, and menu separators appear in bold green typeface. When you add a menu, menu item, or menu separator to a menu, it appears at the bottom of the list of items belonging to the selected menu. When you add a menu, menu item, or menu separator to a menu item, it appears below the selected menu item. You can copy standard menus. When you copy one it appears in bold green typeface because it has become a custom menu. Copied standard menus cannot be renamed and their properties cannot be changed, unless they are made into sub-menus. You can copy standard menu items. When you copy one it appears in bold green typeface because it has become a custom menu item. When standard menu items are copied along with a standard menu, they cannot be renamed and their properties cannot be changed, unless the copied standard menu is made into a sub-menu. You can delete standard menus, menu items, and menu separators. If you delete one it appears in bold red typeface but does not disappear from the Customize dialog box. It disappears from the MicroStation main menu bar. To restore a deleted MicroStation menu, menu item, or menu separator, click the Delete icon a second time. It turns from red to black in the Customize dialog box and reappears in the MicroStation main menu bar. When you delete a standard menu its menu items are also deleted. The deleted menu appears in bold red typeface and its menu items disappear from the Customize dialog box. When you restore the menu its menu items are also restored. You can reorder standard menus and menu items by copying them to a new location and then deleting the original menu or menu item. The copied menu or menu item appears in bold green typeface because it has become a custom menu or menu item. Copied standard menus, and the standard menu items copied along with them, cannot be renamed and their properties cannot be changed. You can copy tool boxes and tools to standard menus. The tool box or tool appears in bold green typeface because it has become a custom tool box or tool.
A deleted Help menu in red, an added New menu in green, and an Old menu loaded from a user interface modification file in black italics, with these changes reflected in the main menu bar
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 102 of 387
Custom menus, menu items, and menu separators have properties that you can change. Clicking one of these items causes its properties to appear in the Properties pane. The following is a list of properties related to menus:
Property Name General Settings The standard menus, menu Cannot be changed. items, and menu separators Custom menus, menu items, and menu separators Dimension Can be changed. Applies to Description
The standard and custom Specifies whether the menu, menu item, or menu separator will be available when you are working in 2D tool boxes and tools copied DGN models, 3D DGN models, or both (the default). to standard and custom menus Some standard menu items Cannot be changed. Custom menu items Icon Standard tools copied to standard and custom menus Tools that are copied to standard menus and to custom menus Tool Path Custom tools copied to standard and custom menus Standard menu items Custom menu items Shortcut Standard and custom tools copied to standard and custom menus Menu Modification Custom menus and menu items added to standard menus Menu Path Standard and custom tool boxes copied to standard menus Custom menus and menu items added to standard menus Relative Item Standard and custom tool boxes copied to standard menus Custom menus and menu items added to standard menus Standard and custom tool boxes copied to standard menus Standard menu items Custom menu items Can be added or changed through the Assigned Shortcuts dialog box. Can be added or changed through the Define Icon for Tool dialog box.
Shows the tool box from which this tool was copied and the tool's name. Can be changed to point to a different tool.
Cannot be changed.
Shows the standard menu to which the menu or tool box belongs. If it belongs to the Main Menu, it is blank. Cannot be changed.
Shows the standard menu item that the menu or tool box is next to. Works in conjunction with the Relative Location field. They are always relative to a standard menu or menu item. They cannot be shown as relative to menus and menu items from DGN libraries, other custom menus and menu items, or menu separators. Cannot be changed.
Relative Location
Shows whether the menu or tool box is above or below the standard menu item in the Relative Item field. Cannot be changed.
Command Data Cannot be changed. Can be added or changed by keying in. The default is NULL. Can be added or changed by keying in. The default is NULL. If a key-in is defined by an MDL application, it is preceded by the MDL application's task ID within brackets. When copying to a DGN library a menu item that specifies a tool path, if you want to use the original key-in be sure to include the task ID within brackets and the key-in. If you want to activate a diff tk i l th ti ti
Key-in
St
d dt
i dt
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
standard and custom menus
Page 103 of 387

You can use the following syntax to make a customized menu item that specifies a tool path run multiple MDL applications and key-ins: [taskID_1;taskID_2;] key-in_1;key-in_2;key-in_3. The number of MDL applications does not have to match the number of key-ins. First, each MDL application is loaded if it is not already loaded; second, each key-in is processed. This syntax applies only to DGN library-based tools.
To add a menu to the MicroStation main menu bar
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand Main Menu and select Main Menu. 4. Click the New Menu icon.
The menu appears at the bottom of the list of menus on the Main Menu. It has the name New Menu and its name is selected. 5. Key in a name for the new menu. The menu's name appears in bold green typeface. 6. (Optional) Drag the menu to a new location. A line appears, showing you where the menu will be placed when you release the mouse button. If you drag the menu to a collapsed menu, a rectangle appears around the menu and the menu will be placed on it.
To add a menu to a standard menu or menu item
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the location where you want to add the menu. 5. Select the menu to which you want to add the menu. or Select the menu item to which you want to add the menu. 6. Click the New Menu icon.
If you added the menu to a menu, it appears at the bottom of the list of items belonging to the selected menu. If you added the menu to a menu item, it appears below the selected menu item. In both cases it has the name New Menu and its name is selected. 7. Key in a name for the new menu. The menu's name appears in bold green typeface.
To add a menu item to a standard menu
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the location where you want to add the menu item. 5. Select the menu to which you want to add the menu item. or S l t th it t hi h t t dd th it
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
6. Click the New Menu Item icon.
Page 104 of 387
If you added the menu item to a menu, it appears at the bottom of the list of items belonging to the selected menu. If you added the menu item to a menu item, it appears below the selected menu item. In both cases it has the name New Menu Item and its name is selected. 7. Key in a name for the new menu item. The menu item's name appears in bold green typeface.
To add a menu separator to a standard menu
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the location where you want to add the menu separator. 5. Select the menu to which you want to add the menu separator. or Select the menu item to which you want to add the menu separator. 6. Click the New Menu Separator icon.
If you added the menu separator to a menu, it appears at the bottom of the list of items belonging to the selected menu. If you added the menu separator to a menu item, it appears below the selected menu item. The menu separator appears in bold green typeface.
To copy a standard menu or menu item
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the menu or menu item that you want to copy and select it. 5. Click the Copy icon. or Right-click the menu or menu item and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
6. Expand menus as needed to get to the location to which you want to copy the menu or menu item and select the location. 7. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
The menu or menu item is pasted to the selected location. It appears in bold green typeface.
To delete a standard menu or menu item
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2 Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the menu or menu item that you want to delete. 5. Click the Delete icon. or Right-click the menu or menu item and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Press the <Delete> key.
Page 105 of 387
The menu or menu item appears in bold red typeface and disappears from the MicroStation menus.
To restore a deleted standard menu or menu item
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the deleted menu or menu item that you want to restore. 5. Click the Delete icon. or Right-click the menu or menu item and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Press the <Delete> key.
The menu or menu item appears in regular black typeface and reappears in the MicroStation menus.
To copy a tool box or tool to a standard menu
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the menu to which you want to copy the tool box or tool and select it.
5. Click and drag a tool box or tool from the left pane to the selected menu in the right pane. The tool box or tool appears in bold green typeface. Working with custom menus MicroStation allows you to create custom pull-down menus. Like the standard MicroStation menus, menu items, and menu separators, the custom ones can be added, copied, and deleted, and custom menus can have tool boxes and tools copied to them. The custom menus, menu items, and menu separators that you add also can be moved, reordered, and renamed. Once you add custom menus, you are able to add access keys to them. Once you add custom menu items, you are able to add access keys, shortcut keys, icons, and key-ins to them.
To move a custom menu, menu item, or menu separator
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3 Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 106 of 387
4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator that you want to move and select it. 5. Drag the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator to the new location. A line appears, showing you where it will be placed when you release the mouse button. If you drag it to a collapsed menu, a rectangle appears around the menu and the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator will be placed on it. 6. Release the mouse button.
Alternative Method To move a custom menu, menu item, or menu separator
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator that you want to move and select it. 5. Click the Cut icon. or Right-click and choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
6. Expand menus as needed to get to the location to which you want to move the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator and select the location. 7. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To reorder custom menus, menu items, or menu separators
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator whose relative position you want to change and select it. 5. To move up the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator one position, click the Move Up icon. or Right-click and choose Move Up from the pop-up menu.
6. To move down the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator one position, click the Move Down icon. or Right-click and choose Move Down from the pop-up menu.
If the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator is the first item in the menu it cannot move up. If the custom menu, menu item, or menu separator is the last item in the menu it cannot move down.
To rename a custom menu or menu item
In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) click the Tools tab
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu or menu item that you want to rename and select it. 5. Click the custom menu or menu item a second time. or Right-click the custom menu or menu item and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the custom menu or menu item's name. 6. Key in a new name for the custom menu or menu item.
To add an access key to a custom menu or menu item
Page 107 of 387
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu or menu item to which you want to add an access key and select it. 5. Click the custom menu or menu item a second time. or Right-click the custom menu or menu item and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the custom menu or menu item's name. 6. Type a tilde (~) to the left of the letter that will be underlined (the access key). In the Customize dialog box a tilde appears to the left of the letter. In the MicroStation menus the letter is underlined. Pressing the <Alt> key plus an underlined letter activates a menu and pressing an underlined letter activates a menu item.
To add a shortcut key to a custom menu item
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu item to which you want to add a shortcut key and select it. If the selected custom menu item's Shortcut property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the General Settings tab. 5. Click the downward pointing triangle to the right of the value in the Shortcut field. The Assigned Shortcuts dialog box opens. 6. In the Assigned Shortcuts dialog box, turn on the Ctrl check box.
The <Ctrl > key must be used in every shortcut.
7. (Optional) Turn on the Alt check box. 8. (Optional) Turn on the Shift check box. 9. Type a letter, number, or symbol in the Key field.
You cannot add multiple shortcuts that use the same combination of keys. The shortcuts already being used appear in the Assigned Shortcuts list.
10. Click OK.

T dd i t t it
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu.
Page 108 of 387
4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu item to which you want to add an icon and select it. If the custom menu item's Icon property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the General Settings tab. If the Icon property is not visible in the General Settings, right-click in the General Settings and choose Add Menu Icon from the pop-up menu. 5. Click the button to the right of the image of the icon. The Define Icon for Tool dialog box opens. 6. From the Look for icons in list box, choose the source of the icon. 7. (Optional) If you chose Import Selected Icons or Import Selected Bitmaps from the list box, click Browse and navigate to the source of the icon. 8. (Optional) If you chose Applications from the list box, expand the list of MicroStation tool boxes. 9. In the Select an icon from the list below list box, select an icon. 10. Click OK. The selected icon is assigned as the custom menu item's icon.
To add a key-in to a custom menu item
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), click the Tools tab. 2. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane. 3. Click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 4. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menu item to which you want to add a key-in and select it. If the selected custom menu item's key-in property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Command Data tab. 5. In the Key-in text field, type a new key-in.
You can use any key-in. The key-in may open a dialog box, activate a tool, run a macro, etc.
Customizing the View Control pop-up menu The MDL LOAD CUSTOMIZ key-in can be used to customize the View Control pop-up menu. This key-in opens the previous edition's Customize dialog box. The View Pop-up tab contains controls for doing this. Changes to this pop-up menu are stored in your user interface modification file.
Importing Custom Tools, Tool Boxes, and Menus

If you used earlier editions of MicroStation to customize tools, tool boxes, tool frames, and menus, you can import your customizations into the V8 XM Edition. Your earlier tool, tool box, and tool frame customizations may have been stored in Settings Manager files and/or in user interface modification files. Your earlier menu customizations were stored in user interface modification files. Custom tool boxes, tools, tasks, and menus also can be imported from and exported to XML files. If you need to make a lot of changes to custom tool boxes, custom tools, tasks, or custom menus, you can export the definitions to an XML file, edit the XML file with an external editor, and import the updated XML file back into the open DGN file. You can generate an HTML report of all the custom tool boxes, tools, tasks, and menus in the open DGN file. Importing custom tools tool boxes and menus from user interface modification files
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 109 of 387
If you used earlier editions of MicroStation and customized tools, tool boxes, tool frames, and menus, you load those customizations from the user interface modification files in which they were stored and copy them into DGN libraries. Once the customizations are imported you can use the Customize dialog box to make additional customizations. Your customizations may have been stored in multiple user interface modification files. If so, and if you load more than one user interface modification file at once, you will see a union of the changes to tools, tool boxes, tool frames, and menus in those files. For example, if ustn.m01 has a custom tool box called My Tools and ustn.m02 has a custom tool box called Company Tools, both tool boxes will be displayed. When you load user interface modification files containing tool and tool box customizations you will see tools and tool boxes that had been added to the standard MicroStation tool boxes. You also will see modifications that had been made to the standard MicroStation tools and tool boxes. If tools had been deleted, they will be omitted from the standard MicroStation tool boxes. When you load user interface modification files containing menu customizations you will see only menus and menu items that were added to the standard MicroStation menus. You will not see deletions from and modifications to the standard MicroStation menus and menu items. You need to see all of the standard MicroStation menus and menu items in their as-delivered state in order to see the new functionality that has been added to them. Once you have reviewed the new features you can delete the menus and menu items that you do not use. You can change the names of menus and menu items by copying them, renaming the copies, and deleting the originals. You can change the order of menus and menu items by copying them to a new location and deleting the originals. An imported tool retains its icon, key-in, and tool tip. You will be able to change its properties and add many other properties to the tool. You will not be able to edit its current icon or create a new icon in MicroStation, however, you can select a different icon for the tool, load a BMP file to use as its icon, or load an ICO file to use as its icon. Once all customizations have been imported to a DGN library, it is suggested that you delete the old user interface modification files.
There are several capabilities available, should you need to change the default display of menus.
To import customizations from user interface modification files
1. Copy the user interface modification files to a folder under the "Workspace\Interfaces\MicroStation" folder. 2. Create a DGN library. Save it in a folder specified by the configuration variable MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST. 3. Close the DGN library file, then choose File > Open. In the MicroStation Manager dialog box, select from the Interface list box the interface folder into which you copied the user interface modification files, then open the new DGN library file.
If your user interface modification files contain customizations to tools, tool boxes, or menus that have been changed in the MicroStation V8 XM Edition you may encounter errors when you open the DGN file with the modification files loaded.
4. Open the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) and select the Tools tab.
Tools, tool boxes, and tool frames from the user interface modification files appear in the list of Application Tools. Tool boxes and tool frames are listed alphabetically. 5. Copy the custom tools and tool boxes from the Application Tools to the open DGN file or to a tool box in the open DGN file.
6. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane and click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 7. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menus and menu items. Customized menus and menu items loaded from user interface modification files appear in italic black typeface. 8. Copy menus and menu items to the Main Menu. Wh it i d t it l ti it i b ld t f i di ti th t i t d i th DGN
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
file. 9. Close MicroStation.
Page 110 of 387
10. Move or delete the old user interface modification files from the folder under the "Workspace\Interfaces\MicroStation" folder. 11. Restart MicroStation. 12. In the MicroStation Manager dialog box, select an interface folder from the Interface list box, then open the new DGN library file.
Be sure to select an interface folder that does not contain old user interface modification files. If you select a folder containing these old files, you will see the old customizations as well as the ones copied to the open DGN file.
13. Open the Tool Boxes dialog box (Tools > Tool Boxes). The custom tool boxes that you copied to the open DGN file appear in the list. They are listed alphabetically and have - Custom appended to their name. 14. Close the Tool Boxes dialog box. 15. Open the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) and select the Tools tab. 16. Expand the User Tools section and expand the open DGN file. The custom tool boxes appear. Now you can make additional customizations, which are stored in the open DGN file. 17. Choose Menu from the list box above the right pane and click the plus sign to expand the Main Menu. 18. Expand menus as needed to get to the custom menus and menu items. The customized menus and menu items appear in bold green typeface. Now you can make additional customizations, which are stored in the open DGN file. You can load user interface modification files at any time to see your earlier customizations. However, you should make additional customizations through the Customize dialog box and you must save them in DGN libraries. This will ensure their compatibility with future editions of MicroStation. Importing custom tools from Settings Manager files If you used earlier editions of MicroStation, you can import data from one or more Settings Manager files (STG files) into element templates. If an STG file entry uses a key-in or a lock, then a corresponding tool box and tool will be created when you import the template data. In the following example, the imported STG file contains a template, A01Temp Post, in the A04fp posts\Cell template group. The A01 Temp Post template contains general settings and cell settings.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 111 of 387
Imported STG file containing templates
Because the imported A01Temp Post template also contains key-ins and locks, custom tool boxes and custom tools were created. They appear on the Tools tab. The custom tool box, A04fp posts, is in the import_stg_file custom tool box and corresponds to the A01Temp Post template. One of the custom tools that was created, A01TEMP POST, uses a key-in and the Use Shared Cells lock.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 112 of 387
Imported STG file containing custom tool boxes and custom tools
Menu items for importing and exporting data are found in the File menu in the Customize dialog box.
AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts

You can customize AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts using the AccuDraw Shortcuts window.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 113 of 387
To open the AccuDraw Shortcuts window
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the <?> key.
Alternative Method To open the AccuDraw Shortcuts window
1. From the Settings menu, choose AccuDraw. The AccuDraw Settings dialog box opens. 2. Click the Shortcut Key-ins button.
To edit a keyboard shortcut
1. In the list box, select the shortcut to edit. 2. In the AccuDraw Shortcuts window, click the Edit button. The Edit Shortcut dialog box opens. 3. Make the desired changes you can change the shortcut key, the Description, or the MicroStation command entry. 4. Click the OK button.
To create a keyboard shortcut
1. In the AccuDraw Shortcuts window, click the New button. The New Shortcut dialog box opens. 2. Key in the shortcut key, Description, and the MicroStation key-in to be simulated. 3. Click the OK button.
AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts are stored in a text file so they can be edited using any word processor or text editor as well as by using the AccuDraw Shortcuts window. The configuration variable AccuDraw Shortcuts (MS_ACCUDRAWKEYS) in the Operation category of the Configuration dialog box identifies the name and location of the shortcuts file. In the as delivered Default workspace, the configuration variable points to the file shortcut.txt in Bentley's "Workspace\system\data" directory. Manually editing the shortcuts file is the only way to delete a shortcut, identify a shortcut as 2D or 3D only, or rearrange the ordering of the shortcuts.
Function Key Menus

A function key menu is a file that contains keyboard function key definitions assignments of actions to function keys. Function key definitions contain action strings that cause an action to occur when you press the function keys. The default function key menu in the Default workspace is "funckey.mnu", which is installed in Bentley's "WorkSpace\interfaces\fkeys" directory. The Function Keys dialog box (Workspace > Function Keys) is used to modify function key menus. You also can define new function keys using the <F1> through <F12> function keys along with the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and <Shift> keys and add them to function key menus.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The following is the list of system default function key definitions.
Key <F1> <F2> <F3> <F4> <F5> <F6> <F7> <F8> <F9> <F10> <F11> <F12> <Alt + F8> <Alt + F11> <Ctrl + F1> <Ctrl + F2> <Ctrl + F3> <Ctrl + F4> <Ctrl + F5> <Ctrl + F6> <Ctrl + F7> <Ctrl + F8> <Ctrl + F9> Opens Help for the active dialog box. Displays the Task Navigation tool box's Task List. Displays the Main tool box. Displays the active task. Displays the View Attributes dialog box. Opens the Saved Views dialog box. Unassigned Unassigned Sends input focus to the Key-in window if it is docked or open. Opens the Key-in window if it is not already open. Description of the Action
Page 114 of 387
Sends input focus to the Tool Settings window if it is docked or open. Opens the Tool Settings window if it is not already open. Sends input focus to the AccuDraw window if it is docked or open. Activates AccuDraw if it is not active and opens the AccuDraw window. Sends input focus to home. Opens the Macros dialog box. Opens the Visual Basic Editor. Activates the first tool in the Primary Tools tool box. The default is to display the Models dialog box. Activates the second tool in the Primary Tools tool box. The default is to display the References dialog box. Activates the third tool in the Primary Tools tool box. The default is to display the Level Manager dialog box. Activates the fourth tool in the Primary Tools tool box. The default is to display the Level Display dialog box. Activates the fifth tool in the Primary Tools tool box. The default is to display the Element Information dialog box. Activates the sixth tool in the Primary Tools tool box. The default is to turn AccuDraw on or off. Activates the seventh tool in the Primary Tools tool box. The default is to turn PopSet on or off. Activates the eighth tool in the Primary Tools tool box. Activates the ninth tool in the Primary Tools tool box.
<Ctrl + F10> Activates the tenth tool in the Primary Tools tool box. <Ctrl + F11> Activates the eleventh tool in the Primary Tools tool box. <Ctrl + F12> Activates the twelfth tool in the Primary Tools tool box. <Shift + F1> <Shift + F2> <Shift + F3> <Shift + F4> <Shift + F5> <Shift + F6> <Shift + F7> <Shift + F8> <Shift + F9> <Shift + F10> <Shift + F11> <Shift + F12> Activates the first tool in the Attributes tool box. The default is to display the active element template. Activates the second tool in the Attributes tool box. The default is to display the Active Level list box. Activates the third tool in the Attributes tool box. The default is to display the Active Color dialog box. Activates the fourth tool in the Attributes tool box. The default is to display the Active Line Style list box. Activates the fifth tool in the Attributes tool box. The default is to display the Active Line Weight list box. Activates the sixth tool in the Attributes tool box. The default is to display the Active Element Transparency list box. Activates the seventh tool in the Attributes tool box. The default is to display the Active Element Priority list box. Activates the eighth tool in the Attributes tool box. Activates the ninth tool in the Attributes tool box. Activates the tenth tool in the Attributes tool box. Activates the eleventh tool in the Attributes tool box. Activates the twelfth tool in the Attributes tool box. Creating alternate function key definitions for function key definitions that already have special meaning in MicroStation, such as <F1> which opens Help, is not recommended.
A Windows-compliant function key menu is also provided. Its file name is "windows_funckey.mnu" and it is installed in Bentley's "WorkSpace\interfaces\fkeys" directory. The following is the list of Windows-compliant function key definitions.
Key <F1> Opens Help for the active dialog box. S b k f th fil ith th t i * b k T fi d th l ti f th b k th t t b ' M Description of the Action
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
<F3> <F6> <F10> <Alt + F4> <Shift + F6> Center. Sends input focus to the next open window or dialog box. Sends input focus to the File menu. Closes MicroStation. Sends input focus to the previous open window or dialog box.
Page 115 of 387
To modify a function key definition
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Function Keys. The Function Keys dialog box opens. The title bar identifies the open function key menu. 2. Select a function key from the list box. or In the Function Keys group box, turn on the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> check boxes and choose the desired function key from the list box. or Using the keyboard, press the desired function key and the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> keys. 3. In the Action text box, edit the definition. The definition must be specified as an action string. 4. To save the function key definitions in the open function key menu, choose Save or Save As from the dialog box's File menu. If you choose Save, the open function key menu is overwritten. If you choose Save As, the Save Function Key Menu As dialog box opens for creating a function key menu with a different name or location. 5. In the Function Keys dialog box, click the OK button. If the definitions were not saved, an alert box opens. If you do not save the definitions, they will remain in effect only for the remainder of the session.
To delete a function key definition
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Function Keys. The Function Keys dialog box opens. The title bar identifies the open function key menu. 2. Select a function key from the list box. or In the Function Keys group box, turn on the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> check boxes and choose the desired function key from the list box. or Using the keyboard, press the desired function key and the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and/or <Shift> keys. 3. Press the <Delete> key. 4. To save your change without closing the dialog box, choose Save from File menu. or To save your change and close the dialog box, click OK.
Capturing MicroStation Screen Images

The Screen Capture utility (Utilities > Image > Capture) makes a screen shot of all or part of a MicroStation screen and saves it in a specified file format. Using Screen Capture, you can take snapshots of items that are in the graphical user interface of MicroStation or an MDL application, such as tool boxes, dialog boxes, and pull-down menus, and then use them in documentation or training manuals. Screen Capture saves an image as it appears on screen, at the resolution of your monitor, and without the screen pointer. Keep these considerations in mind:
Using certain word processing or page layout software with certain printers may not produce a high quality printed image of grayscale information in a screen shot. I h l l d il T d d il d li k h ld l h i ih E l d
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
PostScript (EPS) or a HPGL plotfile, depending on the format that works best with your software and hardware.
Page 116 of 387
Using the Screen Capture utility, the quality of rendered images depends on the resolution of your monitor and the number of colors it supports. Regardless of your display hardware, you can create 24-bit files at a specified resolution by choosing Utilities > Image > Save. If you use a high resolution output device, a higher quality printed image is possible.
General Procedure To Capture Part or All of a Screen
1. Configure the display as desired. 2. Choose Utilities > Image > Capture. or Key in MDL LOAD SCRNCAPT. If you chose the menu item, the Screen Capture dialog box opens. The key-in is recommended for capturing the entire display. 3. Using the following information, specify the part of the screen to capture.
To capture (see for details) To capture the entire screen To capture a rectangular area inside a view To capture a view's contents To capture a view's contents and border To capture the entire screen with a pull-down menu To capture the window that has the input focus Either key in CAPTURE SCREEN CAPTURE RECTANGLE CAPTURE VIEW CONTENTS CAPTURE VIEW WINDOW CAPTURE SCREEN see footnote 7 CAPTURE FOCUS see footnote 8 or in the Screen Capture dialog box, click Capture Screen Capture Rectangle Capture View Capture View Window None None
4. Follow the prompts in the status bar. These prompts change dynamically depending on the action taken in the previous step. The Capture Screen Output dialog box opens.
5. From the Format Type option menu, choose the desired output format. If you choose an item other than the default, the default suffix for the image file in the Files field changes to be consistent with the chosen file type. 6. From the Compression option menu, choose the desired compression level for the screen capture. 7. If the selected format supports more than one mode, choose the desired mode from the Mode option menu .
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
8. (Optional) In the Files field, key in a name for the image file. 9. Click OK. While the image is saving, an animated character appears in the status bar.
To capture the entire screen
Page 117 of 387
1. In the Screen Capture dialog box, click the Capture Screen button or key in CAPTURE SCREEN. The pointer determines which screen is captured if more than one monitor is used, but it is not included in the image captured.
If CAPTURE SCREEN is assigned to a function key, it can be activated by pressing the assigned function key. Using CAPTURE SCREEN, you can document the exact state of MicroStation during a particular operation. This is the only way to make screen shots of pull-down menus and modal dialog boxes. Using the CAPTURE FOCUS key-in, you can capture the window that has the input focus. You can assign key-ins to function keys by choosing Workspace > Function Keys. To capture a rectangular area inside a view
1. In the Screen Capture dialog box, click the Capture Rectangle button or key in CAPTURE RECTANGLE. 2. To define one corner of the area, enter a data point. 3. To define the diagonal corner of the area, enter another data point. You must enter both data points in the same view.
To capture the contents of a view
1. In the Screen Capture dialog box, click the Capture View button or key in CAPTURE VIEW CONTENTS. 2. Select the view to capture.
To capture the contents and border of a view
1. In the Screen Capture dialog box, click the Capture View Window button or key in CAPTURE VIEW WINDOW. 2. Select the view to capture.
To capture the entire screen with a pull-down menu
1. Post the menu. 2. Press the function key defined as CAPTURE SCREEN.
To capture the window that has the input focus
1. Focus on the desired window. 2. Press the function key that is defined as CAPTURE FOCUS.
Digitizing Tablet Menus

You can use the following types of digitizing tablet menus with MicroStation:
Tablet menus contain menu blocks of varying shapes and sizes. Tablet menus are sometimes referred to as paper menus because they exist in printed form or command menus to make a distinction that no longer applies. To use a digitizing tablet menu you must first print it and attach the printed output to the surface of the digitizing tablet. A maximum of four tablet menus can be simultaneously attached.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 118 of 387
At top, a sample tablet menu. At bottom, the action strings for this menu on a separate level.
The tablet cursor button designated as the Command button is used to select a menu item in a menu block.
Cursor button menus assign actions to the tablet cursor buttons that are not assigned as the Command, Data, 3D Data, Reset, Tentative, or 3D Tentative buttons.
MicroStation is supplied with several tablet menus. Attaching and activating tablet menus The ATTACH MENU (AM=) key-in is used to attach and activate tablet menus.
To attach and activate a tablet menu
1. Tape the menu to the tablet surface. 2. In the Key-in window dialog box, key in AM=<file_specification>,<model_name>,t<#>. File_specification and model_name identify the DGN file and the model within that file in which the menu was drawn. The number sign (#) is a number in the range 14, indicating the first, second, third, or fourth tablet menu. For the file_specification you can enter the full path and filename or the path and filename relative to the search path defined by the configuration variable MS_APPMEN. 3. Enter a data point to identify the menu origin at the lower left corner of the menu. 4. Enter a data point on the upper right corner of the menu. The message Menu successfully attached is displayed in the status bar.
To activate a cursor button menu
1. In the Key-in window, key in AM=<menu>,cb. Menu is the name of the menu.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Selecting menu items Before using a tablet menu, you must use the ATTACH MENU (AM=) key-in to activate it.
To select a tool view control, or key-in using a tablet menu
Page 119 of 387
1. Position the tablet cursor on the menu block for the desired tool or view control. 2. Press the Command button.
To select a tool, view control, or key-in using a cursor button menu
1. Press the cursor button to which the desired tool, view control, or key-in is assigned. Deactivating menus The ATTACH MENU (AM=) key-in is used to deactivate tablet menus.
To deactivate a tablet menu
1. In the Key-in window, key in AM=,t<number>. Number is in the range 14, indicating the first, second, third, or fourth tablet menu.
To deactivate a cursor button menu
1. In the Key-in window, key in AM=,cb. Supplied menus The tablet menu DGN file "v8menu.dgn" is installed in Bentley's "Workspace\System\menus\dgn" directory. Customizing tablet menus You can create your own tablet menus in DGN files, customize the ones supplied with the software, or purchase them from various vendors. Typically, when creating a tablet menu, you will want to draw the menu close to the size at which you will print it for use on the digitizing tablet.
To create or modify a tablet menu
1. In a DGN file, create a 2D model and make it the active model. 2. On one or more levels in a Top (unrotated) view, draw the menu items, each of which should consist of a closed shape which encloses text and/or an icon. For example, in the area of the model in which you will create, in step 3, a menu block for a menu item that will activate the key-in PLACE CIRCLE CENTER CONSTRAINED, you might draw a circle or place the text, Place Circle by Center. 3. On a separate level, draw the menu block boundaries as closed shapes. The boundaries can be contained in cells. Element types other than lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex chains, and complex shapes will be ignored. 4. On a separate level, for each menu block, place a text element containing that block's action string. The text in these elements can be of any size. However, it is essential that in each case the center of the text lies within the block to which it pertains. 5. At the origin lower left corner of the model, place a three line text node as follows: Menu Origin FrameLevels=<level_containing_menu_block_boundaries> CommandLevels=<level_containing_action_strings> For example: Menu Origin FrameLevels=Menu Border, Menu Partitions CommandLevels=Command Text
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 120 of 387
The placement point of this text node is the origin of the menu. Note that if you use multiple levels for menu block boundaries or action strings, separate the level names with commas, as illustrated above in the line beginning with FrameLevels. 6. If the DGN file that contains the model has not been saved, save it now. It is not necessary to save settings first. When you are finished, print the menu and attach it to the digitizing tablet.
Screen Menus
As an alternative to using the Customize dialog box to create a task-based user interface, you can customize the user interface by creating clickable screen menus. A screen menu is similar to a digitizing tablet menu in that it is created as a model and can contain menu blocks of varying shapes and sizes. The difference is that whereas a digitizing tablet menu is taped to the surface of a digitizing tablet, a screen menu displays on screen in its own resizable window. You can simultaneously display and use up to five screen menus. Attaching screen menus The ATTACH MENU (AM=) key-in is used to attach and display screen menus.
To display a screen menu
1. In the Key-in window, key in AM=<file_specification>,<model_name>,s<#>. File_specification and model_name identify the DGN file and the model within that file in which the menu was drawn. # is the number in the range of 15, indicating the number of the screen menu. For example, the key-in AM=v8menu.dgn,Command,s1 displays the screen menu drawn in the model Command stored in the file "V8menu.dgn". For the file_specification you can enter the full path and filename or the path and filename relative to the search path defined by the configuration variable MS_APPMEN.
To detach a screen menu
1. Close the window in which the screen menu is displayed. or In the Key-in window, key in AM=,s<number>. Number is in the range of 15, indicating the number of the screen menu. Sample screen menu The model Screen Menu in the DGN library general.dgnlib, installed in the "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\General\Dgnlib" directory, is a sample screen menu. To attach this screen menu to any DGN file in the "WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\General\Dgn" directory, key-in AM=general.dgnlib,Screen Menu,s1.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 121 of 387
Customizing screen menus You can create your own screen menus in MicroStation DGN files or customize the ones supplied with MicroStation.
To create or modify a screen menu
1. In a DGN file, create a 2D model and make it the active model. 2. On one or more levels in a Top (unrotated) view, draw the menu items, each of which should consist of a closed shape which encloses text and/or an icon. For example, in the area of the model in which you will create, in step 3, a menu block for a menu item that will activate the key-in PLACE CIRCLE CENTER CONSTRAINED, you might draw a circle or place the text, Place Circle by Center. 3. On a separate level, draw the menu block boundaries as closed shapes. The boundaries can be contained in cells. Element types other than lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex chains, and complex shapes will be ignored. 4. On a separate level, for each menu block, place a text element containing that block's action string. The text in these elements can be of any size. However, it is essential that in each case the center of the text lies within the block to which it pertains. 5. At the origin lower left corner of the model, place a three line text node as follows: Menu Origin FrameLevels=<level_containing_menu_block_boundaries> CommandLevels=<level_containing_action_strings> For example: Menu Origin FrameLevels=Menu Border, Menu Partitions CommandLevels=Command Text The placement point of this text node is the origin of the menu. Note that if you use multiple levels for menu block boundaries or action strings, separate the level names with commas, as illustrated above in the line beginning with FrameLevels. 6. If the DGN file that contains the model has not been saved, save it now. It is not necessary to save settings first.
Action Strings
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 122 of 387
The actions MicroStation performs when you select a tool, choose a menu item, or press a function key are defined by the action string associated with that object. At first it is simplest to think of an action string as a MicroStation key-in or series of key-ins. For example, the action string associated with the Place SmartLine tool is the key-in PLACE SMARTLINE. The true effect of selecting the Place SmartLine tool is activation of the PLACE SMARTLINE key-in. Action types Several types of actions can be specified in action strings and associated with tools, view controls, menu items, and function keys.
Action type Syntax Description Simulates a key-in. The key-in specified by a command entry key-in is always activated, regardless of state of the active key-in. For example, suppose that PLACE CIRCLE RADIUS is the active key-in and is prompting for the radius. If the user presses a function key defined in the function key menu to have action type E that activates the PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED key-in, then PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED becomes the active key-in. Simulates a key-in. A terminated key-in is normally used to get data requested by prompts, such as the radius of a circle, text, or an answer to a yes-or-no question. Keys in an unterminated string of characters and waits for the user to finish the string. Prints a message in one of the status bar fields.
Command Entry E,<key-in> Key-in Terminated Key-in Unterminated Key-in Print Message Place Active Cell: absolute Place Active Cell: relative T,<key-in> K,<key-in> M,<message>
C,<cellname> Sets the Active Cell to cellname and activates the PLACE CELL ABSOLUTE key-in. R,<cellname> Sets the Active Cell to cellname and activates the PLACE CELL RELATIVE key-in.
If no type specifier (a single character separated from the rest of the string with a comma) exists, MicroStation assumes that the action type is a command entry key-in (E).
For examples of action strings, examine the sample tablet menu DGN file "v8menu.dgn" installed in Bentley's "Workspace\System\menus\dgn" directory.
Action type options These options can be used immediately following the E, T, or K action types or anywhere in a multiple action string following a semicolon.
If there is a slash (/) in an action string, MicroStation pauses for user input. If the slash is followed by d, k, or no character, MicroStation does the following:

/<character>
/d waits for a data point. /k waits for a key-in. No character proceeds after any input.
%<character>
A percent (%) character in an action string is identical to the slash, except that MicroStation does not display any of its normal prompts. This is useful to display custom prompts from a menu. The actions %d and %k work analogously to /d and /k.
Entering multiple action strings Each action string can contain several actions (separated by semicolons). For example, this action string places a blue two-inch circle at a user-specified point:'co=blue;E,PLACE CIRCLE RADIUS;T,2;M,cfPlace 2 Inch Circle;%d;null' The actions are as follows:
Action co=blue E PLACE CIRCLE Description A command entry key-in (since no type is specified) that sets the Active Color to blue. MicroStation activates the ACTIVE COLOR key-in even if it currently expects a data key-in.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
RADIUS T,2 M,cfPlace 2 Inch Circle %d null The MicroStation key-in PLACE CIRCLE RADIUS. A terminated key-in that enters a radius of 2. Displays the message Place 2 Inch Circle in the status bar.
Page 123 of 387
Waits for a data point without displaying the normal prompts (preserving the prompt displayed by the previous action). After the circle is placed, executes the NULL key-in so that no tool or view control is selected.
V7 File Migration
MicroStation V8 XM Edition opens design files from all previous editions of MicroStation. When you open a V7 design file, you have the option of either upgrading the file to V8 DGN file format or opening it read-only. If you want to work with V7 design files in MicroStation V8 but need to maintain backward compatibility, you have two choices:
Upgrade newly opened V7 design files to the new format, but save them when done making changes as V7 files in which the graphic representation is maintained. Configure MicroStation V8 to operate in V7 workmode, in which MicroStation V8 permits the opening of V7 design files for write access but disables functionality that is not backward-compatible.
Options for Saving V8 DGN Files as V7 Design Files Setting Up and Using V7 Workmode Batch Migration
Options for Saving V8 DGN Files as V7 Design Files

You can use the Save As V7 Options dialog box to map MicroStation V8 DGN file format data constructs, such as levels above 63, fonts that are new to MicroStation V8, cells that are too large or have names that are too long, etc., to V7 analogues, and to select other options that influence backward compatibility.
To save the open DGN file as a V7-format design file
1. Choose File > Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 2. From the Select Format To Save option menu, choose MicroStation V7 DGN Files (*.dgn). 3. (Optional) To select save options, click Options and use the controls in the Save As V7 Options dialog box. When done, click OK to return to the Save As dialog box. 4. Specify the name and location of the new V7-format file using the standard dialog box controls. 5. Click OK.
When saving a MicroStation V8 DGN file in V7 format, MicroStation does not save live nested reference attachments to the resulting V7 file.
Setting Up and Using V7 Workmode

V7 workmode operation differs from other MicroStation V8 workmodes, and for that manner, from previous editions of MicroStation, in a fundamental way:
When operating MicroStation V8 in V7 workmode, it is necessary to manually save changes to the open DGN file by choosing File > Save.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The following capabilities are disabled in V7 workmode:

Page 124 of 387
view group creation level creation model creation 3D references in 2D design files reference associations references to models created in V8 DGN files references to models created in DWG files
You cannot use V7, MicroStation/SE, or other pre-V8 cell libraries in V8 using the V7 format, even in V7 workmode. Once you attach a cell library in a V8 design session, it is automatically upgraded to V8 format and a backup is saved to MS_BACKUP (or MS_TMP, if MS_BACKUP is not defined). To continue using a cell library with a V7 format, you will need to maintain the cell library in V7, and upgrade a copy to V8 as needed. This does not affect cells placed in a DGN file, which will save to V7 files successfully.
To enable V7 workmode
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the View/Modify All Configuration Variables list box, select MS_OPENV7. 3. Click Edit. The Edit Configuration File dialog box opens. 4. In the New Value field, type 3. 5. Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog box. 6. From the File menu of the Configuration dialog box, choose Save. 7. To close the Configuration dialog box, click OK. 8. Exit and restart MicroStation. To reenable the default workmode, DGN, set MS_OPENV7 to 0. Follow the above steps, except in step 4, type 0 instead of 3.
To ensure that the project data conforms with the project requirements, the system administrator or project manager should specify the workmode at the project level.
Batch Migration
In addition to the Batch Converter, MicroStation V8 provides a second utility for upgrading a set of V7 design files and/or cell libraries to V8 DGN format. To use this utility, choose File > Upgrade Files to V8 in the MicroStation Manager dialog box (File > Close) or the Cell Library dialog box (Element > Cells).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 125 of 387
Upgrade Files to V8 Format dialog box
To explicitly specify the working unit setup for upgraded files, you must specify the desired working units in a text file. During the upgrade, if the unit labels in a file being processed are identical to those in a custom unit definition, MicroStation V8 creates the V8 DGN file with the specified units. For the syntax and examples of custom unit definitions, see the sample unit definition file, "units.def", which is installed in the "..\Bentley\Workspace\System\data" directory. The configuration variable MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF defines the location of the unit definition file. In MicroStation V8 XM Edition as delivered, MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF is set to the installed sample file, "units.def". All of the unit definitions in that file are on lines that begin with the # character that is, commented out so even if you do not modify the file or redefine MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF, none of the sample unit definitions are applied by default.
If a unit from the units definition file conflicts with one of the standard MicroStation units, the unit from the definition file is used.
The Batch Converter has more options for controlling the upgrading of V7 files than the MicroStation Manager-based utility and is therefore likely to yield better results.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Directory Structure
Page 126 of 387
The directory structure for the XM Edition makes updates easier and reduces the likelihood of overwriting data when reinstalling MicroStation. By default, the destination directory for MicroStation is C:\Program Files\Bentley and the Workspaces are installed to "C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data" (Windows XP) or "C:\ProgramData\Bentley" (Windows Vista). Directory for local data The "Documentation" directory The "Program" directory The "WorkSpace" directory
Directory for local data

The "..\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\ " directory provides a local storage location for some Bentley product-specific data that is unique to a computer or workstation. The location of this directory is defined by the variable _USTN_HOMEROOT. User Preference Files and dfltuser.cfg, the file containing the current workspace name, are created and stored in the "..\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\ " directory by default.
It is highly recommended not to share User Preference Files between users. Although multiple users can and should utilize the same workspace and user configuration files over a network, "..\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\ " should reside on each local computer or workstation.
The "Documentation" directory

This directory contains the new product documentation files.
Directory Name Description Program Files Bentley Documentation Contains all program and language documentation files
The "Program" directory

This directory contains the files necessary for MicroStation to operate in its default configuration. Files installed in this directory include MicroStation system files, licensing files and, if installed, Engineering Configuration system files, such as or Bentley Model Streaming executable files.
Directory Name Program Files Bentley MicroStation assemblies config docs featuremodeling icons mdl mdlapps
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
mdlsys
Page 127 of 387
The "WorkSpace" directory

The WorkSpace directory is where users create and maintain standards and projects in a networked environment. User data files should be stored in the WorkSpace directory or in a shared network resource in order to share project data and to develop, maintain, and enforce the use of drawing standards and the appearance of MicroStation on the desktop. Within the WorkSpace directory are the following:

The Interfaces directory, where workspace interfaces are stored. The Projects directory, where project-specific data is typically stored. The Standards directory, where the CAD manager or system administrator stores and maintains corporate standard configurations. Project data that can be used on multiple projects can be moved to this directory. The System directory, which is updated by Bentley. User data placed in this directory will be overwritten by subsequent software installations or updates. The Users directory, where user configuration files for using workspaces are stored.
Sample project directory structure Projects should be created in the "\WorkSpace\Projects" directory. MicroStation provides a set of sample projects in the "\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples" directory. Users can create projects using their standard naming conventions. These files can be installed anywhere on the network by setting the _USTN_WORKSPACEROOT configuration variable before starting MicroStation.
Directory Name WorkSpace Interfaces Buttons Fkeys default newuser Projects Examples Building Civil General Geospatial Plant Untitled cell data dgn dgnlib out seed Standards cell Default Default Button menus Function key menus Default Resource file Default Default Building files and subdirectories Civil files and subdirectories General files and subdirectories Geospatial files and subdirectories Plant files and subdirectories The seed project to copy Project untitled cell libraries Project untitled data files Project untitled DGN files Project untitled DGN library files Project untitled out directory Project untitled seed files Corporate standards (shared among projects) Corporate standard cell libraries (shared among projects) Description
MicroStation Default
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
data dgn dgnlib macros materials mdlapps plotdrv seed SPC symb tables VBA System Borders Cell ColorBooks Data Database dgnlib Image Macros Materials Menus Plotdrv Seed Symb Tables VBA Users Corporate standard data files (shared among projects) Corporate standard DGN files (shared among projects) Corporate standard DGN library files (shared among projects) Corporate standard macros (shared among projects) Corporate standard materials (shared among projects) Corporate standard mdlapps (shared among projects) Corporate standard plot driver files (shared among projects) Corporate standard seed files (shared among projects) Default location of security configuration variables Corporate standard symb files (shared among projects) Corporate standard table files (shared among projects) Visual Basic files Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Visual Basic files User configuration files
Page 128 of 387
Building DGN Libraries

A DGN library is a DGN file used to store:

Cells Levels Level filters Line styles Multi-line styles Text styles Dimension styles Standards Checker settings Element templates Menu customizations
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects

Page 129 of 387
Project Explorer link sets Customized tools, tool boxes, and tasks
A DGN library, sometimes referred to as a DGNLib, contains data that is shared throughout files and among users. These shared resources consist of things that you define and name, which are used as standards by members of a workgroup. Each cell, level, and so on defined in a DGN library has a unique name that identifies it. When you use a cell, level, line style, multi-line style, text style, dimension style, or template from a DGN library, it is copied to your open DGN file and is given the same name. This allows you to compare the local resource to the DGN library resource with the same name, to see if the contents of the DGN library have changed, to see if the local resource is out of sync with the DGN library resource, and to selectively apply updates to the local resource. In addition to promoting the sharing of data and standards, DGN libraries provide other advantages:
They provide structure, yet allow for exceptions when needed. You start with the resources from a DGN library, but they are not locked to prohibit you from changing them. You can make changes to the local resources as required by your customers. DGN libraries allow administrators to create shared resources in one place and to distribute them to many users. Having a central location for resources makes the maintenance and management of them easier. When you edit a DGN library you can use Edit > Undo and Edit > Redo. For example, because menu customizations are stored in DGN libraries, you can use Edit > Undo and Edit > Redo while using the Customize dialog box.
Digital rights and digital signatures can be applied to DGN libraries to protect their content and to sign approved shared resources. Design history can be used to track revisions of your standard shared resources. If you are part of a small organization, you may want to store all of your resources in one DGN library, which is simpler and requires less administration. If you are part of a larger company with resources for different disciplines and different projects, it makes sense to place them in multiple DGN libraries according to discipline or project. Multiple DGN libraries can be arranged in a hierarchy. You can make DGN libraries containing companys shared resources available to all users at all times. DGN libraries containing discipline-related resources can be made available only when you are working in that discipline. DGN libraries containing project-related resources can be made available only when you are working on that project.
If you want to create resources that will be available only to you, save them in a personal DGN library. In the MicroStation V8 XM Edition, a personal DGN library can contain only user interface modifications: customizations of tools, tool boxes, tasks, and menus. A personal DGN library is created when you create an interface component.
The shared resources in a DGN library are created using MicroStation tools, the same way they are created in a DGN file. A DGN library has the same file format as a DGN file, except that it has a different file extension. The recommended file extension is *.dgnlib. The procedure for creating a DGN library, either by creating a new file from the beginning or by copying an existing file and saving it with a new name, is the same as for any DGN file. When they are ready to be shared among users, DGN libraries should be moved to a central location to which everyone has at least readonly access. The configuration variable MS_DGNLIBLIST specifies the list of DGN libraries that are available for use, for example, "s:\standards\*.dgnlib". After DGN libraries are created, you need to set the configuration variable MS_DGNLIBLIST to point to the libraries in order to use them. Once this has been done, the shared resources stored in the DGN libraries will be available to you when you open a DGN file. For example, when you open the Text Styles dialog box, all text styles in the configured DGN libraries appear in the list of text styles. If the contents of a DGN library change, elements placed in DGN files prior to the change are not updated automatically in the open DGN file. You can synchronize your local resources with shared resources. This is done by using the Update from Library icon or menu item in each style dialog, or by using the following key-ins.
Type of Library Levels Multi-line styles Text styles Dimension styles Update Key-in DGNLIB UPDATE LEVELS DGNLIB UPDATE MLINESTYLES DGNLIB UPDATE TEXTSTYLES DGNLIB UPDATE DIMSTYLES
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Element templates DGNLIB UPDATE TEMPLATES
Page 130 of 387
All type of libraries listed in this table DGNLIB UPDATE ALL
Cells in DGN Libraries Levels in DGN Libraries Line Styles in DGN Libraries Multi-line Styles in DGN Libraries Text Styles in DGN Libraries Dimension Styles in DGN Libraries Element Templates in DGN Libraries
Cells in DGN Libraries

The term cell library refers to a component of a DGN library that contains cells usually one per model. Recall that cells are small drawings usually of frequently-used or complex symbols. Cell libraries used with previous versions of MicroStation are standalone files in a special format that is not directly supported by MicroStation V8. Pre-V8 cell libraries are automatically converted to DGN libraries when attached to a DGN file in MicroStation V8, but they retain their extension, typically .cel.
For more information about creating, defining the contents of, and disseminating cell libraries, see Cells.
To create an HTML Web page that displays the contents of a cell library, use the HTML Author dialog box (Utilities > HTML Author).
Using Multiple Cell Libraries
Using Multiple Cell Libraries

If you key in ACTIVE CELL <cellname> or AC=<cellname>, if the cell is not a shared cell in the design or in the attached cell library, or if there is no attached cell library, MicroStation searches for the cell in the cell library list specified by the Cell Library List configuration variable (MS_CELLLIST). Cell libraries are searched in their order in the list. If wildcard characters are used, cell libraries are searched in alphabetical order. For example, if MS_CELLLIST expands to: Bentley\WorkSpace\projects\proj1\cell\master.cel;Bentley\WorkSpace\system\cell\p*.cel and the files projcel.cel, pipe2.cel, house.cel, and peter.cel are in the "Bentley\WorkSpace\system\cell" directory. MicroStation searches for a cell as follows: 1. In the attached cell library. 2. In "Bentley\WorkSpace\projects\proj1\cell\master.cel". 3. In "Bentley\WorkSpace\system\cell\peter.cel". 4. In "Bentley\WorkSpace\system\cell\pipe2.cel". 5. In "Bentley\WorkSpace\system\cell\projcel.cel".
To make it easier to attach different cell libraries, an item for each cell library in the cell library list is appended to the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 131 of 387
Default cell library list for the sample workspace.
All files in the specified directory with the .cel extension are listed in the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box. Any cell in any listed cell library can be placed by keying in AC=<cell_name>, regardless of whether its cell library is attached. To attach a cell library that is in the cell library list
1. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose the cell library. Cell libraries in the cell library list must have a cell library index file. The first time a cell library is attached, MicroStation automatically generates the cell library index file.
Nested cells are always expanded from the same cell library as their parent.
Levels in DGN Libraries

The term level library refers to a component of a DGN library that contains a level structure that is, one or more level definitions. They can be filtered at any time to make only specific levels within a level library available during the design process. New level libraries can be created, and new and existing level libraries can be attached, detached, imported, and exported using the Level Manager dialog box (Settings > Level > Manager).
Level structures are not hierarchical but level library filters are. In MicroStation level filters are used to combine level definitions into groups.
Working with Level Libraries
Working with Level Libraries

The level library Attach and Detach utility is a good way to set up Seed files. CSV files can be manually attached to drive levels, however they cannot be used in the MS_DGNLIBLIST variable.
Level files (*.lvl) from previous versions of MicroStation will import to V8. However, any previous group structure will not follow.
A level definition does not technically attach from a level library to a DGN file until it is used. This is analogous to attaching a cell from a cell library. After attaching a cell library, the cells are not present in the DGN file until they are placed.
The level library Import utility is valuable for copying levels from a DGN or CSV file into an active file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 132 of 387
The level library Export utility is valuable for creating a new DGN or CSV file containing levels that are defined by individual administrators. After defining and establishing levels and optional level filters, the administrator would export the levels to the users as a project standard. Users would then attach or import the levels. It is recommended that the administrator use the file extension *.dgnlib when exporting a level library. For more information on the mechanics of creating levels and level filters see the Level System.
Administrators can export level libraries as CSV files by choosing Levels > Export in the Level Manager dialog box. Once exported, the *.csv file can be opened in Microsoft Excel where the level definitions can be modified. The modified *.csv file can then be made available to the users for import into their DGN files. Furthermore, administrators can achieve ultimate control of level libraries by connecting Excel to a database via ODBC, whereby using the database to drive level usage.
Line Styles in DGN Libraries

Line style libraries contain custom line style definitions. A line style definition consists of a name and one or more Line style components In MicroStation V8, custom line styles can be stored in DGN libraries and files as well as in resource .rsc files.. When you open or create a DGN file you can use all line styles stored in all DGN libraries specified by the MS_DGNLIBLIST and _USTN_SYSTEMDGNLIBLIST configuration variables, as well as the line styles in the open DGN file.
You can selectively import line styles from a v7 line style library or an AutoCAD .lin file into the open DGN file or library. Conversely, you can export all custom line styles stored in the open DGN file to a v7 line style library for use with MicroStation v7. To perform these operations use the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box (Element > Line Style > Edit). To delete unused line styles from the open DGN file, turn on Delete Unused Line Styles in the Compress Options dialog box (File > Compress > Options) and then click Compress, or key in DELETE UNUSED LINESTYLES.
Copying Line Style Definitions Line Style Components Working with Stroke Pattern Components Working with Point Symbol Components Working with Compound Components Technical Background
Copying Line Style Definitions

Line style definitions are copied from source line style libraries to destination line style libraries. The source line style library is the file that contains the line style definitions you want to copy, and the destination line style library is the file to which you copy the selected definitions.
To copy line style definitions from one line style library to another
1. From the Element menu, choose Line Style > Edit. The Line Style Editor dialog box opens. 2. From the File menu, choose Open. The Open Line Style Library dialog box opens. (You can also use File > New to create a new line style library.) 3. In the File list box, select the file you want to be the line style library. 4. Click OK. The Line Style Editor dialog box displays relevant information on the line styles contained in the selected line style library. Once you have a line style library file assigned, you can then select then the source and destination files. 5. From the Line Style Editor's File menu, choose Manage. The Manage Line Style Definitions dialog box opens listing the line styles in the current line style library.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 133 of 387
Manage Line Style Definitions dialog box
6. From the File menu, choose Open Source File. The Select Source Line Style Library dialog box opens. 7. In the File list box, select the name of the file that you want to be the source file (the file from which you want to copy line styles), and click OK. The filename and list box on the left contain the source entries; and the filename and list box on the right contain the destination entries. You can copy line styles from the source file into the destination file, rename the line styles in this file, and delete line style resources from this file. The resource file is open only for reading and copying line styles into another file; the original resource file is not modified by copying styles from it. 8. Select the name of the line style definition you want to copy in the source list box. 9. Click Copy. or Drag the line style name over to the Destination list box and drop it. The line style name appears at the bottom of the Destination line style name list. 10. Click OK.
You can copy line styles from more than one source file in the destination file at one time by using File > Open Source File.
You may also open more than one destination file to add styles as well, by using File > Open Destination File. If you have made changes to the current destination file, you will be prompted to save them before continuing.
Line Style Components

A line style component is a component of a line style definition. The line style library, lstyle.rsc, installed in Bentley's "Workspace\system\symb" directory contains many sample line style definitions. The line style component types are stroke patterns, point symbols, and compound components. Stroke pattern A stroke pattern is a pattern of dash strokes and gap strokes that is displayed repeatedly along the length of an element. For each dash stroke, the length and optionally, the color and width, are specified.
Stroke pattern attributes
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The following are stroke pattern attributes:

Page 134 of 387
Shift (the relationship between the stroke pattern, the first stroke, and the beginning and end of the element). Whether the stroke pattern is truncated and restarted for each element segment (displayable vector) or continued across segments. The number of repetitions of the stroke pattern used to display elements.
Stroke attributes
The following are stroke attributes:

Whether the stroke is a dash stroke or a gap stroke. Length, in master units. Whether the length is fixed or variable (subject to scaling). Whether the stroke is displayed with width and if so, which half or halves. Starting and ending width, in master units. The type of end cap (if any). Whether the stroke can be broken at element vertices.
Point symbol A point symbol defines how a series of point symbols (like shared cells) are displayed along the length of an element. A point symbol component contains an association to a stroke pattern component from which dash stroke information is extracted to place the point symbols. A point symbol is a named group of elements, much like a shared cell, that includes the following information:

An association to the stroke pattern on which the component is based. Associations between point symbols and strokes in the base stroke pattern. How point symbols are justified on strokes. Optional offset, rotation, and scale factors.
Compound A compound component is a combination of components of any type. Compound components can be nested. The only way to display both dash strokes and point symbols along the length of an element is to create a compound component. For each component specified in a compound component, an offset is specified. The offset value specifies the distance (perpendicularly) from the working line to where the component is displayed. Offsets can be used to produce many of the effects available with multi-lines.
General Procedure To define a line style
1. From the Element menu, choose Line Style > Edit. The Line Style Editor dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 135 of 387
Line Style Editor dialog box
2. From the dialog box's File menu, choose New to create a line style library or Open to open an existing line style library. The Create Line Style Library dialog box or the Open Line Style Library dialog box opens. The controls are analogous to the New and Open dialog box, respectively. 3. Use the dialog box to create or open a line style library. When you close the dialog box, focus returns to the Line Style Editor dialog box. 4. (Optional) Create or modify a line style. See one of the following sections:
Working with stroke pattern components Working with point symbol components Working with compound components
5. From the Edit menu's Create submenu, choose Name. A line style named Unnamed is inserted in the Styles list box and is automatically selected. If a component is selected in the Components list box, >> is displayed next to the component's type to indicate the component is directly linked to the new line style definition. (If the component is a compound component, its subcomponents are part of the definition in essence, indirectly linked.) If a component is not selected, the new line style is linked by default to the Default solid line internal stroke pattern component. To select and link a different component, follow the steps in To change the component to which a line style definition is directly linked. 6. In the Name field below the Styles list box, key in the line style name (replace Unnamed). The specified name replaces Unnamed in the Styles list box. 7. From the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box, choose Save.
To change the component to which a line style definition is directly linked
1. In the Line Style Editor dialog box's Components list box, select the desired component. 2. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Link. 3. From the dialog box's File menu, choose Save.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 136 of 387
Working with Stroke Pattern Components

Here are procedures for creating, modifying, and deleting stroke pattern components. In some cases, the most efficient way to create a stroke pattern component is to adapt an existing component by duplicating it and then modifying the duplicate.
To create a stroke pattern component (by adapting an existing component)
1. In the Components list box, select the stroke pattern component to adapt. The controls for working with stroke patterns are displayed.
Controls for working with stroke pattern components in Line Style Editor dialog box
2. From the Edit menu, choose Duplicate. The component is duplicated. The duplicate is automatically selected in the Components list box, and a sample line with the stroke pattern component and the Stroke Pattern itself are displayed. 3. (Optional) For each stroke you want to delete from the duplicate, select the stroke, and click the Delete button. To select a stroke, click the stroke in the Stroke Pattern display. The selected stroke is highlighted. 4. (Optional) For each stroke you want to add, click the Add button. Each stroke is added to the (right) end of the Stroke Pattern as a gap stroke, which is indicated with an unfilled bar. 5. (Optional) For each stroke you want to change from a gap stroke to a dash stroke, select the stroke and choose Dash from the Stroke Type option menu. Each dash stroke is indicated with a filled bar. The resulting stroke pattern component is displayed above the stroke pattern display. 6. (Optional) Set other stroke attributes. To permit the length of the selected stroke to be adjusted when the stroke pattern is fractionally shifted or repeated a fixed number of times, choose Variable from the Length option menu. Otherwise, choose Fixed. To change the length of the selected stroke, key in the length, in master units, in the Length field. You can also change the length of a stroke by dragging its handle, which is located in the Stroke Pattern display above or below the ending point of the stroke. To set the type of end cap to be displayed on the selected stroke when the stroke is displayed with width, choose the desired end cap type from the Dash Caps option menu.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 137 of 387
Dash Caps (from top): Arc, Closed, Extended, Hexagon, Open
To cause the selected stroke to break at element vertices, choose Break from the Corners option menu. Otherwise, choose Bypass.
Corners: Break, Bypass
To display the selected stroke with width, choose Full from the Width option menu. or To cause only the left or right half of the stroke to be displayed (with width), choose Left or Right from the Width option menu. or To display the stroke without width, choose None from the Width option menu.
Width: Full, Left
If the selected stroke is a dash stroke that is set to display with width, to set the stroke's start and end width, key in the widths, in master units, in the Start and End fields. To taper the stroke, set Start and End to different values. 7. (Optional) Set stroke pattern attributes. To set the fraction of the first stroke that is displayed at the start and end of an element (or element segment) displayed using this stroke pattern, choose Fraction from the Shift option menu and key in the desired fraction, in decimal, in the field. To set the distance, in master units, that the stroke pattern is shifted relative to the beginning of an element (or element segment), choose Distance from the Shift option menu, and key in the desired distance, in master units, in the field. To set the number of repetitions of the stroke pattern along the length of an element (or each segment), choose Count from the Repetitions option menu and key in the desired number in the field. To cause the stroke pattern to repeat continuously along the length of an element (or each segment), choose Unlimited from the Repetitions option menu. To truncate and restart the stroke pattern for each element segment (displayable vector), turn on Single Segment. To continue the stroke pattern across element segments, turn off Single Segment.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 138 of 387
Effect of Shift settings based on dash and gap at top: Distance = 0.0 (top); Distance = 0.2 (center); Fraction = 0.5 (bottom)
8. (Optional) In the field below the Components list box, key in the component description. 9. From the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box, choose Save.
To create a stroke pattern component (without adapting an existing component)
1. From the Edit menu's Create submenu, choose Stroke Pattern. A new, blank row is inserted and is automatically selected in the Components list box. The controls for working with stroke patterns are displayed. 2. Follow the steps in To create a stroke pattern component (by adapting an existing component), beginning with step 4. Steps 4 and 5 are not optional.
To modify a stroke pattern component
1. In the Components list box, select the stroke pattern component to modify. The controls for working with stroke patterns are displayed, along with a sample line with the stroke pattern component and the stroke pattern itself. 2. Follow the steps in To create a stroke pattern component (by adapting an existing component), beginning with step 3.
To delete a stroke pattern component
1. In the Components list box, select the stroke pattern component to delete. A sample line with the stroke pattern component and the stroke pattern itself are displayed. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Delete. 3. From the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box, choose Save.
Working with Point Symbol Components
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 139 of 387
The following are procedures for creating, modifying, and deleting point symbol components, and creating a point symbol. In some cases, the most efficient way to create a point symbol component is to adapt an existing component by duplicating it and then modifying the duplicate.
To create a point symbol component (by adapting an existing component)
1. In the Components list box, select the point symbol component to adapt. The controls for working with point symbol components are displayed.
2. From the Edit menu, choose Duplicate. The component is duplicated. The duplicate is automatically selected in the Components list box, and a sample line with the point symbol component, the base stroke pattern, and the point symbol itself are displayed. 3. (Optional) Click the Base Stroke Pattern button. The Base Stroke Pattern dialog box opens.
Base Stroke Pattern dialog box
4. (Optional) In the Base Stroke Pattern dialog box, select a stroke pattern component on which to base the new point symbol component, and click the OK button (or double-click the desired component). 5. (Optional) Back in the Line Style Editor dialog box, select the stroke with which you want to associate a point symbol by first having the desired Point Line Style displayed. The selected stroke is highlighted. 6. (Optional) Click the Select button at the bottom of the dialog box. The Select Point Symbol dialog box opens. All point symbols in the open line style libraries are available for selection. Follow the
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
steps in To create a point symbol to create additional point symbols and make them available for selection.
Page 140 of 387
Select Point Symbol dialog box
7. (Optional) In the Select Point Symbol dialog box, select a point symbol, and click the OK button (or double-click the desired point symbol). Back in the Line Style Editor dialog box, the resulting point symbol component is displayed below the list boxes. 8. (Optional) Specify the association between the point symbol and the selected stroke: To put the origin of the associated point symbol on the midpoint of the stroke, choose Center from the Origin option menu. or To put the origin of the associated point symbol on the starting point (left end) of the stroke, choose Left from the Origin option menu. or To put the origin of the associated point symbol on the ending point (right end) of the stroke, choose Right from the Origin option menu. To specify an additional point symbol origin horizontal offset distance (from the justification point set on the stroke in the previous step), key in the desired distance, in master units in the direction of the stroke pattern (x-axis), in the X Offset field. To specify an additional point symbol origin vertical offset distance (from the justification point on the stroke), key in the desired distance, in master units in the direction perpendicular to the stroke pattern (x-axis) and its plane, in the Y Offset field. To set the point symbol rotation angle, key in the desired angle, in degrees, in the Rotation field. 9. (Optional) Repeat steps 5-8 to associate point symbols with additional strokes. 10. (Optional) In the field below the Components list box, key in the component description. 11. From the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box, choose Save.
To create a point symbol component (without adapting an existing component)
1. From the Edit menu's Create submenu, choose Point. A new, blank row is inserted and is automatically selected in the Components list box. The controls for working with point symbols are displayed. 2. Follow the steps in To create a stroke pattern component (by adapting an existing component), beginning with step 3. Steps 3-8 are not optional.
To modify a point symbol component
1. In the Components list box, select the point symbol component to modify. The controls for working with point symbols are displayed, along with a sample line with the point symbol component, the base stroke pattern, and the point symbol itself. 2 F ll th t i T t t k tt t (b d ti i ti t) b i i ith t 3
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To delete a point symbol component
Page 141 of 387
1. In the Components list box, select the point symbol component to delete. A sample line with the point symbol component, the base stroke pattern, and the point symbol itself are displayed. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Delete. 3. From the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box, choose Save.
To create a point symbol
1. Draw the elements that will be part of the point symbol. 2. Select or fence the elements. If you use a fence, the Fence (Selection) Mode is ignored; only elements completely enclosed by the fence are used. 3. (Optional) Use the Define Cell Origin tool to define the point symbol origin. 4. In the Components list box, select any point symbol component. The controls for working with point symbol components are displayed. 5. Click the Create button. The Create Point Symbol dialog box opens.
Create Point Symbol dialog box
6. In the Name field, key in a name for the symbol. 7. Click the OK button. 8. If you skipped step 3, enter a data point to define the point symbol origin.
If a point symbol with the same name is already present in the library, an alert box containing that information is displayed, and you are given the option of overwriting the existing point symbol or cancelling creation.
Working with Compound Components

Here are procedures for creating, modifying, and deleting compound components. In some cases, the most efficient way to create a compound component is to adapt an existing component by duplicating it and then modifying the duplicate.
To create a compound component (by adapting an existing component)
1. In the Components list box, select the compound component to adapt. The controls for working with compound components are displayed.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 142 of 387
Controls for working with Compound components in Line Style Editor dialog box
2. From the Edit menu, choose Duplicate. The component is duplicated. The duplicate is automatically selected in the Components list box, and a sample line with the compound component is displayed. 3. (Optional) For each subcomponent you want to remove from the duplicate, select the subcomponent in the Sub-Components list box, and click the Remove button. 4. (Optional) To insert a subcomponent, click the Insert button. The Select Component dialog box opens.
Select Component dialog box
5. (Optional) In the Select Component dialog box, select a component, and click the OK button (or double-click the desired component). Back in the Line Style Editor dialog box, the component is listed in the Sub-Components list box. 6. (Optional) Repeat steps 3-4 to insert additional subcomponents in the new compound component. As you insert additional subcomponents, a sample line with the resulting compound component is displayed above the subcomponents list box. 7. (Optional) To cause a component to be displayed parallel to the work line, select the component in the Sub-Components list box. Then, in the Offset field, key in the desired offset distance, in master units measured perpendicular to the work line. Repeat for additional components as desired. 8. (Optional) In the field below the Components list box, key in the component description. 9. From the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box, choose Save.
To create a compound component (without adapting an existing component)
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 143 of 387
A new, blank row is inserted and is automatically selected in the Components list box. The controls for working with compound components are displayed. 2. Follow the steps in To create a stroke pattern component (by adapting an existing component), beginning with step 4. Steps 4 and 5 are not optional.
To modify a compound component
1. In the Components list box, select the compound component to modify. The controls for working with compound components are displayed, along with a sample line with the compound component. 2. Follow the steps in To create a stroke pattern component (by adapting an existing component), beginning with step 3.
To delete a compound component
1. In the Components list box, select the compound component to delete. A sample line with the compound component is displayed. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Delete. 3. From the File menu in the Line Style Editor dialog box, choose Save.
Technical Background
The attribute data section of an element placed with a line style contains a name ID plus any line style modifiers specified in the Line Styles dialog box. The name ID identifies only the name of the line style in an ID-to-Name map that is contained in the DGN file. This name is used to obtain the resource type and ID of each line style component in the line style definition based on a Name-to-Resource ID map that is stored in the line style library, which is a resource file along with the component definitions themselves. The name indirection is necessary to avoid the need for unique component resource IDs across many different line style libraries. It also provides a simple method for replacing line styles for different display options. Line styles can be completely replaced simply by changing line style libraries, provided the new line style library contains a compatible Name-to-Resource ID map. (Line style libraries are binarycompatible across all MicroStation platforms.) The indirection also makes it possible for a single line style component to be contained in multiple line style definitions.
Multi-line Styles in DGN Libraries

The term multi-line style library refers to a component of a DGN library that contains multi-line styles. To create a multi-line style, use the Multi-line Styles dialog box (Element > Multi-line Styles).
Text Styles in DGN Libraries

The term text style library refers to a component of a DGN library that contains text styles. To create a text style, use the Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles).
Dimension Styles in DGN Libraries

The term dimension style library refers to a component of a DGN library that contains dimension styles. To create a dimension style, use the Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 144 of 387
Element Templates in DGN Libraries

An element template defines properties of elements. Templates should be created and maintained in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to create templates in one place and to distribute them to many users. Templates can be applied to existing elements. They also can be used to set the MicroStation active settings for element placement. The primary purpose of templates is to increase consistency when drawing. A template stores multiple element properties. You can set general properties such as level, color, line style, and line weight; closed linear properties such as area, fill color, and fill type; text styles and text style overrides; cell properties; point properties; pattern properties; multiline styles; dimension styles; and materials. Once you have set up templates you can apply them to existing elements or use them to create elements. Elements can retain an association to the template that was active when they were placed. This is useful because elements that contain a reference to their template can be resymbolized when properties in the template are modified. If the template is one that was created and stored in the open DGN file, this means the associated elements will be resymbolized automatically when properties in their template are modified. When you place an element that is associated with a template, the template is copied into the open DGN file if it is not already in the file. If the template is one that was copied from a DGN library into the open DGN file, you must run the Standards Checker or use a menu item in the Customize dialog box to resymbolize the elements. Templates are stored in hierarchical groups (template groups) to allow for efficient organization. These templates and template groups can be stored in a DGN file or in DGN libraries. If you wanted to define and distribute company-wide drawing standards, you could define and store templates in DGN libraries and share them with all employees. When you open or create a DGN file you can use all templates stored in all DGN libraries specified by the MS_DGNLIBLIST and _USTN_SYSTEMDGNLIBLIST configuration variables, as well as the templates in the open DGN file. Using the Templates tab in the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), you can add, modify, rename, and delete templates and organize them in template groups. You can import data from Settings Manager and XML files to create templates and export template data to XML files. You can generate an HTML report of all the template data in the open DGN file to put into a printed report on your company's standards, for example. The Standards Checker is used to validate templates. You can check the open DGN file's local templates against those defined in the DGN libraries. You also can check all elements in the open DGN file against the local templates with which they are associated. Working with Template Groups Working with Element Templates Importing and Exporting Element Template Data
Working with Template Groups

The element templates in the open DGN file (represented by the blue V8 icon) can be organized in template groups, which hold a collection of templates. Once you add them, template groups appear in a hierarchy in the left pane on the Templates tab of the Customize dialog box. You can name your template groups and organize them by moving them up or down in the hierarchy. A template group can contain other template groups as well as templates. The template groups in the open DGN file can be moved, copied, and renamed. These template groups can be deleted only if they do not contain templates that have been associated with elements. Template groups from the open DGN file cannot be copied or moved into the template groups available in other DGN libraries (represented by the gray V8 icons). However, the DGN libraries' template groups can be copied into the open DGN file. Once they are part of the open DGN file they can be modified and deleted. You cannot cut, rearrange, delete, or rename template groups in a DGN library without opening that DGN library. If you have more than a few templates, organizing them in template groups will make it easier for you to locate them.
To add a template group
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) on the Templates tab, select the open DGN file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 145 of 387
2. (Optional) Select the template group to which you are adding the template group. 3. Click the New Template Group icon. or Right-click the open DGN file and choose New Template Group from the pop-up menu.
A new template group appears with the name New Template Group. 4. Key in a name for the new template group.
To rename a template group
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) on the Templates tab, expand the open DGN file.
2. Select the template group that you want to rename.
3. Click the template group a second time. or Right-click the template group and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the template group's name. 4. Key in a new name for the template group.
To copy a template group
2. (Optional) If the template group you are copying is from a DGN library, expand the DGN library.
3. Select the template group that you want to copy.
4. Click the Copy icon. or Right-click the template group and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the open DGN file or the template group to which you are copying the template group. 6. Click the Paste icon. or
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Right-click the location to which you want to copy the template group and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
Page 146 of 387
To move a template group
2. Click the template group that you want to move.
3. Drag the template group to the open DGN file or to another template group. A line appears, showing you where the template group will be placed when you release the mouse button. If you drag it to a closed folder, a rectangle appears around the closed folder and the template group will be placed in it. 4. Release the mouse button.
Alternative Method To move a template group
2. Select the template group that you want to move.
3. Click the Cut icon. or Right-click the template group and choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
4. Select the open DGN file or the template group to which you are moving the template group. 5. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location to which you want to move the template group and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To reorder template groups
2. Select the template group whose relative position you want to change.
th t
l t
iti
li k th M
U i
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
or Right-click the template group and choose Move Up from the pop-up menu.
Page 147 of 387
4. To move down the template group one position, click the Move Down icon. or Right-click the template group and choose Move Down from the pop-up menu.
If the template group is the first item in the open DGN file it cannot move up. If the template group is the last item in the open DGN file it cannot move down.
To delete a template group
2. Select the template group that you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete icon. or Right-click the template group and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Press the <Delete> key.
Template groups that contain templates that have been associated with elements cannot be deleted.
Working with Element Templates

Element templates define properties of elements. Once you add them to the open DGN file (represented by the blue V8 icon), templates appear in a hierarchy in the left pane on the Templates tab of the Customize dialog box. You can name your templates and organize them by moving them up or down within a template group or by moving them into another template group. The templates in the open DGN file also can be copied, renamed, and set to be the active template. These templates can be deleted only if they have not been associated with elements. When you use a template from a DGN library to place an element, and if the Active Element Template icon is locked, a copy of that template is placed in the open DGN file. Templates from the open DGN file cannot be copied or moved into the DGN libraries' template groups (represented by the gray V8 icons). However, the DGN libraries' templates can be set to be the active template and can be copied into the open DGN file. Once they are part of the open DGN file they can be modified and deleted. You cannot cut, rearrange, delete, or rename templates in a DGN library without opening that DGN library.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 148 of 387
Templates in the open DGN file and in DGN libraries
For each template that you add to the open DGN file, you must decide which properties it will have and you must set those properties. You can add as many properties as needed to a template. None of the properties are required to be in every template. Once properties are added to a template they appear in the Properties pane when the template is selected. When you add a template it adopts the following properties from the active settings in the Attributes tool box:

Level Color Line Style (Line) Weight
If you copy an existing template to add a new one, the new template uses the properties of the copied template. You can add, modify, and delete properties from the open DGN file's templates. When adding properties to a template you can choose them from the following categories:

General Closed linear Text styles and text style overrides Cells A cell can contain component elements that are associated with templates. When you place a cell, the templates associated with the components of the cell are added to the open DGN file. When a template definition is updated, the component elements within the cell are changed to match the properties in the template. Points Patterns To use these properties with templates, patterning and hatching must be applied to a parent shape that is associated with a template. Multi-line styles Dimension styles
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 149 of 387
Materials
You can add multiple instances of the same property to a template, each with a different setting. If there are multiple instances of the same property, the first one in the list will be the default that is used when the template is activated. If there are multiple instances of the same property and you do not want to use the default property, before drawing the element use the appropriate tool boxes to select secondary properties that match those in the template. If the Active Element Template icon is locked, the placed element will be associated with the template. The element will also pass the Standards Checker's tests of element templates. When multiple instances of the same property exist in one template, they appear in the Properties pane under the property's name. Each instance of the property has a number next to it in parentheses. The first instance is the default. The default property value is visible if the list of secondary properties is collapsed below the property's name.
Template with multiple color and multiple line weight properties
List of template properties The following is a list of properties that can be added to a template. None of the properties are required to be in a template.
Template Properties Level Color Line Style (Line) Weight Line Style Scale Dash Scale General Settings Gap Scale Line Style Attributes Start Width End Width Shift Distance If set to 0.0 it is the same as the None setting. Shift Fraction If set to 0.5 it is the same as the Centered setting. Class Transparency Priority Area
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Closed Linear Settings Fill Color Fill Type Text Style Height Width Font Slant Text Justification Text Settings Text Style Overrides Node Justification Line Length Line Spacing Interchar Spacing Fractions Vertical Text Underline Active Cell Cell Settings Scale Terminator Terminator Scale
Page 150 of 387
Point Cell Point Settings Point Character Point Element Pattern Cell Pattern Angle Pattern Spacing (Row and Column) Pattern Scale Area Pattern Spacing (Row and Column) Area Pattern Angle Multi-line Styles Dimension Styles Materials
The points that you add appear in the Properties pane in the order in which you added them, with the labels Active Points(0), Active Points(1), Active Points(2), etc. You can change a point's point type in the Define Active Point dialog box. For a Cell point type, the cell name appears in the Properties pane after you have selected one from the list box. For a Character point type, the character appears in the Properties pane after you have defined one. For a zero-length line element point type, Element appears in the Properties pane after you have added the point. See Point Cell. See Point Cell.
Pattern/Hatch Settings
Adding element templates The following procedures explain how to add and work with templates.
To add a template
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) on the Templates tab, select the open DGN file. 2. Select the template group into which you want to add the template.
3. Click the New Template icon. or Right-click the open DGN file and choose New Template from the pop-up menu.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 151 of 387
A new template appears with the name New Template. 4. Key in a name for the new template.
To add template properties
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) on the Templates tab, expand the open DGN file and the template group.
2. Select the template to which you want to add properties.
3. Right-click the template to which you want to add properties and choose Add from the pop-up menu. or Right-click below the existing properties in the right pane and choose Add from the pop-up menu. A cascading submenu of property categories and properties appears. 4. Choose a property. The chosen property appears in the Properties pane under the name of its category. If the chosen property is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the property's tab. 5. (Optional) To add multiple instances of the same property, in the Properties pane right-click the property and choose Add <property>. 6. (Optional) To add other properties from the same category, in the Properties pane right-click its tab and choose Add <property>. The chosen property appears in the Properties pane on its tab. 7. For each added property, click the downward pointing triangle to the right of its name and select a value for the property. or Select the existing value and key in a new value.
To delete template properties
2. Select the template whose property you want to delete.
If the property you want to delete is not visible in the Properties pane, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the property's tab. 3. In the Properties pane, right-click the name of the property and choose Remove from the pop-up menu. The property is deleted from the template.
To rename a template
2. Select the template that you want to rename.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 152 of 387
3. Click the template a second time. or Right-click the template and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the template's name. 4. Key in a new name for the template.
To copy a template
2. (Optional) If the template you are copying is in a DGN library, expand the DGN library.
3. Expand the template group.
4. Select the template that you want to copy.
5. Click the Copy icon. or Right-click the template and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
6. Select the open DGN file or the template group to which you are copying the template. 7. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location to which you want to copy the template and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To move a template
2. Click the template that you want to move.
3. Drag the template to another template group. A line appears, showing you where the template will be placed when you release the mouse button. If you drag it to a closed folder,
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
a rectangle appears around the closed folder and the template will be placed in it. 4. Release the mouse button.
Alternative Method To move a template
Page 153 of 387
2. Select the template that you want to move.
3. Click the Cut icon. or Right-click the template and choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
4. Select the template group to which you are moving the template. 5. Click the Paste icon. or Right-click the location to which you want to move the template and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
To reorder templates
2. Select the template whose relative location you want to change.
3. To move up the template one position, click the Move Up icon. or Right-click the template and choose Move Up from the pop-up menu.
4. To move down the template one position, click the Move Down icon. or Right-click the template and choose Move Down from the pop-up menu.
If the template is the first item in the template group it cannot move up. If the template is the last item in the template group it cannot move down. To move a template from one template group to another, you must cut and paste it.
To delete a template
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 154 of 387
2. Select the template that you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete icon. or Right-click the template and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Press the <Delete> key.
Templates that have been associated with elements cannot be deleted.
To make a template the active element template
2. (Optional) If the template is in a DGN library, expand the DGN library.
3. Expand the template group.
4. Right-click the template that you want to make active.
5. Choose Set Active from the pop-up menu. If you move your pointer over the Active Element Template icon, you will see that the selected template is active.
To update local templates in the open DGN file
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize) select Utilities > Update Templates from Library. Local templates that were copied from DGN libraries to the open DGN file and all elements associated with the template are updated.
To update selected elements in the open DGN file
1. Using the Element Selection tool, select the elements that you want to update. 2. Open the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize). 3. Select Utilities > Update Selected Elements. The system updates the symbology of all elements in the active selection set that are associated with local templates. If you had used a template while placing elements and had manually changed the elements' symbology so that it no longer matches the
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 155 of 387
template, you can use this menu item to update the elements so that they match the template again. Running this menu item updates only the selected elements that are associated with local templates. If an element that is not associated with a template happens to be selected when this menu item is run, its symbology will not change.
Importing and Exporting Element Template Data

If you used earlier editions of MicroStation you can import data from one or more Settings Manager files (STG files) into element templates. The contents of the STG file are added to the open DGN file's list of template groups and templates. If a Settings Manager file entry uses a key-in or a lock, then a corresponding tool box and tool are generated when you import the template data. If a Settings Manager file contains a template or tool that has the same name as a template or tool already in the open DGN file, the template or tool will be imported and will have (1) (or the next available number) appended to its name in order to make it unique. This allows you to compare the similarly named items and to decide which ones you want to keep. Template data and custom tool box, custom tool, task, and custom menu data also can be imported from and exported to XML files. If you need to make a lot of changes to templates, custom tool boxes, custom tools, tasks, or custom menus, you can export the data to an XML file, edit the XML file with a text editor, and import the updated XML file back into the open DGN file. Menu items for importing and exporting data from the Customize dialog box are found on its File menu. In addition to the File menu items, there are several key-ins you can use to import and export data. You can generate an HTML report of all the template data and custom tool box, custom tool, task, and custom menu data in the open DGN file. This is useful if you need to print a report containing your company's standards, for example. When you generate this HTML report, all XML data in the open DGN file related to templates, custom tool boxes, custom tools, tasks, and custom menus is generated. The XML data is transformed into HTML using the style sheet defined by the MS_CUSTOMIZE_REPORT_STYLESHEET configuration variable. The default style sheet is "customizereport.xsl", stored in the "..\Bentley\WorkSpace\System\Data" folder. The menu item for generating an HTML report containing this data is found in the Utilities menu in the Customize dialog box.
To import data from a Settings Manager file into a template
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), choose File > Import > From Settings Manager. The Select Settings File to Import dialog box opens. 2. Navigate to the proper folder and select the Settings Manager file (STG file) you want to import. 3. Click Open. The Select Settings File to Import dialog box closes. The contents of the selected file are added to the open DGN file's list of template groups and templates. If an STG file entry uses a key-in or a lock, then a corresponding tool box and tool are added to the Tools tab.
To import template, custom tool, and custom menu data from an XML file
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), choose File > Import > From XML File. The Define XML Import File dialog box opens. 2. Navigate to the proper folder and select the XML file you want to import. 3. Click Open. The Define XML Import File dialog box closes. The contents of the selected file are added to the open DGN file's list of template groups, templates, custom tool boxes, custom tools, tasks, and custom menus.
To export template, custom tool, and custom menu data into an XML file
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), choose File > Export > XML. The Define XML Export File dialog box opens. 2. Navigate to the folder to which you want to export the XML file. 3. In the File name field, type a name for the data you are exporting from the open DGN file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Click Save. The XML Export dialog box confirms that the data has been exported. 5. Click OK.
To generate an HTML report on templates and customizations in the open DGN file
Page 156 of 387
1. In the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), choose Utilities > Generate HTML Report. The Define HTML Report File dialog box opens. 2. Navigate to the desired folder in which you want to save the HTML file. 3. In the File name field, type a name for the HTML file you are generating. 4. Click Save. The Define HTML Report File dialog box closes, the HTML report is generated, and the report opens in your Web browser.
Project Explorer
Project Explorer helps you manage project data within MicroStation. Project data refers primarily to design and sheet models and the files in which models are stored (DGN and DWG), but it also can include:

saved views references supporting documentation stored in Microsoft Office files, as well as other data file formats.
Project Explorer allows you to navigate easily through the models, saved views, and references in a DGN file, as well as to other supporting files that have been linked to the DGN file. For example, a DGN file may contain an index that lists the drawings in the file, as well as supporting documentation. You could use Project Explorer to add links from the items in the list to the drawings and supporting files, providing easy access to all documentation related to the project. Link sets are used to organize project data. A link set contains links, or pointers, to project data. Introduction to Project Explorer Exploring Link Sets in Project Explorer Managing Link Sets in Project Explorer Creating Links in Project Explorer Managing Links in Project Explorer Engineering Links
Introduction to Project Explorer

When you are working in a DGN file you can open Project Explorer (File > Project Explorer) to see the linked data. If link sets exist in the open DGN file or in the configured DGN libraries, a link set appears in the Project Explorer dialog box when you open it. The link set's name appears next to the Link Set icon in the drop-down list box.
Link Set icon
The links appear below the Link Set icon and link set name in the Project Explorer dialog box. Links may be organized in folders. To follow a link, double-click it or right-click the link and choose Open from the pop-up menu.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 157 of 387
The Examples link set is supplied with the General sample data
A link set can contain links to DGN and DWG files, design and sheet models, references, saved views, and supporting documentation created in other file formats. Each link set is an independent object stored as non-graphical data in a DGN file or in a DGN library (DGNLib). If you move a DGN file with link sets stored in it, the link sets move with the DGN file and retain their links to the target files. Link sets cannot be stored in DWG files. If you do not see the link set and links that you want to use in the Project Explorer dialog box, you can:

select another link set, if one is available, from the drop-down list box open the Link Sets dialog box to select a link set from another source.
In the Project Explorer dialog box you can view the information in the link set, including browsing through the link set, opening links, adding links to elements, adding links to detailing symbols, and viewing a link's properties. The Project Explorer dialog box is used for organizing your links. You can organize links by creating folders and placing the links in them. You also may want to add more links to a link set. In addition to creating links to DGN and DWG files, design and sheet models, references, and saved views, you can link to:

Microsoft Word documents, including sections and bookmarks within the documents Microsoft Excel workbooks, including specific worksheets within the workbooks
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects

Page 158 of 387
Adobe PDFs, including bookmarks within the file Web sites, MicroStation key-ins, and e-mail addresses Any other file type.
The Project Explorer and Link Sets dialog boxes can be docked to the edge of your MicroStation window as tabs, or as horizontal or vertical panels, to allow more space for your drawings.
Exploring Link Sets in Project Explorer

A project's data is stored in a link set and can be viewed in the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer). Link sets can contain links to documentation related to the project. Once a link set is created you can open it, browse through its links, open links, add links to elements, add links to detailing symbols, and view the properties of links and folders. Selecting a Link Set Viewing Information in a Link Set Adding Links to Elements Adding Links to Detailing Symbols Properties of Links and Folders
Selecting a Link Set

If link sets exist in the open DGN file or in the configured DGN libraries, a link set appears in the Project Explorer dialog box when you open it. The default link set is the one that you were viewing most recently. If you have switched to a different DGN library, the first link set in that DGN library appears. The active link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name. The links may be in folders, which you open and close by clicking the plus and minus signs to the left of the folders.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 159 of 387
If the active link set is not the one you want to explore, use the Project Explorer dialog box to select a different link set from the current source. If you want to select a different link set from a different source, open the Link Sets dialog box.
Link sets come from one of three sources:
Configured Libraries Displays all of the links sets in all of the files specified by the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable. If Configured Libraries is the source of your link set, you will be unable to modify the link set at this point. You will not be able to create or delete folders or links. To modify a link set from the Configured Libraries, you must open the file containing the link set. The name of the file in which the link set is stored appears in the File column in the list box. Active File Displays the link sets stored in the open DGN file. If this is the source of your link set, you will be able to modify the link set, but you will be unable to use the Undo button to reverse any changes you make.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 160 of 387
Selected File Allows you to select a particular DGN file and displays the link sets contained in that DGN file. Click the Browse icon to choose a file. If this is the source of your link set, you will be able to modify the link set, but you will be unable to use the Undo button to reverse any changes you make.
The recommended way to access your link sets is through your configured libraries. If you select Configured Libraries, you will be able to choose from all link sets stored in the location to which the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable points. Link sets stored here are available to all users whose configuration variable points to this location.
To select a link set from the current source
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box. All link sets available in the current source are displayed. 2. Select a link set. The link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name.
To select a link set from the configured libraries or the active file
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), click the Manage Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box.
The Link Sets dialog box opens. 2. Click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box. The three sources of link sets are displayed. 3. Select Configured Libraries as your source. or Select Active File as your source. The link sets in the selected source appear in the list box. 4. Double-click a link set in the selected source. In the Project Explorer dialog box, the link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name.
To select a link set from a selected file
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), click the Manage Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box.
The Link Sets dialog box opens. 2. Click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box and select Selected File as your source. or Click the Browse to a file containing Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box.
If you clicked Browse, or if you chose Selected File and there is no file name next to it, the Select Link Set File dialog box opens. 3. Select a file and click Open. The link sets in the selected file appear in the list box. 4. Double-click a link set in the selected file. In the Project Explorer dialog box, the link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name.
Viewing Information in a Link Set

After you have selected a link set, you can view the information in it and open the files or go to the targets to which the links point.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
There are some prerequisites for opening links:

Page 161 of 387
You must have access to the location in which the file or target is stored. You must have installed on your computer an application that is capable of opening and displaying the file.
The following occurs when you open a link to a Web site, e-mail address, or MicroStation key-in:

When you open a link to a Web site, it opens in your browser. When you open a link to an e-mail address, it opens your e-mail application and places the e-mail address in the To: field. When you open a link to a MicroStation key-in, the key-in script runs.
To browse an existing link set
1. Choose File > Project Explorer. The Project Explorer dialog box opens. The active link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name. 2. (Optional) If the link set contains closed folders, click the plus signs to the left of the folders to open them and to see the links the folders contain. If the link set contains links that have other links grouped within them, click the plus signs to the left of the links to open them and to see the links they contain.
To open a link in the active link set
1. Choose File > Project Explorer. The Project Explorer dialog box opens. The active link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name. 2. (Optional) If the link that you want to open is in a closed folder or other link, click the plus sign to the left of the folder or link to open it. 3. Right-click the link that you want to open and choose Open from the pop-up menu. The target of the link opens.
After you have opened several models you can use the View Groups window to navigate between them.
Adding Links to Elements

After you have created links in a link set, you may want to attach one or more of these links to an element in the open DGN file. This will allow you to click the element and open the files that are linked to it. For example, you could add a link to a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains specifications and costs for beams. Then you could link this Excel workbook to the element representing the beam in the DGN file so that anyone viewing the DGN file would have access to the specifications. In DGN workmode you are able to add multiple links to a single element. Once links are added to an element, when you position your pointer on the element you see a link icon, a list of links, the links' paths relative to the DGN file containing the links, and the linked files' names.
Link icon and information about links added to the selected element
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
You also can see information about an element's links on the Links tab in the Element Info dialog box.
Page 162 of 387
In DWG workmode you can add one link to an element, by default. If you want to add multiple links to an element you must enable the following capability in the standards, project, or user configuration file: _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_DGNLINK_MULTILINKS_PER_ELEM. If you no longer want the linked file to be attached to the element, you can delete the link.
If a target file cannot be located the link will be broken. This will happen if you delete or rename the target file. If you try to open the target of the broken link through Project Explorer, you will receive an error message.
To add a link to an element
1. Choose File > Project Explorer. The Project Explorer dialog box opens. The active link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name. 2. (Optional) If the link that you want to add is in a closed folder or other link, click the plus sign to the left of the folder or link to open it. 3. Using the Element Selection tool, select the element to which you want to add the link. 4. Right-click the link that you want to add to an element and choose Add Link to Element from the pop-up menu. 5. Accept the link.
Alternative Method To add a link to an element
1. Choose File > Project Explorer. The Project Explorer dialog box opens. The active link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name. 2. (Optional) If the link that you want to add is in a closed folder or other link, click the plus sign to the left of the folder or link to open it. 3. Right-click the link that you want to add to an element and choose Add Link to Element from the pop-up menu. 4. Identify the element to which you want to add the link.
To see if there are links attached to an element
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool. 2. Position your pointer on the element. If the element has links attached to it, a link icon and information about the links appear in a pop-up.
Alternative Method To see if there are links attached to an element
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool. 2. Point at the element and choose Properties from the Reset pop-up menu. The Element Info dialog box opens. The links are listed on the Links tab. 3. (Optional) If the links are not visible, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Links tab.
To open a link attached to an element
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool. 2. Point at the element and click Follow Link in the Reset pop-up menu. 3. Choose the desired link from the sub-menu. The target of the link opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To delete a link from an element
Page 163 of 387
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool. 2. Point at the element and choose Properties from the Reset pop-up menu. The Element Info dialog box opens. The links are listed on the Links tab. 3. (Optional) If the links are not visible, click the downward pointing double arrows on the right side of the Links tab. 4. Right-click the link's icon or name and select Delete Link from the pop-up menu.
Adding Links to Detailing Symbols

After you have created links in a link set they are available to attach to detailing symbols in the open DGN file. This will allow you to click the detailing symbol and open the file that is linked to it. Links can be added to the following types of detailing symbols: title text, section markers, arrow markers, and detail markers. Adding links to detailing symbols is different from adding links to elements in a couple of ways:

The link can be added to the detailing symbol as you place the detailing symbol. Only one link can be added to a single detailing symbol during placement. You can add more links to a detailing symbol after the symbol has already been placed, just as you would add them to any other element.
When you place a detailing symbol, such as title text, a section marker, an arrow marker, or a detail marker, use the Link Target list box to select a link. You are able to select any link from Project Explorer's active link set. Once a link is added to a detailing symbol, when you position your pointer on the detailing symbol you see a link icon, the link's path relative to the DGN file containing the link, and the linked file's name. You also can see information about a detailing symbol's link on the Links tab in the Element Info dialog box. If you no longer want the linked file to be attached to the detailing symbol, you can delete the link.
If a target file cannot be located the link will be broken. This will happen if you delete or rename the target file. If you try to open the target of the broken link through Project Explorer, you will receive an error message.
Properties of Links and Folders

The properties of links and folders appear in the Properties for Link or Folder dialog box, with the name of the selected link or folder in its title bar. Properties of links and folders appear on the General tab. The properties that you see in this dialog box are related to the type of link or folder that you selected.
Link Type displays the type of file that is the target of the selected link. The possible link types are: model link, reference link, saved view link, file link, URL link, Microsoft Word bookmark link, Word heading link, Microsoft Excel sheet link, Adobe PDF bookmark link and link folder
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 164 of 387
File Name displays the name of the file that is the target of the selected link. The file name may be preceded by a relative path or a configuration variable if you selected them when you created the link. When you use a relative path the file's path is relative to the DGN file containing the link. The picture above shows the HVAC_DATA configuration variable in the File Name text box. Full Path displays the location of the DGN file, DWG file, design model, sheet model, reference, saved view, Word document, Word bookmark, Word heading, Excel workbook, Excel worksheet, PDF, PDF bookmark, folder, or other file type that is the target of the selected link. If the file cannot be located, the link is broken and this text box is blank. The way that target files are located is based on the same rules used for reference attachments. Name displays the name of the model, logical name of the reference, saved view, Word bookmark, Word style, Word region, Excel worksheet, PDF bookmark, or folder that is the target of the selected link. Address displays the Web site address, e-mail address, or MicroStation key-in that is the target of the selected link.
You cannot change the properties of links or folders.

To view a link or folder's properties
1. Choose File > Project Explorer. The Project Explorer dialog box opens. The active link set's name appears in the drop-down list box and its links appear below its name. 2. (Optional) If the link or folder whose properties you want to view is in a closed folder or other link, click the plus sign to the left of the folder or link to open it. 3. Right-click the link or folder whose properties you want to view and choose Properties from the pop-up menu. The Properties dialog box opens, with the name of the link or folder in the title bar. 4. View the link or folder's properties. 5. Click OK.
Managing Link Sets in Project Explorer

A link set is a group of links to files, models, references, saved views, and supporting documentation. Each link set is an independent object stored as non-graphical data in a DGN file or in a DGN library. The Link Set dialog box is used to manage link sets. This is where you add, copy, rename, delete, and import link sets.
You cannot store link sets in DWG files.
The Link Set dialog box's drop-down list box allows you to select a link set from one of three sources: the configured libraries, the active file, or a selected file. When your link set source is Active File or Selected File, you can add, copy, rename, delete, and import link sets in that source.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 165 of 387
the top of the Link Sets dialog box will be unavailable. To modify a link set from the Configured Libraries, you must open the file containing the link set. The link sets available in the selected source appear in the list box. The Link Set icon appears to the left of each link set's name. The file in which each link set is stored appears in the File column.
Working With Link Sets
Working With Link Sets

The Link Sets dialog box opens when you click the Manage Link Sets icon in the Project Explorer dialog box. When your link set source is Active File or Selected File, you can create, copy, rename, and delete link sets in that source. You also can import link sets from other files.
To create a link set
1. In the Link Sets dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box to select either Active File or Selected File as the source of the link sets. 2. (Optional) Click the Browse to a file containing Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box, select a file, and click Open. 3. Click the New Link Set icon.
The Create New Link Set dialog box opens. 4. Key in a link set name.
The link set's name must be unique to the file it is being stored in, it can be of any length, and it can consist of numbers and letters.
5. Click OK.
To copy a link set
1. In the Link Sets dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box to select either Active File or Selected File as the source of the link sets. 2. (Optional) Click the Browse to a file containing Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box, select a file, and click Open. 3. Select the link set that you want to copy. 4. Click the Copy Link Set icon. or Right-click the link set and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
A rectangle appears around the new link set's name. 5. Key in a name for the copy.
To import a link set from another file
1. In the Link Sets dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box to select either Active File or Selected File as the source of the link sets.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 166 of 387
2. (Optional) Click the Browse to a file containing Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box, select a file, and click Open. 3. Click the Import Link Set icon.
The Select Link Set File dialog box opens. 4. Select a file and click Open. The Import Link Sets dialog box opens. 5. Select one or more link sets and click OK.
To rename a link set
1. In the Link Sets dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box to select either Active File or Selected File as the source of the link sets. 2. (Optional) Click the Browse to a file containing Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box, select a file, and click Open. 3. Right-click the link set that you want to rename and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the new link set's name. 4. Key in new name for the link set.
To delete a link set
1. In the Link Sets dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list box to select either Active File or Selected File as the source of the link sets. 2. (Optional) Click the Browse to a file containing Link Sets icon to the right of the drop-down list box, select a file, and click Open. 3. Select the link set that you want to delete. 4. Click the Delete Link Set icon. or Right-click the link set that you want to delete and choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
Creating Links in Project Explorer

The Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer) is used to create links in the active link set. The links that you create in link sets can be used by anyone with access to the DGN file or DGN library.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 167 of 387
There is an icon bar containing four icons at the top of the Project Explorer dialog box. The first icon is used to create links to files and to the contents of some types of files. The second icon is used to create links to Web sites, MicroStation key-ins, and e-mail addresses. The third and fourth icons are used to organize links in the active link set.
If the icons at the top of the Project Explorer dialog box are unavailable, you are using a link set that is stored in a file that is part of the configured DGN libraries and you do not have that file open.
File Types to Which You Can Link Creating Links to Files and Their Contents Creating Links to Web Sites, E-mail Addresses, and Key-ins
File Types to Which You Can Link

Using Project Explorer, you can create a link to any type of file. You will probably want to create links to other DGN and DWG files. You may want to create links to supporting documentation created in Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and Adobe Acrobat. When you create a link to a file, the link's file name appears in black. This indicates that you can move the link or delete it. The file to which you are linking may contain other pieces of information. For example, a linked DGN file will contain at least one model and may contain references and saved views. A Word document may contain headings and bookmarks. Because you created a link to the file itself and not to its contents, the file's contents appear in gray. You cannot move or delete the file's contents unless you move or delete the file in which they exist. Linking to content within files
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 168 of 387
Often you may want to link not just to a file, but to specific contents within a file. For example, you may want to create a link to a specific saved view within a design model in a DGN file, not just to the DGN file itself. Project Explorer allows you to create links to the specific contents of certain file types, which are listed below. If you create a link directly to the contents of a file, in the Project Explorer dialog box you will see the name of the file, followed by the name of the contents to which you are linking. For example, if your link goes to a sheet model in a DGN file, you will see the DGN file's name, followed by the sheet model's name. When you create a link directly to the contents of a file, the link's file name and the content's name appear in black, indicating that you can move the link or delete it.
In DWG workmode the default is to not be able to link to the contents within files. If you want to be able to create links to the contents of files, you must enable the following capability in the standards, project, or user configuration file: _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_DGNLINK_NONDGN_REGIONLINKS.
The following table lists the file types whose contents you can link to, as well as the specific contents you can link to within those files.
Supported File Types DGN, DWG, DXF References Saved Views Microsoft Heading Styles Microsoft Word Document (DOC) User-defined Heading Styles Bookmarks Microsoft Excel Workbook (XLS) Individual Excel Worksheets (also called Spreadsheets) Adobe PDF DGN, DWG, and DXF files Bookmarks (the go to a page view type) File Content You Can Link To Design and Sheet Models
You can create links to DGN, DWG, and DXF files. You can also create links directly to the contents of these files: design and sheet models, references, and saved views. If you create a link to a model that contains a saved view or a reference, the link is automatically put in the Saved Views folder or the References folder for the model.
Microsoft Word documents
Project Explorer allows you to create links to Microsoft Word documents. You can also create links directly to Word bookmarks and to sections within Word documents that use certain paragraph styles. For simplicity's sake, all of these types of sections are called headings in Project Explorer. You can create a link to a section of a Word document if it meets one of the following conditions:

The section uses one of Word's nine pre-formatted styles called Heading 1 to Heading 9. The section uses Word's pre-formatted style called Title. The section uses a customized style that is based on any paragraph style whose Outline Level list box (in Word's Paragraph dialog box) is set to one of the levels (Level 1 to Level 9) and is not set to Body Text. When a paragraph style's outline style is set to one of the levels, it indicates that the style is a type of heading rather than regular text.
If a linked Word document contains bookmarks or headings, you will find them stored in a Bookmarks folder and a Headings folder included with the Word document. If a link goes directly to a Word bookmark or heading, in the Project Explorer dialog box you will see the Word document's file name, followed by the bookmark's name or the heading's name.
Microsoft Excel workbooks
You can create links to Microsoft Excel workbooks. You can also create links directly to individual worksheets within Excel workbooks. If a link targets an Excel workbook, its worksheets are listed below the workbook but they are not stored in a folder. If a link goes directly to an Excel worksheet, in the Project Explorer dialog box you will see the Excel workbook's name, followed by the worksheet's name.
Adobe PDFs
Project Explorer allows you to create links to Adobe PDFs and to PDFs' bookmarks. When creating a link directly to a PDF's bookmark, you can link to the default bookmark type, which is a go to a page view type of bookmark. If a linked PDF contains bookmarks, the
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
will see the PDF's file name, followed by the bookmark's name.
Page 169 of 387
Creating Links to Files and Their Contents

The New Link icon in the Project Explorer dialog box is used to create a link to a file and to the contents of some types of files.
Clicking the New Link icon opens the Create Links dialog box, whose controls are analogous to those in the Open dialog box. Use this dialog box to select the files to which you want to create links.
You can create more than one link at a time. To make a link portable across directories, projects, and networked systems, you can turn on the Save Relative Path check box and/or click the Directory History icon to select a configuration variable whose definition points to a directory. After you select the file (or files) to which you want to link, the Create Links dialog box opens. This is where you choose to link to the file itself or to specific contents within the file. Use the Tree tab or the List tab to select the files and/or the contents to which you want to create links.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 170 of 387
If you use a key-in to create a link to a file or to the contents of a file, the new link will be placed in the location that is selected in the Project Explorer dialog box.
Because links are stored in link sets, which are stored in a DGN file or in DGN libraries, moving the file in which the links are stored will not break the links. The link sets will retain their links to the target files. For links that point to files, the specification of the target file is stored in a way that allows the link to be portable across directories, projects, and networked systems. The way that target files are located is based on the same rules used for reference attachments. Using the Save Relative Path check box and/or a configuration variable, mentioned above, will ensure portability. If the target file cannot be located the link will be broken. This will happen if you delete or rename the target file. If you try to open the target of the broken link through Project Explorer, you will receive an error message. If you view the properties of the broken link, you will see that the Full Path text box is blank. You can validate links to ensure that they are not broken.
To create a link to a file
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), click the New Link icon.
The Create Links dialog box opens. 2. Select one or more files to which you want to create links. or Select one file at a time. After the file appears in the Selected Files list, click Add. 3. (Optional) To make the links portable, click the Directory History icon and click Select Configuration Variable. Select a configuration variable and click OK.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
or (Optional) Turn on Save Relative Path. 4. Click Open. The Create Links dialog box opens. 5. On the Tree tab, select the files to which you want to create links, then click OK. The links appear in the Project Explorer dialog box.
To create a link to the contents of a file
Page 171 of 387
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), click the New Link icon.
The Create Links dialog box opens. 2. Select one or more files to which you want to create links. or Select one file at a time. After the file appears in the Selected Files list, click Add. 3. (Optional) To make the links portable, click the Directory History icon and click Select Configuration Variable. Select a configuration variable and click OK. or (Optional) Turn on Save Relative Path. 4. Click Open. The Create Links dialog box opens. 5. On the List tab, select the contents of the files (targets) to which you want to create links. or On the Tree tab, click the plus signs to see the contents of the files, then select the targets to which you want to create links. 6. Click OK. The links appear in the Project Explorer dialog box.
Creating Links to Web Sites, E-mail Addresses, and Key-ins

The New URL Link icon is used to create a link to a Web site, an e-mail address, or a key-in.
Clicking this icon opens the Create URL Link dialog box, where you enter the Web site address, e-mail address, or MicroStation key-in to which you want to link.
To create a Web site link
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), click the New URL icon.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The Create URL Link dialog box opens. 2. Select http:// to create a link to a Web site on a regular server. or Select https:// to create a link to a Web site on a secure server. 3. Key in the remainder of the Web site's address. or Select the Web site's URL from the list box. 4. Click OK.
To create an e-mail link
Page 172 of 387
The Create URL Link dialog box opens. 2. Select mailto:. 3. Key in the e-mail address. or Select the e-mail address from the list box. 4. Click OK.
To create a key-in link
The Create URL Link dialog box opens. 2. Select ustnkeyin:. 3. Type the MicroStation key-in. 4. Click OK. Creating linked models While you are working in Project Explorer you can create links to existing design and sheet models. In addition, when you use the Create Model dialog box to create either type of model you can create a link to the model from Project Explorer. Use the Create Link and Select Folder controls to create the link.
Managing Links in Project Explorer

The Project Explorer dialog box is used to manage existing links.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 173 of 387
The links available in the active link set appear in the list box. Links may be stored in folders, which have a yellow folder icon to the left of their name. The icon to the left of a link indicates its file or target type. The name to the right of an icon indicates the name of the link's target. Organizing Links and Folders Working With Links LINKS SELECT
Organizing Links and Folders

You can organize the links within a link set by putting the links in folders. Folders can exist on one level, or you can place folders within other folders. When you add a folder you must give it a unique name. Folders and links are moved by dragging and dropping them, like you do with folders and files in Microsoft Windows Explorer. Within a link set you have control over the sequence in which the folders appear. You can move links within a folder or to a different folder. You also can delete folders and links. When you delete a folder, the links within the folder are deleted as well. The only time you cannot edit folders and links is when they appear in Project Explorer as the contents of another file. For example, you could have a link to a DGN file. The linked DGN file contains a design model with saved views and references. The saved views are automatically stored in a Saved Views folder. The references are automatically stored in a References folder.
You cannot move the design model, saved views, or references into other folders. Y dd f ld h d i d l d i f
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 174 of 387
You cannot delete the links to the design model, saved views, references, or the folders in which they are stored unless you delete the link to the DGN file in which they are contained.
When folders and links are contained in another file, they appear in gray text in the Project Explorer dialog box.
To add a folder to a link set
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), select the folder or file below which you want the new folder to appear. 2. Click the New Folder icon.
A new folder appears with the name Untitled.

To rename a folder
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), right-click the folder that you want to rename and choose Rename from the pop-up menu. A rectangle appears around the folder's name. 2. Key in a new name for the folder.
To move folders and links
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), click and drag the link or folder to the desired location, link, or folder. A line appears, showing you where the link or folder will be placed when you release the mouse button. If you drag a link or folder to a closed folder, a rectangle appears around the closed folder and the selected link or folder will be placed in it.
To delete a link or folder
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), select the link or folder that you want to delete. 2. Right-click the link or folder that you want to delete and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Click the Delete icon.
If you have selected multiple folders for deletion, an alert box opens for confirmation of each deletion.
Working With Links

In addition to opening and viewing links, adding links to elements, and organizing links and folders, there are some additional tasks you can perform on links and folders in the Project Explorer dialog box.
You can check to see if the target of a link still exists in the location to which the link points. You can validate one link at a time or all links within a folder. Numbering is available only for sheet models. You can number a single sheet model, but if a folder contains multiple sheet models you can number all of them at once through the Set Sheet Number dialog box.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 175 of 387
You can use the LINKS SELECT key-in to select valid links, invalid links, or all links in the open DGN file.
To number or renumber a single sheet model
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), right-click the link to the sheet model and choose Renumber from the pop-up menu. The Set Sheet Number dialog box opens. 2. Key in a number for the sheet model in the Start Index text field. 3. Click OK. 4. Right-click the link to the sheet model and choose Validate from the pop-up menu. The sheet model's new number appears in brackets after its name.
To number or renumber multiple sheet models
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), right-click the folder containing the sheet models and choose Renumber Sheets from the pop-up menu. The Set Sheet Number dialog box opens. 2. Key in a number for the first sheet model in the Start Index text field. 3. Key in the number by which you want to increase each subsequent sheet number in the Increment text field. 4. Click OK. 5. Right-click the folder containing the sheet models and choose Validate from the pop-up menu. The sheet models' new numbers appears in brackets after their names.
To validate a link or all links within a folder
1. In the Project Explorer dialog box (File > Project Explorer), right-click the link or folder containing links and choose Validate from the pop-up menu. If the targets of the links do not exist in the locations to which the links point, the folder name and the links' names turn red. The link and folder names remain red until you revalidate and confirm that the target of the link exists in the specified location. If the target file cannot be located the link will be broken. This will happen if you delete or rename the target file. If you try to open the target of the broken link through Project Explorer, you will receive an error message.
Engineering Links
Engineering Links is a relatively old Internet technology that remains supported. It is recommended that you use Project Explorer and Link Sets to manage collaborative project data over the Internet. Opening the Engineering Links Tool Box E-Links (Engineering Links) tool box Show Engineering Links Attach Engineering Link Edit Engineering Tags Follow Engineering Link Connect to/Disconnect from Browser
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Delete Engineering Link
Page 176 of 387
Opening the Engineering Links Tool Box

The E-Links (Engineering Links) tool box opens in the following situations:
when Engineering Links is chosen from the Tools menu when Connect Web Browser is chosen from the Utilities menu when Discussion Groups is chosen from the Help menu when the Bentley Library icon is selected in the Standard tool box.
All but the first option listed here also launches your default Web browser.
E-Links (Engineering Links) tool box

The Engineering Links tool box contains tools for linking to and managing remote data.
To
Select in the Engineering Links tool box
Highlight all the elements in the open DGN file that contain an Internet tag. Show Engineering Links
Create an Internet tag and attach it to an element. Attach Engineering Link
Edit an Internet tag that is attached to an element. Edit Engineering Tags
Send the browser to the Web page specified by the Internet tag attached to an element. Follow Engineering Link
Connect MicroStation to or disconnect it from your default Web browser. Connect to/Disconnect from Browser
Remove an attached Internet tag from an element. Delete Engineering Link
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Key-in: DIALOG WEBTOOLS
Page 177 of 387
Design History
Recording and Browsing Design History Restoring Recorded Changes Using Design History in Projects Design History and Distributed DGN Files
Recording and Browsing Design History

The ability to track changes to models and to restore a model to a prior state can be quite useful in managing the design process. MicroStation provides these abilities in the Design History tool box. They are collectively referred to as design history.
The DGN file data structure in which MicroStation stores the historical information that supports design history is called, non-coincidentally, the design history.
What is Design History? Using Design History Design History tool box Commit Changes Show Conflicts Conflicts dialog box Restore Elements Show Design History Design History dialog box Element Changes dialog box Revision Properties dialog box HISTORY MANAGE SET REVISIONFORMAT HISTORY MANAGE SHOW REVISIONFORMAT HISTORY GOTOMODEL
What is Design History?

Design history allows users to better manage the design process. It provides a complete revision control system that allows users to track and view the incremental changes made to a model. You can restore elements to a prior state through a combination of undoing and redoing historic changes.
You also can use design history with distributed DGN functionality, which allows more than one user to modify a DGN file at the same time.
Changes can be tracked down to the element level. To help track the revisions, each is identified with a revision number, file name, date and time, author, description of the change, and tags. While the revisions are attributed to a single author, the changes can be viewed and restored from a wide range of combinations. Because the logic for combinations of selection sets, multiple revisions, and undoing and redoing can be quite complex, the examples given deal with straightforward usage. A revision records the difference between the current state of the model and the last revision saved. Only the difference is saved in the design history area of the DGN file, which minimizes additional storage requirements for history. Design history records changes in a linear fashion, from when design history was initialized to the present. Branching is not currently supported. When enabled, design history becomes part of the DGN file. MicroStation preserves the integrity of history as carefully as it does ordinary elements, therefore design history serves as a reliable audit trail. By default, revisions cannot be removed from the design history of a file and there is no way to modify historical information. However, the MS_DESIGN_HISTORY configuration variable can be used to control modifications and deletions of design history
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 178 of 387
The design history is maintained even when you save the DGN file with a different name (using File > Save As). Within the Design History dialog box, this is indicated as a change in the design filename. All other items in the design history are unchanged. Once a revision has been committed, there are a number of viewing and recovery options. You can:

Track all committed changes View changes before and after View changes on an element level Select changes via a list filter Undo historic changes Redo historic changes Restore revisions by date and number Return to element changes within revisions
Using Design History

Design history should be turned on as soon as a file is created. In this manner, all changes in a model are identified and tied to a specific revision number. By tracking all changes on the element and revision level, you can easily recover any prior state of a model or undo any single desired change. The revisions appear in the Design History dialog box.
When you are using distributed DGN functionality, additional information appears in the Design History dialog box.
Once a revision has been committed, there are a number of viewing and recovery options. In the Design History dialog box, you can see at a glance the revision number, file name, date and time, author, description of the change, and tags. You can use the icons at the top of the dialog box to view the revisions by type of change. Design history fully supports changes to complex elements, including any combination of grouping, dropping, and editing. These changes are also supported in undoing such changes. Changes to individual elements are tracked in history even if they are components. The Isolate history by fence or selection tool will show an element's history even if it is a member of groups. Design history status can be viewed by clicking the Design History icon in the status bar. Clicking the icon opens the pop-up menu. If design history is not initialized, the icon is dimmed. If design history is initialized but there are uncommitted changes, a pencil is superimposed on the scroll.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 179 of 387
Periodically commit your changes with the Commit Changes tool. You are prompted to enter a comment in the Commit changes dialog box with each revision. How often the revisions are committed is entirely up to you. The general recommendation is that with active model files the changes should be recorded at least daily to allow for easier recovery. For some projects, more frequent recording of data may be desirable.
To start using design history
1. In the status bar, click the Design History icon and choose Initialize from the pop-up menu. or From the Utilities menu's Design History submenu, choose Initialize. The Initialize History dialog box opens. 2. (Optional) In the text field, type a description of the change. 3. Click OK.
To open the Design History dialog box
1. In the status bar, click the Design History icon and choose Design History from the pop-up menu. or In the Design History tool box, click the Show Design History tool.
To commit changes as a revision
1. Begin working on your design model and make changes.

If another user has made changes in a model and those changes are not yet committed, you will see an alert box when you open the file. The alert indicates that any uncommitted changes will be assigned to you, the current user.
2. In the status bar, click the Design History icon and choose Commit from the pop-up menu. The Commit Changes dialog box opens.
3. Enter a comment to indicate the changes made in the revision. 4. Click OK. The revision is committed and the comment appears in the Design History dialog box.
Design History tool box
Tools in the Design History tool box are used to:

Record changes in design history Show conflicts Restore elements from history Show design history
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To Select in the Design History tool box
Page 180 of 387
Record and commit changes Commit changes as a revision to design history
Lists all elements marked with a conflict. Show Conflicts
Restore Elements Restore elements from history
Review design history Show design history Activate the model that contains (or used to contain) the selected element. Use the HISTORY GOTOMODEL key-in. Set or remove custom revision number formatting. Review the open DGN file's revision number format specification. Use the HISTORY MANAGE SET REVISIONFORMAT key-in. Use the HISTORY MANAGE SHOW REVISIONFORMAT key-in.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX HISTORY [INITIALIZE | RESTORE | SHOW | COMMIT]
Restoring Recorded Changes

This section provides information on how to restore MicroStation designs to a prior state using the Design History and Restore elements tools. Design History supports several methods of recovering changes from prior versions. You can recover from a single version, perform a multi-select from several versions, restore by element, or use a combination of these methods. Recovery is not limited to changes that have been made in a specific revision. Working on the model itself, any element can be directly edited or the element can be edited with the element information and the element changes dialog box. Restoring a Design History from a specific revision Restoring to a Revision with a Fence Restoring Multiple Revisions (Undoing Historical Changes) Undoing Historical Changes from Multiple Revisions Revision Level Changes
Restoring a Design History from a specific revision

This section discusses how to restore the state of a model to that of a prior revision using the Restore elements from history tool. This tool restores whatever you have selected to the state it was in at the time you choose. So, if you want a given element or area to look like it did just after you created revision 1.x, select element or fence the area, select revision 1.x, and place a data point. The effects of the Restore elements from history tool are cumulative. That is, for example, if the current revision is 1.6, and you restore the history to revision 1.3, you will remove all of the changes from revisions 1.6. 1.5, and 1.4. In contrast, if you selected the changes in revision 1.3 in Design History and performed an Undo, the changes would occur only for the modifications made in revision 1.4, not for any of the subsequent revisions.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 181 of 387
You do not need to fence in the entire model. With the Restore elements tool you can focus on just a subset of the model.
To restore a specific revision number
1. Select the Restore elements from history tool.
2. Select the desired revision to restore from the scrolling list. You can use the Design History to see if the desired elements are included in the selected revision. 3. Select the element to restore. 4. Place a data point to accept the operation. The revision is returned to the state of the selected revision.
Restoring to a Revision with a Fence

This section discusses recovery from a single revision using a fence and the Restore elements tool.
To restore a specific revision number with a Fence
1. Place a Fence around the model. Make sure the fence is large enough to encompass all elements in the design. 2. Select the Restore elements from history tool.
3. Check the use Fence option. 4. Select the desired revision to restore from the scrolling list. You can use the Design History to see if the desired elements are included in the selected revision. 5. Place a data point. The revision is restored.
Restoring Multiple Revisions (Undoing Historical Changes)

This section discusses recovery from multiple revisions. The general behavior is as follows: If you select revision 1.x and 1.y and then select Undo, you will undo only the effects of those two revisions. If you select revision 1.x and 1.y and then select Redo, you will reassert the effects of those two revisions, possibly overriding the effects of revisions that came later. If you select all revisions after revision 1.x and select Undo, you will effectively roll the design back to the time just after 1.x.
If the results are not as expected, simply use the MicroStation Undo command.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To restore from multiple revisions
Page 182 of 387
1. Select the Design history icon. 2. Select the desired revision(s). 3. Preview the changes with the options in the top of the dialog box for Design History for color coding of the changes. 4. Select Undo selected historic changes. The revision is restored.
Undoing Historical Changes from Multiple Revisions

This section discusses recovery of elements from multiple revisions.
To restore elements from multiple revisions
1. Select the Design history icon. 2. Select the elements to restore. 3. Select Use Show elements changed in selected revisions tool to focus on the revisions affecting those elements. 4. Preview the changes with the color-coding options in the Design History dialog box. 5. Select some or all of the revisions and use the Show Design History Undo or Redo tools.
Revision Level Changes

Undo and redo can be applied to a single revision or to a set of revisions. You get one result by selecting a single revision and then invoking Undo. You get another result by invoking Redo, and still other effects by selecting sequences of revisions and using undo or redo. This information is intended to serve as a caution that these tools should be used with care. In addition to using the Restore elements tool, you can also restore design data at a point in time using Design History and Undo.
The procedure below has two pre-conditions. First, the revisions must be sorted in the correct revision sequence order, either first to last or last to first. Sorts by Author or other criteria may give undesirable results. Second, all the following revisions must be selected as a group with no breaks.
To return a design to a prior state
1. Open Design History. 2. Select all revisions that came after the state you want. 3. Select Undo.
Using Design History in Projects

This section provides information on how to best use design history in MicroStation in a multi-user environment. You will learn techniques to restore to specific revision levels, and find changes. Using Design History in Projects
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Conflicts in Design History Revision Level Changes Element Level Changes Finding Changes Controlling Design History Settings Auditing Design History Transactions Tagging Design History
Page 183 of 387
Using Design History in Projects

Design history works best if it is immediately turned on by the first user after the file is created from the seed file. Once turned on, all changes in a file are then identified and tied to a specific revision number. Typically, the design history will have been initialized by the site administrator. Users will then make changes and commit them as revisions. How often the revisions are stored is entirely under user control. The tools provide flexibility in viewing the changes made and also a number of methods of undoing or redoing these changes by type, author, or by a number of other characteristics. Once design history has been turned on, you can view the design history and, if desired, restore the design history. The restoration can be done at the revision level, at the Eelement level and by area, with a fence, or with a selection set. The Design History dialog box is primarily a viewing tool. Any changes you make with undo or redo are limited to the selected elements in the selected revision. In contrast, the effects of the Restore elements dialog box are cumulative. If you elect to restore an earlier revision, all of the changes following the selected revision are removed. Therefore, it is suggested to use the Restore elements dialog box for recovery to a specific version.
You also can use design history with distributed DGN functionality, which allows more than one user to modify a DGN file at the same time.
Conflicts in Design History

If another user has uncommitted changes in design history and you open that DGN file before those changes were committed, you see an alert. The alert tells you that when you commit a revision, you take ownership of all previously uncommitted changes. From that point on, even though another person had initially made the changes, they are now assigned to you as the current author. This detail may be significant when you use the Show Design History tool and use the list filter to find revisions by a specific author. Conflicts also may appear when you are using design history with distributed DGN functionality. Conflicts appear in the Conflicts dialog box.
Revision Level Changes

Most firms are driven by strict revision control systems. If this is the case, returning to a desired design state is a simple matter. If a revision is created in the local file but not yet committed to the server, its revision's entry in the Design History dialog box has a fourpart revision number, rather than the usual two-part number, and a pencil icon identifying it as a pending revision. In addition, the status bar's design history field displays a blue upward-pointing arrow icon. If a revision has been created in the server copy of the shared file and has not yet been merged into the local copy, the revision's entry in the Design History dialog box has a green downward-pointing arrow icon as does the status bar's design history field.
To restore design history by revision number with a fence or selection set
1. Place a fence or select elements using a selection set.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. Select Restore elements from history. 3. (Optional) Check the Use Fence option if you are using a fence. 4. Select the revision number to be restored. 5. Place a data point in the active window and the desired revision is restored.
Page 184 of 387
Element Level Changes

You can also work at the element level and select which revisions to undo by selecting the elements from the appropriate design history revision. The procedure below explains how to view changes at the element level.
To display changed elements
1. From the Design History tool box, select Show Design History. 2. Select the Use color coding to show changes icon. 3. From the list box, select the revisions for which you wish to display changed elements. The changed elements are displayed.
You can step through the other icons (Show elements added in green, Show elements deleted in red, and so on) to see exactly the kinds of changes that have occurred. The elements that are selected and highlighted with the various color coded options also affect how the Undo and Redo operations work.
To restore elements from a specific revision
1. Select the elements you wish to restore (by selection set or fence). 2. Select Restore elements from history. 3. Select the revision to restore elements from. 4. Accept the operation. You can review the change history for an element by selecting the element in the Element Changes dialog box and clicking the Show History icon. This icon is particularly useful for reviewing the changes to an element leading up to its deletion.
To review the change history of an element
1. From the Design History dialog box, click the Show elements changed in selected revisions. The Element Changes dialog box opens. 2. Select an element from the list box. 3. Click the Show history icon. The Design History (Isolating Selected Element(s)) dialog box opens, displaying the change history of the selected element.
To change the active model to the model that contains the selected element
1. Open the Design History dialog box. 2. Click Show elements changed in the selected revision. The Element Changes dialog box opens. 3. Select an element. 4. Click the Zoom to changes view control (icon labeled Fit View). or Key-in: HISTORY GOTOMODEL. The active model changes to the model that contains (or used to contain) the selected element. If the model is already active, no
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
model.
Page 185 of 387
Finding Changes
One of the challenges of large, complex designs is tracking both the content and the changes to that content. design history provides tools to make these tasks easier. They include:

Isolate history by fence or selection, which shows the history of selected elements. List filter, which lets you filter the history list by selected criteria. Show revisions in reference files, which displays the history of attached references that have design history. Zoom to changes, which lets you zoom to selected changes in the models. Clicking this view control will switch models, if necessary, so that you can see the selected elements or revisions.
To isolate history by fence or selection
1. Place a fence or selection set. 2. Select the Show Design History tool. 3. In the Design History dialog box, click the Isolate history by fence or selection icon. 4. In a view window, select the element or area on which you wish to see the complete history of changes. The Design History dialog box displays the results.
Selecting the Isolate tool again clears the Isolate filter.
To filter the design history list
1. In the Design History dialog box, click the List Filter icon. A blank filter row appears at the top of the design history list.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 186 of 387
2. Enter the desired filter criteria value in the appropriate category, and press <Enter>. (You can use multiple categories as filter criteria.) The design history list displays the revisions that match the criteria.
To display revisions in references
1. Select the Show Design History tool. 2. Click the Show revisions in reference files icon. Revisions for references that use design history appear on the design history list. The Files column lists the reference name.
The File category shows revisions for the DGN file and the reference.
Select a reference revision to display the reference changes in the open views. Click the Show elements changed in selected revisions icon to review the changes to elements in references.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To zoom to changes
Page 187 of 387
1. Select the desired revision. 2. Click Zoom to changes. 3. Place a data point in the view in which you wish to zoom to the changed element.
Controlling Design History Settings

The MS_DESIGN_HISTORY configuration variable provides options to control how design history can be used. By default, the create, commit, browse, tag, set version format, and set version capabilities are enabled, and the delete, change description, change author, combine, retire, and automatic upgrade capabilities are disabled. Generally, you should not change the default settings. In particular, use caution in deleting the design history for a file, since it cannot be recovered. Rather than deleting the design history, you can copy the contents of the file to a new file that does not contain the design history. Removing history from the current file is almost never necessary, except in cases where the file is so large that you cannot open it in order to make a copy without history. If you must delete the design history for the current file, use the following procedure.
Set and lock the MS_DESIGN_HISTORY configuration variable at the site, project, or system level to prevent users from changing the settings.
To delete design history
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Select the MS_DESIGN_HISTORY configuration variable. 3. Click the Edit button. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 4. In the New Value field, key in: delete=1. 5. Click OK, then click OK again to close the Configuration dialog box. 6. Verify that you want to save changes to the user configuration file. 7. Exit and restart MicroStation. 8. In the status bar, click the Design History icon and choose Delete from the pop-up menu. or Choose Utilities > Design History > Delete. 9. Click OK to verify that you want to delete the design history The design history for the file is deleted.
To retire design history
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. 2. Select the MS_DESIGN_HISTORY configuration variable. 3. Click the Edit button. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 4. In the New Value field, key in: retire=1. 5 Click OK then click OK again to close the Configuration dialog box
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
6. Verify that you want to save changes to the user configuration file. 7. Exit and restart MicroStation. 8. Choose Utilities > Design History > Retire. The Choose Revisions dialog box opens. 9. Select the revision number. Design history will be deleted from this selected revision number back through the start of the history. 10. Click OK and then Yes to confirm the revisions that are to be deleted. Revision Number Display Format configuration variable
Page 188 of 387
The Revision Number Display Format configuration variable lets you change the format of the revision numbers in design history, according to your organization's standards. For example, some organizations use numbers for design revisions, and use letters for field revisions. If no format is specified, revision numbers default to the format <major revision number>.<minor revision number>.
HISTORY MANAGE SET REVISIONFORMAT [format] sets or removes the custom revision number formatting for the current (master) file. If format is specified, it becomes the format used when displaying revision numbers from the design history of the current file. If format is not specified, custom formatting is removed from the current file. A file with custom revision number format, will override the format set in MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_REVISION_NUMBERFORMAT configuration variable. If the custom revision number format is removed from a file the formatting is controlled by the configuration variable, if set. If no custom formatting is specified by either the file or the configuration variable, then the default #.# formatting is used. HISTORY MANAGE SHOW REVISIONFORMAT displays the revision number formatting that will be used when displaying revision numbers from the design history of the current file. The HISTORY MANAGE SHOW REVISIONFORMAT displays one of the following:

A custom format defined for the file. The custom format defined in the MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_REVISION_NUMBERFORMAT configuration variable. A message indicating that no custom formatting applies to revision numbers from the file and that the default #.# formatting will be used.
Syntax
The syntax for the Revision Number Display Format configuration variable is based on the Java MessageFormat. formatClause : = { [ [ range ] ] msgFormatPattern }+ range : start [,end] msgFormatPattern : = string [ { msgFormatElement } string ]* msgFormatElement : = argument [ , elementFormat ] elementFormat : = number | letter [ , letterStyle] letterStyle : = { uppercase | lowercase|AA|AB|{omit letter}* }+ The table describes details of the syntax.
Syntax Element formatClause range: start [,end] msgFormatPattern Optional. Start and end range for the revision number. Consists of a string (possibly empty), optional msgFormatElement (in curly braces), and another optional string. Use One or more formatClauses are required. Each formatClause has an optional range and msgFormatPattern.
{msgFormatElement} Consists of an argument (number that identifies the part of the revision number) and an optional elementFormat.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
elementFormat letterStyle
Page 189 of 387
If used, specifies either number or letter. Number indicates that the revision number is displayed as a number, while letter indicates that the revision number is converted to one or more letters. Specifies either uppercase or lowercase. Also specifies the rule, such as the AA and AB rules, or what to do when the number is beyond 26, plus which letters to omit from the alphabet. (Some organizations omit O and I because these letters can be confused with 0 and 1.)
Examples of Revision Number Display Format values
Following are some examples of values for the Revision Number Display Format configuration variable:
Revision Number Desired Appearance Value for Configuration Variable 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.28 1.28 A2 A.2 1.B 2A B1 RevB1 RevB1*** 1BB 1AB {0,letter}{1} {0,letter}.{1} {0}.{1,letter} {1}{0,letter} {1,letter}{0} Rev{1,letter}{0} Rev{1,letter}{0}*** {1,letter,AA} {0}{1,letter,AB}
The following examples show how ranges are used:

Example Using a Range [2.1]{0}.{1,letter} [2.1]{0}.{1.letter}[3.3]{0}, {1,letter,AB} AA and AB rules Description Revisions starting with 2.1 are formatted as number.letter, while all revisions before that are formatted in the default style (number.number). Revisions between 2.1 and 3.3 (inclusive) are formatted as number.letter in AA style (the default), while revisions after 3.3 are formatted as number.letter in AB style.
When the numerical value exceeds 26, a combination of letters is produced. The letterStyle specifies how letters are combined. If AA is specified, then the letters are repeated. If AB is specified, then the letters accumulate in a fashion similar to that of an odometer. Specifically, the revision number is first converted to a base-0 index, and then converted to a base-26 number. When AA is specified, then the lowest base-26 digit is used as a 0based index to select a letter, and that letter is repeated as many times as the number is a multiple of 26, plus 1. When AB is specified, then the highest base-26 digit is decremented, and each base-26 digit is used as a 0based index to select a letter. (If letters are omitted, then the base will not be 26, but the number of letters that remain in the alphabet.) See the table for examples.
Number 1 2 26 27 28 52 53 54 78 79 676 677 A B Z AA BB ZZ AAA BBB ZZZ AAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA (27 As) Value of the Number Using AA Rules Value of the Number Using AB Rules A B Z AA AB AZ BA BB BZ CA AAA
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ (676 is 26*26, so there are 26 Zs) YZ
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 190 of 387
Auditing Design History Transactions

The audit trail is a record of design history management actions, such as initialize, combine, and retire. Each entry in the audit trail contains the type of action, a timestamp, and the user's name. The audit trail is automatically deleted when the design history is removed.
To audit a design history transaction
1. From the Utilities menu, select Design History > Audit Trail. The Design History Audit Trail dialog box opens, displaying a record of history management actions, such as creation, combine, retire, or change in revision number.
Tagging Design History

You have the option to name revisions by applying tags. The Design History Tags dialog box is used to add and remove tags. The Tags column in the Design History dialog box shows, for each revision, all tags that refer to that revision. For example, a revision of 4.8 may have been committed when a project was 50% complete. Creating a tag for that revision named 50% complete identifies the revision more clearly. The tagged design history can then be attached as a reference.
To add a tag
1. From the Utilities menu, select Design History > Tags. The Design History Tags dialog box opens. 2. Click the Add Tag icon. An empty row displays. 3. Enter the name of the tag. 4. Select the value, or the design history revision you want the tag applied. The tag automatically displays on the Design History dialog box.
To delete a tag
1. From the Utilities menu, select Design History > Tags. The Design History Tags dialog box opens. 2. Select the tag you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete Tag icon. An Alert message displays, asking if you want to delete the selected tags. 4. Click Yes. The tag is removed.
Design History and Distributed DGN Files

Using the distributed DGN functionality in MicroStation V8 XM SELECT Update #1, and integrated with the same functionality in ProjectWise XM Edition, users can participate in true distributed engineering. When a file in ProjectWise is marked as shared, more than one user is permitted to modify that file at the same time. ProjectWise users can distribute multiple copies of a distributed DGN file to many users, contractors, or partners. These users can then dit th i i i ll l i Mi St ti V8 it th i i i i th D i Hi t di l b d h k th DGN fil b k i t
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
ProjectWise, where the distributed DGN file contains a complete change history.
Page 191 of 387
To work with distributed DGN files in MicroStation, you must be using ProjectWise XM Edition client software connected to a ProjectWise server. For more information about setting up and using distributed DGN files in ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise Explorer help document.
Distributed DGN Files
Distributed DGN Files

Design History is enhanced to accommodate distributed DGN functionality.

Checking out a DGN document from ProjectWise as shared initiates design history in the DGN file, if it was not already active. Design history icons on the status bar indicate whether changes are pending or if conflicts exist. Changes made to a distributed DGN file by you and by others appear in the Design History dialog box. When multiple users change a distributed DGN file at the same time, conflicts can arise because two users change the same element. By default, when you refresh your local copy of a distributed DGN file, MicroStation detects if the other uses have modified the same models that you are working on. If so, the Overlapping Model Changes dialog box opens. This dialog box gives you the option of merging in the other users' changes or not merging them in but marking them as potential conflicts instead. Model-level conflict detection is set by the HISTORY CONFLICT BY MODEL key-in and can be set per user. The default is on. If it is off, then conflicts are detected by graphic group or at the element level.
Conflicts appear in the Conflicts dialog box. In the Conflicts dialog box, you can apply the other user's changes to your local version of the DGN file, restore your local version of the DGN file, go back to the baseline version of the DGN file, view the conflicts, view the history of the conflicts, compare the conflicting versions, clear the conflicts, or ignore the conflicts and let someone else resolve them later. The actions that you take in the Overlapping Model Changes dialog box and Conflicts dialog box will depend on your company's strategy for working with distributed DGN files.
External Database Interface

MicroStation and Non-graphical Data Connecting to Databases
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Linking Database Rows to Elements Querying and Maintaining the Database Generating Reports Database Application Software Database Interface Reference
Page 192 of 387
MicroStation and Non-graphical Data

Typically private enterprise and government entities manage two significant data sets about their physical plant or products:

Architectural or engineering design drawings Non-graphical data stored in organization-wide databases
One data set is typically of limited use without the other, yet many times the sets are kept separate. The non-graphical data is printed and added to drawings only after they are plotted. While this approach may be fine for a production shop, it may be inappropriate for a project manager who wants intelligent, useful drawings for the life of a project. Several advanced design applications link non-graphical data to drawings for example, products such as Facility Management Systems and Geographic Information Systems (GIS) do this very well. The one aspect most of these systems have in common is that the database interface is built into the application. Associating Elements to Non-graphical Data Tag to Database Converter What is the Database Interface? Why Use the Database Interface? What is a Relational Database? Why Use a Relational Database? Database Server Selection Factors Database Product Families
Associating Elements to Non-graphical Data

MicroStation lets you build your own application that associates non-graphical data to graphical elements, including text and cells, using standard interfaces that are part of MicroStation. This association can be accomplished using either of two MicroStation features:
Element tags, where associated data is stored in the DGN file with the graphical elements. Tags are appropriate if your needs for associating non-graphical data to elements in the DGN file are relatively simple or you must maintain compatibility with other CAD packages that store data inside their drawing files. The associated tag data may be copied from the tag, loaded into a database and linked back to the tag. Database interface, where associated data is stored in a separate relational database that is linked to elements in the DGN file.
The remainder of this chapter covers the database interface.
Tag to Database Converter

The tag to database converter exports tag data from the DGN file into an existing database table for use with MicroStation's database interface. When exporting the tag data, the application scans the DGN file for elements which have tag data attached, extracts the tag data, and builds and executes an Insert statement to add the tag data to a database table. The application adds a database link to the element for the row which was inserted into the table.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
What is the Database Interface?
Page 193 of 387
The database interface is a set of tools and settings that lets you associate (or link) a row in a relational database to an element in the design. This is done by storing information about the linkage on the element in the DGN file. In order to link a table to a graphical element, the table must have a numeric MSLINK column. This column acts as a unique row identifier (essentially a row ID) for MicroStation. The second requirement is that the database contains a table called MSCATALOG, which MicroStation creates upon connecting to a database if one has not already been created. The attribute table name is entered and assigned a unique entity number. There are two pieces of information that are used to retrieve the correct row from the correct table. The first is the entity number, a unique value assigned to the table in the MSCATALOG. The second is the MSLINK number, a unique value assigned to the row of data in the table. When a database row is linked to a graphical element, attribute data, in the form of a USER DATA Linkage containing the MSLINK and entity number, is written to the element. Once this linkage is established you can manipulate and review the database information from inside MicroStation. MicroStation supports a direct connection to Oracle databases. In addition, MicroStation supports database connectivity through industry standards ODBC and OLE DB. Another database connectivity option is BUDBC, a new MicroStation specific connection that provides additional benefits.
ODBC is not a relational database; it is a generic interface that allows advanced design applications to access SQL compliant databases.
Why Use the Database Interface?

Using the database interface offers many capabilities not otherwise available to the CAD user. These range from a simple application that tracks part numbers in an assembly to a sophisticated facility management system, which tracks the operation and maintenance of a large organization, and everything in between. For example, a graphical element representing a street on a map can be linked to a road or street name, traffic flow rate, accident rate, construction date, and resurfacing data in a database table. The centroid point and text for the lot number of each parcel of land could be linked to another database table that includes owner, area, and street name. By relating the two tables, you could, for example:
Selectively display all properties that have a value of over 100,000 dollars and a traffic flow of over 100,000 vehicles per year, and produce a report that included each owner's name and address. Selectively display or highlight all roads in the northeast quadrant of the county that have a traffic flow of 50,000 vehicles a day and over 10 accidents per year. Produce a map of a subdivision showing all owner's names and property values. When the database changes you can globally update the map.
Using the database interface requires more memory than MicroStation's standard memory requirements. Additional memory improves the performance of both MicroStation and the database.
What is a Relational Database?

A relational database is an ordered collection of tables or files that represent objects, their properties, and relationships between the objects. These terms are used throughout this guide:
A relational database contains a collection of tables.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 194 of 387
Each table is composed of rows and columns.
Usually the tables in a database have a common column or field that relates one to the other. Hence the term relational database.
Why Use a Relational Database?

There are many reasons to use external relational databases to link textual information to graphics. Relational databases are by far the most popular database models on the market today. They are designed to hold large amounts of data. They typically use Structured Query Language (SQL) for accessing and modifying data. Products like Oracle along with the standard SQL model, have revolutionized how information is managed. Microsoft's Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface and OLE DB allows applications, through database drivers, access to data in a variety of database management systems (DBMS). This enables users to evaluate their own database environment and add ODBC database drivers without the need for changes to the ODBC-enabled application. Bentley's website has a complete list of certified and supported databases.
Database Server
The MicroStation database interface software program for a particular database package for example, Oracle is sometimes called the database server. The server model defines the interaction between MicroStation, the database package, and the database server. Unless you are developing database applications for MicroStation, you need not be familiar with the details of the server model. It is sufficient to be aware that in the server model, database functions are separated from graphics functions. This means memory requirements for MicroStation sessions are reduced when a database is not connected (a server is not loaded). Choosing a Database MicroStation supports many of the popular relational database software product families on the market today. Selecting the right one can be difficult as these databases represent a broad range in sophistication, performance and cost. You can implement anything from a simple single-user database on a PC to a full featured corporate network system with database servers and different vendor databases all interacting with the same design files. MicroStation database interface availability varies from operating system to operating system. Bentley's website has the latest information on supported database versions. This chapter identifies issues you should consider in selecting a database as well as the major features of the various supported database products.
Selection Factors
There are many factors that influence the selection of a database. For example, if only one person will use the database information you might choose to keep it on the user's system. Or, if several people need access to the data you may choose to place it on a network server. Most of the supported database products will run from a network server, but they operate quite differently. On the single user system, the server just stores the database file. All processing is accomplished on the user's system. This can result in considerable data being passed across the network. Oracle is a client server database. Here the database engine runs on the server. It receives requests from client software on each user's system. A request is processed and only the answer is passed back across the network. This type of database can support more users because there is less traffic on the network. These products can also run with the client and server software both on the user's system. Here are some selection criteria you should consider:
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects

Page 195 of 387
Will the database be local or on a network server? Will you access the data from different types of systems? Will you be required to run the database independent of MicroStation? Should the MicroStation application be independent of the database? That is, should the application run unchanged with different vendor databases? Will tabular reporting of non-graphical data be required? Will corporate database standards influence your selection? Will you need to interface with the corporate database? Will you be required to access more than one vendors' database?
Database Product Families

Typically database products are not just one program or application, but a family or suite of application tools to allow you to build, maintain, and report your information. Because MicroStation supports such a broad range of commercial databases you should familiarize yourself with the capabilities of each family of products before you make a selection. Oracle Oracle, by Oracle Corporation (http://www.oracle.com/), is a very popular database based on the client-server model. Oracle offers several database products with varying capabilities that can be used with MicroStation. Although there are significant differences between these products, the MicroStation issues revolve around the following questions:

Is access required to a local or remote (on a server) database? Will access be required from several different types of systems?
The following is a partial listing of Oracle products and requirements for their use with local and remote (on a server) databases:
Product RDBMS SQL*Plus SQL*Net Local Database Remote Database Required Required Optional* (not applicable) Optional Required Required
Required Support Files Required
* Required to support remote clients

Product descriptions
These Oracle products are of interest to the MicroStation user:

Product Oracle (base product) Oracle Pro*C Oracle SQL*Loader JDeveloper Oracle database tools Oracle development tools Lets developers embed database manipulation statements into their applications. Lets database tables from other sources be loaded into Oracle. Lets developers design applications and components according to the J2EE specification. Description The core of the relational database management system. It includes features that control data storage, retrieval, and security.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Oracle SQL*Plus Oracle Network tools SQL*Net Oracle Client Software Required Support Files MicroStation database server interacts with these files to connect to a remote server. Lets MicroStation access remote Oracle databases over a network. Provides an interactive interface to Oracle with facilities for ad hoc queries and database manipulations.
Page 196 of 387
ODBC Database Interface Microsoft's Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface allows applications, through database drivers, access to data in a variety of database management systems (DBMS). This enables users to evaluate their own database environment and add ODBC database drivers without the need for changes to the ODBC-enabled application. Bentley's Web site has the latest information on supported ODBC versions. OLE DB Database Interface OLE DB provides an open data access and uses a standard set of COM interfaces for accessing and manipulating many types of data. OLE DB interfaces can access simple data or relational databases. This provides access to data that cannot be accessed through the current ODBC technology. The following is a list of supported OLE DB providers:
Supported OLE DB providers Microsoft Jet 3.51 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider Oracle Provider for OLE DB Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server
While Microsoft also supplies an OLE DB provider for Oracle, Bentley recommends the use of the provider supplied by Oracle.
The following databases are supported with an OLE DB connection:

Databases supported with an OLE DB connection Access 97 Access 2000 Oracle 8i Oracle 9i Oracle 10g SQL Server 2000 SQL Server table does table level locking. This can put the database and MicroStation into a Dead Lock situation. This can occur under the following scenario: 1. 2. 3. Auto commit mode is set to off (SESSION AUTOCOMMIT OFF) A record is inserted into a database table using the SQL Window A query is made to the same table using VSQL or another MDL Database application
These conditions will lock MicroStation because it will be waiting for a return from the database. SQL Server will also be dead locked waiting for a commit for the insert statement. To resolve this problem, a dirtyor uncommited read of the table can be done. This allows the database to read uncommitted records from the database. However, these records could be deleted if the original transaction is rolled back. Setting the MS_OLEDBUNCOMMITTEDREAD will prevent the dead lock situation but does come with the risk of lost records. Using Oracle Data Provider (ODP) with MicroStation OLEDB and BUDBC Connections
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 197 of 387
The Oracle Data Provider should be used when connecting to Oracle databases using MicroStations OLEDB. The ODP is also used for BUDBC Oracle connections.
Oracle Data types that are not supported by ODP VARRAY MDSYS.SDO_GEOMETRY ORDSYS.ORDAudio ORDSYS.ORDImage ORDSYS.ORDImageSignature ORDSYS.ORDVideo ORDSYS.ORDDoc User Defined Objects
In versions of the Oracle Data Provider earlier then 10.1.0.4.0 Oracle Client Patch set trying to retrieve these types cause a disconnect from the database. If you are aware that these types are being used in your database schema you should be using the ODP provided in the following patch sets or later versions. Oracle Client Patchset 10.1.0.4.0 Patch set Number 4163362 Oracle ODAC 10.1.0.4.0 Patch set Number 4447340 For additional information on ODP Supported data types refer to the documentation listed below: Oracle Provider for OLE DB Developer's Guide sections entitled Datatype Mappings in Rowsets and Parameters and Table A-1 Datatype Mappings. Release 9.2 Part Number A95498-01
Connecting to Databases
This chapter discusses how to set up databases and connect to them from within MicroStation. Setting Up the Database Interface Troubleshooting Database Connections
Setting Up the Database Interface

Setting up MicroStation for the database has been simplified by the delivery of database configuration files. These files are automatically loaded when Settings > Database > Connect is chosen. Also, the database variables from these configuration files may be loaded automatically with the use of the -wd<config file> switch when executing MicroStation.
Set the database linkage type in the database configuration file(s) since they override MicroStation configuration variables such as MS_LINKTYPE.
Connecting to ODBC ODBC uses a data source to maintain the connection information for a database. MicroStation uses the same ODBC data source name for the connection string. The ODBC driver(s) must be loaded before data sources can be created. Once the drivers are loaded, an ODBC icon appears in the Windows Control Panel or Administrative Tools, depending on the operating system.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. Open the ODBC driver manager by double-clicking the ODBC control panel icon. 2. Click the Add button. 3. Select the ODBC driver for the DBMS that contains your data. The data source dialog box opens. 4. Define the data source name (this is the string you will use in MicroStation's Connect to Database dialog box).
Page 198 of 387
5. (Optional) Provide a description. For the remaining settings, look at the table below for your specific database. Refer to your ODBC driver manual for specifics on other fields.
Database Click the Select button to pick the *.mdb file. Access The delivered Access example database is in the Bentley "MicroStation\database\odbc\examples\access\gis.mdb". Oracle Provide the data source name, service name (created through the Oracle Client Configuration software), and User ID. SQL Server Follow the prompts in the dialog box. At a minimum you should specify Name, Server, and Login/Password. To connect to an ODBC database from within MicroStation Action
1. Choose Settings > Database > Connect. The Connect to Database dialog box opens. 2. Set the Database Server to ODBC. 3. Provide the connect string by entering the Data Source Name created in the ODBC Administrator. If you do not enter a connect string or if you enter an * as the data source name, the ODBC driver manager displays and you can select the desired data source from the list box.
Alternative Method To connect to an ODBC database from within MicroStation
1. Right-click the MicroStation icon and from the menu that appears, choose Properties. 2. In the Properties dialog box, select the Shortcut tab. 3. At the end of the Target field, key in -wdodbc. The Target field should now look something like this: C:\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\ustation.exe -wdodbc 4. Click Apply to save the changes and close the dialog box. 5. Start MicroStation by double-clicking the MicroStation icon. 6. In the Key-in window, key in DB=<data_source_name> where data_source_name is the name created in ODBC.
If you were once connected to the database with this DGN file and you saved the settings in the file after connecting the first time, starting MicroStation with the -wdodbc switch automatically loads the configuration variables and will connect you to the database.
Connecting to Oracle This section covers how to set up an Oracle database for use with MicroStation.
General Procedure Setting Up Oracle
1. Perform any indicated special setup steps in the notes section for your system. (See Windows Notes.) 2. Start Oracle on the server. This step must be performed before any MicroStation session during which you will connect to an Oracle database. See the notes section for your system. (The database administrator is commonly responsible for starting Oracle.) 3. If the database resides on a remote server, create an alias using the Oracle SQL Net Easy Configuration utility. For Oracle 8i, use Net8 Configuration Assistant. For Oracle 9i and later, the utility is called Net Configuration Assistant.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 199 of 387
4. Have the Oracle database administrator set up an Oracle user. Make sure that the appropriate permissions are granted to the user to allow select, update, delete, insert, create, alter, and drop table permissions. 5. Test the connection to the remote server through SQL Plus or SQL Worksheet to ensure that the Oracle client has been configured correctly.
To set up the GIS example database
1. Run the loadgis.bat file located in the "..Bentley\MicroStation\database\oracle\examples\tables" directory from a DOS prompt. The MSCATALOG is created with sample tables.
To connect to an Oracle database from within MicroStation
1. From the Settings menu, chose Database > Connect. The Connect to Database dialog box opens. 2. Set the Database Server to Oracle. 3. In the Connect String field, key in <user_name>/<password>@<database_alias>. 4. Click OK.
Alternative Method To connect to an Oracle database from within MicroStation
1. Right-click the MicroStation icon and from the menu that appears, choose Properties. 2. In the Properties dialog box, select the Shortcut tab. 3. At the end of the Target field, key in -wdoracle. The Target field should now look something like this: C:\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\ustation.exe -wdoracle 4. Click Apply to save the changes and close the dialog box. 5. Start MicroStation by double-clicking the MicroStation icon. 6. In the Key-in window, key in DB =<user_name>/<password>@<database_alias>.
Starting MicroStation with the -wdoracle switch automatically loads the configuration variables.
The default Oracle client files delivered with MicroStation are for use with Oracle 8i, 9i, and 10g. To connect to Oracle 8.0.x from MicroStation, you must have the Oracle 8.0.x client installed and properly configured. In addition, you must take the following steps to connect to your database: 1. 2. 3. Exit any running MicroStation session. Back up any existing Oracle client files, if desired. (These files include orservrd.dll, oralddlm.ma, and orserver.rsc.) Unzip oracle804.zip (located in the folder " ..\Bentley\MicroStation\database\oracle\redist"), and extract the contents to the folder "..\Bentley\MicroStation\mdlsys\asneeded". Restart MicroStation with the Oracle 8.0.x client files.
4.
If you have multiple Oracle clients installed on your system, ensure that the correct Oracle client files are used to connect to Oracle by setting the configuration variable MS_ORACLE_HOME in the configuration file "Program/PowerDraft/config/database/oracle.cfg".
Windows Notes
For the batch file loadgis to run correctly, the Oracle SQL Loader utility must be installed. For Windows NT, search for a file named sqlldr*.exe located in the "\orant\bin" directory of Oracle. Make sure this matches the executable name found in the loadnt.bat file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 200 of 387
The sqlldr*.exe file is located in Oracle's "bin" directory for Oracle 8i, 9i, and 10g.
Connecting to an OLE DB data source This section covers how to set up an OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) database for use with MicroStation. OLE DB provides open data access and uses a standard set of COM interfaces for accessing and manipulating many different types of data. These interfaces are commonly referred to as Data Providers. You may need to contact your database vendor to determine if a OLE database provider is available for your database product. Applications, such as MicroStation, that access data through OLE DB are called a Data Consumer. OLE DB interfaces can be developed to access simple data or true relational databases making it more flexible than the current ODBC technology.
General Procedure Setting Up OLE DB
1. Set up a UDL (Microsoft Data Link) file through Windows or MicroStation. UDL files are stored in the directory defined in the MS_UDLDIR directory. The default directory is ..\Bentley\MicroStation\database\oledb\udl. 2. Obtain the appropriate OLE DB Provider software from your database vendor. 3. Connect to the OLE DB data source.
To create a UDL file in Windows
1. In the Windows Explorer, navigate to the directory where you want the UDL files to be stored. 2. Rightclick on the right panel of the Windows Explorer. A pop-up window opens. 3. Select Microsoft Data Link from the New menu. A file named New Microsoft Data Link.UDL is created. If Microsoft Data Link is not an option on your operating system, select the Text Document option. Once the text file has been created, rename the extension to .udl so it will be recognized as a Microsoft Data Link file. 4. Right-click on the file and rename it to a more appropriate name. 5. Double-click the .udl file. The Data Link Properties dialog box opens. 6. Click on the Provider tab. A list of available OLE DB Providers installed on your machine displays. If your do not a provider installed for you database, contact your database vendor to see if one is available. 7. Select the desired OLE DB Provider and press Next. The Connection tab displays. 8. Enter the necessary information. This information will vary based on the selected provider. 9. Click the Test Connection button to verify the connection is correct. 10. (Optional) Click the Advanced tab and set the desired initialization parameters for the data you are accessing. 11. Click OK.
To create a UDL file through MicroStation
1. From the Database submenu on the Settings menu, select Connect. The Connect to Database dialog box opens. 2. Select OLEDB from the Database Server pull-down menu. 3. Select New from the Database Source pull-down menu.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Click OK. The UDL Filename dialog box opens. 5. Enter the name of the .udl file to be created in the File Name field. 6. Click OK. The Data Link Properties dialog opens with the Connection tab displayed. 7. Follow steps 6 through 11 in the To create a UDL file in Windows procedure.
To edit a UDL file
Page 201 of 387
1. Navigate to the folder containing your .udl files with Windows Explorer. 2. Double-click on the .udl file. The Properties dialog box for the select .udl file opens. 3. Make the desired changes to the file and click OK to save the changes.
Editing the UDL file with a text editor may corrupt the file.
To connect to an existing OLE DB data source
1. From the Database submenu on the Settings menu, select Connect. The Connect to Database dialog box opens. 2. Select OLEDB from the Database Server pull-down menu. 3. Click on the desired .udl file in the Database Source pull-down menu. 4. Press OK to connect to the data source. Connecting to BUDBC MicroStation can interface with an external database through a Bentley Universal Database Connection (BUDBC) connection as an alternative to Oracle, OLE DB, and ODBC connections. BUDBC support opens the MicroStation database interface to Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) applications. BUDBC is part of the foundation for possible future support for multiple simultaneous database connections. The MS_LINKTYPE value for BUDBC linkages is BUDBC. There are three types of BUDBC connections:

OLE DB This type of connection will take a connection string from a .UDL file. SQL Server The connection string for this type of connection is as follows:
Password=[yourpassword]; UserID=[yourusername] Oracle The connection string for this type of connection is as follows:
Password=[yourpassword]; User ID=[yourusername];Data Source=[yourdatasource]

To connect to a BUDBC database
1. Choose Settings > Database > Connect. The Connect to Database dialog box opens. 2. Select the BUDBC tab. 3. Select a BUDBC Provider.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Select a Database Source. 5. Click OK.
Page 202 of 387
A .udl file must be created before connecting to BUDBC.
When selecting Oracle or SQL as the BUDBC Provider, you must enter the connection string parameters.
MS_LINKTYPE Linkages between design elements and the database can be written as any of the following types:

ORACLE ODBC OLEDB
The MS_LINKTYPE configuration variable definition controls which linkage types the MicroStation database interface software recognizes. By default, the delivered configuration files are set to recognize many types of linkages.
The OLEDB_ID configuration variable can be used with the MS_LINKTYPE variable. It tells MicroStation what linkages to write to the file and which linkages to recognize during review operations.
OLEDB configuration variables
The following configuration variables can be set in the OLEDB.cfg:

Configuration variables MS_OLEDBMAXDATA Description Limits the amount of data returned from database columns with unlimited space. These columns are MEMO columns in Microsoft Access and LONG columns in Oracle. The default value is 1024. Format of date fields returned from the database.
%B Full Month Name %d Day of the month %Y Year including the century
MS_DBOLEDBDATEFORMAT

MS_UDLDIR
Identifies the directory which contains the Universal Data Link files (.UDL). The .UDL files contain the connection strings to a particular data source. The default directory is "...\Bentley\MicroStation\database\oledb\udl ".
For more formatting date options, visit the Microsoft Developer Network Web site (http://msdn.microsoft.com/) and look up the syntax for strftime or wcsftime in the Run-Time Library Reference document.
Copying elements with attached linkages
When you copy an element that has database linkages, the database linkages are copied with it. The linkage is written as the type first specified in the MS_LINKTYPE variable, regardless of the original elements' link type. For example, suppose you copied an element that has an ORACLE linkage attached to it. If MS_LINKTYPE=ODBC in the current database session, the linkage that is attached to the new element (the copy) contains exactly the same data. However, when you analyze the element, the linkage is written as ODBC Data Linkage rather than Oracle Data Linkage. The copy function also respects the Linkage Mode setting. For example, if Linkage Mode is set to New, any element with a database
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 203 of 387
linkage that is copied has a new row added to the database. If Linkage Mode is set to Duplicate, the copied element is linked to the same record as the original. The above example assumes MicroStation is connected to the database. If not connected to a database, the element and database linkage are copied as is, without regard to MS_LINKTYPE or Linkage Mode.
Troubleshooting Database Connections

To most effectively troubleshoot a database connection, set the configuration variable MS_SESSION_DEBUG. If you set this configuration variable, session debug will start prior to "server.ma" loading. That is, debug messages will start as soon as the database components load. If you set MS_SESSION_DEBUG to 1, you will get debug information from "server.ma" and the corresponding DLL (ORACLE, ODBC, OLEDB). If you set MS_SESSION_DEBUG to 0 you will only get output from the DLL.
Linking Database Rows to Elements

In this chapter, you will find procedures concerning linking information in a database to graphic elements in MicroStation. Database Tools Available in MicroStation Visual SQL Query Builder Using SQL Creating Tables MSCATALOG Table Database Tools Creating Linkages
Database Tools Available in MicroStation

There are two database interfaces available to the user for database interaction. The first, Visual SQL Query Builder, is a GUIbased interface. VSQL does not require users to key in the exact SQL query statement to interact with the database. The SQL statement is built as the user clicks the table and columns and selects criteria for queries from pull down menus. Execution of the auto-generated query statement produces query results in the form. Values can be edited or new rows can be added/deleted in the database by a click of a button. The second is the SQL window and a series of tools from the Database tool box. SQL (pronounced se-quel) stands for Structured Query Language. SQL is a simple yet powerful language that is the industry standard for database access and data manipulation.
Visual SQL Query Builder

The Visual SQL Query Builder provides a graphically intuitive means of generating simple and complex queries and joining tables. From the generated query, the Visual Query Builder automatically builds form dialogs dialogs containing simple controls for interfacing to a database which can be saved and recalled when needed. Using the form editing tool, a form dialog can be visually manipulated and reformatted. The Visual SQL Query Builder is the default database query tool and is available when Settings > Database > Query Builder is chosen.
To open the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, you must be connected to a database.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 204 of 387
Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box overview The Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box uses a simple graphical means of generating query statements of varying complexity, graphically generates and displays table joins, builds form dialogs from generated queries, and allows you to save form dialogs and to retrieve them for later use. Selecting Query Builder from the Database menu opens the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box.
The Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box lets you easily build SQL queries. It helps ensure proper syntax and reduces time consuming key-ins for both novice and expert SQL users. The dialog box uses a tab structure that separates and organizes the main query building steps. The tab names follow the intuitive SELECT, WHERE, GROUP BY, ORDER BY order with which most users are familiar. The Visual SQL Query Builder also generates a database form dialog from the query statement. The dialog form can be used to navigate through a database table, and to query, insert, update and delete rows in the table. The form can be saved for future use. The Standard Form Items dialog box is used to specify the control items which appear on newly generated dialog forms.
To open the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, you must be connected to a database.
Building simple SELECT statements This section starts with a simple SQL statement and sequentially builds more complex statements, explaining how the Visual SQL Query Builder is used to create SELECT statements, how it displays the results to the user, and how the results are displayed in a dialog form.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 205 of 387
All the examples in this section apply to the GIS database.
The following examples reflect different settings in the Standard Form Items dialog box.
You can either type an SQL statement directly into the SQL Select Statement field or you can proceed with following procedures and have MicroStation generate an SQL statement for you.
To use the Visual SQL Query Builder to build the following query: SELECT parcel_no, owner, parc_value FROM parcel
1. In the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box (Settings > Database > Query Builder), click Tables or from the Tables menu choose Open. The Select Table dialog box opens.
2. In the Table List option menu, choose MSCATALOG to display the tables listed in the MSCATALOG table, or choose All to display all project tables. 3. In the Select Table dialog box, double-click Parcel. The Parcel dialog box opens in the work area on the Select table page.
The Parcel dialog box contains all columns of the Parcel table. 4. In the Select Table dialog box, click Close to dismiss the dialog box. 5. To move the Parcel dialog box, left click the title bar, hold the left mouse button down, drag the dialog box to a new location, and release the mouse button. This functionality is very useful for visually generating table joins. The following appears in the SQL Select Statement text box: SELECT FROM parcel
6. Double-click the parc_no, owner, and parc_value fields. The SQL Select Statement updates to the following, indicating that the query is complete:
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
SELECT parcel_no,owner, parc_value FROM parcel
Page 206 of 387
Double-clicking again any of these selected fields will deselect them, and the query statement updates to reflect the change. Double-clicking the asterisk (*) toggles between selecting and deselecting all fields. 7. Click the Execute button to review the results based on this query. If Output > Forms is turned on with Dataset Mode selected, the following form is generated.
In this example, the user can navigate forward and backward through the Parcel table using the First, Next, Previous and Last buttons. This dialog box, called a form, can be saved and retrieved for future use. If Output > Browser is turned on, the same results are displayed in the Visual SQL Data Browser dialog box.
A maximum of 50 tables may be open at one time.
You can minimize or dismiss the large Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, leaving the smaller form dialog box active. This can be useful if screen space is limited.
If you are working with a table that currently contains no rows of data, turn off Execute Query on Open and Dataset Mode. This will generate an empty form ready for data entry.
To use the Visual SQL Query Builder to build the following query: SELECT max(parc_area) FROM Parcel
1. In the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box (Settings menu > Database > Query Builder), click Clear All to clear everything. 2. In the Select tab page, click Tables or from the Tables menu choose Open. The Select Table dialog box opens. 3. In the Select Table dialog box, double-click Parcel. The Parcel dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 207 of 387
The SQL Select Statement now reads: SELECT FROM Parcel
4. In the Select Table dialog box, click Close. 5. Click the Functions options menu button, and select Maximum Value of. 6. In the Parcel dialog box, double-click Parc_area. The SQL Select Statement updates to the following, indicating the query is complete: SELECT MAX(parc_area) FROM Parcel
7. Click the Execute button to review the results based on this query. If Output > Forms is turned on with Dataset Mode selected, the following form is generated.
If Output > Browser is turned on, the same results are displayed in the Visual SQL Data Browser dialog box. 8. Click Clear All to delete the table and the SQL query.
Aggregate functions (Max, Min, Count, Sum and Avg) operate only in Cursor mode. Clicking Execute places the Query Builder in Cursor mode. The Dataset Mode check box is off.
Joining tables
A relational database typically consists of data stored in many different tables. Joining tables allows you to obtain information from more than one table at one time and enables you to choose various data subsets of the joined tables. In a join, the currently selected table is the Master Table and the table it is joined to is the Lookup Table. The currently selected table name appears after the FROM keyword in the SQL Select Statement text box. A table join relationship can be established in the following way:
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 208 of 387
The join is defined in Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box. The table currently selected is the Master Table, and the second table selected is the Lookup Table. The join is completed visually by left clicking a field in the Master Table, holding the left mouse button down, dragging and dropping to the field in the Lookup Table. A join graphic, a line with two end nodes, is generated showing the fields that have been joined.
To delete the join, click one of the join graphic nodes, and press Delete.
Insert, Update, and Delete database operations are not supported for joined tables.
The Where tab page can be used to create compound Where clauses with joined tables. For example:
To use the Visual SQL Query Builder to build the following query: SELECT parcel_no,owner, house_num,str_name FROM parcel WHERE parc_value >= 50000 AND parc_area >= 100,000
1. Click Clear All to clear any existing tables. 2. In the Select tab page, click Tables or select menu option Tables > Open Table. 3. In the Select Table dialog box, double-click Parcel. 4. In the Select Table dialog box, click Close. 5. In the Parcel dialog box, double-click the Parcel_no, owner, house_num, str_name fields. The following displays in the SQL Select Statement text box: SELECT parcel_no, owner, house_num, str_name FROM parcel
6. Click the Where tab. The Where tab page opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
7. In the Available Fields list box, click the parc_value field. The selected field appears in the Where Fields list box. 8. Click >= (greater than or equal to). In the Value text field, type 50000 and press <Enter>. 9. Click And to create the second WHERE clause. AND displays in the Where Fields list box.
Page 209 of 387
10. Click parc_area in the Available Fields list box, click >= (greater than or equal to), enter 100000 in the Value text field and press <Enter>. The entered operator and value display in the Where Fields list box. 11. Click Apply to add the clause in the Where Fields list box to the SQL Select Statement text box. The following displays in the SQL Select Statement text box: SELECT parcel_no, owner, house_num ,str_name FROM parcel WHERE parc_value >= 50000 AND parc_area >= 100000 The query in the SQL Select Statement text box is complete. 12. Click Execute. If Output > Forms is turned on in the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, clicking Execute generates a dialog form.
If Output > Browser is turned on in the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, clicking Execute generates a list (containing the same information as in the dialog form) which is displayed in the Visual SQL Data Browser dialog box.
The Visual SQL Data Browser only displays the data. Make edits to the database in the Forms mode
To edit any of the Where clauses, click the clause in the Where Fields list box. Dynamically change the field, operator, value and AND/OR clause members as you would normally do when building an SQL statement Clicking Apply conforms the SQL Select Statement to your
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
changes in the Where Fields dialog box. You can also delete the clause by clicking Clear.
Page 210 of 387
If your selection in Available Fields is a character type, your entry in the Value text field (for example, 100) is displayed with single quotes around it in the Value column of the Where Fields list box (is displayed as `100', for example).
Common Operators do not work with character fields.
To use the Visual SQL Query Builder to build the following query: SELECT owner, parc_area, AVG(parcel_value) FROM parcel GROUP BY owner, parc_area HAVING parc_area > 100,000 ORDER BY parc_area
1. Click Clear All to clear any existing tables. 2. In the Select tab page, click Tables or from the Tables menu choose Open Table. 3. In the Select Table dialog box, double-click Parcel. 4. In the Select Table dialog box, click Close. 5. In the Parcel dialog box, double-click the Owner and Parc_area fields. The following is in the SQL Select Statement text box: SELECT owner, parcel_area FROM parcel
6. Click the Functions option button and choose Average Value of. 7. In Parcel, double-click parc_value. The following text is in the SQL Select Statement text box: SELECT owner, parc_area, AVG(parc_value) FROM parcel GROUP BY owner, parc_area
8. To edit the GROUPBY clause, click the GroupBy tab page. The GroupBy tab page opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 211 of 387
9. In the GroupBy Fields list box, click parc_area. Click the > (greater than) Common Operator, enter 100000 in the Value text field, and press <Enter>. 10. Click Apply to generate the following statement: SELECT owner, parc_area, AVG(parc_value) FROM parcel GROUP BY owner, parc_area, HAVING parc_area > 100000
11. To add the OrderBy clause, click the OrderBy tab page. The OrderBy tab page opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 212 of 387
12. In the Available Fields list box, click parc_area. The selected field appears in the OrderBy Field text box. 13. Click Apply to add a OrderBy clause to the SQL Select Statement text box. The query in the SQL Select Statement text box is complete: SELECT owner, parc_area, avg (parc_value), FROM parcel GROUP BY owner, parc_area having parc_area > 100000 ORDER BY parc_area
14. Click Execute to display the results of the query in either a dialog form (Output > Form) or in the Visual SQL Data Browser dialog box (Output > Browser). Creating linkages using the Visual SQL Query Builder Before creating linkages, it is important to be aware of the Linkage Mode setting. Linkage Mode is set in the Database dialog box (Settings > Database > Dialog). Usually New or Duplicate modes are used. New mode means that the data in the database will be duplicated, and a unique row will be linked to the graphic element. Duplicate means that the data in the database will be linked to the graphic element, but neither a new row nor an mslink will be created.
To link a database row to a graphic element
1. In the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, click Tables. The Tables dialog box opens. 2. Select the database table that contains the row to which you want to link. 3 Cli k th * b tt t l t ll l
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 213 of 387
4. Click Execute. A form dialog box opens. This dialog box will have fields for each column in the selected table. The table name is in the dialog box's title bar. The title bar identifies the selected table. Here is an example:
5. Click Clear. 6. In a field, key in a known value for one of the columns. 7. Click Query. The fields populate with the remaining column values of the row that contains the value you keyed in. 8. Click Attach. 9. Identify the graphic element to link. 10. Accept. The message Linkage attached is displayed in the status bar.
To confirm a newly created linkage: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, click Clear. Click Review. Identify the graphic element to which you linked the database row. Accept. The form dialog box fields are populated with the column values of the linked row.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 214 of 387
If after executing a query (step 4 above), the form dialog box opens but does not contain Attach, Delete, Locate, or Review buttons, perform these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Close the form dialog box. In the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box, choose Settings > Forms Turn on the check boxes in the Standard Form Items dialog box. Re-execute the query.
Reviewing database attributes Clicking the Review button from the created form allows you to view a database row linked to an element that you identify on the screen. Alternatively, if a form is not created, keying in VSQL REVIEW, then identifying an element with a database linkage, automatically generates a form for you. The database row displays in a form dialog. The form buttons (Insert, Update, Delete, etc.) displayed on the form dialog are those chosen from the Standard Form Items dialog box (Settings > Forms). Database form dialogs MicroStation VSQL supports database operations including query, update, review, and geolocate using dynamically definable database dialog forms. These forms are generated using the Visual SQL Query Builder. Database form dialog controls allow users to create, edit and save database forms after first interactively defining form contents and dialog controls. Database forms support row navigation operations, including find first row, last row, next row, previous row, and row count. Database update and query operations include query execute, row insert, row update, and row delete. Database forms support integrated database and graphics operations including database review, and locate. The form may also be used to attach and detach linkages from graphical elements. After generating the form, the user can customize the organization of the form and associated controls using the visual editing tools in the Visual SQL Query Builder. Individual dialog controls can optionally be set to read-only in the case that forms are intended to support query operations only. (This is accomplished by selecting Forms from the Settings menu, and turning off Insert Row Button, Delete Row Button and Update Row Button.) Once a form has been created it can be used to query and review database attributes using query by example functions that allow users to enter values and operators (>, <) directly into form fields. Only the columns selected in the <TABLENAME> dialog box appear in the results section of a database dialog form. Instead of getting all rows in a table, the form dialog provides only the fields needed by the user. This ability to customize data display and editing enhances user productivity by reducing the quantity of data to a manageable scale. The control of database resources in this way enables the transformation of raw data into useful information.
You can minimize or dismiss the Visual SQL Query Builder after executing a query, leaving the form dialog active. The following procedure assumes that your form dialog contains all possible items.
To create a new form dialog containing all items
1. Choose Settings > Forms. 2. In the Standard Form Items dialog box, turn all items on, and click OK. 3. Create a new form as described in this chapter, for example, Building Simple SELECT Statements.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 215 of 387
The Query text field is present because Query Multiline was turned on in the Standard Form Items dialog box.
To perform a review from a form dialog
1. In the form dialog, click Review. 2. Identify an element that has database attributes from the same table as the open form dialog. 3. Accept the element.
If the element that you select does not contain a linkage to a row in the currently selected table, no information will appear in the form dialog. In addition, the message, The element does not satisfy the database criteria, will display in the status bar.
Locating linked elements
The locate functionality allows you to locate a graphic element if it is exists in the active DGN file and is linked to the specific record that displays in the VSQL form. This functionality can be enhanced by adding a column called mapid (integer) to the attribute table and adding a table called maps to the database. This allows you to locate graphic elements linked to the current database row that reside in different design files. The DGN file that the graphics are linked to is attached as a reference. Without this additional column and table, the locate function will return No elements linked to the current row when the Locate button is clicked. The maps table can be created as follows: 1. Create table maps (mslink integer, mapname char(30)) 2 In the maps table you must add a entry for every DGN file containing linked graphics and assign that map an mslink number
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 216 of 387
In the attribute table, you must create a numeric column called mapid. The mapid column in the attribute table must contain the mslink number assigned to the map in the maps table.
To display the design element linked to one of the records resulting from the SELECT statement: SELECT * FROM parcel
1. Open "Database.dgn" (located by default in "Bentley\Workspace\Projects\Examples\General\Dgn"). This design file has linkages to GIS database tables. 2. Build the Select statement using the Visual SQL Query Builder. 3. Turn on Output > Form. 4. Click Execute to create the form dialog. 5. In the form dialog, click Next to step through the list of query responses until you find a particular parcel in which you are interested. 6. Click Locate to display the element corresponding to the displayed query result. You are prompted to select a view in which to locate the parcel element. 7. Select the view in which you want the parcel element displayed. If the parcel record selected corresponds to a parcel in an open map, the parcel element displays centered in the selected view, with its number circled and highlighted. If the parcel record selected is not linked to a graphic element in the active DGN file, the following message is displayed: No element linked to current row.
In SQL, in this context, * means `all columns' or `all attributes'.
Opening, editing and saving form dialogs To save or to further customize the form generated from the Visual SQL Query Builder
1. From the Visual SQL Query Builder's Forms menu, select Save As. 2. Into the Save Form dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box, having its search filter preset to .rsc), select a directory and type a filename for the form to be saved. 3. Click OK to save the open form dialog.
To save a form dialog, its SQL query must be in the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box's SQL Select Statement text box.
To open a saved form
1. From the Forms menu, choose Open.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. In the Open Form dialog box, select a directory, and select a form filename to open. 3. Click OK.
Alternative Method To open a saved form using a key-in
Page 217 of 387
1. Key in: VSQL FORMS OPEN <form_name>

This assumes that the form has been saved in the default directory or the directory set in the configuration variable MS_DBDIALOGRSC. If the form has been saved in another directory, the full path to the form must be provided in the key-in.
To resize a form dialog item on the form
1. From Visual SQL Query Builder's Form menu, choose Edit. The Edit Form dialog box opens. 2. Select the file of the form dialog you want to modify, and click OK. The Builder dialog box, Builder's Tools tool box, and the form dialog open. 3. On the form dialog, click the control to resize. Handles appear at the corners of the button. 4. Drag and drop an edge of the button. The button is resized. 5. Click anywhere inside the form dialog. The handles disappear.
This procedure assumes you have saved the form dialog you want to modify.
To resize a form dialog item using the Builder dialog box
1. From Visual SQL Query Builder's Form menu, choose Edit. The Edit Form dialog box opens. 2. Select the file of the form dialog you want to modify, and click OK. The Builder dialog box, Builder's Tools tool box, and the form dialog open. 3. In the Builder dialog box, in the bottom list box, in the Label column select the label of the control to resize. In the form dialog, handles appear at the corners of the push-button. 4. In the text boxes under the list box you are working with, change the X and Y values if you want to change the position of the button, change Wdth if you want to change the width of the push-button, or change Hght if you want to change the height of the push-button. After each text box change, click <Enter> to apply the change. The button is resized. 5. Click anywhere inside the form dialog. The handles disappear.
To interchange the positions of controls on a form dialog
1. From Visual SQL Query Builder's Form menu, choose Edit. The Edit Form dialog box opens. 2. Select the file of the form dialog you want to modify, and click OK. The Builder dialog box, Builder's Tools tool box, and the form dialog open. 3. In the form dialog, drag and drop the two buttons in order to interchange their location. 4 In the form dialog click the window menu button to dismiss the form dialog
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
An Alert box opens asking you whether you want to save your changes. 5. Click Yes to save your changes, click No to discard your changes, and click Cancel to dismiss the Alert box.
Page 218 of 387
To add an item to a form dialog
1. Click a button on the Builder's Tools tool box. 2. Click the Form dialog to place the new item.
To delete an item from a form dialog
1. Click an item in the Form dialog. 2. In the Builder dialog box, select the menu option Edit > Delete.
Using SQL
SQL statements can be used to interactively query a database directly from within MicroStation. All SQL statements recognized by the database software are supported, including:
SELECT UPDATE DELETE INSERT Query database tables. Edit rows in a table. Delete rows. Add new rows. Delete an existing table.
CREATE TABLE Define a new table and add it to the database. DROP TABLE
Opening and saving query statements To open and save query statements, proceed as follows:
To open a query statement
1. From the Queries menu, select Open. 2. Select a file with a .sql extension. 3. Click OK.
To save a query statement
1. From the Queries menu, select Save As. 2. Type in a filename. 3. Click OK.
This assumes a SQL statement is present in the SQL Select Statement section of the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 219 of 387
The following sections contain descriptions of some of the more powerful SQL statements that are supported by the database interface. Literal expressions used in assignments and comparisons can be of character, numeric or date format. Character strings are single quote delimited. In general, dates can be queried as follows:
For ODBC SELECT * FROM <table> where <date_field> > #01/01/2000# The date format through ODBC depends upon the setting of the MicroStation configuration variable MS_DBODBCDATEFORMAT. It is set to mm/dd/yyyy by default. The variable is stored in the "odbc.cfg" file located in the "Program\MicroStation\config\database\".
For Oracle (direct connection) SELECT* FROM <table> where <date_field> > '21-DEC-00' The date format in Oracle is dependent upon the NSL_DATE_FORMAT setting. You must use the following statement keyed in through the SQL Window or the SQL statement portion of VSQL to alter the format (substitute the format you require for mm/dd/yyyy): alter session set nls_date_format = 'mm/dd/yyyy'
It is recommended that you use VSQL to create the SQL for the query as it will assist you in properly delimiting the date field.
SELECT
SELECT <* | <column_name_list> FROM table WHERE <condition_list> Used to query the database. Condition_list can contain any number of comparisons separated by AND or OR operators. The comparisons need not be equivalences (that is, <, >, <=, etc. are valid).
UPDATE
UPDATE <table> SET <assignment-list> Used to edit column values.

DELETE
DELETE FROM <table> [WHERE <condition_list>] Used to delete rows.

INSERT
INSERT INTO table <column_name_list> VALUES <expression_list> Used to insert rows into a database table. If column_name_list is omitted, there must be an expression for each column in the table and it must be listed in the order in which the columns were added to the table.
CREATE TABLE
CREATE TABLE table <column_name_type_list> Used to create a table. Column_name_type_list is a comma-delimited list of expressions of the form: <<column_name> <column_type>>. For example: CREATE TABLE mytable (myname char(10), age integer) creates a table with a myname column of 10 characters and an integer age column.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
DROP
Page 220 of 387
DROP TABLE table Used to drop a table from the data dictionary and to physically delete associated data and index files.
COMMIT
Used to explicitly request MicroStation to commit statements to the database software for processing. SESSION AUTOCOMMIT [OFF|ON] activates a mode in which MicroStation does not automatically commit SQL statements to the database for processing.
ROLLBACK
Used to undo all statements to the last commit point. SESSION AUTOCOMMIT [OFF|ON]activates a mode in which MicroStation does not automatically commit SQL statements to the database for processing. Specific SQL Window key-ins The following section contain descriptions of MicroStation-specific SQL Window key-ins.
CONNECT
Used to connect to a database. Either key in DB= or use Settings > Database > Setup as described in Database Setup dialog box.
DISCONNECT
Used to disconnect from a database.

RELOAD
Used to force MicroStation to reread mscatalog and update the copy of the table it maintains internally. (Changes to mscatalog resulting from SQL statements typed and submitted by the user in the SQL Window are not automatically reflected in MicroStation's internal copy of the table.) Using the SQL Window The SQL Window is used to submit SQL statements and to review the results. It requires knowledge of accurate SQL statement syntax.
If you do not know SQL statement syntax, use the Visual SQL Query Builder.
To open the SQL Window
1. Key in SQL in the Key-in window (Utilities menu > Key-in). The SQL Window has a large section at the top for reviewing SQL queries and a smaller field at the bottom for submitting SQL statements.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 221 of 387
The user can also enter SQL commands preceded by the pipe symbol | in the MicroStation key-in window.
To submit a SQL statement
1. In the SQL Window, type the SQL statement. The statement can be typed as a continuous string with automatic word wrap or you can press <Enter> at the end of each line. Literal expressions used in assignments and comparisons can be of character (char), numeric (number). Character strings are single quote delimited. 2. Click the Submit button. Retrieved database information is presented one row at a time. You can use the scroll bar if the data exceeds the window size. 3. (Optional) To advance between retrieved rows, click the Next button. Command files If you submit a particular SQL statement frequently, you can save it in a command file for easier submission. A command file is simply a text file into which a SQL statement has been placed. While the file can contain only one statement, the statement can be continued on multiple lines. The default file extension is .sql.
Some database interface key-ins require SQL statements, such as (AE=). Unlike actual SQL statements, these key-ins cannot be submitted in the SQL Window; they must be keyed in the Key-in Window. Like all MicroStation key-ins, these key-ins can also be activated from a script file with the key-in @<script_file>.
To create a command file
1. In the SQL Window, type the SQL statement you want to save. 2. From the SQL Window's File menu, choose Save As. The Save SQL Command File dialog box opens. 3. In the Name field, key in the desired filename. 4. Set the destination Directory as desired. 5. Click the OK button.
To submit a SQL statement stored in a command file
1. From the SQL Window's File menu, choose Open. The Open SQL Command File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. Select the file that contains the desired statement. 3. Click OK. 4. When the statement is displayed in the SQL Window, click Submit to execute the query.
Alternative Method To submit a SQL statement stored in a command file
Page 222 of 387
1. In the SQL Window, submit @<file_name>, where file_name is a text file containing the SQL statement. The .sql file extension is the default. Manually committing SQL statements SQL statements are generated by MicroStation each time you use certain database tools and key-ins. For example, MicroStation generates a SQL INSERT statement when you use the Attach Active Entity tool with Linkage Mode set to New. By default, MicroStation immediately commits SQL statements to the database software. In an alternate mode, MicroStation commits statements only when your input necessitates the addition of a row to a database table. The process of adding rows requires the database software to lock tables, and commitment is required to release those locks. The alternate mode can be useful when it is desirable to be able to undo uncommitted SQL statements.
To activate the mode in which MicroStation does not automatically commit SQL statements
1. In the Key-in window, key in: SESSION AUTOCOMMIT OFF

To explicitly request MicroStation to commit statements when AUTOCOMMIT is set to OFF
1. In the SQL Window, submit: COMMIT

To undo (negate) the effect of all statements to the last commit point
1. In the SQL Window, submit: ROLLBACK

To reactivate the default mode
1. In the Key-in window, key in: SESSION AUTOCOMMIT ON
You must type COMMIT before exiting MicroStation when the AUTOCOMMIT mode is set to OFF. Otherwise uncommitted transactions will be discarded.
Creating Tables
Creating a table is as simple as submitting a standard SQL CREATE TABLE command.
To create a table
1. In the SQL Window, submit a statement in the following form: CREATE TABLE table_name(Column_name_1 Column_spec_1,Column_name_2 Column_spec_2,) Column specifications can be any type supported by SQL, including char, numeric, and date. The only requirement to enable a row to be linked to an element is that one of the columns in the table be named mslink and the table has an entry (tablename and entity number) in the mscatalog. For example, suppose in the utility map example on which the lesson at the beginning of this chapter is based, you must create a new table for the purpose of assessing real estate taxes. You might submit the following CREATE TABLE statement: CREATE TABLE assessor(clt_no char(30), as_val number(10),tax_rate number(10,4),mslink number(10))
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 223 of 387
The resulting table would be created (sample data is shown): Note the common column, clt_no, between the new table and the already existing parcel table.
assessor clt_no 119-LA 9 as_val tax_rate mslink 180,000 0.0500 37 38 39
119-LB 36 144,000 0.0500 119-LB 35 180,000 0.0500 parcel house_ mslink 1 14 15 clt_no number 119-LA 9 220
name
parc_value
area 16,036 16,668 16,306
BRIDGEWATER RD 9000 KILDARE DR KILDARE DR 7200 9000
119-LB 36 8717 119-LB 35 8713
To add a table to the MSCATALOG
1. Select Database > Setup from the Settings menu. The MSCATALOG dialog box displays. 2. In the MSCATALOG dialog's Tables menu, select Add to MSCATALOG. The Add to MSCATALOG dialog box opens. 3. Select the new table from the Tables list box. 4. Assign a unique number between 165535 in the Entity Number field. 5. Click the OK button. mslink column The mslink column serves as a primary key for the table. This means that any row can be uniquely specified solely by its mslink column value. Key index When a SELECT, UPDATE, or DELETE statement is submitted, the specified table is searched. Indexes are used whenever available to speed the search. An index is a linked list that contains only the column of interest and its row number in the table. Indexes are optional, but they greatly improve performance. Any column in a table can have its own index. Of course each index takes disk space, so you need to make a trade-off between files size and performance. As the mslink column is the primary key for a table, it makes sense to create an mslink index. You must create this index using your database program. Bentley recommends you create this index as a unique index and do not allow NULLS in the MSLINK column.
MSCATALOG Table
Before you delve too far into creating tables, you need to have a good understanding of the MSCATALOG table. It is the master table that tells MicroStation information about the database tables available for links to graphic elements. It is opened every time you connect to a database and contains a row for each table that may be linked to the design. There is only one MSCATALOG table for each database.
Any table in a database that will be linked to graphic elements in a DGN file must have a corresponding row in MSCATALOG. However, through SQL statements, any table in the database can be accessed from MicroStation even if it does not have a corresponding row in MSCATALOG.
mscatalog structure
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The MSCATALOG table has the following structure:
Column tablename entitynum screenform Type(width) char(32) table name Description
Page 224 of 387
number(10) unique entity or table number char(64) screen form name report table name default SQL review request default SQL fence filter displayable attributes table name table used to locate screen form (optional)
reporttable char(64) sqlreview char(240)
fencefilter char(240) dastable formtable char(32) char(64)
tablename column
The tablename column in the MSCATALOG table contains the names of the tables in the database that are to be linked to elements. The table names must be added to the tablename column before linkages to elements are made. This is a required entry in the MSCATALOG table.
entitynum column
The entitynum column in the MSCATALOG row for a particular table contains the entity number of the table. The entity number is a positive integer from 1 to 65535 that uniquely identifies the table to the database; each table used with a design must have a unique entity number. This is a required entry in the MSCATALOG table.
screenform column
The screenform column in the MSCATALOG row for a particular table specifies the default screen form, used in conjunction with the VSQL Review key-in (VSQL REVIEW) if you are using VSQL, to review the database attributes of elements linked to rows in the table. If the optional formtable column exists in MSCATALOG, that column is examined to attempt to locate a saved VSQL form to be used instead of the default screen form. The screenform column will be used for both review and editing if formtable is empty. This is an optional entry in the MSCATALOG table.
reporttable column
The reporttable column in the MSCATALOG row for a particular table contains the name of the report table that can be created with the Generate Report Table tool to report on the database attributes of elements linked to rows in the table. This column is ordinarily loaded with the key-in ACTIVE REPORT (RS=) but can be entered manually. This is an optional entry in the MSCATALOG table.
sqlreview column
The sqlreview column in the MSCATALOG row for a particular table contains the SQL SELECT statement that is submitted with the Review Database Attributes of Element tool to review database attributes of elements linked to rows in the table. If this SQL statement is entered incorrectly or the column entry contains blank spaces, the SQL Review window is blank when the database linkages are reviewed. When this field is left empty, the default SQL statement: Select * From <tablename> is executed. This column is ordinarily loaded with the key-in ACTIVE REVIEW (RA=) but may be entered manually. This is an optional entry in the MSCATALOG table.
fencefilter column
The fencefilter column in the MSCATALOG row for a particular table contains the SQL SELECT statement that determines which elements linked to rows in the table are selected for fence operations. This column must be loaded with the key-in DEFINE SEARCH (DS=) to function properly. This is an optional entry in the MSCATALOG table.
dastable column
The dastable column in the MSCATALOG row for a particular table, specifies the displayable attributes table that is used. Displayable attributes post information from the database to text nodes placed in the DGN file. Each row in a displayable attributes table (see the following table) specifies a displayable attribute type number and definition.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Column Type(width) NULLs dastype number(3) sqldas char(240) no yes
Page 225 of 387
The sqldas column specifies a SQL SELECT statement that selects the attributes for display.
The displayable attribute text nodes are an optional entry in the MSCATALOG table.
Creating and maintaining MSCATALOG The MSCATALOG dialog box (Settings > Database > Setup) is used to create and maintain the MSCATALOG table.
To create the MSCATALOG table
1. Choose Settings > Database > Setup. An alert box opens to ask if you would like to create MSCATALOG if none exists in the current database. 2. Click the Yes button. MSCATALOG is created, and the MSCATALOG dialog box opens.
To create an attribute table in the database
1. Choose Settings > Database > Setup. The MSCATALOG dialog box opens. 2. From the dialog box's Table menu, choose Create. The Create Table dialog box opens. 3. In the Table Name field, key in the name of the table. 4. Click the Insert button. The Insert Column dialog box opens. 5. In the Column field, key in the name of the first column. 6. From the Type option menu, choose the column's data type Character, Integer, Real, or Date. 7. If Type is Character, key in the field width (number of characters) in the Width field. or If the type is integer, key in the total number in the Width field. or Otherwise, skip to step 8. If Type is Real, key in the total number of digits in the Width field and the number of digits after the decimal point in the Decimal field. 8. Click the OK button to return to the Create Table dialog box. 9. For each additional column, repeat steps 4-8. (To edit or delete a previously defined column, use the Edit and Delete buttons.) 10. Click the OK button.
Alternatively, table creation can be accomplished through the database software.
To add a table to the MSCATALOG table
1. Choose Settings > Database > Setup. The MSCATALOG dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. From the dialog box's Table menu, choose Add to MSCATALOG. The Add Table to MSCATALOG dialog box opens.
Page 226 of 387
3. From the Table Name option menu, choose the table to add. This will become the tablename value in the MSCATALOG row for the table. 4. In the Entity Number field, key in a unique entity number for the table. This will become the entitynum value in the MSCATALOG row for the table. 5. Click the OK button.
Alternatively, update MSCATALOG through the database software.
To delete a table from the MSCATALOG table
1. Choose Settings > Database > Setup. The Database Setup dialog box opens. 2. In the Tables list box, select the table to delete. 3. From the dialog box's Table menu, choose Delete from MSCATALOG.
To drop a table from the database
1. Choose Settings > Database > Setup. The Database Setup dialog box opens. 2. From the dialog box's Table menu, choose Drop. The Drop Table dialog box opens. 3. From the Table Name option menu, choose the table to drop. 4. Click the OK button.
Database Tools
The tool box is operated in the same manner as tool boxes that contain MicroStation's drawing tools. These database tools operate independently from the Visual SQL Query Builder.
To open the Database tool box
1. From the Tools menu, choose Database.
Creating Linkages
Use the Attach Active Entity tool in the Database tool box to create linkages from elements in the design to rows in the database.
This is an alternative way to create database linkages that requires knowledge of SQL statements. It is recommended that you use the Visual SQL Query Builder instead.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 227 of 387
To create a Linkage(s)
1. Define the Active Entity.
2. In the Database dialog box, set Linkage Mode. Use the Attach Active Entity tool to attach an element(s) to the row designated as the Active Entity. Defining the Active Entity The row that is designated as the target row to be attached to an element when a linkage is created is called the Active Entity. It becomes the only row in a special table named AE. The Active Entity can be thought of as a temporary holding place for data multiplication. It can be created several different ways:
It can be defined graphically with the Define Active Entity Graphically tool.
It can be created directly with the ACTIVE ENTITY (AE=) key-in. It can be located and copied from a seed row in the existing table with the FIND (FI=) key-in.
To define the Active Entity graphically by using the database tool
1. Select the Define Active Entity Graphically tool. 2. Select an element that is already linked to the database.
To directly define the Active Entity by key-in
1. In the Key-in window, key in: AE=INSERT INTO <table_name>(<column_1>, <column_2>,)VALUES (<value_1>,<value_2>) or ACTIVE ENTITY INSERT INTO <table_name>(<column_1>, <column_2>,)VALUES (<value_1>,<value_2>) Here you are creating the Active Entity, in the AE table, with the same data structure as table_name. This active entity will create a new row in the database table and is only valid in the new linkage mode.
To define an Active Entity from a seed row
1. In the Key-in window, key in: FI=SELECT * FROM <table_name> WHERE <column_name>='<value>' or FIND SELECT * FROM <table_name> WHERE <column_name>='<value>' This key-in creates the active entity from an existing row in the attribute table. Depending on the linkage mode (new or duplicate), the linkage will be created the existing row, or a row will be added to the table. The Show Active Entity tool is used to check the values in the Active Entity.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 228 of 387
Editing the Active Entity
You can edit the Active Entity from within MicroStation before linking it to an element using an SQL UPDATE statement.
Depending on Linkage Mode, which is set in the Database dialog box, editing the Active Entity can change a row in the database. If Linkage Mode is set to New, the Active Entity is a prototype record; editing the Active Entity does not affect any rows. However, if Linkage Mode is not set to New, editing the Active Entity changes the corresponding row.
To edit the Active Entity using an SQL UPDATE command
1. In the SQL Window, submit: UPDATE AE SET <column> = <value>,<column> = <value>, For example, if you were working with the parcel table you might submit: UPDATE AE SET house_num = `8716',str_name = `KILDARE DR', value = 8000 Setting Linkage Mode Linkage Mode, which is set in the Database dialog box, determines how the Active Entity is treated when an element is linked to it. When Linkage Mode is set to None, no linkages can be created.
New linkage mode
Use New linkage mode when you require a unique row for each linkage, such as in the case of land parcels on a map. In New mode, the Active Entity is actually a prototype row that does not need to represent an existing row in the table. Each time a linkage is created in New mode, a copy of the Active Entity is appended to the table as a new row. The element is then linked to the new row. If you operate exclusively in New mode when establishing linkages, you can be sure that each element you link has a corresponding unique row in the database.
Duplicate linkage mode
In Duplicate linkage mode, each designated element is linked to the same row as long as that row remains the Active Entity. This is useful when it is necessary only to associate elements with a generic row type rather than to a particular occurrence of that row type. For example, in a circuit board design, it may not be desirable for electrical components like resistors and capacitors to be linked with unique rows. Accurate part counts are still possible even if resistors of the same type share rows using the MicroStation database reporting tools.
Information linkage mode
Information linkage mode is identical to Duplicate mode except that a special bit is set in each linkage. This distinction is important to application software that examines this bit when processing linkages. Information linkages cannot be reported, and they do not cause table rows to be added or deleted when the linked element is copied.
To set Linkage Mode
1. Choose Settings > Database > Dialog. The Database dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. From the Linkage Mode option menu, choose the desired mode None, New, Information, or Duplicate. Attaching linkages to cell libraries
Page 229 of 387
Applications frequently need to associate database information with cells. The Cell Link dialog box is used to link a cell library with an existing database table by attaching database linkages to the library cells. This makes it possible to place cells in the design with a database linkage already established.
Querying and Maintaining the Database

In this section you will find procedures concerning querying the database, reviewing database attributes, detaching linkages, and otherwise maintaining the database. Reviewing Attributes Displaying Database Attributes in the DGN File Detaching Linkages Verifying Linkages
Reviewing Attributes
Reviewing the database attributes of elements is the cornerstone of the database interface. You can graphically query the database to review attributes using the Review Database Attributes of Element tool. The attributes can be displayed for review in the SQL Window or in the Visual SQL Query Builder dialog box.
The SQL Window displays read-only database information when the Review Database Attributes of Element tool is used to identify a graphic element.
The Visual SQL Query Builder form is generated and displays when the VSQL REVIEW key-in is used to identify and accept an element. These are editable database attributes.
Setting attribute review selection criteria Attribute review selection criteria can be set and saved in the sqlreview column of the row in MSCATALOG for the desired table. The sqlreview value applies only to data retrieved for display in the SQL Window.
To check the selection criteria for all tables (the sqlreview values for all tables listed in MSCATALOG)
1. In the Key-in window, key in: ACTIVE REVIEW $ or RA=$ The sqlreview value for the first table is displayed in the SQL Window. 2. Click the Next button to review the sqlreview values for successive tables.
To change the selection criteria
1. In the Key-in window, key in: ACTIVE REVIEW <SQL_SELECT_statement> or RA=<SQL_SELECT_statement> For example, to review all columns in a table, key in: RA=SELECT * FROM <table_name> This is the default for any sqlreview column with a NULL value.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To review specific columns, key in: RA=SELECT <column1>,<column2>, FROM <table_name>
Page 230 of 387
Selection criteria can also be modified by directly submitting a SQL UPDATE statement (through the SQL Window) or using the MSCATALOG dialog box. Submitting a SQL UPDATE statement for this purpose can be confusing because the statement must have a SQL SELECT statement embedded as a string.
Verify that the SQL statement is valid before updating the SQL review column. No validation is done on this column, so if there is a mistake in the syntax, the SQL review window will display with no information and no error message.
Displaying Database Attributes in the DGN File

You can place a copy of some or all of an element's database attributes as text in the DGN file. The process of displaying attributes is really quite simple: An empty text node is placed and then designated as a displayable attribute text node. Selected attributes are loaded into the displayable attribute text node based on an SQL SELECT statement. If the database information changes or you change the columns selected by the SELECT statement, you can update the design by simply reloading the text nodes. Different types of displayable attribute text nodes can be defined to display different combinations of attributes. The displayable attribute table specifies the display format for each type of displayable attribute text node. The SQL SELECT statement for the displayable attribute type defined in the column determines the list of columns that are loaded. If no SELECT statement is defined, SELECT * is used.
General Procedure Displaying Attributes
1. If the desired display format is not yet specified as a displayable attribute type, create a type. 2. Use the Place Text Node tool to place text nodes as placeholders for the attributes that will be displayed.
3. Use the Attach Displayable Attributes tool to designate the text nodes as displayable attribute text nodes of the desired type. Be sure to follow the prompts at the bottom of the screen.
The displayable attribute type is set in the Attach Displayable Attributes settings window. Once a displayable attribute linkage is attached, its type cannot be changed.
4. Use the Load Displayable Attributes tool to load the attributes for display in the displayable attribute text nodes. This may be used with the Fence tool to update all text nodes. 5. (Optional) If you change the displayable attribute select statement or the values of the displayed attributes and you want to reflect the changes in the design, reload the attributes using the Load Displayable Attributes tool.
To create a displayable attribute type
1. In the SQL Window, submit: INSERT INTO <displayable_attribute_table> (dastype, sqldas) VALUES (<type_number>, '<SQL_SELECT_statement>') The displayable attribute table contains two columns, dastype (number), and sqldas (text).
Alternately, this record may be inserted through VSQL.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To modify a displayable attribute type
Page 231 of 387
1. In the SQL Window, submit: UPDATE <displayable_attribute_table> SET sqldas = '<SQL_SELECT_statement>' WHERE dastype = <type_number>
Alternately, this can be updated through VSQL.
To change the appearance (as opposed to the arrangement) of attributes in a displayable attribute text node, use the Text settings box (Element menu > Text) and the Change Text Attributes tool.
Detaching Linkages
The Detach Database Linkage tool is used to detach linkages from elements or sets of elements using the Use Fence setting operation. Linkages of the type(s) specified in the MS_LINKTYPE configuration variable definition are removed. Linkages of other types and application user data are not disturbed. The Delete Linked Database Rows setting in the Database dialog box determines whether the row (s) that were attached to a particular element are deleted from the table. Detaching linkages from cells To detach linkages from a component element of a cell, you must first drop the cell using a tool in the Drop tool box .
The Cell Link dialog box is used to link a cell library with an existing database table by attaching database linkages to the library cells. You can also use the dialog box to remove linkages from the library cells.
Verifying Linkages
When you delete an element that has an attached database linkage, MicroStation automatically deletes the associated row from the database table if Delete Linked Database Rows is on in the Database dialog box. However, the opposite is not true. If you should delete data from the database without removing linkage information from an element, you create what is called an orphan linkage. Orphan linkages are linkages without associated rows in the database. A quick visual check of elements that have a database linkage can be made by using a fence filter, a query that determines which elements with linkages to rows in a table are selected for fence operations. This procedure does not identify orphan linkages, but it does show which elements do not have any attached linkages. For example, if every desk in an office layout has a linkage, they will all highlight. Those that are missing a linkage will not highlight. The Verify Database Linkages dialog box generates a listing of all elements in the DGN file with database linkages of the type selected and identifies orphan linkages.
To visually check for database linkages
1. In the Key-in window, key in: DEFINE SEARCH SELECT * FROM <table_name> or DS=SELECT * from <table_name> This sets up a fence filter for all rows in the database that have an mslink attachment. Fence Filter: on displays in the status bar window.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 232 of 387
2. Use the Place Fence tool to fence the area of interest (or the entire design). 3. In the Key-in window, key in: MACRO HILITE. All elements with database linkages will highlight.
Generating Reports
No matter what your application for the database interface, at some point you will need to generate reports to communicate information to others. A report could be as simple as a parts list for a mechanical component or as complex as a maintenance schedule for all equipment in a selected area of a large facility that is still under warranty and requires shutdown time for repair. Whatever the application, you will find that a major strength of the interface lies in its ability to combine the power of the database query with graphical display for analysis, manipulation and reports not otherwise possible. In this section you will find procedures concerning generating reports based on the database attributes of elements. In addition, you will find an overview of the report formatting and output capabilities of the database products to which MicroStation provides an interface. Report Tables Fence Filters Report Formatting and Output
Report Tables
Database report output from MicroStation can either be plots of a design with report information highlighted or report tables.
The Generate Report Table tool is used to generate a report table for each table that has rows attached to elements contained in a fence. A report table contains a row for each row of a particular table attached to an element contained in a fence. Formatting and printing report tables requires report writer software that is available with the relational database package being used. Since a row is written to the report table for each occurrence of a linked element, the table gives an accurate count of linkages that were attached with Linkage Mode set to Duplicate. Recall that Duplicate linkage mode lets the same row be attached to multiple elements. Linkages that were attached with different linkage modes can even be mixed in the same report table. Thus you may have hundreds of identical items in a design, all with the same row attached, and still generate a report table for inventory control or quantity-takeoffs. Also note that linkages created with Linkage Mode set to informational will not be reported.
To generate report tables
1. Make sure a report table name is specified in the MSCATALOG table for each table that has rows attached to elements in the part of the design you want to report on. 2. (Optional) To specify attribute-based criteria for reporting in addition to the geographical criteria defined by a fence, define a fence filter(s) (DS= ).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Use the Generate Report Table tool.
The first three steps can be performed in any order.
Page 233 of 387
Each time you generate report tables, any previously existing report table with the same name is overwritten.
Naming Before a report table can be generated, its name must be specified in the reporttable column of the MSCATALOG table. The name must conform to SQL naming conventions. For example, no symbols or spaces can be contained in the table name.
To check the report table names for all tables listed in MSCATALOG
1. In the Command Window, key in: ACTIVE REPORT $ or RS=$ The reporttable value for the first table is displayed in the SQL Window. 2. Click the Next button to review the reporttable values for successive tables.
To change a report table name specification
1. In the Command Window, key in: ACTIVE REPORT <table_name>:<report_table_name> or RS=<table_name>:<report_table_name> For example, to name a report table parts_report for a table parts, key in: RS=parts:parts_report
The MSCATALOG dialog box can also be used to view and change a report table name specification. From the MicroStation command line use the key-in SET DATABASE.
Fence Filters
Fence filters are used in conjunction with the Generate Report Table tool and also to generate reports in the form of plotted designs. A fence filter specifies non-graphical criteria used to select elements for fence operations. Report tables generated using fence filters contain only rows for elements contained in the fence that meet the specified criteria. This has the added advantage of allowing you to graphically work with the selected elements. The fencefilter row in MSCATALOG contains fence filter specifications. Each table listed in MSCATALOG can have a unique fence filter.
To discard previously defined fence filter specifications and disable fence filter selection
1. In the Command Window, key in: DEFINE SEARCH none or DS=none The fence filter values are cleared from each row in MSCATALOG.
To define a fence filter and enable fence filter selection
1. In the Command Window, key in: DEFINE SEARCH <SQL_SELECT_statement> or DS=<SQL_SELECT_statement> The specified SELECT statement is stored in the fence filter column of the row for the specified table in MSCATALOG.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 234 of 387
Updating the fence filter row in MSCATALOG manually with a SQL statement works, but it is strongly discouraged. The DEFINE SEARCH or DS= commands both modify this column, but they also turn on or off the filtering operation. You can use the sample macro, hilite.bas, to highlight each element contained in a fence that meets the filter criteria. Then you can use the Change Element Attributes tool, with Use Fence on, to change the level, color, line style, or line weight of the highlighted elements. These changes can be reflected in a plot to dramatize an analysis. (To execute the macro, key in MACRO HILITE.)
Report Formatting and Output

A report table generated from within MicroStation can be formatted for output as a report using a database report writing program. Following is a brief discussion of the report writing programs available for the database products to which MicroStation offers interfaces. Oracle Oracle supports report writing both from within the standard SQL*Plus interface and with other sophisticated report writing packages. SQL*Plus supports most report writing functions. It allows you to control column layout, page size, add headers and footers, and control breaks for subtotals. You can also join tables and create summary reports. Microsoft Access Microsoft Access contains reporting tools that allow for highly customized results. Wizards provide guidance for control of data and creation of graphical charts in the standard Microsoft Access package.
Database Application Software

MicroStation Development Language (MDL) applications can be used to extend the database interface and adapt it for more specific uses. Like MDL applications that extend MicroStation functionality outside the database interface, MDL database applications can be acquired off the shelf from software publishers or they can be developed using MicroStation programming tools. In this chapter you will find some examples of types of commercially available MDL database applications. Existing Database Application Software Developing MDL Database Applications
Existing Database Application Software

Following is a list that represents typical areas that commercial MDL database applications extend the database interface:

Architectural applications for automatically generating quantity takeoffs, schedules, project file listings, and area takeoffs. Applications for associating spatial and other attributes to plotted coordinate geometry data in site plans. Applications for visualizing work space utilization. Applications for converting geographic data between coordinate systems. Applications that allow direct modification of database rows using dialog boxes. Mechanical design applications for automatically generating parts lists and position numbers and extracting details from drawings.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Developing MDL Database Applications
Page 235 of 387
MDL (MicroStation Development Language) is the primary programming interface for developing applications for MicroStation. Closely resembling ANSI-standard C, the MDL languages is a dialect of the C programming language. MDL allows developers access to all MicroStation graphic and database interface functions, as well as complete control over the graphical user interface using menus and dialog boxes. Although the fundamentals of MDL programming are beyond the scope of this guide, the sample application, gis.ma, should give you an appreciation of the potential of MDL for developing custom database applications. For general information about MDL and developing MDL applications, see The MDL Alternative in MicroStation BASIC Help.
Database Interface Reference

Database tool box Connect to Database Open Verify Linkages Open Visual Query Builder Attach Active Entity Show Linkage Mode Show Active Entity Define Active Entity Graphically VSQL Review Database Attributes of Element Review Database Attributes of Element Detach Database Linkage Attach Displayable Attributes Load Displayable Attributes Generate Report Table ACTIVE DATABASE (DB=) ACTIVE ENTITY (AE=) ACTIVE REPORT (RS=) ACTIVE REVIEW (RA=) DEFINE SEARCH (DS=) EDIT AE FIND (FI=) SESSION AUTOCOMMIT [OFF|ON] SESSION DEBUG [OFF|ON] SET DATABASE SQL SQL Window MSCATALOG dialog box Cell Link
Database tool box

The tools in the Database tool box are used to establish, review, report on, and remove database linkages and to display database attributes in displayable attribute text nodes. The Database tool box opens when Database is chosen from the Tools menu.
To
Select in the Database tool box
Open the Connect to Database dialog box. Connect to Database
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 236 of 387
Verify database linkages. Open Verify Linkage
Open the Visual Query Builder. Open Visual Query Builder
Attach the Active Entity to an element. Attach Active Entity
Display the linkage mode. Show Linkage Mode
Display the Active Entity. Show Active Entity
Set a database row as the Active Entity. Define Active Entity Graphically
Review database linkages on a VSQL element. VSQL Review Database Attributes of Element
Interactively display the database attributes of an element. Review Database Attributes of Element
Detach database rows from an element. Detach Database Linkage
Attach displayable attributes to an element. Attach Displayable Attributes
Load displayable attribute text nodes contained in a fence with data attributes. Load Displayable Attributes
Generate a report table for each table with linkages to elements in a fence. Generate Report Table
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DATABASE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 237 of 387
The following icons are hidden in the Database tool box, as delivered: Attach Active Entity, Show Linkage Mode, Show Active Entity, and Define Active Entity Graphically.
Cell Link
Applications frequently need to associate database information with cells. The Cell Link utility (celllink.ma) links a cell library with an existing database table by attaching database linkages on the headers of the library cells. As cells are placed into the design, the linkages are copied with the cells. The Linkage Mode determines whether a new row is added to the database table. The database table must have a column that contains the cell names. The column can have any name. The first linkage type in the MS_LINKTYPE configuration variable definition specifies the type of linkage for attachment. The cell library must be attached before linkages can be attached to or detached from its cells.
The utility does not assign mslink keys to rows. Every row in the table that will be linked to the cell must have an mslink key before the utility is used.
To load the Cell Link utility and open its dialog box
1. In the MDL dialog box (Utilities menu > MDL Applications), select CELLLINK in the Available Applications list box. 2. Click the Load button. OR 3. In the Key-in window, key in: MDL LOAD CELLLINK
To attach a linkage to a cell(s)
1. In the Cell Link dialog box, select the cell in the Cell Name list box. To select all cells, choose Select All Cells from the dialog box's Settings menu. 2. Click the Attach button. The Attach Linkage dialog box opens. 3. In the Tables list box, select the desired table. 4. In the Columns list box, select the column that contains the cell names. 5. Click the OK button. The list box in the Cell Link dialog box updates to reflect the newly attached linkage(s).
If the entire cell library is processed, a log file is created that lists the name of every cell in the library and the linkages present in each. The log file has the same name as the cell library with the .log extension.
To detach linkages from a cell(s)
1. In the Cell Link dialog box, select the cell in the Cell Name list box. To select all cells, choose Select All Cells from the dialog box's Settings menu. 2. Click the Detach button. An alert box opens to confirm the request. 3. Click the OK button.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 238 of 387
All linkages listed in MS_LINKTYPE are detached from the selected cell(s). The list box in the Cell Link dialog box updates to reflect this.
Cell Link dialog box

Used to link a cell library to an existing database table. Opens upon loading of the MDL application, celllink.ma.
Library
Shows the filename of the attached cell library, if any.

Cell Name (list box)
Lists the attached cell library and any database linkages present on the cells. For each linkage, the list box shows the database table and the mslink key in the linkage. Cells with multiple attached linkages are listed once for each linkage. If a cell has no linkages, the Table and mslink column are blank.
Attach
Opens the Attach Linkages dialog box, which is used to attach linkages to the selected cell(s).
Tables
Lists for selection the tables for which there are corresponding rows in MSCATALOG.
Columns
Lists for selection the columns in the selected table in the Tables list box. Select the column that contains the cell names.
OK
Accepts the selected column and attaches the linkage(s).

Cancel
Closes the dialog box without attaching any linkages.

Detach
Detaches all linkages listed in MS_LINKTYPE from the selected cell(s). An alert box is used to confirm the request.
File menu > Attach
Opens the standard Attach Cell Library dialog box. You must attach a cell library before you can attach or detach database linkages to or from cells.
Settings menu > Select All Cells
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Selects all of the cells in the Cell Name list box.
Page 239 of 387
Using DWG
MicroStation for AutoCAD Users Working with DWG Data in MicroStation Exchanging Data Using Other File Formats Exchanging Data with Other Applications
MicroStation for AutoCAD Users

User Interface and Basic Concepts Drawing and Modeling Generating Drawings and Visualization
User Interface and Basic Concepts

This chapter includes topics on the user interface and other basic concepts. Each topic lists an AutoCAD concept or command, then describes similar MicroStation commands or concepts. Color palette AutoCAD Color In MicroStation, the color palette is both balanced and changeable, as opposed to being fixed for all files. To create and save custom color tables for future use, use the Color Table dialog box (Settings > Color Table). The color tables (*.tbl) are stored by default in the "\WorkSpace\System\Data" directory. Command line AutoCAD "Command:" Prompt In MicroStation, use the Key-in window (Utilities > Key-in) to manually enter commands. You can either type in commands or select them from the full-sized Key-in window. When you select command from the list on the left, applicable options are displayed in the adjoining column. To execute the command, click on the Run Key-in icon in the top right corner, or press <Enter>. Command options are not displayed in the Key-in window; you enter them in the tool settings dialog box. MicroStation includes a set of key-ins that let you use the AutoCAD command syntax to set system variables and initiate commands. These key-ins give you the option of using either AutoCAD or MicroStation syntax. In MicroStation, there are three ways to enter AutoCAD commands and system variables:

Enter the DWG prefix, then the AutoCAD command. For example, to place a circle, enter DWG CIRCLE. Enter the command prefix as defined by the configuration variable MS_DWG_COMMANDPREFIX, then the AutoCAD command. The default prefix is the backslash character (\). For example, to place a circle, enter \CIRCLE. Enter the command prefix, then a command alias as defined in a PGP file. For example, to place a circle, enter \C (using PGP alias: C, *CIRCLE).
Command sequence A t CAD C dO ti E ti
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 240 of 387
In MicroStation, the active tool can be run multiple times without dismissing the tool settings window. Once you pick a tool, enter the tool settings, then select data points in the drawing area to complete the command. To reuse the same command, simply reenter settings and data points as many times as desired. There is no need to keep calling the command. Drafting settings AutoCAD's Snap, Grid, Ortho, Osnap, and Lineweight Status Bar Toggles In MicroStation, toggle on/off view display of optional drawing aids, element (object) properties, and certain entity classes (such as dimensions) from the Settings menu's View Attributes dialog box. Settings are applied to the window selected in the View Number list. The View Attributes dialog box has many toggles; however, Ortho and AccuSnap are not among them.
The Axis Lock setting (Settings > Locks > Full), when on, is similar Ortho mode. To toggle AccuSnap on or off, choose Settings > Snaps > AccuSnap.
Layers AutoCAD Layers In MicroStation, layers are called levels. Use the Level Manager dialog box (Settings > Level > Manager) to create and define attributes for different levels. Levels are given a name and number in a DGN file, but are only named in DWG workmode. Level Manager settings for Color, Style, Weight, Display On/Off, Freeze, and Lock globally affect all models and views in the file. MicroStation also provides symbology overrides, so elements (objects) can take on different symbology than the ByLevel state for the levels on which they are placed. Set this alternate symbology in Level Manager using the Overrides mode, and then turn on Level Overrides in the View Attributes dialog box (Settings > View Attributes). The Level Display dialog box is most commonly used to control visibility of elements on levels per view. If levels are turned on or off with the mode set to View Display, it is possible that the display setting in the Level Display dialog box and Level Manager will not match. The only other attribute controlled in the Level Display dialog box is Freeze, which is set globally in DGN workmode. When in DWG workmode, freeze can also be set by view to simulate the viewport freeze often used in AutoCAD layouts. Pay attention to the mode and target fields at the top of the Level Display dialog box when working with freeze settings. Linetypes AutoCAD Linetype Object Property In MicroStation, a line style is assigned as an entity attribute. Line styles 1 - 7 are the standard MicroStation line codes, with additional line styles available from the resource files lstyle.rsc and acadlstyle.rsc, located in the "\WorkSpace\System\Symb" directory. To view the list of available line styles or change the line styles list, use the Change Element Attributes tool or the Element Info (rmation) dialog box. To create custom modifications of the existing styles as well as new line styles, use the Line Style dialog boxes (Element > Line Style), and save the line styles to the resource file. The scale of the standard line codes is based on screen units instead of drawing units to maintain proper scaling no matter what the zoom factor. To save a file to DWG format, a scale factor must be applied to convert to drawing units. This Line Code Scale setting is found on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. To set the global line style scale in MicroStation, use the ACTIVE LINESTYLESCALE key-in or Scale Factor field in the Line Styles dialog box (Element > Line Style > Custom). The MicroStation line style definitions are store in line style libraries, which can be attached as needed to the active model. Line weight AutoCAD Line Weight, Defined in Millimeters In MicroStation, line weight is defined in pixels. When converting a DGN file to DWG, the Line Weight Scale setting on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box handles the scale factor so that display of line weights is consistent across formats. Line weight display is controlled by the View Attributes dialog box (Settings >View Attributes) To assign line weight per element use
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 241 of 387
the Change Element Attributes tool or the Element Info(rmation) dialog box. To assign line weight by level, use the Level Manager dialog box. Model space, paper space AutoCAD TILEMODE 0 and 1 A DGN file is composed of models. MicroStation uses design models and sheet models for geometry and documentation (File > Models). The DGN file format allows an unlimited number of design and sheet models into which data can be inserted as cells (blocks), references, or original geometry and annotations. New models can also be designated as cells, and thus can be inserted into other drawings and models as needed. To navigate between models, use the View Groups window docked at the lower left corner of the application window. A new view group is created by default with each new model. Mouse functions AutoCAD Right-Click, Context-Sensitive Menus In MicroStation, the mouse buttons are used to enter graphic information.
Use the left mouse button (the Data button) to select elements and commands. Clicking the left mouse button is known as "entering a data point." Use the right mouse button (the Reset button) to cancel or complete an operation. There are no right-click menus associated with the drawing area or element handles. Right-clicking in a tool box opens a tool list for hiding and showing tools. Use the middle button on a 3button mouse (the Tentative button), or the right and left buttons together on a 2button mouse, to preview snap points.
Options AutoCAD User Options In MicroStation, user preferences are stored in the user preference file *.upf, which is located in the "Home\ prefs" folder. These settings persist between sessions. You change these options through the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences). To set options that apply only to the current design file, use the DGN File Settings dialog box (Settings > Design File). System variables AutoCAD System Variables In MicroStation, system and user variables are set in the Configuration dialog box (Workspace > Configuration). Variable categories are listed on the left, and individual variables are listed on the right. When a variable is highlighted, a description appears at the bottom of the dialog box.
If the open file is a DWG file, AutoCAD system variables and their values are listed in the Element Info(rmation) dialog box in File Browse mode. These variables are DWG-specific, and there is no correspondence in the DGN format. If a DWG file is saved in DGN format, AutoCAD system variable values will not be accessible even if they were inserted in fields. Therefore, it is recommended that you not insert AutoCAD system variable values in fields in a DWG file that you expect to save to DGN format.
Template files AutoCAD *.dwt Files In MicroStation, seed files are used to establish standard file settings that you would otherwise have to enter repeatedly. The file extension remains *.dgn, and the seed files are normally stored in either the "\WorkSpace\System\Seed" or "\WorkSpace\Standards\Seed" directory. When creating a new MicroStation file, you must select the seed file in the New dialog box. The seed file determines, among other things, whether the file will be 2D or 3D.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 242 of 387
In MicroStation you can use a DWG seed to create a DWG file or a DGN seed to create a DGN file. The resulting new file is based on the seed. This applies only to the creation of a new file using the File > New command. If you select File > Save As you still create a new file but it is not based on a seed, it is based on the file being saved. When saving (converting) files from one format to another, you also use the File > Save As command. The contents of the new file are identical to the contents of the file being saved. Units settings AutoCAD DDUNITS (Format > Units) Command In MicroStation, drawing units for the current file are set under the Working Units category of the DGN File Settings dialog box (Settings > Design File). The unit settings are applied to measurements, cells, references, and dimensions. When opening a DWG file in MicroStation, the DWG Open Options dialog box contains options for units to be used in the DWG file format. The most reliable way to retrieve units from an existing DWG file is to use the Design Center Units setting for these options. View controls AutoCAD Zoom, Pan, and Orbit Commands In MicroStation, a view control bar is located at the lower left corner of each view window. These tools control update (redraw), zoom, fit (zoom extents), rotate, pan, and display style (wireframe, hidden line, etc.). View controls can be applied to one view window or to all. When a 3D file is open, additional 3D display controls are available so that solids and surfaces can be rendered in various ways. Results from the MicroStation Fit View tool can look different from the results from AutoCAD Zoom Extents. The MicroStation Fit View tool fits only visible geometry, while the AutoCAD Zoom Extents area includes layers that have display turned off. Viewports AutoCAD VPORTS Command or View Menu > Viewports In MicroStation, use Window > Views to open and close as many as eight view windows per design and sheet model. Alternatively, use the View Groups tool bar, docked below the drawing area, to toggle on or off the numbered view window. Use commands on the Window menu to tile, cascade, or arrange views. When using view attribute and visualization commands in MicroStation, you must select the view(s) to which the command is to be applied. Use Utilities > Saved Views to name and save view attributes for later use.
Drawing and Modeling

This chapter includes topics on drawing and modeling. Each topic lists an AutoCAD concept or command, then describes similar MicroStation commands or concepts. ACIS AutoCAD's 3D Modeling Kernel, ACIS MicroStation uses the Parasolid 3D Modeling kernel when solid models are incorporated into a design. However, when a DGN file containing 3D solids is saved to a DWG file, or a 3D DWG file is opened in MicroStation, the ACIS kernel is used to ensure accuracy and compatibility. Blocks AutoCAD Block Definitions
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 243 of 387
In MicroStation, shared cells, which are similar to AutoCAD blocks, are used to insert predefined data blocks into a drawing. A shared cell can have many instances, but only one definition is stored in the DGN file. An unshared (normal) cell inserts the full definition each time the cell is placed. Thus, shared cells make cell replacement easier and the file size smaller. Since any *.dgn or *.cel file can be used as a cell library, you can create an empty file to store cells. When cells are created, they are defined as either graphic or point cells. A graphic cell assumes the symbology from the elements contained within, while a point cell assumes the active symbology at the time it was inserted. Coordinate entry AutoCAD's Command Line Coordinate Entry for precise location of points In MicroStation, use AccuDraw for precise drafting of geometry. To toggle AccuDraw on and off, click on the AccuDraw icon (compass) on the Primary Tools tool bar. To customize the AccuDraw operation and display, use the AccuDraw Settings dialog box (Settings > AccuDraw) . By using AccuDraw along with AccuSnap functions, you can develop an efficient and precise drawing technique. Once AccuDraw and a drawing command are active, enter an initial data point, then the distances or angles to set the next point according to the compass displayed. The compass is either square or circular, depending on whether a rectangular or polar coordinate system is being used. These are some of the many useful AccuDraw shortcuts:
Shortcut O X Y Space Bar V RX, RY, RZ Use Origin - Resets AccuDraw's origin to the current pointer location, or tentative snap point. Locks the X-coordinate at its currently displayed value, like a point filter. Locks the Y coordinate at its currently displayed value, like a point filter. Changes from rectangular to polar coordinates. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the view axes. Rotates the drawing plane around the X, Y, or Z axis.
Tentative Snap Point When a snap point is indicated, select middle mouse button or both left and right buttons together.
Explode AutoCAD Explode Command In MicroStation, use the tools in the Drop tool box (Tools > Drop) to break elements into simpler components. The Drop Element tool is for general usage. It operates one level (layer) at a time, so that some elements must be dropped more than once. The tool box also includes specific drop commands for specific element types. External references AutoCAD XREFs In MicroStation, external files attached to the current drawing file are called references. The References dialog box (References icon in the Primary Tools tool box, or File > Reference) contains all the commands for attaching and operating on references. Grips AutoCAD's Selected-Object Grips In MicroStation, when an element is selected, handles appear. These handles can be used to stretch an element (object). To turn off handle display, turn on Disable Handles in the Element Selection settings window. Handles do not have associated right-click menus, and they cannot be used to move the element. To drag the element, enter a data point away from the handles, and move the pointer to the desired location. Hatch AutoCAD BHatch Command
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 244 of 387
In MicroStation, the Hatch Area tool generates a fill pattern of slanted lines at a defined angle and spacing. This tool does not have an associated palette of patterns. Any variation on the slanted lines is called an area pattern, and is generated by the Pattern Area tool. With Pattern Area, a cell from the current attached library is selected as the pattern to repeat. Pay close attention to the modes of application for repeated patterns displayed in the Method list on the dialog box. Both fill pattern tools are available from the Patterns task. Object selection AutoCAD Implied Windowing In MicroStation, you can designate selection sets before operating on elements (objects). To select elements:
Use the Element Selection tool (pointer) to select an individual element, or select the tools and drag a rectangle (window) around multiple elements. While selecting elements, hold the <CTRL> key to add elements to a selection set or deselect an alreadyselected element. Use the Place Fence tool. A fence is a persistent window where you can set the shape and determine which elements are included, such as those completely inside the fence, overlapping, etc. Use a named graphic group of elements. With named groups, you can select multiple elements to be included, as well as control whether changes are propagated across the group or individually.
To use a selection set with a command
1. Select elements with a window or fence, and add to a group if desired. 2. Select a tool (for example, Move Element). 3. In the tool setting box, turn on Use Fence if appropriate. 4. Follow the prompts to complete the command.
Once you select the (Move Element) tool, there is no implied windowing to allow you to select multiple elements. To operate on only one element, first select the command, then the element.
Object snaps AutoCAD OSnap and Tracking In MicroStation, use AccuSnap to select precise points on drawing geometry. When active (AccuSnap is on by default) , a yellow "X" highlights over elements and keypoints. Although there is no element (object) snap tracking in MicroStation, when AccuDraw is active, the cursor tracks to an axis on the AccuDraw compass (typically X or Y). The AccuSnap headings and toggle can be found under Settings > Snap > AccuSnap. Offset AutoCAD Offset Command In MicroStation, use the Move/Copy Parallel tool to move or copy an element parallel to the original. Overlay AutoCAD Overlay Type of Reference Attachment In MicroStation, you create an overlay-type of file attachment by selecting the Ignore Attachment when Live Nesting setting in the Attachment Settings dialog box. MicroStation allows close control of reference file nesting, including options for setting nest depth, no nesting, and an overlay equivalent. These settings allow you to precisely select the data that is displayed when referenced files are nested, sometimes several levels deep.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To create the equivalent of an overlay in MicroStation
Page 245 of 387
1. Click the References icon in the Primary Tools tool box. 2. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon in the tool bar. The Attach Reference dialog box opens. 3. Select the desired file to overlay on the current file, then click Open. 4. In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, click on the Options button. 5. In the Attachment Settings dialog box, turn on Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting, then click OK. 6. Enter the remaining reference settings, then click OK.
If this drawing file is attached to another file as a reference and thus becomes a child rather than a parent file, the overlay will not be displayed.
There is also an option for creating overlays when saving files in DWG format.
To create overlays when saving a DGN file to DWG
1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 2. From the Save As Type option menu, choose AutoCAD Drawing Files (*.dwg). 3. Click on the Options button. The Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box opens. 4. Under the General tab, click on References. 5. Turn on Create Overlays for Reference Attachments (No Live Nesting). Properties AutoCAD Properties Window In MicroStation, the Element Information tool on the Primary Tools tool bar provides feedback for a selected element's general attributes and properties, as well as more detailed information. The information on the General tab, including level, color, style, weight, and class, can be modified in the dialog box; however, dimension styles and text styles cannot be modified here. User coordinate systems AutoCAD UCS Command In MicroStation, coordinate systems other than the file's default orientation and origin are called Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS). You define an ACS through the ACS tool box using an element, points, or a view. The ACS triad is turned off and on from the View Attributes dialog box (Settings > View Attributes). To save and name auxiliary coordinate systems, use the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box (Utilities > Auxiliary Coordinates).
Generating Drawings and Visualization

This section includes topics on generating drawings and visualization. Each topic lists an AutoCAD concept or command, then describes similar MicroStation commands or concepts. Attributes
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
AutoCAD Block Attributes (ATTDEF command)
Page 246 of 387
In MicroStation, tags are used to assign labels to drawing entities. These non-graphical annotation objects can then be used to generate various reports in comma-delimited, ASCII tables. Tags can be placed independently, associated with an element, or incorporated into a cell. To use tags, you must first define a tag set, then the tag. If tags are used in drawings that will be converted to DWG format, or if they are assigned in DWG workmode, they must be incorporated into shared cells. To do this, first create the shared cell, then use the Attach Tags tool to attach the tag to the existing cell. In standard MicroStation, tags can be incorporated into shared or normal cells by simply selecting them with the other elements before creating the cell. MicroStation users also frequently use Enter Data Fields for variable text placeholders. These fields are defined by using a designated character (generally the underscore, as defined in the Text preferences) when entering new text in the text editor. With this technique, both constant and variable text can be included in the same text element. For example, an enter data field might appear as "Part Number_ _ _ - _ _". Once the enter data field is created, use either the Fill in Single Enter Data Field or Automatic Fill-In Enter Data Fields tool to fill in the enter data field(s) in the text element. For more information, see Tags. Dimensioning AutoCAD DimLinear, Dimradius, DimStyle etc. Commands
Assigning linear dimensions
Use the Element Dimensioning tool to place dimensions on multiple element types (lines, circles, arcs, etc.). Use the Linear Dimensioning tool's Linear Size mode to dimension part of an element.
Assigning angular dimensions
The Angular Dimensioning tool's Angle Between Lines mode is the most straightforward tool for dimensioning the angle between two straight lines. For dimensioning angle size when elements are not necessarily linear, use the tool's Angle Size mode.
Assigning radial dimensions
Use the Element Dimensioning tool to assign radius or diameter dimensions to circles and arc elements. The mode icon selection in the tool settings determines the type of dimension to be applied.
Setting up dimension style
The Dimension Styles dialog box (Element > Dimension Styles) controls dimension style. For each category on the left, enter the desired dimension settings on the right, then save the style with its own name. Set the dimension settings and active dimension style before assigning any dimensions to the drawing. For details, see Dimension Styles and Settings.
Modifying dimensions
To change the location of a dimension while maintaining its association and value, choose the Modify Dimension Location tool. This tool allows stretching of the extension lines. To change the text associated with a dimension, use the Edit Text tool. Fonts MicroStation supports three types of fonts: traditional MicroStation fonts, TrueType fonts, and AutoCAD shape fonts (*.shx). The available fonts are located in the operating system \fonts directory, the MicroStation \WorkSpace\System\Symb directory in the default font.rsc file, and in the AutoCAD install \fonts directory. The active font is determined by the current text style (Element > Text Styles), and several different text styles can be defined within a design file. All available fonts of the three types listed above are displayed in the Text Styles dialog box. The active Text Style applies to l dt t t ti t d th l tt th t t t
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 247 of 387
The native MicroStation fonts are not compatible with the DWG file format. If a DGN file is saved to DWG, the fonts are converted to *.shx fonts and stored in the AutoCAD install \fonts directory.
To place text using a specific font
1. In the Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles) create and name a new text style. 2. From the General tab on the Text Styles dialog box, click the Font row, Value column. 3. From the list, select the new font for the text style.
The list of available fonts includes the MicroStation, TrueType, and AutoCAD fonts available on your system.
4. Save the text style as the active text style. 5. Use the Place Text tool to select the text style and enter text. 6. Enter a data point to place the text and preview the font. Layouts AutoCAD Paper Space Layouts In MicroStation, sheet models are used for storing drawing layouts. To begin the process of documenting a design, you first create a new sheet model. Next, to create a layout within the sheet model, you attach referenced views of the main model showing the desired viewpoints and data (use the References tool in the Primary Tools tool box). These views are often self-references, which means that the current file is referenced into itself. Note that when self-referencing a model in the current file, the first open view is displayed. Layout drawing views can also come from any other design file containing pertinent information (see Drawing Composition). Plot style tables AutoCAD *.ctb and *.stb Plot Style Tables Open the Print dialog box (File > Print) to make pen assignments using pen tables. Tables can be imported, created, attached, and modified through the PenTable menu. Rendering AutoCAD RENDER Command In MicroStation, rendering tools are available from the Visualization task, and rendering settings are available from the Settings > Rendering menu. The rendering tools include lights, cameras, and materials. To render 3D images, select the render tool, then the view, fence, or element to which the rendering is to be applied. The render mode is analogous to the modes found in the Set View Display Mode view control. The Apply Material tool provides two methods for assigning materials to a solid. The Assign Color/Level method assigns a material to the color and level of the selected solid. All other solids that match the color and level settings will be assigned the same material. The Attach Attribute method applies materials to individual solids. Also in the Apply Material dialog, double-clicking on the preview sphere for a material opens the Material Editor dialog box, where you can set ambient lighting defaults and many other material-based attributes. The mode setting is used for modifying or removing assigned materials.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Introduction to Working with DWG Data Working in DWG Workmode Saving to DWG Files Working with DWG Files Sharing DGN and DWG Data Using AutoCAD Commands in MicroStation Troubleshooting
Page 248 of 387
Introduction to Working with DWG Data

In a project environment, engineering information from different applications often must be shared. It is not uncommon for parts of projects to be created in MicroStation DGN files and other parts in AutoCAD DWG/DXF format files. MicroStation makes it easy to share data because you can work directly in both the MicroStation DGN and the AutoCAD DWG/DXF file formats. The DGN and DWG file formats The V8 DGN file format is MicroStation's native file format. MicroStation also reads and writes files in the AutoCAD DWG format. When a DGN file containing DGN-specific entities not understood by AutoCAD is saved in MicroStation as a DWG file, these entities are automatically converted to DWG-compatible entities so that they can be displayed properly in AutoCAD. MicroStation supports all DWG entity types and objects from AutoCAD 2006 and earlier. The following AutoCAD entities and objects introduced in AutoCAD versions 2007 and 2008 are supported as read-only:

materials and lights annotative objects multi-leaders multi-line attributes layer viewport overrides column mtexts
The DXF file format is an ASCII text representation of the DWG format. DXF is an interchange format historically used to exchange data between AutoCAD and other applications. You work with DXF data in MicroStation in the same manner as DWG data. DWG is preferable because its compact binary representation results in smaller files. For the remainder of this topic, the term DWG refers to both DWG and DXF files.
Strategies for working with DWG data To work with DWG data in MicroStation, you can:

work primarily in DGN files, then deliver DWG files work in a mixed DGN/DWG environment work exclusively with DWG files
The strategy that you choose depends on the type of data that you start with, how the data will be modified, and the format in which the data must be delivered.
Working with DGN files, then delivering DWG files
i h h Mi
DGN fil f
h fi
d li
bl
b i DWG f
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 249 of 387
situations, you may have a legacy DGN file that you need to convert to a DWG file. If you do not need to exchange data with a DWG user for editing, the most effective strategy is to work in the DGN file, then save to a DWG file. There are two ways to work with DGN files that will be saved to DWG: DGN workmode or DWG workmode.
Working in DGN workmode
When you open a DGN file, MicroStation automatically selects the DGN workmode. Using this workmode, you can complete your design work using the full capabilities of MicroStation. Once you have finished changes to your design, you can use the Batch Converter utility or Save As to save to a DWG file. Once you save to a DWG file or switch to the DWG workmode, you lose the ability to work with many advanced MicroStation capabilities such as Design History, level libraries, custom line styles, custom area patterns containing splines and cells, and clip masking of reference views. When you save a DGN file that uses these features to a DWG file, the entities will be displayed correctly in AutoCAD, although you may need to use the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box to refine how the data will be converted to DWG. In some cases, the Batch Converter/Save As process drops the complex element definitions for these entities, and displays them simply as objects. To work effectively in a DGN file that will ultimately be saved to a DWG file, you need to understand the differences in the way that some types of data are defined in the DGN versus the DWG format, and adjust your design methods accordingly. For example, DWG files allow only one design model (model space), but DGN files allow multiple design models. To make conversion from DGN to DWG format easier, therefore, you should use only one design model in your DGN file. You also need to know how to adjust the Save As DWG/DXF Options for maximum effectiveness. For example, if your DGN file contains multiple design models, you can set options that determine how these models will be saved to DWG files.
General Procedure Working with a DGN file, then saving to a DWG file
1. Start with a DGN file. You can open an existing DGN file, or create one. 2. Develop your design in the DGN file. 3. Use the Batch Converter utility to convert the DGN file to a DWG file. Set options to control how the DGN data will be saved to DWG format.
Optionally, you can choose File > Save As to save one DGN file to DWG format.
Working in DWG workmode
Another strategy for working with DGN files that will be saved to DWG format is to work on the DGN file with DWG workmode enabled. The DWG workmode restricts many functions to ensure that you create design data that is fully compatible with the DWG format. However, using DWG workmode does not ensure that existing DGN data is compatible. For example, if you open a new DGN file and enable the DWG workmode, you can only create one design model, since the DWG format only allows one model (model space) in a file. If you open an existing DGN file with multiple design models, then switch to the DWG workmode, the design models are still part of the file. In this case, you need to use the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box to define how the design models will be saved to DWG files.
Working a mixed DGN/DWG environment
MicroStation supports a mixed file format environment, which means that you can use DGN and DWG data in project files simultaneously. DWG files can stay in DWG format, and DGN files can stay in DGN format. Typically, you might maintain the main design file in MicroStation, but have project subcontractors who provide their portion of the project in DWG format. In this case, DWG files can be attached as references, used in supplementary models, or inserted as cells. Additional DGN files, such as specification drawings, can also be incorporated. The main design would always contain a mix of DGN and DWG data, with no translation ever taking place.
Working exclusively with DWG files
In some situations, you may need to work directly with the DWG files in MicroStation, rather than converting them to DGN files. This strategy is most effective if you plan to continually exchange DWG files with an AutoCAD user throughout the life cycle of the project. For example, assume that you are a MicroStation user who has been assigned a project on which you must collaborate closely with an
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 250 of 387
AutoCAD user. You receive DWG files from this collaborator, work on them in MicroStation, return the modified versions back to the collaborator for review and revision, and receive them back for further editing. At the end of the project, you deliver a DWG file that conforms to a set of project standards. By directly opening the DWG file in MicroStation, which automatically enables DWG workmode, you ensure that all the data that you generate is fully compatible with the DWG file format. However, while it is convenient to work directly with the DWG file, one drawback is that you cannot use some of MicroStation's advanced functionality such as Design History or 3D surface modeling tools.
In this scenario you might consider converting the DWG files to DGN format before working on them, then saving them back to DWG format for delivery. This is known as round-tripping files, and is not a recommended workflow due to problems with round-tripping data.
General Procedure Working with DWG files in MicroStation
1. Start with a DWG file. You can open an existing DWG file, or create one in MicroStation.
If the final DWG file output must conform to certain standards, ask the client to supply a template DWG file containing the required layer configuration, dimension style, text style, units, and linetype settings. You can then use this as a DWG seed file to ensure that your work is compliant with your client's standards.
2. Work with your models in the DWG file.

The Sharing DGN and DWG data topic includes information on how the DGN and DWG file formats handle specific types of data such as references and element attributes.
Problems with round-tripping data
To share design data, you may want to round-trip your data by opening a DWG file, converting it to a DGN file, then saving it back to a DWG file. However, every time that you save the file to a different format, the entire file is rewritten, not just the changes that were made to the design. If the file contains product-specific information such as AutoCAD proxy objects, this information will be lost. For this reason, round-tripping is not recommended. In AutoCAD, proxy objects are non-native objects that are inserted into DWG files by third-party programs such as a landscaping package, mapping utility, or other industry-specific program. Although AutoCAD may not fully understand the definition of the proxy objects, it can often display them correctly even if the third party program is unavailable. MicroStation can also display a DWG file proxy object, provided the object's definition contains sufficient display information. As long as the file stays in DWG format, MicroStation simply displays but otherwise ignores the proxy objects while the file is being modified. However, if the DWG file is saved to a DGN file, the proxy objects are lost. To retain AutoCAD proxy objects, you can open the DWG file, modify it using DWG workmode, then save it as a DWG file. Planning your project The way that you handle DWG data in MicroStation depends on a number of factors. Here are some questions that will help you to choose whether to work primarily with the DGN or DWG file format in MicroStation, and to choose between DGN and DWG workmodes:

What is the required file format for the final project deliverables: DGN, DWG, or both? What percentage of the files used in the project will be DGN files versus DWG files? Who will be primarily responsible for modifying and assembling the files: the MicroStation or AutoCAD users? Are there downstream or add-on applications that require either the DGN or DWG format, such as TriForma, third party product data management software, or presentation software? Are there advanced MicroStation functions that will facilitate the completion of the project, such as custom line styles, Design History, reference masking? Will the project files go through revisions where they return to MicroStation users repeatedly for revisions or changes?
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The answers to these revision cycle and formatting questions should help you clarify the strategy to use for your project.
Page 251 of 387
Working in DWG Workmode

DWG workmode is a working environment within MicroStation specifically adapted to the editing and reviewing of DWG files. DWG workmode is automatically enabled when a DWG file is opened. In DWG workmode, some advanced MicroStation functionality is disabled to ensure that you do not create DWG-incompatible features. This topic describes how to work in DWG workmode. MicroStation functions in DWG workmode The following table identifies how MicroStation functionality works in DWG workmode.
Functionality 3D modeling Annotating with flags Area patterning Status in DWG Workmode 3D elements are placed only as ACIS bodies, and the Parasolid modeling engine is disabled. Because most of the 3D modeling tools work equally well with either kernel, this setting is transparent. The Annotate tool box tools for placing and editing flags are disabled. Area patterning is replaced by AutoCAD hatching. Cells have the following limitations: Cells

Only shared cells are allowed. When you use library cells, they are placed as shared cells only. New cells must be created in cell libraries that are .DGN or .CEL files. You cannot create new cells in a .DWG file that is attached as a cell library.
Colors Complex elements Design History Dimension-driven design Dimensioning Element class Grid orientation Importing raster images Line styles Models Raster data handling References
AutoCAD uses a standard color table for all files, rather than allowing custom color tables as in MicroStation. The colors used for displaying the DWG files in MicroStation match AutoCAD's display colors exactly. MicroStation and AutoCAD both use a slightly different set of colors for printing DWG files. Spline curves are not used as part of a complex chain or complex shape. Design history is disabled. Dimension-driven design tools are disabled. Many MicroStation settings and styles are not supported. The active class is set to primary, and cannot be changed. The grid is aligned with a Top view so that it extends along the X and Y axes from the global origin. The Intergraph raster images, Sun raster, procedural application files, Georeferenced TIFF files, and Img files cannot be imported. Line styles 1-7 are disabled, and only custom line styles are allowed. DWG files allow only one design model and multiple sheet models. Some Raster Manager capabilities are not supported. The active model cannot be self-referenced. A reference cannot be clipped by mask. The following are disabled:
creating a saved view for sheet models applying a saved view to sheet models deleting a saved view from sheet models editing properties of a saved view for sheet models
Saved Views
Symbology Tags Text fonts
Element symbology overrides are disabled. All elements are displayed with ByLevel symbology (they use the attributes of the level). Tags are attached only to shared cells. *.SHX and TrueType fonts are supported.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
View Groups View window background color View groups cannot be created, deleted, or modified.
Page 252 of 387
The Black Background -> White setting in the View Options category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences) is disabled. To change the display for models and layouts of DWG files, select the color in the DWG Open Options dialog box.
Setting the workmode to DWG When you are working in a DGN file, the default workmode is DGN. You can also manually set the workmode to DWG. To change the workmode, define the workmode configuration variable MS_WORKMODE. This configuration variable can be set at the user, project, or system level. While DWG workmode is enabled, an icon displays in the status bar. The icon depicts a white crosshair on a blue background.
Setting the workmode (user configuration)
User-level configuration variable settings take precedence over all other level settings.
To set the DWG workmode (user configuration)
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the View/Modify All Configuration Variables list box, select MS_WORKMODE. 3. Click Edit. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 4. In the New Value field, type: DWG 5. To close the Edit Configuration Variable dialog box, click OK. The focus returns to the Configuration dialog box. 6. From the File menu of the Configuration dialog box, choose Save. 7. To close the Configuration dialog box, click OK. 8. Exit and restart MicroStation.
Setting the workmode (project configuration)
Although you can set the workmode in each user configuration file, it may be more efficient to set the variable at the project level. For some users, the DWG delivery requirement affects all files in the entire project. For this reason, editing the project configuration file (*.pcf) ensures that DWG workmode is used for a given project.
General Procedure Setting the project workmode to DWG
1. (Optional) Use the MicroStation Manager to create a new project. When you create a new project, a project configuration file (*.pcf) is automatically created in the Workspace directory. 2. Set DWG workmode in the project configuration file. 3. (Optional) Edit the user configuration file (*.ucf) to associate a user to the project.
To set the project to DWG workmode
1. Using a text editor, open the *.pcf (project configuration) file. 2. Add the following line to the configuration file: MS_WORKMODE=DWG 3. Save the .pcf and exit the text editor.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To associate a user to the DWG project
Page 253 of 387
1. Using a text editor, open the appropriate *.ucf (user configuration) file. This file can be found in the Workspace directory. 2. Add the following line to the configuration file: _USTN_PROJECT_NAME=projectfilename where projectfilename is the name of a project that was set to DWG workmode. 3. Save and close the *.ucf file. The next time that a user starts MicroStation, the project will be the one that was defined above. Enabling and disabling workmode capabilities In addition to setting a workmode, you can use a configuration file to control the capabilities (functions) that are enabled or disabled in a specific workmode. The "workmode.cfg" file describes the syntax that you can use to control various capabilities. The capability variables are listed in the "capability.list" file. The default location for these files is "..\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\config\system\".
Do not edit either "workmode.cfg" or "capability.list" in the default location because they will be overwritten when the system is upgraded or reinstalled. Instead, you should copy the contents of "workmode.cfg" to a configuration file of your choice. To make the changes effective company-wide, copy the contents to the standards configuration file. To make the changes effective for a project, copy the contents to the project's configuration file. To make the changes effective for a user, copy the contents to the user's configuration file. Alternatively, you can copy the file to a user location and add the include comment (include workspace/standards/myworkmode.cfg) to the "standards.cfg" file.
Within a configuration file, a capability may be enabled or disabled using the following syntax: <WORKMODE VARIABLE> <Operator> <Prefix> <CAPABILITY_NAME> where:
<WORKMODE VARIABLE> sets the workmode for the file. For example, _USTN_CAPABILITY means that the capability variable applies to all workmodes, including V8 and DWG. <Operator> appends (>) or prepends (<) the capability variable value to the workmode variable. <Prefix> indicates whether the function is to be enabled (+) or disabled (-). <CAPABILITY_NAME> is the name of the function to be enabled or disabled.
To enable or disable a function using a configuration file
1. Using a text editor, copy the contents of the "workmode.cfg" file to another configuration file (for example, "WorkSpace\Standards\standards.cfg"). 2. To enable or disable a function in the configuration file, add a line that uses the following syntax: <WORKMODE VARIABLE> <Operator> <Prefix> <CAPABILITY_NAME> For example, to allow the creation of levels in all workmodes, key in: _USTN_CAPABILITY < + CAPABILITY_LEVELS_CREATE To disable the ability to enter level description in DWG workmode, key in: _USTN_CAPABILITY_DWG < CAPABILITY_LEVEL_DESCRIPTION
Workmode.cfg syntax
The "workmode.cfg" file contains lists of workmode variables, operators, and prefixes. It also provides details about the file syntax. The capability variables are listed in the "capability.list" file.
Workmode variables
The following workmode variables can be set:

Workmode Variable Description
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
_USTN_CAPABILITY the capability applies in all workmodes
Page 254 of 387
_USTN_CAPABILITY_DGN the capability applies in V8 workmode only _USTN_CAPABILITY_DWG the capability applies only in DWG workmode _USTN_CAPABILITY_V7 Operators the capability applies only in V7 workmode
To define configuration variables, you can use the following operators:

Operator Description Append the capability variable value to the workmode variable settings. > For example: _USTN_CAPABILITY > +CAPABILITY_PARASOLID Prepend the capability variable value to the workmode variable settings. For example: < _USTN_CAPABILITY < CAPABILITY_RASTER_BACKGROUND Do not use the = operator. Using = after the initial definition will override any previous definition, which may result in undesirable or unpredictable behavior.
Prefixes
Use the following prefixes to enable or disable capability variables:

Prefix + Description Enable the capability variable. Disable the capability variable. Capability variables
The following capabilities can be enabled or disabled:

Capability Variable CAPABILITY_ALLOW_NON_SHX_STYLES CAPABILITY_BSPLINE_DISPLAY_CONTROL CAPABILITY_BYCELL CAPABILITY_BYLEVEL CAPABILITY_CELLLIB_ALLOWUPGRADEV7 CAPABILITY_CELLPATTERN CAPABILITY_CELLS_ATTRIBUTE_CHANGES CAPABILITY_COLOR_SHOW_BOOKTAB CAPABILITY_COLOR_SHOW_GRADIENTTAB CAPABILITY_COLOR_SHOW_INDEXEDTAB CAPABILITY_COLOR_SHOW_TRUECOLORTAB CAPABILITY_COLORTABLE CAPABILITY_CREATE_COMPOUND_STYLE CAPABILITY_CREATE_POINT_STYLE CAPABILITY_CURVE_IN_CMPLXCH CAPABILITY CUSTOM KEYPOINTS Description If enabled, allows non-SHX fonts and styles to be used. If disabled, allows only line styles with symbols that contain SHX fonts or text styles to be used, which ensures full DWG compatibility. When disabled, line style usage is limited so that no additional shapes need to be created when writing a DWG file. Allows by-element control of B-spline curve/surface/polygon display. Allows ByCell settings for elements. Allows ByLevel settings for elements. Allows V7 cell libraries to be upgraded. Allows MicroStation cell patterns or AutoCAD named patterns to be used. Allows sub-component attributes to be modified. Shows the book color tab on the color picker. Shows the gradient color tab on the color picker. Shows the index color tab on the color picker. Shows the true color tab on the color picker. Allows color table to be attached. If enabled, allows a compound style to be created in the Line Style Editor. If disabled, a compound style cannot be created, which ensures DWG compatibility. If enabled, allows a point style to be created in the Line Style Editor. If disabled, a point style cannot be created, which ensures DWG compatibility. Allows curves in complex chain/shape. Allows custom keypoints.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
CAPABILITY_DDDESIGN CAPABILITY_DEFAULT_FONTS CAPABILITY_DGN_BLOCKS CAPABILITY_DGNLINK_MULTILINKS_PER_ELEM CAPABILITY_DGNLINK_NONDGN_REGIONLINKS CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_ALT_LABEL CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_ARBITRARY CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_ARC_ABOVE CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_ARC_LENGTH CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_BALLNCHAIN CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_CAPSULE_FRAME CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_CELLTERM_HEIGHT CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_CUSTOM_PREFIX CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_CUSTOM_SYMBOLS CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_DIMLINE_LEVEL CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_FONT CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_LSTYLE_OVERRIDE CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_METRIC_FORMAT CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_MINIMUM_LEADER CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_NEG_EXTOFFSET CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_NOSTYLE CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_SECONDARY_ZEROS CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TERM_ATTRIBS CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TERM_FIRST CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TERM_JOINT CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TERM_SIDES CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TERM_SYMBOL CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TEXT_HEIGHT_SCALE CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TEXT_MARGIN CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TEXT_WEIGHT CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TEXT_WIDTH CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_TOL_MARGINS CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_UNDERLINE_TEXT CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_UNIT_FORMAT CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_UNIT_LABEL CAPABILITY_DIMENSION_WORKING_UNITS CAPABILITY_DIMSTYLE_REQUIRESTANDARD CAPABILITY_DWGINCOMPATIBLE_LINESTYLES CAPABILITY_ELEMENT_ASSOCIATION CAPABILITY_ELEMENT_CLASS CAPABILITY_ELEMENT_LOCK CAPABILITY_GRAPHIC_GROUP CAPABILITY_GRID_ORIENTATION CAPABILITY_IGDS_LINESTYLE CAPABILITY_INVISGEOM_BYELEMENT CAPABILITY_LARGE_DESIGN_PLANE CAPABILITY_LEVEL_LIBRARY_ATTACH CAPABILITY LEVEL LIBRARY DETACH Allows dimension driven design. Allows default font.rsc to be used.
Page 255 of 387
If enabled, all DGN files with one model are treated as blocks. The file name becomes the model name. Allows you to add more than one link to an element in a DWG file. In DWG files, allows you to add links to headings in Microsoft Word documents, to individual sheets in Excel spreadsheets, and to bookmarks in Word documents and Adobe PDFs. Allows alternate labeling for dimensions. Allows a dimension to be aligned at an arbitrary position. Allows an arc symbol above an angular text display for dimensions. Allows an arc length format for an angular dimension. Allows the ball and chain curve type at all dimension terminators. Allows a capsule frame to be used around dimension text. Allows cell terminators for dimensions to have different width and height. Allows custom prefixes and suffixes for dimensions. Allows custom diameter and plus/minus symbols for dimensions. Allows dimension lines to be placed on selected levels. If enabled, allows font and text style options for dimensions. If disabled, only the style option is used. Allows line style overrides for dimensions. Allows unit separation for dimensions at thousandth and millionth. Allows minimum leader beyond dimension terminator to be changed. Allows a negative value for dimension extension line offset. Allows Style (none) to be used as the active dimension style. Allows separate leading/training zeros for a secondary dimension. Allows dimensions terminator symbology. Allows the first terminator type for consecutive dimensions. Allows the joint terminator type for consecutive dimensions. Allows terminator to be inside/outside/reversed. Allows the terminator character symbol. Allows text height and annotation scale overrides if the text style has a non-zero text height. Allows separate text margins for left of and above dimension line. Allows dimension text weight to be specified. Allows text width overrides. Allows dimension tolerance text to set left and lower margins. Allows underlined text for a dimension. Allows the master units format for dimensions to be changed. Allows master units labels to be set for dimensions. Allows the use of working units. If enabled, style Standard or the last named style cannot be deleted. If enabled, all line styles are displayed in the list of available line styles. If disabled, allows only line styles that can be exported to DWG files to be displayed in the list of the available line styles. Allows lines, multi-lines, and cells to be associated with elements. Allows element class to be set. Allows locking elements. Allows graphic groups. Allows a grid orientation display to be set. Allows 17 IGDS line styles to be used. Allows invisible geometry display to be controlled by element. Allows elements to extend beyond the (4Bx4B) V7 design plane. Allows a level library to be attached from the Level Manager. Allows a level library to be detached from the Level Manager
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
CAPABILITY_LEVEL_PLOT CAPABILITY_LEVELS_ALLOW_CREATE CAPABILITY_LEVELS_ALLOW_DELETE CAPABILITY_LEVELS_CREATE CAPABILITY_LEVELS_DESCRIPTION CAPABILITY_LEVELS_ELEMENT_ACCESS CAPABILITY_LEVELS_GLOBALDISPLAY CAPABILITY_LEVELS_GLOBALFREEZE CAPABILITY_LEVELS_NUMBERS CAPABILITY_LEVELS_OVERRIDE_SYMBOLOGY CAPABILITY_LEVELS_OVERRIDES_PER_LEVEL CAPABILITY_LEVELS_PRIORITY CAPABILITY_LEVELS_TRANSPARENCY CAPABILITY_LEVELS_UNUSED CAPABILITY_LEVELS_VIEWDISPLAY CAPABILITY_LEVELS_VPFREEZE CAPABILITY_LINESTYLE_CREATE_STDTXT CAPABILITY_LINESTYLE_CREATE_TEXTSTYLE CAPABILITY_LINESTYLE_SCALEDWIDTH CAPABILITY_MASK_CLIP CAPABILITY_MODEL_ANNOTATION_SCALE CAPABILITY_MODEL_ANNOTATION_SCALE_LOCK CAPABILITY_MODEL_CHANGE_TYPE CAPABILITY_MODEL_CREATE_2D CAPABILITY_MODEL_CREATE_3D CAPABILITY_MODEL_CREATE_DESIGN CAPABILITY_MODEL_CREATE_SHEET CAPABILITY_MODEL_DELETE_DESIGN CAPABILITY_MODEL_DELETE_LAST_DESIGN CAPABILITY_MODEL_DELETE_LAST_SHEET CAPABILITY_MODEL_DELETE_SHEET CAPABILITY_MODEL_EDIT_PROPERTIES_DESIGN CAPABILITY_MODEL_EDIT_PROPERTIES_SHEET CAPABILITY_MODEL_WITHOUT_VIEWGROUP CAPABILITY_MULTILINE_ALLOW_ACTIVE CAPABILITY_MULTILINE_CAPSYMBOLOGY CAPABILITY_MULTILINE_LINESTYLEMODS CAPABILITY_MULTILINE_NOSTYLE CAPABILITY_MULTILINE_REQUIRESTANDARDSTYLE CAPABILITY_MULTILINE_WEIGHTS CAPABILITY_NAMED_GROUPS CAPABILITY_NOTE_ALL_FRAME_TYPES CAPABILITY_NOTE_ELBOWLENGTH CAPABILITY_NOTE_FRAME_SCALE CAPABILITY_NOTE_LEFTMARGIN CAPABILITY_NOTE_LOWERMARGIN CAPABILITY_NOTE_MANUALATTACHMENT CAPABILITY_NOTE_MANUALJUSTIFICATION CAPABILITY_NOTE_VERTICAL_LINE
Page 256 of 387

Allows plot control of levels. A Plot column is added in the Level Manager. Allows level creation. This applies only if CAPABILITY_LEVELS_CREATE is not disabled. Allows levels to be deleted. This applies only if CAPABILITY_LEVELS_CREATE is not disabled. Allows level creation and deletion. Allows level descriptions to be used in Level Manager. Controls whether the level system allows changes to the lock property of a level. Allows levels to be turned on and off using global display. Allows levels to be turned on and off using global freeze. Allows level numbers to be used in Level Manager/Level Display. Allows symbology overrides to be set from the Level Manager. Allows symbology overrides to be set on a per-level basis. Controls whether the level system allows changes to the priority property of a level. Controls whether the level system allows changes to the transparency property of a level. Allows levels to be unused. Controls whether the level system allows changes to the pre-view-display property of a level. Allows access to Viewport Freeze settings in DGN workmode, if applicable. On by default. Creates text style Standard when importing LIN files, if needed. Off by default. When importing LIN files, creates an necessary text styles as copies of Standard. For DWG, enforces that all line styles use True Width, so scaled width is disabled. Allows image clipping (reference or raster). Allows use of the model's annotation scale. Allows use of the model's annotation scale lock. Allows model type to be changed. Allows 2D models to be created. Allows 3D models to be created. Allows DGN models to be created. Allows sheet models to be created. Allows design models to be deleted. Allows the last design model to be deleted. Allows the last sheet model to be deleted. Allows the sheet model to be deleted. Allows properties of design models to be edited. Allows properties of sheet models to be edited. Allows a model to be created without also creating a view group. Allows active settings for style elements. Allows multi-line caps to use color other than BySegment and styles, weights. Allows line style modifiers for multi-lines. If enabled, uses Style-None as the active multi-line style. If enabled, the Standard style can be renamed but not deleted. Allows multi-line styles to use line weights. Allows named groups to be created and used. Allows the note to have all text frame types. Allows the elbow/hook line length to be set for a note. Allows the note to have text frame scale. Allows the left text margin to be set. Allows the lower margin to be set. Allows the note leader to be attached to the left or right side of the text. Allows the note have a fixed justification. Allows a vertical line to be created in a note. C t l th t l tti f th Pl T tt l If bl d h l t t i
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
CAPABILITY_PLACETEXT_DISPLAY_TOGGLES CAPABILITY_RASTER_ALL_TYPES CAPABILITY_RASTER_BACKGROUND CAPABILITY_RASTER_DISP_GAMMA CAPABILITY_RASTER_GEOREFERENCEPRIORITY CAPABILITY_RASTER_INVERT CAPABILITY_RASTER_PRINT CAPABILITY_RASTER_PRINT_GAMMA CAPABILITY_RASTER_PROJECT CAPABILITY_RASTER_TINT CAPABILITY_RASTER_TRANSP_FULL_CONTROL CAPABILITY_REF_ADJUSTCOLORS CAPABILITY_REF_AUX_INFO CAPABILITY_REF_DISP_PER_VIEW CAPABILITY_REF_FROM_URL CAPABILITY_REF_NESTING_OPTIONS CAPABILITY_REF_NONDEFAULT_MODEL CAPABILITY_REF_SAVE_PATH_REL CAPABILITY_REF_RASTERDISPLAY_OFF CAPABILITY_REF_SCALELINESTYLE CAPABILITY_REFERENCE_3DTO2D CAPABILITY_REFERENCE_ATTACHLEVEL CAPABILITY_REFERENCE_DWG CAPABILITY_REFERENCE_LINESTYLESCALE CAPABILITY_REFERENCE_V8 CAPABILITY_REFERENCE_VIEWLEVELDISPLAY CAPABILITY_SAVEDVIEWS_APPLY_TO_SHEETS CAPABILITY_SAVEDVIEWS_CREATE_FOR_SHEETS CAPABILITY_SAVEDVIEWS_DELETE_FOR_SHEETS CAPABILITY_SAVEDVIEWS_PROPS_FOR_SHEETS CAPABILITY_SAVEDVIEWS_UPDATE_FOR_SHEETS CAPABILITY_SCALE_AXIS_INDEP CAPABILITY_SELF_REFERENCE CAPABILITY_SHAREDCELLS_FROM_ATTACHED_LIB CAPABILITY_SHAREDCELLS_FROM_REFERENCES CAPABILITY_TABLE_DESCRIPTION CAPABILITY_TAG_NO_CELL_ELEMS CAPABILITY_TAGS_COPY_WITH_BASE CAPABILITY_TEXT_AUTOSTACKFRACTIONS
Page 257 of 387

style, toggles appear for the tool settings. You must then turn on a tool setting before you can modify it. Allows all supported raster types to be opened. Allows background color on rasters. Allows use of display gamma control for rasters. Allows you to change the raster georeference priority setting. Allows you to turn on/off the raster invert toggle. Allows use of print control for rasters. Allows use of the Print Gamma setting for rasters. Allows use of raster projects. Allows tint color on rasters. Allows full control on image transparency settings. Allows reference colors to be adjusted. Allows logical name and description for a reference attachment. Allows display control on a per view basis. Allows a reference attachment from a URL. Allows reference nesting. Allows a model other than the default to be used as a reference. Allows a relative path to be used for reference attachments. Allows reference and raster display attachments to be turned off. Allows line style scaling when attaching a reference. Allows 2D files to have 3D references. Allows a reference to be placed on a particular level. Allows DWG references. Allows you to select whether master and reference global line style scales apply. Allows V8 type references. Allows a reference to be turned off in a view by turning off its attachment level. Allows saved views to be applied to sheet models. Allows saved views to be created for sheet models. Allows saved views to be deleted from sheet models. Allows saved view properties to be edited for a sheet model. Allows saved view setting updates for sheet models. Allows scale factors to be independently modified along the X, Y, and Z axes. Allows a self reference to be attached. Allows shared cells from an attached library to be placed. Allows shared cells from references to be placed. Allows a description to be created for references or dimension styles. Allows a tag element to be attached to non-cell elements. Allows tags to be copied with a base element. If enabled, the word processor text editor creates AutoCAD-type stacked fractions from numeric characters that are separated by a slash (for example, 9/16).
CAPABILITY_TEXT_BACKGROUND CAPABILITY_TEXT_BACKGROUND_BORDER_X CAPABILITY_TEXT_BACKGROUND_BORDER_Y CAPABILITY_TEXT_BACKGROUND_COLOR CAPABILITY_TEXT_BACKGROUND_FILL_COLOR CAPABILITY_TEXT_BACKGROUND_STYLE CAPABILITY TEXT BACKGROUND WEIGHT If enabled, the setting is visible in the Text Styles editor. If disabled, the setting is not visible.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
CAPABILITY_TEXT_BACKWARDS CAPABILITY_TEXT_BOLD CAPABILITY_TEXT_COLOR CAPABILITY_TEXT_FIXEDSPACING CAPABILITY_TEXT_FONTS CAPABILITY_TEXT_FONTS_RSC CAPABILITY_TEXT_FONTS_SHX CAPABILITY_TEXT_FONTS_TRUETYPE CAPABILITY_TEXT_FRACTIONS CAPABILITY_TEXT_FULLJUSTIFICATION CAPABILITY_TEXT_HEIGHT CAPABILITY_TEXT_INTERCHARACTERSPACING CAPABILITY_TEXT_ITALICS CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_CB CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_CC CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_CT CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_LB CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_LC CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_LMB CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_LMC CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_LMT CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_LT CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_RB CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_RC CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_RMB CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_RMC CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_RMT CAPABILITY_TEXT_JUSTIFICATION_RT CAPABILITY_TEXT_LINELENGTH CAPABILITY_TEXT_LINEOFFSET_X CAPABILITY_TEXT_LINEOFFSET_Y CAPABILITY TEXT LINESPACING
Page 258 of 387
If enabled, the selected fonts are displayed in font list boxes. If disabled, the fonts are not displayed.
If enabled, the setting is visible in the Text Styles editor. If disabled, the setting is not visible.
If enabled, the Center Bottom setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Center Center setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Center Top setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Left Bottom setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Left Center setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Left Margin Bottom setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Left Margin Center setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Left Margin Top setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Left Top setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Right Bottom setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Right Center setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Right Margin Bottom setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Right Margin Center setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Right Margin Top setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible. If enabled, the Right Top setting is visible in Justification list box. If disabled, the setting is not visible.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
CAPABILITY_TEXT_LINESPACINGTYPE CAPABILITY_TEXT_NODEJUSTIFICATION CAPABILITY_TEXT_OVERLINE CAPABILITY_TEXT_OVERLINE_COLOR CAPABILITY_TEXT_OVERLINE_OFFSET CAPABILITY_TEXT_OVERLINE_STYLE CAPABILITY_TEXT_OVERLINE_WEIGHT CAPABILITY_TEXT_PARENTTEXTSTYLES CAPABILITY_TEXT_SLANTANGLE CAPABILITY_TEXT_SUBSCRIPT CAPABILITY_TEXT_SUPERSCRIPT CAPABILITY_TEXT_UNDERLINE CAPABILITY_TEXT_UNDERLINE_COLOR CAPABILITY_TEXT_UNDERLINE_OFFSET CAPABILITY_TEXT_UNDERLINE_STYLE CAPABILITY_TEXT_UNDERLINE_WEIGHT CAPABILITY_TEXT_UPSIDEDOWN CAPABILITY_TEXT_VERTICAL CAPABILITY_TEXT_WIDTH CAPABILITY_TEXTSTYLE_ACTIVE_DGNSETTINGS CAPABILITY_TEXTSTYLE_ACTIVE_DWGSETTINGS CAPABILITY_TEXTSTYLE_STYLE_DGNSETTINGS CAPABILITY_TEXTSTYLE_STYLE_DWGSETTINGS CAPABILITY_TYPE2_CELL CAPABILITY_TYPE87_RASTER CAPABILITY_TYPE90_ALL CAPABILITY_UI_IGNOREMENUSFROMDGNLIBS CAPABILITY_UI_IGNOREMENUSFROMRSCMODFILE
Page 259 of 387
Controls the display of settings for Style (none) in the Text Styles editor. If enabled, DGN text style settings are displayed. Controls the display of settings for Style (none) in the Text Styles editor. If enabled, only DWG-compatible text style settings are displayed. Controls the display of settings for text styles in the Text Styles editor. If enabled, DGN text style settings are displayed. Controls the display of settings for text styles in the Text Styles editor. If enabled, only DWG-compatible text style settings are displayed. If enabled, type 2 cells can be created. If enabled, type 87/88 raster element can be created. Allows import of all rasters as type 90 elements. Hides menu customizations from DGN libraries. The default is to display these menus. Hides menu customizations from imported user interface modification files. The default is to display these menus. This takes effect only if the capability to hide menu customizations from DGN libraries is NOT set. Displays custom menus, tasks, and tools from the open DGN file, even though the open DGN file is not stored in the specified DGN libraries. The default is to display only custom menus, tasks, and tools from the DGN libraries. If enabled, displays coordinates in DGN format (for example, 1:0 1/4 instead of 1'-0 1/4) If enabled, only shows DGN units (MU, SU, PU) and hides DWG format (Arch., Dec., etc.). Allows editing of unit labels. Allows scientific accuracy. (Cannot be saved to V7.) Allows sub-units to be set.
CAPABILITY_UI_LOADFROMACTIVEFILE CAPABILITY_UNITS_DGNCOORDREADOUT CAPBILITY_UNITS_DGNFORMAT CAPABILITY_UNITS_LABEL CAPABILITY_UNITS_SCIENTIFIC_ACCURACY CAPABILITY UNITS SUB
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
CAPABILITY_VIEW_ROTATE_SHEET_MODEL_VIEW CAPABILITY_VIEWATTRIBUTES CAPABILITY_VIEWGROUP_CREATION CAPABILITY_VIEWGROUP_DELETION CAPABILITY_VIEWGROUP_UPDATE CAPABILITY_WORDPROC_FIELD_MODELPROPERTIES If enabled, allows sheet model views to be rotated. Allows view attributes in a DWG file to be modified. Allows view groups to be created. Allows view groups to be deleted. Allows view group properties to be updated. Allows model properties to display in field editor.
Page 260 of 387
If enabled and an RSC font containing fraction characters is used, the word processor CAPABILITY_WORDPROCESSOR_USE_RSCFRACTIONS creates an RSC fraction character from numbers separated by a slash (for example, 9/16).
DWG- and DXF-related configuration variables MicroStation includes configuration variables to help open, edit, and reference AutoCAD DWG data. The following table lists the configuration variables that affect MicroStation's DWG operations. Each configuration variable expects a valid value. An invalid value will not override a setting. If an invalid value is entered, a warning is sent to the Message Center and all valid values will be listed. You do not need to close and restart MicroStation in order for the configuration variable change to take effect.
Configuration Variable Use Defines the directory containing AutoCAD. It is used to find the DWG support files, such as fonts. MS_ACADDIR When you first load MicroStation V8, MicroStation reads the registry, determines whether AutoCAD or AutoCAD LT is installed on your computer, and if present, sets this configuration variable. Defines the list of DWG and DXF files available for insertion as MicroStation cells. MS_BLOCKLIST You can use this configuration variable when you turn on Display All Cells in Path in the Cell Library dialog box. Defines the directory for the DWG backup (.bak) files. If not set, the backup files are placed in the same directory as the DWG file. Defines a character or string of characters that can be used as a shortcut to the AutoCAD key-in commands. If set, when a DGN file with Working Units set to Feet-Inches, Format set to Master Units, and Units on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box set to Master Units, the resulting DWG file has Engineering or Architectural units in AutoCAD. (If not set, the units are Decimal or Fractional.) For details, see Setting units in files that will be saved to DWG files. MS_DWG_FIELD_2005FORMATTING MS_DWG_LSTYLE_FONTPATH MS_DWG_LSTYLE_FONTNAME MS_DWG_OBJECT_APP MS_DWG_PGPFILE MS_DWG_PRE2004_COLOR_TABLE If defined and set to 1, MicroStation only generates field information that AutoCAD 2005 supports. Determines the location of the font file. Determines the name of the font file, and therefore, the name of the font. Lists Object Enabler MDL applications to be loaded. It is currently set to use applications that enable Architectural Desktop and AutoPlant objects (AdtDirectApp and RebisDirectapp). You should not change this setting. Points to a PGP file that contains shortcuts, or aliases, for AutoCAD commands. Sets the color table for DWG files in MicroStation. In version 2004, AutoCAD began displaying indexed colors with a slightly different (generally lighter) colors. MicroStation also uses these new colors unless this variable is set. Determines the frequency, in seconds, of the auto save timer for DWG and DXF files. For example, if set to 300 (the default), an auto-save occurs approximately 5 minutes after the first change to the design. If set to zero, no auto save is done while the file is open. The file is automatically saved on exit or when switching to a different file. If set, auto-save occurs automatically, without displaying the default auto-save dialog box. MS_DWGAUTOSAVE_NODIALOG DWG and DXF format files take longer than DGN files to save. Therefore, by default MicroStation displays a dialog box that allows you to defer the auto-save operation. When the variable is set, the dialog box is not displayed. Points to the directory where the following files are stored: "D S tti " fil t i i ll f th DWG tti
MS_DWG_BACKUP MS_DWG_COMMANDPREFIX
MS_DWG_CREATE_SPACE_FROM_EDF If set to 1, any empty data field remains as a space.
MS_DWG_FEETUNIT_AS_ARCHENG
MS_DWGAUTOSAVE
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects

Page 261 of 387

Files (*.dws) containing saved settings for opening and saving DWG/DXF files. "DwgDisplayColors.tbl"(Optional) A MicroStation color table that contains the fixed AutoCAD colors used for display to the screen. "DwgPlotColors.tbl" (Optional) A MicroStation color table that contains the fixed AutoCAD colors used for plotting.
MS_DWGDATA
Defines the path to AutoCAD *.SHX fonts if AutoCAD is not installed on the system. MS_DWGFONTPATH By default, MicroStation first uses the value of the MS_ACADDIR configuration variable to find AutoCAD support files. If this is unavailable, MicroStation uses individual variables, such as MS_DWGFONTPATH. Controls how direct proxies (Autodesk Architectural Desktop multi-view block references) are displayed. If set to 1, only the proxy entity's graphics or bounding box display. If set to 0, these proxy entities display as 2D or 3D representations, and they can be modified. If more than one file with the same name is present in the same directory, appends the extension to the output filename when saving the file. MS_DWGOMITUNIQUEEXTENSION For example, if the directory contains both sample.s01 and sample.s02, then the extension is included in the output filenames (sample_s01.dgn and sample_s02.dgn). If the directory does not include any files with duplicate names, then the extensions are be included in the output names. For example, if the directory contains only file sample.s02, this file is saved to sample.dwg. Defines the full path file name that contains AutoCAD pattern definitions. Defines how MicroStation uses color tables for DWG or DXF files attached as references.
MS_DWGNODIRECTPROXIES
MS_DWGPATFILE
MS_DWGREF_ALLOWMASTERCOLORS
If MS_DWGREF_ALLOWMASTERCOLORS is set to 1, the color tables for DWG or DXF references are handled as they are for DGN references: they are controlled by the Use Color Table setting (Workspace > Preferences > Reference category). When Use Color Table is on, the elements in each reference are displayed using the reference's color table. When Use Color Table is off, the elements in each reference are displayed using the active design file's color table. If MS_DWGREF_ALLOWMASTERCOLORS is not set to any value, DWG or DXF references are always displayed using the active design file's color table. In this case, the Use Color Table setting has no effect.
MS_DWGSEED
Defines the DWG seed file used when opening DWG files. Determines whether a user can modify the DWG Seed File setting on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. When the variable is not set or set to 0, the first time that the dialog box opens, the default DWG seed file is set by the MS_DWGSEED configuration variable. The user can choose a different seed file
MS_DWGSEED_OVERRIDE When the variable is set to 1, the user can only use the DWG seed file identified by MS_DWGSEED. The user cannot choose a different seed file. When the variable is set to 2, the default DWG seed file is set by MS_DWGSEED at the beginning of each MicroStation session. The user can choose a different seed file during the session. MS_DWGSETTINGSFILE MS_DWGSHEETMODELSEED MS_DWGSHEETMODELSEEDNAME Points to the file that contains the settings for opening and saving DWG files. Identifies the file containing the seed model for new sheet models in DWG files. Identifies the seed model for new sheet models in DWG files. Identifies the directory containing the DWG settings file Dwgsettings.rsc. Overrides the directory specified by MS_DWGDATA. MS_DWGSYSTEMDATA The display and plotting color tables (DwgDisplayColor.tbl and DwgPlotColors.tbl) can also be controlled by placing them in this directory. Modifies Copy Levels During Merge setting on the References tab of the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. MS_MERGE_DISPLAYEDLEVELSONLY When set (to 1), only those reference levels that are displayed in the selected view are merged into the output file. If not set, and the Merge Displayed Levels Only setting is off (in the References tab), then all reference levels are merged into the output file. MS_NO_DWG_BACKUP If set, backup files (.bak) are not created when you edit a DWG or DXF file.
D t
h th
dif th DGN S
d Fil
tti
th DWG O
O ti
di l
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 262 of 387

When the variable is not set or set to 0, the first time that the dialog box opens, the default DGN Seed File is set by the MS_TRANSEED configuration variable. The user can choose a different seed file.
MS_TRANSEED_OVERRIDE
When the variable is set to 1, the user can only use the DGN seed file identified by MS_TRANSEED. The user cannot choose a different seed file. When the variable is set to 2, the default DGN seed fie is set by MS_TRANSEED at the beginning of each MicroStation session. The user can choose a different seed file during the session.
MS_WORKMODE
Defines the workmode as either DGN or DWG.
DWG/DXF Openspecific configuration variables MicroStation includes configuration variables to open AutoCAD DWG data. Valid values must be entered exactly as shown in the table. For example, Region Entity must be entered as a whole string.
Configuration Variable MS_DWG_ALERT_DEC_FRC_SCI_UNITS MS_DWG_ALERT_DESIGNCENTER_UNITS MS_DWG_ALERT_ENG_ARCH_UNITS Use When a DWG file is opened, an alert dialog box opens to warn that Decimal/Fractional/Scientific units are not set to Design Center units. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. When a DWG file is opened, an alert dialog box opens to warn that Design Center units are not set to a specific unit. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. When a DWG file is opened, an alert dialog box opens to warn that Architectural/Engineering units are not set to Inches. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets units to open DWG files that use Architectural or Engineering units. Valid values are: Master Units MS_DWG_ARCH_ENG_UNITS Sub Units Design Center Units a unit defined in file units.def MS_DWG_AXISLOCK_FROM_ORTHOMODE If DWG ORTHOMODE=1, sets the Axis Lock. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets units to open DWG files that use Decimal, Fraction or Scientific units. Valid values are: Master Units MS_DWG_DEC_FRC_SCI_UNITS Sub Units Design Center Units a unit defined in file units.def MS_DWG_DESIGNBACKGROUND_COLOR Sets the background color for the default design model. Valid values are Red, Green, or Blue, where each of the three color indices is an integer between 0 and 255. Sets units to open DWG files that use Design Center Units. Valid values are: Master Units MS_DWG_DESIGNCENTER_UNITS Sub Units a unit defined in file units.def If set, entities that are outside the DGN design plane are discarded and will not be written back to the DWG file on the next file save. If the variable is not set, MicroStation ignores these entities. Typically these entities are not valid and will cause the AutoCAD Zoom Extents tool to perform poorly. Sets blocks to Graphic Groups, that is, puts shared cell and attached tags into a graphic group. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. C t h li k t E i i Li k i t d fD i Li k V lid l ON
MS_DWG_DISCARD_INVALID
MS_DWG_GRAPHIC_GROUP_ATTRIBUTES MS DWG HLINK AS ELINK
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
(or no value) or OFF. MS_DWG_LINEWEIGHT_MAPPING
Page 263 of 387
Maps DWG line weights to DGN line weights. Valid values are 0=DWG weight1; 1=DWG weight2; 2=DWG weight3; and so forth to 31=DWG weight31, where DWG weights are the DWG line weight values in millimeters, for examples, 0.0, 0.13, 2.11. Controls the width of the default line weight and is analogous to the AutoCAD registry variable LWDEFAULT. The default value is 0 for unweighted default lines. Valid LWDEFAULT values are From AutoCAD Registry, 0.00 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.09 mm, 0.13 mm, 0.15 mm, 0.18 mm, 0.20 mm, 0.25 mm, 0.30 mm, 0.35 mm, 0.40 mm, 0.50 mm, 0.53 mm, 0.60 mm, 0.70 mm, 0.80 mm, 0.90 mm, 1.00 mm, 1.06 mm, 1.20 mm, 1.40 mm, 1.58 mm, 2.00 mm, 2.11 mm. The Line weight index is also a valid alternative, that is, any integer from 0 through 211. A line weight index is an enumeration of line weight defined by DXF Group Code 370. Sets the model space to 2D or 3D. Valid values are 2D or 3D. Sets the paper space to 2D or 3D. Valid values are 2D or 3D. Controls the display of proxy objects within a DWG drawing. It is analogous to the AutoCAD registry setting PROXYSHOW. Valid values are: From AutoCAD Registry Do Not Show Proxy
MS_DWG_LWDEFAULT
MS_DWG_MODELSPACE MS_DWG_PAPERSPACE
MS_DWG_PROXYSHOW Show Proxy Image Show Proxy Box An alternative is an integer value such as 0 show image, 1 show box or 2 do not show. The default setting is 1. Sets a view to be displayed for a multi-view proxy. Valid values are: Top MS_DWG_PROXY_VIEW Front Left Isometric MS_DWG_REFERENCE_CONVERT MS_DWG_REFERENCE_COPYLEVEL MS_DWG_REFERENCE_COPYNESTED Converts reference files to DWG files. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the conditions to copy reference levels during merge: only if they are not in the target file, if they are overridden, or always copy. Valid values are If Not Found, If Overrides Exist, or Always. Copies live nested reference attachments to the target file when merging. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves external reference file attachments to be an Xref attachment (retained), merged, merged as a block, or omitted. Valid values are: Retain MS_DWG_REFERENCE_EXTERNAL Merge Merge To Cell Omit Saves masked reference file attachments to be an Xref attachment (retained), merged, merged as a block, or omitted. Valid values are: Retain MS_DWG_REFERENCE_MASKED Merge Merge To Cell Omit
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
MS_DWG_REFERENCE_MERGE_DISPLAYEDLEVELSONLY MS_DWG_REFERENCE_OPTIMIZEDCLIP
Page 264 of 387

Merges reference levels only if they are displayed. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Optimizes reference clipping when merged. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves self-referenced file attachments to be an Xref attachment (retained), merged, merged as a block, or omitted. Valid values are: Retain
MS_DWG_REFERENCE_SELF
Merge Merge To Cell Omit
MS_DWG_RENDER_LIGHTSOURCE_OPEN MS_DWG_RENDER_MATERIAL_OPEN
Sets to use light source for rendering. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets to use materials for rendering. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF.
DWG/DXF Savespecific configuration variables MicroStation includes configuration variables to save AutoCAD DWG data. Valid values must be entered exactly as shown in the table. For example, Region Entity must be entered as a whole string.
Configuration Variable Use Converts 2D unfilled triangles and quadrangles to polyline, face, polyface mesh, or region entities. Valid values are: Face Entity MS_DWG_2D_UNFILLED_3OR4SIDED_SHAPE Region Entity Polyface Mesh Polyline Converts 2D unfilled polygons to polyline, polyface mesh, or region entities. Valid values are: Region Entity MS_DWG_2D_UNFILLED_5ORMORESIDED_SHAPE Polyface Mesh Polyline Converts 2D unfilled complex shapes to polyline, polyface mesh, or region entities. Valid values are: Region Entity MS_DWG_2D_UNFILLED_COMPLEX_SHAPE Polyface Mesh Polyline Converts 2D unfilled group hole elements to polyface mesh or region entities. Valid values are: MS_DWG_2D_UNFILLED_GROUPHOLE Region Entity Polyface Mesh
Converts 3D unfilled triangles and quadrangles to polyline, face, polyface mesh, or region entities. Valid values are: MS_DWG_3D_UNFILLED_3OR4SIDED_SHAPE Face Entity R i E tit
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Polyface Mesh Polyline
Page 265 of 387
Converts 3D unfilled polygons to polyline, polyface mesh, or region entities. Valid values are: Region Entity MS_DWG_3D_UNFILLED_5ORMORESIDED_SHAPE Polyface Mesh Polyline Converts 3D unfilled complex shapes to polyline, polyface mesh, or region entities. Valid values are: Region Entity MS_DWG_3D_UNFILLED_COMPLEX_SHAPE Polyface Mesh Polyline Converts 3D unfilled group hole elements to polyface mesh or region entities. Valid values are: MS_DWG_3D_UNFILLED_GROUPHOLE Region Entity Polyface Mesh MS_DWG_ACS_TO_UCS MS_DWG_BLOCKDEF_ON_LAYER0 MS_DWG_BLOCKNAMES_FROM_TRIFORMA_PARTS MS_DWG_BYBLOCK_COLOR MS_DWG_BYBLOCK_LINETYPE MS_DWG_BYBLOCK_WEIGHT Converts ACS to UCS. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves the block definitions on layer 0. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the block names from TriForma parts. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the block definitions to use the color BYBLOCK. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the block definitions to use line type BYBLOCK. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the block definitions to use line weight BYBLOCK. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the elements of the construction class to Construction layer, Defpoints layer, elements own layer, invisible, or omits them. Valid values are: Save To Construction Layer Save To Defpoints Layer MS_DWG_CONSTRUCTION_CLASS Save Save As Invisible Omit MS_DWG_CONVERT_RSC_FONTS Converts and creates SHX files from RSC fonts. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. When a DGN file containing sheet models is saved to DWG, the sheets are usually saved to separate layouts within the DWG file. If this variable is set, the sheets are saved to separate DWG files with the file name created by appending the model name to the original file name. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Converts curved solids and surfaces to wireframe, polyface mesh or ACIS entities. Valid values are: Wireframe MS_DWG_CURVED_SOLIDSURFACE Polyface Mesh ACIS Entity C t t li l li V lid l
MS_DWG_CREATE_SEPARATE_SHEETS
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Spline Entity MS_DWG_CURVES Polyline MS_DWG_DROP_UNSUPPORTED_LS MS_DWG_EMPTY_EDF_TO_SPACE MS_DWG_FILE_CODEPAGE
Page 266 of 387
Drops line styles that are not supported by DWG file format. The most possible custom line styles DWG format allows are those with characters in them. Any other types are incompatible. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Converts blank enter data fields to spaces. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the DWG file codepage. Valid values are 1252 (English) , 1251 (Cyrillic), 1253 (Greek), 1254 (Turkish), 1255 (Hebrew), 1256 (Arabic), 1257 (Baltic), 1258 (Vietnam), 874 (Thai), 932 (Japanese), 936 (Simplified Chinese), 949 (Korean), or 950 (Traditional Chinese). Converts filled triangles and quadrangles to solid, polyface mesh, region or hatch entities. Valid values are: Solid Entity
MS_DWG_FILLED_3OR4SIDED_SHAPE
Region Entity Hatch Entity Polyface Mesh Converts filled polygons to polyface mesh, region or hatch entities. Valid values are: Region Entity
MS_DWG_FILLED_5ORMORESIDED_SHAPE Hatch Entity Polyface Mesh Converts filled complex shapes to polyline, region or hatch entities. Valid values are: Region Entity MS_DWG_FILLED_COMPLEX_SHAPE Hatch Entity Polyline Converts flat solids and surfaces to wireframe, polyface mesh or ACIS entities. Valid values are: Wireframe MS_DWG_FLAT_SOLIDSURFACE Polyface Mesh ACIS Entity MS_DWG_FORCE_POSITIVE_ARCS MS_DWG_FORCE_ZERO_ZCOORDINATE MS_DWG_INDEXCOLOR_TO_TRUECOLOR For arcs, changes clockwise orientation to counter clockwise. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the z-coordinate of an element to have a zero value. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Converts index color to true color. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. If set, an inline elbow displays on notes that did not have an elbow when first created. MicroStation allows a note to be placed without an inline elbow (a hook line in AutoCAD) when the inline toggle is unchecked, but AutoCAD does not. This type of note (for instance, a leader without a hook line) saved to DWG will retain correct graphical presentation, and will operate properly in AutoCAD. However, the audit tool will generate an error (annotation ID not null). The audit error can be resolved by setting this configuration variable to 1. However, the original graphical presentation will be lost (the hook line will appear). Sets the view number from which the level display will be used for the layers on/off status. Valid values is a number from 0 through 8. Saves the level display status per view to viewport layer thaw/freeze status. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Overrides the element symbology from the level symbology. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF
MS_DWG_LEADER_HOOKLINE
MS_DWG_LEVEL_DISPLAY MS_DWG_LEVELDISP_FOR_VPORTFREEZE MS_DWG_LEVELSYMBOLOGY_OVERRIDE
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 267 of 387

Sets the elements of the linear pattern class to Linear Patterned layer, Defpoints layer, element's own layer, invisible, or omits them. Valid values are: Save To Linear Patterned Layer Save To Defpoints Layer
MS_DWG_LINEARPATTERN_CLASS Save Save As Invisible Omit MS_DWG_LINECODE_SCALE MS_DWG_LOGICALNAME_TO_XREFNAME Scales the line code. Valid value is a positive real number. Saves the reference attachment logical name as the block name of an Xref file. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Merges the attachments of a non-default design model or merges them as block references. Valid values are: Merge MS_DWG_NONDEF_DESIGNMODEL_ATTACHMENTS Merge To Cell Omit Saves non-default design models to separate files, layout models (paper space), or ignore them if their attachments are not merged. Valid values are: Create Separate Files MS_DWG_NONDEFAULT_DESIGNMODEL Create Paper Space Ignore If Not Merged MS_DWG_NONPLANAR_POLYLINES MS_DWG_ONE_BLOCK_FOR_DUP_CELLS MS_DWG_OVERLAY_FOR_REFERENCES Converts a nearly planar line string to a 2D or 3D polyline. A nearly planar line string is strictly non-planar, but its vertex deviation is small enough to be treated as planar such that it is allowed to become a 2D polyline. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Creates one block definition for all type-2 cells that are found to be the same. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Creates overlays for reference attachments (no live nesting). Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets elements of pattern class to Pattern layer, Defpoints layer, element's own layer, invisible, or omits them. Valid values are: Save To Pattern Layer Save To Defpoints Layer MS_DWG_PATTERN_CLASS Save Save As Invisible Omit MS_DWG_PFACE_MESH_ANGLE Sets an angular tolerance for polyface mesh conversion. Valid value is a real value in degrees between 0 and 90. Converts a planar line string to a 2D or 3D polyline. A planar line string has all its vertices lined up to form a unique plane. They do not have to be on an orthogonal plane; they can be on any plane in space. Valid values are: MS_DWG_PLANARPOLYLINES 3D Polyline Polyline MS_DWG_REFERENCE_CONVERT Converts reference files to DWG files. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the conditions to copy reference levels during merge: only if they are not in the t t fil if th idd l V lid l
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
If Not Found MS_DWG_REFERENCE_COPYLEVEL If Overrides Exist Always MS_DWG_REFERENCE_COPYNESTED
Page 268 of 387
Copies live nested reference attachments to the target file when merging. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves external reference file attachments to be an Xref attachment (retained), merged, merged as a block, or omitted. Valid values are: Retain
MS_DWG_REFERENCE_EXTERNAL
Merge Merge To Cell Omit Saves masked reference file attachments to be an Xref attachment (retained), merged, merged as a block, or omitted. Valid values are: Retain
MS_DWG_REFERENCE_MASKED
MS_DWG_REFERENCE_MERGE_DISPLAYEDLEVELSONLY MS_DWG_REFERENCE_OPTIMIZEDCLIP
Merges reference levels only if they are displayed. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Optimizes reference clipping when merged. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves self-referenced file attachments to be an Xref attachment (retained), merged, merged as a block, or omitted. Valid values are: Retain
MS_DWG_REFERENCE_SELF
MS_DWG_RENDER_LIGHTSOURCE_SAVE MS_DWG_RENDER_MATERIAL_SAVE MS_DWG_SAVE_DIMENSION_SETTINGS MS_DWG_SAVE_FILE_SETTINGS MS_DWG_SAVE_FRONTBACK_CLIPS
Saves rendering light sources. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves rendering materials. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves active dimension settings, such as the one listed as Style-none in dimension style dialog box. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves file settings such that non-DWG settings can round-trip back. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Saves front-back clippings. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Tells MicroStation whether/how to save paths for reference attachments. Valid values are: When saving to same directory
MS_DWG_SAVE_REFERENCE_PATH Relative to Master File Never Sets the file units to be saved. Valid values are: MS_DWG_SAVE_UNITS Master Units S b U it
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Arch./Engineering a unit defined in file units.def MS_DWG_SCALE_BLOCKS MS_DWG_SHEETBACKGROUND_COLOR MS_DWG_SHX_OUTPUT_PATH MS_DWG_TEXTSTYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE MS_DWG_VERSION
Page 269 of 387
Scales the block definitions. Valid values are ON (or no value) or OFF. Sets the background color for sheet models. Valid values are Red, Green, Blue, where each of these color values is an integer between 0 and 255. Sets the path to place converted SHX files. Valid value is a path or folder name. Sets a text string template to convert text style name. Valid value is a text string that may contain a place holder %s for the font name. Sets DWG version to be saved. Valid values are 11, 12,13, 14, 2000, 2000i, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008. Sets the layer of viewport entity from the clipping element. Viewport entities are represented as reference attachments in MicroStation the viewport level is extracted from the reference attachment. If no level is set for the reference attachment then by default the viewport is assigned to layer 0 . However, if this variable is set and a clip element is present, then the viewport layer is extracted from the clip element. If set, the Display locked status of a viewport entity is mapped to the Locate setting of the reference attachments that represent this viewport. In this case, a viewport with Display locked off will have Locate turned off and changing the Locate status of the reference attachment will change the Display Locked status of the viewport. Specifies the layer to which normal (unshared) cells and reference attachments are assigned when saving the open DGN file in DWG format. If this configuration variable is not defined, layer 0 is used. Valid values are ON (or no value) and OFF. Linkage data and type 66 application elements can be saved from DGN to DWG. If set, the applications are stored as XRECORDS and the linkages as XDATA. Valid values are ON (or no value) and OFF. The default is off. Sets the number of decimal places for real numbers when saving file to DXF. Valid value is an integer number between 1 and 16.
MS_DWG_VPORT_LAYER_FROM_CLIP
MS_DWG_VPORT_MAP_LOCATE_OFF_TO_LOCKED
MS_DWGINSERTLAYER
MS_DWGSAVEAPPLICATIONDATA MS_DXF_PRECISION
Managing DWG settings The settings for opening and saving DWG files are stored in a DWG settings file (*.dws). This file can be created using the DWG Open Options and Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog boxes. The DWG settings file resides in the local directory pointed to by the configuration variable MS_DWGDATA. By default, MS_DWGDATA is set to the "Bentley\home\prefs\dwgdata" directory. A system administrator can override the defaults for these settings by setting the configuration variable MS_DWGSYSTEMDATA to point to the directory containing the standard settings file.
The display and plotting color tables (DwgDisplayColor.tbl and DwgPlotColors.tbl) can also be controlled by placing them in the "MS_DWGSYSTEMDATA" directory.
The Do Not Display Again setting for the DWG/DXF Units Alert is stored in the DWG settings file, along with the other settings.
Saving to DWG Files

In MicroStation you can work in a DGN file, then, when appropriate, save to a DWG file. This topic describes how DGN elements are saved to DWG files, and the procedures for saving to DWG files. Saving to other file formats The File > Save As menu item provides an easy way to convert DGN files to DWG/DXF files. You can save any open file (DGN, DWG, DXF) to a DWG, DXF, V7 DGN, or V8 DGN file. The Options button lets you more precisely define how data is saved to a new file format. Wh i t th fil f t (DGN t DWG DWG t DGN) th t t f th fil i th th ti fil
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 270 of 387
When converting files from one format to another, generally, settings that do not exist in the original format but are required in the resultant format will be taken from the seed file. During conversion, no extra information will be created. If you have a set of standards that the resulting DWG files have to meet, such as specific dimension styles or text styles that need to exist in all DWG files, these styles can be created in a DGN library file and used throughout the project files. If you do not wish to use DGN libraries, the dimension and text styles can be imported into the DGN file prior to saving to DWG. Another option is to import the dimension or text styles into the DWG in AutoCAD after using the File > Save As command.
If you plan to save to a new file format more than once, consider using the Batch Converter utility to set up a batch conversion job. The batch conversion job lets you save your options so that the conversion output is consistent.
To save the open file as a DWG file
1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.
2. From the Select Format to Save option menu, choose one of the following: AutoCAD Drawing Files (*.dwg) AutoCAD DXF Files (*.dxf) 3. (Optional) To change the directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 4. (Optional) In the Files field, specify the filename.
When a design file with an extension other than DGN is saved to DWG, MicroStation appends the extension to the output filename to differentiate it from other design files with the same name but different extensions. For example, if sample.s01 is saved to DWG, then the output file is named sample_s01.DWG.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
5. (Optional) To specify the DWG file options, click Options. The Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box opens.
Page 271 of 387
6. (Optional) Using the controls on the tabs, set the following types of options: General, Remap, References, or Filter. 7. To close the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, click OK. 8. To close the Save As dialog box, click OK.
To save the open file to a V7/V8 DGN file
1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 2. From the Select Format to Save option menu, choose one of the following: MicroStation V8 DGN Files (*.dgn) MicroStation V7 DGN Files (*.dgn) 3. (Optional) To change the directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 4. (Optional) In the Files field, specify the filename. 5. (Optional) To specify the DGN file options, click the Options button. The Save As V8 Options or Save As V7 Options dialog box opens. 6. (Optional) Using the controls on the tabs, set the following types of options: Remap, References, or Filter. 7. To close the Save As Options dialog box, click OK. 8. To close the Save As dialog box, click OK.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Saving DGN elements to DWG files The table summarizes what happens to elements in DGN files when they are saved to DWG files.
DGN Element Cells Classes Blocks DWG Objects after DGN to DWG Conversion
Page 272 of 387
Elements in construction, pattern, or linear patterned class elements can be saved to a layer or can be invisible entities. Automatically converted to use AutoCAD's fixed color table.
Colors To explicitly control how each color in the DGN file will appear in the DWG file, use the Remap capability. The default design model is saved to model space. Design Models Non-default design models can be saved to additional DWG files or drawing layouts (paper space). Enter Data Fields that are not attached to cells are converted to text. Enter Data Fields Enter Data Fields in cells are converted to attribute labels. The labels are assigned default names that cannot be modified. TrueType and *.SHX fonts are supported by both programs. MicroStation fonts can be converted to AutoCAD fonts when the file is saved to DWG. To explicitly control how each font will appear in the DWG file, use the Remap capability. Layers. Symbology (color, line style, line weight) ByLevel settings are converted to BYLAYER settings. Levels To define how levels are converted to layers, use either the Save As DWG/DXF dialog box or the Remap capability. Line styles are saved to linetypes. Line Styles For line styles that are not compatible with AutoCAD, use the Drop UnSupported LineStyles to Components option on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. To explicitly control how each line style in the DGN file will appear in the DWG file, use the Remap capability. Automatically converted to AutoCAD lineweights. Line Weights To explicitly control how line weights in the DGN file are converted to lineweights in the DWG file, use the Remap capability. If non-default models are saved to separate DWG files, then references to these non-default models are saved to XREF inserts that reference the DWG files. If non-default models are saved to paper space or ignored, then the references must be merged to the output file to be included in the DWG output. To be included in the DWG file, clipping masks applied to references must be merged to the DWG output file. To be included in DWG file, self-attached references must be merged to the DWG output file. To be included in the DWG file, standard external attachments can be merged into the DWG output file or become XREFs. Drawing Layouts (paper space) Attributes
Fonts
References: Attachments to NonDefault Models
References: Masked Attachment References: Self-Attached References: Standard External Attachments Sheet Models Tags
Using the batch converter The Batch Converter utility converts individual files, or entire directories of files, from any of the CAD file formats supported by MicroStation to any other supported format. When you use the Batch Converter, you can set up a series of individual file conversions, and save them to a batch conversion job file. Later, you can open the job file and rerun the conversion using the previously set job values. The batch job updates only the files that have changed since the last time the job was run.
General Procedure To perform a batch conversion
1. Set up a new batch conversion job.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. Start the conversion process.
To set up a batch conversion job
Page 273 of 387
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Batch Converter. The Batch Convert dialog box opens.
2. From the Default Output Format list box, choose the default file format for the conversion. After you select files and directories to convert (steps 47), you can modify the output format for any of the source files. 3. In the Default Destination text box, enter the path to the destination directory for converted files. If you specify a directory that does not yet exist, MicroStation will create it when it processes the job. or Click the magnifying glass icon, and browse to the destination directory. After you select files and directories to convert (steps 47), you can further modify the destination directories. 4. In the dialog box's icon bar, click Add Files or Directories to Convert. The Select Files and Directories to Convert dialog box opens. This dialog box allows multiple selection of both files and directories. 5. Select individual files or directories to convert. 6. Click Add. The specifications for the selected directories or files are listed in the Selected Files list box. 7. (Optional) To remove a selected directory or file, select it in the list box and click Remove. 8. Repeat steps 56 until you have selected all the directories and files to convert. 9. Click Done.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
updates to reflect your selections. Now you can edit individual task entries in the Conversion Tasks list box. 10. (Optional) To remove a task, select the task and click the Remove Files icon.
Page 274 of 387
11. (Optional) Use drag and drop to reorder tasks. or (Optional) With the tasks sorted by the # column in ascending order, use menu items on the Edit menu to reorder tasks. 12. (Optional) In the File column, add the wildcard string "*\" to the end of a directory to indicate that subdirectories will be included. In the File column, designate that specific file types in the subdirectories will be included. For example, to process all files with the extension ".dgn" from directory "c:\projects\" and its subdirectories, edit the entry to read "c:\projects\*\*.dgn". 13. (Optional) Set the output format and destination directory for an individual task by changing the Default Output Format and Default Destination settings, selecting the task in the list, and clicking Apply to Selection. 14. (Optional) Define the conversion options for individual files. Select a file, then select Edit > (Options). For example, if a file is to be output in V8 format, select Edit > V8 Save Options.
If this step is not performed, the most recent settings for the particular file format will be used.
To process a batch conversion job
1. (Optional) To process selected conversion tasks, select the tasks in the Batch Convert dialog box's Conversion Tasks list box, and turn on Process Selection Only. 2. In the Batch Convert dialog box's icon bar, click the Process Batch Conversion Job icon. The Files to Convert dialog box opens. The individual files to convert are listed. 3. To start conversion processing, click Convert. The Convert button label automatically changes to Pause, and the Status column identifies the file being converted. Click Pause to pause processing after the current file. Processing never stops in the middle of converting a file. Click Continue to restart processing. When processing is complete, the Pause button label changes to Done. 4. To return to the Batch Convert dialog box, click Done. When feasible, output files are assigned the same filename as the source file. The output file timestamp is set to match the source file timestamp. When the source is in a MicroStation format and the output is an AutoCAD file, the output extension is automatically set to *.DWG or *.DXF as appropriate (all AutoCAD files must have the .DWG or .DXF extension). If there are multiple files with the same root name (differing only in extension) in the source directory, the extension is incorporated into the output file name.
Because the output file timestamp is set to match the source file timestamp, it is feasible to run a job frequently, updating the output versions of only those source files that have changed. It also makes it possible to restart a batch conversion job. When the destination file is up to date, the Status column indicates that fact. If MicroStation files are being converted to AutoCAD files and Save References As DWG/DXF is on in the DWG Save Options dialog box, the references of each source file are processed as well as the master file. In certain instances, this results in the automatic conversion of some files that are selected as source files in a subsequent task in the same job. When processing reaches such a file, its status changes to Already Converted.
Using drag and drop with batch conversion
When selecting files for batch conversion, you can use drag and drop to select files from Windows Explorer and drag them into the Conversion Tasks list box. When you drop files within an existing list of files in the list box, they are inserted between the rows in which your pointer is positioned. Similarly, you can use drag and drop to reposition tasks in the Conversion Tasks list box. This applies only when tasks are sorted in the ascending order on the # field.
To drag files from Windows Explorer
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Batch Converter. 2. Open Windows Explorer, and navigate to the required folder.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
3. In Windows Explorer, select one or more files as required.
Page 275 of 387
4. Hold down the data button and drag the selected files to the Batch Convert list box, releasing the button to drop the files. If you want the files to be dropped between two existing tasks, position the pointer between them prior to dropping the new files.
Using drag and drop to reorder tasks
1. Make sure that tasks in the Conversion Tasks list box are sorted in ascending order in the # column. 2. Select the file that you want to reposition in the list. or Press and hold down the <Ctrl> key, then select multiple files. 3. Drag the selected files to the required position, releasing the <Ctrl> key to complete the task. Each of the selected files is moved up or down the list by the same number of rows.
Copying files from source directories
As part of a job's specified conversion tasks, you can also copy other types of files from directories that contain CAD files to convert. The configuration variable MS_BATCHCONVERT_COPYEXT specifies the extensions of files that will be copied from directories specified as a source for a conversion task. For example, to copy all the files with the extension .rsc or .txt to your output directory, define MS_BATCHCONVERT_COPYEXT as rsc;txt. In the default workspace, MS_BATCHCONVERT_COPYEXT is not defined, and the Batch Conversion dialog box therefore performs only file conversions.
To copy CAD files without converting them, simply set up a conversion task(s) for which the output and source formats are the same.
Saving and recalling batch conversion jobs
If you plan to reuse the job setup in future jobs, you should save it to a batch conversion job file. This text file is similar to a Windows initialization file. It contains DWG open and save options, the log file name, and all conversion tasks. You can edit it in a text editor if desired.
To save the job setup to a batch conversion job file
1. From the File menu in the Batch Convert dialog box, choose Save or Save As. The Save Batch Convert Job File dialog box opens. 2. In the Files field, key in the desired filename. The default extension is .bcnv. 3. Click OK. The file is created, the dialog box closes, and the focus returns to the Batch Convert dialog box. If you change the job setup in MicroStation, you can save the modified setup to the same batch conversion job file by choosing File > Save or to a new file by choosing File > Save As.
To load a saved batch conversion job setup
1. From the File menu in the Batch Convert dialog box, choose Open. The Open Batch Convert Job File dialog box opens. 2. In the Files list box, select the desired batch conversion job file. 3. Click OK. The dialog box closes, and the focus returns to the Batch Convert dialog box. In that dialog box, the Conversion Tasks list box updates to show the tasks specified in the file.
Alternative Method To load a saved batch conversion job setup
1. In the Key-in window, key in: MDL LOAD batchconvert -nodialog <batch_conversion_job_file_specification>. For example: MDL LOAD -nodialog c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\General\my_conversion.bcnv The Files to Convert dialog box opens At this point you can click Convert to start the job or Cancel
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Command line batch conversion
Page 276 of 387
You can run a job saved in a batch conversion job file directly from the system command line.
To run a saved batch conversion job from the system command line
1. If MicroStation is running, exit. 2. In the MicroStation program group, open the MicroStation Development Shell program item. This causes a MicroStation Development Shell window to open on your desktop. or In a system console window, set the current working directory to the directory in which the MicroStation executable program is installed for example, "Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation" 3. At the system command prompt, enter: msbatch batchconvert <batch_conversion_job_file_specification>. For example: msbatch batchconvert c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\General\my_conversion.bcnv MicroStation starts without its normal graphical interface, and processing of the job begins. A MicroStation console (Text) window opens so you can monitor the progress of the job. The text displayed in this window is also written to the log file specified in the job setup. When the job is completed, the console window closes. Remapping data to other file formats When you save a file to a different format, the file's contents may need to match specific design requirements. Often, these requirements specify element attributes such as levels, symbology, fonts, or cell names. The Remap capability lets you explicitly map element attributes to different values when you save the file to a different format. Remapping is available when you save the file with the Batch Converter or File > Save As. Remapping can be used for several purposes:
File format conversion. Since V8 files support more levels, longer cell names, and more font options than V7 files, you must use remapping, when saving a V8 file to a V7 (MicroStation/J) file. Similarly, MicroStation V8 supports more sophisticated line styles than AutoCAD, so some remapping may be needed when saving V8 DGN files to DWG. Drawing standards enforcement. When V7, V8, or DWG files are initially received from an outside organization, or when files are to be provided to another organization, there is often a need to change the levels or symbology of elements in the design file. Bulk processing. The Batch Converter lets you set up a batch job that you can use repeatedly. Using remapping with the Batch Converter lets you quickly consolidate levels, change fonts, and change cell names.
A remapping table is used to specify the remapping of element attribute values in one file format (for example, DGN) to values in another file format. This table is saved as a CSV (comma separated value) file that is created by a macro embedded in a spreadsheet application. You can create and edit the CSV file from the Remap tab on the Save As Options dialog box. The remapping operation is applied to the elements just before saving them to the new output format specified by the Batch Converter utility or File >Save As.
A few other remap operations are sometimes applied while files are read into MicroStation. For example, when V7 files are read into the current MicroStation version, the read operation applies the level mapping specified by the CSV file pointed to by the MS_V7TOV8_CSVNAME configuration variable. Similarly, when files in AutoCAD 2002 or later DWG or DXF format are read into the current MicroStation version, the software remaps the AutoCAD line weights into MicroStation element line weights. These remappings are not controlled by this remapping table, which applies only when files are being saved.
To create a remapping CSV file
1. From the File menu, choose Save As. 2. From the Select Format to Save option menu, choose the file format type. 3. Click the Options button. Depending on the file type that you chose, one of the following dialog boxes appears: Save As V8 Options Save As V7 Options Save As DWG/DXF Options
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. In the Options dialog, select the Remap tab.
Page 277 of 387
5. Click the Create CSV remapping file icon. The remapping file opens as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet contains a worksheet for each type of parameter that can be remapped: levels, colors, weights, line styles, fonts, and cell names. Each of these worksheets corresponds to a section in the CSV file. There is also an Instructions worksheet which contains the most current information on using the spreadsheet. 6. Select the tab for the appropriate worksheet (for example, Colors). 7. In the first column of the worksheet (for example, Color), enter the value to be remapped. 8. In the same row, enter the new value in the appropriate output column (for example, V7OutputColor).
The text box on each worksheet contains information about entering data. If you do not have Microsoft Excel, you can still create a remapping CSV file.
9. From the spreadsheet File menu, choose Save, then choose Exit. The Options dialog box appears. 10. Turn on the sections in the CSV file to use. For example, to use the Colors remapping defined in the CSV file, turn on Apply Colors.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 278 of 387
11. To close the Save As Options dialog box, click OK. 12. To close the Save As dialog box, click OK.
To use a remapping CSV file when saving to another format
1. From the File menu, chooseSave As. 2. From the Select Format to Save option menu, choose the file format type. 3. Click the Options button. Depending on the file type that you chose, one of the following dialog boxes appears: Save As V8 Options Save As V7 Options Save As DWG/DXF Options 4. In the Save As Options dialog box, select the Remap tab. 5. Click Browse for Remapping CSV file, and choose the remapping file to use.
To modify the CSV file, click Edit CSV Remapping File.
6. Each option on the Remap tab corresponds to a section of the CSV remapping file. Turn on the remapping options that you want to apply when the DGN file is saved. 7. To close the Save As Options dialog box, click OK. 8. To close the Save As dialog box, click OK.
Using the remapping spreadsheet
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 279 of 387
When you use the Create CSV Remapping File icon, MicroStation copies the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet "remaptemplate.xls" file to the file root name you specify, with the extension .XLS. The actual remapping CSV (comma separated value) file is created by a macro embedded in the spreadsheet. When you save the spreadsheet, the macro automatically creates the CSV file in the same directory as the spreadsheet file, with the same root file name but with the extension .CSV. For the CSV file creation to work, the macros must be enabled in the spreadsheet. Make sure that the Macro Virus Protection check box is off (in Excel, pick Tools > Options, General tab), or click on Enable Macros in the dialog box that appears when the file is opened. The remapping spreadsheet contains several worksheets that let you build the remapping table in the CSV file. Most worksheets in the spreadsheet correspond to different mapping options: Levels, Colors, Weights, Line Styles, Fonts, and Cell Names. The Instructions worksheet provides help for using the spreadsheet. The System worksheet is used by the macro; you should not edit it.
The same remapping file can be used for saving files in V7 format, AutoCAD DWG or DXF format, or MicroStation V8 format. Therefore, you can create a single mapping table that can be used for a particular project regardless of the type of output files desired.
On some systems, you may need to use the File > Save and File > Close commands before you can exit Excel (File > Exit). This problem is caused by a timing issue with the way macros are executed when exiting Excel. The symptom of this problem is that the CSV file that you created has a size of 0 bytes. If you experience this, go back into the spreadsheet, change something, then save the spreadsheet before exiting.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Using remapping qualifiers
Page 280 of 387
The basic remapping operation lets you change an element parameter to another value in the output file. However, in some situations you might not want every element with a given source value changed to the same target value. For example, you may want to move all text on Level 23 to the Annotation level, but leave the lines on Level 23 alone. You might want to change only the elements with weight 7 from color 3 to color 4, or you might want to change all elements with weight other than 2 from color 3 to color 4. In the remapping spreadsheet, each mapping table (worksheet) has a required column (primary key) for the element parameter that is being changed. In addition, most mapping tables have optional columns for the other parameters that can be used to qualify elements that match the primary key. For example, in the Levels mapping table, the required primary key column is Level, and the optional qualifier columns are Color, Weight, LineStyle, Class, ElementType, and Cell. Similarly, for Font remapping, there are five qualifiers: Level, Color, Weight, Class, and Cell. The optional qualifier columns are hidden unless the Show Optional Columns setting is turned on. Following are some guidelines for using the qualifier columns in the mapping tables:
If a row contains an entry in any of the qualifier columns, then the element parameter must match that entry or it will not be remapped. There can be only one entry in a qualifier for each row. The spreadsheet can have as many rows as needed, with all entries the same except for a particular qualifier. For example, to change the color of all weight 5 and weight 7 elements from color 3 to color 4, use two rows: one with weight qualifier 5, and one with weight qualifier 7.
Color Weight DWGOutput Color 3 3 5 7 4 4
If a row contains an entry that starts with the character ~, then the element parameter must not match the remainder of that entry or it will not be remapped. For example, to change the color of all weight 7 elements with color 3 to color 4, the Weight column would have the entry 7. To change all elements with a weight other than 2 from color 3 to color 4, the Weight column would have the entry ~2. If the Level qualifier is specified as %match in the Color, Weight, or LineStyle mapping tables, then the source parameter is set to the output parameter only if it matches the corresponding ByLevel attribute of the element's level. This is most useful for setting symbology to ByLevel. For example, assume that the Color Mapping Table includes the values below.
Color 2 Level V8OutputColor
%match %bylevel
In this case, all Color 2 elements that are on the levels that have 2 for their ByLevel color will have their colors set to ByLevel when saving to a V8 file. For a second example, assume that the Color Mapping Table includes the values below.
Color Level V8OutputColor
%unmapped %match %bylevel
In this example, remapping takes every element for which the color matches its level's ByLevel color, and changes its color to ByLevel. The same principles apply for the Weight and LineStyle Mapping tables. The Color Section describes how %unmapped and %bylevel affect the column values.
If the value in the Color, Weight, or LineStyle qualifier column is enclosed in square brackets, remapping interprets it as an effective value. For example, if the value in the Color qualifier column is [2], then the remapping applies if either the element color is 2, or the element has its color set to ByLevel, and the ByLevel color of its level is set to 2. The Class column can either contain integer class values, or the entries Primary, Construction, or Dimension, which are class values of 0, 2, and 3, respectively. To determine the appropriate values for the ElementType column, select an element of the type that you want to remap, and use the Element Information tool in MicroStation. The appropriate integer value appears to the right of the type name in the tree view in the left hand pane. For example, the type of Line elements is 3. The Cell column can be used to specify that the remapping applies only to elements that are components of cells with names
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 281 of 387
matching the entry in the column. The Cell column entry can contain the asterisk character, *, which matches any zero or more characters in that position, or a question mark character ? to match any one character in that position. For example, if the Cell column contains bac*, then the remapping row applies only to elements that are components of a cell with a name that starts with bac. The cell name matching algorithm is not case sensitive.
Understanding the remapping CSV format
Generally, the macro provided in the spreadsheet takes care of creating the remapping CSV file from the information that you provide. However, if you do not have Microsoft Excel, you can still create a remapping CSV file using the information provided in this section. The sections in the remapping CSV file are delimited by lines that start with %section as the first column, followed by the section name in the next column. The case of section and the section name are not important. For example the line: %section,Levels marks the start of the Levels section. The end of a section is either the start of the next section or the end of the file. The first line after the start of a section must have the column names, separated by commas. The column names required in a section are defined in the descriptions of each section below.
Levels Section
The Levels section of the CSV file starts with the line:
%section, Levels It contains the following columns:

Column The name or number of the source level to remap. The icon in the Level column provides an easy way to populate that column with the levels that are in the current MicroStation file. When you click on that icon, an Excel macro contacts MicroStation, retrieves the current levels, and inserts those that are not already in the table at the top of the table. MicroStation must be running and have an active design file for this operation to succeed. Level To specify a level number, use the % character before the number. For example, enter %12 to specify level 12. Note: Some versions of Excel immediately change entries of the form %n to n%. If this happens, enter %%n (for example, %%12) instead. You can see the level numbers in the Number column of the Level Display and Level Manager dialog boxes. Level numbers are most useful when converting V7 files where they correspond directly to the traditional 1-63 levels. Color Weight LineStyle Optional. Qualifiers that refine the elements for which the remapping is performed. Class ElementType Cell V7OutputLevel V8OutputLevel DWGOutputLayer Required Description Number OverrideColor OverrideWeight OverrideStyle OverrideStyleScale The number of the level when saved to a V7 file. The name of the level when saved to a V8 file. The name of the layer when saved to a DWG or DXF file. If the value in this column is 1, then the output level is always created in the output file, even if there are no elements on it. The level description. The level number. The level symbology override color for this level. The level symbology override weight for this level. The level symbology override line style for this level. The scale for the OverrideStyle for this level. Contents
OverrideStyleOriginWidth The starting width of the OverrideStyle for this level.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
OverrideStyleEndWidth ByLevelColor ByLevelWeight ByLevelStyle ByLevelStyleScale ByLevelStyleEndWidth ElementAccess GlobalDisplay Plot The ending width of the OverrideStyle for this level. The ByLevel color for this level. The ByLevel weight for this level. The ByLevel line style for this level. The scale for the ByLevelStyle for this level. The ending width of the ByLevelStyle for this level. If the value of this column is 1, disallows modification of elements on this level. The global display flag for this level. The plot flag for this level.
Page 282 of 387
ByLevelStyleOriginWidth The starting width of the ByLevelStyle for this level.
The Level section has the following characteristics:
For each element, MicroStation finds the entry in the level map that matches that level, and uses the output level in V7OutputLevel, V8OutputLevel, or DWGOutputLayer, depending on the target format. If an elements level does not appear in the Level column, the level is unchanged, except if the target format is V7. When saving to V7, if the level is not found, the level number is used. If that level number is greater than 63, the level is assigned to level number modulo 63. For example, an element on level number 140 would be assigned to level 14 in the V7 output file. (To calculate this, divide 140 by 63. The remainder (14) is used for the level number.)
If the Destination column corresponding to the target of a Save As operation is missing, or that column does not have an entry for a particular row, the default mapping described above applies. Similarly, if there is no Level column or no Level remapping section, the default mapping is applied for the whole file. The elements for which the remapping in a particular row applies can be qualified using the optional Color, Weight, LineStyle, Class, ElementType, and Cell columns. While editing the remapping spreadsheet, those columns are displayed when Show Optional Columns is turned on. To distinguish them from the required columns, they are shown with a different background color. The columns that are shaded grey control the properties of the levels specified as output levels in the V8OutputLevel and DWGOutputLayer columns. They have no effect when saving to V7 format. The 17 rightmost columns are the columns created when doing exporting a level table from the Level Manager. You could use the Level Manager to create the desired levels, export using Level Manager, and then cut and paste the information from that spreadsheet.
Colors Section
The Colors section of the CSV file starts with the line:
%section,Colors It contains the following columns:

Column Color Level Weight LineStyle Optional. Qualifiers that refine the elements for which the remapping is performed. Class ElementType Cell V7OutputColor The color when saved to a V7 file. The color to remap. Contents
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
V8OutputColor The color when saved to a V8 file.
Page 283 of 387
DWGOutputColor The color when saved to a DWG or DXF file.
The Colors section has the following characteristics:
When MicroStation saves files to DWG format, by default it maps the color indices in the DGN color table to the closest color in the (fixed) AutoCAD color table. If the DWGOutputColor entry is a color in the files color table, you can enter the number of the color in the DWGOutputColor column. If a fixed index in the AutoCAD color table is desired (for instance, if you do not want the color matching to be applied), enter the AutoCAD color number with the suffix ac, as in the following example:
%SECTION,Colors %SECTION,Colors Color,DWGOutputColor 14,62ac If the value in the Color column is enclosed in square brackets, it is interpreted as effective color. For example, if the value in the Color column is [2], then the remapping applies if either the element color is 2, or the element has its color set to ByLevel, and the ByLevel color of its level is set to 2. If the keyword %unmapped appears in the Color column, then every element with a color that does not otherwise appear in the Color column is mapped to the destination specified in the %unmapped row. If there is more than one %unmapped row in the section with the same values for the qualifiers columns, the last one is used. If the keyword %bylevel appears in the V8OutputColor or DwgOutputColor column, then every element that has the color indicated is changed to be ByLevel. The V7 file format does not support ByLevel, so that keyword is invalid in the V7OutputColor column. The elements for which the remapping in a particular row applies can be qualified using the optional Level, Weight, LineStyle, Class, ElementType, and Cell columns. While editing the remapping spreadsheet, those columns are displayed when the Show Optional Columns check box is checked. To distinguish them from the required columns, they are shown with a different background color.
Weights Section
The line Weights section of the CSV file starts with the line:
%section,Weights It contains the following columns:

Column Weight Level Color LineStyle Optional. Qualifiers that refine the elements for which the remapping is performed. Class ElementType Cell V7OutputWeight V8OutputWeight The line weight when saved to V7 file. The line weight when saved to V8 file. The line weight to remap. Contents
DWGOutputWeight The line weight when saved to DWG or DXF file.
The Weights section has the following characteristics:
If the value in the Weight column is enclosed in square brackets, it is interpreted as effective weight. For example, if the value in the Weight column is [4], then the remapping applies if either the element weight is 4, or the element has its weight set to ByLevel, and the ByLevel weight of its level is set to 4
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 284 of 387
If the keyword %unmapped appears in the Weight column, then every element that has a weight that does not otherwise appear in the Weight column is mapped to the destination specified in the %unmapped row. If there is more than one %unmapped row in the section with the same values for the qualifier columns, the last one is used. If the keyword %bylevel appears in the V8OutputWeight or DwgOutputWeight column, then every element that has the weight indicated is changed to be ByLevel. The V7 file format does not support ByLevel, so that keyword is invalid in the V7OutputWeight column. Prior to AutoCAD 2000, the DWG format did not have a way to store line weights. Some users established plotting line weights by setting element colors based on their desired line weights. If the output format is DWG or DXF, either a DWGOutputWeight or a DWGOutputColor column, (or both) can be included. The remapping operation will set the output line color based on the source weight if the DWGOutputColor is present; it will set the output line weight based on the source weight if the DWGOutputWeight column is present and the DWG version selected supports line weight. If a DWGOutputColor column is included in the weight mapping section, make sure that there is no DWGOutputColor column in the color mapping section, or the results are unpredictable. When the target is AutoCAD 2000 or later, you can map directly to AutoCAD line weights rather than through MicroStations default linear formula for setting AutoCAD line weights from MicroStation line weights, by entering values in the DWGOutputWeight in mm. For example:
%SECTION,Weights Weight,DWGOutputWeight 1,0.15mm The mm is required whenever the value should be interpreted as mm rather than pixels.
The elements for which the remapping in a particular row applies can be qualified using the optional Level, Color, Style, Class, ElementType, and Cell columns. While editing the remapping spreadsheet, those columns are displayed when the Show Optional Columns check box is checked. To distinguish them from the required columns, they are shown with a different background color.
LineStyles Section
The LineStyles section of the CSV file starts with the line:
%section,LineStyles It contains the following columns:

Column LineStyle Level Color Weight Optional. Qualifiers that refine the elements for which the remapping is performed. Class ElementType Cell V7OutputLineStyle V7OutputScale V8OutputLineStyle V8OutputScale DWGOutputLineStyle DWGOutputScale The name or number of the line style when saved to a V7 file. The scale factor for the line style when saved to a V7 file. If the entry is blank, 1.0 is used. The name or number of the line style when saved to a V8 file. The scale factor for the line style when saved to a V8 file. If the entry is blank, 1.0 is used. The name of the line style when saved to a DWG or DXF file. The scale factor for the line style when saved to a DWG file. If the entry is blank, 1.0 is used. The name or number of the source line style to remap. Contents
If the output line style is defined in an AutoCAD line style file, this entry is the .lin file that contains the line style. The default DWGOutputLineStyleFile is acad.lin. MicroStation attempts to find the file in the support directory of an AutoCAD installation on the system, or you can specify a full file path
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The LineStyles section has the following characteristics:
Page 285 of 387
If the value in the LineStyle column is enclosed in square brackets, it is interpreted as effective line style. For example, if the value in the LineStyle column is [3], then the remapping applies if either the element line style is 3, or the element has its line style set to ByLevel, and the ByLevel line style of its level is set to 3. The keyword %drop can appear in any of the OutputLineStyle columns. When it does, any element with the corresponding LineStyle is drawn as multiple elements that represent the appearance of the source element. This does not apply to predefined line styles 0 through 7. If the keyword %unmapped appears in the LineStyle column, then every element that has a line style that does not otherwise appear in the LineStyle column is mapped to the destination specified in the %unmapped row. If there is more than one % unmapped row in the section, the last one is used. If the keyword %bylevel appears in the V8OutputLineStyle or DwgOutputLineStyle column, then every element that has the line style indicated is changed to ByLevel. The V7 file format does not support ByLevel, so that keyword is invalid in the V7OutputColor column. The elements for which the remapping in a particular row applies can be qualified using the optional Level, Color, Weight, Class, ElementType, and Cell columns. While editing the remapping spreadsheet, those columns are displayed when the Show Optional Columns check box is checked. To distinguish them from the required columns, they are shown with a different background color.
Fonts Section
The Fonts section of the CSV file starts with the line:
%section,Fonts It contains the following columns:

Column Font Level Color Weight Optional. Qualifiers that refine the elements for which the remapping is performed. Class ElementType Cell FontType The font type. This column can be blank, or contain one of the values USTN, SHX or TT for MicroStation, AutoCAD SHX, or TrueType fonts, respectively. If the entry is blank for a particular row, the remapper finds the first font with the name specified in the Font column. If there is more than one font with the same name but different type (for example, a Courier TrueType font and a Courier SHX font) then two rows are required in the table to map them both. The name or number of the font when saved to a V7 file. The destination font must be a USTN font. Otherwise text elements with the Font will not be remapped if the source font is a USTN font, or will be mapped to Font 0 if the source font is a TrueType or SHX font. The name of the font when saved to a V8 file. The type of the font. This can be blank, or one of the values USTN, SHX, or TT. If left blank, the remapper finds the first font with the name specified. The name of the font when saved to DWG or DXF file. If this column is not blank, then the width of every remapped text or tag element is multiplied by the factor specified. The factor must be greater than 0. If this column is not blank, then the height of every remapped text or tag element is multiplied by the factor specified. The factor must be greater than 0 Contents The name or number of the source font to remap. The icon in the Font column provides an easy way to populate that column with the Fonts that are available in MicroStation. When you click on that icon, an Excel macro contacts MicroStation, retrieves the current fonts and inserts those that are not already in the table at the top of the table. MicroStation must be running and have an active design file for this operation to succeed.
V7OutputFont V8OutputFont V8OutputFontType DWGOutputFont
DWGOutputFontType This must be one of the values SHX or TT. OutputWidthFactor OutputHeightFactor
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Cell Name Mapping Table
Page 286 of 387
Cell names can be remapped only when saving to the MicroStation V7 format. This is needed because prior to V8, MicroStation had a sixcharacter limit for cell names. The Cell Names section of the CSV file starts with the line
%section,CellNames It contains the following columns:

Column CellName The cell name to remap. The cell name when saved to a V7 file. V7OutputCellName The names in the V7OutputCellName column must be no longer than six characters, and can contain only the letters A through Z, the numerals 0 through 9, and the characters ., $, _. Contents
Working with DWG Files

MicroStation enables you to directly open and work with DWG files. This topic describes how to open DWG files, create new DWG files, and how to work with seed files. Opening DWG files In MicroStation, you can work directly in a DWG file. Once you choose a DWG file to open, MicroStation automatically enables the DWG workmode. MicroStation also automatically detects the release version of the DWG file (for example, 2004). When you make changes to the DWG file, they are saved in the same release version.
Password-protected DWG files can be opened in MicroStation. When you attempt to open a password-protected file, a dialog box prompts you to enter the password.
To open a DWG file
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 287 of 387
2. From the Files of type option menu, choose one of the following: CAD Files [*.dgn, *.dwg, *.dxf] AutoCAD Drawing Files [*.dwg] AutoCAD DXF Files [*.dxf] All Files [*.*] 3. Select a DWG file to open. Note that once you select a DWG file, the Options button is available. Also note that a thumbnail image of the file's contents appears in view pane on the dialog box. 4. (Optional) To specify DWG file open options, click the Options button. The DWG Open Options dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 288 of 387
5. (Optional) Using the controls on the DWG Open Options dialog box, set the options for opening DWG files. 6. (Optional) To close the DWG Open Options dialog box, click OK. 7. To close the Open dialog box, click Open.
Recovering corrupt or invalid DWG/DXF files
DWG or DXF files may contain inconsistent, corrupt, or lost data caused by certain application programs, improper editing techniques, hardware problems, or software problems. In many cases, MicroStation can correct or ignore errors within a DWG/DXF file. If a file with errors is being opened with read-only access or as a reference, then MicroStation automatically performs a recovery process on the in-memory version of the file, which effectively ignores the errors. The Message Center displays a warning that errors were encountered. If a file is being opened with write access, then an alert box is displayed with the following message: The File: filename.dwg contains errors that prevent opening it. Do you wish to attempt to recover the file by correcting these errors? If you click OK, MicroStation attempts to recover the file. If the recovery is successful, the file is opened, and the Message Center verifies the successful recovery.
To recover DWG/DXF files without opening them, use the Recover command (Utilities > DWG > Recover).
Creating DWG files In MicroStation, you can create a new DWG file from a DWG seed file. A DWG seed file is simply a DWG file that contains default settings and attributes.
To create and open a new DWG file
1. From the File menu, choose New. The New dialog box opens. The default filter is MicroStation DGN Files [*.dgn]. The file specification for the default seed DGN file is displayed in the Seed field. 2. Change the filter to AutoCAD Drawing Files [*.dwg] under the File Type option menu. The Seed field now displays a seed DWG file. 3. (Optional) To select a different seed DWG file, click the Select button and use the Select Seed File dialog box. 4. (Optional) To select a different destination disk drive or directory, choose the desired drive or directory from the Look in option menu. 5. In the File name field, key in a name for the new DWG file. The file list is useful for ensuring that the new filename is not that of an existing file, or for selecting an existing filename and amending it. 6. Click Save. The new DWG file opens. It uses the settings defined in the DWG seed file. Note that the DWG file symbol appears in the status bar at the bottom right of the program window. Working with seed files Whenever you create a new DGN or DWG file, a seed file is required. The contents of the seed file is copied into the new DGN or DWG file. Generally, seed files only contain settings and attributes. Some companies also incorporate graphic data such as logos and drawing sheets into a seed file. When a DGN file is saved to DWG, a DWG seed file may also be used to define required settings that are not present in the file being saved.
Using DGN seed files containing DWG standards
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 289 of 387
If you plan to work with DGN files that will be converted to DWG format, it is helpful to set up a special DGN seed file that contains the standard level (layer), text style, dimension style, line style (linetype), and units settings required for the DWG deliverable. The easiest way to do this is to start with a DWG file containing the settings, then create a DGN seed file from it.
To create a DGN seed file containing DWG standards
1. In MicroStation, open the DWG file that contains the settings to use as standards. 2. Review and modify settings as necessary. 3. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 4. From the Save as type option menu, choose MicroStation V8 DGN Files. The filename in the File name field will now have the DGN, rather than the DWG, extension. 5. From the Save in option menu, choose the appropriate seed directory (for example, ..\Bentley\Workspace\Standards\Seed). 6. Click Save to save the file in the seed file directory.
Using DWG seed files
A seed DWG can be used to establish project standards. Every time that you create a DWG file, you can use the seed DWG file that contains the project's standard level (DWG layer) configuration, text and dimension style, working units (DWG units), and line style (DWG linetype) settings. The default seed.dwg file delivered with MicroStation contains one design model and two sheet models named Layout1 and Layout2. The default seed file also contains view groups for each model.
Sharing DGN and DWG Data

This topic includes strategies and techniques for working with CAD data that will be shared between applications. It also includes a DGN-DWG terminology reference. For more information, see also the DWG Open Options dialog box and the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. Models A DGN file is composed of models. When you draw or place elements with MicroStation tools, the elements are added to the active model. A model can be either 2D or 3D, and is stored as a discrete object within the DGN file. There are two types of models: design or sheet. Design models, which are similar to DWG models (model space), consist of design geometry and can be either 2D or 3D. A design model can also be used as a reference or placed as a cell. In MicroStation, you can create an unlimited number of design models in a DGN file. In contrast, the DWG file format allows only one model per file. Sheet models, which are similar to DWG drawing layouts (paper space), are most commonly used composing finished and annotated drawings. MicroStation allows you to create an unlimited number of sheet models per DGN file. The DWG file format also allows unlimited drawing layouts.
Working with models that will be saved to DWG files
The DWG file format allows one model and unlimited drawing layouts. When you are working with models in a DGN file that you plan to save to a DWG file, the easiest way to ensure compatibility is to use only one design model with unlimited sheet models. When you save a DGN model to a DWG file, the default design model is saved to model space in the DWG file, and the sheet models are saved to drawing layouts. The Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box provides several options for saving non-default design models:
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 290 of 387
The Create Separate Files option saves each non-default design model to a separate DWG file. Reference attachments to nondefault models are saved to XREF inserts pointing to the new separate model DWG files. The Create Paper Space option saves each non-default design model to a drawing layout (paper space) in the DWG model that contains the default design model. Reference attachments are merged according to the Non-Default Models Attachments setting on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. The Ignore option does not save the non-default models to the DWG file. Reference attachments are merged according to the NonDefault Models Attachments setting on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box.
The DWG file format does not support all of the reference types available in MicroStation.
Working with models in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode, you can work with one design model and unlimited sheet models. The design model is saved to model space, and the sheet models are saved to drawing layouts (paper space). References A reference is a model that is attached to and displayed with the active model for printing or construction purposes. A MicroStation reference is analogous to an AutoCAD external reference (XREF) or an AutoCAD overlay.
Working with references that will be saved to DWG files
When you are working with a DGN file that will be saved to a DWG file:
Use settings on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box to control how MicroStation references will be handled in the DWG file format. Do not attach the active model to itself as a reference (self-reference), since the DWG file format does not support this type of reference. Use MicroStation's Live Nesting option, since it is compatible with AutoCAD's settings. See Working with nested references. You can set options in MicroStation to create references that can be saved to AutoCAD overlay attachments.
The default Xref Block insert layer for a DGN reference attachment saved in the DWG file is the layer named 0. To override the default insert layer for reference attachments, set the configuration variable MS_DWGINSERTLAYER to the desired layer name. For example, assigning MS_DWGINSERTLAYER to MSINSERT results in the assignment of inserts to the layer "MSINSERT". If this layer does not exist, it will automatically be created. MS_DWGINSERTLAYER is used to override the default insert layer for normal (unshared) cells as well as reference attachments.
Merging references when saving to a DWG file
The DWG file format does not support all of the reference types available in MicroStation. As a result, you must use the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box to define how the following types of references are merged into the model:
external attachments External attachments are separate files that can be attached to the main (default) design file as a reference. These attachments can be retained as separate attachments (and become AutoCAD XREFs), or be merged into the default model. self-attachments Self-attachments are references to the main design file from within, such as in the case of reference views used to create sheet models. The DWG file format does not support self-attached references. They must be merged to be usable in AutoCAD. attachments to non-default models The DWG file format only supports one design model. DGN files can have multiple design models One of these models is defined as the default model Attachments to non default design models must be merged to display
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
in AutoCAD.
Page 291 of 387
masked attachments The DWG file format does not support clipping masks applied to references. Attachments with clipping masks must be merged, or the clipping mask will be removed in AutoCAD.
Additionally, in the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, you can enable/disable the Merge Displayed Levels Only setting to define whether or not only those levels displayed in the selected view are merged into the DWG file. If the configuration variable MS_MERGE_DISPLAYEDLEVELSONLY is set, then the Merge Displayed Levels Only setting is turned on and disabled.
Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, References tab
Working with nested references
When a MicroStation design file used as a reference has its own attachments, they become nested references. The links between these files can be maintained through many levels (depths) of nesting, so that if you open only one file, you can view the contents of many files. The individual references can be updated, and the changes will be shown in the master (or parent) file. When you attach a parent reference to your model and turn on live nesting, you can also control how many levels of nested references are attached to the model. In AutoCAD, there are two types of references that can be made to create file associations attachments and overlays. Both allow the display of all objects in the attached file, as well as those in the nested references. Although AutoCAD allows live nested references, it does not provide control of nesting depth, and thus all data in the nested attachments is implicitly displayed.
Using live nesting in a DGN file that will be saved to DWG format
If your DGN file will be saved to a DWG file, make sure that your reference settings are compatible with AutoCAD's reference settings. To do this, turn on live nesting for the parent reference, and set the nest depth to a high number so that all nested references are included.
To attach a reference with live nesting
1. In the Primary tool box, click the References icon. The References dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. In the dialog box's tool bar, select the Attach Reference tool. The Attach Reference dialog box opens. 3. Select the DGN file that contains the model to attach as a reference, and click Open. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens.
Page 292 of 387
4. From the Nested Attachments options menu, choose Live Nesting. The Nested Attachments options are only available when the selected model has reference attachments. When the Live Nesting option is on, the hierarchical structure of any nested references are maintained when attaching the parent reference to a model.
In MicroStation, a nested attachment is displayed only if the child reference does not have its Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting setting turned on (in the Attachment Settings dialog box) and the parent reference has Live Nesting enabled.
5. In the Nest Depth field, enter a high value (for example, 10). Set the depth setting to a high number to include even the most deeply nested references when the file is saved to DWG. Although the nested attachments will display in the view window, you will see only the parent reference in the References dialog box's list box.
Defining overlay attachments
An AutoCAD overlay is a type of reference. Unlike an AutoCAD attached reference, if it becomes a nested reference, it is not displayed, nor are any of the files attached to it. Thus, an overlay might be used when designers working on a portion of the project need to see information that will not necessarily be displayed at the parent file level. To create a MicroStation reference attachment that behaves like an AutoCAD overlay, turn on the Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting setting in the Attachment Settings dialog box. When you save a DGN file to a DWG file, you can save reference attachments to DWG files as overlays. To do this, open the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, and turn on Create Overlays for Reference Attachments (No Live Nesting). When this setting is on, all references are created as overlays, whether or not the Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting setting is on. This setting effectively disables live nesting in the DWG output file. It is useful for files where live nesting is turned off for all attachments.
Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, General tab References options
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Working in DGN files with attached DWG data
Page 293 of 387
A model in a DWG file can be attached as a reference to a design or sheet model in the open file (DGN or DWG).
Working with references in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode:
When attaching a reference, you can specify a level for the reference attachment. In an AutoCAD DWG or DXF file, each XREF or layout viewport is placed on a specific layer. When you open the DWG file in MicroStation, XREFs and layout viewports are treated as references, and are placed on the same levels (layers). To modify a reference's level, open the References dialog box, double-click on the reference to open the Attachment Settings dialog box, and modify the Level setting. If a level is frozen, references on that level are not displayed.
A model cannot be attached to itself as a reference (self-reference). Clipping masks cannot be used on references. You can work with live nested references, but cannot turn off live nesting or control nest depth, except by using the Ignore Attachment when Live Nesting setting (Attachment Settings dialog box.)
Cells MicroStation shared cells are similar to AutoCAD blocks. A shared cell is a cell whose elements are stored only once in the DGN file, regardless of how often the cell is placed within the DGN file. Any change made to one instance of a shared cell reflects in all instances of that shared cell. For an unshared normal cell, on the other hand, the library definition is stored in the DGN file each time the cell is placed. In AutoCAD, all blocks behave like shared cells. There is no analogy to a normal cell. Some Web pages contain DWG content that is i-Drop enabled. This means that you can drag the content from the Web page and drop it into a MicroStation model. When you drop this content into a model, it is placed as a cell.
Working with cells that will be saved to DWG files
When you save a DGN file to DWG format, you can use existing cell libraries to help develop the design. Generally, you should use shared cells, as normal cells are not supported in the DWG file format. If your DGN model contains normal cells, however, they will be converted to shared cells in the DWG file. The following topics provide more details about working with cells:

Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, General tab Cells options annotating cells understanding insert layer control Shared Cells
Annotating cells: using enter data fields and tags
During the conversion to DWG format, cells migrate with no problems, unless they contain enter data fields. AutoCAD does not have an equivalent feature. To annotate cells in DGN files that will be saved to DWG file, use tags rather than enter data fields.
Using enter data fields in cells
For drawing annotation, MicroStation users have traditionally embedded enter data fields in cell symbols. For example, items like valve designators and door symbols have often been created using this type of cell annotation.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 294 of 387
When you save the DGN file as a DWG file, the enter data fields that are not used in cells are converted to text. However, the enter data fields in cells are handled somewhat differently. In a DGN file, an enter data field may be used to annotate a normal cell (enter data fields cannot be used with shared cells). During conversion, MicroStation converts an enter data field that is part of a cell to an AutoCAD attribute linked to a block. In AutoCAD, the enter data field's value appears as an attribute positioned precisely where the enter data field was located in the MicroStation cell. Like MicroStation tags, all AutoCAD attributes have an associated label or name. Since MicroStation enter data fields are not defined with a label, the Save As process automatically generates a label for each enter data field that is converted to an attribute. The new label is the cell name plus a sequence number. These automatically-generated attribute labels may be undesirable, particularly if DWG specifications require specific attribute usage and labels. Since MicroStation cannot store labels for enter data fields, you should not use enter data fields in situations where specific labels are required. Instead, incorporate tags into the cell definition, as these become block attributes when the DGN file is converted to DWG.
Understanding insert layer control for normal cells
The insert layer for a normal (unshared) cell saved in the DWG file corresponds by default to the level of the cell's first component element. In certain cases it may desirable to override the default insert layer. Consider, for example, what can happen when levels within a viewport (model attached to sheet) are turned off and Level Display is set to a view number. In this case, unless an override is specified, if an insert exists on a layer that is frozen it will not be displayed at all even if the component layers are displayed. To override the default insert layer for normal cells, set the configuration variable MS_DWGINSERTLAYER to the desired layer name. For example, assigning MS_DWGINSERTLAYER to MSINSERT results in the assignments of inserts to the layer "MSINSERT". If this layer does not exist, it will automatically be created.
MS_DWGINSERTLAYER is used to override the default insert layer for reference attachments as well as normal cells.
Working with DWG blocks in MicroStation
Blocks in a DWG file behave like shared cells when the file is opened in MicroStation. These topics provide more details about working with blocks in MicroStation. You can:

attach the DWG file as a cell library identify a list of DWG files that can be inserted as cells export blocks to a cell library work with multiview block references
Attaching the DWG file as a cell library
A DWG file can be attached to a DGN or DWG file as a cell library. The individual DWG blocks are converted to shared cells that you can place in your model.
To place shared cells (blocks) from a DWG file
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. From the dialog box's File menu, choose Attach. The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens. 3. From the Files of type option menu, select DWG format. Navigate to the DWG file to be attached, and click Open. In the Cell Library dialog box, the DWG file appears in the list box. The Where column identifies the source as Blck.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 295 of 387
4. Turn on Use Shared Cells. The blocks in the DWG file are listed as shared cells. The Where column identifies the source as LbSh.
5. Double-click a cell to make it the active cell. 6. In the Cells task, select the Place Active Cell tool and position the cell as desired.
Usually the origin is (0,0,0) in the DWG that is being placed as a cell. However, if the AutoCAD INSBASE (insertion base) system variable is set, it is used as the origin.
Identifying DWG files that can be used as cells
The MS_BLOCKLIST configuration variable can be used to identify a list of DWG files that can be inserted as cells. In this case, the contents of the entire DWG file is placed as a shared cell.
To place cells from a list of DWG files
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. On the View/modify configuration variables list box, select the variable MS_BLOCKLIST. 3. Click Edit. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. The Edit Mode should be set to Overwrite.
Page 296 of 387
4. In the New Value field, enter the path to the *.DWG files that you want to place as cells, and click OK. For example, enter c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\WorkSpace\Projects\Untitled\*.dwg. 5. From the dialog box's File menu, choose Save. 6. Click OK to exit the Configuration dialog box. 7. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 8. Click Display All Cells in Path. The *.DWG files are displayed. 9. Double-click on the cell to make it the active cell. 10. In the Cells task, select the Place Active Cell tool and position the cell as desired.
Exporting blocks to a cell library
The EXPORT CELLS SHARED key-in can be used to export blocks (or shared cells) from a DWG file to a new MicroStation cell library.
To export blocks/shared cells from the open file to a cell library
1. Key in EXPORT CELLS SHARED [destinationCellLibraryName]. For example, to export the shared cells in the current file to a file called blockCellLibrary.cel, enter: EXPORT CELLS SHARED c:\myDgns\blockCellLibrary.cel.
To export blocks or shared cells from a group of files, use the EXPORT CELLS SHARED key-in with the Batch Process utility.
Working with multiview block references in MicroStation
Multiview block references created by Autodesk Architectural DeskTop display different block definitions in different views, in a manner similar to MicroStation TriForma's compound cells. MicroStation displays these proxy entities by using the general 2D or 3D representations of models. Unlike most proxy entities, which are automatically locked and cannot be modified, multiview block references can be moved, rotated, or scaled with standard MicroStation tools. To disable this behavior, set the configuration variable MS_DWGNODIRECTPROXIES. When this variable is set, only the proxy entity's graphics or bounding box are displayed.
Working with cells in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode, the way that you work with cells is essentially the same as in DGN workmode. All new cells are placed as shared cells, since the DWG file format does not support normal cells. In this workmode, you can also attach a DGN, DWG, or CEL file as a cell library and insert its contents.
Understanding element symbology in cells
In cells, element symbology includes settings for color, line style, and line weight. In MicroStation, cell element symbology can be assigned ByLevel, ByCell, and forced. These three settings are analogous to the AutoCAD ByLayer, ByBlock, and forced settings.
If any of the elements within the cell are assigned symbology ByLevel and are created on the Default level, then they adopt the ByLevel color, ByLevel line style, and ByLevel line weight of the level on which the cell is placed. If they are assigned ByLevel attributes but are on a level other than Default, they retain the symbology of the level on which they were originally placed.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 297 of 387
If the elements are assigned symbology ByCell, they adopt the symbology values that were in effect at the time that the cell is inserted. This setting is only available by default in DWG workmode. If the element attributes are forced, they always display the same way, regardless of level or active symbology. In other words, if an element within a cell is assigned the color red, then it will always display with the color red.
Tags MicroStation tags are elements that may be attached to elements drawn in designs. For example, a cell might have an attached tag that includes a name or number for the cell. Tags are similar to AutoCAD attributes, which are more constrained. In AutoCAD, attributes must be part of a block and cannot be attached to an element.
Working with tags that will be saved to DWG files
When working with a DGN file that will be saved to a DWG file:
A MicroStation tag is defined as part of a tag set, but this type of object does not exist in AutoCAD. When DGN file is saved to a DWG file, the tags become individual attributes, and the tag set name is lost. When tags are saved to DWG files, you can choose to save them to simple text elements. To do this, turn off the Tag option on the Save As DWG/DXF Options, Filter tab. In the DWG file format, tags are defined with characters only. When a DGN file is saved to DWG, the other data types (Integer and Real) are automatically converted to the character type. If the DGN file contains enter data fields in cells, they are converted to attributes.
Working with tags in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode:

Tags must be attached to shared cells. In DWG workmode, you can only place shared cells. A MicroStation tag is defined as part of a tag set, but this type of object does not exist in AutoCAD. When you open a DWG file containing attributes in MicroStation, a tag set is created for all of the tags contained in each shared cell definition with the same name as the shared cell. Tag data can be defined as characters only. (In DGN workmode, tag data can also be defined as integers and real numbers.)
General Procedure Creating tags in DWG workmode
1. Create geometry. 2. Define the tag set and tags. 3. Attach tags to the drawing at the desired location, with element Association off. The tag name is displayed, rather than the tag value. 4. Select the geometry and the tag that you just created. 5. Create a shared cell that uses the geometry and the tag. 6. Insert the cell into the model as many times as needed. The tag value is displayed, rather than the tag name. 7. For each cell, use the Edit Tag tool to change the tag value from the default.
In DGN workmode, the procedure for creating a cell is the same, except that you need to identify the cell as a shared cell. In the Cell Library dialog box, select the cell in the list box, then click Share.
Working with tags created from AutoCAD attribute definitions
When viewing DWG files MicroStation converts AutoCAD attribute definitions to tags that display exactly as they would in AutoCAD If
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
they are:

Page 298 of 387
in the master file, tag names are displayed. referenced, and they are variable tags, they are not displayed at all. referenced, and they are constant tags, their names are displayed.
Levels MicroStation levels are the same as DWG layers. In MicroStation, levels can be identified with both level numbers and names, but in the DWG file format, layers are identified only with names. Another difference in DGN and DWG files is the way that the display of levels (layers) is controlled. In MicroStation, each view can have its own display configuration, or levels can be displayed globally throughout the file. In AutoCAD, layers are only displayed globally they affect all viewports. (A viewport is analogous to a reference attachment.)
Working with levels that will be saved to DWG files

Use level names rather than level numbers, since level numbers are not supported in DWG files. To define how levels are converted to layers, use options on the General and Remap tabs in the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. To control the display of levels, use level filters. Level filters are analogous to DWG layer filters. MicroStation supports layer filters in DWG files from AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. Within MicroStation, you can also create, edit, and save layer filters to DWG files. Layer filters are loaded when a DWG file is opened, and changes are written back when the file is saved. To control display of elements in the selected levels, use the Level Display dialog box. If you want to freeze elements in levels, select Global Freeze. You can also control level display with the Global Display or View Display modes. Alternatively, you can use the Level Manager dialog box to control element display and freeze settings on a level-by-level basis.
When saving to a DWG file, you can choose to omit geometry on frozen levels. To do this, turn off the Frozen Layers option on the Save As DWG/DXF Options, Filter tab. Any of the element symbology settings (color, line weight, and line style) can be defined as with the value of ByLevel, which is similar to the ByLayer setting in AutoCAD. When an element that uses ByLevel symbology settings is placed on a level, it uses the symbology settings assigned to that level. To control the symbology settings for each level, use the Level Manager dialog box. To be consistent with the DWG file format, always set symbology to ByLevel, since AutoCAD does not have a setting similar to Overrides.
DWG files commonly use the ByLayer setting, since this was the default method for setting the appearance of objects for many years.
Working with levels in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode:

Levels can only be identified by names, not numbers, since level numbers are not supported in DWG files. To control how levels are displayed, use the Level Display dialog box. In DWG workmode, you can use the Global Display mode, or opt to freeze elements with the Global Freeze or Viewport Freeze mode. Alternatively, you can use the Level Manager dialog box to globally control element display and freeze settings on a level-by-level basis.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 299 of 387
Element symbology (color, line weight, and line style) can be defined ByLevel, which is similar to the ByLayer setting in AutoCAD. When you place an element on a level, it uses the color, line weight, and line style assigned to that level. To control the symbology settings for each level, use the Level Manager dialog box. In DWG workmode, Symbology is always set to ByLevel; overrides are not allowed.
Text styles and fonts MicroStation uses text styles to define fonts. Text styles support traditional MicroStation fonts, AutoCAD Shape fonts (*.shx), and TrueType fonts. AutoCAD supports its own native Shape fonts (SHX files) and TrueType fonts.
Working with text styles and fonts that will be saved to DWG files

Use TrueType fonts when possible, since both MicroStation and AutoCAD support this font type. MicroStation fonts in a DGN file can be converted to AutoCAD fonts when you save the file to DWG SHX format. If the DGN file contains unconverted MicroStation fonts when it is saved to DWG, AutoCAD uses the font specified by the FONTALT variable, and MicroStation uses the font specified as the Fast Font. Text fonts are stored in font libraries. The MS_DWGFONTPATH configuration variable lets you specify the directory where all DWG SHX fonts are stored. In AutoCAD, every text element in a DWG file must have an associated text style. When a DGN file is saved to DWG format, MicroStation automatically creates a like-named DWG text style for each used text style. If the DGN file contains text elements placed without a text style, MicroStation automatically creates a text style for each font used to place these elements. MicroStation determines these style names by applying the naming template specified by the Text Style Name Template setting in the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box.
Converting MicroStation fonts to AutoCAD fonts
If a DGN file that you want to save to DWG format uses MicroStation fonts, you can opt to convert them to AutoCAD fonts when you convert the file to DWG.
To save a MicroStation font to an AutoCAD font
1. (Optional) If necessary, specify the remapping of the font's angular and diameter dimensioning symbols by defining the configuration variable MS_RSCFONTDATA. 2. From the File menu, choose Save As. 3. From the Select Format to Save list, choose AutoCAD Drawing Files (*.dwg) or AutoCAD DXF Files (*.dxf). 4. Click Options. The Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box opens. 5. In the list box, open the Fonts category.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 300 of 387
Save As DWG/DXF Options, General tab Fonts options
6. Turn on Convert MicroStation Fonts to AutoCAD Fonts. 7. Use the SHX Output Directory field to specify the directory where the AutoCAD fonts are stored. The converted fonts are saved to a *.shx file in this directory.
Specifying the remapping of angular and diameter dimensioning symbols
The configuration variable MS_RSCFONTDATA, if defined, specifies the remapping of the degree, diameter and plus-minus symbols applied to custom MicroStation fonts during conversion to SHX format. AutoCAD requires that all SHX fonts contain these symbols and furthermore requires that these symbols be at the following character positions:

degree 127 (176 for UNICODE fonts) plusMinus 128 (177 for UNICODE fonts) diameter 129 (216, 248 and 8709 for UNICODE fonts)
Remapping is required even in the case of aMicroStation font that does not contain these symbols. On the other hand, in the case of a MicroStation font provided with MicroStation, you need to define MS_RSCFONTDATA only if you have modified the font or want to override the default remapping. The definition syntax of MS_RSCFONTDATA is as follows: MS_RSCFONTDATA=font_name, degree_font, degree_location, new_replaced_degree_symbol_location, plusminus_font, plusminus_location, new_replaced_plusminus_symbol_location, diameter_font, diameter_location, new_replaced_diameter_location
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
where:

Page 301 of 387
Font_name font to which the remapping applies. Degree_font font from which to extract the degree symbol glyph geometry. In MicroStation, the default symbol glyph geometry is in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) at position 176. If you want to use this geometry, set degree_font to -1. Degree_location character position in degree_font from which to extract the degree symbol glyph geometry. If you want to use the default geometry position 176 in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) set degree_location to 0. New_replaced_degree_symbol_location character position in font_name to which to remap the symbol in position 127 (or 176). The recommended value is 192 because MicroStation fonts do not have a symbol defined at position 192. However, if font_name does not have a symbol in position 127 (or 176), set new_replaced_degree_symbol_location to 0. Plusminus_font font from which to extract the plus-minus symbol glyph geometry. In MicroStation, the default symbol glyph geometry is in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) at position 177. If you want to use this geometry, set plusminus_font to -1. Plusminus_location character position in plusminus_font from which to extract the plus-minus symbol glyph geometry. If you want to use the default geometry position 177 in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) set plusminus_location to 0. New_replaced_plusminus_symbol_location character position in font_name to which to remap the symbol in position 128 (or 177). The recommended value is 193 because MicroStation fonts do not have a symbol defined at position 193. However, if font_name does not have a symbol in position 128 (or 177), set new_replaced_plusminus_symbol_location to 0. Diameter_font font from which to extract the diameter symbol glyph geometry. In MicroStation, the default symbol glyph geometry is in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) at position 216. If you want to use this geometry, set diameter_font to -1. Diameter_location character position in diameter_font from which to extract the diameter symbol glyph geometry. If you want to use the default geometry position 216 in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) set diameter_location to 0. New_replaced_diameter_symbol_location character position in font_name to which to remap the symbol in position 129 (or 216). The recommended value is 194 because MicroStation fonts do not have a symbol defined at position 194. However, if font_name does not have a symbol in position 129 (or 216), set new_replaced_diameter_symbol_location to 0.
For example, if you are converting font 3 (ENGINEERING), a UNICODE font, you might define MS_RSCFONTDATA as follows: MS_RSCFONTDATA=ENGINEERING,3,94,192,3,200,193,-1,0,0 This definition specifies the following remapping:
The degree symbol will be extracted from font 3 (ENGINEERING), character position 94, and will be at position 176 in the resulting SHX font. The 33/64 symbol, at position 176 in ENGINEERING, will be at position 192. The plus-minus symbol will be extracted from font 3 (ENGINEERING), position 200, and will be at position 177 in the resulting SHX font. The 35/64 symbol, at position 177 in ENGINEERING, will be at position 193. The MicroStation default diameter symbol will be extracted from font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL), position 216, and will be at position 216 in the resulting SHX font.
Working with text styles and fonts in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode:

You can use (*.shx) or TrueType fonts, since both MicroStation and AutoCAD support them. In AutoCAD, every text element in a DWG file must have an associated text style. When a DGN file is saved to DWG format, MicroStation automatically creates a like-named DWG text style for each used text style. If the DGN file contains text elements placed without a text style, MicroStation automatically creates a text style for each font used to place these elements. MicroStation determines these style names by applying the naming template specified by the Text Style Name Template setting in the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Fields
Page 302 of 387
A field in a DGN file will be saved to DWG as long as the property from which the field content is derived exists in AutoCAD. Enter data fields When saving a DGN file to DWG, you can convert empty enter data fields within text to space characters ( ) by turning on the Convert Empty Enter Data Fields to Spaces option (Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, General tab, Advanced category). If this option is off, enter data fields are converted to underscore characters (_). Units Whether you open a DWG file in MicroStation, attach a DWG file to a DGN file, insert a DWG file into a DGN file as a cell, or save a DGN file to a DWG file, it is important to keep the units consistent.
Working with units in files that will be saved to DWG
When saving a DGN file to DWG, the linear units in the resulting DWG file depend on a combination of:

the Working Units, Master Units, Sub Units, and Accuracy settings in the DGN File Settings dialog box the Units setting on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box
Direct method To set the units in a DGN file to be saved as DWG
1. In the DGN File Settings dialog box, Working Units category, review the Master Unit and Sub Unit settings.
You should not need to change the Working Units when saving to DWG.
2. Review, and if necessary, modify the Accuracy. If Accuracy is decimal, when the file is saved to DWG the results in AutoCAD are in Decimal or Engineering units. If Accuracy is fractional, the results in AutoCAD are in Architectural or Fractional units. If Accuracy is scientific, the results in AutoCAD are always in Scientific units. 3. In the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, under the General tab, set Units to the desired AutoCAD units: Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, or Scientific. This ensures your final unit format in the DWG file, but you must make sure that the selected units are consistent with the working units. When you select Architectural or Engineering units, the resulting DWG file will have inch-based units and coordinates displayed as feet-inches. When either of these two units is selected, the file geometry may be scaled due to unit conversion if the selected units are inconsistent with the working units.
Alternative Method To set the units in a DGN file to be saved as DWG
1. In the DGN File Settings dialog box, Working Units category, review the Master Unit and Sub Unit settings.
You should not need to change the Working Units when saving to DWG.
2. Review, and if necessary, modify the Accuracy. If Accuracy is decimal, when the file is saved to DWG the results in AutoCAD are in Decimal or Engineering units. If Accuracy is fractional, the results in AutoCAD are in Architectural or Fractional units. If Accuracy is scientific, the results in AutoCAD are always in Scientific units. 3. In the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, under the General tab, choose the output Units. The Units, in combination with the Working Units, determines the resulting units in AutoCAD. Refer to the table below to determine the Units value to use to get the desired results in AutoCAD. This table shows combinations of settings in the DGN file, and the resulting linear units when the file is saved to DWG and opened in AutoCAD.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Units in Master Units Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Feet Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Sub Units Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Any other Any other Any other Any other Any Sub Unit Inches Any Sub Unit Any Sub Unit Any Sub Unit Any Sub Unit Inches Any Sub Unit Any Sub Unit Any Sub Unit Accuracy Save As DWX/DXF Options Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Master Units Sub Units Inches Feet Any other Decimal/Engineering see footnote 9 Engineering Engineering Decimal Decimal Architectural/Fractional see footnote 10 Architectural Architectural Fractional Fractional Engineering Decimal Architectural Fractional Engineering Engineering Decimal Engineering Decimal Decimal Architectural Architectural Fractional Architectural Fractional Fractional Engineering Decimal Architectural Fractional Resulting Units in AutoCAD
Page 303 of 387
Fractional Master Units Fractional Sub Units Fractional Inches Fractional Feet Fractional Any other Decimal Decimal Inches Any other
Fractional Inches Fractional Any other Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Master Units Sub Units Sub Units Inches Feet Any other
Any except Inches Decimal
Fractional Master Units Fractional Sub Units Fractional Inches Fractional Feet Fractional Any other Decimal Decimal Inches Any other
Any except Inches Fractional Sub Units
Any Master Unit Any Sub Unit Any Master Unit Any Sub Unit Any Master Unit Any Sub Unit Any Master Unit Any Sub Unit
Fractional Inches Fractional Any other
Setting the units when opening and editing DWG files
When you open a DWG file in MicroStation, use the DWG Open Options dialog box to set the options for units. You can set two types of units: 1) Architectural and Engineering Units, and 2) Decimal, Scientific, or Fractional Units.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 304 of 387
DWG Open Options dialog box
The units settings provide MicroStation with information to determine the linear units to use, and thus the true size of the DWG geometry. You can set unit values to Seed File Master Units, Seed File Sub Units, Design Center Units, or explicit unit values (for example, Inches or Meters).
Modifying units in DWG workmode
When you open a DWG file MicroStation, you should set the file's units on the DWG Open Options dialog box. However, once the DWG file is open, you can modify the unit settings under the DGN File Settings dialog box, Working Units category. If you change the (Linear Units) Format setting, you must make sure that the Resolution (under Advanced Settings) is set to a consistent base unit. Specifically, when you change the Format to Engineering or Architectural, the Resolution must be inch-based in order to save the new unit format back to a DWG file.
Changing the Resolution can change the size of existing geometry in the model; therefore, this is not the recommended method for changing units in DWG files. Use this method only if you know that the change in unit resolution will not affect existing geometry size, or if the change is the intended behavior. The recommended method for setting the DWG units is to select the proper units when opening the DWG file. To modify units in DWG workmode
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. 2. In the DGN File Settings dialog box, choose the Working Units category. 3. From the (Linear Units) Format menu, choose the type of units that you want to use: Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, or Scientific. If you modify the units, you must choose a consistent base unit in the Advanced Settings. 4. (Optional) Select the Master Units. 5. (Optional) Select the Accuracy. 6. (Optional) Under Advanced Settings, check the Resolution to make sure that it is compatible with the Format. Specifically, if the Format is set to Architectural or Engineering, the Resolution must be inch-based. 7. (Optional) If the Resolution needs to be modified, click the Edit button and change the Resolution on the Advanced Unit Settings dialog box.
Changing the Resolution can change the size of existing geometry in the model.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Setting units to Design Center Units
Page 305 of 387
MicroStation's system for controlling units is very flexible, but it depends on knowing the true geometry size. Many of MicroStation's tools for dimensioning, placing cells, and referencing rely on the file units to work correctly. Unfortunately, MicroStation cannot always infer the file units in AutoCAD files. To accurately set the MicroStation Units options, you must understand the DWG file content and the standards used to create it. AutoCAD uses two types of linear units that are specified by the LUNITS variable. DWG files with Engineering and Architectural units (LUNITS= 3 and 4) are implicitly English units (feet and inches), so their units are known. The other types Scientific, Decimal, and Fractional (LUNITS = 1, 2, and 5, respectively) do not imply a specific unit of measurement. Beginning with AutoCAD 2000, INSUNITS system variable specifies units for Design Center blocks that are inserted into existing drawings. The INSUNITS variable allows for the type of automatic scaling that MicroStation performs when True Scaling is specified. Unfortunately, this variable does not exist in DWG files before AutoCAD 2000, and may be set inconsistently in files from more recent versions. If the system variable INSUNITS is appropriately set, when you open the DWG file in MicroStation you can set the Units options to Design Center Units. This is the best way to ensure that units are consistent when you open a file in MicroStation. To set the Design Center Units for a DWG file in MicroStation, use the DWG UNITS key-in to display the DWG/DXF Units dialog box, which lets you control the Design Center Units (INSUNITS) setting. Use the Save Settings command (File > Save Settings) to save the units setting in the active design file.
DWG/DXF Units dialog box
If you do not set the Design Center Units, the Design Center Units that are saved to DWG are determined by the values for Working Units on the DGN File Settings dialog box, and/or Units on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box.
Setting explicit units values
Generally, when you set DWG Open Options for units to explicit unit values (for example, to Inches or Meters), these units become the master units when the DWG file is opened. The next smallest units on the units list become the sub units. For example, if Feet are the master units, Inches are the sub units. However, if the units you select are either the master or sub units of the DGN seed file, both the master and sub units from the seed file are retained. If you want to use the sub units of the seed file as the master units for the file that you are opening, you must change the units in the seed file.
Responding to the DWG/DXF Units alert box
Once you select a DWG file to open, MicroStation displays the DWG/DXF Units alert box if the units for the file are not known. The alert box displays under the following circumstances:
The units for the file are Decimal, Fractional or Scientific, and units other than Design Center have been selected. If the units displayed are correct, then you can simply click OK. If you know that the units are correct for all files of this type, turn on the Do Not Display toggle to avoid seeing this alert box again.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 306 of 387
Design Center Units have been selected, but are unspecified (set to Unitless) in the selected file.
The units for the file are Architectural or Engineering, and units other than inches have been selected. This would only occur if a user explicitly changed the unit setting for Architectural and Engineering files to something other than inches.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 307 of 387
The alert box does not open if the units in the DWG Open Options are set to either Seed File Master Units or Seed File Sub Units.
Working with a DGN file with attached DWG data
Data in DWG files can be attached to the open file as references or cells. When you attach a DWG file as a reference, you can set options for units on the DWG Open Options dialog box. To do this, open the Attach Reference dialog box and click the Options button. Generally, you will get good results if you set both Units options to Design Center Units. If the system variable INSUNITS is appropriately set in AutoCAD, MicroStation can automatically interpret the DWG units. When you insert a DWG file as a cell, the units settings are controlled by the DWG Open Options dialog box (File > Open, then click the DWG Options button). Again, it is generally best to set the Units options to Design Center Units. Dimension styles and settings MicroStation dimension styles allow you to save dimension settings by name. This allows for greater unity between groups of dimensions in the file, as several different styles can be used for various models or portions of a model. Dimension styles are managed through the Dimension Styles dialog box.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 308 of 387
AutoCAD DWG files also include dimension styles. When you open a DWG file in MicroStation, the default dimension styles are available. You can also import dimension styles from DWG files into DGN files. MicroStation supports associative dimensions in DWG files from AutoCAD 2002 and later releases. Within MicroStation, you can also create, edit, and save associative dimensions to DWG files.
Working with dimension styles in files that will be saved to DWG files
MicroStation uses an unnamed dimension style for active settings. This concept works differently in AutoCAD. The unnamed style is exported to AutoCAD as active dimension style overrides in AutoCAD. These overrides take precedence over the effect of the active dimension style. For compatibility, you should not use an unnamed style to create dimensions. The following table describes how to work with the dimension styles so that they are compatible with DWG format. The DGNspecific options mentioned in the table are disabled in DWG workmode.
Dimension Styles Tab
To Make Dimension Styles Compatible with DWG Format: Do not set Overall Prefix and Suffix to Cell. Do not use any options in the Components area. Do not change the Level setting. Keep the dimension lines on the same level as the dimension element (the active level when placing a dimension). Use the same Attributes settings (Color, Style, and Weight) for Terminators and Dimension Lines. Set the Style to be the same as in the active dimension element. Do not use different line styles on dimension components (dimension lines, extension lines, and terminators).
Custom Symbols

Dimension Lines
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
When Allow Dimension with Leader is on: Dimension with Leader

Page 309 of 387
Do not set Type to Curve. Do not use a Terminator (where the leader joins the dimension line). Set the Style to be the same as the style of the active dimension element. Do not use different line styles on dimension components (dimension lines, extension lines, terminators, and text). Do not set the Geometry Offset to a negative number.
Extension Lines
Place Note Placement
No restrictions. The Center Size value is only saved to a DWG file when the Center Mark (Tool Settings category) is turned on for radial dimensions.
Turn on Uniform Cell Scale in the Terminator Symbols category to use the Geometry Width as a shared cell scale factor. Use the same Attributes settings (Color, Style, and Weight) for Terminators and Dimension Lines. Do not set Minimum Leader. In AutoCAD, the dimension line extending beyond terminator has same length as text height. Set the Style to be the same as the dimension element. Do not use different line styles on dimension components (dimension lines, extension lines, and terminators). Use shared cells for terminators, since AutoCAD only uses blocks for terminator symbols. If the terminator symbol for Arrow is set to Default, it is automatically converted to a shared cell when you save to DWG. Do not set the Terminator Symbols options to Symbol. Turn on Uniform Cell Scale. When on, the Geometry Width setting is used to uniformly scale the width and height of cell terminators, in text height units. This setting does not scale terminators defined as Default or Symbol. Do not set Text Frame to Capsule. Do not set a Left Margin. Do not use Underline Text. Do not use a Weight setting. Do not use a Width setting. Instead, define text width in the text style. Set the Style to be the same as the dimension element. Do not use different line styles on dimension components (dimension lines, extension lines, and terminators).
Terminators
Terminator Symbols

Text
Tolerance
No restrictions. Most Tool Settings are not saved to DWG. However, the Left and Right Extension settings are preserved. For the Size Arrow tool, the Left and Right Terminator settings are also preserved. The Advanced tab of the Dimension Styles dialog box lets you define tool and terminator settings.
Tool Settings
When you save to a DWG file, the dimension labels are saved. However, when you open the file in AutoCAD, they are defined as proxy objects. In AutoCAD, a proxy object is a placeholder for an object that you cannot edit directly. In this case, you cannot edit the dimension label information. Under Primary, turn on Use Working Units, if possible. If you do change the units settings, a unit scale factor is applied to the dimensions. Use only the ' (feet) and (inches) symbols. The DWG format does not allow other symbols. Do not use the Alternate Label setting.
Units
For Angle Format, do not set Units to Length. For Metric Format, do not use Unit Separation. F S d it l L di Z dT i i Z
Unit Format
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 310 of 387

When Use Stacked Fractions is on, click Settings. In the Stacked Fractions dialog box, set Alignment to Center, and set Scale to 1.0.
Understanding tool settings and terminator settings
The Advanced tab of the Dimension Styles dialog box lets you define settings for each dimensioning tool. Since AutoCAD's dimension styles are very limited, most of these settings are not preserved when the DGN file is saved to DWG. However, the Left Extension and Right Extension settings are preserved. For the Arrow Size tool, the Left and Right Terminator settings are also preserved as follows:
The Left and Right terminator settings on the Advanced tab, under the Tool Specific category, use symbols that are defined on the Terminators section. For example, if the Left terminator is defined with an arrow, it uses the Arrow symbol defined on the Terminator section. Terminator defined as Default or Cell are converted to shared cells when the file is saved, since AutoCAD terminators use blocks. The DWG format does not support the Symbol setting. If the Left and Right terminator settings are defined as arrows or strokes, then these settings are preserved when the file is saved to DWG. If the Left and Right terminator settings use different terminator symbols (for example, Left is set to arrow and Right is set to stroke), these settings are preserved.
Left is set to arrow, Right is set to stroke
Once the file is saved to DWG, the cell that defines the symbol for the left terminator is listed next to Arrowhead on the Terminators section of the Geometry tab. The left (Arrow) setting corresponds to the AutoCAD 1st Arrowhead setting (Dimension Settings). Likewise, the cell that defines the symbol for the Right terminator is listed next to the Stroke setting on the Geometry tab, under the Symbols option. The Right (Stroke) setting corresponds to the AutoCAD 2nd Arrowhead symbol.
Terminator Symbols settings
If the Left or Right Terminator uses the origin or dot symbol, the appearance of the symbol is maintained when the file is saved to DWG. However, the settings for these symbols are not preserved in the Advanced tab.
When a dimension is set to have text over the first extension line in AutoCAD, all the dimension text displayed over the first extension line. When opening the same file in MicroStation, the dimension text shifts to the second extension line. You can ensure the dimension text stays on the first extension line when working in MicroStation by adjusting two settings on the Advanced tab of the Dimension Styles dialog box. Set Text>Format>Justification to Left or Right and Tool Specific>Size Arrow>Text>Vertical to Vertical (if using size arrow or default tool).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Working with dimension styles in DWG workmode
Page 311 of 387
In DWG workmode:
Dimension style compatibility is checked whenever a dimension style is used. If any incompatible settings are found in the dimension style, an information box opens identifying the first incompatible setting. The style may be in the open file or in a DGN library. The recommended type of terminator is a shared cell. You can set the terminator type on the Geometry tab of the Dimension Styles dialog box. To define text width, use a text style.
Line Styles MicroStation line styles are similar to AutoCAD linetypes. The MicroStation line style definitions are stored in line style libraries, which are attached as needed to the active model. You can customize line styles using the Line Style Editor, and save the new definitions to the line style library. In AutoCAD, linetypes are also stored in an external text file, but only the linetypes used in the current model/layout are loaded into the DWG file and stored there. New linetypes can be created using a text editor, then stored externally. However, while DWG complex linetypes can contain text from SHX files and shapes defined in SHX shape files, they cannot use complex geometry (splines, cells, etc.) as they can in MicroStation. Furthermore, AutoCAD only supports a single spacing option, and does not support dash widths, tapering, and other options available for MicroStation line styles. For this reason, MicroStation custom line styles are not compatible with AutoCAD.
Working with line styles that will be saved to DWG files
MicroStation's standard line styles (line codes 17) are defined in screen units and are independent of the view zoom factor. AutoCAD linetype definitions are always defined in drawing units and are therefore not compatible with the MicroStation's standard line styles. If you have used the standard line styles in a file that will be saved to a DWG file, you should use a line code scale to determine the pattern size in the resulting file. To set this scale, use the Line Code Scale (Design Units/Cycle) on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. This setting indicates the size, in drawing units, of a cycle of a pattern once it is transferred to AutoCAD.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 312 of 387
Save As DWG/DXF Options, General tab Basic options
To maintain the appearance of line styles that are not compatible with AutoCAD, use the Drop Unsupported LineStyles to Components option on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. In the output DWG file, the line styles are dropped to their basic geometry elements. Use the Remap capability on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box Remap tab) to remap line styles to a different style in the DWG file. You can also specify a scale factor and a new DWG line style output file (.lin). If you are working in a file that will be used as a reference, do not use a global line style scale. (The global line scale is set with the ACTIVE LINESTYLESCALE key-in.) Instead, create line styles at an appropriate size or set the line style scale of the individual elements.
Working with line styles in DWG workmode
The following issues apply to working with line styles in DWG workmode.
Only line styles that can be exported to DWG files are displayed in the line style selection menu. Due to the limitations of AutoCAD, the number of line styles displayed will be much smaller than in DGN workmode. The standard line styles (line codes 1 7) are unavailable, as are any line styles with features such as widths or offset lines. The line styles may come from MicroStation line style libraries, or they may be imported from AutoCAD .lin files using the Line Style Editor dialog box. When saving a DWG file to a V7 DGN file, all line styles are written to a file called <DGNfile>_lstyle.rsc. (<DGNfile> is the name of the V7 DGN file being saved.) To see these line styles in any MicroStation version prior to V8.1, put the resource file in a folder that is included in the MS_SYMBRSRC configuration variable. Before V8.1, MicroStation did not support AutoCAD's method of positioning line styles, so symbol location will be slightly different.
Multi-line styles Within MicroStation, you can create, edit, and save multi-line styles to DWG files. MicroStation supports multi-line styles in DWG files from AutoCAD v14 and later releases. Line weights
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Line style weights are displayed in pixel widths in MicroStation and in millimeters in AutoCAD.
Working with line weights that will be saved to DWG files
Page 313 of 387
When you save to a DWG file, you can control the relationship between these units with the Line Weight Scale (MM/Pixel) option (Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box). Setting a larger value causes wide lines in a DWG file to receive lower line weights in MicroStation; a smaller value causes wide lines to receive higher line weights. Line strings When saving a DGN file to DWG format, you can use the Entity Mapping options to control how polylines are saved.
Planar line strings by default are saved to 2D lightweight polylines with an appropriate extrusion vector and elevation. For applications that do not effectively support lightweight polylines, you can map planar line strings to 3D polylines. Nonplanar line strings by default are saved to 3D polylines. For applications that do not effectively support 3D polylines, you can map nonplanar line strings to flattened 2D polylines.
Colors While MicroStation allows custom color tables, AutoCAD uses a standard color table for all files. The colors used for displaying DWG files in MicroStation match AutoCAD's display colors exactly. MicroStation and AutoCAD both use a slightly different set of colors for plotting DWG files.
Working with colors that will be saved to DWG files
When DGN files are saved to DWG format, the colors are automatically mapped to AutoCAD's fixed color table, based on the DGN element's RGB color value. To explicitly control how colors in DGN files will appear in DWG files, save the file using the Remap capability on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, Remap tab.
Working with colors in DWG workmode
In general, it is not necessary or desirable to change the color tables used to display or plot DWG files. However, if required, you can change the colors by modifying the color tables DWGDisplayColors.tbl and DWGPlotColors.tbl in the directory indicated by the MS_SYSTEMDATA configuration variable. These files are standard MicroStation tables; modify them using the Color Table dialog box. The next time a DWG file is opened in MicroStation, the modified color tables are used. If DWG/DXF files are attached as references, set the MS_DWG_ALLOWMASTERCOLORS configuration variable to control whether the reference's AutoCAD color table or the active design file's color table is used to display the reference. Patterning and hatching MicroStation patterning is similar to AutoCAD hatching.
Working with patterning and hatching in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode, MicroStation patterning is replaced by AutoCAD hatching. The Pattern option menu in the Pattern Area settings window lists the patterns in the DWG pattern file "areapat.pat". This file contains a DWG pattern definition for each pattern cell in the supplied cell library "areapat.cel". To select a different DWG pattern file, key in its full path with filename in Pattern File or click the adjacent magnifying glass icon to browse the file system. A corresponding DWG pattern file is supplied for each of the supplied sample pattern cell libraries, such as "archpat.cel", "areapat.cel", "geompa.cel", "igespats.cel", "linepa.cell", and "utilpat.cel". Although these DWG pattern files have the same filename as their cell library counterparts, their extension is .pat. Classes
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 314 of 387
geometry that is useful for construction purposes, but is not considered part of the actual model. MicroStation uses the Pattern class for all area and linear pattern geometry. When linear patterning is applied to an element, the element class is changed to linear patterned. As it is not desirable to display both an element and its linear pattern geometry, turning on a view Pattern display attribute automatically disables display of linear patterned geometry. DWG files do not have analogous concepts. Associated patterns are saved as hatch entities and can be controlled (along with filled geometry) with the AutoCAD FILLMODE setting, but non-associative and linear patterns are saved as simple geometry and therefore have no such control.
Working with classes that will be saved to DWG files
If you are working with a DGN file that contains Construction, Pattern, or Linear Patterned class elements, you can define how these classes will be saved to the DWG file. To do this, use the Classes options on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box.
Working with classes in DWG workmode
In DWG workmode, you can only use Primary class elements. Wipeout objects MicroStation supports wipeout objects in DWG files from AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. Within MicroStation, wipeout objects are displayed as simple shapes that you can move, edit, or manipulate just like any other shape. Wipeout objects cannot be created in MicroStation. Autodesk Architectural Desktop and Bentley AutoPLANT objects AutoCAD ObjectARX applications can create custom objects within a DWG file that represent components specific to the application. If the application is present when a DWG file is opened, then the application is used to display the objects. If the application is not present, then a subset of the application referred to as an object enabler may be used to display the object. If neither application nor object enabler are present, the object can be displayed using graphic data, or proxy graphics, stored with the object the last time it was displayed. In versions of MicroStation prior to SELECT Update V8.5.1, object enablers are not supported, and the display in MicroStation matches AutoCAD's display when the associated object enablers are absent. As the storage of proxy graphics is optional (controlled through the system variable PROXYGRAPHICS), some objects may not be displayed at all. In this case, both AutoCAD and MicroStation display only the objects bounding box. Effective with SELECT Update V8.5.1, an API is provided to allow development of MDL applications that can enable ObjectARX objects within a DWG file. This API has been used to create enabling applications for Autodesk Architectural Desktop objects and Bentley AutoPLANT objects. These applications are provided with SELECT Update V8.5.1, and objects created with these applications are displayed with complete geometry even when their proxy graphics is not stored in the file. DWG file properties The file properties (author, title, subject, keywords, comments) that are supported in DWG files are accessible from MicroStation. These properties are also preserved when converting between MicroStation V8 and DWG. CTB and STB files in MicroStation pen tables MicroStation pen tables let you remap any of the characteristics associated with design file elements to different values for printed output. By remapping element characteristics such as color, line style, and line weights, you can optimize the printed output. For example, if some of the elements in your design file are yellow, they will be difficult to see on a printed white page. You can use a pen table to map the yellow elements to blue elements, for example, so that they will be more visible when printed. Pen tables are used to control print resymbolization. Pen tables are analogous to AutoCAD plot styles. AutoCAD uses two types of plot style tables to control the appearance of plotted objects: color-dependent plot style tables (CTB files) and named plot style tables (STB files). CTB files include plot styles that are based on object color, and STB files include named plot styles that are assigned to individual objects or layers in AutoCAD.
Importing a CTB file
In MicroStation, you can open a DWG file from AutoCAD, then import a CTB file. The printed output uses the settings defined for each color in the CTB file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To import CTB plot styles into MicroStation
Page 315 of 387
1. Open a DWG file. 2. From the File menu, choose Print. The Print dialog box opens. 3. From the dialog box's Pen Table menu, choose Import. The Import AutoCAD plot style table dialog box opens.
4. From the list box, select the CTB file (*.ctb), then click Open. 5. From the dialog box's Pen Table menu, choose Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. The Element Section Processing Order list box displays names of the color-dependent plotting styles in the CTB file explicitly modified in AutoCAD; it does not include plot styles that use only the default object values (such as Use object linetype).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 316 of 387
Modify Pen Table dialog box, Element Selection Criteria tab
6. Select a color name in the Element Section Processing Order list box, then select the Element Output Actions tab to see how elements displayed with this color are processed. For example, elements that match the color in the first section (Color_1) may be plotted using a different color.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 317 of 387
Modify Pen Table dialog box, Element Output Actions tab
7. (Optional) Modify the output settings, if necessary. 8. (Optional) Close the Modify Pen Table dialog box. The Print dialog box is open.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 318 of 387
9. Click the Preview icon. The drawing preview is updated in the Print dialog box. 10. Click the Print icon. 11. Close the Print dialog box.
Importing an STB file
In MicroStation, you can open a DWG file from AutoCAD, then import the STB file that contains definitions of the plot styles used in the file. For each element that has a plot style defined, the printed output uses the settings defined in the STB file.
To import STB plot styles into MicroStation
1. Open a DWG file. 2. From the File menu, choose Print. The Print dialog box opens. 3. From the dialog box's Pen Table menu, choose Import. The Import AutoCAD plot style table dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 319 of 387
4. From the list box, select the STB file [*.stb] file, then click Open. 5. From the dialog box's Pen Table menu, choose Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. The Element Section Processing Order list box displays names of the plotting styles in the STB file that were explicitly defined in AutoCAD; it does not include plot styles that use only the default values (such as Use object linetype). On the Element Selection Criteria tab, the Use Section Name as Criteria setting is on.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 320 of 387
Modify Pen Table dialog box, Element Selection Criteria tab
If an element in the DWG file was assigned a named AutoCAD plot style, and the name matches a name in the Element Section Processing Order list box, then the Element Output Actions are performed on this element.
6. Select a name in the Element Section Processing Order list box, then select the Element Output Actions tab to see how this section is processed. For example, elements defined with the plot style in the first section may be plotted using a particular color, fill color, and pattern.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 321 of 387
Modify Pen Table dialog box, Element Output Actions tab
7. (Optional) Modify the output settings, if necessary. 8. (Optional) Close the Modify Pen Table dialog box. The Print dialog box is open.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 322 of 387
9. Click the Preview icon. The drawing preview is updated in the Print dialog box. 10. Click the Print icon. 11. Close the Print dialog box.
Saving a CTB/STB file to a pen table
In MicroStation, you cannot save changes to a CTB or STB file. You can, however, save the file to a MicroStation pen table (*.tbl), which can be edited.
To save a CTB or STB file to a pen table
1. From the File menu, choose Print. The Print dialog box opens. 2. From the dialog box's Pen Table menu, choose Import. 3. The Import AutoCAD plot style table dialog box opens. 4. From the list box, select the CTB or STB file, then click Open. 5. From the dialog box's Pen Table menu, choose Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. 6. From the dialog box's File menu, choose Save. The Create Pen Table file dialog box opens. 7. Enter a name for the pen table, and click Save. 8. Close all dialog boxes.
When converting a CTB file into a MicroStation pen table, AutoCAD color numbers 1254 are mapped to MicroStation colors 1254. However, the CTB file has an additional assignment for AutoCAD color number 255. Since MicroStation users expect colors 0 and 7 to be pure white when working with DWG files pen table processing ignores the CTB color 255 mapping and instead makes pen
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
map colors 0 and 7 the same (with output assignments taken from color 7).
Page 323 of 387
DGN-DWG terminology
MicroStation Term AccuSnap ACS ACTIVE LINESTYLESCALE Block ByLevel setting Callout bubble Cell libraries Cells: shared and normal Corresponding AutoCAD Term Osnap UCS LTSCALE Rectangle ByLayer setting Balloon Blocks Drafting tool for automatic snaps. Coordinate system acronyms. ACS = Auxiliary Coordinate System; UCS = User Coordinate System. Configuration/system variable used to define the scale of line scale/linetype patterns. Setting that controls whether color, line weight, and line style are set for each level (layer). No analogous AutoCAD term. In AutoCAD, all blocks behave like shared cells. There is no analogy to a normal cell. If the open file is a DWG file, AutoCAD system variables and their values are listed in the Element Info(rmation) dialog box in File Browse mode. These variables are DWGspecific, and there is no correspondence in the DGN format. Configuration variables System variables If a DWG file is saved in DGN format, AutoCAD system variable values will not be accessible even if they were inserted in fields. Therefore, it is recommended that you not insert AutoCAD system variable values in fields in a DWG file that you expect to save to DGN format. Design model DGN file Drop Element Element Attributes Elements Fit View Global Freeze Viewport Freeze (DWG workmode only) Handles Key-in Levels Line styles Merge into Master Message Center Nested references Parasolid Patterning Pen tables Print References Seed files Shape Sheet model Smart Line Tags Freeze layers In MicroStation, pay attention to the Mode setting in the Level Display dialog box. Model space DWG file Explode Properties Objects Zoom extents DWG workmode and AutoCAD allow only one model. MicroStation DGN workmode allows multiple models. Native file format for each program. Command used to demote element/object types to lower level. For example, cells/blocks can be demoted to geometry. Title for current symbology of elements/objects. Command for zooming in on all elements currently in the drawing. Notes
Grips Command line Layers Linetypes Bind XREF Text window Nested references ACIS Hatching Plot styles Plot References: attachments and overlays Template drawing files Region Drawing layout (paper space) Polyline Attributes
Vertices on geometry that can be selected and manipulated. Place for entering commands/variables manually. Both programs have a Manager style dialog box for controlling level/layer symbology. MicroStation also has the Level Display dialog box for quick on/off settings. MicroStation standard line codes are not available in DWG workmode. Inserting an external reference into the current drawing. Place for viewing text messages of program feedback. MicroStation lets you control levels of nesting; AutoCAD does not. Native 3D modeling kernel for each program. AutoCAD hatching relies on predefined patterns. AutoCAD CTB and STB files can be imported into MicroStation. AutoCAD references are also known as XREFs (for eXternal REFerences). These files are used as a starting point for newly-created files. They store standard settings. Unlimited sheet models (drawing layouts) allowed in both programs. Polylines can have variable width, as opposed to constant line weight. In AutoCAD, attributes must be part of a block.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
View View Attributes Working units Viewports (Drafting Settings) Drawing units
Page 324 of 387

MicroStation views are more flexible in terms of display attributes and number. In AutoCAD, there is no analogy to View Attributes. Some settings are found in the taskbar/drafting settings area. MicroStation has a setting on the DWG Open dialog box for Design Center Units. This corresponds to AutoCAD's setting for Drawing units for DesignCenter blocks.
Using AutoCAD Commands in MicroStation

MicroStation includes a set of key-ins that let you use the AutoCAD command syntax to set system variables and initiate commands. These key-ins give users who are familiar with AutoCAD the option of using either AutoCAD or MicroStation syntax. You can enter the AutoCAD commands and system variables in three ways:

Key in the DWG prefix, then the AutoCAD command. Key in the command prefix as defined by the configuration variable MS_DWG_COMMANDPREFIX, then the AutoCAD command. The default prefix is the backslash character (\). Key in the command prefix, then a command alias as defined in a PGP file.
The table lists examples of AutoCAD commands and equivalent MicroStation key-ins.
AutoCAD Key-in Command Equivalent MicroStation Key-ins To place a circle in MicroStation, enter the MicroStation key-in PLACE CIRCLE, or any of these equivalents:

To place a circle in AutoCAD, enter CIRCLE in the key-in window.
DWG CIRCLE \CIRCLE \C (using PGP alias: C, *CIRCLE).
To set the active line style to 2.0 in MicroStation, enter the MicroStation key-in ACTIVE LINESTYLE SCALE, or any of these equivalents:
DWG LTSCALE 2.0 \LTSCALE 2.0 \LTS 2.0 (using the PGP alias LTS, *LTSCALE).
To set the active line style scale to 2.0 in AutoCAD, enter LTSCALE 2.0 or LTS 2.0 (using the PGP alias LTS, *LTSCALE).
Supported AutoCAD key-ins The table lists AutoCAD key-ins that you can use in MicroStation, a brief description, and similar (not necessarily identical) MicroStation key-ins or tools. The table shows the AutoCAD commands with the DWG prefix. Alternatively, you can use a command prefix or a command prefix plus an alias from a PGP file to define shortcuts to these commands.
AutoCAD Key-in DWG 3DFACE DWG 3DPOLY DWG ARC Places a face. Places a line. Places an arc. Measures area and perimeter. DWG AREA <OBJECT If set to Object, measures the area of an element. | Add | POINTS> If t t Add th f b d d b th i ft Key-ins: MEASURE AREA ELEMENT, MEASURE AREA UNION, MEASURE AREA POINTS Description Similar MicroStation Tool or Key-in Key-in: PLACE SHAPE ICON Key-in: PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED Key-in: PLACE ARC ICON
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
or more closed planar elements. If set to Points (default), measures the planar area with its vertices defined by a series of data points. DWG ARRAY DWG ATTDEF DWG ATTEDIT Copies an element many times to create an array. Defines tags. Modifies values for tags. Key-in: ARRAY ICON Key-in: DIALOG TAGS SETS Key-in: EDIT TAGS
Page 325 of 387
DWG AUNITS <0 | 1 | 2 Sets the units for angles. 0 = decimal degrees. 1 = | 3> degrees/minutes/seconds. 2 = gradians. 3 = radians. DWG AUPREC <#> DWG BASE <x,y> DWG BHATCH DWG BLOCK DWG BREAK DWG CECOLOR <color_# DWG CELTSCALE <scale_factor> Sets the number of decimal places for angle units. Sets the insertion base point for the current model. The insertion base point is used when the model is referenced into another model. Defines hatches. Defines a cell. Deletes part of an element. Sets the color for new elements. Sets the line style scale factor for new elements, relative to the global scale factor. When a new element is created, the actual line style scale factor is the CELTSCALE value multiplied by the LTSCALE value.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX PATTERNS Key-in: DIALOG CELL MAINTENANCE and DEFINE CELL ORIGIN Key-in: DELETE PARTIAL Key-in: ACTIVE COLOR Line Styles dialog box, Scale factor setting
DWG CELTYPE <07 | Sets the line style for new elements. # = standard line style number 07. Key-in: ACTIVE STYLE Name = name of a custom line style. name> DWG CHAMFER DWG CHAMFERA <distance_value> DWG CHAMFERB <distance_value> DWG CHANGE DWG CIRCLE DWG CLAYER <layer_name> Constructs a chamfer. Sets chamfer distance 1. Sets chamfer distance 2. Lets you modify element attributes. Places a circle. Sets the level (DWG layer) for new elements. Key-in: CHAMFER Construct Chamfer tool, Distance 1 setting Construct Chamfer tool, Distance 2 setting Key-in: CHANGE ICON Key-in: PLACE CIRCLE ICON Key-in: ACTIVE LEVEL Key-in: COPY ICON Key-in: DIALOG TAGS SETS Key-in: EDIT TAGS Key-in: ANALYZE ELEMENT Key-in: DIALOG COLOR Key-in: EDIT TEXT Key-in: DIALOG DIMSTYLES OPEN Key-in: PLACE CELL ICON Key-in: ANALYZE ELEMENT Key-in: DIALOG COORDSYS Key-in: SHOW VIEWS Key-in: DIMENSION AXIS TRUE and DIMCREATE LINEAR SIZE Key-in: DIMCREATE ANGULAR LINES Key-in: DIMENSION CENTER MARK Key-in: DIMENSION DIAMETER Key-in: DIMCREATE LINEAR SIZE
DWG CMLJUST <0 | 1 | Specifies justification for multi-lines. 0 = top. 1 = middle. 2 = bottom. 2> DWG COPY DWG DATE DWG DDATTDEF DWG DDATTE DWG DDCHPROP DWG DDCOLOR DWG DDEDIT DWG DDIM DWG DDINSERT DWG DDmodify DWG DDUCS DWG DDVIEW DWG DIMALIGNED DWG DIMANGULAR DWG DIMCENTER DWG DIMDIAMETER DWG DIMLINEAR DWG DIMORDINATE DWG DIMRADIUS DWG DIMSTYLE DWG DIMTEDIT Copies elements. (Read only.) Lists the current date and time in the format: <Julian day number.><Decimal fraction of a day>. Defines tags. Lets you modify values for tags. Lets you review and modify information about an element. Lets you modify the active color table. Edits text. Defines dimension style settings. Places a cell. Lets you review or modify information about an element. Manages auxiliary coordinate system (ACS). Manages saved views. Places a linear dimension parallel to the element being dimensioned. Dimensions the angle between two lines. Places a center mark at the center of a circle or arc. Dimensions the diameter of a circle or a circular arc. Dimensions the linear distance between two points (length) .
Labels distances along an axis from an origin (datum) along the ordinate Key-in: DIMCREATE ORDINATE axis (the line along which the distances are measured). Dimensions the radius of a circle or a circular arc. Controls dimension settings. M di i t t Key-in: DIMCREATE ELEMENT RADIUS Key-in: DIALOG DIMSTYLES OPEN K i MODIFY DIMENSION LOC
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
DWG DIST DWG DTEXT DWG DWGCODEPAGE DWG ELLIPSE DWG ERASE DWG EXPLODE DWG EXTEND DWG EXTRUDE DWG FILLET DWG FILLETRAD DWG FILLMODE <0 | 1> DWG GRIDMODE <0 | 1> DWG GROUP DWG HATCH DWG HIDE DWG HPANG <angle> DWG HPNAME <name> DWG HPSCALE <#> Measures distance. Places text. Shows system code page. Places an ellipse. Deletes an element. Breaks up elements into smaller components. Extends elements to an intersection.
Page 326 of 387

Key-in: MEASURE DISTANCE POINTS Key-in: PLACE TEXT ICON Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE ICON Key-in: DELETE ELEMENT Key-in: DROP ELEMENT Key-in: EXTEND ELEMENT 2 and EXTEND ELEMENT INTERSECTION
(3D only) Creates a surface or solid a complex 3D element generated Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE PROJECTION by linearly extruding a profile element a defined distance. Constructs a circular fillet (arc) between two elements. Stores the current fillet radius value. If set to 1, closed elements are filled. If set to 0, closed elements are not filled. (Click Update View to see changes.) If set to 1, displays the grid. If set to 0, the grid is not displayed. Key-in: FILLET ICON Key-in: FILLET ICON, Radius setting Key-in: ACTIVE FILL Key-in: SET GRID Key-in: ACTIVE GRIDUNIT Key-in: GROUP ADD Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX PATTERNS Key-in: RENDER ALL HIDDEN Hatch Area tool, Crosshatch Area tool, Angle setting Pattern Area tool, Pattern Cell setting
DWG GRIDUNIT <unit> Specifies the grid spacing for the current view. Creates and manages groups. Defines hatches. Turns on rendering in hidden line mode. Specifies the hatch angle. Specifies the hatch pattern name. Specifies the hatch pattern scale factor.
DWG HPSPACE
Specifies the hatch pattern line spacing.
Hatch Area tool, Crosshatch Area tool, Angle setting Key-in: DIALOG RASTER Key-in: RASTER DLGGENERAL OPEN Key-in: RASTER ATTACH INTERACTIVE Key-in: RASTER TOOLCLIP Key-in: PLACE CELL ICON Key-in: OLECNTR INSERT
DWG IMAGE DWG IMAGEADJUST DWG IMAGEATTACH DWG IMAGECLIP
Controls the display of raster images in a DGN file view. Controls the image display (brightness, contrast, and fade values). Attaches raster references to the active design file. Crops a raster image using a clipping boundary.
Sets the insertion base point for the current model. The insertion base DWG INSBASE <X, Y> point is used when the model is referenced into another model. DWG INSERT DWG INSERTOBJ Places a cell. Inserts new objects into your file.
Sets the Design Center Units for a DWG file in MicroStation. Use a value of 020 to specify the units:

0 Unspecified (no units) 1 Inches 2 Feet 3 Miles 4 Millimeters 5 Centimeters 6 Meters 7 Kilometers 8 Mi i h
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects

Page 327 of 387

9 Mils 10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Decameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs Key-in: CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION Key-in: CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION B-spline and 3D dialog box, Surface/Solid Iso Lines setting Key-in: LEVEL MANAGER DIALOG OPEN Key-in: PLACE NOTE MULTI Key-in: PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED Key-in: LINESTYLE SETTINGS Key-in: ACTIVE LINESTYLESCALE Key-in: MATCH ELEMENT Key-in: MIRROR ICON Key-in: PLACE MLINE Key-in: MOVE ICON Key-in: PLACE DIALOGTEXT ICON Key-in: MOVE PARALLEL OFFSET Key-in: LOCK AXIS Key-in: PAN VIEW Key-in: CLIPBOARD PASTESPECIAL Key-in: PLACE SMARTLINE Line Styles dialog box, Width settings Key-in: DIALOG PLOT Key-in: PLACE POINT Key-in: PLACE POLYGON ICON
DWG INSUNITS <0 20>
DWG INTERFERE DWG INTERSECT DWG ISOLINES <#> DWG LAYER DWG LEADER DWG LINE DWG LINETYPE DWG LOCALE DWG LTSCALE <scale_factor> DWG MATCHPROP DWG MIRROR DWG MLINE DWG MOVE DWG MTEXT DWG OFFSET DWG ORTHOMODE <0 | 1> DWG PAN DWG PASTESPEC DWG PLINE DWG PLINEGEN <0 | 1> DWG PLINEWID <width> DWG PLOT DWG POINT DWG POLYGON
(3D only) Constructs a solid that is the intersection of two or more overlapping solids. Constructs a solid that is the intersection of two or more overlapping solids. Sets the number of isolines used to display SmartSolids and B-spline surfaces. Controls level display and level symbology. Places a note with a leader line. Creates line segments. Activates line styles and sets line style modifiers. Shows the ISO language code. Sets the global scale factor for line styles. Matches element attributes. Mirrors an element. Places a multi-line (multiple parallel lines). Moves an element. Places text. Moves or copies an element parallel to the original. Turns on Axis lock. Shifts the view to a different part of the design. Applies a special display format to contents of the clipboard. Places a chain of connected line segments and arc segments. If set to 1, defines the way that line styles are controlled for line strings and shapes. If set to 0, the pattern will restart for each segment. Defines the width for wide custom line styles. Note that AutoCAD only supports width on polylines. Creates printed output. Places the active point. Places a polygon. Controls how line styles are scaled in AutoCAD layout viewports. (Note: MicroStation treats layout viewports as reference attachments (referred to below as viewport attachments).)
DWG PSLTSCALE 0 | If
t t 0 th
th li
t l
ithi
t tt
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1> the units in which the model was created, and therefore are not affected by the scale of the sheet model. If set to 1, then the line styles within viewport attachments are based on sheet model units. DWG QUIT DWG RECTANG Places a block. DWG RECTANGLE DWG REDRAW DWG REDRAWAll DWG REGEN DWG REGENALL DWG REGION DWG RENDER DWG REVOLVE DWG ROTATE DWG RPREF DWG SCALE DWG SECTION DWG SHADE DWG SLICE DWG SNAPANG <angle> DWG SNAPBASE <X, Y> Updates the views. Updates the views. Updates the views. Updates the views. Creates a complex shape from a region. Controls rendering settings. (3D only) Creates a surface of revolution. Rotates elements. Sets rendering settings. Resizes an element. Trims elements to a common intersection. Turns on screen rendering (shading). Subtracts the volume of one or more solids from another solid. Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current view. Sets an origin point for the grid. Key-in: PLACE BLOCK ICON Exits MicroStation. Key-in: EXIT
Page 328 of 387
Key-in: UPDATE VIEW EXTENDED Key-in: UPDATE VIEW EXTENDED Key-in: UPDATE VIEW EXTENDED Key-in: UPDATE VIEW EXTENDED Key-in: CREATE REGION ICON Key-in: DIALOG RENDER Key-in: CONSTRUCT surface REVOLUTION Key-in: ROTATE ICON Key-in: DIALOG RENDER Key-in: SCALE ICON Key-in: CONSTRUCT TRIM Key-in: RENDER ICON Key-in: CONSTRUCT DIFFERENCE Key-in: ACTIVE GRIDANGLE Key-in: LOCK GRID Key-in: PLACE SHAPE ICON Key-in: SPELLCHECK
DWG SNAPMODE <0 | If set to 1, data points snap to the nearest point on the grid. If set to 0, 1> data points snap to other locations. DWG SOLID DWG SPELL DWG SPLFRAME <0 | 1> DWG SPLINE DWG SPLINEDIT DWG STYLE DWG SUBTRACT DWG SURFU <#> DWG SURFV <#> DWG TEXT DWG TEXTSIZE <#> DWG TEXTSTYLE <name> DWG TOOLBAR DWG TOOLTIPS <0 | 1> DWG TORUS DWG TRIM DWG UCSICON <0 | 1> DWG UCSORG <X, y, Z> Places a four-sided filled polygon shape. Reviews text for spelling errors. If set to 1, displays the control polygon of each B-spline curve. Also displays invisible edges of mesh elements. If set to 0, the control polygons and invisible edges are not displayed. Places a B-spline curve. Edits a spline. Creates and modifies text styles. Subtracts the volume of solids from another solid. Sets the number of rule lines for the surface's U parameter. Sets the number of rule lines for the surface's V parameter. Places text. Sets the default height for new text created with the active text style. Sets the name of the active text style. Displays and customizes tool boxes. If set to 1, tool tips display. If set to 0, tool tips do not display. Places a torus (donut-shaped solid). Simultaneously trims multiple elements.
Key-in: SET INVISGEOM
Key-in: PLACE BSPLINE CURVE Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVEMODIFY TOGGLE Key-in:TEXTSTYLE DIALOG OPEN Key-in: CONSTRUCT DIFFERENCE Evaluate Surface tool, Number of Points setting Evaluate Surface tool, Number of Points setting Key-in: PLACE TEXT ICON Key-in: TEXTSTYLE ACTIVE Key-in: DRAFTPAL OPENTOOLBOX Help > Tool Tips Key-in:PLACE TORUS Key-in:TRIM MULTI
DWG SYSCODEPAGE Shows the system code page.
If set to 1, a coordinate triad representing the Active Auxiliary Coordinate Key-in: SET ACSDISPLAY System (ACS) displays. If set to 0, the ACS triad does not display. Sets the ACS origin for the current view. ACS origin. ACS X Direction.
DWG UCSXDIR <X, Y, (Read only.) Sets the X direction of the active ACS for the current view. Z>
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
DWG UCSYDIR <X, Y, (Read only.) Sets the Ydirection of the active ACS for the current view. Z> DWG UNION DWG UNITS Unites two or more overlapping solids. ACS Y direction. Key-in: CONSTRUCT UNION
Page 329 of 387
Sets the Design Center Units (AutoCAD system variable INSUNITS) for a DWG file in MicroStation. Opens the DWG/DXF dialog box, where you can change the unit settings. If set to 1, changes to the level attributes for attached references are saved from session to session. Key-in: SET REFLEVELOVERRIDES If set to 0, changes to the level attributes for attached references are valid for the current session only; they are not saved. Writes a new DWG file from one of the following:
DWG VISRETAIN <0 | 1>
the entire design file a group of selected objects a shared cell definition within the current file Key-in: PLACE WEDGE Key-in: ATTACH REFERENCE Key-in: DIALOG REFERENCE and REFERENCE MERGE Key-in: REFERENCE CLIP Key-in: DIALOG REFERENCE Key-in: DIALOG REFERENCE Key-in: ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT
DWG WBLOCK

DWG WEDGE DWG XATTACH DWG XBIND DWG XCLIP
Places a wedge. Attaches a reference to the active model. Merges references into the master DGN file. Defines a clipping boundary.
DWG XCLIPFRAME <0 If set to 1, turns on display of reference clip boundaries. If set to 0, turns | 1> off display of reference clip boundaries. DWG XREF DWG ZOOM Defines references (XREFs). Changes the magnification of the view.
Using a command prefix The configuration variable MS_DWG_COMMANDPREFIX can be set to a character or string of characters that can be used as a shortcut to the AutoCAD commands. Any key-in that begins with this shortcut will be be matched first to the command aliases as defined in a PGP file, and then to the DWG commands. The default prefix is the backslash character (\), but other characters or sequences may also be used. The space character may be a convenient prefix due to its keyboard location. Avoid using a prefix that could be interpreted as a MicroStation key-in. For example, using AC as the prefix conflicts with the key-in for MicroStation key-ins such as ACTIVE ANGLE. When defining a prefix, enclose the definition within double quotes to avoid having it misinterpreted (use \ rather than \ ). Using a PGP file The configuration variable MS_DWG_PGPFILE can be set to point to a PGP file that contains shortcuts, or aliases, for AutoCAD commands. If no directory is found, the support directory of an AutoCAD installation (if one exists on the computer) is used. The default is set to acad.pgp, as this is the default file used by AutoCAD. The format of the PGP file is simple: each line is either a comment (beginning with ; ) or an alias, followed by the command that it initiates. AutoCAD commands begin with *. Therefore , X, *EXTEND defines the alias X for the AutoCAD EXTEND command. In addition to the AutoCAD commands, MicroStation also interprets strings within quotes as standard MicroStation key-ins. For example, PX, POPSET ON defines the alias PX for the MicroStation key-in POPSET ON.
Troubleshooting
This topic includes common problems that have been reported by MicroStation users when working with DWG files, and the proposed solutions to those problems. Troubleshooting using DWG files in MicroStation
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 330 of 387
When I open a DWG file directly it looks fine, but when I open it as a reference, all of the line styles are scaled incorrectly.
In both DWG and DGN files, the global scale factor can be used to control the scale of all line styles. In AutoCAD, this is referred to as LTSCALE. In MicroStation, the global scale factor is set with the ACTIVE LINESTYLESCALE key-in or on the Line Styles dialog box (Element > Line Style > Custom). Unfortunately, neither AutoCAD nor MicroStation applies this scale factor when a file is attached as a reference. For this reason, you should not use the global line style scale in files that are used as references. Instead, create line styles at an appropriate size or set the line style scale of the individual elements.
When I open a DWG file on a computer that has AutoCAD installed it looks fine, but when I move the same file to a computer without AutoCAD, the text appears in a different font.
Text in DWG files may use fonts that are defined in separate SHX files. If the SHX file does not exist, MicroStation will display the text in a default font. This is a common problem when exchanging DWG files even among pure AutoCAD installations. If possible, use TrueType fonts rather than either SHX (or MicroStation) fonts, as they are more likely to exist on other computers.
When I open a DWG file, I get a warning saying the MicroStation cannot infer the units for the file.
This warning appears when MicroStation does not know the units in a DWG file that you are opening, attaching as a reference, or placing as a cell. The warning dialog box displays the units for the DWG file, and lets you change the units setting for opening the file in MicroStation.
An AutoCAD file looks fine on some computers, but on others, the line styles are incomplete they seem to be missing the symbols.
In DWG files, the line style (DWG linetype) definitions are embedded in the file, so it is not necessary to ship the line style definition (.lin) files with the DWG file to have them display. However, the symbols used in a DWG line style (linetype) are stored in separate SHX files. Therefore, you must include these SHX files (as well as any SHX files used for text) when sending a DWG file.
When I open a DWG file, the contents appears flattened.
The model contains 3D data and you have selected Create 2D Models for Model Space setting from the DWG Open Options dialog box. This option is suitable for files that contain 2D data only. If the file contains 3D data, it will be flattened to the XY plane.
When I open a DWG file with many proxy elements, I cannot access the data inside them.
Proxy elements within DWG files cannot be understood by MicroStation or AutoCAD unless the add-on software in which they are created is loaded. They are identified by the Element Information tool as cells with the name DWG Proxy Entity. These cells can be dropped to components, after which you can edit the contents. However, be careful in doing this because the objects will no longer be recognized by their native program and do not retain their proxy definition.
Why do the results of Zoom Extents in AutoCAD look different from the results of Fit View in MicroStation?
Check the geometry on layers that are turned off. The AutoCAD Zoom Extents area includes layers that have display turned off. The MicroStation Fit View tool fits only visible geometry. If you want the Zoom Extents command to ignore geometry on a certain layer, then you must freeze the layer. The Zoom Extents command does not fit frozen layers. Troubleshooting saving a DGN file to a DWG file
When I save a DGN file to DWG, the coordinates seem to shift when I view the DWG file in V8, I get different coordinates than the DGN file.
AutoCAD is most likely displaying the coordinates with respect to the User Coordinate System (UCS), whereas MicroStation displays them in world coordinates. When saving to DWG, turn off Set UCS from ACS on the DWG/DXF Save As Options dialog box, and the coordinates should coincide.
When I save a DGN file containing compound MicroStation line styles to DWG, the lines that have special styles change to the Continuous line style.
DGN line styles that are not compatible with (understood by) AutoCAD default to the Continuous style when the file is saved to DWG. However, if the Drop Unsupported Line Styles option on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box is used, complex MicroStation line styles maintain their appearance in the saved files Although the elements appear the same they actually are many small geometry
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
components in series rather than one line with an assigned style.
Page 331 of 387
When I save a DGN file that contains a default model and multiple additional models to DWG, a separate DWG file is created for each additional model.
AutoCAD only supports one model (model space) in each DWG file. When saving a DGN file to DWG, the default model is saved to model space and non-default design models are saved according to the setting for the Non-Default Design Models on the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box. When this option is set to Create Separate Files, each non-default design model is saved to a separate DWG file. For example, suppose that design file "Test.dgn" has three design models: ModelA, ModelB and ModelC. When this option is on, the default model (Model A) and all sheet models are saved to "Test.dwg". The additional models are saved to "Test_Model.dwg" and "Test_ModelC.dwg". When this option is set to Create Paper Space, each non-default design model is saved to a drawing layout (paper space) in the DWG model that contains the default design model. When this option is set to Ignore , the non-default models are not saved to the DWG file.
When I save a DGN file to DWG, the DWG file displays levels that were not in the DGN file.
MicroStation allows level display to be controlled separately for each view, whereas AutoCAD only supports global layer settings. In the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, set Level Display to the appropriate view.
When I save a DGN file to DWG, the geometry's symbology in the DWG file does not match what is displayed in the DGN file.
The mismatch may be caused by the Level Overrides setting. You can disable this view attribute in MicroStation to determine if it is affecting the display of the DGN file. The level symbology of the elements can be applied during save by using the Use Level Symbology Overrides setting in the Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box.
When I save a DGN or DWG file, changes to references are not being saved.
The ability to save changes to reference file levels might be disabled for the DWG or DGN file. This setting is controlled by either of these key-in commands: DWG VISRETAIN <0 or 1> (AutoCAD key-in) or SET REFLEVELOVERRIDES <OFF or ON> (MicroStation key-in). If DWG VISRETAIN is set to 0 (or SET REFLEVELOVERRIDES OFF), then changes to reference file levels are retained only during the current session. If DWG VISRETAIN is set to 1 (or SET REFLEVELOVERRIDES ON), the reference levels changes are retained when the file is closed.
When I save my DGN as a DWG file, the seed file specified in the DWG Options has dimension styles, text styles, and paper space layouts that are missing from the resulting DWG file. What is used as the source file for the new DWG file?
When working in AutoCAD, template files are used to create new files; when working in MicroStation, seed files are used to create new files. In MicroStation you can use a DWG seed to create a DWG file or a DGN seed to create a DGN file. In both software packages, the resulting new file will be based on the seed/template. This applies only to the creation of a new file using the File > New command. If you select File > Save As you still create a new file but it isnt based on a seed/template, it is based on the file being saved. When saving (converting) files from one format to another, you also use the File > Save As command. The contents of the new file are identical to the contents of the file being saved. In conversion, settings that do not exist in the original format may be necessary for the resultant format. For example, MicroStation has Working Units, and AutoCAD has a single drawing unit. Although similar, they are not the same. When saving a DWG file to DGN, for example, there are settings that will use the Working Units for the converted DGN file from a specified DGN seed file, because a DGN file must have Working Units. For settings such as dimension styles or text styles both file types have equivalent settings, so only the dimension or text styles contained in the DWG file will be saved into the new DGN file. When converting files from one format to another, the rule of thumb is that anything that does not exist in the original format but is required in the resultant format will be taken from the seed file. During conversion, no extra information will be created. This use of the seed file is different from past versions, when MicroStation information was exported to AutoCAD. When exporting the seed file was used to create the new DWG. In V8.5, however, this is not the case. The DWG file format is a subset of the DGN file format, so the software is transforming existing data and does not actually create a new file. If you have a set of standards that the resulting DWG files have to meet such as specific dimension styles or text styles that need to exist
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
in all DWG files, these styles can be created in a Dgnlib file and used throughout the project files.
Page 332 of 387
If you do not wish to use Dgnlib files, the dimension and text styles can be imported into the DGN file prior to saving to DWG. Another option is to import the dimension or text styles into the DWG in AutoCAD after using the File > Save As command.
When I save a DGN file to a DWG file, RSC fonts are save as SHX fonts. Why does this happen?
RSC fonts do not need to have the Degree, Diameter and PlusMinus symbols defined in the font for angular and diameter dimensions to be displayed correctly. However, ACAD needs these symbols to be present in the font. Moreover, the symbols need to be present in fixed locations. The following table shows where these symbols need to be present:
Character SHAPE 10 UNIFONT Degree Diameter 127 129 176 177 216, 248 & 8709 PlusMinus 128
These locations may already have characters so the existing characters must be moved to empty locations. For example, most MicroStation delivered fonts have the fraction symbols 33/64 and 35/64 in locations 176 and 177. You must move the 33/64 and 35/64 glyphs elsewhere. For MicroStation fonts, move them to the locations 192 & 193. However, MicroStation V8 does not know about the characteristic of user defined custom RSC fonts and can not perform this remapping. For example, assume that a user modifies a delivered MicroStation V8 font (with fractions at B0 and B1) and adds new characters in locations 192 and 193. MicroStation would replace those characters if this remapping was performed for user defined and MicroStation delivered RSC fonts. MicroStation does not perform this remapping for user defined fonts but only for MicroStation delivered fonts. When dimension symbols are placed using user fonts and the files are saved to DWG, the symbols do not appear correctly in DWG. When dimension symbols are placed using user fonts and the files are saved to DWG, the symbols do not appear correctly in DWG. The problem can be fixed by using a environment variable MS_RSCFONTDATA. The environment variable provides a way for users to define this remapping for custom fonts. It also provides them a way to override the behavior for MicroStation delivered fonts. The format of the environment variable is as follows: Set MS_RSCFONTDATA=fontName, degreeFont, degreeLocation, newReplacedDegSymLocation, plusminusFont, plusMinusLocation, newReplacedPMSymLocation, diaFont, diaLocation, newReplacedDiaLocation
Parameter Name fontName Description The font for which this remapping applies. The font from which the degree symbol needs to be extracted from. Fonts define symbols in different ways. To insert the degree symbol at 127, MS needs to know how the symbol looks. It needs the symbol geometry. This parameter defines the font from which to extract the glyph geometry from. For example, V8 uses the degree symbols at location 176 in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) as the default degree symbol. If you want to use the default degree font, set this value to -1. The location in degreeFont from which to extract the degree symbol. For example, V8 uses the degree symbols at location 176 in font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) as the default degree symbol. If you want to use the default degree font, set this value to 0.
degreeFont
degreeLocation
Since the degree symbol now occupies location 127 (or location 176), the original symbol needs to be moved to a location where no symbols exist. For example, MicroStation fonts do not have a symbol defined at location 192 (192). newReplacedDegSymLocation Hence, we move the original symbol at location 127 (or 176), to location 192. Set this to 0 if no symbol is present at location 127 (or 176). plusminusFont PlusminusLocation newReplacedPMSymLocation diaFont diaLocation newReplacedDiaSymLocation The font from which to extract the plusminus symbol from. MicroStation uses symbol 177 from font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL). Location in plusMinusFont from which to extract the symbol from. MicroStation uses symbol 177 from font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL). The location to move the original symbol to. For MicroStation fonts, we move the symbol to location 193. Set this to 0 if no symbol is present at location 128 (or 177). The font from which to extract the dia symbol from. MicroStation uses symbol 216 from font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL). Location in diaFont from which to extract the symbol from. MicroStation uses symbol 216 from font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL). The location to move the original symbol to. For MicroStation fonts, we move the symbol to location 194. Set this to 0 if no symbol is present at location 129 (or 216).
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
An example definition for this variable for the ENGINEERING font is as follows: Set MS_RSCFONTDATA=ENGINEERING,3,94,192,3,200,193,-1,0,0
Page 333 of 387
For this configuration, the degree symbol is extracted from font 3 (ENGINEERING) and location 94 (degree symbol in ENGINEERING font) and placed in location 176 (since ENGINEERING is exported as UNICODE font). The symbol 33/64 is moved to location 192, which originally had no symbol. The plus minus symbol is extracted from font 3 (ENGINEERING) location 200 (plus minus symbol) and placed in location 177. The 35/64 symbol is moved to location 193, which originally had no symbol. The dia symbol is extracted from the default font 106 (INTL_ISO_EQUAL) and default location (location 216) and placed at location 216 in the ENGINEERING.SHX font. Since, there was no symbol at location 216 in the ENGINEERING RSC font, no further movement is needed.
Exchanging Data Using Other File Formats

MicroStation can import and export files of the following formats: IGES, Parasolid, ACIS SAT, CGM, STEP AP203/AP214, SketchUp, and VRML World. Copying and Pasting Using the Clipboard IGES File Exchange Parasolid XMT File Exchange ACIS SAT File Exchange CGM File Exchange STEP AP203/AP214 File Exchange Exporting VRML World Files STL File Exchange Exporting to SketchUp (.skp) format Exporting to Collada (.dae) format Exporting U3D Files Using 3DS Files Using OBJ Files
Copying and Pasting Using the Clipboard

MicroStation can import and export files of the following formats:
IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) a public domain, ANSI standard, interchange file format that is intended as an international standard for the exchange of product definition data between different CAD/CAM systems. For information that is specific to IGES translation, see IGES File Exchange. For information about exporting IGES files that are compliant with the CALS Class I or Class II specifications, see Exporting CALS-compliant IGES files. Parasolid XMT a file format that converts Parasolid XMT data into (import) or from (export) a MicroStation DGN file. ACIS SAT a file format that converts ACIS SAT data into (import) or from (export) a MicroStation DGN file. CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) an ANSI standard for the exchange of picture data between different graphics software. CGM file exchange is device-independent and environment-independent. STEP AP203/AP214 a file format that converts STEP AP203 and AP214 data into (import) or from (export) a MicroStation DGN file. AP203 conformance classes 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are supported. Although both DIS and IS versions of AP203 are supported, DIS is supported for background compatibility only. VRML World (export only) a file format that translates MicroStation into VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language), including placing interactive links between geometry in the VRML world and other Internet locations or VRML worlds. STL (Stereolithography) a file format that converts STL files into (import) or from (export) a MicroStation DGN file.
A number of third-party translators to various formats are available from Bentley Developer Network member vendors. The system Clipboard, if one exists, can be used to exchange data with other applications.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
General Data Exchange Information This section contains information that is relevant to any data exchange with another application or format.
Page 334 of 387
For format-specific information, see the following sections.
Format IGES
For more information, see IGES File Exchange
Application see footnote 11 igesin.ma igesout.ma
Parasolid XMT Parasolid XMT File Exchange ACIS SAT CGM ACIS SAT File Exchange CGM File Exchange
[[<xxx>]].ma satinout.ma cgmin.ma cgmout.ma ap203in.ma
STEP AP203 STL
STEP AP203/AP214 File Exchange ap302out.ma STL File Exchange stlio.ma
Basic terminology
The following terms apply to file exchange in general:
Entity The fundamental unit of data in an IGES, Parasolid, ACIS SAT, CGM, STL, or STEP AP203/AP214 file. In general, entities are the equivalent of DGN file elements. Receiving application The application into which a file exported from MicroStation is imported. Sending application The application that created a file that is imported into MicroStation. Product-definition data The graphical information that describes a model in 2D or 3D, in real-world units, and with precision sufficient to create or build the actual product or model, such as a mechanical part, architectural model, site plan, or map. DGN files can store product-definition data. Picture data The graphical information that draws a picture. Although real-world units and 3D are not required and the precision may be high, the information is usable only as an illustration. The CGM format stores picture data.
Choosing a translation
The best translation to use depends on factors that are unique to each translation, such as:

the sending application or receiving application the type of data being translated whether you need to convert product-definition data or picture data
The CGM format cannot exchange product-definition data.
Preserving as much data as possible
Items in one system may not have exact equivalents in another other system. Also, items that are common to both systems may be expressed differently. Usually, the goal is to perform a translation that preserves as much data as possible.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 335 of 387
AP203/AP214 formats and set up your models in a way that minimizes data loss. This chapter has some suggestions for doing this.
You should test the translation with small drawings that contain samples of all of the types of data used in your project.
Opening a 3D file
To import a 3D drawing file interactively, the open DGN file must be 3D. To open a 3D drawing file from the system command line, the translation seed file must be 3D. Certain IGES entities cannot be represented in 2D. Unless you are certain that the IGES file is 2D, it is recommended that the open DGN file be 3D when the IGES file is imported.
The CGM format does not support 3D.
Keeping units and measurements correct
When opening an IGES, Parasolid, ACIS SAT, CGM, STL, or STEP AP203/AP214 file, you should ensure that the DGN file into which you place the file has appropriate working units for the type of data in the imported file. For information about setting working units when importing an IGES, Parasolid, ACIS SAT, CGM, or STEP AP203/AP214 file, see Keeping coordinate units correct.
The CGM format does not store data in real-world units.
Using settings files
Import and export settings help make translation as accurate as possible with as little loss of intelligence as possible. After you set these for your project, you can save them in an import or export settings file that stores the settings as they were when the settings file was created or saved for a particular conversion.
Settings for IGES Import Export Import Export ACIS SAT Import Export CGM Import Export Import Export Import CGM File dialog box Export CGM File dialog box MS_CGMINSET MS_CGMOUTSET cgmin.sfi cgmout.sfi [[<xxx>]]in.sfi [[<xxx>]]out.sfo ACIS SAT Import dialog box ACIS SAT Export dialog box MS_[[<xxx>]]INSET MS_[[<xxx>]]OUTSET [[<xxx>]]in.sfi [[<xxx>]]out.sfo Import IGES File dialog box Export IGES File dialog box Parasolid XMT Import dialog box Parasolid XMT Export dialog box MS_IGESINSET MS_IGESOUTSET MS_[[<xxx>]]INSET MS_[[<xxx>]]OUTSET igesin.sfi igesout.sfi [[<xxx>]]in.sfi [[<xxx>]]out.sfo Adjusted in Configuration variable Default file
Parasolid XMT
STEP AP203/AP214 STEP AP203/AP214 Import dialog box MS_[[<xxx>]]INSET STEP AP203/AP214 Export dialog box MS_[[<xxx>]]OUTSET
For example, the import settings file for IGES Import is pointed to by the MS_IGESINSET configuration variable. When you import an IGES file, the settings are read from this file. If an IGES import settings file does not exist, the default file "igesin.sfi" is created in the "Bentley\WorkSpace\System\Data" directory.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 336 of 387
Using a settings file helps to ensure a consistent translation. You may want to have a different import and export settings file for each sending application, receiving application, client, or project.
To attach a settings file other than the default
1. In the appropriate Import or Export dialog box, choose File > Settings File > Attach. The Attach Settings File dialog box opens. 2. In the Files list box, select the appropriate settings file. 3. Click OK.
To save the current import or export settings
1. In the appropriate Import or Export dialog box, choose File > Settings File > Save. The current settings are saved in the attached settings file.
To save a new import or export settings file
1. In the appropriate Import or Export dialog box, choose File > Settings File > Save As. The Save Settings File As dialog box opens. 2. Specify the filename and directory. 3. Click Save.
Log file
A log file is a text file in which translation statistics and diagnostics are saved. Diagnostics are the messages that display in the status box as a translation is in progress. By default, the log file is saved with the same filename and directory as the file being translated and with the extension .log.
To specify an alternate log file
1. In the appropriate Import or Export dialog box, choose File > Log File. The Log File dialog box opens. 2. Specify the filename and directory for the log file. 3. Click OK.
Versions supported
The following versions of each format can be converted:

Format IGES ACIS SAT CGM STEP AP203 STEP AP214 Can import versions Can export versions 7.0, 7.1, 8.0, 9.0, 9.1, 10.0, 10.1, 11.0, 11.1, 12.0, 12.1, or 13.0 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 2.1, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 5.2, or 6.0 1.0 International Standard (IS) Draft International Standard (DIS)
2.0, 3.0, 4.0, or 5.0 fixed-length ASCII 4.0, 5.0, or 5.3 fixed-length ASCII All versions up to 6.0 1.0 International Standard (IS) Draft International Standard (DIS)
Parasolid XMT All versions up to 13.0
General Data Exchange Procedures This section contains general procedures for opening (importing) and saving (exporting) files in other formats.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 337 of 387
For more information about the specific versions of file formats that MicroStation supports, see the section Versions supported.
Opening files in other formats
You can open IGES, Parasolid, ACIS SAT, CGM, STL, or STEP AP203/AP214 files in these ways:
Directly by choosing File > Open. The current import settings control the conversion. The contents of the opened file are placed in a new DGN file that is created from the Default Translation Seed File. The Default Translation Seed File is set by the MS_TRANSEED configuration variable. Interactively by choosing File > Import > IGES, Parasolids, ACIS SAT, CGM, or STEP AP203/AP214. You can adjust import settings before proceeding. The contents of the imported file are placed in the open DGN file. This changes the DGN file. By issuing commands from the system prompt. On systems that have a system prompt, you can automatically convert multiple files to DGN files.
To directly open a file in another format
2. From the Files of type option menu, choose CAD Drawing Files [*.dgn] [*.dwg] [*.dxf], AutoCAD Drawing Files [*.dwg] , AutoCAD DXF Files [*.dxf] , or CGM Files [*.cgm]. 3. Select the file to open and then click Open. The file opens. If you selected File > Import > CGM, a status box displays messages that describe the translation's progress and that are saved in a Log file. The contents of the opened file are placed in a new DGN file that is created from the Default Translation Seed File. The Default Translation Seed File is set by the configuration variable MS_TRANSEED. The settings that you used the last time you interactively opened a file of the selected file type (by choosing File > Import) control how entities are converted to elements in the DGN file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To interactively import a file in another format
Page 338 of 387
1. Open the DGN file (or create a new DGN file) into which the IGES, Parasolid, ACIS SAT, CGM, STL, or STEP AP203/AP214 file is to be placed. see footnote 12 2. Choose File > Import > IGES, Parasolids, ACIS SAT, CGM, or STEP AP203/AP214. The appropriate initial import dialog box opens. 3. Select the filename and directory. 4. Click Open. The appropriate secondary import dialog box opens for the file type being imported.
Type IGES Parasolid ACIS SAT CGM STL This dialog box opens Import IGES File dialog box Import Parasolids Import ACIS SAT Import CGM File dialog box Import STL File dialog box
STEP AP203/AP214 Import STEP AP203/AP214 File dialog box
5. (Optional) Modify the import settings. 6. Click Import. The file opens. Messages that describe the progress of the conversion are displayed in the Status area and saved in a Log file.
Saving files in other formats
MicroStation lets you save a DGN file as an IGES, Parasolid, ACIS SAT, CGM, STL, or STEP AP203/AP214 file in the following ways:
Directly by choosing File > Save As. The current export settings control the conversion. Interactively by choosing File > Export > IGES, Parasolids, ACIS SAT, CGM, or STEP AP203/AP214. Using this method, you can adjust export settings before proceeding. By issuing commands from the system prompt on systems that have one.
To directly save a DGN file in another format
1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save File As dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 339 of 387
2. From the Files of Type option menu, choose AutoCAD Drawing Files [*.dwg] , AutoCAD DXF Files [*.dxf] , or CGM Files [*.cgm]. 3. (Optional) In the File name field, key in a name for the file to save. By default, the file is saved with the same name as the DGN file and with the extension .dwg , .dxf , or .cgm. 4. Click Save. As the file is saved, you can monitor the status by reading the messages displayed in the Status window. The settings that you set the last time you saved a DGN file as a n IGES or CGM file interactively (using the File menu's Import or Export item) control how elements in the DGN file are converted to entities in the exported file.
To interactively export a DGN file to another format
1. From the File menu, choose Export and then choose a file type. A dialog box opens.
Type IGES Parasolid ACIS SAT CGM STL This dialog box opens Export IGES File dialog box Export Parasolids Export ACIS SAT Export CGM File dialog box Export STL dialog box
STEP AP203/AP214 Export STEP AP203/AP214
(Optional) In the File name field key in a name for the file to export
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
3. Click Save.
Page 340 of 387
IGES File Exchange

IGES is a public domain, neutral file format that serves as an international standard for the exchange of data between different CAD/CAM systems. IGES is an ANSI standard maintained by the IGES/PDES Organization (IPO) under the direction of the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). The National Computer Graphics Association (NCGA) acts as the administrator of the standard. You can export IGES files that are compliant with the CALS Class I or Class II specifications. JAMA-IS IGES Translator JAMA-IS is a Japanese subset of IGES designed by JAMA (Japanese Automotive Manufacturers Association). JAMA restricts the entity set to what is relevant to their purposes and places additional limitations on the remaining ones. This version of IGES translator supports JAMA-IS v.1.04 standard.
The General Data Exchange Procedures provides information on importing and exporting IGES files in MicroStation.
IGES supports many entity types ranging in complexity from simple lines to complex surfaces. MicroStation can cleanly import a large subset of the IGES entities. .
Translating large files can require substantial amounts of RAM and space on the hard disk. The message Aborting due to memory allocation failure indicates the need to add more memory or free up more hard disk space.
Import/Export IGES The following sections discuss the way the Import/Export IGES facility deals with MicroStation dimension elements.
Importing dimension elements
The Import IGES utility imports IGES dimension entities as MicroStation dimension elements. To override this default, you must exclude the MicroStation dimension element. Then the Import IGES process converts IGES dimension entities into discrete MicroStation primitive elements, such as lines and text, and creates a graphic group. This output is the same as generated with MicroStation v5.0.
To exclude the MicroStation dimension element
1. Choose File > Import > IGES. 2. From the Import IGES dialog box, specify the filename and then click OK. 3. From the Import IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Exclude uStn Elements. The Exclude MicroStation Elements dialog box opens. 4. From the Included Elements list box, select Dimension. 5. To move your selection to the Exclude Elements list box, click Exclude. 6. To close the Exclude MicroStation Elements dialog box, click Done. 7. To import the file and close the Import IGES File dialog box, click Import.
Exporting dimension elements
By default, the Export IGES facility exports MicroStation dimensions as IGES dimension entities. To override this, the Break Dimensions option must be selected in the IGES Export Settings dialog box (from the Export IGES File dialog box, choose Settings menu >
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 341 of 387
When the Break Dimensions option is selected, dimensions are exported as their constituent elements (lines, text, etc.). This results in the same output as generated with v5.0.
To override IGES dimension entities
1. Choose File > Export > IGES. 2. From the Export IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > General. 3. From the IGES Export Settings dialog box, turn on Break Dimension. 4. To close the IGES Export Settings dialog box, click OK. 5. To export the file and close the Export IGES File dialog box, click Export. IGES Entities The fundamental unit of data in an IGES file is the entity. There are two major categories of entities.
Geometry entities Geometry entities define physical shapes, such as points, curves, surfaces, solids, and relations which are collections of similarly structured entities. Non-geometry entities Non-geometry entities provide specific attributes or characteristics for geometry entities. Non-geometry entities include view, drawing, general note, dimension, property, and associativity entities.
Some entities have several forms or further definitions of the entity within the entity type. Each entity is represented by an entry in the directory entry section and the parameter data section of the IGES file. IGES File Organization MicroStation can import or export fixed-length ASCII IGES files with 80 characters in each line. Each IGES file has five sections that are identified by the letter in column 73 of each line (S, G, D, P, or T).
Start section
Contains a human-readable comment that is meant to be read by people rather than by computers. By default, the message This file was produced by MicroStation is placed in the Start section of an exported IGES file. If desired, a text file can be specified using the Start Section File dialog box (from the Export IGES File dialog box, choose File > Start Section File). For example, the text file has information about notes to the receiving company. If a text file is specified, the text is reformatted in the standard IGES record format.
Global data section
Contains information needed by the receiving application, such as the sending application, author, organization, drafting standard, measuring system, and IGES version. Some of this information is specified in the Export IGES File dialog box.
Directory entry section
Serves as an index to the IGES file. There is one directory entry for each entity. A directory entry has 20 right-justified fields of 8 characters each in two consecutive lines used to store information that is applicable to every type of entity. Important fields include:
Field Description 1 2 4 5 10 11 Entity type Pointer to the parameter data for that entity Line font pattern Level Line count from beginning of directory entry section Entity type (same as field 1)
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
12 13 14 15 20 Line weight Color Number of lines in the parameter data entry for that entity Form number Line count from beginning of directory entry section (same as field 10) Parameter data section
Page 342 of 387
Contains geometric information that is specific to each type of entity. Geometric information includes the endpoints of a line entity, the center and radius of a circle entity, or the text in a general note entity. The length of the parameter data entries depends on the element type.
Terminate section
Is one line long and must be the last line in the IGES file.
A sample DGN file and exported IGES file
The following examples show the DGN file output.dgn and the exported IGES file output.igs. The DGN file has default settings except for global data specified in the Export to IGES File dialog box.
The DGN file output.dgn has one line and one text element.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 343 of 387
Exported IGES file output.igs
The sections of the above image are as follows:

The start section S contains the default message because no start section file was specified. The global data section G contains information needed by the receiving application, including the name of the sending application (MicroStation), author, and organization. The directory entry section D contains the entity numbers in field 1 and 11 (110 and 212 for the line and general note, respectively), and the pointers in field 2 to the corresponding line in the parameter data section P for each entity, and the labels in field 18 (LINE and TEXT) into which the IGES export program puts the MicroStation element type from which they were created. The parameter data section P contains information that is specific to the entity type. The terminate section T must be the last line in the IGES file.
Issues That Affect IGES Import and Export This section covers issues that affect IGES import and export.
Converting subfigure names
IGES subfigures are similar to MicroStation cells. Although MicroStation cell names are limited to six characters, there is no limit to the length of IGES subfigure names:
When an IGES file is imported, a subfigure name is truncated to its first six characters. If the name already exists in the DGN file or attached cell library, the sixth character is replaced with a 0. This number is incremented until a unique name is found. When exporting a file to IGES, you can replace the six-characters MicroStation cell names with longer subfigure names to match the naming conventions of the receiving application.
You can use the Cell Names dialog box to customize how cell names are translated.
To customize Do this
Subfigure names are translated to cell names during import. From the Import IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Cell Names. Cell names are translated to subfigure names during export. From the Export IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Cell Names. If you must frequently exchange data between MicroStation and another system that supports subfigure names longer than six characters, you should save customized lists of conversions in an import and export settings file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To convert a subfigure name to a cell name
Page 344 of 387
1. Choose File > Import > IGES. 2. From the Import IGES dialog box, specify the filename and then click OK. 3. From the Import IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Cell Names. The Cell Names dialog box opens.
4. In the Subfigure Name field, type the subfigure name. 5. In the Cell Name field, type the cell name to which to convert the subfigure name. 6. Click Add. 7. To close the Cell Names dialog box, click Done. 8. To import the file and close the Import IGES dialog box, click Import.
Converting text
Each MicroStation font is assigned a number from 0 to 255 in a font library. The MicroStation font library igesfont.flb has equivalents for the IGES standard text fonts. The default mappings from the IGES standard text fonts to the fonts in the MicroStation font library igesfont.flb are as follows:
Standard IGES Font 1. Standard Block 2. LeRoy 18. Helvetica 1001. Symbol Font 1 1002. Symbol Font 1003. Drafting Font MicroStation igesfont.flb 0. Standard 3. Engineering 43. Low Res Filled 15. IGES Symbol Font 1 16. IGES Symbol Font 2 17. IGES Symbol Font 3
17. Century Schoolbook 2. Fancy
Any IGES font that is not explicitly mapped is translated to MicroStation Font 1 (Working).
To use the font library igesfont.flb, you should ensure that the configuration variable MS_FNTLB is pointing to it.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 345 of 387
different, you must decide which font mappings work best for your translation. To make font translation as accurate as possible, you should:
Limit font usage to one or two fonts that have a similar appearance in each package. Use simple fonts rather than fancy.
Features that are supported by the sending application may not be supported by MicroStation. For example, some applications support the text attribute bold, but MicroStation does not support bold as a text attribute.
To convert an IGES font to MicroStation font
1. Choose File menu > Import > IGES. 2. In the Import IGES dialog box, specify the filename and then click OK. 3. In the Import IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Text Fonts. The Text Fonts dialog box opens. 4. In the Min field, key in the IGES font number. or In the Min and Max fields, key in the lower number and higher number of a range of IGES fonts. 5. In the uSTN field, key in the MicroStation font number. 6. Click Add.
Converting line styles
The IGES specification includes six standard line styles and custom line font patterns defined by line font definition entities (type 304). Because MicroStation does not support custom line styles, the IGES line font patterns of entities with custom line font patterns can be mapped to any of the MicroStation line styles. For IGES import, the default mapping of IGES line font patterns to MicroStation line styles is:
IGES line font pattern 0. Undefined 1. Solid 2. Dashed 3. Phantom 4. Centerline 5. Dotted MicroStation line style 0. Solid (SOL) 0. Solid (SOL) 5. Short-dashed (SHD) 6. Dash double-dot (DADD) 7. Long dash-short dash (LDSD) 1. Dotted (DOT)
For IGES export, the default mapping of MicroStation line styles to IGES line font patterns is:
MicroStation line style 0. Solid (SOL) 1. Dotted (DOT) 2. Medium-dashed (MEDD) 3. Long-dashed (LNGD) 4. Dot-dashed (DOTD) 5. Short-dashed (SHD) 6. Dash double-dot (DADD) IGES line font 1. Solid 3. Phantom 2. Dashed 2. Dashed 4. Centerline 2. Dashed 3. Phantom
7. Long dash-short dash (LDSD) 4. Centerline
Conversion between MicroStation line styles and IGES line font patterns can be customized For more information see:
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects

Page 346 of 387
For import see the Import IGES File dialog box For export see the Export IGES File dialog box
Issues That Affect IGES Import This section covers issues concerning the importing of IGES files.
Certain IGES entities cannot be represented in 2D. Unless you are sure that the IGES file is 2D, you should open a 3D DGN file before importing the IGES file.
Keeping coordinate units correct
If you need to import an IGES file with the file units in inches into a DGN file where the master units are feet and sub-units are inches, you should set the Translation Units to sub-units so that the working units in the DGN file are correct.
IGES has no equivalent for MicroStation sub-units.
Levels
An IGES file and a MicroStation DGN file can have an unlimited number of levels, numbered with any non-negative integer. By default, when an IGES file is imported entities on a specified level in the IGES file are placed on the corresponding level in the DGN file. The conversion of levels from IGES files to DGN files can be customized in the Levels dialog box, which is opened by choosing Settings menu > Levels in the Import IGES File dialog box.
To convert IGES levels to MicroStation levels
1. Choose File > Import > IGES. 2. From the Import IGES dialog box, specify the filename and then click OK. 3. In the Import IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Levels. The Levels dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. In the Min field, key in the IGES level number. or In the Min and Max fields, key in the minimum and maximum of a range of IGES levels. 5. In the uStn Level field, key in the MicroStation level number. 6. Click the Add button. 7. Click the Done button.
Drawing sheets and viewing visibility
Page 347 of 387
A single IGES file can represent both the model (the actual geometry) and one or more annotated drawing sheets that display the model from different views. Drawing entities (type 404) specify a drawing sheet as a collection of annotation entities and one or more views of the model. Although MicroStation does not directly support drawing entities, sheet files provide the same functionality. An IGES file with drawing entities can be split into the following:

A DGN file with the model One or more sheet files (DGN file with a attached reference for each drawing view as well as any annotation entities associated with the drawing entity) that are created for each drawing entity
Also, IGES has a capability called views visible that is not directly supported by MicroStation:
The display of an individual entity can be enabled or disabled for different views through the views visible form of the associativity instance entity (type 402, form 3). This attribute is called view visibility. The symbology, such as line font pattern, color, or line weight, of an individual entity can be changed in different views through the views visible, color, or line weight form of the associativity instance entity (type 402, form 4). This attribute is called view symbology.
The Drawings option menu in the Import IGES File dialog box controls the handling of drawing entities, view visibility, and view symbology when an IGES file is imported. Issues That Affect IGES Export This section covers issues concerning the exporting of a DGN file to IGES.
Excluding IGES entities
The breadth of the IGES specification makes it impractical for any receiving application to correctly interpret every IGES entity. Usually, you should exclude an entity that is not supported by the receiving application. If you exclude an IGES entity listed in the section Alternate entities to use when exporting excluded IGES entities, the geometry that it represents is approximated with the corresponding alternate entity type. In most cases, the approximation is less compact and intelligent than the entity it replaces.
If an entity is not listed in the following table, its exclusion causes its geometry to be omitted from the IGES file.
The Exclude IGES Entities dialog box lets you exclude IGES entities. You can open the Exclude IGES Entities dialog box by choosing Settings > Exclude IGES Entities from the menu bar of the Export IGES File dialog box. Examples include the following:
If the general note IGES entity (type 212) is excluded, text elements are replaced with their stroked representation as copious data entities (type 106). Although the text appears correctly in the IGES file, it requires much more file space and is interpreted as a series of vectors instead of as text. If the receiving application does not support NURBS, they should be excluded.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Alternate entities to use when exporting excluded IGES entities
Page 348 of 387
Unless the alternate entity is also excluded, the alternate entities for excluded IGES entities are as follows:
IGES Entity 100. Circular Arc 102. Composite Curve 104. Conic Arc 106. Copious Data 108. Plane (Bounded) 116. Point 126. Rational B-spline Curve 128. Rational B-spline Surface 142. Curve On Surface 144. Trimmed Surface 212. General Note 230. Sectioned Area 308. Subfigure Definition 314. Color Definition Alternate If Excluded 126. Rational B-spline Curve Individual component entities 126. Rational B-spline Curve 110. Line(s) 230. Sectioned Area 110. Line (zero length) 106. Copious Data 126. Rational B-spline Curves (rule lines) B-spline Surface boundaries are ignored Grouped holes are exported as Sectioned Area entities (type 230) 106. Copious Data Bounding elements area pattern Individual component entities Standard colors are used
408. Singular Subfigure Instance All cells are dropped (placed as individual entities in the IGES file) If an element does not appear in the table, its exclusion causes its geometry to be omitted from the IGES file.
Exporting CALS-compliant IGES Files CALS is an acronym for the United States Department of Defense Computer-aided Acquisition and Logistic Support initiative. The goal of CALS is to integrate and standardize the digital data received from Department of Defense suppliers. The CALS IGES specification is a series of different classes of IGES files. Each class is a subset of the IGES entity types, as specified in MIL-D-28000A.
CALS Class I. 2D Technical Illustration Settings File cals1.sfo For the Exchange of 2D figures and illustrations normally found in technical publications 3D engineering drawings (export settings are very close to default IGES export settings)
II. 3D Engineering Drawings cals2.sfo Settings files for CALS support
The cals1.sfo and cals2.sfo export settings files specify export settings as follows:
Setting Start Section File Flattening Standard Colors Default Drawing see footnote 15 Excluded Entities (see (IGES Export) Exclude IGES Entities dialog box and (Import IGES) Exclude IGES Entities dialog box) Fonts (see Font Text Style Mapping dialog box and (Export IGES) Text Fonts dialog box and (Import IGES) Text Fonts dialog box.) Level Placement (see Settings menu > Levels and (IGES Export) Levels dialog box and (Import IGES) Levels dialog box.) All entities not in CALS Class I specification are excluded. No entities are excluded. CALS Class I cals1.sfo cals1.ssf template for CALS Class I start section On from the Top see footnote 13 On see footnote 14 On Off Off On CALS Class II cals2.sfo cals2.ssf template for CALS Class II start section
All MicroStation fonts are mapped to IGES fonts 1, All MicroStation fonts are mapped to IGES fonts 1, 1001, and 1002, which are the only fonts allowed in 1001, 1002, and 1003, which are the only fonts CALS Class I IGES files. allowed in CALS Class II IGES files. All elements in the DGN file are placed on level 0 in Elements are left on the same levels as in the DGN the IGES file. file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Settings File > Save As from the Export IGES File dialog box.
Page 349 of 387
To export CALS Class I-compliant IGES files
1. Attach the export settings file cals1.sfo. As necessary, see the procedure To attach a settings file other than the default. 2. In the Export IGES File dialog box, fill in the Product Name field. The product name is required in CALS Class I IGES files. 3. From the menu bar of the Export IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Start Section. 4. In the Start Section dialog box, type the information specific to your project.
These 2D entities are allowed in CALS Class I IGES files.
5. To close the Start Settings dialog box, click Done. 6. To export the file and close the Export IGES File dialog box, click Export.
The Import IGES File dialog box contains information about saving a custom start section file for your project or organization.
To export CALS Class II-compliant IGES files
1. Attach the export settings file cals2.sfo. As necessary, see the procedure To attach a settings file other than the default . 2. In the Export IGES File dialog box, fill in the Author, Organization, and Product Name fields. These are required in CALS Class II IGES files. 3. From the menu bar of the Export IGES File dialog box, choose Settings > Start Section. 4. In the Start Section dialog box, type the information specific to your project.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 350 of 387
These 3D entities are allowed in CALS Class II IGES files.
5. To close the Start Settings dialog box, click Done. 6. To export the file and close the Export IGES File dialog box, click Export. Converting IGES Entities to MicroStation Elements You can convert IGES entities (left) to the related MicroStation elements (right). The supported IGES entities are listed as follows:
IGES Entity 100. Circular Arc

MicroStation Element
Closed arc Arc
15. Ellipse 16. Arc
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
102. Composite Curve 104. Conic Arc:

Page 351 of 387

14. Complex Chain
Closed arc Arc
15. Ellipse 16. Arc
106. Copious Data: see footnote 16

Form 11, 12, 40, 63 Form 20-21, 31-38 43
4. Line String, or 6. Shape, or 14. Complex Shape Line segments
108. Plane:

bounded see footnote 17 unbounded
Shape, Ellipse, closed B-spline Curve, or Complex Shape Not supported
110. Line 112. Parametric Spline Curve 114. Parametric Spline Surface 116. Point 118. Ruled Surface see footnote 18 120. Surface of Revolution 122. Tabulated Cylinder 124. Transformation Matrix 126. Rational B-spline Curve (all forms) 128. Rational B-spline Surface (all forms) 130. Offset Curve 140. Offset Surface 142. Curve On A Parametric Surface

3. Line 27. B-spline Curve 24. B-spline Surface 3. Line (zero length) 24. B-spline Surface 24. Default is Surface of Revolution. However, if the Surface header is excluded, the entity is translated into a Bspline Surface. You can exclude the Surface header by choosing Settings > Exclude uStn Elements in the Import IGES dialog box. 24. B-spline Surface Supported 27. B-spline Curve 24. B-spline Surface 27. B-spline Curve 24. B-spline Surface
Curve present uv_curve present
27. B-spline Curve 24. B-spline Surface Boundary
144. Trimmed Parametric Surface see footnote 19 150. Block 152. Right Angular Wedge 154. Right Circular Cylinder 156. Right Circular Cone Frustum 158. Sphere 160. Torus 162. Solid of Revolution
25. Bounded B-spline Surface if the 3D Design add-on is not present, or 3D Design boundary representation if 3D Design is present 19. Solid (of projection) 19. Solid (of projection) 23. Cylinder 23. Cone 19. Solid (of revolution) 19. Solid (of revolution)

19. Solid (of revolution) 24. B-spline Surface (if cross-section is a B-spline curve) 19. Solid (of projection) 24. B-spline Surface (if cross-section is a B-spline curve)
164. Solid of Linear Extrusion
186. Manifold Solid B-rep Object 202. Angular Dimension 206. Diameter Dimension 208. Flag Note
Type 2 SmartSolids Angular Dimension or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 20 Diameter Dimension or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 21 Flag Note or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 22
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
210. General Label 212. General Note Forms 0-8, 100-102, 105 214. Leader 216. Linear Dimension 218. Ordinate Dimension 220. Point Dimension 222. Radius Dimension 228. General Symbol 230. Sectioned Area see footnote 29 308. Subfigure Definition see footnote 30 312. Text Display Template 314. Color Definition 320. Network Subfigure Definition see footnote 31 402. Associativity Instance:
Page 352 of 387

General Label or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 23 17. Text Leader or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 24 Linear Dimension or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 25 Ordinate Dimension or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 26 Primitive elements, such as lines or text Radius Dimension or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 27 General Symbol or primitive elements, such as lines or text see footnote 28 Boundary elements enclosing a hatch pattern. 1. Cell (in attached cell library) 34. Shared Cell Definition Supported Supported 1. Cell (in attached cell library) 34. Shared Cell Definition
Form 1, 7, 9, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18 Form 3, 4 see footnote 32
Graphic Group Supported (view visibility)
404. Drawing see footnote 33 406. Property:

Supported
Form 3. (level function) Form 5. (line widening) Form 15. (name) Form 16. (drawing size) Form 17. (drawing units)
Named level 36. Multi-line Supported View in sheet DGN file Units in sheet DGN file
408. Singular Subfigure Instance see footnote 34 410. View 412. Rectangular Array Subfigure Instance see footnote 35 414. Circular Array Subfigure Instance see footnote 36 416. External Reference (Form 1) 420. Network Subfigure Instance see footnote 37
2. Cell (placed in attached cell library) 35. Shared Cell Instance 5. Saved View 2. Cell(s) (placed in a rectangular array in attached cell library) 35. Shared Cell Instance(s) (placed in a rectangular array) 2. Cell(s) (placed in a circular array in attached cell library) 35. Shared Cell Instance(s) (placed in a circular array) 5. Reference 2. Cell (in attached cell library) 35. Shared Cell Instance
Converting MicroStation Elements to IGES Entities When you export a DGN file, MicroStation elements (left) are translated to the related IGES entities (right) unless the IGES entity is excluded (see Excluding IGES entities).
MicroStation Element IGES Entity
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
1. Cell Library Header 2. Cell Headers 3. Line 4. Line String 5. Group Data Saved View Color Table 6. Shape 7. Text Node 11. Curve 12. Complex Chain 308. Subfigure Definition 408. Subfigure Instance 110. Line 106. Copious Data Ignored 410. View 314. Color Definition 106. Copious Data 212. General Note 126. Rational B-spline Curve 102. Composite Curve
Page 353 of 387
14. Complex Shape, if bounded 144. Trimmed Surface 100. Arc (Circles only) 104. Conic 100. Arc (Circles only) 104. Conic 15. Ellipse

16. Arc
17. Text 18. Surface of Revolution Surface of Projection 19. Solid of Revolution Solid of Projection 21. B-spline Pole 22. Point String 23. Cone 24. B-spline Surface Header

212. General Note 120. Surface of Revolution 118. Ruled Surface 128. Solid of Revolution 118. Ruled Surface Exported with B-spline Curve or B-spline Surface header 116. Point(s) 128. Rational B-spline Surface
If not bounded If bounded
128. Rational B-spline Surface 144. Trimmed Surface
25. B-spline Surface Boundary 142. Curve On A Parametric Surface 26. B-spline Knot 27. B-spline Curve 28. B-spline Weight Factor 33. Dimension 34. Shared Cell Definition 35. Shared Cell Instance 36. Multi-linea Exported with B-spline Curve or B-spline Surface header 126. Rational B-spline Curve Exported with B-spline Curve or B-spline Surface Header Dimension or primitive elements, such as line and text see footnote 38 308. Subfigure Definition 408. Subfigure Instance Exported as primitive components Text Ignored Ignored Ignored
37. Tag 66. MicroStation Application 87. Raster Header 88. Raster Data
IGES Translation Errors and Warnings Errors messages are problems that cause import or export to fail. Warnings messages do not cause failure, but they indicate that the drawing may have lost some intelligence or had some part omitted during translation.
Import and export errors Message Means
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Unable to open output file Aborting due to memory allocation failure Import errors Message Unable to open IGES file The specified IGES file does not exist or cannot be opened. Means
Page 354 of 387
An error occurred while opening the DGN file that you are importing the IGES file into or while opening the IGES file to which you are attempting to export. Error is caused by an invalid path specification, the existence of a write-protected file with the same filename, or other similar condition (command line or batch method only). Sufficient memory to complete the translation is not available. Translating large files can require substantial amounts of memory. Because both RAM and hard disk space are used, you must add more memory or free up additional hard disk space.
Missing terminator The terminator section is not found at the end of the IGES file. This usually indicates that the specified file is not a valid IGES file or section is truncated or corrupted in some way. Invalid terminator section Unable to create DGN file Unable to open seed file Export error Message Unable to open temporary file Means The parameter data for the IGES file is written to a temporary file (iges.pds) during translation. This file cannot be created for some reason. The format of the terminator section of the IGES file is not valid. The DGN file cannot be created because the specified path does not exist, an existing file with that filename is write-protected, or some other condition prevents the creation of the specified file (command line or batch method only). The seed file specified by MS_DESIGNSEED does not exist in the directory specified by MS_SEEDFILES (command line or batch method only).
Import and export warnings Message Unrecognized option Invalid option format Unable to open settings file Settings version mismatch Unable to create settings file Means An option is specified that MicroStation cannot understand (command line or batch method only). The syntax of an option is incorrect (command line or batch method only). The specified settings file does not exist or cannot be opened. The version for the settings file does not match the version of MicroStation's IGES translator. The specified path does not exist, a write-protected file with the same filename exists, or the file cannot be created for some other reason.
Unable to add settings to file An error occurs while updating the settings file, which usually indicates that the settings file is write-protected. Unable to open specification file Import warnings Message Means The specification file does not exist or cannot be opened.
Parameter type does not match The entity's parameter data does not match the type specified in its directory record. The entity is ignored. directory record Invalid Copious Data Format Unsupported entity
A copious data (type 106) entity of a form not supported by MicroStation was encountered. The entity is ignored. An entity type in the IGES file is not supported and is therefore omitted from the DGN file.
String constant broken before Hollerith character String field too long Hollerith character missing for string field No field delimiter These errors are caused by data that does not conform to the IGES syntax specification. IGESIN attempts to infer or ignore the invalid data. However, missing or incorrect geometry can result.
lid di
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 355 of 387
Invalid PDS Pointer in directory record Invalid directory sequence Invalid PDS count in directory record An invalid line font was encountered. The default line style is used for the entity. An error is encountered extracting the subfigure definition for the specified instance. The instance is omitted from the DGN file. An unsupported conic form is encountered. MicroStation currently supports all conic forms specified in the IGES standard, such as ellipses, hyperbolas, and parabolas. A degenerate hyperbola definition is encountered. No geometry is generated in the DGN file for the conic entity. A degenerate parabola definition is encountered. No geometry is generated in the DGN file for the conic entity. The conic cannot be reduced to standard form through standard rotation and translation of axis techniques. No geometry is generated in the DGN file for the conic entity. The axis for a surface of revolution (type 120) is not a valid line (type 110) entity. No geometry is generated in the DGN file for the surface of revolution. An invalid entity pointer was encountered in the parameter data for the indicated entity. The entity is ignored. The transformation for a view entity is not orthonormal. The view definition is ignored. The specified sheet DGN file cannot be created because the specified path does not exist, a write-protected file exists with the same filename, or the file cannot be created for some other reason. The drawing entity associated with this sheet is ignored. The sheet seed file specified by the MS_SHEETSEED configuration variable cannot be opened in the directory specified by MS_SEEDFILES. Either the file does not exist or read access is not available. The sheet DGN file is created by copying the header or the model DGN file rather than using the sheet seed file. An invalid line weight value is encountered for the indicated entity. The weight of the entity is set to zero. The name of the IGES subfigure is altered to meet the MicroStation requirement of six-character alphanumeric cell names. This error occurs if the active cell library is write-protected. A section pattern that is not in the cell library igespats.cel is encountered. The section pattern is ignored. You can correct this by creating a pattern cell for the section and adding it to igespats.cel with CODEnn as the cell name (nn is the section code number). The pattern cell library igespats.cel is not found. This library is required for sectioned area entities (type 230). The configuration variable MS_CELL is used to locate the cell library. Be sure that igespats.cel exists and that MS_CELL points to its directory. An unsupported associativity form is encountered. The associativity entity is ignored. The geometry for an IGES entity is not included in the model plane (volume in 3D) of the DGN file and is omitted. Usually this means that the working units of the DGN file are not appropriate for the IGES file being imported. You can correct this by choosing an appropriate seed file, adjusting the working units in the Working Units dialog box, or setting Translation Units to Sub-Units or Calculate. MicroStation supports a maximum cell size of 65,000 words (1 word = 2 bytes). If an IGES subfigure exceeds this limit, it is placed in the DGN file as individual components rather than as a cell or shared cell. A type 142 (curve on surface) entity is encountered with a zero pointer for the UV curve entity. The curve is ignored. This usually causes a trim boundary to be omitted from a surface. An invalid form for a Line Font Definition entity is encountered. The font definition is ignored. These errors are caused by IGES files that are syntactically correct but that contain data inconsistent with the IGES specification. In most cases, IGESIN omits the erroneous entities and continues translating.
Invalid line font (ignored) Subfigure instance error Unsupported conic form Invalid hyperbolic conic Invalid parabolic conic Unable to standardize conic Invalid revolution axis Invalid entity pointer Invalid viewing transformation Unable to create sheet file: <filename> Unable to open sheet seed: <filename> Invalid weight value Subfigure name changed: <Subfigure_Name> => <Cell_Name> Can't add cell to library Can't find section pattern <CODEnn> Unable to open pattern cell library Unsupported Associativity Form Element off design plane Maximum cell size exceeded, Subfigure dropped to components No UV Curve in Curve on Surface Unsupported Line font definition (304) form Export warnings Message Geometry omitted by exclusion of Entity: No./No. Degenerate (zero radius) arc omitted
Means Entities are omitted from the IGES file because the indicated entities were excluded and there is no alternate entity type to represent it. This usually occurs only if the copious data (type 106) or point (type 116) entities are excluded. MicroStation DGN files can contain zero radius arc or circle elements. Because the IGES specification prohibits these entities, they are not exported to IGES.
IGES References
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
National Computer Graphics Association 2722 Merrilee Drive, Suite 200 IGES Version 5.2 Fairfax, VA 22031 (703) 698-9600 ext. 325 NIST Building 220, Room A127 IGES 5.1 Recommended Practices Guide Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-3982
Page 356 of 387
Parser/Verifier Parser/Verifier is a utility that checks IGES files for conformance to the IGES standard. It generates reports on entity usage and errors. CALS conformance testing is optional. Parser/Verifier can greatly speed the identification and resolution of IGES translation problems. Parser/Verifier is available for PC, Intergraph Workstation, VAX/VMS, Sun SPARC, and other platforms from IGES Data Analysis, 2001 North Janice Avenue, Melrose Park, IL 60160; phone: (708) 344-1815; fax: (708) 344-2840. Similar utilities may be available from other vendors.
Parasolid XMT File Exchange

Parasolid XMT files are used to exchange data with Parasolid-based solid modelers. Importing Parasolid Data This section describes how to import Parasolid data into MicroStation.
To import a Parasolid file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Import > Parasolids. The Import Parasolid XMT File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 357 of 387
3. Identify the units for the file to import. The imported data will be scaled to match the units of the active model. (If the units in both files are the same, no scaling occurs.) 4. (Optional) To change the selected directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 5. Select the Parasolid file to import. 6. Click OK. The status messages flash briefly in the Status area. If logging is enabled, these status messages are recorded in a log file. After the process is completed, the translated model is shown in a fitted view in the currently visible windows. Exporting Parasolid Data This section describes how to export Parasolid data from MicroStation.
To export a Parasolid file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Export > Parasolids. 3. Select the solid model or assembly to export, and accept it with a data point. The Export Parasolid XMT File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 358 of 387
4. From the Parasolid Version option menu, choose the desired version for the Parasolid output file. 5. From the XMT File Units option menu, choose the units for the Parasolid output file. The data will be scaled to match the units of the output file. (If the units in both files are the same, no scaling occurs.) 6. (Optional) To change the selected directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 7. Enter the name for the exported Parasolid file. 8. Click OK. The dialog box closes after exporting is completed.
ACIS SAT File Exchange

ACIS SAT files are used to exchange data with ACIS SAT-based solid modelers. Importing ACIS SAT Data This section describes how to import ACIS SAT data into MicroStation.
To import an ACIS SAT file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Import > ACIS SAT. The Import ACIS SAT File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 359 of 387
3. Identify the units for the file to import. The imported data will be scaled to match the units of the active model. (If the units in both files are the same, no scaling occurs.) 4. (Optional) To change the selected directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 5. Select the ACIS SAT file to import. 6. Click OK. The status messages flash briefly in the Status area. If logging is enabled, these status messages are recorded in a log file. After the process is completed, the translated model is shown in a fitted view in the currently visible windows. Exporting ACIS SAT Data This section describes how to export ACIS SAT data from MicroStation.
To export an ACIS SAT file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Export > ACIS SAT. 3. Select the solid model or assembly to export and accept it with a data point. The Export ACIS SAT File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 360 of 387
4. From the ACIS Version option menu, choose the desired version for the ACIS output file. 5. From the SAT File Units options menu, choose the units for the ACIS output file. The data will be scaled to match the units of the output file. (If the units in both files are the same, no scaling occurs.) 6. (Optional) To change the selected directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 7. Click OK. The dialog box closes after exporting is completed.
CGM File Exchange

CGMs are used to exchange data. The CGM (computer graphics metafile) provides a file format suitable for the storage and retrieval of picture information. The file format consists of a set of elements that can be used to describe pictures in a way that is compatible between systems of different architectures and devices of differing capabilities and design. Importing CGM Data This section describes how to import CGM data into MicroStation.
To import a CGM file
1. Choose File > Import > CGM. The Open Computer Graphics Metafile dialog box, which is a standard file selection dialog box, opens. 2. To change the selected directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 3. Select the CGM file to import, and then click OK. The Import CGM File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 361 of 387
4. To manage the following features, open the desired dialog boxes by choosing the appropriate menu items from the menu bar of the dialog box : settings files log files general import settings text fonts levels line styles weights 5. To start the translation process, click Open in the Import CGM File dialog box. The status messages flash briefly in the Status area. If logging is enabled, these status messages are recorded in a log file. After the process is complete, the translated model is shown in a fitted view in the currently visible windows. Exporting CGM Data This section describes how to export CGM data from MicroStation.
To export a CGM file
1. Choose File > Export > CGM. The Save As CGM Drawing File dialog box, which is a standard file selection dialog box, opens. 2. Select the desired CGM file and directory path, and then click OK. The Export CGM File dialog box opens.
3. To manage the following features, open the desired dialog boxes by choosing the appropriate menu items from the menu bar of the dialog box:
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
settings files log files general import settings text fonts levels line styles weights 4. To start exporting data, click Export in the Export CGM File dialog box. The dialog box closes after exporting is completed.
Page 362 of 387
STEP AP203/AP214 File Exchange

Application Protocols (APs) are used to exchange data. Each AP pertains to a different application area. For example, AP227 pertains to spatial plant technology and contains several entities pertaining to that area, such as pipe or elbows. Also, these APs use certain common entities known as generic resources, such as geometry and topology, to define solid models. AP203 applies to representations of mechanical parts and assemblies. AP214 applies to representations of data relating to automotive design. Present day AP203 files typically contains the boundary representation model, assembly data, and a limited amount of other product information. AP214 files typically contain colors, layers, and generic resources. The boundary representation of a model is a CAD model represented by its boundary. For example, a surface model consists of only the surfaces use to make the model. Solid models include geometry information, such as surfaces, curves, and points, and topology information, such as edges, vertices, and faces. The geometry information provides data about the form of the model, and the topology information provides the connectivity between these geometric elements and the extent of the geometric elements. Importing STEP Data This section describes how to import STEP data into MicroStation.
Importing STEP data
This section describes how to import STEP data into MicroStation.

To import a STEP file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Import > STEP AP203/AP214. The Import STEP AP203/AP214 File dialog box, which is a standard file selection dialog box, opens. 3. Select the STEP file to import. 4. Click OK. A second Import STEP AP203/AP214 File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 363 of 387
5. (Optional) From the Settings menu of the dialog box, choose Import Settings. The AP203/AP214 Import Settings dialog box opens.
6. (Optional) Modify the import settings and then click Done. 7. To start the translation process, click Import in the Import STEP AP203/AP214 File dialog box. Status messages flash briefly in the Status area. If logging is enabled, these status messages are recorded in a log file. When the process is complete, the translated model is shown in a fitted view in the currently visible windows. Exporting STEP Data This section describes how to export STEP data from MicroStation.
To export STEP data
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. Choose File > Export > STEP AP203/AP214. 3. Identify the solid model or assembly to export and then accept it with a data point. The Export STEP AP203/AP214 File dialog box opens.
Page 364 of 387
4. (Optional) In the Author, Organization, and Approved By fields, fill in the appropriate information. 5. (Optional) From the dialog box, choose File > Export As to specify an export filename. If you do not perform this step, the filename of the exported STEP file is the same as the DGN file and with the extension .stp. 6. (Optional) From the dialog box, choose File > Log File to specify a filename for the log file. If you do not perform this step, the filename of the log file created is the same as the DGN file and with the extension .log. 7. (Optional) From the dialog box, choose Settings > Export Settings. The AP203/AP214 Export Settings dialog box opens.
8. (Optional) Modify the settings and then click Done. 9 T t t ti d t li k E t i th E t STEP AP203/AP214 Fil di l b
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
The dialog box closes after exporting is completed. Boundary Representation Data Exchange and Healing
Page 365 of 387
Compared to the exchange of simple geometry, the data exchange of boundary representation models requires some level of approximation and repair. Translation is difficult because of the additional connectivity information present in the model and the different system level interpretations of model validity. For example, in a boundary representation model, vertices must lie on certain edges. In terms of an engineering model system, this means that the point representing a vertex must lie within a distance of 0.001 units from the curve representing the edge. However, when this file is exported and then re-imported into a target system, the target system may assume that a vertex lies on an edge only if the point representing the vertex lies within a distance of 0.0000001 units from the curve representing the edge. Because of different system tolerances, the model considered valid in the exporting system may not be considered valid in the importing system. Also, geometry considered valid in the exporting system may not be considered valid in the importing system. Therefore, exchange of boundary representation models is usually not a completely successful process. Healing of the imported model is necessary so that it can be used later in the importing system. Notes Regarding STEP AP203/AP214 Translation The following notes are useful for STEP AP203/AP214 translations:
When the Master units in the DGN file are different from the units in the STEP file, the units of the STEP model are changed to the DGN file master units. Translation of solids, wires, sheets, surfaces, faceted Preps, and curves is supported. For AP214 translation, bi-directional exchange of colors and layers is available.
Exporting VRML World Files

VRML Publisher provides translation of MicroStation geometry to VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) and the ability to place interactive links between geometry in the VRML world and other Internet locations or VRML worlds. This enables you to publish interactive worlds in addition to static geometry. VRML Publisher includes the following features:

texture mapping Netscape's Live3D Extensions including headlight, background color, and background image exporting text as VRML ASCII text nodes exporting saved views as VRML cameras (viewpoints) exporting solids created with the 3D Design add-on directly without manually converting to surfaces exporting VRML worlds
Exporting VRML World Files

To export a view to a VRML world file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Export > VRML World. 3. To select a view to export, enter a data point. The Export VRML World File dialog box opens
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 366 of 387
4. Modify the settings as desired and then click Export. The Export VRML World dialog box opens, which is a standard file destination dialog box. By default, the file is saved with the same filename as the open DGN file and with the extension .wrl. The default destination location is "\Bentley\Workspace\projects\examples\generic\out". 5. To save the file, click OK in the VRML World dialog box.
If some curved surfaces do not appear in your exported file, you should try turning off Export Surface Normals and export the file again.
Viewing VRML World Files To view and interact with a VRML world, you need a VRML browser. You can download a wide variety of browsers from the Internet. For example, Netscape's Live3D does an exceptional job of handling large VRML worlds, but other browsers that completely implement the VRML 1.0 specification should also work. VRML Exporting and Viewing Hints The following hints are useful for exporting and viewing VRML files:
You should use either normal or shared cells to reduce the size of VRML worlds. Then you can use cells that require one stored definition with multiple references to it. You should create MicroStation saved views to represent significant views. MicroStation's saved views are exported as named camera entities which most browsers support as viewpoints. Do not use the characters [ and ] in material names. Because most browsers work best with perspective cameras, you should turn on the camera in saved views and, if possible, in the view that is exported. Because large VRML files require powerful computers for efficient viewing and sometime require a long time to download, you should reduce the file size by minimizing the use of curved surfaces and the amount of geometry. If possible, you should use pattern maps rather than actual geometry.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
STL File Exchange
Stereolithography (STL) files are basically lists of triangles that represent solid or surface geometry. Importing STL Data This section describes how to import STL data into MicroStation.
To import an STL file
Page 367 of 387
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Import > STL. The Choose an STL file to import dialog box opens. 3. (Optional) To change the selected directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 4. Select the file to import, and click OK. The Import STL File dialog box opens.
5. Modify the settings as desired, then click OK. The file is imported and displayed in MicroStation. Exporting STL Data This section describes how to export STL data from MicroStation.
To export an STL file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Export > STL. 3. Select the element to export, and accept it with a data point. The Save As Stereolithography File dialog box opens. 4. Enter a name for the stereolithography file 5. (Optional) To change the selected directory, choose one of the following from the menu bar of the dialog box: Directory > Select Configuration Variable Directory > Current Work Directory Directory > <directory_path> 6. Click OK.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 368 of 387
7. Modify the settings as desired, then click Export.
Exporting to SketchUp (.skp) format

MicroStation V8 XM Edition supports exporting of geometry to Sketchup Models (.skp files).
To export geometry to SketchUp (.skp) file
1. In MicroStation V8 XM, open the model to be exported. 2. Select File > Export > Sketchup. The SketchUp (SKP) Export Settings dialog box opens. 3. Adjust settings as required. 4. Click Export. The Create SketchUp File dialog box opens. The default filename is that of the DGN file, but with a .skp extension. 5. Use controls in the dialog box to select a folder and, optionally, change the name of the file. 6. Click Save.
Exporting to Collada (.dae) format

MicroStation V8 XM Edition supports exporting of geometry to Collada (.dae) files.
To export geometry to Collada (.dae) file
1. In MicroStation V8 XM, open the model to be exported. 2. Select File > Export > Collada. The Create Collada File dialog box opens. The default filename is that of the DGN file, but with a .dae extension.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
4. Click Save.
Page 369 of 387
Exporting U3D Files

Universal 3D (U3D) format was introduced by the 3D Industry Forum (www.3dif.org) as a means for transferring three dimensional data from CAD systems to mainstream applications such as marketing, training, sales, technical support and customer service. MicroStation lets you export geometry directly to U3D.
MicroStation also lets you create PDF documents with embedded U3D content. For details, see 3D Content in PDF files.
To export a U3D file
1. Open a 3D file in MicroStation. 2. Choose File > Export > U3D. The Export U3D File dialog box opens. 3. Enter a name for the U3D file. 4. (Optional) Select the appropriate directory. 5. Click OK.
Using 3DS Files

3D Studio is an off-the-shelf 3D animation program. MicroStation allows you to do the following with 3DS files:

Attach them as references Place them as cells Open them in read-only mode Open and save them as DGN files
There are several options available when you open a 3DS file. When working with 3DS files:

3DS file units are defined in the 3DS Open File Settings dialog box. No new levels are created. Materials are stored in the DGN file. Texture files remain in their original location. They are referred to by an absolute or relative path.
Using OBJ Files
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 370 of 387
OBJ is an open geometry definition file format (.OBJ) that is available in various software applications. MicroStation allows you to do the following with OBJ files:

Attach them as references Place them as cells Open them in read-only mode Open and save them as DGN files
There are several options available when you open an OBJ file. When working with OBJ files:

OBJ files use the master units of the file defined by the MS_TRANSEED configuration variable. No new levels are created. No new color are created because OBJ files do not specify color. If you choose to import materials, they are stored in the DGN file. Texture files remain in their original location. They are referred to by an absolute or relative path.
Exchanging Data with Other Applications

Copying and Using the Clipboard Using View Objects Using OLE Container
Copying and Using the Clipboard

You can use the Clipboard in the Microsoft Windows environment to exchange data with other applications. This chapter includes the following topics:

Copying to the Windows Clipboard from the Clipboard
Copying to the Windows clipboard In Windows, you can select text, bitmapped graphics, and metafiles to be copied or cut and copied to the Clipboard. You can place elements selected in MicroStation in the Windows Clipboard in several formats:
MicroStation Elements This format is recognized only by MicroStation and is used if the elements are pasted back into the model. Enhanced Metafile This format is used to paste vectors into other applications. MicroStation View Object This format is used to paste an entire MicroStation view into other applications. You must use the OLESERVE VIEWCOPY <view_number> key-in to copy the view. Device Independent Bitmap This format is available only if the OLESERVE VIEWCOPY <view_number> key-in is used to
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
copy the view.
Page 371 of 387
Text This format is available only if a text element is selected.
To copy elements to the Clipboard
1. With the Element Selection tool, select the desired elements. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Copy or Cut. The selected elements are copied to the Clipboard. Pasting from the Clipboard In Windows, the formats available in the Clipboard depend on the application from which the data is copied. You can paste text, bitmapped graphics, audio notes, and animation sequences into a DGN file. Also, you can paste text into the Key-in window.
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) links
Using DDE links, you can paste text, audio notes, and animation sequences into a DGN file. A linked item is automatically updated in the DGN file when the originating file is changed in the source (or server) application.
If text is pasted with a DDE link and both the source application, such as a word processor or a spreadsheet program, and MicroStation are running, changing the object in the source application causes the linked object in MicroStation to change automatically. If you click the icon for an audio note in the model, the sound file to which it is linked is played. If you click the icon for an animation sequence in the model, the file to which it is linked is played.
To play pasted audio notes, you must have the appropriate sound drivers installed in Windows.
MicroStation identifies linked objects by filename. If an object is not a saved file when it is pasted in a model, MicroStation may not be able to locate it later. For example, if you create text in an untitled document and paste the text before you save the file, MicroStation does not know where to find the linked text.
If you paste an object with a DDE link and if MicroStation displays an alert box with the message MicroStation requested server is not responding, you should confirm the following:

All source applications are located in the proper directories. The directories for the server applications are included in the operating system's PATH environment variable.
To paste elements, text, or linked text from the Clipboard
1. From any application, copy the item to the Clipboard. 2. Go back to MicroStation. 3. If you want MicroStation to paste the information in the most appropriate display format, choose Edit > Paste. The Paste OLE dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 372 of 387
4. Select the format in which you want the object to be pasted in the Paste As list box. 5. Select how you want to paste the object in the Method menu. 6. Turn on Display as icon if you want the pasted object to appear as an icon in the DGN file. 7. If By Size is selected in the Method menu, key in the scale of the object to be pasted in the Scale text box. 8. If the Method is By Size, click a data point to define the location of the object to be pasted.If the Method is By Corner, click a data point to define the top left corner and a second data point to define the bottom right corner of the object to be pasted.
Alternative Method To paste elements, text, or linked text from the Clipboard
1. From any application, copy the item to the Clipboard. 2. Go back to MicroStation. 3. To specify a certain format in which to paste the information, choose Edit > Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens. 4. In the Data Type list box, select the format in which you want to paste the data and then click Paste. The Paste OLE dialog box opens. 5. Select the format in which you want the object to be pasted in the Paste As list box. 6. Select how you want to paste the object in the Method menu. 7. Turn on Display as icon if you want the pasted object to appear as an icon in the DGN file. 8. If By Size is selected in the Method menu, key in the scale of the object to be pasted in the Scale text box. 9. If the Method is By Size, click a data point to define the location of the object to be pasted.If the Method is By Corner, click a data point to define the top left corner and a second data point to define the bottom right corner of the object to be pasted.
To start the application that is the source of linked text in the model
1. Double-click the text.

To paste a bitmapped graphic in the model
1. From any application, copy the image to the Clipboard. 2. Go back to MicroStation. 3. From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special. 4. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the bitmapped graphic format and then click Paste. An outline of the image dynamically displays. 5. To place the image in the model, enter a data point.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 373 of 387
In 3D DGN files, pasted bitmaps are easiest to handle if they are pasted in a Top view. If you place bitmaps in a view other than a Top view, the image handles work properly, but they may appear skewed.
The image is saved in the DGN file as a raster element type 87/88.
Pasting Rich Text Format (RFT)
Rich Text Format (rtf) text can be pasted from another application (via the clipboard) into MicroStation without losing the formatting. RTF text can also be OLE embedded into MicroStation using Edit > Paste Special. MicroStation supports pasting RTF from:

MicroSoft Word Word Pad Internet Explorer
The following is a list of attributes supported during RTF copy/paste:

Bold Italic Underline Color Font Tabs Superscript Subscript Paragraph Indents International Text
To paste RTF text into MicroStation
1. Copy the text from the external application to the clipboard. 2. CTRL+V to paste the text. Double-clicking allows you to edit the text in theMicroStation word processor.
To paste RTF text as an OLE embedded document into MicroStation
1. Copy the text from the external application to the clipboard. 2. CTRL+V to paste the text. Double-clicking allows you to edit the text in the source application.
Pasting audio notes
You can use the Windows' Sound Recorder applet to copy audio notes stored to the Clipboard as WAV files. Then you can paste the audio notes as linked objects into a DGN file.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
To paste an audio note
Page 374 of 387
1. Copy the audio note to the Clipboard. 2. Go back to MicroStation. 3. From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special. 4. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Audio note format and then click Paste. An outline of the image dynamically appears. 5. To place the audio note in the model, enter a data point. The audio note is marked by an icon that looks like a microphone.
To play an audio note
1. Double-click its icon.

Alternative Method To play an audio note
1. From the Edit menu, choose Links. The Link Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Link list box, select the DDE string for the audio note. 3. Click Open Source.
The source WAV file must be available for the audio note to be played.
The reference to the WAV file is user attribute data associated with the microphone bitmap, raster element type 87/88.
Pasting animation sequences
You can paste animation sequences as linked objects in a DGN file.

To paste an animation sequence
1. Copy the animation sequence to the Clipboard. 2. Go back to MicroStation. 3. From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special. 4. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Animation sequence format and the click Paste. An outline of the image dynamically appears. 5. To place the animation sequence in the model, enter a data point. The animation sequence is marked by an icon that looks like a reel of film.
To play an animation sequence
1. Double-click its icon.

Alternative Method To play an animation sequence
1. From the Edit menu, choose Links. The Link Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Link list box, select the DDE string for the animation.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
3. Click Open Source.
Page 375 of 387
The source AVI file must be available for the animation sequence to be played.
Using View Objects

This chapter includes the following topics:

Sending Views to Other Applications Editing View Objects in Other Applications Sending key-ins to MicroStation through a DDE link
Sending views to other applications In Windows, you can use MicroStation to send views to other applications. You can use OLE2 or DDE technologies to exchange data. OLE2 enables document objects from MicroStation to be served to other applications, which are called containers, such as Microsoft Word or Excel. A MicroStation view object is a picture of a MicroStation view that can be modified. The OLE2 document technology provides seamless integration of MicroStation view objects into container documents by embedding . View objects are sent via Embedding. An embedded object is a view object that lives in its container application. Because changes to the source object do not affect the embedded object, you can only edit an embedded object in its container.
General Procedure To Serve a View Object
1. Load the OLE2 Server. 2. Capture the view object. 3. Embed the view object in a container file. 4. If necessary, edit the view object.
To load the OLE2 Server
1. In MicroStation's Key-in window, type MDL LOAD OLESERVE

To capture a view object
1. In MicroStation's Key-in window, type OLESERVE VIEWCOPY [view_number]

To capture a MicroStation view object using DDE
1. In MicroStation's Key-in window, type CLIPBOARD VIEWCOPY 2. Select the view to copy. Editing view objects in other applications You can embed view objects in the following ways:
To embed a view object in a container using OLE2
1. In the container, open the document into which you want to embed the view object.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
2. From the container's Edit menu, choose Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens. 3. In the As list box, select MicroStation View Object. 4. Select Paste and then click OK.
Page 376 of 387
If you select Picture in the As list box, you cannot edit the view object in the container , but you can resize it.
To edit an embedded view object in the container
1. In the container, double-click the embedded view object to edit. MicroStation opens a new file entitled, Embedded <filename> MicroStation but the original source DGN file is not modified. 2. Edit the object as desired in MicroStation. 3. From MicroStation, choose File > Exit. The DGN file closes, and the container of the updated view object is displayed.
To edit a linked view object in the container
1. In the container, double-click the linked view object to edit. MicroStation opens your original source DGN file. 2. Edit the object as desired in MicroStation. 3. From MicroStation, choose File > Exit. The DGN file closes, and the container where the updated linked view object is displayed.
If you return to the container after editing a linked view object without saving the edits in MicroStation, you can update the linked view object in the container by choosing Edit > Links and then clicking the Update Now button.
Although only the captured view object is displayed in the container, OLE2 copies to the Clipboard the entire DGN file including attached references.
Sending key-ins to MicroStation through a DDE link You can send key-ins to MicroStation through a DDE link. For example, you can create a macro in a spreadsheet to start a DDE conversation with and send key-ins to MicroStation. MicroStation understands the following types of DDE requests:

INITIATE Establishes a DDE link with MicroStation. EXECUTE Passes key-in(s) to MicroStation. TERMINATE Ends DDE conversation with MicroStation.
Applications that can make these DDE requests include Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, Object Vision, Visual Basic, and Word Basic.
To send a key-in to MicroStation via a DDE link from an application
1. Send the INITIATE request to establish the DDE link with MicroStation. 2. Use the EXECUTE request to send the key-ins to MicroStation. 3. Send the TERMINATE request to end the conversation with MicroStation. In each of these steps, you must use the syntax of the application that is sending key-ins to MicroStation to make the DDE
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
requests.
Sample DDE conversation
Page 377 of 387
The following Microsoft Excel macro rotates the contents of MicroStation's View 1 in 5 increments about the horizontal axis. In this macro, chan is any Excel variable name, and it is needed to refer to this particular conversation in subsequent DDE requests. The contents of the macro are explained in the following table:
=INITIATE("Ustn","Keyin") =EXECUTE(chan,"rv=5") =FOR("Count",1,40) Opens the conversation with MicroStation. The constants Ustn and Keyin are mandatory. Passes the key-in RV=5 to MicroStation. Starts a loop for 40 times.
=EXECUTE(chan,"selview 1") Uses the key-in SELVIEW 1 to simulate the entry of a data point in View 1. =NEXT() =TERMINATE(chan) =RETURN() Marks the end of the loop. Terminates the DDE conversation with MicroStation. Marks the end of the Excel macro.
Using OLE Container

MicroStation allows you to serve view objects to other applications. Also, you can link or embed objects from other applications into DGN files. Linking and embedding objects in MicroStation A linked object is a document that can be viewed from its container application, but it actually exists in its source application. An embedded object is a document that actually becomes part of the container application. When using OLE Container, MicroStation is the container application. To link or embed an object to a DGN file, both the source application and MicroStation must be installed on the same system. When you want to include the same information in several different DGN files, you should use linking. After you modify a link's source file, you can update linked objects in the DGN files as needed to reflect the modification to the source file. When the information in the object pertains only to one DGN file, you should use embedding. Although editing an embedded object opens the document in the source application, changes made to the embedded object are only saved in the DGN file in which it is embedded.
To link or embed another application's document by pasting the document by its size
1. In the source application, select the part of the document to link and then copy it. 2. In MicroStation, choose Edit > Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens.
3. In the Data Type list box, select one of the following: Linked <object type> E b dd d bj
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 378 of 387
In this example, Linked Microsoft Office Excel Worksheet appears. This item changes dynamically depending on the source application from which you are pasting. 4. Click Paste. The Paste OLE Object dialog box opens with the selected data type in the Object field and either Linked or Embedded in the Paste As field.
5. From the Method option menu, choose By Size. 6. (Optional) If you want the pasted object to appear as an icon in the DGN file, turn on Display as icon. 7. (Optional) If you want the pasted object to have a transparent background, turn on Transparent Background. 8. (Optional) If you want the pasted object to rotate when the view rotates, turn on Rotate With View. 9. In the Scale field, key in the scale of the object to be pasted. 10. Click a data point to define the location of the object to be pasted.
To link or embed another application's document by pasting the document by two corner points
1. Follow steps 14 in the preceding procedure. 2. From the Method option menu, choose By Corners. 3. To define one corner, enter a data point. 4. To define the diagonal corner, enter another data point. 5. (Optional) If you want the pasted object to appear as an icon in the DGN file, turn on Display as icon. 6. (Optional) If you want the pasted object to have a transparent background, turn on Transparent Background. 7. (Optional) If you want the pasted object to rotate when the view rotates, turn on Rotate With View.
MicroStation only supports TrueType fonts. If the TrueType fonts you are using in your source applications are not currently used in MicroStation, you may want to install them. Otherwise, MicroStation substitutes the Active Font (Element > Text). Because the source application defines the text by the font it is using, substituting another font may give undesirable results.
When linking or embedding a Microsoft Excel worksheet to a DGN file, if the linked object is truncated, you need to upgrade to Microsoft Excel 2002 or later.
Limitations when linking and embedding from other applications
The following are some limitations that you may encounter when linking and embedding from other applications.
Limitation F t h i ht Description Although the font used in the source application can be changed in MicroStation, the height and width of the font are determined by the li ti If th li ti d t l t h th tti th th h i ht d idth f th f t i
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
and weight unchanged when linked or embedded in MicroStation. Microsoft Excel has this limitation.
Page 379 of 387
The Excel cropping limitation when large embedded objects (described in the Microsoft Knowledge Base article Q111748) are pasted or past link into Word no longer exist with the use Excel 2002 of the Office XP suite or (Office 10x?). The MDL application that controls this functionality in MicroStation (olecntr.ma) is available starting in the 8.1 release. Once a large spreadsheet is pasted into a design file, it can be viewed properly in releases prior to MicroStation v8.1. However, if you update the link while in any of the prior versions, the spreadsheet is truncated or clipped according to limitation mentioned previously. Depending on the type of metafile being used, the image may not look correct when pasted. Clipboard data There can be two formats (Windows Metafile and Enhances Metafile) of drawing commands in the Windows Clipboard at the same time. Windows automatically converts from one format to the other. Occasionally, the conversion from "Windows Metafile" to "Enhances Metafile" produces an image that does not display properly. MicroStation can use either drawing format that is in the clipboard. However, there is no way for MicroStation to determine which format is the original format and which is the synthesized format. Consequently, you must tell MicroStation which format it should use when creating OLE objects from the Windows Clipboard. The configuration variable MS_OLECNTR_CONFIG_ALLOWEMF specifies the format that MicroStation will use. The general rule is that Excel 2002 of the Office XP suite (a.k.a. Office 10) produces complete large spread sheets in "Enhances Metafile" format. Prior versions of Microsoft Office and WordPerfect Office 2002 produce "Windows Metafile" and MS_OLECNTR_CONFIG_ALLOWEMF should be set to "0" (zero). Microsoft Word does not copy horizontal complex data it perceives to be outside the width of a typical printed sheet of paper. This limitation is due to the physical space and not to the number of columns. To determine the limitation of a Microsoft Word document: 1. 2. Page size 3. 4. 5. In Microsoft Word, choose Edit>Select All to select the entire document. Hold down the Shift key and choose Edit > Copy Picture. The Copy Picture dialog box opens. In the Appearance section, select As Shown on Screen. In the Format section, select Picture. Click OK. If the message, "The picture is too large and will be truncated" is displayed, you have exceeded the page size limit. To correct this problem, you should reduce the size of your document using the Format menu. Keep in mind that this does not apply to spreadsheets brought in from Excel 2002.
Editing and updating linked and embedded objects To edit a linked or embedded object, double-click the object in the DGN file. The document opens in the source application. By default, embedded objects are updated automatically if the container DGN file is open. For example, if the document is a spreadsheet, clicking another cell automatically updates the object in the DGN file. Edits to embedded objects are always updated automatically. If you do not want an embedded object to update automatically, you can change its Update status to Manual. Then the embedded object will only be updated in the DGN file when you need it. For linked objects, you can edit the source document by opening it directly from the source application without opening MicroStation. Also, you can update the linked object by double-clicking it the next time you open the container DGN file.
To change the update status of an embedded object
1. From the Edit menu, choose Links. The Links dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 380 of 387
2. From the Links list box, select one or more items. 3. At the bottom of the dialog box, set the Update control to one of the following: Automatic Manual 4. Click Close.
To update linked objects
1. From the Edit menu, choose Links. The Links dialog box opens. 2. From the Links list box, select one or more items. 3. Click Update Now. 4. Click Close. The selected linked objects are updated in the DGN file.
To update all linked objects in a DGN file
1. From the Edit menu, choose Update Links. The Update Links dialog box appears showing a progress bar. The dialog boxes closes once all links have been updated.
Although double-clicking an embedded object opens the document in the source application, that document is actually part of the DGN file. Note that the name and path of the DGN file appears in the title bar of the document. Closing the DGN file closes both the document and the source application in which you were editing it.
Ensuring Standards Compliance

Introduction to the Standards Checker Using the Standards Checker
Introduction to the Standards Checker

The Standards Checker lets you compare information in your DGN file against standards that you have established. This utility lets you choose the type of information to check as well as the standard values for that information
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 381 of 387
The standards checks are performed by Standards Checker plug-ins, not the Standards Checker utility itself. MicroStation includes plugins for checking level, text style, dimension style, element template, and line style properties. Additional plug-ins can be written in either VBA or MDL, and several VBA examples are included in the MicroStation VBA online help. The Standards Checker plug-ins store their setup information in a MicroStation DGN library file (DGNLib). A DGN library file (*.dgnlib) has the same file format as a DGN file, but by convention contains information that is shared throughout files, such as the levels and styles that are used in a project. You can store the Standards Checker plug-in settings in the same DGN library in which you store your other project-wide information, or you can use a separate DGN library. Small organizations and small projects can take advantage of the simpler administration that is possible when all standards and standards checking settings are stored in the same file. However, many organizations have multiple DGN libraries that contain discipline- or project-specific levels, styles, and other standards, and thus need the flexibility to separate their Standards Checker settings into a separate file. Multiple Standards Checker settings can be stored by name in a given DGN library. This provides the flexibility of establishing more lenient standards to use earlier in a project, and stricter standards to use near project completion. You might also store a set of special-purpose checks in a DGN library file.
Using the Standards Checker

The Standards Checker examines the open DGN file and compares the contents to the standards selected in the Standards Checker settings. To use the Standards Checker, you must first define a set of standards checks in a DGN library (DGNLib). You can then choose to run a standards checker interactively or generate a standards check report. If you are checking element templates, you can add all elements that fail the standards check to a named group. A standards check can be run on an individual DGN file, or as a batch process on multiple files. Defining Standards Checker Settings Running the Standards Checker Interactively Generating Standards Checker Reports Reporting Template Standards Checks in Named Groups Running Standards Checks on an Individual File Running Standards Checks as a Batch Process
Defining Standards Checker Settings

The Standards Checker Settings dialog box (Utilities > Standards Checker > Configure) lets you define a set of standards checks that will be saved in a DGN library (DGNLib). The simplest way to organize standards check settings and standards is to store them in the same DGNLib. You can also create a DGNLib to store only the settings, and keep the standards in other DGNLibs. You can define the standards checks for levels, text styles, dimension styles, element templates, and/or line styles. For each of these checks you must select where the standards are stored (the source) and the properties that you want checked. When defining the standards checks for templates, you can define two additional checks. Check Local Templates checks the open DGN file's local templates against the templates defined in the DGN libraries. Check Elements checks all elements in the open DGN file against the local templates with which they are associated. You can check any or all of the properties stored in an element template.
To create standards check settings
1. Open a DGN library file (*.dgnlib). This DGNLib will store the named set of standards checks (standards check settings). It can be the same DGNLib that you use to store your other project-wide information, or it can be a different DGNLib. 2. In the Standards Checker Settings dialog box (Utilities >Standards Checker > Configure), click Create new Standard Checker Settings.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 382 of 387
3. In the Create Standards Checker Settings dialog box, enter a name and, optionally, a description. Click OK. 4. Place a check mark next to the standards checks you want to use. 5. For a selected check, click the Settings button. 6. In the Settings dialog box, choose the DGNLib that contains the standards. If you choose the default Configured DgnLibs option, it uses the *.dgnlib files specified by the configuration variable MS_DGNLIBLIST. If you choose the Selected DgnLibs option, you can use the icons to add or remove DGNLibs from the list. If you choose the open DGN file, you can create a standards file that includes both the actual standards and the settings for checking those standards. 7. Turn on the properties you want to check, and click OK. 8. Repeat steps 57 for each remaining check. 9. When you are finished with the settings, click OK. The standard check settings are stored in the active DGNLib.
Running the Standards Checker Interactively

In interactive mode, the Standards Checker (Utilities > Standards Checker > Check) opens a window that displays the status of the checking process. When the Standards Checker finds a difference from the standard, it displays a message that explains the difference between the values found and the standard values. For example, if you turn on the Nonstandard Levels property in the Level Checker Settings, the Standards Checker will find each level in the file being checked that does not exist in the standards. For each difference, you can choose to fix, ignore, or skip the problem. If you choose to ignore a problem, the Standards Checker records the fact that the problem is ignored, the current user, and the time for later reference.
Running an interactive standards check
1. In the Standards Checker dialog box, choose the Standards DGNLib that contains the saved standards check settings.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 383 of 387
2. From the Settings Name option menu, choose the saved standards check settings. In the Checks section, the checks that are included in the settings are now active. 3. (Optional) Turn checks on or off. To view the settings for a check, click the Settings button. 4. In the Options section, turn on Interactive. 5. (Optional) In the Options section, turn on Show Ignored Problems. 6. Click OK. The Checking Standards dialog box opens. This dialog box compares the contents of the open DGN file with the standards in the DGNLibs specified in the settings.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Page 384 of 387
7. For each problem found, choose Ignore (if you turned on Show Ignored Problems), Fix, or Skip the problem. The Standards Check Complete dialog box opens, showing the number of problems found, fixed, and ignored. 8. Click OK. The Standards Check Complete dialog box closes.
Generating Standards Checker Reports

The Standards Checker can optionally produce a report file that records the problems that it encounters. The report is written as an XML file. It contains information about the Standards Checker plug-ins that were applied, the standards that each is checking against, the files that were checked, and details about the problems that were discovered. To view the XML file in an easily read format, you need an XML style sheet. The MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_STYLESHEET configuration variable specifies the style sheet to use. A default style sheet is provided, but you may want to develop a custom style sheet for your organization.
Generating a standards check report
1. In the Standards Checker dialog box, choose the Standards DGNLib that contains the saved standards check settings. 2. From the Settings Name option menu, choose the saved standards check settings. 3. (Optional) Turn checks on or off. To view the settings for a check, click the Settings button. 4. In the Options section, turn on Report File. The default report file name is displayed in the adjacent field The default location for the report file is specified by the configuration
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
variable MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_OUT.
Page 385 of 387
5. (Optional) Click the magnifying glass icon to select an existing report file, or to select a new directory for the report file. 6. Choose the report option. If you choose the Create New in Series option you can create a new report using the report file name and the next available number. If you choose the Append option the results of the report will be added to an existing report file. If you choose the Overwrite option the contents of an existing file will be replaced with the new report contents. 7. Click OK. The Standards Check Complete dialog box opens, showing the number of problems found, fixed, and ignored. You must decide whether you want to review the XML report file. 8. Click Yes or No. If you click Yes, the XML report file opens for your review. If you click No, theStandards Check Complete dialog box closes.
Reporting Template Standards Checks in Named Groups

When you are checking element templates, the Standards Checker can add all elements that fail the standards check to a named group. To do so, select the Named Group check box in the Standards Checker dialog box. The default name for the named group is Nonstandard Elements. After the Standards Checker runs, open the Named Groups dialog box to see the results. In the Nonstandard Elements named group is a list of templates and the number of elements that failed the standard checks against each template. This list of Nonstandard Elements remains in the Named Groups dialog box until you rerun the Standards Checker, select Named Groups, and use the name Nonstandard Elements. Then the previous results are overwritten. If you want to keep track of which elements failed the standards check, how many were fixed, and how many still need to be fixed, you can enter a different name in the Named Group text box each time you do a standards check.
If you select the Named Group check box, select the Interactive check box, and fix all errors when they occur in interactive mode, a named group will not be created.
To check element templates and send results to a named group
1. In the Standards Checker dialog box (Utilities > Standards Checker > Check), choose the Standards DGNLib that contains the saved standards check settings. 2. From the Settings Name option menu, choose the saved standards check settings. 3. Select Check Element Templates. 4. (Optional) To view the settings for a check, click the Settings button. 5. In the Options section, select Named Group. 6. (Optional) Type a new name for the named group. 7. Click OK. 8. In the Standards Check Complete dialog box, click OK. 9. Open the Named Groups dialog box (Utilities > Named Groups). The elements that failed the check appear in the list under the named group that you specified.
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
Running Standards Checks on an Individual File
Page 386 of 387
After you have defined a set of standards checks in a DGN library (DGNLib) you can run the checks on an individual DGN file.
General Procedure To set up and run a standards check on an individual file
1. Open a DGN library file (*.dgnlib). 2. Define the standards checker settings. These settings are saved in the DGNLib file. 3. Open the file to be checked. 4. Run the standards check. 5. Review, and optionally fix, the results of the standards check. 6. Run the standards check again to verify the fixes.
Running Standards Checks as a Batch Process

The Standards Checker can be used in conjunction with the Batch Process utility to automate checking standards for many files at once.
General Procedure To set up and run a standards check as a batch process
1. Open a DGN library file (*.dgnlib). 2. Define the standards checker settings. These settings are saved in the DGNLib file. 3. Create a batch process command file that contains the standards checker commands. 4. Select the files to process. 5. Run the batch process. 6. Review, and optionally fix, the results of the standards check. If you choose to create a standards check report, the results for all files are consolidated into one report file. 7. Run the standards check again to verify the fixes. Syntax for running standards checks in the Batch Process utility In the batch process command file, the syntax for the Standards Checker execution command is: standardschecker execute [keyword=value,keyword=value...], where the keywords set the standards checker operational parameters. The possible keywords and values are:
Keyword true, false, 0 or 1 report If true or 1, a report file is generated true, false, 0 or 1 interactive If true or 1, the Standards Checker is run in interactive mode. If the Batch Process runs in non-graphics mode, this keyword is ignored. settingsfile File specification for the settings DGNLib file. If the path is not specified, MicroStation searches the directory specified by the MS_SETTINGSDIR configuration variable. If the MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_SETTINGSFILE configuration variable is set, this keyword is ignored. Values
settingsname The named standards check settings to be used within the settings file. Fil ifi ti f th St d d Ch k t fil If th di t i t ifi d th fil i t i th di t ifi d b th
3/24/2010
Setting Up Projects
reportfile reportopen If not set (and report is set to 1 or true), a new report file is generated. true, false, 0, or 1 reviewignored MS_STANDARDSCHECKER_OUT configuration variable. overwrite, append, or new
Page 387 of 387
If true or 1, then problems previously marked as ignored are displayed in interactive mode. If the Standards Checker is not run in interactive mode, this keyword has no effect.
The keyword/value pairs can be separated by either commas or spaces. Any value that includes a space or a comma can be specified by using double quotes either around the entire keyword/value pair, or around just the value portion, such as: reportfile=c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\Workspace\Projects\untitled\out\check.xml or reportfile=c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\Workspace\Projects\untitled\out\check.xml.
3/24/2010
AccuSnap and AccuDraw
Page 1 of 51
AccuSnap AccuSnap and and AccuDraw AccuDraw

Tentative Snaps Using AccuSnap Working with AccuDraw
Tentative Snaps
During a drawing session, much of your time will revolve around joining new elements to existing elements in the design, or modifying existing elements. In manual drafting, this is done by eye. With MicroStation, you can work precisely, letting the system find the exact location of elements, or various points on elements. You can define points relative to other points as well. All this is done using tentative snap points. Tentative Snap Points
Tentative Snap Points

A tentative snap point is a form of graphic input that is used to:

Preview the location of the next data point. Accepting the tentative point location enters the data point there. Define a point of reference for entry of the next data point.
It is also possible to snap a tentative point to an existing element (put it directly on the element). Tentative point snapping helps you accurately construct new elements that are either connected to existing ones or precisely related to existing ones. Using tentative snaps, for example, you can:

Place a line from the exact end point of an existing element to the midpoint of another. Place a line perpendicular or parallel to another line. Place a circle tangent to an arc or a B-spline curve. Place a cell at the centroid of a shape.
Snapping to a point on an element at which that element is overlapped by another element(s) can be difficult, especially when working with complex models. It is sometimes easiest to first bring the overlapped element to the frontof the view display. An element is said to be in the front if it is not overlapped by any other elements. To bring an overlapped element to the front, select the element and then choose Edit > Bring to Front.
AccuDraw and tentative snap points When using tentative snaps, you can set AccuDraw's origin to the resulting tentative snap point by holding down the <Ctrl> key as you snap to the element. Snapping to tentative points on elements Snapping is affected by the Snap Lock settings. There are three basic Snap Lock settings: the snap on/off toggle, the Snap Mode, and the Snap Mode override.
Snap Lock
If the Snap Lock toggle is off, tentative points do not snap to elements.
Snap Mode
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hhC840.htm
3/24/2010
Page 2 of 51
When Snap Lock is on, how a tentative point snaps to an element is set by the active Snap Mode (or the override setting if one is active). You can set the default Snap Mode via the Locks dialog box, the Snap Mode button bar, the pointer's pop-up menu, or the status bar menu. The Snap Mode (or Snap Mode override) is indicated in the status bar.
To set the Snap Mode via the Locks dialog box
1. From the Settings menu's Locks submenu (or the pop-up Locks menu in the status bar), choose Full. The Locks dialog box opens.
2. From the Snap section, Mode option menu, choose the desired snap mode.
To set the Snap Mode via the Snap Mode button bar
1. From the Settings menu's Snaps submenu (or the pop-up Snaps menu in the status bar), choose Button Bar. The Snap Mode button bar opens.
2. In the button bar, double-click the desired snap mode. The active Snap Mode's button is highlighted with speckled gray.
To set the Snap Mode via the Snap Modes pop-up menu
1. Place the pointer in any view. 2. Hold down the <Shift> key. 3. Click (or press) the Tentative button.
3/24/2010
Page 3 of 51
The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. A button with a filled black circle is displayed to the left of the active Snap Mode. 4. While still holding down the <Shift> key, click the desired Snap Mode (or drag the pointer to it and release the Tentative button). 5. Release the <Shift> key.
To set the Snap Mode via the status bar
1. Place the pointer in the Snap Mode field located on the status bar. 2. Click the Data button. The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. A button with a filled black circle is displayed to the left of the active Snap Mode. 3. While holding down the <Shift> key, choose the desired Snap Mode by clicking it (or drag the pointer to it and release the Data button). 4. Release the <Shift> key.
To set the Snap Mode via key-in
1. Key in SNAP <snap_mode>. To set a multi-snap mode, specify snap_mode as MULTISNAP1, MULTISNAP2 or MULTISNAP3 for example, SNAP MULTISNAP2.
The Snap Modes button bar is dockable and resizable.
Multi-snaps
There are three snap modes called multi-snaps. Unlike an ordinary snap mode, a multi-snap represents a list of other snaps. When a multi-snap is active, AccuSnap and Tentative Point snap will process the list of snaps that it represents. The following table shows the default contents of the three multi-snaps:
Multi-snap Default snaps
3/24/2010

Intersection 1 Keypoint Nearest Intersection 2 Keypoint Center Midpoint 3 Intersection Center
Page 4 of 51
You can modify the contents of a multi-snap using the Multi-snaps dialog box. The dialog box displays all possible snaps for the multi-snap chosen in the icon bar. Snaps currently included in the chosen multi-snap are marked with a check mark. Snap modes can be included or excluded from the multi-snap by checking or unchecking the corresponding checkbox. The definition of each multi-snap is stored in the user's preference file.
To define a multi-snap
1. From the Settings menu's Snaps submenu, choose Multi-snaps. The Multi-snaps dialog box opens displaying all possible snaps that can be included in the multi-snap. 2. Include or exclude a snap mode from the multi-snap by checking or unchecking the corresponding checkbox. To change the order in which the snap modes are processed, drag and drop the entries in the list of snaps.
To set a multi-snap from the button bar
1. Right click on the Snap Mode button bar. A pop up list of snap modes opens. 2. Choose the desired multi-snap. The Multi-snaps dialog box opens displaying the available snaps for the selected multi-snap. 3. Include or exclude a snap mode from the multi-snap by checking or unchecking the corresponding checkbox.
If the Multi-snaps dialog box is open and a different multi-snap mode is activated, the dialog box automatically displays the contents of that multi-snap.
Snap Mode override
During a session, most likely you will use a particular Snap Mode for a majority of operations, but occasionally you want to use a different snap mode. At any time, you can override the active Snap Mode for a single snap by choosing a Snap Mode override. The override mode is effective only for the next operation. After you have snapped a tentative point and accepted with a data point (or Reset), the override is cancelled and the active Snap Mode becomes effective again. You can set the Snap Mode override via the Settings menu's Snaps submenu, the Snap Mode button bar, the pointer's pop-up menu, or the status bar menu. The active Snap Mode, or Snap Mode override, is indicated in the status bar.
To set the Snap Mode override via the Settings menu
1. From the Settings menu's Snaps submenu, choose the desired Snap Mode override. If you open the menu again, you will see that the snap override has a button with a filled black circle to its left, while the active snap mode has an open black circle to its left.
To set the Snap Mode override via the Snap Mode button bar
3/24/2010

1. From the Settings menu's Snaps submenu (or the pop-up Snaps menu in the status bar), choose Button Bar. The Snap Mode button bar opens.
Page 5 of 51
2. In the button bar, select the desired Snap Mode override. The Snap Mode override's button is highlighted with light gray; while the active Snap Mode's button remains highlighted with speckled gray.
Snap Mode button bar showing the active snap mode highlighted in speckled gray, and the override snap mode to the right highlighted in light gray
To set the Snap Mode override via the Snap Modes pop-up menu
1. Place the pointer in any view. 2. While holding down the <Shift> key, click the Tentative button. The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. If a Snap Mode override is already in effect, a button with a filled black circle is displayed to the left of the override and an open black circle is displayed to the left of the active Snap Mode. Otherwise, the button with a filled black circle is displayed to the left of the active Snap Mode. 3. Release the <Shift> key. 4. Choose the desired Snap Mode override by clicking it (or drag the pointer to it and release the Tentative button).
To set the Snap Mode override via the status bar
1. In the status bar, click the Snap Mode indicator. The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. 2. Choose the desired Snap Mode override by clicking it (or drag the pointer to it and release the Data button).
Effect of Snap Modes
With Snap Lock on, each snap mode setting has an effect on tentative snap points. When you enter a tentative point on or near an element, the following occurs:
Snap Mode: see footnote 39 Tentative point snaps to:
Nearest Point on the element nearest to the pointer.
Keypoint The nearest of the Element keypoints on the element. This is the most generally useful of the snap modes.
Midpoint Midpoint of the segment of the element closest to the pointer.
Center
3/24/2010
Page 6 of 51
Center of elements (such as circles, arcs, text, and so on) with centers. Centroid of other elements, including shapes, line strings, and B-splines.
Origin Origin of a cell or text, centroid of a B-spline, the first data point in a dimension element, or the first vertex of a line, multiline, line string, or shape.
Bisector Midpoint of an entire line string, multi-line, or complex chain, rather than to the midpoint of the closest segment. It also snaps to the midpoint of a line or arc.
Intersection
Intersection of two elements. (Two tentative points are required, although more can be used.) The first tentative point snaps to one element, and that element is highlighted. The second tentative point snaps to another element, and the two segments used to find the intersection of the two elements are displayed in dashed lines. (If the two elements do not actually intersect, but projections of the elements would intersect, the segments include projections of the elements to the intersection.) You can continue snapping until the desired intersection is found; the last two tentative points define where the intersection snap lies.
Tangent An existing element the edge of the element being placed is constrained to be tangent to an existing element. The tentative point dynamically slides along the element to maintain the tangency as you move the pointer to finish placing the element.
Tangent From An existing element the edge of the element you are placing is constrained to be tangent to the existing element at the tentative point. The tentative point does not move dynamically as you move the pointer, but is locked in place.
Perpendicular An existing element the line you are placing is constrained to be perpendicular to the element the tentative point slides dynamically along the element in order to maintain the perpendicularity as you move the pointer to finish placing the element.
Perpendicular From An existing element the line you are placing is constrained to be perpendicular to the element at the tentative point. The tentative point does not move dynamically as you move the pointer, but is locked in place.
Parallel An existing element, but does not define a point through which the line you are placing will pass. Instead, when you accept the tentative point, the line you then place is parallel to the line to which the tentative point was snapped.
3/24/2010
Page 7 of 51
Through Point Defines a point through which the element you are placing (or an extrapolation of it) must pass.
Point On To nearest element, as follows: When entering second or later data point, constrains the next data point to lie on it (if it is a closed element) or anywhere on the line on which it lies (if it is a linear element). When entering first data point, constrains the element being placed to extend to that element (or the line on which it lies) from the second data point.
Multisnap1 Multi-snap mode 1 by default is Intersection, Keypoint, Nearest.
Multisnap2 Multi-snap mode 2 by default is Intersection, Keypoint, Center.
Multisnap3 Multi-snap mode 3 by default is Midpoint, Intersection, Center. Locate Tolerance
How close the pointer must be to an element in order to snap a tentative point to it depends upon the Locate Tolerance. Locate Tolerance is a user preference that is adjustable in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace menu > Preferences). Tolerance values are set in screen resolution (pixels).
Snapping to cells
A cell is a small drawing usually of a frequently-used or complex symbol, notation, or detail created in MicroStation. To snap to the origin of a cell, set the Snap Mode to Origin. When the Snap Mode is not set to origin, tentative points snap to component elements within the cell. For example, when the Snap Mode is Keypoint, tentative points will snap to a keypoint on the line, not the origin of the cell.
Element keypoints
Keypoints are regularly-spaced points in an element to which a tentative point will snap when the Snap Mode (or override) is set to Keypoint. The number of keypoints on each segment of a linear element (line, line string, or shape) is one greater than the Snap Lock Divisor setting. If Snap Lock Divisor is 2 (as in all seed files supplied with MicroStation), keypoints are as shown in the figure below. The midpoint of a linear element is a keypoint only if the Snap Lock Divisor is an even number.
For text, the keypoint is determined by the justification attribute. That attribute and others specific to text elements are described in Text Labels.
3/24/2010
Page 8 of 51
Element keypoints (with Snap Lock Divisor set to 2 and the text element left top justified). Clockwise from the upper left: Arc, arc, line, line string, text, ellipse, and shape.
To enable snapping
1. From the Settings menu's Locks submenu (or the pop-up Locks menu in the status bar), choose Full. The Locks dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Snap Lock.
To change the number of element keypoints on each element segment
1. From the Settings menu's Locks submenu (or pop-up Locks menu in the status bar) choose Full. The Locks dialog box opens. 2. Set Snap Lock Divisor to a value one less than the desired number of keypoints. For example, to create element keypoints on the endpoints and the first, second, and third quarter points of element segments, set Snap Lock Divisor to 4. Using tentative points Tentative points let you see where the next data point will be placed before you are committed. They also let you define a data point relative to the tentative point. You can specify the distance from the tentative point using a key-in or, better still, using AccuDraw and its input window. The exact location of tentative points, on elements, are determined by the current Snap Mode, or snap override, setting. You can enter tentative snap points manually, or you can turn on AccuSnap and let it display tentative points interactively as you move the pointer over elements in a view. With AccuSnap active, when the Tentative Point marker displays, you can enter a data point to accept it. Even when AccuSnap is active, you can enter a tentative snap point manually, by pressing the Tentative button on your system's graphical input device.
To enter a tentative point (manually) to preview a data point
1. Select the required Snap Mode. 2. Position the pointer on the location at which you plan to enter a data point. 3. Press the Tentative button. The tentative point coordinates are shown in the status bar. Large crosshairs are displayed. The intersection of the lines in the crosshairs marks the location of the tentative point. If you snap to an element, the element is highlighted.
To accept a tentative point's location and enter a data point there
1. With the tentative point location displayed, and the pointer in any view, press the Data button. 2. Press the Data button.
3/24/2010
Page 9 of 51
When using AccuSnap, to snap to elements, only one button press is required. You let AccuSnap find and display the tentative snap point.
Using AccuSnap to view a tentative point location and place a data point there
1. With AccuSnap active, select the required Snap Mode. 2. Move the pointer to the required element and then position the pointer so that the Tentative Point marker (a heavy line weight X) displays. 3. Enter a data point to accept the tentative point and place the point.
To manually snap a tentative point to an element at a keypoint
1. Select the required Snap Mode. 2. Position the pointer on or near the desired keypoint. 3. Press the Tentative button. If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element, the element is highlighted.
To snap a tentative point to an element when more than one element lies at the desired snap point
1. Enable snapping. 2. Position the pointer on or near the desired point. 3. Press the Tentative button. Of the elements at the desired snap point, a tentative point will snap to the element that was placed in the design earliest. That element is highlighted. 4. (Optional) If the desired element was not snapped to (highlighted), press the Tentative button again. Of the remaining elements at the desired snap point (the ones to which a tentative point has not snapped), a tentative point snaps to the element that was placed in the design earliest. That element is highlighted. 5. (Optional) Repeat step 4 until the desired element is highlighted.
Tentative points working with multi-snaps
When Tentative Point snap encounters a multi-snap mode, it evaluates each snap mode in order, building up a list of candidate snaps for the current target element. Each successive tentative point snap steps to the next candidate snap. When the end of the list of candidate snaps for the current target element is reached, the next target element is picked and a new list of candidate snaps is created, and so on.
Snaps displayed in the Multi-snaps dialog box are listed in the order in which they are processes by Tentative Point snap. The order of the snaps can be changed by clicking on a snap mode and dragging it up or down in the list.
Using AccuSnap
AccuSnap provides tentative snap functionality, which may be used stand-alone or in combination with AccuDraw. It provides graphical assistance a smart pointer for snapping to elements. This automates the tentative snap process, virtually eliminating the need to press the tentative snap button, thus reducing the number of button presses required during a design session. When in AccuSnap mode, you simply select a tool and move the pointer over the elements, letting AccuSnap find and display the nearest tentative snap point for you. When the correct snap point is displayed, you enter a data point to accept. If required you can adjusting various AccuSnap settings to configure AccuSnap for your mode of operation. AccuSnap complements the standard, or manual, method of placing tentative points. That is, even with AccuSnap enabled, you can still use the standard tentative snap method (pressing the tentative button). Additionally, when you are using AccuSnap in conjunction with AccuDraw, you can use AccuDraw shortcuts, which include <HU> to suspend AccuSnap for the current tool operation, and <HS> to toggle AccuSnap on and off. Alternatively, you can press (and hold down) <Ctrl + Shift> to temporarily toggle AccuSnap on or off, as required. Turning AccuSnap On or Off AccuSnap Settings
3/24/2010

AccuSnap and Snap Mode Settings AccuSnap Working with Multi-snaps
Page 10 of 51
Turning AccuSnap On or Off

AccuSnap can be toggled On or Off:
In the AccuSnap Settings dialog box (Enable AccuSnap setting).
In the Snap Mode button bar (clicking the Toggle AccuSnap button).
With AccuDraw active and the focus in the AccuDraw window, using the shortcut <HS>. By pressing (and holding down) the <Ctrl + Shift keys>, which temporarily toggles AccuSnap on or off. Releasing the <Ctrl + Shift> keys returns AccuSnap to its previous setting.
AccuSnap Settings
AccuSnap works in conjunction with the current Snap Mode setting and, for the most part, is similar in operation to the manual method of tentative snap points minus the button presses. How close to an element or a keypoint that the pointer must be, before AccuSnap finds it, is governed by the Locate Tolerance setting in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box. These settings can be further refined by the following settings in the AccuSnap Settings dialog box's Feel tab:

Snap Tolerance for locating elements. Keypoint Sensitivity for locating snap points.
Location of snap points on elements still is controlled by the Snap Mode setting.
3/24/2010
Page 11 of 51
With both Show Tentative Hint, and Display Icon turned on Left: With the pointer within the snap tolerance of an element, AccuSnap shows a prospective snap point with a crosshair (+), along with the current snap mode icon. Right: When the pointer is within Keypoint Sensitivity range, AccuSnap highlights the element and displays the tentative snap point as a heavy line weight X. A data point at this stage will be placed at the tentative snap point location.
Settings in the AccuSnap Settings dialog box are divided into three tabbed sections General, Elements, and Feel. General settings Settings in this group let you enable/disable AccuSnap and you can define AccuSnap's general working mode. By default, Show Tentative Hint and Display Icon are enabled. Both settings give visual feedback on the snapping point and the current snap mode, respectively. Show Tentative Hint is very useful as it shows you visually where the nearest snap point is, even though the pointer may not be in the near vicinity of the snap point. Show Tentative Hint With Show Tentative Hint turned on (the default), and snap mode set to Keypoint or MidPoint snap as you move the pointer over the elements, AccuSnap finds the nearest snap point and displays its location with a crosshair (if the pointer is not within the keypoint snap tolerance), or a heavy line weight X, denoting a tentative snap point (if the pointer is within the keypoint snap tolerance). A data point at this stage will be placed at the displayed tentative snap point. Display Icon if on, the current snap mode icon displays at the snap point, for both the tentative hint and for the tentative point. Hilite active element if on, the element highlights as soon as AccuSnap locates it and the tentative hint displays. If off, the active element highlights only when the tentative snap point is displayed. For information on all general settings, refer to AccuSnap General Settings. Element settings Controls in this group let you control whether or not AccuSnap snaps to Curves, Dimensions, Text, and/or Meshes. When snapping is turned off for any of these, AccuSnap will not snap to the particular element, but it will display an icon to show that the element is being ignored.
Even if snapping to an element is turned off in AccuSnap's settings, you can still snap to the element manually with a tentative snap point.
With Curves turned off, AccuSnap displays an icon to show that the B-spline curve is being ignored.
Feel settings Using the controls in the Feel group of the AccuSnap settings you can set AccuSnap's sensitivity when snapping to elements, as follows:

Keypoint sensitivity lets you adjust how close the screen pointer must be, to the snap point, before AccuSnap snaps to it. Stickiness lets you adjust the sensitivity of AccuSnap to the current element. When you have snapped to an element, as long as you move the pointer along that element, the snap system will have a preference for that element over other elements that may have snap points closer to the pointer. The further to the right (+) that you set the Stickiness slider, the further away from the element the pointer may be before AccuSnap will snap to another element.
3/24/2010
Page 12 of 51
Snap Tolerance lets you adjust how close the pointer must be to an element in order to snap a tentative point to it.
AccuSnap and Snap Mode Settings

AccuSnap enhances many of the standard snap mode settings by displaying and automatically snapping to the next tentative snap point as you move the pointer over an element. With AccuSnap enabled, you very rarely need to enter a tentative snap point manually. In the following examples, it is assumed that a tool has been selected and that Show Tentative Hint and Display Icon are enabled (the default settings). Near snap point When working with this snap mode, manually, you move the pointer to the position that you want the snap to be located and then enter a tentative snap point, followed by a data point to accept the location. If the location is incorrect, you move the pointer along the element and enter another tentative snap point. With AccuSnap, as you move the pointer to the required element, it highlights and the proposed tentative snap point marker displays. To position the nearest snap point, you simply move the pointer along the highlighted element, until the required location is reached, and enter a data point.
To select a near snap point (with AccuSnap)
1. Select Near Snap Point mode. 2. With AccuSnap enabled, move the pointer over the required element. The element highlights, and AccuSnap displays the nearest tentative snap point. 3. Move the pointer, and tentative snap point, along the element to the required position. 4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. Keypoint snap When you move the pointer over an element in the design, AccuSnap displays the nearest keypoint snap with the crosshair hint, or the tentative point marker if the pointer is within the Keypoint Sensitivity range. To select a different keypoint, simply move the pointer to the required region of the element and AccuSnap will again show you where the nearest keypoint is located.
To select a keypoint snap point (with AccuSnap)
1. Select KeyPoint Snap mode. 2. With AccuSnap enabled, move the pointer over the required element. AccuSnap displays the nearest keypoint snap. 3. If necessary, using the tentative hint as a guide, move the pointer toward the required snap point until the tentative snap point marker displays. 4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. MidPoint snap When you move the pointer over an element, AccuSnap displays the MidPoint Snap location with the crosshair hint, or the tentative snap point marker if the pointer is within the Keypoint Sensitivity range of the midpoint.
To select the midpoint of an element (with AccuSnap)
1. Select MidPoint Snap mode. 2. Move the pointer over the required element. AccuSnap displays the element's midpoint location. 3. If necessary, using the tentative hint as a guide, move the pointer toward the required snap point until the tentative snap point
3/24/2010

marker displays. 4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. Center snap
Page 13 of 51
When Center Snap is active, the pointer does not have to be close to the actual center point of the element, whether it be a line string, curve, arc, or circle. As soon as you place the pointer over an element, AccuSnap highlights the element and displays the tentative snap point marker at its center point.
To select the center point of an element (with AccuSnap)
1. Select Center Snap mode. 2. Move the pointer over the required element. The element highlights and AccuSnap displays the tentative snap point marker at the center point of the element. 3. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. Origin snap When you create an element, the first point defined is its origin. With Snap Mode set to Origin Snap, as you move the pointer over an element, AccuSnap displays its origin point location with the crosshair hint, or the tentative snap point marker if the pointer is within the Keypoint Sensitivity range.
To select the origin point of an element (with AccuSnap)
1. Select Origin Snap mode. 2. Move the pointer over the required element. AccuSnap displays the origin point of the element. 3. If necessary, using the tentative hint as a guide, move the pointer toward the required snap point until the tentative snap point marker displays. 4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. Bisector snap As you move the pointer over an element, AccuSnap displays its bisector point location with the crosshair hint, or the tentative snap point marker if the pointer is within the Keypoint Sensitivity range.
To select the bisector of an element (with AccuSnap)
1. Select Bisector Snap mode. 2. Move the pointer over the required element. AccuSnap displays the bisector snap point of the element. 3. If necessary, using the tentative hint as a guide, move the pointer toward the required snap point until the tentative snap point marker displays. 4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. Intersect snap To select the intersection point of two elements requires you to identify both elements. AccuSnap lets you do this by simply hovering over the intersection point of the two elements, without entering tentative snap points. When the pointer is over the intersection point, the elements highlight, one solid and one dashed, and the tentative point marker displays at the intersection point. Where a number of elements intersect at a common point, you can move the pointer until the correct pair of elements highlight. In a 3D DGN file, the two intersecting lines may be separated in the view Z direction. By default the element nearest the Active Depth of the view is highlighted as a solid line and it is on this element that the data point will be placed. That is, the new element is attached to the element highlighted as a solid line. You can control this by manually snapping to the required element first, before moving the pointer to the intersection point That is snap to the element to which you want the new element attached then move the pointer to the intersection
3/24/2010

point. The first element will highlight as a solid line, and the remaining element as dashed.
To select the intersection point of two elements (with AccuSnap)
Page 14 of 51
1. Select Intersect Snap mode. 2. Move the pointer to the intersection point of the two elements so that the two elements highlight and the snap point marker appears. 3. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point.
Tentative Point and AccuSnap can be used together to define an intersection. If a multi-snap is active and contains intersection snap when tentative is snapped, then tentative + AccuSnap selects the intersection. Tentative selects one of the snaps contained in the multi-snap. If the cursor moves over another element with AccuSnap enabled, AccuSnap selects the closest intersection with the first element, ignoring the snap mode chosen by Tentative and ignoring the other contained snap modes.
Tangent snap and Tangent Point snap (For AccuSnap, applies only when using the Place SmartLine tool) The Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From setting in the General tab of the AccuSnap settings determines whether Tangent Snap, or Tangent Point Snap is used when either snap is active. When you are placing a SmartLine with either Tangent Snap, or Tangent Point Snap, as the active snap mode, setting Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From to:

On sets the snap mode to Tangent Point Snap. Off sets the snap mode to Tangent Snap.
To use Tangent Point Snap with the Place SmartLine tool (with AccuSnap)
1. In the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, General tab, turn on Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From. 2. Select either Tangent Snap, or Tangent Point Snap, as the active snap mode. 3. Move the pointer over the curved element, so that it highlights and AccuSnap displays the tentative point. 4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. The SmartLine segment is restricted to being at a tangent from the highlighted element, at the accepted snap point.
To use Tangent Snap with the Place SmartLine tool (with AccuSnap)
1. In the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, General tab, turn off Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From. 2. Select either Tangent Snap, or Tangent Point Snap, as the active snap mode. 3. Move the pointer over the curved element, so that it is highlighted. 4. Enter a data point to accept the element. As you move the pointer, the SmartLine segment is restricted to remaining at a tangent to the selected curve. Perpendicular Snap and Perpendicular Snap Point (For AccuSnap, applies only when using the Place SmartLine tool) The Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From setting in the General tab of the AccuSnap settings determines whether Perpendicular Snap, or Perpendicular Snap Point is used when either snap is active. When you are placing a SmartLine with Perpendicular Snap, or Perpendicular Snap Point, as the active snap mode, setting Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From to:

On sets the snap mode to Perpendicular Snap Point. Off sets the snap mode to Perpendicular Snap.
To use Perpendicular Snap Point with the Place SmartLine tool (with AccuSnap)
3/24/2010

1. In the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, General tab, turn on Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From. 2. Select either Perpendicular Snap, or Perpendicular Snap Point, as the active snap mode. 3. Move the pointer over the element, so that it highlights, and AccuSnap displays the tentative point.
Page 15 of 51
4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative snap point. The SmartLine segment is restricted to being perpendicular to the highlighted element, from the accepted snap point.
To use Perpendicular Snap with the Place SmartLine tool (with AccuSnap)
1. In the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, General tab, turn off Fixed Point for Perp./Tan. From. 2. Select either Perpendicular Snap, or Perpendicular Snap Point, as the active snap mode. 3. Move the pointer over the element, so that it is highlighted. 4. Enter a data point to accept the element. As you move the pointer, the SmartLine segment is restricted to remaining perpendicular to the selected element.
AccuSnap Working with Multi-snaps

When a multi-snap mode is active (by default or override), AccuSnap processes the snaps in the order they are listed. AccuSnap selects the first snap mode in the list that is hot and on the target element. If none of the snap modes are hot or on the target element, AccuSnap chooses the nearest to the cursor.
Center is an example of a snap that can be hot but not on the target element.
Snaps displayed in the Multi-snaps dialog box are listed in the order in which they are processes by AccuSnap. The order of the snaps can be changed by clicking on a snap mode and dragging it up or down in the list.
Working with AccuDraw

AccuDraw is a drafting aid that evaluates such parameters as your current pointer location, the previously entered data point, the last coordinate directive, the current tool's needs, and any directive you have entered via shortcut key-ins or AccuDraw options. AccuDraw then generates the appropriate precision coordinates and applies them to the active tool. A Simple Example of Using AccuDraw Activating AccuDraw AccuDraw's Compass AccuDraw's Drawing Plane The AccuDraw Window AccuDraw's Settings dialog box Controlling and Using AccuDraw Previewing and Constraining Data Points AccuDraw and the Popup Calculator AccuDraw's Shortcut Key-ins Unit Roundoffs and Their Effect on AccuDraw Moving the AccuDraw Compass AccuDraw and the Tentative Point AccuDraw's Drawing Plane Orientation AccuDraw and Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS) Using Shortcut Snap Modes with AccuDraw AccuDraw's Effect on Various Tools Complete List of AccuDraw Shortcut Key-ins Precision Input Key-ins
3/24/2010
Page 16 of 51
A Simple Example of Using AccuDraw

To help you understand what AccuDraw does, the following is a description of a simple design session using AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine tool. The task presented is the creation of a simple bracket. If a 3D file is used, the Top view is assumed in the exercise.
The design subject is a simple bracket with the important dimensions and features noted.
With AccuDraw activated (Toggle AccuDraw tool in the Primary Tools tool box), select the Place SmartLine tool in the Linear task. When you enter your first data point for the lower left corner of the bracket, AccuDraw displays a square or circular shaped compass.
The AccuDraw compass appears whenever AccuDraw is active and a data point is placed.
Next, you need to draw the left edge of the bracket. As you move the dynamic line around the view window nothing interesting happens until you get close to one of the axes of the AccuDraw compass. In this case, because you want a vertical edge, you should move the line close to the Y axis. When AccuDraw senses the axis, the line snaps or indexes to it. While the axis is highlighted you can key in a number for the vertical distance, in this case, 2 inches. Don't worry about telling AccuDraw the direction, it has already figured that out and also has placed the input focus (where the key-in data will appear) in the correct field, in this case the Y field. After keying in the distance value, entering a data point results in what you would expect, a line segment oriented along the vertical axis and exactly two inches long.
The start of the bracket's left edge with its 2 inch measurement courtesy of AccuDraw.
At this point the AccuDraw compass moves to the end point of the line you just placed. Moving the dynamic line segment around, it acts as before. This time you need to place the line with a fixed length of 1.25 inches in the horizontal direction. You do this by moving the dynamic line so that it snaps onto the positive horizontal axis, key in 1.25, and enter a data point.
3/24/2010
Page 17 of 51
The bracket's top edge is taking shape as the indexed line is placed along the horizontal axis.
The next part of the bracket involves going off at a 30 degree angle for a given distance. Pressing the Space bar changes the AccuDraw compass to its polar mode (indicated by a circular compass), which lets you enter an angle and a distance. Entering 30 degrees in the Angle field and 1.75 inches in the Distance field locks the line in the right direction. A data point accepts the new location.
The notch appears next with the Polar compass oriented along the new line.
Note how the compass orients along the 30 degree line. This illustrates AccuDraw's context sensitivity. AccuDraw provides a method for associating coordinate information with respect to existing elements. To place the half inch line at a right angle to the 30 degree line only requires indexing to the appropriate axis, keying-in 0.5 and entering a data point to accept.
The notch is nearing completion.
With the bracket's notch complete, all that remains is the completion of the bracket's right edge. Currently, however, the compass still is rotated to the 60 degree angle of the notch and not the horizontal direction you need. To override the context nature of AccuDraw you press <T> to orient the compass to the Top view (the default). Pressing the Space bar brings up the rectangular compass. Indexing, again, to the X axis and keying in 2 inches followed by a data point locks the final known dimension of the bracket.
3/24/2010
Page 18 of 51
A quick press of the <T> key and AccuDraw orients itself to the screen's x and y axes.
To close out the bracket's bottom edge, you use the smart axis locking feature of AccuDraw. Moving the pointer down the Y axis you press <Enter> for the smart lock feature. Recognizing that you are indexed along the Y axis, AccuDraw locks the Y direction but allows you to move up and down this axis. A tentative point on the beginning point of the bracket (the Place SmartLine tool allows you to snap to an element under construction) followed by a data point locates the lower right corner of the bracket. A final tentative point and data point on the origin of the bracket completes the job.
Remember that you can use AccuSnap in conjunction with AccuDraw. This speeds up the process of snapping tentative points.
A tentative point on the origin of the bracket results in the dashed index line.
Accepting the tentative point completes the construction.
3/24/2010
Page 19 of 51
An isometric depiction of the bracket construction shows the orientation of the AccuDraw compass upon the entry of each data point.
The preceding was a very simple example of AccuDraw in action. There is much more to this drafting aid. AccuDraw has been designed with ease of use and a certain intuitive feel to it. As with any drafting aid, you need to try it out first. As you get the hang of it, the various options begin to make sense. In the following sections, the user interface features of AccuDraw are presented followed by the settings and directives that control its operations.
Activating AccuDraw
By default, when MicroStation is started, AccuDraw is activated automatically. With AccuDraw activated, all drawing tools utilize it for dynamic data input.
To turn AccuDraw on or off
1. In the Primary Tools tool box, select the Toggle AccuDraw tool. The AccuDraw window opens or closes.
Alternative Method To turn on AccuDraw
1. If you are using the default function key menu, press <F11>. The AccuDraw window opens. If it is already docked or open, pressing <F11> sends input focus to the AccuDraw window. Normally, the AccuDraw compass does not appear until you enter the first data point after selecting a tool. AccuDraw's behavior changes slightly with tools that utilize dynamics before the first data point. The Place Text and Place Active Cell tools are examples of such tools. Instead of waiting for the first data point to display the compass, AccuDraw activates the compass at the last data point location. In this way, you can place the element with respect to this location by using any of AccuDraw's relative directives. AccuDraw also affects operations like placing text or cells in another way. When you place a string of text with AccuDraw active, its initial orientation will be along the current AccuDraw drawing plane In other words when you have a Front oriented drawing plane the text will
3/24/2010

be oriented along the front axis regardless of the view orientation.
Page 20 of 51
AccuDraw will not activate when it would conflict with other tools for instance, during fence placement and element selection operations, dimensioning, and so on. Although most users will activate and use AccuDraw during the entire design session, there may be times when its actions might interfere with the current operation. For this reason, AccuDraw can be turned off. MicroStation's tools return to their non-AccuDraw operation.
To deactivate AccuDraw
1. In the Primary Tools tool box, select the Toggle AccuDraw tool. or With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <Q>.
AccuDraw's Compass
AccuDraw's most recognizable feature is its compass. Visible only when AccuDraw is active and has control of MicroStation's coordinate input, the compass acts as both a status indicator and a focus for your input.
AccuDraw compasses. Left: Rectangular coordinate system. Right: Polar coordinate system.
When AccuDraw has focus, its compass has a transparent blue background. When it does not have focus, the compass appears grey.
AccuDraw's compass with focus (left) and when it does not have focus (right).
The origin point At the center of the compass is AccuDraw's origin point. This is the focal point of all AccuDraw operations. As you select various AccuDraw options, their functions operate from this origin point. This last point is important. All AccuDraw directives (distance key-ins, shortcut key-ins, and so on) operate in conjunction with the compass. In most cases, the compass is located at the last entered data point. In addition, there are AccuDraw directives that allow you to move the compass to entirely different locations without generating a new data point. This is not unlike a tentative point. The frame (drawing plane indicator) Surrounding the origin point is the frame, or drawing plane indicator. Its primary purpose is to show the current orientation of AccuDraw's drawing plane and the current coordinate system in effect. When the frame appears as a rectangle, the rectangular coordinate system (X,Y) is in effect. When the frame appears as a circle then the polar coordinate system (Distance, Angle) is active. By default, when AccuDraw has focus, the frame's color is grey, and its fill color is blue, but you can change this in the Display tab of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.
To change the color of the AccuDraw frame
3/24/2010

1. With AccuDraw active, open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box by pressing <G> followed by <S> (Get Settings). or Choose Settings > AccuDraw. 2. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, click the Display tab. 3. From the Frame option menu, choose a new color (the button color indicates the current setting).
To change the fill color of the AccuDraw compass
Page 21 of 51
1. With AccuDraw active, open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box by pressing <G> followed by <S> (Get Settings). or Choose Settings > AccuDraw. 2. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, click the Display tab. 3. From the Fill option menu, choose a new color (the button color indicates the current setting). When working in a 2D DGN file the drawing plane portion of the compass functions simply as an indicator of the current coordinate system. When working in 3D, however, the drawing plane becomes a much more valuable tool. Because you can orient the AccuDraw drawing plane along any plane in 3D space, AccuDraw's drawing plane indicator determines where your data points will appear with respect to the rest of the design.
You can relocate AccuDraw's origin to the current pointer location, or tentative point, using a shortcut key-in (the <O> key).
The X/Y axes The final parts of the AccuDraw compass are the two axes. Oriented at right angles to one another, these axes represent the drawing plane X and Y axes. To differentiate between the two axes, each is color coded. By default, the positive or +X axis is displayed in red while the positive or +Y axis is green in color. If these colors do not suit you or are hard to discern, you can change them via the Display tab section of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. As well, you can change the highlight color for when the pointer is indexed to the X or Y axes.
To change the colors of AccuDraw's X and Y axes, or its indexing highlight
1. With AccuDraw active, open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box by pressing <G> followed by <S> (Get Settings). or Choose Settings > AccuDraw. The AccuDraw Settings dialog box opens. 2. Click the Display tab. 3. From the X Axis or Y Axis option menu, choose a new color (the button color indicates the current setting). 4. From the Hilite option menu, choose a new color (the button indicates the current setting).
AccuDraw's Drawing Plane

AccuDraw's drawing plane is central to its operation. As you work, AccuDraw orients this drawing plane based on a number of factors including cues from the active tool, the last placed coordinate, and key AccuDraw settings. This is known as context sensitive operation. For instance, when you use the Place SmartLine tool, the orientation of the AccuDraw compass changes as you enter data points. Because Place SmartLine was designed to take advantage of the context-sensitive nature of AccuDraw, the tool cues AccuDraw to rotate the axis of the plane to the angle between the last two data points.
3/24/2010
Page 22 of 51
Place SmartLine controls the orientation of the compass.
You can override this feature via the AccuDraw Settings dialog box (Operation tab section: Context Sensitivity check box off) in which case, the compass maintains the traditional view axes orientation (+X to the right, +Y straight up). Drawing plane coordinate systems AccuDraw's drawing plane supports two different coordinate systems. This echoes MicroStation's normal support for rectangular and polar coordinate values:
3/24/2010
Page 23 of 51
Rectangular, for specifying distances along the drawing plane axes. AccuDraw's frame appears as a square indicator. Polar, for specifying distances and angles relative to the origin. AccuDraw's frame appears as a circular indicator.
To switch between Rectangular and Polar coordinate systems
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <space bar>.

Alternative Method To switch between Rectangular and Polar coordinate systems
1. With AccuDraw active, open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box by pressing <G> followed by <S> (Get Settings). or Choose Settings > AccuDraw. The AccuDraw Settings dialog box opens. 2. Click the Coordinates tab. 3. From the Type option menu, choose Polar or Rectangular.
The AccuDraw Window
AccuDraw has its own window, named AccuDraw, which contains the data entry fields and axis lock buttons for the currently active coordinate system. The AccuDraw window initially comes up floating just like any other window. However, it can be docked to either the top or bottom edge of the MicroStation application window.
AccuDraw window docked along the bottom edge of the application window.
Docking the AccuDraw window has the advantage of minimizing its intrusion into the working area of your drawing. As with the floating window version, the fields found in the docked version change depending on whether you are in polar or rectangular mode and whether you are in a 2D or 3D DGN file. AccuDraw's window and the input focus When AccuDraw is active it becomes part of the input focus order controlled by the <Esc> key, initially, and others. How focus is controlled depends on whether or not you have Use Position Mapping enabled (Workspace > Preferences > Position Mapping). This is important to remember as no AccuDraw shortcut key-in works unless focus is in the AccuDraw window. Fortunately, after every data point or tentative point the focus is forced to the AccuDraw window where it remains until you press the <Esc> key or enter a Reset
3/24/2010

from a tool.
AccuDraw focus with Position Mapping enabled
Page 24 of 51
When Position Mapping is enabled, the following keys control focus:
<Enter> Opens the key-in browser at the pointer location, or puts focus within the key-in browser if it already is open. If AccuDraw has focus, invokes SmartLock for the AccuDraw input fields. <Spacebar> Sends focus to AccuDraw. If AccuDraw already has focus, toggles coordinates between rectangular and polar. <Tab> Change to the next element under the pointer. If AccuDraw has focus, changes to the next input field in the AccuDraw window. <Page Up>/<Page Down> Next/Previous task in the Task List. If AccuDraw has focus, locks the active input field in the AccuDraw window.
At any time, the <Esc> key sets focus back to Home.

AccuDraw focus with Position Mapping disabled
When Position Mapping is disabled, the focus order toggles between the AccuDraw window and the Tool Settings window unless the Keyin window is open. In this case, the input focus cycles from the AccuDraw window through the Tool Settings window to the Key-in window. Pressing <Shift-Esc> reverses the cycle, moving the focus from the Key-in window through the Tool Settings window to the AccuDraw window.
AccuDraw's Settings dialog box

Many aspects of AccuDraw's behavior are specified using the controls in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. A few have already been mentioned (such as context sensitivity, and axis display colors).
To open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box
1. From the Settings menu, choose AccuDraw. or With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <G>,<S>.
Controlling and Using AccuDraw

AccuDraw is controlled from a variety of sources. You can influence it through the use of one- and two-key sequences called shortcut key-
3/24/2010

options via the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. AccuDraw supports a large number of options, all of which can be placed into one of three major AccuDraw functions:

Page 25 of 51
Previewing and constraining data points Locating the AccuDraw compass Orienting AccuDraw's drawing plane
The following discussion is organized along these three basic operations. In most instances, you will use a combination of all three types of AccuDraw operations to accomplish your design goal. AccuDraw may be employed in a variety of different situations with standard drawing and manipulation tools, or using more advanced approaches, such as with the Place SmartLine tool and the Modify Element tool. In either case, AccuDraw employs the same general procedure: 1. Select the desired tool. 2. Enter a data point to activate dynamics and set the location of the drawing plane origin. 3. If necessary, rotate the drawing plane axes. 4. If necessary, set the type of drawing plane coordinate system. 5. Preview and constrain the next data point. 6. Enter the data point. Typically, you will use a mix of AccuDraw options throughout the design process. The key to working with AccuDraw is understanding how it interacts with the active tool and the current data point.
Many drawing tools are optimized for use with AccuDraw.
AccuDraw is particularly useful when employed in 3D.
Previewing and Constraining Data Points

AccuDraw, via tentative points, lets you preview and constrain pending data point locations. In response to your input in the AccuDraw window, dynamic update in view windows lets you visualize the results. This gives you the option of accepting the displayed tentative point, or trying another location. That is, you have the flexibility to unconstrain a pending data point at any time. It is only when you actually enter a data point that you are committed to the values in the AccuDraw window and their results. How AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement When active, AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement by trying to anticipate your intent.
3/24/2010
Page 26 of 51
Moving the pointer (Rectangular coordinates). Top: Toward the x-axis; Bottom: Toward the y-axis.
As you move the pointer, the fields in the AccuDraw window automatically update to reflect the drawing plane coordinates of the current pointer location (expressed as either relative x, y, and z offsets, or as a distance and an angle) with respect to the location of the AccuDraw compass. Furthermore, the AccuDraw window's input focus automatically adjusts, based on the general direction of the pointer movement. As you move the pointer in the same direction as either drawing plane axis the focus moves to the field that you would use to precisely locate the data point along that axis. Tolerance setting In the Coordinates tab section of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box is a setting for indexing tolerance for both Axis and Distance (instead of using Locate Tolerance from the Workspace > Preferences dialog box although, by default, they are the same: 10 pixels). Alternatively, you can set this with a key-in (and therefore a shortcut or function key): ACCUDRAW SETTINGS INDEXTOL [num], where [num] is the number of pixels ranging from 1 to 99. Changing the tolerance to a small number is useful when you want to do detailed work without the pointer getting pulled back to the axes or to the last distance. When the pointer is within the Tolerance of an axis, of the displayed AccuDraw compass, then the pointer snaps to the alignment of that axis. At this point, the dynamic element is considered indexed to that axis. Similarly, if the pointer is within the Tolerance of the previous distance, the pointer snaps to that distance.
3/24/2010
Page 27 of 51
Index highlight along a drawing plane axis.
The effect of these behaviors is to make it as easy as possible for you to apply constraints and specify precision when previewing a data point.
To enter rectangular coordinates using AccuDraw
1. Enter the first data point. As you move the dynamic line, AccuDraw shifts its key-in focus to the X or Y field depending on which axis the pointer is closest to. (If the Polar compass is visible, press <space bar> to switch to Rectangular coordinates.) 2. When the focus is on the X field, type the desired X value. AccuDraw automatically locks this value in, denoted by the check mark in the box adjacent to the X field.
Keying in a precise distance along the x-axis.
3. Move the pointer up the Y axis. Notice the dynamic dashed line identifying the locked condition from the X axis. The distance required to move the pointer to change focus to the Y field is the same as the Locate Tolerance associated with identifying an element and is selectable in the Coordinates tab of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. 4. Type the Y value desired (press <Enter> to complete the input). AccuDraw responds by setting the endpoint of the new element and displays fixed, dashed lines extending to the point from the X and Y axes of the compass. 5. Enter a data point to accept the location. If you do not want to accept this point, press <Enter> to override the locked axes and return the pointer to the free dynamic state. When working with Polar coordinates, AccuDraw does not automatically shift the focus from the Distance and Angle fields like it does with the X and Y fields in Rectangular coordinates. Instead, you must navigate between these two fields to enter precise values. This is easily done using the <Tab> or <down arrow> keys. When it comes to entering angular values, however, AccuDraw does try to help you out by not requiring a negative value when you want to go off in the opposite direction from an axis. Simply by moving the pointer to the opposite quadrant from the positive angle, AccuDraw moves the dynamic element in the negative direction.
To enter a polar coordinate using AccuDraw
1. Enter the first data point. If the Rectangular compass appears, press the <space bar> to switch to Polar coordinates. 2. Type a distance value in the Distance field. If the input focus is on the Angle field press the <Tab> or <down arrow> key first. AccuDraw will lock the length of the dynamic element to this value. You can rotate this dynamic element around. 3. Press the <Tab> or <down arrow> key. The input focus will shift to the Angle field. 4 Type the desired angle
3/24/2010

or Press the <A> key to lock in the angle at the current pointer location. 5. Enter a data point to accept the coordinate entry. Previous distance recall
Page 28 of 51
Another example of how AccuDraw tries to help you is its previous distance feature. As you place elements in your model, AccuDraw keeps track of the distance between your last two data points. Known as the Previous Distance, AccuDraw uses this distance as a hint for your next data point. Think of previous distance as a radius length from the compass origin. When you move the pointer within the Tolerance distance to this radius, AccuDraw displays a small tangent line called the previous distance indicator, and locks the pointer to this point.
Previous distance indicator.
As you keep the pointer within the Tolerance distance of this previous distance, AccuDraw will keep it locked. This, of course, only works with Polar coordinates. If you are using Rectangular coordinates, the previous distance only works when you are indexed to either drawing plane axis. A data point will result in an offset distance from your last data point precisely the same as the distance between your previous two data points. This lock on feature is not hard to override. Just continue dragging the pointer until it is outside the Tolerance and the previous distance lock disengages. Recalling previous values AccuDraw stores all entered values for its X, Y, Distance, and Angle fields for recall as needed. When in the X, Y, (Z in 3D), Distance, or Angle fields, pressing the <PgUp> key recalls the last distance or angle value entered in any of these fields. Pressing <PgUp> again recalls the next to last entered value and so on. You should note that the X, Y, Z, and Distance fields share a common value buffer but that Angular data is stored separately. This means you can enter a value in the X field, for instance, change the input focus to Y, and by pressing <PgUp>, enter the same value as placed in the X field. Settings manipulation Several AccuDraw settings that can be set in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box also can be toggled on or off with key-in commands. For instance, to turn on context sensitivity, you can key in ACCUDRAW SETTINGS CONTEXTSENS ON. If you enter it without trailing on or off, it behaves as a toggle. Being able to turn settings on or off is most useful for such things as macros, although you may want them as toggles in a function key/shortcut. These key-ins apply also to autoload, floating origin, auto point placement, axis indexing and distance indexing.
The on/off option does not show up in the Key-in window
3/24/2010
Page 29 of 51
AccuDraw and the Popup Calculator

With the pop-up calculator, you can perform mathematical operations on the values displayed in some MicroStation text fields and the values adjust accordingly.
This feature is documented here as it works with AccuDraw. In fact, its use is extendable to other controls. For example, Active Scale and Active Angle fields currently support it. The pop-up calculator is supported as follows: Dialog Box X Y AccuDraw window Z Distance Angle (various) (various) Active Angle Active Scale Fields
To use the pop-up calculator
1. With the input focus in a field that supports pop-up calculation, type any of the following: +, -, *, /, = 2. Type a value or expression to complete the calculation. Press <Enter>, enter a data point, or click outside the pop-up calculator to accept the calculated value. Press <Esc> if you want to reject the value.
Generating a calculated value (by typing 2+1).
Performing simple operations The pop-up calculator lets you perform calculations on measured values (snap to an element, then multiply the distance, for example), or to simply type in the entire equation, such as 5.23 + 1.34. Not only does the pop-up calculator eliminate the need to use a physical calculator, you may notice that with the + and - operations, you do not have to reposition AccuDraw's origin to move relative to a snapped or keyed-in offset. The calculator is designed to be very efficient, to work seamlessly with AccuDraw, and to be entirely keyboard-driven, letting you keep the mouse in the view window rather than having to click in the dialog box. Also, the calculator works in a per-keystroke manner the result of the calculation is expressed both numerically and graphically with every keystroke typed. The pop-up calculator is format aware, as it accepts expressions in feet and inches or degrees-minutes-seconds, if appropriate. Obviously you cannot multiply feet times feet, so the calculator properly adjusts to interpret this type of string. When performing operations on a measured value, the pop-up calculator always operates on the underlying precise value, rather than the string which is truncated to whatever coordinate readout you have. This dynamic value displays at the bottom of the pop-up calculator.
3/24/2010
Page 30 of 51
Creating a relative offset (by snapping then typing +2 when the X field has input focus).
You may notice that sometimes pressing +, -, or / does not bring up the calculator, but is interpreted by AccuDraw as either an explicit positive or negative, or as a fraction. The rule with the + and - operators is: If the value is locked or a tentative point is active, the calculator displays. If you type something like 3 3/8, the / is interpreted as part of a fraction because of the space. If you simply type 3/8, AccuDraw uses the calculator but the result will be the same as 3 divided by 8, or the fraction 3/8. To enter 1 foot and 3/8 inches you must type a space (1: 3/8) so the value is not misinterpreted as 1 foot 3 inches, divided by 8. 1+:3/8 would also work. When entering planar data points (not polar coordinates), there are some special procedures to prevent unexpected results. Since AccuDraw interprets values as negative when the cursor is pointed in the negative direction, the calculator, when appropriate, prepends the entered expression with a minus sign.
Advanced uses of the pop-up calculator You can use the pop-up calculator to enter complex expressions, including multiple operators, parentheses, and C expressions (sin(30), tcb->actangle). Parentheses do not have to be matched to have a valid string. If you type =, the pop-up calculator replaces the existing AccuDraw value rather than operating upon it. In this case the result dynamically updates in the original field, rather than having a field of its own on the pop-up. This is rarely needed for simple operations, but can be useful for complex expressions.
You can use the compact pop-up to replace values with expressions that do not contain a simple operator.
You can also enter and save variables. Although you cannot save them to a file, and there is no graphical user interface, this functionality
3/24/2010
Page 31 of 51
can still be exceptionally useful. By default, the only saved variable is pi. The variable can then be entered within any expression using the calculator. To use the variable directly as a distance or angle, type =<variable name>.
Entering a complex expression including parentheses and a user-defined variable.
To save variables
1. Type popcalc variable save <name> <value>. The value may be entered as a complex expression, if desired. The value is optional; if none is supplied, it uses the last value used by the calculator (thus allowing the use of measured values).
To show variables
1. Type popcalc variable show name. The name is optional; if none is supplied, all variables print to a Messages dialog box. Where a variable name is supplied, its name and value appear in the status bar.
To delete variables
1. Type popcalc variable delete name. Finally, there is a special variable, $, that represents the starting value, whether measured or typed into AccuDraw's field. For instance, if you measure a distance with AccuDraw and then want one over that distance, you can simply type =1/$. Or, for example, to get 12 squared, type 12*$.
AccuDraw's Shortcut Key-ins

Although AccuDraw tries to anticipate your next move it cannot always predict your intentions. AccuDraw therefore includes a wide variety of single and double character command directives known as the shortcut key-ins. By pressing the appropriate key, you can direct AccuDraw to perform a specific task. In operation, AccuDraw is the default input focus in most cases, thus letting you just type in the shortcut without having to consider where the input focus is.
Pop-ups confirm single letter shortcuts below the focused input field. This function is not only useful to confirm the key-in, but also it serves to communicate that the shortcut is received via AccuDraw's input fields.
3/24/2010
Page 32 of 51
Two letter shortcuts appear attached to the focused input field, and confirm the action through the temporary appearance of the AccuDraw Shortcuts window. The pop-down list adjacent to the input field illustrates where the shortcut comes from, thereby making it easy to follow the action. Creating or editing a shortcut will result in an Alert window should the shortcut duplicate or conflict with an existing shortcut (a conflict occurs when two or more shortcuts begin with the same letter); however duplicates and conflicts are allowed. The following is a list of the more common shortcut key-ins:
Key <?> Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts window. Smart Lock <Enter>

Effect
In Rectangular coordinates, locks X to 0 if the pointer is on the drawing plane y-axis or Y to 0 if the pointer is on the x-axis. In Polar coordinates, locks Angle to 0, 90, -90, or 180 if the pointer is on a drawing plane axis or otherwise locks Distance to its last entered value.
<space bar> <O> <X> <Y> <D> <A>
Switches between Rectangular and Polar coordinates. Moves the drawing plane origin to the current pointer position. This can also be used to explicitly activate AccuDraw before you enter a data point. Toggles the lock status for the X value. Toggles the lock status for the Y value. Toggles the lock status for the Distance value. Toggles the lock status for the Angle value.
For the complete list, see Complete List of AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts. AccuDraw defaults There is a command to set the shortcuts back to the defaults, and one to reread the shortcuts file. The latter is useful if you want to change the file manually without exiting MicroStation. It could be useful, also, if you would like to alter the shortcuts programmatically (for example, with MDL or BASIC). Key-ins to perform these tasks are ACCUDRAW SHORTCUTS DEFAULT and ACCUDRAW SHORTCUTS READFILE. Create, edit and delete shortcuts As well as being able to edit the input fields in the AccuDraw window, you can create, edit, and delete, shortcuts in the AccuDraw Shortcuts window. In brief, you can:

Press <Delete> in any of the text fields in the AccuDraw window, which will let you edit, or delete, the string. Delete a shortcut by highlighting it in the AccuDraw Shortcuts window and pressing <Delete>. Create a new shortcut. When you do this, it will be inserted following the highlighted one, rather than being put at the end of the list. Edit an existing shortcut.
When you create a new shortcut, or edit an existing one, a message box appears informing you if the shortcut is a duplicate or conflicts with an existing one (for instance, F and FS). You still can create it if you want to, which often is convenient if you want to edit the other one later. If, for some reason, your edited shortcuts cannot be written to the shortcut.txt file, an error message will warn you of the situation.
General Procedure To activate a shortcut key-in
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, simply press the keyboard key(s) that corresponds to the shortcut you wish to use. If the first typed letter is, by itself, a valid shortcut, the shortcut activates. Otherwise, the AccuDraw Shortcuts window opens. The window lists the available shortcuts. Typing the second letter activates the shortcut.
To review a listing of the available AccuDraw shortcuts
3/24/2010

1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the <?> key. The AccuDraw Shortcuts window opens.
Page 33 of 51
AccuDraw Shortcuts window
To activate a single-letter shortcut from the AccuDraw Shortcuts window
1. In the list box, select the desired shortcut and click the Run button. or Press the key that corresponds to the desired shortcut.
To activate a two-letter shortcut from the AccuDraw Shortcuts window
1. In the list box, select the desired shortcut and click the Run button. or Press the two letters that correspond to the desired shortcut. Smart Lock One of the first keyboard shortcuts you will use is Smart Lock. Similar in operation to striking a line along a T-square, Smart Lock is invoked by pressing the <Enter> key. Depending on where the pointer is located, at the time you select Smart Lock, one of two things will occur:

If the pointer is oriented closer to the X axis of the compass, the pointer will lock to the X axis. If the pointer is oriented closer to the Y axis of the compass, the pointer will lock to the Y axis.
You know the pointer is locked on an axis when the dynamic line highlights. Pressing the <Enter> key again deactivates Smart Lock and releases the dynamic line back to free motion.
To constrain the pending data point to a drawing plane axis
1. Position the pointer near the desired axis. When the pointer is on an axis, a highlighted line is displayed from the drawing plane origin to the pointer location.
Positioning the pointer on a drawing plane axis on the x-axis (above), on the y-axis (below).
2. Press the <Enter> key.
3/24/2010

Smart Lock is engaged. Its effect is to constrain the pending data point to the axis.
Page 34 of 51
Constraining the pending data point along x-axis.
Constraining the pending data point along y-axis.
You now can constrain the pending data point to a precise distance along the axis by keying in a value, or simply by snapping a tentative point to an element or monument point and accepting the tentative point as the data point location.
To disengage Smart Lock and unconstrain the pending data point, press <Enter> again. The <Enter> key toggles Smart Lock.
Snapping to constrain the pending data point to a precise distance along the x-axis.
Smart Lock will not lock to an axis when you are entering coordinate values into its field. Instead, AccuDraw returns the dynamic element to free motion.
X and Y locks When using the Rectangular coordinate system, you can force AccuDraw to lock the current distance along an axis by activating the <X> or <Y> keyboard shortcut. AccuDraw responds by locking the dynamic line to the chosen axis at the current pointer distance from the origin point of the compass. Having done this, the focus of the complement AccuDraw axis data field becomes the focus for your next keyboard entry.
AccuDraw automatically switches its coordinate system to rectangular in response to the X or Y lock
3/24/2010

All X and Y values entered are relative to the plane of the previous element segment.
Page 35 of 51
To override this, AccuDraw provides an option in its settings called Context Sensitivity. Turning this off forces AccuDraw to stay oriented to the DGN file's XY axes.
Distance lock You can use the <D> shortcut to lock the distance from the compass origin point to the current location of the pointer and, if necessary, change AccuDraw's coordinate system to Polar. The input focus automatically shifts to the Angle field.
To interactively enter the distance of the dynamic element
1. In the AccuDraw window's Distance field (Polar coordinates), type the distance. The pending data point is contrained automatically, as indicated by the pressed Distance button. Dynamic update occurs in response to each keystroke.
Alternative Method To interactively enter the distance of the dynamic element
1. Move the pointer away from the drawing plane origin until the desired distance is displayed in the AccuDraw window's Distance field. As the pointer is moved, the displayed distance is rounded off to the increment specified by the Unit Roundoff's Distance setting (if the setting is turned on) in the Coordinates tab section of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. 2. Press the <D> key. Angle lock You can use the <A> shortcut to set the angle portion of the polar drawing plane and, if necessary, change AccuDraw's coordinate system to Polar. AccuDraw sets the angle to the current position of the pointer.
To interactively lock the angle of a dynamic element
1. In the AccuDraw window's Angle field (Polar coordinates), type the angle, in degrees. The pending data point is contrained automatically, as indicated by the pressed Angle button. Dynamic update occurs in response to each keystroke.
Alternative Method To interactively lock the angle of a dynamic element
1. Move the pointer around the drawing plane origin until the desired angle is displayed in the AccuDraw window's Angle field. As the pointer is moved, the displayed angle is rounded off to the increment specified by the Unit Roundoff's Angle setting (if the setting is turned on) in the Coordinates tab section of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. 2. Press the <A> key.
The Angle value automatically switches to the opposite angle if the pointer position dictates.
Angle value automatically switches to the opposite value.
3/24/2010
Page 36 of 51
Angle value automatically switches to the opposite value.
Unit Roundoffs and Their Effect on AccuDraw

Although you can set the X, Y, Z, Distance, and Angle fields by typing in values, AccuDraw also supports a roundoff feature that can force the new data point to a multiple of a set value. You can set AccuDraw's Unit Roundoff in the Coordinates tab section of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. Distance roundoff When you enable the Distance field in Unit Roundoff, AccuDraw acts as if there is an invisible grid in effect. The Distance Roundoff, however, always is calculated from the current compass location. In addition, at any time you can override this value by snapping to an element, or entering a value in the X, Y, Z, or Distance fields of the AccuDraw window.
To round off the values displayed in AccuDraw's X, Y, Z, and Distance fields as the pointer moves
1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, click the Coordinates tab. 2. In the Unit Roundoff section, turn on Distance. 3. In the Distance field, key in the desired increment.
To cancel distance roundoff
1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, click the Coordinates tab. 2. In the Unit Roundoff section, turn off Distance. Angle roundoff You can use the Angle Unit Roundoff to lock elements along specific axes. For instance, setting the Angle Roundoff to 30 degrees assures that all elements placed will occur along one of the normal isometric drawing axes. As with the X, Y, Z, or Distance fields, at any time you can override this value by snapping to an element, or entering a value in the Angle field of the AccuDraw window.
3/24/2010
Page 37 of 51
Drawing in progress showing AccuDraw window with angle locked to 30.
To round off the values displayed in the AccuDraw's Angle field as the pointer moves
1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, click the Coordinates tab. 2. In the Unit Roundoff section, turn on Angle. 3. In the Angle field, key in the desired increment in degrees.
To cancel angle roundoff
1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, click the Coordinates tab. 2. In the Unit Roundoff section, turn off Angle.
Moving the AccuDraw Compass

By default, AccuDraw places its compass at the last data point location. There are, however, times when you need to take over control of the AccuDraw compass. Tentative point operations can take better advantage of AccuDraw's capabilities when you unlock the compass and place it wherever needed. The following covers how you do this and some interesting ways in which you can use AccuDraw to accomplish otherwise difficult operations. The floating origin option At any time, you can move AccuDraw's compass to the pointer location. You do this with the O keyboard shortcut, which forces AccuDraw to move the compass to the current pointer location. This occurs regardless of the tool or operation currently selected. This last point is important to recognize. AccuDraw is considered a nonmodal feature in that you don't have to be in a predetermined part of a procedure in order for it to operate. In practice, the most common use for a relocated compass origin point is to index the element under construction from an existing point. For instance, if you want to locate the corner of a block a specified distance from a given location, you can tentative snap to the given location, then press O to move the drawing plane origin to the snap. From there you can use AccuDraw to position the tentative point from this relocated origin point. This procedure is explained in AccuDraw and the tentative point.
AccuDraw and the Tentative Point

Creating precision offsets is a fundamental function of the design process. AccuDraw performs this important function by utilizing tentative points. These can be input manually, or you can further streamline the process using AccuSnap. Whether you use AccuSnap or manually entered tentative points, the key to using AccuDraw and the tentative point is the Set Origin function (the <O> shortcut key-in). When there is a tentative point present, pressing the <O> key results in the relocation of the compass to the tentative point location. f f
3/24/2010

Page 38 of 51
Enter coordinate data using the AccuDraw window. Use a second tentative point and various locks (X/Y or D/A) to interactively set the offset.
This latter technique is useful when you need to set an offset from two elements.
To create an offset from an element, along the X or Y axis
1. With a tool active, use AccuSnap to display a tentative point at the required point on the element (or place it manually). 2. Press the <O> shortcut key. The compass moves to the tentative point location. 3. Move the pointer so that it is indexed on the required X or Y axis. This sets the focus automatically to the indexed axis. 4. Key in the required distance. 5. With the pointer still indexed to the axis, accept with a data point.
To create an offset from an element, along both X and Y axes
1. With a tool active, use AccuSnap to display a tentative point at the required point on the element (or place it manually). 2. Press the <O> shortcut key. The compass moves to the tentative point location. 3. Move the pointer so that it is indexed on the required X or Y axis. This sets the focus automatically to the indexed axis. 4. Key in the required distance. This locks the distance on the indexed axis. 5. Move the pointer along the other axis, and note that a dashed line indicates that the distance from the first axis is maintained. 6. Key in the required distance along the second axis. Dashed lines indicate the distances from the X and Y axes. 7. Accept to place the data point at the offsets.
To create an offset from two elements
1. With a tool active, use AccuSnap to display a tentative point at the keypoint of the first element (or place it manually). 2. Press the <O> shortcut key. The compass moves to the tentative point location. 3. On the keypoint of the second element, use AccuSnap to display a tentative point (or place it manually). 4. Press the <X> or <Y> key. AccuDraw responds by locking the dynamic line to the appropriate X or Y axis, but at the offset from the first tentative point to the second one. 5. Use another tentative point to lock the remaining axis of the tentative compass location. or Enter a data point to set the second axis value. AccuDraw relocates the initial compass to the new indirectly derived location. From here you can continue the use of the current drawing tool.
AccuDraw's Drawing Plane Orientation

AccuDraw is a powerful tool in 2D drafting. It is even more powerful in 3D design, where you can work in a known coordinate system even though the view has a different orientation For example you can work in an Isometric view with the AccuDraw drawing plane oriented in
3/24/2010
Page 39 of 51
the Top View. AccuDraw orients the drawing plane in accordance with the Coordinate System Rotation setting in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box:
Coordinate System Rotation Top (default) Front Side View Auxiliary Context Orients compass to match front view (3D only). Orients compass to match side view (3D only). Orients compass to current view axes. Orients compass to last defined auxiliary coordinate system (see Rotate Auxiliary). A temporary orientation affected by a number of factors including the current tool, the previous data points and the RQ keyboard shortcut. Definition Orients compass to match top view (in 2D same as an unrotated view).
Rotating the drawing plane axes in 2D Along with the standard drawing plane orientations, the rotation of the drawing plane axes can be altered using keyboard shortcuts. In 2D, you are limited to rotating AccuDraw's drawing plane about the view axis. This matches the same restriction placed on rotating views in 2D. Rotation-sensitive tools Depending on the tool in use, dynamically rotating the drawing plane axes yields slightly different results. For example, consider the scenario of placing a block (rectangle) with the Place Block (Orthogonal) tool, which takes its orientation from the drawing plane XY axes. Once the drawing plane axes are rotated, the block's main axis is constrained to the rotated XY axis. Contrast this to the effect when using the Place Line tool: The drawing plane axes rotate, and while dynamic readout is a function of the newly rotated system, the tool itself remains available to dynamically place the line wherever desired. The Rotate Quick shortcut key-in You can use the Rotate Quick (<R>,<Q>) shortcut to change the orientation of the drawing plane only for the current data point, after which it resumes its normal orientation. This will vary, depending on the tool being used.
To quickly rotate the drawing plane axes
1. With AccuDraw dynamics active, press <R>,<Q>. The drawing plane indicator spins freely about its origin, the x-axis following the movement of the screen pointer. 2. Enter a data point to accept the specified rotation. The use of the previously selected tool continues. For example, suppose you are using the Place Line tool to start a construction and wish to align the drawing plane axes with the new line. After establishing the drawing plane origin (with the first data point of the line), pressing <R>,<Q> lets you rotate the drawing plane axes interactively.
Dynamically rotating the drawing plane axes.
3/24/2010
Page 40 of 51
Placing the line.
Shortcut key-ins are available to rotate the drawing plane coordinate system 90 about an individual axis <R>,<Z> (plus <R>,<X> and <R>,<Y> in 3D) or to align it with the design plane axes <T> (plus <F> and <S> in 3D), view axes <V>, or ACS axis <R>,<C>. When working in a 3D environment, AccuDraw's axes rotation takes on a very important role in the design process.
AccuDraw and Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS)

AccuDraw performs the function of an ACS, interactively. Using its shortcut key-ins you can quickly change to a Top <T>, Front <F>, Side <S>, or View <V> orientation. When you have an ACS loaded, you can use the <R>,<C> shortcut to rotate the AccuDraw compass to orientation of the current ACS. From this, you can return to the default coordinate system orientation with the <T>, <F>, <S>, or <V> shortcuts. Locking AccuDraw to an ACS You can toggle AccuDraw to lock to the current ACS with the <L>,<P> shortcut, which activates the ACCUDRAW LOCK GRIDPLANE key-in. This key-in toggles the ACS Plane and ACS Plane Snap locks, and the Grid view attribute for all views. With gridplane lock:
On when you use the the <T>, <F>, or <S> AccuDraw shortcuts, they rotate the drawing plane to the Top, Front, or Side view for the ACS. Off when you use the the <T>, <F>, or <S> AccuDraw shortcuts, they rotate the drawing plane to the Top, Front, or Side view for the default DGN coordinate system.
By default, the accudraw lock gridplane key-in also is mapped to the F8 function key. Projecting points from the active ACS to the AccuDraw plane You can use a combination of an ACS and AccuDraw to project points, in the ACS z-direction, from the ACS plane to the AccuDraw drawing plane. This technique lets you, for example, trace the boundary of a house on to a sloping roof line, as explained in the following worflow:
To project points onto a rotated plane
1. Set up an ACS such that the Z direction is the desired projection. 2. Press F8 to lock AccuDraw to the ACS.
3/24/2010
Page 41 of 51
3. Select the element placement tool, such Place Smartline. 4. Press F11, to set focus to AccuDraw. 5. Key-in the AccuDraw shortcut RE. 6. In the tool settings, set: Update Current ACS: Off Move Origin: On 7. Select the element to which you want AccuDraw aligned and accept with a data point.
8. To commence drawing the element, snap to an element in the ACS plane and accept with a data point. The point is projected onto the AccuDraw drawing plane.
The snap point is projected up to the AccuDraw plane.
9. Add more points by snapping to elements in the ACS plane to project the points to the AccuDraw drawing plane.
3/24/2010
Page 42 of 51
As you snap to elements on the ACS plane, the points are projected to the rotated AccuDraw plane.
Using Shortcut Snap Modes with AccuDraw

AccuDraw provides a few keyboard shortcuts to enhance popular tentative point snaps:

N Nearest C Center I Intersect
These shortcuts work the same as selecting the snap from the status bar or Snap Mode button bar, with the exception of Nearest. The AccuDraw-enhanced Nearest snap mode With AccuDraw disabled, when you snap to an element with the Nearest snap, either manually or with AccuSnap, MicroStation enters the tentative point at the point on the element closest to the pointer. With AccuDraw active, this changes a bit. When the pointer is constrained by either X, Y, Distance, or Angle Lock, and an element is snapped using Nearest snap mode, AccuDraw will attempt to produce a tentative point at the nearest point on the element that also satisfies AccuDraw's lock. In many cases the effect is similar to that when using the Extend Element to Intersection tool. In the case where there is no point on the snapped element that satisfies AccuDraw's lock, the snapped point will simply appear at the point on the element closest to the pointer. This point will then be projected onto the hypothetical line or circle determined by AccuDraw's lock.
Nearest snap with Place SmartLine tool constrained by an angle.
Setting the keypoint snap divisor
3/24/2010
Page 43 of 51
Although not technically a snap mode, there is one additional shortcut associated with tentative point snaps, K which opens the Keypoint Snap Divisor dialog box. This lets you define the number of keypoints in each element. When you use this shortcut, the following snap point is a Keypoint snap.
Keypoint Snap Divisor dialog box
AccuDraw's Effect on Various Tools

Although much of AccuDraw's operation is global in nature, it does have subtle effects on individual tools. As you learn to use AccuDraw you will find that it can be used as a substitute for many individual tool settings. The following discussion provides some insights into this feature. The Place SmartLine tool is specially designed to exploit AccuDraw's capabilities. AccuDraw and the Place Circle tool A simple tool like Place Circle can benefit from AccuDraw in a number of ways. First, when you place a circle you can explicitly set the diameter of the circle by turning on the Diameter tool setting and entering a value. However, with AccuDraw active this can be done with fewer keystrokes. Once you've placed the circle's origin point all you have to do is type in the radius value. AccuDraw automatically locks the circle to the value indicated by the locked dynamic circle. It really doesn't matter which drawing coordinate system is active.
Using AccuDraw to place a circle by center.
To place a second circle of equal radius is also easy. Using AccuDraw's previous distance feature, when you move the pointer away from the center data point, the circle will temporarily lock to the previous radius letting you enter the second data point. This does require two data points for all remaining circles, so if you are placing numerous fixed diameter circles you may want to use the Diameter tool setting. AccuDraw and the Place Arc tool AccuDraw can be used to simplify the operation of the Place Arc tool By using the polar coordinate system you can easily specify radial
3/24/2010

lengths and sweep angles just by typing them in via AccuDraw.
Page 44 of 51
Using AccuDraw to place an arc by center.
This is one case where AccuDraw's context sensitive orientation is good for incremental angle settings, and View or other rotations are good for setting an absolute sweep angle. AccuDraw and the Place Ellipse tool When you place an ellipse without AccuDraw you specify a center point, the primary axis and radius, and a point through which the ellipse will pass. You can do this by selecting the various options in the Tool Settings window or use AccuDraw to set these values in a more user-friendly manner. When you enter that first center point, AccuDraw's effect becomes noticeable. The second data point still defines the major axis, but now you can specify both the radius and angle using the AccuDraw window simply by entering the radius and angle or dynamically positioning it.
Using AccuDraw to place an ellipse by center and edge.
Now, because the AccuDraw compass orients itself along the axis of the ellipse under construction, the secondary axis is automatically locked so you can simply enter the value or position the pointer and data point. AccuDraw and the Place Block tool Y A D ith th Pl Bl kt lt l bl k ith ifi di i d t ifi l
3/24/2010
Page 45 of 51
With the Rotated method you can specify the angle and X length of the block using the polar drawing plane. Once the base of the block has been defined, AccuDraw orients the compass along this base. At this point, you can switch to rectangular mode (space bar) and lock in the Y distance by simply entering its dimension.
Using AccuDraw to place a block
AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine tool The Place SmartLine tool is used to automatically place a complex chain or shape containing a dynamically specified collection of segments and vertices. This tool is designed to be used in conjunction with AccuDraw. The main benefits of using AccuDraw with Place SmartLine are as follows:

The drawing plane origin automatically moves to the location of a newly defined vertex. The drawing plane automatically rotates to align with a newly defined segment. This allows tangent and perpendicular segments to be easily defined. When defining an arc segment, the drawing plane coordinate system automatically switches to Polar.
To define an arc segment tangent to the previous segment
1. With AccuDraw active and Place SmartLine selected, and Segment Type set to Lines place two data points to define a straight section. Note that AccuDraw aligns its drawing plane with the line segment. 2. Now, set Segment Type to Arcs.
3/24/2010
Page 46 of 51
Switching the Place SmartLine Segment Type to Arcs.
3. Move the pointer toward the drawing plane axis that is perpendicular (that is, at 90) to the previous segment. When the pointer is close to the axis, the arc radius position dynamically aligns with it.
Defining the center point.
4. With the pointer indexed to the axis, enter a data point to define the center point for the arc. The drawing plane coordinate system automatically switches to Polar, and the arc's center point and sweep angle are dynamically displayed. 5. Enter a data point to define the arc's sweep angle and complete the segment definition.
Defining the sweep angle.
You can key-in values for the Radius and the sweep angle, using AccuDraw's input fields. As well, the arc's sweep angle can be defined in either direction clockwise or counterclockwise.
AccuDraw affects most tools The tools just described were selected to illustrate how AccuDraw works with even the simplest tools to provide additional capabilities, or easier access to options, over non-AccuDraw operations. AccuDraw actually affects the operation of most MicroStation tools, and even
3/24/2010

has the potential to work with third-party application software.
Page 47 of 51
Complete List of AccuDraw Shortcut Key-ins

The following table lists each keyboard shortcut and its effect. Additional information about the effect of individual keyboard shortcuts is presented in the general discussions of AccuDraw procedures.
Key Smart Lock <Enter>

Effect
In Rectangular coordinates, locks X to 0 if the pointer is on the drawing plane y-axis or Y to 0 if the pointer is on the x-axis. In Polar coordinates, locks Angle to 0, 90, -90, or 180 if the pointer is on a drawing plane axis or otherwise locks Distance to its last entered value.
<Space bar> <O> <V> <T> <F> <S> <B> <E> <X> <Y> <Z> <D> <A> <L>,<I> <L>,<P> <L>,<A> <L>,<S> <L>,<Z> <R>,<Q> <R>,<A> <R>,<C> <R>,<E> <R>,<V> <R>,<X> <R>,<Y> <R>,<Z> <?>
Switches between Rectangular and Polar coordinates. Moves the drawing plane origin to the current pointer position. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the view axes. Pressing this key a second time restores context-sensitive rotation. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in a standard Top view. Pressing this key a second time restores context-sensitive rotation. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in a standard Front view. Pressing this key a second time restores context-sensitive rotation. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in a standard Side view. Pressing this key a second time restores context-sensitive rotation. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the active ACS, or if you set up a rotation in the dialog, it will return you to that rotation. In a new file (where you haven't used an ACS yet) it will be the rotation of the view. Rotates between three main planes: top, front, and side (3D only). This also works when your original plane is an ACS or context rotation, so you do not have to use RX, RY to rotate to a 90 plane. Toggles the lock status for the X value. Toggles the lock status for the Y value. Toggles the lock status for the Z value. Toggles the lock status for the Distance value. Toggles the lock status for the Angle value. Locks the current index state. If an axis or distance is not indexed, indexing is disabled. If an axis or distance is indexed, it is locked. The effect is temporary, lasting until a data point is entered or the shortcut is run again. This is useful if you need to index to one axis but not the other, or to enter a data point very close to an axis but not on the axis. Toggles ACS Grid Plane lock, which toggles the ACS Plane and ACS Plane Snap locks, and the Grid view attribute for all views. Toggles ACS Plane lock. Toggles ACS Plane snap lock. Toggles Sticky Z Lock, which is used in conjunction with ACS Plane Snap Lock to force a series of snap points to lie on the active ACS' XY plane (Z=0). Used to quickly and temporarily rotate the drawing plane. The procedure is described in The Rotate Quick keyboard shortcut. Used to permanently rotate the drawing plane. Because it rotates the current ACS, this rotation will still be active after the tool in use is exited. If on, the tool setting Use Current Origin causes the drawing plane origin to be used as the x-axis origin, thereby eliminating the need to enter an extra data point. Of course, in many cases it is desirable to be able to define the x-axis origin at a different location than the drawing plane origin. Rotates the drawing plane to the current ACS. Rotates the drawing plane to match the orientation of a selected element. Rotates the active view to match the current drawing plane. Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its x-axis. Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its y-axis. Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its z-axis. Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts window. Bumps an item in the tool settings dialog box (shortcut is ~, usually right under the <Esc> key there is no need to press the <Shift> key). It finds the first enabled item in the tool settings dialog box that is a toggle button or an option button, and either toggles it or bumps it to the t lid l F i t if d i S tLi d th f i i th A D i d j t th k d
3/24/2010

it switches to arcs without moving the focus from the AccuDraw window. <~> Key-in: ACCUDRAW BUMP TOOLSETTING. <G>,<T> <G>,<K> <G>,<S> <G>,<A> <P> <M> <I> <N> <C> <K> <H>,<A> <H>,<S> <H>,<U> <Q> Moves focus to the Tool Settings window. Opens (or moves focus to) the Key-in window (same as choosing Utilities > Key-in). Opens (or moves focus to) the AccuDraw Settings dialog box (same as choosing Settings > AccuDraw). Opens the Get ACS dialog box, which lets you select a saved Auxiliary Coordinate System. Opens the Data Point Key-in dialog box for entering a single data point . Opens the Data Point Key-in dialog box for entering multiple data points. Activates Intersect snap mode. Activates Nearest snap mode. Activates Center snap mode. Opens the Keypoint Snap Divisor dialog box, which is used to set the Snap Divisor for keypoint snapping. Suspends AccuDraw for the current tool operation. Selecting a new tool, or entering a Reset re-enables AccuDraw. Toggles AccuSnap on/off. Suspends AccuSnap for the current tool operation. Selecting a new tool, or entering a Reset re-enables AccuSnap. Deactivates AccuDraw.
Page 48 of 51
<W>,<A> Opens the Write to ACS dialog box, which lets you save the drawing plane alignment as an ACS.
In addition to the AccuDraw shortcuts, the key-in ACCUDRAW LOCK GRIDPLANE is mapped to the F8 function key. This performs the same function as the <L>,<P> shortcut, which toggles the ACS Plane and ACS Plane Snap locks, and the Grid view attribute for all views.
Keyboard shortcuts are not case sensitive.
Precision Input Key-ins

Precision input is a method of entering data points with the keyboard. Using this method, you can specify the exact location of a data point by specifying any of the following:
design plane coordinates, the distances along the x-axis and y-axis (and z-axis in 3D) from the global origin, which has the coordinates 0,0 (0,0,0 in 3D). distance and angle relative to the view x-axis, from the most recently entered tentative point or data point. distances, along the design plane axes, from the most recently entered tentative point or data point. distances, along the view axes, from the most recently entered tentative point or data point.
Using AccuDraw to enter data points is generally superior to using precision input key-ins.
The Data Point Key-in dialog box is used to enter precision input key-ins.
To open the Data Point Key-in dialog box to enter a single precision input key-in
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <P>. After you enter the key-in, the dialog box automatically closes.
To open the Data Point Key-in dialog box to enter multiple precision input key-ins
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <M>. Aft t k i th di l b i
3/24/2010
Page 49 of 51
Although you can enter key-ins in the Key-in window, it is easier to use the dialog box. The dialog box has an option menu for choosing the type of key-in (for example, DX=). When you enter the key-in, its type becomes the default.
Locks do not affect data points entered with precision input.
The following table summarizes precision input key-ins:

Key-in POINT DELTA POINT VDELTA Alternate Key-in DL= DX= Distance from Design plane origin Along Design plane axes
POINT ABSOLUTE XY=
Last tentative or data point Design plane axes Last tentative or data point View axes Last tentative or data point Relative to view x-axis
POINT DISTANCE DI=
For more information about precision input key-ins, see Precision input key-ins in 3D.
To enter a data point at specific coordinates in the design plane
1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT ABSOLUTE x,y or XY=x,y. x and y are the x- and y-coordinates, respectively.
Absolute. GO denotes the Global Origin; xd and yd denote the DGN file x- and y-axes.
AccuDraw does not provide a means for entering a data point in this manner.
To enter a data point at a distance from the last tentative point or data point and angle relative to the view x-axis
1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT DISTANCE d,Q or DI=d,Q. d is the distance from the most recently entered tentative point or data point and Q is the angle relative to the view x-axis.
3/24/2010
Page 50 of 51
Relative. P denotes the last data or tentative point, xv the view x-axis, and Q the angle.
To enter a data point at distances along the design plane axes from the last tentative point or data point
1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT DELTA x,y or DL= x,y. x and y are the distances along the design plane x- and y-axes, respectively.
Distance. P denotes the last data or tentative point; xd and yd the DGN file x- and y-axes.
To enter a data point at distances along the view axes from the last tentative point or data point
1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT VDELTA x,y or DX=x,y. x and y are the distances along the view x-axis and y-axis, respectively.
Distance. P denotes the last data or tentative point; xv and yv the view x- and y-axes.
3/24/2010
Page 51 of 51
Precision input of relative coordinate values When you use the XY = x,y,z key-in, you can specify relative coordinate values as well as absolute values. That is, you can specify that the new value either is the exact value as given, or that it is plus or minus a specified distance from a snap point. You do this by using the # symbol to indicate the current value of the coordinate. The syntax for these key-ins is:

# means leave the coordinate x,y, or z value as is. #10 means add 10 to the current value of the x, y, or z coordinate. #-10 means subtract 10 from the current value of the x, y, or z coordinate.
The following examples illustrate the use of the # symbol in these key-ins:

XY=#,10 (2D) keep the same x value, but make the y value 10. XY=#,10 (3D) keep the same x value, but make the y value 10, and the z value 0. XY=#,#10 (2D) keep the same x value but add 10 to the y coordinate. XY=#-10,#20 (2D) subtract 10 from the x coordinate and add 20 to the y coordinate. XY=#10,#10,50 (3D) add 10 to the x and y coordinates and make the z coordinate 50.
You can use key-ins that incorporate the # symbol in the Data Point Keyin dialog box also.
To move a vertex in a line string to a Z value of 10
1. Select the Modify Element tool. 2. Snap to the vertex to be moved. 3. Key in xy=#,#,10 The vertex is moved to a z value of 10, while leaving the x and y coordinates at their current value. Syntax notes The syntax of precision input key-ins includes provisions for the following:
Specifying the view in which the data point is entered. The view number optionally follows the last coordinate, distance, or angle. For example, the key-in XY=,,1 enters a data point at the global origin of the design plane in View 1. The equivalent key-in in 3D is XY=,,,1.
Entering multiple data points. A number following a | character at the end of a precision input key-in indicates how many data points to enter. (The default is 1.) For example, the key-in DL=15|3 enters three data points at incremental distances of 15 master units from the last tentative point or data point. AccuDraw does not provide a means for entering multiple data points in this manner.
An omitted value in a precision input key-in is assumed to be 0. For example, the key-in DL=,5:4 is equal to DL=0,5:4.
3/24/2010
Creating Drawing Elements
Page 1 of 57
Creating Creating Drawing Drawing Elements Elements

Setting the Active Element Attributes Primitive Geometry Using Curves Isometric Drawing Using Multi-lines Using Cells Drawing Aids
Setting the Active Element Attributes

When you place an element, the design plane locations of the data points used to draw the element are stored in the design file. In addition, a number of element attributes are stored. Element Symbology Color Line Weight Line Style Other Element Attributes Match tool box Match All Element Settings Match Element Attributes Match Multi-line Definition Match Curve Settings Match Surface Settings
Element Symbology
These attributes compose what is called element symbology:

color line weight line style fill color (for closed elements) class transparency priority (2D only, for display)
Color
MicroStation stores the Active Color and the color attribute of each element in the DGN file. The color for an element can be defined through the Active Color dialog box, which provides several ways to select a color, including a color table that assigns a color as a value from 0255. You can also select a color graphically, by specifying values using a color model, or by selecting a color from a color book. You can change the colors in the open DGN file by attaching a different color table to it. The attached color table is automatically activated each time the design file is reopened. Each seed design file supplied with MicroStation has a color table already attached. Color tables are stored as independent files The active color table can be saved to a file for future attachment to any design file
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh1BEE.htm
3/24/2010
Page 2 of 57
Color can also be set ByCell or ByLevel. If ByCell is selected, when a cell is placed the active color is used in place of the color used when the cell was created. If ByLevel is selected, when an element is placed the color defined for the active level is used to display the element.
When working in DWG workmode, the DWG color palette is the only color table loaded; no other color tables can be loaded. The menu item Settings > Color Table is disabled. An exception to this is that you can still change the color palette by importing raster files. If you choose to use the color palette of the raster file that is, you turn off Current Color Palette, the color palette changes.
ByCell is enabled, by default, only in DWG workmode. You can enable ByCell in DGN workmode by enabling the following capability in the standards, project, or user configuration file: _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_BYCELL.
To set the Active Color
1. From the Attributes tool box, select the Active Color icon. The Active Color dialog box drops down.
2. In the Active Color tab, select the desired color from the color palette. The new active color displays in the preview area. After you click OK, the new active color displays on the Attributes tool box.
To set the Active Color using a True Color value
1. From the Attributes tool box, select the Active Color icon. The Active Color dialog box drops down. 2. Select the True Color tab.
3/24/2010
Page 3 of 57
3. From the Color Model menu, choose the color model to use. 4. Enter values for Hue, Saturation, and Value. or From the color rectangle, select a color. The new active color displays in the preview area. 5. Click OK. The new active color displays on the Attributes tool box.
To set the Active Color using a color book
1. From the Attributes tool box, select the Active Color icon. The Active Color dialog box drops down. 2. Select the Color Book tab.
3/24/2010

3. From the drop-down menu, choose the color book to use. 4. From the color list, select the color to use. The new active color displays in the preview area. 5. Click OK. The new active color displays on the Attributes tool box.
To set the Active Color with a key-in
Page 4 of 57
1. In the Key-in window, key in ACTIVE COLOR <color_name | color_number> or CO=<color_name | color_number> .
Elements have other attributes such as the Active Fill Color, which applies only to closed elements such as circles and ellipses.
Line Weight
MicroStation stores the Active Line Weight and the line weight attribute of each element as a value in the 0-31 range. Line Weight can also be set ByCell or ByLevel. If ByCell is selected, when a cell is placed the active line weight is used in place of the line weight used when the cell was created. If ByLevel is selected, when an element is placed the line weight defined for the active level is used to display the element.
ByCell is enabled, by default, only in DWG workmode. You can enable ByCell in DGN workmode by enabling the following capability in the standards, project, or user configuration file: _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_BYCELL .
To set the Active Line Weight from the Attributes box
1. From the Attributes tool box's Line Weight option menu, choose the desired line weight value.
Line Weight option menu
Alternative Method To set the Active Line Weight
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The Design File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Element Attributes.
3/24/2010

3. Select the desired line weight from the Weight field's option menu. The new active line weight displays on the Attributes tool box.
To set the Active Line Weight with a key-in
Page 5 of 57
1. In the Key-in window, key in ACTIVE WEIGHT <weight_number> or WT=<weight_number>.
Line Style
A line style definition can specify the following:

A stroke pattern composed of dash strokes and gap strokes of varying lengths. Small drawings called point symbols at varying intervals.
Line style definitions are customizable. The default set of line styles in the Line Styles dialog box is intended as a sample. In most cases, line styles should be set up by a site or project manager.
Some of the sample line styles supplied in MicroStation's sample workspaces (not to scale)
Line style modifiers Line style modifiers or overrides allow some characteristics of a line style to be modified as elements are placed without requiring separate line style definitions. Modifiers are available for the following stroke pattern and stroke attributes:

Origin and end widths. These modifiers are applied to each stroke and can be used to create wide or tapered elements. Stroke pattern shift.
In addition, a Scale Factor modifier is available. This modifier is applied to all length values in the line style definition. Line Style can also be set ByCell or ByLevel. If ByCell is selected, when a cell is placed the active line style is used in place of the line style used when the cell was created. If ByLevel is selected, when an element is placed the line style defined for the active level is used to display the element. ByCell is enabled, by default, only in DWG workmode. You can enable ByCell in DGN workmode by enabling the following capability in the standards, project, or user configuration file: _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_BYCELL.
General Procedure To use a custom line style
3/24/2010

1. Set the Active Line Style. 2. (Optional) Activate any desired line style modifiers. 3. Place elements with the Active Line Style and any active modifiers.
To set the Active Line Style
Page 6 of 57
1. From the Attributes tool box's Line Style option menu, choose the desired line style. see footnote 40
Line Styles option menu
Alternative Method To set the Active Line Style
1. From the Element menu's Line Style, choose Custom. The Line Styles dialog box opens.
2. In the Names list box on the Line Styles dialog box, double-click the name of the desired line style. or In the Names list box on the Line Styles dialog box, select the name of the desired line style, and click the large button at the bottom of the dialog box on which a sample of the selected line style is displayed. (To make the large button visible, you must first turn on the Show Details check box.)
Alternative Method To set the Active Line Style with a key-in
1. In the Key-in window, key in ACTIVE STYLE <style_name |style_number> or LC=<style_name | style_number>.
To set the active Global Line Style Scale factor for custom line styles
3/24/2010

1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Element Attributes. 3. In the Global Line Style Scale field, key in the desired scale factor. 4. Click OK.
Page 7 of 57
For example, setting the Global Line Style Scale to 5 will cause custom line styles to be placed at five times their normal scale. Activating line style modifiers Line style modifiers are activated in the Line Styles dialog box. The large button in the dialog box shows the line style selected in the list box with active modifiers applied. (To make the large button visible, you must first turn on the Show Details check box.)
The New User interface does not let you activate line style modifiers.
To override the starting or ending width for each dash stroke in elements placed with the Active Line Style
1. From the Element menu's Line Style, choose Custom. The Line Styles dialog box opens. 2. (Optional) To set the start width, turn on Origin, and key in the desired width in master units in the Origin field. 3. (Optional) To set the ending width, turn on End, and key in the desired width in master units in the End field.
Line Styles setting box with Show Details on
To apply a scale factor to all displayable characteristics of the Active Line Style
1. From the Element menu's Line Style, choose Custom. The Line Styles dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Scale Factor, and key in the desired scale factor in the Scale Factor field.
To shift or adjust stroke patterns differently than specified in the Active Line Style definition
1. From the Element menu's Line Style, choose Custom. The Line Styles dialog box opens. 2. To shift stroke patterns relative to the beginning of elements or element segments, choose Distance from the Shift option menu, and key in the shift distance in master units in the Distance field. or To adjust stroke patterns such that a fraction of the first strokes in stroke patterns are displayed at the start and end of elements or element segments choose Fraction from the Shift option menu and key in the fraction in decimals in the Fraction field
3/24/2010
Page 8 of 57
or To center the pattern along a segment by splitting the first stroke and stretching the first and last stroke, choose Centered from the Shift option menu. This option is provided for compatibility with DWG format.
While the Change Element Attributes tool is used to adjust the line style modifiers of an existing element as a set, the Modify Line Style Attributes tool in the Change Attributes tool box can be used to adjust individual line style modifiers.
Standard line styles Standard line styles (also known as line codes), numbered 0-7, are based on output device coordinates, and therefore are not truly WYSIWYG (what-you-see-is-what-you-get), as are custom line styles. Hence, it is recommended that you use custom line styles instead of standard line styles.
Line Styles 17 are disabled while DWG workmode is in effect. Only custom line styles are active in this mode.
Other Element Attributes

In addition to level, color, line weight, and line style, elements have these attributes:

Fill (none, opaque, or outline) Class (primary or construction) The Area attribute determines whether a closed element is a solid or a hole Transparency Priority The Material attribute is applicable to a surface of a 3D model. Element Templates
Fill The fill attribute applies only to closed elements such as circles, ellipses, and polygons. Closed elements completely enclose the area within their boundaries.
Top: Opaque fill; Bottom: Outline fill
3/24/2010
Page 9 of 57
By default, a closed element is displayed in a wireframe view by lines that outline the area occupied by the element. The area of the element inside the outline is transparent. A closed element is filled when the area within its outline is displayed as a solid area of color. The element's fill color is determined by the Active Fill Color at time of placement. When an element is opaque, it is displayed as a solid shape. In that case, the lines outlining the element are not discernible since the fill has the same color. A gradient may also be assigned as the fill color.
In any view, opaque and filled elements are displayed as outlines unless the Fill view attribute is on for that view. In other words, turning off Fill in a view hides the fill. The effects of the fill attribute and the Fill view attribute are summarized in this table: Fill Type None Opaque Outline No fill displayed Element filled with color of the element Fill on Fill off No fill displayed No fill displayed
Element filled with Active Fill Color or a gradient No fill displayed A series of lines or a closed line string can also enclose an area. However, MicroStation treats neither as a shape. Therefore, neither can be assigned an area or fill attribute.
To set the Active Fill Type and Color
1. Select a tool in the Polygons task. 2. From the Fill Type option menu in the Tool Settings window, choose Opaque or Outline. 3. In the Fill Color dialog box, select the Indexed Color, True Color, or Color Book tab. 4. Select the desired color.
To set the Active Fill to a gradient
1. Select a tool in the Polygons task. 2. From the Fill Type option menu in the Tool Settings window, choose Opaque or Outline. 3. In the Fill Color dialog box, select the Gradient Fill tab. 4. From the Type option menu, choose the fill type. 5. From the Color Mode option menu, choose the number of colors: 1, 2, or multiple. 6. Adjust the gradient as desired.
To add color keys to a gradient
1. From the Fill Color dialog box, choose the Gradient Fill tab. 2. From the Type option menu, choose the fill type. 3. From the Color Mode option menu, choose Multiple Colors. 4. Enter a data point on the color bar at the desired position for the key. The key is added. Initially, the color is set to the interpolated value of the gradient at that point. 5. Repeat the above step for further color keys, as required. MicroStation allows a maximum of six intermediate color keys.
To reposition a color key on a gradient
1. From the Fill Color dialog box, choose the Gradient Fill tab.
3/24/2010

2. From the Type option menu, choose the fill type. 3. From the Color Mode option menu, choose Multiple Colors.
Page 10 of 57
4. Click on the vertical bar for the desired color key, and drag it to its new location. You cannot drag a key past another key, but they can be abutted to cause a sharp edge between the adjacent colors.
To move multiple keys simultaneously, hold the <Ctrl> key as you select the keys. When you move the keys, the space between them is preserved.
If you drag another key all the way to either end of the gradient color bar, then that key will replace the end key.
To change the color of a color key
1. From the Fill Color dialog box, choose the Gradient Fill tab. 2. From the Type option menu, choose the fill type. 3. From the Color Mode option menu, choose Multiple Colors. 4. Click on the color (lower) button for the color key. The Modify Color dialog box opens. 5. Use the controls in the dialog box to define the required color. 6. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the gradient is redisplayed with the new color included.
To delete a color key from a gradient
1. From the Fill Color dialog box, choose the Gradient Fill tab. 2. From the Type option menu, choose the fill type. 3. From the Color Mode option menu, choose Multiple Colors. 4. Click on the vertical bar, or the top button, for the required key. The button at the top of the color key highlights. 5. (Optional) Use <Ctrl> data points to select additional keys to delete. 6. Press the <Delete> key.
The first and last keys cannot be deleted. If, however, you drag another key all the way to either end of the gradient color bar, then that key will replace the end key.
To turn Fill on or off in a view in one or more views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. From the View option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn Fill on or off. 4. Repeat steps 23 for additional views.
To turn Fill on or off in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>).
3/24/2010

From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn Fill on or off.
Page 11 of 57
To change the fill type and color of an element, use the Change Element to Active Fill Type tool in the Change Attributes tool box.
Class By convention, elements with the class attribute of Construction are used as drawing aids. For example, you might place a construction element in a particular location as an element to snap other elements to, but you would not plot the construction element when the design is complete. The elements that are actually part of the design usually have the class attribute of Primary.
To set the Active Class
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Element Attributes. 3. From the Class option menu, choose Primary or Construction. 4. Click the OK button. Element Transparency Element transparency is a display setting that lets you apply transparency to elements in a model. Transparency may vary from 0% to 100%. A value of 0 indicates no transparency at all, while a value of 100% indicates almost complete transparency. Transparency also may be applied to one or more references via the References dialog box, and to one or more levels via the Level Manager dialog box. When transparency is applied to a

Reference, it includes all elements in that reference. Level, it includes all elements on that level.
To set the Active Element Transparency
1. From the Attributes tool box, choose the Active Element Transparency icon. 2. In the dialog box, key in a new priority value, or use the slider to adjust the priority value.
To modify the element transparency
1. Select the elements to modify. 2. In Primary Tools tool box, choose the Element Information icon. 3. In the Element Info dialog box, modify the value for Transparency.
Element transparency is not the same as transparency set in a material definition for rendering. When rendering, material definitions takes precedence over element transparency settings.
Element Priority (2D models only) Element Priority is a display only setting that determines the order in which elements are displayed in a view. Essentially, this display priority setting adds a calculated Z value for to 2D co-planar elements, similar to the Z value in 3D models. In 3D models, elements closer to the eye are always displayed in front of elements further from the eye so display priority is not necessary.
3/24/2010
Page 12 of 57
In a 2D model, you can assign an active element priority, which sets the display priority value for new elements that you place in the model. The elements assigned the highest element priority value are displayed in the front, while the elements assigned the lowest values are displayed at the back. In 2D models, you can assign Display Priority values to references, levels, and to individual elements. The hierarchy for Display Priority is Reference : Level : Element. That is:
All elements in a reference with a higher Reference Display Priority will appear in front of all elements from references with a lower value. Within a single model, or from references with the same reference display priority, elements on levels with higher Level Display Priority will appear in front of those with a lower value. Where elements have the same reference and level display priority, then Element Display Priority determines those that will appear in front of others. Where two elements have the same Reference, Level, and Element display priorities, then the one that appears later in the display order (that is, file position and update sequence) appears on top.
To set the Active Element Priority
1. From the Attributes tool box, choose the Active Element Priority icon. 2. In the dialog box, key in a new priority value, or use the slider to adjust the priority value.
To modify the element priority
1. Select the elements to modify. 2. In Primary Tools tool box, choose the Element Information icon. 3. In the Element Info dialog box, modify the value for Priority. Element template An element template is a named set of element properties that can be applied to existing elements or can be used to set the active settings that are used for element placement. Their primary purpose is to increase consistency when drawing. Templates can be stored in DGN libraries or in DGN files. Templates are defined in the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize). The following is a typical sequence for working with templates: 1. Import data into a template, or 2. Add a template and add its properties. 3. Manage your templates (add and delete properties, rename, copy, move, and delete them). 4. Organize your templates in hierarchical groups called template groups. 5. Place elements that are associated with, or locked to, your template. 6. Check and update elements associated with your template by using the Standards Checker, or 7. In the Customize dialog box, use menu items on the Utilities menu to update all elements or to update selected elements associated with your template. Once you have set up templates you can use them when you place elements or you can apply them to existing elements. The Active Element Template icon in the Attributes tool box provides a drop-down list of available templates and it allows you to associate (or lock) elements to the active template during placement.
3/24/2010

There is an important difference between setting the active element template and locking the active element template:
Page 13 of 57
When you set the template, the active element attribute settings in the Attributes tool box change to the properties defined in the template. When you place an element with the template set, the element inherits the template's properties but the element is not locked to the template. When a template is locked, the active element attribute settings in the Attributes tool box change to the properties defined in the template and placed elements inherit the template's properties. In addition, the elements are associated with, or are locked to, the template that was active when they were placed. If the template is one that was created and stored in the open DGN file, this means the associated elements will be resymbolized automatically when properties in their template are modified. If the template is from a DGN library, you must run the Standards Checker or use a menu item in the Customize dialog box to resymbolize the elements.
To determine which template is active
1. In the Attributes tool box, move your pointer over the Active Element Template icon.
A tooltip displays the name of the active element template group, followed by the template name.
To set the active element template
1. In the Attributes tool box, click the downward pointing triangle next to the Active Element Template icon.
A drop-down list of available templates is displayed. 2. Click the name of the template in the drop-down list. The active element attribute settings in the Attributes tool box change to the properties defined in the template.
To lock the active element template when placing an element
1. In the Attributes tool box, click the downward pointing triangle next to the Active Element Template icon. A drop-down list of available templates is displayed. 2. Click the name of the template in the drop-down list. The active element attribute settings in the Attributes tool box change to the properties defined in the template. 3. Click the Active Element Template icon so that it is highlighted with a depressed background. The template is locked. 4. Place the element. The placed element is associated (or locked) to the template.
If you want to place an element with slightly different attributes but still want the element to be associated with a particular template, you can lock the Active Element Template icon and select different attributes before or after you place the element.
If you select different attributes and save your settings, when you open another DGN file your saved settings will remain active. They will not be overridden by the attributes in the active element template, even if it is set or locked.
Matching the active attribute settings to element attributes
3/24/2010
Page 14 of 57
At times you may find it convenient to change an active attribute setting by matching it to the corresponding attribute of an element in your model. For example, you might want to match the Active Line Weight setting to the line weight of an existing element.
To change an active attribute setting to match the corresponding attribute of an existing element
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool.
The pointer changes to an arrow resembling the Element Selection tool icon, and the title of the Tool Settings window changes to Element Selection. 2. Position the pointer over the element. 3. When the element highlights, drag it to the Attributes tool box and drop it on the icon for the setting. For example, to set the Active Line Weight to match an element's line weight, drag the element and drop it on the Active Line Weight icon in the Attributes tool box.
Attributes tool box
This technique works with the following controls and icons in the Attributes tool box:

Active Level Active Color Active Line Style Active Line Weight Active Element Class (this icon is hidden by default in the tool box) Active Element Transparency Active Element Priority
If you enable the display of the Symbology Preview box in the Attributes tool box, you can use the drag and drop technique to change all of the above settings to match the attributes of an existing element.
3/24/2010
Page 15 of 57
Symbology Preview box
To change the general active element attribute settings to match the attributes of an existing element
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool. 2. Position the pointer over the element. 3. When the element highlights, drag it to the Attributes tool box, and drop it on the Symbology Preview box.
Like any settings changes, you cannot Undo these drag and drop operations.
The Element Selection tool is commonly used to select the elements that will be acted upon by an element manipulation or modification tool. When you finish dragging an element to the Attributes tool box, the element will be in this selected state and displayed with handles to indicate its selection. It is possible to select multiple elements with the Element Selection tool. However, dragging multiple selected elements to the Attributes tool box will change the setting in question only if all of the selected elements share the same attribute for example, they all have the same line weight.
Using matching tools
You can also match active attribute settings to attributes of existing elements using matching tools. These tools are grouped in the Match tool box although in some cases they are also accessible through tasks. The settings upon which matching tools operate differ from tool to tool, and in some cases you can individually select one or more settings per usage in the tool's settings window. Some of these tools, such as Match Dimension Settings, operate only on settings related to a specific element type. The Match All Element Settings tool, on the other hand, functions exactly as implied by its name; it operates on both general active element attribute settings Active Level, Active Color, etc. and element type-specific active settings.
Match tool box

The tools in the Match tool box are used to set element attribute settings to those of an element in the design (or a reference), making it easy to place elements with the same attributes as existing elements.
To
Select in the Match tool box
Change all active element attribute settings, including those specific to particular element types, so they match the attributes of an element in the design.
Match All Element Settings (SmartMatch) see footnote 41
3/24/2010
Page 16 of 57
Set the active element attributes so they match those of an existing element.
Match Element Attributes see footnote 42
Set the active text settings the same as the corresponding attributes of text in the design. Match Text Attributes see footnote 43
Set the active multi-line definition to the definition of a multi-line element. Match Multi-line Definition
Set the active dimension settings to the dimension attributes of a dimension element. Match Dimension Settings
Set the active pattern settings to match the attributes of a pattern element. Match Pattern Attributes see footnote 44
Match the active B-spline curve settings to the attributes of a B-spline curve. Match Curve Settings
Match the active B-spline surface settings to the attributes of a B-spline surface. Match Surface Settings
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MATCH [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Primitive Geometry
Linear task Place SmartLine Place Line Place Multi-line Place Stream Line String Place Point or Stream Curve Construct Angle Bisector Construct Minimum Distance Line Construct Line at Active Angle Points task Place Active Point Construct Points Between Data Points Project Active Point Onto Element Construct Active Point at Intersection Construct Points Along Element Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element
3/24/2010

PLACE POINT STRING <CONTINUOUS | DISJOINT> Polygons task Place Block Place Shape Place Orthogonal Shape Place Regular Polygon Circles task Place Circle Place Ellipse Place Arc Place Half Ellipse Place Quarter Ellipse Modify Arc Radius Modify Arc Angle Modify Arc Axis
Page 17 of 57
Linear task
The tools in the Linear task are used to place linear elements.
Linear task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Linear task
Place a line, line string, shape, arc, or circle or a combination thereof as a complex element. Place SmartLine
Place or construct a line. Place Line
Place a multi-line. Place Multi-line
Place the Active Point
Points task
Draw curves and extract iso-parametric lines from a solid or B-spline surface.
Create Curves task
Place a stream line string (primarily for tracing images when digitizing). Pl St Li St i
3/24/2010
Page 18 of 57
Place a point curve or a stream curve. see footnote 45 Place Point or Stream Curve
Construct a line that bisects an angle. Construct Angle Bisector
Construct a line between two elements at their closest points. Construct Minimum Distance Line
Construct a line at the Active Angle. Construct Line at Active Angle
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX LINEAR [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Points task
The tools in the Points task are used to place the Active Point. An active point is used as a reference or monument point in the design plane. It can consist of a cell from the attached cell library, a text character, a symbol, or a line with no (zero) length (a point element).
Points task (opened as tool box)
The Active Angle for placement is set in the DGN File Settings dialog box (Settings menu > Design File). The Active Scale for cell placement is also set in the DGN File Settings dialog box. The Active Font, Text Height, and Text Width for character placement are set in the Text dialog box (Element menu > Text Styles).
To Select in the Points task
Place the Active Point. Place Active Point
Construct equally spaced Active Points between two data points. Construct Points Between Data Points
Place the Active Point on an element at the point closest to the data point. Project Active Point Onto Element
3/24/2010
Page 19 of 57
Construct a point at an intersection. Construct Active Point at Intersection
Construct a specified number of Active Points along an element between two data points. Construct Points Along Element
Construct the Active Point on an element at a keyed in distance. Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element Construct point strings. Key in PLACE POINT STRING <CONTINUOUS | DISJOINT>
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX POINTS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Polygons task
The tools in the Polygons task are used to place planar polygonal shapes.
Polygons task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Polygons task
Place a rectangular shape. Place Block
Place a polygonal shape. Place Shape
Place a shape with each segment either perpendicular or parallel to all other segments in the shape. Place Orthogonal Shape
Place a regular polygon (one with all sides and angles the same). Place Regular Polygon
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX POLYGONS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Rectangular solids can be drawn in 3D with the Place Slab tool, or can be generated from a planar closed element with the Extrude tool.
3/24/2010
Page 20 of 57
Circles task
The tools in the Circles task are used to place ellipses (including circles) and arcs.
Circles task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Circles task
Place a circle. Place Circle
Place an ellipse, precisely positioning the center and one end of the primary axis. Place Ellipse
Place a circular arc. Place Arc
Place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 180. Place Half Ellipse
Place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 90. Place Quarter Ellipse
Modify a circular arc's radius, sweep angle, and center. Modify Arc Radius
Extend or shorten an arc's length (sweep angle). Modify Arc Angle
Lengthen or shorten an axis of an arc. Modify Arc Axis
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ELLIPSES [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Using Curves
With l d fti t l d i t ( th h i f i t ) ith F h Mi St ti h i ff t
3/24/2010
Page 21 of 57
a variety of mathematical French curves for placing curves on the basis of data points in the design plane, including point curves and NURBS (non-uniform rational B-splines). Composite curves actually can consist of a combination of line segments, arcs, and Bzier curves. You can draw curves without any understanding of the mathematics behind them, or you can create curves based on sophisticated mathematical formulas. The easiest way to become familiar with curve placement tools is to enter a series of data points or a line string, then construct different curves based on those elements. With B-splines, you can adjust the settings as you watch the curve update, then accept the curve when it has the correct shape. Point Curves B-spline Curves Composite Curves Creating Any Conceivable Curve B-splines task Create Curves task Place B-spline Curve Create Curve by Tangents Place Composite Curve Construct Interpolation by Arcs Place Conic Place Spiral Place Helix Offset Curve Extract Iso-parametric Lines Curve Calculator Curve Calculator dialog box
Point Curves
Point curves are based on a relatively simple mathematical formula there are no settings that control the curve's shape. As you place a point curve, it is dynamically displayed as you enter data points. Of course, you can place active points or other elements to snap to as you place the point curve, and you can enter the data points using AccuDraw.
Point curves are placed with the Place Point or Stream Curve tool in the Linear task.
Point curves
B-spline Curves
A B-spline curve is more complex mathematically than a point curve. A B-spline curve's shape is determined by the number and location of its poles, which are represented as vertices of the curve's control polygon and its order.
3/24/2010
Page 22 of 57
B-spline curve and its control polygon.
B-spline curves are drawn with the Place B-spline Curve tool in the Create Curves task as well as several special-purpose 2D B-spline tools.
You can place a B-spline curve by entering data points or construct it by identifying a line string or shape this is determined by choosing Placement or Construction, respectively, from the Define By option menu in the Tool Settings window. Methods by which the curve is calculated Unlike point curves, there are a number of Methods, which can be chosen from the Method option menu, for calculating the final curve that results.
Method Define Poles Through Points Catmull-Rom Data points or vertices of element define Vertices of control polygon. Points on the curve. A set of points that is closely approximated.
Least Squares by Tolerance and Least Squares by Number A set of points that the curve approximates or is fit to.
These illustrations show the different types of B-spline curves constructed from the same line string.
B-spline curves constructed based on a line string. Method set to, from left: Define Poles, Through Points, Least Squares, Catmull-Rom.
Least Squares by Tolerance
Curves created with this method are approximated, based on the points used to define the curve and the Tolerance setting. The maximum deviation of the input points from the curve is controlled by the Tolerance setting.
Least Squares by Number
This Method lets you adjust the number of poles in the control polygon. If the number of poles is lower than the number of data points or vertices, the curve is fit using the least squares method. Generally, the more poles in the control polygon, the better the curve will fit a regular shape.
Catmull-Rom
The Catmull-Rom curve is popular with aircraft and ship hull designers it passes directly through the data points or vertices on which it is based, as do point curves and B-splines Through Points. In general, the approximation is more accurate than with other methods.
3/24/2010

Page 23 of 57
Point curves are flat between the first and second data points as well as between the next-to-last and last data points. With very irregular shapes, B-spline curves Through Points can develop unwanted loops.
Line string in shape of square as the basis for B-spline: Through Points (left) and Catmull-Rom (right).
B-spline curve attributes B-spline curve settings are set in the B-spline and 3D dialog box, which is opened by choosing B-spline and 3D from the Element menu.
Changes to the attributes of existing B-spline curves are carried out with the Modify Curves task's Change to Active Curve Settings tool.
Display of the curve or control polygon
You can turn on or off the display of either the control polygon or curve.
Order
In practical terms, a B-spline curve's order defines the curve's distance from the control polygon's poles. The greater the order, the further the curve can lie from the poles of its control polygon. A high-order curve is freer than a low-order curve. The limit to a curve's order is the number of poles: You cannot place a B-spline curve with a greater order than the number of poles.
3/24/2010
Page 24 of 57
B-spline curves (Method set to Define Poles and Define By set to Construction). The Order increases from left to right. In these cases, the line strings are congruent with the control polygons.
Closure
A closed B-spline starts and ends at the same point, and encloses an area. A closed B-spline can also be periodic, which means that all derivatives of the curve (less than order -1) are continuous through the points. In other words, a periodic B-spline passes smoothly through the point at which its ends are joined, without a kink in the curve. In a design, a B-spline whose ends do not meet can be called open. Mathematically, however, an open B-spline starts at its first pole and ends at its last pole, and the ends need not meet. Setting the Closure tool setting to Open results in mathematically open B-spline curves. You can use the Change to Active Curve Settings tool to change a periodic B-spline's definition in the model to be a mathematically open B-spline without changing its shape. This is helpful when the DGN file is to be transferred to a package that does not support periodic B-splines. Special-purpose 2D B-spline tools These tools in the Create Curves task are used to place the following special types of 2D B-spline curves. The Place Conic tool is used to place a conic section a hyperbola, parabola, or partial ellipse.
The Place Spiral tool is used to place a transitional spiral this is most commonly used for highway design.
The Construct Interpolation by Arcs tool is used to place a complex chain of arcs that passes through a given set of points.
Composite Curves
The Place Composite Curve tool in the Create Curves task lets you place a complex element that can contain line segments, arcs, and a special type of B-spline curve, a Bzier curve.
3/24/2010

Bzier curves
Page 25 of 57
A Bzier curve is a B-spline curve with the same number of poles as its order. Thus, a fourth-order B-spline with four poles is a fourthorder Bzier curve. These are very popular as they allow control of a curve's starting and ending position as well as the tangents at those positions.
Composite curve comprising a line, an arc, a Bzier curve, another line, and an arc
The handles that appear when placing a Bzier curve with the Place Composite Curve tool control the tangents at the ends of the curve segment. The line defined by the first and second poles is the initial tangent direction, and the line defined by the third and fourth poles is the final tangent direction. The length of the handles controls the size of the tangent at each end. (A tangent is a vector so it has direction and magnitude.)
Creating Any Conceivable Curve
The Curve Calculator tool lets you create any conceivable planar curve, based on a mathematical formula.

A pre-defined curve can be selected from a library and placed in the design. New curves can be defined and added to the supplied libraries. This is similar to programming a programmable calculator.
General Procedure To place a pre-defined curve
1. In the Create Curves task, select the Curve Calculator tool. The Curve Calculator dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 26 of 57
2. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator dialog box, choose Open File. The Open resource file dialog box opens. 3. Select a curve library file and click the OK button. The Open resource file dialog box closes and the Open Curve Resource dialog box opens for the selected resource.
4. Select a curve in the list box and click OK. The Open Curve Resource dialog box closes and the selected curve's defining equations are listed in the Curve Calculator dialog box. 5. (Optional) Edit values in the equation that defines the curve. 6. From the Create As menu, choose Bspline or Line String as the element to place. 7. Click the Place button. 8. Enter a data point to define the curve's origin. The curve is defined relative to the coordinate system of the view in which this data point is entered.
To select another curve from the resource
1. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator dialog box, choose More Curves. The Open Curve Resource dialog box opens. 2. (Optional) Select another resource file from the Files menu.. 3. Select a curve in the list box and click OK.
To edit values in the equation that defines a curve
1. In the Curve Calculator dialog box, edit the values. Items in the Curve Calculator dialog box can be edited as you would with a word processor. For example, you can highlight the required value and then key in the new value. Each equation must end with a semi-colon ;.
General Procedure To define a curve's formula
1. In the Create Curves task, select the Curve Calculator tool. The Curve Calculator dialog box opens. 2. In the Curve field, key in the curve's name. 3. Define the equations, finishing each with a semi-colon ;. 4. (Optional) Place a curve to test the equation.
3/24/2010

5. Save the equation.
Page 27 of 57
Some mathematical knowledge is needed to define a new curve. A curve is defined by the parametric equations for the x, y, and z coordinates of the curve. These formulas give the value of the articular coordinate as a parameter t that is between zero and one (0.0 < t < 1.0). This is the standard parametric form of a curve described in mathematical text books.
Examples A sinusoid with an amplitude of 5 and wave length of 10 can be defined with the following equations:
Formula x(t) = 10u(t) Syntax x = 10*t
y(t) = 5sin(u(t)) y(t) = 5*sin(u) u(t) = 2[pi ]t
u(t) = 2*pi*t
The third equation is necessary since t must be between zero and one and we want an entire period of the sine wave, from 02[pi ]. Auxiliary functions such as this can be defined. By using two auxiliary variable-value equations for the amplitude and wave length a more flexible definition results.
x = wl*t; y = amp*sin(u); u = 2*pi*t; amp = 5; wl = 10; This definition could be used to place sine waves of any amplitude and wave length by modifying the last two equations. It is clear, however, that the first three equations should not be modified, since doing that would corrupt the sine wave's definition. Dimensionality Curves can be defined in 2 or 3 dimensions; if no z formula is present the z value defaults to 0, thereby creating a planar curve. Function format The formulas defining the x, y, and z coordinates of the curve can use trigonometric, hyperbolic, logarithmic, exponential, or power functions. The format for such functions is as follows:
Function sin (value) cos (value) tan (value) asin (value) acos (value) atan (value) atan2 (y, x) sinh (value) cosh (value) Returns sine of value see footnote 52 cosine of valuea tangent of valuea arc sine of valuea arc cosine of valuea arc tangent of valuea arctan(y)/xa hyperbolic sine of value hyperbolic cosine of value
3/24/2010

tanh (value) hyperbolic tangent of value
Page 28 of 57
asinh (value) inverse hyperbolic sine of value exp (value) ldexp (x,p) log (value) evalue 2xp natural logarithm of value
log10 (value) base 10 logarithm of value ldexp (x, y) sqrt (value) xy square root of value
Curve Calculator also understands standard C operators.
Deriving a curve from an existing curve A curve can be defined from a set of formulas alone or can be derived from formulas and an existing curve (the root curve). If a curve is derived, then these values can be referenced in the equations. These values are derived from the Frenet frame of the root curve and are updated depending on the value of t, the curve parameter. All these values begin with an underscore.
Value _rx _ry _rz _tx _ty _tz _mx _my _mz _bx _by _bz Description x coordinate of root curve's position y coordinate of root curve's position z coordinate of root curve's position x coordinate of root curve's tangent y coordinate of root curve's tangent z coordinate of root curve's tangent x coordinate of root curve's normal y coordinate of root curve's normal z coordinate of root curve's normal x coordinate of root curve's binormal y coordinate of root curve's binormal z coordinate of root curve's binormal
_kappa curvature of root curve _tau torsion of root curve
The following constants can be referenced in equations:
3/24/2010

Value pi e _w Description [pi ] e Omega Constant
Page 29 of 57
B-splines task
Tools for creating and modifying B-spline curves are accessed from the B-splines task.
B-splines task (opened as tool box)
The B-splines task is a sub-task of the Surface Modeling and Solids Modeling tasks.
To Place a B-spline curve or Curve by tangents, or Place a composite curve, or Construct interpolation by arcs, or Place a conic, spiral, or helix, or Offset an element, or Extract Iso-parametric lines, or Calculate a curve. Create Curves task Use tools in the
Change to active curve settings, or Rebuild a curve, or Extend a curve,
3/24/2010

Change the direction of an element, or Convert an element to a B-spline, or Construct a blend curve, or Drop a B-spline curve, or Flatten, or project a curve, or Deform a curve or Evaluate a curve. Modify Curves task
Page 30 of 57
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX BSPLINE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Create Curves task

The Create Curves task has tools that are used to draw curves and extract iso-parametric lines from a solid or B-spline surface.
Create Curves task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Create Curves task
Place a B-spline curve. Place B-spline Curve
Create a B-spline curve that passes through a set of points while maintaining user-defined tangent directions at those points. Create Curve by Tangents
Place a composite curve, which can have line strings, arcs, or Bzier curves as components. Place Composite Curve
3/24/2010
Page 31 of 57
Place or construct a complex chain of arcs that passes through a given set of points. Construct Interpolation by Arcs
Place a parabola, hyperbola, or partial ellipse. Place Conic
Place a clothoid or Archimedes or logarithmic spiral. Place Spiral
Place a helix in a 3D design. Place Helix
Construct a B-spline curve that is the same distance from the identified element at all points. Offset Curve
Extract a B-spline curve(s) from a solid or a B-spline surface. Extract Iso-parametric Lines
Place a curve by defining its mathematical formula. Curve Calculator
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVECREATE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
To construct a curve along the intersection of two 3D elements, use the Construct Trim tool in the Modify Surfaces task.
B-spline curve and surface settings are set in the B-spline and 3D dialog box, which is opened by choosing B-spline and 3D from the Element menu.
Isometric Drawing
Isometric drawing is a technique used to represent 3D relationships in a 2D design. There are special tools to quickly and accurately place isometric representations of blocks and circles, and you can configure the screen pointer to make the job even easier. However, such drawings are not 3D models; they are strictly illustrative.
To set the Isometric (drawing) Plane
1. From the Settings menu's Locks submenu , choose Full. The Locks dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 32 of 57
2. From the Isometric Plane option menu, choose Top, Left, Right, or All.
You can also set the Isometric Plane in the Tool Settings window for the Place Isometric Block and Place Isometric Circle tools.
To force each data point to lie on the Isometric Plane
1. In the Settings menu's Locks submenu , turn on Isometric (Lock). When a linear element is placed, it snaps to the Isometric Plane.
Line string placed with Isometric Lock on and Isometric Plane set to Top. Note how the lines are constrained.
To configure the pointer for isometric drawing
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. 2. In the Preferences dialog box's Category list box, select Input. 3 F th P i t T ti h I ti
3/24/2010

The pointer's cross hairs will indicate graphically the Isometric Plane in which elements are placed.
Page 33 of 57
4. (Optional) From the Pointer Size option menu, choose Full View. The pointer's cross hairs will extend to the edges of the screen, facilitating alignment of new elements with elements in the same isometric plane. 5. Click OK. Isometric tool box Place Isometric Block Place Isometric Circle
Isometric tool box

The tools in the Isometric tool box are used to represent 3D relationships in a 2D design.
To
Select in the Isometric tool box
Place a shape that represents a rectangle projected from the isometric drawing plane. Place Isometric Block
Place an ellipse that represents a circle projected from the isometric drawing plane. Place Isometric Circle
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ISOMETRIC [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
To create 3D models, draw in 3D.
Using Multi-lines
A multi-line element consists of up to 16 independently-defined lines and optional end caps and joints. Changing a multi-line style will update all elements in the file that use the selected multi-line style.
Multi-lines
Defining Multi-lines Dropping Multi-lines
3/24/2010

Multi-line Styles
Page 34 of 57
Defining Multi-lines
The active multi-line definition specifies the form of multi-lines placed with the Place Multi-line tool. The component lines can be varying distances apart. Each component line can have its own level, color, line style, and line weight. You can easily clean up intersections in multi-lines and modify individual multi-line components using the tools in the Multi-line Joints tool box. You can associate multi-lines to other elements.
General Procedure To define a multi-line
1. From the Element menu, choose Multi-line Styles. The Multi-line Styles dialog box opens.
The controls show the settings that constitute the active multi-line definition. The defined multi-line (if there is one) is shown graphically at the bottom of the dialog box. 2. Add any desired component lines to the multi-line definition. 3. (Optional) Adjust each new component line's offset. 4. (Optional) Give the component lines any desired attributes (class, level, color, line weight, and line style) to override the active element attributes when the multi-line is placed. 5. (Optional) Add any desired color fill to the areas between component lines. 6. (Optional) Delete any unwanted lines from the multi-line definition. 7. (Optional) Define a start cap for the multi-line.
3/24/2010

8. (Optional) Define an end cap for the multi-line. 9. (Optional) Adjust the settings for joints (a line optionally displayed at vertices in the multi-line). 10. (Optional) Create a multi-line style based on the new multi-line definition.
To add a new profile to a multi-line definition
Page 35 of 57
1. From the Profile menu, choose Insert. A new line displays in the Multi-line Styles lines list box. It has an offset value of 0.0 and no attribute override settings.
To copy a profile of a multi-line definition
1. From the Profiles tab in the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the desired line in the list box. 2. From the Profile menu, choose Copy. A copy of the selected line displays in the Multi-line Styles lines list box.
To delete a profile from a multi-line definition
1. From the Profiles tab in the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the desired line in the list box. 2. From the Profile menu, choose Delete. The selected profile is deleted.
To adjust a component line's offset
1. From the Profiles tab in the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the desired line in the list box. 2. Key in a positive or negative offset value (in working units) in the Offset field and save.
To give a component line attributes that override the active element attributes
1. From the End Caps and Joints tab in the Multi-line Styles dialog box, choose a component. 2. To give the selected line attributes of class, level, color, line weight, and line style (to override the active element attributes), click on the desired controls, adjust the settings and save.
To add color fill to a multi-line definition
1. In the Multi-line Styles dialog box, turn on Fill Color and save. 2. From the adjacent color palette, choose the desired fill color.
To delete a component line from a multi-line definition
1. From the Profiles tab in the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the desired line in the list box. 2. From the dialog box's Profile menu, choose Delete and save.
To define a start cap for a multi-line
1. From the End Caps and Joints tab in the Multi-line Styles dialog box, choose the Start Cap row. 2. Turn on one, two, or all of the start cap types: Line a straight line across the end of the multi-line. Outer Arc a single arc bridging the two outermost lines. Inner Arcs arcs between each component line and the component line between the remaining outermost lines. 3. To give the start cap attributes of class, level, color, line weight, and line style (to override the active element attributes), adjust the settings and save.
To define an end cap for a multi-line
3/24/2010

2. Turn on one, two, or all of the end cap types: Line a straight line across the end of the multi-line. Outer Arc a single arc bridging the two outermost lines. Inner Arcs arcs between each component line and the component line between the remaining outermost lines.
Page 36 of 57
3. To give the end cap attributes of class, level, color, line weight, and line style (to override the active element attributes), turn on the desired controls, adjust the settings and save.
To define multi-line joints
1. From the End Caps and Joints tab in the Multi-line Styles dialog box, choose the Joints row. 2. To give the joints attributes of class, level, color, line weight, and line style (to override the active element attributes), turn on the desired controls, adjust the settings and save.
Dropping Multi-lines
You can drop a multi-line. That is, break it up into component lines, line strings, and so on. This can be done to let you manipulate the multi-line's components individually.
To drop all multi-lines in a fence contents, key in FENCE DROP MLINE.
To drop a multi-line
1. In the Drop tool box, select the Drop Multi-line tool.
2. Identify the multi-line. 3. Accept the drop.

Alternative Method To drop a multi-line
1. Select the multi-line. 2. In the Drop tool box, select the Drop Multi-line tool.
You also can use the Drop Element tool, with Multi-lines turned on, to drop a multi-line back to its component elements.
Multi-line Styles
A multi-line style is a saved multi-line definition. You can define multi-lines styles and apply them to multi-line elements during placement. Multi-line styles can be created, customized and saved for easy recall. The Multi-line Styles dialog box (Element > Multi-line Styles) is used to manage multi-line styles. The active multi-line style is associated with the open DGN file. Multi-line definitions can be stored as styles in either the open DGN file or a DGN library.
3/24/2010
Page 37 of 57
If a multi-line style changes in a multi-line style library component of a DGN library, multi-line styles placed in DGN files prior to the change are not automatically updated in the DGN files. You can manually update them in the Multi-line Styles dialog box.
To create a multi-line style
1. From the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the Create Multi-line Style list box. A new multi-line style displays in blue in the Multi-line styles list box.
To save a multi-line style
1. From the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select an unsaved (blue) Multi-line style from the Multi-line Style list box. 2. From the Style menu, choose Save. or Click the Save Style icon. The name of the Multi-line style changes from blue to black signifying the multi-line style has been saved.
To save all multi-line styles
1. From the Style menu, choose Save All. All unsaved (blue) Multi-line styles are saved (changed to black).
To copy a multi-line style
1. From the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the style in the Multi-line styles list box. 2. Select the Copy Style icon. A new line displays in the Multi-line styles list box.
To rename a multi-line style
1. From the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the style in the Multi-line styles list box. 2. Choose Style > Rename. 3. Enter a new name for the selected style.
To delete a multi-line style
1. From the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the style in the Multi-line styles list box. 2. Select the Delete Style icon. The style is removed from the Multi-line styles list box.
To reset a multi-line style
1. From the Multi-line Styles dialog box, select the modified style in the Multi-line styles list box. 2. Select the Reset icon. The style reverts to the saved version of the style.
To import a multi-line style
1. Choose Style > Import. The Multi-line Style Import dialog box opens and imports all style from a remote file. 2. Select the style and click Open. The style displays in the Mutli-line styles list box.
To update a multi-line style from a DGN library
1. Select the multi-line style from the Multi-line styles list box.
3/24/2010

2. Choose Style > Update from Library. The multi-line style updates to match the style of the same name stored in the attached DGN library.
To set a multi-line style as the active multi-line style
Page 38 of 57
1. Select the multi-line style from the Multi-line styles list box. 2. Select the Set Active icon. The selected multi-line style is the active multi-line style and will be used when placing styles.
Right clicking in the Multi-line style list box brings up a pop-up menu containing Activate, Copy, Rename, Delete, Reset and Move Element.
Using Cells
Cells can represent complex elements that you use regularly in your designs. Rather than redraw them each time, you can save them in a cell library to recall for repeated use. Cell libraries are really DGN files that contain one or more models, one for each cell. The cells are simply design models that have the option Can be placed as a cell enabled. Cells created in this fashion have the models origin as their origin. Using cells in 3D Cells task Place Active Cell Web-Drop Settings dialog box Place Active Cell Matrix Select and Place Cell Define Cell Origin Identify Cell Place Active Line Terminator Replace Cells Place Cell Index ANNOTATIONSCALE Hatching and Patterning Patterns task Hatch Area Crosshatch Area Pattern Area Linear Pattern Show Pattern Attributes Match Pattern Attributes Change Pattern Delete Pattern
Using cells in 3D
Cells are used in 3D modeling in a manner similar to 2D. You can place a 2D cell in a 3D model and vice-versa. When a 3D cell is placed in a 2D model, it is placed as a Top view orientation. That is, with its X and Y design axes matching that of the 2D model's X and Y design axes. Creating 3D cells The procedure for creating a cell in 3D is similar to that in 2D (see Creating and Editing Cells), with these differences:

3D cells, along with their 2D counterparts, are simply models in a DGN file that have the setting Can be placed as a cell turned on. In 3D, the cell retains the orientation in which it was created. For example, a cell created in a Top view always is placed as though it is a Top view. That is, its length and width always would be along the x and y axes of the view (if AccuDraw is not active) or the AccuDraw drawing plane (when AccuDraw is used). Normally, cells should be created in one of the Orthogonal views to simplify f t re placement
3/24/2010
Page 39 of 57
3D cells are created in a volume determined by the fence area and the view's Display Depth.
It is a good idea to create separate models of those objects that you later want to use as cells.
Cells task
The tools in the Cells task are used to place and manipulate cells.
Cells task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Cells task
Place the active cell. Place Active Cell
Place a matrix (rows and columns) of the active cell. Place Active Cell Matrix
Identify a cell and place an additional instance(s). Select and Place Cell
Define the cell origin (the point about which the cell is placed) when creating the cell. Define Cell Origin
Display the name and level of a cell that is in the DGN file. Identify Cell
Add a terminator to a line segment. Place Active Line Terminator
Replace a cell(s) (or all instances of a shared cell) in the design with another of the same name from an attached library. Replace Cells
Create and place a cell index. Place Cell Index Add and remove annotation scale to and from existing annotation cells. Change the scale of existing annotation cells Use the ANNOTATIONSCALE <ADD|CHANGE|REMOVE> key-in.
3/24/2010

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CELLS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Page 40 of 57
To select and place cells by clicking thumbnail representations, use the Cell Selector dialog box (Utilities > Cell Selector).
To convert an instance of a shared cell to an unshared cell, use the Drop Element tool in the Groups tool box.
Hatching and Patterning

Patterning is the repeated placement of a hatch line or cell through a closed area at a specified interval (spacing), scale, and angle. You can place patterns on any designated level.
When using a hatching or patterning tool with the tool setting Method set to Flood, Union, Intersection, or Difference, turning on Dynamic Area along with Associative Pattern lets you create patterns that regenerate themselves when their bounding elements are modified. As well, you can create single associative patterns with disjoint regions. In DWG workmode, by default, area patterning is replaced by AutoCAD pre-defined hatching. The Pattern field in the Pattern Area settings window is a combo box which, by default, lists the patterns in the DWG pattern file "areapat.pat". This file contains a DWG pattern definition for each pattern cell in the supplied cell library, "areapat.cel". To select a different DWG pattern file, key in its full file specification path and filename in Pattern File or click the adjacent magnifying glass icon to browse the file system. A corresponding DWG pattern file is supplied for each of the important, supplied pattern cell libraries "archpat.cel", "areapat.cel", "geompa.cel", "igespats.cel", "linepa.cell", and "utilpat.cel". These DWG pattern files have the same filename as their cell library counterparts except their extension is .pat.
Controlling the display of patterns Elements either lines or cells in a pattern are designated as pattern elements.
To turn the display of patterns on or off in one or more views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 41 of 57
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn Patterns on or off. 4. Repeat steps 23 for additional views.
To turn the display of patterns on or off in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn Patterns on or off. Placing patterns in the design The tools in the Patterns task are used to pattern the area inside a closed element with the Area attribute of Solid, a fence, the intersection, union, or difference of multiple elements, or the area enclosed by a set of elements. Elements used to create the patterned area can be in either the active file, one or more references, or a combination of both.
The Hatch Area tool and Crosshatch Area tool are used to place lines (hatch lines).
Hatching (left) and Crosshatching (right)
3/24/2010
Page 42 of 57
The Pattern Area tool is used to place the cell designated as the Active Pattern Cell. For example, a wall face can be patterned with a brick cell for a more realistic appearance.
Examples of placing the Active Pattern Cell
Area patterning can be a time-consuming operation, depending on the complexity of the Active Pattern Cell and the size of the patterned area. The time also depends on the number, intricacy, and levels of hole elements within the area. More intricate elements may require several minutes to pattern. Associative patterns Turning on Associative Pattern, when you use the Hatch Area tool, Crosshatch Area tool, or Pattern Area tool, causes the pattern to be associated with the patterned element. This means that whenever the element is modified or manipulated, the pattern automatically is updated. The pattern elements are placed on the same level as the patterned element. Turning on Associative Region Boundary, in addition to Associative Pattern, enables you to place the pattern elements on a different level. If an element that has an associated pattern is rotated or scaled, the associated pattern also is rotated or scaled. Associative patterns can be created from:

elements in the active DGN file elements in references, including nested reference and self-references a combination of elements from the active file and references
When any of the elements used to create the patterned area are modified, whether they be from the active file or a reference, the associated patterning updates also.
Hatching the shape on the left, with Associative Pattern turned on, means that if you modify it later (right), the hatching updates automatically to the new shape.
Snappable patterns Turning on Snappable Pattern, when you use the Hatch Area tool, Crosshatch Area tool, and Pattern Area tool, causes the pattern element to be eligible for snapping
3/24/2010
Page 43 of 57
While, in some cases, being able to snap to pattern elements is desirable, in others it is not, since having large numbers of pattern elements in an area may make it difficult to select or identify a particular element. Excluding areas inside a patterned area from patterning When you create a shape, circle, or ellipse, defining an area for patterning, you can exclude patterning in regions within this element. You do this by placing other shapes, circles, or ellipses within the outer element. Additionally, you can exclude the areas surrounding text in the patterned region. You have several ways to define the areas for patterning, and those to be excluded.
Setting elements to be Solid or Hole
When you create shapes, circles, or ellipses, you have the choice of setting their Area to be Hole or Solid. This can affect the way that elements are hatched or patterned. Usually, the areas enclosed by hole elements, located inside and on the same level as the Solid element, are not patterned. This applies as follows:
Associative Pattern Off On If they were not grouped with the solid element they are ignored and the selected solid element is patterned with no holes. Using tool settings Are not patterned. If they were grouped with the solid element using the Group Holes tool they are not patterned. Hole Elements Inside Element
Tool settings for the Hatch Area, Crosshatch Area, and Pattern Area tools, let you exclude areas in closed elements from being patterned. With each of these tools, Method can be set to:

Intersection patterned region is where two or more selected elements intersect. Difference lets you select a main element to pattern from which other selected elements are subtracted. Flood lets you pattern the interior of bounding elements. Additionally, you can specify that interior shapes and/or text are not to be patterned or that alternating areas are patterned where shapes are nested inside one another.
Using Alternating Area to exclude nested areas from patterning
When you have areas nested inside others, you can pattern alternate regions in one step using the Flood method with both Locate Interior Shapes and Alternating Area turned on. In the example below, the hatching was performed in a single operation.
The Alternating Area setting, in conjunction with Locate Interior Shapes, lets you flood hatch/pattern the nested areas (left) to produce the required result (right) in one step.
Manipulating/modifying excluded regions
When you pattern an area, with Associative Pattern turned on, you can manipulate or modify the elements defining the regions and the pattern will update accordingly to conform to the modified regions.
3/24/2010
Page 44 of 57
When you manipulate or modify a shape, or excluded area, that has been hatched/patterned with Associative Pattern turned on (left), the patterning updates accordingly (right).
Patterning disjointed regions With Method set to Flood, and Dynamic Area turned on, you can pattern disjointed elements. That is, by holding down the <Ctrl> key, you can select a number of enclosed regions to flood hatch or pattern, in one step. These regions highlight dynamically as you move and hover the pointer over the drawing. With this method, you still can use the Locate Interior Shapes and Locate Text settings to exclude areas in the selected regions.
Left: Select the regions to flood hatch (<Ctrl>-data points 13). Right: Accept to hatch the selected regions (4).
A single associative pattern region can consist of many disjointed sub-regions. A sub-region may be the smallest area enclosed by many elements or simply the area of a closed shape. A sub-region can contain grouped holes and text elements.
When patterning disjointed regions, turning on Associative Pattern causes the creation of a complex shape that bounds the patterned area. The hatch lines are associated to the complex shape. If you move or modify the original element(s), used to create the complex shape, the complex shape and the hatch lines will not update unless Associative Region Boundary was also on during the patterning operation.
Cells used for patterning Pattern cells may contain any combination of elements, even text. Cells used for area patterning typically are designed specifically for that purpose.
Pattern cells supplied with MicroStation
The cell libraries archpa.cel and geompa.cel, in Bentley's "WorkSpace\System\Cell" directory, contain pattern cells that are useful for various area patterning applications.
3/24/2010
Page 45 of 57
Examples of cells in archpa.cel cell library
3/24/2010
Page 46 of 57
Examples of cells in geompa.cel cell library
Guidelines for creating pattern cells
Additional pattern cells are created just as all other cells are. Here are some guidelines to follow and restrictions to be aware of when creating area pattern cells:

Area pattern cells should contain at least one full cycle of the pattern in both the horizontal and vertical directions. The cell range is used to determine the pattern matrix size. If you want unused space at the pattern boundary, place point elements (zero length lines) to expand the pattern range. Point elements are not patterned. If the cell is created as a point cell, the pattern components are placed on the Active Level using the color and line weight of the active symbology. The pattern will be on the same level as the element being patterned. If the cell is created as a graphic cell, the pattern elements are placed with the same symbology and on the same level as the element being patterned. The Pattern Area tool handles horizontal or vertical lines that span the entire pattern cell in a special manner. Instead of placing many contiguous line segments to create the pattern, these lines are extended through the entire pattern area. This results in a substantial increase in patterning speed and also requires much less room in the DGN file.
Tolerance When patterning along or inside a curved element, the curve is approximated with a series of line segments that are used as guides. The tool setting Tolerance is the maximum distance in working units between a curved element and the approximating line segments used to pattern. If the Tolerance is small, the line segments conform closely to the curve and the approximation is more accurate, but processing time increases. If the Tolerance is large, line segments do not conform as closely to the curve and the approximation is less accurate, but processing time decreases. The setting can be saved.
3/24/2010
Page 47 of 57
Left: Tolerance as denoted by T. Center: Approximating line segments if tolerance is large. Right: Approximating line segments if tolerance is small.
Patterns task
The tools in the Patterns task are used to pattern areas and along linear elements.
Patterns task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Patterns task
Hatch an area. Hatch Area
Crosshatch an area. Crosshatch Area
Pattern an area by tiling the Active Pattern Cell. Pattern Area
Pattern along a linear element. Linear Pattern
Display the angle and scale attributes of a pattern element. Show Pattern Attributes
Set the active pattern settings to match the attributes of an existing pattern element. Match Pattern Attributes
Modify the patterning. Change Pattern Delete patterning.
3/24/2010
Page 48 of 57
Delete Pattern
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX PATTERNS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Drawing Aids
Measure task Measure Distance Measure Radius Measure Angle Between Lines Measure Length Measure Area Measure Volume Mass Properties window Mass Properties window Basic properties Locks Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems ACS tool box Define ACS (Aligned with Element) Define ACS (By Points) Define ACS (Aligned with View) Define ACS (Aligned with Reference) Rotate Active ACS Move ACS Select ACS Setting the Active Point Digitizing
Measure task
The tools in the Measure task are used to perform measuring operations.
Measure task (opened as tool box) To Measure the distance(s) along an element. or Measure the cumulative distance from a data point. or Measure the perpendicular distance between an element and a data point. or Measure the minimum distance between two elements. Measure Distance Select in the Measure task
Measure the radius of a circle, circular arc, cone, or cylinder, or the axes of an ellipse or elliptical arc.
3/24/2010

Measure Radius
Page 49 of 57
Measure the angle between two lines. Measure Angle Between Lines
Measure the length of an element. Measure Length
Measure the area and perimeter of a shape, ellipse, or complex shape and to analyze mass properties. Measure Area
Measure the volume enclosed by an element or a set of elements and to analyze mass properties. Measure Volume
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MEASURE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
To ensure accurate measurements, snap to the reference elements and points when using measuring tools.
Locks
Locks are settings that let you control the actions of various tools. Locks may toggled on/off by:
Clicking the Active Locks icon in the status bar and selecting the required lock from the drop-down menu. Selecting Settings > Locks and enabling/disabling the required locks.
In either of the above menus, if you select:
Full the Locks dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you can toggle locks on/off, plus you can enter settings for those that have settings. Toggles the Lock Toggles dialog box opens, which lets you toggle locks on/off.
Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems

You can define new x- and y- axes in your design plane and save them as an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS). You can define several auxiliary coordinate systems and quickly choose any of them to use, as well as the DGN file or view coordinate systems. At any time, you can make one ACS active.
Auxiliary coordinate systems can be particularly helpful in 3D design, where they facilitate placing elements on planes at different depths and orientations. Once an ACS is active you can use it with AccuDraw and with precision input key-ins (such as AX= and AD=) to perform precision input with
3/24/2010

You can also use AccuDraw shortcut key-ins to define and activate auxiliary coordinate systems.
Page 50 of 57
Controlling the display of the ACS triad When an ACS is defined, two arrows can be displayed in a view window(s) indicating the active ACS' positive x- and y- axes and its origin. This symbol is called the ACS triad because it consists of three arrows in 3D designs.
To turn on or off the display of the ACS triad in one or more views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>) or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn ACS Triad on or off. 4. (Optional) Repeat steps 23 for additional views.
To turn on or off the display of the ACS triad in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>) or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn ACS Triad on or off. Defining and activating auxiliary coordinate systems (without using AccuDraw) You can define an ACS using the following techniques: S th A D d i l ACS
3/24/2010

Page 51 of 57
Key in the ACS origin in the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box (Utilities > Auxiliary Coordinates). Enter data points to define the ACS axes. Align the ACS with an element, view, or reference.
This topic covers the latter three techniques.

To define an ACS in a 2D model by keying in the origin
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates. The Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box opens.
2. In the icon bar, click the icon labeled Create a new ACS. A list box entry for the new ACS appears in the list box. The Name column of the entry is highlighted for editing. 3. (Optional) In the Name column, key in a name for the ACS. 4. Click the Origin X column, and key in the X coordinate of the ACS origin. 5. Click the Origin Y column, and key in the Y coordinate of the ACS origin. 6. Click the Type column, and choose Rectangular from the pop-up option menu. 7. (Optional) Click the Description column, and key in a description for the ACS.
When an ACS is defined in this manner, its Origin and Type properties match those of the active ACS by default.
To make a previously defined ACS the active ACS
Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box
3/24/2010
Page 52 of 57
2. In the list box, double-click the ACS. or In the list box, right-click the ACS and choose Set Active from the pop-up menu.
To define an ACS by data points in a 2D model
2. In the icon bar, select the Define ACS (By Points) tool. 3. From the Type menu in the Define ACS (By Points) settings window, choose Rectangular. The prompt in the status bar is Enter first point @ x axis origin. 4. Enter a data point to define the origin of the ACS. The coordinates of the point identified will be 0,0 in the ACS. The prompt in the status bar is Enter second point on x-axis. 5. Enter a data point to define a point on the positive x-axis. If ACS Triad is on in the view, the ACS triad appears at the location of the first data point. The prompt in the status bar is New Coordinate System Defined. The new ACS appears in the list box in the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box with the name Unnamed and becomes the active ACS.
When you graphically define an ACS, whether you do so by entering data points or aligning the ACS with an element, view, or reference, the newly defined ACS is automatically named Unnamed and designated the active ACS. While it is not possible to directly rename the active ACS, you can achieve the same effect as follows: 1. In the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box, click the icon labeled Create a new ACS to create a new ACS with the name Unnamed. The new ACS inherits the Origin and Type of the graphically defined active ACS. Name the new ACS by editing the Name value in its list box entry.
2.
At this point you can activate the named ACS and the graphically defined one will be automatically deleted.
Importing auxiliary coordinate systems If you have an ACS stored in a model residing in another DGN file, you can import it into the active model.
To import an ACS
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates. The Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box opens. 2. In the icon bar, click the Import ACS icon. The Import Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 53 of 57
3. Navigate to and select the DGN file from which you want to import the ACS. 4. Click Open. The Select Models dialog box opens. 5. Select the model from which you want to import the ACS. 6. Click OK. The Select Auxiliary Coordinate Systems to Import dialog box opens. 7. Select one or more auxiliary coordinate systems to import. 8. Click OK. The selected ACS appears in the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box.
ACS tool box

The tools in the ACS tool box are used to define and manipulate an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) a coordinate system you define that differs from the design plane (world) and view coordinate systems. For general information about using an ACS, see 3D auxiliary coordinate systems.
One ACS can be active at any time in a 2D or 3D design. While ACSs can be used in 2D, they are most useful in 3D design.
To Select in the ACS tool box
3/24/2010
Page 54 of 57
Define an ACS aligned with a planar element. Define ACS (Aligned with Element)
Define an ACS by entering data points. Define ACS (By Points)
Define an ACS aligned with a view. Define ACS (Aligned with View)
Define an ACS aligned with a reference. Define ACS (Aligned with Reference)
Rotate the active ACS. Rotate Active ACS
Move the origin of the Active ACS. Move ACS
Identify an ACS for attachment as the Active ACS. Select ACS
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ACS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Setting the Active Point

In the Tool Settings window of the tools in the Points task, the Point Type is set as follows.
Point Type Element A zero-length line (point element). The character (or symbol if the Active Font is a symbol font) specified in the Character field at the:
The Active Point is
Character
Active Font, Height and Width, which are set on the General tab on the Text Style Editor dialog box (opened by choosing Text Styles from the Element menu). Active Angle.
Cell
The Active Point Cell at the Active Angle and Active Scale. To designate a zero-length line as the Active Point
1. From the Point Type option menu, choose Element.

To designate a character as the Active Point
1. In the Character field, key in the character.
3/24/2010

To designate a cell as the Active Point
Page 55 of 57
1. Key in the cell name in the Cell field (or use the Cell Library dialog box, which is opened by choosing the Cell Browse button).
Digitizing
MicroStation requires that you use a digitizing tablet or table see footnote 94 to perform digitizing. Digitizing is the process of electronically reproducing the features of an existing hard copy drawing or map into a MicroStation design. A large tablet or table is recommended. Accurate digitizing requires careful planning and setup of the relationship between the hard copy, mounted on the tablet or table, and the design plane, represented on the screen.
Setting up to digitize
1. Create a DGN file and model. 2. Set up appropriate working units. 3. Set up appropriate views. It is recommended that you set up one of the views to encompass the entire drawing. 4. (Optional) Partition the digitizing tablet surface. 5. Mount the hard copy to be digitized on the surface of the tablet. (Tape works well for mounting.) Locate the features you will be mapping to the DGN file over the digitizing partition, not over the screen partition. 6. Place monument points that associate known points (of your choosing) on the hard copy with points in the design plane. 7. From the File menu, choose Save Settings (or press <Ctrl-F>) to save the working units, view configuration, and the relationships specified by monument points, digitizer partitioning and setup. 8. Use any MicroStation drawing tool to trace the hard copy image. Digitizing tablet partitioning Partitioning divides the surface of the digitizing tablet into two areas or partitions. One area, the screen partition, continues to provide standard tablet-to-screen mapping. Within the screen partition, moving the tablet cursor results in a corresponding movement of the screen pointer, regardless of what is displayed on the screen. The other area is the digitizing partition. Within the digitizing partition, movement of the tablet cursor results in a corresponding movement of the screen pointer only within the part of the design plane to which you are mapping features of the hard copy. After you partition the tablet surface, you will notice a change in the behavior of the screen pointer, depending on whether it is in the screen or digitizing partition. When in the screen partition, the pointer moves on the screen in direct proportion to the movement of the tablet cursor. If you have two screens, the screen partition corresponds to the rectangular area encompassing both screens. When the tablet cursor is in the digitizing partition, the tablet cursor position determines the position of the pointer in the design plane. MicroStation places the pointer in the first open view where the design plane position is visible. The open views are checked in sequence starting with the lowest numbered view. If the design plane position is not visible in any views, the pointer is not displayed. Nevertheless, even when you cannot see the pointer, you can continue to enter data points and place elements into the design. The screen partition takes priority over the digitizing partition. If data points are entered in the screen partition, their position in the design plane reflects their position on the screen. Therefore, make sure not to stray into the screen partition while digitizing.
If the tablet surface is not partitioned, MicroStation defaults the screen partition to an 18 12 area (or smaller on a smaller tablet) in the lower left corner of the tablet surface.
To change the default digitizing and screen partitions on the tablet surface
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Digitizing.
3/24/2010

The Digitizing dialog box opens. 2. From the dialog box's Tablet menu, choose Partition. 3. Identify the lower left corner of the screen partition by placing the tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button.
Page 56 of 57
4. Identify the upper right corner of the screen partition by placing the tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button. Placing monument points Monument points are used to define the mapping of coordinates on the digitizing tablet to coordinates in the design plane. Thus, monument points are defined on both the digitizing tablet surface and in the design plane. At least two monument points must be defined; more are recommended for increased accuracy. When only two monument points are defined, MicroStation assumes the hard copy is perfectly aligned on the tablet surface. If more than two monument points are defined, MicroStation can compensate for misalignment. A monument point can be any point at which the coordinates on the hard copy being digitized are known. It is best to define several widely spaced monument points. It is easier to place monument points in the design plane before setting up for digitizing, and then snap tentative points to them during setup and digitizing. To make monument points visible, place them with a line weight of at least 3.
To place monument points that associate points on the hard copy with points in the design plane
1. (Optional) Place point elements (zero length lines) for reference with line weights of at least 3 using the Place Active Point tool. 2. From the Workspace menu, choose Digitizing. The Digitizing dialog box opens. 3. From the dialog box's Tablet menu, choose Setup. 4. Choose a monument point on the hard copy, position the tablet cursor over it, and enter a data point. Ignore the location of the screen pointer, which only lets you know that the tablet cursor is over an active area of the tablet. 5. Move the tablet cursor into the screen partition and enter a data point in the design that corresponds to the monument point you chose in the previous step. Precision input, or snapping to a point element, if one was placed for reference, is recommended. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional monument points. 7. After placing all monument points, Reset. 8. Confirm accurate placement of the monument points by moving the cursor around the hard copy. If the monument points are correctly defined, the pointer displays in the design at points corresponding to the monument points. Tools for digitizing The Place Stream Line String tool and the Place Point or Stream Curve tool in the Linear Elements task are particularly useful. With these tools, it is not necessary to press the Data button to enter individual data points since MicroStation samples the movement of the tablet cursor and automatically records data points based on Stream. Panning while digitizing As hard copy is digitized, the design in the view normally remains static and the screen pointer moves as the tablet cursor is moved. You may find it more convenient to let the screen pointer remain stationary in the center of a view and have the view pan as the tablet cursor is moved. To automatically pan this way while digitizing, key in SET AUTOPAN ON. The view in which the screen pointer is located when this key-in is entered becomes the anchor view, the view that is panned as digitizing progresses. The center of the view becomes the anchor point, the location in which the screen pointer is locked or anchored. When automatic panning is on and the tablet cursor is in the screen partition of the digitizing tablet, the design will pan unless the pointer is in the center of the view. The effect is exactly as if you began panning at the center of the view, and is much less useful than the panning that occurs in the digitizing partition.
3/24/2010
Page 57 of 57
Therefore, you may want to turn off automatic panning (SET AUTOPAN OFF) when the tablet cursor is in the screen partition. To facilitate toggling of automatic panning, create and attach a cursor button menu with a button assigned to the key-in SET AUTOPAN TOGGLE.
3/24/2010
Working With Existing Elements
Page 1 of 37
Working Working With With Existing Existing Elements Elements

Identifying Elements Selecting Elements Using a Fence Changing Elements Grouping Elements
Identifying Elements
Many of the operations that you perform in a design session rely on the ability to identify existing elements, or to pick specific points on those elements. MicroStation provides the tools to perform these tasks. You can quickly and conveniently identify elements, or keypoints on elements, using tentative snap points and data points. Identifying Elements Manually AccuSnap Automatic Identification of Elements Pop-up Info
Identifying Elements Manually

Many tools require that you identify one or more elements. You can do this manually by placing the pointer over the element and entering a data point to highlight the element. If you want to preview which element is being selected, you can enter tentative snap points first, until the correct element highlights, and then accept with a data point.
AccuSnap
AccuSnap automates the identification of elements and the placement of tentative snap points, so that you do not have to enter all tentative snap points manually. You can turn on the Enable AccuSnap setting in the General tab of the AccuSnap Settings dialog box to automatically locate and snap a tentative point to elements. You simply move the screen pointer to the region of the element that you want to identify and AccuSnap snaps to it automatically.
Even with AccuSnap enabled, you can still enter tentative snap points manually.
Automatic Identification of Elements

Separately or in conjunction with AccuSnap, you can enable the capability to automatically identify elements for various tools. This feature is enabled with the Identify Elements Automatically setting in the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, General tab. Like AccuSnap, this setting can greatly reduce the number of button presses required in a design session. Using this setting with the Delete Element tool, for example, you only have to move the screen pointer over the required element in any view and it highlights. A single data point then deletes the highlighted element.
Pop-up Info
As part of the automatic element identification functions, you can turn on Pop-up Info in the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, General tab. With this setting enabled when you hover or pause the pointer over a highlighted element information about it appears in a pop up
3/24/2010

window.
Page 2 of 37
Selecting Elements
For operations on existing elements in your DGN file, you have to be able to select them. You can do this manually, by placing the screen pointer over the element and entering a data point. Alternatively, you can place the screen pointer over the element and enter a tentative point first, to check the selection prior to accepting with a data point. Entering a tentative point can be performed automatically with AccuSnap or by pressing the tentative button to enter it manually. With AccuSnap's Identify Elements Automatically setting, this process is streamlined, dramatically reducing the number of button presses required. Normally, to identify an element manually requires at least one button press, or two if you enter a tentative point first. With AccuSnap and the Identify Elements Automatically setting, you only have to position the pointer over an element for MicroStation to identify and highlight it without a button press. For example, to delete an element with the Delete Element tool, you need only place the pointer over the element so that it highlights and then accept with a data point to complete the deletion. Without AccuSnap, this would require at least two data points, or a tentative point followed by two data points. Selecting Multiple Elements Selecting Elements Based on Attributes The Element Selection tool and the Reset pop-up menu Using Handles Element Selection tool box
Selecting Multiple Elements

For operations on several elements, simultaneously, you can use the Element Selection tool. This tool lets you select multiple elements to be worked on as a temporary group. Using this method, for example, you can move, copy, rotate, or scale multiple elements together.
Selecting Elements Based on Attributes

When you use the Element Selection tool, you can select, or group, the elements by a variety of means, including by:

level color line style line weight type class template
For example, you can request MicroStation to select all text elements or all elements with line weight 3. You can even specify search criteria based on different kinds of attributes for example, green, dotted arc elements on level 22 and level 23.
3/24/2010
Page 3 of 37
By default, selected elements are bracketed with squares called handles. If any elements are selected, an arrowhead icon is displayed in the status bar. The number to the right of the icon is the number of selected elements.
The Select By Attributes dialog box (Edit > Select By Attributes) provides additional attribute-based element selection options selection by attached tag values and by properties. Properties include the area attribute (Solid or Hole), whether an element can be snapped to, whether it is locked, and whether it has been modified.
This dialog box also provides the capability to filter the display of elements based on their attributes.
The Element Selection tool and the Reset pop-up menu

While the Element Selection tool is not selected, it is available for selection in the Reset pop-up menu as well as the Main tool box.
3/24/2010
Page 4 of 37
Reset pop-up menu as it appears when the Element Selection tool is not selected
As you build the selection set with the Element Selection tool, you can choose Select All, Select None, or Select Previous from the Reset pop-up menu to quickly include or exclude elements from the selection set. While the Element Selection tool is selected, you can use the tool pointer in conjunction with the Reset pop-up menu to operate on the element at the pointer location or on the selected elements.
Reset pop-up menu as it appears when the element at the pointer location is in a reference and has an attached link
The following items in the Reset pop-up menu are context-sensitive as described in the preceding paragraph
Copy Move Scale
3/24/2010
Page 5 of 37
Rotate Mirror Follow Link choosing an item from the Follow Link sub-menu opens the corresponding file or target linked to the element at the pointer location. Follow Link appears in the menu only if a file or target is linked to that element. Exchange exchanges models to the reference which contains the element at the pointer location, maintaining the same view orientations. This item appears in the menu only if that element is in a reference. Edit Reference opens the reference which contains the element at the pointer location, for editing, in a new session of MicroStation. This item appears in the menu only if that element is in a reference. Cut to Clipboard this menu item is disabled if no elements are at the pointer location. Copy to Clipboard this menu item is disabled if no elements are at the pointer location. Paste from Clipboard this menu item is disabled if the Clipboard is empty. Delete only elements in the active model can be deleted. Properties
Right-clicking a highlighted element with the Element Selection tool pointer selects that element even if a pop-up menu item is not chosen.
Using Handles
You can use handles to manipulate or modify:

Individual elements, including 3D solids. Groups of elements. References (when Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation is enabled). References clip boundaries. Named fences (when the named fence is displayed).
You can modify or manipulate the above elements by selecting them first with the Element Selection tool, which displays handles for the element, named fence, or reference boundary display.
When handles are displayed, you can:

Drag a handle to modify the element, whilst maintaining geometric constraints, such as angles at vertices and radius ratios. Tap the <Alt> key while dragging a single handle, to modify the element without maintaining geometric constraints. Drag any other part of the selected element to move or copy it. To copy it press and hold down the <Ctrl> key once you start dragging.
3/24/2010
Page 6 of 37
Where multiple elements are selected, select handles on any of the highlighted elements.
When you modify an element via a single handle, the default mode of operation is to preserve geometric relationships, such as angles at vertices, radius ratios, and the like. For most geometry, as you drag the handle, you can tap the <Alt> key to toggle this mode off, so that only the selected handle is manipulated. For example, modifying:
Circles in default mode (left) dragging a handle modifies the radius, while in the alternative drag mode (right) the circle is scaled about its center along the chosen axis.
Ellipses in default mode (left) dragging a handle modifies the ellipse, maintaining the ratio of the radii, while in the alternative drag mode (right) the ellipse is scaled about its center along the chosen axis.
Shapes and line strings in default mode (left) dragging a handle modifies the element, whilst retaining the angles between the sections. In the alternative drag mode (right) only the selected handle is modified, with other vertices remaining unaltered.
To move elements with the Element Selection tool
3/24/2010

2. Select the element or elements to be moved. Handles appear on the selected element(s). 3. Position the pointer on part of a selected element that is not a handle. 4. Drag the element to its new location and drop it there.
To copy elements with the Element Selection tool
Page 7 of 37
2. Select the element or elements to be copied. Handles appear on the selected element(s). 3. Position the pointer on part of a selected element that is not a handle. 4. Begin to drag the element toward the desired location for the copy. 5. As you drag, press and hold down the <Ctrl> key. As long as you hold down the <Ctrl> key, the element you are dragging is a copy of the original element. 6. Drag the copy to the desired location and drop it there.
To modify a selected element (default mode)
2. Select the element. The selected element is bracketed with handles. 3. Drag the appropriate handle to make the desired change. The geometric relationships are preserved as the handle is moved.
To modify a selected element (alternative mode)
2. Select the element. The selected element is bracketed with handles. 3. While dragging the appropriate handle, press the <Alt> key. The drag mode toggles to the alternative mode, where only the selected handle is modified.
Element Selection tool box

The Element Selection tool box contains tools that are used to select elements, place a fence, and manipulate or delete the fence contents.
To Select in the Element Selection tool box
3/24/2010
Page 8 of 37
Select and deselect elements on a per element basis, by defining an area, or by drawing a line that intersects them.
Element Selection see footnote 95
Place a fence. Place Fence see footnote 96 Manipulate the fence contents. or Manipulate Fence Contents Extend or shorten elements that overlap the fence. see footnote 97
Delete the fence contents. Delete Fence Contents see footnote 98
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX SELECTION [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
The Element Selection tool box is accessible only through the Tool Boxes dialog box (Tools > Tool Boxes).
To prevent accidental fence manipulations, remove a no-longer-needed fence by selecting the Place Fence tool.
Using a Fence
In addition to using the Element Selection tool to group elements for manipulation, you can group elements with a fence. Additionally, you can create named fences that you can recall later to again group the elements. A fence creates a temporary grouping of elements that is ended when the DGN file is closed, if not before. When you create named fences, however, you can recall these at a latter stage. You can also create permanent groupings such as graphic groups and named groups. Fence Properties Placing a Fence Named Fences Specifying Which Elements are in the Fence Contents Optimized Fence Clipping Special Fence Manipulations Fence tool box Place Fence Modify Fence Manipulate Fence Contents Delete Fence Contents Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File
3/24/2010

Fence Properties
Page 9 of 37
Most often, a fence is placed around elements to group them for manipulation, just as the pointer is dragged around elements to select them with the Element Selection tool. However, a fence has two additional grouping capabilities. It can be used:

As a void to exclude elements inside (or overlapping) the fence boundary. To clip elements that cross the fence boundary, like a cookie cutter, so that only the parts inside the fence boundary (or outside in the case of a void) are subject to manipulation.
Fences can be rectangular (referred to as a fence block), polygonal (non-rectangular, referred to as a fence shape, with as many as 5000 vertices), or circular (referred to as a fence circle). A fence shape can be derived from a previously placed shape element. Fences are persistent in both 3D and 2D DGN files. You can place a fence, zoom in on the design and the fence will remain when you zoom back out.
Placing a Fence
The Place Fence tool is used to place a fence. On placement, a fence whether it is a fence block, shape, or circle is displayed on screen as a closed shape with the color used to highlight identified elements. While a fence is placed, a fence mode icon is displayed in the status bar.
To remove a fence if it is already displayed
1. In the Fence tool box, select the Place Fence tool and continue with your work. (In the Main tool box, Place Fence is the default representative from the Fence tool box.)
You can remove a fence this way to prevent accidental fence manipulations.
Named Fences
When you place a fence with the Place Fence tool, you have the option of saving it as a named fence for future use. This can be useful, for example, when creating check prints of parts of a model. You can quickly recall the named fence to recreate the print from it. Options for creating, deleting, and activating named fences are visible when you expand the Place Fence tool settings.
Specifying Which Elements are in the Fence Contents

The Fence (Selection) Mode determines just what constitutes the contents of a fence that is, whether the elements (or parts of elements) inside, outside, or overlapping the fence are contained by the fence to be processed.

Inside Only those elements completely inside the fence are processed. Overlap Only those elements inside or overlapping the fence are processed. Clip Only elements completely inside the fence and parts of elements inside and overlapping the fence are processed. see footnote 99 V id O l th l t l t l t id th f d
3/24/2010

Page 10 of 37
Void-Overlap Only those elements outside or overlapping the fence are processed. Void-Clip Only elements completely outside the fence and parts of elements outside and overlapping the fence are processed. see footnote 100
Fence selection modes. Top, the fence and elements. Center Left: Inside; Center Middle: Overlap; Center Right: Clip. Bottom Left: Void; Bottom Middle: Void-Overlap; Bottom Right: Void-Clip.
The Fence Selection Mode is a tool setting (labeled Fence Mode) for the fence tools in the Fence tool box as well as for manipulation tools that can operate on fence contents. In the latter case, it is set with the option menu next to the Use Fence control. There is also a control in the Locks dialog box.
Examples of Tool Settings window controls for setting the Fence Selection Mode.
It is not necessary to place or recall a fence in order to set the Fence Selection Mode. Conversely, once a fence is placed, you can adjust the Fence Selection Mode to change the fence contents without moving or replacing the fence.
To manipulate the fence contents
1. Place a fence.
2. Select an element manipulation tool that can be used with the fence contents. 3. In the Tool Settings window, turn on Use Fence and set the Fence Selection Mode.
3/24/2010
Page 11 of 37
You are prompted, usually for a data point. For example, with the Delete Fence Contents tool, you are prompted to Accept/Reject Fence Contents. 4. Enter a data point to accept the manipulation or Reset. 5. In some cases, you can repeat the manipulation.
You can Reset to halt a fence manipulation that is in progress. Manipulations that were completed before Resetting remain in the design and can be undone. (Pressing <Ctrl-C> also halts a fence manipulation.)
Manipulations on many elements Some fence manipulations on many elements (large arrays, for example) may take a long time to complete. To minimize potential problems, back up the DGN file before attempting such a manipulation.
Optimized Fence Clipping

The Optimized Fence Clipping preference in the Operation category of the Preferences dialog box is on by default. This preference enables you to maintain closed shapes, solids, and surfaces when clipping those elements that cross a fence boundary. If this preference is turned off, closed shapes, solids, and surfaces are dropped to linear elements when clipped.
MicroStation's ability to place fences with as many as 5000 vertices provides tremendous flexibility when performing clipping operations.
You can also use this preference in conjunction with the Locate By Face preference (in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box) to create associative holes in closed shapes, solids and surfaces. When Locate Interiors is set to Always, fences that are located entirely within a closed piece of geometry can perform clip actions upon their section of the larger area.
To create an associative hole inside an element using optimized fence clipping
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. 2. In the Input category, set Locate Interiors to Always. 3. Click OK to accept the change and close the dialog box. 4. Select the Place Fence tool. 5. Set the Mode to Clip. 6. Inside a closed shape, solid or surface, place a fence. 7. Select the Delete Fence Contents 8. Accept.
To keep fence clipping from changing the larger geometry in which it is placed, set Locate Interiors to Never or Render Views Only.
Special Fence Manipulations
3/24/2010
Page 12 of 37
The Manipulate Fence Contents tool can be used to stretch (extend or shorten) segments of elements that overlap a fence. It does this simply by moving element vertices that fall within the fence. You can also stretch elements that overlap a fence using the Copy tool, Move tool, Scale tool and Rotate tool. The contents of a fence can also be moved or copied to a new file with the Copy Fence Contents to New File tool.
Using a key-in to copy the contents of a fence to a new DGN file
1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE FILE or FF=. The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens. 2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directory in which it is to be created. 3. Click the OK button. 4. Accept the copy.
Alternative Method Using a key-in to copy the contents of a fence to a new DGN file
1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE FILE <filename> or FF=<filename>. 2. Accept the copy. The file is created in the directory that is pointed to by the MS_DEF configuration variable.
When using the second method, if a file already exists with the specified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be overwritten.
Using a key-in to move the contents of a fence to a new DGN file
1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE SEPARATE or SF=. The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens. 2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directory in which to create it. 3. Click the OK button. 4. Accept the move.
Alternative Method Using a key-in to move the contents of a fence to a new DGN file
1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE SEPARATE <filename> or SF=<filename>. 2. Accept the move. The file is created in the directory that is pointed to by the MS_DEF configuration variable.
When using the second method, if a file already exists with the specified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be overwritten.
Fence tool box

The Fence tool box contains tools that are used to place, modify, move a fence, and delete the fence contents.
3/24/2010
Page 13 of 37
To
Select in the Fence tool box
Place a fence. Place Fence
Modify one vertex of a fence. Modify Fence Manipulate the fence contents. or Extend or shorten elements that overlap the fence. Manipulate Fence Contents
Delete the fence contents. Delete Fence Contents
Break up the complex elements in the fence contents into their components. Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents Copy the fence contents to a new DGN file or Move the fence contents to a new DGN file Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX FENCE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
To prevent accidental fence manipulations, remove a no-longer-needed fence by selecting the Place Fence tool.
Changing Elements
Manipulate tool box Copy Element Move Element Scale Rotate Mirror Construct Array Align Edges Stretch Element Move/Copy Parallel Move to Contact Modify tool box Modify Element Delete Part of Element
3/24/2010

Break Element Extend Extend Two Elements to Intersection Extend Element to Intersection Trim Element IntelliTrim Insert Vertex Delete Vertex Construct Circular Fillet Construct Chamfer Fillets tool box Construct Parabolic Fillet Multi-line Joints tool box Construct Closed Cross Joint Construct Open Cross Joint Construct Merged Cross Joint Cut Single Component Line Cut All Component Lines Construct Closed Tee Joint Construct Open Tee Joint Construct Merged Tee Joint Construct Corner Joint Uncut Component Lines Multi-line Partial Delete Move Multi-line Profile Edit Multi-line Cap Change Attributes tool box Change Element Attributes Change Element to Active Area Change Element to Active Fill Type Modify Line Style Attributes CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE Change Multi-line to Active Definition Changing the Level of an Element Changing an Element's Template Association Updating Elements from a Template Modify Curves task Change to Active Curve Settings Rebuild Curve Extend Curve Change Element Direction Convert Element to B-spline Blend Curves Drop B-spline Curve Flatten Curve Deform Curve Evaluate Curve Specialized Manipulation and Modification Tools Putting "Holes" in Solid Elements
Page 14 of 37
Manipulate tool box

The tools in the Manipulate tool box are used to copy, move, resize, rotate, mirror, create arrays, align and stretch elements.
To
Select in the Manipulate tool box
Copy an element(s). Copy Element
3/24/2010
Page 15 of 37
Move an element(s). Move Element
Resize an element(s) by the active scale factors. Scale
Rotate an element(s). Rotate
Mirror an element(s). Mirror
Copy an element(s) many times to create a rectangular or a polar (circular) array. Construct Array
Align an element(s) to an edge of another element. Align Edges
Stretch an element(s) Stretch Element
Move or copy an element with the sides of the copy parallel to the original. Move/Copy Parallel
Move an element(s) in a defined direction until it contacts an existing element in the model. Move to Contact
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MANIPULATE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
With the Element Selection tool active, you can right-click on an element to open a menu with options to copy, move, scale, rotate, mirror, delete, or display the properties for the selected element(s).
To manipulate an attached reference with these tools, you must first turn on the attachment's Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation setting.
Modify tool box

The tools in the Modify tool box are used to modify element geometry.
3/24/2010
Page 16 of 37
To Move a vertex of a linear element. or Modify rounded segments of complex chains and complex shapes. or Change rounded segments of complex chains and complex shapes to vertices and vice-versa. or Scale a circular arc while maintaining its sweep angle. or Move dimension text. or Change dimension extension line length. or Scale a block about the opposite vertex. or Change a circle's radius or the length of one axis of an ellipse.
Select in the Modify tool box
Modify Element
Delete part of an element. Delete Part of Element
Break a linear element at a defined point. Break Element
Extend or shorten a line. Extend
Extend or shorten two open elements to their intersection. Extend Two Elements to Intersection
Extend or shorten an open element to its intersection with another element. Extend Element to Intersection
Trim a series of elements at their intersection with one or more other elements.
3/24/2010

Trim Element
Page 17 of 37
Simultaneously trim or extend multiple elements at their intersection with one or more other elements. IntelliTrim
Insert a vertex in a linear element. Insert Vertex
Delete a vertex from a linear element. Delete Vertex
Construct a circular fillet between two elements. Construct Circular Fillet see footnote 105
Construct a chamfer between two lines or adjacent segments of a line string or shape. Construct Chamfer see footnote 106
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MODIFY [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
To create and clean up multi-line intersections, use the tools in the Multi-line Joints tool box.
Fillets tool box

The tools in the Fillets tool box are used to fillet planar elements.
To
Select in the Fillets tool box
Construct a circular fillet between two elements. Construct Circular Fillet see footnote 108
Construct a parabolic fillet between two elements. Construct Parabolic Fillet
3/24/2010
Page 18 of 37
Construct a chamfer between two lines or adjacent segments of a line string or shape.
Construct Chamfer see footnote 109
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX FILLET [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
To perform filleting or chamfering on the fly, use the Place SmartLine tool.
Multi-line Joints tool box

The tools in the Multi-line Joints tool box are used to construct joints at multi-line intersections, construct cuts (breaks) in multi-lines, and modify multi-line components. Multi-lines are placed with the Place Multi-line tool in the Linear task.
To
Select in the Multi-line Joints tool box
Construct a closed cross joint. Construct Closed Cross Joint
Construct an open cross joint. Construct Open Cross Joint
Construct a merged cross joint. Construct Merged Cross Joint
Cut (break) a component line in a multi-line segment. Cut Single Component Line
Cut (break) all component lines in a multi-line segment. Cut All Component Lines
Construct a closed tee joint. Construct Closed Tee Joint
Construct an open tee joint. Construct Open Tee Joint
3/24/2010
Page 19 of 37
Construct a merged tee joint. Construct Merged Tee Joint
Construct a corner joint. Construct Corner Joint
Remove a break in a multi-line. Uncut Component Lines
Partially delete a multi-line without losing previously created breaks. Multi-line Partial Delete
Move a multi-line's work line or one of its component lines. Move Multi-line Profile
Change the end cap of a multi-line. Edit Multi-line Cap
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX JOINTS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Change Attributes tool box

These tools in the Change Attributes tool box are used to change an element(s) to the active element attribute settings.
To
Select in the Change Attributes tool box
Change an element(s) level, color, line style, line weight, or class. Change Element Attributes
Change a closed element(s) to the active area (Solid or Hole). Change Element to Active Area
Change a closed element(s) to the Active Fill Type. Change Element to Active Fill Type Interactively modify the line style attributes of an element with a custom line style.
3/24/2010
Page 20 of 37
Modify Line Style Attributes
Change a multi-line to the active multi-line definition. Change Multi-line to Active Definition
Set the active element attributes so they match those of an existing element. Match Element Attributes
Change all active element attribute settings, including those specific to particular element types, so they match the attributes of an element in the design. Match All Element Settings (SmartMatch)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CHANGE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
These tools are used to change other element-specific attributes:
To change attributes for
Use
B-spline curves Change to Active Curve Settings in the Modify Curves task.
B-spline surfaces Change to Active Surface Settings in the Modify Surfaces task.
Dimension elements Change Dimension in the Dimensioning task.
Text elements Change Text Attributes in the Text task.
Changing the Level of an Element

All elements are placed on particular levels. At times you may wish to move an element from one level to another, or to copy an element to other levels. The following procedures show you how to copy and move elements between levels.
To change an element's level using the Active Level drop-down menu
1. Select the element whose level you want to change.
3/24/2010

2. In the Attributes tool box, click the Active Level drop-down menu. The menu drops down, listing the levels in the open DGN file. 3. Choose the level to which to move the selected element. The element is moved to the chosen level, and the Active Level is set to that level.
To change an element's level with the Change Element Attributes tool
Page 21 of 37
1. Select the element whose level you want to change. 2. In the Change Attributes tool box, select the Change Element Attributes tool. (In the Main tool box, Change Element Attributes is the default representative of the Change Attributes tool box.)
3. Click the Level check box and choose the level where the element is to be relocated. 4. Enter a data point to accept. The element is relocated to the selected level.
You can also change the level of an element from the Level option menu on the General tab of the Element Information dialog box.
To move elements from one level to another level using a key-in
1. Key in LEVEL ELEMENT MOVE [dest:level-spec2] level-spec1. Moves all elements on level-spec1 to specified destination level-spec2. The destination level specification is optional. If it is not specified, then the elements are moved to the Default level.
To copy elements from one level to another level using a key-in
1. Key in LEVEL ELEMENT COPY [dest:level-spec2] level-spec1. Copies all elements on level-spec1 to specified destination level-spec2. The destination level specification is optional. If it is not specified, then the elements are copied to the Default level.
To select all elements on a level using a key-in
1. Key in LEVEL ELEMENT SELECT [file:file-spec] level-spec. Selects all elements on level-spec of specified file-spec. The file specification is optional. If it is not specified, then the elements of the active-model are selected.
To delete all elements on a level using a key-in
1. Key in LEVEL ELEMENT DELETE level-spec. Deletes all elements of specified level-spec of the active-model.
To purge all elements on a level using a key-in
1. Key in LEVEL PURGE [DEST:LEVEL-SPEC2] levelspec1. Moves all elements on a level to a specified level before the level is deleted.
Changing an Element's Template Association

An element can be associated with, or locked to, an element template. You can associate an element with a template before drawing the element. You can also associate an element with a template after the element has been placed. When an element is associated with a template, its properties match those specified in the template. When properties in the template change, the elements associated with the template can be resymbolized.
3/24/2010
Page 22 of 37
The following procedures show you how to use the Element Info dialog box to find out if an element is associated with template, associate an element with a template, and change an element's template association.
Determining an element's template association
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element. 2. Right-click the element and click Properties. or In the Primary tool box, click the Element Information icon. The Element Info dialog box opens. 3. (Optional) If the General tab is collapsed, click the downward pointing double arrows to expand it. 4. Locate the Template field. If the element is associated with a template, the template's group and template name appear in the field. If the element is not associated with a template, None appears in the field.
Associating an element with a template
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element. 2. In the Attributes tool box, if the Active Element Template icon is not displayed with highlighting on a depressed background, click the icon to change its state to selected. 3. Click the arrow next to the Active Element Template icon. A drop-down list of available template groups and templates is displayed. 4. Click the name of the template in the drop-down list. The element is associated (or locked) to the template.
Alternative Method Associating an element with a template
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element 2. In the Primary tool box, click the Element Information icon. The Element Info dialog box opens. 3. (Optional) If the General tab is collapsed, click the downward pointing double arrows to expand it. 4. In the Template field, click the right side of the field and click the drop-down arrow that appears. A drop-down list of available template groups and templates is displayed. 5. Double-click the name of the template in the drop-down list. The element is associated (or locked) to the template.
Associating an element with a different template
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element. 2. In the Attributes tool box, if the Active Element Template icon is not displayed with highlighting on a depressed background, click the icon to change its state to selected. 3. Click the arrow next to the Active Element Template icon. A drop-down list of available template groups and templates is displayed. 4. Click the name of a different template in the drop-down list. The element is associated (or locked) to a different template.
If you place an element using a template that has a certain property specified (fill, for example), and then you associate the element with a different template that does not specify that property, the property from the first template remains in effect.
Alternative Method Associating an element with a different template
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element
3/24/2010

2. In the Primary tool box, click the Element Information icon. The Element Info dialog box opens. 3. (Optional) If the General tab is collapsed, click the downward pointing double arrows to expand it. 4. In the Template field, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the existing template group and template name. A drop-down list of available template groups and templates is displayed. 5. Double-click the name of a different template in the drop-down list. The element is associated (or locked) to a different template.
Page 23 of 37
Updating Elements from a Template

An element can be associated with, or locked to, an element template. When an element is associated with a template, its properties match those specified in the template. At some point the properties in the template may change, in which case you would want to update all elements that were associated with that template. The associated elements can be updated in one of several ways, depending on whether their template was created and stored in the open DGN file or came from a DGN library:
If the template is one that was created and stored in the open DGN file, the associated elements will be resymbolized automatically when properties in their template are modified. As soon as you change the template in the Customize dialog box, elements in the open DGN file associated with that template are updated. If the template is one that was copied from a DGN library, you can update all associated elements by using a menu item on the Utilities menu in the Customize dialog box. If the template is from a DGN library, you can use the Standards Checker to check and update associated elements.
If you had used a template while placing elements and had manually changed the elements' symbology so that it no longer matches the local template, you can update the elements so that they match the template again. A menu item on the Utilities menu in the Customize dialog box allows you to update only the selected elements that are associated with local templates. If an element that is not associated with a template happens to be selected when this update occurs, its symbology will not change. The following procedures show you how to update a template created in the open DGN file and resymbolize its associated elements automatically, update all elements associated with a DGN library template that has changed, and update selected elements associated with a local template.
Updating elements while updating a template created in the open DGN file
1. Open the DGN file in which the template was created and stored. 2. Choose Workspace > Customize. The Customize dialog box opens. 3. On the Templates tab, select the template you want to change. 4. In the Properties pane, change properties associated with this template. Elements in the DGN file that are associated with this template and that use these properties are resymbolized automatically.
Updating all elements associated with a DGN library template
1. Choose Workspace > Customize. The Customize dialog box opens. 2. Choose Utilities > Update Templates from Library. All elements in the DGN file that are associated with DGN library templates and that use properties that have changed are updated.
Updating selected elements associated with a local template
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select one or more elements that are associated with the local template but whose symbology no longer matches the template.
3/24/2010

The Customize dialog box opens.
Page 24 of 37
3. Choose Utilities > Update Selected Elements. Only selected elements in the DGN file that are associated with local templates and whose properties did not match the template are updated.
Modify Curves task

The Modify Curves task contains tools that are used to modify curves.
Modify Curves task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Modify Curves task
Change a B-spline curve's attributes to the active B-spline curve settings. Change to Active Curve Settings
Clean up curves with large numbers of control points. Rebuild Curve
Extend a B-spline curve. Extend Curve
Reverse the direction of an open B-spline curve or change the start of a closed B-spline curve. Change Element Direction
Convert an element to a B-spline curve with the same shape. Convert Element to B-spline
Construct a blend curve between two elements. Blend Curves
Convert a B-spline curve to lines, a line string, a stream curve, arcs or points. Drop B-spline Curve
Flatten or project MicroStation curve type elements. Flatten Curve
3/24/2010
Page 25 of 37
Deform a curve with restrictions. Deform Curve
Graphically and numerically evaluate the attributes of a B-spline curve at given locations on the curve. Evaluate Curve
Specialized Manipulation and Modification Tools

When you need to manipulate or modify elements with more precision than is possible with the technique of dragging elements or handles on elements with the Element Selection pointer, or if you need to delete elements, use a specialized element manipulation or modification tool. These tools can be used in conjunction with the Element Selection tool or by themselves.
This table summarizes the tool boxes that contain specialized tools used to place, manipulate, and modify elements.
To Change (attributes, level, etc. of) elements. Modify (the shape or size of) elements. To use specialized tools Use a tool in the Change Attributes tool box Modify tool box
Copy, move, scale, rotate, or mirror elements. Manipulate tool box
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool. 2. Select the element(s). 3. Select the specialized tool. 4. Perform the desired manipulation or modification.
Alternative Method To use specialized tools
1. Select the specialized tool. The prompt Identify element is displayed in the status bar. The pointer has a circular aperture that works like the aperture on the Element Selection arrowhead pointer.
2. Enter a data point on or near a desired element to identify the element. In some cases it may be helpful to first snap a tentative point to the element. The element is highlighted, and the prompt Accept/reject element is displayed in the status bar. 3. To accept the element and continue, enter a data point anywhere in any view except on an element. or To identify a different element, Reset and return to step 2. 4. Enter additional data points to perform (and in some cases, repeat) the desired manipulation. 5. (Optional) Repeat steps 24 for each additional element. (The tool must have been locked upon selection in step 1.)
The first method is referred to as noun-verb because the element(s) are distinguished before the specialized tool is selected. The second method is referred to as verb-noun All specialized tools work with the verb-noun method Not all can be operated noun-verb When you
3/24/2010

select a tool that does not work on a noun-verb basis, MicroStation automatically deselects any selected elements.
Page 26 of 37
Putting Holes in Solid Elements

When you draw a shape that represents a hole in a solid element, the interior of that shape cannot be hatched or patterned (if Associative Pattern is off), and the background will show through the hole.
The block is a solid; the circle and hexagon are holes, and so are not hatched (when Associative Pattern is off).
Whether a closed element is a solid or hole is determined by its Area attribute:
The Change Element to Active Area tool in the Change Attributes tool box is used to change the Area of a closed element(s).
The Group Holes tool in the Groups tool box is a special tool for putting holes in solid elements. The tool is so named because it creates a group consisting of the holes and the solid. In effect, this tool creates an orphan cell consisting of the outside solid element with the interior hole elements. To modify any of the elements making up the solid and holes, you first have to drop the group back to its constituent elements, using the Drop Element tool.
Grouping Elements
Some groupings in MicroStation, such as the set of selected elements and a fence contents, are temporary. Other groupings are permanent. These groupings include:

levels complex chains and complex shapes groups graphic groups named groups hierarchies of named group
In this chapter, you will also find:

Using the Tools in the Groups tool box Associating Elements C l Ch i dC l Sh
U i
3/24/2010

Using Groups Using Graphic Groups Using Named Groups Using Displaysets Groups tool box Drop Element Create Complex Chain Create Complex Shape Create Region Add to Graphic Group Create Named Group dialog box Drop from Graphic Group Group Holes Drop tool box Drop Complex Status Drop Line String/Shape Status Drop Text Drop Association Drop Line Style Drop Associative Pattern Drop Multi-line Drop Dimension Element Associating Elements
Page 27 of 37
Using Complex Chains and Complex Shapes

A complex chain (sometimes called a complex string) is a series of connected open elements (lines, line strings, arcs, curves) grouped for manipulation as a single entity. A complex shape, like a complex chain, is a series of connected open elements grouped for manipulation as a single object. The difference is that the first and last element in a complex shape are connected, thereby closing a shape.
Left: Complex shape created from arc and line string with Create Complex Shape tool. Center and right: Union and intersection of circle and block created with Create Region tool.
You can create complex chains and shapes, from existing elements, with tools in the Groups tool box. Also, you can use the Place SmartLine tool to create a complex shape or chain.
Complex chains and complex shapes are complex elements. A complex element is a grouping of two or more elements that is manipulated as a single entity. Cells also are complex elements. (If you develop application software for MicroStation, you should know that a complex header element is stored in the DGN file for each grouping.) To reverse the grouping, you can use the Drop Element tool in the Groups tool box to drop the status of a complex element. That is, to convert the complex element to its component elements so they can be manipulated individually.
Using Groups
You can select a number of elements and group them so that you can manipulate them as a single element. A group is a complex element whose component elements need not be connected.
To create a group
3/24/2010

1. Select the elements that will compose the group. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Group. The elements are grouped and will now be able to be manipulated as a single element.
To break up a group
Page 28 of 37
1. Select the group. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Ungroup. The elements are ungrouped and now may be manipulated individually. You manipulate and modify groups just as you do simple elements.
A group is actually an unnamed cell. Unlike named cells, groups are not defined in cell libraries. For this reason groups are sometimes called orphan cells.
Using Graphic Groups

Graphic groups are a quick method for grouping elements in MicroStation. Without breaking up the grouping, you can add, remove, or manipulate individual member elements. Whether your actions change the whole graphic group or only part of it depends upon whether you turn Graphic Group Lock on or off. With Graphic Group Lock on, all elements in the graphic group are manipulated. With Graphic Group Lock off only the selected element is manipulated. For greater flexibility still, you can create named groups, which let you give a name to each grouping of elements. The Groups tool box has tools for creating a graphic group and adding and removing elements to or from a graphic group.
To manipulate or modify a graphic group
1. Turn on Graphic Group (Lock) in the Settings menu's Locks submenu. 2. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation or modification. 3. Identify the graphic group. 4. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool.
To manipulate or modify one or more member elements of a graphic group
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element(s).
2. Perform the desired manipulation or modification. or Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation or modification in the Manipulate tool box or Modify tool box. 3. If using a specialized tool, continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool.
Alternative Method To manipulate or modify one or more member elements of a graphic group
1. Turn off Graphic Group (Lock) in the Settings menu's Locks submenu. 2. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation or modification in the Manipulate tool box or Modify tool box. 3. Identify an element in the graphic group. 4. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool.
3/24/2010
Page 29 of 37
Using Named Groups

Named groups are the most flexible method for grouping elements in MicroStation. Named groups can include elements from the active file and those from directly attached references. As well as individual named groups, you can create a hierarchy of them by adding child named groups to a parent. When you have a hierarchy, manipulating the parent named group will include any attached child named groups. You can add and drop elements from individual named groups (including those that are part of a hierarchy), as well as manipulate the elements within each named group (again, including those that are part of a hierarchy). When you select elements from a reference, to be included in a named group, they are not copied into the master file. Elements from references are just referred to (pointed to) by the named group element in the master file. When you detach a reference that includes elements selected in a named group, the count of elements for the named group does not decrease in the Named Groups dialog box until you close and re-open it. The same happens when you delete elements that are part of a named group in the active file. Again, you must close and then re-open the Named Groups dialog box to see the corrected number of elements in the named group. If you inadvertently detach a reference having elements that are part of a named group, only undoing the detachment will return the members to the named group. They will, however, only reappear after you close and reopen the Named Groups dialog box. Simply re-attaching the reference will not return the members to the named group, as there is no way that MicroStation knows that the file once was attached. When you attach members to a named group, the Member Type setting lets you define the way that other members of the named group are affected when a member is manipulated or selected. This is done via Change Propagation settings. These are set to defaults, automatically, when you select Member Type as either Active or Passive. Alternatively, you can define the settings manually by selecting Custom as the Member Type. Each member has three Change Propagation settings that define when a member can propagate changes To other members, can have changes propagated From other members, and can propagate changes To other groups. In each case, the Change Propagation options are:

Group Lock only when Graphic Group Lock is on. Never propagation never occurs. Always propagation always occurs.
Another setting, Selectable, which can be toggled on/off in the Named Groups dialog box, overrides the above settings when Graphic Group lock is on and members are chosen with the Element Selection tool. If Selectable is on, then all members of the named group will be selected. If it is off, the change propagation settings apply.
To create a named group with the Add to Graphic Group tool
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element(s) to be included in the named group. 2. Select the Add to Graphic Group tool. 3. Click the Create New Named Group icon. The Create Named Group dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in a name for the new named group. 5. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description for the new named group. 6. (Optional) Turn on Select all members when any member selected. This turns on Selectable for the named group. 7. Click OK.
To create a named group from the Named Groups dialog box
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element(s) to be included in the named group.
3/24/2010

The Named Groups dialog box opens. 3. Click the New Named Group icon (far left). A new entry is inserted in the list box, with a default name highlighted ready to edit. 4. (Optional) Key in the required name, to replace the default name.
Page 30 of 37
5. Click the Add Elements icon. The Add to Graphic Group tool is activated, with Named Group turned on, the new named group selected, and Member Type set to Active.. 6. Accept to add the selected element(s) to the named group.
To add elements to an existing named group with the Element Selection tool
1. In the Main tool box, select the Element Selection tool. 2. If adding a single element, drag it into the Named Groups dialog box and drop it on the list box entry for the named group. or If adding multiple elements, select them, and then drag one and drop it on the list box entry for the named group.
To add selected elements to an existing named group with the Add to Graphic Group tool
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element(s) to be added to the named group. 2. Select the Add to Graphic Group tool. 3. If necessary, turn on Named Group. 4. From the Named Group drop-down menu, choose the named group. 5. Accept to add the elements.
To add elements individually to an existing named group with the Add to Graphic Group tool
1. Select the Add to Graphic Group tool. 2. If necessary, turn on Named Group. 3. From the Named Group drop-down menu, choose the named group. 4. Identify the element(s) to add to the named group. 5. Accept to add the element(s) to the named group.
To add selected elements to an existing named group from the Named Groups dialog box
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element(s) to be added to the named group. 2. From the Utilities menu, choose Named Groups. The Named Groups dialog box opens. 3. In the named groups list box, select a named group to which to add the elements. 4. Click the Add Elements icon. 5. Accept to add the selected elements to the named group.
To add elements individually to an existing named group from the Named Groups dialog box
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Named Groups. The Named Groups dialog box opens. 2. In the named groups list box, select a named group to which to add the elements. 3. Click the Add Elements icon.
3/24/2010

4. Identify the element(s) to add to the named group. 5. Accept to add the selected elements to the named group. Creating named group hierarchies
Page 31 of 37
From the Named Groups dialog box, you can create a hierarchy of named groups. This lets you nest other named groups in a hierarchical structure. Take a simple example of an office layout with named groups for Partitions, Shelving, Workstation, and Chairs. You could set up the following hierarchies (as shown in the following diagram):

Workstation (2) with Visitor Chairs (A) and Workstation chair (B) as child groups. Partitions (1) with Shelving (3) and Workstation (2) as child groups.
Named Groups dialog box displaying the example hierarchy.
With the above setup, for example, moving:
Partitions (1) would move the entire layout
3/24/2010
Page 32 of 37
Workstation (2) would move the chairs as well, but leave the partition and shelving.
When you are creating a hierarchy, you first drag a named group from the Named Groups list to the Hierarchy list. From here, you can use drag and drop, or the Add Named Group to Parent icon, to add Named Groups to the hierarchy. You can select entries in the Named Groups dialog box individually, with data points. Additional entries can be selected with <Ctrl> data points or <Shift> data to include all entries in-between the previous selection and the current.
To create a hierarchy
1. Open the Named Groups dialog box (Utilities > Named Groups). 2. If necessary, click the Show Hierarchy icon to display the Hierarchy. 3. Select a named group for the Parent group and drag it to the Hierarchy list box. 4. In the named group list on the right, select a named group to attach. 5. (Optional) Select further named groups to attach to the hierarchy. 6. Click the Add Named Group to Parent Group icon.
Using drag and drop to create a hierarchy
1. Open the Named Groups dialog box (Utilities > Named Groups). 2. If necessary, click the Show Hierarchy icon to display the Hierarchy. 3. Select a named group for the Parent group and drag it to the Hierarchy list box. 4. (Optional) Select further named groups to attach to the hierarchy. 5. Drag the selected named group(s) to the Parent entry.
To remove a named group(s) from a parent group
1. In the Hierarchy list, expand the parent group to display the attached child groups. 2. Select the group(s) to be removed from the hierarchy. 3. Click the Remove Group from Parent icon. Quicksets Working in conjunction with named groups, quicksets let you quickly save selected elements as named groups for later recall. Groups of elements created as Quicksets, have the setting for Member Type set to passive. That is, they do not propagate changes to other members in the quickset. For example, if you turn on Group Lock on and then move a member of a quickset, it will have no effect on other members of the quickset group. To work with all members of a quickset, you first must recall the quickset. You can create and recall up to ten named groups via the Quickset Save and Quickset Recall menus in the view control pop-up menu, which is activated by pressing the Reset button while holding down <Shift>. Alternatively, you can create or recall up to ten quicksets using the keyboard shortcuts <Ctrl-Shift-n> and <Ctrl-n>, respectively, where n is a value 0 9 inclusive. By default, quicksets are given the names Quickset0 through to Quickset9, and appear as such in the Named Groups dialog box. Where necessary, you can use the Named Groups dialog box to rename them.
When creating or recalling a quickset with key-ins, the numbers in the alpha-numeric section of th keyboard must be used, not those from the numeric keypad.
To create a quickset via the view control pop-up menu
3/24/2010
Page 33 of 37
2. With the pointer in the view, press the Reset button while holding down <Shift> to open the view control pop-up menu. 3. From the Quickset Save menu, choose the required number for the quickset.
To recall a quickset via the view control pop-up menu
1. With the pointer in the view, press the Reset button while holding down <Shift> to open the view control pop-up menu. 2. From the Quickset Recall menu, choose the number for the required quickset.
To create a quickset with a keyboard shortcut
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the elements to be included. 2. Press <Ctrl + Shift + n> where n is the number of the quickset (from 0 to 9, entered from the alphanumeric part of the keyboard).
To recall a quickset with a keyboard shortcut
1. Press <Ctrl + n> where n is the number of the quickset that you want to recall and is a number from 0 to 9 entered from the alphanumeric part of the keyboard.
Using Displaysets
Displaysets let you select a group of elements to display in selected views, with all other elements hidden. You can create displaysets from selection sets or named groups. Displaysets display is controlled from the View Attributes dialog box, where the Displayset control lets you turn their display on and off. With Displaysets active, you can use the Named Groups dialog box to select a named group and then display only the elements in the group, in the chosen view(s), by clicking the Put Elements into the Displayset icon. This lets you quickly switch between different named groups. Using the view control pop-up menu, you can set selected elements as the displayset, or you can clear the displayset, so that all elements display. You can also add or remove elements from the displayset.
To turn on displaysets in a view(s)
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes. or From any open view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
3/24/2010

2. (Optional) To turn on displaysets in all views, turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn on Displayset.
To select a named group or hierarchy as the displayset
Page 34 of 37
1. In the Named Groups dialog box, select the required named group, or hierarchy. 2. Click the Put Elements into the Displayset icon.
To create a displayset from selected elements
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the required elements. 2. Press the Reset button while holding down <Shift> to open the view control pop-up menu. 3. From the Displayset menu, choose Set.
To add elements to a displayset
1. Turn on displaysets in a view. 2. Select element(s) for the displayset. 3. Press the Reset button while holding down <Shift> to open the view control pop-up menu. 4. From the Displayset menu, choose Set. 5. With the pointer in a different view, select element(s) or group(s). 6. Press the Reset button while holding down <Shift> to open the view control pop-up menu. 7. From the Displayset menu, choose Add.
To remove elements from a displayset
1. Turn on displaysets in a view. 2. Select the element(s) to remove from the displayset. 3. With the pointer in the view, press the Reset button while holding down <Shift> to open the view control pop-up menu. 4. From the Displayset menu, choose Remove.
Groups tool box

The tools in the Groups tool box are used to create and manipulate complex chains, complex shapes, and graphic groups.
To
Select in the Groups tool box
Break up a complex element(s) or an element(s) of a special type into simpler components. Drop Element Create a complex chain (open complex element).
3/24/2010
Page 35 of 37
Create Complex Chain
Create a complex shape (closed complex element) from individual open elements. Create Complex Shape
Create a complex shape from the union, intersection, or difference between closed elements or by flood fill. Create Region Create a graphic group. see footnote 112 or Add elements to an existing graphic group. or Combine two or more graphic groups into one graphic group. Remove (drop) an element(s) from a graphic group. or Break up a graphic group into individual elements. Drop from Graphic Group Add to Graphic Group
Select a solid element and the hole or holes to be associated with the solid. Group Holes
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX GROUPS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Drop tool box

The tools in the Drop tool box are used to break up complex elements into simpler components, and to remove association points between elements.
To
Select in the Drop tool box
Break up a complex element(s) or an element(s) of a special type into simpler components. Drop Element see footnote 121
Break up a complex element into its components. Drop Complex Status
3/24/2010
Page 36 of 37
Convert a line string or shape to a series of individual line elements. Drop Line String/Shape Status
Convert the text characters in a text element to the individual elements that are used to draw the characters. Drop Text
Discontinue an association between a shared cell, dimension witness line, or multi-line and another element. Drop Association Remove (drop) an element(s) from a graphic group. or Drop from Graphic Group Break up a graphic group into individual elements. see footnote 122
Convert an element with a custom line style to an identically appearing group of primitive elements with standard line styles. Drop Line Style
Convert any associative pattern (or hatch) into an identically appearing group of primitive elements. Drop Associative Pattern
Convert a multi-line to a set of line strings, lines, and/or arcs. Drop Multi-line
Break up a dimension element(s) into their components. Drop Dimension Element
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DROP [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
The Drop Element tool is a general dropping tool. It incorporates the capabilities of several of the more specialized tools in the tool box.
Associating Elements
Under most circumstances, elements are static and, when an element is placed in a design, its position is defined simply by the design plane coordinates on which it lies. It retains that position in the design plane until you move it with an element manipulation tool. One exception to this rule is association, in which an element's position in the design plane is defined in relation to another element. When that other element is moved, the associated element moves with it. For example, dimension elements can be associated with the elements whose dimensions they display. These dimensions update when the dimensions of the elements, with which they are associated, change. Elements that can be associated with other elements The types of elements that can be associated with other elements are dimensions, multi-lines, normal cells, shared cells, and tags. The
3/24/2010

association is made when the dimension, multi-line, cell, or tag is placed. Associating cells When a cell is associated with another element, the cell's origin is associated with a point on the other element.
To associate a shared cell with another element
Page 37 of 37
1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. If using a shared cell, turn on Use Shared Cells. 3. In the list box, select the desired cell. 4. In the Active Cells section, click the Placement button. 5. In the Cells task, select the Place Active Cell tool. (In the Drawing task, Place Active Cell is the default representative of the Cells task.)
The prompt in the status bar is Place Active Cell. 6. In the tool settings Placement Options (extended) section, turn on Association Lock. 7. Snap a tentative point to the element to which the cell is to be associated. 8. Enter a data point to accept placement and association of the Active Cell. Associating multi-lines When a multi-line is associated with another element, one or more vertices of the multi-line are associated with points on another element (or elements).
To associate a multi-line with another element
1. In the Settings menu's Locks submenu, or in the tool settings for the Place Multi-line tool, turn on Association (Lock). 2. In the Linear task, select the Place Multi-line tool.
Vertices of the multi-line that are not associated with other elements can be placed in the normal way (as if placing a line string). When you are ready to place a vertex associated with another element, continue with step 3. 3. Snap to a tentative point on the element to which the multi-line's vertex is to be associated. 4. Enter a data point to accept placement of the vertex of the multi-line and its association with the other element. 5. Continue placing vertices of the multi-line or Reset to complete the multi-line. The vertices of a multi-line can further be associated with vertices of other multi-lines.
3/24/2010
Managing References and Raster Images
Page 1 of 74
Managing Managing References References and and Raster Raster Images Images
Attaching References Reference Update Sequence Working with Attached References Raster Manager Overview Raster Manager Tools Managing Raster Image Files Raster Manager Projects Modifying Raster File Attachments Migrating to Raster Manager
Attaching References
MicroStation's referencing tools let you view other models as you work on the active model, much the way overlays are used in the real world. With overlays, you work on the top overlay, while referring to the information on one or more overlays below. You can reference models from the open DGN file, or from other DGN's that may or may not currently be opened by other users. Similarly, other users can reference the model that you are working on. Referencing is a powerful tool in a multi-discipline office, in particular, where many are working on different aspects of the same project.
General Procedure To attach a single reference
1. In the Primary Tools tool box, click the References icon. 2. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. 3. In the Attach Reference dialog box, select the DGN file that contains the model to attach as a reference. 4. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive. 5. Click OK. 6. In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, adjust settings as required. 7. Click OK. Making Coincident Attachments Attaching References Using Views and Named Fences Making Portable Reference Attachments Locating Attachments Locating Lost Attachments Attaching Remote References Maintaining Copies of Remote References with Reference Agent
Making Coincident Attachments

The most common way to attach a reference is coincident, which means that the coordinates of the referenced model's design plane, and optionally its Global Origin, are aligned with those of the active model, without any rotation, scaling, or offset.
To attach a reference coincident
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hhB82E.htm
3/24/2010
Page 2 of 74
References dialog box
2. In the Attach Reference dialog box, select the DGN file that contains the model to attach as a reference.
Attach Reference dialog box
3/24/2010
Page 3 of 74
3. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive, then click OK. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 4. In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, select the model to attach.
5. To align the reference with the active model with regard to both Global Origin and design plane coordinates, select Coincident World in the Orientation list box. This option is available only when referencing a model in a DGN file. or To align the reference with regard to design plane coordinates only, select Coincident in the Orientation list box. 6. Modify the other attachment settings as needed, and click OK.
To attach multiple references from a single directory
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. The Attach Reference dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 4 of 74
Attach Reference dialog box
2. Select the DGN files that contain the models to attach as references.
To select multiple files, hold the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key as you select the files.
3. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 4. Click Open. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens for the first file in the selection list. 5. Modify the attachment settings, as required, then click OK. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens for the next file in the selection list. 6. Modify the attachment settings, as required, for each subsequent reference in the list.
To attach multiple references from multiple folders
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. The Attach Reference dialog box opens. 2. If necessary, open Selected Files list by clicking the down arrowhead at lower left of the dialog box.
3/24/2010

3. Select the first folder and file(s).
To select multiple files, hold the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key as you select the files.
Page 5 of 74
4. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive. 5. Click Add to add the selected files to the list. 6. Select a new folder and file(s). 7. Click Add to add the new files to the list. 8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for any further files required. 9. In the Attach Reference dialog box, click Open. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens for the first file in the selection list. 10. Modify the attachment settings, as required, then click OK. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens for the next file in the selection list. 11. Modify the attachment settings, as required, for each subsequent reference in the list.
To attach references interactively using drag and drop
1. Open the References dialog box. 2. In a Windows Explorer window, select the files to attach as references. 3. Drag and drop the files into the References dialog box's list box. The Attach Source Files dialog box opens.
Attach Source Files dialog box
4. Choose the Interactive attachment method. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens for each reference. 5. Modify the attachment settings, as required, then click OK.
To attach a model as a coincident reference using drag and drop
1. Open the References dialog box. 2. In the Models dialog box, select the models to use as references. 3. Drag and drop the files into the References dialog box's list box. The Attach Source Files dialog box opens. 4. Choose the Coincident method, and click OK. The models are attached.
To attach the active model to itself as a reference (self-reference)
3/24/2010

1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. The Attach Reference dialog box opens. 2. Select the open DGN file and click Open. 3. From the Model option menu, choose the active model. 4. (Optional) Type in a logical name and description. 5. Attach the model as a coincident reference to itself. or Attach using a saved view or named fence.
Page 6 of 74
The workspace preference Allow Editing of Self References determines whether models that are attached to themselves (selfattached) are automatically updated to reflect modifications to the active model. Allow Editing of Self References is on by default. This makes it easier to use self-attached references, for example, to generate drawings of 3D models.
Attaching References Using Views and Named Fences

Attaching references can be a useful way to set up a drawing for printing. In composing the drawing, you can attach only that portion of a model that is required using a saved view or named fence. A saved view can have a clip volume element saved with it, to provide precise control of the view boundary. The clip boundary element can be associated to the saved view, so that changes to the clip boundary element directly control the clip volume of the saved view. You can also change the orientation of an attachment by selecting standard views, sometimes combined with a saved view or named fence. This process can be automated.
To attach a reference using standard views
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. 2. In the Attach Reference dialog box, select the file that contains the model to attach as a reference. 3. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive, and click Open. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 4. In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, Orientation list box, expand Standard Views. 5. Select one or more of the standard views, and click OK. 6. In the active model, enter data points to position the centers of each of the selected attachments.
To attach a reference using a named fence
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. 2. In the Attach Reference dialog box, select the file that contains the model to attach as a reference. 3. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive, and click Open. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 4. In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, Orientation list box, expand Named Fences (if the model contains named fences). 5. (Optional) Under a named fence, select one or more of the standard views to place the reference at one or more standard rotation (s). 6. Click OK. 7. In the active model, enter data points to position the centers of each of the selected attachments.
3/24/2010

To attach a reference using a saved view
Page 7 of 74
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. 2. In the Attach Reference dialog box, select the file that contains the model to attach as a reference. 3. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive, and click Open. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 4. In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, Orientation list box, expand Saved Views (if the model contains saved views). 5. Under a saved view, select one or more of the standard views. 6. (Optional) If the saved view contains a clip boundary element, from the Clip Boundary Element option menu, choose how you want to associate a clip boundary element to the saved view. If you choose Copy to Master to copy the clip boundary to the saved view, the clip boundary is not associative. If you choose Associate to Saved View, the reference clip boundary automatically reflects any changes to the clip boundary in the reference. 7. Click OK. 8. In the active model, enter data points to position the centers of each of the selected attachments.
Making Portable Reference Attachments

A reference attachment that specifies the DGN file containing the attached model by its full (absolute) path is not portable across directories, projects, and networked systems. Administrators can prevent the storage of full paths in attachment data by setting the configuration variable MS_DISALLOWFULLREFPATH. You can take these additional measures to make sure that your reference attachments are portable:
If you do not expect the internal directory structure of your workspace's project component to change, the best way to ensure portability when attaching references is to turn on Save Relative Path in the Attach Reference dialog box. This causes the relative paths to DGN files that contain attached models to be saved as attachment data in the open DGN file. Where you are sure that the internal directory structure of your workspace's project component will not change, you can set the configuration variable MS_ALWAYSRELATIVEREFPATH. When this configuration variable is set, MicroStation always turns on the Save Relative Path toggle and disables it so that it cannot be turned off. If the project directory structure is in flux, or if DGN files are shared between projects, using relative paths would not give you sufficient flexibility to ensure the portability of your reference attachments. In these situations, you should define the configuration variable MS_RFDIR or a custom configuration variable to specify the directory in which references reside, and attach references using this configuration variable. The configuration variable name, but not its definition, is saved as attachment data. If the project files are then moved, for example, to another directory or a file server, the only change needed is to redefine the variable. Defining multiple custom configuration variables, such as project-specific or data type-specific variables, provides even greater flexibility.
You can combine the above techniques that is, specify the location of a DGN file that contains an attached reference with a configuration variable and a relative path.
To attach a model as a reference residing in a directory specified by a configuration variable
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. The Attach Reference dialog box opens. Even if the model you want to attach is displayed in the Files list box, do not skip steps 34. 2. In the icon menu bar, click the Directories/Configuration variables icon (far right) and, from the drop-down menu, choose Select Configuration Variable. The Select Configuration Variable dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 8 of 74
3. From the list box, select the configuration variable that specifies the directory in which the DGN resides (for example, MS_RFDIR), then click OK. The Attach Reference dialog box lists files in the specified directory. 4. From the list box, select the file to attach and click OK. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 5. Select the required model, adjust other settings as necessary, then click OK. The configuration variable name is stored, along with the filename, (optional) logical name and (optional) description, in the attachment information. MicroStation will locate a model attached in this manner whenever the DGN file is opened on any system as long as the custom configuration variable is defined and the DGN file that contains the model is stored in the specified directory. The specified directory can vary from system to system.
Locating Attachments
When MicroStation opens a DGN file, it searches for DGN files that contain attached references as follows: 1. If the file specification contains a custom configuration variable, it searches that directory, using the relative path, if any. 2. It searches a list of directories which consists of all of the directories for the parent files of the reference. If the reference is attached directly to the master file, the search path consists only of the directory of the master file. If the reference is nested, the path consists of the directories of each parent file, starting with the most deeply nested. The directories searched include the relative path, if any, in the file specification. 3. It searches the directories specified by the configuration variable MS_RFDIR, again retaining the relative path, if any, in the file specification. 4. It uses the full file specification in the reference attachment, if present.
Locating Lost Attachments

If MicroStation cannot locate one or more references, upon opening a DGN file or model, a warning appears in the message center. Details for that message list the references that were not found. When the reference dialog box is opened, references that are not found are displayed in red.
3/24/2010

To update a reference when MicroStation cannot locate the file
Page 9 of 74
1. In References dialog box's list box, double-click the reference. or In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference. Then, from the Settings menu, choose Attachment. The Attachment Settings dialog box opens.
2. In the File Name field, key in the new file specification. or Click the Browse button, select the reference in the Reattach Reference dialog box, then click OK to return to the Attachment Settings dialog box. 3. Click OK.
Attaching Remote References

The Remote Attach function lets you select a URL as a DGN file location instead of a specific local DGN file.
To attach a remote reference
1. Key in DIALOG REFERENCE ATTACHURL. The Select Remote Design to Attach dialog box open. The controls in this dialog box are analogous to those in the Select Remote File dialog box. 2. In the URL text box, key in the path to the remote reference. 3. (Optional) Adjust any other settings as necessary. 4. Click OK.
3/24/2010
Page 10 of 74
Maintaining Copies of Remote References with Reference Agent

Reference Agent lets you automatically maintain local copies of remote references. Upon loading the Reference Agent, each attached reference is checked against a data file to see if a URL has been associated. If so, an HTTP request is automatically sent to check the last-modified date of the remote file against the local copy. If a newer copy exists at the remote URL, the status of the file changes to Out of Date.
Status N/A Current Unknown Out of Date Reference has no associated URL. Remote reference is the same age or older. Remote reference could not be found, or the last modified date was not available. Generally indicates that the URL is invalid, or that there was a network error when the remote site was contacted. Local copy of the reference is older then the remote copy. Description
References with more than one logical name have only one entry in the Reference Agent. Downloading the associated remote URL updates all logical entries associated with the local file.
To access the Reference Agent
1. Key in BROWSER REFAGENT. The Reference File Agent dialog box opens.
Reference Update Sequence

When updating a view, MicroStation follows, by default, the following update sequence: 1. the active model, and then 2. the references, roughly in their attachment order. Adjusting the Update Sequence
3/24/2010
Page 11 of 74
You can customize the update sequence used with the active model using the Update Sequence dialog box. The customization capability is used to prioritize the display of overlapping elements.
To modify the file update sequence
1. From the References dialog box's Settings menu, choose Update Sequence. The Update Sequence dialog box opens. The list box shows the current update sequence.
2. In the list box, select one or more references or the active model. Use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select a range or individual files. 3. Click the buttons to move the selected files in the chosen direction, or simply drag the selected files to the desired location. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the sequence is modified as desired. 5. Click OK.
Changes to the update sequence are saved to the active model on disk by choosing Save Settings from the File menu.
To restore the default update sequence
1. From the References dialog box's Settings menu, choose Update Sequence. The Update Sequence dialog box opens. 2. Click the Default button. 3. Click OK. Once this procedure is performed and DGN file settings are saved, any previous update sequence changes are lost. The alternative is to override the active model's custom update sequence with the default update sequence.
To override the custom update sequence with the default
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Reference. 3. Turn on Ignore Update Sequence.
3/24/2010

4. Click OK.
Page 12 of 74
You can set the RDL_DIR to automatically locate redline files created in Bentley Redline.
If Ignore Update Sequence option is on, the Update Sequence item in the References dialog box's Settings menu is disabled (dimmed).
Working with Attached References

Except for Attach Reference, the reference tools operate on the models that are selected in the References dialog box. If no model is selected there, you are prompted to identify a model. See Identifying references for more information. The <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys are used to select multiple models. Clipping References Manipulating References Setting the Render Mode for References Reloading References Detaching References Controlling Reference Settings Identifying References Working with Nested References Merging References into the Active Model References task Attach Reference Set Reference Clip Boundary Set Reference Clip Mask Delete Reference Clip Set Reference Back Clip Plane Set Reference Front Clip Plane Reload Reference Move Reference Copy References Scale References Rotate Reference Mirror Reference Copy Reference By Folding Set Reference Presentation Hidden Line Settings dialog box Hidden Line Settings dialog box General tab Hidden Line Settings dialog box Hidden tab Hidden Line Settings dialog box Visible tab Hidden Line Settings dialog box Smooth tab Detach Reference REFERENCE UPDATE References key-ins
Clipping References
You can control the reference display more precisely by using the clipping tools:
The Clip Reference tool lets you use a boundary, such as an element, cell, or fence, to clip a reference. When a reference is clipped, the area of the reference outside the selected boundary is not displayed. The Clip Mask tool lets you use a fence to cover a portion of a reference.
Reference elements display only if they are inside the clipping boundary and outside all clipping masks.
3/24/2010
Page 13 of 74
To more precisely control the reference display, you can use both clipping boundaries and clipping masks on the same reference.
While a view's Boundary Display attribute is on in the View Attributes dialog box, reference clip boundaries, as well as clip volume boundaries, are displayed for that view. Reference clipping is defined relative to the world coordinates, and the clipped volume will therefore remain the same in all views.
The boundaries of a saved view can be used as the clipping boundary when a reference is attached (see To attach a reference using a saved view).
To define a reference clipping boundary using a fence
1. To define the reference clipping boundary's position, place a fence over the desired clip area. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references to include in the clip boundary set. 3. Click the Clip Reference icon. The Set Reference Clip Boundary tool settings window opens. 4. From the Method option menu, choose Active Fence. 5. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 6. Enter a data point to accept the clip boundary.
To define a reference clipping boundary using a named fence
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references to include in the clip boundary set. 2. Click the Clip Reference icon. The Set Reference Clip Boundary tool settings window opens. 3. From the Method option menu, choose Named Fence. 4. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 5. Choose the named fence from the list on the dialog box 6. Enter a data point to accept the clip boundary.
To define a reference clipping boundary using an element
1. To define the reference clipping boundary's position, place an element (or a cell) over the desired clip area. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that the clip boundary will affect. 3. Click the Clip Reference tool. The Set Reference Clip Boundary tool settings window opens. 4. From the Method option menu, choose Element. 5. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 6. Identify the element as the clipping element. 7. Accept the element as the clipping element.
To mask a reference
1. To define the reference clipping mask's position, place a fence over the desired clip area. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references to be masked. 3. Click the Mask Reference icon. Th S t R f Cli M k tti i d
3/24/2010

4. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 5. Enter a data point to accept the clip mask.
Page 14 of 74
More than one clipping mask can be specified for a reference.
To selectively delete reference clipping
1. In the References dialog box, select the references that have clipping to delete. 2. Click the Delete Clip icon. The Delete Reference Clip tool settings window opens. 3. Turn on Use References Dialog List. The clip boundary and any clip masks within the boundary highlight. 4. Identify the clip boundary, or clipping mask to be deleted. 5. Accept the deletion. or Reset to keep the highlighted clip boundary or clipping mask. 6. Repeat step 4 for each subsequent clipping mask.
When you select a reference (or have one selected from the selection set, fence or dialog box), the reference is highlighted. If there is a clip boundary and one or more masks, the boundary is shown in yellow and the masks shown in red.
To define a reference front clipping plane (3D only)
1. In the References dialog box, select the reference to be clipped. 2. Click the Set Ref Front Clip Z icon. The Set Reference Front Clip Plane dialog box opens. 3. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 4. Enter a data point to define the front clipping plane depth. The reference updates with the new clipping plane.
To define a reference back clipping plane (3D only)
1. In the References dialog box, select the reference to be clipped. 2. Click the Set Ref Back Clip Z icon. The Set Reference Back Clip Plane dialog box opens. 3. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 4. Enter a data point to define the back clipping plane depth. The reference updates with the new clipping plane. Modifying reference clip boundaries/masks You can use handles to adjust reference clip boundaries and clip masks. You can adjust a single handle, or select several to manipulate simultaneously. Handles may be selected as follows:

To select a single handle Data Point (click) on it. To select multiple handles <Ctrl> + Data on each, or <Ctrl> + Drag a box around several handles.
To adjust a single vertex of a reference clip boundary/mask
3/24/2010

1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the relevant reference. Handles appear on the reference's clip boundaries and clip masks (if present). 2. Click and drag a handle to adjust the clip boundary or clip mask.
To adjust multiple vertices of a reference clip boundary/mask
Page 15 of 74
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the relevant reference. Handles appear on the reference's clip boundaries and clip masks (if present). 2. Select the handles that you wish to manipulate. The selected handles change color to yellow. 3. Click on one of the highlighted handles and drag to the required location.
Manipulating References
You can manipulate references with the standard manipulation tools, or you can perform these tasks with tools specifically designed for reference manipulation. Whichever method you employ, the manipulation is for the reference attachment as a whole. You cannot manipulate individual elements in a reference. In order to manipulate elements in a reference, it must be the active model. A simple method to open a reference, whilst maintaining the current view orientation, is to use the exchange option. Using standard tools to manipulate references You can manipulate a reference with MicroStation's standard manipulation tools such as Move, Copy, Rotate, and Scale. That is, the reference attachment is treated as an element for the purpose of the manipulation. When you attach references, you can choose to enable the Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation setting, or you can enable/disable it later by clicking on the relevant column in the References dialog box. When the setting is:

On you can manipulate a reference by snapping to any of its elements, or its boundary. Off you can manipulate a reference only by snapping to its boundary.
Using the reference tools to manipulate references Tools in the References task let you manipulate references directly. You can use these tools whether or not the Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation setting is enabled. Every reference manipulation tool can contain any or all of the following tool settings.
If Move Boundary with Reference is on, then any clip boundaries/masks are manipulated with the reference. If this setting is off, then the reference is manipulated, while the clip boundaries/masks remain static. If Use Reference Dialog List is turned on, the manipulation works on the models selected in the References dialog box. If a fence exists and Use Fence is turned on, any models that are in the fence are manipulated. If a selection set has been created, manipulation works on the models in that set.
To move a reference selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to move in the active model. 2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate. 3. Click the Move References icon in the References dialog box. 4 In the tool settings window turn on Use References Dialog List
3/24/2010

5. Enter a data point to begin the move, and drag the reference to the desired location.
To move a reference using a fence
Page 16 of 74
1. Place a fence around the area containing the references to be moved. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select a reference. 3. Click the Move References icon. 4. In the tool settings window, turn off Use References Dialog List. 5. Turn on Use Fence and choose the fence mode. 6. Enter a data point to begin the move, and drag the fence and reference to the desired location.
To copy elements from a reference to the active DGN file
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference in which the elements are located. 2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate. 3. Select or place a fence around the elements to be copied. 4. From the Manipulate tool box, select the Copy tool.
5. Enter a data point to define the origin of the elements to be copied. The elements are dynamically displayed as the pointer is moved about the screen. 6. Enter a data point to define the origin of the copies of the elements in the active model.
If Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation is turned on, the entire reference is copied rather than elements within the reference.
To copy references selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to copy in the active model. 2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate. 3. Click the Copy References icon. 4. In the tool settings window, turn on Use References Dialog List. 5. (Optional) To make multiple copies, turn on Copies and in the adjacent field, key in the number of copies. 6. Enter a data point to begin the copy. 7. Drag the reference to the desired location, and enter a data point to place the copied model.
To copy references using a fence
1. Place a fence around the area containing the references to be copied. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select a reference. 3. Click the Copy References icon. 4. In the tool settings window, turn off Use References Dialog List. 5. Turn on Use Fence and choose the fence mode.
3/24/2010

7. Enter a data point to begin the copy. 8. Drag the reference to the desired location, and enter a data point to place the copied model.
To scale references selected from the References dialog box list
Page 17 of 74
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to scale in the active model. 2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate. 3. Click the Scale References icon. 4. In the tool settings window, choose the scaling Method (and key in the scale factor or ratio, if applicable). 5. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 6. Enter a data point about which the reference is scaled.
To scale references selected using a fence
1. Place a fence around the area containing the references to be scaled. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select a reference. 3. Click the Scale References icon. 4. In the tool settings window, choose the scaling Method (and key in the scale factor or ratio, if applicable). 5. Turn off Use References Dialog List. 6. Turn on Use Fence and choose the fence mode. 7. Enter a data point about which the references are scaled.
To rotate references selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to rotate in the active model. 2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate. 3. Click the Rotate References icon. 4. In the tool settings window, choose the rotate Method (and key in X, Y, Z coordinates if method is By Angles). 5. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 6. Enter a data point about which the references are rotated.
To rotate references using a fence
1. Place a fence around the area containing the references to be rotated. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select a reference. 3. Click the Rotate References icon. 4. In the tool settings window, choose a rotate Method (and key in X, Y, Z coordinates if Method is By Angle). 5. Turn off Use References Dialog List. 6. Turn on Use Fence and choose the fence mode. 7. Enter a data point about which the references are rotated.
To mirror references selected from the References dialog box list
In the References dialog box's list box select the references you want to mirror in the active model
3/24/2010

2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate. 3. Click the Mirror Reference icon. 4. In the tool settings window, choose the Method: About Vertical Line or About Horizontal Line. 5. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 6. Enter a data point about which the reference is to be mirrored.
To mirror references using a fence
Page 18 of 74
1. Place a fence around the area containing the references to be mirrored. 2. In the References dialog box's list box, select a reference. 3. Click the Mirror Reference icon. 4. In the tool settings window, choose the Method: About Vertical Line or About Horizontal Line. 5. Turn off Use References Dialog List. 6. Turn on Use Fence and choose the fence mode. 7. Enter a data point about which the references are to be mirrored.
To copy and fold a reference about a horizontal/vertical line
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference you want to copy and fold. 2. Click the Copy/Fold Reference icon. The Copy Reference By Folding settings window opens. 3. In the Method menu, select About Horizontal Line or About Vertical Line, as required. 4. In the Projection menu, select First Angle or Third Angle, as required. 5. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 6. Move the copy to the desired location and enter a data point to accept.
To copy and fold a reference about a specified line
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference you want to copy and fold. 2. Click the Copy/Fold Reference icon. 3. In the tool settings window, Method option menu, choose About Specified Line. 4. Turn on Use References Dialog List. 5. Enter data points for the start and end of the line around which to fold the reference. 6. Move the copy to the desired location and enter a data point to accept.
3/24/2010
Page 19 of 74
Left: Original reference attachment. Upper right: The reference attachment copied and folded about the line specified by points 1 and 2, then positioned by point 3.
Exchanging to a reference Where you want to make changes to elements located in a reference, you have to open the reference directly. When you open a reference in the usual way, it will appear as it was saved (Save Settings). With the exchange option, you are effectively exchanging the referenced model for the active model, whilst maintaining the current view setup from the active model. To exchange the referenced model for the active model, you can:

In the References dialog box, select the reference then choose Tools > Exchange. Right-click the reference in the References dialog box, then select Exchange from the pop-up menu. With the Element Selection tool, point at the referenced element and choose Exchange from the Reset pop-up menu. Use the key-ins REFERENCE EXCHANGE <file_name, model_name>, or XD= <file_name, model_name>.
When using the key-ins, Including the file name, model name, is optional. When you use a key-in to exchange to a reference, you can:

Select the reference graphically (by not specifying a file name, nor selecting a reference in the References dialog box). Include the reference filename and, where necessary, model name. Select the reference in the References dialog box, prior to using the key-in.
To exchange to a reference via the References dialog box
1. In the References dialog box, select the required reference. 2. In the References dialog box, select Tools > Exchange. The current model is closed and the selected reference is opened, maintaining the same view orientation.
To exchange to a reference by selecting a referenced element
1. Select the Element Selection tool. 2 P i t t l t i th i d f
3/24/2010

3. Choose Exchange from the Reset pop-up menu.
To exchange to a reference via a key-in using the References dialog box
Page 20 of 74
1. Select the required reference in the References dialog box. 2. Enter the key-in, REFERENCE EXCHANGE or Enter the key-in: XD=
To exchange to a reference selected graphically
1. If the References dialog box is open, ensure that no references are selected. 2. Enter the key-in, REFERENCE EXCHANGE or Enter the key-in: XD= You are prompted to select a reference. 3. Identify the required reference. 4. Accept to make the exchange.
To exchange to a reference using a key-in
1. In the active model, enter the key-in, REFERENCE EXCHANGE <file_name, model_name> or Enter the key-in: XD=<file_name, model_name>
Where the file is referenced once only, the model name is not required. If the file is referenced multiple times and the model name is omitted, the first instance of the reference is assumed.
Setting the Render Mode for References

The Set Reference Presentation tool in the References task and on the References dialog box provides many options for controlling the display of references. These options include Wireframe, Hidden Line, Filled Hidden Line, Phong, and Smooth shading. In a sheet model, the Presentation menu has one additional option: True Hidden Line. Unlike the other reference presentation options, True Hidden Line generates a new vector model of the reference, with hidden lines removed. In the sheet model, a reference set to True Hidden Line looks similar to a reference set to Hidden Line. However, when you print the sheet model, a reference set to True Hidden Line will print as a true vector image. A reference set to any other presentation option (such as Hidden Line) will print as a raster image. The True Hidden Line option also provides many settings for modifying the appearance of the reference.
To set the render mode of a reference
1. In the References dialog box, select a reference. 2. Click the Set Reference Presentation tool. 3. In the tool settings window, choose the Presentation method. 4. Accept the reference. The reference is displayed using the select presentation method.
Reloading References
When working with models that include references it is possible that other users are making changes to the references When a change
3/24/2010
Page 21 of 74
has been made to a reference, and it has not been updated in the active model, the references dialog box displays an icon in the Status column for the reference. This indicates that you need to reload the reference in the current session to get the latest updates.
To reload a reference
1. In the list box in the References dialog box, select the reference. 2. Click the Reload Reference icon. The reference is redrawn.
Reloading a reference lets you see changes that have been made to the reference by a co-worker on the network since the reference was last attached or reloaded.
To reload all attached references
1. From the Tools menu, choose Reload All. The references are redrawn.
To update reference elements in a view
1. Key in REFERENCE UPDATE. 2. Identify the reference by identifying one of its elements. or Identify the reference by keying in its logical name or filename in the Key-in window.
Detaching References
References that are no longer required in a model may be detached. When you detach a reference, you lose all its settings, such as any clip boundaries or clip masks. If it is likely that you will require the reference later, you can merely turn off the display (see Controlling Reference Settings).
To detach references
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references. 2. Click the Detach Reference icon. An alert box asks you to confirm that the selected references are to be detached. 3. Click OK.
To detach all references
1. From the Tools menu, choose Detach All. An alert box asks you to confirm that all references are to be detached. 2. Click OK.
Controlling Reference Settings

There are a number of settings that control the attachment and display of references in a model. These can be controlled from the References dialog box. The list box of the References dialog box displays columns containing many settings that you can modify, either by just clicking them (for toggle settings) or by clicking them and selecting a new setting or value. Right-clicking on a reference entry opens a contextual menu with options for manipulating the reference (these same options also are included in the References dialog box's Tools menu).
3/24/2010

To turn on/off the display of a reference
Page 22 of 74
1. In the References dialog box's list box, click the Display column of the entry for the reference.
Alternative Method To turn on/off the display of a reference
1. From the References dialog box's Settings menu, choose Attachment. or In the References dialog box's list box, double-click the reference. The Attachment Settings dialog box opens for the selected reference. 2. Turn the Display check box off or on.
To disable reference level property changes from remaining in effect across sessions
1. In the Key-in window, key in SET REFLEVELOVERRIDES OFF. 2. From the File menu, choose Save Settings. This change takes effect for an individual reference upon its reloading.
For information about turning on or off levels in a reference, see Controlling Level Display.
For information about turning on or off symbology in a reference, see To control level symbology.
For information about resynchronizing a level in a reference with its source level, see Resynchronizing DGN file levels with library levels. Rather than selecting or right-clicking the open DGN file in the left-hand pane as described in that topic, instead select or right-click the reference to resynchronize.
To turn on/off snapping to elements in a reference
1. In the References dialog box's list box, click the Snap column of the entry for the model.
Alternative Method To turn on/off snapping to elements in a reference
1. From the References dialog box's Settings menu, choose Attachment. or In the References dialog box's list box, double-click the reference. The Attachment Settings dialog box opens for the selected reference. 2. Turn the Snap check box off or on.
To control whether elements in a reference can be identified (for construction )
1. In the References dialog box's list box, click the Locate column of the entry for the reference.
Alternative Method To control whether elements in a reference can be identified (for construction )
1. From the References dialog box's Settings menu, choose Attachment. or In the References dialog box's list box, double-click the reference. The Attachment Settings dialog box opens for the selected reference. 2. Turn the Locate check box on or off.
To change a reference's logical name or description
1. From the References dialog box's Settings menu, choose Attachment. or In the References dialog box's list box, double-click the reference.
3/24/2010

The Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Logical Name field, enter the new logical name. 3. In the Description field, enter the new description. 4. Click OK. Adjusting reference colors
Page 23 of 74
You can adjust the intensity of element colors in an attached reference to distinguish the elements in a reference from the elements in the open DGN file.
To dim all elements in a reference
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference. 2. From the dialog box's Settings menu, choose Adjust Colors. The Adjust Reference Colors dialog box opens.
3. If necessary, select Adjustment Factor. 4. Adjust the Value and Saturation until the colors display at the appropriate brightness. 5. (Optional) Click Apply to check the brightness in a view displaying the reference. 6. Click OK.
To make all elements in a reference the same color
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference. 2 From the dialog box's Settings menu choose Adjust Colors
3/24/2010

The Adjust Reference Colors dialog box opens. 3. Select Fixed. 4. Turn on Hue Fixed for All Colors. 5. Adjust Hue to select the color for the reference. 6. (Optional) Click Apply to check the color in a view displaying the reference. 7. Click OK. Reference Transparency
Page 24 of 74
Where required, you can set one or more of your references to be transparent. This may be to reduce confusion on the screen, or as an aid to focus attention on a particular (non-transparent) part of a design. You can set the amount of transparency to be applied either via the Transparency setting in the Adjust Reference Colors dialog box, or by clicking the Transparency setting for the reference entry in the References dialog box.
To set reference transparency
1. In the References dialog box's list box, click the Transparency column of the entry for the reference. The Transparency dialog box opens. 2. In the Transparency dialog box, select a pre-set transparency setting, or use the slider or key-in field, to set the transparency. 3. Click OK.
Alternative method to set reference transparency
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference. 2. From the dialog box's Settings menu, choose Adjust Colors. The Adjust Reference Colors dialog box opens. 3. Move the Transparency slider to increase the transparency for the reference. 4. (Optional) Click Apply to check the transparency in a view displaying the reference. 5. Click OK. Reference (display) Priority for 2D references Reference priority is a technique for specifying the relative front-to-back order in which 2D references appear in a 2D model when they are displayed in a view. Essentially, Display Priority adds a calculated Z value for these co-planar references. Display Priority is only useful or necessary for 2D models, since all elements in 3D models have their own explicit 3D coordinate space. In 3D models, elements closer to the eye are always drawn in front of elements further from the eye so display priority is not necessary.
To set the (display) priority for references in a 2D model
1. In the References dialog box's list box, click the Priority column of the entry for the reference. The Priority dialog box opens. 2. In the Priority dialog box, select a pre-set priority setting, or use the slider or key-in field, to set the priority. 3. Click OK.
Identifying References
Identifying a reference on which to operate is an alternative to selecting the reference in the References dialog box's list box; the identification technique is typically used with tools in the References task.
3/24/2010

To identify a reference
Page 25 of 74
1. In a view window, identify an element in the reference.
Working with Nested References

In MicroStation you can have an infinite number of reference attachments, and those attachments can have attachments, which in turn can have more attachments, and so on. This concept is called nesting. Nested references make it easy for you to attach and display multiple references, just by attaching a single, parent reference to a model. When you are attaching references, you can control the manner in which nested references are to be attached to the model, or you can decide not to attach any nested references at all. If you do decide to include nested references when attaching a parent reference, you can control how many levels of nested references to attach to the model. This is called setting the nest depth. The higher the number you set, the more certain you can be about including even the most deeply nested references when attaching a parent reference. The Nested Attachments option menu on the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box controls how nested references are handled when attaching a parent reference.
For information about MicroStation nested references and DWG files, see Working with references that will be saved to DWG files.
Modifying attributes of nested references Modifications to attributes of nested attachments depend on the path to the attachment through the parent file. For example, assume that "c.dgn" is a nested attachment in "a.dgn" and "c.dgn" is attached once through "b.dgn", once through "d.dgn" and once through "e.dgn". Using the example above, if the ByLevelColor of "c.dgn" was changed through "b.dgn", "d.dgn" and "e.dgn" each nested attachment would reflect each individual change through "a.dgn" and not be uniform with respect to the appearance of "c.dgn" through "b.dgn", as shown in the figure below.
However, if "b.dgn" was attached twice, the change to "c.dgn" through "b.dgn" would propagate to both instances. This is regardless of whether the parent attachment containing the nested attachment is itself nested into another file. That is, the uniformity is based upon path to the nested attachment through the parent, not the file to which the parent is attached.
3/24/2010
Page 26 of 74
Adjusting nested references colors By default, the configuration variable MS_NEST_COLORADJUSTMENT is not set. Any color adjustment made to a top level reference is applied to all the nested attachments directly. If the MS_NEST_COLORADJUSTMENT configuration variable is set to any value, then the color adjustments are applied cumulatively. For example: Model A attaches Model B, and Model B attaches Model C. If Model C has a 90% value and 50% saturation adjustment as it is attached to Model B, and Model B has an 80% value and 70% saturation adjustment as it is attached to Model A, then Model C will display with a 72% value (80 % of 90%) and 35% saturation (70% of 50%) adjustment. Controlling the reference color table You can override the Use Color Table user preference (Workspace > Preferences) by creating and setting a MicroStation configuration variable. If MS_REFCOLORTABLE is defined and set to 1, MicroStation always uses the reference's color table. If MS_REFCOLORTABLE is defined and set to any value other than 1, MicroStation never uses the reference's color table. If MS_REFCOLORTABLE is not defined, MicroStation uses the user preference to determine whether or not to use the reference's color table.
Merging References into the Active Model

The contents of one or more references can be merged into the active model.
The levels of elements in the attached reference are copied to the merged file only if they do not exist in the active model. To change how levels are handled, choose Preferences from the Workspace menu and select the Reference category.
If a reference file being merged into the active model contains elements associated with templates, any templates associated with the merged elements that are not already in the active model are copied into it.
To merge the active model and attached references
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references to be merged. 2. From the Tools menu, choose Merge Into Master. 3. Select the view into which to merge the references. An alert box asks you to confirm that the selected references are to be merged into the active model
3/24/2010

4. Click OK.
Page 27 of 74
There is no inverse of a reference DGN file merging operation.
References task
References task (opened as tool box)
The References task is a sub-task of the Drawing Composition task. The tools in the References task are used to:

Attach referenced models to the active model. Control the positioning, scaling, clipping, and orientation of attached referenced models. Detach referenced models from the active model.
These tools can also be selected in these ways:
From the icons on the References dialog box (File menu > Reference). From the Tools menu in the References dialog box (File menu > Reference). The controls in the References dialog box are used to adjust reference settings as well.
To Select in the References task
Attach a model (reference) to the active model. Attach Reference
Change a reference clipping boundary. Set Reference Clip Boundary
Mask (cover) part of a reference that is inside the clipping boundary. Set Reference Clip Mask
Selectively delete a reference's clipping mask(s). Delete Reference Clip
Set the back clipping plane for a 3D reference. Set Reference Back Clip Plane
3/24/2010
Page 28 of 74
Set the front clipping plane for a 3D reference. Set Reference Front Clip Plane
Reread and redraw a reference to see recent changes made to it. Reload Reference
Move a reference. Move Reference
Copy a reference. Copy References
Scale a reference. Scale References
Rotate a reference. Rotate Reference
Mirror a reference about a horizontal or vertical axis. Mirror Reference
Copy a reference, then attach a view of the reference by folding it about an orthogonal axis or a line defined by two points. Copy Reference by Folding
Sets the rendering mode of the reference. Set Reference Presentation
Detach a reference from the active model. Detach Reference Update reference elements in a view. Use the REFERENCE UPDATE keyin.
References key-ins
For most of the references operations, there is a key-in alternative that you can use when required. Typically, you can use the key-ins to:

Attach/detach references. Modify references' attributes. Merge references.
3/24/2010

References key-in format
Page 29 of 74
Many of the references key-ins take a file-spec, which can be the file name or the logical name of the reference. Additionally, you may use all or * to signify all attached references.
The key-in to attach references (REFERENCE ATTACH, or RF=) lets you specify a configuration variable to define the location of the references. This configuration variable can be either one defined within MicroStation, or one defined at the operating system level. References key-in REFERENCE ATTACH (or RF=)[configuration_variable:]<file-name>[,model_name] [,logical_name][,description][,view_name][,scale][,nesting][,on|off] REFERENCE CLIP BOUNDARY <file-spec> REFERENCE CLIP MASK <file-spec> REFERENCE CLIP DELETE <file-spec> REFERENCE CLIP BACK <file-spec> REFERENCE CLIP FRONT <file-spec> REFERENCE RELOAD <file-spec> REFERENCE RELOAD FORCE <file-spec> REFERENCE MOVE <file-spec> REFERENCE COPY <file-spec> REFERENCE SCALE ABSOLUTE|FACTOR|POINTS <file-spec> REFERENCE ROTATE <file-spec> REFERENCE MIRROR HORIZONTAL|VERTICAL <file-spec> REFERENCE COPY FOLDED HORIZONTAL|LINE|VERTICAL <file-spec> REFERENCE PRESENTATION <file-spec> REFERENCE DETACH <file-spec> Description Attaches a reference to the active model. See Attach Reference tool. Applies a clip boundary to a reference. See Set Reference Clip Boundary tool. Applies a clip mask to a reference. See Set Reference Clip Mask tool. Deletes a reference clip boundary or clip mask. See Delete Reference Clip tool. Sets the back clipping plane for a 3D reference. See Set Reference Back Clip Plane tool. Sets the front clipping plane for a 3D reference. See Set Reference Front Clip Plane tool. Reloads references that have changed since last loaded. See Reload Reference tool. Forces a reload of references. See Reload Reference tool. Moves a reference. See Move Reference tool. Makes a copy of a reference. See Copy References tool. Scales (resizes) a reference. See Scale References tool. Rotates a reference. See Rotate Reference tool. Mirrors a reference about a horizontal or vertical line. See Mirror Reference tool. Creates copies of references, folded about an orthogonal axis, or about a defined line. See Copy/Fold Reference tool. Sets the presentation mode of a reference. See Set Reference Presentation tool. Detaches a reference. See Detach Reference tool.
Reference settings key-ins Many of the reference file parameters that can be set in the References dialog box, also can be set with REFERENCE SET key-ins. These can simplify the task of setting the parameters for groups of files, where you can also use a batch process. Reference settings key-ins take a string of name/value pairs with the same syntax as required for the MS_REF_DEFAULTSETTINGS configuration variable. Multiple name/value pairs can be separated by commas. If spaces are needed in the name/value pair string, surround the entire name/value pair string with double quotes. One or more references can be specified on the command line, separated from the name/value pair string by a space. For these key-ins, any case is acceptable, but the full unabbreviated keyword must be present. For many of the settings, a setting_spec value can be specified, which can be any of the following:

1 or 0 On or Off True of False
When specifying the reference a file_spec can be used, which may be the file name or the logical name of the reference. Additionally, you may use all or * to signify all attached references.
3/24/2010

References key-in REFERENCE SET DISPLAY=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET SNAP=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET LOCATE=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET SCALELINESTYLES=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET DISPLAYRASTERREFS=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET PRIORITY=<value between -5 and 5 inclusive> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET TREATASELEMENT=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET USELIGHTS=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET IGNOREWHENNESTING=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET PLOTAS3D=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET REVISION=<revision> <file_spec> Description
Page 30 of 74
Turns on/off the display of the defined references. Equivalent to the Display (icon) in the References dialog box. Turns on/off the ability to snap to the defined references. Equivalent to the Snap (icon) in the References dialog box. Turns on/off the ability to select elements in the defined references. Equivalent to the Locate (icon) in the References dialog box. Defines whether or not custom line styles are scaled by the reference scale for the defined references. Equivalent to the Scale Line Styles by Reference (icon) in the References dialog box. Defines whether or not raster references display for the defined references. Equivalent to the Display Raster References (icon) in the References dialog box. (2D only) Sets the display priority to be applied to the reference. References with higher priority display in front of others. Defines whether or not the defined references may be manipulated with the standard tools. Equivalent to the Treat Attachment as Element for Manipulation (icon) in the References dialog box. Defines whether or not light sources in the defined references are considered for rendering. Equivalent to the Use Lights (icon) in the References dialog box. Controls the display of nested attachments when working in a DWG or DXF file, where live nesting is always on and there is no limit to nest depth. Equivalent to the Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting (icon) in the References dialog box. (PDF printer driver only) When on and the PDF printer driver is used, the reference is plotted as 3D data in Universal 3D (U3D) format. Equivalent to the Plot As 3D (PDF) (icon) in the References dialog box. <revision> can be either the revision number, such as 1.1, or a revision tag.
Used to set reference clip rotation to V7 mode (OFF), where the clip boundary is REFERENCE SET ROTATECLIPPING=<setting_spec> <file_spec> view dependent, or to V8 mode (ON), where the clip boundary is maintained in model coordinates. REFERENCE SET PRINTCOLORADJUSTMENT=<setting_spec> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET TRANSPARENCY=<value between 0.0 and 1.0> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET NESTDEPTH=<integer between 0 and 99> <file_spec> REFERENCE SET NEWLEVELDISPLAY=FROMCONFIG|ALWAYS|NEVER <file_spec> REFERENCE SET NESTOVERRIDES=ALLOW|ALWAYS|NEVER <file_spec> REFERENCE SET GLOBALLSSCALE=MASTER|NONE|REFERENCE|BOTH <file_spec> Where reference colors have been adjusted, sets whether the adjusted (1) or the original (0) colors print. Equivalent to the Print Adjusted Colors setting in the Adjust Reference Colors dialog box. Sets the transparency value of the defined references. Equivalent to the Transparency (icon) in the References dialog box. Sets the nesting depth for the defined references. Equivalent to the Depth setting in the References dialog box. Sets when new levels will display in the defined references. Equivalent to the New Level Display setting in the References dialog box. Sets how overrides are treated in nested references for the defined references. Equivalent to the overrides option menu in the References dialog box. Defines how custom line styles are scaled for the defined references. Equivalent to the Global Line Style Scale setting in the Attachment Settings dialog box.
Miscellaneous references key-ins The following key-ins are used for various references operations. When specifying the reference a file_spec can be used, which may be the file name or the logical name of the reference. Additionally, you may use all or * to signify all attached references.
References key-in REFERENCE MAKEDIRECT [parent_file_name]-> [nested_file_name] REFERENCE ADJUSTCOLORS <value,saturation,file_spec> REFERENCE EXCHANGE <reference_file_name> XD=<reference_file_name> REFERENCE LEVELS ON|OFF|TOGGLE <file_spec> REFERENCE MERGE <file_spec> Description Promotes nested attachments to direct attachments. See Tools > Make Direct Attachment in the References dialog box. Sets the Value and Saturation parameters for the defined references. Equivalent to the Value and Saturation settings in the Adjust Reference Colors dialog box. Opens the defined reference, retaining the same view configuration. If no filename is given with the key-in, and no reference is selected in the References dialog box, you are prompted to select a reference (graphically). For the defined references, all levels are turned on, off, or their on/off state is toggled. Merges the defined references into the active model.
3/24/2010

REFERENCE NEWSESSION <reference_file_name> REFERENCE SYNCHRONIZE LEVELS <file_spec> Opens the defined reference in a new MicroStation session.
Page 31 of 74
Synchronizes the properties of levels in the defined reference and its attachments with the properties of levels in the source file of the attachment.
Re-instating level masks after switching references outside MicroStation In some cases, it is possible that a reference is replaced by a different version of the DGN at the OS (operating system) level, outside MicroStation. Typically, this may occur when off-site contractors make changes to designs. The altered DGN files, when they are returned, are switched for the originals in the office. Where this occurs, the level masks may go out of synchronization. it the level structure of the referenced DGN file is modified. In these instances, you can use the following key-in to correct the situation: REFERENCE FILECHANGED <file_spec> The key-in attempts to rebuild the level-masks after the attachment file has been switched at OS level. It looks in the master-file for all level masks associated with the specified attachments and remaps each individual level-mask to reflect the modified level structure. The modified level-masks are then written back to the active-file. This key-in should be run in the master file that contains the attachment. The attachment file parameter syntax is the same as for other reference key-ins. The key-in may be run interactively, in MicroStation, or in batch mode on all files that have the switched file attached. It is recommended that the key-in is run immediately after switching the file at the OS level. If the master file is opened and modified prior to running the key-in, the re-synchronizing of the level masks may not work correctly.
Limitations
Only level masks for primary attachments are processed, and the attachment must be a DGN file. The key-in will not work for nested attachments, nor attachments that are DWG files.
Raster Manager Overview

MicroStation 's Raster Manager utility allows you to control and manipulate raster images within MicroStation. The Raster Manager dialog box, along with the Raster Display and Raster Control tool boxes let you control all aspects of attaching and manipulating raster image files. Many settings controlling raster location, display and search paths can be found under the Workspace > Preferences > Raster Manager menu. In MicroStation XM Edition, raster attachments are treated as any standard element. They can be displayed between vector elements and they can be placed on a level. To achieve this, a new element has been added, the Raster Frame (type 94), is generated each time a raster is attached. The old type 90 element also continues to be present and is linked to the new Raster Frame. To preserve compatibility with older versions, when a previous version DGN is opened in the XM Edition, a Raster Frame is automatically generated for each type 90 present in the file. Raster Manager lets you control the display of one or more image files within a DGN file view. Each view may be used to display image files. The names of all attached image files (for all views) are displayed in the Raster Manager dialog box. Information about the image files is stored with the DGN file. The georeferencing and positioning information is also kept in the raster file header for georeferenced file formats. For non-georeferenced image formats, this information is either written to a location info sister file, or it is simply kept in the image's DGN file attachment. To see if a file is georeferenced or not, look in the Supported Output File Formats chart. When the options HGR or World File are listed under the Options column, this indicates that the format is non-georeferenced and needs an ASCII text file, known as a sister file or world file to position itself. As for a georeferenced format, the Options column will remain empty. User preference settings are available to specify where the georeferencing information is stored, and to set the priority as to which information source will be used. Warping, mirroring and resizing parameters are also stored in the DGN file's raster attachment. If the image is detached, these settings are deleted. In order to apply warping, mirroring and resizing settings, a new image must be saved using the Save As command with the Option > Resample toggle set to On. Neither clipping and transparency, nor contrast and brightness settings are exported when an image is resampled. These settings are only kept in the DGN file attachment and are lost if the image is detached.
3/24/2010
Page 32 of 74
Certain Windows DLLs must be present on your computer in order to use Raster Manager. Make sure you have Microsoft Internet Explorer (Version 5 or greater) installed. You do not need to change your default browser as long as Internet Explorer is installed. Please refer to the Microsoft Internet Explorer home page for more information about Internet Explorer.
Raster Manager Dialog Box Raster Manager Preferences Printing Command Line Raster File Conversion Supported Output File Formats
Raster Manager Dialog Box

All Raster Manager functions can be accessed from the Raster Manager dialog box. Additionally, the Raster Display and Raster Control tool boxes provide quick access to many of these functions. Both of these tool boxes are located in the Raster Main tool box.
To open the Raster Manager dialog box
1. Choose File > Raster Manager. or Choose Tools > Raster > Control to open the Raster Control tool box, then select the Raster Manager tool. The Raster Manager dialog box opens, displaying names of any attached raster images.
The Raster Manager dialog list box is customizable. You can selectively disable or enable individual fields from the list box menu bar using a contextual menu (right-click). The Logical Name, On-the-Fly, Geo Priority, Display Gamma, Print Gamma and Status fields can be added to the list box menu by using the contextual menu. For more information on these fields, see the Raster Manager Dialog box.
To show or hide a field from the list box menu bar
1. Open the Raster Manager dialog box. 2. Position the pointer within the list box menu bar and right-click. A pop-up menu opens. Enabled fields are indicated with checkmarks.
3/24/2010
Page 33 of 74
3. Choose the pop-up menu item for the field you want to hide or show.
Raster Manager Preferences

Several preferences control the operation of Raster Manager. These are located in the Raster Manager category of the Preferences dialog box (select Workspace > Preferences > Raster Manager).
Printing
With Raster Manager, you can print raster images from MicroStation as you would for vector data. New versions of the printer driver files now include settings for printing of raster data.
Specific plot driver files used by Image Manager are no longer required.
Command Line Raster File Conversion

You can convert raster files to other formats via the Raster Convert dialog box, or you can use "rastconv.ma" with the system command line batch file, "msbatch.bat", to process the files. By default, "msbatch.bat" is delivered to the "Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation" directory. Command line syntax Syntax for command line raster file conversion is as follows:
3/24/2010

msbatch rastconv inname <<input filename><option1 option2 option3 option8>>
Page 34 of 74
For example, to convert all the PCX files in the C:\pcx directory into TIFF files in the C:\tiff directory, you could use the following command line key-in. msbatch rastconv inname:c:\pcx\*.pcx outtype:tif outname:c:\tiff\*.tif The following table lists the available options for command line conversion of raster files.
Keyword Option Description Required name of input file. May include wildcards. inname: <inputfilename> For details, see the list of Supported Input File Formats If incomplete, input filename is used. Color depth in output file.
outname: color:
<outputfilename> <rgb|16|256|grayscale|monochrome> bmp (.bmp) Windows BMP cal (.cal) CALS crl (.crl) CRL ecw (.ecw) ERMapper gif (.gif) Compuserve GIF gtiff (.tif) Georeferenced TIFF hmr (.hmr) HMR img (.img) Erdas IMG imgmap (.p) IMG (mapped) imgpal (.p) IMG (256 colors) imgrgb (.a) IMG (unmapped)
Output file type. See details in the list of Supported Output File Formats. See note below.
outtype: ingrc29 (.c29) Intergraph 29 ingrcit (.cit) Intergraph CIT ingrcot (.cot) Intergraph COT ingrrgbcomp (.rgb) Intergraph RGB Compressed ingrrgbraw (.rgb) Intergraph RGB Uncompressed ingrtg4 (.tg4) Intergraph TG4 itiff (.itiff) Internet TIFF jpg (.jpg) JPEG (JFIF) jpg2000 (.jp2) JPEG 2000 lrd (.lrd) LRD ( ) PC P i tb h
3/24/2010

png (.png) PNG rle (.rle) Intergraph RLE (monochrome) sun (.rs) Sun Raster targa (.tga) TrueVision Targa tiffcomp (.tif) Compressed TIFF tiffraw (.tif) Uncompressed TIFF wbmp (.wbmp) Wireless BMP
Page 35 of 74
Compression of the output format. compression: <none|bmprle8|ccittfax3|ccittfax4|lzw|packbits|jpegmin|jpeglow|jpegmed|jpeghigh|deflate|rle1|flashpix|lrd> See details about compression types in the list of Supported Output File Formats. Output width defaults to input width. Output height defaults to input height. If On, converted files are tiled (does not apply to all formats). If On, any transformation (rotation, affinity) is removed. Number of colors used to reconstruct the palette. Type of sister file to use for georeference information for the resulting output. hgr HGR sister file location: <hgr|worldfile> worldfile ESRI world file Hgr and world file may be used only if the file does not have built-in georeference (for example: .jpg or .bmp file formats). When converting file formats which refer to a dgn file for georeference information, the conversion of the rasters data will be correct, but the location of the raster will not be kept. Since rastconv.ma operates offline, the raster formats are handled like rasters with no georeference. Thus, world files will not be utilized if present when used for the input file.
width: height: tiled: resampled: nbcolors:
<outputwidth> <outputheight> <on|off> <on|off> <nbcolors>
Supported Output File Formats

The following table lists the supported output file formats.
File Format Name CALS (TYPE1) File Extension .cal Color Mode Monochrome 256 Colors Compuserve GIF .gif 256 Colors with transparency LZW 256 C l Compression CCITT FAX4 World File GIF Options HGR
3/24/2010

CRL .crl Grayscale 256 Colors Grayscale Erdas IMG Format .img RGB RGB Alpha 24 Bit Color ERMapper .ecw Grayscale None Georeferenced TIFF .tif RGB Alpha LZW None JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss 24 Bit Color JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss PackBits LZW None JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss Grayscale JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss PackBits LZW None 16 Colors PackBits 256 Colors LZW None Monochrome 2 Colors PackBits Tiled CCITT FAX4 LZW None 256 Colors HMR .hmr Grayscale Deflate None CCITT FAX4 PackBits Tiled Tiled Tiled Tiled None World File HGR None RLE8 Tiled
Page 36 of 74
2 Colors
3/24/2010

PackBits 256 Colors IMG .p Grayscale IMG (24 Bit) .a 24 Bit Color 256 Colors Intergraph 29 Intergraph CIT Intergraph COT Intergraph RGB Intergraph RLE Intergraph TG4 .c29 Grayscale .cit .cot Grayscale .rgb .rle .tg4 24 Bit Color 24 Bit Color Monochrome Monochrome None RLE8 RLE1 CCITT FAX4 None JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss 24 BitColor Internet TIFF .iTIFF Grayscale JPEG High Loss Deflate LZW None 256 Colors Deflate LZW None CCITT FAX4 Monochrome 2 Colors PackBits RLE1 Deflate LZW None Flashpix RGB Alpha Deflate LZW JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss JPEG M di L JPEG Medium Loss Tiled Tiled Intergraph RGB Compressed .rgb Monochrome 256 Colors None Tiled CCITT FAX4 RLE8 Tiled None World File None World File HGR HGR
Page 37 of 74
24 Bit Color JPEG (JFIF) .jpg Grayscale
HGR World File
3/24/2010

JPEG High Loss 24 Bit Color JPEG 2000 LRD .jp2 Grayscale .lrd Monochrome 24 Bit Color 16 Colors HGR PCX .pcx 256 Colors Grayscale Monochrome 24 Bit Color 16 Colors 2 Colors HGR PNG .png 256 Colors Grayscale Monochrome RGB Alpha 24 Bit Color 2 Colors HGR Sun Raster .rs 256 Colors Grayscale Monochrome HGR None TIFF .tif RGB Alpha LZW Tiled None PackBits JPEG Minimum Loss HGR 24 Bit Color JPEG Low Loss Grayscale JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss LZW None 16 Colors PackBits 256 Colors LZW N Tiled World File HGR Tiled World File World File None World File Deflate World File None World File LRD RLE None World File HGR
Page 38 of 74
3/24/2010

CCITT FAX4 Monochrome PackBits 2 Colors LZW 24 Bit Color 256 Colors Targa .tga Grayscale RGB Alpha 24 Bit Color HGR Windows BMP .bmp 2 Colors 16 Colors None 256 Colors BMP RLE8 Wireless BMP File Format .wbmp Monochrome None World File HGR None World File None World File HGR Tiled World File HGR
Page 39 of 74
ECW and JPEG 2000 files do not support Rotation and Affinity transformations.
Raster Manager Tools

This chapter includes descriptions of the Raster Manager tool boxes and tools. Raster Main tool box Raster Display tool box Bring to Front Send to Back Fit to View Actual Resolution (1:1) Contrast/Brightness Raster Control tool box Attach Raster Selection Transform Raster Move Raster Scale Raster Rotate Raster Mirror Raster Raster Warp Clip Modify Clip Unclip
Raster Main tool box
Tools for manipulating raster image files are contained in tool boxes located in the Raster Main tool box, which is opened by selecting Tools > Raster > Main
3/24/2010

To To change the display order of overlapping images, fit images to a view, display images at 1:1 resolution, or change their contrast/brightness settings.
Page 40 of 74
Use tools in the Raster Display tool box
To open the Raster Manager dialog box; to attach, select, modify or mirror images, or to clip, warp, modify or remove a clipping Raster Control tool polygon for an image. box
Key-in: RASTER TOOLMAIN OPEN
Raster Display tool box
The Raster Display tool box contains tools to change the display order of overlapping raster images, fit images to a view, display images at 1:1 resolution, or change their contrast/brightness settings. It is contained in the Raster Main tool box, or may be opened separately by selecting Tools > Raster > Display.
To Select in the Raster Display tool box
Bring a raster to the front, or move it one position up in the display stack. Bring to Front
Send a raster to the back, or move it one position back in the display stack. Send to Back
Fit selected raster(s), or all rasters, to a view. Fit to View
Fit a raster to its Actual Resolution (1:1). Actual Resolution (1:1)
Set a raster's Contrast and Brightness. Contrast/Brightness
Key-in: RASTER TOOLDISPLAY OPEN
Raster Control tool box
3/24/2010
Page 41 of 74
The Raster Control tool box contains tools to open the Raster Manager dialog box; to attach, select, modify or mirror images, and to clip, modify or remove a clipping polygon for a raster image. It is contained in the Raster Main tool box, or may be opened separately by selecting Tools > Raster > Control.
To Select in the Raster Control tool box
Open the Raster Manager dialog box. Raster Manager
Attach a raster image to a design file view(s). Attach
Select one or more raster images in a view(s). Raster Selection
Modify a raster image. Transform
Move a raster image. Move Raster
Scale a raster image. Scale Raster
Rotate a raster image. Rotate Raster
Mirror a raster image in a view. Mirror Raster
Warp a raster image. Raster Warp
Clip a raster image in a view. Clip
Modify a clipping polygon. Modify Clip
Remove one or more clipping polygons from a raster image.
3/24/2010

Unclip
Page 42 of 74
Key-in: RASTER TOOLCONTROL OPEN
Managing Raster Image Files

Raster Manager lets you control all aspects of image display within one or more MicroStation DGN file views. Image Display Supported Input File Formats Controlling the Display of Images in Views Fitting Images to a View Displaying an Image at Full Resolution Changing the Display Characteristics of Raster Images DWG Workmode Binary Workmode
Image Display
Using Raster Manager you can open and display images of various formats, from monochrome to full color (For details, see the list of Supported Input File Formats). Single images, or groups of images, can be set to display in one or more DGN file views. MicroStation's drawing and annotation tools still can be used in views that display raster images. The Raster Manager dialog list box displays a list of all attached image files. You can set the size of the list box by dragging the horizontal/vertical edges, or the corners of the dialog box. When the number of images in a list is larger than the number of lines displayed, you can scroll up and down with the scroll bar. You can modify the location, display order, and various other settings of previously attached raster image files. Changes can be made via the Element Info(rmation) dialog box, the Modify tool, or the attachment information section of the Raster Manager dialog box. Additionally, the Warp tool lets you fit (warp) a raster image to a particular shape. When you display a raster image file in a DGN file, it is attached in a Raster Reference Attachment. When a raster attachment is modified with Raster Manager, no changes are made to the original file, just to its attachment information in the DGN file. Attaching raster files Using the Raster Manager dialog box, or tools in the Raster Display and Raster Control tool boxes, you can control the display of raster references in one or more MicroStation DGN file views. You can attach a raster reference to a DGN file by selecting File > Attach in the Raster Manager dialog box , or by selecting the Attach tool in the Raster Control tool box. In either case, the Attach Raster Reference dialog box opens, letting you choose the view(s) in which to display the image.
To attach a raster reference based on the image's own positioning information
1. From the Raster Manager File menu, choose Attach. or In the Raster Control tool box, select the Attach tool. The Attach Raster Reference dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the Attach Raster Reference dialog box to select the raster image file. 3. (Optional) Turn On Raster Preview, to preview the file being attached. 4. (Optional) Enter Logical Name and Description. 5. Turn Off Place Interactively. 6. (Optional) Turn On Open Raster Files Read Only.
3/24/2010

8. Click OK.
To attach a raster reference interactively
Page 43 of 74
1. From the Raster Manager File menu, choose Attach. In the Raster Control tool box, select the Attach tool. The Attach Raster Reference dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the Attach Raster Reference dialog box to select the raster image file. 3. (Optional) Turn On Raster Preview, to preview the file being attached. 4. (Optional) Enter Logical Name and Description. 5. Turn On Place Interactively.
Rotation and Affinity values are not applied to image(s) when attached with the Place Interactively toggle set to ON.
6. (Optional) Turn On Open Raster Files Read-Only. 7. Turn On the view number(s) in which the raster reference is to be displayed. 8. Click OK. 9. Place a data point in the designated view, to define the origin of the image. 10. Place a second data point to define the opposite corner of the image. 11. Reset to finish. Selecting raster files to modify/manipulate You can choose one or more images via the Raster Manager dialog box , or with the Raster Selection tool. While only one raster file at a time can be modified with tools such as those that mirror, warp and clip, you can manipulate several images simultaneously with the transform tools. For example, you can choose several images that you want to bring to the front of the display, or send to the back of the display, in one step. When selecting raster element(s) with the Raster Selection tool in a view, the selection set is not modified when the selected raster reference(s) is no longer visible in the Raster Manager dialog box. Raster Manager is AccuSnap compliant, which means you can use a smart pointer for snapping to rasters. When in AccuSnap mode, you simply select a tool and move the pointer over the elements, letting AccuSnap find and display the nearest tentative snap point for you. Use the Ignore Locate Interior toggle in the Raster Manager category of the Workspace / Preferences dialog box to change the behaviour of the AccuSnap functionality with rasters.
To select one image in a view
1. Select the Raster Selection tool. 2. Click the required image in the view. The selected raster filename is highlighted in the Raster Manager dialog box (if open). If Display Border Around Selected Raster (Workspace Preferences) is On, the image highlights in the view(s) as well. All other images are deselected.
To select additional images in a view
1. Select the Raster Selection tool. 2. Control-click the additional images. That is, while holding down the <Ctrl> key, click the additional images. The additional raster filenames highlight in the Raster Manager dialog box (if open). If Display Border Around Selected Raster (Workspace Preferences) is On, the images highlight in the view(s) as well. If you control-click a previously selected image, it is deselected.
To select one raster image from the list
3/24/2010
Page 44 of 74
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, click the name of the required image. The selected raster filename is highlighted and any other previously selected files are deselected. If Display Border Around Selected Raster (Workspace Preferences) is On, the image highlights in the view(s) as well.
To select additional raster images from the list
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, control-click the names of the additional images. That is, while holding down the <Ctrl> key, click the names of the additional images. The additional raster filenames highlight in the Raster Manager dialog box. If Display Border Around Selected Raster (Workspace Preferences) is On, the images highlight in the view(s) as well. If you control-click a highlighted name, it is deselected.
To select several consecutive raster images from the list
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, click the name of the first image. 2. Shift-click the name of the last consecutive image. That is, hold down the <Shift> key and click the name of the last image. The first image, the last image, and all names in between are selected.
To deselect images
1. Control-click the names of the images you want to deselect in the Raster Manager dialog box. or Select the Raster Selection tool and control-click the images that you want to deselect.
To deselect all images in a view
1. Select the Raster Selection tool. 2. Click a blank part of a view.

To deselect all raster files from the list
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, click any name. All names are deselected except for this one. 2. Control-click the highlighted name to deselect it. Detaching raster files You can detach one or more raster references. First select the required files in the Raster Manager dialog list box , or use the Raster Selection tool. Then select File > Detach or press the right mouse button and select Detach from the right-click menu. To detach all raster references, select File > Detach All. If mirroring, warping resizing or clipping modifications were brought to the image, detaching the image will result in the loss of those settings. In order to keep them, you can save the image in a new file using the Save As menu with the Option > Resample toggle On. When detaching a read-write mode raster file, if the native information of the file has been modified during the work session, Raster Manager will automatically save the changes made to the raster file. This applies to the following "native" information:

Georeference which is native to the file (geotiff/HMR/Intergraph formats, and others) Georeference stored in a sister file Coordinate systems and projections in a geotiff.
If the file being detached does not have native georeference or georeference stored in an already existing file, the Save Location Info in Sister File if Required toggle in the Workspace > Preferences dialog box has to be set to ON for the file to be updated. Otherwise, if the file has native georeference or if it already has a sister file, it will be updated regardless of the toggle setting. Automatic file saving controls the detach operations in Raster Manager. By default, automatic file saving of rasters is activated, meaning the user is not prompted when changes to the files are committed in a detach operation. You can change the default behavior for automatic file saving so that each detach operation in Raster Manager will prompt for saving or not saving the image, whichever case applies.
3/24/2010

Use the following key-ins to change the default behavior of automatic file saving:

Page 45 of 74
RASTER SAVEAUTO SETON to activate automatic file saving RASTER SAVEAUTO SETOff to disable automatic file saving RASTER SAVEAUTO TOGGLE to invert automatic saving status RASTER SAVEAUTO GET to get the status of automatic saving (in the status field).
You can also use the following configuration variables:
MS_RASTER_SAVEAUTO = 0 to disable automatic file saving. MS_RASTER_SAVEAUTO = 1 to activate automatic file saving.
In order to activate the MS_RASTER_SAVEAUTO configuration variable, MicroStation needs to be exited and reopened.
To detach selected raster files
1. In the Raster Manager dialog list box, click the name of the image to detach. or Select the Raster Selection tool, and identify a raster image. 2. (Optional) Hold down the <Ctrl> key and select additional filenames or interactively identify raster images. You also can hold down the <Shift> key to select consecutive names in the Raster Manager dialog box list. 3. From the Raster Manager File menu, choose Detach. or With the pointer in the Raster Manager file list box, right-click the mouse (press the right mouse button) and select Detach from the right-click menu. If the following variable are set: MS_RASTER_NO_DETACH_CONFIRM=0 and RASTER SILENT ON, an alert box asks if you are sure that you want to detach the selected raster reference(s). You can turn Off the alert box with the key-in MS_RASTER_NO_DETACH_CONFIRM=1 . In order to activate the MS_RASTER_NO_DETACH_CONFIRM configuration variable, MicroStation needs to be exited and reopened. 4. Click OK. If you made changes to the raster reference's native information and Autosave is set to Off, an Alert box asks if you want to save the changes. 5. Click your selection (Yes, Yes To All or No) or Cancel to exit without detaching.
To detach all raster references
1. From the Raster Manager File menu, choose Detach All. If the following variable are set: MS_RASTER_NO_DETACH_CONFIRM=0 and RASTER SILENT ON, an alert box asks if you are sure that you want to detach the selected raster reference(s). You can turn Off the alert box with the key-in MS_RASTER_NO_DETACH_CONFIRM=1 . In order to activate the MS_RASTER_NO_DETACH_CONFIRM configuration variable, MicroStation needs to be exited and reopened. 2. Click OK. If you made changes to the raster reference's native information and Autosave is set to Off, an Alert box asks if you want to save the changes. 3. Click your selection (Yes, Yes To All or No) or Cancel to exit without detaching. Image Server Used to create new or modify existing server configuration files. The Image Server utility requires that a Bentley publishing server be installed.
To set an Image Server
3/24/2010

1. Choose Settings > Image Server 2. Select the Add tool. The New Server Alias dialog box opens.
Page 46 of 74
3. Specify the protocole to use (IIP or HTTP), the server's IP address and the port number of the server you want to add. You can also enter any one parameter or any combination of two parameters. The new server name displays in the Alias list and name box. 4. Type in the URL name or IP address. 5. Click OK. The new alias is saved. You can also select Save or Save as in the File menu of the Image Server Settings dialog box.
To attach a raster file from a server
1. From the Raster Manager File menu, choose Attach or select the Attach tool from the Raster Control tool box. The Attach Raster Reference dialog box opens. 2. From the Drives option menu, choose the new image server you created above. Notice the alias name is there, not the server name. 3. Select the name of the required file. 4. (Optional) Turn On Raster Preview, to preview the file being attached. 5. (Optional) Turn On Place Interactively. 6. Click OK.
Supported Input File Formats

The following table lists the supported input file formats.
File Format Name File Extension Adobe PDF File Format .pdf Color Mode RGB Grayscale Bil .bil RGB HGR CALS (TYPE1) .cal Monochrome 256 Colors CRL .crl Grayscale 256 Colors Compuserve GIF .gif GIF CRL8 Tiled CCITT FAX4 WorldFile None See note below Compression Tiled None See note below Options
256 Colors with LZW transparency RGB None Grayscale 256 Colors
Digital Orthophoto File Format
.doq
Line
Erdas IMG Format
.img
Grayscale RGB
None
3/24/2010

RGB Alpha HGR WorldFile Grayscale ERMapper .ecw RGB Wavelet
Page 47 of 74
To add missing Coordinate Systems used by some ECW files, you must create a Geocoding file named PCSkeyProjDatum.dat, and save it in the WorkSpace\System\Tables\raster directory with the Coordinate System information , as in the following example:
2903,TMNEWMCF83,NAD83 Erdas IMG Format FLI .img .fli, .flc RGB 256 Colors None FLI RLE8 None Georeferenced TIFF .tif RGB Alpha LZW Deflate None LZW PackBits Deflate RGB JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss None LZW PackBits Deflate Grayscale JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss None 16 Colors 256 Colors LZW Tiled PackBits Deflate Tiled Tiled Tiled Tile See note below
3/24/2010

PackBits Monochrome 2 Colors CCITT FAX3 Tiled CCITT FAX4 RLE None 256 Colors HMR .hmr Grayscale PackBits Deflate None CCITT FAX3 CCITT FAX4 2 Colors RLE Deflate PackBits 256 Colors IMG .p Grayscale IMG (24 Bit) .a RGB 256 Colors Intergraph 29 Intergraph 30 Intergraph 31 Intergraph CIT Intergraph COT Intergraph RGB Intergraph RGB Compressed Intergraph RLE Intergraph TG4 Intergraph TIFF .c29 Grayscale .c30 .c31 .cit .cot Grayscale .rgb .rgb .rle .tg4 .tif RGB RGB Monochrome Monochrome 1 Bit Color (black and white) None RLE8 RLE1 CCITT FAX4 CCITT FAX4 Tiled Tiled See note below Grayscale RGB Monochrome 256 Colors None Tiled JPEG JPEG CCITT FAX4 See note below See note below RLE8 Tiled None WorldFile None WorldFile HGR HGR LZW
Page 48 of 74
None Deflate Flashpix Internet TIFF .iTIFF RGB JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss JPEG M di
3/24/2010

Loss JPEG High Loss None Deflate Flashpix JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss None 256 Colors Deflate None CCITT FAX4 Monochrome PackBits 2 Colors RLE1 Deflate None RGB Alpha Flashpix Deflate JPEG Minimum Loss RGB JPEG (JFIF) .jpg Grayscale JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss RGB Alpha HGR JPEG 2000 .jp2 RGB Grayscale LRD MPF .lrd .mpf Monochrome Grayscale MrSID .sid RGB Line RGB MultiChannel .xch RGB Alpha Strip None Tiled Wavelet See note below LRD RLE JPEG 2000 WorldFile WorldFile JPEG Low Loss HGR
Page 49 of 74
Grayscale
This is not a raster format in itself. MPF (stands for Multi-Page Format) is a collection of other bi-level Intergraph files concatenated into one single physical file.
3/24/2010

RGB 16 Colors HGR PCX .pcx 256 Colors Grayscale Monochrome RGB 16 Colors 2 Colors HGR PNG .png 256 Colors Grayscale Monochrome RGB Alpha Line RGB .rgb RGB None Tiled RGB Compressed .rgb RGB 1 Bit Color (black and white) Monochrome RGB SPOT CAP .fil Grayscale None LZW Compression JPEG Compression .dim RGB PackBits Compression Deflate Compression (Extended) None LZW Compression 16 Colors PackBits Compression Deflate C Tiled Tiled None See note below RLE8 Compression Line Tiled See note below Line Tiled Deflate WorldFile None WorldFile
Page 50 of 74
RLC
.rlc
None
RLE
.rle
RLE1 Compression
SPOT : Digital Image Map
3/24/2010

(Extended) None LZW Compression 256 Colors PackBits Compression Deflate Compression (Extended) None LZW Compression JPEG Compression Grayscale PackBits Compression Deflate Compression (Extended) None CCITT FAX4 Compression Monochrome LZW Compression PackBits Compression None CCITT FAX4 Compression RGB Alpha LZW Compression PackBits Compression None LZW Compression 2 Colors PackBits Compression Deflate Compression (Extended) Tiled Tiled Tiled Tiled
Page 51 of 74
RGB 2C l HGR
3/24/2010

256 Colors Sun Raster .rs Grayscale Monochrome RGB 256 Colors Targa .tga Grayscale RGB Alpha TG4 .tg4 Monochrome CCITT FAX4 Compression None TIFF .tif RGB Alpha LZW Deflate None LZW Deflate PackBits RGB JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss None LZW Deflate PackBits Grayscale JPEG Minimum Loss JPEG Low Loss JPEG Medium Loss JPEG High Loss None HGR 16 Colors 256 Colors LZW WorldFile Deflate Tiled PackBits N HGR WorldFile Tiled HGR WorldFile Tiled Line Tiled HGR WorldFile Tiled TGARLE WorldFile None HGR None WorldFile
Page 52 of 74
3/24/2010

CCITT FAX3 Monochrome 2 Colors CCITT FAX4 RLE PackBits RGB USGS FastL7A .fst Grayscale Grayscale USGS NDF .h1 RGB RGB Alpha Web Map Server File Format Windows BMP .xwms 24-bit RGB .bmp 2 Colors 256 Colors 16 Colors Wireless BMP File Format .wbmp Monochrome None BMP RLE8 None None World File HGR WorldFile None Supported header formats : jpg, png,bmp, and gif. HGR None None HGR WorldFile Tiled
Page 53 of 74
The Adobe PDF, Bil, DOQ, FLI, GIF, Intergraph TIFF, Intergraph 30, Intergraph 31, MrSID, RLC, SPOT CAP and SPOT DIMAP file formats are supported in read-only mode. To conserve modifications made to these file formats, use the "Save As" or "Batch Convert" commands, and select one of the supported output file formats.
ECW and JPEG 2000 files do not support Rotation and Affinity transformations.
Controlling the Display of Images in Views

Raster files can be displayed in any of the eight available DGN file views. When you attach a raster image, you set in which view(s) the image should be displayed. For previously attached raster files, you can change this setting via the Raster Manager dialog box. That is, you can turn the display of an image On or Off in a view.
To change the views in which an image is displayed
1. Select the raster file, by clicking it in the Raster Manager dialog box , or by selecting it with the Raster Selection tool . 2. Select or unselect the view number in the Raster Manager dialog box. This procedure can be done for multiple selections. Changing the display order of raster image files Raster image files are displayed in the order in which they are attached to a DGN file. That is, where images overlap, image files attached later display in front of those images attached earlier. You can change the display order of images in a view(s) either from the Raster Manager dialog box , or by using tools in the Raster Display tool box.
Using the Raster Manager menu tools
You can use the files list in the Raster Manager dialog box and the Edit menu to change the display order of raster images in a view(s).
To bring one or more images to the front in the list
3/24/2010
Page 54 of 74
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, select the name(s) of the required image(s) , or use the Raster Selection tool to select the image (s) in the view(s). 2. From the Display menu, choose Bring To Front. The selected image name(s) moves to the bottom of the list. Simultaneously, the view(s) in which the image(s) appears updates to show the selected image(s) in front of any other overlapping images.
To send one or more images to the back in the list
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, select the name(s) of the required image(s) , or use the Raster Selection tool to select the image (s) in the view(s). 2. From the Display menu, choose Send To Back. The selected image name(s) moves to the top of the list. Simultaneously, the view(s) in which the image(s) appears updates to show the selected image(s) behind any other overlapping images.
To bring one or more images forward one place in the list
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, select the name(s) of the required image(s) , or use the Raster Selection tool to select the image (s) in the view(s). 2. From the Display menu, choose Bring Forward. The selected image name(s) moves down the list by one position. Simultaneously, the view(s) in which the image(s) appears updates to show the new display order.
To send one or more images backward one place in the list
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, select the name(s) of the required image(s) , or use the Raster Selection tool to select the image (s) in the view(s). 2. From the Display menu, choose Send Backward. The selected image name(s) moves up the list by one position. Simultaneously, the view(s) in which the image(s) appears updates to show the new display order.
To change the display order in the list interactively
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box click and drag the name of the required file to its new position. That is, click the required filename and, while holding down the data button, drag the file to its new position in the list. The filename is moved to its new position. Simultaneously, the view(s) in which the image is displayed updates to show the new display order.
Using Raster Display tool box tools
To change the display order of image files, interactively in any view, you can use the Bring to Front and Send to Back tools in the Raster Display tool box. These tools let you select the image file in the view(s) in which it is displayed.
To bring one image to the front of the display in a view
1. (With no image files selected) Select the Bring to Front tool in the Raster Display tool box. 2. In the tool settings, set Action to To Front. 3. Identify the image to be brought to the front of the display. Views that display the selected image update to display it in front of any other image files. If the Raster Manager dialog box is open, its files list updates to show the selected image file at the bottom. 4. (Optionally) Select other image files to be brought to the front of the display.
To bring several images to the front of the display in a view
1. Use the Raster Selection tool to select the images to be brought to the front of the display. 2. Select the Bring to Front tool in the Raster Display tool box. 3. In the tool settings, set Action to To Front.
3/24/2010
Page 55 of 74
4. In any view, enter a data point. Views that display the selected images update to display them in front of other image files. If the Raster Manager dialog box is open, its files list updates to show the selected image files at the bottom.
To send one image to the back of the display in a view
1. (With no image files selected) Select the Send to Back tool in the Raster Display tool box. 2. In the tool settings, set Action to To Back. 3. Identify the image to be sent to the back of the display. Views that display the selected image update to display it behind any other image files. If the Raster Manager dialog box is open, its files list updates to show the selected image file at the top. 4. (Optional) Select other image files to be sent to the back of the display.
To send several images to the back of the display in a view
1. Use the Raster Selection tool to select the images to be sent to the back of the display. 2. Select the Send to Back tool in the Raster Display tool box. 3. In the tool settings, set Action to To Back. 4. In any view, enter a data point. Views that display the selected images update to display them behind other image files. If the Raster Manager dialog box is open, its files list updates to show the selected image files at the top.
Fitting Images to a View

You can fit one image to a view, or you can select several/all images and fit them to a view.
To fit a single image to a view
1. Use the Raster Selection tool to select an image. or In the Raster Manager dialog box, select a filename. 2. In the Raster Display tool box, select the Fit to View tool, with Mode set to Selected Rasters. or In the Raster Manager dialog box, select Display > Fit Rasters To View. 3. Select the view(s) to fit. The view updates with the selected raster image files displayed.
To fit all images to a view
1. In the Raster Display tool box, select the Fit to View tool, with Mode set to All Rasters. or In the Raster Manager dialog box, select Display > Fit All Rasters To View. 2. Select the view(s) to fit. The view updates with all raster images displayed.
The MicroStation Fit View tool can also be used to display all displayable elements in attached raster references.
Di
t F ll R
l ti
3/24/2010
Page 56 of 74
You can display a raster image at its full resolution in a view. This can be done using the Actual Resolution (1:1) tool, in the Raster Display tool box, or by selecting Display > Actual Resolution (1:1) in the Raster Manager dialog box. In both cases the view magnification is changed to let you view the image at its actual resolution, where one screen pixel represents each image pixel. When identifying the view/image, the identification point also defines the center of the rescaled view.
To display an image at its full resolution with the Actual Resolution (1:1) tool
1. In the Raster Display tool box, select the Actual Resolution (1:1) tool. 2. Identify the raster image in the view. The identification point also defines the center of the view. The view updates, with the identification point at the center of the view and the image displayed at its true resolution. 3. (Optional) Identify another raster images, to change the view scale so that the image is viewed at its actual resolution.
To display an image at its full resolution from the Raster Manager dialog box
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, select the filename of the image. 2. Select Display > Actual Resolution (1:1). 3. Identify the view, at the point that you want to be the center of the rescaled view. The view updates, with the identification point at the center of the view and the image displayed at its true resolution.
Changing the Display Characteristics of Raster Images

Where images appear dull, or lack in contrast, you can change their contrast and brightness display settings. Additionally, you can change the Display Gamma setting. Changing any of these settings does not alter the original image. Display settings may be different for individual images and they are saved with the DGN file. Changing the Contrast and Brightness may only be carried out on one image file at a time, while the Display Gamma setting can be applied to a number of selected image files simultaneously.
To change the Contrast/Brightness of an image
1. In the Raster Display tool box, select the Contrast/Brightness tool. 2. Identify the image. 3. In the tool settings, adjust the Contrast and Brightness settings. The image updates after each adjustment.
Contrast/Brightness tool settings
To change the Display Gamma setting for an image(s)
1. In the Raster Manager dialog box, select the image(s). 2. Click the Show Image Settings button at lower left of dialog box, to open the Image Settings portion of the Raster Manager dialog box. 3. In the Display Gamma field, enter a new value (press <Enter> to complete the process). The image(s) update to display with the new gamma setting.
DWG Workmode
3/24/2010
Page 57 of 74
DWG workmode is a working environment within MicroStation specifically adapted to the editing and reviewing of DWG files. MicroStation natively reads and writes both the MicroStation DGN file format and the DWG file format thus enabling less data loss from sharing. You can also directly reference a DWG file from a MicroStation DGN file. When you open a DWG file in MicroStation, various MicroStation tools are restricted to ensure compatibility with the DWG format. When you are required to create DGN files that are DWG compatible, you can turn on DWG workmode. In both cases MicroStation restricts its tools to create only elements that are compatible with the DWG format. The main purpose of the DWG workmode is to ensure that no DWG-incompatible features are added to the DWG file while editing it in MicroStation. This is done by restraining access to certain tools and features of MicroStation that remain unsupported in AutoCAD.
In DWG workmode, the read-only status (default ON) of a raster cannot be edited when only Raster Manager is loaded. This toggle can only be edited if Bentley Descartes is also loaded.
Raster Manager and the DWG workmode Raster Manager has been adapted to the DWG workmode to best reflect the image attachment abilities of AutoCAD. Many features are common to both platforms, but some are only found in MicroStation. These features are disabled in MicroStation's DWG workmode. Some of the features that are affected are generic (for example, image file types available), and some are file type dependant (for example, various transparency settings). Generic disabled features When you operate in DWG workmode, the following functionality is disabled by default:
Auxiliary information
Any feature allowing to assign a logical name and description to image attachments is disabled in DWG mode.
Images from server
Raster Manager allows the attachment of images accessible through a ModelServer Imager or Bentley Publisher server. However, access to image servers has been blocked from the Raster Manager interface when working in DWG mode.
Display control of images
MicroStation allows to specify whether or not to display the images in a specific view port. This capability is disabled in DWG mode, so that Raster Manager will display the images in ALL views or in NO view at all.
Independent scale factor along the x- and y-axis
When modifying an image in MicroStation, it is possible to scale it along the x- and y-axis using two different scale factors. The feature is not available in DWG mode.
Image clipping
Raster Manager's mask clipping functionality is disabled in DWG mode.

Tint color
When working with images in DWG workmode, all tint related tools and dialog items are disabled.
Display gamma
The display gamma setting is made unavailable while in DWG workmode and has a default value of 1.00.
Print gamma
The print gamma setting is also made unavailable while in DWG mode and has a default value of 1.00.
3/24/2010
Page 58 of 74
In MicroStation, users can control the printing of an image through a toggle button in Raster Manager's main dialog box. This feature is not available in DWG workmode.
Raster Projects
When working in DWG Workmode, the ability to import Raster Manager Projects has been disabled.
Supported image file types
The following table lists the raster file formats supported in DWG workmode:
Type BMP CALS-1 ECW FLI JFIF / JPEG GIF INGR TIFF PCX PNG RLC TARGA TIFF Description and versions Windows and OS/2 bitmap format Mils-R-Raster I ERMapper Compressed Wavelet format FLI Animation File Format Joint Photograpics Expert Group Compuserve GIF Intergraph TIFF File Format Picture PC Paintbrush Picture Run-Length Compressed True Vision Raster-Based Data Format Tagged Image File Format ECW files do not support Rotation and Affinity transformations. File extension .bmp, .dib .Gp4, .mil, .rst, .gc4, .cal .ecw .fli .jpg, .jpeg .tif .gif .tif .pcx .rlc .tga .tif, .tiff
Georeferenced TIFF Georeferenced TIFF File Format
Portable Network Graphic Run-Length Compressed .png
File type dependant disabled features When you operate in DWG workmode, the following file type dependant functionality is affected:
Transparency settings
When dealing with transparency settings in Raster Manager, some features are specific to the image type (binary, continuous tone and 24bit palette) and their behavior in DWG mode has been modified differently depending on the image type.
Binary images
When a binary image is attached in DWG workmode, the background transparency settings are disabled and the background transparency factor is set to 100%. The foreground transparency settings are also disabled and foreground transparency is set to 0.
Continuous tone and 24-bit images
The transparent settings for 24-bit, 8-bit and 4-bit images are also modified when working in DWG workmode. The transparent color picker is always disabled and the transparent factor/scale is disabled and set to 0. When loading a DWG file, if the image's transparency display is ON, then the transparent toggle in Raster Manager will also be ON. If the fade setting has been applied to the image from the DWG file, then this setting will be interpreted as transparency applied to all colors. The "all color transparent settings" will then never be disabled.
In order to see the effect of transparency on all colors, the transparent toggle must be ON. When an image has a fade setting greater than 0, but has its transparency OFF, then the image will automatically be displayed with transparency in MicroStation in order to see the effect of the fading. Background color
3/24/2010

Binary Images
Page 59 of 74
All tools that relate to background color modifications in Raster Manager have been disabled.
Continuous tone and 24-bit images
This feature does not affect 24-bit, 8-bit and 4-bit images, since there is no concept of background and foreground for these types of images. Troubleshooting DWG workmode
What happens if a DWG image is not located in the XY plane?
Though 3D display is fully supported, some restrictions do apply for the modify, mirror, warp and clip functions. They require the rasters to be attached parallel to the DGN's X-Y plane in order to be effective in a 3D DGN. If the raster is not parallel to the X-Y plane, these functions will be disabled for raster manipulations.
What happens if an image has a self-intersecting clip polygon?
For the time being, when loading a DWG file with such a polygon, MicroStation ties this clip polygon to the image attachment, but the rendered image does not show clipping at all, even though the clipping data has been transferred. This is done so that no data is lost when switching from one platform to the other. On the other hand, if an image has a self-intersecting clip polygon and the user decides to set a new clip polygon on the image, the original (and invisible to the MicroStation user) clip boundary is deleted and replaced with the new one.
What happens with an unsupported image file type in MicroStation ?
When loading a DWG file containing an unsupported image file type in MicroStation, the image appears in Raster Manager's image list, but with the mention Raster cannot be read. Even though Raster Manager will allow the modification of this image's properties, the modifications will not be saved to the DWG file.
What happens if an image file cannot be found?
When loading an image file attached in a DWG file that cannot be found from the filename information contained in the DWG entity, the image also appears in Raster Manager's image list, but with the mention Raster not found. Because of its missing status, the image file type is unknown. When this happens, the image's color mode is forced to RGB. The same limitations on modifications stand when this case arises as when an unsupported image file type is loaded in MicroStation (i.e., no changes are recorded).
Binary Workmode
Raster Manager provides three (3) binary workmodes. Each workmode is designed to handle, manage and display binary (1-bit) image files in a specific way. Workmodes To ensure compliancy with versions before 2004 Edition, workmodes can be used to revert back to previous display modes. A workmode is activated by using a configuration variable. There are 3 workmodes: Monochrome, Raster Reference and 2-color. By default, when the configuration variable is not set, absent, or defined with an invalid value, the workmode 2-color is automatically set as the default workmode. To set or change the default workmode 1. Create the configuration variable MS_RASTER_1BIT_WORKMODE. 2. Assign a valid numeric value (0, 1 or 2) to the above configuration variable.
The valid values are as follows:
3/24/2010

Page 60 of 74
(0) : Monochrome (1) : Raster Reference (2) : 2-color
(0) Monochrome When assigned to 0 (zero), binary files are treated equally as monochrome formats. In this mode, 2color formats are read as monochrome. This mode complies with Industry Standards for 1-bit raster image file formats. When 1-bit raster image files are exchanged between different systems / applications, they should always display identically. This mode ensures consistency when MicroStation Raster Manager preserves the visual aspects of 1-bit raster image files, especially when working in DWG Workmode, transitioning to and from Bentley I/RAS B, or other MicroStation based programs. Background pixel color is always identical to the view background color.

Only foreground pixels are displayed with a different color. Background pixels are assigned the exact same color as the View background. Background pixels are rendered transparent by automatically toggling the Transparency feature. The Transparent background can be turned OFF by turning off the Transparency option from the Element Info(rmation) dialog box under the Color tab.
Foreground color assigned to foreground pixels is set as assigned by the Foreground Color setting.
From the Attach dialog box, when a 2color or monochrome image is selected, the Foreground color option displays under the preview area. The selected color is used to display the foreground pixels.
When the foreground pixel color is identical to the view background color, the raster image file foreground pixel color is automatically changed to a different color that will render these pixels visible in the View.
In cases where the View background is modified to a color identical to the one used by the foreground pixels, an automated task best contrast color is triggered to ensure that the foreground pixels do not blend in the View background color. A color is identified as identical when the RGB values are identical as the color it is compared with.
When displaying 2color images in the monochrome workmode, the image's colors will be replaced by the colors that were selected in the Attach Raster Reference dialog box.
(1) Raster Reference In this mode, raster image files are displayed as in a fashion that complies with MicroStations former raster engine, Raster Reference. (2) 2-color The 2-color mode complies with the 8.0 and 8.1 versions of MicroStation Raster Manager.
Raster Manager Projects

Raster Manager's project capability lets you retrieve all features associated with groups of images, such as the following:
3/24/2010

Page 61 of 74
Lists of image's display status (on or off) in each MicroStation view. Organization parameters for each image (display order, visibility, transparency, translucency).
When you retrieve a previously saved project, you retrieve your work and your data organized exactly as it was when saved. The parameters and the links to the images are attached to the active design file. Managing Projects
Managing Projects
You can import your Project files from the File > Project submenu of the Raster Manager dialog box. Although Raster Manager continues to support existing projects, it is no longer possible to create new projects. All rasters attached from an existing project are transformed into Raster Reference attachments in Raster Manager.
Import Project dialog box
To open an existing project
1. From the Raster Manager File menu, choose Project > Import. The Import Project dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the Import Project dialog box to select the required project.
3/24/2010

3. Click OK.
Page 62 of 74
Modifying Raster File Attachments

The display of raster image files that have been attached to a design file may be modified in various ways. Included in Raster Manager are the tools that let you:

Clip, or crop an image's display. Mask off an area within an image. Modify or remove a clipping polygon. Move, and/or resize an image. Warp an image to fit an area in the design.
When a raster attachment is modified with Raster Manager, no changes are made to the original file, just to its attachment information in the design file. To keep warping, mirroring and resizing modifications, a new file must be created using the Save As menu with the Option > Resample toggle on. Clipping and transparency settings are not exported when an image is resampled. By default, these settings are kept in the design file attachment and are lost if the image is detached. Clipping raster image files Moving and resizing image files
Clipping raster image files

Raster Manager lets you perform non-destructive clipping of raster image attachments. Only one raster image at a time can be clipped. With the clip tools, you have the choice of either of two clipping modes:

Clip Boundary lets you crop an image to display only the area of interest. Clip Mask lets you clip out a portion of the image. Masking can be used, for example, to clear an area for text display.
In either case, the clipping polygon can be an existing closed element, an existing fence, or you can place a block interactively. When using the Clip tool from the Raster Manager dialog box (Edit > Clip) you must first select an image or else the Clip menu item is disabled. When using the Clip tool from the Raster Control tool box, you have the choice of selecting the image before or after selecting the tool. If an image already is selected, prior to selecting the tool, then that image will be clipped. If no image is selected, then you can select the image after selecting the Clip tool.
To crop an image interactively
1. In the Raster Control tool box, select the Clip tool. 2. In the tool settings, set Method to Block and Mode to Clip Boundary.
3. If more than one raster image is attached, identify the image to be clipped.
3/24/2010

4. Place a data point to define the first point of the clipping block. 5. Place a second data point to define the opposite corner of the clipping block. 6. Accept to complete the clipping operation.
Page 63 of 74
Image with clipping block boundary defined (left) and after clipping (right).
To crop an image using an existing fence or closed element
1. Use the Place Fence tool to place a fence defining the clipping boundary for the image. or Place an element to define the clipping boundary. 2. In the Raster Control tool box, select the Clip tool. 3. In the tool settings, set Method to Fence or Element, as appropriate, and Mode to Clip Boundary. Fence is an available option only if a fence is present in the design.
4. If more than one raster image is attached, identify the image to be clipped. 5. Accept the fence as the clipping polygon. or Identify the element to use as the clipping polygon and accept with a second data point. The image is clipped to the shape of the fence or element.
3/24/2010
Page 64 of 74
Image with fence or element defined (left) and after clipping (right).
Using the same procedures as those above, for clipping boundaries, you can mask an area of a raster image. This can be used to place some text describing the image, for example. For these operations, you simply set Mode to Clip Mask, as the following example shows.
To mask part of an image interactively
1. In the Raster Control tool box, select the Clip tool. 2. In the tool settings, set Method to Block and Mode to Clip Mask.
3. If more than one raster image is attached, identify the image to be clipped. 4. Place a data point to define the first point of the clipping block. 5. Place a second data point to define the opposite corner of the clipping block. 6. Accept to complete the clipping operation. 7. (Optional) Repeat steps 46 to place additional clipping masks on the raster image.
3/24/2010
Page 65 of 74
Image with clipping block mask defined (left) and after clipping (right).
Modifying clipping polygons Where you have clipped a raster file previously, you can modify or delete the boundaries of its clipping polygon(s). This may be to display more or less of an image that has been cropped, or to create a larger masked region to add more text. Once you have selected the clipping polygon, you can modify it in a similar fashion to that used for normal elements. When using the Modify Clip tool from the Raster Manager dialog box (Edit > Modify Clip) you must first select an image or else the Modify Clip menu item is disabled. When using the Modify Clip tool from the Raster Control tool box, you have the choice of selecting the image before or after selecting the tool. If no image is selected, then you can select the image after selecting the Modify Clip tool. When you identify the polygon to modify, the identification point defines the way that the polygon is modified. For example, if you identify a vertex, you can move the vertex. Similarly, if you identify a side of a polygon, you can move the side.
To modify a raster clipping polygon
1. In the Raster Control tool box, select the Modify Clip tool. 2. If more than one raster image is attached, identify the required image. 3. Identify the polygon to modify, at the point at which you want to perform the modification. That is, at a vertex if you want to move the vertex, or at a point on a side if you want to move the side. 4. Move the pointer to modify the clipping polygon as required. 5. Enter a data point to complete the modification. The image updates to show the new boundaries of the clipping polygon. 6. (Optional) Repeat steps 35 for other modifications.
3/24/2010
Page 66 of 74
Modifying a side of a clipping polygon (left) and the result (right).
Modifying a vertex of a clipping polygon (left) and the result (right).
Deleting clipping polygons Using the Unclip tool in the Raster Control tool box, you can delete one or more clipping polygons from a raster image. Similarly, you can delete all clipping polygons from a raster image, using Unclip in the Raster Manager dialog box (select Edit > Unclip).
To delete selected clipping polygons from a raster image
1. In the Raster Control tool box, select the Unclip tool. 2. In the tool settings window, set Delete to Selected Polygon. 3. Identify the raster image from which the clipping polygon(s) is to be removed. The clipping polygons for the selected raster image are highlighted. 4. Identify a clipping polygon to delete. The selected clipping polygon highlights in a different color. 5. Accept to delete the clipping polygon.
3/24/2010
Page 67 of 74
Moving and resizing image files

Raster images that have been attached to a design may be moved, rotated and/or resized. You can do this with the Transform tool. Another option is to use the Warp tool, which is useful for matching a raster image to design file elements. Georeferencing and positioning information is kept in the raster file header for georeferenced file formats. For non-georeferenced image formats, it is either written to a location info sister file or simply kept in the image's design file attachment. Warping, mirroring and resizing parameters are also kept in the design file's raster attachment. If the image is detached, these settings are deleted. In order to apply warping, mirroring and resizing settings, a new image must be saved using the Save As menu with the Option > Resample toggle set to on. Using the Transform tool With this tool you can move a raster image or modify its size or rotation. Only one raster file at a time can be modified interactively. When working interactively, scaling and rotation modifications are performed relative to the image anchor point, which is set at using the Anchor Point tool.
To rotate an image interactively
1. Using the MicroStation Element Selection tool, select the image you want to move or choose the image from the list in the Raster Manager dialog box. 2. From the Raster Manager dialog box's Edit menu, select Transform. 3. In the Transform tool box, select the Anchor Point tool. 4. With a data point, identify the anchor point along the image's border. The anchor displays on the selected corner. 5. In the Transform tool box, select the Rotate tool. 6. Place a data point to on the image's contour and move the cursor. A rubberband interactively displays to show the position of the image. 7. Place a data point to complete the rotation at the desired position. The image is interactively repositioned. 8. Reset to deselect the image.
3/24/2010
Page 68 of 74
Rotating the image (left) and the new position of the raster image (right)
To scale an image interactively
1. Use the MicroStationElement Selection tool, or the Raster Manager dialog box to select the required raster image. 2. From the Raster Manager dialog box's Edit menu, select Transform. 3. In the Transform tool box, select the Anchor Point tool. 4. With a data point, identify the anchor point along the image's border. The anchor displays at the selected position on the image border. 5. In the Transform tool box, select the Scale tool. 6. Place a data point on the image's contour and move your cursor. A rubberband interactively displays to show the size of the image. 7. Place a data point to complete scaling at the desired size. The image is repositioned to its new dimension. 8. Reset to deselect the image.
3/24/2010
Page 69 of 74
Scaling the image (left) and the new position of the image (right).
To move an image interactively
1. Use the MicroStationElement Selection tool, or the Raster Manager dialog box to select the required raster image. 2. In the Transform tool box, select the Anchor Point tool. 3. With a data point, identify the anchor point along the image's border. The anchor displays at the selected position on the image border. 4. In the Transform tool box, select the Move tool. 5. Place a data point on the image, away from the image anchor point. The image now is attached to the screen pointer. 6. Move the image to its new location. 7. Place a data point to complete the move. The image is repositioned interactively. 8. Reset to deselect the image.
3/24/2010
Page 70 of 74
Moving the image (left) and with its new position (right).
Using the Warp tool You can use the Warp tool to manipulate a raster image by moving, scaling, rotating, or skewing. Manipulation is accomplished by defining points on the image, and their corresponding points in the design file. Raster Manager uses this information to perform a best fit of the image to the design file points. Using this tool, for example, you can match a visible feature in an aerial mapping image to the corresponding feature in the design file.
To match an image feature to a design file element
1. Select the Warp tool. 2. If necessary, identify the raster image. 3. Set Method to the required setting, depending on the number of points available and the type of warping: Align (Move, Scale) requires two points. Similitude (Move, Scale, Rotate) minimum of two points. Affine (Move, Scale, Rotate, Skew) minimum of three points. 4. Identify a point in the raster image. 5. Identify the corresponding point in the design file.
3/24/2010

6. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for additional points, as required. 7. Reset to warp the image.
Page 71 of 74
Matching points in the image to points in the design (left) and the modified image (right).
With Similitude and Affine, the image can be rotated during warping.
If the image to warp has non-zero affinity, use the Similitude rather than the Affine method.
Migrating to Raster Manager

Raster Manager brings together, into a unified user interface, the best features of both raster references and Image Manager. Raster Manager is now included in MicroStation. This section provides some background information to help those who wish to migrate to Raster Manager now. Background General Information Raster Functions
3/24/2010
Page 72 of 74
Background
Raster references are saved as type 90 elements in the design file. These type 90 attachments also are used by IRAS/B, IRAS/C and other Intergraph products. For this reason Bentley cannot modify the basic format of this data without causing compatibility problems. Raster Manager, however, has extended these elements in a compatible way and favors the use of these extended type 90 elements to save information about raster attachments. Image Manager uses project files to save information about raster attachments. With Raster Manager, project files still are supported, but now they are useful only for attaching a mosaic of raster files to multiple design files. If raster files are associated with a single design file, it is preferable to change to Raster Reference (type 90) attachments.
General Information
Raster Manager, overall, favors the use of raster references. The Raster Manager dialog box looks like the Reference Files: Raster Files dialog box and can be accessed by selecting File > Raster Manager in MicroStations main menu. Another option is to select the Raster Manager tool in the Raster Control tool box. All existing Raster Reference key-ins are supported. While there still is a ref.ma MDL application, the raster portion of ref.ma is now carried out by rastmgr.ma. The mdlRastRef API has been replaced by the mdlRaster API. Raster Project users should note that Raster Manager now imports Raster Projects as Type 90 elements. All new raster attachments are forced into the Raster Reference attachment type. Raster Project attachment types are now imported through the File > Project > Import menu item and are no longer manipulated by Raster Manager. See the chapter on Managing Projects for more information. Previously, raster reference users were forced to create a new raster file after every raster modify operation. For example, after clipping or warping an image, users were forced to create a new image. This was costly, both in time and storage space, but is no longer necessary in Raster Manager. Instead, all modifications are non-destructive meaning that they are kept inside the design file, unless a new image file is saved. Your raster file remains the same, and modifications are applied, dynamically, to the image. The first time that you warp or clip an image, you will appreciate this improvement. Raster Managers Modify tool now is the way to move, scale or rotate a raster file. Previously these were separate tools in raster reference and they were not as easy to use. Raster Manager supports warping and aligning, but you must use Bentley Descartes' Registration tool for higher-order warping, and for properly dealing with residuals. One difference is that the Helmert warping in raster reference has been renamed to Similitude warping in Raster Manager. This was done because Similitude, technically, is more correct since this warp supports scaling.
Raster Functions
The following tables summarize the functions available in raster reference and Image Manager, and their equivalents in Raster Manager. These tables let you correlate the old procedures for manipulating raster files with those in Raster Manager. The first table shows changes that will let raster reference users make a smooth transition to Raster Manager. The second table does the same for Image Manager users. From Raster Reference to Raster Manager:
Raster Reference Attach Attach Fixed Attach URL Preview D t h dD t Same Uncheck the Place Interactively check box. Use the key-in RASTER ATTACHURL. Can be toggled on or off in the Attach Raster Reference dialog box. h S Th k i RASTER SILENT ON/OFF/TOGGLE till b dt li i t th d l di l b t fi th Raster Manager
3/24/2010

All Reload Ref Agent Save As Mirror Warp Attachment Settings Update Sequence deletion. Same Use the key-in BROWSER REFAGENT.
Page 73 of 74
Improved. Raster Manager allows sister files such as ESRI World files. Generally, in Raster Manager, Save As will attempt to save positioning information as well as the new raster file. You also have the option to resample the image, which applies any warping or resizing to the image. Previously in the Tools menu, now available in both the Raster Control tool box and in the Raster Manager Edit menu. These now are dynamically applied. Moved (or added) from the Tools menu to the Edit menu. Available also in the Raster Control tool box. These now are dynamically applied. Removed and replaced by the Element Info(rmation) dialog box accessible either by double-clicking on an image in the Raster Manager dialog box, or by selecting the image and choosing the Element Info icon in the MicroStation main tool bar. There is now a Background / Design / Foreground plane managing display priority in the master model, while the rasters with a "referenced" status will still honor Update Sequence settings.
From Image Manager to Raster Manager:

Image Manager New File Open File Close/Close All Save/Save As Properties Project Batch Conversion Print/Plot Set Active Image Front/Back Images On/Off Fit Image(s) Tools Help No corresponding function If Save and Attach Automatically was set in Image Manager then Attach is the closest functionality. All images are now attached in Type 90 raster reference attachments. Similar to Detach/Detach All. Now Save As. Removed and replaced by the Element Info(rmation) dialog box accessible either by double-clicking on an image in the Raster Manager dialog box, or by selecting the image and clicking the Element Info icon in the MicroStation main tool bar. Projects are imported through the File > Project > Import menu item. Raster Project attachments are now converted into Raster Reference attachments. It is still possible to export Raster attachments into a project file. For more information, see the section on Managing Projects. Identical, but is now also available by selecting Utilities > Image > Convert. Integrated into MicroStation. Note that RTL Plot On the Fly is now accomplished as part of a MicroStation driver. Also, all IMXXX.PLT files are now obsolete. This concept is obsolete and the function has been removed. Same Display Control by view has been removed. Change display in the Image Settings menu of the Raster Manager dialog box or through the Element Info(rmation) dialog box. Same Integrated into MicroStation tools (select Tools > Raster > Main/Display/Control). Integrated into MicroStation help. Raster Manager
Managing Images from MicroStation/J

When opening files created in MicroStation/J, attached images are often displayed at a different location in MicroStation V8. This occurs when the working units are not properly defined. Raster Manager for MicroStation/J reads the Sub Unit label and matches that label with the one from the units.ini file. As an example, you cannot have kilometers as the Master Unit and inches as the Sub Unit. This problem also occurs if "SU" is used as the Sub Unit label, and the Master Unit label is anything other than "MU". For the HMR and TIF formats, "SU" is equal to 1 meter. If the Master Unit label defines a unit that is smaller than the one defined by the Sub Unit label (MU is smaller than SU), then MicroStation/J opens the image at a different location. There are two workarounds to fix this: 1. Change "SU" for a valid Sub Unit label (m, cm, mm, etc.), that is a Sub Unit label that fits with the Master Unit, and make sure that the value entered for the Sub Unit per Master Unit is valid. For instance, if the Master Unit is feet then the Sub Unit is inches, and the value in the Sub Unit field must be 12 (12 inches per foot).
3/24/2010
Page 74 of 74
2. If you want to keep the original SU label, you can edit the units.ini file and assign the proper value to the "SU" label entry. The units.ini file is located under the "..\Bentley\WorkSpace\System\Tables\raster" directory. You should keep in mind that the SU label is defined as 1 meter. It is possible to assign any value you want to the SU label, but it must be expressed in meters and it must be defined in the units.ini file under the SU label. For example, in MicroStation, if one SU is to be equal to 1/10th of a foot, you need to convert this value into meters. Hence, you would use the following formula: 0.3048/10=0.0348, where 0.3048 is 1 foot expressed in meters. Thus, the SU label in the units.ini file will be defined as: SU,0.03048.
3/24/2010
3D Design and Modeling
Page 1 of 131
3D 3D Design Design and and Modeling Modeling

Understanding 3D Drawing in 3D Surface Modeling Solids Modeling Introduction to Feature-based Solids Modeling Adding and Manipulating Solids and Features Variable Driven Modeling and Constraints Feature Manager Feature Modeling Tools Dimension-driven Design
Understanding 3D
MicroStation's 3D tools let you work on a single 3D model, rather than separate 2D models.
When the 3D design is complete, drawings such as plans, elevations, sections, and details are generated from the single model. Any required modifications are made to the design just once, and then the drawings are regenerated. For more information, see Composing Sheet Models with References. As an added benefit, you can use MicroStation's tools for rendering and visualizing 3D models to produce realistic color images of your design. This is often more cost-effective than traditional mock-ups and artist's drawings, especially when there are frequent revisions or tight deadlines. Animated sequences provide a way to present a design that was not available before CAD.
The standard 3D tools are similar to the Feature Modeling tools.
DWG workmode and 3D Basic 3D Concepts Viewing a 3D model View Control tool box View Rotation tool box Walk Fly Navigate View View Perspective tool box Change View Perspective Change View Rotation View Rotation dialog box Set Active Depth Show Active Depth Camera Settings View Display Mode Clip Volume Clip Mask 3D Elements SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces Settings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces
DWG workmode and 3D

When you open a DWG file in MicroStation, various MicroStation tools are restricted to ensure compatibility with the DWG format. When you are required to create DGN files that are DWG compatible, you can turn on DWG workmode. In both cases, MicroStation restricts its tools to create only elements that are compatible with the DWG format. With 3D, this includes the following:
SmartSolids/Surfaces are created using the ACIS representations rather than the Parasolid representations as in the DGN workmode. B-spline curves cannot be used in creating a complex chain or shape.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh1ED7.htm
3/24/2010

Page 2 of 131
Self-referencing of DGN files is disabled, as is reference clipping. Raster references are disabled.
Basic 3D Concepts
This section introduces the basic concepts related to working with 3D models. Design cube 3D DGN files consist of a design cube in which you work. The design cube represents a 3D DGN file's total volume, in which points are defined with x-, y-, and z-values, or coordinates. Points can be placed anywhere within the design cube, and are not restricted to a single plane as is the case when you work in a 2D DGN file.
The 2D design plane (top) and 3D design cube (bottom)
Design cube coordinates are expressed in the form (x,y,z). The global origin in the 3D seed files provided with MicroStation is located at the exact center of the design cube and assigned the coordinates (0,0,0). Any point above the global origin has a positive z-value and any point below it has a negative z-value. View volume The view volume (sometimes called the display volume) is the volume of the design cube that is displayed in a 3D view. In most cases, only a part of the design cube is displayed in a view.
3/24/2010
Page 3 of 131
View volume. A denotes the window area (hatched). D denotes the Display Depth, bounded by the front F and back B clipping planes. The large cube shows the design cube, part of which is displayed in each view.
Any elements, or parts of elements, not contained in the view volume are not displayed in the view. Unless a clip volume has been applied to a view, the view volume is bounded by the window area, and its Display Depth. You can set the clipping volume of a 3D view such that only the region of interest is displayed and you can snap to only those elements that are located within the defined clip volume of the view. Similarly, you can apply a clip mask to a view, where only those elements located outside the clip mask are displayed. When a clip mask is used inside a clip volume, the only elements that will display in the view are those that are located within the clip volume, and outside the clip mask. Additionally, if you use the Fit View tool, only those elements within the clip volume are considered. This simplifies working on discrete portions of large and/or complicated 3D objects. At any time, in a view, you can toggle on/off the view display restrictions of the front and/or back clipping planes. Similarly, you can toggle the clip volume, if one has been applied. Three settings in the View Attributes dialog box let you do this:

Clip Back if on, a back clipping plane is active in a view. Clip Front if on, a front clipping plane is active in a view. Clip Volume if on, and a clip volume has been applied to the view, the view volume is restricted to the defined clip volume.
Display Depth
The distance from the front to the back of a 3D view is its Display Depth. This depth is bounded by clipping planes, unless they have been disabled in the View Attributes dialog box. When clipping planes are on:

The front clipping plane is nearest the viewer. The back clipping plane is farthest from the viewer.
Elements in front of the front clipping plane, or behind the back clipping plane, are not displayed in the view. This applies even if they are within its viewing area, regardless of how far the view is zoomed out. In other words, the front and back clipping planes define a slice of the total volume of the design cube. Only elements located within this slice can be displayed in a view. When a clip volume has been applied to a view, and Clip Volume is enabled (in the View Attributes dialog box), then this is the maximum volume of the design cube that will be displayed in that view. Clipping planes can be set that reduce this volume, but they have no effect if they are set outside the clip volume. Active Depth The Active Depth in a view defines the position of a plane, parallel to the screen, on which data points are entered by default. The Active Depth is perpendicular to, and is measured along, the view's z-axis. For this reason, it is sometimes referred to as the active z-depth.
3/24/2010
Page 4 of 131
Active Depth, denoted by AZ. x, y, and z denote the View axes. F and B denote the front and back clipping planes, respectively.
For example, suppose you are modeling the interior of a multi-story building. You can complete the details on one floor at a time in the top view by setting the Display Depth and Active Depth to each floor successively. An even better method is to create a 3D clipping element (such as an extruded block) that encloses a single floor of the building and then use the Clip Volume view control to hide all other geometry. With this set up, to view any particular floor, you would move the clipping element to the level of the floor that you wanted to work on, and the display volume would change accordingly. You set the Active Depth with the Set Active Depth view control. Also, you can change the Active Depth by completing a view manipulation for example, Rotate View, Fit View, Change View Perspective for which you snapped to an element for the first data point.
A view's Active Depth always lies within its Display Depth.
Although Active Depth is a very powerful concept, MicroStation also lets you position points away from the Active Depth. For example, using AccuDraw in 3D, you can work at a particular depth without having to first set the Active Depth.
Standard views If you rotate a view to a standard orientation, the view orientation displays, along with the view number, in the view's title bar.
2D
In 2D, the design plane is parallel to the screen and, in effect, you view the model from above. The default (unrotated view) in 2D is like a Top view with its orientation such that:

The x-axis is positive from left to right (horizontally). The y-axis is vertical, and positive from bottom to top (vertically).
In a 2D model, you rotate a view about an imaginary z-axis, which is perpendicular to the screen. No matter how you rotate a view in 2D, effectively, you still view it from above.
3D Orthogonal views
In 3D, since you can rotate views about three axes, rather than just one, there are six orthogonal orientations, each of which corresponds to a standard orthogonal view: Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back. The name of the view describes also the position from which the model is viewed.
3/24/2010
Page 5 of 131
The faces of this cube correspond to the 3D orthogonal views. The cube is displayed here in an Isometric view.
Top view
A Top view displays the model from the top:

the xy plane is parallel to your screen (as in a 2D model). x is positive from left to right (horizontally). y is positive from bottom to top (vertically). z is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.
While, for a Bottom view:

y is positive from top to bottom (vertically). z is positive away from you, perpendicular to the screen.
Front view
A Front view displays the model from the front:

the xz plane is parallel to your screen. x is positive from left to right (horizontally). z is positive from bottom to top (vertically). y is positive away from you, perpendicular to the screen.
While, for a Back view:

x is positive from right to left (horizontally). y is positive towards you, perpendicular to the screen.
Right view
A Right view, displays the model from the right:
the yz plane is parallel to your screen. i iti f l ft t i ht (h i t ll )
3/24/2010

Page 6 of 131
z is positive from bottom to top (vertically). x is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.
While, for a Left view:

y is positive from right to left (horizontally). x is positive away from you, perpendicular to the screen.
Isometric views
There are two other standard views Isometric and Right Isometric. These views are rotated so the three faces of a cube orthogonal to the design cube axes are equally inclined from the screen surface.
Standard view Isometric Faces in front Top, Left, and Front
Right Isometric Top, Right, and Front
Isometric view (left) and Right Isometric view (right)
View coordinates Working in 3D, in every view we always have at least two coordinate systems to work with the DGN file coordinate system and the view coordinate system. Only in a Top view, do the two coordinate systems align exactly. When we rotate a view, in reality we are repositioning our view camera to let us see the model from a different direction. Thus, when we rotate a view, the DGN file's axes rotate with it. Each view's axes, on the other hand, are relative to the view (or, if you like, the screen) and the following always applies for view axes:

The x-axis is horizontal and positive from left to right. The y-axis is vertical and positive from bottom to top. The z-axis is perpendicular to the view (screen), and positive toward you.
Thus, you can place elements relative to the DGN file coordinates, or relative to the view coordinates. When you use AccuDraw, this is easier to understand as its compass gives you a visual indication of the drawing plane in which you are working. Perspective projection Elements in 3D designs must be displayed on the screen, which is planar.
In a view with parallel projection, each element is projected to the screen along a line parallel to the view's z-axis. Although parallel projected views make drawing easier, they lack realism because elements have the same relative size regardless of their depth in the view. With parallel projection it can be difficult to decipher the orientation of the model. In a view with perspective projection, elements at greater depths appear relatively smaller, enhancing realism. A view with perspective projection is also referred to as a camera view.
3/24/2010
Page 7 of 131
Example of parallel projection (left) compared to a perspective view (right)
Using the grid in 3D In a 3D DGN file, you can define the orientation of the grid to suit the task at hand. Once you define a grid, Grid Lock works as expected and input points are constrained to the grid points. The Grid Orientation is controlled from the Grid section of the DGN File Settings dialog (select Settings > Design File). Options are:

View Grid always aligns to the view and passes through the global origin. ACS Grid aligns to the active ACS. Top Grid aligns to a Top view. It extends along the X and Y axes from the global origin. Right Grid aligns to a Right view. It extends along the Y and Z axes from the global origin. Front Grid aligns to a Front view. It extends along the X and Z axes from the global origin.
Added to these options, is a key-in that lets you rotate the grid about (its) Z-Axis. This key-in, ACTIVE GRIDANGLE <value> is included specifically to provide compatibility with AutoCAD, which supports only a grid in the XY plane, but can include a rotation angle. When you define a grid to align to an ACS or a view orientation, it will rotate with that view, or display with perspective in camera views.
Perspective view displaying the grid with Orientation set to Top
3/24/2010
Page 8 of 131
Viewing a 3D model
A 3D view can display part of the design cube from any point, looking in any direction.
As in 2D, elements to the left, right, above, or below, can be excluded from a view by zooming in or windowing so that the elements are outside the view's area. 3D views also have depth. You can exclude the display of elements located in front of, or behind, a required object by changing the view's Display Depth, or by applying a clip volume.
3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D Many 3D viewing procedures are similar to their 2D counterparts. For example, you can change a view's area using the same tools as for 2D. Tools such as the Window Area, Zoom In, and Zoom Out view controls are used.
Fitting views in 3D
The Fit View view control has some 3D-specific aspects and settings.
Expand Clipping Planes Center Active Depth Center Camera If on, the view's Display Depth is adjusted, along with the view origin and magnification, so that all elements on levels that are on for the view are displayed. If on, centers the Active Depth in the fitted view. (It is recommended that you turn on Center Active Depth when fitting a view you intend to dynamically rotate, or a view whose perspective you intend to change.) If on, centers the Camera in the fitted view.
When a clip volume has been applied to a view, the Fit View tool has no effect on the volume displayed in the view, it merely fits the view to the elements contained within the applied clip volume.
Rotating views in 3D
Typically, the Rotate View view control is used in 3D to rotate a view to one of the standard views as well as to custom orientations. When rotating views in 3D, an important point to consider is the axis about which you want the view to rotate. By default, the pivot point is the center of the view, at the active depth. If the active depth is far behind the elements in the view, then you can quickly rotate the geometry out of sight. You can, however, move the pivot point to another location prior to rotating the view (see To move the pivot point for dynamic view rotation).
To dynamically rotate a view (Cube option)
1. Select the Rotate View view control. A cross-hair displays at the center of the active view. 2. Set Method to Dynamic. 3. In the extended settings, click the Cube icon. 4. Enter a data point (away from the cross-hairs) in the view to rotate. Two white dots display in the view, a larger dot at the center of rotation and a smaller dot at the starting point of the rotation. As you move the screen pointer from this first data point, the view is rotated. 5. Enter a second data point to define the view orientation.
To dynamically rotate a view (Sphere option)
1. Select the Rotate View view control. A cross-hair displays at the center of the active view. (If Sphere is selected already, in the extended settings, then the cross-hair displays at the center of a shaded sphere).
3/24/2010

2. Set Method to Dynamic. 3. In the extended settings, click the Sphere icon. A shaded sphere displays in the active view, with the cross-hair at its center.
Page 9 of 131
4. Enter a data point somewhere within the shaded sphere (away from the cross-hairs). Two white dots display in the view, a larger dot at the center of the sphere and a smaller dot at the starting point of the rotation. As you move the screen pointer from this first data point, the view is rotated. Graphics show the relationship between the starting point and current point on the rotation sphere. 5. Enter a second data point to define the view orientation.
To rotate a view in 3D by three points
1. Select the Rotate View view control. 2. Set Method to 3 Points. 3. Enter a data point to define the origin of the x-axis in the view to rotate. The origin, as well as a dynamic line indicating the positive direction of the view x-axis, displays. 4. Enter a data point to define the positive direction of the view x-axis. 5. Enter a data point in any view to define the positive direction of the view y-axis and rotate the view.
To rotate a view(s) in 3D to a standard orientation
1. Select the Rotate View view control. 2. Set Method to the desired standard orientation Top, Front Right, Isometric, Bottom, Back, Left, or Right Isometric. 3. Select the view(s).
Panning views in 3D
Panning in 3D models, using the Pan View view control, gives you two options for determining the amount to pan the view. If Dynamic Display is off, a dynamic cube is displayed between the origin and the pointer (rather than an arrow as in 2D), indicating the distance and direction that the view will be moved. If Dynamic Display is turned on, then the elements in the view are panned dynamically. 3D-specific viewing procedures In addition to the familiar 2D viewing procedures, in 3D you can:

Limit the depth of the view volume using the Set Display Depth view control. Change the perspective angle of a view using the Change View Perspective view control or the Camera Settings view control.
Window volume
You can define a volume of a model to display in a view, using the key-in WINDOW VOLUME. After entering the key-in, you enter two data points that define diagonally opposite vertices of a rectangular volume, then select a view in which to display the information. In effect, this key-in works in a similar fashion to the Window Area tool, except that the z value (depth) of the defining points is taken into account. Typically, this key-in can be used to display a part of an existing model, where you can snap to existing elements to define the required volume.
For the display depth to be taken into account, the selected view must have its Clip Back and Clip Front view attributes enabled.
To define a window volume
1. Key in WINDOW VOLUME.
3/24/2010

2. Enter a data point to define one vertex of the required volume. 3. Enter a data point to define the diagonally opposite vertex of the required volume. 4. Select a view in which to display the volume. Using saved views in 3D
Page 10 of 131
Creating saved views in 3D is identical to 2D. Like 2D saved views, those for 3D remember various parameters concerning the view, which levels are on and off in both the active model and any references, and the region of the model that is displayed. Additionally, the Display Depth is saved with a 3D saved view, as is the Clip Volume if one is applied. The following categories of settings can be saved with a saved view:

window aspect ratio, size, or size and position camera position view attributes clip volume level display reference settings
When creating saved views in 3D, thought should be given to the Display Depth and Clip Volume (if applied).
View Control tool box

The View Control tool box contains tools for manipulating views in the active DGN file. Tools that are 3D specific are disabled when working in a 2D model.
To
In the View Control tool box, select
Update (redraw) a view(s). Update View
Increase the magnification of a view. Zoom In
Decrease the magnification of a view. Zoom Out
Window an area in a view. Window Area
3/24/2010
Page 11 of 131
Display all displayable elements in the active design and attached references in a view. Fit View
Rotate the view. Rotate View
View a different part of the design without changing the view magnification. Pan View
(3D only) Interactively walk through a 3D model. Walk
(3D only) Interactively fly through a 3D model. Fly
(3D only) Interactively navigate a 3D view. Navigate View see footnote 123
Undo the last viewing operation. View Previous
Redo the last undone viewing operation. View Next
Copy contents of one view to another. Copy View
(3D only) Change the perspective angle of a 3D view. Change View Perspective
(3D only) Set a view's Display Depth. Set Display Depth see footnote 124
(3D only) Set a view's Active Depth. Set Active Depth
3/24/2010
Page 12 of 131
(3D only) Show the Display Depth setting for a view(s). Show Display Depth
(3D only) Show the Active Depth setting for a view(s). Show Active Depth
(3D only) Set up the view camera. Setup Camera see footnote 125
Render a view(s), the fence contents, or an element(s). Render see footnote 126
Set the view display mode. View Display Mode
Apply a clip volume to a view. Clip Volume see footnote 127
Apply a clip mask to a view Clip Mask see footnote 128
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX VIEWCONTROL <OFF | ON>
Where you have particular view controls that you use regularly, you can customize the view control bar used with 3D DGN files to include additional 3D-specific view controls, such as Render.
View Rotation tool box

(3D only) The View Rotation tool box contains tools for rotating 3D views dynamically, or to one of the Standard view orientations Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, Isometric, or Right Isometric. Clicking on a standard view icon rotates the active view to the selected standard orientation.
To
Select in the View Rotation tool box
3/24/2010
Page 13 of 131
Rotate a view Rotate View
Change active view to a top view Top View
Change active view to a front view Front View
Change active view to a right view Right View
Change active view to an isometric view Isometric View
Change active view to a bottom view Bottom View
Change active view to a back view Back View
Change active view to a left view Left View
Change active view to a right-isometric view Right-Isometric View
View Perspective tool box

(3D only) The View Perspective tool box contains tools for setting the perspective in a view. You can set perspective interactively, select a camera lens setting, or select Two Point Projection. A final option lets you turn off the camera in a view.
To
Select in the View Perspective tool box
Interactively set perspective in a view. Change View Perspective
3/24/2010
Page 14 of 131
Set perspective in a view to match an extra wide angle camera lens. Extra Wide Camera Lens
Set perspective in a view to match a normal camera lens. Normal Camera Lens
Set perspective in a view to match a telephoto camera lens. Telephoto Camera Lens
(Hidden by default) Set perspective in a view to two point projection. Two Point Projection
Turn off a view camera. Camera Off
3D Elements
Many of the elements used in 3D design, including shapes, circles, polygons, and arcs, are 2D. That is, they are planar and are therefore restricted to being constructed in one plane, even in a 3D model. 3D elements do not have this restriction, and can be drawn freely in the design cube. Open 3D elements Open elements do not enclose an area or volume.
Non-planar line strings and curves
To place a line string or point curve that is not constrained to one plane, use these tools in the Linear task:
To place a non-planar Line string Point curve Place SmartLine Place Point or Stream Curve with the tool setting Non-planar turned on Use this tool in the Linear task
The Extract Iso-parametric Lines tool in the Create Curves task and the Extract Face or Edge Geometry tool in the 3D Utility task are used to extract a curve from a B-spline surface, or SmartSolid.
Helixes
A helix is placed with the Place Helix tool.
3/24/2010
Page 15 of 131
3D Primitives Primitive see footnote 129 surfaces/solids (often referred to by 3D designers as primary or simple surfaces/solids) include the 3D objects that are relatively simple to describe. They are placed in the model with the tools in the 3D Primitives task.
Slab
A slab (also referred to as a 3D block) is placed with the Place Slab tool.
Slab
A slab is defined in the model as an extruded surface in which the profile element is a block (rectangle). For information about generating more complex extruded surfaces, see Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution.
Sphere
A sphere's geometry is defined by its center and its radius. It is placed in the model with the Place Sphere tool.
Sphere
Rendered sphere
3/24/2010
Page 16 of 131
A sphere is defined in the model as a surface of revolution in which the profile element is an arc. For information about generating more complex surfaces of revolution, see Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution.
Cone and cylinder
The ends of a cone are two circles lying in parallel planes. It is placed in the model with the Place Cone tool.
Cone
A cylinder is a cone in which both ends have the same diameter. It is placed in the model with the Place Cylinder tool .
Torus
A torus (also referred to as a donut) is defined by its radii and Projection Angle. It is placed in the model with the Place Torus tool.
Torus
A torus is defined in the model as a surface of revolution in which the profile element is a circle.
Wedge
A wedge is placed in the model with the Place Wedge tool.
3/24/2010
Page 17 of 131
Wedge
A wedge is defined in the model as a surface of revolution in which the profile element is a rectangle.
Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution Many objects can be drawn by first drawing a planar profile element (or cross-section) and then extruding or revolving the profile.
An extruded surface or solid is formed by extruding a planar element line string, curve, shape, ellipse, B-spline curve, complex chain, or complex shape. It is placed in the model with the Extrude tool in the 3D Construct task. A surface or solid of revolution is formed by revolving a planar element about an axis. It is placed in the model with the Construct Revolution tool in the 3D Construct task.
Extruded surface
Surface of revolution
Complex chains and shapes can be extruded or rotated to create elaborate surfaces. Free-form (NURBS) surfaces A non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) surface is the most mathematically flexible way to represent a surface in a model. A B-spline surface is easy to modify because each pole of its control net affects the shape of the surface only over a limited part. The control net is analogous to a B-spline curve's control polygon.
3/24/2010
Page 18 of 131
B-spline surface: wireframe view.
B-spline surface: smooth shaded view.
Teapot created using B-spline surfaces.
Before working with 3D NURBS surfaces, it is a good idea to become familiar with 2D B-spline concepts and placement. For more information, see Using Curves.
3D fillets Tools in the 3D Modify task and the Fillet Surfaces task let you round edges of solids/surfaces and blend existing surfaces, using a variety of fillets.
3/24/2010

SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces
Page 19 of 131
Using MicroStation's SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces tools you can quickly construct complex 3D objects of your designs. For example, starting with basic solids or surfaces, you then can:

Add finishing touches, such as fillets and chamfers. Use a planar closed shape, or open element, as a profile to create a cut out in either a surface or a solid. Use the Shell Solid tool to quickly create a hollow solid with defined wall thickness.
Converting existing elements to SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces By default, many of the tools in the 3D Construct and 3D Modify taskes create SmartSolids or SmartSurfaces from existing elements in your models. Additionally, you can convert existing solid and surface elements in your model to SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces, respectively, using the Convert To SmartSolids/Surface tool, in the 3D Utility task, or by using the the key-in CONVERT BREP.
To convert an element to a SmartSolid or SmartSurface
1. Select the Convert To SmartSolid/Surface tool or In the key-in window, key in CONVERT BREP. 2. Identify the element to be converted. 3. Accept to complete the conversion.
Settings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces

Several settings control the way in which SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces are treated. First, you should check that the Solids Accuracy is set appropriately for the solids that you are working with. This is controlled by the Solids setting in the Advanced Unit Settings dialog box. Other settings, as described in the following, control both the display and the method for selecting SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces, as well how they are treated when exported as visible edges. B-spline and 3D dialog box The B-spline and 3D dialog box (Element > B-spline and 3D) controls the default display of SmartSolid/SmartSurface elements, as well as B-spline curves and surfaces.
3/24/2010
Page 20 of 131
Display
By default, SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces are displayed in Wireframe display mode. This is the more efficient mode for working with SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces in a design session. Surfaces display mode should be used only where the model is to be rendered with an earlier version of MicroStation (pre-MicroStation/J).
Surface/Solid Iso Lines
In Wireframe (and Surfaces) display mode, curved surfaces are represented both by their edge lines and a defined number of iso lines. The iso lines provide a visual indication of a surface's curvature. With the default setting of 4, for example, a full cylindrical solid is displayed with 4 surface rule lines, while the same solid cut in half displays with 2 surface rule lines. Planar surfaces, which do not have curvature, are represented by their edge boundaries only.
To change the default display of SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces
1. Choose Element > B-spline and 3D. The B-spline and 3D dialog box opens. 2. Make the desired changes to the settings.
In non-rendered views, curved surfaces are represented by iso lines. Top: Surface/Solid Iso Lines set to 4 (the default). Bottom: Surface/Solid Iso Lines set to 10.
Conceptual Modeling tools Most useful for conceptual design, two tools in the 3D Modify task, Draw on Solid and Modify Solid Entity, let you use push-pull modeling techniqes to create and modify solids With these tools you can quickly evaluate alternatives
3/24/2010
Page 21 of 131
You can use the Modify Solid Entity tool to manipulate edges, faces, and vertices of existing solids (other than feature solids). Where required, you can use the Draw on Solid tool to create a new edge on a face of a solid. You have choices of lines, blocks, or circles, which may be drawn on a face, plus you can imprint an element. Edges, vertices, and faces, created in this manner, also may be pushed or pulled, with the Modify Solid Entity tool.
Drawing lines (like a line string) on the solid to divide the face (left) and modifying the new face (right).
Locate Interiors This setting, in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box, affects the way that solids and closed elements are selected. Generally, you select elements by snapping to their edges. When Locate Interiors is set to Always, however, a data point anywhere on a solid or surface will select that face element. This is particularly useful in a rendered view, where you can identify a solid or surface with a data point anywhere on the displayed surface. Options for Locate Interiors are: Never, Rendered or Filled, Rendered, Filled, or Always (default).
To change the method of selecting surfaces
1. Choose Workspace > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list, select Input. The Set input preferences options display. 3. From the Locate Interiors option menu, choose the required setting. 4. Click OK.
With Locate By Face: Off solids and surfaces can be identified only with a data point on an edge or rule line (for example, 1). On solids and surfaces may be identified with a data point anywhere on any face (for example, 2).
Use Optimized Fence Clipping In the Operation section of the Preferences dialog box, the Optimized Fence Clipping setting affects the way that SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces are clipped. When this option is on (the default), fence operations that involve clipping (Clip and Void Clip) do not drop the solids or surfaces back to their basic components. In effect, the fence operation works like a boolean subtraction, where part of the solid or surface is removed.
3/24/2010
Page 22 of 131
As with other fence operations in 3D, the extent of a fence volume is defined by the fence, and the display depth of the view. When a circular fence is used, for example, it is similar to using a cylinder as the clipping template. Optimized fence clipping is supported in all views, including camera views.
Using optimized fence clipping. Top: A block with a fence in place ready to delete. Bottom: The result of deleting the fence contents with Optimized Fence Clipping turned off (left) and on (right).
Exporting visible edges When exporting visible edges from a model that consists primarily of SmartSolids, the Parasolids option in the Method menu may prove faster. While processing all element types, it is optimized for SmartSolids.
Calculate Intersections is not supported with the ParaSolids option. Also, for files containing a large number of elements, another option may prove more suitable. You should experiment to determine which option is best for your application.
To choose Parasolids when exporting visible edges
1. Choose File > Export > Visible Edges. The Export Visible Edges dialog box opens. 2. In the General tab, from the Method option menu, choose Parasolids.
Drawing in 3D
By default, data points in a 3D model are placed at the view's Active Depth. Where you snap a tentative point or place a data point in a blank part of a view, it will be located at the active depth. You can, however, snap a tentative point to an existing element at any depth in a view. When you accept such tentative points, the data point is placed at the level of the snap point. AccuDraw and its drawing plane, 3D data points and 3D tentative points, and 3D auxiliary coordinate systems, let you place elements away from the Active Depth. Often this improves productivity, since you need not constantly change the Active Depth. Placing Elements in 3D Using AccuDraw in 3D Precision Input Key-ins in 3D 3D Data Points and 3D Tentative Points 3D Auxiliary Coordinate Systems Manipulating and Modifying Elements in 3D 3D Main tool box Basic 3D task Place Slab Place Sphere Place Cylinder
3/24/2010

Place Torus Place Wedge Extrude Construct Revolution Convert 3D Edit 3D Primitive
Page 23 of 131
Placing Elements in 3D
Placing elements in a 2D model is like manual drafting all elements appear on the same plane, the sheet of paper. In 3D, you place elements in space horizontally (for example, a floor), vertically (for example, a wall), or at any other angle or direction (for example, a sloping roof). Many elements rely on the orientation of the view, AccuDraw's drawing plane, or the current auxiliary coordinate system if the ACS Plane Lock is on, for exact placement. To place elements such as blocks (rectangles), circles (by center), polygons, cells, and text, you have these choices:

Rotate a view so that the plane of the view (your screen) is parallel to the required orientation. Use AccuDraw or work with 3D auxiliary coordinate systems.
Specifying whether an element encloses volume When you use tools in the 3D Primitives task, the Type tool setting specifies whether the 3D element is either of the following:

Solid capped on its ends; encloses a volume. Surface not capped on its ends; does not enclose volume.
For example, to draw a tube you can use the Place Cylinder tool with Type set to Surface, while to draw an iron bar you could use the Place Cylinder tool with Type set to Solid.
Top: Solids with hidden lines removed. Bottom: Surfaces with hidden lines removed.
Where you have a 3D object that is a surface, you can convert it to a solid, and vice-versa.
To change an element from a surface to a solid
1. In the Modify Surfaces task, select the Convert 3D tool. 2. From the Convert To option menu, choose Solid. 3 Id tif th l tt dif
3/24/2010

4. Accept the modification.
Page 24 of 131
Using AccuDraw in 3D
In 3D, usually it is easier to visualize your model in a pictorial view, such as Isometric. AccuDraw gives you the option of working in a pictorial view, while placing elements as if you were working in the standard, orthogonal views. This is possible because AccuDraw automatically constrains data points to its drawing plane regardless of the active view's orientation.
Compass tilted over to align with the top view plane in a 3D pictorial view
The AccuDraw window in 3D In 3D, the AccuDraw window has an additional field for the z-axis, for both Rectangular and Polar modes.
The AccuDraw window for Rectangular (left) and Polar (right) modes.
Orienting the drawing plane in 3D Learning to orient AccuDraw's drawing plane is essential to mastering 3D drawing. For example, it is easy with AccuDraw, using an Isometric view, to place a non-planar complex chain or complex shape in any direction without reverting to an orthogonal view. That is, simply by rotating the drawing plane axes to Front, Top, or Side, you can work in an Isometric view while drawing in the plane of any of the orthogonal views. This is most apparent during the creation of a true 3D drawing normally portrayed as an isometric drawing for example, a plumbing riser diagram. By starting a pipe run along one view axis and shifting it using the <F>, <S>, and <T> (Front, Side, and Top) keyboard shortcuts, you can twist and turn the pipe through 3D space.
3/24/2010
Page 25 of 131
A simple plumbing riser diagram under construction showing the compass at each corner and annotation pointing out the drawing plane orientation at each vertex
This ability to adhere to the standard view axes while manipulating your drawing in a pictorial view is so important that AccuDraw maintains the current orientation from tool to tool. You can still return to the view orientation by using the <V> (View) keyboard shortcut. Additionally, other keyboard shortcuts ley you rotate the AccuDraw compass to match the orientation of an element (<R> <E>), to match the currently loaded Auxiliary Coordinate System (<R> <C>), or to rotate a view to match the AccuDraw compass orientation (<R> <V>). The following table summarizes the AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts available for fine tuning the drawing plane orientation so the axes align in the directions you want them:
Key <V> <F> <S> <T> Rotates the drawing plane to align with the view axes. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in a standard Front view. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in a standard Right view. Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in a standard Top view. Effect
<R>,<Q> Used to quickly and temporarily rotate the drawing plane with a single point. Used to permanently rotate the drawing plane by three points. Because it rotates the active ACS, this rotation will still be active after the tool in use is exited. If on, the tool setting Use Current Origin causes the drawing plane origin to be used as the x-axis origin, thereby eliminating <R>,<A> the need to enter an extra data point. Of course, in many cases it is desirable to be able to define the x-axis origin at a different location than the drawing plane origin. <R>,<C> Rotates the drawing plane to the current ACS. <R>,<E> Rotates the drawing plane to match the orientation of a selected element. <R>,<V> Rotates the active view to match the drawing plane. <R>,<X> Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its x-axis. <R>,<Y> Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its y-axis. <R>,<Z> Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its z-axis. <E> Successively pressing E rotates the drawing plane first 90 about its x-axis, then 90 about its y-axis, and then back to its original rotation. This is useful for working with any drawing plane orientation, particularly where the model is rotated relative to the drawing file axes.
Arbitrary rotations
By default, AccuDraw orients the drawing plane to the view axes. This is in keeping with the way it works in 2D. You can return AccuDraw to this orientation at any time using the <V> keyboard shortcut. You can set up an arbitrary orientation that can be saved and subsequently retrieved as an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS).
To rotate the drawing plane axes to align with the current view
3/24/2010

1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the <V> key.
To interactively rotate the drawing plane axes
Page 26 of 131
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <R>,<A>. 2. Enter a data point to locate the x-axis origin. 3. Enter a data point to define the direction of the x-axis. As a result, the plane of the y-axis relative to the x-axis is implied (perpendicular to the x-axis). All that remains, is to define the direction of the y-axis in that plane. 4. Enter a data point to define the direction of the y-axis about the x-axis.
Graphically rotating the drawing plane axes. Left: Defining the x-axis direction. Right: Defining the y-axis direction (only necessary in 3D).
For information about saving and retrieving an ACS defined using AccuDraw, see Using AccuDraw with auxiliary coordinate systems.
The Front, Side and Top rotations
Three keyboard shortcuts, <F>, <S>, and <T>, are used to orient AccuDraw's drawing plane to the standard Top, Front, and Side views, no matter in what view you are working. Activating one of these shortcuts dynamically rotates AccuDraw's compass to indicate the orientation of the drawing plane.
To rotate the drawing plane axes to align with the standard Top, Front, or Side (Right) view
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <T>, <F>, or <S> to rotate the drawing plane to align with the Top, Front, or Side (Right) view, respectively.
Rotating 90 about a specified axis
When the drawing plane is rotated to orientations other than the standard Top, Front, and side, often it is useful to be able to access planes at 90 to the current orientation. AccuDraw has keyboard shortcuts that rotate the drawing plane 90 about its individual axes. These shortcuts <R>,<X> or <R>,<Y> or <R>,<Z> can be used to spin the drawing plane through 90 about the selected axis, any number of times, until its orientation is exactly as you desire.
To rotate the drawing plane axes 90 about an individual axis
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, use one of the following keyboard shortcuts.
To rotate 90 about x-axis y-axis z-axis Press <R>,<X> <R>,<Y> <R>,<Z>
The new orientation is maintained only until a data point or Reset is entered. However, you can save this coordinate system for subsequent recall.
3/24/2010
Page 27 of 131
Precision Input Key-ins in 3D

Precision input key-ins in 3D work much as in 2D, except that the depth coordinate must also be entered. see footnote 130 For more information about precision input key-ins, see Precision Input Key-ins and Precision input key-ins with an ACS.
3D Data Points and 3D Tentative Points

While not as easy to use as AccuDraw, 3D data points and 3D tentative points also can be used to position points at any depth within the view volume. They are not restricted to the Active Depth but, for simplicity, require at least two views to be open, with different z-axis orientations. To place points with this method you first define the view x,y values and then, in a second view, define the depth (z value) for the point.
To define a 3D point with 3D data points or 3D tentative points
1. In a view, position the pointer at the desired x- and y- coordinates. 2. To enter a 3D data point, press the 3D Data button. or To enter a 3D tentative point, press the 3D Tentative button. A boreline, in the view's z-direction, displays in each view that is not the same z-axis orientation as the view selected in step 1. (If no borelines display, adjust the views so that at least one other view that shows the same part of the model has a different orientation.) 3. In one of the other views, position the pointer on the boreline at the desired depth and again press the 3D Data button or 3D Tentative button. This completes the positioning of the point in the x, y, and z direction.
3D Auxiliary Coordinate Systems

An auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is a coordinate system with an orientation, and/or an origin, different from those of the DGN file coordinates (the Global system). Although not exclusively a 3D concept, an ACS is most useful in 3D modeling as a drawing aid. By using an ACS that corresponds to the location and orientation of a particular element, you can enter data points relative to parts of the model rather than the global origin. Although using ACSs may seem complicated, AccuDraw uses them as a basic part of its 3D functionality, permanently storing arbitrary rotations. It is not necessary to learn much about ACSs to use them effectively with AccuDraw.
ACS is called UCS (user coordinate system) by some other CAD systems.
ACS Type You can choose from these ACS types: Rectangular, Cylindrical, and Spherical.
Rectangular
Like the design cube coordinate system, with coordinates expressed in the form (X,Y,Z). You can use AccuDraw to define, save, and retrieve rectangular ACSs.
3/24/2010
Page 28 of 131
Rectangular ACS
Cylindrical
Points are specified as two magnitudes (R and Z) and an angle (q), with coordinates expressed in the form (R, q, Z). The process of locating a point in a cylindrical ACS can be thought of as follows: 1. Moving from the origin along the x-axis a distance of R. 2. Rotating about the z-axis an angle of q. 3. Finally, moving parallel to the z-axis a distance of Z.
Cylindrical ACS
In 2D, there is no depth (z-axis), and cylindrical coordinates are commonly known as polar coordinates.
These are used to position a data point with a Cylindrical ACS:
AX=R,q,Z for an exact location, where: R is the distance from the origin, along the x-axis. q is the angle counterclockwise from the x-axis about the z-axis. Z is the distance in the z-direction.
AD=[Delta ]R,[Delta ]q,[Delta ]Z for locations relative to a tentative point, where: [Delta ]R is the difference in distance from the origin, along the x-axis. [Delta ]q is the difference in the angle counterclockwise from the x-axis.
3/24/2010

[Delta ]Z is the difference in the distance in the z-direction.
Spherical
Page 29 of 131
(3D only) Points are specified by a magnitude (R) and two angles (q and f), with coordinates expressed in the form (R, q, f). The process of locating a point in a spherical ACS can be thought of as follows: 1. Move from the origin along the x-axis a distance of R to establish a radius vector. 2. Rotate this vector about the z-axis an angle of q. 3. The angle f is the angle between the radius vector and the positive z-axis.
Spherical ACS
These key-ins are used to position a data point with a Spherical ACS:
AX=R,q,f for an exact location, where: R is the radius vector distance from the origin. q is the angle counterclockwise from the x-axis about the z-axis. f is the angle between the radius vector and the z-axis.
AD=[Delta ]R,[Delta ]q,[Delta ]f for locations relative to a tentative point, where: [Delta ]R is the difference in the radius vector distance from the origin. [Delta ]q is the difference in the angle, counterclockwise, from the x-axis. [Delta ]f is the difference in the angle between the radius vector and the z-axis.
Using AccuDraw with auxiliary coordinate systems Unless you are using one of the four (Top, right Side, Front, View) standard orientations, AccuDraw forgets the drawing plane orientation at the end of the current design session. To overcome this, there is a mechanism to save and retrieve arbitrary drawing plane orientations as rectangular auxiliary coordinate systems. The <R>,<A> keyboard shortcut is used to define an arbitrary drawing plane orientation that can subsequently be saved as a rectangular ACS.
To save a drawing plane coordinate system
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <W>,<A>. The Write To ACS dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 30 of 131
Write to ACS dialog box
2. In the Name field, key in a name for the coordinate system. or To save the coordinate system as the active (unnamed) ACS, leave the Name field blank. 3. Click the OK button.
To recall a saved drawing plane coordinate system
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press <G>,<A>. The Get ACS dialog box opens. Where more than one ACS has been saved, the Name field is an option menu from which you can select the required ACS.
Get ACS dialog box
2. From the Name option menu, choose the auxiliary coordinate system to recall. 3. (Optional) To rotate the drawing plane to the saved orientation without moving the drawing plane origin, turn off Origin. or (Optional) To move the drawing plane origin to the saved location without rotating the drawing plane, turn off Rotation. 4. Click the OK button. The compass updates to show the effect of recalling the saved coordinate system. Other ways of working with auxiliary coordinate systems In addition to the AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts for working with an ACS, MicroStation also has an ACS tool box and an Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box. These are the only mechanisms for working with a cylindrical or spherical ACS.
Defining an ACS
You can define an ACS (without using AccuDraw) in any of the following ways:
To define an ACS Use this tool in the ACS tool box
That is aligned with a planar element. Define ACS (Aligned with Element)
By entering data points. Define ACS (By Points)
3/24/2010
Page 31 of 131
That is aligned with a view. Define ACS (Aligned with View)
That is aligned with a reference. Define ACS (Aligned with Reference) Making an ACS active
MicroStation lets you define and save multiple ACSs. At any time, you can make one ACS active using either AccuDraw, the controls in the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box, or the Select ACS tool. This lets you work simultaneously with three coordinate systems the active ACS as well as the DGN file and view coordinate systems.
To identify an ACS to make it the active ACS
1. In the ACS tool box, select the Select ACS tool. Triads appear, indicating the available saved ACSs, in each view that contains the ACS's origins. 2. Identify the required ACS at its origin.
ACS Plane Lock
If on, ACS Plane Lock sets the default view depth to be on the active ACS's xy plane rather than the view's active depth plane. As with the standard active depth, you can override this default by snapping to an existing element.
Gridplane lock
You can toggle the settings for ACS Plane Lock, ACS Plane Snap, and Grid Display, with the key-in ACCUDRAW LOCK GRIDPLANE. This key-in is mapped to the AccuDraw shortcut <L>,<P> and also to the F8 function key.
Precision input key-ins with an ACS
While an ACS is active, precision input can be specified as one of the following:
For precision input as ACS Type Key in
Rectangular AX=x value, y value, z value ACS coordinate Spherical Cylindrical AX=R value, q angle, f angle AX=R value, q angle, Z value
Rectangular AD=x value, y value, z value (x, y, and z, axes) Distances, along the ACS axes, from the most recently entered tentative point or data point Spherical Cylindrical Manipulating an ACS AD=R value, q angle, f angle AD=R value, q angle, Z value
You can manipulate an ACS as follows:

To Use this tool in the ACS tool box
Rotate the active ACS. Rotate Active ACS
3/24/2010
Page 32 of 131
Move the origin of the active ACS. Move ACS
Manipulating and Modifying Elements in 3D

For the most part, manipulating and modifying elements in 3D is similar to 2D. 3D-specific aspects are discussed here. Element manipulations (for example, scaling or rotation) are performed relative to AccuDraw's drawing plane. If AccuDraw is not active, the manipulation is performed relative to the view axes. Graphic groups work as they do in 2D. Selecting elements in 3D Most basic 3D element manipulations, including moving, scaling, rotating, deleting, and copying, can be done with the Element Selection tool, and are similar to 2D. For example, you can select one or more elements and manipulate them as a single entity. Identifying existing elements You can identify elements at any depth in a view. This is important to remember, particularly if AccuDraw is not active. In these cases, when you are using tools such as Move Element or Copy Element, elements are moved to the Active Depth when you snap to the element with a tentative point (either manually, or automatically via AccuSnap), and then accept with a data point. When AccuDraw is active, it always controls the depth of the element in the view, keeping it at the same depth by default.
If you have difficulty selecting an element, check Grid Lock and Level Lock.
Using a fence in 3D When you place a fence in a 3D file, it is planar and parallel to the view in which it is placed. A fence encloses the volume bounded by the area of the fence and the view's Display Depth that is, the volume enclosed by moving the fence from the front to the rear of the view volume along the view z-axis. Even if an element is completely within a fence's boundaries, if it also intersects the view's front or back clipping plane, it is considered to cross the fence and is clipped if Fence Mode is set to Clip. This is important to remember, in particular, when creating 3D cells. How elements such as shapes and solids are clipped by a fence is affected by the preference Use Optimized Fence Clipping.
Text cannot be clipped.
For basic information about fences, see Using a Fence to Manipulate and Modify Elements.
3D Main tool box

Tools for creating and modifying solids and surfaces are accessed from this tool box.
3/24/2010
Page 33 of 131
These tools can also be accessed from the

Basic 3D task Solids Modeling task Surface Modeling task

To Use tools in the
Place a simple 3D element slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, torus, or wedge.
3D Primitives task Extrude a solid or surface, or construct a surface of revolution, or Extrude a solid or surface along a path, or Construct a thin shell solid, 3D Construct task or Thicken a surface into a solid. Modify a solid, remove a face, taper a solid or Construct a new solid from the union, intersection, or difference of existing solids, or 3D Modify task Cut, fillet, or chamfer an existing solid, or edit a 3D primitive. Align elements relative to a face on each element, or Change the display of a SmartSolid/SmartSurface, or Extract a face or edge from a solid, or intersect a solid/surface with a linear element. 3D Utility task or Create a set of planar shapes from a 3D element.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX SOLID
3/24/2010

Basic 3D task
Contains commonly used 3D tools.
Page 34 of 131
The first tool in the Basic 3D task, Place SmartLine initially, is also a member of the Drawing task. When that tool is pointed to and the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tool in the Drawing task can be selected. The Drawing task can be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in the Drawing task, the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Basic 3D task. The following table shows the remainder of the tools in the 3D Basic task:
To Select in the 3D Basic task
Place a slab. Place Slab
Place a sphere. Place Sphere
Place a cylinder. Place Cylinder
Place a cone. Place Cone
Place a torus. Place Torus
Place a wedge-shaped object.
3/24/2010

Place Wedge
Page 35 of 131
Create a surface or solid by extruding an element linearly. Extrude
Create a surface or solid by revolving an element. Construct Revolution
Switch between surface types, or add caps to extrusions and surfaces of revolution. Convert 3D
Modify the dimensions of existing 3D primitive elements. Edit 3D Primitive
Surface Modeling
MicroStation's Surface Modeling task contains tools that let you create all manner of surfaces, from the very simple through to complex Bspline surfaces and, if required, meshes. For example, you can start with a simple surface and then modify and manipulate it into the shape you want. Other tools let you create a skeleton from profiles, or sections, and then drape a surface over it, or you can extrude/revolve a surface from a profile. You can use the surface modeling tools alone, or in conjunction with the solids modeling tools. MicroStation's Meshes Task contains tools specifically for working with mesh elements, which are surfaces composed of facets that represent a smooth surface. Digitial terrain models, for example, are commonly created as mesh elements. MicroStation's mesh modeling tools let you convert solids and surfaces to mesh elements, create meshes from contours or points, and to modify the mesh elements. Surface Modeling task 3D Primitives task 3D Construct task Extrude Along Path Shell Solid Thicken to Solid Loft Block to Circle Create Surfaces task Construct Surface by Section Construct Surface by Network Construct Surface by Edges Place Free-form Surface Construct Skin Solid/Surface Sweep Along Two Traces Construct Helical Surface Offset Surface Create Planar Surface Modify Surfaces task Construct Trim Project Trim Construct Stitch Change Normal Direction Untrim Surface Change to Active Surface Settings Split Surface Extend Surface Rebuild Faces/Surfaces Fillet Surfaces task
3/24/2010

Blend Surfaces Blend Surface Between Rail Curves 3D Queries task Evaluate Surface Analyze Curvature Meshes task Construct Mesh Mesh Boolean Modify Mesh
Page 36 of 131
Surface Modeling task

The Surface Modeling task contains tools useful for surface modeling tasks.
Each of the tools in the Surface Modeling task is also a member of a child task. When a tool is pointed to and the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tools in the child task can be selected.. The child task can be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in a child task, the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Surface Modeling task. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Surface Modeling task and identifies the corresponding child tasks and for each, the default representative tool:
Drawing task (Place SmartLine)
3D Primitives task (Place Slab)
3/24/2010
Page 37 of 131
3D Construct task (Extrude)
Create Surfaces task (Construct Surface by Section)
Modify Surfaces task (Construct Trim)
Fillet Surfaces task (Fillet Surfaces)
3D Queries task (Evaluate Faces/Surfaces)
B-splines task (Place B-spline Curve)
Meshes task (Construct Mesh)
3D Primitives task
The tools in the 3D Primitives task are used to place simple 3D elements slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, torus, or wedge.
3D P i iti
k(
lb
3/24/2010
Page 38 of 131
To
Select in the 3D Primitives task
Place a slab. Place Slab
Place a sphere. Place Sphere
Place a cylinder. Place Cylinder
Place a cone. Place Cone
Place a torus. Place Torus
Place a wedge-shaped object. Place Wedge
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DDRAWING [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
3D Construct task
Tools in the 3D Construct task are used to extrude a surface or solid linearly or along a path, construct a surface or solid of revolution, create a shell solid, or thicken a surface to create a solid.
3D Construct task (opened as tool box) To Select in the 3D Construct task
Create a surface or solid by extruding an element linearly. Extrude
Create a surface or solid by revolving an element. Construct Revolution
3/24/2010
Page 39 of 131
Create a surface or solid by extruding an element along a path. Extrude Along Path
Hollow out a solid to create a solid with walls of constant thickness. Shell Solid
Add thickness to a surface to create a solid. Thicken to Solid
Create a surface or solid transition from a rectangular to a circular section. Loft Block to Circle
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DCONSTRUCT [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Create Surfaces task

The tools in the Create Surfaces task are used to place or construct a free-form, helical, or offset surface, and to construct a surface by cross-sections, edges, skin, or by sweeping along two traces.
Create Surfaces task (opened as tool box) To Select in Create Surfaces task
Construct a B-spline surface that is transformed between section elements. Construct Surface by Section
Construct a B-spline surface that is transformed between elements of a network. Construct Surface by Network
Construct a B-spline surface that contains selected elements as edges. Construct Surface by Edges
Place or construct a free-form B-spline surface. Place Free-form Surface
Construct a B-spline surface by transforming one element (section) to a second element (section) as it is projected along a linear element (the trace). Construct Skin Solid/Surface
3/24/2010
Page 40 of 131
Create a B-spline surface by sweeping one or two section profile curves along two trace curves. Sweep Along Two Traces
Create a helical-shaped B-spline surface by sweeping a section profile curve along a pre-defined helix curve. Construct Helical Surface
Construct a B-spline surface that is offset from another surface. Offset Surface
Construct a planar B-spline surface with two data points. Create Planar Surface
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFREEFORM [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Modify Surfaces task

The tools in the Modify Surfaces task are used to create new surfaces from the union, intersection, or difference between surfaces; to trim, extend, stitch, split, punch, or extrude surfaces; or to change B-spline specific attributes.
Modify Surfaces task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Modify Surfaces task
Trim two elements to their common intersection. Construct Trim
Punch a hole in a surface, or to project a B-spline curve onto a surface. Project Trim
Switch between surface types, or add caps to extrusions and surfaces of revolution. Convert 3D
To stitch two surfaces together to form a single surface. Construct Stitch
Change the normal direction of a surface element.
3/24/2010

Change Normal Direction Reverse the sense of the boundaries of a B-spline surface. or Remove one or all boundaries (holes) from a B-spline surface. Untrim Surface
Page 41 of 131
Change a surface's B-spline-specific attributes to the active B-spline settings. Change to Active Surface Settings
Split, or break, an element into two separate surfaces. Split Surface
Construct a B-spline surface extension to an element. Extend Surface
Rebuild a B-spline surface. Rebuild Faces/Surfaces
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODSURF [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Fillet Surfaces task

The tools in the Fillet Surfaces task are used to create fillets between surfaces, and to join surfaces by blending.
Fillet Surfaces task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Fillet Surfaces task
Construct a fillet of constant radius between two surfaces. Fillet Surfaces
Construct a blend surface from two surfaces. Blend Surfaces
Construct a blend surface between two B-spline surfaces along their rail curves. Blend Surface Between Rail Curves
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFILLET [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
3/24/2010
Page 42 of 131
3D Queries task
Tools in the 3D Queries task are used to extract curves from B-spline surfaces.
3D Queries task (opened as tool box) To Select in the 3D Queries task
Graphically and numerically evaluate the attributes of a B-spline surface at given locations on the surface. Evaluate Surface
Visualize the curvature of a curve or Gaussian curvature of a surface. Analyze Curvature
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX EXTRACT [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Meshes task
The Meshes task contains tools to create, manipulate, and modify, faceted or mesh elements.
Meshes task (opened as tool box) To Construct a faceted element from a solid or surface. or Construct a mesh surface from a selection of contours. or Construct a mesh surface from a selection of points. Unite mesh elements. or Construct the intersection of mesh elements. or C t t th diff b t h l t Mesh Boolean Construct Mesh Select in the Meshes task
3/24/2010

or Project a profile onto a mesh element. Decimate a mesh (reduce the number of facets). or Stitch mesh elements into a single mesh. or Split a mesh element into parts. or Simplify a mesh (remove superfluous facets). or Unfold a mesh element. or Reverse the surface normals of a mesh element. or Extract a mesh element boundary. Modify Mesh
Page 43 of 131
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MESH
Solids Modeling
MicroStation's solids modeling tools let you quickly create 3D models of your designs. Typically, you can start with one or more simple underlying solids, then use construction and manipulation tools to finish the design. Included are tools that make use of push-pull technology to let you quickly create conceptual solids. You can use the solids modeling tools alone, or in conjunction with the surface modeling tools. Solids Modeling task 3D Modify task Draw on Solid Modify Solid Entity Delete Solid Entity Taper Solid Construct Union Construct Intersection Construct Difference Cut Solid Fillet Edges Chamfer Edges 3D Utility task Align Faces Change SmartSolid Display Extract Face or Edge Geometry Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve Convert To SmartSolid/Surface
3/24/2010

Solids Modeling task
The Solids Modeling task contains tools useful for solids modeling tasks.
Page 44 of 131
Each of the tools in the Solids Modeling task is also a member of a child task. When a tool is pointed to and the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tools in the child task can be selected.. The child task can be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in a child task, the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Solids Modeling task. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Solids Modeling task and identifies the corresponding child tasks and for each, the default representative tool:
3D Primitives task (Place Slab)
3D Construct task (Extrude)
3D Modify task (Draw on Solid)
3/24/2010
Page 45 of 131
3D Utility task (Align Faces)
Surface Modeling task (Create Surface by Section or Network)
Bsplines task (Place B-spline Curve)
3D Modify task
Tools in the 3D Modify task are used to:

modify, taper, or remove faces of a solid construct a single solid from the union, intersection, or difference of existing solids place cuts, fillets, or chamfers on existing solids edit existing 3D primitive elements
3D Modify task (opened as tool box) To Select in the 3D Modify task
Create a new edge on an existing solid. Draw on Solid
Relocate inwards or outwards one or more faces of a solid. Modify Solid
Delete an entity from a solid. Delete Solid Entity
3/24/2010
Page 46 of 131
Taper one or more faces of a solid. Taper Solid
Construct a single solid that is the union of two or more existing (overlapping) solids. Construct Union
Construct a single solid that is the intersection of two or more existing (overlapping) solids. Construct Intersection
Construct a single solid by subtracting the volume of one or more (overlapping) solids from another. Construct Difference
Create a cut, slot, or pocket in a solid. Cut Solid
Fillet one or more edges of a solid. Fillet Edges
Chamfer one or more edges of a solid. Chamfer Edges
Modify the dimensions of existing 3D primitive elements. Edit 3D Primitive
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODIFY [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
3D Utility task
Tools in the 3D Utility task are used to:

Relocate elements so their faces are aligned. Change the display of SmartSolids. Extract a face or edge from a solid or surface. Intersect a solid or surface with a linear element. Convert a solid/surface to a SmartSolid/Surface
3/24/2010
Page 47 of 131
3D Utility task (opened as tool box) To Select in the 3D Utility task
Move an element and align a selected face of it to the selected face of a second element. Align Faces
Change the display of SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces. Change SmartSolid Display
Extract a face, or edge, from a solid or surface. Extract Face or Edge Geometry
Find the intersection point between a solid/surface and a linear element. Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve
Convert a solid/surface to a SmartSolid/Surface. Convert To SmartSolid/Surface
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DQUERY [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Introduction to Feature-based Solids Modeling

MicroStation's Feature Modeling tools let you create parametric feature-based solids. That is, a parametric solid that is created from one or more features. Each part of a solids model created with these tools is a feature. Parameters used to create the features are stored in the design and may be edited with the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool. Alternatively, you can edit a feature interactively by selecting it with the Element Selection tool and then dragging one or more of its handles. Overview Display of Feature Solids Geometry and Features Solids Working Area Feature Manager Variable Driven Modeling Constraints Feature Cells Manipulating Solids and Features Interactively Creating Parametric Primitive Features Profile Feature Solids Boolean Features and Modify Face Features Creating and Manipulating Features on Parametric Solids
Overview
Solids created with the Feature Modeling tools are much more powerful than those created with other 3D tools in MicroStation
3/24/2010
Page 48 of 131
When Feature Modeling tools are used to add features to SmartSolids, the SmartSolids are converted to feature solids.
Feature Modeling tools must be used to edit feature solids.
Why use parametric feature-based solids MicroStation's feature-based solids tools give you a degree of flexibility, when working in 3D, that is not possible with the standard 3D tools. For example, they let you edit solids by changing the parameters used to create them, or simply by selecting them and then using handles to make changes interactively. You can use the Move Feature tool to relocate a feature, or you can use the Element Selection tool to select the feature and move it to a different location on any part of the solid that was placed prior to the feature being moved. Where you want to move a feature to a part of the solid that was created/added after the feature, you first need to change the order of features in the solid via the Feature Manager. Where you move a feature, such as a hole, to another location on a solid, the hole correctly orientates itself relative to previously created surfaces over which the pointer is passing, no matter what view you are working with there is no need to work in a specific view. On completion of the move the solid regenerates automatically to reflect the change.
Left: Identify the hole feature. Center and Right: As it is moved, the hole feature orientates itself to the surface nearest the viewer (shown in heavy line weight for emphasis).
When you create feature-based solids, you construct your model more like you would do in real-life. For example, you may start with one or more primitive features (slab, sphere, cone, cylinder, torus, wedge), extrusions, or revolutions. These may be united, subtracted, or intersected with the Boolean Feature tools, and then the finishing touches added, such as blends, holes, cuts, and protrusions. Editing tools let you modify the underlying solids, as well as the added features. Similarly, feature manipulation tools let you rearrange, copy, or delete, features of the solid. Fully editable features With the standard 3D tools you can edit the parameters for primitive solids, Slab, Sphere, Cylinder, Cone, Torus, or Wedge, but that is all. Once one of these primitives is modified in any way, such as by adding a chamfer or cut, then no longer are they editable. With the Feature Modeling tools, which create parametric feature-based solids, all items are considered to be features whose parameters you can edit. Take the example where you use the Feature Modeling tools to create a slab feature that has a chamfered edge, a rounded edge, plus a countersunk hole. Each feature of this solid is editable as shown in the following diagrams:
3/24/2010
Page 49 of 131
Each feature of a solid, created with the Feature Modeling tools, is editable.
For each of these features, the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool opens the appropriate Edit <feature> dialog box (as shown in the diagram). After making the desired changes to the settings and clicking OK, the solid is regenerated to reflect the changes.
Display of Feature Solids Geometry and Features

When you work with feature solids, you can control the way that the Geometry, Profiles, and highlighted features display in a view. Settings for these are located in the Feature Solids dialog box.
Solids Working Area

When working with feature-based solids (or SmartSolids), you should first check that the Solids Accuracy is set appropriately for the solids that you are working with. This is controlled by the Solids setting in the Working Areas (each axis) section of the Advanced Unit Settings dialog box.
3/24/2010

Feature Manager
Page 50 of 131
Feature Manager is a utility that lets you display a list of all features of a solid, in the order that they were added to it. Using Feature Manager, you can select a feature and:

Display its details. Display the solid up to the point that the selected feature was added (that is, turn off display of all features created after the selected feature). Rearrange the order of features on the solid. Identify hidden solids/features.
Rearranging the order of features on a solid All information on each feature of a solid is retained in the DGN, in the order that it was created. This is very important to remember, particularly when editing existing solids/features. For example, you cannot move a feature to a part of a solid that was created after it. In such a situation, however, you can use Feature Manager to rearrange the order that features were created, so that you can make the required move. Take the simple case, for example, where you have a slab with a through hole in it, to which you add a smaller slab with the Union Feature tool.
Left: Slab with hole feature. Right: After adding second slab with Union Feature tool.
Because the hole was created on the solid prior to the second slab being added, you would not be able to relocate the hole on to the region of this second slab. Using Feature Manager, however, you could move the hole in the feature tree so that it was higher than the second slab. In other words, as though it had been created after the second slab. After this rearrangement, you could then move the hole anywhere on the solid.
Using Feature Manager to reorganize the hole feature.
3/24/2010
Page 51 of 131
Left: Before rearranging the feature tree, the through hole only passes through the original slab, ignoring the more recent addition. Right: After rearranging the position of the hole in the feature tree, it now passes through the entire solid.
Identifying hidden solids/features Another situation for which Feature Manager is particularly useful, is when you have a solid on which you want to edit a feature that no longer has any edges visible. In other words, a feature for which you have no way to graphically select it for editing. In these situations, you can use Feature Manager to select the hidden feature. Take, for example, a model that consists simply of a slab feature, with all of its edges rounded.
Solid created from a slab, with all edges rounded.
Here, none of the original edges remains visible to let you identify the underlying slab. If you wanted to change the dimensions of the slab, it would not be possible to identify it graphically. You can select the slab, however, using Feature Manager. With Feature Manager active you simply identify the solid to list its features, then right-click on the entry for the slab and select Modify from the pop-up menu. This opens the Edit Slab dialog box, to let you modify the dimensions.
3/24/2010
Page 52 of 131
Select Modify in the Feature Manager menu (left) to open the Edit dialog box for the highlighted feature (right).
After modifying the dimensions, the solid is regenerated to reflect the changes.
After editing, the solid is regenerated.
Variable Driven Modeling

While each dimension for a feature can be edited individually, other options let you use variables to define dimensions, such that editing a single variable can propagate changes to all solids in the model that use that variable. By default, each feature is given local variables to define its various parameters. As well, you can create your own global variables, which you may assign to the parameters of a feature. Taking this further, you can use equations to link dimensions, or variables. For example, you may want the width of a slab to be 1 meter plus one fifth of its length, and the Height to be one third of the Width. By assigning the appropriate equations to the Width and Height dimensions, only the Length parameter would be available for manual editing, with the remaining two dimensions automatically updated as per the equations.
3/24/2010
Page 53 of 131
Creating an equation linking the Length and Width values of the slab.
In this case, if you edited the Length dimension of the slab, its Width and Height also would be changed to maintain the relationship defined by the equations.
With Width and Height defined by equations, only the Length value is available for manual editing.
Left: Original slab showing the length (L). Right: Result of increasing the value of L all 3 values are changed (length, width, and height) as per the equations (original slab shown dashed).
For more detailed information see Variable Driven Modeling and Constraints.
Constraints
Constraints is another function available with parametric feature-based design. Using the Constrain Feature tool, you can fix features relative to each other, so that they remain correctly located even if the underlying solid or feature is modified. For example, in a model such as shown in the illustration, you can assign constraints to ensure that the centers of holes always are located at twice their radius from the edges of a solid.
3/24/2010
Page 54 of 131
If the holes are unconstrained, they will remain in their current location even if the base slab feature of the model is modified. When the holes are constrained to be a particular distance from the edges, however, they will be relocated to honour the constraints.
Left: Solid with unconstrained holes. When the base slab feature is modified, the holes remain in their current location. Right: Solid with constrained holes. When the slab feature is modified, the holes are relocated also to maintain the constraints.
Feature Cells
Feature cells, are special cells that you create using global variables and equations, grouped in a parameter set, to define their dimensions, or parameters. A single feature cell can have many parameter sets, covering its various allowable sizes, which lets you choose the correct set of dimensions at placement time. Feature cells are placed with the Place Feature Cell tool and may be edited with the Edit Feature Cell tool. During editing, you can select another parameter set to apply, or you can choose another feature cell.
Manipulating Solids and Features Interactively

For freestyle modification of solids and features, you can manually push and pull them, or move and adjust features such as holes and cuts by using handles that appear when you select the solid or feature with the Element Selection tool. These same techniques for modifying solids, also can be used for SmartSurfaces and SmartSolids. In addition to interactive, graphical, modification of solids and features, you can perform a number of operations via a Reset (or right-click) menu. After you select the feature, tool tips indicate what the handles are for. If you hover the pointer over a handle, a tool tip indicates that the handle either is part of the feature, such as Hole Cbore./Csink. Diameter: 12.00, Diameter: 10.00and can be used to modify it, or a Move/Copy handle such as Move Slab by Point (Press <Alt> while dragging to toggle copy). For more detailed information on manipulating solids and features interactively, see Using Handles to modify solids and features interactively.
Creating Parametric Primitive Features

Tools for creating 3D parametric primitive features slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, torus, wedge are located in the Primitive Feature
3/24/2010
Page 55 of 131
Solids task. Unlike the standard 3D Primitives tools, there is no Type setting, for Solid/Surface, as all parametric primitive features are solids. Additionally, the parametric feature solids are fully editable with the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool.
Primitive Feature Solids, clockwise, from top left: Slab, Sphere, Cylinder, Wedge, Torus, Cone.
Profile Feature Solids

Many solids and features can be created from profiles, which can be standard elements or Dimension Driven Design (DDD) cells/profiles. Tools for creating these solids are located in the Profile Feature Solids task. Solids created with these tools can be edited with the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature. As well, you can use the Modify Profile tool to adjust the profile(s) used to create the solid. Tools in the Profile Feature Solids task let you:
Extrude a profile Extrude Feature tool.
Revolve a profile Revolve Feature tool.
3/24/2010
Page 56 of 131
Extrude a profile along a trace curve Tube Feature tool.
Construct a surface/solid skin over any number of sections Skin Solid Feature tool.
Construct a helical solid from any profile Helix Feature tool.
3/24/2010
Page 57 of 131
Add thickness to an existing surface Thicken Feature tool.
Boolean Features and Modify Face Features

Often, complex solids can be created by adding, subtracting, or merging, two or more existing solids. To perform these operations, you can use tools from the Boolean Features task.
Result of using the boolean tools on an intersecting slab and cylinder. Left to Right: Addition, Subtraction (of cylinder), and Intersection.
Surfaces also may be used with boolean operations.
3/24/2010
Page 58 of 131
Example showing a boolean subtraction, created by subtracting a b-spline surface from a slab.
Several tools, in the Modify Face Features task let you manipulate faces on a solid. With these tools, you can:
Add a taper to a face(s).
A taper can be added to the face shown in a heavy line weight (left), to a single face (center), or to tangentially continuous faces (right).
Extend a face(s).
A face shown in heavy line weight (left) can be extended individually (center) or offset with tangentially continuous faces (right).
Spin a face.
Left: Solid with face to be spun shown in heavy line weight. Center: After spinning face about lower edge. Right: After spinning face about lower edge, with a radius.
3/24/2010
Page 59 of 131
Remove a face(s).
Left: Selected faces (shown in heavy line weight) can be removed. Right: Solid with faces removed.
Replace surfaces on a solid to align with each other, in a single operation.
Left: Before replacing surfaces 2, 3, and 4 to align with surface 1. Right: After replacing surfaces.
Creating and Manipulating Features on Parametric Solids

You can add various parametric features to solids using tools in the Features task. Using these tools you can add:
Blends and Chamfers.
3/24/2010
Page 60 of 131
Top: Slab with constant blend (left) and varying blend (right). Bottom: Slab with symmetrical chamfer (left) and unequal chamfer (right).
Holes and Bosses
Slab with examples of countersunk, simple, and counterbore holes, plus a simple boss right and boss with draft and rounding (left).
Cuts and protrusions where profiles can create cuts or protrusions on solids.
Slab and profile (left) used to create a cut (center) and protrusion (right).
Swept edges where a profile can be swept around a solid, as a cut or a protrusion, using an edge as a reference trace path.
3/24/2010
Page 61 of 131
Solid, with elliptical profile to be swept, using edge of solid (shown in heavy line weight) as a reference trace path.
Swept profiles can create a cut (left) or a protrusion (right).
Ribs
Example rib (shown heavy line weight).
Thin shell solids
3/24/2010
Page 62 of 131
Before thin shelling (left) and after (right).
In a similar manner to how you manipulate individual elements, you can use tools in the Manipulate Feature task, to move, copy, rotate, mirror, or create an array of, existing features on a solid. A further tool lets you add one or more constraints to features. This may be, for example, to ensure that a hole or cut always has a minimum clearance distance from one or more edges of a solid.
Adding and Manipulating Solids and Features

MicroStation's feature-based modeling tools bring with them a variety of new and improved ways to perform various tasks as you create your models. Workflow Techniques for Adding and Manipulating Features Adding Features to Solids Manipulating Features
Workflow Techniques for Adding and Manipulating Features

When you are working with the Feature Modeling tools, several additional features and tools are provided that assist with workflow. Working with Views For the most part, unless you are working with a multi-monitor system, it is more convenient to work in a single view, to present the largest picture of your model. To facilitate this, the Standard Views tool box lets you quickly change between Top, Front, Right, and Isometric views. If you have only one view open, you don't need to select a view after choosing the required rotation. Other tools in this tool box let you quickly turn Constructions on or off, and to toggle between a smooth-shaded view and Wireframe display. Identifying faces on a solid When you are working with feature-based solids the screen pointer will, by default, identify only those faces that would be visible to you in the view. That is, it ignores surfaces that would, in real life, be obscured by the rest of the solid in the view. Consider a rectangular slab feature, viewed in an Isometric view. By default, only the top, front, and left faces of the slab would highlight as you pass the pointer over it.
3/24/2010
Page 63 of 131
By default, the pointer will identify only those surfaces that would be visible in the view in real life, such as the shaded surfaces in the diagram.
In wireframe display mode, where all faces are visible, it is convenient to be able to work on any face of the solid, whether or not it would be hidden in real life. MicroStation provides a means for doing just this. For example, to select a face(s) at the rear of the example slab, after identifying it, you first snap to a common edge or vertex and then move the pointer to highlight the required face prior to accepting with a data point. After the snap point on the edge or vertex, only faces sharing that common edge or vertex will be highlighted by the pointer.
Left: Snapping to the rear right corner of the slab would force the pointer to only highlight the back and right faces (shown shaded). Right: Snapping to the rear lower right vertex of the slab forces the pointer to only highlight the back, right, and bottom faces (shown shaded).
General Procedure To select a surface(s) at the rear of a solid in a view
1. Select the tool that is to be used (such as the Extend Face Feature tool.) 2. Identify the solid. 3. Snap to an edge, or vertex, of the required surface. 4. Move the pointer over the surface, so that the surface highlights. 5. Accept the surface with a data point. Identifying an edge on a solid You can use the normal identification methods to select an edge of a parametric solid AccuSnap, Tentative Snap, Data Point. If you enter a data point on a vertex, however, and the incorrect edge highlights, you can enter Resets to cycle through the edges until the correct edge highlights and then enter a data point to accept. Dynamic update to preview settings
3/24/2010
Page 64 of 131
When adding features to a parametric solid, you can change the settings prior to accepting the feature. This lets you preview how the construction will look before completing (accepting) it. Take, for example, the Blend Feature tool, which lets you preview the blend prior to finally accepting it. .
Example of previewing a blend prior to accepting
1. Select the Blend Feature tool. 2. With Edge set to Blend, input the proposed radius. 3. Identify the edge to blend. 4. Accept to view the blend. The blend is displayed. 5. If necessary, before accepting the blend, change the values for the radius, or radii, in the tool settings. As each change is input (by pressing <Enter> on the keyboard) the blend preview updates to show the new values. 6. Accept to place the blend, or Reset to cancel the placing of the blend.
Even if you make a mistake and accept the wrong blend, you can use the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool to change the radius.
Adding Features to Solids

Using the tools in the Features tool box, you can add the following features: blends, chamfers, holes, bosses, cuts, protrusions, swept cuts/protrusions, and ribs. As well, you can use the Thin Shell Feature tool to hollow out a solid. These tools let you start with simple solids and then finish them off with features. Take as an example the angle bracket shown in the following illustration. This model is very simple to construct, from the basic extrusion of an L-shaped profile, using tools from the Features tool box.
3/24/2010
Page 65 of 131
Example model of an angle bracket.
To the underlying solid, which is an extrusion, of an L-shaped profile, the Rib Feature tool is used to add the rib.
Left: The underlying solid an extrusion of an L-shaped profile. Right: After adding the Rib Feature.
Following on from this, the Blend Feature tool lets you add rounding to the corners and to the right angle bend. Following this, a blend for the smaller radius rounding on the outer edge is added.
3/24/2010
Page 66 of 131
Left: Rounding is added to the corners and the right-angle bend. Right: Rounding is added to the outer edge of the bracket.
Next, the chamfer and the countersunk holes are added using the Chamfer Feature and Hole Feature tools, respectively.
Left: The chamfer is added between the back faces of the bracket. Right: The countersunk holes are constructed.
To complete the bracket, the Thin Shell Feature tool is used to hollow out the back of the bracket.
3/24/2010
Page 67 of 131
Rear view showing before (left) and after (right) using the Thin Shell Feature tool to hollow out the back of the bracket to complete the model.
For more information on using the tools for adding features to solids, see the Features tool box.
Manipulating Features
During the design process it is not unusual to have design changes that require modifications to one or more solid(s) in your design. With feature-based parametric solids, compared to normal solids, these procedures are simplified. Parameters used to create the solids/features are retained in the model. When you edit a parameter, the solid is regenerated. The Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool lets you modify solids/features by editing their parameters in a dialog box. Alternatively, you can modify them using selection handles. These handles display when you use the Element Selection tool to select the solid or one of its features. For graphical modifications, the parameter values update accordingly. It is possible that a feature no longer has any edges visible by which you can identify it. This can happen with a slab, for example, where all the edges have been blended or chamfered. In such cases, you can use the Feature Manager to suppress some features, so that the underlying feature again is visible, or to modify the underlying invisible feature directly. Modifying a feature via its parameters
3/24/2010
Page 68 of 131
Values for the parameters used to construct a feature can be edited using the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool. Alternatively, you can modify many features, interactively, by using the Element Selection tool to select the feature and then manipulating its handles. When you modify a feature-based solid or feature, using handles, the parameters are updated also. Consider the before and after images of this example solid. It consists of a rectangular solid (created with the Slab Feature tool) to which various features have been added blends, a cut, and a countersunk hole. These features can be modified by editing their parameters.
Example solid, showing before version (left) and the modified version (right).
This example, requires two modifications change one blend radius, and change the hole type to counterbore. You can change the blend and hole using the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool, for which a dialog box opens when you select the feature to modify. This contains the current values for the parameters that were used to create the feature. In this example, although the two corner blends were created simultaneously, you still can edit each radius individually.
Modifying a blend radius
1. Select the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool. 2. Identify either of the blends. 3. Accept to open the Edit Edge Blend dialog box. 4. In the Edit Edge Blend dialog box, turn on Show All Edges. The dialog box expands to display the edges individually, with ID numbers that correspond to numbers that dynamically display at the relative blends of the model.
3/24/2010
Page 69 of 131
5. In the list box, highlight the edge to be modified and edit the value in the input fields below the list box. 6. Click OK. The solid regenerates with the new value for the edge blend.
Left: Identify one of the blends. Right: After modifying the radius of the blend.
Similarly, the countersunk hole can be modified, using the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool.
Changing a hole type
1. Select the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool. 2. Identify the countersunk hole. 3. Accept to open the Edit Hole dialog box. 4. Change Hole Type to Counterbore. 5. Make other adjustments as required.
6. Click OK. The solid is regenerated with the hole changed to a counterbore type.
3/24/2010
Page 70 of 131
Left: The original countersunk hole. Right: After modification to a counterbore hole.
Using handles to modify solids/features interactively You can use the Element Selection tool to select a solid, or feature, and then use the handles to copy, move, or modify it. To modify or scale a solid or feature you must first use the Element Selection tool to select it and display the relevant handles. How you select the solid/feature determines which handles are displayed initially. You can select the solid or feature with a Data Point, which displays the feature handles. You can enter a Reset, or right-click, on any of these handles to view a menu with the same options as those available via Feature Manager's right-click menu.
Pop-up menu from entering a Reset on a feature handle.
After you select the feature, tool tips indicate what the handles are for. If you hover the pointer over a handle, a tool tip indicates that the handle either is part of the feature, such as Hole Cbore./Csink. Diameter: 12.00, Diameter: 10.00and can be used to modify it, or a Move/Copy handle such as Move Slab by Point (Press <Alt> while dragging to toggle copy).
Selecting handles
In many situations, when moving or modifying solids or features interactively, you can select one or more handles to work with. This method can be used, for example, to modify several faces of a solid simultaneously.

To select a single handle Data Point (click) on it. To select multiple handles <Ctrl> + Data on each, or <Ctrl> + Drag a box around several handles.
Modifying solids and features
When modifying solids, interactively, you can modify, move, or copy features forming the solid, or the profiles used to create a feature. Take, for example, the following solid, which consists of a slab with a simple through hole and a cut. The cut was made using the rectangle (shown dashed) as a profile.
3/24/2010
Page 71 of 131
Example model consisting of a slab, with a hole and a cut using a rectangle as a profile.
Using the Element Selection tool to select the slab feature part of the solid displays the handles for modifying or moving the slab feature.
After selecting the slab feature, the moving/copying handle displays at the center of the slab along with handles for modifying the feature.
For a feature, such as a slab, handles appear in each corner of the (original) slab, as well as a moving/copying handle at the center of it. Dragging any of the handles modifies/moves the slab.
3/24/2010

Left: Selecting a handle to modify the slab feature. Right: The modified slab feature.
Page 72 of 131
In a similar fashion, you can select a profile used to create a solid or a cut and modify it by its handles, which automatically regenerates the solid. In this example model, the corner cutout was created with a rectangular profile. To modify this, you first select an edge of the cutout area, which will display the original profile along with handles for modifying it.
Selecting an edge of the cutout region displays the profile used to create it, along with handles to move or modify it.
Here, you can use the handles in each corner to modify the shape of the profile, or the fifth handle in the center of the profile to move/copy the cutout. To move a feature, you can click and drag the move handle. You can toggle between move and copy modes by pressing the <Alt> key. A plus sign appears at the selected handle when in copy mode.
Left: Click and drag a corner handle to change the shape of the cutout. Right: Click and drag the center handle to move the cutout region. To create a copy of the feature, press the <Alt> key to toggle to copy mode.
With a hole feature, you can use a similar procedure to change its radius, or to change its location. First you use the Element Selection
3/24/2010

tool to identify the feature.
Page 73 of 131
Select an edge of the hole feature to highlight it and display its control handles.
Using the handle on the edge, you can modify the radius, while the center handle can be used to move/copy the hole in the solid.
Left: Click and drag the edge handle to modify the radius of the hole. Right: Click and drag the center handle to move the hole. To create a copy of the feature, press the <Alt> key to toggle to copy mode.
When you modify a solid/feature interactively, you can select multiple handles to modify simultaneously. This is particularly useful with more complex solids, or those with multiple edges/faces that you want to manipulate together. To select multiple handles, use <Ctrl> + Data on each required handle so that it is highlighted. To modify all the selected handles simultaneously, click and drag any of the highlighted handles.
3/24/2010
Page 74 of 131
Left: Select handles required to be modified. Right: Select a highlighted handle and drag to the new location.
In a solid that contains a cut created with a simple shape, having no parametric dimensions, for example, the cut still could be modified graphically, as shown in the following example.
Modifying a cut interactively
1. Select the Element Selection tool. 2. Select an edge of the cut. The cut is highlighted, and the profile used to create it is displayed with handles. 3. Click on one of the manipulation handles at the edge of the profile that you want to adjust. 4. Move the pointer to make the required adjustment (AccuDraw can be used for precision adjustment). 5. Accept. 6. (Optional) Repeat steps 3 to 5 for any other required adjustments. 7. Accept to finish.
Left: Select an edge of the cut (1) and then a handle to modify (2). Right: Move the handle, using AccuDraw for precise placement.
3/24/2010
Page 75 of 131
After modifying the profile, the solid is regenerated to reflect the change.
Adding or removing blends and chamfers
You can use handles to add copies of an existing blend or chamfer, or remove them.
To add a copy of a blend
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the existing blend. The blend highlights. A circle depicts the radius, and a line depicts its axis. A green handle is at its center. 2. Click the green handle. It changes color to yellow. 3. Move the pointer to the new edge, so it highlights. 4. Accept. The blend is copied to the new edge.
Left: Identify the existing blend. Right: Move the pointer to the new edge.
3/24/2010
Page 76 of 131
Rendered view of the modified solid.
You can remove copies of a blend or chamfer by double-clicking its handle. Where it is the last instance of a blend or chamfer, however, you must use the handle's right-click menu to perform the deletion.
To delete a copy of an existing blend or chamfer feature
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the blend or chamfer. 2. Double-click the handle at the center of the axis line. The feature is deleted.
To delete the last instance of a blend or chamfer feature
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the blend or chamfer. 2. Right-click the handle for the feature. 3. Select Delete from the menu. The feature is deleted.
Adding or removing faces of a thin shelled solid
You can use handles to remove additional faces from a thin shelled solid, or to replace a previously removed face.
To remove additional faces from a thin shelled solid
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the solid at an open face. The solid highlights, with a green handle displayed at the center of the open face. 2. Click on the handle. The handle changes color to yellow. 3. Move the pointer to the face to remove. The face highlights. 4. Enter a data point to select the face. A green handle appears on the face. 5. Accept with a data point. The face is removed.
3/24/2010
Page 77 of 131
Left: Select solid at open face. Center: Click on face to remove. Right: Solid with additional face removed.
To return a previously removed face on a thin shelled solid
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the solid at an open face. The solid highlights, with a green handle displayed at the center of each open face. 2. Double-click the handle on the face to return. 3. (Optional) Double-click the handle of other faces to return.
Left: Select solid at an open face, and double-click the handle of the face to be returned. Right: The solid after returning the missing face.
Variable Driven Modeling and Constraints

MicroStation's Variable Driven Modeling (VDM) tools let you assign variables or equations to the parameters of solids and features contained in your models. For example, if a slab always has its width and height as percentages of its length, you could set equations for these such that any changes you made to the length would automatically correct the width and height dimensions to maintain the relationship. Variables may contain simple values, or else equations that define a value. Equations also may include previously defined variables.
3/24/2010
Page 78 of 131
Many of the settings for features have an equation icon, signifying that you can assign a variable, or an equation, to the particular setting.
Equation icon.
Working in conjunction with the variable driven modeling tools, the Constrain Feature tool lets you constrain a feature of a solid. That is you can constrain, or fix, a feature so that it remains in the same relative position on a solid irrespective of how the underlying solid's dimensions are modified. For example, you could constrain a hole to always be 25 mm from a slab's edges. Settings for constraints also may include variables or equations. Variables and Equations Constraints Working with Variables, Equations, and Constraints Working with feature cells Parameter sets for hole features
Variables and Equations

Variables can be divided into two main categories:

Global created manually and available to all solids in the model. Local created by MicroStation automatically, for all feature parameters of a solid, and available for that solid (only).
Variables can be defined as individual values, or they can be defined by equations, which in turn may contain previously defined variables. Equations can include trigonometric and algebraic expressions, giving you a full range of options. Valid expressions for equations When creating equations you have access to MicroStation's mathematical capabilities.
White space and comments
White space and comments can appear anywhere in an expression and are ignored. A comment is a sequence of characters enclosed in brackets or braces, as follows: '[' ... ']' | '{' ... '}' | '/*' ... '*/'
Built-in functions and arithmetic operators
You can include any of the following arithmetic operators in your equations:
Function/Operator cos sin tan acos asin atan sqrt ceil (x) floor (x) f b ( ) arithmetic negation cosine sine tangent arccosine arcsine arctangent square root returns a double value representing the smallest integer that is greater than or equal to x. There is no error return. returns a floating-point value representing the largest integer that is less than or equal to x. There is no error return. t th b l t l f th fl ti i t b ( ) Operation Performed
3/24/2010

+ * / % ^ addition subtraction multiplication division modulo exponent. For example, a^2 squares the value of a. Built-in numerical constant
Page 79 of 131
The following numerical constant is available:

Constant Means pi [pi ]
Naming variables Variable names may have up to 32 characters, with no embedded blanks. They are case sensitive and must begin with a letter, followed by letters, numbers, or underscores. You cannot create a variable name that is the same as a built-in function or constant, but it may contain a reserved word as part of a name. For example, as sin is a built-in function, 'sin' is not a valid variable name. The variable sin_of_x, however, is valid. Reserved words are not case sensitive, so Sin also is not a valid variable name. A variable's name must be unique within the solid (local variables), or DGN file (global variables), in which it is used.
Caution should be used when using variables because of the possible confusion of an underscore in a variable name with that of Text Entry fields. It is strongly recommended to change the ED character to &. This can be done in the Workspace > Preferences > Text dialog box, by changing the setting for ED character from an underscore to an ampersand &.
Global Variables You can create your own global variables, which are available for all solids in a model. Typically, you can give them names that simplify later identification where editing is required, or you where you may want to use them on other solids. To avoid confusion with local variables, names for global variables must begin with an alpha character. Names for local variables always begin with the underscore character. Global variables can be either driving or driven.

Driving variable like a constant in an equation. Can be changed only by manual editing. Driven variables derived from the solution of an equation and cannot be edited manually. Changes to these occur, automatically, when a value (of a driving variable) in the equation is modified.
Consider, for example, a simple slab that always has its width as 0.5 times its length, and its height as 0.75 times its width. You could create a driving variable for its length, and driven variables for its width and height. If we take the case where the length is 5 units, then the global variables could be created as follows: Driving variable Length=5 Driven variables Width=0.5*Length and Height=0.75*Width In this case, the variables would have to be created in the order Length, Width, and Height, as each includes a reference to the previously defined variable. You cannot create an equation that references a nonexistent variable. With the above variables applied to the dimensions of the slab, only the value of Length is readily editable, but this would cause changes to the Width and Height of the slab, as per the driven variables.
Creating global variables and equations
Global variables and equations are created via the Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box which has tabs for Variables and
3/24/2010
Page 80 of 131
Equations. This lets you Create, Edit, and Delete, variables and equations as well as to Apply edited values to any solid(s) that uses the global variable. When you create a variable, it can be one of the following Types:
Distance (the default) defined in working units and displayed as specified in the Working Units category of the DGN File Settings dialog box (Settings > Design File). Degrees defined in degrees and displayed as specified in the Working Units category of the DGN File Settings dialog box. When using trigonometric functions, the Angle variables of type Degree are computed without conversion to Radians. If you wish to use Radians with the trigonometric functions, then the variables should be of type Number. Number a floating point number with six digit precision.
To create a global variable
1. Choose Element > Feature Modeling > Variables. The Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box opens. 2. With the Variables tab active, click the New icon. A list box entry for the new variable appears. 3. In the Name field, key in the required name. 4. In the Value field, key in the required value. 5. From the Type option menu, choose the type of variable.
To create an equation
1. Choose Element > Feature Modeling > Variables. The Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box opens. 2. Click the Equations tab. 3. Click the New icon. 4. Key in the required equation. You can use one or more variables from the Available Variables list box below the equation field. Double-clicking on an available variable will enter it in the equation field. 5. When done, click the Equations tab. The equation is entered in the Equation list box. As well, the (driven) variable, which is defined by the equation, is added to the variable Name list in the Variables tab. Local Variables Local variables, by default, are created automatically for each parameter of a feature/solid and can be used when creating/editing equations for parameters, or when adding/editing constraints. You can toggle the display of local variables with the Locals setting in the equation dialog box, which is opened when you click the equation icon for a parameter. Local variables are available only for the selected solid. The naming convention used for local variables is: _<Feature Name><Node Number>_<Parameter Name> For example, a slab on node 1 of the feature tree would have the following local variables defined for each of its dimensions: _SLAB1_Length, _SLAB1_Width, and _SLAB1_Height Local variables for a solid always are available for use when creating or editing features on the selected solid. They also may be used in equations.
Constraints
3/24/2010
Page 81 of 131
Constraints let you fix various dimensions that control the location and/or orientation of features on a solid. The Constrain Feature tool, in the Manipulate Features task, lets you add constraints to features. For example, you could constrain holes in each corner of a slab to always be 25 mm from adjacent edges. The holes would remain correctly located no matter how you changed the dimensions of the slab. Without the constraints, changing the dimension of the slab leaves the holes static in their current locations.
Left: Original solid (slab) with holes offset 25 mm from adjacent edges in each corner. Center: With holes unconstrained changing the dimensions of the slab can leave the holes incorrectly positioned. Right: With holes constrained when the dimensions of the slab are modified, the holes remain correctly located 25 mm from adjacent edges of each corner.
Variables and constraints When adding a constraint to a feature, you can define the constraint using an existing global or local variable, either by itself or as part of an equation. When variables are used in this way, you can redesign the solid simply by changing the values of the variables. This results in the solid being regenerated, with the new values applied to the constraints for the features.
Working with Variables, Equations, and Constraints

To illustrate how variables, equations, and constraints can be used, the following discussion will look at a simple example (shown below). This model consists of a 50 mm x 50 mm x 20 mm (high) slab which has a 15 mm radius blend in one corner and in which two 10 mm hole features and a 13 mm x 9 mm rectangular cut feature have been placed. Several methods will be used to constrain these features.
Adding constraints For this example, the following constraints will be applied:

A hole will be constrained to be concentric to the rounded corner of the solid. The second hole will be constrained to be a distance from two edges of the solid using a variable, and an equation. The cut will be located midway along an edge, and offset by a specified distance.
3/24/2010
Page 82 of 131
Features that have point like entities may be constrained to be concentric. Such features include holes and bosses, as well as features that have vertices. In this example, the center point of a hole will be constrained to be concentric to the center point of the rounded edge on the solid.
Constraining the hole to be concentric to the rounded edge
1. Select the Constrain Feature tool. 2. Click the Add New Constraints icon and the Concentric icon.
3. Identify the hole. 4. Identify a curved edge of the rounded corner on the solid. A concentric icon appears at the center of the curved edge, where the center of the hole will be located. 5. Accept to preview the effect of constraining the hole. 6. Accept again to complete constraining the hole to be concentric to the rounded edge. The hole is moved so that it is concentric to the rounded edge.
Left: Identify the feature (1) and the rounded edge (2). Right: Accept (3) to preview the effect of the constraint and again (4) to add the (concentric) constraint.
With the hole constrained to be concentric to the curved edge, if the radius of the edge is modified, then the hole will move, automatically, to maintain its concentric relationship.
Modifying the curved edge of the solid results in the constrained hole moving to maintain its concentric relationship.
3/24/2010
Page 83 of 131
Next, we will use distance constraints to position the rectangular cut in a corner of the solid, with a 2 mm clearance to the nearest edges.
Adding distance constraints to the rectangular cut
1. Select the Constrain Feature tool. 2. Click the Add New Constraints icon and the Distance icon. 3. Turn on Distance and, in its field, key in 2.0.
4. Identify the rectangular cut feature in the solid. 5. Identify an edge of the feature to be constrained. 6. Identify the edge on the solid to which the constraint will be referenced. The constraint dimension displays dynamically. 7. Using a <Ctrl> + Data point, identify the second edge of the feature to be constrained. 8. Using a <Ctrl> + Data point, identify the edge on the solid to which the constraint will be referenced. Again, the constraints dimension displays dynamically.
Left: Identify the feature (1), the edge to be constrained (2) and the reference edge on the solid (3). Right: Identify the second edge on the feature (4) and the reference edge on the solid (5).
9. Accept to preview the effect of the constraints. The cut is repositioned to the location defined by the constraints.
3/24/2010
Page 84 of 131
Accept (6), to preview the effect of the proposed constraint(s).
10. Accept to complete the constraint. Finally, an equation will be used to constrain the remaining hole to be clear of the edges of the solid by 1.5 times the diameter of the hole. Because there are two holes in this solid, first it must be established which hole is being constrained. For this, Feature Manager can be used. This lists all the features of the solid, with unique numbers (node numbers). As well, any features that are already constrained will have an asterisk (*) next to them in Feature Manager.
Identify the unconstrained hole, using Feature Manager
1. Choose Element > Feature Modeling > Feature Manager. The Feature Manager dialog box opens. 2. Click on the remaining hole to display the solid with the hole feature highlighted in Feature Manager. The feature that you click on appears highlighted in Feature Manager.
Feature Manager with the selected hole highlighted. Previously constrained features display an asterisk (*) next to them.
In the above illustration, it can be seen that in this solid, Hole (3) is the feature that is yet to be constrained. This will help to select the correct hole diameter when adding the constraint.
When you construct a solid such as this, the number of the hole will vary depending on the order in which the features were placed.
Constrain the remaining hole
1. Select the Constrain Feature tool. 2. Set Constraint to Add and select the Distance icon. 3. Turn on Distance. 4. Identify the hole. The hole highlights. At the same time, the equation icon for the Distance setting is enabled.
3/24/2010

5. Click the Equation icon. The equation input dialog box opens. 6. If necessary, in the equation input dialog box, turn on Locals to display local variables for the features on the solid. 7. In the list of variables, double-click the local variable _HOLE3_Diameter. The variable is entered in the text field above. 8. In the text field, add to the variable already present *1.5. That is, the equation should read _HOLE3_Diameter*1.5. This will make the constraint 1.5 times the diameter of the hole.
Page 85 of 131
9. Click OK. The equation dialog box closes and the value 15 is entered in the Distance field this is 1.5 times the diameter (10 mm) of the hole. 10. Identify one of the edges adjacent to the hole. 11. With a <Ctrl> + Data point, identify the remaining edge adjacent to the hole. In each case the dimension 15 appears dynamically to show the constraint value. 12. Accept to preview the effect of the constraints. 13. Accept to complete the addition of the constraints. The hole moves to the required location.
Left: Identify the feature (1) and then, after clicking the equation icon and entering the equation, identify the edges (2 and 3). Right: Accept (4), to view the effect of the constraint, and again (5) to accept.
With the features constrained, changes made to the parameters of the underlying slab will result in the features moving, if necessary, to maintain the defined constraints.
3/24/2010
Page 86 of 131
When the underlying solid is modified, the features maintain their constraint settings.
Similarly, if changes are made to the parameters of a feature, then it is repositioned, if necessary, to maintain the defined constraint(s).
When a feature is modified, it still maintains its constraint settings.
As well as being able to modify solids and features, whilst maintaining the constraint settings, you may also make changes to the constraint settings themselves. You do this with the Constrain Feature tool, with Constraint set to Modify. For example, the clearance constraints for the rectangular cut could be modified. Currently, both are set at 2 mm, but they may be modified individually, to different values, if required. In this example, we will increase both offsets to 6 mm.
Modify the constraints for the rectangular cut feature
1. Select the Constrain Feature tool. 2. Set Constraint to Modify. 3. Identify the rectangular cut feature. The feature highlights. 4. Accept. The Modify Feature Constraints dialog box opens, displaying the constraints currently applied to the feature. 5. Select the first constraint in the dialog box. The constraint highlights, and the value is entered in the edit field below the list box.
3/24/2010
Page 87 of 131
At the same time the corresponding dimension displays dynamically on the solid, to help you identify the correct constraint for modification.
6. In the edit field, key in 6. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the second constraint. 8. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the solid updates with the cut in the new location.
The solid after modifying the offsets for the cut feature.
Working with feature cells

Feature cells, are special cells that have been created using global variables and equations, grouped in a parameter set, to define their parameters.
3/24/2010
Page 88 of 131
One feature cell can have multiple parameter sets, one of which you select when placing the cell. As well as fixed dimensions, parameter sets can include variable or free parameters, which you define when placing the feature cell. Sets of the parameters then are created in a Parameter Sets Table, thus letting you use the one cell, with different dimensions applied to the various parameters. When you place a feature cell, you also select a parameter set from the table, which is used to construct the cell. Parameters can be defined from Global Variables, and Equations. They can be fixed (not editable) or free (editable) at placement time. Feature cell origin When you create feature cells, it is important that you take into account the way that these cells are varied when the different parameter sets are applied. This directly affects the location of the cell origin, or placement point. Take, for example, a feature cell that is based on a slab feature that has a blend and a cut feature added to it. In this cell, the origin (0,0,0) of the base cell is in the lower left corner of the slab. Any parameter sets that change the dimensions of the underlying slab will cause the new dimensions to be calculated relative to the centroid of the underlying slab.
Original cell, with origin at lower left corner of underlying slab.
Thus, if a parameter set reduces the length and width of the underlying slab, the cell origin will be outside the feature cell.
With the underlying slab reduced, the origin falls outside the cell.
Similarly, if a parameter set increases the length and width of the underlying slab, the cell origin will now be located inside the feature cell.
3/24/2010
Page 89 of 131
When the underlying slab is enlarged, the origin falls inside the cell.
To avoid this shifting of the cell origin you can use a different modeling method to create your feature cells. In the above example, rather than using a primitive for the underlying solid, you could use an extruded dimension driven (DD) profile. When you create the DD profile, you create a fixed point set at the required location for the cell origin. All changes in dimensions then would be relative to this fixed point, which is also the cell origin. If we take the previous example, the underlying slab can be created from a rectangular DD profile, which is extruded and then the blend and cut features added. In this case, the fixed point for the profile would be the lower left corner as before. No matter which parameter set is chosen, the origin of the cell remains in the lower left corner of the cell.
In each case, the origin of the feature cell is the lower left corner of the cell.
Typically, the workflow for creating a feature cell of this type is: 1. Create a dimension driven (DDD) profile with variables for the required dimensions. 2. Create a feature solid using the profile. 3. Create a Global Variables/Equations list, which will be used by the feature cell. 4. Use the Modify Profile tool to assign the Global Variables to the (dimension driven) profile. 5. Create the parameter sets. Creating a feature cell
3/24/2010
Page 90 of 131
In the following section, we will go through the steps to create a feature cell. For this example, we will work on creating the cell pictured below, which is an extrusion of an L-shaped dimension driven design (DDD) profile. As with a normal cell, a feature cell is created in a model that has the Can be placed as a cell option enabled.
Creating the DDD profile
In this example, we will create a shape and then convert it to a DDD profile.
Prepare to create the feature cell
1. In a DGN file, create a new 3D model, giving it the name of the required feature cell. In this example, the cell is L Bracket. 2. Turn off all views other than View 1. This will let us quickly rotate the views. 3. If necessary, rotate View 1 to a Top view.
Draw the base profile
1. In the Polygons task, select the Place Orthogonal Shape tool. 2. Draw an L-shaped profile with dimensions 150x100x30(thick), as shown below. Start with the outer corner of the L at 0,0,0 (as shown). This point will form the origin of the completed feature cell.
Profile shape, showing dimensions and location of 0,0,0 point.
Convert the shape to a profile
1. In the Profile task, select the Convert Element to Profile tool. The Profile task is a child of the DD Design task. 2. Turn on Set Text Size Automatically and Set Tolerance Automatically. 3. Identify the profile element. 4. Accept to convert it to a profile. Symbols appear, to indicate the geometric constraints that have been applied.
3/24/2010
Page 91 of 131
Profile showing geometric constraints symbols.
This has set the geometric constraints for the profile. Next, we will add dimensional constraints to it. For this profile, we will dimension the two legs and the thickness. Before we can add any dimensional constraints, however, we must place a Fixed Point constraint. This provides a base point about which the system calculates all dimensions of the finished feature cell. In this profile, we will place the fixed point constraint at the same point as we want for the finished cell origin.
Add a fixed point constraint
1. In the Geometric Constraints task, select the Fix Point at Location tool. 2. Snap to the profile at the outer corner of the two legs of the L. 3. Accept to place the fixed point constraint. Notice, in the status bar, the message DOF=4, indicating that the profile has 4 degrees of freedom. With the fixed point constraint in place, and knowing that the profile has 4 degrees of freedom (DOF), we will now add dimensional constraints. You will notice that each of the remaining unfixed vertices has a yellow marker and question mark (you may need to zoom in to clearly see the yellow question marks). These indicate points that are not fixed. The vertex with the fixed point constraint has a white marker and no question mark. We will now fix the other points, and reduce the degrees of freedom to zero, by adding dimensional constraints to the profile. These can be added in either of two ways. You can dimension the profile and then use the Convert Dimension to Constraint tool to convert the dimensions to constraints. Alternatively, you can specify the constraints as you add the dimensions. Here, we will use the latter option.
Add dimensional constraints to the profile
1. In the Dimensioning task, select the Element Dimensioning tool. 2. If necessary, click the Dimension Element icon in the tool settings, and choose the following settings: Alignment: Drawing Location: Automatic 3. Identify the vertical edge at the right of the profile. Notice that the Element Dimensioning tool settings now display a Constraint field. 4. If necessary, turn on Constraint and, in its field, key in W1. 5. Move the pointer to the right of the profile and enter a data point to complete the dimension. Notice that the status bar now displays DOF=3. 6. Repeat for the bottom edge of the profile, naming the constraint L1. Notice that the status bar now displays DOF=2 7. Similarly, dimension the topmost edge of the profile to specify its thickness, naming the constraint T1. Notice that the status bar now displays DOF=1
3/24/2010
Page 92 of 131
8. Dimension the left edge of the base of the profile, this time selecting the existing constraint T1, from the constraints list box in the tool settings.
Notice that the status bar now displays DOF=0. In other words, the profile is fully constrained. With the profile fully constrained, we can create a feature solid by extruding it.
Creating the feature solid
Using the DDD profile, we will create a feature solid by extrusion.

Extrude the DDD profile
1. Rotate to the Isometric view. 2. Fit the view. 3. Select the Extrude Feature tool. 4. Turn on Distance and, in its field, key in 75. 5. Identify the profile. 6. Move the pointer upward and accept with a data point.
Solid after extruding the DDD profile.
3/24/2010

Create the Global Variables/Equation list
Page 93 of 131
We are ready now to create a list of Global Variables and/or equations. In this example, we will create Global Variables for the length, width, and thickness of the L-shaped profile that was used to create the feature solid. Additionally, we will create an equation to define the height variable of the model. This will be the extrusion distance and we will set it to be half the total of the length plus width. That is, 0.5* (Length+Width). Later, these variables will be assigned to the solid and used to create parameter sets.
Create Global Variables
1. Choose Element > Feature Modeling > Variables. The Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box opens. 2. If necessary, open the Variables tab. 3. Click the New icon. A new row is inserted in the variables list box. It is given a default Name (Unnamed1), Value and Type. 4. Right-click the Name field and key in a new name, Length, pressing <Return > to complete the change. 5. Right-click the Value field and key in a new Value, 150, pressing <Return > to complete the change. 6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for additional variables and settings for Name and Value, as follows: Width, 100 Thickness, 30
Global Variables dialog box after adding the variables.
Create equation to define height variable
1. In the Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box, open the Equations tab. 2. Click the New icon. A new row is inserted in the Equation list box, and the equation editor opens (if not, double-click the empty row to open the editor). Below the input field, the editor displays a list of Available Variables that may be used in creating the equation. 3. In the input field, key in Height=0.5*(. 4. In the Available Variables list, double-click both Length and Width. Notice that they both are inserted into the equation, with a + sign between them. 5. In the equation input field, complete the equation with a closing bracket ).
3/24/2010
Page 94 of 131
Creating the equation.
6. Click the highlighted row in the Equations list box to add the equation (and close the equation editor). 7. Open the Variables tab and notice that the new variable Height has been added. Notice that the variable Height is greyed out. This indicates that it is derived from an equation and is not directly editable. To change its value, you would have to modify one of the variables used in its equation. In this case, changing either Length or Width would result in a change to the value of Height.
Variables tab showing the new variable created from the equation.
Assign the Global Variables
Our next task is to assign the global variables to the dimensional constraints of our feature solid. In this example, the variables Length, Width, and Thickness, will be applied to the feature solid's profile element, while Height will be applied to the extruded distance. We can apply the variables via the modifying tools Modify Profile and Modify Parametric Solid or Feature.
Assign global variables to the solid's profile
1. In the Modify Feature task, select the Modify Profile tool. 2. If necessary, in the tool settings, select the Modify DD Profile Parameters icon. 3. Identify the solid and accept with a data point. The Modify Profile dialog box opens, displaying the original profile and the parameters. A list box displays the parameters and their values. As well, the original parameters/dimensions appear on the solid. 4 In the Modify Profile dialog box click the row for parameter W1
3/24/2010

5. Click the calculator icon to the right of the W1 field below the list box. A dialog box opens displaying the global variables. 6. In the list of variables, double-click Width so that it's name appears in the input field above.
Page 95 of 131
7. Click OK to complete the assignment. 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for the W1 and T1 parameters, assigning the Global Variable Length to L1 and Thickness to T1. 9. Click OK in the Modify Profile to finish. Finally, we need to assign the Height variable for the solid. This dimension is not part of the DD profile, it is the distance that the profile was extruded. We can use the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool to make the assignment to this dimension.
Assign a global variable to the solid's height
1. In the Modify Feature task, select the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool. 2. Turn off Edit Solids About ID Point. This is to ensure that modifications will be taken about the cell origin. 3. Identify the solid and accept with a data point. The Edit Extrusion dialog box opens. 4. Click the calculator icon to the right of the Distance field. A variable input dialog opens. 5. Double-click the variable Height, so that it appears in the input field, then click OK. The Distance field in the Edit Extrusion dialog box now is greyed out, and may only be edited by first clicking the Calculator icon. 6. In the Edit Extrusion dialog box, Click OK.
3/24/2010
Page 96 of 131
Assigning a variable to the extrusion distance.
Create the Parameter Sets
We now have a feature solid that is controlled by global variables. Using Parameter Sets, we can specify various combinations of values for these global variables. In future, when placing the solid as a feature cell, these parameter sets give us the option of selecting from a list of predefined dimensions for the cell. Where it is required to define the dimension at placement time, we can leave the field blank for one or more variables in the parameter set.
Create parameter sets
1. Choose Element > Feature Modeling > Parameter Sets. The Parameter Sets dialog box opens, with a default parameter set named Untitled, displaying the Length, Width, and Thickness variables with their current values. 2. Select the name value (untitled) and change it to L-150x100x30 entering a <Return> to complete the change. An asterisk appears in the title bar, indicating that their are unsaved changes in the parameter set. 3. Click the New icon. A second parameter set row is placed in the list box. 4. Select the name value and change it to L-200x150x30 entering a <Return> to complete the change. 5. In turn, select the Length and Width values in the second row and change them to 200 and 150 respectively. 6. Using the same technique, create further parameter sets with the following names/values: L-300x200x50 with values 300,200,50 L-100x80x30 with values 100,80,30. 7. Click the Name column title button, to sort the parameter table by name. 8. Click the Save Table icon, to save the parameter table to disk. The asterisk in the title bar disappears, indicating that the current parameter table has been saved to disk.
To this point, we have specified values for each variable in the parameter sets. If we leave a variable blank, then we can input the value at the time we place the feature cell.
Create a parameter set with variable values
In the Parameter Sets dialog box click the New icon
3/24/2010

2. Select the name value and change it to L-variable. 3. Identify the Length variable and delete the figure, so that <empty> appears in the field. 4. Repeat this for the remaining Width and Thickness fields. 5. Click the Save Table icon to save the changes to disk.
Page 97 of 131
Once you have created a parameter set, you can apply it to the feature solid. This is useful for checking the effect on the solid of the values used in the parameter sets. Where a parameter is blank, then that dimension is left as is.
Check the effect of the parameter sets
1. In the Parameter Sets dialog box, select a parameter set. 2. Click the Apply icon. The solid updates to conform to the values of the chosen parameter set. 3. Repeat for other parameter sets, noting that each time the solid changes to reflect the chosen parameter set. Placing and editing feature cells Placing feature cells is similar to placing normal cells, except that feature cells have a parameter set table associated with them. These let you select from a list of preset dimensions prior to placing the cell. Where a dimension is left blank in the parameter table, you can specify it at the time of placing the cell. As well, after placing the feature cell, you can apply a different parameter set to it. In the following example, we will work with the feature cell created in the previous section.
Placing feature cells with predefined parameter sets
1. Select the Place Feature Cell tool. 2. Click the Browse icon to the right of the Cell field. The Select File dialog box opens. 3. Use the controls in the Select File dialog box to select the file containing the required cell. 4. Click OK. 5. In the Place Feature Cell tool settings, use the Cell menu to select the required cell (in this case, L Bracket).
6. From the Params menu, select the required parameter set for the cell.
7. If necessary, click the down Show Extended Settings icon to view the parameters and their values.
3/24/2010
Page 98 of 131
8. Enter a data point to place the cell. 9. Optionally, place further instances of the feature cell, selecting different parameter sets where required.
Isometric view of the one feature cell placed 3 times with different parameter sets for each.
When a parameter set has free fields, you can input values interactively before placing the feature cell. Free fields are created when no value is specified in the parameter set. When placing feature cells, any fields that may be edited have a black dot in their Free column, in the Extended Settings list. One of the parameter sets we created for this feature cell, L-Variable, has such fields.
Placing a feature cell with variable parameters
1. Select the Place Feature Cell tool. 2. Click the Browse icon to the right of the Cell field. The Select File dialog box opens. 3. Use the controls in the Select File dialog box to select the file containing the required cell. 4. Click OK.
3/24/2010

6. From the Params menu, select L-Variable.
Page 99 of 131
7. If necessary, click the down Show Extended Settings icon to view the parameters and their values. In this case, parameters Length, Width, and Thickness have black dots in their Free column, indicating that they are editable.
8. Select the variable, then right-click on its value. 9. Key-in the new value. 10. Optionally, edit other variables as required. 11. Enter a data point to place the feature cell. Editing feature cells You can modify feature cells, by replacing their parameter set, or by replacing the cell with another feature cell. To do this, you must have the cell library attached, or it must be in the Cell Library List, which is defined by the configuration variable MS_CELLIST.
Changing the parameter set of a feature cell
1. Select the Edit Feature Cell tool. 2. In the model, identify the feature cell. The Cell and its current Params settings display in the tool settings. 3. From the Params menu, choose a new parameter set. 4. Accept to make the changes.
Replacing a feature cell
1. Select the Edit Feature Cell tool. 2. In the model, identify the feature cell. The Cell and its current Params settings display in the tool settings. 3. From the Cell menu, select a different feature cell. 4. Optionally, from the Params menu, select the required parameter set. 5. Accept to complete the replacement.
Parameter sets for hole features

You can create parameter sets for feature holes, which let you place hole features with previously defined settings. Parameters for feature holes must be set up in a CSV (comma separated values) file.
3/24/2010
Page 100 of 131
Apart from the Name column, which is mandatory, only columns for those parameters for which you want to set particular values need be included in the CSV file. Other values then can be defined, if necessary, via the tool settings at the time of placement for the selected hole.
To create parameter sets for hole features
1. Create a CSV file with the relative variables and the required values. 2. Import the CSV file into a DGNLIB file using the key-in paramset table import hole to open the Import Parameter Set Table dialog box, which lets you choose a CSV file to import. 3. Use this DGNLIB file in conjunction with your active DGN file to access the feature hole Parameter Sets.
To edit an existing parameter set for hole features
1. From the DGNLIB file that has the parameter set, key in paramset table export hole, to open the Export Parameter Set Table dialog box. 2. Select a folder and file name for the CSV file. 3. Use a text editor, or import the file into a spreadsheet, to edit the information. 4. Save the file again as a CSV file. 5. Import the CSV file into a DGNLIB file using the key-in paramset table import hole to open the Import Parameter Set Table dialog box, which lets you choose a CSV file to import.
When you create or edit a CSV file, the correct syntax for variable names is required. The table following shows the names of the variables and their equivalent labels on the Hole Feature tool dialog box.
Variable Name in csv file Variable Type Name String
Dialog box label Parameter Set
Values Tool Setting 0 Simple Counterbore Countersink Through Blind Next Face First Face Last Face Both Disabled Enabled
HoleType
Integer
Hole Type
1 2 0
DrillType
Integer
Drill
1 2 0
WhichEnd
Integer
Cbore or Csink End
1 2 0
Threaded Depth Diameter CDiameter CAngle CDepth DraftAngle Tapped TapAngle ThreadDiameter
Integer Distance Distance Distance Angle Distance Angle Integer Angle Distance
Add Thread 1 Depth Diameter Cbore or Csink Diameter Csink Angle Cbore Depth Draft Angle 0 Drill Angle 1 Drill Angle (field) Thread Dia (field) Enabled Disabled
3/24/2010

ThreadDepth ThreadPitch Distance Distance Thread Depth Thread Pitch
Page 101 of 131
Delivered Examples Two example dgnlib files are delivered with MicroStation V8 2004 Edition in the ...\Workspace\projects\examples\General3D\dgnlib folder. The two dgnlib files, HoleParamSetE.dgnlib and HoleParamSetM.dgnlib, contain examples of parameter sets for holes in English and Metric units respectively.
Feature Manager
MicroStation's Feature Manager lets you display the feature tree of a solid. That is, all features of a solid are displayed as branches on a tree view, in the order in which they were added to the solid. Using Feature Manager, you can:

Identify features. Analyze features. Modify features. Suppress features. Temporarily suppress the display of features. Re-order features in the feature tree.
Working with Feature Manager
Working with Feature Manager

When you first open the Feature Manager window, you are prompted to Identify element. On identifying a solid, its feature tree appears in the Feature Manager window. Using Feature Manager, you have many options for modifying and viewing the features of the solid. In the first part of this discussion, the following example model will be used.
3/24/2010
Page 102 of 131
Example model used in discussion.
In the following, you will see that you can use Feature Manager to select and modify features, and even to view the solid at various stages of its development.
To open Feature Manager and view a solid's feature tree
1. Choose Element > Feature Modeling > Feature Manager. The Feature Manager window opens. 2. Identify the solid. The feature tree for the solid is displayed in the Feature Manager list box.
3/24/2010
Page 103 of 131
3. If necessary, you can expand (+) or collapse () branches of the tree by clicking the + or icons.
Fully expanded feature tree for the example solid.
Display of features in the feature tree
3/24/2010

When a feature tree is displayed in Feature Manager, the following conventions apply:

Page 104 of 131
Features followed by an asterisk (*) indicates that a constraint is applied to the feature. Features highlighted in yellow indicates that you have marked the feature for moving in the tree. Features displayed in red indicates that due to some problem the feature no longer can be constructed.
In the example solid, Hole (17), Hole (18), and Hole (19) have asterisks next to them, indicating that they have constraints applied. When you select a feature in the Feature Manager list box, any edges of the feature that are visible on the solid are highlighted. Similarly, if you select a feature on the solid, then its entry in the Feature Manager list box is highlighted. Where a feature does not have any edges visible on the solid, you still can select the feature in the Feature Manager list box.
Selecting the feature in the Feature Manager list box, highlights the feature on the solid and vice-versa.
Right-clicking on a feature entry in the list box highlights the feature on the solid and displays a pop-up menu with various feature editing and display options.
Modifying features
You can right-click on a feature and select Modify to edit the parameters used to create the feature. This is similar to using the Modify Solid or Feature tool in the Modify Feature task. For example, right-clicking on an Edge Blend feature and selecting Modify opens the Edit Edge Blend dialog box. Here you can edit the parameters used to construct the blend.
3/24/2010
Page 105 of 131
To modify a feature's parameters from Feature Manager
1. In the Feature Manager list box, right-click on the feature to be modified. 2. In the right-click menu, select Modify. The Edit feature dialog box opens. 3. Make the required changes. 4. Click OK. The window closes and the solid updates to display the new values for the feature.
Before (left) and after (right) editing the value of an edge blend on the example solid.
Similarly, you can choose to delete a highlighted feature, by selecting Delete in the right-click menu.
3/24/2010
Page 106 of 131
Same solid, after deleting the edge blend.
It is possible, when modifying features, that a change will break another feature of the solid. When this happens, the item for the broken part of the solid appears in red in the feature tree. For example, if we increased the width of the underlying horizontal slab of the sample model then the chamfer join where the vertical components meet the horizontal part would not be able to be constructed. As well, part of the edge blend would disappear due to the break in continuity.
Left: Original solid with chamfers (1) and blends (2). Right: Modified solid, with chamfers and blends missing.
Looking at the feature tree, the missing features, displayed in red, are easily picked out.
3/24/2010
Page 107 of 131
Feature tree displaying the missing features in red.
While the features are not displayed on the solid, they still retain their positions in the feature tree. If later changes to the features of the solid would allow the missing features to again be constructed then they will reappear. For example, if the chamfer distance was reduced, then the missing features could again be constructed on the solid. Although you could not modify the chamfer by identifying it graphically on the solid, you still can access it from the feature tree.
Suppressing features on a solid
It can be useful at times to view, or work with, a solid that has some of its features suppressed. For example, you might want to view the solid without some features displayed, or you may want to suppress blending along edges of a slab to make it easier to select for manipulation, or modification. This function in effect lets you view or work with the solid at an earlier stage in its development, prior to adding various features. You can suppress features with options in Feature Manager.
To suppress the display of features on a solid
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the last feature that you want to have displayed. Remember that the features are listed with the newest feature at the top of the list. 2. In the right-click menu, select Display > Geometry At Feature. The solid updates to display without the features listed above the selected feature. This is a display function only, and updating the view will return the solid to its normal display. Where you want to disable the display of features on a more permanent basis, without deleting them, you can use another option that suppresses the features. For example, you may want to temporarily suppress some blends so that you can identify, graphically, edges of an underlying solid for manipulation or modification.
To suppress features on a solid
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the last feature that you want to have displayed. 2. In the right-click menu, select Suppress Feature > All Above Feature. The solid updates without the features listed above the selected feature. In the Feature Manager list box, suppressed features are shown greyed out.
3/24/2010
Page 108 of 131
Left: Original solid. Center and Right: The same solid with various features suppressed.
To suppress the display of a feature type on a solid
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the feature that you want to suppress. 2. In the right-click menu, select Suppress Feature > By Type. 3. In the Feature Type Suppression dialog box, turn on Suppress Feature Type. 4. Where the selected feature has an associated dimension, adjust the settings to define which features are suppressed (such as blends with a radius less than 25 mm). 5. Click OK. Changing the order of features When you create a solid with features, the order in which the features are created can be important. This can be demonstrated with a simple example. In this example, the solid is constructed from four slabs, one of which has a through cut in it. The slabs are merged into a single solid with the Union Feature tool.
The four slabs (left) used to create the solid (right).
Even though the cut through the center (vertical) slab is a through cut, it does not extend to the rest of the solid after the union with the other slabs. Looking at the feature tree for the solid, you can see that the reason for this is that the cut is associated only with Slab (2).
3/24/2010
Page 109 of 131
Feature Manager window with the Cut item highlighted.
For the cut to extend through the other parts of the merged solid, it would have to be created after the union. In a situation like this, you could extract the profile used for the cut. This then could be used to cut through the rest of the solid. A simpler method, however, is to reorder the feature tree, with the cut placed above the Union Solids entry. In this case, the union currently is at the top of the feature tree, so we need to relocate the cut to the top. This can be done as follows:
To move the cut feature to the top of the feature tree
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the Cut item. 2. In the right-click menu, select Re-order Tree > Move To Top. The feature moves to the top of the feature tree.
The solid updates, with the cut now extending through the entire solid.
After re-ordering the feature tree, the cut is at the top and extends through the whole solid.
Where you want to move a feature to a particular position in the feature tree (not at the top), you first mark the item and then move it. Continuing with our example, the cut could be relocated to be above the item Slab (4), so that it only passes through that part of the solid. This is done as follows:
To move a feature in the feature tree
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the item to be moved. 2. In the right-click menu, select Re-order Tree > Mark For Move. The feature is highlighted in yellow.
3/24/2010

Above.
Page 110 of 131
The feature is relocated in the feature tree and the solid updates to reflect the change.
After moving the cut feature, the solid updates to reflect the change.
Working with profiles Where a profile has been used in the construction of a solid, Feature Manager provides options for manipulating the profile. These provide similar functionality to that provided by the Modify Profile tool, in the Modify Feature task. A simple example will explain how these features work. Consider the solid shown in the following figure, which has been created by extruding a profile shape.
Modifying this solid consists of three procedures extract, modify, and replace the profile all of which can be achieved via Feature Manager.
To extract and modify the profile
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the feature containing the profile. 2. In the right-click menu, select Profile > Extract In Place. The profile is extracted from the solid. 3. Make the required modifications to the profile.
3/24/2010
Page 111 of 131
Solid with modified profile (shown in heavier line weight).
When the required modifications have been made to the extracted profile, you are ready to replace it in the solid.
Replace the profile
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the feature containing the profile. 2. In the right-click menu, select Profile > Replace. 3. Identify the modified profile. 4. Accept to complete the operation. The solid is regenerated, using the modified profile.
The regenerated solid.
Where the solid has been constructed using a dimension driven design (DDD) profile, then you have the option to edit the dimensions and thus modify the solid. This can be done without the need to first extract the profile. Following is an example showing the steps required to modify the dimension driven profile used to create the solid shown below.
The solid which was created by extruding a DDD profile.
To modify the solid via its DDD profile
1. In the feature tree, right-click on the feature containing the solid. 2. In the right-click menu, select Profile > Modify. The Modify Profile dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 112 of 131
3. Make the required changes to the profile dimensions. 4. Click OK. The Modify Profile dialog box closes and the solid is regenerated with the modified dimensions applied to the profile.
After modifying the DDD profile's dimensions, the solid is regenerated.
At times, it can be useful to view the dimensions associated with dimension driven design profiles that were used to create a solid. You can toggle the display of these dimensions from Feature Manager.
To display of a DDD profile's dimensions from Feature Manager
1. In the feature tree, right click on the Solid_header entry for the solid. 2. In the right-click menu, select Profile Dimensions > All On. The dimensions for all DDD profiles used, display on the solid.
3/24/2010

Similarly, you can select Profile Dimensions > All Off to turn off the display of the dimensions.
Page 113 of 131
Feature Modeling Tools

Feature-Based Solids Modeling task Primitive Feature Solids task Slab Feature Sphere Feature Cylinder Feature Cone Feature Torus Feature Wedge Feature Boolean Features task Union Feature Intersection Feature Difference Feature Profile Feature Solids task Extrude Feature Revolve Feature Tube Feature Skin Solid Feature Helix Feature Thicken Feature Modify Face Features task Modify Face Feature Taper Face Feature Extend Face Feature Spin Face Feature Remove Face Feature Replace Surface Feature Deform Face Features task Blend Feature Chamfer Feature Hole Feature Boss Feature Cut Feature Protrusion Feature Sweep Edge Feature Rib Feature Thin Shell Feature Manipulate Feature task Move Feature Rotate Feature Mirror Feature Array Feature Constrain Feature Delete Feature Modify Feature task Modify Parametric Solid or Feature Modify Profile Change Feature Attributes Re-Evaluate Tree Place Feature Cell Edit Feature Cell Feature Modeling Primary tool box Feature Manager Feature Manager window Feature Type Suppression dialog box Feature Modeling Variables Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box Variables tab Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box Equations tab Parameter Sets
3/24/2010

Parameter Sets dialog box
Page 114 of 131
Feature-Based Solids Modeling task

The Feature-Based Solids Modeling task contains tools for creating and manipulating features.
Each of the tools in the Feature-Based Solids Modeling task, apart from the Delete Feature tool, is also a member of a child task. When a tool is pointed to and the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tools in the child task can be selected.. The child task can be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in a child task, the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Feature-Based Solids Modeling task. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Feature-Based Solids Modeling task and identifies the corresponding child tasks and for each, the default representative tool:
Primitive Feature Solids task (Slab Feature)
3/24/2010

Boolean Features task (Union Feature)
Page 115 of 131
Profile Feature Solids task (Extrude Feature)
Modify Face Features task (Modify Face Feature)
Features task (Blend Feature)
Manipulate Feature task (Move Feature)
Delete Feature
Modify Feature task (Modify Parametric Solid or Feature)
3D Utility task (Align Faces)
DD Design task (Sketch Profile)
3/24/2010
Page 116 of 131
Surface Modeling task (Construct Surface by Section or Network)
Primitive Feature Solids task

The tools in the Primitive Feature Solids task are used to place simple 3D parametric solids slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, torus, or wedge.
Primitive Feature Solids task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Primitive Feature Solids task
Place a parametric slab. Slab Feature
Place a parametric sphere. Sphere Feature
Place a parametric cylinder. Cylinder Feature
Place a parametric cone. Cone Feature
Place a parametric torus. Torus Feature
Place a parametric wedge-shaped object. Wedge Feature
Boolean Features task

The Boolean Features task contains tools to construct parametric solids by uniting, intersecting, or subtracting existing solids. With each tool you can perform multiple operations without the need to accept each before selecting another solid.
3/24/2010
Page 117 of 131
Boolean Features task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Boolean Features task
Construct a single parametric solid that is the union of two or more solids. Union Feature
Construct a single parametric solid that is the intersection of two or more solids Intersection Feature
Construct a single parametric solid by subtracting one or more solids from another solid. Difference Feature
Profile Feature Solids task

The Profile Feature Solids task contains tools for creating parametric solids from existing profile elements.
Profile Feature Solids task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Profile Feature Solids task
Create a parametric solid by extruding a profile element or cell. Extrude Feature
Create a parametric solid by revolving a profile element or cell. Revolve Feature
Create a parametric solid by extruding a profile element, or cell, along a trace curve. Tube Feature
Create a parametric solid with its shape defined by two or more section profiles. Skin Solid Feature
Create a parametric solid by extruding a profile element, or cell, along a helical trace curve. Helix Feature
3/24/2010
Page 118 of 131
Create a parametric solid by adding thickening to one or both sides of an existing surface. Thicken Feature
Modify Face Features task

The Modify Face Features task contains tools that let you taper, extend, spin, remove, or replace faces of a solid.
Modify Face Features task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Modify Face Features task
Taper, extend, spin, remove, or replace one or more faces of a solid. Performs the same functions as other individual tools in the task, apart from Deform Face. Modify Face Feature
Taper one or more faces of a solid. Taper Face Feature
Extend a face of a solid. Extend Face Feature
Rotate the face of a solid. Spin Face Feature
Remove a face from a solid. Remove Face Feature
Replace surfaces on a solid, to align them to another surface. Replace Surface Feature
Deform a surface, or a face on a solid Deform Face
Features task
The tools in the Features task are used to add features to a solid. Complex designs can be created by starting with a basic solid to which you add the features required to finish it.
3/24/2010
Page 119 of 131
Features task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Features task
Blend (fillet) edges, vertices, or faces of a solid. Blend Feature
Chamfer one or more edges of a solid. Chamfer Feature
Create a simple, countersunk, or counterbore hole in a solid. Hole Feature
Construct a circular protrusion (boss) on a solid. Boss Feature
Place a cut in a solid. Cut Feature
Construct a protrusion on a solid. Protrusion Feature
Construct a cut or protrusion along an edge of a solid. Sweep Edge Feature
Construct a rib on a solid. Rib Feature
Hollow out a solid to create a solid with walls of constant or varied thickness. Thin Shell Feature
Manipulate Feature task

The tools in the Manipulate Feature task are used to manipulate most features holes, circular bosses, cuts, protrusions, or ribs.
3/24/2010

Manipulate Feature task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Manipulate Feature task
Page 120 of 131
Move or copy a feature. Move Feature
Rotate a feature. Rotate Feature
Mirror a feature. Mirror Feature
Create a rectangular or polar array of a feature. Array Feature
Constrain a feature relative to other features or entities in a solid. Constrain Feature
Modify Feature task

The tools in the Modify Feature task are used to modify features or profiles of existing solids. When modifying features or profiles, dialog boxes let you edit the parameters that were used initially to create the feature or profile of the solid.
Modify Feature task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Modify Feature task
Modify a parametric solid or feature by editing its parameters. Modify Parametric Solid or Feature
Modify a profile, used to create a solid, by editing its parameters. Modify Profile
Change the attributes of one or more features of a solid. Change Feature Attributes
3/24/2010
Page 121 of 131
Re-evaluate all nodes in a feature tree and synchronize the model. Re-Evaluate Tree
Place a feature cell. Place Feature Cell
Edit the parameters of a feature cell Edit Feature Cell
Feature Modeling Primary tool box

The Feature Modeling Primary tool box is a launch point for commonly used Feature Modeling management tools.
To
Select in the Feature Modeling Primary tool box
Open the Feature Manager dialog box. Feature Manager
Open the Feature Modeling Global Variables dialog box. Feature Modeling Variables
Open the Parameter Sets dialog box. Parameter Set Table
Key-in: DIALOG MODELER PRIMARY
Dimension-driven Design
Dimension-driven design (DDD) is the process by which elements are drawn with respect to previously determined dimensions, and/or relationships between dimensions. Taking a very simple case, for example, you may have a rectangular element in which you want the width always to be half the length. You can create a dimension-driven cell, with this constraint defined. When you place the cell, you need only define the length and the width is determined from the constraint formula. Similarly, when you use the DDD tools to modify the length, the width also is modified to maintain the relationship. Creating Dimension-driven Cells DD Design task Profile task Sketch Profile Convert Element to Profile
3/24/2010

Parameter Constraints task Convert Dimension to Constraint Assign Equation Assign Variable to Dimensional Constraint Attach Element task Construct Attached Line String or Shape Construct Attached Arc Construct Attached Ellipse or Circle Attach Element to Point Align Element with Point and Line Attach Pen Element to Point Geometric Constraints task Constrain Elements Make Construction or Parameter Invariant Constrain Point on Construction Constrain Point at Intersection Constrain Two Points to be Coincident Fix Point at Location Equate Parameters or Constructions Evaluate Constraints task Re-solve Constraints Modify and Re-solve Constraints Describe Selected Construction or Constraint Modify Constraint task Break Constrained Geometry Trim Constrained Geometry Fillet Constrained Geometry Chamfer Constrained Geometry Modify Value of Dimension or Variable Dimension-Driven Design dialog box
Page 122 of 131
Creating Dimension-driven Cells

A dimension-driven cell is one that is constrained by dimensions and/or formulae. It can serve as a template for a family of cells that can be derived solved for a specified set of dimension values. Constraints and constructions represent a dimension-driven cell's underlying structure. A derived cell is a cell in a design that is derived from a dimension-driven cell. Dimension-driven design tools are used to specify constraints and constructions that determine the size, extent, or shape of associated elements in the model. All dimension-driven design tools are in the DD Design task. The dimensions and constants on which a dimension-driven cell are based can be modified with the Dimension-Driven Design dialog box.
The Dimension-Driven Design dialog box is also used to place derived cells.
Concepts and terminology This section has definitions of basic terminology and other introductory information about dimension-driven cell creation.
Important terminology
The following terms are important for understanding dimension-driven cell creation: Constraint a piece of information that limits or controls a construction. Construction an element (point, infinite line, circle, ellipse, or B-spline curve's control polygon) that lets constraints locate, delimit or arrange other elements. For example, a construction line can be the center line of a symmetric design. Well-constrained a set of constructions that is completely defined by constraints or is constant and has no redundant constraints. There is generally more than one feasible solution for a set of well-constrained constructions, but the choice is usually clear.
3/24/2010
Page 123 of 131
Under-constrained a set of constructions that is not completely defined by constraints and is not constant. An under-constrained construction has many possible solutions and is unacceptably ambiguous. Redundant A constraint that is applied to a set of constructions that are already well-constrained. A redundant constraint may or may not be inconsistent with other constraints, but, in either case, it adds no useful information. Degrees of freedom Number that sums up a dimension-driven cell's ambiguity. Solve To construct the design from a given set of constraints and show what remains to be defined.
Constructions are elements with the class construction and special symbology.
Constraints
Constraints say what characteristics a dimension-driven cell must have, but not necessarily how to arrive at a design with those characteristics. How to compute geometry in the light of constraints is the task of solving. Most constraint relationships apply to the design's essential layout or general structure. The design's details are located and shaped by its structure. For example, if a dimension-driven cell is generally symmetrical, it has constraints that relate elements to a center line in some way. The following types of constraints can be created:

Location A constraint that fixes the location of a point in the design plane. Geometric A constraint that controls the position or orientation of two or more elements relative to each other. Dimensional A constraint that is a controlled by a dimension. Algebraic An equation that expresses a relationship among variables.
When a constraint is added, modified, or deleted, the model is resolved an attempt is made to reconstruct the design so that the new or modified constraint, as well as all existing constraints, are satisfied.
If a solution is found, the affected elements are updated and redisplayed. The solution may affect elements that are not obviously or locally related to the new constraint. If no solution is possible, the message Not Solved and graphical cues as to where the trouble is are displayed. The design's geometry is not updated, but the constraint is accepted anyway. If MicroStation reports Not Solved even though the new constraint is not redundant and you are sure that a solution is in fact possible, it may help to re-arrange the geometry of the model to look more like the solution you want and then re-solve.
Adding a new constraint removes ambiguity from the design. (Deleting a constraint has the opposite effect.) A constraint can apply only to a construction. An element is converted to the equivalent construction when a constraint is applied to it.
Most location and geometric constraints are assigned the class Construction. You can define the level and class of dimensions, location constraints, and equations. In the future, you will be able to specify the level, symbology, and class of all constraints and constructions.
Diagnosing an ambiguous dimension-driven cell
The symbology of constrained elements and of the constraint and dimension elements themselves alert you to ambiguities and inconsistencies in the design.

If a construction or variable is completely defined by constraints or is constant, it is well-constrained and is displayed in solid white. If a construction or variable is not completely defined by constraints, it is under-constrained and is displayed dashed in yellow.
3/24/2010
Page 124 of 131
If a constraint is applied to a set of construction that are already well-constrained, it is redundant and is displayed dashed in red.
Valid constraints are displayed as follows:

Constraint Dimensions Equations Displayed In solid white white
Other geometric constraints solid blue
The remaining ambiguity in a design is summed up by a number called degrees of freedom. Each new construction adds degrees of freedom as follows:
Construction Degrees of Freedom Added Point Line Circle Ellipse 2 up to 4 up to 3 up to 5
Each valid constraint removes one or more degrees of freedom. A well-constrained design has zero degrees of freedom and no redundant constraints. All constructions are well-constrained (displayed in white). If the number of degrees of freedom is not zero, then parts of the design are under-constrained (displayed in yellow). When a constraint is added, the remaining degrees of freedom are displayed, followed by the message Over-constrained if there are any redundant constraints. Equation syntax An equation consists of an algebraic expression (or just a variable), optionally followed by an equals = sign and another algebraic expression. For example, a + b = c^2 is an equation relating a, b, and c. If just one expression is given, = 0 is assumed. For example, the equations a + b = 2 and a + b - 2 mean the same thing. Constant expressions are valid in equations. A constant expression is an algebraic expression involving numbers, operators, built-in functions and built-in constants (like pi).
Algebraic expression
An algebraic expression can contain variable identifiers, numbers, arithmetic operators, and built-in functions and constants, according to the usual rules of algebra. Formally, the grammar of an algebraic expression is as follows:
Clause exp2: exp1: exp0: op2: op1: const: exp1 [ [op2] exp2 ]* [op1]* exp0 `(' exp `)' | variable | number | const binary arithmetic operator unary operator or built-in function numerical constant reserved word Grammar
number: integer, floating point, exponential, or mu:su:pu notation variable: user-defined variable identifier
[ ] denotes an optional clause * means zero or more clauses
3/24/2010

| separates alternatives quotes `' denote a literal character.) Fractional clauses are valid in algebraic expressions. A fractional clause has the following grammar: `#' integer `/' integer `#' (example: #2 1/2#)
Page 125 of 131
In number clauses, distances and coordinates can be expressed in working units (MU:SU:PU:), decimal, or fractional notation. The multiplication operator * is not assumed. Omitting an operator is a grammatical error.
White space and comments
White space and comments can appear anywhere in an expression and are ignored. A comment is a sequence of characters enclosed in brackets or braces, as follows: `[' ...`]' | `{' ... `}' | `/*' ... `*/'
Arithmetic operators
The following arithmetic operators are available:

Operator cos sin tan acos asin atan sqrt + * / % ^ = cosine sine tangent arccosine arcsine arctangent square root addition subtraction multiplication division (floating point) modulo exponent (e.g., a ^ 2 squares the value of a) equal to Built-in numerical constants Operation Performed arithmetic negation
The following built-in numerical constant is available:

Constant Means pi [pi ] Numbers
A number can be expressed in integer, floating point or exponential notation, followed by an optional units keyword, or in working units notation (mu:su:pu). Units keywords are as follows:
Keyword deg Units Denoted degrees (for angles) Variable names
3/24/2010

embedded blanks. Variable names are case-sensitive.
Page 126 of 131
A variable name cannot be the same as a built-in function or constant, but may contain a reserved word as part of its name. For example, if sin is a built-in function, then sin is not a valid variable name, but sin_of_x is valid. Reserved names are not case sensitive, so Sin is not a valid variable name. A variable's name must be unique within the cell or sub-design in which it is used.
DD Design task
The DD Design task contains tools for creating and modifying dimension-driven profiles and cells plus dimensioning tools.
DD Design task (opened as tool box)
Each of the tools in the DD Design task is also a member of a child task. When a tool is pointed to and the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tools in the child task can be selected.. The child task can be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in a child task, the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the DD Design task. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the DD Design task and identifies the corresponding child tasks and for each, the default representative tool:
Profile task (Sketch Profile)
Parameter Constraints task (Convert Dimension to Constraint)
Attach Element task (Construct Attached Line String or Shape)
3/24/2010

Geometric Constraints task (Constrain Elements)
Page 127 of 131
Evaluate Constraints task (Re-solve Constraints)
Modify Constraint task (Break Constrained Geometry)
Profile task
The tools in the Profile task are used to sketch a profile and convert an element to a profile.
Profile task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Profile task
Sketch a geometrically-constrained profile. Sketch Profile
Convert a line string shape or complex shape to a geometrically-constrained profile. Convert Element to Profile
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DDDDRAW
Parameter Constraints task

The tools in the Parameter Constraints task are used to apply dimensional constraints to constructions.
Parameter Constraints task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Parameter Constraints task
3/24/2010
Page 128 of 131
Convert an associative dimension into a constraint. Convert Dimension to Constraint
Assign an equation to a model. Assign Equation
Assign a constant or variable to a dimensional constraint. Assign Variable to Dimensional Constraint
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DDDPARM [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Attach Element task

The tools in the Attach Element task are used to construct an arc, line string, or shape that is attached to one or more constructions. Only the elements size, shape, or location are modified when solving.
Attach Element task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Attach Element task
Construct an attached line sting or shape. Construct Attached Line String or Shape
Construct an attached arc. Construct Attached Arc
Construct an attached ellipse or circle. Construct Attached Ellipse or Circle
Attach an element's location to a construction or constraint. Attach Element to Point
Attach an element's location and rotation to a constraint. Align Element with Point and Line
Cause an element to track a point, ellipse, or constraint. Attach Pen Element to Point
3/24/2010

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DDDATTACH [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Page 129 of 131
Geometric Constraints task

The tools in the Geometric Constraints task are used to create geometric constraints.
Geometric Constraints task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Geometric Constraints task
Constrain geometry to be tangent, perpendicular, parallel, or fix angle to horizontal or vertical. Constrain Elements
Make a variable a constant or make a construction invariant (not recalculated when solving). Make Construction or Parameter Invariant
Constrain a point (or the center of a circle or an ellipse) to lie on a construction. Constrain Point On Construction
Constrain a point to the intersection of two constructions. Constrain Point at Intersection
Constrain two points to be coincident, two circles to the same center, or a point to the center of a circle. Constrain Two Points to be Coincident
Fix the location of a point in the design. Fix Point at Location
Equate the endpoints of constructions. Equate Parameters or Constructions
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DDDCONSTRAINT [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Evaluate Constraints task

The tools in the Evaluate Constraints task are used to evaluate, modify, and re-solve constraints for dimension-driven profiles.
3/24/2010
Page 130 of 131
Evaluate Constraints task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Evaluate Constraints task
Re-establish dimensions and other constraints in a parametric profile that has been modified with conventional element modification tools. Re-solve Constraints
Modify a dimension-driven profile. Modify and Re-solve Constraints
See a visual representation of relationships between constraints in a profile. Describe Selected Construction or Constraint
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DDDMODEL [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Modify Constraint task

The tools in the Modify Constraint task can be used to break or trim constrained geometry, add fillet and chamfer constraints to constrained geometry, and modify dimension or variable values.
Modify Constraint task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Modify Constraint task
Break an element between constraints so that additional geometry and constraints can be inserted. Break Constrained Geometry
Trim two elements that share a common intersection. Trim Constrained Geometry
Add a fillet between two constrained elements. Fillet Constrained Geometry
Add a chamfer between two constrained elements. Chamfer Constrained Geometry
3/24/2010
Page 131 of 131
Change the value of a dimensional constraint or variable. Modify Value of Dimension or Variable
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DDDMODIFY [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 1 of 80
Detailing Detailing Designs Designs

Dimensioning Annotations Tagging Elements Composing Sheet Models with References Using Redline Files
Dimensioning
Once drawing objects have been established at the proper size, scale, and orientation, annotation generally begins. Adding dimensions, symbols, and notes to a drawing (sometimes referred to as detailing) conveys intent when it is time for the drawing to become something real. A dimension is a label in a design showing a linear, angular, or radial measurement. MicroStation has many dimensioning tools. For example, the Element Dimensioning tool can be used to quickly dimension most elements. Dimension Elements Controlling the Display of Dimensions Dimension Styles Associating Dimensions With Elements Editing Dimension Text During Placement Dimensioning task Element Dimensioning Linear Dimensioning Angular Dimensioning Ordinate Dimensioning Change Dimension Match Dimension Settings Reassociate Dimension Dimension Tools tool box Linear Dimensions tool box Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points Dimension Size Perpendicular to Element (DIMENSION SIZE PERPENDICULAR ELEMENT) Dimension Symmetric Dimension Half Dimension Chamfer Angular Dimensions tool box Dimension Angle from X-Axis Dimension Angle from Y-Axis Dimension Angle Chamfer Radial Dimensions tool box Dimension Radial Dimension Diameter Dimension Diameter Perpendicular Dimension Radius (Extended Leader) Place Center Mark Dimension Radius/Diameter Note Dimension Arc Distance Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box Insert (Dimension) Vertex Delete (Dimension) Vertex Modify Dimension Location Geometric Tolerance Geometric Tolerance dialog box Dimensioning Key-ins Changing Dimension Associations Modifying a Dimension Element Dimension Text dialog box Dimension Audit
Dimension Elements
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hhAD7B.htm
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
A dimension can be placed with the dimensioning tools as separate lines, line strings, and text or as one dimension element.
Page 2 of 80
Dimension element components: 1 Extension Line, 2 Dimension Line, 3 Dimension Text, 4 Terminator
A dimension can have the following components:

A dimension line Dimension text Extension lines Dimension line terminators A prefix or suffix (center, diameter, radius, etc.)
Extension lines, terminators, and prefix or suffix are optional. Display of dimensions can be turned on or off in each view.
To break up a dimension element into its component lines, line string, ellipse, arc, or text elements, use the Drop Element tool in the Groups tool box or the Drop Dimension Element tool in the Drop tool box.
Advantages of dimension elements Dimension elements have the following advantages:

A dimension element can be modified easily. A dimension element can be associated with the element or elements it dimensions. Such an associated dimension updates automatically when any of the dimensioned elements are modified. Using dimension elements can significantly reduce the size of a design file that has many dimensions, since a dimension element is usually smaller than the corresponding individual elements. When the Use Working Units (Units tab of the Dimension Styles dialog box) option is on, if the working units in a design file are changed, dimension elements will display dimensions based on the new working units.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Controlling the Display of Dimensions
The View Attributes dialog box is used to enable or disable the display of dimension elements on a per view basis.
To turn on or off the display of dimensions in one or more views
Page 3 of 80
View Attributes dialog box
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn Dimensions on or off. 4. Repeat steps 23 for additional views.
To turn on or off the display of dimensions in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn Dimensions on or off.
Dimension Styles
The Dimension Styles dialog box lets you manage dimension styles. A dimension style is a saved set of dimensioning settings.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 4 of 80
The options are organized under tabs, and a preview area lets you quickly view style modifications. Dimension styles can be stored in either the open DGN file or a DGN library. You can define dimension styles and apply them to dimension elements during placement. Dimension styles can be created, customized, and saved for easy recall. Changes made to a dimension style propagate to all dimension previously set with the dimension style in the DGN file. Dimension styles can be stored in DGN library and used in a DGN file. Changes made to the dimension style (from a dimension style library) within a DGN file are called overrides if the style is not saved. Dimensions placed with overrides do not change if the style is changed and saved. To remove the override, the Change Dimension tool can be used to match the Dimension Style. The active dimension style is used by the Dimensioning tools. Working with dimension styles The Dimension Styles dialog box provides tools for creating and managing dimension styles.
To create a dimension style
1. Open the Dimension Styles dialog box. 2. (Optional) In the Dimension Styles list box, select a dimension style. Click the Set Style Active icon. The new style that you are about to create will inherit the settings of the active dimension style. 3. Click the Create Style icon. An Untitled style is added to the Dimension Styles list box. 4. Enter the name for the new dimension style. The dimension style is created, using the settings from the active dimension style.
To make a dimension style the active style
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select a dimension style from the list box. 2. Click the Set Style Active icon. or Double-click on dimension style name. The dimension style becomes the active style. It is listed in the dialog box title bar, and becomes the default dimension style for the Dimensioning tools.
To save a dimension style to the DGN file
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select a dimension style from the list box. 2. Click the Save Style icon. The selected dimension style is saved to the open DGN file. All blue (modified) settings, as well as the dimension style name, change to black.
To copy a dimension style
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select a dimension style from the list box. 2. Click the Copy Style icon. A copy of the style is added to the Dimension Styles list box. 3. Enter the name for the dimension style.
To remap dimension styles
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select the dimension style to be the source of the remap. 2. Rightclick in the Dimension Styles pane of the Dimension Styles dialog box. The right-click menu opens. 3. Select Remap Elements
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
The Remap Elements to Dimension Style dialog box opens. 4. Select the dimension style to be remapped from the Destination drop down menu. 5. Click OK.
To delete dimension styles
Page 5 of 80
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select one or more dimension styles from the list box. 2. Click the Delete Style icon. If the selected dimension style(s) are not being used in the file, the dimension styles are deleted from the DGN file. 3. (Optional) If the dimension style(s) is in use in the file, the Alert dialog box opens
4. (Optional) To delete dimension styles one by one, click Yes. The first selected dimension style is deleted. You can click Yes to delete each subsequent selected dimension style, or click No to skip each selected dimension style you do not want to delete. 5. To delete all selected dimension styles, click Yes To All. All selected dimension styles are deleted. Clicking Cancel will abort the delete option on all selected dimension styles
To reset a dimension style
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select one or more dimension styles from the list box.Click the Reset Style icon. The settings for each dimension style are reset to the last saved settings.
To modify settings for a single dimension style
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select a dimension style from the list box. 2. Modify the settings as needed.
The Advanced tab includes all the settings from the other tabs, plus additional settings for advanced users. To modify settings on this tab, set the Mode to Edit. Select a setting, then click in the Value column to enter a new setting.
To modify settings for multiple dimension styles
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select multiple dimension styles from the list box. 2. Modify settings as needed. 3. From the Style menu, select Save All. The modified dimension settings are saved to the selected dimension styles.
To compare two dimension styles
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, click the Advanced tab. 2. Set the Mode to Comparison. 3 In the list box select two dimension styles
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
All dimension style settings are listed. The values for properties with different values are displayed in bold text.
Page 6 of 80
Comparison between two dimension styles.
To display differences between two dimension styles
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, click the Advanced tab. 2. Set the Mode to Differences. 3. In the list box, select two dimension styles. Only the dimension style settings with different values are listed.
Differences between two dimension styles.
To turn the preview pane on and off
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, click Toggle Preview. or Right-click in the Dimension Styles dialog box. From the menu, select Preview. or In the Dimension Styles dialog box's View menu, choose Preview.
To control dimensions displayed in the preview pane
Page 7 of 80
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, right-click in the preview pane. 2. From the menu, turn on or off the types of dimensions to display in the preview.
To turn the Dimension Styles list box on and off
1. Right-click in the Dimension Styles dialog box. From the menu, select Styles. or In the Dimension Styles dialog box's View menu, choose Styles. Working with dimension style libraries Dimension styles can be stored in a DGN library. A DGN library that contains dimension styles is also known as a dimension style library. If the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable points to the dimension style library, the Dimension Styles dialog box displays dimension styles in this dimension style library. You can save and modify local copies of these dimension styles. You should avoid storing in DGN libraries two dimension styles with the same name. However, if the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable points to more than one dimension style library, and they contain dimension styles with the same name, the dimension style in the DGN library that is processed first will appear in the Dimension Styles dialog box.
To save and modify a dimension style from a library
1. Make sure that the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable points to the dimension style (DGN) library.
If necessary, close and reopen MicroStation to set the variable.
2. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select a dimension style library from the list box. 3. Click Save Style to save a local copy of the style. 4. Modify the settings as needed. 5. Click Save Style to save a local copy of the modified style.
To compare a local dimension style with the dimension style library
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, click the Advanced tab. 2. Set the Mode to Comparison. 3. Turn on Compare with Library. 4. In the list box, select a local dimension style that is based on a dimension style library. These types of dimension styles are displayed with a filled book icon and a delta symbol. For both the local style and the library style, all dimension style settings (properties) are listed. The values for properties with different values are displayed in bold text.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 8 of 80
To display differences between a local dimension style and the dimension style library
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, click the Advanced tab. 2. Set the Mode to Difference. 3. Turn on Compare with Library. 4. In the list box, select a local dimension style that is based on a dimension style library. These types of dimension styles are displayed with a filled book icon with a delta symbol. For both the local style and the library style, only the dimension style settings (properties) with different values are listed.
To import dimension styles from another file or DGN library
1. From the Dimension Styles dialog box's Style menu, choose Import. The Dimension Style Import dialog box opens. 2. From the list box, choose the DGN, DGNLib, or DWG file containing the dimension style to import. Click OK. The imported styles are displayed in the Dimension Styles list. If a dimension style in a DGN library changes, local dimension styles based on the dimension style library are not automatically updated. To update local dimension styles to reflect the changes in the dimension style library, use the Update from Library icon.
To update dimension styles from dimension style libraries
1. In the Dimension Styles dialog box, select one or more local dimension styles that are based on a dimension style library. These
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
types of dimension styles are displayed with a filled book icon with a delta symbol. 2. Click the Update from Library icon. The local dimension styles are updated to match the library dimension styles.
Page 9 of 80
Associating Dimensions With Elements

An association point in a dimension element is one that is associated with a point in the dimensioned element(s). Association points are most useful for points that are connected to the element being dimensioned, such as dimension endpoints.
The origin of Shared cells or the vertices of a multi-line can also be associated with points on other elements.
Association Lock To place association points, Association Lock and Snap Lock must be on. (Turning Association Lock on automatically turns Snap Lock on.) Dimensions must be placed as dimension elements to have association points. Association Lock can be set in the tool setting controls for dimensioning tools as well as in the Settings menu's Locks submenu.
To place association points
1. Turn on Association Lock.
2. If using the Element Dimensioning tool, place the dimension normally. The Element Dimensioning tool creates all possible associations automatically if Association Lock is on. Snapping is unnecessary. If using dimensioning tools other than Element Dimensioning, snap tentative points to the element or elements being dimensioned to create associations.
Editing Dimension Text During Placement

It can be useful to edit dimension text while placing dimensions, particularly non-associative dimensions.
To edit text when placing a dimension
1. When you are placing the dimension, move the input focus to the Key-in window. 2. When the message Press <Enter> to edit dimension text appears in the status bar, press <Enter>. (The time to do this is noted in Dimensioning task for each dimensioning tool.) The Dimension Text dialog box opens. All fields are marked with an asterisk (*). 3. Edit the desired field(s). 4. Click OK.
Text entered in the Dimension Text dialog box is not associative it does not change when the dimension element is modified.
Di
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
The tools in the Dimensioning task are used to perform general dimensioning.
Page 10 of 80
Dimensioning task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Dimensioning task
Dimension an element. Creates all associations automatically, if Association is on. Element Dimensioning
Dimension linear size (distance), with each dimension computed from the endpoint of the previous one and placed in line (chained). Linear Dimensioning
Dimension an angle. Angular Dimensioning
Label distances along an axis from a common point of origin. Ordinate Dimensioning
Change a dimension to the active dimensioning attributes. Change Dimension
Set the active dimension settings to the dimension attributes of a dimension element. Match Dimension Settings
Recreate a linear or radial dimension's association to an element. Reassociate Dimension
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DIMENSION [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
To ensure accurate dimensions, snap to the reference elements and points when using dimensioning tools. However, snapping is unnecessary with the Element Dimensioning tool.
AccuDraw, if active, is automatically disabled upon the selection of a dimensioning tool.
To use reference scaling in a dimension, snap to an element in the reference when entering the first data point. The Reference Scale is set in the Dimension Styles dialog box (Units tab).
When accessed as a subtask of the DD Design task, the Dimensioning task contains only the following tools:
Element Dimensioning
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs

Page 11 of 80
Linear Dimensioning Angular Dimensioning
Dimension Tools tool box
The Dimension Tools tool box contains tool boxes related to certain types of dimensioning.
To Use tools in the
Create linear dimensions.
Linear Dimensions tool box
Create angular dimensions.
Angular Dimensions tool box
Create radial dimensions.
Radial Dimensions tool box
Perform dimensioning that is not specific to linear, angular or radial dimensioning.
Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DIMTOOL [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
The Dimension Tools tool box is accessible only through the Tool Boxes dialog box (Tools > Tool Boxes).
Linear Dimensions tool box
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Tools in the Linear Dimensions tool box are used to create specialized types of linear dimensions.
To
Page 12 of 80
Select in the Linear Dimensions tool box
Dimension the linear distance between two points and orient the dimension's y-axis interactively. Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points Dimension a distance perpendicularly from an element (at the point at which the element Key in DIMENSION SIZE PERPENDICULAR is identified). ELEMENT.
Dimension symmetric by defining center (non-associative). Dimension Symmetric
Dimension one-sided by defining center. Dimension Half
Place a dimension on a chamfer. Dimension Chamfer
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DIMLINEAR [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
Angular Dimensions tool box
Tools in the Angular Dimensions tool box are used to create specialized angular dimensions.
To Select in the Angular Dimensions tool box
Dimension the angle between a line or segment and the view x-axis. Dimension Angle from X-Axis
Dimension the angle between a line or segment and the view y-axis. Dimension Angle from Y-Axis
Dimension angle of a chamfer. Dimension Angle Chamfer
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DIMANGULAR [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Radial Dimensions tool box
Tools in the Radial Dimensions tool box are used to create radial dimensions.
Page 13 of 80
To
Select in the Radial Dimensions tool box
Dimension the radius or diameter of a circle or circular arc or to place a center mark at the center of a circle or circular arc. Dimension Radial
Dimension the diameter of a circle or a circular arc. Dimension Diameter
Dimension the diameter of a circle or a circular arc, with the dimension placed perpendicular to the plane of the circle or arc and with tangent extension lines extending to the circle or arc. Dimension Diameter Perpendicular
Dimension the radius of a circle or a circular arc with an extended leader. Dimension Radius (Extended Leader)
Place a center mark at the center of a circle or circular arc. Place Center Mark
Place a note dimension on a circle or circular arc. Dimension Radius/Diameter Note
Dimension the distance between two arcs that have the same center. Dimension Arc Distance
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DIMRADIAL [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box
Tools in the Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box are used to perform dimensioning that is not specific to linear, angular, or radial dimensioning.
To Select in the Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 14 of 80
Add an extension line to a dimension element. Insert Dimension Vertex
Remove an extension line from a dimension element. Delete Dimension Vertex
Move dimension text or modify the extension line length of a dimension element. Modify Dimension Location
Build a feature control frame with geometric tolerance symbols. Geometric Tolerance
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DIMMISC [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
Dimensioning Key-ins
These key-ins are used for specialized dimensioning tasks.
To Turn an individual extension line(s) off or on. Change the view that determines the orientation of text in a dimension element. Change the justification of dimension text. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION EXTENSION CHANGE DIMENSION VIEW CHANGE DIMENSION JUSTIFICATION
Break up the dimension elements contained in a fence into lines, line strings, ellipses, arcs, and text. FENCE DROP DIMENSION
Turning off and on individual extension lines You can turn a single extension line off or on, turn all of a dimension's extension lines off or on, or toggle all of a dimension element's extension lines.
To turn off a dimension's extension line
1. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION EXTENSION OFF. 2. Identify the extension line. 3. Accept the change.
To turn off all of a dimension's extension lines
1. Select all of the dimension element's extension lines by dragging around them with the selection tool. 2. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION EXTENSION OFF. 3. Accept the change.
To turn on a dimension's extension line
1. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION EXTENSION ON.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 15 of 80
2. Identify the extension line. An extension line that is off is not displayed, of course. To identify it, snap to a point between the end of the dimension line and the point on the element that it dimensions. If you have difficulty locating the extension line, toggle all the dimension's extension lines, and turn off the one that you want on, and toggle all the extension lines again. When the extension line is identified, it is highlighted. 3. Accept the change.
To turn on all of a dimension's extension lines
1. Select all the dimension element's extension lines by dragging around them with the selection tool. 2. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION EXTENSION ON. 3. Accept the change.
To toggle all of a dimension's extension lines
1. Select all the dimension element's extension lines by dragging around them with the selection tool. 2. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION EXTENSION. All extension lines that were on are turned off, and all extension lines that were off are turned on. 3. Accept the change. Changing the view with which dimension text is oriented By default, the orientation of text in a dimension element is controlled by the view in which the first data point was entered when the element was placed.
To change the view that determines the orientation of dimension text
1. Select the dimension element(s). 2. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION VIEW <view_number>. View_number specifies the view with which the text in the selected dimension(s) is to be oriented.
Alternative Method To change the view that determines the orientation of dimension text
1. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION VIEW <view_number>. 2. Identify the dimension element. 3. Accept the change. Changing dimension text justification The CHANGE DIMENSION JUSTIFICATION key-in lets you change the justification of text in a dimension to center, left, or right. The fromstyle option returns the text to the default location from the dimension style.
To change text in a dimension to left justified
1. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION JUSTIFICATION <LEFT | CENTER | RIGHT | FROMSTYLE>. 2. Identify the dimension element. 3. Accept the change.
Changing Dimension Associations

It i ibl t h i ti di i i ti d
di
ith
th di
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
To drop an association point
Page 16 of 80
1. In the Drop tool box, select the Drop Association tool.
2. Identify the extension line that is associated to an element. 3. Accept the dropping of the association.
To re-associate an extension line to an element
1. Turn on Association Lock. 2. In the Modify tool box, select the Modify Element tool. (In the Main tool box, Modify Element is the default representative of the Modify tool box.)
3. Identify the extension line whose association with an element has been dropped. 4. Snap to the point on the element to which the extension line is to be associated. 5. Accept the association of the extension line to the snapped point on the element.
If a dimension element is dropped, all associations are dropped and can be restored only by placing a new dimension.
Modifying a Dimension Element

The modifications covered here can be performed only on dimension elements; they do not work on dimensions that are placed as primitive elements. The Change Dimension tool is used to change the symbology of a dimension element to the active settings.
The Drop Element tool or the Drop Dimension Element tool in the Drop tool box is used to convert a dimension element to individual elements.
Working with extension lines The points that determine what a dimension element is dimensioning can be thought of as the vertices of the dimension element. As explained in the next two procedures, you can add and delete these points with the Insert (Dimension) Vertex and Delete (Dimension) Vertex tools in the Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box. A dimension element must have at least two points or vertices, just as a line must have two end points or vertices. Therefore, you cannot delete one of the extension lines of a dimension with only two extension lines.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 17 of 80
1. In the Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box, select the Insert (Dimension) Vertex tool its tool tip reads Insert Dimension.
2. Identify the dimension element. 3. Enter a data point at the location at which you want the extension line. 4. Accept the new extension line.
Inserting an extension line
To remove an extension line from a dimension element
1. In the Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions tool box, select the Delete (Dimension) Vertex tool its tool tip reads Remove Dimension.
2. Identify the extension line. 3. Accept the deletion of the extension line.
To move an extension line
1. In the Modify tool box, select the Modify Element tool.
2. Identify the extension line. The extension line dynamically displays as you move the pointer. 3. Enter a data point to position the extension line. 4. Reset to finish.
To modify the length of an extension line
2. Identify the extension line. The extension lines dynamically display as you move the pointer. 3. Enter a data point to define the new extension line length. Working with dimension text
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
To move dimension text
Page 18 of 80
2. Identify the dimension text. The dimension text dynamically displays as you move the pointer. 3. Enter a data point to position the dimension text. 4. Reset to finish.
Text can be modified only along the axis on which it was placed.
To edit text in a dimension element
1. In the Text task, select the Edit Text tool.
2. Identify the dimension text. The Text Editor window opens. All text that is generated from the geometry of the element(s) dimensioned is represented by an asterisk (*). 3. Edit the dimension text. Text placed before the asterisk precedes (and text placed after the asterisk follows) the text that is generated from the geometry of the element(s) dimensioned. 4. Enter a data point to apply the change.
You can delete the asterisk when editing dimension text. To restore the text that is automatically generated from the geometry of the dimensioned element, edit the dimension's text again and insert an asterisk.
Text entered in the Text Editor window is not associative it does not change when the dimension element is modified.
If the Text Editor Style preference (Workspace > Preferences, Text category) is set to Dialog Box, the Dimension Text dialog box opens rather than the Text Editor window.
Dimension Audit
The Dimension Audit utility searches for all dimensions in the active model and report any errors.
To set a criteria
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Dimension Audit. 2. Select one or all of the Criteria icons.
To find a dimension error
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Dimension Audit.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
2. Select one or more of the Criteria icons to set the criteria. 3. Select the Find icon. 4. Select a view with a data point to make it the active view. Each error is highlighted with a red ellipse. When the error is corrected the ellipse changes to green. 5. A report is generated and displays any dimension errors.
To run Dimension Audit from key-ins
Page 19 of 80
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Key-in. 2. In the Key-in window, key in MDL LOAD DIMAUDIT QUIET. 3. Key in DIMENSION AUDIT.
Annotations
Placing Text Using the Word Processor Text Editor Window Word Processor text editor window controls Find dialog box Word Processor Text Editor icon bar Fields Editor dialog box Edit Enter Data Field dialog box Edit Stack Fraction dialog box Symbols dialog box Manage Favorite List dialog box Indents and Tabs Settings dialog box Tab Schemes dialog box Using Placeholders for Text Text task Place Text Place Note Edit Text Spell Checker Spell Checker dialog box Edit User Dictionary dialog box Display Text Attributes Match Text Attributes Change Text Attributes Place Text Node Copy and Increment Text Copy Enter Data Field Copy and Increment Enter Data Field Fill In Single Enter Data Field Automatic Fill In Enter Data Fields Justify Enter Data Field (JUSTIFY) FIELD UPDATE Controlling the Display of Text Searching for and Replacing Text Text Styles Importing Text Font Libraries Importing Images Flags Annotation tool box Annotate tool box Place Flag Show/Edit Flag Update Flags Annotating Models in 3D Detailing Symbols task
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Place Section Marker Place Arrow Marker Place Detail Marker Match Symbol Settings Change Symbol Settings Cloud tool box XYZ Text tool box Label Point Coordinate Label Element Coordinates Export Coordinates Import Coordinates
Page 20 of 80
Placing Text
Text elements are useful for including labels other than dimensions in a model. As an element type, text differs in several ways from other types of elements. The following attributes apply exclusively to text and text node elements:

Fonts Text is placed in the Active Font. Justification Text is aligned in a specific way with respect to the data point that positions its origin. Text sizes (Height and Width) Text characters have height and width. However, when creating a sheet model for drawing production, if Annotation Scale Lock is on (Settings > Locks > Annotation Scale), text is automatically scaled by the Annotation Scale factor, which is set in the Model Properties dialog box.
Single (above) and Multi-line (below) text Justification. From left: Left Top, Center, and Right Bottom. The origin is placed at the location of the pointer. TH denotes Height, TW denotes Width, and LS denotes Line Spacing.
Text that exceeds the Active Line Length, such that it is more than one line long, is automatically converted to a text node. Text nodes have a line spacing attribute, which is the space between each line of text. Text nodes have numbers and cross hair symbols that mark their position in the design. The maximum number of characters in a single-line text element is 65,535.
To place text with the Place Text tool
1. In the Text task, select the Place Text tool. The Word Processor text editor window opens 2. (Optional) In the Place Text settings window, set Text Style to an existing text style by keying in a text style name or selecting from the drop-down menu. or (Optional) In the Place Text settings window and/or the Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles), adjust the active text attributes such as the Active Font. You can later choose to create a text style consisting of these attributes.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 21 of 80
3. (Optional) If you are creating a sheet model for drawing production in which you will eventually scale the drawing border to fit the design, turn on Annotation Scale Lock by clicking the icon adjacent to the Height and Width fields in the Place Text settings window. 4. In the Place Text settings window, adjust other relevant tool settings such as the Active Angle and the placement Method (By Origin, Fixed, View Independent, Fitted View Independent, Above Element, Below Element, On Element, Along Element, or Word Wrap). 5. In the Word Processor text editor window, type your text.
6. (Optional) Apply formatting to the text you typed using the icon bar in the Word Processor text editor window. 7. As you move the pointer the text displays dynamically. Position the text in the model by entering a data point. 8. Return to step 6 to place additional instances of the same text. or Return to step 4 to place other text.
The Text task has additional tools for placing text, but Place Text is most commonly used.
Word Processor is the default text editor window style preference. To change this preference to another style, choose the style from the Text Editor Style option menu in the Text category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Fields derived content in text
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 22 of 80
As you place or edit text you can insert fields in the text whose content is derived from object properties. Properties of the following types of objects can be used as sources for field content:

elements models files
A field can appear anywhere within a piece of text and can span multiple words or lines within multiple line text.
Fields derived from element properties
You can insert a field in text you are placing or editing whose content is derived from a property of an identified element in the active model. Fields in text elements derived from element properties are updated to reflect changes whenever a change to the element causes the property to change. A field derived, for example, from the area of a closed element would be updated should the element's area change.
Fields derived from model properties
You can insert a field in text you are placing or editing whose content is derived from a property of the active model. Fields in text elements based on model properties are updated when the file in which the model resides is opened. A field derived, for example, from the a model's Description property would be automatically updated should that property be modified. There also exists the capability to manually update this type of field content.
Fields derived from file properties
You can insert a field in text you are placing or editing whose content is derived from a property of the open DGN file. Fields in text elements based on file properties are updated when the file is opened. A field derived, for example, from the name of the open DGN file would be automatically updated should the file be renamed. There also exists the capability to manually update this type of field content.
AutoCAD system variable values are valid field content only in DWG files.
Manually updating fields
Using key-ins, you can manually update field content derived from model or file properties to reflect changes in the properties from which the fields were derived. (Fields derived from element properties are automatically updated to reflect property changes.)
To update fields in a text element(s)
1. Select the text that contains the fields to update. 2. Key in FIELD UPDATE SELECT.
Alternative Method To update fields in a text element(s)
1. Key in FIELD UPDATE SELECT. 2. Identify the text that contains the field(s) to update. 3. Accept the text.
To update all fields in the active model
1. Key in FIELD UPDATE ALL. S tti t t tt ib t
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 23 of 80
The Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles) provides an interface for setting active text attributes. The attributes available on the General tab page are a subset of the total attributes on the Advanced tab page.
General Procedure To set active text attributes
1. From the Element menu, choose Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog box opens.
2. (Optional) To set the Active Font, click the Value field for the Font attribute on either the General or Advanced tab pages and then choose the desired font from the option menu. 3. (Optional) To set the Active Text Size, click the Value fields for the Height and Width attributes on either the General or Advanced tab page and then type the desired Active Text Height and the Active Text Width in working units. 4. To set the Active Line Spacing, click the Value field for the Line Spacing attribute on the Advanced tab page and then key in the desired distance in working units. 5. To set the Active Line Length, click the Value field for the Line Length attribute on the Spacing or Advanced tab page and then key in the desired length in characters. 6. (Optional) To set the distance between the characters in the text, click the Value field for the Inter Character Spacing attribute on the Spacing or Advanced tab page and then key in the desired distance in working units. 7. (Optional) To set the Active Text Justification, click the Value field for the Single-Line or Multi-Line Justification attribute on the General tab or the Justification attribute on the Advanced tab page and then select the type of justification from the list box. 8. (Optional) To cause numeric characters separated by a slash (/) to be placed as single characters (numerator over denominator), click the Value field for the Fractions attribute on the General or Advanced tab page. A check appears in the selected Value field. 9. (Optional) To underline the text, click the Value field of the Underline attribute on either the Advanced tab page or the Underline check box on the Underline/Overline tab page. A check appears in the selected Value field. 10. (Optional) To overline the text, click the Value field of the Overline attribute on either the Advanced tab page or the Overline check box on the Underline/Overline tab page. A check appears in the selected Value field. 11. (Optional) To place each letter in the text below the previous letter, rather than to the right of it, click the Value field of the Vertical attribute on either the General or Advanced tab page. A check appears in the selected Value field.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 24 of 80
12. (Optional) To set the degree to which the text is slanted from vertical (90), click the Value field of the Slant attribute on either the General tab page or Slant Angle on the Advanced tab page and then key in the desired angle in degrees. Positive values cause text to slant to the right; negative values cause text to slant to the left. Most text is set to a value of 0 so that the vertical components are at an angle of 90 from the x-axis. 13. (Optional) To bold the text, click the Value field of the Bold attribute on either the General or Advanced tab page. A check appears in the selected Value field.
To align text vertically in columns, set the Active Font to a monospaced font. Traditional MicroStation fonts 3, 41, 50, and 127 are monospaced.
Traditional MicroStation fonts usually look best when the Active Text Width is about three-quarters of the Active Text Height.
Bold text attributes are not enabled for MicroStation fonts.
To browse fonts
1. From the Element menu, choose Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog box opens. 2. Select the General or Advanced tab page. 3. Click the Value field of the Font attribute. Sample text in the selected font is displayed below the list box.
For information about changing the selection of fonts, see Font Libraries.
To change the Active Text Size by a factor
1. From the Element menu, choose Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog box opens. 2. In the Value field of the Height attribute in either the General or Advanced tab page, key in *<factor> or /<factor>. 3. In the Value field of the Width attribute, key in *<factor> or /<factor>. For example, to double the Active Text Size, you can key in *2 in the Height and the Weight fields. To decrease the Active Text Size by half, you can key in /2 or *.5 in both fields.
View independent text
A view independent text element displays at the same orientation regardless of the rotation of the view. The Method setting of the Place Text tool determines whether or not view independent text is placed. Text in 3D Normally, text is not place text in a 3D design model, but instead it is place in the related sheet model). However, sometimes text is required in a 3D model. Like other 2D elements, text is placed planar to the view in which it is placed. When viewed edge is turned on, individual characters appear as dashes. If you want text to be visible, regardless of the view orientation, you should use View independent text (View Independent tool setting on the Place Text tool), which is visible in all views, regardless of the orientation of the view in which it is placed. This is useful for placing
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 25 of 80
Using the Word Processor Text Editor Window

Unless it is already open, the Word Processor text editor window opens when you select a text placement or editing tool. Input from the letter keys and arrow keys on the keyboard is treated as text input until you press the <Esc> key, select another tool, or click the Key-in window.
The Word Processor text editor window can also be opened by selecting the Element Selection tool and double-clicking the text in the model.
Basic text editing functions You can edit text in the Word Processor text editor window (and in text fields in MicroStation dialog boxes) using these functions:
New text is placed at the insertion point, which is indicated by a vertical bar. You can click within the text to place the insertion point, and then you can use any available method for moving the insertion point. In the default insert mode, new characters are inserted at the insertion point. Also, overwrite mode, in which each new character overwrites an existing character, is available. Enter data fields are used as placeholders into which text can be is inserted later.
Also, you can place text (or import text) without using the Word Processor text editor window.
The key names shown here and in MicroStation's menus are logical key names. MicroStation uses logical key names because different systems have different keyboards.
In pre-MicroStation V8 XM Edition versions, the Word Processor text editor did not recognize the RSC font. Text with an RSC would be displayed with a default TrueType Font (TTF). This process worked in most cases but not all. With MicroStation V8 XM Edition, the RSC to TrueType Font Converter extracts the RSC font information and converts it to a TTF format, saves the information temporarily, loads the TTF into the font table for MicroStation to use to properly display the characters and then unloads the TTF when MicroStation is closed.
Moving the insertion point
You can move the insertion point in the following ways:

To move Right one character Left one character Press this key <> < >
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Up one line Down one line <> <>
Page 26 of 80
To the beginning of the line <Home> To the end of the line Down to the next window To the next word To the previous word <End> <PageDown> <Ctrl-> <Ctrl-> Up to the previous window <Page Up>
To the beginning of the text <Ctrl-Home> To the end of the text Selecting text <Ctrl-End>
You can select text in the following ways:

To Select a range of text Do this Drag through the desired text Double-click before the first character of the word Select a word Double-click after the last character of the word Double-click within the word Select all text Increase a selection Press <Ctrl-A> Shift-click a point beyond the selected text
Increase selection by one character Press <Shift-> Decrease selection by one character Press <Shift-> Increase selection by one word Decrease selection by one word Press <Ctrl-Shift-> Press <Ctrl-Shift-> Click anywhere in the Word Processor text editor window Deselect text Press <> Press <> Using tabs and schemes
The Word Processor text editor window allows you to set line indents, paragraph indents and tab stops. Multiple tab stops can be placed. You can use tab stops for creating tables or aligning text. Tab stops and indents are only available in Word Wrap mode. First line indentation is used to specify how far the first line is indented by setting its working units. Paragraph indent specifies how far the entire paragraph is indented.
To set a tab stop
1. Click on the Tab ruler. A tab stop is placed. You can have multiple tab stops.
Alternative Method To set a tab stop
1. Right-click on the Tab ruler and choose Indents and Tabs. The Indents and Tabs dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 27 of 80
2. Define the tab stops and click Set.

To move a tab stop
1. Place your cursor on a tab stop and drag the tab stop marker to the right or left on the Tab ruler.
To clear tab stops
1. Click on the Tab stop marker in the Tab ruler. The tab stop is removed.
Alternative Method To clear a tab stop
1. Right-click on the Tab ruler and choose Indents and Tabs. The Indents and Tabs dialog box opens. 2. Select a tab setting from the Tab Settings list and click Clear. The tab is removed.
To set a first line indent
1. Select the paragraph you want to indent. 2. Right-click on the Tab ruler and choose Indents and Tabs. The Indents and Tabs dialog box opens. 3. Set the First Line Indentation and click OK.
Alternative Method To set a first line indent
1. On the Tab ruler, drag the First Line Indent marker to the position where you want the text to start.
To set a paragraph indent
1. Select the paragraph you want to indent. 2. Right-click on the Tab ruler and choose Indents and Tabs. The Indents and Tabs dialog box opens. 3. Set the Paragraph Indentation and click OK.
Alternative Method To set a paragraph indent
1. On the Tab ruler, drag the Paragraph Indent marker to the position where you want the text to start.
To save a scheme
1. Right-click on the Tab ruler.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 28 of 80
3. Enter a name for the new scheme and click OK.

To retrieve a scheme
1. Right-click on the Tab ruler. 2. Choose Tab Schemes from the pop-up menu. The Tab Schemes dialog box opens.
3. Choose a scheme and click Select.

To delete a scheme
1. Right-click on the Tab ruler. 2. Choose Tab Schemes from the pop-up menu. The Tab Schemes dialog box opens. 3. Choose a scheme and click Delete. The scheme is removed.
Editing text
The available text editing functionality is as follows:

To Delete previous character or selected text Delete next character or selected text Delete previous word Delete next word Cut selected text Copy selected text Paste selected text <Delete> <Ctrl-Back Space> <Ctrl-Delete> <Shift-Delete> or <Ctrl-X> <Ctrl-Insert> or <Ctrl-C> <Shift-Insert> or <Ctrl-V> Do this <Back Space>
Toggle between insert mode and overwrite mode <Insert> To replace text in the Word Processor text editor window
1. Select the text. 2 Type the new text
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
The typed text replaces the selected text.
Page 29 of 80
To switch between insert mode and overwrite mode, you can press the <Insert> key. In overwrite mode, it is usually more efficient to select text and then type the new text rather than to edit text.
To move text in the Word Processor text editor window
1. Select the text. 2. Right-click and choose Cut from the pop-up menu . or Press <Ctrl-X> 3. Place the insertion point at the desired location for the moved text. If you want to replace text, you can select the text to be replaced. 4. Right-click and choose Paste from the pop-up menu . or Press <Ctrl-V>
To copy text in the Word Processor text editor window
1. Select the text. 2. Right-click and choose Copy from the pop-up menu . or Press <Ctrl-C> 3. Place the insertion point at the desired location for the copy of the text. If you want to replace text, you can select the text to be replaced. 4. Right-click and choose Paste from the pop-up menu . or Press <Ctrl-V>
To insert a new line in the Word Processor text editor window
1. From the Text task, select the Place Text tool. 2. In the Word Processor text editor window, press <Enter>. Multi-line text is automatically placed as a text node. Text elements are converted to text nodes if lines are added, and text nodes are converted to text elements if the text is reduced to one line.
The easiest way to open the Word Processor text editor window is to double-click on an existing text element with the Element Selection tool. Double-clicking opens the Word Processor text editor window.
Inserting symbols
The Symbols dialog box lets you to insert symbols (associated with the currently selected font) into the Word Processor text editor window. In addition, you can add commonly used symbols to a user-defined Favorite List for faster access.
To insert a symbol(s) while entering or editing a text element
1. If the symbol(s) are in your Favorite List, choose them one at a time from the drop-down menu to the right of the Insert Symbol icon in the Word Processor text editor window's icon bar.
Alternative Method To insert a symbol(s) while entering or editing a text element
1. In the Word Processor text editor window's icon bar, click the Insert Symbol icon. The Symbols dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 30 of 80
2. Click the desired symbol(s). When done, click Insert. or Double-click the desired symbols. The symbols appear in the Word Processor.
To add a symbol to your Favorite List
1. In the Symbols dialog box, right-click the symbol, and choose Add to Favorite List from the pop-up menu. The Add Character to Favorite List opens.
2. In the field, key in a description of the symbol. This description will appear in the Favorite List when you access it in the Word Processor text editor window through the drop-down menu to the right of the Insert Symbol icon. 3. Click Add.
To modify your Favorite List
1. In the Symbols dialog box, click Manage Favorite List. The Manage Favorite List dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 31 of 80
2. Use the controls in the dialog box to change the description of symbols in the Favorite List, reorder symbols in the list, or delete symbols from the list. 3. When done, click OK.
Inserting and editing fields
There are two ways to insert fields in text that contain element, model, or file properties:

The easiest way is to drag and drop property values from the Element Info(rmation) dialog box. As an alternative method, you can use the Fields Editor dialog box, which is opened from the right-click, pop-up menu in the Word Processor text editor window.
To insert a field while entering or editing a text element
1. With the Word Processor Text Editor window open, open the Element Info(rmation) dialog box. 2. Drag the desired property value (right-hand column) from the Element Info(rmation) dialog box into the Word Processor Text Editor window, and drop it at the location within the text at which to insert the field.
To access model and file properties, right-click in the tree pane and choose Dialog Properties from the pop-up menu. Then set the Browse property to Model or File.
Alternative Method To insert a field while entering or editing a text element
1. In the Word Processor text editor window, right-click at the location within the text at which to insert the field. 2. In the pop-up menu, choose the item from the Insert Field submenu that corresponds to the type of data Element Properties, Model Properties, or File Properties that will be the source for the field data. 3. If you chose Element Properties, identify the element that will be the source for the field data. The Fields Editor dialog box opens. This dialog box contains a list of the attributes or properties of the identified element, the active model, or the open file.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 32 of 80
Fields Editor dialog box for inserting a field derived from Element Properties
Fields Editor dialog box for inserting a field derived from Model Properties
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 33 of 80
Fields Editor dialog box for inserting a field derived from File Properties
4. Select the property that will be the source for the field data. The data appears in the field at the bottom of the Fields Editor dialog box.
For some types of data, such as strings, you have the option to specify formatting, such as case (upper, lower, first capital, title). To specify formatting in these cases, use the controls that appear to the right of the attribute or property when you select it.
5. Click OK. The field is inserted in the Word Processor Text Editor window. You can edit an inserted field in the Word Processor Text Editor window regardless of whether you are in the act of placing a text element, with the Place Text tool, or editing an existing text element, with the Edit Text tool.
To edit a field
1. In the Word Processor Text Editor window, right-click the field you want to edit, and choose Edit Field from the pop-up menu. or In the Word Processor Text Editor window, double-click the field you want to edit. The Fields Editor dialog box opens with the field's underlying property selected
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 34 of 80
2. To change the fields's underlying property, select the property. or To change the formatting of the field's underlying property, use the control in the right-hand column of the selected property. 3. When done, click OK. The field is updated in the Word Processor Text Editor window.
To reassign a field to a different target element
1. In the Word Processor Text Editor window, select the field you want to reassign. The field should have been created with the Insert Field > Element properties option on the Word processor right-click menu 2. Right-click and choose Reassign Field from the pop-up menu. 3. Select the new element to which the text field will be assigned. The field is reassigned to the new element.
Using Autostacked fractions
Fractions, when placed as text, can be automatically offset using the CAPABILITY_TEXT_AUTOSTACKFRACTIONS configuration variable.
To place an offset fraction
1. Open the standards, project, or user configuration file in a text editor. 2. Add _USTN_CAPABILITY <+CAPABILITY_TEXT_AUTOSTACKFRACTIONS to the file and save the change. 3. From the Elements menu, choose Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog box opens. 4. Place a check mark in the Fractions check box. 5. From the Text task, select the Place Text tool. The Text Editor Word Processor dialog box opens. 6. In the Word Processor text editor window, key in 1/2 followed by a space, then press <Enter>. 7. Enter a data point to place the fraction. The fraction is offset at 45 degrees.
See "\\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation\config\system\capability.list" for a list of capabilities.
Editing stacked fractions
Stacked fractions that are placed in a model can be edited through the Word Processor text editor window using the Edit Stack Fraction dialog box.
To edit a stacked fraction
1. With the Element Selection tool pointer, double-click the text in the model that contains the fraction. The Word Processor text editor window opens. 2. (Optional) Choose the desired stacked fraction format from the Stacked Fraction option menu. 3. Double-click the fraction in the Word Processor. The Edit Stack Fraction dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 35 of 80
4. In the Numerator and/or the Demoninator fields, key in a new value(s). 5. Click OK. The edited fraction displays in the model. 6. Accept the edit.
Using Placeholders for Text

During the design process it can be efficient to insert placeholders for text to be added later. There are two types of placeholders:

You can place empty text nodes in your model in locations in which text is to be added later. You can place text with blanks, known as enter data fields, representing part of the text that is to be filled in later.
Empty text nodes Use the Place Text Node tool to place empty text nodes in your model as placeholders. Your tool options for filling in empty text nodes, once placed, are as follows:

Place Text fill with one or multiple lines of text Attach Displayable Attributes fill with the contents of a linked database row
To place empty text nodes as placeholders for text to be added later
1. In the Text task, select the Place Text Node tool.
2. (Optional) To make the text node view independent, such that is it readable in every view regardless of the rotation of the view, turn on the tool setting View Independent. 3. To position the origin of the first text node, enter a data point. 4. To place the text node at the Active Angle, click the reset button. To define the angle at which the text node is positioned, you can enter a data point. 5. To place more text nodes, repeat steps 2 through 4. Enter data fields
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 36 of 80
An enter data field is a one-or-more-character placeholder for future text input. You can insert empty enter data fields in a text element and fill in the actual text later. Enter data fields are particularly useful for variable text such as part numbers or detail numbers. The Text task has special tools for copying and filling in enter data fields. An enter data field is a placeholder for future text input. You can insert empty enter data fields for one or more characters in a text element and fill in the actual text later.
Enter data fields
The Fill in Single Enter Data Field tool and the Auto Fill In Enter Data Fields tool are subject to all the preferences set for the Text Editor Style (Workspace > Preferences, Text category). These commands should always take input from the key-in field for compatibility with scripts, settings groups, and command menus.
To create an enter data field in the Word Processor text editor window
1. From the Text task, select the Place Text tool. 2. In the Word Processor text editor window, type the enter data field character once for each character in the enter data field. By default, _ is the enter data field character. or Key in a matched pair of field delimiters. To leave an empty enter data field with a certain number of enter data field characters, you can type that number of spaces within the delimiters or you can type text between the delimiters. 3. (Optional) Use the JUSTIFY (Justify Enter Data Field) key-in to change the justification. When created, MicroStation left justifies all enter data fields.
The enter data field character is set in the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences, Text category, ED Character field).
To edit text that contains enter data fields
1. From the Text task, select the Edit Text tool.
2. Identify the text. 3. To accept the text, enter another data point. The Word Processor text editor window opens. 4. Edit the text.
To edit the enter data field properties
1. From the Text task, select the Edit Text tool.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
2. Click on the enter data field in the design file. The Word Processor opens. 3. Double-click the enter data field in the word processor. The Edit Enter Data Field dialog box opens.
Page 37 of 80
4. Make the desired changes to the enter data field character, restrict the length and/or justification and click OK.
Text task
The tools in the Text task are used to place text, modify existing text elements, and fill in enter data fields.
Text task (opened as tool box) To Place text in the design. or Fill in empty text nodes. Place Text Select in the Text task
Place a note. Place Note
Edit a text or text node element to replace, add, or delete characters. Edit Text
Review text or text node elements for spelling errors. Spell Checker
Display the attributes of a text or text node element. Display Text Attributes
Set the active text settings the same as the attributes of a text element. Match Text Attributes
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 38 of 80
Change selected text-specific element attributes of a text or tag element(s). Change Text Attributes
Place empty text nodes to be filled with text later. Place Text Node
Copy and increment a text element that contains numbers. Copy and Increment Text
Copy the contents of one enter data field to another. Copy Enter Data Field
Copy and increment the contents of an enter data field that contains numbers into another enter data field. Copy and Increment Enter Data Field
Fill in or change an enter data field. Fill In Single Enter Data Field
Fill in all enter data fields in a view. Automatic Fill In Enter Data Fields Change the justification of an enter data field. Manually update fields in text. Use the JUSTIFY key-in. Use the FIELD UPDATE key-in.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX TEXT [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
You can define text styles that, when selected, automatically adjust the active text settings for text placement.
Controlling the Display of Text

Using the View Attributes dialog box (Settings > View Attributes), you can turn off the display of the text itself or of text node numbers and symbols. Turning off the display of the symbols prevents them from interfering with your reading the text in the text nodes. In order to distinguish fields from directly keyed text, fields are by default displayed with a light gray background. To display fields without this background, turn on Hide Field Background in the Text category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
To turn on or turn off the display of text in a view
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 39 of 80
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn on or turn off the Text attribute. 4. (Optional) Repeat steps 23 for additional views.
To turn on or turn off the display of text in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn on or turn off the Text attribute.
To turn on or turn off the display of text node numbers and symbols in a view
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>) . or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn on or turn off the Text Nodes attributes. 4. (Optional) Repeat steps 2 3 for additional views.
To turn on or turn off the display of text node numbers and symbols in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>) . or From any view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn on or turn off the Text Nodes attributes.
Page 40 of 80
Searching for and Replacing Text

You can search all text in a model for a sequence of letters and numbers, and you can specify a text search for single character fractions. Also, you can replace some or all instances of text with other text. Also, you can append and prepend text while retaining an original string. The Find/Replace Text functionality supports dimensions, tags, text, text nodes, notes and symbols.
To search for text in a model
1. (Optional) To search for text only in a certain part of the model, place a fence and set the appropriate fence search criteria. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Find/Replace Text The Find/Replace Text dialog box opens.
3. In the Find field, type the text for which you want to search. 4. (Optional) To zoom in or out on the text for which you want to search, adjust the Zoom Factor between 5 (zoomed in) and 100 (zoomed out). 5. (Optional) To search for text with special characteristics, perform one of the following: To find only text with the same capitalization as the text in the Find field (case-sensitive), turn on Match Case. To find only complete words that match the text in the Find field, turn on Whole Words. To use special characters in the Find field, turn on Reg. Expr. To search for text in cells, turn on In Cells. To search for text with fractions, turn on Fractions. 6. Click Find. The first placement in the model of the specified text in the Find field is displayed in the view in which you entered the last data point. 7. To find the desired text, continue clicking the Find button. An information box confirms that all text in the model has been searched. If text matching the specified text is not found, the search resumes at the beginning of the model. 8. (Optional) To reset the view back to the way it looked prior to the search, click the Reset button (right mouse button).
To find and replace text in a model
1. (Optional) To search for text only in a certain part of the model, place a fence and set the appropriate fence search criteria. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Find/Replace Text. The Find/Replace Text dialog box opens. 3. In the Find field, key in the text to replace. 4 (O ti l) T i t th t tf hi h tt h dj t th Z F t b t 5( di ) d 100
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
(zoomed out). 5. From the Change option menu, choose Replace. 6. In the With field, key in the replacement text. To delete text that matches the text in the Find field, you can leave the With field blank. 7. (Optional) To search for text with special characteristics, turn on one of the following check boxes: Match Case Whole Words Reg. Expr. In Cells Fractions (See To search for text in a model.) 8. To execute a search, perform one of the following: To examine the first instance of text that matches the specified text, click Find. To replace text, click Change. To replace all text that matches the specified text, click Change All. To replace all text elements that match the current Fence search criteria, click Change Fence. To examine additional instances of matching text, continue clicking Find.
Page 41 of 80
9. (Optional) To reset the view back to the way it looked prior to the search, click the Reset button (right mouse button).
To replace text in a known location in the model
1. (Optional) To search for text only in a certain part of the model, place a fence and set the appropriate fence search criteria. 2. From the Edit menu, choose Find/Replace Text. The Find/Replace Text dialog box opens. 3. In the Find field, key in the text to replace. 4. (Optional) To zoom in or out on the text for which you want to search, adjust the Zoom Factor between 5 (zoomed in) and 100 (zoomed out). 5. From the Change option menu, choose Replace. 6. In the With field, key in the replacement text. 7. (Optional) To search for text with special characteristics, turn on one of the following check boxes: Match Case Whole Words Reg. Expr In Cells Fractions (See To search for text in a model.) 8. Click Change Single. 9. Identify a text element. Any matching text found in the text element is replaced. 10. (Optional) To reset the view back to the way it looked prior to the search, click the Reset button (right mouse button).
Text Styles
MicroStation supports text styles and provides an interface for constructing text using available system fonts and a wide variety of text attributes. A text style comprises a group of text attributes, such as font type, width, height, and color. Text styles enable you to place text within a model in a consistent and automated manner. The following fonts are supported natively in MicroStation:
traditional MicroStation fonts
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs

Page 42 of 80
TrueType fonts AutoCAD Shape fonts (.shx)
The Text Style setting for the Place Text, Place Note, and Edit Text tools sets the Active Text Style. You can also set the Active Text Style by keying in TEXTSTYLE ACTIVE <style_name>.
Fonts are not embedded in the DGN file.
If a specific font is not found on the system, MicroStation substitutes font #127, Fast Font.
If a Text Style changes in a Text Style library, Text Styles placed in DGN files prior to the change are not automatically updated in the DGN files. To update a DGN file to reflect the changes in the Text Style library, use the dgnlib update textstyles.
Text using third party TrueType fonts that were not designed using the generally accepted TrueType definition may display differently than in previous releases. Although the current presentation is more accurate, you can make the text using these fonts appear as it did previously by setting the configuration variable MS_80TRUETYPESCALE=1.
To remove unused text styles from a DGN file that are locked because they were once referenced in a V8 DGN library, use the key-in TEXTSTYLE UNLOCK <TextStyleName>. (<TextStyleName> is the name of your locked text style.)
To create a text style
1. From the Element menu, choose Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog box opens. 2. From the menu bar of the Text Styles dialog box, choose Style > New. A new Untitled style appears in the Text Styles hierarchy tree. 3. Key in the desired name for the new text style. 4. Click <Enter>. The new text style name appears in the Text Styles hierarchy tree. 5. (Optional) From the Advanced tab, modify the values of text attributes as desired. The Advanced Tab contains all the settings from the Spacing, Under/Overline and Background tabs. 6. From the menu bar of the Text Styles dialog box, choose Styles > Save. The new text style is saved. Child text styles A child text style inherits all attributes of its parent text style except for those text attributes explicitly set as different. For example, a parent text style can use Helvetica font and center justification, but the child style can be left center justified. This indicates that both the parent and child styles use the Helvetica font, but the parent is center justified and the child is left center justified. The child text style inherits all other characteristics from the parent text style. MicroStation's ability to utilize hierarchical text styles is very powerful. Because all text within a DGN file conforms to a specific text style, you can identify parts of the model by a specific text attribute. Therefore, you can easily apply text and ensure that all attribute characteristics are uniform.
To create a child text style
1. From the Element menu, choose Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog box opens. 2. From the menu bar of the Text Styles dialog box, choose Style > New. A U titl d t t t l
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Click the value for the Parent Style attribute. An option menu opens. 5. Choose a value for the Parent Style attribute. 6. Click the value for Style Name and then type a name for the child text style. The newly named child appears in the Hierarchy Tree under the selected Text Style. 7. (Optional) Modify other attributes on the General or Advanced tabs. 8. From the menu bar of the Text Styles dialog box, choose Style > Save. The new child text style is saved.
Alternative Method To create a child text style
Page 43 of 80
1. From the Element menu, choose Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog box opens. 2. Select the Text Style to receive the child text style in the Hierarchy Tree. 3. Right click in the Hierarchy Tree. 4. Click on New Child. A new Untitled child text style appears. 5. Type the name of the new child text style and press Enter. The child text style takes the attributes of the parent text style 6. (Optional) Modify attributes on the Advanced tabs. 7. From the menu bar of the Text Styles dialog box, choose Style > Save. The new child text style is saved.
Instance-specific style overrides
An instance-specific style override enables you to change text attributes for a single placement of text or a text node. Text style changes made in this manner are not a permanent part of the text style. You can create instance-specific overrides in either of the following ways:

using the default Word Processor text editor window using the Dialog Box-style text editor window
To create instance-specific style overrides using the Word Processor text editor window
1. With the Text Editor Style preference set to Word Processor, in the Text task, select the Place Text tool. The Place Text settings window and the Word Processor text editor open. 2. Using the controls in the Place Text settings window, modify the active text attributes as desired. 3. In the Word Processor text editor window, type the desired text. 4. To place the text in the model, enter a data point.
To create instance-specific style overrides using the Place Text settings window and the Word Processor text editor window
1. With the Text Editor Style preference set to Word Processor, in the Text task, select the Place Text tool. The Place Text settings window and the Word Processor text editor open. 2. (Optional) In the Place Text settings window, choose the desired text style from the Text Style option menu. 3. (Optional) In the expanded Place Text settings window, modify the values for Height, Width, Font, and Justification.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
4. (Optional) Using the tools in the Word Processor text editor window, modify the active text attributes as desired. 5. In the Word Processor text editor window, type the desired text. 6. To place the text in the model, enter a data point.
Page 44 of 80
To create instance-specific style overrides using the Place Text settings window and the Dialog Box-style text editor window
1. With the Text Editor Style preference set to Dialog Box, in the Text task, select the Place Text tool. The Place Text settings window and the dialog box-style Text Editor window open. 2. (Optional) In the Place Text settings window, choose the desired text style from the Text Style option menu. 3. (Optional) In the expanded Place Text settings window, modify the values for Height, Width, Font, and Justification. 4. In the Text Editor window, type the desired text. 5. Position the text in the model by entering a data point. Working with text style libraries Text styles can be stored in a DGN library. A DGN library that contains text styles is also known as a text style library. If the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable points to the text style library, the Text Styles dialog box displays text styles in this text style library. You can save and modify local copies of these text styles. A blue delta icon appears next to a text style if the local copy does not match the library copy. A green check mark appears next to the text style when it is updated back to the original library text style. You should avoid storing two text styles with the same name in DGN libraries. However, if the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable points to more than one text style library, and they contain text styles with the same name, the text style in the DGN library that is processed first will appear in the Text Styles dialog box.
To save and modify a text style from a library
1. Make sure that the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable points to the text style (DGN) library.
If necessary, close and reopen MicroStation to set the variable.
2. In the Text Styles dialog box, select a text style library from the list box. 3. Click Activate to make the text style the active text style. A blue delta icon appears next to the text style library indicating the local copy does not match the library copy. 4. Modify the settings as needed. 5. Click Save to save a local copy of the modified style.
To import text styles from another file or DGN library
1. From the Text Styles dialog box's Style menu, choose Import. The Dimension Style Import dialog box opens. 2. From the list box, choose the DGN, DGNLib, or DWG file containing the dimension style to import. Click OK. The imported styles are displayed in the Text Styles list. If a text style in a DGN library changes, local text styles based on the text style library are not automatically updated. To update local text styles to reflect the changes in the text style library, use the Update from Library icon.
To update text styles from text style libraries
1. In the Text Styles dialog box, select one or more local text styles that are based on a text style library. These types of text styles are displayed with a filled book icon with a delta symbol
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
2. Click the Update from Library icon. A green check mark displays indicating the local text styles are updated to match the library text styles. Remapping text styles
Page 45 of 80
The Remap Elements function allows you to change the text style of all text elements having a particular text style to another text style. This function is accessible via the pop-up menu in the Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles).
Choosing Remap Elements opens the Remap Elements to Text Styles dialog box.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
To remap text styles
Page 46 of 80
1. From the Text Styles dialog box, select the text style to be the source of the remap. 2. Rightclick in the Text Styles pane of the Text Styles dialog box. The right-click menu opens. 3. Select Remap Elements The Remap Elements to Text Style dialog box opens. 4. Select the text style from the Destination drop down menu that will be remapped to the source text style . 5. Click OK.
Importing Text
You can create a text file using a word processing, text editing, or other type of application and then import the contents of the text file into a MicroStation model.
To place a text file into a model
1. (Optional) To set the number of space characters to substitute for each Tab character in the file, key in ACTIVE TAB [spaces] or TB=[spaces]. 2. Choose File > Import > Text. The Include Text File dialog box opens.
3. Select the file and then click OK. The text contained in the file is displayed. 4. To position the text, enter a data point. The text is placed as a text node and the data point positions the text node origin.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 47 of 80
The file can include MicroStation key-in strings to set text attributes, such as the font, text size, line spacing, and line length. Each key-in string must follow a period (.) that begins a line. One key-in string is allowed per line. All text following a key-in string is placed with the specified attribute. Other text placement controls can be included, such as INDENT # indents by the specified number of columns and NEWGG begins a new graphic group.
Font Libraries
Text fonts for use with MicroStation are stored in font libraries. Font libraries are resource files and typically have the extension .rsc. The Active Font for text placement is selected from those available in open font libraries. In a single font library, you can mix fonts of several different formats. Fonts in the font libraries are distinguished by name and number. In addition, you can assign to a font the following attributes:

Description Fast Font name Identifies the font that is substituted for display purposes.
For display purposes, the default font is substituted in text whose font is not in an open MicroStation font library.
Finding fonts to install The industry-standard fonts are typically available on your system. Working with font libraries The Font Installer dialog box (Utilities > Install Fonts) is used to insert fonts into font libraries. Also, you can use this dialog box to copy fonts between font libraries and to rename and renumber fonts in font libraries.
To open the Font Installer dialog box
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Install Fonts. The Font Installer dialog box opens.
To insert fonts into an existing font library
Page 48 of 80
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Install Fonts. The Font Installer dialog box opens. 2. In the Font Installer dialog box, click the Open button below the Source File list box. The Open Source Font Files dialog box opens.
3. From the Type option menu, choose the one of the following font types: Font Cell Library [*.cel] Font Library [*.rsc] uStn V4/IGDS Fontlib [*.*] 4. Select a file that contains fonts to insert. 5. Click the Add button. Also, you can double-click the desired file. The selected file is added to the File List. 6. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add additional files of the same type to the File List. 7. Click the Done button. The fonts in the files are loaded and then are listed in the Source File list box of the Font Installer dialog box. 8. In the Font Installer dialog box, click the Open button located below the Destination File list box. The Open Font Library dialog box opens. 9. Select the destination font library, and then click OK. The fonts in the selected Open Font Library are listed in the Destination File list box. An asterisk (*) indicates the default font. 10. In the Source File list box, select the fonts to insert. Sample characters or symbols from the first font selected in the list box are displayed in the Font Sample section. 11. Click the Copy button to insert the fonts in the destination file. 12 (Optional) To install fonts from files of a different source type repeat steps 3-7 to open the source files and then steps 10 and11
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
13. To close the Font Installer dialog box, click the Done button.
Page 49 of 80
When a font is installed in a font library, the name of the default font is automatically assigned as the fast font.
Because AutoCAD Shape files and TrueType fonts from your system are available through the Text Styles dialog box, see To set active text attributes they do not need to be installed through the Font Installer dialog box.
To create a new font library and insert fonts in it
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Install Fonts. 2. In the Font Installer dialog box, click the Open button below the Source File list box. The Open Source Font Files dialog box opens. 3. From the Type option menu, choose one of the following font types: Font Cell Library [*.cel] Font Library[*.rsc] uStn V4/IGDS Fontlib [*.*] 4. Select a file that contains fonts to insert. 5. Click the Add button. Also, you can double-click the desired file. The selected file is added to the File List. 6. (Optional) Repeat steps and 5 to add additional files of the same type to the File List. 7. Click the Done button. The fonts in the files are loaded and then are listed in the Source File list box of the Font Installer dialog box. 8. In the Font Installer dialog box, click the New button located below the Destination File list box. The Create Font Library dialog box opens. 9. Type a name for the new font library, and then click OK. 10. Click the Copy button to insert the fonts in the font library. The first font inserted in a new font library is the default font, which is indicated by an asterisk (*) next to its name in the Destination File list box.
To remove a font from a font library
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Install Fonts. 2. In the Font Installer dialog box, click the Open button below the Destination File list box. The Open Font Library dialog box opens. 3. Select the font library, and then click OK. The fonts in the Selected Font Library file are listed in the Destination File list box. An asterisk (*) indicates the default font, which is used to display text if its assigned font is not in an open font library. 4. In the Destination File list box, select the fonts to remove. Sample characters or symbols from the first font selected in the list box are displayed in the Font Sample section. 5. To remove the fonts, click the Remove button. An alert box opens asking you to confirm the removal of the fonts. 6. Click OK. 7. To close the Font Installer dialog box, click Done.
If the default font is removed from a font library, the next font inserted into the library becomes the default font. If a new font is not inserted, then Font 127 (CHAR_FAST_FONT) in the font library ustation.rsc, supplied with MicroStation, becomes the default font.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 50 of 80
To change the name, number, or description of a font
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Install Fonts. 2. In the Font Installer dialog box, click the Open button below the Destination File list box. The Open Font Library dialog box opens. 3. Select the font library that contains the font, and then click OK. The fonts in the opened file are listed in the Destination File list box. An asterisk (*) indicates the default font, which is used to display text if its assigned font is not in an open font library. 4. In the Destination File list, select the font. The name, number, and description of the selected font and also the name of the fast font are displayed in fields at the bottom of the Font Installer dialog box. 5. To change the font name, type the new name in the Name field. 6. To change the fast font name, type the new name in the Fast Font field. 7. To change the font number, type the new number in the Number field. 8. To change the font description, type the new description in the Description field. 9. To close the Font Installer dialog box, click Done.
Importing Images
You can select a raster image file and then place it in a model for publication purposes. The Select Image File dialog box controls are analogous to those in the Open dialog box.
Importing an image saves the raster data in the DGN file. This is different than attaching an image file to a model as a reference using the Raster Manager dialog box. A raster reference attachment is a link between a model and an image file.
To import an image file into a model
1. Choose File > Import > Image. The Select Image File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 51 of 80
2. From the List Files of Type option menu, choose JPEG (JFIF) Files [*.jpg]. 3. Select the file and then click OK. 4. To position the image, enter a data point for the image's origin and a second data point for the image's diagonally opposite corner. The image is placed. Supported input formats The following formats are supported for displaying images, importing images, saving images, and capturing screen images.
Format CALS (Type I) Img (X Window) Img (24 Bit) Ext .cal .p .a Military/SGML conformance X-Windows palette format X-Windows RGB format Engineering drawings highly compressed format used for large drawings Monochrome or continuous tone (grayscale) images; color trained Full-color images Old standard for engineering drawings. Uses one-dimensional run-length compression. Prefer .cit over .rle for binary images. Joint Photographic Experts Group used for grayscale or color photographs. Very high compression rates, but lossy compression. Requires careful use. Popular PC format supporting binary, mapped and true color. Developed by ZSoft for PC Paintbrush. Popular Apple Macintosh format (Not supported by Raster Manager) Commonly used for Bits see footnote 144 1 8 24 1 8 24 1 8 or 24 1, 8, or 24 Compression CCITT Group 4 None None CCITT-G4 None Variable Run-length JPEG Run-length
Ingr. (Intergraph) .cit CIT Ingr. (Intergraph) .cot COT Ingr. (Intergraph) .rgb RGB Ingr. (Intergraph) .rle RLE JPEG (JFIF) PCX PICT see footnote 145 see footnote 146 PNG PostScript Sun Raster Targa .jpg .pcx
.pct
8 or 24 Various
Run-length Many
.png Web art, GIF replacement Encapsulated PostScript specification by Adobe Systems Incorporated (Not .eps supported by Raster Manager) .rs tga Sun-compatible format P l PC f t ti bi d d t l TGA d
8 8 16 24 or 32
Run-length U d d
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
TARGA are trademarks of Truevision, Inc. TIFF see footnote 147 Windows BMP WordPerfect (WPG) .tif Tag Image File Format. Popular for desktop publishing Any 8 or 24 8
Page 52 of 80
run-length Various None Run-length
.bmp Microsoft Windows bitmap .wpg WordPerfect bitmap format (Not supported by Raster Manager)
Setting the number of colors in exported images
The Mode setting controls the number of colors in exported images. The available Modes depend on the Format. For example, Intergraph RGB files must be 24-bit color, but PICT files can be 24-bit color, 256 colors, or grayscale.
Unless the image is used with a display that supports 24-bit color or is printed in color, using either 256 color or grayscale mode saves time and results in smaller image files with no loss of quality. This is especially true if the final output is monochrome.
Flags
Flags are useful for annotating a design with reminders or suggestions for future changes. A flag is a bitmapped image (raster element) with or without an associated explanatory message. Although the message text is not displayed with the image, you can easily review and edit the text in a separate window. A set of flag image files is supplied with MicroStation in its image directory, which by default is located in "Bentley\WorkSpace\System\Image".
Flag image file chkmrk.bmp
chkmrk2.bmp
flag.bmp
flag2.bmp
note.bmp
t 2b
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 53 of 80
pencil.bmp
pencil2.bmp
postit.bmp
postit2.bmp
tack.bmp
tack2.bmp
thmbtck.bmp
thmbtck2.bmp
The explanatory message associated with a flag is a tag element that is automatically attached to the raster element when the flag is placed.
Annotation tool box
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 54 of 80
The Annotation tool box contains tool boxes for labelling and annotating designs.
To Use tools in the
Place and edit flags.
Annotate tool box
Place title text, detail, section, material callout markers, and leaders.
Detailing Symbols task
Import, export, and label coordinate points in 2D and 3D design files.
XYZ Text tool box
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ANNOTATION [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
Annotate tool box
The tools in the Annotate tool box are used to place and edit Flags.
To Select in the Annotate tool box
Place a flag. Place Flag
Display or edit the explanatory text for a flag(s). Show/Edit Flag
Update the bitmapped image with which a flag(s) is displayed with the active image for flag placement. Update Flags
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 55 of 80
Annotating Models in 3D
For the most part, text and dimensioning work the same in 3D as in 2D. See Text in 3D.
Detailing Symbols task

This set of tools is used to simplify and standardize the placement of title text, detail, section, material callout markers, and leaders.
Detailing Symbols task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Detailing Symbols task
Place a title in a design file. Place Title Text
Place a section marker in a design file. Place Section Marker
Place an arrow marker in a design file. Place Arrow Marker
Place a detail marker in a design file. Place Detail Marker
Match symbol settings to an existing symbol. Match Symbol Settings
Change symbol settings. Change Symbol Settings
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DETAILINGSYMBOL [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
Cloud tool box
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
The Cloud tool box contains tools for placing revision clouds.
Page 56 of 80
To
Select in the Cloud tool box
Draw a revision cloud. Cloud By Points
Construct a revision cloud from an existing, closed element.. Cloud By Element
These tools are also in the Drawing Composition task.
XYZ Text tool box
Tools in the XYZ Text tool box allow you to import, export, and label coordinate points in either 2D or 3D design files.
To Select in the XYZ Text tool box
Label points with a data point. Label Point Coordinate
Label elements individually, in selection sets, in a fence, or globally. Label Elements Coordinates
Export coordinates of elements to an ASCII text file. Export Coordinates
Import coordinates from an ASCII text file and place them as points, text, or cells. Import Coordinates
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX XYZTXT [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]
Tagging Elements
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 57 of 80
An engineering design is rarely communicated with a drawing alone. Non-graphical data is part of most projects; for example, material lists are commonly produced. MicroStation lets you attach non-graphical attributes or tags to elements you draw in designs. If you delete an element with attached tags, the tags are deleted as well.

Tag Sets and Definitions Using the Tools in the Tags task Selecting Tagged Elements
For more sophisticated usage of non-graphical data, MicroStation provides an interface to several external relational databases. To import data in an external database that is linked to a design file as tag data or to export tag data to an external database, use the Import and Export menus in the Tag Sets dialog box (Element > Tags > Define). Unless you are working in DWG workmode, the use of Tags in Cells is not recommended. If the cell is shared, then the tags may no longer be unique. When working in DWG workmode, however, tags can be attached only to shared cells.
Tag Sets and Definitions Tags task Attach Tags Edit Tags Review Tags Change Tags Delete Tags Controlling the Display of Tags Selecting Tagged Elements Reporting on Tags Converting Database Data to Tags Exporting Tag Data to an External Database
Tag Sets and Definitions

Before you can attach tags to elements, you must define tag sets. A tag set definition specifies the unique tag name, display attributes, data type, and default value for each tag in the set.
General Procedure To define a tag set
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens.
2. Click the Add button in the Sets section of the dialog box. The Tag Set Name dialog box opens. 3. In the Name field, key in the tag set name.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
4. Click OK. The new set name displays in the Sets list box. 5. Define each tag in the set.
To define a tag
Page 58 of 80
1. In the Tag Sets dialog box's Sets list box, select the set to which you want to add the tag. 2. Click the Add button in the Tags section of the dialog box. The Define Tag dialog box opens.
3. In the Tag Name field, key in the tag name. 4. (Optional) To customize the prompt for the tag value that appears in the Attach Tags box when the tag is being attached, key in the desired prompt text in the Prompt field. The default prompt text is Value? 5. From the Type option menu, choose the tag data type (Character, Integer, or Real). 6. (Optional) To define a default value for the tag, key in the value in the Default Tag Value field. 7. (Optional) To cause the use of the default value upon attachment of the tag, turn on Default. 8. (Optional) To cause the Attach Tags dialog box to be opened for confirming the default tag value upon attachment of the tag, turn on Confirm. 9. (Optional) To prevent the tag value from being displayed with each element to which the tag is attached, turn off Display Tag. 10. Click OK. The tag is listed in the Tags list box in the Tag Sets dialog box.
When Tag definitions are included in a Cell, the Tag association moves to the Cell header. The Tag(s) remain associated as long as the Cell remains intact. Tag definitions included in Shared Cells are not placed since there may only be one instance of a particular Tag for one element.
To edit a tag definition
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. Select the set in the Sets list box. 3. Select the tag in the Tags list box. 4. Click Edit. The Define Tag dialog box opens. 5 (O ti l) T h th t ' k i th i th T N fi ld
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 59 of 80
6. (Optional) To customize the prompt for the tag value that appears in the Attach Tags dialog box when the tag is being attached, key in the desired prompt text in the Prompt field. 7. (Optional) To change the tag's data type, choose the new type (Character, Integer, or Real) from the Type option menu. Do not change a tag's data type after having attached any instances of the tag. 8. (Optional) To define or change the default value for the tag, key in the value in the Default Tag Value field. 9. (Optional) To cause the use of the default value upon attachment of the tag, turn on Default. 10. (Optional) To cause the Attach Tags dialog box to open for confirming the default tag value upon attachment of the tag, turn on Confirm. 11. (Optional) To prevent the tag value from displaying with each element to which the tag is attached, turn off Display Tag. 12. Click OK.
To rename a tag set definition
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. In the Sets list box, select the set. 3. Click Rename. The Tag Set Name dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the new tag set name. 5. Click OK.
To duplicate a tag set definition
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. In the Sets list box, select the set. 3. Click Duplicate. The Tag Set Name dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the duplicate tag set name. 5. Click OK. The duplicate tag set is listed in the Sets list box. Duplicating a tag set definition also duplicates the set's tag definitions.
For the best results when moving and/or copying Tags with a Selection Set, select and move and/or copy the tagged element (excluding the Tag data). Fence move and/or copy manipulations are best for moving and/or copying across distances that fall outside the original fenced area. Tag associations are dropped when copied from reference files or when Clipboard operations are performed, similar to associated Dimensions and Multi-Lines.
To remove a tag set definition
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. In the Sets list box, select the set you want to remove. 3. Click Remove. An alert box opens, which asks if you are sure you want to remove the tag set definition and all instances of the set's member tags in the design. 4. If you are sure, click OK.
To remove a tag definition
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. In the Tags list box, select the tag you want to remove.
Page 60 of 80
3. Click Remove. An alert box opens, which asks if you are sure you want to remove the tag definition and all instances of the tag in the design. 4. If you are sure, click OK. Tag set libraries Tag set libraries are files that contain tag set definitions for use across multiple design files. The standard filename suffix for tag set libraries is .tlb. Before creating a tag set library, you must define tag sets.
All of the tag sets in a library must have unique names.
To create a tag set library
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. In the Tag Sets list box, select the first tag set to be inserted in the new library. 3. From the File menu's Export submenu (in the dialog box), choose Create Tag Library. The Export Tag Library dialog box opens. 4. In the Files field, key in a tag set library name. 5. Click OK. The tag set library is created, and the selected tag set is inserted.
To append a tag set to a tag set library
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. In the Tag Sets list box, select the tag set to append. 3. From the File menu's Export submenu (in the dialog box), choose Append to Tag Library. The Export Tag Library dialog box opens. 4. Select the desired tag set library and click OK.
To copy a tag set(s) from a library into the active design file
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Define. The Tag Sets dialog box opens. 2. From the dialog box's File menu's Import submenu, choose From Tag Library. The Open Tag Library dialog box opens. 3. Select the tag set library that contains the desired tag set, and click OK. The Import Sets dialog box opens. 4. In the list box, select the tag set(s) to copy. 5. Click OK.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Tags task
The tools in the Tags task are used to attach, edit, change, review, and delete element tags.
Page 61 of 80
Tags task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Tags task
Attach a tag(s) to an element. Attach Tags
Edit a tag(s) that is attached to an element. Edit Tags
Review a tag(s) that is attached to an element. Review Tags
Manipulate tag values. Change Tags
Remove a tag(s) that is attached to an element. Delete Tags
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX TAGS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Controlling the Display of Tags

The display of tag elements (attached tags) can be collectively disabled on a per view basis, thereby overriding the display status of the individual tags.
To turn the display of tags on or off in a view(s)
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or From any open view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 62 of 80
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view. 3. Turn Tags on or off. 4. Repeat steps 23 for additional views.
To turn the display of tags on or off in all views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>). or From any open view window's control menu, choose View Attributes. or In the view control bar, select the View Attributes icon or the adjacent downward-pointing triangle. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Apply To All. 3. Turn Tags on or off.
To change the display attributes of a tag element, use the Change Text Attributes tool in the Text task. The following display attributes of a tag element cannot be changed: Line Spacing, Line Length, Fractions, and view independence.
Selecting Tagged Elements

One of the most useful aspects of attaching tags is that you can easily select groups of elements whose tag values are equal to or fall within (or on either side) of a specified range.
General Procedure To use tag values as selection criteria
1. From the Edit menu, choose Select By Attributes. The Select By Attributes dialog box opens. The second option menu in the Mode section should be set to Selection.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 63 of 80
2. (Optional) Use the controls in the Select By Attributes dialog box to specify selection criteria based on graphical element attributes such as color and type. 3. Click the Tags button. The Select By Tags dialog box opens.
4. Use the controls in the Select By Tags dialog box to specify selection criteria based on tag values. 5. In the Select By Attributes dialog box, make sure the second and third Mode options are set to Selection and On, respectively (the defaults), and then click Execute. The elements meeting the specified selection criteria are selected and bracketed with handles.
The second Mode option determines the effect of the Execute button. Choose Location to locate (highlight) elements; choose Display to filter their display based on their tag values.
The display of tagged elements in attached references can be filtered based on their tag values, but these elements cannot be selected or located based on their tag values.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
To specify selection criteria based on tag values
Page 64 of 80
1. In the Select By Tags dialog box, select a tag name in the Tag list box. 2. In the Operator list box, select an operator, such as equal to or greater than. 3. In the Expression field, key in a value that is valid for the tag selected in the Tag list box. 4. Click Insert. The first criterion displays and is automatically selected in the Criteria list box. 5. (Optional) If you want to specify additional criteria and the next criterion is not mutually exclusive to the first, click the Or button. 6. (Optional) Repeat steps 1-4 for each additional criterion you want to specify. For each newly specified criterion that is not mutually exclusive to the next, select the new criterion in the Criteria list box, and click the Or button.
If selection criteria based on tag values are specified, elements that do not have attached tags with the specified tag name(s) are not selected.
Reporting on Tags
You can generate many different variations of reports on tags. The reports can contain information about graphical element attributes as well as tags. Report output from MicroStation is in the form of line-separated, comma-delimited ASCII text files called report files that can be formatted and printed using a text editor or word processor.
General Procedure To generate report files
1. Generate tag report template files, each of which specifies a single tag set and some or all of its member tags (plus graphical element attributes) on which to report. 2. Distinguish the elements to be reported. 3. Select each tag report template file on which you want to base a report, and generate the report files.
A report file is simply a text file, so you can use any text editor or word processor to format the report data and print the formatted report. Also you can import a report file into some spreadsheets and database managers.
To generate a tag report template file
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Generate Templates. The Generate Templates dialog box opens.
2. In the Tag Sets list box, select the set that contains the tags on which you want to report. 3. In the Tags list box, select a tag (or graphical element attribute) on which you want to report. (Graphical element attributes and properties are preceded by the $ character.)
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
4. Click Add. The tag is added to the Report Columns list box. 5. Repeat steps 3-4 for each additional tag (or graphical element attribute) on which you want to report.
Page 65 of 80
6. (Optional) To specify that elements will be reported regardless of whether they have tags attached, turn on All Elements in the Report On menu. 7. In the Report File Name field, key in the name of the report file that will be generated when the template file is used. 8. From the dialog box's File menu, choose Save As. The Save Template As dialog box opens. 9. In the Name field, key in the desired filename. 10. (Optional) To change the destination directory, use the Directories list box. 11. Click OK.
The filename specified in step 7 is saved with the tag set in the design file and appears in the Report File Name field when the tag set is selected in the Generate Templates dialog box. The template file itself can be used with any design file in which the tag set is defined.
The columns in the report file output are in the same order as specified in the Report Columns list.
To distinguish the elements to be reported
1. Place a fence to group the elements with the Place Fence tool. or Select the elements with the Element Selection tool.
To generate report files
1. From the Element menu's Tags submenu, choose Generate Reports. The Generate Reports dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 66 of 80
2. In the Files list box, select a template on which you want to base a report. 3. Click Add. The template is added to the Templates for Reports list box. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional template on which you want to base a report. 5. Click Done.
Converting Database Data to Tags

The Database to Tag Converter utility (dbtotag.ma) is used to convert data records from an external database, which is linked to the active design file, into tag data. A database must first be attached and properly linked to existing elements in the active design file. Once DBTOTAG is properly configured, it performs three operations: 1. Creates a tag set definition in a type 66 element (required) 2. Loads the tag data into the design file and links it to the graphical elements. (optional) 3. Displays tag data values near the associated graphic element. (optional)
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
To start the conversion process, you first need to be in an active design file with a valid database attached.
Page 67 of 80
The first step in any conversion process is to select the source data. This includes selecting a database table in the Database Tables list and transferring or Adding it to the Import Tables list.
To start the conversion process
1. In the Tag Sets dialog box (Element > Tags > Define), choose File > Import > From Database. The Database to Tag dialog box opens.
To select the source data
1. Select a database table entry for import. 2. Click the Add button. DBTOTAG places the table name in the Import Tables list. Repeat this process for any database tables attached to the design file.
To select individual data fields to import
1. Highlight the appropriate dataset on the Import Tables list. 2. Click the Details button. The Column Details dialog box is displayed for the selected dataset. Importing the information Once all of the data fields have been adjusted for each data column to be imported, all that remains is the import process itself. Selecting the Import button from the Database to Tag dialog box starts this process. DBTOTAG creates a tag element (type: 66) for each dataset selected. Into this element, the selected data field definitions are created and loaded with the table definitions from the external database. The data from each column in the database is copied into a tag element (type: 37). A link between each tag data field and the graphic elements of the design file is performed. Finally, if any data fields were selected as displayable, the displayable attribute of the tag element is enabled, and the data is displayed near the associated graphic element.
After the conversion process is complete, the design file will still be attached and linked to the original database. You must perform further database maintenance to truly eliminate this connection to the external database.
Once a tag set has been created it cannot be accessed by dbtotag. You can, however, change the displayability on any loaded tag data as part of the normal tag process. You can delete an entire tag set from your design file using the Tag Set Settings Dialog Box. Just select the tag set name from the Tag Set list and hit the delete button. An alert window displays to warn you that this function deletes all tag data. If this is correct then hit the OK button. It is always a good idea to perform a Compress operation on the design file after deleting a tag set.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Exporting Tag Data to an External Database
Page 68 of 80
The Tag to Database dialog box allows you to export tag data from the design file into an existing database table. The Export tags list box displays all tag sets that can be exported to the database.
To select the tag set to be exported
1. Choose File > Export > To Database, from the Tag Sets dialog box. The Tag to Database dialog box opens.
2. Select the tag set to be exported. 3. Click Add. The tag set displays in the Export Tags list box. 4. Repeat this process.
To select individual tag sets to export
1. From the Export tags list box, select the tag set to export. 2. (Optional) Click Details. The Tag Details dialog box opens, displaying the details of the selected tag set. 3. Click Export.
Composing Sheet Models with References

Creation of hard-copy prints of your designs, in the form of drawings, requires initial setting up of Sheet models. A Sheet model typically consists of a collection of design model references that are scaled and positioned as necessary to create a drawing, usually inside a drawing border, which can be printed. In the Sheet model, you then add dimensions and other notes as required. You can use the reference tools to manipulate the references as needed to create the drawing. Typically, this may include folding, copying, scaling, clipping, rotating, masking, and/or mirroring the references. When working with 3D references, you can use true hidden line representation to display the reference correctly for the drawing. Sheet models can be thought of as virtual sheets of paper, which are printed to produce hard-copy documents. Design geometry that appears in a Sheet model is attached as references, either from models in the same DGN file, or from models in other DGN files, or a combination of both. Overview Creating Sheet Models for Drawing Production Views and References Tools for Drawing Creation Drawing Composition task
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
SHEET SET BORDERATTACHMENT Cloud By Points Cloud By Element Sample Border DGN Files Visible Edges DGN Files
Page 69 of 80
Overview
Because all geometry is placed at full-size in your design models, either of two methods may be used to compose drawings in a Sheet model. That is, you have two choices for fitting your geometry to the space allowed by your drawing sheet. You can:

Scale up the border to fit around your full-size geometry. Draw the border at full-size, then scale down your design geometry to fit inside the border.
Both methods have their pros and cons, and either system may be used successfully. No matter which method you employ, creating a Sheet model for printing as a drawing, typically involves working with the following components:

Design model(s) where the design geometry is created Saved views Used to set up views required for the drawing. Border model Contains the border and title block for plotted output. Sheet model The electronic drawing sheet.
Another common usage of references is in the creation of design compositions, which are used by engineers and other technical professionals to communicate through the visual content of their designs. Whereas a drawing is composed in a sheet model, a design composition typically is contained in a design model.
Creating Sheet Models for Drawing Production

Creating Sheet models automates the creation of drawing sheets for printing of your design drawings. This process is similar in a way to how the manual draftsperson works. Where it differs, however, is that instead of redrawing the model's geometry for each view, like the manual system requires, you simply attach views of the design model as references. In other words, you attach as references, views of your design geometry for each plan, elevation, section, and so on. The power of this system is that any changes made to the design model then is reflected immediately in each affected view in the drawings. The electronic version of the manual drawing sheet consists of:

Sheet model The electronic drawing sheet. Attached models/views References of the design geometry.
There is no hard and fast rule to how you create Sheet models, and display your drawing information from your design models. Commonly, either of two methods are used, one that scales the border to enclose the design, or the other that scales the design to fit the border. With both methods, for 3D work in particular, it is a good idea to have separate design models and sheet models. This lets you keep the purely drawing information, such as text and dimensioning, separate from the design information. Doing this reduces the likelihood of conflicts where others, for example, wish to reference the same design model for use in a drawing of a different scale. Scaling the drawing border to fit the design With this method, where the drawing border is scaled up (or down) to cover the required area in the design, all text and dimensioning must be scaled the same amount also This is to ensure that when the scaled print is created text and dimensioning elements are at the correct
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
physical size.
Page 70 of 80
To simplify this process, when you create a Sheet model, you have the option of associating an Annotation Scale to it, as well as a sheet layout size. Additionally, if required, you can specify the origin of the sheet layout and its rotation. When you specify an annotation scale, the Sheet Layout element also is scaled by that amount. This is a non-printing element that shows you the outer limits of the sheet size that you choose. To this, you then can reference your own border, to which you apply the same scale factor as that for the Sheet model. Additionally, any text that you place in the Sheet model, with the Annotation Scale lock enabled, automatically will be scaled by the same amount. For example, if you are creating a 1m = 200m scale drawing, any text that you place would have to be 200 times bigger than normal so that it prints at the correct size. With Annotation Scale set to 200:1, you don't have to worry about calculating the size of the text. If you turn on the Annotation Scale lock and then select 5mm text, it will be placed in the Sheet model as 1,000mm high, but when printed at 1:200 scale it will be scaled back to 5mm high. For occasions where you do need to place text in the Design model, a similar Annotation Scale setting is available. Where a drawing consists of various views and details, at different scales, the sheet should be created at the main scale for the drawing. Any details, with different scales, that are then required in the drawing can be placed at a scale that is a multiple of the main scale. For example, if the main part of the drawing is 1m = 200m, or 1:200 scale, then the Sheet model is created with the Annotation Scale set to 200:1 to compensate for the scaling down during printing. If you want to include a 1m = 20m, or 1:20, detail, you would reference this detail at a ratio of 200/20 or 10:1 scale. When you print your drawings you set the scale to that of the annotation scale. If the annotation scale is 200:1, you print the drawing with the scale set to 200 Design = 1 Paper (where the units are the same).
General Procedure Creating a drawing by scaling the border to fit the design
1. Create a DGN file and design model, using references as required. 2. Create a Sheet model (this can be in the same DGN file as your design geometry, or in a separate DGN file, as required). Set the Annotation Scale to the main scale that will be used in the drawing. 3. To the sheet model, reference your border file at the scale required for the drawing. 4. To the sheet model, reference all views of the design model that are to be at the main scale for the drawing at 1:1 (full scale). Set nesting to the level necessary to include all required sub references. 5. For any views that are to be at a different scale from the main scale, reference them at a scale factor of (Main Scale/Required Scale). 6. If necessary, use the Set Reference Presentation tool, in the References dialog box, to change the display format for the references. This applies particularly to 3D models, where the display presentation normally would be set to True Hidden Line. 7. Check that the Annotation Scale lock is enabled. 8. Place text and dimensions at their required size. Annotation Scale lock scales the size of the text so that it prints at the required size. 9. Print the drawing at the scale required.
In the event that you need to change the scale of the drawing, you can quickly change the size of all text, by changing the Annotation Scale setting for the model.
Scaling the design to fit the drawing border With this method, the drawing border is placed at full size and the design information is scaled up or down to fit inside the border, similar to how drawings are created with manual drafting. All text and dimensioning is placed at full size. When you create a Sheet model, you select Full Size for the Annotation Scale. Additionally, if required, you can specify the origin of the sheet layout and its rotation. In this case, with Annotation Scale set to full size, the Sheet Layout element is placed at its real-world size (not scaled). This is a nonprinting element that shows you the outer limits of the sheet size that you choose. To this you then can reference your own border, again at full size (no scale factor). References to the design are placed at the appropriate scales as required, to fit inside the sheet/border layout. For a 1m = 200m, or 1:200 scale drawing, the design model references will be placed in the Sheet model at a scale of 1:200. Similarly, any details that are at different scales are simply referenced at the required scale For example a 1m = 20m or 1:20 scale detail would be referenced at 1:20 scale You
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 71 of 80
place text in the Sheet model at exactly the size that you want in the printout. When you print your drawings they are printed with the scale set to full-size (1:1).
General Procedure Creating a drawing with a 1:1 border, and scaling the design
1. Create a DGN file and design model, using references as required. 2. Create a Sheet model (this can be in the same DGN file as your design geometry, or in a separate DGN file, as required.) Set the Annotation Scale to Full Scale. 3. To the sheet model, reference your border file at 1:1 (full scale). 4. To the sheet model, reference views of the design model as required, at the scale at which each view is to be printed. Set nesting to the level necessary to include all required sub references. 5. If necessary, use the Set Reference Presentation tool, in the References dialog box, to change the display format for the references. This applies particularly to 3D models, where the display presentation normally would be set to True Hidden Line. 6. Check that the Annotation Scale lock is enabled. 7. In the sheet model, place text and dimensions at their required size, as required for the drawing. For dimensioning, Reference Scale must be enabled to ensure that reference units are used when dimensioning elements in a reference. 8. Print the drawing at 1:1 scale.
While the Annotation Scale lock really is not required in this method, because the text is placed at real-world sizes, it is good practice to have it enabled. In the event that you need to change the scale of the drawing, you can quickly change the size of all text, by changing the Annotation Scale setting for the model.
Associating a border attachment to a sheet model When you associate a border attachment to a sheet model, any changes to the annotation scale for the sheet, automatically are propagated to the border attachment. If, for example, you have an A4 title border associated to a sheet model, and you change the annotation scale to 1:50, then the associated border file also is scaled by the same amount. You can set up a border attachment association as follows: 1. Create a sheet model of the required size for your title block (typically, in a separate DGN file). 2. Either place the title block graphics in the sheet model, or reference them to it. 3. Create your drawing sheet model, at the required sheet size. 4. In the drawing sheet model, reference the title block sheet model (with live nesting on if the title border graphics were referenced to the sheet model). 5. In the drawing sheet model, key in SHEET SET BORDERATTACHMENT <filename>. Once you have associated the border attachment to the drawing sheet model, any changes to the annotation scale will be reflected in the attachment. If, for example, you change the annotation scale for the drawing, the title block graphics (in the associated borderattachment) also will be adjusted.
Views and References Tools for Drawing Creation

Setting up a sheet model for drawing production, requires references of the design geometry. These may be references of various standard views of a 3D model, such as Top, Front, and Right elevations, or of saved views. MicroStation's view and reference tools streamline this process. Copy references by folding
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 72 of 80
Typically, drawings consist of various views of the design. Usually, these views are orthogonal to one another, which lets you reference, say, the Top view and then use the Copy Reference by Folding tool to create the Front and Side elevations. This tool copies the original reference and then attaches a view by folding it about an orthogonal axis, or about a line defined by two points. Reference Presentation (display mode) Where drawing sheets are created from views of 3D models, the default display mode usually is Wireframe. In order to create drawings, with hidden lines removed, the Set Reference Presentation tool in the References dialog box, lets you change the display mode. When you are working in a Sheet model, as well as the standard display modes, an extra option is available True Hidden Line. This setting generates a new vector model of the reference, with hidden lines removed, which provides much cleaner printouts, and also lets you choose from other settings, such as Include Hidden Edges. Additionally, you can specify the attributes for both the visible and hidden lines. Saved views In the design model, you can create saved views of your design, which then can be referenced to create a view in the drawing sheet. Named fences When you attach a reference, you can select a named fence to specify the view for the reference. When you select a named fence for the reference, all levels are on. If level display or other controls are required, then the named fence should be used as a clip volume, then saved and attached with a saved view. Clip Volume Where it is difficult to create a saved view that contains only the part of the model that you require for the drawing, you can use the Clip Volume tool to first isolate the part of the model required, and then make a saved view of this, to reference to the sheet model. Clip boundary elements can be associative to the saved view. With an associative clip boundary, the reference clip boundary automatically reflects any changes to the clip boundary element in the reference. If the clip boundary is not associative to the saved view, then the reference attachment will only change when the saved view is updated through the Saved Views dialog box.
Drawing Composition task

Contains tools used to compose Sheet models.
Most of the tools in the Drawing Composition task are also members of a child task. When a tool is pointed to and the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tools in the child task can be selected. The child task can be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open As ToolBox from the drop-down menu. When a tool is selected in a child task, the tool automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Drawing Composition task.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 73 of 80
The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Drawing Composition task and identifies the corresponding child tasks and for each, the default representative tool:
References task (Attach Reference)
Dimensioning task (Dimension Element)
Detailing Symbols task (Place Title Text)
Cells task (Place Active Cell)
Text task (Place Text)
Cloud By Points
Cloud By Element
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 74 of 80
Sample Border DGN Files

When you install MicroStation with Commonly used Workspace files checked (the default) then a number of sample border files are delivered to the ANSI, Architectural, and ISO sub-folders of the Workspace\Projects\Examples\Borders folder. These provide sample border files that you can use, either as references, or placed as cells. In each border DGN file there is a default model, in which the title block is drawn at full scale. This model then is referenced to other models for various scales, including Full Scale. The description for each model includes an example of the size required for any text, to produce standard size text in the printed output. A saved view also is provided for each scale, with the name of the saved view matching the scale represented. A cell placed below the title block provides instructions for its use. This cell contains tags that can be used to input information into the various fields of the title block. If the border file has been referenced to the active file, rather than placed as a cell, then you should copy the cell (containing the instructions) into the active file in order to edit the title block tags.
To attach a 1:100 AO border as a reference
1. In the References dialog box, select the Attach References icon. The Attach References dialog box opens. 2. Navigate to the Workspace\Projects\Examples\Borders\ISO folder. 3. Select AO-border.dgn and click OK. The Attach Reference Settings dialog box opens. 4. From the Models option menu, choose 1;100. 5. From the Orientation list, select 1:100. 6. Check that True Scale is turned on with Scale (Master:Ref) set to 1:1. 7. From the Nested Attachments option menu, choose Live Nesting and set Depth to 1. 8. Click OK. 9. Enter a data point to position the reference.
To place a 1:100 AO border as a cell
1. Attach the file AO-border.dgn as a cell library (located in the Workspace\Projects\Examples\Borders\ISO folder). 2. Select the Place Active Cell tool. 3. Click the Browse Cell(s) icon. 4. Select the cell 1;100 and click the Placement button. 5. Check that X, Y, and Z scales are set to 1. 6. Check that True Scale is turned on. 7. Enter a data point to place the cell.
To fill in the attached border's title block
1. Zoom in to the title block area. 2. If the border is referenced, copy into the active file the cell (with the instructions) located directly below the lower right corner of the border. 3. In the Tags task, select the Edit Tags tool.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
4. Identify the cell below the title block. The Edit Tags [TitleBlock] dialog box opens. 5. In turn, highlight each of the required items in the list box and input their values in the key-in field below. 6. When completed, click OK. The dialog box closes and the keyed-in values are added to the title block in the model.
Page 75 of 80
Editing the tags for the title block.
Visible Edges DGN Files

You can create a visible edges DGN file a 2D or 3D DGN file that contains the edges visible in a 3D view (that is, with those edges that would be hidden, removed).
To export a visible edges DGN file
1. From the File menu's Export submenu, choose Visible Edges. The Export Visible Edges dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 76 of 80
Export Visible Edges dialog box
2. On the General tab, choose the view number from the View option menu. 3. On the General tab, choose a method from the Method option menu. 4. (Usually recommended) To create a visible edges DGN file, set Export To to 3D File or 2D File. or To place the visible edges in the active DGN file, set Export To to Active File. 5. Adjust other settings as desired. 6. (Optional) To preview the result, click the Preview button. The Export Visible Edges Preview window opens, displaying a preview image. If you are dissatisfied with the preview image, return to step 5.
Export Visible Edges Preview window
7. Click the Export button. The Save Visible Edges Design File As dialog box opens. By default, the visible edges file is given the same filename as the active design file but with the suffix .hln. 8. (Optional) Change the filename and/or choose a different directory. 9 Click OK
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 77 of 80
You can export multiple visible edges DGN files using key-ins.
To export multiple visible edges DGN files
1. Key in EDGES PROCESS <file_name> [switches]

Alternative Method To export multiple visible edges DGN files
1. Create an Input command file. 2. Key in EDGES BATCH <input_command_file> In the above procedures: <file_name> is the DGN file from which the information for the visible edges file is obtained. The wildcard characters * and ? can be used to specify more than one file. Unless a complete path is specified, the "Design Files "configuration variable (MS_DEF) is used to locate the DGN file(s). <input_command_file> is the name of the input command file containing the processing details, such as file names and switches. Unless a switch(es) is specified, the default settings set forth in the following table are used to control the conversion.
Switch -B[D|V] Effect Process the entire DGN file (-BD), or the view only (-BV). Specifies whether a 2D or a 3D visible edges DGN file is to be created (if -D is not present). Specifies the filename and path of the visible edges DGN file. Enables/disables expanding hatching so that it appears in the generated geometry. Enables/disables modifications to the Line Style Attributes in the generated geometry Enables/disables output of hidden edges Where <color> is specified, hidden edges are given that color. If no color is specified, they have the same color as the source. Where <level> is specified, hidden edges are placed on that level. If no level is specified, they are placed on the same level as the source. Where <line_style> is specified, hidden edges are given that line style. If no line style is specified, they have the same line style as the source. Default (switch not present) In perspective views, all view boundaries (side, front, back) are always applied. For parallel views this option enables processing of the entire file without clipping to any of the view planes. Create a 3D visible edges DGN file. Name is the same as the DGN file with the suffix .hln saved in MicroStation's out/dgn directory. -EXPANDHATCHOFF -EXPANDCLSOFF -HOFF -HC
-ED[2|3] -EF<edgesfile> -EXPANDHATCH, EXPANDHATCHOFF -EXPANDCLS, -EXPANDCLSOFF -H, -HOFF -HC<color>, -HC
-HL<level>, -HL
-HL
-HS<line_style>, -HS
-HS
-HW<line_weight>, -HW
Where <line_weight> is specified, hidden edges are given that line weight. If no line weight is -HW specified, they have the same line weight as the source. Enable, disable, calculation of intersections between elements. -I
-I, -IOFF
Selects calculation method for edges. -M Corresponds to the Method settings in the [TRACE|EXACT|FAST|MODELER] General tab of the Export Visible Edges dialog box. -A[L|M|H] -PAUSE, -NOPAUSE -R, -ROFF -REMOVESMOOTH, NOREMOVESMOOTH -RX<resolution> -RY<resolution> -S<saved view> Selects low, medium, or high, accuracy for spline surfaces when -MEXACT is set. Activates/Deactivates the pause (for OK) dialog box between views. Enable, disable, spline surface rule lines. Removes/leaves edges between tangent faces when -MMODELER is set. Sets the x resolution for Fast method (-MFAST). Sets the y resolution for Fast method (-MFAST). S l t d i Thi i i ti t d
-MEXACT
-AM -NOPAUSE -ROFF -NOREMOVESMOOTH -RX1000 -RY1000 The view is used in its current position
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
(attached). -TCB -V<view_number> Instead of using defaults, use settings from the DGN file. Visible edges are created from the contents of the specified view. Where <color> is specified, visible edges are given that color. If no color is specified, they have the same color as the source. Where <level> is specified, visible edges are placed on that level. If no level is specified, they are placed on the same level as in the source. Where <line_style> is specified, visible edges are given that line style. If no line style is specified, they have the same line style as the source.
Page 78 of 80
-V1, visible edges are created from the contents of View 1. -VC
-VC<color>, -VC
-VL<level>, -VL
-VL
-VS<line_style>, -VS
-VS
-VW<line_weight>, -VW
Where <line_weight> is specified, visible edges are given that line weight. If no line weight is -VW specified, they have the same line weight as the source. Sets working memory in KB. For example, to set 1 MB of working memory, enter -W1024.
-W<working_memory>
-W0 indicates that the application should use as much memory as needed to compute the entire picture in one step. For default resolutions of RX1000 and -RY1000, this uses 4 MB. Sets the tolerance, in working units, for certain curved surface operations. Forces all text and dimensions to show, even if hidden by surfaces.
-W4000
-T<mu:su>
-SHOWTEXT, -PROCESSTEXT Processes text and dimensions like other geometry (may be hidden). -TILEX=<nnn>, -TILEY=<nnn> Enables Tiling, where the value <nnn> sets the number of tiles.
-PROCESSTEXT
No tiling.
Input command file The input command file is a text file in which each line consists of the filename of the DGN file to process followed by any switches. The syntax for each line is:
<dgn_file> [switch(es)] dgn_file is the name of the DGN file. If the path is not specified, the file is searched for in the directory specified by the MS_DEF configuration variable. The following sample input command file specifies that visible edges DGN files be created of views 1 and 2 of the DGN file test1.dgn and test2.dgn and of View 1 of the DGN file test2.dgn:
test1.dgn -V1 -EFc:/Bentley/Workspace/projects/examples/generic/out/testv1.hln test1.dgn -V2 -EFc:/Bentley/Workspace/projects/examples/generic/out/testv2.hln test2.dgn -EFc:/Bentley/Workspace/projects/examples/generic/out/test2.hln
Using Redline Files

MicroStation enables you to display redline files. Redline files are reference attachments created with Bentley Redline. The configuration variable RDL_DIR specifies the directory location(s), root filename(s), and extension(s) for redline files. By default, any redline file that meets the following criteria is automatically
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs

Page 79 of 80
The redline file is located in the same directory as the open DGN or DWG file. The redline file has the extension .rdl. The redline file's name is identical to that of the open DGN or DWG file or matches the name of the open file but contains additional characters.
For example, if the redline files "Graphics Display.rdl" and "Graphics Display2.rdl" were created in Bentley Redline as attachments to the model Index and stored in the same directory as "Graphics Display.dgn", they would be automatically attached when that model is activated in MicroStation. If a redline file is attached to a model in the open DGN file, it is automatically detached when the model is deactivated.
To enable or disable the display of an attached redline file
1. In the Redline tool box, click the Redline Display icon.
The Display Redline Files dialog box opens. The attached redline files are listed. A check mark appears in the Display column for each redline file whose display is enabled.
2. In the list box, click the Display column of the entry for the redline file whose display you want to enable or disable. Redline tool box Redline Display Display Redline Files dialog box Redline Off
Redline tool box

The tools in the Redline tool box are used to work with redline files.
To
Select in the Redline tool box
Enable or disable the display of attached redline files. Redline Display
3/24/2010
Detailing Designs
Page 80 of 80
Detach redline files. Redline Off
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX REDLINE <OFF | ON | TOGGLE>
3/24/2010
Working With Complete Designs
Page 1 of 329
Working Working With With Complete Complete Designs Designs

Visualization Printing Digital Rights Technologies Visualization Glossary
Visualization
Rendering Types and Methods Lighting Material Characteristics Setting Up the Camera Generating Rendered Images Specialized Procedures Animation
Rendering Types and Methods

Rendering is the process of depicting a 3D model through the display of shaded surfaces. MicroStation V8 provides a comprehensive range of rendering choices from the simple modes, which include Hidden Line Display, Smooth shading, and Phong shading, through to the sophisticated photo-realistic rendering modes such as Ray Tracing, Radiosity solving, and Particle Tracing. How you approach rendering will depend largely on what you require as the finished result. At the outset you should decide whether your goal is interactive images, or photo-realism:
Interactive where the goal is rendering speed, or frame rate, rather than realism. This may be to produce simple conceptual images, or animations, through to more sophisticated images in which elements are given basic material characteristics. Photo-realistic where realism is the requirement. These images require more time and care with setting up material definitions. Similarly, the setting up and placement of light sources is more critical with photo-realistic rendering modes. With both Radiosity solving and Particle Tracing, real-world lighting values always are used. With Ray Tracing, real world lighting values are used if Real World Lighting is enabled in the Ray Tracing dialog box. You can use IES lighting data files, also, to provide even more realism to your lighting. Another important consideration, particularly with photo-realistic rendering, is that of Gamma Correction of your output.
Changing the view display mode Interactive rendering modes Photo-realistic rendering modes Guide to choosing a rendering method
Changing the view display mode

You can use the View Display Mode view control to set the display of a view to Wireframe, Hidden Line, Filled Hidden Line, or Smooth Shading. These same options, plus that of Phong, are available in the Display option menu of the View Attributes dialog box. Setting a view to a shaded mode lets you work in a rendered view.
Currently, Phong Shading as a Display Mode for view display does not support shadows. When the Render tool is used to render a view with Phong Shading, however, you can specify that shadows are generated.
Interactive rendering modes

Interactive rendering modes for Smooth and Phong provide direct illumination only That is you see only the effects of lighting on
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh17BE.htm
3/24/2010

elements. You do not see reflected light, nor do you see reflections, or refraction of light. A view can be rendered in the following ways (listed in increasing order of realism). Hidden Line display
Page 2 of 329
Only parts of elements that actually would be visible are displayed lines hidden behind objects are removed. Also called polygon display as each element is first decomposed into polygons (in memory), prior to the final display. Due to these calculations, hidden line display takes longer than wireframe display.
Hidden-line rendering
See Visible Edges Design Files for information about creating a 2D or 3D design file that contains only the visible edges in a 3D view.
Filled Hidden Line display Similar to Hidden Line display, except the polygons are filled with the element color. This creates a cartoon-like effect that may be useful in some circumstances, especially with hardware that displays a limited number of colors. This mode is also called filled polygon display.
3/24/2010
Page 3 of 329
Filled hidden line rendering
Smooth (Gouraud) shading Smooth shading, displays surfaces as one or more polygons. With Smooth shading, colors are calculated at the vertices of the polygons, and then blended across the polygon interiors. This gives curved surfaces a smooth rounded appearance.
3/24/2010

Smooth-shaded rendering
Page 4 of 329
Phong shading Phong shading differs from Smooth (Gouraud) shading in that the color of each pixel is individually computed useful when better quality is more important than speed.
Phong shading can be used to display shadows (see Shadows and Phong shading), Bump maps, Transparency, and Distance Cueing in the rendered images. Phong shading renders more realistic lighting effects than Smooth shading, particularly if the light source is close to the object (for example, to see a spotlight on a wall).
Computations for Phong shading, being more complex than that for Smooth shading, can slow display time. Where Phong-shaded images are very similar to Smooth-shaded images (that is, there are no transparent elements, shadows, or bump maps) it may not be worth the extra rendering time.
Phong-shaded rendering
Photo-realistic rendering modes

Where your goal is realism, at the expense of longer rendering times, you have a choice of Ray Tracing, Radiosity solving, or Particle Tracing. The latter two take into account both direct lighting and indirect lighting, such as reflection of light and refraction. Additionally, both Radiosity and Particle Tracing can calculate diffuse reflections, with Particle Tracing also able to produce caustics (such as reflected light, and refraction). For these two rendering modes, in particular, the following points should be kept in mind:

You should use real world working units for your model, and lighting values are input as lumens. IES lighting files should be used to correctly display the lighting characteristics of different lamps, such as halogen lamps, incandescent lamps, or flourescent tubes.
3/24/2010

Page 5 of 329
More care has to be taken when defining materials, to ensure that realistic values are defined. You should set the display gamma value for your output. You must Ray Trace the Radiosity or Particle Traced solution to display specular highlights, reflections, and refraction. When working with Ray Tracing (with Real World Lighting enabled), Radiosity, or Particle Tracing, the sliders in the Render tool dialog box lets you interactively adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. That is, the result is immediate, you do not have to redisplay the solution to see the updated brightness and contrast settings.
Gamma correction for photo-realistic rendering Gamma correction is used to compensate for the fact that monitors and printers do not have the same visual response as the human eye, and serves to bring out more detail in darker areas of images. Typically, the gamma correction for a standard monitor (CRT) should be set to 1.8 to 2.5, while for an LCD display, it should be left at 1.0. In MicroStation you can set the gamma correction value for your display in the View Options category of the Preferences dialog box (select Workspace > Preferences). An exact figure is not critical, but a good starting value to experiment with is 2.0. Similarly, when you save an image from MicroStation, you have the option of applying Gamma Correction to it. This may be to accommodate a printer to produce hard-copy output that more closely represents what is seen on the screen. As a rule, to avoid tying your image to one particular display/printing device, it is better to save images with a neutral gamma value (1.0) and let other software, or printing device software, that you use add the gamma correction that they require. Each display/printing device can have different characteristics such that the correct gamma correction for one device may not be correct for another. Once gamma correction has been saved with an image, changing the gamma value will not let you return the image exactly to its original state (with gamma correction of 1.0). There is, however, one proviso. That is, that you can perform a better gamma correction in MicroStation, while you still have floating point brightness values before they are saved in a typical integer brightness file format. What this means is, if you have a specific display or output device that you are catering for, it may be advantageous to save the image with a gamma correction value (other than 1.0). While this will tie the image to the output device, it may also give the best result. Typically, printers tend to darken images more than display monitors, so a higher value may be required if you intend to print the finished image. Where required, gamma correction can be performed on the saved image, after rendering, using the MicroStation image display utility (select Utilities > Image > Display) or other imaging software. Ray Tracing Ray tracing is a photo-realistic rendering method in which an image is generated by simulating the specular reflection of light rays in a 3D scene. Ray Tracing does not display diffuse reflections. It can, however, be used in conjunction with Radiosity or Particle Tracing solution to produce the specular highlights and reflections that these processes do not display. Both Radiosity and Particle Tracing have an option for ray tracing the final display. MicroStation's Ray Tracing lets you use lighting that is more compatible with the interactive rendering modes, or you can turn on Real World Lighting, in the Ray Tracing dialog box, to work with real-world lighting values. This lets you use the Ray Tracing option to set up lighting and materials in your images prior to running a Particle Tracing or Radiosity solution, both of which can take much longer. In the real world, light rays are emitted by one or more light sources and reflect off objects until they finally reach the eye. On a computer, often it is more efficient to trace rays from the eye rather than from the light sources. This can save a significant amount of time by not following rays from lights to surfaces that are never seen.
3/24/2010
Page 6 of 329
Ray traced rendering
Ray tracing follows rays backwards from the eye into the scene, determining what can be seen. It begins by tracing (or shooting) rays of light from the viewer's eye (the camera position) through each pixel in the view. Tracing a ray involves testing all objects in a scene for intersection with that ray. For these initial rays, often referred to as primary rays or eye rays, the nearest intersection along each ray must be computed the entire design must be examined to find the nearest of all the intersections along the ray. Hidden surface removal is performed by this procedure. Once it is determined what is visible, the illumination and shading of the visible objects is computed. The illustration below shows the various rays that must be computed during ray tracing:

1 Primary or eye ray. 2 Reflected ray. 3 Shadow ray, which is traced to the light source, checks for any obstructions to the light. 4 Transmitted ray. 5 Secondary reflected ray. 6 Secondary transmitted ray.
3/24/2010
Page 7 of 329
Tracing a ray from the camera (eye) position.
Shading of the visible surface is computed for each pixel. The color of the surface is composed of three components ambient, local, and global illumination which are added together.
Ambient illumination is surface lighting not directly attributed to any particular light source. Ambient light brightens a scene in areas where there is little or no lighting. Local illumination is surface shading directly attributed to light sources. Local illumination is made up of diffuse and specular components. The Diffuse component is the light that directly strikes a surface. It is view-independent. The Specular component creates a bright highlight in the reflected direction of the light on objects with glossy surfaces. Specular highlights are view-dependent. Local illumination of a surface depends on whether or not other objects obstruct a light from shining on the surface. To determine if any object shadows a surface, a ray must be traced from the surface in the direction of each potential light source. For these shadow rays, as they are commonly called, it is not always necessary to traverse the entire design, testing for intersections. Once an opaque object is found that intersects a shadow ray, traversal can stop, since there can be no light from that light source. If a transparent object intersects the shadow ray, the light is attenuated according to the transparency of the intersected (shadowing) object. Once a light is determined to illuminate a surface, the intensity of the light is attenuated according to the distance from the light to the surface.
Global illumination is shading on a surface due to secondary (global) effects such as reflections and transparency. To determine the illumination a surface receives from the reflected and refracted directions, secondary rays are traced in those directions. For efficiency, rays are only traced if the surface is actually reflective or transparent. Each reflected or transmitted ray is treated as a primary ray in that the nearest intersection along the ray must be computed. Similarly, the surfaces that these rays see must be shaded as described above. This process is repeated recursively until a limit you define is reached or the accumulated reflectivity or transparency drops below a given threshold.
Ray tracing is especially useful in applications that require realistic renderings of reflective and transparent surfaces, such as metal and glass.
3/24/2010
Page 8 of 329
Images rendered with Phong (left) and Ray Traced (right).
Radiosity Radiosity, as defined in the literature of physics, is the total power leaving a point on a surface, per unit area on the surface. In the context of rendering, power is light energy.
3/24/2010
Page 9 of 329
Radiosity solving is a sophisticated technique that calculates the light that is reflected between diffuse surfaces. It can be used to demonstrate effects such as color bleeding (where one colored surface lends a tint to another nearby surface) and light dispersion (the reflection of indirect light onto other surfaces in a scene). Radiosity does not distribute specular light and, thus, it does not produce caustics. Also, to display specular highlights in a radiosity solution, you must set Final Display to Ray Trace (this setting is found in the Display section of the Radiosity dialog box). Radiosity solving, unlike Ray Tracing, is not a rendering technique on its own it merely generates a lighting solution that in turn, can be rendered. In fact, radiosity solving and ray tracing capabilities can be used together to produce realistic images with the best qualities of both methods. Radiosity solving operates as a rendering pre-process that computes the global, view-independent (diffuse) lighting solution. Ray tracing uses this radiosity solution to render a view-dependent image, adding specular highlights and reflections. In the following example, source lighting is provided by two spotlights, pointing toward the ceiling. Only with the ray traced image that includes the radiosity solution, do you see the natural look of the scene illuminated by both direct and reflected light. This produces the subtle shadows normally present in the real world.
Where caustics are desired (the reflection/refraction of specular light) you should consider using Particle Tracing.
Image ray traced, with no radiosity solution. Only specular highlights are displayed.
Same image ray traced, with no radiosity solution, but with Global Lighting's Flashbulb turned on to illuminate the dark areas.
3/24/2010

Same image ray traced with radiosity solution. The only lights in the scene are the two spotlights. Here, the darkened areas are illuminated by the reflected light from the walls and ceiling, giving a natural look with subtle shadows.
Page 10 of 329
Since the radiosity solution is view-independent it can be reused to render additional images of the design from different views. Each image can be rendered using either ray tracing or smooth shading. Smooth shading can be faster than ray tracing, but does not include any of the specular effects (such as reflections, refractions, and specular highlights). The radiosity solving process produces useful intermediate solutions in a short amount of time. It then automatically and continuously refines them into the final solution. This makes it possible to display intermediate results so that you can decide when the solution is satisfactory and stop the calculations. Also, you can specify the stopping criteria, either as a fixed number of shots or as a fraction of the total global illumination to be distributed. When viewing a radiosity solution, whether it be an intermediate solution, or a completed calculation, you can adjust the brightness and contrast of the image interactively, using the slider controls in the Render tool dialog box.
Radiosity and Lighting
MicroStation's radiosity solving calculates the dispersion of light energy in a scene. Radiosity calculations require different lighting settings to those used for standard Phong, or Ray Traced (with Real World Lighting disabled) images. Thus, for use with a radiosity solution, the Define Light tool has a Lumens setting that acts as a multiplier of a light source's color and intensity values to simulate real world lighting values. If the Intensity value is set to 1.0 or less, the value for Lumens most closely approximates real world lumens.
Ambient and Flashbulb lighting with radiosity
By default, radiosity calculations ignore both Flashbulb and Ambient global lighting. Where Ambient and/or Flashbulb lighting is required for a radiosity solution, the following key-ins are available to enable/disable them:

RADIOSITY SET AMBIENT [ON|OFF] RADIOSITY SET FLASHBULB [ON|OFF]
Where no value (ON or OFF) is supplied, a message displays in the message area, giving the current state of the setting (enabled or disabled).
How radiosity solutions are generated
Understanding the basics of the radiosity solving process can help you determine the trade-offs between solution time and solution quality that are critical to successful usage. The main control over solution quality is determined by the subdivision settings, which specify how finely each surface in the design is meshed.
Radiosity solving is a processing-intensive operation. As such, the practical minimum hardware requirements for radiosity solving may exceed the general minimum requirements for using MicroStation.
Patches and elements
During processing, surfaces are first subdivided into a set of triangles (controlled by the MicroStation Stroke Tolerance setting). These triangles are further subdivided into patches. From here, each patch is subdivided into one or more triangular elements, thus forming an element mesh. A further adaptive subdivision may occur along shadow boundaries. Settings in the Radiosity dialog box determine the sizes of the patches and elements, as well as the degree of adaptive subdivision. The settings in the Radiosity Settings section control the size of the patches and elements. Another setting controls the way that the elements are further subdivided along shadow boundaries. Take, for example, a simple 10 10 unit square surface. With the following settings: Maximum Patch Area 50 Maximum Element Area 10
3/24/2010

the surface is first subdivided into patches having a maximum area of 50 square units.
Page 11 of 329
From here, the patches are further divided into elements having a maximum area of 10 square units.
Light energy is received by the elements. Illumination is calculated at each vertex, and the mean value is calculated for the element. Also calculated is the amount of energy that is absorbed and reflected. This is dependent on the material definition for the surface. Finally, the amount of light energy to be shot (reflected) is then calculated for each patch, by gathering the values for all elements contained within it (the patch). Each shot during radiosity solving shoots the light energy from a single patch to each of the elements of the other surfaces. By selecting and shooting the brightest unshot patch each time, the intermediate solution progresses as quickly as possible toward the final solution.
Adaptive subdivision
If a spotlight is placed above the lower right corner of the surface, the radiosity solution calculated and then ray traced, the resulting image is less than satisfactory. This is due to the element mesh being too coarse to accurately depict the circular light beam.
Coarse element mesh
3/24/2010
Page 12 of 329
A coarse element mesh produces inaccurate results at the boundary of the (circular) light beam in the lower right corner.
This can be corrected by decreasing the size of the element mesh. However, only the lower right corner of the image needs the extra resolution, not the entire surface. Setting Maximum Element Subdivisions to a value greater than zero meshes surfaces more finely at shadow boundaries. For example, a setting of 1 allows each element to be further subdivided into 4 triangles, and a setting of 2 allows each of these to be further subdivided into 4, and so on. Thus, the higher this value, the more accurate the boundary becomes, at a greater cost in processing time.
A finer element mesh provides a more accurate definition of the light beam on the surface.
3/24/2010
Page 13 of 329
Adaptive subdivision allows for greater subdivision of the surface element mesh at the shadow boundaries. Other areas are left at their initial subdivision.
Controlling calculation time and accuracy
Geometric accuracy of the shooting operations is determined by the sizes of the patches, with smaller patches giving a more accurate result at a greater cost in time. In general, each patch can shoot to the elements of every other patch, so the time needed to compute an exact solution can increase with the square of the number of patches. For example, a solution with twice as many patches takes about 4 times as long to compute; one with 10 times as many patches takes about 100 times as long to compute, assuming the ratio of the patch areas to the element areas remains the same. When the element area remains constant, the time to compute a solution may vary linearly with the number of patches. For example, if the maximum patch size is 10.0 and the maximum element size is 1.0, reducing the patch size to 5.0 would require twice as many shots to be taken (with the time per shot remaining constant), taking twice as long to reach a similar solution (of higher quality).
Maximum Patch Area 20.
3/24/2010
Page 14 of 329
Maximum Patch Area 5.
As the Maximum Patch Area setting is reduced, the shadows from the reflected light become less distinct. In this example, the shadow cast by the lamp on the left, particularly, is much more diffuse with the smaller setting for Maximum Patch Area. With this in mind, it is important to keep tight control over the number of patches to minimize the time needed to compute the radiosity solution. A good starting point for these settings is to use the defaults, which can be found by selecting File > Reset Default Settings in the Radiosity dialog box. For even finer control, you can also specify, on an individual basis, which surfaces are allowed to shoot and which surfaces are allowed to receive illumination. Selection is based on whether or not Global Illumination is turned on in the material definition of the surface. Accuracy of the visibility calculations is determined by the number of sample points on the current light source or shooting patch. You can use the Maximum Samples per Shot setting to specify a larger number of sample points to improve the visibility calculations. The radiosity solution time increases roughly one-for-one with the number of samples. If you are using a relatively small patch size, you can generally use a smaller number of samples, and if you are using a larger patch size, you will generally need to use a larger number of samples. Similarly, if you wish to decrease the number of samples, you may need to decrease the patch size as well. If you increase the number of samples, however, you still may be unable to increase the patch size significantly without adversely affecting the accuracy of the lighting calculations. Resolution of shadows and highlights in the solution is determined by the sizes of the elements. To improve resolution along shadow boundaries, adaptive subdivision of elements across the boundaries can also be performed. This is controlled by the Maximum Element Subdivisions setting.
3/24/2010
Page 15 of 329
Top: Maximum Element Subdivisions = 1. Bottom: Maximum Element Subdivisions = 4. Increasing the Maximum Element Subdivisions value, results in more accurate images, particularly at shadow boundaries.
Ray Trace Direct Illumination
You can save on memory usage by using turning on Ray Trace direct illumination. With this setting on, the ray tracer is used to compute shadows from light sources, but not from reflected light. This means that if the scene is lit primarily by direct light, very high quality images can be obtained using much larger element sizes, and therefore much less memory.
To generate a radiosity solution
1. Select the Render tool. 2. Set the Render Mode to Radiosity. The Render tool dialog box expands to display further options for Radiosity solving. 3. Click the Open Radiosity Settings dialog icon. The Radiosity dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 16 of 329
This dialog box is divided into three collapsible sections that contain the controls for generating radiosity solutions. In the above figure, the dialog box is shown with sections collapsed (left) and expanded (right). There are options for controlling the accuracy of the solution and monitoring the intermediate result. 4. Adjust settings as required. 5. Select the view in which to display the solution. 6. Check the progress of the solution.
For Radiosity and Particle Tracing solutions, Render All Objects, in the Ray Tracing dialog box, is assumed to be on. This is regardless of the actual setting in the Ray Tracing dialog box.
For radiosity solving, both Ambient and Flashbulb in the Global Lighting dialog box should be turned off, or set to zero.
Radiosity key-ins
If necessary, the key-ins RADIOSITY SHOOTINTERIOR, RADIOSITY SET SHOOTINTERIOR [ON|OFF], and RADIOSITY SET EDGEDELTA <value> can be used to allow radiosity to be shot only to the interiors of polygons. This serves two purposes:

Where a light source is outside a room, it prevents light from hitting the vertices on the edge shared by a wall and a floor. If geometry of a wall or cornice is near the edge of a surface, it may prevent that cornice from inadvertently shadowing the surface.
3/24/2010

Key-in Effect
Page 17 of 329
Enables or disables shooting radiosity to polygon interiors. This value should generally be set ON (the default). When RADIOSITY SET enabled (on), the vertices near the edges of polygons are moved toward the polygon's interior by the amount specified SHOOTINTERIOR [ON|OFF] with the RADIOSITY SET EDGEDELTA <value> key-in. RADIOSITY SHOOTINTERIOR RADIOSITY SET EDGEDELTA <value> Toggles the current state (on/off) for shooting radiosity to polygon interiors. Specifies the amount that the edges of polygons are moved towards the polygon's interior. This value is expressed as a fraction of a triangle. The default (0.0002) should be sufficient for most designs.
Checking the progress of the solution
As a radiosity solution is being computed, the status bar displays the current status shot number, energy for this shot, unshot energy remaining, and the minimum energy threshold for stopping the solution. If an intermediate display is specified, then intermediate solutions are rendered in the selected view at the specified frequency. When one of the stopping conditions is met, or the final solution is computed, it is rendered into the selected view (provided Final Display is not set to None), and the message Display complete appears in the status bar. Rendering statistics can be viewed in the Message Details section of the Message Center.
Rendering details displayed in the Message Details section of the Message Center.
Interrupting/restarting the radiosity process
You can interrupt radiosity solving between shots with a Reset. After the current shot is completed, the final display is rendered. The final display can then be interrupted with another Reset. In the case where an intermediate solution is being displayed, a single Reset interrupts the display, and the solution continues with the next shot. A second Reset then interrupts the radiosity solution, and a third Reset interrupts the final display. You can restart the radiosity solution, from the next shot, by clicking the Add more shots to solution (to current limits) icon in the Render tool dialog box. Radiosity settings, such as the Limit Number of Shots value, can be changed before the solution is restarted, and in most cases will take effect immediately. Other settings, such as the Maximum Patch and Element areas, will not take effect until the rendering database is cleared and a new solution commenced.
Adjusting the brightness/contrast of an image
Whether Radiosity calculations have been interrupted or have been completed, you can use the Brightness and Contrast sliders in the Render settings window to fine tune an image interactively. Move the sliders to the right to brighten the image or to add contrast, or move them to the left to darken the image or to red ce the contrast Using the sliders is similar to orking ith the Brightness M ltiplier/Adapt to
3/24/2010
Page 18 of 329
Brightness setting and the Display Contrast setting in the Display section of the Radiosity dialog box, except that the controls in the Render tool dialog box are interactive and do not require an update of the view with the Display current solution (in any view) option in the Render settings window. When you use the slider controls, the Brightness Multiplier/Adapt to Brightness, and Display Contrast settings automatically are adjusted to match the two slider control settings.
Saving radiosity solutions to disk
Where required, you can save the radiosity solution itself to disk. This then can be retrieved at a later time and, providing the geometry and lighting have not changed, you can add more shots to the scene or render additional images with the radiosity solution already calculated. When saving a radiosity solution, from a model other than the default model, by default it is given a name in the form <DGN filename>_<model name>.rad. For example, if you were working in a model named First Floor in a DGN file named Office.dgn, then the radiosity solution would, by default, be given the name Office_First Floor.rad. If you then changed to another model, Second Floor, in the same DGN file, it would be given the name Office_Second Floor.rad and so on. Solutions created from the default model, whether it has been renamed or not, are given a default name <DGN filename>.rad. This naming convention lets you work on different models in the same DGN file without overwriting existing solutions. You also have the option of choosing your own name for the radiosity solution.
To save a radiosity solution database
1. From the Radiosity dialog box's File menu, choose Save Solution. The Save Rendering Database dialog box opens. Controls in this dialog box are similar to those in the Save As dialog box. 2. Select a directory (and a new filename, if required). 3. Click the OK button to save the rendering database.
To retrieve a radiosity solution database and render other views
1. From the Radiosity dialog box's File menu, choose Load Solution. The Load Rendering Database dialog box opens. Controls in this dialog box are similar to those in the Open dialog box. 2. Select a directory and filename. The database should be one that was created from the active DGN file/model. 3. Click the OK button. 4. Select the Render tool and set Render Mode to Radiosity. 5. In the Render tool dialog box, click the Display current solution (in any view) icon. 6. Select the view(s) in which you want to display the solution. The view is rendered according to the Final Display setting of the Radiosity dialog box.
It is highly recommended that a radiosity solution be loaded only into the model from which it was originally saved. Doing otherwise, results are unpredictable.
Exporting radiosity solutions to DGN
MicroStations Radiosity rendering mode, along with Particle Trace, calculates lighting effects for every surface within the model. They are, therefore, commonly referred to as global solutions. Global lighting solutions can be considerably more useful than other visualization methods (such as ray tracing) as they can be viewed from any angle or camera location. You can export the global lighting solution from either a radiosity or particle trace rendering with the Export Solution to DGN option in the right-click menu of the Render tool. The solution will be exported to a 3D design file as mesh geometry with the appropriate lighting values at the vertices. The exported model then can be viewed from any direction, attached as a reference, and so on. Diffuse lighting only is exported and the exported model will not display specular or reflective effects. You can control the quality of the exported mesh with the Quality setting of the 3D Plotting Options dialog box. This is accessed from the Print dialog box when printing to 3D PDF, or with the key-in Dialog U3D.
To export a radiosity solution to DGN
1. With a radiosity solution loaded, right-click in the icon menu bar of the Render tool dialog box and select Save Solution to DGN
3/24/2010
Page 19 of 329
from the pop-up menu. The Export Rendering Solution To Design File dialog box opens. By default the file is given the name of the active DGN with RAD appended in the form <filename>RAD.dgn. 2. (Optional) In the Export Rendering Solution To Design File dialog box, adjust settings as required. You can change the location for the exported DGN file, and change the name of the file. 3. Click Save. Particle Tracing Particle tracing is not a rendering process in itself, but a global lighting solution that may be rendered. Particle tracing is an alternative to traditional radiosity, with significantly lower memory requirements. It is especially well suited to visualizing very large designs. Because the particle tracing solutions are computed directly to disk, rather than in memory, solutions may be generated for designs of virtually any size (see Disk Space Requirements for Particle Tracing). Particle tracing solutions are view-independent. Once computed, the solution can be redisplayed from any vantage point. This feature is particularly useful for creating animations and interactive walkthroughs. Particle tracing calculates the paths of light particles as they are emitted from light sources and are reflected and transmitted through the scene. When ray traced, these lighting solutions provide photorealistic images, including reflections, refraction and other caustic lighting effects such as light reflected by mirrors or focused through lenses. To view specular highlights, reflections and refraction, in a particle traced image, you must turn on Ray Trace Specular Effects, in the Display section of the Particle Tracing dialog box.
Image ray traced with no particle tracing solution present, displays only specular highlights
3/24/2010
Page 20 of 329
Same image ray traced with a particle tracing solution present. Notice that the walls are more naturally illuminated by reflected as well as direct light. Notice in particular, the circle of light on the left wall above the table. This is caused by light reflecting from the silver tray (with decanter and glasses) on the table.
Particle tracing and lighting
Particle tracing computes a view-independent, global lighting solution that includes all diffuse lighting effects, such as color bleeding. Additionally, particle tracing accounts for all specular light effects including reflections, refractions and caustics. Since the particle trace solution is view-independent, it can be viewed from any vantage point in the design. This makes it very useful for animation applications such as walk-throughs. Because it also has the low memory overhead of ray tracing, particle tracing can be used to render very large designs. To further speed up the process for an image, you can turn on Visible Surfaces Only so that only those surfaces visible in the view are meshed. If you then select another view that contains surfaces not visible in the first view then only the new surfaces will need to be meshed.
Ambient and Flashbulb lighting with particle tracing
By default, particle tracing calculations ignore both Flashbulb and Ambient global lighting. Where Ambient and/or Flashbulb lighting is required for a particle traced solution, the following key-ins are available to enable/disable them:

PARTICLETRACE SET AMBIENT [ON|OFF] PARTICLETRACE SET FLASHBULB [ON|OFF]
Where no value (ON or OFF) is supplied, a message displays in the message area, giving the current state of the setting (enabled or disabled).
How particle tracing works
Particle tracing works by calculating the paths of light particles as they are emitted from light sources and are reflected and transmitted throughout the scene. This process occurs in two distinct phases Particle Shooting and Meshing.
Particle Shooting phase
During this phase, particles are emitted or shot, into the scene, from each of the light sources. You can specify the total number of particles to be shot. From this total figure, the relative value of the Lumens setting for each light source then determines the number of
3/24/2010
Page 21 of 329
Particle paths are traced through the scene, interacting with the surfaces encountered along the way. These interactions can include caustics, which are the lighting effects caused by light reflected off surfaces or refracted through transparent objects. Examples of these effects are light reflecting off a mirror or being focused through a lens. A caustic reflection differs from a ray-traced reflection in that the caustic reflection adds light to the surface receiving the caustic, while a ray-traced reflection just shows what the viewer would see. When a particle strikes a surface, it is either absorbed or bounced. A bounce can be a diffuse reflection, a specular (mirror) reflection, or a specular transmission (with refraction). Each time that a particle is diffusely reflected or absorbed, a hit point is recorded for that surface. All hits are recorded to disk in a hit point file, having the extension .shp. Each surface's material properties determine the relative probabilities of these interactions. Take, for example, a diffuse white surface having a diffuse setting of 0.7 and a specular setting of 0.0. This surface will diffusely reflect 70% of the particles that hit it and absorb the remaining 30%. If the material also has a specular value greater than zero then a percentage of the particles will be specularly reflected. Similarly, if the material is partially transparent then some particles will be transmitted as well.
Display/Meshing phase
Once the shooting phase has finished, the display phase begins, meshing surfaces as needed. When Visible Surfaces Only is enabled, the progress bar and time estimates the amount of time required to complete the view, not the complete solution. When Visible Surfaces Only is disabled, first the view is rendered, meshing surfaces as needed. When the view is complete, all remaining surfaces are meshed. For these situations the progress bar and time estimates reflect the amount of time required to complete the entire solution. Note that the view is likely to be fully rendered long before the progress bar reaches 100%. After meshing is completed with Visible Surfaces Only disabled, the particle-traced solution can be redisplayed quickly and easily, from any viewpoint. Because the solution automatically is saved to disk, it is not lost even if you close the design or exit MicroStation.
Particle tracing stores most of its data in temporary files. These files are located in the directory specified by the MS_PTDIR configuration variable. If this variable is not defined, then the files are stored in the directory pointed to by the MS_TMP configuration variable. For Distributed Rendering, the configuration variable MS_SHARED_DR_DIR sets the working directory for shared particle tracing files. If this variable is not defined, then the files are stored in the Distributed Rendering Save Image output directory.
General Procedure To generate a particle traced solution
1. Select the Render tool. 2. Set the Render Mode to Particle Trace. 3. Click the Open Particle Tracing settings dialog icon. The Particle Tracing dialog box opens.
This dialog box lets you adjust various settings prior to particle tracing a view. Settings are separated into three main sections.
Section Description Particles Defines the number of particles to be shot, and how they interact with materials in the design. Meshing Controls the level of detail and smoothness of the rendering mesh Display Defines the display of the particle traced solution
3/24/2010
Page 22 of 329
4. Select the view in which to display the solution.

Disk space requirements for Particle Tracing
Because Particle Tracing computations are written to disk, you need to ensure that you have enough free space for the image being rendered. Specifically, 8 bytes is required for each hit point initially, in the unsorted hit point file (.uhp). Later, this reduces to 4 bytes / hit point when that file is converted into a sorted hit point file (.shp). The ratio of hit points to particles can vary greatly, of course, depending on the geometry and materials used in your design. This ratio, however, remains relatively constant as you add more particles. Thus, you can get an estimate of the disk space required as follows: 1. First run a small (1 million particle) solution, and check the size of your hit point file (.shp). 2. You can use this figure then to estimate how much free space you'll need. For example, if a 1 million particle solution produces a 4 MB hit point file (.shp), then for a 400 million particle solution, the final hit point file would be 1600 MB (400 x 4 MB). The disk space required, however would be double that, 3200 MB, to allow for the initial .uhp file. Where you dont have enough free space, there is a trick that you can use to overcome the shortage. What if, in the above example, you had only 3000 MB free? Still you could get a 400 million particle solution, as follows: 1. Shoot 200 million particles, which would require 1600MB for the initial .uhp file, then reducing to 800MB for the final .shp file. 2. Add 200 million particles, which would require only 2400 MB (800 MB for the first .shp file, plus 1600 MB for the second .uhp file). In this example, the final .shp file still will be 1600 MB, exactly the same as if you did it all in one step.
In order to create files greater than 4 GB, you must be using an NTFS file system. FAT file systems are limited to 4GB for a single file.
Effect of Smoothness setting on a particle traced image
Particle tracing calculates the paths of light particles as they bounce around a model and then calculates the effect of the light particle hit points on each surface. The more particles that you use, the more hit points that the particle tracer has to work with, to produce a better image. The Smoothness setting controls the size of the local area over which hit points are spread out. The Smoothness setting involves a trade-off between noisiness and blurriness. In brief, setting the Smoothness setting:
Too low your details (such as shadows and caustics) will be sharp, but you will also see noise (more commonly known as splotches) in your image.
With S
th
tt
d t il
b t
l t h
i th i
3/24/2010
Page 23 of 329
Too high everything normally will appear smooth, but you will lose detail in your shadows and caustics.
With Smoothness set too high, details are indistinct, but surfaces are smooth.
Using the default setting (3.0) normally should provide a good balance. If there is noise in the image, adding more particles will reduce the noise without loss of detail.
Adding more particles to the solution reduces noise, while retaining detail.
Interrupting/continuing the process
You can interrupt the processing of a particle traced view by entering a reset. When you do this, the Continue After Reset icon becomes active. Clicking this icon lets you continue the process from where it was stopped. This applies even after you have exited and restarted MicroStation. If Visible surfaces only is enabled and processing is aborted after the shooting phase was complete, Display current solution is enabled and can be used to continue the solution. As the view is rendered, any unmeshed surfaces are meshed as they are displayed. If Visible surfaces only is not enabled or processing is aborted during the shooting phase, the solution can be continued by clicking the Continue after reset icon.
Often it is advisable to save the partial solution as a PTD file, just in case any of the design changes.
3/24/2010

Adjusting the brightness and contrast of an image
Page 24 of 329
When Particle Tracing calculations have been completed, you can use the brightness and contrast sliders in the Render tool dialog box to fine tune an image interactively. Move the sliders to the right to brighten the image and/or to add contrast, or to the left to darken it and/or reduce the contrast. Using the sliders is similar to working with the Brightness Multiplier/Adapt to Brightness and Display Contrast settings in the Display area of the Particle Tracing dialog box (Advanced Settings), except that it is interactive and does not require an update of the view with the Display current solution (in any view) option in the Render tool dialog box. When you use the Slider controls in the Render tool dialog box, the Brightness Multiplier/Adapt to Brightness and Display Contrast settings are adjusted automatically to match the two slider control settings.
Saving particle traced solutions
You can save the particle traced solution to disk. This then can be retrieved at a later time and, providing the geometry and the lighting has not changed, you can add more particles or render additional images with the particle traced solution already calculated (see also, Files required for Particle Tracing solutions). When saving a particle tracing solution, from a model other than the default model, by default it is given a name in the form <DGN filename>_<model name>.ptd. For example, if you were working in a model named First Floor in a DGN file named Office.dgn, then the particle traced solution would, by default, be given the name Office_First Floor.ptd. If you then changed to another model, Second Floor, in the same DGN file, it would be given the name Office_Second Floor.ptd and so on. Solutions created from the default model, whether it has been renamed or not, are given a default name <DGN filename>.ptd. This naming convention lets you work on different models in the same DGN file without overwriting existing solutions. You also have the option of choosing your own name for the particle traced solution. Associating solutions with different models makes it convenient to have various setups, such as different models with different lighting setups, or with different levels of detail, or even different rooms of a house. By default, each of these models will use different work files for particle tracing solutions.
If Use Alternate Workfile is enabled, the alternate file name is used for particle tracing work files without modification.
To use particle tracing solutions that were computed with earlier versions of the software, for non-default models, turn on Use Alternate Workfile (in the Advanced Settings interface of the Particle Tracing dialog box) and key in the name of the DGN file. Alternatively, you can rename the files in the Particle Tracing working directory (MS_PTDIR) from the relevant DGNfilename.* to DGNfilename_modelname.*.
To save a particle traced solution to disk
1. From the Particle Tracing dialog box's File menu, choose Save Solution. The Save Rendering Database dialog box opens. Controls in this dialog box are similar to those in the Save As dialog box. 2. Select a directory (and new filename if required). 3. Click the OK button to save the rendering database.
To retrieve a particle traced database and render other views
1. From the Particle Tracing dialog box's File menu, choose Load Solution. The Load Rendering Database dialog box opens. 2. Select a directory and filename (by default the particle traced rendering databases have the extension .ptd). 3. Select the Render tool and set Render Mode to Particle Trace. 4. In the Render tool dialog box, click the Display current solution (in any view) icon. 5. Select the view(s) in which you want to display the solution. The view is rendered according to the values in the Display Setting area of the Particle Tracing dialog box.
It is highly recommended that a particle traced solution be loaded only into the model from which it was originally saved. Otherwise, the results are unpredictable.
Files required for Particle Tracing solutions
3/24/2010
Page 25 of 329
Once you have saved a particle traced solution to disk, you only need this file, the design, and the pattern/bump map files to re-display the solution at any point in the future. Once this .ptd file is saved, and you are sure that you will not require more particles to be added, nor more surfaces to be meshed (if you had Visible Surfaces only enabled) you can safely delete any remaining hit point files, mesh files, or other temporary files associated with particle tracing. If you change models, or DGN files, when a particle tracing solution is present in memory, an Alert box gives you the option of saving/clearing the current solution. Additionally you have the option of deleting the work files associated with the solution. Options available let you:
Save the solution (without deleting the associated work files) lets you reload the solution in the future to view the current solution or to add more particles and, where Visible Surfaces Only was enabled, to mesh more surfaces. Save the solution (deleting the associated work files) lets you reload the solution, but you cannot add more particles nor mesh more surfaces. Clear the current solution (deleting the associated work files) deletes both the current solution and all its associated work files. Clear the current solution (without deleting the associated work files) clears the current solution from memory, but retains the work files so that the current solution still is available when you again open the model.
Exporting particle traced solutions to DGN
MicroStations Particle Trace rendering mode, along with Radiosity, calculates lighting effects for every surface within the model. They are, therefore, commonly referred to as global solutions. Global lighting solutions can be considerably more useful than other visualization methods (such as ray tracing) as they can be viewed from any angle or camera location. You can export the global lighting solution from either a particle trace or radiosity rendering with the Export Solution to DGN option in the right-click menu of the Render tool. The solution will be exported to a 3D design file as mesh geometry with the appropriate lighting values at the vertices. The exported model then can be viewed from any direction, attached as a reference, and so on. Diffuse lighting only is exported and the exported model will not display specular or reflective effects. You can control the quality of the exported mesh with the Quality setting of the 3D Plotting Options dialog box. This is accessed from the Print dialog box when printing to 3D PDF, or with the key-in Dialog U3D.
To export a particle trace solution to DGN
1. With a particle trace solution loaded, right-click in the icon menu bar of the Render tool dialog box and select Save Solution to DGN from the pop-up menu. The Export Rendering Solution To Design File dialog box opens. By default the file is given the name of the active DGN with PT appended in the form <filename>PT.dgn. 2. (Optional) In the Export Rendering Solution To Design File dialog box, adjust settings as required. You can change the location for the exported DGN file, and change the name of the file. 3. Click Save.
Particle tracing using Distributed Rendering
Particle traced images can be created over a network using Distributed Rendering. The procedure is as follows: 1. Make sure MicroStation is installed on each machine. 2. Set the configuration variable MS_SHARED_DR_DIR to point to a shared drive. 3. Set the configuration variable MS_PTDIR to point to a local drive. 4. Start the solution.
Particle tracing using multiple machines
When creating particle traced images, you can use multiple machines across a network. The requirements and procedures are as follows: 1. MicroStation must be installed on each machine.
3/24/2010
Page 26 of 329
2. All machines must use the same directory for the solution files. In other words, all machines must use a common network path for the configuration variable MS_PTDIR, the Particle Tracing Work Directory configuration variable in the Rendering/Images category of the Configuration dialog box. 3. Start the solution on one machine and let it finish shooting particles (the first stage). 4. Once the view starts to render on the first machine, use Display current solution for another view on a different machine. Each machine will mesh any unmeshed surfaces as needed, and will in turn, finish the complete solution faster.
Often it is necessary to save a PTD file on the first machine and then load that PTD file on the others. This ensures that the rendering database is the same on all machines. If necessary, you can Reset to interrupt the process on the first machine, save the PTD file, then continue.
During processing, before a machine creates a new mesh for a surface, it first checks to see if another machine has already meshed that surface and, if so, it will use the existing mesh for display. Thus, multiple views can be meshed simultaneously from the same hit point file. During processing, each machine writes its meshes into a separate mesh (UM) file. For example, when creating a solution for gallery.dgn, the first machine writes meshes into gallery.um, and the others write meshes into gallery$1.um, gallery$2.um, and so on. Index files (with extensions of MIN and PIN) are used to keep track of where all the meshes are located. These mesh and index files, along with the hit point (SHP) file, must be in a single directory that is shared among all of the participating machines. When processing is complete, it is recommended that the solution be saved to a PTD file, which will combine the individual mesh files into the single PTD. In addition to providing a permanent solution, redisplaying from the PTD file is somewhat more efficient than redisplaying from the individual mesh files. Solutions are saved by selecting File > Save Solution in the Particle Tracing dialog box, or by keying in PARTICLETRACE SAVE. In a similar manner, Display current solution can be used to extend a PTD file that contains a partial solution. Again, it is recommended that the completed solution be saved. This will combine the original PTD file with any new mesh files into a single solution file. After creating a partial solution, a full solution can be completed as follows:
To create a full solution from a partial solution
1. In the Particle Tracing dialog box, turn off Visible Surfaces Only. 2. With the Render tool active, and Render Mode set to Particle Trace, click the Continue after reset icon. Render the view to complete processing of all meshes (on any number of machines). 3. Save the full solution. At this point, only after saving the full solution, it is safe to delete the mesh, index and hit point files. If, however, you might want to re-mesh later, then the hit point file (SHP) should NOT be deleted.
Guide to choosing a rendering method

MicroStation provides a comprehensive range of rendering options, to let you produce shaded images from the very basic through to photo-realistic. Sometimes, when working in wireframe mode, it is possible to lose your place with regards to the orientation of the view. In these instances, quite often it is helpful to use the basic rendering modes, such as hidden line, filled hidden line, or smooth, to quickly render a view as an aid to visualizing the design.
3/24/2010
Page 27 of 329
It can be difficult to determine the orientation of a model when viewed in wireframe display.
Using one of the basic rendering modes is a quick way to verify the view orientation.
When the view is rendered, it is easy to see how it is rotated. Both the above images look the same in wireframe.
Alternatively, you can work in a shaded view so that you see your design in a more realistic fashion. You can manipulate the rendered view in real time. Similarly, you can preview your animations on screen in rendered display mode. None of the basic rendering modes display shadows.
3/24/2010
Page 28 of 329
When it comes to the finished product, creating a still image or an animation, several choices are available. For example, the choice of a photo-realistic rendering mode can be dependent on the type of model and the materials present in the model. Where accurate shadows are required, Ray Tracing should be used. While Phong rendering can generate shadow maps, these are an approximation of the shadows. With both Radiosity and Particle Tracing, you can specify that the final display is Ray Traced. Similarly, for both these rendering modes, you can turn on Ray Trace Direct Illumination, which will produce sharp shadows from any direct illumination from light sources. Shadows from reflected light, still will produce softer shadows. For most situations, Ray Tracing and Particle Tracing present straightforward methods to produce high quality photo-realistic images. Particle Tracing was specifically designed to handle large designs, and all light paths. Additionally, it is easier to understand, and easier to use than Radiosity solving. As a general rule of thumb:

Particle Tracing is best in terms of getting a "full" solution. That is, all light paths are considered. If you have no diffuse reflections or caustics, ray tracing might be sufficient, and quicker (you can consider it a sort of subset of particle tracing). If you have a small design, and no specular effects, Radiosity might be quicker than PT, but requires a steeper learning curve.
Following are general guidelines to help you choose the appropriate rendering mode for common situations.
In the following examples, where Radiosity and Particle Tracing are used, the final display is set to Ray Trace, and Ray Trace Direct Illumination is turned on.
No diffuse or specular reflection of light Models that have no diffuse reflection, or caustics, normally can be rendered successfully with Ray Tracing alone. In the example below, which has no diffuse or specular reflection of light, the same model has been rendered using Particle Tracing with Ray Trace Direct Illumination turned on (left) while Ray Tracing alone has been used in the image on the right. In this example, Ray Tracing produces an equivalent result, but quicker than using Particle Tracing.
Ray Tracing (right) can produce equivalent results to Particle Tracing (left), where no diffuse or specular reflections are prese
Diffuse reflections Models that have diffuse reflection, but no specular reflection, can be rendered using Radiosity, or Particle Tracing. For these models, Ray Tracing alone will not produce as good a result as Radiosity or Particle Tracing. This is noticeable particularly with interior scenes where the reflections from walls contribute much to the overall lighting, commonly known as global illumination.
3/24/2010
Page 29 of 329
In the example below, ray tracing alone does not produce as good a result as achieved with Radiosity or Particle Tracing. In the ray traced image, there is no reflected light illuminating the ceiling, as would be the case in real life.
Where diffuse reflections predominate, Ray Tracing alone may not produce the required result.
Both Radiosity and Particle Tracing produce more natural looking images than ray tracing alone, because they account for diffuse reflection. In this case, the ceiling is illuminated by reflected light. Generally, Particle Tracing is the easier option to use, though it is possible in some smaller models that radiosity solving will produce a faster result.
Both Radiosity (left) and Particle Tracing (right) take into account diffuse reflections.
Similarly, using this same example, the result is even more dramatic when the only illumination for the scene is provided via a single external distant light source coming through the windows. When using Ray Tracing alone, you would need to add some Flashbulb, or other lighting, to provide illumination to the portions that are in dark shadow (as shown below).
3/24/2010
Page 30 of 329
Ray Tracing alone, with no additional lighting (left) and with Flashbulb turned on (right)
Again, both Radiosity and Particle Tracing produce more natural looking images by taking into account the diffuse reflections from the walls. Particle Tracing also accounts for the specular reflection component, if any.
Both Radiosity (left) and Particle Tracing (right) produce more natural looking images.
Diffuse and specular reflections Models that have both diffuse reflection and specular reflection require Particle Tracing to correctly display all features of the image. With Radiosity, only the diffuse reflections are accounted for, whereas Particle Tracing accounts for specular reflections as well. For these images, Ray Tracing alone does not display either diffuse or specular reflections. In the examples below, the image on the left uses Radiosity, while that on the right uses Particle Tracing. In the particle traced image, you can see that the light has been reflected from the polished table and the silver tray. In the image that uses radiosity, only the diffuse portion of the light has been reflected, which is very little in this instance.
3/24/2010
Page 31 of 329
Particle traced image (right) displays both diffuse and specular reflections (such as the light reflecting on to the wall from the table and silver tray), while radiosity image (left) displays only the diffuse component.
Lighting
Lighting is essential for producing realistic rendered images, since light determines what you see. All light source placement and editing features are available with the Define Light tool. For photo-realistic rendering, the use of IES lighting files is recommended. Lighting Types Creating Light Sources Predefined light sources Modifying Light Sources Lighting task Define Light Place Light Edit Light Global Lighting Creating lighting setups Rendering Setup dialog box Lighting tab Global Lighting Shadows Lighting considerations for photorealism
Lighting Types
Two types of lighting are available for MicroStation rendering, Source Lighting and Global Lighting. Source lighting MicroStation supports four source lighting types Distant, Point, Spot, and Area, which come in the form of cells delivered in the cell library lighting.cel. Additionally, you can select from sample predefined light sources in the delivered DGN file lightlist.dgn, or create your own predefined lights in that or another DGN file. Light source cells have a number of settings that you can adjust to get the correct lighting. For photo-realistic rendering, using Radiosity or Particle Tracing, you can use IES lighting files to set physically correct values for Point, Spot, and Area light source cells (see Lighting considerations for photorealism) During processing for rendering, the source lighting cells present in the active file always are considered. Any source lighting cells located in references, however, are ignored unless the Use Lights setting is turned on for the reference. You can turn on this setting in the Attachment Settings dialog box when you first attach the reference click the Option button in the Attach Reference dialog box to open the Attachment Settings dialog box. For previously attached references, you can toggle the Use Lights setting on or off via the Attachments Settings dialog box, which is opened by selecting Settings > Attachment in the References dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 32 of 329
references are displayed in collapsible lists under the number and name of each reference. You can view the settings of light source cells in references, but you cannot edit them from the active file.
Define Light tool with Light List displaying lights in both the active file and references.
You can use this feature to experiment with different lighting setups. For example, you can create multiple lighting files to which you can reference your models with Use Lights turned off, so that only the source lighting in the active file is used. One of the settings for each light source, Lumens, is used for only for ray tracing (with Real World Lighting enabled), radiosity solving, and particle tracing. It is ignored by the other rendering modes. It lets you work with real-world lighting values for ray tracing, radiosity, and particle tracing solutions. While not a light source in itself, there is a fifth source lighting option, Sky Opening. These are used in conjunction with Solar, Sky Light, and Distant light source lighting, when using Ray Tracing, Radiosity, or Particle Tracing, rendering modes. They restrict the calculations of the effects of Solar lighting, Sky Lighting, and Distant lights, to only that area represented by the Sky Opening. That is, only the illumination from Solar lighting or Distant Lights that shine through the sky openings is considered in the calculations. Similarly, all particles from these same light sources pass through the sky opening(s) Light sources direct light as follows:
Distant Light directional light, like the sun, producing parallel light rays, throughout the design. That is, the light source's orientation defines the direction of uniform light that illuminates all surfaces facing in its direction. This applies whether they are in front of or behind the light source, in the design. By default, Distant light sources have the same brightness as Solar lighting. Distant Lights, if pointing upward, behave differently in the various rendering modes (see Creating Distant Light Sources).
Point Light light is radiated in all directions from the origin of the light source. Spot Light directional light having a conical beam, similar to a flashlight. Spot light sources having the same Lumens and Intensity settings as a Point light source may appear brighter in rendered images because the energy is restricted to the cone angle. Area Light useful for many diffuse lighting situations, such as simulating fluorescent lighting, where the light source is neither a Point light nor a Spot light. Area light sources are created from existing polygonal shapes in the design. Sky Opening used with Ray Tracing, Radiosity solving, and Particle Tracing, to generate more efficient solutions for indoor scenes lit with Solar Lighting, Sky Light, or Distant Light sources, through an opening in a wall or ceiling. Rather than consider the entire sky for calculating the lighting effect, only the lighting that is visible through the opening is considered.
By default, the delivered light sources all have their Intensity set to 1 and their Lumens value set to 1500.
IES lighting files can change the way that the Point, Spot, and Area lights direct their light.
3/24/2010
Page 33 of 329
A light source's settings are stored in enter data fields within the cell that represents it. Values that appear in fields in the Define Light tool settings window are read from the corresponding enter data fields in the light source cells (except for Lumens in the dialog box, which corresponds to the Brightness setting in the cell).
Creating Light Sources

All light source cells are placed, by default, on the Default level. As well, they are made from Construction class elements. Thus, to avoid the elements appearing in your rendered view or image, you must hide them either by turning off the Default level, or by turning off Constructions for the view, prior to rendering. This setting is located in the View Attributes dialog box (Settings menu > View Attributes). When creating a light source, you must give it a name. While a default name, such as Point Light, Point Light (1), and so on, is provided by the system, it is good practice to give light sources more meaningful names. These names, which will appear in the Light List of the Define Light tool's dialog box, can be used to easily identify the light source if you want to modify any of its settings. By default, when you select select the Place Light tool or set Create as the Mode, in the Define Light tool settings, the On switch is enabled. To create a new light that is off you can disable the On switch prior to placing the light source. Placement scale of light source cells Lighting in an image is not affected by the scale of the light source cells for Point, Spot, or Distant Lights. They merely define where the lighting is coming from and/or the direction. By default, the Cell Scale setting for light source cells is set to 1. If necessary, you can change the Cell Scale setting to make your light source cells bigger/smaller. Subsequently, the last scale value input will be used for further light source placement during the session.
When you first use the Define Light tool during a session in a DGN file, the default values are displayed in the tool's dialog box. Any changes you make to the settings, when creating new light sources, or editing existing lights, will remain for the current session. When you exit the DGN, the settings revert back to the defaults.
Area Light source sizes Unlike the Distant, Point, and Spot light source cells, the size of an Area light source is defined by the element (convex polygon) being used to create it. The size of the element, and therefore the light source, affects the rendered image when ray tracing, radiosity solving, or particle tracing is used. When smooth (Gouraud), or Phong shading is used, however, the size of area light sources has no effect. Creating Point Light sources Similar to a light bulb, light radiates in all directions from a Point Light source. These light sources do not cast shadows when used with Phong rendering. To create a Point Light source, normally you need only define its location. Where an IES lighting file is specified for a Point light source, the direction that light radiates may vary, and you may be required to define a direction.
To ensure that the IES values are applied correctly to the light source, it is recommended that Point Lights be used with IES data. Using Spot Lights or Area Lights can result in restriction of the IES lighting to within the cone of spot lights, or to the front side of area lights.
Point Light source cell.
See To create a Point light source. Creating Spot Light sources Working like a real spot light, settings for the Spot Light sources let you focus the beam (Cone Angle), and the edge fall-off, where the light falls from full intensity to zero (Delta Angle).
3/24/2010
Page 34 of 329
To create a Spot Light source, you define first the location of the light source, and then the target point. The Distance value (for attenuation, if on) is set by default to equal the length of the cone as the light source is placed that is, the distance between the light source and the target point. For Radiosity Solving, and Particle Tracing solutions, the Distance setting is ignored. In these cases the lights attenuate according to the square of the distance.
Spot Light source cell.
See To create a Spot light source. Creating Distant Light sources Only the direction of Distant light sources is important, as they provide similar lighting to sunlight. No matter where in the design you create a Distant light source, all surfaces facing that direction are equally illuminated. In creating a Distant Light source, you define first the location of the light source, and then its direction. Distant Lights, if pointing upward and turned on, behave differently in the various rendering modes, as follows:

Smooth and Phong Distant Light sources always will shine. Particle Tracing A Distant Light source is presumed to be a realistic representation of a sun and is considered off if pointing upward (similar to the Sun being below the horizon). Radiosity A Distant Light is presumed to be a realistic representation of a sun, and is considered off when pointing upward. Ray tracing If Real World Lighting is enabled (in the Ray Tracing settings), a Distant light is presumed to be a realistic representation of a sun, and is considered off when pointing upward. Otherwise, upward-pointing distant lighting will shine.
By default the Intensity of a Distant light source is defined as 1.0 and is equivalent to the intensity of the sun at the brightest point on Earth, on the brightest day when the sun is directly overhead (120,000 lumens per square meter). In contrast, for a scene requiring an overcast day, you might, for example, have a distant light with an intensity of 0.001. To simulate the yellowish color of sunlight at high angles, you can set the light source Color to the following RGB values: 255, 247, 235 (or, on a scale of 0 to 1, to 1.00, 0.97, 0.92). To simulate the more reddish color of sunlight at low angles, such as at sunset, decrease the Green and Blue values from those specified above.
Distant light source cell.
See To create a Distant light source. Creating Area Light sources Area Light sources are useful for simulating lighting such as that from fluorescent lighting. You can create an Area Light source from any existing convex polygon. That is, you first define a (polygonal) shape for the geometry. You then select Create in the Define Light tool, select the geometry, then define the direction that the area light shines.
Polygons used to create Area Light sources may have any number of vertices, but they must be convex polygons.
3/24/2010
Page 35 of 329
During processing, Area Light sources are first converted into triangular-shaped light sources. A rectangular Area Light source, for example, is converted into two triangular light sources, while a pentagon is converted into five triangular light sources, one for each edge. If a radiosity solution is being computed, each (converted) triangular light source is processed separately. In a design containing only one rectangular light source, therefore, there will be shots for two light sources (one for each triangle). See To create an Area Light source. Shadows and Ray Tracing Ray Tracing can generate shadows from all light source cells. For this to occur, shadows must be enabled for the light source, the material, and in the Ray Tracing dialog box. Shadows can be sharp, or soft, depending on the number of samples taken from each light source during rendering calculations.
Soft shadows
You can control the sharpness of shadows in a ray traced image either globally, where all light sources are given the same value, or on a per light basis, where each light source uses its own setting for shadow generation. Settings for Shadows, in the Ray Tracing dialog box let you choose from:

Per Light shapness is controlled by the Shadow setting for each light source. Sharp 1 sample Soft - Coarse 16 samples Soft - Medium 64 samples Soft - Fine 160 samples Soft - Very Fine 256 samples
3/24/2010
Page 36 of 329
Ray tracing with lighting from a single point light source. Top: Shadows set to Sharp Bottom: Shadows set to Soft - Very Fine
The ray traced soft shadows capability of MicroStation V8 XM Edition v8.9.4 requires the "lighting.cel" cell library that is delivered in the MicroStation V8 XM Edition v8.9.4 workspace. By default, this file is delivered to "Bentley\WorkSpace\system\cell\". Generally, it is recommend that you use the workspace that accompanies a particular MicroStation delivery. If, however, you will be using MicroStation V8 XM Edition v8.9.4 with an older workspace, you will need to replace "lighting.cel" in your older workspace with the updated version delivered with MicroStation V8 XM Edition v8.9.4 in order to use ray traced soft shadows.
Light size for soft shadows
For soft shadows calculations, the ray tracing process assumes a default size of 12 inches for all point and spot lights. This can cause unnatural lighting in situations where light sources are placed within fixtures, where the fixtures are expected to cast shadows. For these situations, you can change the default size for all point and spot lights in a model with the key-in:
3/24/2010

RAY SET LIGHTSIZE <light-diameter> Creating Sky Openings
Page 37 of 329
(Applicable only when using Ray Tracing, Radiosity, or Particle Tracing rendering modes). You can use Sky Openings to generate more efficient solutions for indoor scenes lit with Distant, Sky, or Solar light. Sky Openings are not true lights in the traditional sense, but act as a control when using Solar, Distant, and Sky lights. Performance is improved by only testing for shadows in the directions of the sky openings, as opposed to testing the entire sky. You place a Sky Opening the same way that you place an Area Light. That is, you first define a (convex polygonal) shape for the geometry. You then select the Place Light tool, or set Mode to Create in the Define Light tool, select the geometry, then define the direction that the opening shines light. For example, an opening representing a window would point toward the inside of the room (that is, the direction the sunlight travels into the room from the window).
Polygons used to create Sky Openings may have any number of vertices, but they must be convex polygons.
When there are any Sky Openings that are ON in a design, Solar, Distant, and Sky light will shine through those openings only, thus reducing the amount of time spent calculating light energy/particles outside the scene. Sky Openings apply even when shadows are OFF for the corresponding light. This means that you can model a room with one window, then use Solar and Sky light to illuminate the scene through that window only, without calculating shadows. Sky Openings provide the greatest benefit when using Sky light. Without Sky Openings you need to have Sky samples set to a very large number in order to get reasonable shadows. With Sky Openings enabled, the Sky samples are considered only for that light shining through the sky opening and does not affect performance much. When sky openings are used in conjunction with Sky Light, ray tracing can produce soft shadows.
If Sky Openings are enabled, we recommend that Sky samples be set to a value of at least 145. Often, for ray tracing and radiosity solving, a much higher value will be required. This applies also to radiosity solving and particle tracing, when Ray Trace Direct Illumination is enabled.
When computing shadows from Sky Openings, for Ray Trace, or Ray Trace Direct Illumination, the distance from the opening determines the number of shadows samples taken. When a point is very far from the opening, it can only see a small portion of the sky, and only Min Samples (defined in the Sky Opening) are taken. As points closer to the opening are illuminated, those points can see more of the sky and the number of shadow samples will increase, up to Max Samples.
When using Sky Openings, it is highly recommended that Jitter sky samples be turned on. This will reduce many artifacts that can occur from sky shadows.
Note that only objects in front of the sky opening will receive light and, as with a real window, objects outside (behind) the opening can cast shadows through the opening. Also keep in mind that you do not need to create an opening for every pane of a window; you can create a single opening that covers all the panes, or even a group of windows. The Sky Opening is merely an efficiency tool, but there are trade-offs the more openings you have, the more processing time required; fewer but larger openings, however, could require more shadow samples to achieve good results. See To Create a Sky Opening.
Predefined light sources

You can create predefined light sources that you may then select via the Place Light tool. When you have predefined light sources available and you select the Place Light tool, the Name field is replaced with a combo box, whose drop-down list contains all of the predefined lights of that type. When you select a predefined light from the drop-down list, the settings for that light replace the values in the dialog box. You then can adjust these settings as required, prior to placing the light source. Delivered with MicroStation is a selection of predefined light sources, present in the DGN file lightlist.dgn. This DGN file is placed in the Bentley\Workspace\system\cell directory. The location of this, and any other DGN containing predefined lights, is defined by the configuration variable MS_LIGHTLIST, which initially is defined to:
3/24/2010

Page 38 of 329
$(_USTN_SYSTEMROOT)cell/lightlist.dgn $(_USTN_SITE)cell/lightlist.dgn $(_USTN_PROJECTDATA)cell/lightlist.dgn
This lets you create your own predefined lights in a DGN file named lightlist.dgn, which you then can place in either$(_USTN_SITE)cell/ (typically Bentley\Workspace\standards\cell), or in $(_USTN_PROJECTDATA)cell/ (typically Bentley\Workspace\projects\YourProject\cell). Lights defined in these additional DGN files then would be added to the initial list of predefined lights. Alternatively, you can use any DGN file in any location and simply add the file to the MS_LIGHTLIST configuration variable. Creating predefined light sources You can create a list of predefined light sources as follows: 1. Create a new DGN file. 2. Use the standard Define Light tool to place any number of lights, with the desired settings, anywhere in the DGN file. For maximum efficiency, it is highly recommended that no other elements are placed in these DGN files (other than the light sources). When the Define Light tool is used in Create mode, the list of lights that is available consists of the names of all the lights of the appropriate type that are located in any of the models of any of the DGN files pointed to by the configuration variable MS_LIGHTLIST.
Modifying Light Sources

Light sources that have been created in models in a DGN file also can be modified using the Edit Light tool. This is the recommended method for altering light source settings and modification can be carried out whether or not the light source cells are visible in the view. All light source cells, irrespective of what level they are on or whether Constructions are turned on in a view, can be identified in the Light List, or by scanning for them using the Scan button in the Edit Light tool's dialog box.
You also may use standard MicroStation tools, such as the Move tool to move a light source.
Identifying light sources When modifying existing light sources with the Edit Light tool, you can identify them graphically with a data point. This method, however, requires that the light source be visible in a view. That is, the level on which the light source resides must be turned on (default is level Default), and the view attribute Constructions must be turned on. Scanning, or identifying by name, are much more efficient methods for finding any light sources in the design, regardless of whether or not they are visible. For this reason, it is good practice to give your light sources meaningful names, to aid with identification. If you use the scanning process to find light sources, it does so in the order in which they appear in the Light List. After clicking the Scan button, you can enter Resets to cycle through the light sources from first to last. You can select multiple light sources for modification in the Edit Light tool light list. When you do this, the settings for the last selected light source are displayed in the tool settings. You can select individual light sources with a data point, or <Ctrl> + Data points to select several lights. To select several consecutive lights in the list, you can click and drag through them in the list.
To select a light source(s) from the Light List
1. Select the Edit Light tool. 2. Click the Show Light List button to the right of the Mode option menu. The dialog box expands to display a list of light sources present in the design. 3. Select the light source that you wish to modify. When you select the light source its current settings are loaded in to the Define Light tool's dialog box
3/24/2010

4. (Optional) Use <Ctrl> + Data points to select further light sources.
To scan for a light source
Page 39 of 329
1. Select the Edit Light tool. 2. Click the Scan button. The first light source cell is located. Its values appear in the tool's dialog box and its type and location appear in the status bar. 3. (Optional) Reset to locate the next light source cell. 4. (Optional) Keep Resetting until the required light source cell is located.
Optionally, you can use the key-in light scan, which will activate the Define Light tool and locate the first light source.
Scanning can be used with all the modification Methods, but default Point light sources will not be found in a scan if Method is set to Target Light. If IES lighting data with a direction component has been applied to the Point light source, however, it will be found by the scanning process.
Where you have given your source lights meaningful names, you can select the required light source from the light list in the tool settings window.
Selecting lights in a selection set
You can edit and delete multiple lights that are part of a graphical selection set. When a selection set is created and the Edit Light tool is started, with Method set to Edit Light or Delete Light, the tool will use any and all lights from the selection set, ignoring all non-light objects. You can, for example, turn on all the lights in a single room by first using the Element Selection tool to drag around the entire area containing the lights. When you then start the Edit Light tool and Method is Edit Light, all the lights from the selection set will be highlighted. You then can turn them on or off, or toggle them with one click. Note that if the tool did not have Method set to Edit or Delete Light, only the last light of the selection will be used. To start the tool for editing, you can use the key-in LIGHT EDIT.
Lighting task
Lighting task (opened as tool box)
The Lighting task contains tools for creating and modifying source lighting, and for adjusting the Global Lighting settings.
To Select in the Lighting task
Open the Define Light dialog box to work with source lighting. Define Light see footnote 148
Place a source lighting cell, or create an area light, or sky opening. Place Light
3/24/2010
Page 40 of 329
Edit an existing light source cell, area light source, or sky opening. Edit Light
Open the Global Lighting dialog box. Global Lighting see footnote 149
Creating lighting setups

When you have a model that contains numerous light sources, and you would like to view different lighting setups, you can do this via rendering setups. The Rendering Setup dialog box contains numerous settings that you can save as a rendering setup. For lighting, however, the Lighting tab gives you control over setting multiple source lights to be on or off. Using the Lighting tab, you can select a number of lights and turn them on/off collectively. As well, you can turn on/off lighting setups in references. Where it is a scenario that you would like to recall, you can save it as a rendering setup. Typically, this might be to have an image with normal lighting, and another with only security lighting. Rather than having to modify the light sources each time, you can create two rendering setups that will configure the lighting for you.
Global Lighting
You use the Global Lighting dialog box to define the settings for Ambient, Flashbulb and Solar lighting. Additionally, you can turn on Add Sky Light to all Solar and Distant Lights and Approximate Ground Reflection for Sky Light to simulate lighting from the sky and reflected light from the ground, respectively.
To open the Global Lighting dialog box
1. Select the Global Lighting tool in the Lighting task. or From the Settings menu's Rendering submenu, choose Global Lighting. or In the Define Light tool's dialog box, click the Global button. The following table covers the controls and settings of the Global Lighting dialog box.
Tool setting: Effect: If on, enables controls for setting the intensity and color of ambient lighting. Ambient

Intensity can vary from no light (0) to full light (1). Color Opens the Modify Color dialog box, to set the Ambient lighting color.
If on, enables controls for setting the intensity and color of the view flashbulb. Flashbulb

Intensity can vary from no light (0) to full light (1). Color Opens the Modify Color dialog box, to set the Flashbulb lighting color.
Solar Add Sky Light to all Solar and Distant Lights
If on, enables controls for setting the intensity and color of the solar lighting. Clicking the Show Solar Settings button, at the left, expands the dialog box to display all Solar lighting settings. If on, enables the color button for the lighting. Clicking the Show Sky Settings button, at the left, expands the dialog box to display all relevant settings.
3/24/2010
Page 41 of 329
Global Lighting dialog box, fully expanded.
Ambient Ambient light is all-pervasive. That is, it illuminates all surfaces equally. It is controlled in the Global Lighting dialog box. The intensity of ambient light can vary from None (0) to Full (1.0), and its color can be adjusted. Because ambient light illuminates all surfaces equally, increasing its intensity reduces the depth, or contrast, of the shaded view. Ambient light is useful, however, in simulating background office lighting or illuminating surfaces that would not otherwise receive light. No shadows are cast by ambient light. For Radiosity solving and Particle Tracing, it is normal to turn off Ambient lighting. If you forget to do this, an alert box gives you the option to do so prior to commencing the rendering process.
3/24/2010
Page 42 of 329
Ambient lighting with Intensity set to 0 (left), 0.20 (center), and 0.40 (right).
Flashbulb Flashbulb light provides a point light source from the eye-point of the view. It is controlled in the Global Lighting dialog box. The intensity of flashbulb light can vary from None (0) to Full (1.0), and its color can be adjusted. Flashbulb lighting does not cast shadows. For Radiosity solving and Particle Tracing, it is normal to turn off Flashbulb. If you forget to do this, an alert box gives you the option to do so prior to commencing the rendering process.
3/24/2010
Page 43 of 329
The effect of flashbulb light, showing Flashbulb off (left) and on (right).
Because it always originates from the camera, or eye-point, of the view, flashbulb lighting is convenient to use for a first try rendering, before any other light sources are introduced.
Solar Solar light simulates light from the sun. It is controlled in the Global Lighting dialog box. You can specify whether or not shadows are cast by the solar light. To display solar shadows when ray tracing requires that Shadows also be on in the Ray Tracing settings dialog box. As well as being able to specify a location and time for the Solar lighting, you can define the direction of North in your design. This can be input manually as a value of degrees from X axis, or you can define North graphically. Where you specify that the Sun is below the horizon, then the Color button for Solar changes to black and its title changes from Color to No Sun and Solar lighting will not illuminate the scene.
You can create a sequence of images that shows the locations of shadows cast by the sun over a period of time using the Solar Study utility. For instructions see Conducting Solar Studies.
Add Sky Light to all Solar and Distant Lights With this setting turned on, you can add atmospheric lighting from the sky. A color button lets you define the color of the sky light. When this setting is turned on with Solar lighting, the intensity of the light is modified by the angle of the Sun (providing a more realistic solar study). As cloudiness increases, the direct sunlight decreases but the amount of light from the sky increases. Similarly, the light from any Distant Light sources is modified. You can set the amount of Cloudiness and the Air Quality (Turbidity) to create the desired conditions. On a clear day, for example, the sky is not uniformly lit More sky light comes from the direction of the Sun thus producing darker sharper shadows Alternatively on a cloudy
3/24/2010

day, the sky is uniformly lit with softer, less pronounced shadows.
Page 44 of 329
With Air Quality (Turbidity) set to Perfectly Clean, there is a small amount of coloring from the sky lighting. When Air Quality (Turbidity) is set to Industrial, the coloring effect of the sky lighting is more pronounced. Sky light is a directional light coming from each direction of an imaginary sky hemisphere. The precision of the hemisphere is determined by the sky samples setting. When using Solar lighting or Distant Lights to illuminate an interior scene, through windows for example, it is more efficient to create sky openings to focus the calculations to only that light coming through the windows.
Ray traced image without added Sky Light (left) and with added Sky Light (right). With added Sky Light, shadows are less stark and objects that were hidden in the shadows of the larger object now become slightly visible.
Approximate Ground Reflection for Sky Light
This setting is used to create an approximation of all Sun and sky light reflected by the ground. A color button lets you define the color for the ground reflection. Typically, this setting would be used only where a model has been created without any ground geometry. If you have ground geometry in the design, it would cast shadows and/or reflect its own light. Solar lighting settings When Solar is turned on, in the Global Lighting dialog box, the Intensity and Color settings are enabled. Clicking the Show Solar Settings button, to the left of the Solar toggle, expands the Solar section of the dialog box to reveal more solar lighting settings.
Solar setting: Intensity Color Effect: Sets the intensity of the Solar light can vary from no light (0) to full light (1). Opens the Modify Color dialog box, to set the Solar lighting color. If on, solar shadows are created in Phong rendering, ray traced and particle traced images, as well as radiosity solutions. Solar Shadows For ray tracing, this requires also that Shadows be on in the Ray Tracing settings dialog box. For Ray Tracing, when Shadows is set to Per Light in the Ray Tracing Settings dialog box, the sharpness of the shadows is controlled via the Solar Shadows option menu. Sets the resolution of the shadow map generated for the solar light with Phong rendering. The lower the value, the less resolute the solar shadows will be, and processing time will be reduced. Has no effect on ray traced images. True North Direction (degrees Specifies the direction of North as degrees from the X axis. from X axis) Define By Points Solar Direction Vector X, Y, Z Azimuth Angle Altitude Angle Lets you define the direction of North, graphically, with two points. Specifies the direction vector from the solar light. Dimmed if Lock is off. Sets the azimuth direction of the solar light (from 0-360). Dimmed if Lock is off. Sets the angle of the sun above the horizon (from 0-90). Dimmed if Lock is off.
Solar Shadow Resolution
3/24/2010

Sets how the position of the solar light is determined: Lock

Page 45 of 329
On the position of the solar light is determined by Vector values. Off the position is determined by Location and Time settings.
Contains controls to set the model's location for calculating Solar light. These controls are dimmed if Lock is on.

Longitude sets the longitude at the model's location. Latitude sets the latitude at the model's location. GMT Offset Sets the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) at the model's location. Cities Opens the Location By City dialog box, which is used to set the location by selecting a city from the list. Map Opens the Location By Map dialog box, which is used to set the location by pointing at the location on a map of the world. Zones Opens the GMT Offset By Time Zone dialog box, which is used to set the GMT Offset by selecting a time zone.
Location
Sets the time of day and the year for the rendering.
Time sets the hours and minutes, with option menus for AM or PM and Standard or Daylight time. Date sets the date for the rendering. Year sets the year for the rendering.
Time

To set solar lighting using the Cities button
1. In the Global Lighting dialog box, turn on Solar. 2. Click the Show Solar Settings button. The dialog box expands to display further solar settings. 3. In the Location section of the dialog box, click Cities. The Location By City dialog box opens. 4. Select a city from the list. 5. Click OK to accept. The dialog box closes and the Latitude, Longitude, GMT Offset values are updated to match those of the selected city. If you click Cancel, the dialog closes without changing the values for Latitude, Longitude, GMT Offset.
Location By City dialog box
3/24/2010
Page 46 of 329
To set solar lighting using the Map button
1. In the Global Lighting dialog box, turn on Solar. 2. Click the Show Solar Settings button. The dialog box expands to display further solar settings. 3. In the Location section of the dialog box, click Map. The Location By Map dialog box opens. 4. On the map of the world, click the required location. Latitude and Longitude values below the map of the world update to the selected location. 5. In the GMT Offset field, key in the correct value. If you do not enter a value in the GMT Offset field of the Location By Map dialog box, an Information box will alert you that you must enter this value manually when you click OK to accept. 6. Click OK to accept. The dialog box closes and the Latitude, Longitude, GMT Offset values are updated to match those of the selected city. If you click Cancel, the dialog closes without changing the values for Latitude, Longitude, GMT Offset.
Location By Map dialog box
To set the GMT Offset using the Zones button
1. In the Global Lighting dialog box, turn on Solar. 2. Click the Show Solar Settings button. The dialog box expands to display further solar settings. 3. In the Location section of the dialog box, click Zones. The GMT Offset By Time Zone dialog box opens. 4. Select a time zone from the list. 5. Click OK to accept. The dialog box closes and the GMT Offset value updates to match that of the selected zone. If you click Cancel, the dialog closes without changing the value for GMT Offset.
3/24/2010
Page 47 of 329
GMT Offset By Time Zone dialog box
Add Sky Light to all Solar and Distant Lights settings When Add Sky Light to all Solar and Distant Lights is turned on, in the Global Lighting dialog box, the Color setting button is enabled. Clicking the Show Sky Settings button, to the left of the Add Sky Light to all Solar and Distant Lights toggle, expands the dialog box to reveal additional settings.
Sky Light setting: Color Sky Shadows Jitter sky samples If on, sky samples are taken in a non-uniform manner, to create a softer image. Sets the cloudiness of the sky. Cloudiness Can vary from Clear (0) to Cloudy (1). Sets the purity of the air. Air Quality (Turbidity) Can vary from Perfectly Clean (1) to heavily polluted (9). An option menu provides commonly used settings. Sets the precision of the sky hemisphere. Higher values more accurately simulate sky lighting, but processing time increases. An option menu provides default values for the various rendering modes. Approximate Ground Reflection for Sky If on, enables its Color button with which you can specify the color for the ground reflection of incoming sky Light and sunlight. Ground Reflection (When Approximate Ground Reflection for Sky Light is on only) Sets the amount of reflection from the ground, from None (0) to Full (1). Sets the color of the Sky Light. If on, shadows are generated from the Sky Light. (When Sky Shadows are on only) Effect:
Sky samples
Shadows
With the standard rendering options (that is, without a radiosity or particle tracing solution present in memory), shadows can be generated with Phong and Ray Trace rendered images only. When a radiosity or particle traced solution is used, you can use Smooth or Ray Trace to produce an image with shadows. Ray tracing produces the most accurate shadows. With Phong rendering, shadow maps are generated. These approximate the shadows cast by objects in the model.
3/24/2010
Page 48 of 329
Normally, constructions should be turned off for a view when it is rendered. Doing this, ensures that any light source cells, for example, do not cast unwanted shadows.
Shadows and Phong shading In Phong shading, shadows can be generated only for Solar, Distant, Spot and Area light sources. For shadows to be generated by an object in the model, the Shadows setting must be on for the material definition (if any), and the light source.
Shadow maps are calculated the first time a view is shaded. Since they are valid for any view, they are not recalculated unless there is a change to the lighting.
If you change the geometry of the scene, you should clear any existing shadow maps so that the shadows are recalculated to include the changes. You can do this by keying in LIGHT CLEAR, or by selecting Clear Shadow Maps from the Mode option menu in the Define Light tool dialog box.
Shadows and Ray Tracing In a ray traced image, shadows can be generated by Solar, Distant, Point, Spot and Area light sources. For shadows to be generated by an object in the model, the Shadows setting must be on for the material definition (if any), the light source, and in the Ray Tracing dialog box .
Point, distant, spot, and area lights are actually the light cells PNTLT, DISTLT, SPOTLT and AREALT, respectively, from the supplied lighting cell library "lighting.cel". You can adjust the various settings for these light sources with the Edit Light tool.
Lighting considerations for photorealism

MicroStation's advanced photo-realistic rendering options Ray Tracing, Radiosity, and Particle Tracing let you produce lifelike images of your models from within MicroStation. When you are working with Radiosity solving or Particle Tracing, you still can use the standard light source cells to provide the illumination, but both processes use the Lumens value, multiplied by the Intensity value, to determine the brightness of the light source. Thus, you can set the correct Lumens value for the light source and then use the Intensity setting, like a dimmer switch, to quickly change its brightness, if required. For Ray Tracing without a particle traced or radiosity solution present, the Lumens setting is ignored unless Real World Lighting is enabled in the Ray Tracing dialog box. When ray tracing a Radiosity, or Particle Traced, solution, the Lumens value is considered. Where correct lighting effects are required, it is recommended that you work with IES lighting data files. Additionally, when creating Particle Traced images that include Distant light sources or Solar lighting, you can use Sky Openings to focus the particles on to the required areas of the model. Source lighting cells and IES files For photo-realistic lighting in images MicroStation supports the use of IES lighting files for Ray Tracing (with Real World Lighting enabled), Radiosity solving and Particle Traced solutions. These are available for downloading, from various lighting manufacturers, via the world wide web. IES data files apply the correct values to the source lighting cells for Ray Tracing, Radiosity solving and Particle Traced images. As well, they define the photometric web, to correctly display the spread of the light from the light source, to produce more natural looking images. How a particular IES light should be used is up to the manufacturer who defines the data. It is not possible always to tell, by looking at the IES file text, whether or not it is intended to be used as an area light or a point light. Often, however, there are some clues, as the manufacturer can (optionally) specify the dimensions of the luminaire. While these values are ignored by the rendering process, you can use them as a guide in using the IES file properly. That is, by applying it to a light source of the corresponding size, after viewing the IES information by turning on "Show IES Detailed Text" in the Define Light tool dialog box. For example, to use the IES file properly for an IES light that has a defined area, you could define an area light of the appropriate dimensions and then, in the Define Light tool dialog box, turn on IES Data for the light source. Bear in mind, however, that there are provisos to applying IES data to directional light sources such as Area Lights and Spot Lights When an IES lighting file is specified for a light source the IES values override the current values in the
3/24/2010
Page 49 of 329
source lighting cell, except that any IES light that would be outside the cone angle of a spotlight, or behind the plane of an area light, is clipped off. If this clipped light is importantd, then It is better to use Point Light sources when working with IES data. This will ensure that the lighting is correctly matched to the data in the IES file.
Scene illuminated with 2 standard point light sources (left) and with IES lighting data applied
In the above particle traced images, the left image is illuminated with two standard point light sources. For the image on the right, IES lighting data was applied to the two point light sources. This changed the characteristics of the point light sources such that they shone upwards and out from the wall, producing a more natural looking lighting for the model. When IES data files are used, all settings for the light source, apart from its color, are read from the IES data, so that little or no further tweaking of the light source should be required.
IES data controls only the intensity and distribution of the light, not the color. Color is not included in the IES specification.
Using drag and drop with IES data files
If you drag-and-drop an IES data file into a MicroStation view, the Define Light tool starts, in Create mode, with IES Data enabled and the dragged IES file selected.
Accessing IES data files
Many manufacturers of lighting fixtures provide IES data for their products. Links to a number of these manufacturers are available from the Bentley Visualization Center web site. Sky Openings When using Distant light sources, or Solar lighting, the light rays are present throughout the model, not just in the vicinity of the design geometry. For efficiency, you can create one or more sky openings that restrict the calculations to the light that passes through the sky opening only. You should use sky openings in particular where you have an interior space illuminated from outside by Distant light sources, and/or Solar lighting. For exterior scenes also, you can use sky openings to focus the processing on the region of the model where the design geometry is located.
Sky openings and Particle Tracing
3/24/2010
Page 50 of 329
openings and not be dispersed throughout the model. This speeds up the rendering process by letting you use less particles than would be required were no sky openings present. Both images below are Particle Traced, with the same number of particles. On the left, the image does not have a Sky Opening, so many particles are lost to illuminate outside the building. When a Sky Opening is created (the same size as the window), all particles are shot through the Sky Opening and, in this case, through the window, producing a better image.
Light from Distant Light shining through a window, without Sky Opening(left) and with S With Sky Opening active, all particles are shot through the window.
Sky Light and Distant/Solar lighting
In real-life, light coming through a window comes not just from the Sun, but from the entire surroundings. You can simulate this by turning on Add Sky Light to all Solar and Distant Lights. During processing, light is assumed to be emanating from throughout a hemisphere. When a sky opening is present, the calculations are restricted to only that part of the hemisphere seen through the sky opening. The image below has been Particle Traced using the same number of particles as the two previous images (above). As you can see, it is much brighter because the light is not concentrated from only the direction of the Distant Light source (or Solar Light).
3/24/2010
Page 51 of 329
With Sky Light added, the image is brighter.
Controlling the display of hot-spots Both the Radiosity and Particle Tracing processes work with an expanded color range, but not so basic ray tracing. When ray tracing a radiosity or particle traced solution, you can use the following key-ins to control the intensity of hot spots in overly bright areas.
raytrace set colorclip off disables color clipping, so that hotspots quickly become white. raytrace set colorclip on enables color clipping, which tries to maintain the color of the material within hot spots. raytrace set colorclip <value> enables color clipping with the set value. Values may range from 2.0 to 2.0, with zero as the default. Positive values intensify the hot spots, making them go white faster. Negative values flatten the hot spots, making them stay close to the original color, no matter how bright the image is.
Effects of colorclip set to 1 (left), the default 0 (center), and 1 (right).
Adjusting image brightness and contrast Once you have rendered a view with Ray Trace (with Real World Lighting enabled), Radiosity or Particle Trace modes, you can use the brightness and contrast sliders in the Render tool dialog box to fine tune an image interactively. Move the sliders to the right to increase the brightness/contrast, or to the left to lessen them. With respect to Radiosity and Particle Trace rendering modes, using the sliders is similar to working with the Brightness Multiplier/Adapt to Brightness and Contrast settings, except that it is interactive and does not require an update of the view with the Display current solution (in any view) option in the Render tool dialog box. When you use the Slider controls,
3/24/2010

settings.
Page 52 of 329
Material Characteristics
This section discusses the defining and applying of material definitions to surfaces. When rendered, the surfaces take on the appearance of the material. Surface Material Definitions Material considerations for photorealism Procedural Textures Working with Procedural Textures Gradient maps Environment Maps Materials task Define Materials Apply Material Dynamically Adjust Map Environment Maps dialog box Material Assignments dialog box Attach Projection Edit Projection Match Projection Create Projection Group Remove Projection ArchVision RPC support RPC tools tool box Creating and Modifying Material Palettes
Surface Material Definitions

Material definitions and assignments can be separated into two distinct categories local and library. Local materials are saved with the DGN file, while library materials require external material assignment table (.mat) and material palette (.pal) files to be present during rendering. Options in the Material Editor dialog box's Table menu let you convert library files to local and vice-versa. Material definitions attributes related to color, texture, transparency, and finish are created and stored in material palette (.pal) files. For local materials, this file is required only the first time a material is used in a DGN. For external materials, the palette file always must be present when applying materials, or rendering.
Many sample material definitions are supplied. If you do not plan to create your own material definitions, but want to apply existing material definitions to elements, see the Apply Material tool.
Attaching/assigning materials You have several choices when applying materials to elements in your models:

Level/color (using the Apply Material tool, or the Material Editor). Attached as an attribute to an element/solid, or to one or more faces of a solid (using the Apply Material tool, the Material Editor, or the Element Info dialog box). Per level, or level override (using the Level Manager dialog box). As part of an element template (using the Customize dialog box).
Where there is a conflict and a different material has been attached to an element that also has a level/color material assignment, then the attached material takes precedence over the level/color assignment.
3/24/2010
Page 53 of 329
For example, you may have a solid that has a level/color assignment for Brass Cast, but one of its faces has the Brass Polished material attached. When rendered, the solid will appear as cast brass (material assigned by level/color), but with one face appearing as polished brass (the attached material).
Solid with cast brass material assigned by color/level, and polished brass material attached to top surface
Materials priority
When attaching/assigning materials to elements, solids, or faces of solids, the priority that applies to the material assignments, highest to lowest, is as follows: 1. Material attached to a level override. 2. Material attached to the face of an elements. 3. Material attached to an entire element (or by element template). 4. Material assigned by level and color (if color is ByLevel then the assignment is by level and the color of the level). 5. Material attached to the level (this is the ByLevel level Attachment - the Material column of the Level Manager). Local materials Local materials are stored within the DGN file itself rather than in external library files. Storing the materials in the DGN file allows for an elements material definition to be handled in a manner that is more consistent with other element properties such as level, text style, and the like. For example, when an element is copied from a reference file, its level (if it does not already exists) is copied as well it is never possible in normal operation for an element to lose its level. In a similar manner, with local materials, copying an element from a reference file causes its material definition also to be copied to the master file. By tightly binding a material to an element (or level), it is possible to insure that the object is always rendered with that material, thus helping to insure that rendering is more repeatable. When local materials are used, created from external palettes, a material palette file is required only the first time that a material is applied. Once you have copied or converted materials to be local, the material definitions are saved with the DGN file. You then can use the materials in any models of the DGN without the need for library files (external material tables and material palette files). Where a material is imported, or a new material created, with Copy Materials Locally On Use enabled, then a local material and palette is created. In these cases, a material is created that has no association with an external definition. You can, however, create external versions of these local materials by selecting Table > Local Materials > Copy To Library in the Material Editor.
3/24/2010
Page 54 of 329
As with external material allocation tables and palettes, local tables and palettes are independent of one another. While not a recommended workflow, you can, for example, use local materials with and external material table and vice-versa.
A material may incorporate image files that define either pattern maps or bump maps. These files are stored externally (for both local and library materials) and must be accessible when the design file is rendered.
Loading local tables
When working with local material tables, still you can open external tables, either from the Apply Material tool, or from the Material Editor dialog box. If you then want to re-open the local material table, you must select the DGN file in the Open Table File dialog box.
To open a local material assignment table
1. In the Material Editor dialog box, select Table > Open. or In the Apply Material tool, click the Open Material Table icon. The Open Table File dialog box opens. 2. Set Files of type to All Files (*.*). 3. Select the current DGN file. 4. Click Open. Library materials When using library materials, two external files are required a material assignment table (.mat) file and a material palette (.pal) file. This is the method used for earlier versions of MicroStation, prior to the V8 XM Edition. When working with library materials:

Materials are defined in an external material palette (.pal) and may include a pattern map, a bump map, or both, in the definition. For level/color assignments, an external material assignment table (.mat) defines the palettes used and the assignments of materials to elements in the design. Assignments refer to elements that reside on a specified level(s) and with a specified color(s). All elements on the same level with the same color have the same material characteristics, with the exception of elements that have materials attached to them as attributes. Where materials are attached as attributes, the material assignment table still is required, to define the palette file(s) used.
Type of File: Suffix/Extension: Stores: To modify: Choose Settings > Rendering > Materials. Material palette file .pal Material definitions Alternatively, in the Apply Material tool settings, double-click the material preview box to open the Material Editor. In the Visualization task or the Materials task, select the Apply Material tool. Material .mat assignment table Assignments to levels and colors in design Alternatively, select Material > Assign in the Material Editor dialog box, or edit the assignment manually in the palette tree. One DGN file Multiple DGN files Usually referred to by:
Material settings When defining materials for your models, settings in the Material Editor dialog box let you define how the surfaces react with light in the scene. In order to use correctly the various material settings, it is important to understand how they affect the interaction of light rays with objects in your models. The diagram below shows the various possibilities when a light ray strikes an object.
3/24/2010
Page 55 of 329
Legend:

1 Light source 2 Diffuse (percentage of light that is randomly dispersed in all directions). 3 Specular (percentage of light reflected in the mirror direction) and Reflect (percentage of light that is visible in the mirror direction). 4 Surface Normal 5 Refract (angle that light bends as it passes through an object). 6 Translucent (percentage of light that passes through an object and then is dispersed randomly in all directions on the back side of the object). 7 Transparent (percentage of light that passes through the object). 8 Finish (roughness of the surface, which controls the falloff of highlight on a surface).
In reality, all objects absorb some amount of light. That is, not all the light that strikes an object is reflected or transmitted. Similarly, when you define materials in your models, they should not be greater than 100% efficient. This is important, in particular, for materials that are to be used in photo-realistic images. For these materials, the following formula should be used: Efficiency = Diffuse + Translucency + Specular + Transparency <= 100 Using the Efficiency lock, in the Material Editor's advanced mode, you can select an Efficiency value, which is maintained as you modify the above settings. That is, if you modify a setting for Diffuse, Translucency, Specular, or Transparency, changes are made also to the remaining three settings to maintain the Efficiency setting.
3/24/2010

Pattern maps
Page 56 of 329
For increased realism, one or more pattern maps can be included in a material definition. Pattern maps are raster images (patterns) that are mapped to selected surfaces in the design file, as determined by the material assignments. You can map an image of a carpet, for example, to a shape in the design file that denotes the floor. When rendered, the shape takes on the appearance of the carpet. More than one image can be assigned to a material definition. For example, you can map an image of a brick wall, with a second smaller image of a road sign over the top of the first. In the rendered image, you would see the brick wall with the road sign placed on it. Tools in the Materials task let you apply and edit projection modes for pattern maps. For example, using projection modes lets you use the same material definition for various shaped objects.
Material projection modes are not backward-compatible with MicroStation V8.9.2 and earlier.
Bump maps (Phong shading, Ray Tracing, Radiosity and Particle Tracing only) Material definitions can include one or more bump maps, which can be any image (even the same image as that used for a pattern map). Brighter portions of the image are interpreted as high points, or bumps, and darker areas are interpreted as depressions or dents (this can be inverted in the bump map settings.) Bump maps can be used with pattern maps to simulate realistic surfaces. For example, a material definition can use a bricks and mortar pattern map, along with the equivalent bump map, to produce realistic bricks and mortar.
From left to right: Element with no material definition, with pattern map, with bump map, with both pattern and bump map
Material lighting effects Rendering relies on the reflection of light off surfaces in the design file. Material definitions include settings for various properties that affect the way that lighting is treated. Using the Material Editor dialog box, you can specify the various settings that determine the appearance of materials in your rendered images, including applying pattern maps and bump maps. Many settings are available that affect the appearance of materials. If you hover the pointer over these settings, in the Material Editor dialog box, a tool tip displays a description of the setting.
Efficiency
When you are defining materials for photorealism, a primary consideration is the efficiency setting for the material. This should never exceed 100%. Typical materials in the real world generally range in efficiency from 30% to 70%. When you turn on efficiency (Basic Mode) or lock it (Advanced Mode) it will remain at the selected value. As you adjust a material setting that affects the efficiency, then automatic adjustments will be made to the other settings to maintain the selected efficiency.
Diffuse
3/24/2010
Page 57 of 329
(Dark/Bright setting in Basic Mode) the intensity of the material's diffuse color can range from Dark (no diffuse color) to Bright (100% diffuse color). How the diffuse color is defined depends on the color setting. Click the color menu to see the following options:

Custom lets you select a color, using a color picker dialog box, which is opened by clicking the color button. Use element color uses the color of the element(s) in the model to define the diffuse color.
By mixing the diffuse color with a pattern map, the need for many different pattern maps is reduced. For example, both blue and pink marble materials could be created by mixing different base colors with a single marble pattern map.
Translucency
Translucency controls the amount of light that illuminates the side of the surface opposite the light source. That is, the percentage of incoming light that is transmitted through the material and scattered in all directions as it exits the material.
Specular, Finish, and Reflect
(Dull/Shiny control and Reflective toggle in Basic Mode) These three settings affect materials as follows:

Specular sets the intensity of specular highlights, with values ranging from 0 (Dull) to 100 (Shiny). Finish controls the size of the highlight, with values ranging from 0 (Rough) to 100 (Smooth). Reflect controls how reflective the material is, with values ranging from 0 (None) to 100 (Full).
The Finish and Specular settings interact to produce specular highlights, or lighting hot spots, for a material.
A highly polished material, such as chrome that has high Specular and Finish values, produces concentrated and bright specular highlights. A rough material, such as felt that has low values for Specular and Finish, has dull and more spread out specular highlights.
Left: Rough (low Specular and/or Finish), Center: Smooth (medium Specular and Finish), Right: Highly polished (high Spe
Transparency and Refract
(Opaque/Clear setting in Basic Mode) Sets a material's transparency and refractive index.
3/24/2010

Transparency values range from 0 (opaque) to 1 (fully transparent).
Page 58 of 329
Sphere with Transparency set to 0 (left) and 0.6 (right).
Refract sets the index of refraction for the material. The index of refraction is the ratio of the speed of light in a solid material to the speed of light in air. The index defines how much light bends as it enters a material.

A value of 1.0 does not bend light at all. A value greater than 1.0 causes the light to bend toward the surface normal of the object to which the material is applied A value of less than 1.0 causes the light to bend away from the surface normal of the object.
Values for Refract range from 0.10 to 3.00, but refract values for commonly used materials are available from the drop-down menu, which is opened by clicking the arrow icon.
Sphere with Refract set to 1.000 (left) and 1.400 (right).
It is not uncommon to use surfaces, rather than solids, to model panes of glass in windows. This can cause rendering inaccuracies where refraction is concerned because the light is bent only as it enters the surface. In real-life glass has thickness and the light is bent in one direction as it enters the glass, and again (in the opposite direction) as it exits the glass. In these situations, you can use the Thickness setting to specify that the material has a thickness. Thickness is defined in master units.
Thickness
This setting can be used to modify the refraction through a surface. For example, it is not uncommon to use surfaces, rather than solids, to model panes of glass in windows. This can cause rendering inaccuracies where refraction is concerned because the light is bent only as it enters the surface. In real-life glass has thickness and the light is bent in one direction as it enters the glass, and again (in the opposite direction) as it exits the glass. In these situations, you can use the Thickness setting to specify that the material has a thickness.
3/24/2010

When applied to a solid, then a non-zero thickness would make the solid appear hollow. Thickness is defined in master units.
Ambient
Page 59 of 329
The material's ambient reflectance that is, the degree to which the overall ambient lighting is reflected by the surface values can range from None (0) to Full (100). A combination of the overall Ambient light setting, together with the material's ambient light, determines the surface's appearance in the rendered image.
You can produce a material that appears to glow by keying in a value greater than 1 for Ambient.
Casts Shadows
If on, the material can cast shadows. If off, the material will not cast shadows (the light will shine through it).
Left: Cast shadows on for all materials. Right: Cylinder's material has Cast Shadow turned off.
Global Illumination
Used in conjunction with the Material Receives Light and Material Reflects Light settings in the Materials & Lighting section of the Radiosity dialog box and the Particles section of the Particle Tracing dialog box. Determine how the material receives and transmits radiosity illumination or particles. In either case:
If Material Receives Light is set to If global illumination on, this setting must be on for the material to receive radiosity illumination or particles. If set to If global illumination off, this setting must be off for the material to receive radiosity illumination or particles. If Material Reflects Light is set to If global illumination on, this setting must be on for the material to transmit radiosity illumination or particles. If set to If global illumination off, this setting must be off for the material to transmit radiosity illumination or particles.
Multi-layered materials You can create materials that consist of multiple layers of pattern maps, bump maps, procedures, gradients, and/or operations (tint or gamma setting). You can define the way that the pattern/bump maps are blended and you can assign a value for opacity, to allow one map to be seen through another. Adding layers of pattern maps, lets you create more complex materials. For example, you can create a brick wall that includes one or more signs as shown below
3/24/2010
Page 60 of 329
Multi-layered material example.
You can create this type of material by assigning a pattern map for the wall, and then adding layers for the overlayed pattern maps of the signs. The patterns for the signs have Repeat turned off and offsets defined to position them on the wall.
Multi-layered materials are not backward compatible with MicroStation V8 XM version 8.9.2.xx and earlier.
Using wildcards in material assignments When you enter level/color assignments for materials via the Material Editor, or the Material Assignments dialog boxes, you can use wildcards in the assignment. Level/color assignments are specified as LevelRange : ColorRange. Currently, the only wildcard character supported is the asterisk *.
Color wildcards
You can specify colors individually, separated by commas, or as a range separated with a hyphen. For colors, the wildcard character matches all colors. For colors, wildcard and non-wildcard characters cannot be combined, the wildcard takes precedence. Examples:

wall : 1,3,6,2030 matches colors 1,3,6, and colors 20 through 30 on level wall. wall : * matches all colors on level wall. wall is the equivalent of wall : * and matches all colors on level wall. wall : 2* is the equivalent of wall : * and matches all colors on level wall.
Level name wildcards
You can specify levels individually, separated by commas, or as a range separated with a hyphen. For levels, the wildcard character * matches zero or more characters, as shown in the following examples:

1, 5, 713 : * matches all colors on levels numbered 1, 5, and 7 through 13. w* matches levels wall, window and west entrance. w*n* matches levels window and west entrance. *oor matches door and floor. *oor* matches door floor and doorknobs
3/24/2010

Multiple wildcards can be entered on the same line, such as:
Page 61 of 329
hvac*, *floor* :22 matches color 22 on all levels that begin with hvac and/or all levels that contain the word floor.
Wildcard conflicts
Where conflicting assignments occur, more qualified assignments override less qualified assignments. For example:
wa* : 22 has precedence over w* : 22. In other words, levels starting with wa would match the first assignment, and all other levels starting with w would match the second. wall : 22 has precedence over w* : 22. In other words, levels named wall would match the first assignment, and all other levels starting with w would match the second.
Material considerations for photorealism

When creating photorealistic images, care should be taken with material definitions. Special considerations for ray tracing Unless a material is meant to be reflective or transparent, its Reflect and Transparency properties should be set to 0. While the practical maximum value for both Reflect and Transparency is 100, larger values may be keyed-in to create certain types of effects. (This is true for the Ambient, Diffuse, and Specular settings, as well.) If Transparency is off for a view, or in the Ray Tracing dialog box, transparent elements are rendered opaquely in that view. Reflections and transparency are tinted by the Specular Color of the material. The degree of reflectivity also is modified by the Specular material property. For example, if Reflect is set to 0.9 and Specular is set to 0.4, the material is only 0.36 reflective as, essentially, the two fields are multiplied together. The reflectivity is further modified by the Specular Color. In this case, the RGB values of the reflections are the products of the above (0.36 reflective) further multiplied by the respective RGB values (between 0 and 1) of the Specular Color. The same holds true for Transparency. Where there are no environment maps defined, a reflective object that does not see another object in its reflection will reflect the background color, as defined in the MicroStation color table. Thus, reflective objects will appear brighter when rendered with a white background than they would with a black background. Where environment maps are defined, and Environment Mapping is enabled, then these will be reflected in place of the background color. Any background image that may be defined for a view, however, is not reflected.
Material definitions for older existing DGN files may have Reflect set to a value other than 0.0. This means that more objects in a design may be reflective than intended, which can slow down ray tracing unnecessarily. Use the Material Editor dialog box to ensure that the reflectivity of only those objects that are intended to be reflective is set to a value greater than 0.0.
Transparent surface elements and refraction
When ray tracing a transparent surface (as opposed to a solid), if the element is defined in a clockwise order, transmitted rays bend as if they were leaving the element, as opposed to entering. You can solve this problem by specifying a Thickness value for the material. Other options are to use the reciprocal of the refraction value set for the element's material, or to reverse the surface normals using the Change Normal Direction tool in the Modify Surfaces task.
Glass surfaces
To achieve a realistic glass surface, the Diffuse Color should be relatively low (0.05). Clear glass actually is colorless (that is, its diffuse color is black, not white). Its Specular Color (the color of light that is reflected or transmitted) is white. Tinted glass can be obtained by modifying the specular color.
3/24/2010

Special considerations for Radiosity solving and Particle Tracing
Page 62 of 329
With both Radiosity solving and Particle Tracing, correct material definitions are even more important. For both these options, it is important that the Efficiency does not exceed 100%. In the real-world, materials generally range in efficiency from 30% to 70%. For Radiosity solving, if efficiency is greater than 100%, then it is possible for more light energy to be reflected than was initially received, which is unrealistic and could result in a never-ending calculation with the light energy increasing rather than decreasing. For Particle Tracing, this is not as drastic, but still should be considered. If the efficiency is above 100% then the process reduces the values for that material, on a pro-rata basis, back to 100%.
Effects of material settings
When the rendering process comes across a material definition, the four components Diffuse, Specular, Transparency, and Ambient, all have an effect on the outcome.
Diffuse the material's Base Color scaled by Diffuse, represents the percent of light (in each color) reflected by each light. This diffuse color determines how bright the material appears when illuminated, and how much light is reflected onto other surfaces for radiosity and particle tracing. For materials that are pattern-mapped, Color is first blended with the pattern map, and then Diffuse is applied.
Specular the Specular Color, scaled by Specular, represents the percent of light (in each color) that is reflected off a surface as a specular highlight, where you can see a reflection of each light source in the surface. When additionally scaled by Reflect, this yields the percent of light (in each color) that is seen in a reflection of a ray-traced object. When working with particle tracing, this value also represents the amount of light that will be reflected in the mirror direction onto other surfaces, accounting for caustics. Radiosity does not distribute specular light, and thus does not produce caustics. Specular highlights are seen in radiosity solutions only when Ray Trace is chosen as the Final Display in the Display section of the Radiosity dialog box. Specular highlights are seen in particle tracing solutions only when Ray Trace Specular Effects is enabled in the Display section of the Particle Tracing dialog box.
Transparency the Specular Color scaled by Transparency, represents the percent of light (in each color) that passes through a surface. Note that this means that a material with a Specular Color of black will never transmit any light, even if Transparency is set at 1. This applies when the material is casting shadows and when objects are seen through the material. Ambient the ambient color of a material is its Color scaled by Ambient, and then by the Ambient Light from the Global Lighting dialog box. For Radiosity solving and Particle Tracing, Ambient usually should be 0.0, or you can have Ambient Lighting turned off. In general, Ambient should be used only for ray tracing (as well as Phong, Smooth, and the other rendering modes). It is used to compensate for reflected light that these renderers do not handle.
Procedural Textures
This section introduces a second form of material definition, that of procedural textures. Material definitions A common problem that occurs with standard materials is that of inconsistencies when the material wraps around a solid. Take, for example, a wood material, applied to a sphere, slab and cylinder:

The sphere looks like a beach ball, with the woodgrains bunched up unnaturally at the poles. Grains displayed on the slab and cylinder don't align at the edges where surfaces meet.
3/24/2010
Page 63 of 329
While rotating the pattern 90 may reduce the problems (particularly with the sphere), making them less noticeable, that is a work-around and not a solution. These mismatches are inherent with the method used to apply the material. It is similar to applying a laminate or wallpaper to a surface. That is, the same pattern (material definition) is applied separately to each surface of each solid. Additionally, on a large area, tiling occurs where the image used for the material is repeated. These problems can be overcome with procedural textures, which produce natural looking materials. Advantages of procedural textures Each procedural texture is a self-contained MDL application that computes and applies the material definition to the selected solid or surface. As well as the standard user defined parameters that appear in the Material Editor dialog box, and the Mapping parameters in the Map Editor, further parameters are available when you open the Map Editor dialog box for the pattern map, or bump map. These additional parameters are specific to each procedural texture.
3/24/2010
Page 64 of 329
Map Editor with pattern map (left) and procedural texture (right).
Thus, procedural textures have major advantages over standard material definitions:

They look more natural because there are no seams caused by texture wrapping. They have virtually infinite resolution. They have editable settings allowing greater control over the material definition. A single procedural texture can be used to create a range of similar materials.
3D procedural textures
When applied to a solid or surface, a 3D procedural texture produces a different pattern for each axis. The effect is that the solid or surface appears to have been carved out of a single block of the material. When a 3D procedural texture is used, there is no need to specify different materials for the top and sides of a model, as may be required with standard pattern maps. Variations of the material can be created by changing the Size X, Y, and Z values for the material in the Map Editor dialog box. This lets you change the appearance of the material along any of the axes. Consider the previous sample model with the sample 3D procedural texture wood applied. As shown in the following image, with a procedural texture, the sphere looks as though it was cut from a single material. On the slab, different patterns are applied to each face. Furthermore, the grains on each face of the slab and the grains on the cylinder render correctly. They run in the correct direction relative to each other and meet correctly at the edges. These differences in the top and sides were generated from the one 3D procedural texture.
3/24/2010
Page 65 of 329
2D procedural textures
Like their 3D counterparts, you can change the appearance of 2D procedural textures using the Size X, and Y values in the Map Editor dialog box. Each 2D procedural texture has its own specific settings as well, to control various aspects of its appearance. For example, you can change the thickness of the mortar in the brick texture, as well as the color of the bricks or mortar. While 2D procedural textures work similarly to normal pattern maps, they are calculated for each surface. This may result in them not matching at edges, but on the other hand, there is none of the tiling that can occur with a normal pattern map (when a pattern is repeated).
2D procedural textures brick and boards applied to surfaces.
Sample procedural textures The material palette, proctext.pal, which is installed in the "Workspace\system\materials" directory, contains each sample procedural texture that is installed in MicroStation's "mdlsys\textures" directory.
Sample of 3D procedural textures
3/24/2010
Page 66 of 329
Wood
Wood (another one)
Marble
Marble (another one)
Black/white noise
Color noise
Turbulence
Checker (3D)
RGB color cubes
Waves
Sample of 2D procedural textures
3/24/2010

Boards Brick Checker (2D)
Page 67 of 329
Sand
Turf
Special online help is supplied for each sample procedural texture. This includes information on the procedural texture's specific parameters and how they affect its appearance.
Working with Procedural Textures

Working with procedural textures is just like working with regular textures. You select them the same way, and they can be displayed in the same way. They do take longer to display however (because each pixel is computed instead of loaded from memory).
To define a material with a procedural texture
1. In the Materials task, select Define Materials. or Choose Settings > Rendering > Materials. The Material Editor dialog box opens, with the current palettes loaded. 2. If multiple palettes are loaded, select the palette to which you want the material added. 3. Click New Material. If the Palette Tree is not displayed, the New Material dialog box opens. If the Palette Tree is displayed, a new entry appears in the palette. In both cases, focus is on the default material name. 4. Key in a name for the new material (and click OK if entering the name in the New Material dialog box). 5. In the Material Editor dialog box, click on the Pattern map or Bump map icon as required. The Open Image File dialog box opens. 6. Use the controls in this dialog box to select the procedural texture file. Procedural textures have the extension .pma (procedural MDL application) and are stored in the "..\program\MicroStation\mdlsys\textures" folder. 7. Click the Open button. The Map Editor opens with the procedural texture loaded. It appears also in the display area of the Material Editor dialog box. 8. (Optional) To preview the application of the procedural texture to a surface or solid, select Material > Preview Element or click the appropriate icon, in the Material Editor dialog box, than identify and accept the element. 9. Make any adjustments required to the settings. 10. Select Palette > Save (or Save As), or click the Save icon, to save the palette file with the new material. Editing material definitions with procedural textures A f th t d d t th t b dit d f t d dt t l b dit d f d lt t Thi i d i th M
3/24/2010

Editor dialog box.
Page 68 of 329
In the wood material, for example, various wood patterns can be created simply by changing the size of the material in any combination of the x, y, and z axes. When the size of the wood material definition is changed in this way, the grain still aligns correctly at each edge.
Doubling the value in the Size X field, relative to those for Y and Z, stretches the pattern of the wood grain along the x-axis.
Doubling the value in the Size Y field, relative to those for X and Z, stretches the pattern of the wood grain along the y-axis.
Editing procedural texture values
In addition to the standard parameters, each procedural texture has its own specific parameters that you can edit. For example:
The sample procedural texture, Wood, has parameters that determine the wood's base color and ring color.
3/24/2010
Page 69 of 329
Procedural Texture Values dialog box for sample Wood procedural texture. Here, as well as the values in the list box, you can change, individually, the wood's Base Color and Ring Color
The sample procedural texture, Marble, has parameters that determine the appearance of the veins in the marble.
3/24/2010
Page 70 of 329
Procedural Texture Values dialog box for the sample Marble procedural texture. Changing these values alters the appearance of the material in the rendered image.
For this procedural texture, the degree of Complexity and the Vein Tightness or sharpness of the veins can be altered. Thus, it is possible to produce a range of marble materials, with different colors and vein structure, from the single marble procedural texture.
Simply by changing these two values, you can alter the appearance of this material. This is in addition to the Size field in the Material Editor dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 71 of 329
Changing Complexity to 1.0 produces a smoother vein.
Changing Vein Tightness to 1.0 produces a sharper, more clearly defined, vein.
To edit a material definition with a procedural texture
1. In the Material Editor dialog box, with the material palette that contains the material open, select the material from the Material option menu, or from the palette tree view. 2. (Optional) To adjust the standard parameters, use the controls in the Material Editor dialog box. 3. Click the Pattern map, or Bump map icon. The Map Editor dialog box opens. The title bar indicates the material name. 4. Use the controls in the Map Editor dialog box to adjust procedural texture-specific parameters. 5. From the Material Editor dialog box's Palette menu, choose Save. or Click the Save Palette icon in the Material Editor dialog box. Tool tips help Each procedural texture has tool tip help, which includes information on the parameters, and how they affect the appearance of the material. If you hover the pointer over the settings, a tool tip displays with information on the setting. Orientation of procedural textures Procedural textures, by default, are computed relative to the minimum extent of each element, or to the origin of its cell, if any. Where a f f f f
3/24/2010

A simple way to do this, is to create a cell of the required surfaces. They will then be processed as a single element.
Page 72 of 329
If left ungrouped, the procedural texture is applied relative to the origin of each surface individually. In other words, there would most likely be mismatches of the texture at any edges.
Where a model consists of a number of separate surfaces, the procedural texture may not match correctly at the edges.
Where a model is a single entity, such as a solid, or a cell, then the procedural texture is applied correctly, and matches along the edges.
Gradient maps
Along with pattern/bump maps and procedural textures, you can apply a gradient as a material map, either individually or as part of a multi-layer material. Two types of gradients are available linear and radial, which are applied as follows:

Linear gradient Color is constant in the Y direction of the map. Its colors are interpolated along the X direction of the map. Radial gradient Colors are interpolated based on the distance from the origin of the map.
Linear gradients may be rotated, while the angle setting has no effect on radial gradients.
3/24/2010
Page 73 of 329
Examples of linear (left) and radial (right) gradients.
When creating a gradient as a map, you can specify up to 50 different color keys. Colors can be edited, and the color keys can be repositioned as required. When you want to use a gradient as a repeating map, with a smooth transition, you should set the first and last colors to be identical.
To select a gradient as a map
1. In the Material Editor, click the Pattern Map or Bump Map icon as required. If a map already is assigned, then the Map Editor opens, otherwise the Open Image File dialog box opens. 2. If necessary, click the Cancel button to close the Open Image File dialog box. 3. In the Map Editor dialog box, use the option menu on the left to set map type to Gradient. 4. Use the option menu on the right to select Linear or Radial.
To add color keys to a gradient
1. If necessary, in the Map Editor dialog box, expand the section displaying the image type (Gradient) and gradient type, to reveal the gradient color bar. 2. Enter a data point on the color bar at the desired position for the key. The key is added. Initially, the color is set to the interpolated value of the gradient at that point. 3. Repeat the above step for further color keys, as required.
To re-position a color key on a gradient
1. Click on the vertical bar for the desired color key, and drag it to its new location. You cannot drag a key past another key, but they can be abutted to cause a sharp edge between the adjacent colors.
3/24/2010
Page 74 of 329
The first and last keys of the gradient cannot be moved, but if you try to drag them a copy is made of the key. If you drag another key all the way to either end of the gradient color bar, then that key will replace the end key.
To change the color of a color key
1. Click on the color (lower) button for the color key. The Gradient Color Chooser dialog box opens. 2. Use the controls in the dialog box to define the required color. 3. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the gradient is redisplayed with the new color included.
To delete a color key(s) of a gradient
1. Click on the vertical bar, or the top button, for the required key. The button at the top of the color key highlights. 2. (Optional) Use <Ctrl> data points to select additional keys to delete. 3. Press the <Delete> key. or Right-click to open a menu and select Delete.
The first and last keys cannot be deleted. If, however, you drag another key all the way to either end of the gradient color bar, then that key will replace the end key.
Environment Maps
An environment map is a set of image files that are mapped to the six faces of an imaginary cube surrounding a model (or environment). The way that environment maps are treated depends on the settings that are enabled in the Ray Tracing dialog box. When a view is ray traced, the Environment Mapping and Visible Environment settings control whether the map image are visible:
Where both Environment Mapping and Visible Environment settings are enabled environment map images are seen wherever the background color of the view normally would be visible. This applies also in reflections and through transparent surfaces. Where Environment Mapping is enabled, but Visible Environment is disabled environment map images are seen in reflections only.
When Environment Mapping is enabled, in the Ray Tracing settings box, the Visible Environment toggle also is enabled. This lets you optionally disable the visible environment, for example, when rendering with a PhotoMatched raster reference. A typical usage of environment mapping would be to show reflections of an outdoor scene, using an image of the sky for the top and sides and another image for the ground.
To assign environment maps to a DGN file
1. Select the Apply Material tool. 2. Click the Environment Maps icon. The Environment Maps dialog box opens. 3. Click the Browse For File icon. The Select Environment Map [All] dialog box opens. 4. Select an image file. 5 Cli k h O b
3/24/2010

The dialog box closes, and the selected file is applied to all faces of the environment cube.
Page 75 of 329
6. (Optional) To apply a different image or images to some of the other faces of the environment cube, click the Browse For File icon for the required face and select the image file as above. 7. Click OK. The Environment Maps dialog box closes and Environment Mapping is enabled in the Ray Tracing dialog box.
To use environment maps in ray traced images
1. Choose Settings > Rendering > Ray Tracing. The Ray Tracing dialog box opens. 2. If necessary, turn on Environment Mapping. By default, Environment Mapping is enabled when you first Set your environment maps in a design.
Environment mapping only operates with ray tracing, radiosity and particle tracing.
If you manually edit a material table file to change or add an environment map, choose Update Environment Maps from the File menu in the Ray Tracing dialog box to read the new assignment.
The imaginary environment cube is constructed slightly beyond the extents of the design file and is not directly visible, unless Visible Environment also is enabled. Where Visible Environment is not enabled, it can be seen only in reflections. The environment cube also can be rendered as part of a view if a totally transparent cube is created that surrounds the entire model.
If a model with an environment map(s) is to be animated, it is advisable to create geometry that defines the extents of the portion to animate. This will prevent the environment map(s) from drifting.
Materials task
Materials task (opened as tool box)
The Materials task contains tools to define and apply materials and to dynamically adjust pattern/bump maps, and to apply and edit projection modes for materials.
To Select in the Materials task
Define materials and create material palettes. Define Materials see footnote 150
Apply/attach materials to, or remove materials from geometry in a model, or to define Environment Maps. Apply Material see footnote 151
3/24/2010
Page 76 of 329
Interactively move, scale, or rotate, a previously applied pattern map or bump map.
Dynamically Adjust Map see footnote 152
Attach a material projection to an element. Attach Projection see footnote 153
Edit material projection parameters for an element. Edit Projection see footnote 154
Match the material projection of a selected element to that of an existing element. Match Projection see footnote 155
Group elements as a single entity for projection of a material onto them. Create Projection Group see footnote 156
Remove a material projection from an element. Remove Projection see footnote 157
ArchVision RPC support

MicroStation supports ArchVision RPC 3D textures, such as realPeople, realTrees, and RPC 3.0 content such as RPC Automobiles and Objects. RPC cells are replaced dynamically, at render time, with images from the RPC files that are appropriate for the current viewing direction. That is, during rendering, the RPC cells are replaced by geometry and texture maps extracted from the RPC files. The maps selected are determined by the orientation of the camera with respect to the RPC cells, and the current animation frame number for animated RPC cells. ArchVision Content Manager For newer RPC content, ArchVision Content Manager is required, along with an ArchVision licence. From MicroStation, you can access the ArchVision Content Manager via the Configure Content button in the RPC Thumbnail Viewer. Refer to ArchVision (www.archvision.com) for information on RPC cells and their licensing. Where required, MicroStation's thumbnail browser may be disabled via a configuration variable. To disable the RPC thumbnail browser, set the configuration variable MS_DISABLE_RPCBROWSER to value of 1. To re-enable the browser, set the configuration variable to 0 (zero), or leave blank.
3/24/2010

Tools for placing and editing RPC cells are contained in the Visualization Utilities task.
Placing RPC cells
Page 77 of 329
You use the Place RPC cell tool to place RPC cells in a model. Settings for this tool let you select, via combo boxes, a Directory, Category, and Name for the RPC cell. Additional controls let you browse for a directory, refresh the combo boxes, or view the RPC content via a thumbnail browser. Where it is the first time placing an RPC cell, automatically you will be presented with the file browser. Other tool settings let you Set the Height, Scale, and Size Variation for the cells. A Random rotation setting lets you place cells with random rotation, without having to define the target direction for the cells.
When you first use this tool, all the directories in the search path will be scanned for RPC files. The search path is the list of directories defined by the configuration variables MS_PATTERN, MS_BUMP, MS_IMAGE, and MS_DEF. Any time the contents of a directory is changed, it will be re-scanned. If for any reason the combo boxes do not accurately list the RPC files present, you can click the Refresh button (immediately to the right of the Browse button). A Reset will abort the scanning for RPC files. You can adjust the Height or Scale settings to modify the size of the RPC cell. As you do this, the size of the RPC cell is scaled to reflect the current dimensions. Setting the Size Variation to a non-zero value results in RPC cells that are scaled randomly, as specified by the percentage. That is, if Height is set to 10.0 and Size Variation is set to 20%, then RPC's will be placed with a random height from 8.0 to 12.0. When you place RPC cells, you will first be prompted for the RPC cell position, which locates the center of the bottom edge of the RPC cell. Once you have set the cell position, you will be prompted for the RPC cell target point, which is the point at which the cell will face. In other words, it defines the rotation of the cell about the global Z axis. RPC cells are always placed such that their vertical (or Y) axis is parallel to the model's Z axis. If Random rotation is enabled, each RPC will be placed with a randomly selected orientation, and no additional data point is needed to select the target point. RPC cells are placed using the active level and color. They appear as a rough representation of the geometry, with an enter data field that specifies the RPC file name. After placing an RPC cell, you may continue to place additional cells or Reset to finish.
Customize settings for RPC cells
If the RPC cell is customizable, as with RPC 3.0 content such as Automobiles and Office Clutter, then the Customize button will be enabled. Selecting it will open the Customize RPC dialog box, which lets you edit the various options available for a given RPC cell. When using settings in the Customize RPC dialog box, the following restrictions apply:
Cast Reflections (which has nothing to do with rendering reflections) is ignored, but is controlled globally through the RPC MODEL key-in. Speed (which controls the rotation of car wheels) currently is not supported. Jitter always is ignored and disabled.
3/24/2010
Page 78 of 329
Height should be modified only in the RPC tool settings window, not from Customize RPC dialog.
Editing RPC cells
You use the Edit RPC cell tool to edit, or replace, existing RPC cells present in a model. After selecting the tool and the RPC cell you wish to edit, you then can change the name of the RPC file that is associated with the cell, as well as its height or scale. As you change the height or scale, the size of the RPC cell is scaled to reflect the current dimensions. If you select a different RPC filename, the new cell will replace the existing. To complete any changes to the settings, you must enter a data point in a view. Changes made to an RPC (including those made from the Customize RPC dialog) are applied only when a data point is entered in a view to accept those changes.
RPC file properties
You can display properties and a preview of the selected RPC file, in both the Place RPC cell and Edit RPC cell tools, by clicking the Show RPC Properties button in the lower left corner of the settings window. Properties displayed include:

Images: The number of images that are stored in a horizontal ring. Frames: The number of time intervals stored for each image. Rings: The number of horizontal rings that are stored. Each ring is a series of images of the object from a specific elevation. Image size: The size (width, height) of each image in pixels. Object size: The size (width, height) of the real world object in master units. Gait: The distance in inches that the object needs to travel for each loop of motion. Loop time: The elapse time in seconds for each loop of motion.
Animating RPC files
RPC cells that contain walking people can be included in actors to allow the RPC cell to move during an animation. Animated RPC files contain 30 frames per second of animation. You can calculate the total distance in inches that the RPC cell should move during an entire animation using the following formula: distancePerFrame = Gait / (30 * Loop time) distance = animationFrames * distancePerFrame where: animationFrames is the total number of frames in your animation. Other animated RPC files (such as fountains and 2.5D people) do not have to be defined as actors in order to be animated.
When recording animations, the Clear Pattern/Bump Maps Between Frames toggle does not apply to RPC cells - they always will be cleared after each rendering.
The Speed setting (for animating RPC 3.0 content) currently is not supported.
Key-ins to modify rendering behavior
There are two key-ins that you can use to modify the appearance of RPC cells in renderings and animations. Settings for both key-ins are saved as design file settings. RPC VIEWMODE [ CELL | TARGET ]
3/24/2010

Options CELL and TARGET are used as follows:

Page 79 of 329
CELL to select RPC images based on the direction from the camera to the origin of the RPC cell (the default). TARGET to select RPC images based on the viewing direction. Enter the key-in with no option to display the current mode.
CELL mode, the default, is recommended for creating animations where the camera is panning but position is fixed. In these cases, CELL mode will use the same image from the RPC throughout the animation, whereas TARGET would use different images for each frame. This could cause the RPC to appear to spin during the animation. CELL mode generally should be used in most animations, even when the camera is moving (as in fly-through animations), since the camera frequently will pan during the course of the animation. TARGET mode generally is recommended only for fly-through animations where the camera passes very close to RPC's. For a fixed viewing direction, TARGET would use the same image from an RPC as it passed by, while CELL would use different images as it passed. This could cause the RPC to appear to spin as the camera passed by. RPC MODEL [ VIEW | SCENE ] (applies to RPC 3.0 content only) Options VIEW and SCENE are used as follows:

VIEW to optimize RPC images based on the current view (the default). SCENE to select RPC images that can be viewed from all sides. Enter the command with no option to display the current mode.
VIEW mode, the default, is recommended for static images where no reflections of the opposite side of the RPC can be seen. VIEW mode also can be used in animations where a solution is created for each frame, again as long as the backs of RPC's would not be visible in reflections. SCENE mode generally should be used in animations where one solution is used for the entire animation, or when the opposite sides of RPC's can be seen in reflection. It is recommended also for global illumination solutions where the RPC is likely to be redisplayed from the opposite direction.
Notes on using RPC cells
When rendering RPC files with Ray Tracing, Radiosity, or Particle Tracing, a special Procedural Texture, RPCPROC.PMA is used for the rendering. This procedural textures is installed in the "Bentley\MicroStation\mdlsys\textures\" directory. By default, this directory is added to the MS_PATTERN search path. If you have modified the MS_PATTERN search path for your user or project, you will need to ensure that this directory is included in the MS_PATTERN path in order to correctly render designs with RPC's. Potentially, there can be problems if a camera passes through an RPC cell that also has other geometry passing through it. In raytraced animations, these objects can appear to jump in front of or behind these RPC's. To detect errors when recording animation scripts across several machines, it is a very good idea to enable render logging. This can be enabled with the Log Rendering Statistics toggle on the Settings > Rendering > General dialog box. When enabled, the default log file is render.log in the MS_IMAGEOUT directory. An alternate file can be specified by changing the configuration variable MS_RENDERLOG. Any machine that encounters an error, such as a missing pattern map, will record the error in the render log. This will help you identify and remove bad animation frames that can be caused by network problems.
When accessing RPC's over a network, if an animation uses a rendering database that references an RPC file that becomes unavailable during the course of a rendering, the render will halt and display an error. If an RPC file cannot be found when the rendering database is being created, this will not currently cause an error (just as for missing pattern or bump maps). These missing files will be identified in the rendering statistics log to help you identify the bad frames. You can find a catalog of RPC files, along with sample files at the ArchVision web site, www.RPCnet.com.
3/24/2010
Page 80 of 329
RPC tools tool box

The RPC tools tool box contains tools for placing and editing ArchVision RPC files.
To
Select in the RPC tools tool box
Place RPC cells in a model Place RPC cell see footnote 158
Edit RPC cells in a model Edit RPC cell see footnote 159
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX RPC
The tools in the RPC tools tool box are also in the Visualization Utilities task.
Creating and Modifying Material Palettes

The Material Editor dialog box is used to create or modify a material palette. Material characteristics are stored in material palette .pal files. Sample palette files with a wide selection of materials are supplied with MicroStation. You can use these materials, create your own, or modify an existing material. As you make adjustments to materials in the Material Editor dialog box, all changes are stored in memory only, until you Save the palette file to disk. This lets you recover from unintentional errors. For example, if you accidentally delete a material, you can simply re-open the palette file without first saving the modified version to disk. Any materials, or palettes, that have been modified in the session appear in blue in the tree view, while unchanged materials and palettes appear in black. You can use drag-and-drop to copy or move materials from one or more palettes to another in the tree view.
It is good practice to place any materials that you create in palette files separate from the ones that are delivered. This avoids the chance of them being overwritten with any software updates.
To modify a material definition
1. In the Material Editor dialog box, select a material from the Materials drop-down menu. Settings for the selected material are displayed. The material is displayed in the Display area.
3/24/2010
Page 81 of 329
The Display area updates to display the current material. The original material is replaced (in memory) by the new definition, and will be used in the next render. 3. From the dialog box's Palette menu, choose Save, or click the Save Palette icon, to permanently record the modification. The palette file is saved with the new material definition.
To preview changes to a material's definition
1. In the Material Editor dialog box's Materials option menu, select a material. 2. From the Material menu, choose Preview Element. 3. Identify an element in the model. 4. Accept the element. The element is rendered with the material applied.
To preview the material on multiple elements, use the Element Selection tool to select the elements before clicking the Preview button.
To define a new material (palette tree not displayed)
1. In the Material Editor dialog box, click the New Material button. The New Material dialog box opens. 2. In the Material Name field, key in the name of the new material. 3. Click the OK button. The Create New Material dialog box closes. The new material name appears in the Material field of the Material Editor dialog box. All settings are set to the default values. 4. Adjust the settings and select a pattern map or bump map, if desired. After each adjustment, the Display updates to display the current material definition. 5. From the Material Editor dialog box's File menu, choose Save Palette. or Click the Save Palette icon. The palette file is saved to disk with the new material definition.
To avoid conflicts, each material's name should be unique in the material palette and any other material palette that might be used at the same time.
The characters [ and ] should not be used in the names of materials applied to models that will be exported as VRML worlds.
To define a new material (palette tree displayed)
1. If necessary, in the Material Editor dialog box, click the Show Palette Tree icon (left of the Palette menu). The dialog box expands to display the palette tree. 2. Click the New Material button. or Right-click on the Palette, in the palette tree, and choose New Material. A new material displays in the palette tree, named with the default New Material [1]. The material name is highlighted, ready to be edited to the name of your choice. 3. Key in the required name for the new material. Complete the entry with a carriage return, or enter a data point. 4. Adjust the settings and select a pattern map or bump map, if desired. After each adjustment, the Display updates to display the current material definition. 5 From the Material Editor dialog box's File menu choose Save Palette
3/24/2010

or Click the Save Palette icon. The palette file is saved to disk with the new material definition.
Page 82 of 329
To avoid conflicts, each material's name should be unique in the material palette and any other material palette that might be used at the same time.
The characters [ and ] should not be used in the names of materials applied to models that will be exported as VRML worlds.
To make a copy of a material
1. From the Material option menu, choose the material to copy. or In the Palette/Material tree select the material. 2. Click the Copy icon. 3. In the Palette/Material tree select the palette into which the material is to be copied (may be the same palette from which it is being copied). 4. Click the Past icon. 5. (Optional) Make adjustments to the settings for the copied material. 6. From the Material Editor dialog box's Palette menu, choose Save. The palette file is saved to disk with the new material definition.
Using drag-and-drop to copy a material(s)
1. In the Palette/Material tree select the material. 2. (Optional) Use <Ctrl> data to points select other materials to copy. Materials may be selected from multiple palettes in the tree view. 3. Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click and drag the material(s) to the palette to which you want the materials copied. If you are copying in the same material palette, or to another material palette that has materials of the same name, the copied materials will have a number appended to their names. You then can rename them.
Using drag-and-drop to move a material(s) between palettes
1. In the Palette/Material tree select the material to move. 2. (Optional) Use <Ctrl> data points to select other materials to copy. Materials may be selected from multiple palettes in the tree view. 3. Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click and drag the material(s) to the palette to which you want the materials moved. If you are moving materials to another material palette that has materials of the same name, the moved materials will have a number appended to their names. You then can rename them.
To rename a material
1. In the Palette/Material tree right-click the material, and select Rename from the menu. The material highlights, ready to be edited. 2. Change the material name to the new name. 3. From the Material Editor dialog box's Palette menu, choose Save. or Click the Save Palette icon. The palette file is saved to disk with the renamed material definition.
To delete a material
3/24/2010

2. An Alert box opens, asking if you are sure that you want to delete the material. 3. Click Yes. The Alert box closes and the material is deleted. 4. From the Material Editor dialog box's Palette menu, choose Save. or Click the Save Palette icon. The palette file is saved to disk with the deleted material definition removed.
To import a material from another palette file
Page 83 of 329
1. In the Material Editor dialog box, select the palette file into which you want to import a material. 2. From the Material menu, choose Import. The Select Palette File dialog box opens. 3. Use controls in the Select Palette File dialog box to select the palette file from which you wish to import materials. 4. Click the Open button. 5. The Select Palette File dialog box closes and the Import Materials dialog box opens with a list box displaying the names of the materials in the selected palette file. Any materials having the same names as those in the open palette file are displayed in red. 6. Click the name of the material to be imported. 7. (Optional) In the Import As field enter a new name for the material to be imported as. 8. (Optional) Select further materials to import, by holding down the <Ctrl> key as you click their names, renaming them, if necessary, as you select them. 9. Click the Import button. The Import Materials dialog box closes and the selected material(s) is added to those in the open palette file in the Material Editor dialog box. 10. From the Material Editor dialog box's Palette menu, choose Save. or Click the Save Palette icon. The palette is saved with the new materials included.
Setting Up the Camera

Setting up the virtual view camera is the last step in preparing to render an image. For simple setups, or for moving around your 3D design generally, you can use the Navigate View view control, which is available from the Camera task, or from the view control bar in the view border. For more precise setups, however, the Define Camera tool in the Camera task provides a simple system to set up a view for rendering. As well as the camera positioning tools, it includes options for changing the view projection. Using similar terminology to that used in the movie world, the Define Camera tool settings let you Orient, Pan, Roll, or Dolly the camera. It is easy to imagine a real camera and its physical movement when using this tool. For example, with reference point set to eye, when you want to see the area just to the left of the view extents, you Pan Horizontally to the left, and the objects move to the right as you would expect. Camera View Projection Camera Actions Camera task Define Camera Setup Camera Photomatch View Size Set Display Depth Show Display Depth
3/24/2010

Camera View Projection
The Define Camera tool supports four view projections:

Page 84 of 329
Parallel default MicroStation (no perspective). Three Point for conventional perspectives. Two Point for architectural use where vertical edges are required to be kept vertical. One Point for dimensionally correct sectional perspectives.
Choosing any of these options, in the Define Camera settings window, changes the projection in the camera view accordingly. Similarly, the view cone updates with the new viewing parameters. You may change the view projection at any time. Parallel projection MicroStation's standard viewing projection is parallel. This projection is most commonly used during the design process. Here, the view cone is rectangular in shape. In the illustration, below, the dashed rectangle contains the eye point handle.
Parallel projection. The blue rectangle indicates the plane in which the camera is located.
Three Point projection Three point projection is the most natural projection, and is used for conventional images. In this projection, the image plane is normal to the direction of the view, as in a conventional camera.
3/24/2010
Page 85 of 329
Three Point projection provides a view as would be seen through a standard camera.
Two Point projection Most commonly used for architectural renderings where vertical edges are required to be displayed as vertical, even in the perspective views. Here, the image plane is kept vertical, but oriented in the horizontal direction of the view. In this way, you get perspective while keeping any vertical edges completely vertical in the image.
3/24/2010
Page 86 of 329
Two Point projection can be used to ensure that vertical edges remain vertical in a perspective view.
One Point projection Working in a similar manner to a bellows camera, with one point projection the orientation of the image plane is completely independent of the view direction. Thus, an extra handle, normal to the image plane, is added to the view cone. This handle controls the direction of the image plane. An advantage of one point projection is that of dimensional correctness. That is, if you have the image plane parallel to a plane of the model, then the dimensions of the model in that plane are to scale. This enables you to create an image that has both depth, and dimensional correctness in the selected plane. Once the camera and target locations have been set, you then use the plane handle to manipulate the image plane to be parallel to the required face. This can be done graphically, or via settings in the Camera Orientation settings fields.
3/24/2010
Page 87 of 329
One Point projection allows the image plane to be manipulated independently to the viewing direction.
Camera Actions
Modifying the view cone graphically is a very quick way to set up a view for rendering. However, for more precise manipulation, you can select from the Camera Action options available in the Define Camera tool's icon bar. These allow you to quickly and precisely adjust a view with controlled movement of the view cone. This can be:

Relative to the pointer movement in the camera view. With Controlled Movement, such that each data point moves, revolves, or rotates the view cone by a defined distance or angle. As defined by key-ins in the relative settings fields.
To In the icon bar, select
Move the camera or the target radially (horizontally or vertically) relative to each other. Pan
Move the camera or the target radially (horizontally) relative to each other. Pan Horizontal Move the camera or the target radially (vertically) relative to each other.
3/24/2010
Page 88 of 329
Pan Vertical
Roll or tilt the camera. Roll
Move the camera horizontally or vertically. Dolly/Elevate
Move the camera in, out, or sideways. Dolly
Change the Lens Focal Length. Lens Focal Length
Change the Lens Viewing Angle. Lens View Angle
Walk through the view. Pan/Dolly
Keyins to directly control the view camera Two key-ins can be used to directly control the view camera CAMERA ROLL and CAMERA PROJECTION:
CAMERA ROLL [angle] sets the roll (tilt) angle of the camera for a view. If no value is given for angle, then it is assumed to be zero. The angle also may be entered in the tool settings window, which appears when you enter the key-in. After entering the keyin, select the view required to have its angle set. CAMERA PROJECTION [ANGLE | ONEPOINT | TWOPOINT | THREEPOINT] sets the projection mode for a view. If a projection mode is included in the key-in, then that projection mode is used. The projection mode also may be selected in the tool settings window, which appears when you enter the key-in. After entering the key-in, select the view required to have its projection mode set.
Controlling camera movement with the screen pointer For manipulation of the active or camera view, via controlled movement, effectively the screen is sectioned off like a tic-tac-toe board.
Controlled Movement
For manipulations that allow movement horizontally and vertically, the middle section is the origin, and clicking in any other section produces movement.
3/24/2010
Page 89 of 329
Screen partitioning for controlled movement horizontally and vertically. Clicking in any of these sections produces movement as shown.
Where movements are restricted to the horizontal or vertical direction only, the center strip (horizontally or vertically respectively) becomes the origin. Here, clicking in the sections either side of the origin strip produces the desired movement.
Screen partitioning for controlled movement horizontally or vertically. Movements are as shown for horizontal (left), and vertical (right).
Continuous View Updates
When Continuous View Updates is turned on, the camera view updates dynamically, as the pointer is moved. The origin point for camera control, however, is the first data point in the camera view. Here, in effect, the screen sectioning is about this first data point. Thus, movement of the pointer from this data point produces the relative movement in the camera.
To calibrate the camera such that the viewing perspective matches that of a photograph or rendered image, use the Photomatch tool in the Camera task.
Camera task
Camera task (opened as tool box)
The Camera task contains tools and view controls for setting up camera views, setting view areas, display and active depths, controlling clip volumes and clip masks, and navigating a 3D model.
To Select in the Camera task
Set up a view for rendering. Define Camera see footnote 160
3/24/2010
Page 90 of 329
Interactively navigate a 3D view using a subset of the Navigate Camera view control.
Navigate View see footnote 161
Setup a view camera for a view. Setup Camera see footnote 162
Calibrate a view to match the perspective of a photograph. Photomatch see footnote 163
Resize a view. View Size see footnote 164
Set the display depth for a view. Set Display Depth see footnote 165
Show the current display depth for a view. Show Display Depth see footnote 166
Limit the displayed volume for a view. Clip Volume see footnote 167
Mask the display of elements in a view. Clip Mask see footnote 168
Generating Rendered Images

After setting up lights, defining and applying material characteristics, and setting up the virtual view camera, the next step is to put it all together and create a rendered image.
3/24/2010

Visualization task Render Controlling Image Quality and Processing Time Rendering Setups Visualization Utilities task Facet Smoothing Query Illumination Place RPC cell Edit RPC cell Rendering Tools tool box Solving Common Rendering Problems
Page 91 of 329
Visualization task
The Visualization task contains tools useful for visualization tasks for creating rendered images of your 3D designs. It is located in the Task Navigation tool box, which is docked (by default) to the right-hand edge of the MicroStation window.
Each tool in the Visualization task, apart from the Render tool, also is a member of a child task. When you point to a tool and hold down the Data button, a drop-down menu opens from which you can select tools in the child task. You can also open the child task as a floating tool box by choosing Open As Toolbox from the drop-down menu. When you select a tool in the child task, it automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Visualization task. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Visualization task. Where appropriate, it identifies the corresponding child tasks and, for each, the default representative tool.
3/24/2010
Page 92 of 329
Render see footnote 170
Lighting task (Define Light)
Materials task (Define Materials)
Camera task (Define Camera)
Visualization Utilities task (Facet Smoothing)
Controlling Image Quality and Processing Time

In most cases, higher image quality is achieved at the expense of longer processing time with a little effort you can learn how to get adequate quality in a reasonable amount of time.

The Stroke Tolerance, Antialiasing Grid Size and Ignore Open Elements And Text settings affect rendering quality. Lighting types and Surface material definitions can be simulated with a high degree of realism.
Adjusting rendering settings You can define all settings for rendering from the Rendering Setup dialog box (Settings > Rendering > Setup), which also lets you save your rendering setup parameters for use in other designs. This is useful for creating setups for different levels of accuracy/finish.
3/24/2010
Page 93 of 329
These same settings can be defined in their individual dialog boxes, such as the following:
Rendering Settings dialog box (Settings > Rendering > General) Ray Tracing dialog box (Settings > Rendering > Ray Tracing) Radiosity dialog box (Settings > Rendering > Radiosity) Particle Tracing dialog box (Settings > Rendering > Particle Tracing)
Any settings that you change in the Rendering Setup dialog box, and apply to the view(s), are reflected in the individual dialog boxes, and vice-versa. Using the Rendering Setup dialog box simplifies the setting up process because all settings are readily accessible from the one dialog box.
General Procedure To adjust rendering settings
1. Open the Rendering Setup dialog box by selecting Settings > Rendering > Setup. 2. From the View option menu, select the view to which the settings are to apply. 3. Select the tab relating to the settings that you want to adjust. 4. Make adjustments. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required. 6. If the Apply button is enabled, click it to make the adjustments to the selected view. The Apply button remains inactive (dimmed) unless a change is made that has to be applied (for example, changes to View Attributes have to be applied to the view). Controlling shadow quality in Phong rendering Shadow settings for Phong rendering are controlled in the Rendering Settings dialog box (Settings menu > Rendering > General), or
3/24/2010
Page 94 of 329
Phong Shadow Filter Size determines the softness of shadows larger values produce softer shadows. Its value describes the number of adjacent pixels to look at in the shadow map. Zero or one would produce hard shadows; two or three would produce softer shadows.
A Large Phong Shadow Filter Size results in softer shadows.
Phong Shadow Tolerance determines how close objects can be to cast shadows on each other, and is used to prevent surfaces from casting shadows on themselves. The default value .02 is usually sufficient to prevent self-shadowing. Large Shadow Tolerance values can cause inaccurate shadow generation.
Phong Shadow Tolerance. The default settings are usually sufficient.
3/24/2010
Page 95 of 329
Phong Shadow Tolerance. A large Phong Shadow Tolerance may cause inaccurate shadows to be generated
If the shadow tolerance is too large, objects may not cast shadows on other objects that are too close. If it is too small, the objects might shadow themselves, causing a rippled appearance across the surface.
Decreasing processing time Even on fast systems, high-resolution ray traced images take some time to generate. The following options in the Ray Tracing dialog box help reduce the time required to produce photo-realistic ray traced images:
Ray Tracing dialog box
Quick Display allows a ray traced image to be previewed quickly, letting you stop processing (with a Reset) if the image needs fine tuning.
Multiple images can be ray traced sequentially without user intervention. Follow the General Procedure for Rendering Multiple Images.
3/24/2010
Page 96 of 329
As a general rule, to save time, test renderings should be done in small views or fences. Large views, or images saved to disk, should only be rendered after you are satisfied with the initial results.
Ray Tracing setting key-in There is a key-in that can be used by advanced Visualization users to improve ray tracing performance in certain situations. This key-in, RAYTRACE SET CONTRIBUTION <value>, sets the minimum contribution a reflected or transmitted ray needs to have before that ray will be computed. In ray tracing calculations, the contribution of a ray is cumulative from the eye. Take, for example, a ray from the eye that sees an object having a reflective value of 0.6. The contribution of the ray reflected from this object would be 0.6. If that reflected ray now sees an object that has a transparent value of 0.3, the contribution of the ray transmitted from the new object would be 0.6 * 0.3 = 0.18. If the minimum contribution was set to 0.2, this transmitted ray would not be computed, since it would be considered insignificant. Values that may be used for this key-in range from 0.0 to 1.0. A value of 0.0 (the default) indicates that all rays are significant and will be computed, while values near 1.0 indicate that almost no reflected or transmitted rays are significant, and most would be ignored. Typical non-zero values would range between 0.1 and 0.001. Submitting this key-in without a value will display the current value in the status bar. Shading Type When rendering a view, you can choose from Normal, Antialias and Stereo shading types.
Normal
The view is shaded normally.

Antialias
Reduces the jagged edges (jaggies) that are particularly noticeable on low-resolution displays. The additional time required for antialiasing is especially worthwhile when saving images for presentation, publication, or animated sequences.
Antialiased (left) compared to not antialiased (right).
3/24/2010
Page 97 of 329
Magnified view of top edge when antialiased (left) and not antialiased (right).
Antialiasing quality
An option menu, in the Rendering Settings dialog box, lets you set the value of Antialiasing Quality. This same setting is present also in the Ray Tracing dialog box's Antialiasing Settings section. Choosing from any of the preset options Very Low, Low, Medium, High, Very High automatically sets the values for Antialiasing Grid Size. Choosing Custom lets you manually edit the Antialiasing settings.
Antialiasing grid size
Antialiasing with standard rendering modes is done by rendering the model several times and combining the images into one image. Antialiasing quality is determined by the Antialiasing Grid Size setting, which can be set automatically with the Antialiasing Quality settings of Very Low, Low, Medium, High, Very High. Alternatively, you can input the value manually if you choose Custom.
Ray tracing and antialiasing
MicroStation's Ray Tracing render mode uses an adaptive antialiasing technique that samples each pixel. The number of samples taken is determined by the Quality setting, which sets the minimum and maximum samples. Antialiasing for Ray Tracing is performed as follows: 1. A small number of initial samples is taken in a pixel. The number of initial samples is determined by the Samples Min setting in the Ray Tracing dialog box (Antialiasing Settings). 2. The degree that the samples vary from each other is determined. 3. If the variance exceeds the Contrast Threshold, another sample is taken and the variance is re-evaluated. 4. This procedure is repeated until the variance between the samples is acceptable, or until the maximum number of samples is reached. The maximum number of samples is determined by the Samples Max setting in the Ray Tracing dialog box (Antialiasing Settings). 5. When done, all the samples are combined into a final pixel value. You can set the minimum and maximum samples manually, by setting Quality to Custom in the Antialiasing Settings area of the Ray Tracing dialog box. Generally, selecting one of the preset Quality settings, which presets the minimum and maximum samples settings, will cover most situations.
Stereo
Renders a view with a stereo effect that is visible when viewed with 3D (Red/Blue) glasses. Stereo shading takes twice as long as Normal because two images, one each from the perspective of the right and left eyes, are rendered and combined into one color coded image.
Rendering Setups
Rendering, particularly of complex models, can be time consuming. Various rendering settings can have a major impact on rendering times. For initial working images, coarse settings can be used, to produce images quickly. For final images, however, you must remember to adjust the settings to improve the quality. The Rendering Setups dialog box streamlines these procedures.
3/24/2010
Page 98 of 329
MicroStation's Rendering Setup dialog box lets you create rendering setups and save them with the design file. You can create multiple setups that cover different rendering scenarios, such as:

Working setup with coarse settings, useful for initial rendering to check the placement of lights and materials. Check setup with finer settings to give a near final quality image for last minute checking. Final setup with all settings chosen to produce the final high quality, photo-realistic rendered image.
To load the settings relative to the current requirements you select the appropriate Setup Name, from an option menu. Setup files also can be exported to an external file. This same setup file then can be imported into a new design file, and saved with it. Thus, you need to go through the initial setting up process once only.
To create a rendering settings setup
1. Choose Settings > Rendering > Setup. The Rendering Setup dialog box opens. 2. Using controls in the dialog box, define settings as required. 3. Click the Save As button. The Save Setup As dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in a filename. 5. Click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the new settings filename appears in the Setup Name option menu.
Using the above method, you can create several rendering setups. To change from one setup to the other you choose the required setup from the Setup Name option menu.
To export a rendering settings setup file
1. From the Setup Name option menu, choose the setup to export. 2. From the Rendering Setup dialog box's File menu, choose Export Setup File. The Export Setup File dialog box opens. 3. In the Files field, key in a name for the settings file. 4. Click the OK button. The file is saved to disk and the dialog box closes.
Where a setup file is required for other design files, you must first export it, in this way, to an external file.
To import a rendering settings setup file
1. From the Rendering Setup dialog box's File menu, choose Import Setup File. The Import Setup File dialog box opens. 2. If necessary, select the directory where the required file is stored. 3. Select the required file from the list. 4. Click the OK button. The Import Setup File dialog box closes and the Import Setup As dialog box opens. This lets you name the rendering setup for the current design file. 5. Enter a name for the imported rendering setup. 6. Click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the imported settings are loaded with the chosen setup name displayed in the Setup Name option menu.
3/24/2010
Page 99 of 329
Visualization Utilities task
Visualization Utilities task (opened as tool box)
The Visualization Utilities task contains tools to smooth facets in rendered images, query illumination values, to place RPC cells and to edit values for RPC cells.
To Select in the Visualization Utilities task
Improve the rendered quality of polygons by smoothing the facets. Facet Smoothing see footnote 171
Display the amount of light reflected or reaching a surface. Query Illumination see footnote 172
Place ArchVision RPC cells. Place RPC see footnote 173
Edit or replace ArchVision cells. Edit RPC see footnote 174
Rendering Tools tool box

All the tools for setting up a view for rendering are in the Rendering Tools tool box. These include tools for creating lighting, applying materials, creating a radiosity or particle traced solution, querying the illumination, and setting up the view camera.
To
Select in the Rendering Tools tool box
Create or modify a light source.
3/24/2010

Define Light see footnote 175 To open the Global Lighting dialog box to: Turn on/off Ambient, Flashbulb, or Solar lighting, or Add Skylight to Solar and Distant lights. Global Lighting see footnote 176
Page 100 of 329
Set up the virtual view camera. Define Camera see footnote 177 Apply, modify or identify an existing material definition to an element(s). or Preview the application of a material definition. Apply Material or see footnote 178 Remove a previously applied material definition. To open the Material Editor dialog box to: Create or modify a material definition. or Create a material palette file. Define Materials see footnote 179
To interactively adjust the size, position, and orientation of a pattern/bump map. Dynamically Adjust Map see footnote 180
Render views, fence contents, or individual elements. Render see footnote 181
Display the amount of light reaching the point indicated by the pointer. Query Illumination see footnote 182
Improve the rendered quality of discrete polygons. Facet Smoothing see footnote 183
3/24/2010
Page 101 of 329
Match the view perspective to that of a photograph or rendered image.
Photomatch see footnote 184
Change the size of a view window to match another view window, or to match a standard format View Size see footnote 185
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX VISUALIZATION [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]
Solving Common Rendering Problems

This section covers how to solve some common rendering problems. Screen remains blank Lighting illuminates the image. If there are no lights shining on visible surfaces, the image stays dark. Turn on Flashbulb to remedy this. If you are Ray Tracing, with Real World Lighting enabled, try first adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the rendered image via the sliders in the Render tool settings.
To turn on Flashbulb
1. Choose Settings > Rendering > Global Lighting. The Global Lighting dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Flashbulb. 3. (Optional) Adjust the flashbulb Intensity. The maximum Intensity value is 1.0. 4. (Optional) Adjust the flashbulb Color. The brightest available Color is the default, White. Image is too dark This may be due to either or both of the following: 1. Screen Gamma Make sure that your monitor display gamma value is set correctly. For photorealistic rendering, with particle tracing or radiosity, it is vital that you set the gamma correction value for your monitor correctly. With incorrect settings, you will not get the best images possible. For PC monitors, good results usually are achieved with a gamma setting somewhere between 1.8 and 2.2. The exact setting is not critical, so a good starting point is a value of 2.0. 2. Brightness/Contrast for Ray Traced images When Ray Tracing, with Real World Lighting enabled, you can adjust the Brightness/Contrast of the rendered image interactively. No shadows Shadows are cast only if shadows are on for the views, light sources, materials and, for ray traced images, Shadows also must be turned on in the Ray Tracing dialog box. No transparency Objects are rendered transparent only if the material and the view have transparency enabled. No shadows cast by new or modified elements with Phong rendering
3/24/2010
Page 102 of 329
During a design session, shadow maps for a light source are calculated when you first render a view. To save time, shadow maps can be saved instead of being recalculated each time a view is rendered. This is done by selecting Save Phong Shadow Maps, in the Rendering Settings dialog box (select Settings > Rendering > General). When you have Save Phong Shadow Maps turned on, you must clear the shadow maps to ensure that shadows are calculated correctly, if you do either of the following:

Change the design add, delete, modify, or move elements. Make any changes to a light source in any way except by using the controls in the Define Light tool's dialog box.
You can clear existing shadow maps by selecting Clear Shadow Map(s) from the Mode option menu in the Define Light tool's dialog box or by keying in LIGHT CLEAR. Noise in images Noise, in the form of spots or other odd shadows, in your rendered images can occur for a number of reasons. For example, if they appear:
In the shadows of spotlights usually due to having constructions turned on in the view, as well as the level containing the spotlights. Correct this by turning constructions off in the view being rendered. Another reason may be that the spotlight is placed coincident with a surface. You can correct this by moving the origin of the light source slightly away from the surface.
In the shadows of area lights usually due to having too few samples. Increasing the Samples setting for the area light should solve this problem. In general, with area light sources, the bigger the area and the closer it is to its target, the more samples that are required to produce smooth shadows. Alternatively, a small area light at a far distance would act more like a spot light (with a 90 degree cone angle) and would only require a few samples.
When shadows are off, you should not see any noise from a light source. Other possible causes of noisy images may be:

Coincident surfaces in the model. When particle tracing, the Smoothness setting is too low, or not enough particles have been shot. Increasing the Smoothness setting reduces noise, but can also lead to a lack of detail.
Lack of detail in particle traced images As with many other apparent problems with particle traced images, this can be solved by adding more particles. The more particles used, the finer the mesh used in the image, producing finer detail. Shadows not sharp enough Generally, if the shadows in an image are not sharp enough, you can:

Add more particles (for Particle Tracing). Check that the Smoothness setting is not too high (for Particle Tracing). Where shadows are from direct lighting, turn on Ray Trace Direct Illumination (for Particle Tracing and Radiosity solutions).
Missing pattern/bump maps, or IES lighting data When the rendering process encounters materials that have missing pattern/bump maps, or source lighting that has missing IES data, messages are generated in the Message Center and the render log file (if Log Rendering Statistics is enabled in the Rendering Settings dialog box). The messages note the missing file, the material/light and, where appropriate, the reference and model. This information is useful for correcting the problems.
3/24/2010
Page 103 of 329
Specialized Procedures
MicroStation includes several options and applications for creating and editing panoramas, images, and movies. Producing FlyThrough Sequences Conducting Solar Studies Solar Time Stamp Playing and Editing Sequences Saving Rendered Images Creating Panoramas Saving Images and Panoramas in Piranesi EPix Format Displaying and Modifying Rendered Images Using Google Earth Tools Google 3D Warehouse interface Google Earth tool box Export Google Earth (KML) File Capture Google Earth Image Define Placemark Monument Synchronize Google Earth View Follow Google Earth View Google Earth Export Settings Google Earth Tools Settings dialog box Play Camera Animation in Google Earth
Producing FlyThrough Sequences

The FlyThrough Producer utility provides a set of tools that let you create simple animations called flythrough sequences in which frames of stationary geometry are recorded by a virtual camera at specified intervals along a specified path. Typically, a flythrough sequence is rehearsed, or previewed, in wireframe to validate the camera path and then is recorded as a series of rendered images. The Movies utility (Utilities > Image > Movies) is used to play back these sequences and also to perform some simple editing tasks.
Both simple and complex flythrough sequences also can be created using the animation camera tools.
General Procedure To produce a flythrough sequence
1. Choose Utilities > Render > FlyThrough. The FlyThrough Producer dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 104 of 329
2. From the View option menu, choose the source view for the animation. 3. From the Shading option menu, choose Wireframe for rehearsal purposes or the desired rendering method for a finished or nearly finished sequence. 4. (Optional) Use the other controls in the dialog box to adjust the camera settings and set the output options (Render > FlyThrough.). 5. Define the path that the camera is to follow and the camera target. The path can be an existing open element, or you can place an element in the design file. See To define the path that the camera will travel during the sequence. 6. Preview the sequence. Once you have adjusted the FlyThrough Producer settings and defined the camera path, you can preview the sequence before taking the time to record all the frames. See To preview each frame in the output view 7. Record the sequence.
Step 4 can be performed before or after step 5.
To define the path that the camera will travel during the sequence
1. Place a line, line string, arc, ellipse, curve, or B-spline curve to define the path the camera is to travel. (If you do not want the path to be visible in the sequence, place the path as a construction element, or on a separate level that is not displayed in the source view for the sequence.) 2. From the FlyThrough Producer dialog box's Tools menu, choose Define Path. 3. Identify the element that defines the camera path at the point at which the camera path is to begin. 4. Accept the element at the point at which the camera path is to end.
For best results when placing a camera path around a design, place the camera path so that it lies on the x-y coordinate plane.
3/24/2010

To preview each frame in the output view
Page 105 of 329
1. (Optional) To see each camera location and viewing volume for each frame along the camera path, choose Camera from the Tools menu's Preview submenu, in the FlyThrough Producer dialog box. 2. From the Tools menu's Preview submenu, choose View in the FlyThrough Producer dialog box.
To record a sequence
1. From the FlyThrough Producer dialog box's Tools menu, choose Record. The Record Sequence dialog box opens.
2. From the Format option menu, choose the format in which to save the sequence. Refer to note, below, for information on choosing a format. 3. In the Files field, enter the name of the sequence file, or the first file in the series. 4. Use the controls in the Directories and Drives sections specify the destination drive and directory. 5. Click the OK button.
It is recommended that you choose a format that creates separate frame images, such as Targa or TIFF. When you select these formats, a separate file will be created automatically for each frame in the sequence. By default, when you select one of these formats, a number is added at the end of the filename and this number will be incremented for each frame saved. For example, if the name of the file is orbit.dgn then the first frame of a Targa-format sequence would be named orbit01.tga by default. Subsequent frame files then would be named orbit02.tga, orbit03.tga, orbit04.tga, and so on. In the event of an interruption to the process, you can return later and pick up from the next frame number in the sequence. If you choose to use a name other than the default, you must make sure that you add a number to it for incrementing during recording. If you choose FLI or FLC, the sequence will be saved as a single 256-color animation file. If you choose Windows AVI, the sequence will be saved as a single 24 Bit Color animation file. For these formats, however, the whole animation has to be retained in memory as it is processed. In the event of an interruption, you will lose the entire sequence and have to start again. It is recommended, therefore, that you select another format. Later, if necessary, you can convert the sequence to FLI/FLC or AVI via the Movie Player.
The lower the resolution, the faster each frame is rendered. For example, use a low resolution to test your lighting and camera settings. Once you are satisfied with the production, record the sequence at a higher resolution. To achieve a smoother animation with FlyThrough Producer:

Minimize the difference between successive frames (use more frames). Increase the speed at which the sequence is played
3/24/2010
Page 106 of 329
You can control what elements appear in the sequence. To avoid including lights or the camera path in the sequence, place those elements as construction elements or on a separate level(s). When you record the sequence, turn off Constructions, or the specific level(s) for the output view. Constructions are turned on and off for a view in the View Attributes dialog box (Settings > View Attributes). If the camera path twists and turns, you can create a roller-coaster effect by leaving the camera path visible in your sequence. The camera appears to chase the path.
The Speed setting is stored only in .fli and .flc files. It is ignored when you save sequences in any other format.
Conducting Solar Studies

The Solar Study utility is used to create a sequence of images that shows the locations of shadows cast by the sun over a period of time. Optionally, you can place a Solar Time Stamp cell in the view being rendered. This can display the time and date for each frame. The Movies utility (Utilities > Image > Movies) is used to play back these sequences and also to perform some simple editing tasks.
Solar study sequences also can be created using the Animation Producer utility.
To create a sequence of images that shows the locations of shadows cast by the sun over time
1. Choose Utilities > Render > Solar Study. The Solar Study dialog box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose the source view.
3/24/2010

3. In the No. of Frames field, key in the number of the frames to create. 4. Use the controls in the Start Time section to specify the start of the time period. 5. In the Time fields, set the duration of the time period. 6. (Optional) Adjust other Settings as needed. 7. Click the Save button. The Record Sequence dialog box opens.
Page 107 of 329
8. From the Format option menu, choose the format in which to save the sequence and, if required, select a Compression setting and Color Mode from the respective option menus in the Image group box. Refer to note, below, for information on choosing a format. 9. Use the controls in the File section to name the sequence file (or the first file in the series) and specify the destination drive and directory. 10. Click the OK button.
It is recommended that you choose a format that creates separate frame images, such as Targa or TIFF. When you select these formats, a separate file will be created automatically for each frame in the sequence. By default, when you select one of these formats, a number is added at the end of the filename and this number will be incremented for each frame saved. For example, if the name of the file is orbit.dgn then the first frame of a Targa-format sequence would be named orbit01.tga by default. Subsequent frame files then would be named orbit02.tga, orbit03.tga, orbit04.tga, and so on. In the event of an interruption to the process, you can return later and pick up from the next frame number in the sequence. If you choose to use a name other than the default, you must make sure that you add a number to it for incrementing during recording. If you choose FLI or FLC, the sequence will be saved as a single 256-color animation file. If you choose Windows AVI, the sequence will be saved as a single 24 Bit Color animation file. For these formats, however, the whole animation has to be retained in memory as it is processed. In the event of an interruption, you will lose the entire sequence and have to start again. It is recommended that you select another format. Later, if necessary, you can convert the sequence to FLI/FLC or AVI via the Movie Player.
Solar Time Stamp

You can display the current Solar Time and Date information while rendering a view. When used in conjunction with the Solar Study utility, or in an animation, you can display the Solar Time and Date information for each frame of the sequence. To display solar time and date in your rendered view, you first place the cell SLRTIM in a convenient place in the view being rendered. This cell is located in the cell library animator.cel in the Workspace\system\cell directory. After placing the cell, you can edit the Enter-Data field of the cell to display the string you want The format of the string is that used by the C function strftime By default the cell contains the string %c which
3/24/2010

displays the Date and Time. Some of the more popular formats are:
Format %c %x %X %y %Y %b %B %m %d %a %A %H %I %M %S %p Date for current locale Time for current locale Year without century (00 99) Year with century (such as, 2001) Abbreviated month name Full month name Month as number (01 12) Day of month as number (01 31) Abbreviated day name Full day name Hour in 24hour format (00 23) Hour in 12hour format (01 12) Minute as number (00 59) Second as number (00 59) Current locale's AM/PM indicator for 12hour clock Description Date and time appropriate for current locale
Page 108 of 329
%z, %Z Time-zone name or abbreviation; no characters if time zone is unknown
Typical examples are:

String %c Date is %c Displays 04/18/01, 2001, 10:13:45 AM Date is 04/18/01, 2001, 10:13:45 AM
Time is %I:%M %p Time is 10:15 AM
Each time the view is rendered, the format string will be replaced with information based on the current Solar Time and Date. If an animation is being recorded, the string will be updated to reflect the Solar Time and Date for each frame of the animation. Only the string in the Enter-Data field is used for display in the rendered image. The string Solar Time:, in the cell, is for reference only and will not be displayed. Text attributes are taken from the existing text item in the cell. After the SLRTIM cell is placed, the origin of the cell is used as the reference point for the time/date text. In other words, the text is justified relative to the placement location. For example, if the justification of text is CENTER, the text is centered about that point; if the justification is LEFT, the left edge of the text is at that point. When the view is rendered, the entire string is replaced and justified relative to the placement location of the cell. After the cell is placed, you can change any of the text attributes (with the Change Text Attributes tool), including size, font, and justification.
Playing and Editing Sequences

The Movies utility is used to play back a sequence created with any of the following utilities:

Animation Producer (see Fundamentals of Animation) FlyThrough Producer (see Producing FlyThrough Sequences) Solar Study (see Conducting Solar Studies)
The displayed sequence of frames will show motion, just as in a film or videotape. You can also use the Movies utility to edit sequences delete or insert a frame from a sequence insert one sequence into another or
3/24/2010

control a sequence's playback speed.
Page 109 of 329
You can display and save sequences in several common file formats. Using the Movies utility in conjunction with other applications, you can integrate sequences into multimedia presentations.
Movies dialog box
General Procedure To play back a sequence
1. Choose Utilities > Image > Movies. The Movies dialog box opens. 2. (Optional) To adjust the playback settings, use the controls in the Movie Playback Settings dialog box, opened by choosing Playback from the Movies dialog box's Settings menu(Image > Movies). 3. (Optional) To preview the sequence, choose Preview from the dialog box's File menu. Previewing means loading only the first frame of a FLI/FLC or AVI sequence and viewing it. This is a quick way to identify a sequence, since loading an entire sequence can take some time. Where a sequence consists of individual frame files, you can Reset to stop the loading of frames at any time. 4. Load the sequence. 5. Click the Play button.
You can use the scroll bar to view a particular frame or to move through the frames slowly. 6. To stop the playback, click the Stop button.
To preview a sequence
1. From the File menu in the Movies dialog box, choose Preview. The Preview Movie dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the sequence in the list box. If a sequence of image files from a non-animation format is to be previewed, select the file that contains the first frame of the sequence
3/24/2010
Page 110 of 329
3. Click the OK button. Where the sequence is a FLI/FLC file, then the first frame loads for preview. Where the sequence consists of separate frame files (such as TIFF) then the frames start loading from the selected file. Entering a Reset stops further frames loading.
To load a sequence
1. From the File menu in the Movies dialog box, choose Load. The Load Movie dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the sequence. If a sequence of image files from a non-animation format is to be loaded, select the file that contains the first frame in the sequence. 3. Click the OK button.
The process of loading an animation sequence reading and dithering each frame so that it displays as well as possible in the current MicroStation color configuration can take a lot of processing time. To be sure you are loading the correct sequence, preview the first frame.
Making changes to a sequence You can delete or insert frames into a sequence, or insert one sequence into another.
To delete a frame from a sequence
1. Use the scroll bar to select the frame to be deleted. 2. From the Movies dialog box's Edit menu, choose Delete Frame.
To insert a frame into a sequence
1. Use the scroll bar to select the frame (in the original sequence) before which the new frame is to be inserted. 2. From the Movies dialog box's Edit menu, choose Insert Frame. The Insert Frame dialog box opens. 3. In the Files list box, select a file to open. Since sequences in most formats are stored in separate files, you can select the file containing a particular frame. If you select a sequence file in FLI or FLC format, the first frame of the sequence is inserted. To make all the frames in a sequence in FLI or FLC format available for insertion, save it in another format. 4. Click the OK button. If necessary, the frame is resized to match the resolution of the current sequence.
To insert a sequence into another sequence
1. Use the scroll bar in the Movies dialog box to select the frame (in the original sequence) before which the new sequence is to be inserted. 2. From the Edit menu in the Movies dialog box, choose Insert Sequence. The Insert Sequence dialog box opens. 3. In the Files list box, select the filename of the sequence file to insert. The sequence that is inserted must have the same resolution as the current sequence. 4. Click the OK button.
To save changes to a sequence
1. From the Movies dialog box's File menu, choose Save As. The Save Movie As dialog box opens. 2. In the Files field, key in the filename. 3. Click the OK button.
3/24/2010
Page 111 of 329
Saving Rendered Images

You can save your rendered images to disk using the Save Image dialog box. In addition, you can use the Save Multiple Images dialog box to render multiple images and save them to disk. This can be done from within the MicroStation environment or from the system command line. You can save rendered images as follows:
Recommended: Saving an image, which is done by choosing Image > Save from the Utilities menu. You can save true-color images (also referred to as 24-bit or 16.7 million color images) that display or print in full color on a system with that capability, even if you do not have a true-color display. Images also can be rendered and saved at resolutions higher than the resolution of the screen. There is a banded rendering option that is useful for overcoming memory limitations when saving large images. Banded rendering can be performed by multiple systems over a network. Screen Capture is performed by choosing Image > Capture from the Utilities menu. Images saved in this way are limited to screen resolution and the number of displayable colors.
To save a rendered image
1. Choose Utilities > Image > Save. The Save Image dialog box opens.
Save Image dialog box
2. From the View option menu, choose the source view. 3 From the Format and Compression option menus choose the format and compression level required
3/24/2010

4. From the Mode option menu, choose the number of colors. 5. From the Shading option menu, choose the required rendering method. 6. From the Shading Type option menu, choose the required rendering type.
Page 112 of 329
7. Where, Shading is Ray Trace, Radiosity, or Particle Trace, choose the required Action from the Action option menu. 8. (Optional) In the Resolution fields you can specify a different value to the default that appears. Defaults are calculated according to the aspect ratio of the selected view (its height relative to its width). Changing either the X or Y value automatically changes the other. 9. (Optional) In the Gamma Correction field you can specify a different value to the default that appears. Higher values will lighten the image, while lower values will darken it. 10. (Optional) To set up to render an image in parts (bands), turn on the Render Image in Bands check box and adjust the settings in the Banded Rendering section. Banded rendering only works with true color (24-bit) or RGB Alpha rendering and does not support JPEG format. 11. Click the Save button. The Save Image As dialog box opens. By default, the image file is given the same name as the design file, but with a suffix matching the format (for example, .tif or .rgb). If the image is to be rendered in bands, do not enter an extension. 12. Click the OK button. Rendering commences and the image file is saved. Screen capture and dithering If your system cannot simultaneously display all the required colors, rendered images are dithered to simulate the extra colors. Dithering is the creation of a pattern of pixels, using available colors, to approximate any unavailable color(s). With screen capture you are limited to the number of colors and resolution your monitor can display. You should save images rather than use screen capture if a high-quality image is required. Rendering images in bands Because of memory limitations it can be difficult to render high resolution images in order to save them to disk. Consider that during the rendering process, an extremely large image with antialiasing can exceed tens of megabytes in working size prior to its completion. For example, a 20002000-pixel antialiased image requires 48 MB of RAM to process. You can overcome such memory limitations by using the Render Image in Bands option in the Save Image dialog box. The banded rendering process breaks up the image into a series of bands. Each band is then, in turn, processed as individual images within RAM and written to disk as a rendered band file. Upon completion of the last band, all of the rendered band files are combined into a single, finished image file, and the rendered band files are then deleted.
Banded rendering only works with true color (24-bit) or RGB Alpha rendering and does not support the JPEG format.
Settings for banded rendering
The following settings in the Save Image dialog box affect banded rendering:
Memory the amount of RAM, in KB, allocated to the rendering process. The more RAM allocated the fewer bands required to process a given image at the current resolution and the faster the processing. Number of Bands the complement to the Memory setting, this setting is automatically calculated based on the rendering parameters and the amount of memory made available. You can directly enter the number of bands which will result in a recalculation of the amount of memory required for the rendering of each band.
Files created by banded rendering
During a banded rendering process, the file extension is used to identify individual rendered band files during the rendering process. The
3/24/2010
Page 113 of 329
file naming syntax is <image_file_name>.b##, where ## is a sequential hexadecimal number (0-F) starting with .b00 and running through .bff (a maximum of 256 possible bands per rendering). Because of the potential of overwriting existing files with similar extensions, it is recommended that these band files be stored in a separate directory. This directory is identified with the configuration variable MS_IMAGEOUT (Image Output in the Rendering/Images category of the Configuration dialog box). For example, when banded rendering is being used to render and save a 20002000-pixel image with the banded memory set to 8 MB, 22 band files are created. In addition to the rendered band files, the banded rendering process creates a temporary control file named <image_file_name>.bnd. This file contains the rendering settings, the total number of bands to render, and the number of bands thus far rendered.
Error recovery
Rendering an image in bands and writing each band to disk makes it is possible to recover from an interruption in the process.
To restart a banded rendering after an interruption
1. Choose Utilities > Image > Save. The Save Image dialog box opens. 2. In the Banded Rendering section, click the Continue button. The Continue Banded Rendering dialog box opens. 3. In the Files list box, select the control (.bnd) file. 4. Click the OK button. The Continue Banded Rendering dialog box closes and focus returns to the Save Image dialog box. 5. Click the Save button. The rendering process resumes starting with the next unfinished band.
Using multiple systems
The Render Image in Bands option lets you use multiple systems to render and save a single image. All of the systems must be connected to a common networked file system. The system on which the banded rendering process is initiated creates the control file on the shared network drive. The Continue button in the Save Image dialog box (see To restart a banded rendering after an interruption) is used on subsequent systems to continue the processing with the first unrendered band. After the last rendered band file in the series is created, the system by which this file was generated combines all of the previous bands together and creates the final image file. This system also deletes the individual rendered band files. Saving multiple image files As well as saving single image files, you can set up your system to save a list of images. This is useful for creating and saving rendered images, automatically, when the system normally is not being used, such as overnight. For this procedure, you create a script that contains the names of the files to be rendered along with the view number, or the saved view to be used.
To render multiple images
1. Set up views to be rendered in the desired designs. 2. Before closing each design file: Choose File > Save Settings. or Use MicroStation's Saved Views utility (Utilities > Saved Views) to name and save the views. 3. Choose Utilities > Image > Save Multiple. The Save Multiple Images dialog box opens. If a script file is found that has the same name as the DGN, then that will be opened.
3/24/2010
Page 114 of 329
4. Use the controls in the dialog box to build the image script file, which is an ASCII text file containing entries that define the names of design files, views, output filenames, rendering options, and image formats. See Building image scripts. 5. Click the Execute Script icon. or From the dialog box's File menu, choose Execute. As a script entry is processed it is highlighted in the list box.
Output File Name macros
Output File Name macros provide a convenient way to format the output file name based on information about the script entry. When the script entry is executed, the macro definitions are replaced with corresponding properties of the script entry. The following table shows the macros that are available. These macros may be keyed-in manually, or selected from a right-click menu in for the Output File name field.
Macro %d %m %v %n %r %s %e %a Expanded value DGN file name Model name Named view, or view group name View number Render mode Render setup name Script entry number Auto-increment number
A length modifier can be specified by inserting a number after the percent sign in the macro, with the following results:
If the macro evaluates to a string, the length modifier specifies the maximum length of the string inserted into the output file name. For example, %6d would be replaced by the first 6 characters from the DGN file name. If the macro evaluates to a number, the length modifier specifies the minimum length of the resultant string. If the number of digits in the number is less than the length modifier, the string is padded with zeros. For example, %3e in the first script entry would be replaced by 001. Using numeric length modifiers allows the resulting file names to be sorted in numeric order.
Typical examples illustrating the use of output file name macros are shown in the following table. All examples below refer to the third entry of a script, using DGN file kitchen.dgn, view number 4, with a render mode of Ray Trace.
Output File String %d-%n.jpg My %d [%r].jpg %5d [%3r].jpg %d (%e).jpg %d (%3e).jpg Output File Name kitchen-4.jpg My kitchen [Ray Trace].jpg kitch [Ray].jpg kitchen (3).jpg kitchen (003).jpg
3/24/2010

Building image scripts
Page 115 of 329
Menu items and icons in the Save Multiple Images dialog box let you build image scripts automatically.
Typical entry in an image script file. Information from each entry is used by the rendering process to select the design file and view, and to set the rendering mode, output file name, type, and resolution.
You can create one or more scripts and save them to disk. As well, you can recall an existing script, or include an existing one with the currently displayed script. Options for creating scripts are contained in the Save Multiple Images dialog box's File menu and options for editing the open script in its Edit menu. Several of the most commonly used selections are accessible also via icons in the dialog box, plus you can the right-click menu for any script entry. Once a script has been created, and the entries displayed in the list box, you can selectively enable or disable entries for processing. Only those entries with checkmarks, in the Enabled column, are active and will be processed. Clicking in the Enabled column toggles the checkmarks on or off.
Only those entries with checkmarks in the Enabled column will be processed. Clicking in the Enabled column, next to an entry, toggles the checkmarks on or off.
Working with image script files
The following procedures are used to work with script files.

To create a script file
3/24/2010

1. From the Save Multiple Images dialog box's File menu, choose New. The Create Script File dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the Create Script File dialog box to select a drive, directory and filename for the new script file. These controls are similar to those in the New dialog box. 3. Click the OK button. The dialog box closes. The name of the script file appears in the title bar of the Save Multiple Images dialog box.
To open an existing script file
Page 116 of 329
1. From the Save Multiple Images dialog box's File menu, choose Open. or Click the Open Script icon. The Open Script File dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the Open Script File dialog box to select the drive, directory and filename. These controls are similar to those in the Open dialog box. 3. Click the OK button. The dialog box closes. The name of the script file appears in the title bar of the Save Multiple Images dialog box. Entries for the selected script appear in its list box.
To save a script file with the current filename
1. From the Save Multiple Images dialog box's File menu, choose Save. or Click the Save Script icon. The script file is saved with the filename that appears in the title bar of the Save Multiple Images dialog box.
To save a script file with a different name
1. From the Save Multiple Images dialog box's File menu, choose Save As. The Save Script As dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the Save Script As dialog box to choose a new drive, directory and/or filename. These controls are similar to those in the Save As dialog box. 3. Click the OK button. The dialog box closes. The (new) name of the script file appears in the title bar of the Save Multiple Images dialog box.
Working with image script entries
The following procedures are used to work with script entries.

To insert existing script entries into the open script
1. From the Save Multiple Images dialog box's File menu, choose Import. The Import Script File dialog box opens. 2. Use controls in the Import Script File dialog box to select the drive, directory and filename. These controls are similar to those for opening a design file. 3. Click the OK button. Entries from the selected script file are appended to the current list of the open script file.
To add a script entry
1. From the Save Multiple Images dialog box's Edit menu, choose New. or Click the New Entry icon. The Edit Script Entry dialog box opens with the default settings. If an existing entry was selected prior to adding the new entry, then these settings are present in the dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 117 of 329
2. Use controls and fields in this dialog box to select/modify options such as: Design File, Output File, View, View Number, Rendering Setup (if applicable), Format, Render mode, Shading Type, Resolution, and Banded Rendering options. As you modify settings, they are updated in the Save Multiple Images dialog box. 3. In the Save Multiple Images dialog box, click the Save Script icon, to save the new entry to the open script.
When creating entries for a script file, make sure that each output file has a unique name, so that they do not overwrite previous images having the same name.
To modify a script entry
1. In the Save Multiple Images dialog box's list box, select the entry to be modified. The entry is highlighted. 2. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Edit. or Click the Edit Entry icon. or From the entry's right-click menu, choose Edit. The Edit Script Entry dialog box opens with the settings for the highlighted entry 3. Make changes to the settings as required. 4. In the Save Multiple Images dialog box, click the Save Script icon, to save the modifications to the open script.
3/24/2010

To duplicate a script entry
Page 118 of 329
1. In the Save Multiple Images dialog box's list box, select the entry to duplicate. 2. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Copy. or Click the Copy Entry icon. or From the entry's right-click menu, choose Copy. 3. If necessary, open the script file into which the entry is to be pasted. 4. (Optional) Select the entry below which you want to paste the copied entry. 5. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Paste. or Click the Paste Entry icon. or From the entry's right-click menu, select Paste. The script entry is pasted below the highlighted entry in the currently displayed script file.
To move a script entry
1. In the Save Multiple Images dialog box's list box, select the script entry to move. 2. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Cut. or Click the Cut Entry icon. or From the entry's right-click menu, choose Cut. 3. If necessary, open the script file into which the entry is to be pasted. 4. (Optional) Select the entry below which you want to paste the cut entry. 5. From the dialog box's Edit menu, choose Paste. or Click the Paste Entry icon. or From the entry's right-click menu, select Paste. The script entry is pasted below the highlighted entry in the currently displayed script file. Rendering multiple images from the command line You can also execute image script files from the system command line.
To render multiple images from the command line
1. Build the image script file. 2. Exit MicroStation. 3. At the system prompt, enter: ustation -waSAVEMULT -iSAVEMULT=<script_file>
Creating Panoramas
MicroStation lets you create panorama files that can be viewed in other applications, such as the QuickTime player. These let you interactively view the model and move your view point. Additionally, when a complete QuickTime installation is loaded, these further options are available for creating panoramas:
3/24/2010

Page 119 of 329
You can save panoramas to a QuickTime VR file (.MOV extension). Additional panorama types are available, for creating Image Object panoramas.
Selecting Utilities > Image > Save Panorama opens the Save Panorama dialog box, which lets you create a panorama. Options for standard panoramas are:

Cube creates images that let you view forward, backward, left, right, up, and down. Cylinder creates images that let you view all around horizontally.
When QuickTime is installed, the following additional panorama options are enabled:

Object - Sphere creates images that let you view the target object from any direction. Object - Top Hemisphere creates images that let you view the target object from any position from horizontal to directly above. Object - Circle creates images that let you view the target object from a fixed altitude. Object - Custom lets you specify the minimum and maximum altitudes for viewing the target object.
For all QuickTime panorama types, the camera spins 360 about the target, with the panorama centered at the target location of the view you choose. The camera location defines the initial view direction. The distance from the target to the camera sets the radius of the object panorama. The number of frames created at each altitude is set by the Frames field in the Save Panorama dialog box. QuickTime requirements In order to enable the QuickTime VR functionality, a complete QuickTime installation must be loaded. That is, you must select Custom installation and install ALL components. A free version of QuickTime can be obtained from Apple Computer at: http://www.apple.com/quicktime/download/. Specifically, the libraries QTJavaNative.dll and QuickTime.qts must be present in the windows system32 folder in order for Save Panorama to be able to use the QuickTime VR formats.
If the QuickTime setup program does not let you install QuickTime for Java, it may be because the Java 2 Runtime Environment cannot be found on your computer. In this situation, you should exit from the QuickTime setup and install the Java 2 Runtime Environment. You can obtain this from http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.3/jre/download-windows.html. Follow the instructions to download and install the Java 2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition. Once this has been installed, the QuickTime setup program should let you install QuickTime for Java.
Using Alternate QuickTime Video Codecs QuickTime uses data codec components to compress image data that is written to the QuickTime VR movie files. The codec determines the data format used to store each image. The codec that is selected is the one that matches the format that you select for the output image. The following output formats have matching codec:

JPEG TGA PNG BMP TIFF
If you select a file format that is not in this list, the TIFF codec is used by default. You may override the codec selection by setting the configuration variable MS_QTVR_CODEC_TYPE. When set, the codec defined by this variable is used, regardless of the selected output format. The configuration variable should be set to one of the following strings: jpeg, tga, png, bmp, or tiff.. Changes that you make to the configuration variable, MS_QTVR_CODEC_TYPE, take effect immediately. You do not have to restart MicroStation.
General Procedure To create a panorama
3/24/2010

1. Turn on the view camera in the required view, with the eyepoint set at the point for the first view. For a panorama to be created, the view camera must be turned on. 2. Select Utilities > Image > Save Panorama to open the Save Panorama dialog box. 3. Adjust settings in the dialog box as required. 4. Click Save.
Page 120 of 329
Saving Images and Panoramas in Piranesi EPix Format

You can save images and panoramas in Piranesi Epix format. EPix images have additional information stored for each pixel, namely Z depth and material ID, which lets Piranesi "paint in space". That is, you can paint over specific surfaces in the image. More information on Piranesi can be found at http://www.informatix.co.uk/pir_splash.htm.
To save an image in EPix format
1. Select Utilities > Image > Save. The Save Image dialog box opens. 2. Set Format to Extended TIFF (EPX). 3. Set Shading to Normal or Antialiased. Stereo is ignored for EPix files. If selected, Normal is used instead. 4. Set other settings as required. 5. Click Save. The Save Image dialog box opens. 6. Select an output file name and location. 7. Click OK.
To save an EPix panorama
1. Select Utilities > Image > Save Panorama. The Save Panorama dialog box opens. 2. Set Format to Extended TIFF (EPX). 3. Set Panorama Type to Cube. Only Cube is supported for EPix panoramas. All other panorama types will be saved as QuickTime VR (*.mov) or Image World (*.ivr). 4. Set other settings as required. 5. Click Save. The Save Panorama As dialog box opens. 6. Select an output file name and location. 7. Click OK. The resulting file can be viewed as a TIFF file by image viewing applications and can be imported into Piranesi for 3D painting. From Piranesi, the edited image then can be exported to a variety of panorama formats.
When using the Plane Lock feature in Piranesi, you may observe some slight differences in the Z depth between faces of the panoramas. You may need to either increase Piranesi's Plane Tolerance, or repeat some paint operations on multiple faces of the panorama.
3/24/2010

Displaying and Modifying Rendered Images
Page 121 of 329
Rendered images that you have saved to disk can be recalled for viewing and modification in MicroStation, via the Display Image dialog box (Utilities > Image > Display).
When you view your saved images via the Display Image dialog box (Utilities > Image > Display), you see the image without MicroStations view Gamma Correction. Any gamma correction that you specified at the time of saving will be part of the saved image, but the view gamma correction is ignored. Gamma correction that has been set at the system level, however, will have an effect on the displayed image.
General Procedure To view a saved rendered image
1. Choose Utilities > Image > Display. The Display Image dialog box opens. 2. From the Files of type option menu, choose the format of the image file to display. 3. In the list box, select the image file to display. 4. Click the Open button. The Display Image dialog box closes and a display window opens in which the selected image is displayed. The window's title bar indicates the filename, pixel dimensions and color depth.
Image display window
5. (Optional) Perform image modifications by using items in the display window's Edit and Image menus:
File menu Open Open an existing image. Save As Save an image with a new name. Save Save an image with its current name. Edit menu Cut/Copy/Paste Copy or move a portion of the image. Size Resize the image by specifying a new pixel count. Crop Trim the image to a specified rectangle. Rotate > Rotate the image 90 CW, 90 CCW or 180 degrees.
3/24/2010

Mirror > Mirror the image along the horizontal or vertical axis. Image menu Equalize Perform a histogram equalization on the image color palette. Gamma Correction Lighten or darken the mid-range colors of the image. Tint Tint the image. Negate Invert the image to appear like a film negative. Blur Smooth jagged edges through pixel averaging. Color Mode Change the color depth of the image.
Page 122 of 329
6. (Optional) Replace the image file on disk with the modified image, or save the modified image to a new file on disk in the same or different format. or (Optional) If the result of the modifications is undesirable, just reopen the image using Open from the display window's File menu or simply close the display window without saving.
To move or copy a portion of the image
1. Locate the pointer on one corner of the rectangular area to move or copy, and then press and hold down the Data button. 2. Drag the resulting selection rectangle to the opposite corner of the desired area, and then release the Data button. A dynamic rectangle indicates the area to be cut or copied. 3. From the display window's Edit menu, choose Copy. or From the display window's Edit menu, choose Cut to replace the selected area with the background color. 4. From the display window's Edit menu, choose Paste. The selected area appears in the upper left corner of window. 5. Relocate the portion to its new location by pressing and holding down the Data button and dragging the image to its new location. 6. Once the portion is positioned where you want it, click once inside the selection.
Should you decide to cancel the pasting operation while the pasted selection rectangle is active, click once anywhere outside the selection rectangle. This results in the disappearance of the pasted image. It does not, however, reverse the cut operation.
To resize the image
1. From the display window's Edit menu, choose Size. The Size Image dialog box opens.
There are two fields: X Resolution and Y Resolution. Each can be specified directly or, if the two fields are locked, a change to one field results in a change in the opposite file, thus maintaining the image's aspect ratio. 2. Key in the desired sizes. 3. Click the OK button.
You cannot specify a size larger than the working size of the MicroStation application window. If a value larger than this is entered, the image is scaled to fit in the application window.
To trim (crop) the image
1. Locate the pointer on one corner of the rectangular area to which you wish to trim the image, and then press and hold down the Data button.
3/24/2010
Page 123 of 329
2. Drag the resulting selection rectangle to the opposite corner of the desired area, and then release the Data button. A dynamic rectangle indicates the area that will remain at the conclusion of the crop operation. 3. From the display window's Edit menu, choose Crop.
To rotate the image
1. In the display window, choose the appropriate item from the Edit menu's Rotate submenu:
Rotate > 90 CW 180 Used to: Rotate the image 90 clockwise. Rotate the image 180. To mirror the image
90 CCW Rotate the image 90 counterclockwise.
1. In the display window, choose the appropriate item from the Edit menu's Mirror submenu:
Mirror > Vertical Used to: Mirror the image about the vertical (y-) axis.
Horizontal Mirror the image about the horizontal (x-) axis.
Equalize The Equalize function is used to color-correct a washed out or overly dark image. This is done by finding the highest and lowest values for the red, green and blue components of each color. Once these values are identified, an averaging operation is performed to push the high and low values to white and black respectfully. This results in a wider separation of dark to light areas in the image.
To equalize the image
1. From the Image menu, choose Equalize. Gamma Correction Similar in operation to the Picture control on a television, the Gamma Correction function brightens or darkens a large portion of what is known as the middle colors of an image. This avoids changing a true black or white value to a gray value. In general, Gamma Correction helps improve a dark image so that subtle details can be seen. Two typical methods for working with Gamma Correction are: 1. Save the image at the default gamma value of 1.0, to avoid data loss, and then enable gamma correction at display time. 2. Save the image with the gamma set for the brightest media, say 1.8 for display, then adjust the value for printing. You can set the gamma value for an image when you create a saved image. At a system level, you can set the gamma value for your display by selecting Workspace > Preferences > View Options and setting the value for Gamma Correction.
To gamma correct the image
1. From the Image menu, choose Gamma Correction. The Gamma Correction dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 124 of 329
2. Adjust the slider towards the right for a lighter image or towards the left for a darker image. The Gamma Correction field will update to show the current numeric value. or Directly enter the value in the Gamma Correction field. An acceptable value is in the range 0-2, with 1.00 representing no correction. Decreasing the value results in a darkening of the image while increasing the value results in a lighter image. 3. Click the Apply button to process the image with the value entered. or Click the Preview button to see the change without modifying the image in memory. Tint The Tint function modifies the RGB value of each pixel in the image. For instance, to tint an image with a touch of yellow, you would adjust the blue color to a lower value. This subtracts blue and reveals its complement yellow. Setting red, green or blue to zero causes that color to be removed from the image. This also causes the complement to that primary color to dominate the image.
To tint the image
1. From the Image menu, choose Tint. The Tint Image dialog box opens.
2. Adjust the RGB values either by adjusting the sliders or directly entering a value in the appropriate field. 3. Click the Apply button to process the image. or Click the Preview button to see the change (in memory) without modifying the image. Negate The Negate function converts an image into its negative or color complement. This function is especially useful for enhancing dark grayscale images where details are easily lost in the black background.
To invert or negate the image
1. From the Image menu, choose Negate. Blur The Blur function minimizes jagged edges by creating a smooth transition between adjacent pixels.
To blur the image
1. From the Image menu, choose Blur. Color Mode All images are organized by their resolution and their color depth. Color depth refers to the number of bits assigned to each pixel in the image. The more bits, the larger the number of colors that can be represented. MicroStation can be used to display images with anywhere from 1 bit of color (black-and-white) to 24 bits of color (also known as true or RGB color).
3/24/2010
Page 125 of 329
contains 24 bits of color (representing 16.7 million possible colors) and reduce it to black-and-white, grayscale (256 shades of gray), 16 colors or 256 colors. In response to a request to reduce the color depth for example, from 256 colors to 16 the image is dithered. This is a method by which adjacent pixels are modified in color to approximate the previous value of the center pixel. This is similar in function to how magazines produce color on the printed page.
To change the color depth of the image
1. In the display window, choose the appropriate item from the Image menu's Color Mode submenu:
Color Mode > RGB 16 Colors 256 Colors Grey Scale Monochrome Used to: Change the color depth to 24 bits (256 red, 256 green, 256 blue) for 16.7 M possible colors Change the number of colors to 16 (4-bit color depth) Change the number of colors to 256 (8-bit color depth) Process all colors to the closest grayscale value (256 shades of gray) Process all colors (or grays) to 1-bit or black-and-white (using extreme dithering)
When you save an image to a format that does not support the current image's color depth (a common occurrence), a Color Mode operation can be performed to adjust the color depth prior to the save image operation, or you will be prompted to accept a supported color mode that will not result in loss of detail.
Saving image modifications You can save a modified image either by replacing the original image file on disk or creating a new image file. In the latter case, the new file need not have the same format.
To save changes to the image file
1. From the display window's File menu, choose Save.

To save a modified image to a new image file with the same or different format
1. From the display window's File menu, choose Save As. The Save Image As dialog box opens. 2. From the Format Type option menu, choose the image file format and, from the Compression option menu, the compression level. 3. In the Files field, key in the filename. 4. Click the OK button.
You can save an image file in a different format using Save As even if you have not modified the image. The same result can be accomplished by using the Raster File Conversion utility (Utilities menu > Image > Convert).
Using Google Earth Tools

Google Earth is an application that provides a 3D interface to view imagery from anywhere on Earth. Google provides a Google Earth viewer as a free download from http://earth.google.com/. With Google Earth, the AEC projects that you design, document, and maintain, with MicroStation now can be visualized in situ. Google Earth gives you an aerial view of geometry and geography, but it is not intended to be a detailed CAD viewer. Its greatest value is in providing a rich, accurate and intuitive backdrop for your AEC projects. While Google Earth is designed and optimized for spatially large designs, it is not intended for visualizing geometric detail. Including excessive detail will quickly exceed the current capacity of Google Earth. For this reason it is important to carefully select and export only the geometry that is both visible and valuable to Google Earth.
3/24/2010
Page 126 of 329
MicroStation provides data to Google Earth as KML documents, an XML based data structure for creating and sharing geographic data. MicroStation geometry exported to KML retains the Reference File and Level (layer) structure defined in the model. This lets you selectively control the display of individual levels or reference files within Google Earth. Saved views are also saved to KML so that they can be used to navigate to views of interest in Google Earth. To export data such as material properties or texture maps, Google Earth version 4 is required. You can set this in the Google Earth Tools Settings dialog box. Defining geographic location In order to accurately define the geographic location of a model, when exporting to Google Earth, you must provide both the model's location and its orientation. There are three methods by which you can do this. 1. Use the Geospatial Extension applications and their associated projection capabilities to handle geographic projections. 2. Use a single Placemark Monument to define the location of a known point in the model, and then use the DEFINE NORTH key-in to indicate the orientation. In order to use this method, the geometry must be drawn accurately and the working units must be set correctly so that the geometry size is known. 3. Place two or more Placemark Monuments to provide the complete projection transform (location, orientation, and scale). This method is useful when accurate scale and orientation information is not known and an approximate projection is sufficient. When this method is used a best fit transformation is calculated to provide the best match to the monument points. 4. If you are not using Geospatial Extension applications, and there is no Placemark Monument in the model, the location of the models origin is derived from the latitude and longitude settings for Solar lighting, in the Global Lighting dialog box.
You can define North interactively from the Solar Lighting section of the Global Lighting dialog box (Settings > Rendering > Global Lighting).
Exporting models to Google Earth When you export models to Google Earth, you can use MicroStation's Google Earth Settings tool to define how they are exported to, and displayed in, Google Earth. Display options include Hidden Line, Filled Hidden Line, and Smooth rendering. Typically, the steps required to display your design model in Google Earth are as follows: 1. In Google Earth, create a placemark at the required location and save it as a kml file, by right-clicking on the created placemark and choosing Save As. 2. In your design model, use the Define Placemark Monument tool to define a monument point that matches the location of the placemark. 3. In your design model, use the Export Google Earth (KML) File tool to export your model to a Google Earth kml or kmz file (a compressed kml file).
If you are working with Geospatial Extension, then step 2 is not required. With Geospatial Extension you do not need to define a monument point in your model.
Support for Collada (.dae) files You can export geometry to Collada (version 1.4) files, by selecting File > Export > Collada. These files then can be imported into applications that support this file format, such as Google Earth.
To export geometry to Collada format
1. In MicroStation, select File > Export > Collada. The Create Collada File dialog box opens. 2. Select the location for the file.
3/24/2010

3. Click Save. Viewing models with Google Earth
Page 127 of 329
When you export your model, Google Earth is opened automatically (if not already open) and it navigates to the location of your placemark and model. Having exported your model to Google Earth and with both Google Earth and MicroStation viewing the same general region, you can move between the Google Earth view and the MicroStation active view using the:

Synchronize Google Earth View tool to navigate Google Earth to the active MicroStation view location and orientation. Follow Google Earth View tool to navigate the active MicroStation view to the location and orientation of the current Google Earth location.
Where you have a camera animation in your model, you can play the animation in Google Earth, using the Play Camera Animation in Google Earth tool. Google SketchUp models support MicroStation V8 XM Edition supports viewing of Google Sketchup Models (.skp files). You can use the MicroStation standard Open dialog box to access SketchUp files directly in MicroStation, in read only mode. Support for textured models Google Earth 4.0 introduced support for textures. MicroStations Google Earth tools take advantage of this feature. To export your geometry with textures intact, set Google Earth Version to 4, in the Google Earth Tools Settings dialog box. You can then follow the normal steps for exporting with the Export Google Earth (KML) File tool.
Google 3D Warehouse interface

MicroStation V8 XM Edition's 3D Warehouse interface lets you open and place Sketchup models in MicroStation. It gives you direct access to the growing collection of 3D models available from the Google 3D Warehouse. As well, you can upload your models to 3D Warehouse. SketchUp file texture maps Texture maps for SketchUp files are embedded within the file and no separate image files are needed. When a SketchUp file is imported into a model, placed as a cell, or saved as DGN, the image files associated with the SketchUp file are automatically moved to a SketchUpImage directory below the project root directory (this is created if it does not already exist). While this happens automatically, when the DGN file is closed, you can force the copy to occur by saving the DGN manually (File > Save). When you attach a SketchUp file as a reference, its materials are not copied into the current DGN file and, therefore, are not copied to the SketchUpImage directory. Accessing 3D Warehouse You can access the 3D Warehouse options via the Utilities > 3D Warehouse menu. Items in this menu let you:

Open a 3D Warehouse model in read-only mode (Open). Place a 3D Warehouse model as a cell in the active MicroStation model (Place As Cell). Import a 3D Warehouse model as a new model in the active DGN file (Import Model). Upload the active MicroStation model to 3D Warehouse (Share Model).
3/24/2010
Page 128 of 329
The Google 3D Warehouse dialog box
Opening a 3D Warehouse model
You can open a 3D Warehouse model for viewing in MicroStation, read-only mode.
To open a 3D Warehouse (SketchUp) file in MicroStation
1. Select Utilities > 3D Warehouse > Open The 3D Warehouse dialog box opens. 2. Use the search functions to find the required model and select it. The model is displayed in more detail. 3. Click the Edit with Google SketchUp button. The Load Into Model? dialog box opens. 4. Click Yes. The model is opened in MicroStation, in read-only mode.
If you click No in the Load Into Model? dialog box, you are given the option of saving the sketchup file separately.
Placing a 3D Warehouse model as a cell
You can place 3D Warehouse models directly into your active model. The models are imported as cells. Typically, the cells are placed in a top view orientation. You can use AccuDraw, or a standard Top view to correctly orientate the models.
3/24/2010

To place a 3D Warehouse model in MicroStation
Page 129 of 329
1. In MicroStation, select Utilities > 3D Warehouse > Place as Cell The 3D Warehouse dialog box opens. 2. Use the search functions to find the required model and select it. The model is displayed in more detail. 3. Click the Edit with Google SketchUp button. The Load Into Model? dialog box opens. 4. Click Yes. The model is downloaded as a cell. 5. Enter a data point to place the cell. Use AccuDraw, or a view, to correctly orientate the cell. 6. Reset to finish.
Importing a 3D Warehouse model
You can import a 3D Warehouse model, into the open DGN file, as a new model.
To import a 3D Warehouse model
1. Select Utilities > 3D Warehouse > Import Model The 3D Warehouse dialog box opens. 2. Use the search functions to find the required model and select it. The model is displayed in more detail. 3. Click the Edit with Google SketchUp button. The Load Into Model? dialog box opens. 4. Click Yes. The 3D Warehouse file is downloaded and placed in a new model in the open DGN file. The new model then is opened.
Uploading a model to 3D Warehouse
When you want to share a model, you can upload it to 3D Warehouse. To do this requires that you sign in to Google. You can create a Google Account, which is free and requires only an e-mail address and a password. When you upload a model, only the active model is uploaded along with a thumbnail, which is based on your active view.
To upload a model to 3D Warehouse
1. Select Utilities > 3D Warehouse > Share Model The 3D Warehouse sign in dialog box opens. 2. Enter your e-mail address and password. or Click Create an account now and create a new account. 3. Click Sign In. The Upload to 3D Warehouse dialog box opens. 4. Enter the details for your model.
3/24/2010

5. Click Upload. Referencing SketchUp models You can attach SketchUp models (.skp files) as references.
To attach a SketchUp model as a reference
Page 130 of 329
1. In the References dialog box, click the Attach Reference icon. 2. In the Attach Reference dialog box, set Files of type to SketchUp File (*.skp). 3. Navigate to the folder containing the required SketchUp file and select it. 4. Click Open. 5. In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, adjust settings as required. 6. Click OK. 7. Enter a data point to place the reference.
Google Earth tool box

The Google Earth tool box contains tools for interacting with Google Earth. Included are tools for:

Defining a Google Earth placemark location in a MicroStation model. Placing models in Google Earth. Capturing a Google Earth image. Matching the viewing location in MicroStation to that in Google Earth, and vice-versa. Playing a MicroStation camera animation in Google Earth.
To
Select in the Google Earth tool box
Export geometry to Google Earth. Export Google Earth (KML) File
Capture a Google Earth image. Capture Google Earth image
Define a Google Earth Placemark Monument in a model. Define Google Earth Placemark Monument
3/24/2010
Page 131 of 329
Navigate Google Earth to the current MicroStation view. Synchronize Google Earth View
Match the current MicroStation view to the current Google Earth view location. Follow Google Earth View
Control settings and operation of the export and capture image functions. Google Earth Settings
Play a MicroStation camera animation in Google Earth. Play Camera Animation in Google Earth
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX GOOGLEEARTH
Animation
MicroStation's animation tools, when combined with its advanced rendering capabilities, provides an outstanding level of engineering visualization. Fundamentals of Animation Animation task Creating and Manipulating Actors Animation Actor task Create Actor Modify Actor Attach Actor Manipulate Actor Define Actor Path Script Actor Script Actor dialog box Drop Actor Detach Actor Attach Actor Action Detach Actor Action Keyframing Parametric Motion Control Varying Lighting and Material Characteristics Animation Settings task Keyframes dialog Animate General Settings Animate Global Lighting Settings Animate Source Lighting Settings Animate Material Settings Animate Element Attributes Animation Dialog task Animation Producer dialog Animation Producer Timeline, Velocity Graph, and Schedule ProjectWise Schedule Simulation Setting up Schedule Simulation Working with Tasks and Scripts Previewing and Exporting the Schedule
3/24/2010

Animator Preview Record Script Setting Up Animation Cameras Animation Cameras task Create Animation Camera Modify Animation Camera Script Camera Camera View Create Target Script Target Previewing and Recording
Page 132 of 329
Fundamentals of Animation
Animation adds a new dimension to 3D design. Using MicroStation's Animation Producer utility, you can create animation sequences that show your designs in action. For architectural models, you can produce walkthroughs with a flexibility not available in the simple Fly Through producer.
If a V8 DGN created in a previous version of MicroStation has animation actors defined, and is then previewed in MicroStation V8 XM Edition, those actors will not be backwards compatible with previous versions of MicroStation. An Alert box warns you of this, and gives you the option to Cancel if you do not want to upgrade the animation.
Overview Whether your design consists of a single object, or several, you can produce animation sequences in MicroStation. The Animation Producer provides several different ways to define and control motion. The method used to produce an animation sequence depends on the type of design. You can animate design elements, including camera and lighting cells. As well, you can animate the settings for light sources, and material definitions. With light sources, you can change the intensity/lumens, color, and the cone/delta angle (spot lights). You can change a material's characteristics, such as transparency, and the pattern or bump map settings, as well as the associated scale and offset values. Additionally, the material palette file 'proctext.pal' contains several animated procedural textures (fire, flame, and fog) that you can use. The Animation Producer dialog box is used to control the Animation Producer utility.
To open the Animation Producer dialog box
1. From the Utilities menu's Render submenu, choose Animation. or In the Animation Dialog task, click the Animation Producer dialog icon.
3/24/2010
Page 133 of 329
Animation Producer dialog box
Animation Methods In producing animations, you can choose from the most basic method, keyframing, or more advanced methods motion along paths and parametric motion control. Where necessary, these techniques can be combined to produce animations that would be very difficult with one method alone.
Keyframing
Keyframing is the most basic form of animation. It is similar to that used in producing cartoons and does not require that elements first be defined as actors. Here, you move elements to the required locations or orientations for certain keyframes and then create the keyframe. You can create keyframes with the Create key frame for selected elements icon in the Animator Preview tool.
Alternatively, you can click the Create button in the Animation KeyFrames dialog box, which is opened when you select the Keyframes dialog tool. After you have created and scripted the keyframes, during preview or recording the system automatically computes the frames in between these keyframes. Historically, in cartoon animation, this in-betweening function, or simply called tweening, has been performed by assistant animators referred to as in-betweeners. Where you have a number of elements that are to be keyframed it can be much more convenient to first define them as actors. This lets you keyframe and script each actor individually Additionally where you want to change the motion of only one of the elements you can
3/24/2010

work with that element (actor) in isolation.
Page 134 of 329
In creating a keyframe, it is far more efficient to include only the geometry that is being animated.
Animation KeyFrames dialog box
Motion along paths
You can define a path along which an actor, animation camera, or target (the latter two are specialized actors) moves. You do this with the Define Actor Path tool, in the Animation Actor task. Scripting motion along paths is useful for creating a flythrough-type sequence, for example, where the camera moves along one path, while its target moves along another. An actor can be scripted simultaneously to move along a path, while under parametric motion control.
Parametric motion control
Often, animation of complex assemblies is very difficult with keyframing. In these cases you can use parametric motion control, which lets you specify geometry position and orientation as a function of time. This is an attractive alternative, particularly when you know the equations of motion. A set of built-in variables and functions is available to assist in defining these equations. Additionally, you can define new variables, based on the built-in variables, or any user-defined variable. Parametric motion is defined relative to the axes of the actor, which are defined when the actor is created. During scripting, the parametric motion is defined relative to frame numbers.
Parametric motion control can be performed only on elements that have been defined as actors.
3/24/2010
Page 135 of 329
Parametric motion is defined when scripting an actor. Here, in the Script Actor dialog box rotation about the Z axis has been defined as 5 per frame.
Terminology
The Animation Producer uses terminology consistent with that used in the production of movies. You can create actors and scripts. As well, you can animate cameras, targets, and light sources.
Scripts
Integral to the production of a real life movie is the script. The same applies to producing an animation sequence. Animation data that defines the motion of geometry or the change of settings, over time, is stored in the DGN file as a series of relationships. These relationships are defined in the script, which contains the information required for the system to create the animation sequence keyframes, views, parameter definitions, and parametric actor controls. This information is in the form of script entries. The script entries in the open script are collectively known as the open script. The open script is displayed in the list box in the Animation Producer dialog box. Each list box entry corresponds to a script entry. You can enable/disable script entries by clicking the Enabled toggle for each entry. A check mark indicates that the script entry is enabled. As well, disabled entries are displayed in red. You can resize the dialog box in order to increase (or decrease) the number of entries that are visible without scrolling. As you create keyframes, define an actor's path, or script an actor, material, camera or light, script entries are automatically generated.
Actors
An actor is simply a special type of named group containing one or more DGN file elements that move, rotate, or scale in a controlled manner. Movement, defined in a script, can be controlled by keyframes, or with parametric motion control.
Animation cameras and targets
Special cells are available to be placed in the design to designate animation cameras and their targets. One or more of these then can be used in the animation sequence, by scripting them to become active from a particular frame number. From that specified frame, the animation view is taken from the nominated camera. Since cameras and targets are also actors, you can move them during the animation by scripting them.
Lights
As with rendering a single image, lighting is integral to producing animation sequences. You can script light sources to move, and you can animate each of their settings with script entries.
Paths
An alternate method for controlling actors is to specify a path along which the actor moves during a sequence of frames. This method is particularly useful for controlling animation camera and target motion.
Producing an animation sequence
Following is the general procedure for producing an animation sequence.

General Procedure To produce an animation sequence
1. Define actors. 2. (Optional) Script the actors. 3. (Optional) Script keyframes. 4. (Optional) Script light sources and material characteristics.. 5. (Optional) Script animation cameras and targets.. 6 (O ti l) R h i th i ti
3/24/2010

7. Record the animation sequence.
Page 136 of 329
The Movies utility (Utilities > Image > Movies) can be used to play back animation sequences in the MicroStation environment.
Working with Scripts The Animation Producer dialog box's File menu contains items for working with scripts.
Choose: New Script Open Script Scale Script Copy Script Include Script Import MSA File Clear Script Delete Script Record Script Motion Blur Exit To edit a script Open an existing script in the DGN file. Scale overall animation by a factor. This will slow down or speed up the entire animation. Make a copy of a script. Include an existing script that is in the DGN file or a reference. Import old animation script files. This will create an animation script with the name of the file. Clear all entries in the open script. Delete the script from the DGN file. Record the active script. To exaggerate the motion blur effect in a sequence. Close the Animation Producer dialog box. To: Creates a new animation script in the DGN file.
Continue Recorded Sequence Continue recording a script on a networked system or a recording that was aborted.
1. In the list box in the Animation Producer dialog box, double-click a script entry Type that you want to edit. The appropriate dialog box opens (for example, Edit KeyFrame, Edit View, or Edit Actor). 2. Change any of the parameters to the desired values. 3. Click the OK button to accept the changes. or Click the Delete button to delete the entry. or Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes. 4. (Optional) For each additional entry you want to edit, repeat steps 1-3.
3/24/2010
Page 137 of 329
Double-clicking a script entry in the Animation Producer dialog box, opens the appropriate Edit dialog box.
Scaling scripts
Where necessary, you can define a multiplier value to be applied to the open script. This is useful for sizing an animation to run for a predetermined time or adding frames to smooth motion.
To scale a script
1. From the Animation Producer dialog box's File menu, choose Scale Script. The Scale Script dialog box opens.
The Scale Script dialog box.
2. In the Scale field, key in the scale factor. or Turn on Time and key in a new time value for Duration. Where a scale factor is used, the resulting frame count is computed by multiplying the scale factor by the difference between the starting and ending frame numbers. For instance, a script with frames 0 through 10 and an applied scale factor of 2 will go from frame 0 to 20. You can also shorten a script by entering a scale value of less than 1 (but greater than zero). 3. Click the OK button.
3/24/2010
Page 138 of 329
Caution is required when scaling a script that contains parametric motion control (that is, referencing specific frame numbers).
Including scripts
Previously created scripts can be included in the open script. For example, you may have created and scripted a clock actor, with moving hands and pendulum, in a previous design. Rather than create a new animated clock, you can reference the model with the clock actor into the new design, and then include the script. Alternatively, if you have created a new clock, you simply give the actor(s) the same name (s) as in the original, and then include the script of the original clock.
To include an existing script in the open script
1. From the Animation Producer dialog box's File menu, choose Include Script. The Include Script dialog box opens.
2. In the File drop-down menu, select the DGN file in which the required script file is located. This may be the active DGN file, or a reference. 3. In the scripts list box, select the required script file. 4. (Optional) Enter values for: the Start Time, Repeat Count, and/or Scale, as required. Start Time: the frame/time at which you want the script to start. Repeat Count: the number of times that the script is to be repeated in the animation. Scale: the scale factor to apply to the script. 5. Click the OK button. The Include Script dialog box closes, and the script entry is added to the list in the Animation Producer dialog box. 6. Click the OK button. The Include Script dialog box closes, and the script entry is added to the list in the Animation Producer dialog box.
Animation task
All the tools necessary for animating your models are accessible through the Animation task.
3/24/2010
Page 139 of 329
Each tool in the Animation task, apart from the Render tool, also is a member of a child task. When you point to a tool and hold down the Data button, a drop-down menu opens from which you can select tools in the child task. You can also open the child task as a floating tool box by choosing Open As Toolbox from the drop-down menu. When you select a tool in the child task, it automatically becomes the representative of the child task in the Animation task. The following table shows the as delivered arrangement of the Animation task. Where appropriate, it identifies the corresponding child tasks and, for each, the default representative tool.
Render
Animation Actor task (Create Actor)
Animation Cameras task (Create Animation Camera)
3/24/2010
Page 140 of 329
Animation Settings task (Keyframes dialog)
Animation Dialog task (Animation Producer dialog)
Creating and Manipulating Actors

MicroStation provides a set of tools for creating and working with actors in animation sequences. Actor Basics Actors for animation sequences are created from one or more elements in a design. They are special named groups and, once created, must be instructed where and when to move. This is done by scripting each actor using keyframes, defining a path, or by applying a parametric motion formula. Using the latter technique, you can script the position, rotation, or scale of an actor as a function of time, or frame number. It is not necessary to create actors for keyframe animation. Where hierarchical motion is required, however, it is often convenient to define actors and their hierarchical relationships. This simplifies the positioning of assemblies for keyframing. Actors, with names, are required for defining actor paths or parametric motion control. These tools detect and refer to elements in the design by actor name only. All actors must have unique names. Because they are a special type of named group, they cannot have the same name as another (normal) named group.
Working with actors
Tools for creating and manipulating actors are contained in the Animation Actor task. The Tool Settings window for those tools that operate on existing actors include a drop-down menu that displays the names of the actors. Hierarchical actor relationships (see Hierarchical motion) are displayed in a tree view. You can expand (+) or collapse () branches of a hierarchical tree by clicking the + or icons. Selecting an actor in the list box, by clicking its name, highlights the actor in the view window. It is also possible to graphically identify an actor rather than using the Tool Settings window.
If there are multiple actors with the same name and the same object highlights regardless of which list box entry with that name is selected, drop each actor with the Drop Actor tool and recreate them with the Create Actor tool. This should be necessary only for actors created with early pre-release versions of the MicroStation Version 1.0 Animation Producer.
Range of motion
Ways in which an actor can move, parametrically, in an animation are defined during scripting of the actor. Controls for specifying an actor's manipulation are in the Script Actor tool settings window. When defining an actor's movement options, an animation coordinate system is created. As the actor is manipulated, or during an animation, the defined axis system moves and rotates with the actor. That is, it remains constant relative to the actor.
3/24/2010

Hierarchical motion
Page 141 of 329
Using the Attach Actor tool, you can specify that particular actors are attached to each other as an assembly of parts. Attachment is performed in a hierarchical manner, such that moving an actor also moves any actors below it in the hierarchy. This is most useful for positioning actors for keyframing. Take, as an example, a model of a human body. To create a hierarchical assembly of a leg you would start at the foot, and finish at the thigh. In this example:

Moving the thigh moves the calf and foot also, because they are lower in the hierarchy. Similarly, moving the calf also moves the foot (but not the thigh). Moving the foot would not move the calf or thigh.
Manipulating the upper leg takes with it those parts lower in the hierarchy (the calf and foot).
3/24/2010
Page 142 of 329
Manipulating the calf takes only the foot with it. Only the foot is lower in the hierarchy.
Manipulating the foot moves nothing else, because the foot is the lowest element of the hierarchy.
Hierarchical motion simplifies the task of moving actors to their required position for each keyframe. As with standard actors, when the animation is being recorded, the intervening frames are interpolated from the keyframes.
General Procedure To define hierarchical motion
1. Create the actors with the Create Actor tool. 2. Using the Attach Actor tool, attach the actors to each other, starting with the lowest in the hierarchy through to the top.
3/24/2010

3. Manipulate and/or move the actors to their required locations.
Page 143 of 329
If an animation includes many actors that move independently of one another, then separate keyframes can be created for each actor. They then can be scripted separately, thus simplifying an otherwise complex task.
Animation Actor task

The Animation Actor task contains tools for creating, manipulating, modifying, scripting and deleting actors used in animation sequences.
Animation Actor task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Animation Actor task
Create an actor. Create Actor
Modify an actor. Modify Actor
Attach an actor. Attach Actor
Manipulate an actor. Manipulate Actor
Define an actor path. Define Actor Path
Script an actor. Script Actor
Drop an actor. Drop Actor
Detach an actor. Detach Actor Script attachment of an actor. Located in Animation Actors tool box (Tools > Visualization > Animation Actors).
3/24/2010
Page 144 of 329
Attach Actor Action Script detachment of an actor. Located in Animation Actors tool box (Tools > Visualization > Animation Actors). Detach Actor Action
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ANIMATION ACTORS
Only the Script Actor, Define Actor Path, Script Attach Actor and Script Detach Actor tools let you identify an actor in a reference.
Keyframing
To create a keyframe animation, you must specify the location of actors and other geometry at certain positions, called keyframes. Scripting Keyframes A keyframe can contain many elements, but, for efficiency, it is recommended that you include only animated geometry in a keyframe. Where keyframes already are present, you can script them via the right-click menu in the tree view of the Animation Producer dialog box. The frames in-between keyframes are computed through a process called in-betweening or tweening. The following can be computed:

In-between frames that involve both movement and rotation. In-between versions of an element that has been modified.
General Procedure To script keyframes
1. Create a keyframe(s). 2. Insert a keyframe(s) in the open script.

To create a keyframe
1. Position the geometry to be keyframed as desired, using MicroStation's element manipulation tools, or the Manipulate Actor tool. 2. Select the element(s) to be included in the keyframe. 3. In the Animation Settings task, click the Keyframes dialog icon. or In the Animation Producer dialog box, select Tools > Named KeyFrames. The Animation KeyFrames dialog box opens.
3/24/2010

Animation KeyFrames settings box
Page 145 of 329
4. Click the Create button. The Create KeyFrame dialog box opens.
Create KeyFrame dialog box
5. In the Name field, key in a name for the keyframe. 6. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description for the keyframe. 7. Click the OK button. Focus returns to the Animation KeyFrames dialog box. The new keyframe is listed there.
Alternative Method To create a keyframe
1. Position the geometry to be keyframed as desired, using MicroStation's element manipulation tools, or the Manipulate Actor tool . 2. In the Animation Settings task, click the Keyframes dialog icon. or From the Animation Producer dialog box, select Tools > Named KeyFrames. The Animation KeyFrames dialog box opens. 3. Click the Create button. 4. Identify the element to be included in the keyframe. 5. Accept the element. The Create KeyFrame dialog box opens. 6. In the Name field, key in the desired name for the keyframe. 7. (Optional) In the Description field, key in the desired description for the keyframe. 8. Click the OK button. Focus returns to the Animation KeyFrames dialog box. The new keyframe is listed there.
To insert a keyframe in the open script
1. In the Animation Settings task, click the Keyframes dialog icon. or From the Animation Producer dialog box, select Tools > Named KeyFrames. The Animation KeyFrames dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, double-click the keyframe to insert. or Select the keyframe to insert, and click the Script button. The Script KeyFrame dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 146 of 329
Script Keyframe dialog box
3. In the Frame Number field, key in the desired frame number for the keyframe. 4. From the Interpolation option menu, choose one of the following to specify the type of path the elements follow when moving to this keyframe: Linear The path followed between keyframes is a straight line. In most cases, this results in a jerky, unnatural motion. Spline A curve is fitted to the path between keyframes, which results in a smoother, more natural motion. 5. From the Velocity option menu, choose one of the following to specify the manner in which the elements' speed varies as they move to this keyframe: Constant The elements move at a constant velocity to this keyframe. Accelerate Movement starts at zero velocity and moves to this keyframe with constant acceleration, as if it is initially at rest and is acted on by a constant force. Decelerate Motion starts with a velocity that declines to zero at this keyframe, as if the object is initially moving and is acted on by a constant opposing force. Accelerate-Decelerate The elements start at rest, accelerate until halfway to this keyframe, and then decelerate to rest at this keyframe. Infinite The elements jump instantaneously to their position in this keyframe. Custom Where it is intended to modify the velocity curve later, inserts a default velocity curve (Constant) for the script entry. 6. Click the OK button. A new script entry for the keyframe is inserted in the open script in the Animation Producer dialog box. Using the Animator Preview tool to create and script keyframes You can use the Animator Preview tool to quickly create and script keyframes. When you use this method, you have two options for the naming of the keyframes. You can let the system give the keyframes a default name, or you can turn on Prompt For Keyframe Name in the Animation Settings dialog box. With the setting enabled, you will be prompted for a keyframe name each time that you click the Create key frame for selected items icon. Where necessary, you may change the names of keyframes in the Animation KeyFrames dialog box. Other settings for the keyframes may be edited by double-clicking their entry in the Storyboard Panel of the Animation Producer dialog box.
General Procedure To create a keyframe with the Animator Preview tool
1. Select the Animator Preview tool. 2. Use the scroll control to select the time/frame number. or In the time/frame number field, key in the required value. 3. Move the geometry/actors to the required position(s). 4. Use the Element Selection tool to select the geometry for the key frame. 5. Click the Create key frame for selected elements icon. A script entry for the key frame is added to the open script and can be viewed in the Animation Producer dialog box. Keyframing a Hierarchy of Actors If a hierarchy of actors is keyframed, the in-between frames are calculated with the hierarchical relationships between the actors maintained
3/24/2010
Page 147 of 329
An animation can include many keyframes with different actors in each one, so it is not necessary to include all of the animated geometry in every keyframe.
If an animation includes many actors that move independently of one another, the actors can be placed in separate keyframes and scripted independently. This can greatly simplify the task of scripting complex animations.
Parametric Motion Control

Parametric motion control is the specification of the position and orientation of actors in an animation sequence as a function of time. Parameters are defined in the Animation Parameters dialog box, which is opened by selecting Tools > Parameters in the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box. Scripting Parametric Motion Parametric motion control is especially useful in these situations:

To animate complex assemblies, which is very difficult with keyframing alone. When the equations of motion are known.
It is possible to script parametric motion for an actor that will take place while the actor is moving along a path. Motion along a path is scripted with the Define Actor Path tool. To make it easier to define equations of motion, MicroStation provides a set of built-in variables and functions. Additionally, you can define custom parameters based on the built-in variables or any variable that has previously been defined.
To script parametric motion
1. Use the Create Actor tool to create an actor with which to associate the motion and to specify the allowable types of motion.
The actor must be created with a unique name. 2. Use the Script Actor tool to script the motion.
3/24/2010
Page 148 of 329
Script Actor dialog box.
Key in equations only for the values that are to change; leave others blank. For motion to occur, these parameter equations should be dependent on time. This can be handled by referencing the built-in variable for time (tSeconds) or frame number (frame) directly, or by defining custom parameters that are dependent on time. 3. (Optional) To script additional motion for the same actor, repeat step 2. or (Optional) To script motion for a different actor, repeat steps 1-2.
Where you want to compare different scenarios, you can create conflicting script entries for the one actor. Then you can use the Enabled setting in the Storyboard Panel to toggle the various actions on/off to compare the results.
Built-in variables and functions
The following built-in variables are available for defining actor motion equations or custom parameters with the Script Actor tool .
Variable frame pi tSeconds beginFrame endFrame minFrame maxFrame beginSequence endSequence sequenceLength frame number the mathematical value, Pi, which is equal to the angle covered by one-half of a circle elapsed time from beginning of sequence (frame 0) in seconds beginning frame of the section currently being recorded end frame of the section currently being recorded first frame number at which action is defined (frame 0); also first frame of a preview last frame number at which action is defined; also last frame of a preview frame number of the start of the current script last frame number of the current script length of the current script in frames Description
tSecondsSequence elapsed time (in seconds) from beginning of the current script
The elapsed time tSeconds is derived as follows:
tSeconds = frames/frames per second For example, if you set frames per second to 30, tSeconds equals 1 second at frame 30, 2 seconds at frame 60 and so on.
3/24/2010
Page 149 of 329
You set the number of frames per second in the General Settings box, which is opened by selecting Settings > General in the Animation Producer's dialog box. The following built-in functions are available for defining actor motion equations or custom parameters with the Script Actor tool. These functions are identical to those in the standard C math library, except that all angular values are expected and returned in degrees rather than radians.
Function Description
radiansFromDegrees(d) radians from degrees degreesFromRadians(r) degrees from radians secondsFromFrame(f) cos(angle) acos(value) sin(angle) asin(value) atan(value) seconds from frame number trigonometric cosine of angle arc cosine of value sine of angle arc sine of value arc tangent of value
atan2(valueY, valueX) arc tangent of valueY/valueX tan(angle) cosh(value) sinh(value) tanh(value) exp(value) log(value) log10(value) pow(x,y) sqrt(value) fabs(value) ceil(value) floor(value) fmod(x,y) rand() srand(x) tangent of angle hyperbolic cosine of value hyperbolic sine of value hyperbolic tangent of value exponential of x natural logarithm of value base 10 logarithm of value x to y power square root of value absolute value of smallest integer not less than value largest integer not greater than value floating point remainder of x/y pseudo random number set random seed
Defining custom parameters Often the same parameters are used in multiple equations of motion in different models. You can save time by using built-in variables and functions to define custom parameters. Once you define a custom parameter, you can refer to it by name when scripting actors. For example, consider a custom parameter, named revolution, defined as follows:
360/maxFrame*frame An actor whose motion is scripted as revolution rotates one full rotation during the course of the animation sequence, no matter how many frames are used. This is determined as follows: dividing 360 (degrees) by the total number of frames (maxFrame) gives the rotation per frame. This, in turn, is multiplied by the current frame number (frame). Mathematical operators can be applied to custom parameters in the same manner as to built-in variables. Continuing with the example, in scripting an actor to rotate, you could use the following: 2*revolution to rotate the actor 720 revolution/2 to rotate the actor 180 Each newly defined custom parameter is stored in the active script along with the script entries themselves. You can then include this
3/24/2010

as required.
To define a custom parameter
Page 150 of 329
1. From the Animation Producer dialog box's Settings menu, choose Parameters. The Animation Parameters dialog box opens.
2. Click the Create button. The Create Parameter dialog box opens.
3. In the Name field, key in the name for the parameter. 4. In the Value field, key in the value (see Built-in variables and functions ). 5. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description of the parameter. 6. Click the OK button. The Create Parameter dialog box closes, and the parameter is added to the list in the Animation Parameters dialog box.
The Animation Parameters dialog box is also used to edit and delete existing parameters.
Reviewing parameter values When reviewing or debugging your animation script, you can retrieve the current values of parameters. The key-in ANIMATOR PARAMETER DUMP outputs into a debug text window the current values for any parameters used by the sequence. You can use this keyin for any time/frame number.
To review the values of parameters
1. Use the Animator Preview tool to select the frame at which you require the values. 2. In the key-in window, enter ANIMATOR PARAMETER DUMP. 3. View the results in the Text Window.
3/24/2010
Page 151 of 329
Example showing current values of parameters
Creating/importing commonly used custom parameters Custom parameters that have been created in other models can be imported into the current model. This may be from the active DGN, where parameters have been created in other models, or they can be imported from another DGN file. This same procedure can be used to store commonly used custom parameters in a separate DGN file, ready to import into other models as required. This lets you create a library of animation parameters and saves having to re-create them each time in new models or DGN files. To import parameters from another DGN file, you use the key-in: ANIMATOR PARAMETER IMPORT <file_name> When you import parameters, all parameters from all models in the DGN file are imported.
To import animation parameters
1. Open the model in which you require the animation parameters. 2. In the key-in window, enter ANIMATOR PARAMETER IMPORT <file_name> All custom parameters, from all models in the specified DGN file, are imported into the active model.
Varying Lighting and Material Characteristics

When scripting an animation sequence, you can vary lighting, material, and other rendering settings as a function of time. Additionally, texture maps, bump maps, and background images can consist of animated sequences of images. Settings that are scripted to change are interpolated from one setting to the next. Where there is no script entry for a setting at time/frame zero, the current DGN file setting is taken. This section covers the Animation Settings task.
In versions of MicroStation prior to V8 XM Edition, if the first scripting of a setting was at frame 20, then this setting was used also from frame zero to frame 20. Now, the setting is interpolated from the current DGN file setting at frame zero, to the scripted setting at frame 50. This also means that any .msa files which have the earlier V8 behavior will get an extra script entry at frame zero, copying that of frame 20. This is done to maintain the old behavior when they are imported.
Animation Settings task

The Animation Settings task contains tools for animating general rendering settings, global lighting, source lighting, material definitions,
3/24/2010
Page 152 of 329
Animation Settings task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Animation Settings task
Open the Animation KeyFrames dialog box. Keyframes dialog
Script changes to General settings Animate General Settings
Script changes to Global Lighting settings. Animate Global Lighting Settings
Script changes to Source Lighting settings. Animate Source Lighting Settings
Script changes to Material settings. Animate Material Settings
Script element attributes. Animate Element Attributes
Animation Dialog task

The Animation Dialog task contains tools for reviewing and previewing animation scripts.
Animation Dialog task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Animation Dialog task
Open the Animation Producer dialog box. Animation Producer dialog
Preview the animation and optionally add key frames. A i ti P i T l
3/24/2010
Page 153 of 329
Record an animation script. Record
Animation Producer Timeline, Velocity Graph, and Schedule

Using Timeline, and Velocity Graph views in the Animation Producer dialog box, you can quickly access the settings and script entries of your animation, and modify them, via a graphical interface. When the Timeline view is displayed, script entries are displayed graphically. You can edit the graphs directly, by clicking and dragging the entries along the time line. Similarly, when the Velocity Graph view is displayed, you can quickly edit velocity curves via a graphical interface. With both utilities, any alterations are reflected in the script entries. Similarly, any changes made to the script entries are reflected in the Timeline and Velocity Graph views. Using the Schedule view, you can quickly visualize the tasks in a construction schedule. As with the other views, you can edit the graph by clicking and dragging the task entries along the time line.
ProjectWise Schedule Simulation

The ProjectWise Schedule Simulation feature enables you to visualize a schedule by integrating 3D engineering data with a project schedule. It is designed to help in the planning stages of a project so that you can get a visual representation of the required tasks and prevent spatial conflicts. ProjectWise Schedule Simulation is accessed through the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box. A project is the overall plan for which you want to set up a schedule. An example project is a three-story office building (76,000 square feet). A schedule is a chronological list of tasks used to complete the project, with start and finish dates and times for each task. A task is one step in a schedule; and a task can have subtasks. A task in the schedule could be Foundations, with subtasks such as excavate foundations, excavate elevator pit, and form column piers and spread foundation. A script sets up the steps used to move the elements and simulate the schedule.
In order to use ProjectWise Schedule Simulation, you must first obtain a separate ProjectWise Schedule Simulation license using the License Management Tool. If there is a schedule in the DGN file but you do not have a license, you can view the tasks but not manipulate or change them.
Scheduling concepts To view different construction situations, you can assign a Construction Type to the elements in a model. As the schedule simulation plays, ProjectWise Schedule Simulation changes the display of the objects according to the Construction Type and their related schedule start and end dates. By default, all tasks are considered to be Constructive.
Constructive Elements are invisible at the start of the project. At the start of the task to which they belong, the elements display in the selected color. After the task is run, they continue to display in the default color until the end of the project. Destructive Elements are visible at the start of the project. During the task to which they belong, the elements display in the selected color. After the task is complete, the elements become invisible.
3/24/2010
Page 154 of 329
Permanent Elements are visible in the default color at the start of the project. While the task to which they belong is run, the elements display in the selected color. After the task is complete, elements return to the default color. Temporary Elements are visible only while the task to which they belong is run.
Using external scheduling applications Schedules from Microsoft Project and Primavera Project Planner can be imported into and exported from ProjectWise Schedule Simulation. ProjectWise Schedule Simulation supports the following file formats for import/export:
Scheduling Application Microsoft Project 2003 ProjectWise Schedule Simulation imports formats: ProjectWise Schedule Simulation exports formats: MPX, XML XML MPX
Primavera Project Planner version 5 MPX
ProjectWise Schedule Simulation supports various types of Start-Finish dates and times for tasks. These dates and times can be imported from other scheduling software packages. When you export a schedule, you can either overwrite the original schedule or replace specific task properties in the original schedule. However, some fields such as Early Start, Early Finish, Late Start, and Late Finish are calculated by the external scheduling software (Microsoft Project or Primavera Project Planner). Changes made to these fields in ProjectWise Schedule Simulation may be ignored when the data is imported into the scheduling package. Refer to the MPX Project File Exchange Format specifications for more information.
Setting up Schedule Simulation

The MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box (Utilities > Render > Animation) is used to control ProjectWise Schedule Simulation, so you will need to open the Animation Producer dialog box before you can import or create a schedule.
General Procedure To set up a schedule simulation
1. Import a schedule. or Create a schedule. 2. (Optional) Modify the tasks in the schedule. 3. Attach elements or named groups to tasks in the schedule. 4. (Optional) Modify scripts attached to tasks. 5. Preview the schedule simulation. 6. (Optional) Export a schedule. Importing schedules ProjectWise Schedule Simulation allows you to run a schedule simulation by importing data from Microsoft Project 2003 or Primavera Project Planner.
To import a schedule
1. In the Animation Producer dialog box, choose Schedule > Import. The Import Schedule dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 155 of 329
2. At the right of the File Name field, click the Browse icon. Another Import Schedule dialog box opens. Imported schedule files can have an .xml, .mpx or .txt extension.
3. Select the file to import. The file name displays in the Name field on the original Import Schedule dialog box. 4. In the Import Schedule dialog box, select one of the options to delete, replace or update existing tasks. 5. If you select Delete all the tasks before importing a new schedule, the Select Start Time dialog box opens. Select a start date and time. The Tasks to Import dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 156 of 329
6. Select All Tasks or the Selected Tasks you want to include in your project. Tasks for this project display in the Animation Producer dialog box.
Fixed-length delimited text files also can be imported in and exported from ProjectWise Schedule Simulation. When the .txt file is imported, the columns in the file display as the Unique ID, Task Name, Early Start and Early Finish in the Schedule Panel of the Animation Producer dialog box.
Creating schedules You can set up a schedule simulation by creating a simple schedule in ProjectWise Schedule Simulation.
To create a schedule
1. In the Schedule Panel section of the Animation Producer dialog box, right-click and from the menu, select New. or In the Animation Producer dialog box, click the New Task icon.
An entry is added to the tree pane and the Schedule Panel. 2. Click in the field and name the task. 3. (Optional) In the Schedule Panel, modify the properties of the task. 4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 to create each of the remaining tasks in the schedule. The changes are reflected in the tree pane, graph and Schedule Panel. Comparing schedules You can view and compare two animations of the same list of tasks based on different types of start and finish times. For example, you can run the animation set to the Early Start - Early Finish time and then run the same schedule based on the Late Start - Late Finish time and compare the two animations The Compare Schedules tool creates a new temporary animation similar to the original animation but
3/24/2010
Page 157 of 329
with the selected type of Start/Finish times. All script entries and tasks in the active animation model are copied for the comparison but are based on the selected Start/Finish times. The temporary model is automatically deleted when you switch to another model or exit the Animation Producer dialog.
To compare schedules
1. In the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box, choose File > Schedule > Compare Schedules. The Compare Animations dialog opens.
2. Choose the type of Start/Finish times for the schedule you want to compare to the original schedule and Accept. 3. In the Animation Settings dialog box Second Animation section, click Browse to open the Open Script dialog box and select the second (or temporary) animation script just created.
The temporary animation has the type of selected Start/Finish times as a suffix, for example, PIPM01 - [Early Start - Early Finish]. This temporary model is a copy of the original model, PIPM01. 4. In the Animation Settings dialog box Second Animation section, choose a view number in which to play the second animation. 5. In the Animator Preview dialog, click Play. The animations of the two schedules run in the view windows.
Working with Tasks and Scripts

Modifying tasks You can modify a schedule by changing the dates or other properties of a task.
To modify the properties of a task
1. In the Schedule Panel section of the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box, right-click the property you want to change. 2. Make your change in the entry field drop-down menu or dialog that opens. The changes are reflected in tree pane, graph and Schedule Panel.
To change the appearance of a task
1. In the Schedule Panel section of the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box, right-click the task whose appearance you want t h d h Ch T kA
3/24/2010

The Change Task Appearance dialog box opens. The Task option menu displays the task name.
Page 158 of 329
2. In the Start section, choose the element's color and transparency when the task begins. 3. In the Finish section, choose the element's color and transparency when the task ends. Attaching elements to tasks To perform a schedule simulation, you need to attach an element to a task in the schedule.
To attach an element to a task
1. Select the element(s) you want to attach to a task. 2. Drag the element(s) to the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box and drop it on the task to which you want it to be attached. The element(s) are listed in the graph and in the tree pane as a subtask of the selected task.
To attach a named group to a task
1. In the Named Groups dialog box, select the group of elements you want to attach to a task. 2. Click and drag the group on to the task to which you want it to be attached. The element(s) are listed in the graph and in the tree pane as a subtask of the selected task.
Alternative Method To attach a named group to a task
1. In the Animation Producer dialog box, click the Attach Element to Task icon.
3/24/2010

The Attach Element to Task dialog box opens.
Page 159 of 329
2. From the Task option menu, choose the task to which you want to attach the element and then select the element to attach. 3. From the Named Group option menu, choose the element to attach. The element(s) in the named group are listed in the graph and in the tree pane as a subtask of the selected task.
To remove a named group or graphic element
1. In the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box tree pane, right-click the element or named group and delete.
When you delete an element or named group, all the script entries that were created when you made the link are deleted.
To attach one task to another task
1. In the Animation Producer dialog box, select the Attach Task to Another icon.
The Attach Task dialog box opens.
2. From the Task option menu, select the task you want to attach to another. 3. From the Parent option menu, select the task to which you want to attach another task. Parent tasks display in black in the graph and are bold in the tree view and Schedule Panel list box.
To detach a task from its parent task
1. In the Animation Producer dialog box, select the task you want to detach from its parent task. 2. Click the Detach From Parent Task icon.
The task is detached from the parent task.

To filter the list of tasks
1. In the filter row (top row) of the Schedule Panel list box of the Animation Producer dialog box, click the field to filter. 2. Enter the filter information and press <Enter>. The Schedule Panel updates to display the filtered list of tasks. 3. When finished, right-click and from the menu choose Reset Filter to return to your original list of tasks. Attaching and modifying scripts
3/24/2010

Before previewing or exporting a schedule, you may want to view or change the script.
Page 160 of 329
When you drag an element to attach it to a task in the Animation Producer dialog box, a script is automatically attached to the task. You can view or change the script properties in the Storyboard Panel of the MicroStation Animation Producer dialog box. You need to change to the Timeline view (View menu) to display the Storyboard Panel. There are three types of scripts, which display in the Storyboard Panel: Transparency, Display (On-Off), and Color. The Include Script tool is used to include an already created script to a task.
To attach a script
1. In the Animation Producer dialog box Schedule Panel, right-click the task to which you want to attach a script. 2. From the pop-up menu, choose Attach Script. The Attach Script dialog box opens.
3. In the scripts list box, select the required script file and Accept. The script is attached to the task as displayed in the tree pane.
To view or change a script
1. Attach an element to a task. 2. In the Animation Producer tree pane, highlight the element attached to the task. 3. In the Animation Producer, change to the Timeline view (View > Timeline). The script displays in the Schedule Panel.
3/24/2010
Page 161 of 329
4. Right-click the properties you want to modify and make your changes. The color of the elements is controlled by the Color selected in the Schedule Simulation section of the Animation Settings dialog box, which opens when you select Settings > General in the Animation Producer dialog.
You cannot directly delete script entries that are created by linking elements/named groups to a task in a Schedule Panel. To delete these script entries, go to the tree pane view and delete the element/named group node. Do not use the Schedule Panel to modify individual scripts that are created by linking elements to tasks. You can use the Schedule Panel to modify task properties, that is, you can change the time of the script by changing the time of the task to which the script entry belongs.
Previewing and Exporting the Schedule

After you link the elements to the tasks and make any modifications, you can preview the schedule. After this review, if the schedule is complete and accurate, you can export the data to Microsoft Office or Primavera Project Planner.
To preview the schedule simulation
1. In the Animation Producer dialog box, choose Tools > Preview. The Animator Preview dialog box opens.
2. Click Play.
3/24/2010

To export a schedule
Page 162 of 329
1. In the Animation Producer dialog box, choose Schedule > Export. The Export Schedule dialog box opens.
2. Click Browse to select a File Name or enter a file name. 3. Select one of the options either to overwrite the existing schedule or replace tasks with the same ID number. 4. Click OK. The external schedule is updated with the revised task information.
Some properties such as Early Start, Early Finish, Late Start, Late Finish are calculated by the external scheduling software. Changes made to these properties in ProjectWise Schedule Simulation may be ignored when the data is imported into the scheduling package.
Setting Up Animation Cameras

In producing an animation sequence, you can specify changes in the viewing perspective by scripting animation cameras and their targets, or saved views. Animation Camera and Target Basics You can use one or more animation cameras in an animation sequence, by scripting each one to become active from a particular frame number. From that specified frame, the animation view is taken from the designated camera. Additionally, you can specify targets at which an animation camera is aimed. Animation cameras are specialized actors. Their motion can be controlled using keyframes, paths, or scripts in the same manner as regular actors. They can also be manipulated with the Manipulate Actor tool or positioned with any of the standard MicroStation manipulation tools. Targets may be other actors, or special target elements, which, like animation cameras, are specialized actors.
Working with cameras and targets
Tools for creating and activating animation cameras and targets are contained in the Animation Cameras task. The Tool Settings window for those tools that operate on existing cameras or targets include a list box with the names of the cameras or targets. Selecting a camera or target in the list box, by clicking its name, highlights the camera or target in the view window. As well, you can identify a camera or target graphically. Scripting Saved Views As well as the views from animation cameras, you can script saved views to be active during your animation sequences. A scripted saved view is sometimes called a key view. As with animation cameras, you can specify the transition method from one saved view to the next.
To script a saved view to be used during the animation
3/24/2010

1. From the Animation Producer dialog box's Tools menu, choose Saved Views. The Script Saved View dialog box opens, displaying existing save views.
Page 163 of 329
Script Saved View dialog box
2. In the Saved Views list box, select the required saved view. 3. In the Start Time field, key in the frame number or time to begin using the saved view. 4. From the Interpolation option menu, choose the interpolation method Linear or Spline for the transition to the saved view. 5. From the Velocity option menu, choose the velocity type Constant, Accelerate, Decelerate, Accelerate-Decelerate, or Infinite for the transition to the saved view. 6. Click the OK button. The script entry is added to the list in the Animation Producer dialog box.
Animation Cameras task

The Animation Cameras task contains tools that are used to create and script animation cameras and targets.
Animation Cameras task (opened as tool box) To Select in the Animation Cameras task
Create an animation camera. Create Animation Camera
Modify an animation camera. Modify Animation Camera
Specify the frame number at which to begin using an animation camera.
3/24/2010

Script Camera
Page 164 of 329
Display, in a view, the view from an animation camera. Camera View
Create a target for an animation camera. Create Target
Specify the frame interval during which to use an animation camera target. Script Target
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ANIMATION CAMERAS
Animation cameras and targets are created as Construction class elements. They are not visible unless the view attribute Constructions is turned on in the View Attributes dialog box (Settings menu > View Attributes or from a view window control menu).
Previewing and Recording

Previewing/recording the open script Following are the general procedures for previewing and recording a script, using tools in the Animation Dialog task.
To preview the open script
1. In the Animation Dialog task, select the Animator Preview tool. For convenience, this tool may be docked at the top or bottom of the application window. 2. In the Animator Preview tool settings, click the General Settings icon and adjust the settings as required. 3. From the view option menu select the view in which you want the preview displayed. 4. Click the Play button. Previewing begins. To stop the preview before its conclusion, click the Pause button, or enter a Reset.
To record the open script
1. In the Animation task, select the Record tool. The Record Script dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 165 of 329
Record Script dialog box
2. From the View option menu, choose the source view for the animation. 3. From the Render Mode option menu, choose the desired rendering method. 4. From the Format option menu, choose the required output format. 5. (Optional) Adjust other recording settings as required. 6. (Optional) In the Output File field, you can change the name and directory from the defaults. 7. Click the OK button. The animation file(s) are created. A preview window opens, in which each frame is shown as it is rendered.
If you change the file name, you must insert a number at the end of the filename. This number will be incremented for each frame saved. For example, naming the file that contains the first frame of a Targa-format sequence orbit01.tga causes the subsequent frame files to be named orbit02.tga, orbit03.tga, orbit04.tga, and so on. In the event of an interruption to the process, you can return later and pick up from the next frame number in the sequence. If you require AVI, FLI or FLC, you can convert the sequence to FLI/FLC or AVI via the Movie Player.
Recording for Playback on NTSC and PAL Video Both NTSC and PAL television systems use interlaced video. This means that each frame actually consists of two fields. Each field contains half of the frame scan lines and only a single field is refreshed in each scan An NTSC screen that displays 30 frames per
3/24/2010

second will therefore display 60 fields per second.
Page 166 of 329
When recording a script, you have the option to render each frame in two passes, with the second pass half a frame ahead of the first one, and then interlace the images from the two passes such that the resulting frame matches the field refresh rate of the display system. This technique, known as field rendering, effectively doubles the apparent refresh rate of the recorded sequence, from 30 to 60 fields for NTSC and from 25 to 50 fields for PAL.
To enable field rendering
1. In the Record Script dialog box, turn on Field Rendering. 2. If appropriate, turn on Odd Rows First. This setting determines whether the odd rows are taken from the first or second rendering pass. (This is sometimes referred to as 2:1 or 1:2 interlacing.) Most video recording equipment expects the even row first, so Odd Rows First is turned off by default. If this setting is incorrect, a field rendered movie will jump badly and appear worse than if field rendering was not used.
Field rendering is only useful when creating sequences that are to be played back on interlaced equipment (such as NTSC or PAL video). Field rendered sequences will not appear correct when played back with the MicroStation Movies utility (Utilities > Image > Movies) or other systems that do not refresh the interlaced fields separately.
Recording Scripts on Networked Systems When you record an animation from a script, an animation settings file (.asf) is created by MicroStation to hold the open script's settings and recording status. This makes it possible to easily record the script on networked systems. The settings file is stored in the same directory in which the animation frames are saved. The default root filename is the same as the design filename. The settings file is not deleted after recording is completed in case any frames need to be re-rendered.
General Procedure To record a script on networked systems
1. Begin recording using the first system. Specify a shared drive as the destination for the resulting animation file(s). 2. Continue recording using additional systems.
To continue a recording using a different system
1. From the Animation Producer dialog box's File menu, choose Continue Recorded Sequence. The Select File dialog box opens. 2. Select the animation settings file (.asf) for the recording from the shared drive. 3. Click the OK button. You can use a key-in also, to continue a recording on a different system. The key-in animator script continue [filename] can be used from within MicroStation, or in a batch command file. If the filename is omitted, then the Select File dialog box opens to let you select an animation settings file. Shadow Maps and Flythrough-type Scripts When recording a script using Phong rendering, you have the option to not clear the shadow maps between frames. This option is desirable if recording a flythrough-type script in which only cameras or targets are moving.
To enable the option to not clear shadow maps between frames
1. In the Record Script dialog box, turn on Don't Clear Shadow Maps Between Frames. Recording Notes Following are general notes that relate to recording and previewing:
When recording a script, using ray tracing, radiosity solving, or particle tracing, in which the only motion is that of cameras or their targets, often it is desirable to use the Create single solution from frame setting. When this option is selected, a field to the right of
3/24/2010
Page 167 of 329
is no movement of actors, such as walk-throughs. It reduces rendering time by not regenerating the rendering database for each frame. Alternatively, you can load an existing solution from file. If recording using networked systems, it is advisable to ensure all systems use the exact same rendering database by rendering frame 1 (or at least some common view) on each system. As soon as the first line of the frame is ray traced on a particular system, you can safely Reset to abort the recording.
The Freeze button in the Animation Producer dialog box acts only on design geometry (and viewpoint). It is not possible to freeze changing environmental parameters, such as material characteristics, lighting, and camera settings. Where objects move quickly in a sequence, motion blur can be used to give them a smooth and more realistic appearance of motion. Clear Pattern/Bump Maps Between Frames should be turned on where you have a number of different pattern images used between frames, or where you are using a large number of very big animated patterns, or where you use many different images of RPC's. In some cases this can cause many more images to be loaded into memory, than when just rendering an individual frame, and could use up all your system's memory resources.
Printing
Introduction Printing Basics Printer Driver Configuration Files Printing in Depth Submitting Printed Output to a Printer Batch Printing Print Resymbolization and Pen Tables Tracking Printer Usage Printing Key-ins
Introduction
MicroStations printing tools provide many features that simplify the process of creating printed output of your designs. Printing can be as simple as setting up a view or placing a fence around the area of interest and clicking the Print icon. Typically, the result will be printed output of what you see on the screen (refer to thePrinting Basics section.) For scaled prints, you can set the scale in the Print Scale and Position section of the Print dialog box. Creating completed scaled drawings that include a border typically requires extra planning and setting up prior to printing (see Border considerations). MicroStation also lets you create and use pen tables to resymbolize your design. In other words, you can produce printed output that looks different from the on-screen view of the design. Thus, from a single design file, by using different pen tables, you can produce printed output having different element symbology to that of the original design. The Print Dialog Box Configuration Considerations Design Resymbolization Using a Pen Table Printing and References Previewing the Printed Output Using Print Configuration Files Batch Printing
The Print Dialog Box

MicroStation's Print dialog box provides the necessary tools for producing printed output at any stage during a project.
3/24/2010

You can perform all printing operations from the Print dialog box, which is opened by choosing File > Print. For example, via this dialog box, you can:

Page 168 of 329
Select a printer driver and edit its configuration file. Create a pen table to resymbolize the print. Specify monochrome, grayscale, or true color output. Create print setup files.
Configuration Considerations
MicroStation lets you create printed output either:

directly to a default system printer, or via a print saved to disk for later submission to a printer.
In both instances, MicroStation uses a printer driver to either interface with the system printer, or to correctly format the design data for your printer. Selecting a printer MicroStation lets you work with two types of printers: those controlled via the Windows system and those controlled via a Bentley driver. Typically, in the Print dialog box, when you choose:
Windows driver you have access to the functionality of the Windows printer driver to print directly to the system printer device, create an Enhanced Windows metafile, or save the print to disk for later submission to the printer. Bentley driver you can save the print to disk for later submission to a printer.
Each printer driver has a printer driver configuration file. Printer driver configuration files are stored in MicroStations ...\Workspace\system\plotdrv directory (see Selecting a printer). Where necessary, you can edit a printer driver configuration file by choosing File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration from the Print dialog box, which opens an editor with the printer driver configuration file loaded. Where required, you can set a different editor to be your default. You do this by setting the value of the MicroStation configuration variable MS_PLTFILE_EDITOR to that of your preferred editor (see Customizing printer driver configuration files). Printer page sizes Many printers have predefined page sizes, which are defined in the printer driver configuration file. In most configuration files, both English and metric page sizes are provided. While the supplied Bentley printer driver configuration files provide commonly used page sizes, you are not limited to these. MicroStation lets you define an unlimited number of page sizes for a Bentley printer driver. By default, page sizes for a Windows driver are obtained from the Windows printer driver and/or the operating system's forms database. Most sophisticated Windows printer drivers offer their own mechanism for creating and selecting custom paper sizes. Every system printer driver is different, so you will need to consult the appropriate Windows driver's documentation for instructions on how to accomplish this. Alternately, MicroStation permits you to define custom page sizes for system printers in the same manner as with Bentley drivers, with some limitations. Refer to "printer.pltcfg" or "printer.plt" for more information on this subject. Setting the correct scale You set the scale for your printed output as a ratio of working units to printer units. When you use the Scale Assistant dialog box, which is
3/24/2010
Page 169 of 329
simplify setting scales, you can quickly redefine your printer units by choosing Settings > Units, in the Print dialog box, and then choosing your preferred printer units. When you are printing completed drawings, usually within a border, other scaling factors such as text sizes also should be considered. These factors are discussed in Border considerations.
Design Resymbolization Using a Pen Table

Often, the way you work on-screen does not produce easy to read printouts. For example, you may use yellow and cyan colored lines onscreen because they are easy to see against a black background. When these same lines are printed in color on white paper, the result is not easy to read. MicroStation lets you create pen tables that, in turn, let you change the symbology of design file elements for printing purposes. During this process, the design file is not changed in any way. The resymbolization occurs for the printed output only. Where necessary, you can import AutoCAD CTB and STB files for resymbolizing the printed output. Using a pen table you can change the symbology of elements, including:

Line Weight Color Fill Color Line Style Class
As well, you can specify text replacement, both for specific variables, such as file name and date, or for generic text items (such as a title in a border). Pen tables can be used to resymbolize any design file for printing. Thus, you can produce several different printed outputs from the one design file, without changing an element in the design. The section, Print Resymbolization and Pen Tables, covers these topics.
Printing and References

References are a valuable design tool and are fully supported by MicroStations printing tools. For simple printing, you set up the view with all the required design elements displayed, both in the active design file and all references. You then can print the view contents or place a fence around the area of interest. MicroStation lets you attach an unlimited number of references to the active design file. These attachments can include DWG and Raster files. Nested reference attachments also are supported. Pen tables and references With pen tables, you can selectively resymbolize elements from a particular reference or from a list of references. For information on resymbolization of references, refer to Files in the Print Resymbolization and Pen Tables section. Printing raster files MicroStation's Raster Manager lets you attach and manipulate image files of various formats. In order to print these raster references, your printer must be capable of printing raster data.
3/24/2010

Previewing the Printed Output
Page 170 of 329
There are several ways to preview your printed output. You can view a preview in the Print dialog box (File > Print) or you can open the Preview dialog box (File > Print Preview). When you open the Print dialog box, the thumbnail preview paints for 10 seconds before stopping to allow the rest of the dialog box to refresh. If the print preview is not complete within that time period, a message appears in the status bar. The default time period is 10 seconds. It is controlled by the Thumbnail preview timeout setting in the Print Preferences dialog box. This setting is stored in your user preference file. You can use the MS_PLT_THUMBNAIL_PREVIEW_TIMEOUT configuration variable to override the setting. Using the Show design in preview check box in the Print dialog box's Preview section, you can quickly review the drawing as it will appear on the selected drawing sheet. For more detail you can use the resizable Preview dialog box to review how the selected area will be printed on the chosen printer. As you make changes to the printing parameters, or the design, you can use the Update from View and Preview icons to update the display. This can be a useful tool when you are creating a pen table, for example. You can view the results of the changes to the pen table resymbolization prior to printing.
The Thumbnail preview timeout setting does not affect print previews initiated by opening the Preview dialog box or by clicking the Preview icon in the Print dialog box. If you use one of these methods to preview a print, they are always painted to completion.
Using Print Configuration Files

Print configuration (.ini) files let you save the printing parameters for a design file. These include the area to be printed, the levels that are displayed (in the master file), page size, margins and scale. Where a pen table is attached, this too is saved as part of the print configuration file. Once saved, you can recall the print configuration file at any time to create printed output of the same area of your design file. When you require printed output during a design session, for example, you can use the print configuration file to set the parameters. Thus, you do not have to remember details such as the region to print, and which levels should be on or off. These settings, along with others, are saved with the print configuration file. For information on creating and using print configuration files, see Print configuration files.
Batch Printing
Batch Print is a utility for printing and reprinting related sets of design files and models by means of Job Sets and Print Specifications.

Job sets are used to identify, save, recall, and print related sets of design files and models. See Job Sets. Print specifications describe what to print and how it should be printed. See Print specifications.
Using the Batch Print utility you can set up groups of design files and models in job sets in order to print automatically. Printing specifications also are saved in the job sets. These let you define the Printer, Print Area, Layout, and Display parameters. When batch printing, these specifications are applied to each design file in the list. Batch Print lets you use sheet definitions, shapes, cells, or views (including saved views) to define the area that should be printed in each design file. For more information on the Batch Print utility, see Batch Printing.
Printing Basics
3/24/2010
Page 171 of 329
This section introduces the basics of printing with MicroStation. In this section, the (delivered) default settings are considered. Many of these default settings can be customized with configuration variables, which are covered in later sections. Creating a Print from MicroStation Setting the Raster Options 3D Content in PDF Files
Creating a Print from MicroStation

In simple terms, the steps required to create a print from MicroStation are: 1. Open the Print dialog box. 2. Select the print area. 3. Select a printer. 4. Set the printing parameters, such as sheet size and scale. 5. (Optional) Preview the print. 6. Click the Print button. Central to all these printing operations is the Print dialog box. Introduction to the Print dialog box All printing functions can be performed from the Print dialog box. Using the options in this dialog box you can select a printer and adjust various settings that affect printing. Additionally, you can preview the printed output.
To open the Print dialog box
1. From the File menu, choose Print. or Press <Ctrl-P>. The Print dialog box opens. All options for adjusting printing settings are contained in the menu bar at the top of this dialog box and via the icon bar directly below it. The selected printer driver configuration file appears in the title bar of the dialog box.
Basic Print dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 172 of 329
By default, the printed output is maximized. That is, it is drawn to the largest scale that will fit on the selected paper size. You can see a preview of the printed area, along with the elements in your plot. This appears in an expanded portion of the Print dialog box, which you can display or hide as required.
To expand the Print dialog box to visually check the printed output
1. In the Print dialog box, click the Show Preview arrow to the right of the icon bar. The Print dialog box expands to display the print preview window. The blue rectangle represents the size of the printed output on the selected sheet. 2. To see the part of the drawing that is to be printed, turn on the Show design in preview check box.
Print dialog box, expanded to show preview image.
Further expansion of the Print dialog box lets you set the print size and scale and the print position on the selected sheet.
To view the Print Size, Scale, and Position settings
1. In the expanded dialog box, click the Show Details arrow at bottom right. The Print dialog box expands to display more printing parameters.
3/24/2010
Page 173 of 329
Print dialog box, fully expanded to show all settings.
With both expanded portions of the dialog box visible, you can switch the display of both together by clicking the Hide/Show Preview arrow.
Selecting the print area When you first open the Print dialog box, the initial print area is determined as follows:

If the active model contains a sheet definition, the print area is obtained from the sheet definition. If no sheet definition exists, and a fence exists, the fence defines the print area. If no sheet definition or fence exists, the print area is set to the first open view.
The priority of a sheet definition versus an active fence may be swapped using the configuration variable MS_PLT_AREA_PRIORITY. If you are not using sheet or fence print area modes, you can define the print view so that it encompasses all the elements in either the master file or the master file and all its references. These are the "Fit Master" and "Fit All" print areas, respectively. The configuration variable MS_PLT_AUTO_FIT_VIEW can be used to instruct the Print dialog box to automatically select one of the Fit print areas when the Print dialog box is opened. You can change the print area via the Area list box in the General Settings section of the Print dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 174 of 329
Selecting the area to print.
Setting the output color mode Often, it is advantageous to print in grayscale or monochrome, rather than using the element colors. When you have a color printer, you can quickly set it to print in grayscale or monochrome using the Color setting in the Print dialog box. This lets you choose from:

Monochrome output is black and white Grayscale design file colors are output as grayscale True Color design file colors are used
For more precise control over output color, set the color mode to True Color and use a pen table to selectively define print colors.
When you choose a different output, you can see the result in the preview window. Printing rasterized, rendered, and transparent prints Use the Rasterized check box to indicate that the view should be output to the plotter as a single raster image. You can also print partial transparency with any printer driver capable of printing in rasterized mode. To do so, turn on the Rasterized check box in the Print dialog box.
The view render mode, printer driver, or other factors may prevent you from turning on the Rasterized check box. If the area to print is rendered, the Rasterized check box label changes to Rendered, and it is read-only.
Rasterized printing works by generating a display list from the model, with all printer and pen table resymbolization applied, then rasterizing that display list into tiles or bands before writing them to the plot file. Hardware acceleration is used during rasterization whenever possible. The printer driver determines whether tiles or bands are used. The size of the tiles or bands plays a large role in printing performance. The larger the tile, the faster the plot, but the larger the memory overhead. Tile sizes are also limited by the capabilities of, and available memory on, your video card. Your system's display settings must also be set to use 24-bit color (true color) or higher. Selecting a printer
3/24/2010
Page 175 of 329
MicroStation lets you work with either of two types of printer drivers: Windows driver or Bentley driver. A list box in the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog box lets you switch between the two types of printer drivers. Selecting Windows driver automatically loads the Windows printer driver configuration file (default is "printer.pltcfg" or "printer.plt"). When you select Bentley driver then, by default, the Bentley printer driver configuration file that you last used is loaded. Where required, you can select another Bentley driver. You can, however, use the configuration variable MS_PLOTDLG_DEF_PLTFILE to define a default printer driver configuration file to be selected each time the Print dialog box is opened. That is, the defined printer driver configuration file will be selected rather than the one you used last.
To select a Bentley printer driver
1. In the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog box, click the Select Printer Driver Configuration File icon.
The Select Printer Driver Configuration File dialog box opens. 2. Choose a printer driver configuration file. 3. Click Open. The Select Printer Driver Configuration File dialog box closes and the name of the selected printer driver configuration file appears in the title bar of the Print dialog box. The list box displays Bentley driver.
Printer driver selection guide
You can use the following table as a guide to help you choose the correct Bentley printer driver.
Output To: Printer Driver Configuration File Pros Lets you access manufacturer specific features such as: Standard large format printer, that accepts HPGL/2, HP RTL (such as HP, OCE, Xerox) printer.pltcfg and printer.plt Host based color correction and paper handling (stapling, folding) hpglrtl.pltcfg and hpglrtl.plt Desktop printer printer.pltcfg and printer.plt Fast generation of output file by MicroStation. User specification of paper sizes. Lets you access manufacturer specific features. Lets you generate PostScript for use in documents (EPS), or to be postprocessed to PDF, or can be sent to a PostScript printer. Lets you directly create PDF documents. When sending to a printer, no access to manufacturer specific features. Cons Large amounts of vector and raster data can cause printer driver to consume large amounts of host memory and possibly fail. No access to manufacturer specific features.
PostScript output
pscript.pltcfg and pscript.plt pdf.pltcfg and pdf.plt
You can print partial transparency with any printer driver capable of printing in rasterized mode. To do so, turn on the Rasterized check box in the Print dialog box. Rasterized printing typically produces larger plot file sizes than non-rasterized printing. It may also require longer processing time.
Supported printers
MicroStations printing system generates output in formats supported by most printing devices. There are two types of printer driver configuration files that are delivered with MicroStation:

generic printer driver configuration files such as "hpgl2.pltcfg" (and "hpgl2.plt") and "pscript.pltcfg" (and "pscript.plt"). "printer.pltcfg" (and "printer.plt"), which works in conjunction with the system printer driver provided by the output devices vendor.
All delivered MicroStation printer driver configuration files reference drivers that create print information in industry-recognized formats (such as HPGL/2, HPGL/RTL and TIF). Setting the printing parameters Settings in the Print dialog box let you select the sheet size, set the scale for the print, and position the print on the selected sheet.
3/24/2010

Setting the paper size, orientation, and output
Page 176 of 329
Using settings in the Printer and Paper Size section, you can select a predefined paper size and define the orientation. When you are using a Bentley driver and the Allow paper size editing check box is on in the Print Preferences dialog box, you can edit the X (width) and Y (height) dimensions of the selected paper size. When you select the Windows driver, these dimensions are not editable. The setting for Orientation lets you choose between Portrait or Landscape.
Printer and Paper Size section of Print dialog box (Bentley driver selected).
Printer and Paper Size section of Print dialog box (Windows driver selected).
You can select the output destination for your print:

Send to printer available only when using a Windows printer driver. Create plot file available when using either a Windows or Bentley printer driver. Create metafile available only when using a Windows printer driver.
Setting the print scale and position
In setting the scale for a print, you are defining the number of design units (in working units) that equate to each paper, or printed output, unit (in printer units). You can key-in this value in the Scale field, or you can click the Scale Assistant icon and use the Scale Assistant dialog box to define the scale criteria either as Design to Paper, or Paper to Design. The default scale method may be specified in the workspace configuration using the MS_PLT_SCALE_METHOD configuration variable, with settings:

1 default scale display is paper units to master units. 2 default scale display is master units to paper units.
This variable overrides the user preference when the Print dialog box loads. You may change the preference while working in the dialog, but the configuration value will be used when the Print dialog box is exited and restarted. As an alternative to setting the scale for the print, you can set the X (width) and Y (height) size dimensions for the print. Changing the scale, or either size dimension (X or Y), automatically results in changes to the remaining parameters to maintain the aspect ratio of the print.
3/24/2010
Page 177 of 329
Print Scale and Position section of Print dialog box.
You cannot set the X or Y print size to values that would place part of the printed output outside the area of the selected page. When a new print scale is specified, however, the behavior depends on the currently selected print area.
If the print area is View, the print size is adjusted according to the new print scale. Scales that result in print sizes too large for the paper size are not permitted. A view definition is never clipped to accommodate a print scale. For all other print areas options, the print area is recalculated using the original sheet definition, MicroStation fence, or design fit criteria, and the print size is adjusted according to the new print scale. If the new scale is smaller than the old one, the outer part of the print area may be clipped. If the new scale is larger than the old one, more of the design is included in the print area. The print area is always scaled about its center point.
Setting the printer's units
It is not always the case that the printer's units and the design file units are the same. You can, however, change the printer's units via the Print dialog box.
To change the printer's units
1. In the Print dialog box, select Settings > Units. Choose the new printer units. The printer's units change to the new setting. This setting will remain until they are changed again.
Setting the print position
Where the size of the print is smaller than the selected page size, you can control its positioning on the page. You can turn on Auto-center to center the print on the page. Alternatively, you can specify the position of the lower left corner of the print, relative to the lower left corner of the page. The X Origin value defines the distance horizontally and the Y Origin setting defines the distance vertically.
Setting the print rotation and mirroring
You can change the rotation of the printed output. For prints that are not rendered, do not contain a camera definition, and do not use the View plot area, you can specify any rotation in the 0360 degree range. For rendered prints, prints containing a camera definition, or when using the View plot area, you must choose from the list box one of the orthogonal rotations. You can also mirror printed output about the X and/or Y axis.
If Hide advanced layout controls is checked in the Print Preferences dialog box, you must use the list box to select an orthogonal rotation. In addition, the Mirror field does not appear and mirroring is not available.
Previewing the printed output Generally, the Print dialog box's self-contained preview window is sufficient for quickly checking the printing parameters. For more accurate previewing, however, you can open the resizable Preview window. This lets you check more thoroughly how the printed output will appear and is useful for checking fine detail , or when checking the effect of a pen table on the print.
To open the Preview window
1. In the Print dialog box, click the Preview icon. or
3/24/2010

From the File menu, choose Print Preview.
Page 178 of 329
The Preview window opens, displaying the proposed printed output. 2. (Optional) Click and drag the window borders to resize the window as required.
The resizable Preview window.
Updating from the view
During the setup process, you may use tools such as Window Area, or Zoom In/Out to redefine the view to be printed. After adjusting the view, you must update from the view to ensure that the preview is displaying the new printing region. If you are using the adjustable Preview window, the same procedure applies.
To update the Print dialog box preview from the view
1. After adjusting the viewing parameters in a view, click the Update from View icon in the Print dialog box.
The preview window in the Print dialog box updates.

To update the Preview window from the view
1. After adjusting the viewing parameters in a view, click the Update from View icon in either the Print dialog box or the Preview window.
Creating the print Once you have set up your design to print (via the Print dialog box), you can click the Print icon to create the print. What happens at this stage depends on your system configuration and your selected printer driver. For a standard configuration, with no modifications to printer driver configuration files or configuration variables, the print will either go directly to a printer, or will be saved to disk for later submission to a printer. When saving to a file, the Save Print As dialog box opens, to let you specify a name and location for the print to be saved to disk. For more details on creating prints, see Submitting Printed Output to a Printer.
3/24/2010
Page 179 of 329
Setting the Raster Options

MicroStations Raster Manager lets you control the display of one or more image files within a design file view. Each view in a DGN file may be used to display image files. Information about the image files is stored with the DGN file. In a typical Raster Manager session where aerial photography is used, a design file view contains a mosaic of images depicting the region of interest. The mosaic can include an unlimited number of images, each referenced to the vector data contained in the active DGN file and any references attached to it. Similarly, using Raster Manager, you can assemble a group of rendered images for printing. Whether you print to a color or grayscale PostScript device, images from various sources can be assembled together and the colors for each image are represented correctly in the output. With this flexibility, you can integrate black and white scanned documents, grayscale or color aerial photographs, monochrome bitmap layers, satellite imagery, and DGN files to produce a full color document on color devices or a grayscale document on grayscale devices. MicroStations Raster Manager lets you produce hybrid prints of raster images along with raster vector data and design vector data. To produce such a hybrid print for a view, choose Print from the MicroStation File menu. Printing devices for Raster Manager MicroStations Raster Manager supports printing raster data to all Bentley printer drivers except the HP-GL/2 driver. It also can print raster data to all vendor-supplied Windows printer drivers that support raster. The HP-GL/2 driver is the only non-raster-capable Bentley printer driver. It does not contain direct support for raster data. All images are converted into pen commands, which may result in a significant loss of quality. This affects Raster Manager attachments, 87/88 elements, OLE objects, and gradient fills. To plot raster data, use "printer.pltcfg" or "hpglrtl.pltcfg" instead. A list box in the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog box lets you switch between the Bentley and Windows printer drivers. You can use the Printer driver selection guide to help you choose the correct Bentley printer driver configuration file. Raster Manager's Print toggle This toggle enables or disables the printing of Type 90 raster images. It has no effect on the printing of Type 87/88 rasters. It is on by default. You can find the toggle in the following menus:

Raster Manager dialog box Element Info(rmation) dialog box > Display Print tab
Output resolution
It is recommended that you select the maximum possible number of pixels per inch for the output resolution. You can use a lower resolution to obtain a quick draft output but the higher resolution should be used to obtain high quality output. The printing resolution for Raster Manager images is set by editing the Resolution property in the chosen printer driver configuration file. The resolution is defined by the printer manufacturer, therefore the number of pixels varies, depending on which printer you are using.
To set the resolution in the printer driver's configuration file
1. Using a text editor, open the .pltcfg file you will use to generate the print file. 2. Search for the Driver Resolution property and set its number of pixels (DPI) to the desired resolution. The number of pixels varies, depending on which printer you are using. 3. Save and exit.
Maximum resolution
To ensure maximum quality for your print, you should set this value to the same resolution as that of your printing device. With devices that use half-toning, however, the maximum resolution that you can achieve is the net resolution after half-toning (that is, the net resolution will be less that the overall resolution of the device). Since a value set higher than necessary usually does not provide added resolution, it is advisable to determine the optimum value to minimize the size of your print file
3/24/2010

Calculating the optimum output resolution
Page 180 of 329
To calculate the output resolution that will produce the smallest print file size:

Determine the net resolution of your device. This value should be less than the resolution of the printer. The Raster Manager default value is 75, since it is the typical net resolution for 300 DPI printers that print in grayscale with halftoning. Optimize your print file size by determining whether your print requires the full available resolution. Use the following formula to optimize the print file size: (Image Width/Pixel Size) / Width of print = Optimal Resolution. For example, if the image width is 1000 feet, the pixel size is 1 foot and the width of the print is 5 inches, then: (1000/1) / 5 = 200 DPI
Use the Raster Manager: Files () dialog box to find the pixel size and the image dimensions (select the appropriate image in the Raster Manager: Files () dialog box and get the values from the Pixel Size field under the Files list box). In this example, the maximum quality output can be achieved with a resolution set at 200 DPI. Consider also:

Any higher value creates a larger print file but does not increase quality. If the net (true) resolution of your device is lower than 200 DPI, then any value higher than the true resolution also creates a larger print file but does not increase quality. In this instance, if your device does not contain the true resolution necessary to achieve the maximum possible resolution inherent in your image, then your print quality cannot be maximized.
After the Maximum Resolution is set, the Output Size of Raster Data field displays the amount of raster data that will be created. The total size of the PostScript file also includes the vector data.
Printing images Printing images from Raster Manager is similar to standard printing. See Creating a print file from the Print dialog box. Additional information about printer driver configuration files Before you try to print rasters, the appropriate statements must be present in the printer driver's configuration file. If the appropriate statements are not present in the printer driver configuration file, you will not have any control over the appearance of the printed results. For specific information and guidance in configuring and using the configuration file associated with a printer driver, you can open the printer driver configuration file in a text editor. You can then follow the instructions in the file to configure the printer driver. See Editing the current printer driver configuration file. You also can access this file through the Print dialog box. The following table lists the mandatory statements for printing raster files. Raster Manager - Type 90 Elements Statements
STATEMENTS GRAYSCALE=0 BACKGROUND=2 CONTRAST=50 DESCRIPTION/USE Enables and disables grayscale printing of raster files. 1=On, 0=Off, Default=0. Used to specify the background color of monochrome rasters in Raster Manager. If BACKGROUND = 0 or 1 (white or black), the foreground is inverted if identical to the background. If BACKGROUND=2 (color), no changes are brought to the monochrome raster. Default=0. Defines the percentage of contrast applied to the image being printed. Default=50.
PIXEL_RESOLUTION=75 Specifies the printing resolution for raster files. Values span from 0 to 300, the default value being 75.
3/24/2010

BRIGHTNESS=50 NO_RASTERREF=0 Defines the percentage of brightness applied to the image being printed. Default=50. Enables and disables printing of raster images. 1=Don't Plot, 0=Plot, Default=0.
Page 181 of 329
3D Content in PDF Files

With the release of Acrobat Version 7.0, Adobes PDF format supports the embedding of 3D content within documents. In MicroStation, the creation of PDF documents with 3D content is similar to printing a standard 2D document. Where 3D content is included, it will contain any visualization data and settings that already exist within the design file, such as lights, materials, texture maps, and animation or camera movement (flythroughs). Additionally, any saved views are included in the 3D content. Any 3D content within a PDF document is stored in Universal 3D (U3D) format. This format was introduced by the 3D Industry Forum (http://www.3dif.org/) as a means for transferring three-dimensional data from CAD systems to mainstream applications such as marketing, training, sales, technical support and customer service. MicroStation lets you export geometry directly to U3D or to seamlessly create PDF documents with embedded U3D objects. Support for clip volumes/masks, reference clip boundaries MicroStation supports clip volumes/masks, and/or references with clip boundaries, when you publish the 3D content to PDF. Global lighting solutions in PDF files Particle Trace and Radiosity rendering modes calculate the effects of lighting for every surface within a model and are commonly referred to as global solutions. Global lighting solutions can be considerably more useful than other visualization methods (such as ray tracing) because they can be viewed from any angle or camera location. Publishing of these global lighting solutions directly to PDF (or U3D) is supported by exporting both the model geometry and the precalculated lighting values at the model surfaces. This lets you view these lighting solutions within Adobe Acrobat or other U3D clients. Publishing a particle-trace or radiosity solution requires only that a particle-trace or radiosity solution has been loaded at the time the U3D or 3D PDF document is printed. If a solution is loaded, then that solution will automatically be used to generate the 3D content in the PDF file.
Global lighting settings that affect PDF output
The following items affect the generation of the published solution:
The brightness and contrast settings currently selected for the screen display are used to control these settings in the published model. As the published model will be viewable from any camera location, the Visible Surfaces Only option should not be selected when a Particle Trace solution is calculated.
Limitations
When publishing global lighting solutions to PDF, the following limitations are present:
Earlier versions of Adobe Acrobat (prior to version 7.07) will display the global lighting solutions only when the Software renderer is used. This can be set, in the Acrobat Preferences dialog box, by choosing the 3D category and then setting the Preferred Renderer to Software. While the published global lighting solutions do not support animated geometry, animation of the camera location (walk or flythroughs) is supported. The Ray Trace lighting effects (such as specular effects and reflectance) are not supported. Luminance solutions can be published, but Illuminance is not currently supported. The viewing display modes (such as illustration) and level controls are not available within a published global lighting solution.
3/24/2010
Page 182 of 329
From a 3D design model, you can add 3D content to a PDF file simply by enabling the Plot to 3D setting in the Print dialog box.
To create 3D in PDF from a design model
1. Open the Print dialog box. 2. Turn on Plot To 3D. 3. (Optional) Open the 3D Plotting Options dialog box (Settings > 3D Plotting) and adjust settings as required. 4. Back in the Print dialog box, click Print.
Controlling the rotation point for 3D content in a PDF file
When a 3D model is printed to PDF, the rotation point for the Acrobat tools is determined as follows:

For views where the camera is on the target point for the camera is the point about which the view will be rotated in Acrobat. For non-camera views the pivot point is set to the center of the view, midway between the front and back clipping planes. If the front/back clipping planes are disabled, then the model range is used.
Adding 3D content from sheet models When creating a PDF document to represent a sheet model, often it is desirable to have one or more reference attachments included as 3D content on the otherwise 2D sheet. You can do this by enabling the Plot to 3D (PDF) setting, for the reference, in the Attachment Settings dialog box.
To create 3D in PDF from a sheet model
1. In the Sheet model, open the References dialog box. 2. Select the reference for which you require 3D content. 3. Open the Attachments Settings dialog box (Settings > Attachment). 4. Turn on Plot To 3D (PDF). 5. Click OK. 6. (Optional) Repeat above steps for any other references for which 3D content is required. 7. Open the Print dialog box. 8. (Optional) In the Print dialog box, open the 3D Plotting Options dialog box (Settings > 3D Plotting) and adjust settings as required. 9. Back in the Print dialog box, click Print. 3D plotting options Settings that control the 3D content are found in the 3D Plotting Options dialog box (Settings > 3D Plotting, in the Print dialog box). These settings, which are saved in the user preference file, are retained between sessions. Animation in 3D content Animation scripts created with MicroStations Animation Producer (Utilities > Render > Animation) can be used to specify geometry or camera motion that can be exported to U3D and viewed dynamically within the PDF document. When a model is saved to U3D either the default script (a file with same name as design file but .msa) extension, or the script currently loaded in the animator, is used to specify the U3D animation. In Adobe Reader, the animation can be started or paused by selecting the 3D object and then selecting the Start Animation or Pause Animation buttons from the tool bar. Interacting with 3D content in Adobe Reader Once a PDF document containing 3D content is created from MicroStation, it can be opened with Adobe Reader 7 in the same manner as a standard PDF file. Clicking on a 3D object will activate a toolbar with a set of tools for navigating within the scene, adjusting lighting, and
3/24/2010

Saved Views are available from the Views menu entries.
Reference and level display in Adobe Reader
Page 183 of 329
You can control the display of references and levels in your 3D content via the Model Tree tab. It contains a hierarchical tree displaying the references and levels available for viewing.
3D content published from earlier versions of MicroStation V8 XM Edition included additional tools for displaying/hiding levels and references. These now are no longer required. MicroStation V8MicroStation PowerDraft XM Edition publishes to Acrobat version 7.07, where you can control the display of references and levels via the Model Tree controls.
Printer Driver Configuration Files

When preparing to print your design, an important consideration is the selection of the appropriate type of printer driver. Once you determine the category of printer driver that you need, you can select an appropriate driver. Each printer driver has a configuration file. MicroStation includes many sample printer driver configuration files in the " \Workspace\System\Plotdrv" directory. It is likely that you will find in this directory a printer driver configuration file that either is intended for or works with your printer. Introduction Customizing Printer Driver Configuration Files General Properties Default Print File Name Properties Print Border Properties Raster Printing Properties Printer Communication Properties Advanced Properties Windows Printer Driver PDF Printer Driver HPGLRTL Printer Driver HPGL2 Printer Driver PostScript Printer Driver CALS Printer Driver TIFF Printer Driver LORIP Printer Driver PLT File Records
Introduction
Printer driver configuration files contain properties that may specify the following about your printed output:

Name and size for all paper sizes Pen to element color or weight mappings The definitions for custom line styles (on prints only) Design font to print font mappings The method by which printed output is generated Border around printed output and information about border comments Resolution and units of distance on the printer Actions to be taken at the start and end of printed output
3/24/2010
Page 184 of 329
Some properties are available in every printer driver configuration file. Other properties are available only in certain types of printer driver configuration files. The properties in the sample printer driver configuration files may work with your printer and may not require customization. However, in some cases you may need to customize the printer driver's configuration file to fit your needs. Printer driver configuration files have the extension .pltcfg. These printer driver configuration files are XML files that can be viewed and edited with the Printer Driver Configuration Editor. When you select a .pltcfg file for editing in the Print dialog box, it opens in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box.
The Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box.
The Printer Driver Configuration Editor provides an easy to use interface for editing .pltcfg files. You can pick values from lists and use check boxes to turn properties on or off, which is much easier and less error prone than editing text files in a text editor. The quickest way to create a customized printer driver configuration file is to edit one of the sample files supplied with the printing system. MicroStation continues to support legacy .plt files, therefore, two sets of default printer driver configuration files are delivered:

One set in .pltcfg format One set in .plt format
Migration to .pltcfg files is strongly encouraged. The currently delivered .plt files will be removed in a future release.
Both sets of printer driver configuration files are stored in the "..\Workspace\System\Plotdrv" directory. All dialog boxes in which you choose a printer driver configuration file show files with the .pltcfg and .plt extensions. You can open and view both types of files in the Print dialog box, the Batch Print dialog box, and the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. PLT file format Legacy printer driver configuration files have the extension .plt. These printer driver configuration files are ASCII text files that can be edited with a text editor. When you select a .plt file for editing in the Print dialog box, it opens in Windows Notepad.
3/24/2010
Page 185 of 329
Printer driver configuration (.plt) files contain records and associated qualifiers that can be entered in any order (with a few noted exceptions). The following conventions apply to .plt files:

Records can be in either uppercase or lowercase letters. Spaces and tabs before and after data are ignored. All characters to the right of a semicolon are treated as comments and are ignored. Blank records and comment-only records are permitted. The maximum record length is 1024 characters, therefore each line is a record. When a record requires more than one line, you can place a backslash (\) at the end of the line. This acts as a continuation character, letting you include multiple lines in a single record.
Customizing Printer Driver Configuration Files

The quickest way to create a customized printer driver configuration file is to edit one of the sample files supplied with the printing system. When you modify a sample printer driver configuration file, it is a good idea to retain the original file in its default location, and to save the modified file with a different name, in a separate directory. MicroStation provides you with a separate directory for this purpose "Workspace\Standards\Plotdrv". In addition to customized printer driver configuration files, you can use this directory to store copies of all printer driver configuration files that you commonly use. This helps to ensure that your modified files are not overwritten during a subsequent software update, or reinstall.
To ensure that your print reflects all changes that you make to a printer driver configuration file, usually you must generate a new print.
For specific information and guidance in customizing and using the driver associated with your printer, you can open the printer driver configuration file that you intend to use in an appropriate editor. You then can follow the instructions in the file to customize your printer driver configuration file. Selecting File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration in the Print dialog box opens a printer driver configuration file. The MS_PLTFILE_EDITOR configuration variable controls which editor is used to open the file. The values for the configuration variable are:

Not defined (the default) The .pltcfg files open in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box and .plt files open in Notepad. MicroStation The Printer Driver Configuration dialog box is used to open all files, however, .plt files open as read-only. You can use the Printer Driver Configuration Editor to edit .plt files, but they must be saved as .pltcfg files. Name of a text editor, such as notepad.exe The specified text editor is used to open all files. You can use a text editor to view and edit .pltcfg files, but it is much easier to use the Printer Driver Configuration Editor. HIDE_MENU_ITEM Removes the Edit and Reload Printer Driver Configuration menu items from the File menu in the Print dialog box.
To create a printer driver configuration file
1. From the Print dialog box's File menu, choose Edit Printer Driver Configuration. The Create New Printer Driver Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Select a type of printer driver from the Select printer driver list box. 3. (Optional) Type comments as needed. 4. Click OK. 5. Change the file's properties as needed.
3/24/2010

The Save Printer Driver Configuration File dialog box opens. 7. Type a file name and click Save. 8. From the File menu, choose Exit.
To edit the selected printer driver configuration file
Page 186 of 329
1. From the Print dialog box's File menu, choose Edit Printer Driver Configuration. The selected .pltcfg printer driver configuration file opens in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. 2. Change the file's properties as needed. 3. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save Printer Driver Configuration File dialog box opens. 4. Type a file name and click Save. 5. From the File menu, choose Exit. 6. From the Print dialog box's File menu, choose Reload Printer Driver Configuration. This includes in the selected file the recent changes that you made. Defining default print settings When you first select a printer driver from the Print dialog box, a number of the printer driver configuration files' properties define the default settings in this dialog box. You can use the dialog box to change the settings, but they apply only for that session. The next time you select that printer driver, the settings revert to the values defined in the printer driver configuration file. You could create a print setup file containing your settings, but you would have to remember to load this file, each time, prior to printing. Another method is to modify your printer driver configuration file to reflect your preferred default settings. This modified printer driver configuration file could be saved under a name that reflects its purpose.
General Properties
This section describes the general properties that are included in a printer driver configuration file. The individual properties that are displayed within the General Properties category depend on which printer driver is currently loaded. These properties appear in the General category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. Automatic Centering The Auto-center setting, in the Print dialog box's Print Scale and Position section, is controlled by this property. It determines whether or not the printed output is centered on the page.
Auto-centering occurs only when a new page size or print rotation is specified.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Automatic Centering Syntax Values If set to False, printed outputs are not automatically centered. Default True Not commented out . True, False autocenter autocenter
In .PLT file
If not commented out, the print is centered on the page.
Automatic Open Plot File After Creation
3/24/2010

print file's extension. It is available for all printer drivers.
Page 187 of 329
This property is not relevant when printing directly to a printer.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Automatic Open Plot File After Creation . True, False Values If set to True, the file is opened after the print file is created. False ShellExecute
In .PLT file
program /post /command=ShellExecute If not commented out, the file is opened after the print file is created. Commented out
Default
Default Color Mode Sets the initial value of the output color control in the Print dialog box.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Default Color Mode Syntax Values Default . Monochrome Grayscale True Color In .PLT file color_mode monochrome grayscale color . Output is black and white DGN file colors are output as grayscale DGN file colors are used . color_mode=<value> . Effect of the Value
In most cases, True Color color
Default Line Cap Specifies the type of default line caps to use on printed output.
Not all line caps are valid for every device. Refer to the relevant printer driver configuration files for the valid values.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Default Line Cap Syntax Values Default . Flat
In .PLT file default_linecap default_linecap=<value> flat
Butt, Flat, Round, Square, Triangle butt, flat, round, square, triangle
Default Line Join Specifies the type of default line joins to use on printed output.
Not all line joins are valid for every device. Refer to the relevant printer driver configuration files for the valid values.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Default Line Cap Syntax Values Default . Round default_linejoin
In .PLT file default_linejoin=<value> round
Bevel, Miter, Miter/Bevel, Round, Triangle, None bevel, miter, mitrbevel, round, triangle, none
Default Number of Copies
3/24/2010

Specifies the default number of copies in the Print dialog box.
Page 188 of 329
When using the PostScript and Windows printer drivers, you cannot set the number of copies in a .plt file. Instead, use the Copies control in the Print dialog box. In .PLTCFG file Values Default A positive integer 1 . Not defined In .PLT file
Property or Record Name Default Number of Copies For the HPGL2 and HPGLRTL printer drivers, use the end_plot record with its /replot qualifier
Default Output Mode Specifies a driver-specific default setting for the Rasterized check box in the Print dialog box. You also can indicate whether the setting is a preference, in which case you can change it after the driver loads, or a requirement, in which case the check box is disabled.
You cannot use this property to override an output mode enforced by the driver itself, such as LORIP and rasterized mode, or a rendering mode requiring rasterization. In .PLTCFG file Syntax . No Preference force_rasterized Force Rasterized prefer_rasterized Values Prefer Rasterized force_nonrasterized Force Non-rasterized prefer_nonrasterized Prefer Non-rasterized Default No Preference Not defined In .PLT file output_mode=<value >
Property or Record Name Default Output Mode output_mode
Default Print to 3D Sets the Plot to 3D check box in the Print dialog box.
This property is used only by the Bentley PDF printer driver. If the Plot to 3D check box is not selected in the Print dialog box, PDFs are still created with 3D content if the references are so marked. In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default Default Print to 3D . True, False False In .PLT file plot_to_3d plot_to_3d . Commented out . . If set to True, or if not commented out, the Print dialog box's Plot to 3D check box is turned on automatically when the PDF printer driver is loaded. . Effect of the Value
Default Pen Table Name When you have a pen table that you use for all printed output in a project, you can have it loaded automatically when you select the printer driver configuration file that has this property enabled. The specified file name is searched for in the MS_PENTABLE configuration variable's search path.
You can specify a fully qualified directory that is different from the MS_PENTABLE configuration variable's search path, in addition to the pen table file name However if you do so and if the pen table file is removed from that directory the Select Pen Table File dialog box opens
3/24/2010

when you open the Print dialog box.
Page 189 of 329
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Default Pen Table Name . Not defined Values pentable
In .PLT file . .
Effect of the Value
pentable=c:\Pen Table Directory\Pen Table Name.tbl Commented out
If not defined or if commented out, the active pen table stays active when a new printer driver configuration file is chosen. Loads the named pen table file. If set to 0, the active pen table is unloaded. .
<name of a pen table <name of a pen table file> file> 0 0 Commented out Not defined
Default
Default Print File Name Properties

This section describes the default print file name properties that are included in a printer driver configuration file. All properties in the Default Print File Name Properties category are available for every printer driver. These properties appear in the Default Print File Name category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. File Name Specifies the default print file name. If this property is defined for the Windows printer driver, the Print dialog box destination is set to create plot file whenever this printer driver configuration file is loaded. If the default print file name is set to a UNC share or LPR port, such as \\printserver\hp1055 or 10.8.0.1, the Print dialog box sends the print directly to the printer rather than create a plot file.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default File Name . <name of a print file, excluding its extension> default_outfile default_outfile=<value> <name of a print file> In .PLT file
$(MS_PLTFILES)$(basename(_DGNFILE))-$(MS_PLTMODELNAME)$(MS_PLTFILES)$(basename(_DGNFILE))<autoInc?digits=3?base=0>.xxx, where you replace xxx with the appropriate $(MS_PLTMODELNAME)-<autoInc?digits=3?base=0> extension.
The following variables allow you to change the default print file's name through text substitution.
$(_DGNFILE) in a .pltcfg file Uses the open DGN file's name in the default print file name. $(MS_PLTMODELNAME) in a .pltcfg file Uses the open model's name in the default print file name.
<autoInc?digits=d?base=n> Adds an automatically increasing number to the file name rather than to the file's extension. You must substitute for d the number of digits and for n the starting (base) number for this automatically increasing number. The <autoInc> variable can be inserted anywhere in the default print file name. Extension Specifies the default print file extension.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Extension default_extension In .PLT file
3/24/2010

Syntax Values Default . cal, hpgl, hprtl, jpg, pdf, png, ps, tif default_extension=<value> cal, hpgl, hprtl, jpg, pdf, png, ps, tif
Page 190 of 329
Set to the extension that is appropriate for the selected printer Set to the extension that is appropriate for the selected printer driver driver
Auto Increment Extension Specifies that the print file extension should be increased automatically. To use this property the default extension must be a numeric value, such as 000.
This is legacy functionality. A more modern approach is to use an extension representing the file format, such as .pdf or .hprtl, and include the <autoInc> variable in the File Name property. In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Auto Increment Extension /auto_incext Syntax Values Default . True, False False default_extension[/auto_incext]=<file_extension> . Not defined In .PLT file
Auto Overwrite File Allows new print files to overwrite existing print files with the same name, without asking you for confirmation each time it finds an existing print file with the same name.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default Auto Overwrite File . True, False False In .PLT file auto_overwrite default_outfile[/auto_overwrite] =<file_name> . Commented out . . If set to True or if not commented out, the file is overwritten without confirmation. . Effect of the Value
Examples for .plt files default_outFile = $(MS_PLTFILES)$(basename(_DGNFILE))-$(MS_PLTMODELNAME)-<autoInc?digits=3?base=0>.pdf This creates a print file in the MS_PLTFILES directory, whose file name consists of the open DGN file's name, followed by a dash, followed by the open model's name, followed by a dash, followed by an automatically increasing number starting with 000, with a .pdf extension. default_outFile /auto_overwrite = $(noext(_DGNFILE)).hpgl This creates a print file residing in the same directory as the open DGN file, whose file name consists of the open DGN file's name with an .hpgl extension. The Print dialog box will not confirm the output file's name before creating it. default_outFile = $(MS_PLTFILES)<autoInc?digits=2?base=50>.ps This creates a print file in the MS_PLTFILES directory, whose file name consists of an increasing two-digit number with a .ps extension. The first print file will be called 50.ps. default_outFile /auto_overwrite = \\<server_name>\<printer_share_name> This redirects the output from a file on disk directly to a specific printer. The Print dialog box will not confirm the output file's name before creating it.
3/24/2010

Print Border Properties
Page 191 of 329
This section describes the print border properties that are included in a printer driver configuration file. The individual properties that are displayed within the Print Border category depend on which printer driver is currently loaded.
In a .pltcfg file the properties appear in the Print Border category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a .plt file the qualifiers appear with the Border record. The qualifiers can be used alone or in combination. The syntax is: border /pen=1 /width=0.000 /text_height=0.000 /offset=(0,0) /filename /time /comment=( )
Border On Determines the default setting of the Print Border check box in the Print Attributes dialog box. If this property is set to False, no border is drawn but other border properties may still be defined. (Windows printer driver) The printable area of the page is not reduced to accommodate border text. Instead, border text is printed on top of the print, with a blanking fill behind it. (PDF printer driver) The printable area of the page is not reduced to accommodate border text. Instead, border text is printed on top of the print, but without a blanking fill behind it.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Border On Syntax Values Default . True, False False In .PLT file border border . Commented out
Border Outline On Specifies whether the border outline around the print area is drawn.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Values Default . True, False True In .PLT file border /nooutline . Commented out
Property or Record Name Border Outline On nooutline
Include File Name in Border Text Specifies whether the file name is inserted in the border text.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Values Default . True, False False In .PLT file border /filename . Commented out
Property or Record Name Include File Name in Border Text filename
Include Model Name in Border Text Specifies whether the model name is inserted in the border text.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Values . True, False In .PLT file border /model .
Property or Record Name Include Model Name in Border Text model
3/24/2010

Default False Commented out
Page 192 of 329
Include Date/Time in Border Text Specifies whether the current date and time is inserted in the border text. The Windows Regional Settings are used to format the time and date for printed output in a locale-sensitive manner. Use the MS_PLOTBORDER_TIME_FORMAT configuration variable to adjust the format.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Values Default Date and time format . True, False False In .PLT file border /time . Commented out
Property or Record Name Include Date/Time in Border Text time
Use the MS_PLOTBORDER_TIME_FORMAT configuration variable to adjust the format. There are also strftime( ) formatting codes. With these formatting strings, you can choose how to display the date and time. For example, you can set MS_PLOTBORDER_TIME_FORMAT=It is now %I:%M %p on %A, %B %d, %Y, which displays as It is now 02:36 PM on Monday, December 10, 1999. The following table lists the variables and their definitions:
Variable %a %A %b %B %c %d %H %I %j %m %M %p %S %U %w %W %x %X %y %Y %% Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name. Abbreviated month name Full month name Date and time representation appropriate for locale Day of month as decimal number (01-31) Hour in 24-hour format (00-23) Hour in 12-hour format (01-12) Day of year as decimal number (001-366) Month as decimal number (01-12) Minute as decimal number (00-59) Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00-59) Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00-51) Weekday as decimal number (0-6; Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00-51) Date representation for current locale Time representation for current locale Year without century, as decimal number (00-99) Year with century, as decimal number Percent sign Definition
%z, %Z Time-zone name or abbreviation; no characters if time zone is unknown
Border Comment Specifies text to be printed as a comment on printed output. The comment string is limited to 80 characters, and may contain references to configuration variables.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax . In .PLT file border /comment=(text)
Property or Record Name Border Comment comment=(text)
3/24/2010

Default Not defined Commented out
Page 193 of 329
Including configuration variables in the border comment
You can include a configuration variable reference in the text of the Border Comment property. For example, if the configuration variable USER was defined as John Smith and you defined the border comment as User=${USER}, the printed output would expand the configuration variable so that the text User=John Smith appears in the label outside the print boundary. Note that in this case, braces { } are required around the configuration variable. Comment strings are limited to 80 characters, so care should be used when defining the Border Comment property. There is a chance that a long expansion may be truncated, particularly with the smaller sheet sizes. Border Font Specifies the font to be used in printed output.
This property is used only by the Windows printer driver.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Border Font Syntax Default . Not defined
In .PLT file font=fontname border /font=fontname Commented out
Border Text Offset Determines the position of the border text. The border text offset is interpreted as the distance from the lower left corner of the physical page. By changing the Border Text Offset property you can place border text anywhere on the page bottom left corner, top right corner, etc. You must specify the X and Y values in centimeters. For example, a setting of /offset=(2.50, 2.50) starts your border text 2.5 cm from the bottom and 2.5 cm from the left side of the page. If the border text offset is undefined, or if it is set to (0, 0), then the border text origin is determined automatically.
(Windows printer driver) If you do not specify an offset, the printer driver calculates an offset. This calculation depends on whether full sheet mode is specified and it places the border text just inside the lower-left corner of the printable area. When you specify an offset that is smaller than the calculated offset, the border text may move closer to the lower-left corner of the page and could be partially clipped. (PDF and PostScript printer drivers) If you do not specify an offset, the lower left corner is calculated by taking the print origin and subtracting the /text_height plus 10 pixels (if space permits). This results in text that lies just below the print's border rectangle with a small margin, assuming the print is not maximized. If the print is maximized, the print's Y origin may be zero and cannot be decreased. In that case, the text is drawn with its baseline along the Y axis, possibly directly atop the print's border rectangle.
This property is used only by the Windows, PDF, and PostScript printer drivers.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Default . 0,0
In .PLT file border /offset=(X, Y) 0,0
Property or Record Name Border Text Offset offset=(X, Y)
Border Pen Specifies the pen number to use to draw the border.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Border Pen Syntax Values . In .PLT file pen=n border /pen=n
A number from 1 to 255 A number from 1 to 255
3/24/2010

Default 1 1
Page 194 of 329
Border Text Height Specifies how high, in centimeters, comment text is printed.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Default . 0.254 In .PLT file border /text_height=0.000 0.254
Property or Record Name Border Text Height text_height=0.000
Border Width Specifies the width of the border outline, in centimeters.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Border Width Syntax Default . 0.025 In .PLT file width=0.000 border /width=0.000 0.025
Fence Outline On Specifies whether the outline of the fence should be printed (if the printed output is generated from a fence).
In .PLTCFG file In .PLT file Property or Record Name Border Width Syntax Default . False fence_outline fence_outline Not defined
Fence Outline Pen Specifies the pen number with which to draw the fence outline.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Default . 1 In .PLT file fence_outline</pen=penNumber> 1
Property or Record Name Fence Outline Pen fence_outline</pen=penNumber>
Examples for .plt files border/pen=1/filename/time draws a border around the printed output using pen number 1, showing the current time and DGN file name. border/pen=1/comment=(My plot)/off defines a border and a comment but turns off Print Border in the Print Attributes dialog box by default. border/pen=1/comment=(User=${USER}) defines a border and a comment that includes the configuration variable USER, which would be expanded to its defined value in the printed output (such as John Smith as described above). border/pen=1/comment=(Model=${MS_PLTMODELNAME}) defines a border and a comment that includes the configuration variable MS PLTMODELNAME which would be expanded to display the
3/24/2010

name of the model from which the print is produced.
Page 195 of 329
Raster Printing Properties

This section describes the raster printing properties that are included in a printer driver configuration file. These properties apply to Raster Manager attachments in non-rasterized prints, such as a JPEG printed to non-rasterized PDF. The individual properties that are displayed within the Raster Printing category depend on which printer driver is currently loaded.
In a .pltcfg file the properties appear in the Raster Printing category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a .plt file the qualifiers appear with the Raster_parameters record. The qualifiers can be used alone or in combination. The syntax is: raster_parameters /quality=<value> /contrast=<value> /brightness=<value> /grayscale=<value> /ignore=<value> /monoasis=<value
Legacy .plt files that do not have all raster parameters consolidated into a single Raster_parameters record are still supported.
Raster Quality Factor The Raster Quality Factor is the ratio of printer driver resolution to raster resolution, as a percentage. That is, 100 means that raster data should print at the driver resolution. Setting it to 50 results in raster data printed at half the available resolution, which may be desirable if print's file size is a bigger concern than output quality.
In a .plt file in place of the /quality record, you can substitute /dpi.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default Raster Quality Factor . A number from 0 to 100 100 is the default for almost all printer drivers. The PDF driver's default is 50. /quality
In .PLT file
raster_parameters /quality=<value> A number from 0 to 100 100 is the default for almost all printer drivers. The PDF driver's default is 50.
Raster DPI The Raster DPI is the desired raster output resolution in dots per inch. This property is used instead of the Raster Quality Factor property for drivers with unusual vector resolutions.
This property is used only by the Bentley HPGLRTL printer driver.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default Raster DPI . /dpi
In .PLT file
raster_parameters /dpi=<value>
A number from 1 to the maximum resolution supported by the A number from 1 to the maximum resolution supported by the actual device actual device 300 300
Raster Brightness Used to control raster brightness when printing
3/24/2010

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Raster Brightness Syntax Values Default . 0 /brightness raster_parameters /brightness=<value> 0 In .PLT file
Page 196 of 329
(-)100 to (+)100, where 0 is neutral (-)100 to (+)100, where 0 is neutral
Raster Contrast Used to control raster contrast when printing.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Raster Contrast Syntax Values Default . 0 /contrast raster_parameters /contrast=<value> 0 In .PLT file
(-)100 to (+)100, where 0 is neutral (-)100 to (+)100, where 0 is neutral
Print Raster Controls whether raster data is printed.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Print Raster Syntax Values Default . True, False True /ignore 0, 1 0 In .PLT file . If set to False or 1, no raster data is printed. . raster_parameters /ignore=<value> . Effect of Value
Print Raster in Grayscale Controls whether raster data is printed in grayscale.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Print Raster in Grayscale /grayscale Syntax Values Default . True, False False 0, 1 0 In .PLT file . If set to True or 1, all raster data is printed in grayscale. . raster_parameters /grayscale=<value> . Effect of Value
Ignore Color Rules for Monochrome Raster Controls whether normal color rules are applied to or are ignored for monochrome rasters.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default Ignore Color Rules for Monochrome Raster . True, False False /monoasis In .PLT file . Effect of Value
raster_parameters /monoasis=<value> . 0, 1 0 If set to True or 1, it disables the application of color rules to monochrome raster attachments. .
Printer Communication Properties

This section describes the printer communication properties that are included in a printer driver configuration file. These properties are available only for the PostScript printer driver. They are displayed in the Printer Communication category.
3/24/2010
Page 197 of 329
In a .pltcfg file the properties appear in the Printer Communication category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a .plt file the qualifiers appear with the Communication record. The qualifiers can be used alone or in combination. The syntax is: communication=(handshake=0,baud=9600,par=none,data=8,stop=1)
These are the communication properties used to generate the print file and send it to the printer. Generally the default properties are sufficient. However, if the printer is used with other software that requires different communication properties, you can use the Printer Communication properties to meet those requirements. If you find erroneous lines (zingers), incomplete, or no printed output at all, make sure the communication properties of the printer driver configuration file match the printer setup. EOL1 Specifies the first End of Line terminator character. The default value is 13 (carriage return). EOL2 Specifies the second End of Line terminator character. The default value is 0 (do not use an EOL2 terminator). By default, each line in the PostScript file is separated by a carriage return only. If you open it in an editor like Notepad, the entire file appears to be on one line. If you want it to be readable in Notepad, you can set EOL2=10 (new line). Then each line is separated by a carriage return and a new line, which Notepad interprets as a line break. Qualifiers in .plt files The following table lists qualifiers, their meanings, and their default settings. These qualifiers can be used in .plt files.
Qualifier baud=value checksum databits=n 7 or 8 eom=value value for End of Message Communication method. Allowed values for n are 0, 1, or 2, where: 0=DIRECT CONTROL handshake=n 1=XON/XOFF 2=ACK/NAK (Calcomp 907 format only [east desirable handshake].) numsync=value parity=keyword NONE, ODD, or EVEN port=value serial communications port number number of stop bits, where n can be: stopbits=n 1 or 2 syncval=value sync code value 2 1 1 1024 recordsize=value set record size number of sync chars used parity, where keyword can be: NONE 1 0 3 baud rate enable checksumming number of data bits where n can be: 8 Meaning Default 9,600 no
Examples for .plt files communication=(hand=2, eom=13, record=128) communication=(syncval=22, numsync=1)
3/24/2010
Page 198 of 329
These lines could be used for a CALCOMP 907 controller set up to use ACK/NAK handshaking, an End of Message character of 13 (carriage return), a record size of 128 bytes, a sync value of 22 (decimal), and one synchronization character. communication=(hand=1, eol1=13, eol2=10) communication=(port=1, baud=9600, par=none) communication=(databits=8, stopbits=1) Hewlett-Packard printers may require lines similar to these, which specify the use of XON/XOFF handshaking, set the first end of line terminator to 13 (carriage return), set the second end of line terminator to 10 (line feed), and communicate through the communications port. The second end of line terminator (the line feed) is necessary for certain Hewlett-Packard compatible printers and may be necessary for transmitting print files to another computer for printing. The printing system omits the second end of line terminator, by default, to make print files as compact as possible. Line terminators can be disabled entirely by setting both EOL1 and EOL2 to 0, allowing the file to become a continuous stream of coordinate data.
Advanced Properties
This section describes the advanced properties that are included in a printer driver configuration file. The individual properties that are displayed within the Advanced category depend on which printer driver is currently loaded. These properties appear in the Advanced category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. Always Rasterize OLE Attachments When printing to the Windows printer driver in non-rasterized mode, OLE objects are normally sent directly to the printer driver as vector geometry. This is the most efficient behavior. When printing to a Bentley printer driver, OLE objects must first be rasterized, then the raster data is sent to the driver. In the rare event that rasterized output produces better results than non-rasterized output, this property can be used to instruct the Windows printer driver to output OLE objects the same way as Bentley printer drivers.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Always Rasterize OLE Attachments Values Default False, True, Not defined Not defined
Automatic Rotation Direction Indicates the direction in which printed output is automatically rotated to maximize the area on the page used for the printout. Rotation is not automatic. Rotation occurs only when necessary to fit the printable area of the paper. Take, for example, the case of trying to print a 24 inch x 44 inch image at a one-to-one scale on a 36inch-wide printer. Since it would be impossible to print 44 inches across a 36inch roll, setting this property to Rotate 90 cw instructs the printer to rotate the print 90 degrees clockwise to accommodate the larger dimension. Automatic rotation may be undesirable when using certain long forms. In that case, it can be disabled on a per-paper-size basis.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Values Default . Rotate 90 ccw Rotate 90 cw No Automatic Rotation Rotate 90 cw In .PLT file rotate=<value> 90 ccw 90 cw none Rotate 90 cw
Property or Record Name Automatic Rotation Direction rotate
3/24/2010

Driver Resolution
Page 199 of 329
Specifies the resolution of the printer and the units in which distances on the printer are expressed. The values are specified in dots per unit for the X and Y paper axis.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Driver Resolution resolution Syntax Default . Varies resolution(units)=(<x_resolution>,<y_resolution>) Varies In .PLT file
Driver Resolution Units Specifies the units in which the printer driver resolution is defined.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Driver Resolution Units Syntax Values Default . Inches units resolution(units)=(<x_resolution>,<y_resolution>) in In .PLT file
Millimeters, Centimeters, Decimeters, Meters, Inches, Feet, Dots mm, cm, dm, m, in, ft
Enable Driver Clipping Enables or prevents the printing system from sending clip fences to the printer driver. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses True.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Driver Clipping Values Default False, True, Not defined Not defined
Enable Output Width Enables or prevents the printing system from using non-zero print width symbology. You may want to set this property to False when printing to a laser cutter printer driver that cannot accept non-zero print widths. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses True.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Output Width Syntax Values Default . Not defined In .PLT file enable_output_width enable_output_width=<value> Commented out
False, True, Not defined .
Enable Path Support Enables or prevents the printing system from using path output geometry. You may want to set this property to False when using the HPGL2 or HPGLRTL printer drivers to print to an older printer that cannot accept paths. If this property is not defined, the printing system sets it according to the capabilities of the printer driver.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Path Support Syntax Values Default . Not defined In .PLT file supports_paths supports_paths=<value> Commented out
False, True, Not defined .
End Plot Action
3/24/2010

Specifies the action taken by the printer after printed output has been generated.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax In .PLT file . Effect of Value
Page 200 of 329
End Plot Action end_plot . Beep Eject Pause Replot None
end_plot=<value> . beep eject pause replot=n none eject Sounds the bell after stroking is completed. Advances the page after printing (on printers that support this feature). Takes the printer off line to wait for operator intervention. For HPGL2 and HPGLRTL devices that support the RP command for printing multiple copies. The total number of copies equals the number of replots plus one. No action taken. .
Values
Default
Eject
HP-GL Quality Specifies the quality level written into an HPGL2 or HPGLRTL print file. For more information, refer to the HPGL2 and HPGLRTL reference guide.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name HP-GL Quality Values Default A number from 1 to 100 Not defined
Level of Detail Mode Used to increase printing performance in certain circumstances. It is used in conjunction with the Minimum Level of Detail property.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Level of Detail Mode Show All Values Show Range Show Nothing Default Show Range . Turns off level of detail filtering, in which case all elements are always stroked, regardless of their output size. The print engine checks the output size of each element before printing it. If the output size is smaller than the threshold, a range box is printed instead of stroking the actual element. Ignores the element, which can yield dramatic savings in memory use when printing to a display-list-style driver such as PDF in non-rasterized mode. . Effect of Value
Maximum Mitre Angle Specifies the maximum miter angle for mitered joins on printed output. The value is specified in degrees. Smaller values result in longer spikes.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Maximum Mitre Angle Syntax Values Default . 90 In .PLT file max_miter_angle=<value> max_miter_angle=<value> 90
Minimum Level of Detail Specifies the output pixel size threshold used in level of detail filtering. Elements whose printed size is greater than the threshold are printed normally.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Minimum Level of Detail
3/24/2010

Default 3
Page 201 of 329
Optimize Raster Color Depth When printing in rasterized mode, all output is in true color unless optimized into 256 colors. More time is required for optimized color printing, but it produces more compact print files for typical drawings. This setting also affects how raster data in non-rasterized mode is handled. Color depth optimization is enabled by default for hybrid/vector printer drivers. It is not appropriate for raster output drivers.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Values Default . True, False True In .PLT file optimize_raster_color_depth=<value> True, False True
Property or Record Name Optimize Raster Color Depth optimize_raster_color_depth=<value>
Prefix File Name Specifies the name of a file, the contents of which are added to the beginning of a print file. The file name can include a full or partial path specification. In the absence of a full path specification, the MS_PLTR configuration variable is used to complete the specification. Normally, prefix files are stored in the same directory as the printer driver configuration file.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Default . True In .PLT file prefix=<file_name> Not defined
Property or Record Name Prefix File Name prefix
Print Points Controls whether pattern points are printed.
In the .plt files, point_size is a misnomer; all that matters is whether the value is zero or not.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Print Points . True False True is the default for the cals, jpeg, pdf, png, printer, and tiff files. Default False is the default for the hpgl2, hpglrtl, and pscript files. point_size
In .PLT file . .
Effect of Value
point_size=<value> A number greater than zero 0.0 (zero) 0.1 is the default for the cals, pdf, printer, and tiff files.
Pattern points are printed using diameters calculated from their weights Pattern points are not printed
. 0.0 is the default for the hpgl2, hpglrtl, and pscript files.
Prolog File Name Specifies the PostScript prolog file, the content of which is copied into PostScript print files. The file name can include a full or partial path specification. In the absence of a full path specification, the MS_PLTR configuration variable is used to complete the specification. Normally, prolog files are stored in the same directory as the printer driver configuration file. If this property is not defined, the "pscript.pro" prolog file is used to provide the header for the PostScript file.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Default . Not defined In .PLT file prolog=<file_name> Not defined
Property or Record Name Prolog File Name prolog
3/24/2010

Raster Compression Format
Page 202 of 329
Controls the overall format of compressed data. If you define a raster compression format, you must also define a series of raster compression methods.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Raster Compression Format . 0 1 format
In .PLT file . .
Effect of Value
raster_compression /format=<value> /methods= (value) 0 1
Use default raster compression format. When compression format is set to 1 and compression methods is set to 0, it indicates no compression and that raster data must be transferred by row. This format is more likely to work with printers that claim RTL support. When compression format is set to 2 and compression methods is set to 2 3 1 0 4 5, it indicates full adaptive compression. It is the most aggressive setting and results in the smallest print file. Raster data may be transferred in RTL blocks. Some OCE devices may not support all compression modes. In this case set format to 1 and methods to 2 3 1 0.
Values 2 2
Default
Not defined or set to 0
Not defined or set to 0
Raster Compression Methods Controls the raster compression method and is used in conjunction with the raster compression format. When entering multiple raster compression methods, separate them with single spaces.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Raster Compression Methods methods . 0 1 2 Values 3 4 5 Default Not defined (uses default methods)
In .PLT file . .
Effect of Value
raster_compression /format=<value> /methods= (value) 0 1 2 3 4 5 Not defined (uses default methods)
None (unencoded) Run Length encoding TIFF PackBits encoding Delta Row (Seed Row) encoding Empty Row (valid only if compression format=2) Duplicate Row (valid only if compression format=2) .
Rasterized DPI The resolution of a rasterized print in dots per inch. This property is used instead of the Rasterized Quality Factor property for drivers with unusual device resolutions. Because prints containing fine line work could be badly decimated if not rasterized at device resolution, reducing the rasterized DPI is not recommended.
3/24/2010
Page 203 of 329
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Rasterized DPI Values Default 300
In .PLT file rasterized_parameters /dpi=<value> 300
A number from 1 to the maximum resolution supported by the actual device rasterized_parameters /dpi=<value>
Rasterized Quality Factor The ratio of printer driver resolution to raster resolution, as a percentage, when printing in rasterized mode. That is, 100 means that rasterized prints should be made at the driver resolution. Setting it to 50 results in rasterized prints made at half the available resolution, which may be desirable if print's file size is a bigger concern than output quality. Because prints containing fine line work could be badly decimated if not rasterized at device resolution, reducing the rasterized quality factor is not recommended.
This property is used only by the Windows, PDF, and PostScript printer drivers.
In .PLTCFG file Values Default A number from 0 to 100 100
In .PLT file rasterized_parameters /quality=<value> 100
Property or Record Name Rasterized Quality Factor rasterized_parameters /quality=<value>
Roll Orientation Sets the orientation setting for roll-type media.
This property is used only by the Bentley PostScript printer driver.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Roll Orientation Syntax . Not defined Values Rotate 90 ccw Rotate 180 ccw Rotate 270 ccw Default Not defined roll
In .PLT file . . Not rotated roll=<value> None 1 2 3
Effect of Value
Default Orientation 0
Normal default orientation for the specified page size Rotate image 90 counterclockwise Rotate image 180 counterclockwise Rotate image 270 counterclockwise
Set to 2 but commented out .
Scale Adjustment Factor Specifies a scale factor to apply to geometry after it is generated by the print engine. This property can be used to compensate for inaccurate printer output. For example, if you request an 11x17 inch print, but the printer produces an 11.0 x 16.8" print, you can specify a scale adjustment factor of (1.0, 1.0119) to increase the scale of one axis of its output. The default is 1, 1.
This scaling adjustment does not appear in the Print dialog box.
Start Plot Action Specifies the action to be taken by the printer before the printed output is generated
3/24/2010

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax In .PLT file . Effect of Value
Page 204 of 329
Start Plot Action start_plot . Beep Eject Pause Replot None
start_plot=<value> . beep eject pause replot=n none none Sounds the bell after stroking is completed. Advances the page before printing (on printers that support this feature). Takes the printer off line to wait for operator intervention. For HPGL2 and HPGLRTL devices that support the RP command for printing multiple copies. The total number of copies equals the number of replots plus one. No action taken. .
Values
Default
None
Suffix File Name Specifies the name of a file, the contents of which are added to the end of the print file. The file name can include a full or partial path specification. In the absence of a full path specification, the MS_PLTR configuration variable is used to complete the specification. Normally, suffix files are stored in the same directory as the printer driver configuration file.
In .PLTCFG file Syntax Default . Not defined In .PLT file suffix=<file_name> Not defined
Property or Record Name Suffix File Name suffix
Windows Printer Simple GDI Enables or prevents the printing system from using Simple GDI mode. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses False.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Windows Printer Simple GDI . False Values True Not defined Default Not defined
In .PLT file simple_gdi simple_gdi . . . Commented out . .
Effect of Value
If set to False or if commented out, uses advanced GDI features to reduce print file size and improve output quality. If set to True or if not commented out, uses less sophisticated geometry. This may be desirable when printing to certain types of drivers, such as laser cutting devices. . .
Windows Printer Select Form No Clip Enables or prevents the printing system from using Select Form No Clip mode. This property controls the behavior of the printer driver when automatically selecting a paper size to fit a specified print size. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses False.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Windows Printer Select Form No . Clip False Values True
Effect of Value
If set to False, uses the printable paper size rather than the total size when performing an automatic form search. If set to True, uses the total paper size when performing an automatic form search.
3/24/2010

Not defined Default Not defined . .
Page 205 of 329
Windows Printer Driver

The Bentley Windows printer driver configuration files are named "printer.pltcfg" and "printer.plt". This section describes the properties that are in the "printer.pltcfg" file, and the records and qualifiers that are in the "printer.plt" file.
In a "printer.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Windows Printer category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a "printer.plt" file the qualifiers appear with the Sysprinter record. The qualifiers can be used alone or in combination. The syntax is: sysprinter /name=printer name /form=<value> /orientation=<value> /tray=<value> /fullsheet
Default Windows Printer Name Specifies the Windows printer name. Printers can be accessed locally or across a network. In either case, the printer must have been installed on the machine from which MicroStation is being used. To obtain a valid printer name, open the Start > Settings > Printers window. Below or next to the icon for each printer is the printer name. The printer name takes one of two forms:

A local printer name, such as HP LaserJet 4 Plus. A network printer name, such as hp755cm on printserver, which specifies a printer share name and a network computer.
In .plt files, if the printer name contains spaces or slashes, it must be enclosed in single (`) or double () quotation marks.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Default Windows Printer Name Record Name For a local printer name: HP LaserJet 4 Plus Syntax /name
In .PLT file
For a local printer name: sysprinter /name=HP LaserJet 4 Plus
For a network printer name include the network computer For a network printer name include the network computer name, followed by name, followed by the printer share name: the printer share name: sysprinter /name=\\printserver\hp755cm \\printserver\hp755cm Optional, but recommended. If omitted, the Windows default printer is used. Optional, but recommended. If omitted, the Windows default printer is used.
Default
Default Form Name Specifies the default paper size to be selected. This value can be any valid form name for the selected printer, such as letter, legal, and so on.
For .plt files only Some manufacturers have used form names that contain characters outside the normal ASCII printable range. To handle this case, you can enter a question mark (?) in place of any character and the printing system will match the actual name. If the form name contains spaces or slashes, it must be enclosed in single (`) or double () quotation marks. If the form name contains an inch mark (), use a pair of single quotation marks. In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Default Default Form Name <name of a paper size> Optional, but recommended. If omitted, the Windows default setting for the selected printer is used. /form sysprinter /form=`letter 8 1/2 x 11' Optional, but recommended. If omitted, the Windows default setting for the selected printer is used. In .PLT file
Default Tray Name Specifies the default paper tray to be selected. This value can be any valid tray name for the selected printer, such as Tray 1, Manual
3/24/2010
Page 206 of 329
When a printer has a choice of trays (or paper sources) you can check the available tray names by clicking the Configure Windows Printer icon in the Print dialog box, which opens the system Print dialog box. In this dialog box, you can select a printer and then view the printer's properties, including that for paper source.
For .plt files only Some manufacturers have used tray names that contain characters outside the normal ASCII printable range. To handle this case, you can enter a question mark (?) in place of any character and the printing system will match the actual name. If the tray name contains spaces or slashes, it must be enclosed in single (`) or double () quotation marks. If the tray name contains an inch mark (), use a pair of single quotation marks. In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Default Default Tray Name <name of a paper tray> Optional, but recommended. If omitted, the Windows default setting for the selected printer is used. /tray sysprinter /tray=<tray_name> Optional, but recommended. If omitted, the Windows default setting for the selected printer is used. In .PLT file
Full Sheet Mode If this property is set to False, when the printing system determines the usable part of a sheet of paper, it considers only the printable portion. For example: when printing to an ANSI A sheet of paper (nominally 8.5 x 11 inches), the displayed paper size may be only 8 x 10.5 inches. The advantage of using this mode is that when Maximize is selected, the print area is expanded to the printable area and no geometry is clipped. When Full Sheet Mode is set to True (the default behavior), the print maximizes to the total paper size instead of the printable size. Some geometry may be clipped (by the printer) if it falls into the unprintable area around the edges of the paper.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Full Sheet Mode . True Values False Default True . Not commented out In .PLT file /fullsheet . Effect of Value
sysprinter /fullsheet . . If set to True or if not commented out, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the paper size. If set to False or if commented out, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the printable portion. .
Orientation Specifies the default paper orientation to be selected.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default Orientation . Default Orientation, Portrait, Landscape Optional. If omitted, the Windows default setting for the selected printer is used. /orientation sysprinter /orientation=<value> Default Orientation, Portrait, Landscape Optional. If omitted, the Windows default setting for the selected printer is used. In .PLT file
Default Create Metafile Allows you to set the print's destination in the Print dialog box to Create metafile.
In .PLTCFG file Values Default True, False False . Not defined In .PLT file
Property or Record Name Default Create Metafile Set the model record to model=sysprnmetafile
3/24/2010

PDF Printer Driver
Page 207 of 329
The Bentley PDF printer driver configuration files are named "pdf.pltcfg" and "pdf.plt". This section describes the properties that are in the "pdf.pltcfg" file, and the records and qualifiers that are in the "pdf.plt" file.
In a "pdf.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a "pdf.plt" file the records specific to this printer driver appear in a section at the end of the .plt file.
PDF Version Used to select the version of PDF that is created.

In .PLTCFG file Property or PDF Version Record Name Syntax Values Default . Acrobat 7 (PDF 1.6), Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5)/Viewable in Acrobat 5, Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5), or Acrobat 5 (PDF 1.4) Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5) Version CmdName /appname=pdf /command=Version /qualifier=<value> Acrobat 7 (PDF 1.6), Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5)/Viewable in Acrobat 5, Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5), or Acrobat 5 (PDF 1.4) Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5) In .PLT file
Enable Bookmarks Used to enable or disable book marks.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Bookmarks BookMarks Syntax Values Default . On, Off On CmdName /appname=pdf /command=BookMarks /qualifier=<value> On, Off On In .PLT file
Enable Engineering Links Used to enable or disable engineering links.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Engineering Links EngineeringLinks Syntax Values Default . On, Off On CmdName /appname=pdf /command=EngineeringLinks/qualifier=<value> On, Off On In .PLT file
Enable Optional Content Use to enable or disable optional content in levels and files.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Optional Content EnableOptionalContent Syntax Values Default . On, Off Off CmdName /appname=pdf /command=EnableOptionalContent /qualifier=<value> On, Off Off In .PLT file
Print Optional Content Used to control how optional content in levels and files is printed. Changing the property to As Created allows you to turn on or off l l d f f di l b tf ll i t t t th i i l di l t t
3/24/2010

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Print Optional Content Syntax Values Default . As Displayed PrintOptionalContent In .PLT file
Page 208 of 329
CmdName /appname=pdf /command=PrintOptionalContent /qualifier=<value> AsDisplayed
As Displayed, As Created AsDisplayed, AsCreated
Enable Searchable Text Used to enable or disable searchable text.

In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Searchable Text SearchableText Syntax Values Default . On, Off On CmdName /appname=pdf /command=SearchableText/qualifier=<value> On, Off On In .PLT file
Level Label Used to specify what is used for the level labels in optional content.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Level Label Name Syntax . Level Display Name Values Level Name Level Description Default Level Display Name Name Description DisplayName LevelLabel In .PLT file . Effect of Value
CmdName /appname=pdf /command=LevelLabel /qualifier=<value> . DisplayName Level display names (formatted by the MS_LEVEL_DISPLAY_FORMAT configuration variable) are used. You can use the level name, number, and description in any order. Unformatted level names are used. Level descriptions are used. .
Allow Changes Used to control changes to the PDF. Either the Owner Password property or the User Password property must be set for this setting to take effect.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Allow Changes . Do not allow any changes Allow unrestricted changes Allow inserting, deleting, and rotating pages. Values Allow filling in form fields and signing. Allow commenting, filling in form fields, and signing. Allow any changes except for extracting content and printing. Default Allow unrestricted changes AllowChanges CmdName /appname=pdf /command=AllowChanges /qualifier=<value> 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 In .PLT file
Allow Printing Used to control printing permissions. Either the Owner Password property or the User Password property must be set for this setting to
3/24/2010

take effect.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Allow Printing Syntax Values Default . Do not allow printing Allow high resolution printing Allow high resolution printing AllowPrinting In .PLT file
Page 209 of 329
CmdName /appname=pdf /command=AllowPrinting /qualifier=<value> 0 1 1
Allow only low resolution printing 2
RGB Raster Compression Used to specify the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) raster compression mode in PDF. This property affects only true color raster data, not palette color or monochrome raster. By default, true color raster is converted to palette color or monochrome when the conversion can be done without loss of color depth. When using JPEG RGB compression, this default avoidance of true color raster can actually result in larger PDF files than would otherwise be produced. Therefore, if you change the RGB compression mode to JPEG, you also may want to consider setting the Optimize Raster Color Depth property to False. However, doing so may result in unacceptably poor output of rasterized Excel spreadsheets, or any raster data consisting of thin lines.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax RGB Raster Compression . JPEG Zipped Default Zipped RGBRasterCompression In .PLT file . Effect of Value
CmdName /appname=pdf/command=RGBRasterCompression /qualifier=<value> . jpeg zipped zipped JPEG RGB compression yields smaller PDF files, but at a loss of print quality. Lossless zip compression .
Values
Enable Plot to 3D Used to enable or disable printing to 3D. This property does not turn on or turn off the Plot to 3D check box in the Print dialog box. It merely specifies whether the check box is available. You may want to use this property when printing models containing references with the Plot to 3D icon turned on. By default, the printing system embeds 3D data for those references in the PDF file rather than stroked print geometry. To force creation of PDF files containing no 3D data, set this property to Off.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Enable Plot to 3D EnablePlotTo3D Syntax Values Default . On, Off On CmdName /appname=pdf /command=EnablePlotTo3D /qualifier=<value> On, Off On In .PLT file
Set Page from Plot Size Used to specify that the size of the print, rather than the paper size, should be used to set the PDF page size. Turning this property on is useful when printing a small print size to a very large paper size.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Set Page from Plot Size SetPageFromPlotSize Syntax Values Default . On, Off Off CmdName /appname=pdf /command=SetPageFromPlotSize /qualifier=<value> On, Off Off In .PLT file
3/24/2010

Document Title
Page 210 of 329
Used to specify the document title string embedded in the PDF file. The default below adds the open DGN file name and model name to the PDF file.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Document Title Syntax Default . DocTitle CmdName /appname=pdf /command=DocTitle /qualifier=<value> In .PLT file
$(basename(_DGNFILE))-$(MS_PLTMODELNAME) $(basename(_DGNFILE))-$(MS_PLTMODELNAME)
Author Used to specify the author string embedded in the PDF file.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Author Syntax Default . Not defined Author CmdName /appname=pdf /command=Author /qualifier=$(USERNAME) Commented out In .PLT file
Owner Password Used to add the owner password if you would like to protect the PDF that is created. If this password is set, you not be able to change the PDF's permissions without specifying it. If the User Password property is defined but the owner password is not, the user password also is used as the owner password.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Owner Password OwnerPassword Syntax Default . Not defined CmdName /appname=pdf /command=OwnerPassword /qualifier=<my_owner_password>) Commented out In .PLT file
User Password Used to add the user password if you would like to protect the PDF that is created. If this password is set, you not be able to open or view the PDF without specifying it.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name User Password UserPassword Syntax Default . Not defined CmdName /appname=pdf /command=UserPassword /qualifier=<my_user_password> Commented out In .PLT file
HPGLRTL Printer Driver

The HPGLRTL printer driver produces HPGL-2 vectors from vector data sources and RTL rasters from raster data sources. Many devices that support HPGL-2/RTL have numerous limitations. For example, these devices do not support both HPGL-2 vectors and RTL rasters in the same print. Nor do they support all the different RTL pixel formats and color depth. In addition, they may not support all of the RTL compression modes described in the RTL specification from Hewlett Packard. The Bentley HPGLRTL printer driver configuration files are named "hglrtl.pltcfg" and "hpglrtl.plt". This section describes the properties that are in the "hglrtl.pltcfg" file, and the records and qualifiers that are in the "hpglrtl.plt" file.
In a "hglrtl.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a "hpglrtl.plt" file the records specific to this printer driver appear in a section at the end of the .plt file.
3/24/2010

Merge
Page 211 of 329
Provides control over the color of pixels where graphics intersect on the page. For more information, refer to the HPGL2 and HPGLRTL Reference Guide.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Merge Syntax Values Default . On Off Default Not defined merge On Off Default Set to On but commented out In .PLT file . Merge control is enabled. Merge control is disabled. Uses the printer's default setting. . CmdName /appname=hpglrtl /parsed=merge /unparsed=<value> . Effect of Value
Color Table File Name Used to specify a file containing a color lookup table to use. This can be used to color-correct HPGLRTL being sent to printers such as an HP DesignJet. One table, hp1055cm-v0201.tbl, is delivered for you to use as a starting point for your own customization.
If print color correction is a concern, Bentley recommends printing using the Windows printer driver instead of the generic Bentley HPGLRTL driver. In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Values Default Color Table File Name . <name of a file containing a color lookup table> Not defined setColorTableFile CmdName /appname=hpglrtl /parsed=setColorTableFile /unparsed=<value> hp1055cm-v0201.tbl Set but commented out In .PLT file
RGB Pen Number The MicroStation V8 XM Edition and later print engines produce only true color output geometry. For compatibility with the pen-based HPGLRTL printer language, the printing system looks up output colors in the print color table and writes the corresponding pen numbers into the print file. In the event the color cannot be found in the color table, a pen is defined on the fly. This property specifies the pen number that is used in those cases. This is an advanced setting, and should normally be left undefined. If it is undefined, 255 is used.
HPGL2 Printer Driver

The HPGL2 printer driver is similar to the HPGLRTL printer driver. The Bentley HPGL2 printer driver configuration files are named "hpgl2.pltcfg" and "hpgl2.plt". This section describes the properties that are in the "hpgl2.pltcfg" file, and the records and qualifiers that are in the "hpgl2.plt" file.
In a "hpgl2.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a "hpgl2.plt" file the records specific to this printer driver appear in a section at the end of the .plt file.
Merge See information about this property in the HPGLRTL printer driver configuration file. The only difference between the two printer drivers is that in the hpgl2.plt syntax, the /appname=hpgl2.
3/24/2010

RGB Pen Number See information about this property in the HPGLRTL printer driver configuration file.
Page 212 of 329
PostScript Printer Driver

The Bentley PostScript printer driver configuration files are named "pscript.pltcfg" and "pscript.plt". This section describes the properties that are in the "pscript.pltcfg" file, and the records and qualifiers that are in the "pscript.plt" file.
In a "pscript.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a "pscript.plt" file the records specific to this printer driver appear in a section at the end of the .plt file.
Language Level Sets the maximum PostScript language level to be used.

In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Language Level LanguageLevel Syntax Values Default . 1, 3 3 CmdName /appname=pscript /command=LanguageLevel /qualifier=<value> 1, 3 3 In .PLT file
Title Used to specify the title string embedded in the PostScript file. The default below adds the open DGN file name and model name to the PostScript file.
In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Syntax Default Title . $(basename(_DGNFILE))$(MS_PLTMODELNAME) PostScriptTitle CmdName /appname=pscript /command=PostScriptTitle /qualifier=<value> $(basename(_DGNFILE))-$(MS_PLTMODELNAME) In .PLT file
Color Scheme Used to specify CMYK (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow/Black) output rather than the default RGB (Red/Green/Blue) output.
In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Color Scheme Syntax Values Default . RGB CMYK Not defined colorScheme CmdName /appname=pscript /parsed=colorScheme /unparsed=<value> CMYK . Commented out In .PLT file
Encoding Vector Used to set the font encoding vector. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses Standard Encoding.
In a .plt file, before uncommenting either line, ensure that your associated .pro file contains a procedure called reencodefont.
3/24/2010

In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Encoding Vector Syntax Values Default . EncodingVector CmdName /appname=pscript /command=EncodingVector /qualifier=<value> In .PLT file
Page 213 of 329
Standard Encoding StandardEncoding ISOLatin1 Encoding ISOLatin1Encoding Not defined Commented out
Thumbnail Format Used to add a TIFF preview image to the output file. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses No Thumbnail.
In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Thumbnail Format Syntax Values Default . 256-color Thumbnail No Thumbnail Not defined thumbnail CmdName /appname=pscript /parsed=thumbnail /unparsed=<value> tiff . Commented out In .PLT file
True Color Thumbnail tiff24
Thumbnail Pixel Size Used to set the size of the thumbnail image. The size is set in pixels.
In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Thumbnail Pixel Size Syntax Values Default . 512 thumbnailResolution CmdName /appname=pscript /parsed=thumbnailResolution /unparsed=<value> 512 In .PLT file
Setup File Name Used to include the contents of a file in the Setup section of the PostScript output file. You must specify the appropriate file name.
In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Setup File Name importPsSetup Syntax Default . Not defined CmdName /appname=pscript /parsed=importPsSetup /unparsed=<file_name> Commented out and no file name specified In .PLT file
CALS Printer Driver

The CALSDRIVER is new to MicroStation. It is a specialized printer driver that replaces the generic LORIP driver for producing CALS raster print files. CALSDRIVER requires a complete print frame buffer in memory, but it is compressed much better than the LORIP RGB memory frame buffer. CALSDRIVER leverages the rasterized printing capability of the V8 XM Edition. When this driver is selected, the Print dialog box's Rasterized check box is selected and cannot be changed. The Print dialog box's Color list box is set to Monochrome and cannot be changed.
All rasterized output from the V8 XM Edition graphics subsystem is true color data obtained from the computer's video card, with anti-aliasing effects applied. The conversion to monochrome requires dithering. As a result, the resulting monochrome raster print file may be less sharp than the input design, even if the design contains only monochrome data.
The Bentley CALS printer driver configuration files are named "cals.pltcfg" and "cals.plt". This section describes the properties that are in
3/24/2010

the "cals.pltcfg" file.
Page 214 of 329
In a "cals.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. Full Sheet Mode See information about this property in the Windows printer driver configuration file. If it is not defined, the printing system uses On.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Full Sheet Record Name Mode Syntax . On Values Off Default Not defined Off Not defined FullSheet In .PLT file . Effect of Value
CmdName /appname=calsDriver /command=FullSheet /qualifier=<value> . On If set to On, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the paper size. If set to Off, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the printable portion. .
TIFF Printer Driver

The TIFFDRIVER is a specialized printer driver that replaces the generic LORIP driver for producing TIFF raster print files. TIFFDRIVER is capable of writing both monochrome and true color TIFF files. TIFFDRIVER generates output one scan line at a time, rather than storing the entire print in memory as LORIP does. This enables you to use larger output sizes and/or resolutions than you could previously using the LORIP driver. TIFFDRIVER leverages the rasterized printing capability of the MicroStation V8 XM Edition. When this driver is selected, the Print dialog box's Rasterized check box is selected and cannot be changed.
All rasterized output from the MicroStation V8 XM Edition graphics subsystem is true color data obtained from the computer's video card, with anti-aliasing effects applied. The conversion to monochrome requires dithering. As a result, the resulting monochrome raster print file may be less sharp than the input design, even if the design contains only monochrome data.
The delivered "tiff.plt" has been rewritten to use TIFFDRIVER instead of the LORIP driver. Several TIFF-specific properties (listed below) are now available. If you want to take advantage of TIFFDRIVER functionality you must switch to the new "tiff.plt" file. If you are using "tiff.plt" files from previous editions of MicroStation, they will continue to reference the LORIP driver. They will continue to work because the LORIP driver is still included in the product. The Bentley TIFF printer driver configuration files are named "tiff.pltcfg" and "tiff.plt". This section describes the properties that are in the "tiff.pltcfg" file, and the records and qualifiers that are in the "tiff.plt" file.
In a "tiff.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a "tiff.plt" file the records specific to this printer driver appear in a section at the end of the .plt file.
Full Sheet Mode See information about this property in the Windows printer driver configuration file.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Full Sheet Mode . FullSheet In .PLT file . Effect of Value
CmdName /appname=tiffDriver /command=FullSheet /qualifier=<value> .
3/24/2010
Page 215 of 329

If set to On or if not commented out, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the paper size. If set to Off or if commented out, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the printable portion. .
On Values Off Default On
On
Off Not commented out
Compression Type Specifies the data compression technique. Unless the Compression Type property is disabled, TIFFDRIVER uses lossless LZW compression when creating full color TIFF files. JPEG compression is not available due to the use of scan lines rather than tiles when writing the TIFF file.
In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Syntax Compression Type . None Compression In .PLT file . Effect of Value
CmdName /appname=tiffDriver /command=Compression /qualifier=<value> . None In the Print dialog box, you can set the Color to Monochrome, Grayscale, or True Color. In the Print dialog box, you can set the Color to Monochrome, Grayscale, or True Color. In the Print dialog box, the Color is set to Monochrome. In the Print dialog box, the Color is set to Monochrome. .
Values
LZW
LZW
CCITTFAX4 CCITTRLE Default
CCITTFAX4 CCITTRLE
LZW for color output and LZW CCITTFAX4 for monochrome output.
Photometric Flag Controls whether bitmap background pixels are displayed in white or black. The setting is relevant only when you use a monochrome compression type.
Raster editors interpret the 0 and 1 values differently. Your raster editor may interpret 0 as white and 1 as black, and another editor may interpret them the opposite way. In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Photometric Flag Syntax Values Default . 0 1 Photometric CmdName /appname=tiffDriver /command=Photometric /qualifier=<value> 0 1 In .PLT file
Determine Automatically Auto Determine Automatically Auto
Document Name Used to specify the document name embedded in the TIFF file. The default below adds the open DGN file name and model name to the TIFF file.
In .PLTCFG file P t N Document Name DocumentName In .PLT file
3/24/2010

Record Syntax Default . $(basename(_DGNFILE))$(MS_PLTMODELNAME)
Page 216 of 329
CmdName /appname=tiffDriver /command=DocumentName /qualifier=<value> $(basename(_DGNFILE))-$(MS_PLTMODELNAME)
Description Used to specify the description embedded in the TIFF file.

In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Description Syntax Default . Not defined Description CmdName /appname=tiffDriver /command=Description /qualifier= Commented out In .PLT file
Page Name Used to specify the page name embedded in the TIFF file.
In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Page Name Syntax Default . Not defined PageName CmdName /appname=tiffDriver /command=PageName /qualifier= Commented out In .PLT file
Artist Used to specify the artist embedded in the TIFF file.

In .PLTCFG file Property Name or Record Artist Syntax Default . Not defined Artist CmdName /appname=tiffDriver /command=Artist /qualifier=$(USERNAME) Commented out In .PLT file
LORIP Printer Driver

The Bentley JPEG printer driver configuration files are named "jpeg.pltcfg" and "jpeg.plt". The Bentley PNG printer driver configuration files are named "png.pltcfg" and "png.plt". This section describes the properties that are in the "jpeg.pltcfg" and "png.pltcfg" files, and the records and qualifiers that are in the "jpeg.plt" and "png.plt" files. These printer driver configuration files use a LORIP printer driver.
In a "jpeg.pltcfg" or "png.pltcfg" file the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. In a "jpeg.plt"or "png.plt" file the records specific to this printer driver appear in a section at the end of the .plt file.
Raster File Format Used to specify the output raster file format to be produced by the LORIP printer driver.
The TIFF printer driver replaces the LORIP driver's TIFF raster file format.
In .PLTCFG file P t
In .PLT file
Effect of Value
3/24/2010

Name or Record Syntax Raster File Format . JPEG Format .
Page 217 of 329
CmdName /appname=lorip /command=Format /qualifier=<value> . 18 The printer driver generates a JFIF file. The LORIP driver is restricted to RGB raster formats. The printer driver generates a PNG file. The LORIP driver is restricted to RGB raster formats. The printer driver generates a TIFF file. The LORIP driver is restricted to RGB raster formats. .
Values
PNG
28
TIFF Set to the value appropriate for the selected .pltcfg file.
Default
Set to the value appropriate for the selected .pltcfg file.
Full Sheet Mode See information about this property in the Windows printer driver configuration file. If it is not defined, the printing system uses Off for compatibility with Bentley Publisher.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name Syntax Full Sheet Mode . On Values Off Default Not defined Off Not defined FullSheet In .PLT file . Effect of Value
CmdName /appname=lorip /command=FullSheet /qualifier=<value> . On If set to On, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the paper size. If set to Off, the dimensions of the output print file are equal to the printable portion. .
JPEG Quality Used to specify JPEG quality. Forty represents low quality (high compression) and 90 represents high quality (low compression). The JPEG Quality property is used only when the Raster File Format property is set to JPEG.
In .PLTCFG file Property or Record Name JPEG Quality Syntax Values Default . 75 JpegQuality CmdName /appname=lorip /command=JpegQuality /qualifier=<value> 75 In .PLT file
%include in .plt files Using the %include statement in your printer driver lets you include another file containing printer driver information. Typically, the included file will not be a complete .plt file but instead will contain one or more records that can be shared by other parent files. Multiple %include statements may be used to include multiple files. Included files, in turn, may include other files. Syntax: %include file_name where file_name is the name of the file to be included. Quotation marks enclosing the file name are optional and may be either quotes (`) or quotation marks (). The file name may include a path or extension. If the path or extension is omitted, the missing values are taken from the MS_PLTR configuration variable. Configuration variables also may be used in %include statements to define where those included files can be found. For example, %include msdir:papersizes.inc. In addition you can use %include $(msdir)papersizes.inc, which provides flexibility because you can use multiple variables: $(project)$(user).
LORIP %include
The delivered LORIP printer driver files "jpeg.plt", "png.plt", and "tiff.plt" (the old TIFF printer driver delivered prior to V8 XM Edition's first SELECT update) make use of an %include statement to consolidate many of their common settings. Note that, as with the P tS i t l fil ill dt thi i l d fil l ith it t lt fil t t MS PLTR di t R f t th
3/24/2010

comments in the header section of "lorip_common.inc".
LORIP full sheet mode
Page 218 of 329
The delivered LORIP common include file (lorip_common.inc) contains a CmdName record that permits you to create raster offline files whose sizes are equal to the sheet size. Plot origins are correctly reflected inside the image data. Remove the semicolon at the beginning of the line below to create raster file sizes equal to the sheet size instead of the plot area size. Note that this line should be commented out when using this driver with Bentley Publisher. ;CmdName /appname=lorip /command=fullSheet /qualifier=ON
Exceptions
A file cannot include itself nor another file more than once. A file cannot include a file that would cause the inclusion process to loop back on itself. For example, if File A includes File B and File B attempts to include File A, then File Bs %include statement is ignored.
Example
Typically, the include file will not be a complete .plt file but instead will contain one or more records that can be shared by other parent files. Take, for example, the Style record, which supports device-independent units. You could move these definitions out of your printer driver configuration files and place them into a single shared file, which then could be included in all your printer driver configuration files. You then can modify the style definitions for all your printers by editing this one shared file.
PLT File Records

This section describes some records that are included in .plt printer driver configuration files. Some of these records are not used in .pltcfg files, some are used but are not editable in .pltcfg files, and others can be edited in .pltcfg files in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. Default_scale Specifies the default scale factor to generate printed output at the same scale every time.
Default scale is used in .pltcfg files. You can edit and add a default print scale in the Edit Paper Sizes dialog box.
Syntax: default_scale=<scale factor> Default: Largest printed output that fits on page. That is, the size and scale factors are set for printed output to be the largest that fits on the paper size selected. If the Default_scale record exists anywhere in the printer driver configuration file, the printing system uses this scale factor to set the starting scale when you open the Print dialog box. Driver Specifies the name of an MDL printer driver used to stroke the printed output. The driver may reside either in the directory pointed to by the MS_MDL configuration variable or in the same directory as the printer driver.
The Driver record is used in .pltcfg files, but it is not editable in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box. When you create a printer driver configuration file you select a type of driver. Once the file is created you cannot change the driver.
3/24/2010

Syntax: driver=<file_name> where file_name is the name of the MDL printer driver to be used. A full path may be specified.
Page 219 of 329
Drivers named in the delivered printer driver configuration files are required and should not be changed.
Font Specifies the device font name to be mapped to MicroStation font numbers, SHX font names, or TrueType font names. The font records are valid for Windows printer drivers and Bentley PostScript printer drivers.
Font properties are used in .pltcfg files. You can edit and add font maps on the Font Maps tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box and in the Edit Font Map dialog box.
Syntax: FONT(fontName)=(<IGDS font number list>) [/Kern=n] [/Sizeratio=m] FONT(fontName)=(<TrueType or SHX font name>) [/Kern=n] [/Sizeratio=m] FONT(fontName)=(ALL TTF) [/Kern=n] [/Sizeratio=m] FONT(fontName)=(ALL SHX) [/Kern=n] [/Sizeratio=m] FONT(USE GDI FOR TRUE TYPE FONTS) [/Kern=n] [/Sizeratio=m] (sysprinter only) All quote marks in the preceding syntax examples are literal; they must be included as shown. Wild cards or other pattern recognition methods are not supported; each font name must be specified precisely. Where: fontName is the name of the PostScript font to use. IGDS font number list is the font number or numbers inside MicroStation to map to fontName. Kern is the inter-character spacing controlled by the parameter n. Sizeratio is a ratio that can be set with the parameter m to adjust how large the font is printed (where 1 is the default size). MicroStation font numbers have the following ranges: 0-255 for IGDS fonts, 512-1023 for AutoCAD SHX fonts, and 1024-(max_int) for TrueType fonts. Note that only integers 0-255 may be used in the IGDS font number list. TrueType or SHX fonts may not be specified using numerical ranges. It is legal to use ALL TTF and/or LL SHX to assign default font mappings to all SHX and TrueType fonts, then override that mapping for particular font names. The order in which ALL TTF, ALL SHX, and font name mappings appear in the printer driver configuration file is not important. This is not what-you-see-is-what-you-get in the sense that you may see a font in the DGN file that looks different from the printed output. You can adjust the Sizeratio value to make the printed text more like the MicroStation font for which it is substituted. Making the characters taller also makes them wider. In order for this mapping to work correctly, the font must be resident in the printer prior to sending the print file to the printer. Where a font is listed more than once, the last record in the file defines the mapping parameters.
Examples for .plt files
font(Helvetica)=(1 2 44 52) /Kern=35
3/24/2010

font(Courier)=(53,67) /Kern=25
Page 220 of 329
These lines can be used to map fonts 1, 2, 44-52, 54-66 and 68-126 to the Helvetica font, and to map fonts 53 and 67 to the Courier font on the PostScript printer. font(Helvetica)=(1,2,44-126) /Kern=35 /Sizeratio=1.5 In this case, the Helvetica characters are printed 50% larger than they are in the first example. The USE GDI FOR TRUE TYPE FONTS device font name is a special case supported only for system printers. If specified, all TrueType fonts in the DGN file are output as text through the Windows printing system, instead of being vectorized by MicroStation. Model Specifies the printer model.
The Model record is stored in .pltcfg files, but it is not editable in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box.
Syntax: model=<model_name> where model_name can be HPGL2, POSTSCRIPT, or MDL. Models named in the delivered printer driver configuration files are required by the printer driver configuration files and should not be changed. In the "printer.plt" printer driver configuration file the default is model=sysprinter. This sets the print's destination in the Print dialog box to Send to printer. To change the print's destination to Create metafile, change the Model record to model=sysprnmetafile. Num_pens When you create designs it is normal to use colored lines to help discern the various elements of the design. When these designs are printed on a color printer the lines are printed in the same colors (unless resymbolized with a pen table), which may make them hard to read. This applies particularly to colors such as yellow and cyan, which are easily seen against the black background of your screen but not so easily seen against the white paper background. The Num_pens record indicates how many pens the selected printer can use.
The Num_pens record is not used in .pltcfg files. The MicroStation V8 XM Edition's graphics system is true color throughout, and there is no arbitrary pen limit in the supported printer drivers. When a .plt file is imported that contains num_pens=1, the Default Color Mode is automatically set to Monochrome. Other values of num_pens, such as 8, are automatically upgraded to 255.
Syntax: num_pens=<number> where <number> can be a number from 1 to 255, inclusive. Typically, printer drivers for color printers have the following setting to accommodate the colors in MicroStations color palette: num_pens=255
Changing this setting to num_pens=1 forces all colors to the first color in the color table. If the first color is white, it will be plotted as black.
Alternatively, you can change this setting temporarily via the Print dialog box. In the General Settings section of the Print dialog box, the Color list box lets you select from Monochrome, Grayscale, or True Color for the printed output. Pen Defines the parameters that determine which pens to use to draw individual elements and specify the velocity force and acceleration of
3/24/2010

each pen (when possible).
Page 221 of 329
Pen properties are used in .pltcfg files. You can edit and add color maps on the Color Maps tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box and in the Edit Color Maps dialog box.
Syntax: pen(pen_number)=(<colors, weights, or levels>)[qualifiers] Where: pen_number is a number between 1 and num_pens that specifies which pen is affected by this record. colors, weights, or levels is a list of color numbers, weight numbers, or level numbers. The colors (0-255), weights (0-31) or levels (1-63) list should be a series of numbers separated by commas for individual numbers, or dashes to indicate a range of numbers. If no pen records exist in the printer driver, the default pen-to-color/weight mapping is established so that the pens are assigned to colors cyclically, with color 0 assigned to pen 1, color 1 assigned to pen 2, and so on. Colors are always assigned to the last pen for which they are specified. If a pen record is too long, it can be split into two pen records with the same pen_number. Valid qualifiers are:
Qualifier /speed= /force= /acceleration= /rgb= /grayscale /screen= /widthmm What It Specifies Speed of pen, as a decimal number in cm/s. See printer documentation for limits on pen speed for your printer. Force of pen, as an integer and should be defined in printer documentation. The HP7470 and HP7475 printers do not allow force selection and will ignore this parameter. Acceleration of pen, as an integer and should be defined in printer documentation. The HP7470 and HP7475 printers do not allow acceleration selection and will ignore this parameter. Specification of pen color using the RGB color model. If you are using a pen printer, the RGB qualifier is desirable for on-screen print preview. If you are using a printer with programmable color, the RGB qualifier lets you override the screen color when printing. Sets the pen to grayscale, without requiring an RGB value. Assigns screening to a pen. Requires a value from 0.0 to 100.0. A value of 0.0 results in pure white, and 100.0 in no screening. Output line width in millimeters.
If pen speed, force, or acceleration is omitted, the values are assumed to be set up in the printer (normal case). The /widthmm = qualifier lets you map color indices to both plot output colors (/rgb=...) and physical line widths (/widthmm=...). For some resymbolization work flows, where the display color controls or defines line width, you can specify pen color and width in the PLT file, potentially minimizing the need for a pen table.
Any pen widths specified using the /widthmm qualifier take precedence over the weight_strokes statement.
Examples for .plt files
pen(4)=(1,3,20-33,44) Specifies that colors (assuming that color is the pen change criteria) 1, 3, 20 through 33 and color 44 are to be drawn with pen number 4. pen(1)=(1-128) pen(2)=(4,7,20) Specifies that elements with colors 4, 7, and 20 are drawn using pen 2 and all others are drawn using pen 1.
3/24/2010

pen(2)=(6)/rgb=(100,100,100) ;medium gray
Page 222 of 329
Specifies that color 6 (assuming that color is the pen change criteria) is to be mapped to RGB values of 100,100,100 and drawn using pen 2. It is good practice to add a comment such as shown here (;medium gray) describing the assigned color. pen(1) = (0) /rgb=(000, 000, 000) /widthmm=0.5 pen(2) = (1) /rgb=(000, 000, 000) /widthmm=0.25 pen(3) = (2) /widthmm=0.15 pen(4) = (3-254) /rgb=(128, 128, 128) /widthmm=0.1 Assigns the color indices 0 and 1 to black, with 0.5 and 0.25 mm line widths respectively. Color index 2 uses the RGB value from the file's color table and assigns a 0.15 mm line width. Every other color index plots 50% gray with 0.1 mm width. Size As a rule, printers are capable of printing on sheets of various sizes. The Paper list box in the Print dialog box lets you select the required sheet size. Size records in the printer driver configuration files specify the paper sizes supported by the printer. At least one Size record must be in the printer driver configuration file.
Size properties are used in .pltcfg files. You can edit and add paper sizes on the Paper Sizes tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box and in the Edit Paper Sizes dialog box.
Syntax: size=(X,Y) /units=<value> /name=<value> MicroStation permits both ISO and ANSI paper sizes to be defined simultaneously in a printer driver file. Each Size record contains the size of the paper, a /units qualifier to indicate how the paper size and offset should be interpreted, and the name of the paper size. For example: size=(8.5, 11) /units=in /name=ANSI A size=( 11, 17) /units=in /name=ANSI B size=( 17, 22) /units=in /name=ANSI C size=( 22, 34) /units=in /name=ANSI D size=( 34, 44) /units=in /name=ANSI E size=(210, 297) /units=mm /name=ISO A4 size=(297, 420) /units=mm /name=ISO A3 size=(420, 594) /units=mm /name=ISO A2 size=(594, 841) /units=mm /name=ISO A1 size=(841, 1189) /units=mm /name=ISO A0 Each printer driver file contains a single Resolution record, defined in inverted DPI, that is not necessarily tied to the Size records. Printer driver files should not contain multiple Resolution records. For legacy printer driver files, where the Size records do not contain a /units qualifier, the Size record uses the Resolution record's units instead.
The "printer.plt" gets its resolution from the Windows printer driver, so there is no Resolution record in the "printer.plt".
3/24/2010
Page 223 of 329
Historically a printable area modelhas been used in printer driver paper size definitions. The Size record specified the dimensions of the printable area, and the /offset qualifier specified the exterior distance from the physical paper corner to the printable area corner. For example, for an ANSI A sheet with 0.5" margins on each side, the Size record would be: size=(10,7.5) /offset=(0.5,0.5). This specification method is different from that used by system printers, where the physical sheet size is defined along with an interior margin. Now the Size records can use either page model.

If the Size record contains the /offset qualifier, then the paper size is assumed to be the printable area. If the Size record contains the /margin qualifier, then the paper size is assumed to be the physical sheet size.
You can control line weight and line style scaling on an individual paper size basis by specifying one of the following qualifiers for the Size record. Each qualifier takes a value greater than zero, with 1.0 indicating no scaling.

/weightScale=<scale> scales the widths defined in the Weight_Strokes record. /styleScale=<scale> scales the pattern lengths defined in the Styles record. /penScale=<scale> sets both line weightScale and line styleScale.
An example of where this feature may be useful is when the Weight_strokes record is set correctly for an ANSI C paper size. When creating an ANSI A half-size plot, the output widths would be too wide. Rather than create a new, half-size printer driver file, you could add /weightScale=0.5 to your ANSI A paper size definition. More information about all Size record qualifiers is shown below:
Qualifier What It Specifies If used, the paper size is assumed to be the physical sheet size. Supply values for the interior margins in printer units. If the right_margin and top_margin values are omitted, the left and bottom margins will be symmetrical across the page. For example, the three Size records below are equivalent: /margin=<left margin>, <bottom margin>, <right margin>, <top margin> /units=<value>

size=(10, 7.5) /offset=(0.5, 0.5) /units=in size=(11, 8.5) /margin=(0.5, 0.5, 0.5, 0.5) /units=in size=(11, 8.5) /margin=(0.5, 0.5) /units=in
If used, the paper size is assumed to be the printable area. /offset=(X,Y) Specifies the exterior distance from the physical paper corner to the printable area corner in printer units. /weightScale=<scale> /styleScale=<scale> /penScale=<scale> Scales the widths defined in the Weight_Strokes record. Scales the pattern lengths defined in the Styles record. Sets both line weightScale and line styleScale. Indicates the units that will be used to interpret the paper size and offset. /units=<value> Valid values are: in, mm. In older print driver files where the Size record does not contain a units qualifier, the Resolution record's units are used instead. Paper size number (on HP7475A and some HPGL2 devices) to specify paper size. (The HP7470 uses only one paper size and the other printer models sense the paper size automatically.) Use /number=0 for either B or A3 paper or /number=4 for A or A4 paper. /number=n or Form length, in inches, for some MDL-driven, ESC/P-language printers, such as the Canon BJ230, that accommodate ledger size paper but lack a DIP switch for turning off the page break skip feature. /scale=n Sets the default printing scale factor for the paper size. Manually sets the print origin: 1 S t l l ft
3/24/2010

Page 224 of 329

p2 Sets upper right corner both Sets both corners
/manual_origin=<origin qualifier> (HewlettPackard printers only)
If either p1 or p2 is used, the size of the drawing is determined by the size and scale factors in the Print dialog box. The position on the page is determined by the setting of the p1 or p2 point on the printer. If the both qualifier is used, the printed output is fit between the p1 and p2 points set up on the printer at print time. The size and scale factors in the Print dialog box are irrelevant. Name to specify the paper size. Each name should be unique. If the name contains spaces it must have quotation marks around it. Each Size record must have a /name= keyword. Indicates that this is the default paper size for the printer driver. Only one Size record should have the /default qualifier.
/name=
/default= When more than one Size record is present and no default is indicated, the last Size record in the file becomes the default paper size.
Style Used to map DGN file line styles to printed line styles.
The Style property is used in .pltcfg files. You can edit line styles on the Line Styles tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box and in the Edit Print Line Styles dialog box.
Syntax: style(style_number) = (<pen_down,pen_up>)/qualifier/units=MM,IN,or DOTS Where style_number is the line style number (in the range 0 and 7), which corresponds to the MicroStation line code number. pen_down, pen_up these pairs are distances represented in specified units or in printer resolution units. /units=MM or /units=IN specifies that the pen_down, pen_up pairs are in millimeters or inches respectively. Where /units=DOTS or when /units is not specified, then distances are in printer units, which vary for different printers. DOTS is the default. Default: Varies according to printer. If a printer can generate user-defined line styles, the printing subsystem downloads a pattern to the printer. Several printers support this feature. For other printers, use the /nohardware qualifier in the Style record. Line styles are a series of pen down, pen up distances that define one repetition of the pattern being drawn. Line styles can be up to 11 inches long and can have up to 5 pen down, pen up pairs. Valid values for /qualifier are: /hardware indicates that a printer is capable of generating custom line styles. When this qualifier is used, the printing subsystem downloads the line style pattern to the printer. This is the default value if no qualifier is specified. /nohardware indicates that a printer does not support the generation of custom line styles.
Example for .plt files
Using the /units setting makes the task of defining line styles much easier than using printer resolution units. Take, for example, a Calcomp 907 printer with a resolution of 2032 lines per inch. If /units is set to DOTS or left out completely, then definitions are in printer resolution units. To define style number 2 as a 1/2 inch line, followed by a 1/4 inch space, followed by an 1/8 inch line, and then followed by a 1/4 inch space, in printer resolution units, the style record would read: style(2)=(1016 508 254 508) /nohardware
3/24/2010

On HP printers with a resolution of 1016 lines per inch using printer resolution units, the record would read: style(2)=(508, 254, 127, 254)/nohardware
Page 225 of 329
If the /units qualifier is set to IN for both printers, then the record is the same for both printers and is much simpler to understand: style(2)=(0.5, 0.25, 0.125, 0.25) /nohardware/units=IN Weight_strokes Specifies the mapping of MicroStation line weights to line thicknesses in the printed output.
Weight Strokes properties are used in .pltcfg files. You can edit weight maps on the Weight Maps tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog box and in the Edit Weight Maps dialog box.
Syntax: weight_strokes(units)=(list) where: units can be mm, in, or dots (the default) to specify that line thicknesses are printed in millimeters, inches, or printer resolution units, respectively. list is a list of line thicknesses, expressed in millimeters, inches, or dots (printer resolution units). For example the following entry: weight_strokes(mm)=(0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.00, 1.25, 1.50, 1.75, 2.00, \ 2.25, 2.50, 2.75, 3.00, 3.25, 3.50, 3.75, 4.00, \ 4.25, 4.50, 4.75, 5.00, 5.25, 5.50, 5.75, 6.00, \ 6.25, 6.50, 6.75, 7.00, 7.25, 7.50, 7.75, 8.00) lists line thicknesses in millimeters (mm) for each MicroStation line weight from 0 through to line weight 31. Each line thickness is separated by a comma. Because the entry spans more than one line, backslashes are placed at the end of preceding lines to tell the system to continue reading the record on the following line. Where no units are specified or when dots is specified as the units, then the line thicknesses are based on printer resolution units. The listed values specify the number of strokes that are used for each line weight when line weight is enabled. Thus, printers with different resolution units will require different settings to produce the same line thickness. If omitted, the default value is the line weight divided by 2.
Example for .plt files
If you used the following record: weight_strokes(mm)=(0.25,0.50,0.75,1.00,1.25,1.50,1.75,2.00) then line weight 0 is printed at a thickness of 0.25mm, line weight 1 is printed at a thickness of 0.50mm, and so on. This record is valid for any printer because the units are specified as millimeters. When dots is specified as the units or if units are omitted, the stroke thickness for a line weight in millimeters is computed by multiplying the corresponding weight_strokes value by the printers resolution units. If, for example, the printer resolution units are 0.025, then the following: weight_strokes=(10,20,30,40,50,60,70,80) causes line weight 0 to be drawn 0.25 mm wide (10 x 0.025), line weight 1 to be drawn 0.50 mm wide (20 x 0.025), and so on. To produce these exact line thicknesses, this record is valid only for printers having a resolution of 0.025mm. A typical problem with using dots as the units is that a print from a 300 DPI printer will print twice as thick as a line from a 600 DPI printer. Using in or mm as the units avoids this.
3/24/2010
Page 226 of 329
Printing in Depth
This section discusses, in more detail, the steps required prior to creating printed output of your design file. Introduction Print Dialog Box Layout Behavior How the Default Printer Is Selected Previewing the Usable Area Printing to Scale Preparing to Create Printed Output Using Configuration Variables
Introduction
With MicroStation you draw your designs at full-size and, when it comes to printing, you decide on the scale to be used. You can specify that a print be created of a view or of the contents of a fence. When preliminary check prints are required, you can simply zoom in to the required area, or place a fence around it. You then print this view or fenced area at the required scale, which can be set via the Print dialog box. For finished scale drawings, however, more planning is needed. In most cases, printing is required to be standardized for a particular project or discipline. With this in mind, you can set various configuration variables to streamline this process, and to provide the required uniformity of prints. As a rule, if the Windows printer driver is selected, printed output is sent directly to the system printer. Alternatively, if a Bentley printer driver is selected, printed output generally is saved to disk. This saved file then can be submitted to the printer at a later date. An exception to this is when the File Name property in the printer driver configuration file designates a port name, such as lpt1 or printer name such as \\printmanager\laserjet4. In these cases the printed output from the modified Bentley printer driver configuration file will be sent directly to the printer.
Print Dialog Box Layout Behavior

This following describes the basic default print area and page layout behavior of the standard Print dialog box. Note that, while much of this behavior is configurable, such configuration is beyond the scope of this document. Initial layout and print area When the Print dialog box is first invoked, the print size is usually maximized to the printer driver configuration file's default paper size. A non-maximum print size may be used, however, if the desired print scale is specified in the printer driver configuration file. The long edge of the print area is automatically aligned with the long edge of the paper. For Bentley printer drivers, this is accomplished via the Rotation field. For Windows printer drivers, the appropriate paper orientation is selected. Normally, it should not be necessary to manually adjust either the rotation or the orientation to achieve the desired scale. The initial print area is determined as follows:
If the active model contains a sheet definition, the print area is obtained from the sheet definition. An internal fence is maintained by the Print dialog box, and the print scale is set such that the entire contents of the sheet are maximized within the page size. If no sheet definition exists, and a fence exists, the fence defines the print area. The print scale is set such that the entire contents of the fence are maximized within the page size. If no sheet definition or fence exists, the print area is set to the first open view. As with fence print area mode, the print scale is set such that the entire contents of the view are maximized within the page size.
The print Area list box on the Print dialog box is set to indicate the current print area in use.
3/24/2010
Page 227 of 329
If the print size does not precisely match the paper size, and auto-center is enabled in the printer driver configuration file, the print origin is automatically set to center the print area within the page. This occurs whenever the print size or scale is changed. New printer When a new printer driver (or a new printer name in the case of a Windows printer driver) is selected, the paper size is changed to the new printer's default paper size. The orientation and rotation is set automatically to achieve the best fit. The print size always is maximized to the new paper size. New paper size When a new paper size is selected, or the form size is changed manually, the orientation and rotation is automatically set to achieve the best fit. The print scale behavior depends on the print area.
With the print area set to View, if the current print scale with the new paper size results in an unclipped print size that fits the paper, the current print scale is left unchanged. Otherwise, the print size is maximized. With all other print areas, the design area is automatically clipped to accommodate the current print scale. If the new paper size is smaller than the previous one, it may be necessary to maximize the print size, or enter a new scale, to obtain the desired layout.
New orientation or rotation If either the paper orientation or the Rotation option is changed, the Print dialog box assumes the current print scale is not desired. The print size is maximized to the paper size, which may or may not be a best fit. If the print area is set to Sheet, the print area is recalculated using the original sheet definition. This can result in a larger scale if the design area previously had been clipped to accommodate the sheet scale.
Generally, it is undesirable to change the paper orientation for Bentley printer drivers. In most cases, the Rotation option should be used instead.
New print scale When a new print scale is specified, the behavior depends on the currently selected print area.
If the print area is set to View, the print size is adjusted according to the new print scale. Scales that result in print sizes too large for the paper size are not permitted. A view definition is never clipped to accommodate a print scale. For all other print areas, the print area is recalculated using the original sheet definition, MicroStation fence, or design fit criteria, and the print size is adjusted according to the new print scale. If the new scale is smaller than the old one, the outer part of the print area may be clipped. If the new scale is larger than the old one, more of the design is included in the print area. The print area always is scaled about its center point.
New print size If a new print size is specified, the print scale is changed accordingly. User-entered print sizes larger than the paper size are not permitted, regardless of the print area. New print position If a new print origin is specified, the print scale and size are reduced as necessary to accommodate the new origin, regardless of the print area. If the print area is clipped to accommodate the print scale, then the print origin automatically is set to zero. In that situation, the origin should not be changed manually. New origin values are honored briefly, until the print scale is re-entered. After that, the origin is reset to zero when the clipped print area is recalculated. Maximize If the print size is maximized, the print size is maximized to the paper size at the current orientation and rotation. For non-view print areas, the print area is recalculated using the original sheet definition, MicroStation fence, or design fit criteria. This can result in a larger scale if the design area previously had been clipped to accommodate the sheet scale
3/24/2010

New fence
Page 228 of 329
If a new fence is placed, and the print area is not Sheet, the Print dialog box automatically uses the new fence as the print area. The print area is changed to Fence. The orientation and rotation automatically is set to achieve the best fit. If the current print scale with the new fence results in an unclipped print size that fits the paper, the current print scale is left unchanged. Otherwise, the print size is maximized. This behavior permits fences to be moved from location to location within a model without having to reset the print scale. Note that the new fence area never is automatically clipped to accommodate the existing print scale. If the view that the new fence was placed in is not the same as the current Print dialog box view, the print attributes are reset from the new view. Otherwise, the print attributes are left unchanged. If a new fence is placed, and the print area is Sheet, the fence is ignored unless the print boundary fence key-in command is used. New view If a new view number is selected, the behavior depends on the currently selected print area.

If the print area is Fence, changes to the view number are not permitted. If the print area is View, the print area is reloaded from the new view information. The orientation and rotation automatically is set to achieve the best fit. If the current print scale with the new view results in an unclipped print size that fits the paper, the current print scale is left unchanged. Otherwise, the print size is maximized. This behavior permits switching to a similar view without having to reset the print scale. For example, both views may depict an identical area, but have different level symbology view attributes. The Print dialog box always resets its print attributes using the new view attributes. Note that the view area never is automatically clipped to accommodate an existing print scale. If the print area is Fit All or Fit M aster, the Print dialog box behaves the same as when the print area is View. In addition, the design range is recalculated and the print size is maximized. If the print area is Sheet, the Print dialog box behaves the same as when the print area is View. In addition, after the print area and print attributes have been updated, the sheet definition is reloaded from the model and applied in the same manner as was done when the Print dialog box was first invoked.
New Windows printer When Apply or Print is clicked in the Windows Print dialog box, the Print dialog box behaves as if a new selected printer was chosen. After the new printer steps are performed, the paper orientation is set to the orientation selected in the Windows dialog box. The Print dialog box attempts to restore the print scale that was set before the Windows printer was invoked. When the print area is Sheet, this may result in design area clipping. Update from view When Update from View is selected, all new view parameters are loaded from the MicroStation environment for the selected view number. This includes the view origin and delta, the view attributes, and the level display settings. The orientation and rotation automatically is set to achieve the best fit. If the current print scale with the new print area results in a print size that fits the paper, the current print scale is left unchanged. Otherwise, the print size is maximized. This behavior permits Update from View to be used to update level display and print attributes without disturbing the current print layout. If the print area is Fence, the behavior is the same as updating with a print area of View, followed by placing a new fence. If the print area is Fit, the behavior is the same as updating with a print area of View, except that the design range is recalculated and the print size is maximized. If the print area is Sheet, the behavior is the same as updating with a print area of View, followed by changing the print area to Sheet. New print area Changing the print area, does the following:
If the print area is changed to View, the print area is reset to the view origin and delta for the selected view number. The orientation and rotation automatically is set to achieve the best fit. If the current print scale with the new print area results in a print size that fits the paper, the current print scale is left unchanged. Otherwise, the print size is maximized. The print attributes are reset from the selected view number.
3/24/2010
Page 229 of 329
If the print area is changed to Fit Master or Fit All, the print area is reset to the view origin and delta for the selected view number. The orientation and rotation automatically is set to achieve the best fit. The print size is always maximized. The print attributes are reset from the selected view number. If the print area is changed to Fence, the print area is reset to the area enclosed by the internal fence maintained by the Print dialog box. This may or may not be the same fence that is currently placed in the MicroStation view. The orientation and rotation is automatically set to achieve the best fit. If the current print scale with the new print area results in a print size that fits the paper, the current print scale is left unchanged. Otherwise, the print size is maximized. If the print area is changed to Sheet, the sheet definition is reloaded from the model and applied in the same manner as was done when the Print dialog box was first invoked. The print attributes are reset from the selected view number.
When the print area is changed, new view, fence, or sheet parameters are obtained from the MicroStation environment. In this manner, the print area control acts like the Update from View control. When the view number is changed, the behavior is the same as when the print area is changed. Total versus usable area With Bentley printer driver configuration files and the default Windows printer driver configuration file ("printer.pltcfg" or "printer.plt"), the paper size represents the usable area. Everything within this area will be printed (with the exception of lines residing precisely on the paper boundary, which may be clipped by either MicroStation or the output device). Typically, the usable area is smaller than the physical paper dimensions. When the Full Sheet Mode property is set in the Windows printer driver configuration file, the paper size represents the total paper size. The total paper area includes the usable area and the non-printable hardware margins. The usable area is depicted within the Preview window by a dashed rectangle. Data outside this rectangle will not be printed. Printer driver default scale If a default scale is specified in the printer driver configuration file (either through the Edit Paper Sizes dialog box, the /scale qualifier in the Size record, or through the Default_scale record), that scale is applied when the Print dialog box is first invoked, when the printer driver is changed, when the view is recalculated during a fit operation, when the sheet definition is loaded, and (optionally) when the paper size is changed. If the printer driver configuration file's default scale is used, the design area is automatically clipped to accommodate it. Page layout default behavior summary The following table displays the page layout default behavior. The Design Clipped heading in column 3 indicates the following behavior: The design area is clipped if needed to accommodate the current print scale. The Default Scale heading in column 4 indicates the following behavior: The printer driver configuration file's default scale is applied (implies design area clipping if needed).
Layout Rules
Design Clipped Default Scale
Auto-center flag reset from driver Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected Not applicable Print size maximized Auto-center flag reset from driver Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected No Print size maximized Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected Yes Current print scale preserved Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected Yes No No Current print scale preserved No Optional (No by default) Yes Yes
Initial layout
New printer driver
New paper size

Current paper size dimensions changed
New orientation and/or rotation
Print size maximized
3/24/2010
Page 230 of 329

Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected No

New view Current print scale preserved Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected
No
New fit view

No Print size maximized Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected No

Yes
New fence Current print scale preserved Best-fit orientation and/or rotation selected
No
New sheet definition
Yes Current print scale preserved
No
How the Default Printer Is Selected

When the Print dialog box is invoked, the procedure described below is used to select the default printer driver configuration file and the Windows printer, paper size, and tray names. If the Print dialog box has never been opened before, two printer driver configuration files are selected for future defaults. One, "printer.pltcfg", is picked as the default for the Windows printer driver. The second, "pscript.pltcfg", is picked as the default for the Bentley printer driver (provided the product supports non-Windows printer drivers). The directory path component of the MS_PLTR configuration variable value is used to find the printer driver configuration files. The Windows printer driver configuration file is used the first time the dialog box opens, assuming that this setting has not already been overridden using configuration variables. The Print dialog box stores the active printer driver type and configuration file in the MicroStation user preference file. When the Print dialog box is subsequently invoked, the most recently used printer driver type and configuration file are selected by default. This behavior may, however, be overridden using configuration variables.
If MS_PLT_USE_MRU_DEFAULTS is set to 0, the most recently used printer driver type and configuration file are not stored in the user preference file. In that case, the dialog always picks the same defaults as when it was first opened, unless otherwise overridden using configuration variables. Note that the MS_PLT_USE_MRU_DEFAULTS configuration variable affects all printing user preference data, not just the printer driver configuration files. If MS_PLOTDLG_DEF_PLTFILE is set to a fully qualified printer driver configuration file, that file is loaded instead of the most recently used file when the Print dialog box is opened. If MS_PLT_SYSPRT_PLTFILE is set to a fully qualified printer driver configuration file, that file will be used instead of "printer.pltcfg" when Windows driver is selected in the Print dialog box.
In the event the selected printer driver configuration file cannot be loaded, you are prompted for a file name to use. If you abort the file selection box without picking a file that can be loaded, the Print dialog box attempts to load "pscript.pltcfg" followed by "hpglrtl.pltcfg". If neither can be loaded, the Print dialog box cannot be opened. If a Windows printer driver is loaded, the Print dialog box must select a default Windows printer name, paper size name, and tray name. Normally, this information is obtained from the Windows default printer, but may be overridden using either the printer driver configuration file or configuration variables.

MS_PLT_SYSPRT_DEFAULT_PRINTER specifies the printer name that is selected when a system printer is opened. MS_PLT_SYSPRT_DEFAULT_FORM specifies the paper size name that is selected when a system printer is opened. MS_PLT_SYSPRT_DEFAULT_TRAY specifies the tray name that is selected when a system printer is opened.
If the above configuration variables are not defined, properties in the Windows printer driver configuration file can be used to specify the default printer, paper size, and tray names.
3/24/2010

Previewing the Usable Area
Page 231 of 329
Using the Show design in preview check box in the Print dialog box's Preview section, you can review the drawing as it will appear on the printed drawing sheet. When a Windows printer driver is selected in the Print dialog box, you have the option to view or hide the usable area in the preview window.
If you are in Full sheet mode, go to the Settings menu and choose Preferences. When you turn on the Preview usable area check box you will see the usable area depicted in the preview window. If this check box is off you will see only the physical paper size in the preview window. If you are not in Full sheet mode, go to the Settings menu and choose Preferences. When you turn on the Preview entire page check box you will see the physical paper size, including a gray dotted line showing the usable area, depicted in the preview window. If this check box is off you will see only the usable area.
The figure below shows the Print dialog box with a Windows printer driver selected, in Full sheet mode, with the Preview usable area check box turned on in the Print Preferences window, with the Preview section displayed, and Show design in preview turned on. A gray dotted line shows the usable area.
The Preview usable area and Preview entire page check boxes take effect only when the selected printer driver is a Windows printer driver, that is, the "printer.pltcfg" printer driver configuration file is being used. Bentley printer driver configuration files (such as "hpgl2.pltcfg" and "pscript.pltcfg") do not contain usable area information. If the Full Sheet Mode property is set for a Windows printer driver, the page rectangle always represents the physical paper size and the non-usable area is always depicted inside it. Therefore, Preview usable area and Preview entire page check boxes do not apply for these two cases. The usable area rectangle indicates the effective non-printable area. It may contain regions that you can change from within MicroStation. The usable area consists of the physical paper size minus the driver's non-printable area minus any user-defined Windows page setup margins minus any form offset specified in the printer driver configuration file. The region between the physical paper size and the usable area is blanked out, using the background fill color. This simulates what the printer will do. Other dashed and solid lines are only drawn if the design is not present in the Print dialog box's Preview section. To see these lines, turn off the Show design in preview check box. The figure below shows the Print dialog box with a fenced area selected, a Windows printer driver selected, the Preview section displayed, and Show design in preview turned off. A solid magenta line shows the fenced area and a dashed magenta line shows the print bounding box area.
3/24/2010
Page 232 of 329
The print preview line colors may be altered via the following configuration variables. Valid color numbers are: blue = 1, red = 4, magenta = 5, light gray = 8, medium gray = 10, turquoise = 13, dark-green = 14, maroon = 15, dark-yellow = 17. MS_PLT_PREVIEW_USABLEAREACOLOR specifies the color of the usable area rectangle in the Preview window. MS_PLT_PREVIEW_PLOTBOXCOLOR specifies the color of the print bounding box rectangle in the Preview window. MS_PLT_PREVIEW_PLOTFENCECOLOR specifies the color of the print fence shape in the Preview window.
Printing to Scale
Because MicroStation designs can be printed at any scale, the one design can be used in a number of drawings. For example, the one design may be used in an overall plan at 1:100 and parts of it in other views or details at 1:10, 1:20, and 1:50. With manual drafting, each view or detail has to be drawn separately. With MicroStation, however, you need only draw the design once. It then can be used any number of times, referenced to other files at various scales, either in its entirety or just a portion of it, and printed. For this reason, planning is required to produce finished drawings with borders. Take text placement, for example. If you place text elements in the design and it is scaled, then the text elements also will be scaled. With manual drafting, you scaled your design to fit the border. MicroStation lets you use this same technique, via scaled references. Alternatively, you can scale your border to fit the design. Border considerations When working on a project, the standard borders typically are drawn in a separate design file and then either referenced, or placed as a cell, when creating a drawing. An advantage with the reference option is that only one file or model needs to be updated if there is a change to the standard title block or border. On the other hand, if the border is placed as a cell then the border is included with the drawing and doesn't require the reference file. Similarly, when putting together a drawing, either of two distinct methods may be used placing a full scale border and scaling the design, or scaling the border to fit the full scale design.
Using a 1:1 scale border
With manual drafting, you have a full-size drawing sheet into which you place scaled views of your design. With MicroStation you can do h hi h d h i i ld i f ll i d h l i f fi h b d
3/24/2010
Page 233 of 329
For this method, you first create a sheet model, with the sheet layout set to full size. Into this model you reference your standard border (at full scale). Within the confines of this border you then reference the designs at the required scales. All text and dimensioning is placed in the sheet model at full size. When printing, you print the sheet at full size. The border and text will print at their normal size while the design elements will print to the scale at which they were referenced to the sheet model. If you use this method to create your drawings, because they are all plotted at the same scale, it is very simple to use Batch Print to print sets of drawings in one step.
Scaling the border to fit the design
An alternative method to that discussed above, is to create a sheet model that is scaled to surround the required part of the design. This is done, simply, by setting the Annotation Scale to the required value when creating the sheet model. When you place text with Annotation Scale lock on, the text and dimensioning is scaled such that when it prints it is the correct size. For example, if the border is 20 times its normal size, all text also would have to be 20 times its normal size. In such a case, when the final printed output is created, you would use a scale of 1:20 to reduce the border and text back to their normal size. At the same time, the design elements will be reduced by the same ratio. With this method, you print the sheet model at a scale that returns the border back to its normal size, at the same time scaling the design elements elements, text and dimensioning.
Using the sample borders delivered with MicroStation
When you install MicroStation with Commonly used Workspace files checked (the default) then a number of sample border files are delivered to the ANSI, Architectural, and ISO sub-directories of the "..\Workspace\Projects\Examples\Borders" directory. These provide sample border files that you can use, either as references, or placed as cells. In each border DGN file there is a default model, in which the title block is drawn at full scale. This model then is referenced to other models for various scales, including Full Scale. The description for each model includes an example of the size required for any text, to produce standard size text in the printed output. A saved view also is provided for each scale, with the name of the saved view matching the scale represented. A cell placed below the title block provides instructions for its use. This cell contains tags that can be used to input information into the various fields of the title block. If the border file has been referenced to the active file, rather than placed as a cell, then you should copy the cell (containing the instructions) into the active file in order to edit the title block tags.
To attach a 1:100 AO border as a reference
1. In the References dialog box, select the Attach References icon. The Attach References dialog box opens. 2. Navigate to the "..\Workspace\Projects\Examples\Borders\ISO" directory. 3. Select AO-border.dgn and click Open. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens. 4. From the Models list box, choose 1;100. 5. From the Orientation list, select 1:100. 6. Check that True Scale is turned on with Scale (Master:Ref) set to 1:1. 7. From the Nested Attachments list box, choose Live Nesting and set Depth to 1. 8. Click OK. 9. Enter a data point to position the reference.
To place a 1:100 AO border as a cell
1. Attach the file AO-border.dgn as a cell library (located in the "..\Workspace\Projects\Examples\Borders\ISO" directory). 2. Select the Place Active Cell tool. 3 Cli k th B C ll( ) i
3/24/2010

4. Select the cell 1;100 and click the Placement button. 5. Check that X, Y, and Z scales are set to 1. 6. Check that True Scale is turned on. 7. Enter a data point to place the cell.
To fill in the attached border's title block
Page 234 of 329
1. Zoom in to the title block area. 2. If the border is referenced, copy into the active file the cell (with the instructions) located directly below the lower right corner of the border. 3. In the Tags task, select the Edit Tags tool. 4. Identify the cell below the title block. The Edit Tags [TitleBlock] dialog box opens. 5. In turn, highlight each of the required items in the list box and input their values in the key-in field below. 6. When completed, click OK. The dialog box closes and the keyed-in values are added to the title block in the model.
Editing the tags for the title block.
Preparing to Create Printed Output

Prior to printing your design, you first have to choose the type of printer. Having selected the printer, you then need to choose the page size and specify the layout of the printed output on the selected page
3/24/2010

Page setup criteria
Page 235 of 329
Choices for page sizes are determined by the type of printer that you select. To set up the page for your printed output you have to:

Select the printing device Set the printing attributes Set the paper size and orientation
Selecting a printer
MicroStation supplies driver files for most popular printers, stored in the "..\Workspace\System\Plotdrv" directory. One of these drivers, "printer.pltcfg", is used specifically to interface with a Windows system printer. You should use this driver to print to the Windows system printer. Where a number of networked printers are available, "printer.pltcfg" by default prints to the default Windows printer. You can, however, select another of the networked printers (see below).
To select a printer
1. In the Print dialog box, click the Select Printer Driver Configuration File icon. or From the Print dialog boxs File menu, choose Select Bentley Driver.
The Select Printer Driver Configuration File dialog box opens.
2. Select the new printer driver. 3. Click OK. The Select Printer Driver Configuration File dialog box closes. If the print preview is displayed, it updates to preview the printed output from the new printer.
To select the Windows system default printer
3/24/2010
Page 236 of 329
1. In the Print dialog box in the Printer and Paper Size section, choose Windows driver. The "printer.pltcfg" printer driver configuration file is chosen, and its name, along with the name of the default Windows printer, appears in the title bar of Print dialog box. When necessary, you can configure your system to select another printer to be your default Windows printer for printing from MicroStation. See Setting a new default Windows system printer.
To interactively select a networked printer other than the Windows default
1. Follow the previous procedure to select the Windows printer. 2. In the Print dialog boxs Printer and Paper Size section, click the Configure Windows Printer icon.
The system Print dialog box opens. 3. From the Select Printer section, choose the required printer. 4. Click Print. The system Print dialog box closes. In the title bar of the Print dialog box, the default Windows printer is changed to the chosen printer. The printer driver configuration file is still "printer.pltcfg".
Setting print attributes
You can change aspects of the printed output's default appearance via the Print Attributes dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click the Print Attributes icon, or when you choose Settings > Print Attributes, in the Print dialog box. Check boxes in the Print Attributes dialog box let you vary the relevant settings for printing purposes. Additionally, you can turn on/off the display of a Fence Boundary and/or the default Print Border for your printer output. When you turn on Print Border, you can add text in the Border Comment field. This appears in the label outside the border and can include configuration variable references, which are expanded in the printed output. For example, if the configuration variable USER was defined as John Smith and you keyed in the description User=$(USER), the printed output would expand to User=John Smith in the printed output.
To add a border and description
1. In the Print dialog boxs icon bar, click the Print Attributes icon. or From the Print dialog boxs Settings menu, choose Print Attributes.
The Print Attributes dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Print Border. 3. (Optional) In the Border Comment field, key in a comment.
3/24/2010
Page 237 of 329
4. Click OK. The Print Attributes dialog box closes.
Example printed output showing the border, file information, and Border Comment.
Setting the page size and orientation
Most printer driver configuration files have a choice of page sizes, which could be ISO and/or ANSI paper sizes. The orientation of the printed output also may be set to Portrait or Landscape.
On some printers, output is not properly generated unless the page size specified is the same as, or smaller than, the actual size of the paper loaded in the printer.
To define the page setup for the printed output
1. In the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog box, choose the required sheet size from the Paper list box. 2. Turn on Portrait or Landscape orientation as required.
3/24/2010

3. (Optional) In the X and Y fields of the Print and Paper Size section, key in new values for the Paper size.
Page 238 of 329
These X and Y fields are not editable when you use the Windows driver.
Print layout criteria Using settings in the Print Scale and Position section of the Print dialog box, you can set the drawing dimensions or scale to what is required, plus position the print on the sheet. Using these settings you can:

Set the dimensions of the printed output Set the scale of the printed output as a ratio of working units to printer units Set the X and Y origins to position the printed output on the selected page Maximize the printed output or center it on the page
Setting the height or width of the printed output
When you first open the Print dialog box, the printed output is maximized on the selected page. That is, either its width (X) or height (Y) is scaled to match that of the selected page with the aspect ratio determining the remaining dimension. Within the limits of the selected page size and, if specified, the X origin and Y origin, you can set the scale, the X (width), or the Y (height) of your printed output. The settings for the width and height (the Size fields) and Scale are interlocked to preserve the aspect ratio of the print area. Changing one setting results in corresponding changes to the others. You cannot, however, set the Size or Scale settings to a figure that would place part of the printed output outside the area of the selected page.
To set the height or width
1. Expand the Print dialog box to its maximum (click the Show Preview button to the right of the icon bar and then the Show Details button at the bottom right of the expanded dialog box). The Print Scale and Position section is visible in the Print dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 239 of 329
2. In the Size fields, key in the required value. The remaining values update to reflect the new setting. The size of the print changes in the preview area.
Setting the exact scale of the printed output
You can set the scale for your drawing as a ratio of the working units to the printer units. Default printer units are specified in the printer driver configuration files Driver Resolution Units property. You can change this by selecting Settings > Units and then choosing new units from the subsequent menu. The options are: IN, FT, MM, CM, DM, M. Even if your printer is not set up with exactly the same units as your drawing, you can specify the scale of your printed output as a ratio of working units (mu:su) to printer units. Consider, for example, your design file having Master Units of Feet (MU), while your printers units are Inches. To create a 15 feet to the inch scale output would require no changes to the printer's units. You would enter 15 in the Scale field to make the printed output scale 15 ft per in. To create a 1:20 scale output, you could first change the printer's units to ft, to match the design file's master units. You would then enter 20 in the Scale field. That is, the printed output would be 20ft. per ft or 1:20. For more complicated scale values, you can use the Scale Assistant to help you set the correct scale. This lets you set the scale as a ration of Paper to Design, or Design to Paper.
Using the Scale Assistant to set the scale of the printed output
1. If necessary, expand the Print dialog box to display the Print Size/Scale section. 2. In the Print Scale and Position section, click the Scale Assistant icon to the right of the Scale field.
The Scale Assistant dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 240 of 329
3. From the Method list box, choose Design:Paper or Paper:Design. 4. In the Paper and Design fields, key in the required values from which the scale will be calculated. 5. Click OK. The Scale Assistant dialog box closes and the new scale value appears in the Scale field (in the format of Working Units to Printer units).
Setting the origin
When the scaled drawing takes up only a portion of the selected page size, you can position it on the page by adjusting the Origin settings, in the Print Scale and Position section of the Print dialog box. By default, Auto-center is turned on, which ensures that the printed output always is centered in the selected page. If you specify a value for either Origin field, Auto-center is turned off.
To position the printed output on the page
1. If necessary, expand the Print dialog box to display the Print Scale and Position section. 2. In the Origin fields, key in the new value. As the new value is entered and you press <Tab> to move to the next field, the location and if needed, the size, of the print changes in the preview area. When a value is entered for either origin, Auto-center is turned off.
3/24/2010
Page 241 of 329
By default, when you open the Print dialog box, the printed output is maximized. That is, it is drawn to the largest scale that will fit on the selected paper size. By default, also, Auto-center is turned on and the printed output is centered on the page. When you make adjustments to the margin settings, Auto-center turns off. At any time you can turn on Auto-center to center the printed output, or click the Maximize Print Size icon to maximize the printed output on the page.
To maximize the printed output
1. In the Print dialog boxs icon bar, click the Maximize Print Size icon. or From the Print dialog boxs Settings menu, choose Maximize.
Print configuration files It is not necessary to go through the complete setup procedure each time that you require printed output from a design file. You can create a print configuration (.ini) file and save it to disk. These specify the design file-specific information required to recreate prints of particular drawings, thus streamlining repetitive printing tasks. A print configuration file consists of the following entities and settings:

Specification of the printed area of the design Print attributes as set in the Print Attributes dialog box Master file levels displayed in the printed view Page size, margins, and scale Pen table, if attached
Print configuration files may be used only in conjunction with the design file for which they were created. Print configuration files contain detailed information about the design file's model and view groups, therefore they are not portable. You should not try to get around this by changing the design file's working units or sheet definition parameters because this may invalidate any print configuration files that are intended to be used with that design file. By default, print configuration files are given the suffix .ini. They are ASCII text files that, again by default, are saved in MicroStations "..\Workspace\System\Data" directory.
To create a print configuration file
1. Use the controls in the Print dialog box to distinguish the entity to print and adjust the printing setup as desired. 2. From the Print dialog boxs Configuration menu, choose Save As. The Save Print INI File As dialog box opens. 3. In the File name field, key in the new print configuration filename. By default, the extension .ini is added to the file name. 4. Click Save.
To modify the active print configuration file
1. Use the controls in the Print dialog box to modify the entity to print and/or adjust other print settings as desired. 2. From the dialog boxs Configuration menu, choose Save. The new settings are saved in the active print configuration (.ini) file. When one or more print configuration files have been created for a design file, you can use these to create printed output in the future. This saves having to remember which levels are displayed, the position of a fence or the size of the view, the type of printer and so on.
To open an existing print configuration file
3/24/2010

The Select Print INI File dialog box opens. 2. Select the required print configuration file.
Page 242 of 329
3. Click Open. The Select Print INI File dialog box closes and the settings for the selected print configuration file are applied to the Print dialog box.
Using Configuration Variables

You can use configuration variables to define default settings to standardize your setup and further streamline the printing process. Following are several printing configuration variables that can help you in this:
Variable MS_PLOTDLG_DEF_PLTFILE MS_PLTFILE_EDITOR MS_PLT_SYSPRT_PLTFILE MS_PLOTDLG_DEF_PENTABLE MS_PLOTINI MS_PLTDLG_CLOSE_AFTER_PLOT Description If this variable is set to a printer driver configuration (.pltcfg or .plt) file, that printer driver will be loaded, rather than the last one used, when you open the Print dialog box. Controls which editor is used when you select File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration in the Print dialog box. If this variable is set to a fully qualified printer driver configuration (.pltcfg or .plt) file, then this will be used instead of printer.pltcfg when Windows driver is selected in the Print dialog box (see Setting a new default Windows system printer). Defines a default pen table that is loaded when you open the Print dialog box. If this variable is set to a path, then it will search the path for saved print configuration (.ini) files. If this is set to 1, the Print dialog box closes automatically after a print job is performed successfully. By default, the Print dialog box does not close after a print job.
Setting a new default Windows system printer When you select Windows driver in the Print dialog box (Printer and Paper Size section), by default "printer.pltcfg" is the printer driver configuration file selected. This configuration file is used by MicroStation to interface with a Windows system printer. Normally, this is the Windows default printer. To force the printing system to use another networked printer, take the following steps. 1. Save "printer.pltcfg" with a different name. 2. In the new "printer.pltcfg" file, add your printer's name to the Default Windows Printer Name property. 3. Set the MS_PLT_SYSPRT_PLTFILE configuration variable to the name of your new printer driver configuration file. With the above setup, when you select Windows driver in the Print dialog box, the new printer driver configuration file will be chosen, and the printer specified in it will be the Windows system printer.
Submitting Printed Output to a Printer

This section discusses the steps for submitting printed output to your printer. Introduction Sending Printed Output to a Printer Using Printing Key-ins
Introduction
You can produce printed output of your whole design or part of it at any time. You can create interim print files on disk and later submit them to a printer. You also can send printed output directly to a printer.
3/24/2010
Page 243 of 329
When you send printed output directly to a printer, the MicroStation Print in Progress dialog box displays the print's status. This dialog box allows you to cancel the print job. For rasterized and rendered prints, a progress bar shows the rasterization process. For non-rasterized prints, no progress bar appears because the amount of work is not known in advance.
Print status for a rasterized print
Print status for a non-rasterized print
The Print in Progress dialog box appears after the print has been processing for one second. Therefore, the dialog box is not displayed for prints that take less than one second to complete. Once the print job has completed, the Print in Progress dialog box closes. Display of the Print in Progress dialog box is controlled by the Show print status dialog check box in the Print Preferences dialog box. The check box's setting is stored in your user preference file. You can use the MS_PLT_SHOW_PRINT_STATUS configuration variable to override the setting.
The Print in Progress dialog box does not appear during a batch print job. Batch printing has its own status window.
Creating a print file from the Print dialog box You can create a print file on disk that can be submitted to the appropriate printer at a later stage. These disk files can be created from the Print dialog box.
To create a print file on disk
1. From the File menu, choose Print. or Press <Ctrl-P>. The Print dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 244 of 329
2. From the Printer and Paper Size list box, choose Bentley driver. 3. (Optional) Click the Select Printer Driver Configuration File icon to select another printer driver configuration file. If you choose "printer.pltcfg", then printing defaults to the Windows driver and the print will be sent directly to that printer (unless you have picked Print to file in the Windows Print dialog box, which is opened by selecting File > Select Windows Printer). 4. (Optional) Prior to creating your print you can do any or all of the following:
Action Adjust the Page Setup to:

For more information, see
change the paper size on which the design is to be printed. rotate the printed output in the printable area.
Setting the page size and orientation
Adjust the Print Layout to:

change the scale or printed output size. position the printed output on the sheet.
Print layout criteria
Adjust the appearance of the printed output, add a border and/or comment. Setting print attributes Select a pen table for print resymbolization. Pen tables
5. In the Print dialog boxs icon bar, click the Print icon. or From the Print dialog boxs File menu, choose Print.
If Send to printer is selected, printed output is sent to the system print manager. The Print in Progress dialog box displays the print's status. You can cancel the print job. If Create plot file is selected and its File Name property is not set to a port or other printer, then the Save Print As dialog box opens and continue to next step. If Create metafile is selected, printed output is saved as an enhanced metafile (.emf). 6. To name, create, and save the print file, use the Save Print As dialog box just as you would the Save As dialog box. The default print file extension is .000 unless otherwise specified by the Extension property in the printer driver configuration file. If a numeric default extension is used, such as .000, the extension proposed in the dialog box automatically increases with the creation of each additional print file having the same filename (for example, bracket.000, bracket.001, bracket.002).
3/24/2010
Page 245 of 329
When you create a print from MicroStation, certain configuration variables are set for each print. Using the values of these configuration variables, a macro can be written that writes to a log file, recording the values of these variables. This information can be used for accounting purposes. For more information, see Printing accounting variables.
Sending Printed Output to a Printer

You can send printed output to any printer on your network, whether or not it is physically connected to your PC. MicroStation lets you use a variety of methods to send printed output (or print files) to the preferred printer on your system. These include:

Create a print file on disk and copy this to the printer (at the system prompt). Send the printed output directly to a locally connected printer through the parallel port without first creating a print file. You can do this either via the Print dialog box or the key-in window. Via the Print dialog box, send the printed output directly to the system printer (either attached to your PC or elsewhere on the network).
To send a print file to a printer through a parallel port
1. Open a DOS window (session). 2. At the system command line, enter copy /b <print_file> <port> where: print_file is the print file to be sent. port is the parallel port on your system to which the printer is connected; for example, lpt1: or lpt2: (Wintel systems) or prn (DEC Alpha). /b switch specifying that the file is binary.
To send printed output to a printer through a parallel port without creating a print file
1. From the File menu, choose Print. The Print dialog box opens. 2. In the dialog box, adjust the controls as desired. 3. In the dialog boxs icon bar, click the Print icon.
The Save Print As dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the name of the parallel port, for example, lpt1: or lpt2:(Wintel systems) or prn (DEC Alpha). 5. Click OK.
To send printed output directly to a printer (without creating a print file) from the Key-in window
1. In the Key-in window, key in PRINT <configuration | VIEW view_number | FENCE <output_device> where: configuration identifies the print configuration (.ini) file upon which to base the printed output. view_number is the view number where VIEW is specified. output_device specifies the destination printer. For example, lpt2: or \\printman\laserjet1. Output_device may be omitted when "printer.pltcfg" is the printer driver configuration file.
To print the contents of a view from the Key-in window
1. In the Key-in window, key in PRINT BOUNDARY <view_number>. This tells the printing process which view to print. 2. In the Key-in window, key in PRINT EXECUTE. Thi d th i t t th t i t
3/24/2010

To send the printed output directly to the system printer
Page 246 of 329
1. From the File menu, choose Print. The Print dialog box opens. 2. In the Select Printer section, choose a printer. 3. (Optional) Adjust other printing settings as required. 4. In the Print dialog box, click Print.
Using Printing Key-ins

You can send printed output to a printer via key-ins from the key-in window. Printing key-ins provide additional key-in options for customizing your print files to specific criteria. You can use these key-ins directly, in BASIC macros or in MDL applications. Printing key-ins are provided by the "plotdlg.ma" printing application. One-step key-ins You can use a one-step key-in to set up and produce printed output in one step. For example, you can use: PRINT <configuration> <filename> to bypass the Print dialog box. All printing key-ins are accessible from the MDL application "plotdlg.ma". You can execute a one-step keyin before or after loading "plotdlg.ma". Combined key-ins You can use combined key-ins to both set up and produce printed output. For example, you can use PRINT DRIVER, PRINT BOUNDARY FENCE and PRINT SCALE to set up the printed output, and then use PRINT EXECUTE to produce the print. Most of the combined keyins require that "plotdlg.ma" be loaded prior to the key-in being executed. Even those key-ins that are valid prior to "plotdlg.ma" being loaded result in it being loaded. You can key in multiple combined key-ins, separating each with a semicolon.
Using combined key-ins to select the postscript printer, fence contents, set scale and then create the print file
1. Use the Place Fence tool to place a fence around the area to be printed. 2. In the key-in window, key in the following: PRINT DRIVER pscript.pltcfg; PRINT BOUNDARY fence; PRINT SCALE 2:1; PRINT EXECUTE section1.eps to create a postscript print file named "section1.eps" containing a 2:1 scale printout of the contents of a fence. For a full list of combined key-ins, see Combined Key-ins.
Batch Printing
The Batch Print utility lets you create printed output of sets of models in one or more DGN files. It is not a replacement for the standard Print dialog box. It is simply a printing utility that focuses on printing multiple models versus printing the active model. Overview Printing Sets of Design Files Job Sets Using Print Specifications Defining Print Specifications
3/24/2010

Overview
Page 247 of 329
Batch Print is a utility for printing and reprinting related sets of models in reusable ways. Print specifications are the mechanism for describing these reusable ways. Job sets are used to identify, save, recall, and print related sets of models. Each job set prints at a selected scale, so it is important to consider this when setting up your drawings in the first place. If all related drawings can be printed at one scale, Batch Print can create a full set of drawings in one step. A simple method for setting up your drawings to do this is described in Using a 1:1 scale border.
By default, the Batch Print utility opens all design files in read-only mode to prevent any inadvertent modifications to the files. If you select Open design files in read-only mode in the Batch Print Preferences dialog box, or change the MS_BATCHPRINT_NO_READONLY configuration variable to 1, Batch Print will not open design files in read-only mode, which may be necessary for some work flows. Print specifications A print specification is a named group of instructions describing how to perform a certain step in the printing process. A given specification does not encompass the entire printing process just a particular step in it.
Print specification types
Batch Print supports four specification types corresponding to four printing process steps:
Specification Type Printer Print Area Layout Display Description Describes the target printer, paper size and post-processing options. See Printer specifications. Selects the portion or portions of the design file to print. A print area specification essentially describes a view or the equivalent of one or more fences in a view. See Print Area specifications. Places a representation of the given print area on the paper at the specified size and position. See Layout specifications. Identifies a pen table and/or controls view attributes (for example, to turn text nodes and construction lines off) and print options (displays fence boundary and print border). See Display specifications.
3/24/2010

Printing Sets of Design Files
Page 248 of 329
In order to print a set of models in one or more design files, the following steps are necessary to select the design files, and specifications for printing.
General procedure for printing a set of models/design files
1. Select the design files containing the models to print. 2. Select the specifications to control the printing. 3. Print the files. You can carry out all the above operations from the Batch Print dialog box. Selecting design files Your first step in batch printing is to select the design files that you want to print. This can be done via the Add Files icon or by selecting Edit > Add Files in the Batch Print dialog box. Alternatively, you can use drag and drop to select files from Windows Explorer or from the Models dialog box of the open design file, or from that in another open session of MicroStation.
To select design files to print
1. From the File menu, choose Batch Print. The Batch Print dialog box opens.
2. In the Batch Print dialog box, click the Add Design Files icon. or From the dialog boxs Edit menu, choose Add Files.
The Select Design Files to Add dialog box opens. 3. Navigate to the desired directory and select the names of the files you want to print. You can select multiple files by holding down the <Ctrl> key as you select the files and then proceed to step 4. Alternatively, you can double-click a file to send it to the File list box. 4. Click Open. The Select Files to Add dialog box closes and the selected files are added to the Files and Models to Print list box.
3/24/2010
Page 249 of 329
Using drag and drop to select files from Windows Explorer
1. From the File menu, choose Batch Print. 2. Open Windows Explorer, and navigate to the required folder. 3. In Windows Explorer, select one or more files as required. 4. Hold down the data button and drag the selected files to the Files and Models to Print list box, releasing the button to drop the files. If you want the files to be dropped between two existing print tasks, position the pointer between them prior to dropping the new files.
Using drag and drop to select models for batch printing
1. From the File menu, choose Batch Print. 2. In either the active design file, or from a second session of MicroStation, open the Models dialog box. 3. In the Models dialog box, select the models to print. 4. Hold down the data button and drag the selected files to the Files and Models to Print list box, releasing the button to drop the files. If you want the files to be dropped between two existing print tasks, position the pointer between them prior to dropping the new files.
Arranging the printing order
When Batch Print prints a job set, it prints the files in the order in which they appear in the list box. You can rearrange the order of the files in the list.
To rearrange the printing order
1. In the Batch Print dialog box, select the files that you wish to move. To select multiple files, hold down the <Ctrl> key when selecting the files. 2. From the Batch Print dialog boxs Edit menu, choose: Move Files to Top to move selected files to the top of the list. Move Files Up to move selected files up one position. Move Files Down to move selected files down one position. Move Files to Bottom to move selected files to the bottom of the list.
Using drag and drop to rearrange the printing order
1. Check that tasks in the list box are sorted in ascending order on the # field. 2. Select the files that you want to reposition in the list (use <Ctrl> data to select multiple files).
3/24/2010
Page 250 of 329
3. Hold down the data button and drag the selected files to the required position, releasing the data button to complete the task. Each of the selected files is moved up or down the list by the same number of rows. Viewing and selecting specifications to control printing Specifications are used to control the printer, print area, layout, or display.
To view or change the properties of a specification
1. In the Specifications Controlling Printing list box, select the specification type (Printer, Print Area, Layout, or Display). 2. Click the Specification Properties icon. or From the Specifications menu, choose Properties. The appropriate Properties dialog box opens.
3. (Optional) Make any required changes to the settings. 4. Click OK.

To select a specification to control printing
1. In the Specifications Controlling Printing list box, select the specification type (Printer, Print Area, Layout or Display). 2. Click the Select Specification icon. or From the Specifications menu, choose Select.
The Select Specification dialog box opens showing all existing specifications of the selected type.
The Select (Printer) Specification dialog box
3. Select the desired specification. 4. Click OK. The Select Specification dialog box closes and the new specification replaces the selected one in the Specifications Controlling Printing list box.
Batch Print automatically selects a specification of each print specification type. You can select a different print specification for each type.
Printing the selected models/design files
3/24/2010

When you have selected the specifications for printing, you can print the selected models.
To print models
Page 251 of 329
1. In the Files and Models to Print list box, select the files to be printed. If you are printing all the files in the list, skip to Step 2. 2. In the Batch Print dialog box, click the Print icon. or From the Batch Print dialog boxs File menu, choose Print.
The Print Batch dialog box opens.
3. (Optional) To print all the files in the list, select the All button in the Print Range section. 4. (Optional) To set up a system printer, click the Set Up System Printer button and make any required changes. The Set Up System Printer button appears in the Print dialog box only if the active printer specification represents a native operating system printer. The Windows Print dialog box opens. 5. Click Print to accept the printer setup changes and return to the Print dialog box. 6. (Optional) Turn off Clear Log File Before Printing. By default, Batch Print creates a log file describing the processing that occurs during actual printing, including any errors that occurred. You can disable the creation of the log file and redirect the log messages to the screen by clearing the Filename field. You can also instruct Batch Print to append its logging messages to the end of an existing log file (by turning off Clear Log File Before Printing). 7. Click OK to start printing. A progress window opens showing the name and sequence number of the currently printing file. You can stop the job with a Reset. Printing errors When Batch Print prints a set of design files, various specification-related errors may occur, including (but not limited to):

The saved view, shape element, or cell referenced by a print area specification may not exist. The shape element or cell referenced by a print area specification may be perpendicular to the reference view, so it appears as a line in the view. The print size, calculated from the print area and the scale or size, may exceed the size of the paper selected by the printer specification. The print origin specified by a layout specification, coupled with the print size calculated from the print area and the print scale, may shift part of the print area off the page.
3/24/2010
Page 252 of 329
When Batch Print detects an error, it stops processing the current print boundary in the current design file, but continues processing with the next print boundary or file.
Job Sets
A job set is an ordered list of design files to be printed, along with references to the print specifications that control how they are printed. Job sets are stored in job set files (.job) with arbitrary names and locations. For example, a job set file named myhouse.job might represent the set of plans, elevations and detail sheets for a particular house. It lists all the master design files representing those plans, elevations, and detail sheets, as well as the names of the specifications describing how they should be printed. Batch Print lets you reassign the specifications assigned to a job set at any time, making it easy to print variations of the set. Files can be added, deleted, or moved up or down within the job set.
To create a new job set
1. Use the Batch Print dialog box to select the design files to be included and to select the print specifications required. 2. In the Batch Print dialog box, click the Save icon. or From the Batch Print dialog boxs File menu, choose Save.
The Save Job Set File dialog box opens.
3. In the File name field, key in the name. 4. Click Save. The Save Job Set File dialog box closes.
To load an existing job set
3/24/2010

1. In the Batch Print dialog box, click the Open icon. or From the Batch Print dialog box's File menu, choose Open.
Page 253 of 329
The Open Job Set File dialog box opens.
2. Select the desired job set. 3. Click Open. The Open Job Set File dialog box closes and the selected job sets design files are listed in the Files and Models to Print list box. All printing specifications associated with the job set appear in the Specifications Controlling Printing list box.
Batch Print does not embed print specifications in job set files. Instead, job sets reference (by name) specifications are stored in a separate specification file. This separation lets you easily share specifications across multiple job sets. It also simplifies maintenance. New specifications are automatically available for use in all job sets. As well, corrections or additions to specifications are automatically propagated to sets that reference them.
Using Print Specifications

Print specifications control the following aspects of printing:

Printer (see Printer specifications) Print Area (see Print Area specifications) Layout (see Layout specifications) Display (see Display specifications)
3/24/2010
Page 254 of 329
Using print specifications you can set up a system for printing the drawings for a particular project. Once set up, you do not need to enter the drawing file to create a print of it. You can produce a print of one or more drawings via Batch Print. Managing print specifications Using the Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box, you can create, copy, rename, and delete print specifications.
Whenever you create, rename, copy, or edit a print specification, Batch Print automatically assigns it to the current job set.
Rename a print specification
You can rename a print specification but you should be careful when doing this.
You should take into account that changing the name of a specification:
May cause the descriptive name to not match the contents of the specification. May affect other job sets that have referenced the same print specification.
To rename a print specification
1. In the Batch Print dialog box, click the Manage Specifications icon. or From the Batch Print dialog boxs Specifications menu, choose Manage.
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens.
2. In the Types list box, select the type of specification to rename. 3. In the Specifications list box, select the specification to rename. 4. Click the Rename button. The appropriate Rename Specification dialog box opens. 5. In the Name field, key in the new name. 6. Click OK.
Create a new print specification
For each specification type, you can define multiple specifications. For example, you may have a choice of printers that you can access. Also, you may have several page sizes that you use. You can create specifications to account for each combination that is required.
3/24/2010

To create a new print specification
Page 255 of 329
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select the type of specification to create. 3. Click the New button. The appropriate New Specification Name dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the name for the new specification. 5. Click OK. The appropriate Properties dialog box opens so you can define the new specification. See Defining Print Specifications.
Copying a print specification
To create a new specification that is similar to one that exists, you can copy the existing specification. Once copied, you can make any adjustments that you require.
To copy a print specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select the type of specification to copy. 3. In the Specifications list box, select the specification to copy. 4. Click the Copy button. The appropriate New Specification Name dialog box opens. 5. In the Name field, key in the new name. 6. Click OK. The appropriate Properties dialog box opens so you can modify the copied specification. See Defining print Specifications.
Deleting a print specification
Where a print specification is no longer wanted, you can delete it.

When deleting print specifications, you should be careful that other job sets have not referenced them. Once deleted, they will not be available for any other job sets that may have referenced them.
To delete a print specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens.
3/24/2010

2. In the Types list box, select the type of specification to delete. 3. In the Specifications list box, select the specification to delete. 4. Click Delete.
Page 256 of 329
Defining Print Specifications

You can define the properties for each print specification of each specification type: Printer, Print Area, Layout, and Display.
When you modify print specifications, keep in mind that they are shared across job sets. If you edit a specification, your changes affect all job sets that reference it. Similarly, if you delete or rename a specification used by another job set, Batch Print automatically selects a new specification of the appropriate type the next time it opens that other job set.
Printer specifications A Printer specification selects a MicroStation printer driver configuration file, a paper size, a paper orientation, and specifies postprocessing options.
Define printer specifications
You can create new printer specifications via the Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box.
To create a new printer specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Printer.
3. Click the New button. The New Printer Specification Name dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the name for the new printer specification. 5. Click OK. The New Printer Specification Name dialog box closes and the Properties dialog box opens for the new printer specification. 6. Click the Browse button. The Select Printer Driver Configuration File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 257 of 329
8. Click OK. The Properties dialog box opens for the selected printer driver configuration file to be associated with the newly named specification.
Printer Specification Properties dialog box
Using the Properties dialog box, you can define the various settings for the selected printer. Batch Print permits use of .pltcfg-defined paper sizes in the system printer specification, as well as the print file output and post-processing options. The options available to you will vary depending on the printer driver configuration file you select.
When using Batch Print with a system printer, it is strongly recommended that you create a version of "printer.pltcfg" for each target system printer, and specify the desired Windows printer name in each .pltcfg file using the Default Windows Printer Name property. Doing so allows Batch Print to present the list of paper sizes that are appropriate for the target printer. If you use the generic "printer.pltcfg" without an embedded Windows printer name, Batch Print obtains the paper size list from the default Windows printer.
Setting the properties in the Properties dialog box
1. In the Paper Size and Orientation group box, choose a paper size from the Size list box. 2. Choose the dimension readout in the desired units. 3. Select the desired paper orientation (or print rotation). or If you are using the "printer.pltcfg", you can select Use paper size and orientation from Windows Print Dialog. 4. In the Output and Post Processing group box, choose a Print to option. See Output and Post Processing options. 5. Click OK to accept the modifications to the printer specification properties.
Output and post-processing options
In the Output and Post Processing section of the printer Properties dialog box, you can choose between creating print files (optionally with a post-processing system command) and printing directly to a device.
To create print files
3/24/2010

1. In the Output and Post Processing group box, select Print to File. The default output folder is that specified by the configuration variable MS_PLTFILES.
Page 258 of 329
2. (Optional) To change the default output folder, key in a new value. or (Optional) Click the Browse button to open the Browse For Folder dialog box. Use this dialog box to select a new folder, then click OK. 3. (Optional) To specify an operating system command to be executed for each generated print file, key in the command into the Print Cmd field, using %f to represent the print file name. 4. (Optional) To change the format of the file names assigned to print files, click the Name button and use the controls in the Print Filename Format dialog box. When finished, click OK to return to the printer Properties dialog box. By default, print files are named after the design file with a three-digit numeric extension. Multiple print files from the same design file are distinguished by incrementing this numeric extension (for example, abc.000, abc.001, abc.002). When you click the Name button in the Output and Post Processing section, several of the format options let you specify a file extension in the Extension field. Choosing Custom activates the String field for entry of a custom format. This format can be literal characters plus any combination of the following substitution strings.
Substitution String %j %d %e %p %b %m %x Base job set filename (batchplt if job set is untitled). Base design filename (no directory or extension). Contents of Extensions field. Three-digit print counter starting with 000. This counter is not reset between design files in a job set. Three-digit per-design-file print boundary counter starting with 000. This counter resets between design files in a job set. Model name Design file extension. Replaced By
If you have design files with the same base name but different extensions, you can use the %x substitution string to differentiate the print filenames. This lets you include the file extension in the print filename. Take, for example, the filenames abc.dgn, abc.hln, and abc.s01. Here you could specify in the Print Filename Format dialog box that the Extension be ps and that the String be %d-%x.%e. This would generate the print filenames abc-dgn.ps, abc-hln.ps, and abc-s01.ps. The following table shows other typical examples of how these substitution strings can be used.
Filename formats <DGN>.<boundary counter> <DGN>-<boundary counter>.<extension> <DGN>-<print counter>.<extension> <DGN>-<model>-<print counter>.<extension> <job>.<print counter> <job>-<print counter>.<extension> <job>-<DGN>-<print counter>.<extension> Substitution string %d.%b %d-%b.%e %d-%p.%e %d-%m-%p.%e %j.%p %j-%p.%e %j-%d-%p.%e
<job>-<DGN>-<model>-<print counter>.<extension> %j-%d-%m-%p.%e
Your other choice, in the Output and Post Processing section of the printer Properties dialog box, is to print directly to a device.
To print directly to a device
1. In the Output and Post Processing section, select Print to Device. 2. In the Port field, key in the port name (for example, lpt1: or \\server\printer). Keying a name in this field has the same effect as adding a File Name property to a printer driver configuration file.
Modifying a printer specification
3/24/2010
Page 259 of 329
You can modify an existing printer specification from the Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box. You can also modify the selected printer specification from the Batch Print dialog box.
Remember, when you modify a printer specification, it affects all job sets that reference that particular specification.
To modify an existing printer specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Printer.
3. In the Specifications list box, select the specification that is to be modified, then click Properties. or In the Specifications list box, double-click the specification to be modified. The selected printer specifications Properties dialog box opens. 4. Make changes as required to the settings. 5. Click OK to accept modifications to printer specification properties. The printer specifications Properties dialog box closes.
Modify the selected printer specification from the Batch Print dialog box
1. In the Specifications Controlling Printing list box in the Batch Print dialog box, right-click Printer, then choose Properties from the pop-up menu. or Select the Printer Specification entry in the list box and then from the Specifications menu, choose Properties. The printer Properties dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 260 of 329
Printer Specification Properties dialog box
2. Make changes as required to the settings. 3. Click OK to accept modifications to printer specification properties. The printer specifications Properties dialog box closes. Print Area specifications A Print Area specification describes how Batch Print determines which portion of each design file to print. The two basic options are:

A view may be one of the eight numbered views or it may be a saved view. A fenced area in a view because fences are not stored in design files and because Batch Print essentially is non-interactive once it starts printing, Batch Print dynamically creates fences from particular boundary-defining elements, such as shapes or a cell (similar to placing a fence by snapping to the vertices of a shape). The print area specification Properties dialog box is used to define the characteristics of the shape elements or the name of the cell.
To create a new print area specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Print Area.
3/24/2010
Page 261 of 329
3. Click the New button. The New Print Area Specification Name dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the name for the new specification. 5. Click OK. The New Print Area Specification Name dialog box closes and the Properties dialog box for the new specification opens. The specifications name appears in the title bar of the dialog box. 6. In the Reference View group box, choose the number of the desired view or Saved View from the View list box. Designating a reference view determines the default print options (which can be overridden, See Display specifications), viewing angle and, in 3D files, clip volumes and front and back clipping planes. 7. If you chose Saved View, key in the name of the Saved Views. When you choose Saved View, a field appears adjacent the View list box. 8. From the Print Boundary group box, choose one of the following options from the Method list box:
View Fit Master Fit All to print a view or saved view(s) in each file. to print the view after fitting it to all elements in the active model. to print the view, after fitting it to all elements in the active model and all references. to print an area bounded by a particular shape. Shape When you select Shape, toggles appear that let you define the attributes of the shape (that is, the Level, Color, Style and Weight attributes). to print an area bounded by a cell. Cell When you select Cell, a Name field appears, into which you key in the name of the cell. The cell name may be a literal name (for example, border) or regular expression (for example, bdr.* to match any cell name starting with bdr). to print a sheet.
Sheet
9. (Optional) In the Search Files section, turn off the Master File and/or References settings to limit the search for the boundarydefining shape or cell. By default, Batch Print searches each master file and all of its references to find the boundary-defining shape or cell. You restrict the search to specific references by typing their logical names (for example, border) or filenames (without drives or directories, for example, border.dgn) into the multi-line References field. As with cell names, reference filenames may be literals or regular expressions. 10. (Optional) Turn on Process Multiple Boundary Elements to generate a print for each boundary element found. or (Optional) Turn off Process Multiple Boundary Elements to generate a print for the first boundary element found only. 11. Click OK to accept the settings. The Properties dialog box closes and the new specification becomes the selected Print Area specification in the Batch Print dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 262 of 329
Print Area Specification Properties dialog box (for a bound shape)
Selecting multiple cells, references, or saved views
When specifying the name of a cell, reference, or saved view, you can use regular expressions to choose multiple items. Regular expressions let you define strings with variables for matching the names of the required items. They provide a string matching mechanism and are defined by the following rules:
Character c \c ^ $ . :a :d :n Also, a colon followed by a space matches any punctuation character. [] [^] s* s+ st any one of characters in ; ranges like a-z are legal. any single character not in ; ranges are legal. zero or more occurrences of string s (the preceding character). one or more occurrences of string s (the preceding character). string s followed by string t. Examples Meaning any non-special character c matches itself. turn off special meaning of character c. beginning of line. end of line. any single character. any alphabetic character [a-z|A-Z]. any digit [0-9]. any alphanumeric character [a-z|A-Z|0-9].
Take, for example, the case where there are six references attached print1.dgn, print2.dgn, print3.dgn, printa.dgn, printb.dgn, and prelim.dgn. The following table shows those filenames that are matched when using various reference filename specifications.
Specify All six references. p.* Finds all files beginning with the letter p followed by zero or more of any other characters. Three references print1.dgn, print2.dgn and print3.dgn. print:d.dgn Finds all files beginning with print followed by a single digit and then .dgn. T f i t d d i tb d To find the following
3/24/2010

print:a.dgn Finds all references beginning with print followed by a single alphabetic character and then .dgn. Five references all but prelim.dgn. print:n.dgn Finds all references beginning with print followed by a single alphanumeric character and then .dgn. Modifying a print area specification
Page 263 of 329
You can modify an existing print area specification from the Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box. Also, you can modify the selected print area specification from the Batch Print dialog box.
Remember, when you modify a print area specification, it affects all job sets that reference that particular specification.
To modify an existing print area specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Print Area. 3. In the Specifications list box, select the specification that is to be modified, then click Properties. or In the Specifications list box, double-click the specification to be modified. The selected print area specifications Properties dialog box opens. 4. Make changes as required to the existing settings. 5. Click OK to accept the modifications to the print area specification properties. The Properties dialog box closes.
Modify a selected print area specification from the Batch Print dialog box
1. In the Specifications Controlling Printing list box in the Batch Print dialog box, right-click Print Area and then choose Properties from the pop-up menu. or Select the Print Area specification entry in the list box and then from the Specifications menu, choose Properties. The selected print area specifications Properties dialog box opens. 2. Make changes as required to the existing settings. 3. Click OK to accept the modifications to the print area specification properties. The Properties dialog box closes. Layout specifications A Layout specification describes how Batch Print determines the size and position of each print on the selected sheet size. Batch Print supports five print size options, which are selected via the Print Size/Scale group box's Method list box in the Properties dialog box. Options are:

Maximize makes each print as large as possible given the paper size and orientation in the job sets printer specification. Scale specifies a scale factor that maps master units in the design file to physical units on the output media. The print size is calculated from this scale and the size of the print area. % of Maximum Size specifies an integer between 10 and 100 inclusive to make each print some percentage of its maximum
3/24/2010

possible size on the selected sheet size.
Page 264 of 329
X Size specifies an explicit X size (width) for the print. The prints Y size is calculated from this X size and the print areas aspect ratio. Y Size specifies an explicit Y size (height) for the print. The prints X size is calculated from this Y size and the print areas aspect ratio.
Batch Print supports two Print Origin options, which are selected via the Print Origin Method list box in the Properties dialog box. Options are:

Center centers each print on the selected sheet. Manual Offset specifies explicit X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) offsets for the print. These offsets are relative to the selected sheets lower-left margin.
If necessary, you can change the printed output units used by your printer. This is done by selecting the required units from the Units list box. You can select from: in, ft, mm, cm, dm, m.
The Center origin option and the Maximize and % of Maximum size options are safe options. They never cause print-time errors. Certain combinations of the other options, combined with a particular print areas size or shape, may result in print-time errors.
Example of print-time errors
Consider a design file representing a map defined in terms of meters. A print scale of 1 (meaning one master design unit maps to one mm or inch) almost certainly results in a print size too large error when used with that file. That same scale factor might work fine with a design file representing some small mechanical part. See Printing Errors.
To create a new layout specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Layout.
3. Click the New button. The New Layout Specification Name dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the name for the new specification (for example, A4 portrait or 1=20). 5. Click OK. The New Layout Specification Name dialog box closes and the Properties dialog box for the new specification opens. The specifications name appears in the title bar of the dialog box (for example A4 portrait Properties or 1=20 Properties).
3/24/2010
Page 265 of 329
Layout Specification Properties dialog box
6. From the Print Size/Scale group boxs Method list box, choose the required method (see above for descriptions). 7. From the Print Origin group boxs Method list box, choose the required method (see above for descriptions). 8. From the Units list box, select the desired units for the printer output. The scale of the print is calculated as master units per printer output units. This setting defines the printer output units. 9. Click OK to accept the settings for the new Layout specification properties. The Properties dialog box closes and the new specification becomes the selected Layout specification in the Batch Print dialog box
Modifying a layout specification
You can modify an existing layout specification from the Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box. Also, you can modify the selected Layout specification from the Batch Print dialog box.
Remember, when you modify a layout specification, it affects all job sets that reference that particular specification.
To modify an existing layout specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Layout. 3. In the Specifications list box, select the required specification, then click Properties. or In the Specifications list box, double-click the specification to be modified. The selected specifications Properties dialog box opens. 4. Make changes as required to the existing settings. 5. Click OK to accept the modifications to the layout specification properties. The Properties dialog box closes.
To modify the selected layout specification from the Batch Print dialog box
1. In the Specifications Controlling Printing list box in the Batch Print dialog box, right-click Layout and select Properties from the pop-
3/24/2010

or Select the layout specification in the list box and then from the Specifications menu, choose Properties. The appropriate layout Properties dialog box opens. 2. Make changes as required to the existing settings. 3. Click OK to accept the modifications to the layout specification properties. The Properties dialog box closes. Display specifications
Page 266 of 329
A Display specification controls the appearance of printed elements. You can specify a pen table that will resymbolize the print or you can control one or more display options the printing equivalent of the MicroStation view attributes. Each display option has three possible states:

As-is causes Batch Print to use the setting saved in the design file. On turns on the setting. Off turns off the setting.
To create a new display specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Display.
3. Click the New button. The New Display Specification Name dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in the name for the new specification (for example, No Fills). 5. Click OK. The New Display Specification Name dialog box closes and the Properties dialog box for the new specification opens. The specifications name appears in the title bar of the dialog box (for example, No Fills Properties).
3/24/2010
Page 267 of 329
Display Specification Properties dialog box
6. (Optional) Make the desired changes to each print attribute. The choices are As-is, Off, or On. 7. (Optional) To attach a pen table to resymbolize the print, key in the name and location of a pen table in the Filename field or use the Browse button to select the pen table. 8. (Optional) Make the desired changes to the fields in the Additional Options group box. 9. Click OK to accept the settings for the new display specification properties. The display Properties dialog box closes and the new specification becomes the selected display specification in the Batch Print dialog box
Modifying a display specification
You can modify an existing display specification from the Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box. Also, you can modify the selected display specification from the Batch Print dialog box.
Remember, when you modify a display specification, it affects all job sets that reference that particular specification.
To modify an existing display specification
The Batch Print Specification Manager dialog box opens. 2. In the Types list box, select Display.
3/24/2010

3. In the Specifications list box, select the required specification, then click Properties. or In the Specifications list box, double-click the specification to be modified. The selected specifications Properties dialog box opens. 4. Make changes as required to the existing settings. 5. Click OK to accept the modifications to the Display specification properties. The Properties dialog box closes.
To modify the selected display specification from the Batch Print dialog box
Page 268 of 329
1. In the Specifications Controlling Printing list box in the Batch Print dialog box, right-click Display, then select Properties from the pop-up menu. or Select the Display specification entry in the list box and then, from the Specifications menu, choose Properties. The appropriate display Properties dialog box opens. 2. Make changes as required to the existing settings. 3. Click OK to accept the modifications to the Display specification properties. The Properties dialog box closes.
Example using the three display options
To illustrate the benefits of the three available display options, consider a set of design files each having a different combination of on/off view attribute settings for text nodes, constructions, and fill. Assume that you want to print all of these files with text nodes and constructions hidden, but you want to print filled areas as they appear in the files. (Fill may be on in some files and off in others.) To obtain the desired results, simply set the Text Nodes and Constructions options to Off and set the Fill option (and all other options) to As-is. As Batch Print opens each design file, it turns off text nodes and constructions but it will leave all other settings alone. Files and directories Batch Print stores user preferences in the file ${MS_DATA}batchplt.rsc (for example, c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\WorkSpace\System\Data\batchplt.rsc). Currently the only preference saved is the name and location of the last job set file saved or opened. Batch Print stores all specifications in the file ${MS_DATA}batchplt.spc (for example, c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\WorkSpace\System\Data\batchplt.spc). You can make Batch Print use a different file by setting the configuration variable MS_BATCHPLT_SPECS to point to the desired file through Workspace > Configuration > Printing > Batch Print Specification. You have control over the names and locations of job set files. By default, they are saved in the directory specified by the configuration variable MS_PLTFILES. The default Batch Print log file (written to record the status of the actual printing process) is MS_PLTFILES:batchplt.log (for example, c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\WorkSpace\Projects\Untitled\out\batchplt.log).
For a list of Batch Print key-ins, see Batch Print Key-ins.
Print Resymbolization and Pen Tables

Introduction Pen Tables Modify Pen Table Dialog Box Pen Maps
Introduction
3/24/2010
Page 269 of 329
Resymbolization is the process of changing characteristics of elements within a design file. When these changes are applied to printed output, the process is referred to as print resymbolization. MicroStation uses pen tables to control print resymbolization. Pen tables let you remap any of the characteristics associated with design file elements for the printed output. Once specified, you can save them for future use. You can store multiple pen tables that can be applied to one or more design files. Using a pen table, you can specify many complex print resymbolization steps. Similarly, you can specify a single simple resymbolization step. In addition, the text string substitution feature lets you substitute specific strings of text with either a replacement text string or a string variable such as the date or time. In summary, a pen table lets you:

Selectively alter the printed appearance of elements Determine the printing order of elements Specify text string substitutions
Pen Tables
Pen tables are ASCII text files that contain instructions for resymbolizing the printed output of design files. The instructions are contained in sections within the pen table. Pen tables are created or modified automatically when you use the Pen Table dialog boxes. For each pen table section, there are element selection criteria and a set of element output actions. During creation of printed output, the pen table tests for the presence of specific types of elements and related element characteristics. If such elements are detected, the pen table will modify, enhance, or eliminate these elements or their characteristics depending on the intended output. The testing criteria includes:

Element type Files Weight Color Fill Color Level Style Class MSLink number (in external database) Entity number (in external database)
Evaluation of elements is based on the criteria that you specify. Any combination of these parameters can be evaluated. Many elements, such as level, can have multiple values and ranges of values.
To create a pen table
1. From the Print dialog boxs menu, choose New. The Create Pen Table File dialog box opens. Pen tables are stored in the directory defined by the MS_PENTABLE configuration variable (typically MicroStations "..\Workspaces\System\Tables\Pen" directory). 2. In the File name field, type the pen table file name. Only the file name need be entered. By default, the extension .tbl is added. 3. Click Save.
3/24/2010
Page 270 of 329
The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. The new pen table is loaded and pen table processing is activated. When you create a pen table, MicroStation automatically inserts a single section called NEW. This section provides the minimum structure required in the pen table. You can either rename this section or insert a new one and delete NEW.
To load a previously existing pen table
1. From the Print dialog boxs PenTable menu, choose Attach. The Select Pen Table File dialog box opens. 2. In the Files list box, select the pen table. 3. Click Open. Focus returns to the Print dialog box. The pen table is loaded and pen table processing is activated. 4. (Optional) To modify or review the contents of the loaded pen table, from the Pen Table menu, choose Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens.
Modify Pen Table Dialog Box

All operations concerning pen tables can be carried out from the Modify Pen Table dialog box. Sections present in the currently loaded pen table are listed in the Element Section Processing Order list box. Its File and Edit menus let you create and edit both new and existing pen tables. Using settings in the Element Selection Criteria tab of the Modify Pen Table dialog box, you can define the parameters for selecting elements in the design file (see Element Selection Criteria). Having set the selection criteria, you can use the settings in the Element Output Actions tab to define the changes required for the printed output (see Element Output Actions). You can define an individual parameter for element selection and based on that evaluation, specify modification of the identified element in the output file. Similarly, you can evaluate multiple parameters. However, when you specify more than one parameter, they are considered as a boolean AND operation. That is, elements for which you specify multiple parameter values must meet all specified criteria before they will be identified.
3/24/2010
Page 271 of 329
For example, if you specify Ellipse as the element type, you can specify one or more types of modifications to be applied to all ellipses in the design file. However, if you specify Ellipse, Level 40, Line Weight 2, then only ellipses on level 40 with a line weight of 2 will be affected by the output action. All other ellipses in the design will be ignored by this section. Subsequently, you can define changes that you want to apply to other types of ellipses on other levels of the design file. Those changes will be applied without affecting the first section of changes. By default, only one section can be applied to an element. This means that elements modified by the present or previous sections cannot be changed in future sections. You can change this in the Pen Table Options dialog box, however, to allow more than one section to apply to an element. If you do so, the sections are selected and applied in descending order, starting at the top of the list and working downward.
To open the Modify Pen Table dialog box
1. In the Print dialog box, from the Pen Table menu, choose Edit. If a pen table is loaded, the Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. If no pen table is loaded, the Select Pen Table File dialog box opens. Proceed to the next step. 2. In the Files list box, select the pen table. 3. Click Open. The selected pen table is loaded and the Modify Pen Table dialog box opens.
To save a modified pen table
1. From the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs File menu, choose Save. or To save the modified pen table in a different pen table file, choose Save As and then use the controls in the Create Pen Table dialog box to specify the destination file name, directory, and disk. File menu Items in the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs File menu are used to create new pen tables, open existing pen tables, or import AutoCAD CTB and STB files for modification.
3/24/2010

File menu item New Open Save Save As Export CTB File Exit and Unload Description Opens the Create Pen Table File dialog box to create a new pen table. Opens the Select Pen Table File dialog box to open an existing pen table. Saves the active pen table file. Opens the Create Pen Table File dialog box to save the active pen table under a different name. Opens the Export AutoCAD CTB plot style table dialog box. Closes the Modify Pen Table dialog box and unloads the pen table.
Page 272 of 329
Import Plot Style Table Opens the Import AutoCAD plot style table dialog box.
Edit menu Items in the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Edit menu are used to create and modify sections in the currently loaded pen table.
Edit menu item Description
Insert New Section Above Inserts a new section above the currently selected section in the Element Section Processing Order list box. Insert New Section Below Inserts a new section below the currently selected section in the Element Section Processing Order list box. Rename Section Delete Section Clear Types Clear Classes Set All Types Set All Classes Lets you rename the currently selected section. Lets you delete the currently selected section. Clears all element types currently selected. Clears all element classes currently selected. Selects all element types. Selects all element classes.
Element sections Each element section contains the definition for an individual resymbolization task or a group of related resymbolization tasks. These tasks can be applied to either a single element or a group of elements. Element sections let you define resymbolization tasks separately from each other. You can specify virtually an unlimited number of resymbolization tasks of varying degrees of complexity. These resymbolization tasks can apply to any element that, while being similar to others, has at least one characteristic differentiating it from the others. In the Modify Pen Table dialog box, the Element Section Processing Order list box displays the processing order of the element sections that you have defined for the pen table. As you create element sections, they are added to the Element Section Processing Order list box. During processing, each element is checked against the first section, then the second section and so on, through to the last section or until a match occurs. Regardless of whether elements are affected by only one section or by all sections in the pen table, the order of processing is important. When necessary, you can rearrange the order of sections in the Element Section Processing Order list. When creating sections, Element Selection Criteria parameters define the elements to be processed and the Element Output Actions parameters define how the selected elements are treated when printed.
To add a pen table section
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Section Processing Order list box, select an existing section at the point where you want to insert a new section. 2. From the dialog boxs Edit menu, choose Insert New Section Above to insert the new section above the selected one. or Choose Insert New Section Below to insert the new section below the selected one. The Insert Section dialog box opens. 3. In the Name field, type the new sections name. 4. Click OK.
To rename a pen table section
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Section Processing Order list box, select the section to rename. 2 From the dialog boxs Edit menu choose Rename Section
3/24/2010

The Rename Section dialog box opens. 3. In the Name field, type the new name. 4. Click OK.
To delete a pen table section
Page 273 of 329
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Section Processing Order list box, select the section name to delete. 2. From the dialog boxs Edit menu, choose Delete Section.
To modify a pen table section
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Section Processing Order list box, select the section. 2. Set the Element Selection Criteria for the selected section. Element Selection Criteria specify which elements are selected for processing. The list boxes used to specify element type and class criteria allow multiple, disjointed selections. <Ctrl+click> to select multiple non-contiguous items. <Shift+click> to select a range of items (multiple contiguous items). The fields used to specify element line weight, level, color, and fill color criteria allow multiple, disjointed value ranges specified using commas and hyphens for example, 2, 7, 11-14, 16-18, 21. 3. Set the Output Actions for the selected section. Output actions specify what is to be done once an element meets the sections criteria.
To rearrange the processing order of pen table sections
1. In the Element Section Processing Order list box, select the section to be moved. 2. Click the Down or Up button (below the list box) to move the selected section down or up one position in the list. 3. Repeat step 2 to further rearrange the order of the sections. Global actions Global actions are completed without regard to section definitions. They are applied across the entire design file and across all levels within the file. Global actions cannot be focused on any specific section. They provide three features for modifying your designs printed output:

Text Substitutions Mapping Pen Colors Mapping Pen Weights
Text substitutions
You can use the Text Substitutions dialog box to replace text in your design file for the printed output. This can be done with standard text string variables for text items such as: design file name (short, abbreviated, or long form), pen table file name (short, abbreviated, or long form), printer driver configuration file name (short, abbreviated, or long form), date, time, scale (long or short form), paper size, paper size name, model name, last saved date, system printer name, or one of eight document set variables. Proposed replacement strings are special strings that are converted to the required information during processing for printing. When specifying these text substitutions, the system provides a suggested actual string. You can place an identical text string in the design file at the position that you want the text substitution. Alternatively, you can amend the actual string to match an existing text string in the design. In addition, you can replace original generic text (text that is not standard design file information) with replacement text strings. Using the Text Substitutions dialog box to replace text works well in MicroStation's V8.5 and earlier design files. In MicroStation's V8 XM Edition, the Fields functionality provides better control over layout and formatting, and allows you to see the printed replacement text in the design session rather than only when you preview the print. It is recommended that you use fields rather than pen tables for text substitution.
To define a text substitution
3/24/2010

1. In the design, place at least one string of text that you want substituted with something else in the printed output. 2. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Global Actions section, click the Text Substitutions button. The Text Substitutions dialog box opens.
Page 274 of 329
3. From the Text Substitutions dialog boxs Edit menu, choose one of the Insert menu items. (See the Text Substitutions dialog box for the complete list of menu items.) Choosing one of these menu items inserts a list box entry. A special string appears in the Replacement field and a suggested string appears in the Actual field, as follows: 4. (Optional) In the Actual field, edit the string to match an existing string in the design file. 5. Press <Enter> to update the list box entry with the specified strings.
To insert a generic text substitution entry
1. In the design, place at least one string of text for which you want to substitute other text for printed output. 2. From the Text Substitutions dialog boxs Edit menu, choose Insert New. An entry labeled Original appears in the Actual field of the list box. 3. In the Actual field, replace Original with the string in the design that you want replaced for printing purposes. Text substitution is case sensitive, so make sure that the Actual string is exactly the same as that in the design file. 4. In the Replacement field, type the replacement string. 5. Press <Enter> to update the list box entry with the specified strings.
Date and time format
The Windows Regional Settings are used to format the time and date for printed output in a locale-sensitive manner. This produces the following results when English (U.S.) is used and the short date is set to mm/dd/yyyy and the time is set to hh:mm:ss tt:

Pen table DATE: 08/23/1999 Pen table TIME: 02:36:05

If you want to customize the date or time format, you can assign an ANSI C function strftime-compatible format string to any of the following variables. Some of the more common substitution codes are listed below. With these formatting strings, you can choose how to display the date and time. For example, you can set MS_PENTABLE_DATE_FORMAT=It is now %I:%M %p on %A, %B %d, %Y, which displays as It is now 02:36 PM on Monday, December 10, 1999.
%a Abbreviated weekday name (such as Thu)
3/24/2010

%A Full weekday name (such as Thursday) %b Abbreviated month name (such as Nov) %B Full month name (such as November) %c Date and time representation appropriate for the locale %d Day of the month as a integer (00-31) %H Hour using a 24-hour clock (00-23) %I %j Hour using a 12-hour clock (01-12) Day of year as decimal number (001-366)
Page 275 of 329
%m Month as decimal number (01-12) %M Minutes as decimal number (00-59) %p AM/PM indicator for the 12-hour clock %S Seconds as decimal number (00-59) %w Weekday as a decimal number (0-6 with Sunday as 0) %x Date representation for current locale %X Time representation for current locale %y Two-digit year number (such as 99) %Y Four-digit year number (such as 1999)
The entry automatically updates in the pen table when you close this dialog box, edit another string, or insert a new string.
If a replacement string or a portion of a replacement string has the format of a MicroStation configuration macro that is, $(<text>) the string undergoes substitution automatically to a preset value. This automatic substitution is called expansion. For example, the string User: $(_USTN_USERNAME) might expand to User: JohnSmith. If a string in configuration macro format is expanded to another configuration macro, substitution is iterative. That is, it continues until the resulting string does not contain a configuration macro.
Mapping pen colors
You can apply output color and width symbology to different parts of the same element. See the Pen Maps section for information about mapping pen colors.
Mapping pen weights
You can specify print output weights for each of the MicroStation weight values. See the Pen Maps section for information about mapping pen weights. Pen table options Pen table options allow you to customize the behavior of the pen table. They are used to control level symbology, apply multiple sections to elements, set an option for importing an AutoCAD CTB or STB plot style table, and set options for complex and compound elements. Pen table options apply only to the pen table that is currently open and are saved in the pen table file. To see the Pen Table Options dialog box, click the Pen Table Options button in the Modify Pen Table dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 276 of 329
Element symbology comparison mode
This option affects how the element selection criteria operates when level symbology is enabled. There are two modes from which to choose:
As stored in element header The pen table processes your specified element selection criteria against the symbology as it is stored in the element header. As displayed in view The pen table processes your specified element selection criteria against the symbology as it is currently displayed in the view.
The pen table's element output actions are always applied, whether level symbology is enabled or not.
Match multiple element sections
You can set up a pen table to apply more than one section to an element. If this check box is on, the sections will be selected and applied in descending order, starting at the top of the list and working downwards. If this check box is off (the default), once a section has been selected by its input criteria and its output actions have been applied, pen table processing on that element stops. Elements modified by the present or previous sections cannot be changed in future sections.
Plot style table compatibility mode
This option prevents fill pattern output actions from being applied to non-filled objects. If this check box is on, any plot style table specified in the sheet definition is automatically attached to the plot. The system searches for plot style tables in the AutoCAD plot styles folder first. If none are found, it searches in the MS_PENTABLE search path. If an AutoCAD plot style table (CTB or STB file) is specified in the active layout of a DWG file, it is converted into a MicroStation pen table and is attached to the plot. It prevents fill pattern output actions from being applied to non-filled objects.
The MS_PLT_SET_PLOT_STYLE_TABLE_FROM_SHEET configuration variable controls this behavior. If it is set to 0, sheet plot style tables are ignored. By default it is set to 1, and sheet plot style tables are attached to the plot.
Complex / Compound element options
A common hurdle to overcome in pen table design is the resymbolization of complex (cell, shared cell, complex shape) and compound (dimension, multi-line, and tag) elements. Without careful input criteria choices, components of complex and compound elements can be affected twice by the pen table once by inheriting output actions applied to the complex header, and again due to direct manipulation of the component element. This can easily lead to unexpected pen table behavior. To address this issue, you have the ability to choose whether you wish to treat cells, shared cells, dimensions, multi-lines, and tags as single units or as individual elements. When they are treated as a single unit, only the complex or compound header is processed by the pen table; all of its children inherit any output actions applied to the header When they are treated as individual elements the complex or
3/24/2010

compound header is ignored by the pen table.
Page 277 of 329
Complex strings and shapes are always treated as single units. No element is processed by the pen table more than once. To treat the components of complex or compound elements as individual elements, check the appropriate option.

Explode cells If this check box is on, cells are treated as individual elements. Explode shared cells If this check box is on, shared cells are treated as individual elements. Explode dimensions If this check box is on, dimensions are treated as individual elements. Explode multilines If this check box is on, multi-lines are treated as individual elements. Explode tags If this check box is on, tags are treated as individual elements.
Element selection criteria Settings contained on the Element Selection Criteria tab determine which elements in the design file are selected for processing. You do not have to define all settings. When a setting is not defined, then all options for that setting are included. For example, if you do not set a color or range of colors, then elements of all colors are selected.
To set the element selection criteria for a pen table section
1. If necessary, in the Modify Pen Table dialog box, click the Element Selection Criteria tab. 2. (Optional) If you do not want the settings in this section to be used during processing, turn on the Disable Section check box. 3. (Optional) If the file is a DWG file and a CTB or STB file has been imported, you can turn on the Use Section Name as Criteria check box. (For more information, see Element Selection Criteria.) 4. In the Type list box, select the element types. Use <Ctrl+click> to select multiple non-contiguous types and <Shift+click> to select a range of types.
Element Selection Criteria tab
3/24/2010

5. Click the Files button to identify the files you want processed (see Files).
Page 278 of 329
6. In the Weight field, key in the line weight values. or Click the Weight button and use the controls in the Select Weights dialog box to set the line weight values (see Weight). 7. In the Level field, key in the level numbers. or Click the Level button and use the controls in the Select Levels dialog box to set the level numbers (see Level). 8. In the Color field, key in the color numbers. or Click the Color button and use the controls in the Select Colors dialog box to set the colors (see Color). 9. In the Fill Color field, key in the fill color numbers. or Click the Fill Color button and use the controls in the Select Colors dialog box to set the fill colors (see Fill Color). 10. Click the Style button and use the controls in the Select Line Style dialog box to select the line styles (see Style). 11. In the Class list box, select the classes. 12. In the MSLink field, key in the mslink column values. 13. In the Entity field, key in the entity numbers.
Types
This list box contains a list of element types. A type, against which an element is evaluated, is selected by clicking it. You can select from the following element types: arc, B-spline, B-spline surface, cell, complex shape, complex string, cone, curve, dimension, ellipse, line, line string, multi-line, raster, shape, shared cell, solid, surface, tag, text, text node.
Files
This setting defines the design files that will be selected by the pen table for processing. You can select the active file and any references by their slot numbers. References also can be selected by their logical names. Using logical names for references produces more reusable pen tables. For example, you may have a number of design drawing files that use the same references, including the border file, but in different slot numbers. Selecting by logical names ensures that the correct resymbolization occurs for the references, irrespective of their slot numbers. To identify the master file, you need to use its slot number, which is always zero because it does not have a logical name.
To select files for processing by slot number
3/24/2010

The Identify Files dialog box opens. 2. In the Slot Numbers section click the Select button. The Select Files dialog box opens. 3. Select the required files and click OK. The Select Files dialog box closes and the selected files slot numbers appear in the Slot Numbers field.
To select references for processing by logical name
Page 279 of 329
1. In the Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Files button. The Identify Files dialog box opens. 2. In the Reference Logical Names section, click the Select button. The Select Files dialog box opens. 3. Select the required references and click OK. The Select Files dialog box closes and the selected files are added to the Reference Logical Names list box.
Alternative Method To select references for processing by logical name
1. In the Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Files button. The Identify Files dialog box opens. 2. In the field below the Reference Logical Names list box, type the logical name of the required reference. 3. Click Add. The file is added to the Reference Logical Names list box. When specifying a logical name for a reference in the pen table, you can enter the complete logical name or you can enter an expression pattern consisting of one or more wild cards. The following table identifies the wild cards that you can use for matching logical names.
Wild Card (.) (*) (+) Match any character. Serves as a single-character wild card. Match zero or more occurrences of the preceding character. Used in combination with any character or with the single character wild card (.). Automatically includes the root word. Match one or more occurrences of the preceding character. Used in combination with any character or with the single character wild card (.). Automatically excludes the root word. Used to
When necessary, you can replace existing entries or remove them.

To replace a reference entry on processing list
1. In the Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Files button. The Identify Files dialog box opens. 2. In the Reference Logical Names list box, select the logical name that is to be replaced. 3. In the field below the Reference Logical Names list box, type the new reference logical name. 4. Click Replace. The reference logical name is replaced with the new entry.
To remove a reference entry from the processing list
1. In the Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Files button. The Identify Files dialog box opens. 2. In the Reference Logical Names list box, select the logical name that is to be removed. 3. Click Remove. The reference logical name is deleted from the list.
Weight
This setting defines the line weights that will be selected by the pen table for processing. When defining the weight parameter for element
3/24/2010

To select weights graphically
Page 280 of 329
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Weight button. 2. The Select Weights dialog box opens. 3. Select the required weights by clicking them. Clicking a selection a second time deselects it. or Use the All or None buttons to select all weight values or no weight values, respectively. 4. Click OK. The selected values are entered in the Weights field.
Color
This setting defines the element colors that will be selected by the pen table for processing. When defining the color parameter for element evaluation, you can type the values or you can use the Color button to select the values graphically, via the Select Color dialog box. Colors are displayed as a circular button when not selected, and as a square button when selected.
To select colors graphically
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Color button. 2. The Select Colors dialog box opens. By default, no colors are selected and appear as round buttons in the dialog box. 3. Select the desired colors by clicking them. Also, you can click and drag to deselect or select multiple colors. Clicking a selection reverses its state. or Click the All or None buttons to select all color values or no color values, respectively. 4. Click OK. The selected values are entered in the Color field.
3/24/2010
Page 281 of 329
Fill Color
This setting defines the fill colors that will be selected by the pen table for processing. When defining the fill color parameter for element evaluation, you can type the values or you can use the Fill Color button to select the values graphically.
To select fill colors graphically
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Fill Color button. 2. The Select Colors dialog box opens. By default, no colors are selected and appear as round buttons in the dialog box. 3. Select the desired colors by clicking them. Also, you can click and drag to deselect or select multiple colors. Clicking a selection reverses its state. or Click the All or None buttons to select all color values or no color values, respectively. 4. Click OK. The selected values are entered in the Fill Color field.
Level and Level regular expression
This setting defines the levels that will be selected by the pen table for processing. Levels can come from the master model, referenced models, and level DGN libraries. The pen table presents a combined list of level names with the duplicates removed. When defining the level parameter for element evaluation, you can type the values or you can click the Level button to select the values graphically in the Select Levels dialog box. You also can use regular expressions to select levels. For example, if you type a.* in the Level regular expression text box, the pen table section will match every level beginning with a. The comparisons are not case sensitive. If a pen table contains a list of levels and a regular expression, all must match the element level name for the pen table section's output actions to be applied.
To select levels graphically
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Level button. 2 Th S l tL l di l b
3/24/2010
Page 282 of 329
3. Select a level by clicking it. The list box allows for multiple, disjointed selections. You can press <Ctrl - click> to select multiple noncontiguous items, and <Shift - click> to select a range of items (multiple contiguous items). With multiple selections, you can deselect an entry by pressing <Ctrl-> and clicking it a second time. or Use the All or None buttons to select all level values or no level values, respectively. 4. Click OK. The selected values are entered in the Level field.
To select levels by using regular expressions
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog box's Element Selection Criteria tab, enter a regular expression in the Level regular expression text box.
Style
This setting defines the line styles that will be selected by the pen table for processing.
To select styles
1. In the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs Element Selection Criteria tab, click the Style button. 2. The Select Line Style dialog box opens. 3. Select the required line styles by clicking them. 4. Click OK. The selected values are entered in the Style list box.
3/24/2010
Page 283 of 329
Element output actions Settings on the Element Output Actions tab are associated with each pen table section. Element output actions specify what is to be done once an element meets the sections Element Selection Criteria. For a description of each setting, see Element Output Actions tab .
To set the output actions for a pen table section
1. If necessary, in the Modify Pen Table dialog box, click the Element Output Actions tab.
2. Turn on other settings, as required, and define their values. Unloading the pen table To disable pen table processing, you simply unload the pen table.
To unload the pen table
1. From the Print dialog boxs PenTable menu, choose Detach. or From the Modify Pen Table dialog boxs File menu, choose Exit and Unload.
3/24/2010
Page 284 of 329
Pen Maps
Pen maps differ from Element Selection Criteria and Element Output Action pen table resymbolization in that they operate on individual vectors instead of entire elements. If you are familiar with printer driver configuration (.pltcfg) files' color maps (or .plt files' pen records), this feature can be considered a user interface for color maps, with the data stored in the pen table instead of the .pltcfg file. Pen maps let you apply multiple output color and width symbology to different parts of the same element. For example, an element with a multi-colored custom line style or an associative hatch linkage definition with a different color, may be assigned unique widths for the specific colors. This is not possible using element-based output actions. The order of resymbolization is as follows:

First, any color maps defined in the .pltcfg file are applied. Next, any pen maps in the pen table are applied. If desired, you may disable individual pen table pen maps in order to keep the .pltcfg definitions. Finally, any RGB-color, grayscale, screening, and/or millimeter-width actions in the pen table's element-based output section are applied.
Mapping pen colors You can create design-color to print-color, output-transparency, output-grayscale, output-screening, and output-width mappings, via the Pen Table - Map Design Colors to Output Pen Symbology dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click the Map Pen Colors button in the Global Actions section of the Modify Pen Table dialog box. This mapping method is implemented in the same manner as the color maps in the printer driver configuration file, and can be considered a user interface for that feature. This approach lets you create color and width resymbolization on a per-stroke basis. This is the only way some results can be achieved, such as screening multi-colored associative patterns and custom line styles. The pen map list box consists of the following columns:
Design Color Only color indices 0 through 254 may be mapped. Output symbology cannot be assigned to the background color (index 255). Enabled Individual pen maps may be disabled if desired. This preserves the settings in the pen table file, but prevents them from affecting the print. The Enabled column may be useful if you want to use both pen table pen maps and .pltcfg files' color maps. Unless disabled, pen table pen maps override those in the .pltcfg file. Print Color Optional specification of print color using the RGB color model. Transparency Optional transparency value, with a range of 0 to 100. 100 indicates fully transparent, 1 indicates opaque, and 0 indicates no transparency values should be defined in pen mapping. Grayscale If checked, the print color is converted to grayscale. Screening Optional screening factor, with a range of 1 to 99. This control is used to wash out a color towards white in the printed output. A 50% screen, for example, moves a color halfway to white. Screening can be used to save ink, or to de-emphasize elements plotted in that color. A screening value of 100 means do nothing. Width Optional print width in either millimeters or inches.
To map pen colors
1. From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box opens. 2. From the PenTable menu, select Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. 3. Click the Map Pen Colors button. The Pen Table Map Design Colors to Output Pen Symbology dialog box opens
3/24/2010
Page 285 of 329
4. (Optional) If the dialog box is opened from a new pen table or from an existing one that does not contain any pen maps, the list box is empty. Click the Create button. or (Optional) From the Edit menu, select Create New Pen Maps. This creates the default set of 255 design-color-to-output-symbology pen maps.
5. To define print symbology for more than one design color, select their rows in the list box, then click the Edit button. or To define print symbology for a single design color, double-click its row. The Edit Pen Map(s) dialog box opens.
6. Enable or disable the pen map.
3/24/2010
Page 286 of 329
When a print color is defined, the preview color in the button control represents the effective color (with grayscale and screening applied). 8. (Optional) Key in a print transparency percentage. 9. (Optional) Turn on Print in Grayscale. 10. (Optional) Turn on Screening Factor and key in a screening factor. 11. (Optional) Turn on Define Print Width and enter a print width and print width units. 12. Click OK to save edits to the selected design colors. 13. Click OK to save edits to the pen maps for this pen table.
To import an existing printer driver configuration file with pen maps
1. From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box opens. 2. From the PenTable menu, select Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. 3. Click the Map Pen Colors button. The Pen Table - Map Design Colors to Output Pen Symbology dialog box opens. 4. From the Edit menu, select Import from Printer Driver Configuration. The Import pen maps from printer driver configuration file dialog box opens. 5. Navigate to the printer driver configuration file (.pltcfg or .plt) and click Open. 6. Click Yes to erase all current pen maps before importing new ones from the specified file. The pen maps are imported. 7. (Optional) Make changes to the pen maps, if necessary. 8. Click OK.
To remove all pen maps from a pen table
1. From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box opens. 2. From the PenTable menu, select Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. 3. Click the Map Pen Colors button. The Pen Table - Map Design Colors to Output Pen Symbology dialog box opens. 4. From the Edit menu, select Clear All Pen Maps. 5. Click Yes to clear all pen maps. 6. Click OK. Mapping pen weights You can map print output widths for each of the weight values via the Pen Table - Map Design Weights to Output Width dialog box, which opens when you click the Map Pen Weights button in the Global Actions section of the Modify Pen Table dialog box. This mapping also is available via the printer driver configuration file's weight maps. This is an alternative to using element-based output actions to map weight to output width. It is better suited to multi-weight associative patterns and custom line styles.
To map pen weights
1. From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box opens.
3/24/2010

2. From the PenTable menu, select Edit. The Modify Pen Table dialog box opens. 3. Click the Map Pen Weights button. The Pen Table - Map Design Weights to Output Width dialog box opens.
Page 287 of 329
4. If the dialog box is opened from a new pen table or from an existing one that does not contain any weight maps, the list box is empty. Click the Create button. or From the Edit menu, select Create New Weight Maps. This creates the default set of 32 design-weight-to-output-symbology weight maps.
5. To define print symbology for more than one design weight, select their rows in the list box, then click the Edit button. or To define print symbology for a single design weight, double-click its row. The Edit Weight Map(s) dialog box opens.
6. Turn on Define Print Width. 7. Key in a print width. 8. Select a print width unit. 9. Click OK to save edits to the select design weights. 10 Cli k OK t dit t th f thi t bl
3/24/2010

CTB import
Page 288 of 329
When an AutoCAD CTB plot style table is imported, the pen table automatically creates a pen map from the CTB file's color-to-width mappings. For typical CTB files, no element sections are created. If the CTB file contains resymbolization not supported by the pen table's pen map feature, appropriate element sections are created. Pen maps cannot be created from STB files. For details, see Importing a CTB file. If an STB file is imported, element sections are created. For details, see Importing an STB file. CTB export If a pen table contains a pen map section, the pen maps can be exported to an AutoCAD CTB file by selecting File > Export CTB File in the Modify Pen Table dialog box. When a CTB file is exported, MicroStation writes only the data relevant to the pen map section. Other pen table resymbolization actions, such as end caps, line joints, patterns, and the like, are not exported to the CTB file. If a CTB file is imported into the pen table and then exported, the extra data that MicroStation does not modify is preserved. This must be done, however, in a single pen table session. MicroStation does not store any unrecognized CTB data in a pen table file. For details, see Saving a CTB/STB file to a pen table. MicroStation cannot export to an STB file.
Tracking Printer Usage

A number of printing variables can be used to let you track printer usage and other details regarding printing. Printing Accounting Variables
Printing Accounting Variables

When you create a print from MicroStation, certain variables are set for each print. Using the values of these printing variables, a macro can be written that writes to a log file, recording the values of these variables. This information can be used for accounting purposes. Listed in the following table are the variables that are set each time a print is created.
Variable MS_PLTDATE MS_PLTDELTA MS_PLTDELTA_UOR MS_PLTDGNDIR _DGNFILE MS_PLTDGNFILE_ABBREV MS_PLTDGNFILE_LONG MS_PLTDGNFILE_SHORT MS_PLTDRVFILE_ABBREV MS_PLTDRVFILE_LONG MS_PLTDRVFILE_SHORT MS_PLTENTITY MS_PLTMODELNAME MS_PLTORIGIN MS_PLTORIGIN_UOR Date that last print was generated. Print view delta in master units. Print view delta in UORs. Directory containing the last DGN file printed. Open DGN file (full path). Last DGN file printed (shortened version). Last DGN file printed (full path). Last DGN file printed (without path). Print driver file used during last print (shortened version). Print driver file used during last print (full path). Print driver file used during last print (without path). VIEW <view number> or FENCE_VIEW <view number>. Open model. Print view origin in master units. Print view origin in UORs. Description
3/24/2010

MS_PLTOUT MS_PLTPENTBL_ABBREV MS_PLTPENTBL_LONG MS_PLTPENTBL_SHORT MS_PLTSCALE MS_PLTSCALE_SHORT MS_PLTSHEETNAME MS_PLTSHEETSIZE MS_PLTSTATE MS_PLTTIME Name of last generated print output file. Pen table used during last print (shortened version). Pen table used during last print (full path). Pen table used during last print (without path). Scale used for last print (as a character string). For example, 70.0739 m:cm / IN.
Page 289 of 329
Shortened version of MS_PLTSCALE. The appearance of this variable is controlled by the MS_PLT_SCALE_METHOD configuration variable. No units are included in the value, and the precision is limited to six. For example, if the print scale is 100 master units (meters) to 1 printer unit (inches), MS_PLTSCALE_SHORT will either be "1:100" or "100:1." Name of paper size used. For example, ISO A3. Size of paper printed. For example, 11x17 (in). Set to "PREVIEW" or "REALPLOT." Used to distinguish a paper print from a preview (so previews aren't logged to the accounting log). Time that last print file was generated.
MS_PLT_SYSPRINTER_NAME The name of the Windows printer, if the system printer driver is being used.
The following variables are published when Batch Print outputs a document set:
Variable MS_PLT_DOCSET_NUMSETDOCS MS_PLT_DOCSET_NUMPRINTDOCS MS_PLT_DOCSET_CURRENT_SETDOC Description The number of documents (rows) in the Batch Print file list. This number does not change depending on the number of items selected for printing. The number of documents (rows) in the Batch Print file list that have been selected for printing. The set document number currently being processed. This number is relative to the start of the Batch Print file list, regardless of the first document selected. For example, the current set document number for second row is 2, even if it is the first document being printed. This number remains constant while multiple models and/or boundaries are processed for a single document. The print document number currently being processed. This number is relative to the first printed document. For example, the current print document number for the second row is 1 if it is the first document being printed. This number remains constant while multiple models and/or boundaries are processed for a single document. The current boundary number being processed for the current document. This sequence begins at 1, and restarts with every document. The current page number being processed. This sequence begins at 1, and increases for each printed document, model, and boundary. It is not possible to determine the number of pages in advance if multiple boundaries are used. The model name of the current document being processed. The Batch Print description of the current document being processed.
MS_PLT_DOCSET_CURRENT_PRINTDOC
MS_PLT_DOCSET_CURRENT_NUMBOUNDS The number of boundaries to be printed for the current document. MS_PLT_DOCSET_CURRENT_BOUNDARY MS_PLT_DOCSET_CURRENT_PAGE MS_PLT_DOCSET_CURRENT_MODEL MS_PLT_DOCSET_CURRENT_DESC
Printing Key-ins
This section describes the key-ins that are available for printing functions. Printing Key-ins Combined Key-ins Batch Print Key-ins
Printing Key-ins
You can use key-ins to submit printed output to a printer. They provide options for customizing your print files to specific criteria and can be used in BASIC macros or in MDL applications. Printing key-ins are provided by the "plotdlg.ma" printing application.
3/24/2010

Combined Key-ins
Page 290 of 329
Combined key-ins are a series of key-ins that you can use together to both set up and produce printed output. To use combined key-ins, you separate each one with a semicolon. These combined key-ins are grouped in the following categories:

Printer Key-ins Print Execution Key-ins Print Preview Key-ins Print Dialog Box Key-ins Entity Selection Key-ins Layout Key-ins Display Attributes Key-ins Dialog Display Key-ins Paper/Page/Form Key-ins Border Key-ins
Key-in Description/Use
Printer Key-ins PRINT DESTINATION <DEVICE | PLOTFILE | METAFILE> PRINT DRIVER [print_driver_filename] PRINT PRINTERNAME [printer_name]
Sets the print destination. Loads a printer driver.
If a printer name (or printer driver name) is specified, selects that printer as the active printer. If the printer name is omitted, displays the Print dialog box.
PRINT TRAYNAME <tray_name> Print Execution Key-ins
Selects the printer tray to use.

Produces printed output using existing settings. Specify output filename (optional if active printer is system printer). Selecting a new printer (loading a new printer driver) clears most settings. It is best to select a printer, specify settings, and then use the PRINT EXECUTE key-in to produce the printed output.
PRINT EXECUTE [output_filename]
PRINT PENCOLOR [0255] PRINT QUALITY [0100] PRINT UNITS <MM|CM|DM|METERS|IN|FT> Print Preview Key-ins PRINT PAINTPREVIEW
Sets pen to a specified RGB value in the range 0 to 255, where 0 is background color. Sets print quality (where 100 is best). Sets the printer units.
Refreshes the print preview area and the Preview window. Opens the resizable Preview window. If the Preview window is already displayed, this key-in refreshes the preview window (and the preview area of the Print dialog box), but does not synchronize the preview image with the view.
PRINT PREVIEW
Print Dialog Box Key-ins PRINT BOUNDARY FIT ALL [view_number] PRINT BOUNDARY FIT MASTER [view_number] PRINT BOUNDARY SHEET Sets Area field to Fit All. If a view number is included, changes View field to that number. Sets Area field to Fit Master. If a view number is included, changes View field to that number. Sets Area field to Sheet
3/24/2010

PRINT COLORMODE [MONOCHROME | GRAYSCALE | COLOR] PRINT COPIES PRINT FULLSHEET [ON | OFF] PRINT RASTERIZED <ON | OFF> Entity Selection Key-ins PRINT BOUNDARY FENCE PRINT BOUNDARY VIEW <view_number> PRINT OPENPRINTSETUP [configuration_filename]

Page 291 of 329

Sets Color field to Monochrome, Grayscale, or True Color. Sets the number of copies to print. (Windows printer only) Sets Full Sheet setting on or off. Sets Rasterized check box to on or off. Selects the fence, if present, as the active print entity. Selects a view specified by number (1 - 8, inclusive) as the print entity.
If a print configuration (.ini) file is specified, loads that file and makes it the print entity. If no print configuration file is specified, opens the Select Print INI File dialog box, which lets you select a print configuration file to use. Attaches the named resymbolization pen table. If no filename is given, the Select Pen Table File dialog box opens. Detaches the pen table file. Opens the Modify Pen Table dialog box with the current pen table loaded. PRINT PENTABLE EDIT If no pen table currently is loaded, opens the Select Pen Table File dialog box. PRINT PENTABLE IMPORT <filename> PRINT PENTABLE NEW PRINT SAVEASPRINTSETUP PRINT SAVEPRINTSETUP Layout Key-ins

PRINT PENTABLE ATTACH <filename> PRINT PENTABLE DETACH
Opens the Import AutoCAD Plot Style Table File dialog box. Opens the Create Pen Table file dialog box. Opens the Save Print INI File As dialog box, which lets you save the current print configuration (.ini) file. Saves the currently loaded print configuration (.ini) file. Sets the print scale and recalculates the printed outputs horizontal and vertical sizes. If the scale is specified as a percentage, the percentage is relative to the printed outputs normal (maximized) print size. If the scale is specified as a working unit value, the scale maps that number of working units to one printer unit (the units specified in the printer driver configuration file's Resolution property). Turns auto-centering on or off. Selects maximize mode and sets the horizontal and vertical print size to values that maximize the print size, without rotating the page or changing the printed outputs aspect ratio. Sets all print rotations. The existing PLOT PAPER ROTATE key-in can still be used to set 0, 90 cw, or 90 ccw rotations.
PRINT SCALE <percent_scale% |working_unit_scale>
PRINT AUTOCENTER [ON/OFF] PRINT MAXIMIZE PRINT PAPERNAME <name> PRINT ROTATION <rotation in degrees>
Sets named form as the current form, such as letter, legal, or A4.

PRINT XMIRROR <ON | OFF> PRINT YMIRROR <ON | OFF>
Sets print mirroring around the X axis on or off. Sets print mirroring around the Y axis on or off.
Specifies the horizontal print margin (print offset) and deselects auto-center and maximize modes. Units Valid unit strings are mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. When string is omitted, assumes units are defined by the active printer driver configuration file's Driver Resolution property. Specifies the vertical print margin (print offset) and deselects auto-center and maximize modes. Units Valid unit strings are mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. When string is omitted, assumes units are defined by the active printer driver configuration file's Driver Resolution property. Sets the horizontal print size, recalculates the vertical size to maintain the printed outputs original aspect ratio, and deselects maximize mode. Units Valid unit strings are mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. When string is omitted, assumes units are defined by the active printer driver configuration file's Driver Resolution property. Sets the vertical print size, recalculates the horizontal size to maintain the printed outputs original aspect ratio, and deselects maximize mode. Units Valid unit strings are mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. When string is omitted, assumes units are defined by the active printer driver configuration file's Driver Resolution property.
PRINT XORIGIN <value> [units_string]
PRINT YORIGIN <value> [units_string]
PRINT XSIZE <value> [units_string]

PRINT YSIZE <value> [units_string]
Display Attributes Key-ins PRINT ATTRIBUTES CAMERA [ON/OFF]
3/24/2010

PRINT ATTRIBUTES CONSTRUCTIONS [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES DATAFIELDS [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES DIMENSIONS [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES FASTCELLS [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES FASTCURVES [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES FASTFONT [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES FASTREFCLIP [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES FENCEBOUNDARY [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES FILL [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES LEVELSYMBOLOGY [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES LINESTYLES [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES LINEWEIGHTS [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES PATTERNS [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES PLOTBORDER [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES REFBOUNDARIES [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES TAGS [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES TEXT [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES TEXTNODES [ON/OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES TRANSPARENCY Dialog Display Key-ins PRINT PRINT PICKPRINTER <printer_name> PRINT THUMBPREVIEW [ON/OFF] Paper/Page/Form Key-ins PRINT ORIENTATION [PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE] Sets the page orientation to portrait (no rotation) or landscape (90 rotation).

Page 292 of 329
These key-ins enable or disable view attributes, similar to the check boxes in the Print Attributes dialog box. The print attributes key-ins (except for fenceboundary) have no effect unless a print setup file defines the print entity. On/Off In key-ins accepting on or off, the keyword may be omitted, in which case on is assumed.
Displays the Print dialog box. Used to select a particular local or network Windows printer as the system printer (if a printer driver configuration file specifying model=sysprinter is loaded, such as printer.plt).
Enables or disables the Show design in preview setting in the Print dialog box.
With a system printer selected, use print papername to select a new paper size (form). Note: You must select a paper size (form) name corresponding to a physical paper tray that the printer can use.
PRINT PAPERNAME <paper_name>
3/24/2010
Page 293 of 329

Sets horizontal size of the currently selected paper size (form). Units Valid unit strings are mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. When string is omitted, assumes units are defined by the active printer driver configuration file's Driver Resolution property. Sets the vertical size of the currently selected paper size (form). Units Valid unit strings are mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. When string is omitted, assumes units are defined by the active printer driver configuration file's Driver Resolution property.
PRINT XFORM <value> [units_string]
PRINT YFORM <value> [units_string]
Border Key-ins PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER [ON | OFF] Enables or disables the entire border. PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER COMMENT Specifies a border comment <string>. The string is limited to 80 characters. <string> PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER FILENAME Enables or disables printing of the active DGN file name on the border. [ON | OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER MODEL [ON | OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER OUTLINE [ON | OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER PEN <pen number> PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER TEXTHEIGHT <height> [units] Enables or disables printing of the active model name on the border. Enables or disables the border outline rectangle. Specifies the pen (1 - 255, inclusive) used to draw the border (outline and text). Specifies height of any text appearing on print border. Valid units are dots, mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. If the units are omitted, the current print dialog units are assumed.
PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER TIME [ON | Enables or disables the printing of the date and time on the border. OFF] PRINT ATTRIBUTES BORDER WIDTH <width> [units] Specifies the width of the border outline in physical units. 0.0 is a valid border width, and means "use thinnest possible line." Valid unit strings are dots, mm, cm, dm, m, in, and ft. If the units are omitted, the current print dialog units are assumed.
Batch Print Key-ins

Batch Print has a minimal key-in interface intended to provide basic control over job sets: opening, saving, and printing them, adding design files to them, and assigning specifications to them. The key-in interface provides no means for managing specifications.
Key-in BATCHPLT NEW BATCHPLT OPEN [jobset_filename] BATCHPLT PRINT BATCHPLT SAVE BATCHPLT SAVEAS [jobset_filename] BATCHPLT ADDDGN [design_filename] BATCHPLT ADDACTIVEDGN BATCHPLT ADDMODEL <"design_file><model_name> [description] BATCHPLT SELECTSPEC [specType=specName] BATCHPLT EXIT Effect Clears the design file list in preparation for creation of a new job set file. Loads a job set file if a filename is specified. Otherwise, opens the Open Job Set File dialog box. Opens the Print Batch dialog box in preparation for printing the current job set. Opens the Save Job Set File dialog box. Saves the current job set to a file if a filename is specified. Otherwise, opens the Save Job Set File dialog box. Adds a design file to the current job set if a filename is specified. Otherwise, opens the Select Design Files to Add dialog box. Adds the active design file to the current job set. Adds individual models to the current job set. Note that the double quotes are required. Assigns a specification to the current job set if an assignment string is specified. Valid specTypes are Printer, PlotArea, Layout, and Display. specName is the name of any existing specification of that type. The specification name should not be enclosed in quotation marks, even if it contains spaces. If an assignment string is not specified, this key-in opens a Select Specification dialog box. Closes the Batch Print dialog boxes and unloads the Batch Print utility.
Digital Rights Technologies

File Protection Digital Signatures
3/24/2010
Page 294 of 329
File Protection
File Protection makes the contents of a protected DGN file inaccessible to unauthorized persons, even if they hold a copy of the file. File Protection is based on standardized cryptography and digital certificate mechanisms that restrict access in several ways, from simple password protection to digital rights enforcement. The author limits access to designated users who are identified by digital certificates. Before opening a protected file, MicroStation authenticates the current user, disables functions that are not permitted, and applies the assigned rights. When in a rights-restricted file, MicroStation loads only digitally signed applications that have been identified by the author as rights-compliant. What is File Protection? Encryption Rights Authorizing Users and Assigning Rights Digital Rights-Compliant Applications
What is File Protection?

File Protection applies primarily to the distribution of files to locations and recipients outside of an organizations normal file-management system. Therefore, you will normally apply file protection to the copies of your DGN files that leave your control. File protection has the following components:

Encryption Recipients Rights Expiry
General Procedure Protecting a file
1. Enable File Protection functionality. 2. Protect the file with a certificate or a password. 3. Create licenses for users to access the protected file. You can create certificate, password and/or everyone licenses. 4. (Optional) Identify digital rights-compliant applications. 5. Distribute protected file to the appropriate users.
PROTECT FILEOPEN allows direct opening of protected files and certificates. PROTECT FILEOPEN {PASSWORD|CERTIFICATE} <filename><passwordOrCertname> allows you to open a file and make it the active file. The ability to specify a password or certificate is useful for macros or applications that want to work with the protected files but do not want the user to be prompted for credentials. PROTECT LICENSE ADD CERTIFICATE , PROTECT LICENSE ADD EVERYONE, andPROTECT LICENSE ADD PASSWORD allow you to create licenses.
Author and user distinction It is important to distinguish between the author, the person who protects a file and has unlimited rights, and users, the people who open and work with a protected file. File Protection assumes that any user who has physical read/write access to an unprotected file is
3/24/2010

Levels of security Using File Protection, an author can protect his digital property at two levels by:
Page 295 of 329
excluding unauthorized persons The author protects a file by encrypting it, then authorizing only specific digital certificates and/or passwords to access it. It is impossible for anyone to open a protected file without an authorized certificate or password.
restricting usage rights to authorized persons The author uses an authorized certificate or password to restrict usage by the user. Specifically, the author restricts the user's right to print, export, and/or modify the file or places a time limit on the user's right to access the file. The author may also specify an authentication URL to function as a dynamic check on a user's right to access the file.
To ensure that your files will become more secure over time, older versions of MicroStation will be unable to open files that are protected by newer versions of MicroStation.
Enabling protection File Protection is disabled by default in MicroStation. To enable the File Protection functionality, change the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE from 0 to 1, 2 or 3.
To enable file protection
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens.
3/24/2010

The File Protection configuration definitions are displayed. 3. Select the definition to edit, then press the Edit button. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 4. With the Edit Mode set to Overwrite, replace the 0 in the New Value field with the desired file protection value.
File Protection values 0 1 2 3 Description Disables file protection (default) Enables password or certificate protection Enables password protection Enables certification protection
Page 296 of 329
The value also changes in the Expansion field and the OK button becomes active. 5. Click the OK button. The Configuration dialog box displays. 6. Click OK. The Alert box opens. 7. Click Yes to save the configuration changes. The configuration change does not take affect until you completely exit then re-start MicroStation.
MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE replaces the old MS_PROTECTION_ENCRYPT.
Encryption
File Protection encrypts a file so that it can only be opened with an encryption key. Encryption scrambles all of the data in the DGN file making it impossible to use the data until it is unscrambled. There are several ways to provide this key to users while keeping it secret.
By default, File Protection encrypts the files thumbnail image and summary properties. These items are shown by Windows File Explorer, by MicroStation Manager, and by the File Properties dialog box. To make either of these items unencrypted, set the MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_THUMBNAIL and/or MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_PROPERTIES configuration variables.
Rights
The author controls who can access the files contents as well as grants or denies rights to users to publish or modify data. MicroStation disables all commands for which the corresponding right is not granted. File Protection defines the following rights:
Type of Access View Print Edit See contents displayed on the screen Plot contents of the file to paper Modify contents of the file Edit > Copy and ^C copy (or cut) elements to the clipboard File > Export/SaveAs save the contents of the file to a different format Export File > Save As save the contents of the file to a different name without encryption or restrictions Fence File Generate an e-plot Description
3/24/2010
Page 297 of 329
Since view right is the default right, it is not explicitly granted by the author. Any user authorized to access the file has the right to view it. The remaining rights control how or if the user can capture the contents. Unlimited rights File Protection also defines the unlimited right. Unlimited implies all basic rights, plus the right to grant rights and authorize users. Anyone with unlimited rights fills the role of the author who can assign unlimited rights to other users.
Authorizing Users and Assigning Rights

An author creates one or more licenses to identify users and their rights. In turn, to open a protected file, a user acquires and uses a license which is stored in a protected file. A user must be authenticated in order to acquire a password or certificate-based license. Additional authentication checks can be set up via a server through an authentication URL. An author can also set the time when a license will expire or use the authentication URL to revoke access to the protected file. Authenticating users An author can identify authorized users in the following ways:
Authentication Type Description A certificate-based recipient license is usable only by the person who owns the designated certificate. This is similar to sending an encrypted e-mail to the recipient. That is, the author uses the users public key to create a license that can only be opened by the recipient using the corresponding private key. When opening a protected file, MicroStation looks in the users secure keystore for the needed private key. MicroStation considers possession of the private key as proof of the recipients identity. This authenticates the user as an authorized user. MicroStation then grants the rights contained in the recipient license. A smart card is a variation of a certificate-based recipient license. A user arranges for a private key corresponding to their digital certificate to be stored on a token or smart card. When MicroStation accesses the private key, the user is required to supply the smart card and to authenticate himself. Failing either of those, the license does not open. Anyone who knows the password can use a password license. Usually, the author creates multiple passwords conveying different rights to the same file. Then the author sends passwords to the users via some secure channel. When opening a password-protected file, MicroStation prompts the user, finds the license corresponding to the supplied password, and then grants the rights contained in the password license. The everyone license is usable by everyone, without credentials. This option is generally useful only when combined with limited rights or with an authentication URL. The everyone license can also be added to a set of targeted password or recipient licenses. In those cases, the everyone license is selected as the default in case the user has access to no other license. When creating an everyone license through a key in, a confirmation question displays as a warning message on the protected item on the status bar. Authentication URL The authentication URL can modify any of the license types listed above. If the author adds a URL, MicroStation only uses the license if the user can also access the URL. The URL may identify a file on a secure WebDAV server or on a site accessed via a VPN. This allows an organization to apply its own user authentication on top of the license authentication mechanism.
Digital Certificate
Smart Card
Password
Everyone
Protecting a file To protect a file, the author invokes the File > Protection > Protect command. This is only done once, then the menu item is disabled in the protected file.
3/24/2010
Page 298 of 329
File menu showing Protection menu options
A user with unlimited rights to a protected file can unencrypt the file without prompting for confirmation with the PROTECT ENCRYPT REMOVE key-in.
You can use the PROTECT NOPROTECT key-in to mark a file so that the encryption commands won't work. However, another user could encrypt the file by using the reverse keyin to clear the flag. This key-in is only intended to communicate the file owner's wishes to the user.
Protecting with certificate or password
The Protect dialog box allows the author to use either a certificate or a password to protect a file.
3/24/2010
Page 299 of 329
Protect dialog box
Protecting with Certificate is the preferred method. MicroStation encrypts the file using a random key, then creates a license with unlimited rights for the specified certificate. Protecting with Password allows the author to supply a password to protect the file. MicroStation encrypts files using the password and creates a password license with unlimited rights for that password.
Typically, the author identifies his own certificate to protect a file. This gives the author access to the file allowing for additions or changes to the licenses. Alternatively, the author can use some other persons certificate to protect the file. In that case, the file is accessible to that other person only. This approach only makes sense when applied to a copy of the file and only if the author will not need access to the file later on.
Protecting a file with a certificate
The author can select certificates from their personal certificate store or certificate files. After the author identifies a certificate, the OK button on the Protect dialog is enabled. When the author presses OK, the file is protected.
To protect a file with a certificate
1. From the Protect dialog box, click the With Certificate button.
3/24/2010
Page 300 of 329
Certificate dialog box. or To select a certificate file, click the Choose Certificate file icon and choose a certificate file from the Certificate files dialog box. 3. Click OK. The file is protected with the certificate.
If you try to protect a file with a certificate sent to you buy someone else and it could prevent you future access to your own file, you will receive the following warning message:
It is a good idea to protect your private key against loss. Check with Microsoft for the best method to protect your private key.
Protecting a file with a password
The author can limit access to a file so that a user must supply the correct password before gaining access to the file. Protecting with a password is recommended only for those who do not have a digital certificate because password protection can be less secure than a certificate because it is easier to lose or accidentally disclose. However, password-protecting a file can be convenient because recipients do not need certificates. Additionally, passwords can be a good solution for archiving protected files because they do not have to expire.
To protect a file with a password
1. From the Protect dialog box, click the With Password button. 2. Type the desired password to protect the file in the Password field. 3 Retype the password in the Confirm field
3/24/2010

4. Click OK. The file is protected with the password.
Page 301 of 329
The MS_PROTECTION_PASSWORD_MINIMUM configuration variable sets the minimum length of a file protection password. The default is 5. Setting this variable to 0 allows for a blank password.
The MS_PROTECTION_PASSWORD_MIXED configuration variable determines if a file protection password can contain a mixture of numbers and letters. The default (0) permits only letters in the password. Setting the variable to 1 requires a combination of numbers and letters in the password. This option is more secure since it is harder to guess a mixed password than an all numeric password.
Creating licenses to authorize users
After protecting the file, the Protect command opens the Digital Rights dialog box. MicroStation created a license for the certificate used to protect the file. This license grants unlimited (`* stands for unlimited) rights. Initially this is the only recipient authorized to access the file.
Digital Rights dialog box with initial license create when file was protected
Nobody, including the author, is able to delete or modify the authors license. This prevents the author from accidentally locking himself out of the file or denying himself the right to administer rights. The author can add other recipients and assign rights to them. Only the author (or anyone with unlimited rights) can open the Digital Rights dialog box. A user who gains access to this file by using a license sees only the description of his own license, including rights, expiry, URL, and annotation data.
If the author used a certificate belonging to someone else to encrypt the file, then the author will only have access to the encrypted file until the end of the current session. The person whose certificate was used to encrypt the file has unlimited access.
The MS_PROTECTION_LICENSE_ENABLE configuration variable controls the type of licenses that can be added to a protected file
Add individual values together to enable two or more license types.

Value 0 1 2 4 Description Disable license creation Enable password licenses Enable certificate licenses Enable Everyone licenses
7 (default) Enable all types of licenses
The MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE configuration variable controls the method by which a file is encrypted. Some organizations do not want to password protect a file for fear that password could be forgotten. Using the MS_PROTECTION_LICENSE_ENABLE configuration variable to add licenses to a file provides additional entry points to the file.
3/24/2010
Page 302 of 329
An author grants access to a file to everyone by using the Add access for everyone tool on the Digital Rights dialog box. Generally, it makes sense to create an Everyone license that only grants limited rights. For example, creating an everyone license that allows anyone to view the file
Everyone license with view only rights
To add an everyone license
1. From the Digital Rights dialog box, click the Add access for everyone icon. The License Properties dialog box opens with the Recipient field set to Everyone. 2. Assign the desired rights and properties for the license. 3. Click OK. The Everyone license is added to the file.
When creating an everyone license through a key in, a confirmation question displays as a warning message on the protected item on the status bar.
Password license
An author grants access to a file by creating a password license using the Add a password tool on the Digital Rights dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 303 of 329
Add a Password dialog box
MicroStation never divulges the password associated with this license.

To add a password license
1. From the Digital Rights dialog box, click the Add a Password icon. The Add a Password dialog box opens. 2. Enter a password in the Password field. 3. Assign the desired rights and properties for the license. 4. Click OK. The Password license is added to the file.
Recipient license
An author grants access to a file by creating a certificate-based recipient license using the Add a recipient license tool on the Digital Rights dialog box. The author first selects the recipient's certificate, then defines a license for that recipient, including rights, expiry and/or authentication URL. The author can select a digital certificate from their personal certificate store or identify a signed e-mail message file (.msg) or certificate file (.cer or .p7b).
3/24/2010
Page 304 of 329
Add a Recipient certificate dialog box
To add a recipient certificate license
1. From the Digital Rights dialog box, click the Add a Recipient certificate icon. The Add a Recipient Certificate dialog box opens. 2. Select a digital certificate from your personal certificate store with the Choose certificate tool. or Identify a signed e-mail message file (.msg) or certificate file (.cer or .p7b) with the Choose certificate file tool. 3. Assign the desired rights and properties for the license. 4. Click OK. The recipient license is added to the file.
The common name becomes the default name of the recipient in the license. This is annotation data for the license that can be changed.
Adding a recipient certificate via drag and drop from Windows Explorer
The author can add recipient certificates to a protected file by dragging signed e-mail message (.msg) files and/or certificate (.cer, or .p7?) files from Windows Explorer or the desktop onto the Digital Rights dialog. The rights, expiry, etc., assigned to the new recipients are the same as the recipient that was selected in the dialog when the files were dropped.
Removing a license
An author removes a license from a file using the Remove selected recipients tool on the Digital Rights dialog box.
To remove a license
1. From the Digital Rights dialog box, select the recipient(s) to be removed. 2. Click the Remove selected recipients tool. The license is removed from the file.
You can delete an everyone license through by keying:PROTECT LICENSE DELETE EVERYONE.
Obtaining a persons certificate
3/24/2010

An author can obtain a persons certificate by:

Page 305 of 329
Asking the intended recipient to send you the certificate Looking up the certificate
Receive the certificate from the intended recipient
The recipient must have already obtained a certificate from a Certificate Authority such as Verisign or Thawte. There are three ways to get a certificate from the recipient:
Method of receiving a certificate from a recipient Ask the intended recipient to send you a signed e-mail message in S/MIME format. Description This requires Microsoft Outlook 2000 or later or another e-mail program such as Netscape that supports S/MIME. The message should not be encrypted. Drag or save the e-mail message to a normal file folder. The resulting .msg file contains the recipients certificate. You can specify a .msg file anywhere that MicroStation prompts for a certificate file. In Microsoft Outlook, the procedure is as follows: Open the message and issue the File > Properties > Security > View Signing Certificate command to bring up the Windows certificate viewer. On the Details tab of the viewer, use the Copy to File command to export the certificate to a .cer or .p7b file. In Outlook Express and other e-mail programs, the procedure will be slightly different. The recipient uses the Windows Internet Options > Content > Certificates > Certificates > Export tool to create a .cer or .p7b file and sends that file to you.
Ask the intended recipient to send you a signed e-mail message then extract the signers certificate from the e-mail message. Ask the intended recipient to send you his certificate file as an email attachment or via ftp, etc. To obtain a user's certificate via signed e-mail
1. Have the user send their certificate to the author of the file in a signed e-mail. The user must set the Secure Message Format to S/MIME and check the Send these certificates box on the Outlook Tool > Opens > Security> Settings > Change Security Settings dialog box. Also, the Send clear text signed message on the Outlook Tool > Opens > Security tab must also be checked. 2. The author then drags the signed e-mail from Outlook on to the desktop or into a folder. A .msg file is created. 3. Drag the .msg file onto the Digital Rights dialog box in the protected file.
A message signed with clear text has a red certificate seal on the icon. A message signed with non-clear text has a blue lock on the icon.
Search for the certificate
There are two ways to search for the certificate of the recipient: see footnote 186
Search Method Directory Service Lookup through LDAP Download Directly from the Certifying Authority Description In Outlook Express, go to Start | Find | People, select Verisign as the server and type in the e-mail address of the person whose certificate you wish to download. Go to the web site of the certifying authority, e.g., [http://digitalid.verisign.com], and use the Find feature to search for a DID. To be effective in your search, you need to know the persons e-mail address. Click on the ID summary information. At the bottom of the resulting page of detailed information where several download options are available, choose Someone Else's Digital ID for Outlook Express. The default download format is cert.p7c, which you should save to your hard disk. When the downloaded is complete, the file icon looks like a small rolodex card. Note that if you choose either My Digital ID for Microsoft Internet Explorer or S/MIME Format (Binary PKCS #7), the downloaded file format will be query.exe. If you do this, rename the file to cert.p7c.
Once a certificate file is obtained, you can store and reuse it to designate recipients.
Verifying a certificate
You should not use a certificate unless it meets the following requirements: It h t i d
3/24/2010
Page 306 of 329
It was issued by a trusted certification authority (CA) such as Verisign or Thawte. Note that an organization can implement its own CA. It positively identifies the person you intend. Use the Windows certificate viewer to check trust and expiration.
You can direct File Encryption to use expired certificates with the key-in SIGNATURE TOGGLEEXPIREDCERTS.
References
Each file is protected separately and carries its own set of licenses and rights. Therefore, a master file can be protected while references are not, or vice versa. To protect all files in a set, the author must protect each file individually. In turn this means when opening a file with references attached, a user must acquire a separate license for each reference. Using certificate-based licenses is as easy for multiple files as for a single file. For password licenses, Bentley recommends that the author assign the same password to all files in a set. The author decides which rights the password should convey in each file individually. This allows the user to open an entire set of files with a single password. Using protected files This section describes the users usage of protected files. When a user attempts to open a protected file, he must first obtain a license. How a user obtains a license depends on how the file was encrypted and what type of licenses are in the file.
Protection type Description If the file was protected using a certificate, MicroStation first tries to find certificate-based license. MicroStation opens the file using the first certificate-based license the user can open. If the license does not possess the private key needed to open any certificatebased license, then MicroStation tries password-based access. If there is no password license or Everyone license in the file, then the user is denied access. If there are any password licenses in the file, MicroStation prompts the user for a password and attempts to open the file. If the password is invalid, the user is denied access to the file. If the user presses Enter without entering a password, MicroStation attempts to obtain the Everyone license. If there is an Everyone license, the file is opened using that license. If not, access is denied. If the file was protected using a password, MicroStation first prompts the user for the password. If a password is entered, MicroStation attempts to obtain a password license. If the password is valid, the corresponding license is used to open the file. If the password is invalid, access is denied. If the user presses Enter without entering a password, MicroStation attempts to obtain the Everyone license. If there is an Everyone license, the file is opened using that license. If not, access is denied.
Certificate preferred
Password preferred
After opening a protected file, MicroStation displays a lock icon in the status bar.
When a pre-File Protection version of MicroStation V8 tries to open a protected file, it recognizes the file as a V8 encrypted file. MicroStation displays an explanatory message but will not open the file.
A gold lock indicates a protected file
While in a protected file, MicroStation disables functions when the corresponding right was not granted as part of the license. Here is a partial listing of functions by right.
Right Granted Functions Enabled File > Print Print File > Print Preview PRINT key-in
File > Export Export File > Save As FENCE FILE (FF ) k i
3/24/2010

<Ctrl-C> (copy to clipboard) <Ctrl-X> (cut to clipboard) File > Save Edit <Ctrl-X>
Page 307 of 329
In some cases, a command may start but then fail because a right has not been granted. For example, a user enters the PRINT key-in when the Print right has not been granted. In that case, the command is aborted with the following error message: the author has restricted access to the DGN file. The current operation requires an access right that has not been granted.
The file is read-only if the license does not grant the Edit right.
URL authentication
Once a license is acquired for the user to open the protected file, if the author attached an authentication URL to the license, then MicroStation attempts to access the URL. If this step fails, MicroStation does not open the file and displays the failure alert box.
Opening a file in an unsecure environment
MicroStation loads only digital rights-compliant applications when in a protected file with limited access. This implies that a user may not open a protected file if non-compliant applications have already been loaded. This can happen when the user first opens an unprotected file and then tries to open a protected file. It can also happen when the user moves between different protected files, where each file has a different set of digital rights-compliant applications. When this happens, even an authorized user will be denied access to the protected file.
Opening a file in secure mode
Security provides users with the ability to shield themselves from applications that are not trusted. In contrast, digital rights is the authors mechanism for excluding use of specific applications on a protected file. The combination of File Protection and Security can effectively deal with the conflict between legacy applications and digital rights. Problems can occur when a user attempts to open a rights-restricted file when non-right-compliant applications are already loaded on the machine. MicroStation will not open the file in this situation. Secure mode is intended as a temporary way (until a rightscompliant version of the application can be obtained) to prevent these applications from loading so the file can be opened. The user can set up MicroStation to load only digitally signed MDL applications and VBA macros by setting the MS_SECURITY_LEVEL configuration variable to MEDIUM or HIGH. The default security level is none.
MS_SECURITY_LEVEL value LOW MEDIUM HIGH Allows any application to be loaded and used. Allows the loading of applications that are digitally signed by Bentley or by any software publishing certificates that are trusted. The user identifies trusted certificates in the MS_SECURITY_SPC configuration variable. MS_SECURITY_SPC defaults to all .cer files in the ../workspace/standards/SPC directory. The user identifies the applications that he trusts by putting copies of the certificates used to sign them into this directory. Only loads applications that are digitally signed by Bentley. Description
The fact that a user trusts an application does not necessarily mean that the application is authorized for use with a given protected file.
Bentley applications that are not signed as rightscompliant are unloaded when you enter a restricted file. For example, if your rights to a file excludes export, the export capabilities will be unloaded while you are in that file.
URL authentication
Once a license is acquired for the user to open the protected file, if the author attached an authentication URL to the license, then MicroStation attempts to access the URL. If this step fails, MicroStation does not open the file and displays the failure alert box.
3/24/2010
Page 308 of 329
Digital Rights-Compliant Applications

MicroStation loads only digital, rights-compliant applications in a file that has limited rights. This section explains how the author certifies an application as rights-compliant and how MicroStation screens applications at runtime. File Protection allows for the use of rights-compliant applications developed outside of Bentley, while preventing non-compliant MDL applications from circumventing rights enforcement. A compliant MDL application checks for digital rights and does not perform any unauthorized functions, such as printing, exporting, or modifying. Many MDL applications, including pre-existing applications, are compliant because they do not perform restricted functions. Other applications have to be changed to become compliant. Rather than trying to prevent illegal operations, MicroStation refuses to load a non-compliant MDL application when less than unlimited rights are granted. Thus, the user can safely use compliant applications and has no access to non-compliant ones. Bentley has certified the applications that ship with MicroStation. Bentley cannot certify applications developed by others. It is up to the author to certify non-Bentley applications as rights-compliant. Once an application is certified, it is designated as being digital rightscompliant. An application is digital rights-compliant if it is:

digitally signed its signature is verified the signing key is either Bentleys signing key or is a key identified by the author
MicroStation recognizes digital rights-compliant applications by the public keys used in their signatures. Keep in mind that the author identifies the signing keys rather than applications. MicroStation treats any application that was signed using a specified signing key as rights-compliant. Therefore, the author must be careful to guard the signing certificate and only use it to sign rights-compliant applications. The digital signature prevents anyone from modifying an application after it has been certified and signed by the author. File Protection allows multiple authors to sign the same application without invalidating each others signatures. A signed application can also be modified and then re-signed. If an application has multiple signatures, MicroStation recognizes the application as digital rights-compliant if it can verify and recognize any one of them. If an author adds a signature to an application, he must distribute the affected .MA files to users. In most cases, an author will rely on the original software publisher to sign the application files and simply cite the publishers key. Signing applications The author uses the rsign and checksignature command-line programs to mark an application as trusted. These programs computes the digital signature of the .MA file and then stores the signature inside the file. MicroStation .MA files have the capacity to store up to about 100 digital signatures internally. Adding a new digital signature to a signed .MA file does not invalidate existing signatures. This means that up to 100 different authors can independently sign the same .MA. The syntax of the rsign command is:
rsign [-flags] <filename> Flags to identify the signing certificate:

Flag <filename> -spc <file> -sp <policy> default to spcstore Location of the cert store in the registry: <localMachine|currentUser> -s <location> default to currentUser -k <KeyName> Key container name (in current users default keystore) where private key can be found Identifies the file to signs file containing encoded software publishing certificate Add the certification path (chain) or add the certification path excluding the root certificate (spcstore): <chain|spcstore> Description
3/24/2010

-cn <name> -v <pvkFile The common name of the certificate Pvk file name containing the private key (in case certificate does not specify container or pvk file)
Page 309 of 329
The sp argument allows the signer of an application to store more information in the digital signature about their identity making it easier for other users to verify their signature. Storing this information takes up more space in the signature section of the application. This section is 50,000 bytes in size. Each signature in the signature chain takes up space so you may be limited in the number of these signatures you can store.
Flags to modify the result of signing:

Flag --iN Description Include the signers name in the signature for display purposes. Information to include in the digital signature:

K public key N certificate common name D today's date L name of this computer C a copy of the certificate
--iKNDLC

Hashing algorithm for signing: <md5|sha1> -a <algorithm> Default to sha1 -sha1 <thumbPrint> The sha1 hash of the certificate (to be used instead of cn, in case name is not unique)
Miscellaneous flags:
Flag Description
--r remove existing signature
The syntax of the checksignature command is:
checksignature [-flags] <filename> Flags to identify the signature being checked:

Flag <filename> --l[l] --x --xb List (-ll for verbose) Verify signatures Verify that file is signed by Bentley Description Identifies the file to check. If not specified, filename is read from stdin
--n <filename> List of Bentley applications that are known to be non-rights-compliant --e <filename> Export certificates from signatures The e argument allows a user to extract the signer's certificate or certification chain from the digital signatures in an application. Standard tools, such as the Microsoft certmgr.exe program can be used to examine and check the certificates for trustworthiness.
Any certificate that has a private key can be used to sign an MDL application. Certificates may be selected from the current users certificate store or from standard X.509 certificate (.cer) files and from PKCS#7 (.p7b) files. You can use the Windows Internet Options > Content > Certificates dialog to review your certificate store. The author must distribute the signed .MA to users. A signed .MA file can be used in earlier versions of MicroStation and in non-protected files.
3/24/2010
Page 310 of 329
.PFX and .P12 files are not supported.
Identifying signed applications
Use the File > Protection > Applications command to view, add, and remove certificates that identify digital rights-compliant applications .
The Compliant Applications Add command allows the author to choose a certificate that has was used by rsign to digitally sign applications that were digital rights-compliant. You can identify any number of certificates that MicroStation should use to recognize rightscompliant certificates in a given protected file. If another party signed the application(s), you must obtain a copy of the signers certificate in order to enter it into the file.
To add a certificate that identifies a rightscompliant application
1. From the File menus Protection submenu, choose Applications. The Trusted Applications dialog box opens
3/24/2010
Page 311 of 329
2. Select the certificate(s). MicroStation should use to recognized rights-compliant applications in a protected file. 3. Click the Add trusted signing certificate icon. The Add Trusted Signing Certificate dialog box opens.
4. Select a digital certificate from his personal certificate store. or Select a signed e-mail message file (.msg) or a certificate file (.cer or .p7) 5. (Optional) Enter a date the certificate expires. 6. Click OK. A rights-compliant certificate is added to the file.
The PROTECT COMPLIANT {ADD|DELETE} command can also be used to add or remove a digital certificate from the list of authorized applications
To add a public key token to a list of authorized .NET assemblies for use with a protected file
1. From the File menus Protection submenu, choose Applications. The Trusted Applications dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 312 of 329
2. To add a public key token for a specific .Net assembly, click the Add trusted .Net assembly icon. or To add a public key token for a specific .Net assembly and all others signed in the same way, click the Add all .Net assemblies signed like this icon. The .Net assemblies dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the desired .Net assembly and click Open. The trusted application now displays in theTrust applications dialog box. The example below shows an individual .Net assembly and an example of all .Net assemblies of the same type.
You can use thePROTECT STRONGNAME {ADD|REMOVE} {ASSEMBLY|PUBLICKEYTOKEN} <assemblyFileNameOrHexPublickeyToken> to add or remove a public key token to/from the list of applications that are authorized for use with the active (protected) file.
3/24/2010
Page 313 of 329
VBA macros File Protection supports rights-compliant VBA projects in a similar way that it handles MDL applications. The developer must certify that the VBA project is rights compliant. The developer digitally signs the VBA project using the Tools>Digital Signature dialog in the Visual Basic Editor. The author of a protected DGN file authorizes use of the VBA project by identifying the certificate used to sign the project. MicroStation will not load unsigned or unauthorized VBA project when rights restricted files (or reference) are open. Conversely, MicroStation will not open a protected file (or reference) with restricted rights if any open VBA project is either unsigned or is not authorized for use with the protected file.
Digital Signatures
In MicroStation, digitally signing a model or file can be used to indicate approval of the design. Another user can then detect the signature, verify the signers identity, and verify that the design has not been changed since it was signed. Model-specific signatures are displayed graphically in the context of the design. Multiple signatures can be affixed to a single file or model. Hierarchical signing is also supported so that one signature is dependent upon prior signatures. A signature can cover the content of a model or file and all of its references including DGN and DWG references.
Starting with the 2004 Edition, MicroStation saves not only the signer information but also who issued the signer's certificate. In earlier versions, if the user's computer and the signer's computer were not set up to recognize the same intermediate certificate authority (CAs), valid signatures could be viewed as not trusted. By saving the entire chain of certificates leading from the signer back to the trusted root, adequate information is available for any computer to verify a signature regardless of the intermediate CAs it recognizes. Signatures created in the 2004 Edition and later will not be backward compatible with MicroStation V8.1 because it is possible that the signatures could be larger then the earlier version allows. These signatures will be marked as unverified because they contain information that is not recognizable. Users who want to exchange signatures should all be running the 2004 Edition.
Among other key features, signers can use cells to represent signatures with arbitrary graphics; an API is defined to allow applications to customize where signatures can be placed and how a signers identity is authenticated; and there are several ways users can detect valid signatures to prevent spoofing. MicroStation Digital Signatures Digital Signatures dialog box Add File Signature dialog box Place Signature Cell dialog box Add Hidden Digital Model Signature dialog box Signature Properties dialog box Tools for Signing Digital Signatures tool box Digital Signatures Place Signature Cell
MicroStation Digital Signatures

A digital signature in MicroStation has the following components:
An element (a cell) stored in the file
Hash of model or file and optionally its references Signer's certificate Ti f i i
Special linkage containing
3/24/2010
Page 314 of 329
Optional information, such as expiration, annotation data, signature graphics, or list of prerequisite signatures
Signature cells
A signature cell is really just a cell. It is created and managed as a normal cell in a cell library. It is then placed in the model that is being signed. What makes a signature cell special is that it itself is digitally signed
Model scope A signature with model scope (model signature) captures the data in the model in which it is placed.
contents of all elements in the model (graphic and non-graphic) contents of file-wide, non-graphic data, such as shared cell definitions model properties, such as model name, number, type, and units lastmodified time of each element m and n properties flags on graphic elements archive flag on each element signatures reference attachment data, if the signature does not include references
Included in a model signature
Excluded from a model signature
A signature may apply to some but not all models within a design file.
File scope A signature with file scope captures the state of all the models in the file plus file-level information (defined below). Thus, a file signature becomes invalidated by any change to the content of any model or to file-level information.
Editable summary properties including title, subject, category, keywords, comments, author, company, category, manager, and application Shared status of file (set for Design History file sharing feature) File format (V8, V7, DWG)
File-level information included in the signature
File path and name File size Opens With (application association) Attributes (read only, hidden) Volatile Summary Properties including revision number, date last saved, last saved by, edit time, security, modified time, accessed time Thumbnail Security Properties Custom Properties MicroStation Session data, including last user and computer to access the file Licenses defined by File Protection D i Hi t
File-level information excluded from the signature

3/24/2010

Page 315 of 329

All Custom Properties All nested property sets
A file signature excludes streams and storage added to the file by applications.
All summary properties not mentioned here are excluded from the signature.
Design History is excluded from the signature so that history may be used to manage signatures.
Signature scope not restricted to view and level display A signature includes all elements in the file or model. View attributes that are turned off, such as display of cells, text, dimensions, constructions, or tags, and view parameters, such as window area and clipping planes, are included in the scope of the signature. Similarly, all levels are included regardless of whether they are displayed. In summary, all elements are signed even if no views are open and all levels are off.
Even though the scope of a signature is not limited by view and level setting, a signature includes the state of those settings. Therefore, changing view parameters, turning levels on/off, or other design file settings will invalidate all signatures in that file.
Signature excludes external resources, databases and user preferences External resources are excluded from model and file signatures. This means that a signature is not invalidated when an external resource changes, even though that might affect the appearance of the design. Examples of external resources excluded from signatures:

most fonts user preferences external databases application .RSC files
Changes inside file that do not invalidate signatures A few very special types of change will not invalidate digital signatures:

adding and deleting an element making a change and then using Undo or Design History to back it out. using the compress command committing changes to Design History creating, re-validating, or deleting a digital signature
Changes outside file that do not invalidate signatures Any of the General and Security Properties, including name and location of a signed file, can be changed without invalidating signatures inside the file.
3/24/2010

Signatures and design history
Page 316 of 329
A digital signature does not include the contents of Design History. While a signature captures the current state of a model or file, Design History holds previous or alternate states. Thus a signature is not invalidated when changes are committed to Design History because commit does not modify the current state of the design. You can use Design History to restore broken signatures that result from changes to a file, which causes signatures to become invalid. By restoring the original contents of the signed design, the signature again becomes valid. Design History can also restore deleted signatures. If a signature is deleted, that is a change to the DGN file that can be committed. Design History can then be used to undo that change, restoring the signature.
A restored signature becomes valid only if the rest of the design is in the exact state that was originally signed.
Signatures and other signatures A signature normally ignores other signatures so you can place new signatures without invalidating existing ones. A signature can depend on other signatures by creating a signature hierarchy. This is also known as countersigning. A signer has no way of knowing if the DGN file has been signed by another person. Additionally, a signer can not prevent another signer from signing the file afterwards. Digital signatures and references A signature may or may not include reference models.
Including references
The user determines if the signature includes referenced content. If live nesting is turned on when creating the signature, nested references are also included in the signature. A reference and its children are only included in the signature if the attachment is marked for display. Signatures of both model and file scope can be marked to include references. When a model signature includes references, only the references attached to that model are included. When a file signature includes references, all references attached to all models are included. The biggest signature is a signature of a file and all of its references.
A Reference denotes a model not a file.
A signature that includes referenced content is marked with a star in the Digital Signatures dialog box.
Reference attachment data included
A signature always includes reference attachment data, such as reference origin, scale, rotation, and clip boundary regardless of whether or not referenced content is included in the signature.
DWG reference included
A reference to a DWG model can be included in a signature.

Signatures not restricted by clip boundaries
When a reference is included in a signature, the signature captures its entire contents regardless of the clip boundary.
Signatures in references
3/24/2010

A signature placed in the master file may depend on a signature in a reference. The Digital Signatures dialog box displays all signatures in references.
Status display of signatures in references
Page 317 of 329
If a reference has signatures, they are displayed in the view and in the Digital Signatures dialog box. A red seal displays in the status area indicating there is a signature on the active file. However, this area remains blank if the active file has no signatures but there are signatures on the references. The Digital Signatures dialog box lists all signatures in all references, regardless of whether or not the active file has any signatures. Checking the Digital Signatures dialog box is much more accurate than the status bar. File signatures A file signature is displayed only in the Digital Signatures dialog box, which displays all file signatures regardless of the current model. The existence of a file signature is not indicated on plots.
The MicroStation status bar displays a signature icon when a file contains any file or model signatures.
Model signatures A model signature is a cell with a special linkage containing the non-graphical data associated with the signature, as well as graphics that visually represent a signature. A signer supplies a signature cell which can contain raster and/or OLE objects to create a realistic and meaningful signature. Some organizations have their own guidelines for signatures. Signature placement can be controlled by a custom application. MicroStation displays a model signature by displaying the cell. Model signatures display on plots as cells. There are two types of Model signatures: hidden and non-hidden. Both types are listed in the Digital Signatures dialog box but non-hidden model signatures are also displayed as an element in the context of the model.
The Fast Cells view parameter does not apply to signature cells.
The Digital Signatures dialog displays only the model signatures of the current model and, optionally, its references.
The MicroStation status bar displays a signature icon when the file contains any file or model signatures.
Signature cell A cell that represents a model signature is called a signature cell. It is created and managed as a normal cell in a cell library and then placed in the model that is being signed. What makes a signature cell special is that it is digitally signed. Digitally signing the cell prevents tampering and associates a digital certificate with the cell. Internally, a signature cell contains an embedded cell, which is the cells (hidden) signature.
Signature Cell Structure Cell <John Doe>

Graphics (OLE, text, etc.) Orphan Cell Header (signature linkage)
This method of associating a certificate with cell graphics reduces errors in placing signature cells but does not make signature cells more
3/24/2010
Page 318 of 329
When creating a signature cell, set the current level to default and place all its elements on the default level. This ensures that placing a signature cell will not break existing signatures.
To create a signature cell using a cell library
1. Create a cell.. 2. Open the cell as a DGN file. 3. From the Digital Signatures dialog box, click the Add Hidden Digital Model Signatures icon. The Add Hidden Digital Model Signatures dialog box opens. 4. Add the signature cell as a Hidden Signature.
To create a signature cell using a model
1. From the File menu, select New. The New dialog box opens 2. Enter a new file name in the Files field and press OK. The new DGN opens. 3. From the File menu, select Models. The Models dialog box opens. 4. From the Models dialog box, select the Create a Model tool. The Create Model dialog box opens. 5. Select Design or Sheet in the Type field or Select Design from Seed or Sheet from Seed in the Type field. 6. If Design or Sheet was selected, choose a 2D seed file. You can create a 3D signature but 2D is recommended. or If Design from Seed or Sheet from Seed was selected, use the Change Seed Mode icon to browse for the desired seed file. 7. Enter Signature in the Name field. 8. Turn on the Can be placed as a cell check box. 9. Turn off the Create A View Group check box. 10. Select Point in the Cell Type field. 11. Click OK. A new model is created. 12. From the Digital Signatures toolbox, select the Digital Signatures icon. The Digital Signatures dialog box opens. 13. From the Digital Signatures dialog box, select the Add Hidden Digital Model Signature icon. The Add Hidden Digital Model Signature dialog box opens. 14. Select a certificate installed on your machine with the browse icon and then click OK. Verify that the model has been signed by a green check mark in the Verified column on the Digital Signatures dialog box.
To place a signature cell
1. Open the DGN you want to sign. 2. From the Tools Menu, select Digital Signatures. The Digital Signatures toolbox opens. 3. Click Place Signature Cell icon. The Place Signature Cell dialog box opens.
3/24/2010

4. Click on the Attach Signature Cell Library icon. The Signature Cell Library dialog box opens. 5. Select a signature cell library file. The Signature Cell Library dialog box closes. 6. Select the signature cell from the Cell drop-down list box on the Place Signature Cell dialog box. Only valid signatures cells belonging to the current user display and are available for placement. 7. Place a data point in the DGN being signed. Signature decoration
Page 319 of 329
MicroStation draws special decoration graphics next to a signature cell that represent a signature and depict the status as either genuine or invalid. Since the decoration graphic is view independent, it has the same size and orientation regardless of view zoom or rotation. Signature decorations display outside and to the left of the cells actual range adjacent to the cell origin. Signature decorations appear on plots. Spoofing and trust If you see a cell that appears to be a signature, how can you know whose signature it is? The signer supplies the signature cell, and the cell can display anything at all. The cell is not guaranteed to reflect the signers identity or the purpose of the signature. The user must check the signers identity by inspecting the certificate associated with the signature. In particular, the user must verify that the certificate is trusted and is recognized by his organization. In some organizations, the user will also consider the signatures annotation data and/or use a custom application to verify the authenticity of signatures. An element that appears to be a signature is only a genuine MicroStation digital signature if:

a view-independent red seal is displayed to its left it has a corresponding item on the Digital Signatures dialog box
When you select an item in the Digital Signatures dialog box, the corresponding element will highlight on the screen. Signature integration Digital signatures become part of the design file. In fact, a digital signature is really an element in the model to which it applies. File signatures are elements in the internal settings model. Making the signature a part of the file makes it impossible for a signature to somehow be detached from the design accidentally, as can happen when a signature is applied externally to a file. MicroStation does not require a different file format, special packaging, or special viewing software to associate signatures with design data. MicroStation automatically validates digital signatures. In other words, you cannot look at a signature without seeing that it is valid or invalid. Multiple signatures Either a model or a file can contain multiple and unlimited signatures. Adding a new signature does not invalidate existing signatures, although one signature can be valid while others are invalid. Support for multiple signatures means that more than one person can add his signature to a single model or file. Or that one person can sign one model in several places. Since each signature has its own verified status, you can add a new signature after a previous signature has been invalidated by a change to the model or file. This is like initialing a change. The Digital Signatures dialog is useful for detecting and locating signatures in a model or file.
Signature hierarchy
Sometimes a user can sign only after others sign. When a new signature certifies both the file content and other signatures, it is sometimes called countersigning but in MicroStation it is referred to as a signature hierarchy. A hierarchy captures signing order and also records which signatures are required as prerequisites for a new signature. The new signature depends on these prerequisite signatures and is invalidated if a prerequisite signature is deleted or otherwise invalidated. When this happens the (ne ) dependent signat re remains in alid e en if the prereq isite signat re is re alidated This preser es signing order
3/24/2010
Page 320 of 329
Nested hierarchies can be created so that a new signature becomes dependent on a signature that already has prerequisite dependencies. There are no structural limitations to the depth of a signature hierarchy. One signature can be a prerequisite of several dependent signatures so that hierarchies overlap (defining a graph rather than a tree). The Digital Signatures dialog box visually displays hierarchy relationships. A signature hierarchy is the only true proof of signing order. Signature dates is not a reliable indicator of signing order for several reasons:

Signature dates are not reliable indicators. A deleted signature can be reinstated with an earlier date. If Shared Files are used, it is possible for users to sign a file simultaneously.
Multi-user support A user must select a certificate from the secure, private certificate store of the user currently logged in under Windows. This usually means that a user must be logged into his own Windows account when adding a digital signature. When smart cards are used, it is possible to install references to a single certificate on multiple machines, while keeping the private key on the card itself. In this case, multiple users could sign the same file or model using the same machine, each supplying his own smart card. Customization MicroStation supports customization and control over digital signatures in two ways:

The signer defines the cell for model signature graphics. MicroStation defines an API for creating and reviewing signatures.
Tools for Signing

This section describes Digital Signatures support from the point of view of the signer and of other users who view and verify signatures. The main user interface is the Digital Signatures dialog. The signer uses this dialog to create, delete, and re-validate signatures. Other users will find tools to locate and review signatures. The Digital Signatures dialog is accessed from the Tools menu. Signing an entire file The Add File Signature tool is used to create a digital signature with file scope.
Add File Signature dialog box
To sign an entire file
1. From the Digital Signatures dialog box, select the Add File Signature icon.
3/24/2010
Page 321 of 329
The Add File Signature dialog box opens. The name of the signer is filled in from the selection of the certificate. The location defaults to the computer name. 2. Select a certificate from your personal certificate store. 3. (Optional) Enter the reason the file is being signed in the Purpose field. 4. (Optional) Enter the date the signature expires in the Expiry field. 5. (Optional) Click the Dependent Signature check box if you want to create a signature hierarchy. 6. (Optional) Click the Include References check box if you want the contents of all references attached to the master file to be included in the signature. 7. Click OK. MicroStation automatically annotates the new signature with the current time from the signers machine. Signing multiple files via batch command The Batch Process tool can be used to sign multiple files with a single batch operation.
Only file-wide signatures can be applied using this method.
To sign multiple files via batch command
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Batch Process. The Batch Process dialog box opens. 2. Click the Create Command File icon. The Create Command File dialog box opens. 3. Enter the name of the Batch Process Command file you want to create. 4. Navigate to the path where you want the Batch Process Command file to reside and press OK. Notepad opens your Batch Process Command file. 5. Enter the following key-in: SIGNATURE ADD FILESIGNATURE certificate common name and save the file. The certificate common name is the name associated with the digital signature to be used for the signings. 6. From the Batch Process dialog box Edit menu, select Add Files or Click the Add Files or Directories to Process icon. The Select Files and Directories to process dialog box opens. 7. Select the file or files to be included in the batch and click the Add button. or Double-click on each file to be included in the batch. The selected files appear in the Selected Files dialog section. 8. Click the Done button. The selected files appear in the Process Tasks dialog section of the Batch Process dialog box. 9. From the Batch Process dialog box File menu, select Process or Click the Process Batch Process icon. The Files to Process dialog box opens. 10. Click the Process button. All of the selected files are signed via the batch process.
You can remove file signatures via the same batch process as described above by simply using the SIGNATURE REMOVE FILESIGNATURE signer key-in where signer is what displays in the Signer column of the Digital Signatures dialog box.
3/24/2010

Signing a model
Page 322 of 329
The Place Signature Cell and Add Hidden Model Signature tools on the Digital Signatures dialog create digital signatures with model scope. A model signature applies to the contents of the current model.
Adding a model signature
The Place Signature Cell tool is used to place a model signature that applies to and is displayed in the context of the current model. A model signature requires a signature cell that is placed in the current model to represent the signature visually.
Place Signature Cell dialog box
To add a model signature
1. From the Digital Signatures dialog box, select the Place Signature Cell icon. The Place Signature Cell dialog box opens. This tool is used to place a model signature that applies to and displays in the current model. 2. Select the cell library that contains the signature cell with the Attach Signature Cell Library tool. The Cell field will be populated with a list of available signature cells from the currently attached signature cell library. 3. Choose a signature cell from the Cell pull-down menu. 4. Enter the angle by which the cell is rotated in the Active Angle field. 5. Enter the scale at which the cell will be placed in the Scale field. 6. (Optional) Check the Include Reference box to include all attached references in the signing. 7. (Optional) Enter the name of the person signing the model in the Signer field. The Signer defaults to the current users login name. 8. (Optional) Enter a description of the signers intent. 9. (Optional) Enter a date that the signature expires. 10. Check this option to make the new signature depend on all signatures that are currently selected in the Digital Signatures dialog box. This check box is disabled if no signatures are selected. 11. Click a data point to place the signature cell. The new signature displays in the current model of the DGN file and appears in the Signature dialog box.
A red seal next to the signature in the model indicates that it is a signature. Moving or modifying the signature invalidates the signature. An invalid signature is displayed with a red X across it. A yellow warning symbol is displayed if the signature is based on a certificate that is not trusted or if the signature has expired.
Creating additional signatures Use the Add Signature tool on the Digital Signatures dialog to add additional signatures to a file or model. Adding a new signature does
3/24/2010
Page 323 of 329
not invalidate existing signatures. The same user can place multiple instances of the same signature cell or multiple signature cells. The same user can also place a mixture of file, model, and hidden model signatures.
Hierarchical signing
To create a hierarchy, the signer selects one or more existing signatures in the Digital Signatures dialog before activating the Add Model or File Signature tool. The signer then specifies that the new signature will depend on the selected signatures.
To create a signing hierarchy
1. From the Digital Signatures dialog box, select one or more existing signatures. 2. Select the Add File Signature (or Place Signature Cell) icon. The Add File Signature (or Place Signature Cell) dialog box opens. The name of the signer and there location is filled in from the selection of the certificate. 3. Select a certificate from your personal certificate store. 4. Click the Dependent Signature check box if you want to create a signature hierarchy. 5. Click OK. Removing a signature The signer can use the Remove a Signature tool on the Digital Signatures dialog to remove a model or file signature. Since model signature elements are locked, this tool is the most convenient way to remove them. Only the original signer can remove a signature. That is, the current user can remove a signature only if he possesses the certificate and private key used to create the signature. Undo and Design History can be used to undo the removal of a signature. Anyone can undo the removal of a signature. Whether the restored signature is valid or not depends on whether the rest of the DGN file and prerequisites are in the state that was signed.
To remove a signature
1. From the Digital Signatures dialog box, select the signature or signatures to be removed. 2. Select the Remove a Signature tool. The selected signature(s) is removed from the file. If a prerequisite signature is deleted, the dependent signatures become invalid. Re-validating a signature A signature is invalidated by any change to the data in its scope or to the signature itself. The signature can be restored using the Undo or Design History function. The signer (and only the signer) can re-validate the signature after file changes based on the current content using the re-validate tool. This is a short cut for deleting the invalid signature and adding a new one.
To re-validate a signature
1. From the Digital Signatures dialog box, select a signature that is invalid. Invalid signatures have an X in the verified column. 2. Click the re-validate a Signature tool The signature is re-validated with the current state of the file. The signature now displays verified (green check mark) and the red X is removed.
Re-validating a signature does not re-validate the signatures that depend on it. Conversely, a dependent signature cannot be revalidated until all of its prerequisite signatures have been re-validated. In general, the signatures in a hierarchy must be re-validated in the reverse of the order in which they were created. If a model signature element is copied, the copy will be a signature but will be invalid. The signer (and only the signer) could then recreate it, thus updating its signing time.
3/24/2010
Page 324 of 329
When a signed design file is modified, the signature is invalidated and marked with a red cross. The MS_SIGNATURE_DISPLAY_UNVERIFIED configuration variable can be used to change how unverified digital signatures are crossed out. Additionally, the MS_SIGNATURE_SHOW_FULL_NAME variable can be set to display the full subject and issuer names from the signer's certificate in the element information balloon. See the table of uncategorized configuration variables for descriptions and values.
Digital Signatures tool box

The Digital Signatures tool box contains tools to access the Digital Signatures dialog box and the Place Signature Cell dialog box.
To
Select in the Digital Signatures tool box
Opens the Digital Signatures dialog box. Digital Signatures
Opens the Place Signature Cell dialog box. Place signature cell
Key-in: SIGNATURE ADD FILESIGNATURE
Visualization Glossary
ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPRSTUV This glossary defines visualization terms used with MicroStation.
A
actor adaptive subdivision aliasing
In an animation sequence, an element(s) that are scripted to move or rotate in a controlled manner. Created as a cell. Process within radiosity solving that dynamically subdivides a surface element mesh along shadow boundaries, resulting in more accurate and detailed shading. Source of several common computer graphics artifacts such as jagged lines, missing objects, and jerky motion in animation. In signal processing terms, aliasing is caused by the under-sampling of a signal, resulting in some high-frequency components of the signal assuming the alias (or false identity) of the low frequency components, and mixing together in such a way that they can no longer be distinguished properly. Imaginary light that is presumed to strike every point on a surface with equal intensity. Used to approximate the large-scale effects of diffuse inter-reflections, a phenomenon not usually accounted for by most lighting methods. Ambient light should be turned off when using particle tracing or radiosity solving, both of which take into account the diffuse reflection of light between surfaces.
ambient light
animation camera
Actor that is scripted to designate a viewing position, orientation, and perspective for animation.
3/24/2010

animation settings file antialiasing
Page 325 of 329
File (.asf) that contains design and rendering settings while recording an animation sequence. Particularly useful for collaborative recording of animation scripts on networked systems or continuing disrupted recordings. Special rendering processing to remove or limit the appearance of aliasing artifacts in an image or an animation sequence. See also sample. Light source created from a MicroStation shape element. This type of light source casts softer, more natural shadows than a Point light source.
area light source
camera caustics color bleeding
Imaginary entity that specifies a scene's viewing position, orientation, and perspective. See also animation camera. Lighting effects caused by light reflected off surfaces, or refracted through transparent objects. Shading effect observable in particle traced and radiosity solutions caused by diffuse-inter-reflections between surfaces. For example, a colored wall often reflects a small amount of its color onto an adjoining white wall.
diffuse interreflection diffuse reflection
A global process of light transport among all the surfaces in an environment, based on a series of diffuse reflections between surfaces. This is the process that is simulated in radiosity solving. Type of reflection that sends light in all directions with equal energy. Diffuse reflection is said to be view-independent. See also specular reflection. To move the view cone while keeping the camera and target points in the same positions relative to each other that is, without changing its orientation. To move a directional light source and its target point such that they remain in the same positions relative to each other that is, without changing its orientation.
dolly (camera)
dolly (light source)
element
For radiosity solving, a triangular subdivision of a patch. Light energy is shot from a single patch to each of the elements of the other surfaces. For radiosity solving, the set of elements composing a surface. To move the view cone, linearly, in a vertical direction.
element mesh elevate environment cube environment map
Imaginary cube surrounding the entire design, on which images are applied as environment maps.
Image file representing the projection of a 3D environment onto a 2D surface from a specific point of view. A set of these files can be applied to the six faces of the environment cube that surrounds a design (or environment). An environment map is not directly visible in the view, but is seen only when reflected or transmitted by surfaces in the model to which material characteristics are applied.
field
Animation script recording technique that results in frames that consist of two fields each (one for the even-numbered scan lines and
3/24/2010

rendering
Page 326 of 329
one for the odd-numbered scan lines). Used to improve playback on NTSC and PAL video display systems that employ interlaced display. Single rendered image that is part of a series of rendered images that make up an animation sequence. Identifies a frame's relative position in an animation sequence. Since the speed of an animation sequence (expressed in frames per second) is constant throughout the animation, frame numbers can also be thought of as points in time. Therefore, fractional frame numbers can be specified in script entries. Effect of the angle of view on the reflectivity and transparency of a surface. For example, a window appears more reflective than transparent when viewed at a sharp angle. Geometric shape used to describe the viewing volume in computer graphics, where the viewing plane sits at the top of a truncated pyramid that extends into the 3D environment.
frame frame number
Fresnel effects frustum
global lighting
Shading of a surface that takes into account both direct lighting and some indirect lighting, such as reflections and refractions. Ray tracing, radiosity solving, and particle tracing, account for global lighting, but in different ways. Also refers to the Ambient, Flashbulb, and Solar light settings that are grouped in the Global Lighting settings box.
highlight
Brightly-lit area on a surface caused by a specular reflection.
illumination image point
Specification of lighting on a surface. In photomatching, a known point on the photograph or rendered image that correlates to a monument point in the computer model. Text file (.scr) containing entries that define the names of design files, views, output filenames and formats, and rendering options for batch rendering. Rendered image showing an intermediate result of a radiosity solving process. Smooth shading is typically used to render the image to decrease processing time. Method by which an animation parameter smoothly varies from one state to another. Also refers to the blending of adjacent pixels of a texture map for smoother rendered images.
image script
intermediate image interpolation
jittering
Antialiasing technique in which samples are taken in a non-uniform manner which efficiently approximates a Poisson distribution. This distribution is particularly effective in eliminating regular-pattern artifacts, such as jagged edges, from a rendered image.
keyframe
Frame in which the locations and orientations of particular elements are explicitly specified.
3/24/2010

keyframing
Page 327 of 329
Most basic method of animation, in which keyframes are defined, and the system automatically computes the frames in between (a process known as tweening).
local lighting local material lumen
Shading of the surface that accounts for direct lighting only that is, lighting directly attributed to light sources. Phong shading is an example of a rendering method that is based on local lighting.
Material definition for a model stored within the DGN file rather than externally in a palette (.pal) file.
Units in which the brightness of light sources is expressed. Lumens are the photometric equivalent of watts, but only account for energy in the visible part of the electromagnetic spectrum. If a light source's Intensity setting is 1.0, its Lumens setting closely approximates lumens.
mip mapping monument point multi-level texture interpolation
See multi-level texture interpolation. In photomatching, a known point in the model whose corresponding image point is visible. Texture mapping option for Phong and ray-traced rendering that provides less noisy images and smoother animations by pre-filtering the texture into a series of progressive lower resolution images, and then smoothly interpolating between them. In an image rendered with this option, repetitive patterns fade to constant as the distance from the camera increases.
NTSC
Video standard for television systems in the United States, Canada, and Japan.
open script
Animation script whose entries are listed in the Animation Producer settings box. The open script can be previewed and recorded.
PAL pan parametric motion control particle tracing
Dominant video standard for television systems in Europe and Australia. To manipulate the view cone by revolving either the camera about the target (horizontally or vertically), or vice-versa.
Animation method in which the position and orientation of elements are mathematically specified as a function of time.
Global lighting method that computes a view-independent solution that includes all lighting effects such as color bleeding, specular light effects including reflections, refractions and caustics. For radiosity solving, a subdivision of a surface that shoots light energy to each of the triangular elements of other surfaces. Each patch is subdivided into one or more elements.
patch
photomatching
Process of matching a model's viewing perspective to that of a photograph or rendered background image, which is attached
3/24/2010
Page 328 of 329
to the model as a reference raster file. The expected result is a composite image in which the model is superimposed on the background image with correct positioning and orientation. Poisson distribution Random set of points with the property that no two points are closer together than a given fixed distance. This distribution is expensive to compute, but is generally regarded as the optimal sampling pattern for computer graphics. Jittering is commonly used to generate a point set that approximates a Poisson distribution, but with significantly less computation. Special type of bump map that dynamically calls a procedural texture function to compute a perturbed surface normal rather than performing a lookup into a stored image. Special type of pattern map that dynamically calls a procedural texture function to compute pixel color rather than performing a lookup into a stored image. Function that takes either a 2D texture coordinate or a 3D world coordinate as input, and returns a texture value (either a color for a pattern map or a normal for a bump map). The function can perform anything from a simple lookup into a standard texture map to a very complex calculation. When a solid to which a 3D procedural texture is applied is rendered, the solid appears to be sculpted from the specified pattern rather than wrapped with the pattern.
procedural bump map procedural pattern map procedural texture
radiosity radiosity database radiosity solution radiosity solving
Total power (light energy per unit time) per unit area leaving a point on a surface. See also radiosity solving.
See rendering database.
3D view independent lighting solution calculated using radiosity solving.
Global lighting method that accurately calculates the distribution of light energy in an environment by accounting for both direct lighting and diffuse inter-reflections. Radiosity solving is particularly useful for handling effects such as color bleeding and indirect lighting. Photorealistic rendering method in which the global lighting of an environment is computed by simulating the reflection and refraction of light rays (recursively), using the principles of geometric optics. The output of ray tracing is a 2D view-dependent image. Ray tracing accurately depicts reflections, refractions, and semi-transparent materials. Data structure containing the geometry and settings that are constructed in memory during pre-processing for ray tracing, radiosity solving, or particle tracing. The rendering database is kept in memory, automatically, when repeatedly rendering the same design. Rotate the camera about the view Z-axis.
ray tracing
rendering database roll
sample
In radiosity solving, the process of examining a point on the current light source or shooting patch. The computation time increases roughly one-for-one with the number of samples. In antialiasing, the process of examining part of a pixel. Samples are combined into a final pixel value. The number of samples and the threshold at which sampling stops are adjustable settings. Text file (.msa) that contains animation script entries directions concerning keyframes, views, parameter definitions, settings, actors, animation cameras, and targets. In radiosity solving, the process of transporting light energy from a single patch to each of the elements of the other surfaces. Type of reflection that sends light primarily in a single outgoing direction related to a single incoming direction by the principles of geometric optics, resulting in either a mirror-like reflection or a glossy highlight. Specular reflection is said to be view-dependent.
script
shot specular reflection
3/24/2010

terminator texture map texture mapping
Page 329 of 329
Line separating light and dark on curved surfaces, most noticeable when an object is illuminated by a single light source. Stored image used for texture mapping. Process of applying detail to a surface without explicitly modeling it as part of the geometry of the surface. This process can be either a standard lookup into an image texture map or a function call to compute a value algorithmically. The resulting value can be used either as a pixel color value (as in a pattern map) or as a perturbed surface normal (as in a bump map). In keyframing, the process in which the system automatically computes the frames in between keyframes.
tweening
uniform sampling
Regular distribution of samples, equally spaced in all dimensions.
velocity view cone view-dependent lighting view-independent lighting viewing pyramid
Rate of change of an animation parameter as it varies from one state to another. Dynamically displayed indication of view extents that is used to set up the camera. Global lighting of a 3D environment that varies from image to image as the position of the view is changed, primarily because of specular reflections or refractions of visible surfaces. Global lighting of a 3D environment that remains constant from image to image as the position of the view is changed, thereby allowing for reuse, which significantly shortens the rendering time of subsequent images. See view cone.
3/24/2010
Programmed Customizations
Page 1 of 41
Programmed Programmed Customizations Customizations

Scripts and Macros MDL Applications Batch Process Utility Utilities Command Line Arguments and Exception Logs Bentley Digitizer Interface for Windows Information
Scripts and Macros

To more efficiently perform specific tasks with MicroStation, you can use various forms of customization. These kinds of application software are available:

Key-in Scripts MicroStation BASIC Macros VBA Macros
Key-in Scripts MicroStation BASIC Macros VBA Macros
Key-in Scripts
The simplest software applications are key-in scripts. A key-in script is a sequence of MicroStation key-ins that are stored in a text file. For example, the following script sets the active level, active color, and active line weight:
active level Level 3 active color blue active weight 2 The Batch Process utility provides a convenient way to create a script and apply it to a set of files or directories. You can also use the Key-in window to run a key-in script.
To load and run a key-in script in the Key-in window
1. In the Key-in window, key in @<script_file> script_file must include the full path and filename to the script file.
MicroStation BASIC Macros

MicroStation BASIC Macros are BASIC programs that automate often-used, usually short sequences of operations. Many MicroStationspecific extensions have been added to the BASIC language to customize it for the MicroStation environment. In its simplest form, a macro drives MicroStation in much the same way a human user does. Macros select tools and view controls, send key-ins, manipulate dialog boxes, modify elements, and more, using many of the tools documented in this guide. The obvious advantage of writing a macro to perform a task that could otherwise be done manually is automating mechanical and repetitive tasks. Several sample macros are supplied with MicroStation. Macro code is stored in text files with .bas file extension. The macro language is BASIC with MicroStation-specific extensions. Compiled macros are stored in resource files with .ba extensions.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh343A.htm
3/24/2010
Page 2 of 41
For information about developing your own macros, see MicroStation BASIC Help.
Running MicroStation BASIC macros You can load, run, and edit a macro using the Macros dialog box or a key-in.
To load and run a MicroStation BASIC macro
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Macros > MicroStation BASIC. The Macros dialog box opens.
2. In the Macro name list box, select the macro. 3. Click the Run button.
Alternative Method To load and run a MicroStation BASIC macro
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Macros > MicroStation BASIC. The Macros dialog box opens. 2. Click the Browse button. The Select Macro dialog box opens. 3. Key in or select the desired macro, and click the OK button. The Start Macro dialog box opens. 4. Click the Run button.
Alternative Method To load and run a MicroStation BASIC macro
1. In the Key-in window, key in: MACRO <macro_name> [arg1 arg2 argn]
You can define an action string that specifies a key-in that runs a macro and assign the action string to a custom tool, menu item, function key, or AccuDraw keyboard shortcut. You can customize the user interface and run frequently used macros with a single click or key press.
Publishing MicroStation BASIC macros on the Internet MicroStation has a utility that makes preparing a directory of macros for publishing on the Internet easier than with standard Internet publishing tools.
To create an HTML document from a directory of MicroStation BASIC macros
3/24/2010
The HTML Author dialog box opens. 2. Select the Basic Macros radio button. 3. Click OK. The Select Basic Macro Directory dialog box opens. 4. Navigate to the desired directory and click OK. The Basic Macro HTML Page dialog box opens.
Page 3 of 41
5. Adjust any settings necessary and click OK. The Create HTML File dialog box opens. 6. Adjust any settings necessary and click OK. The HTML document is created and stored in the directory defined in the Create HTML File dialog box's File Name field. If Display File In Browser is checked, clicking OK also opens your default Web browser to display the document. You can publish the document on the Internet by uploading it to a Web server.
VBA Macros
MicroStation implements Microsoft's Visual Basic for Applications (VBA). MicroStation VBA has extensions to VBA that allow interaction to the MicroStation design file elements and settings. Several sample VBA macros are supplied with MicroStation. For information about developing your own macros, see the MicroStation VBA Help. Running VBA macros You can create, run, and edit a VBA macro using the Macros dialog box.
To load and run a VBA macro
1. Choose Utilities > Macro > Macros. The Macros dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 4 of 41
2. In the Macro Name list box, select the macro. 3. Click the Run button.
Alternative Method To load and run a VBA macro
1. In the Key-in window, key in: VBA RUN [project name]module name.subprocedure
MDL Applications
MDL applications are extensions to MicroStation. MDL stands for MicroStation Development Language essentially the C language executed by MicroStation. Many parts of standard MicroStation are actually MDL applications. Bentley Developer Network members around the world offer products and services that compliment Bentley engineering solutions. An MDL application can only be used in MicroStation. MicroStation can be (and almost always is) operated with more than one MDL application loaded at a time. MicroStation can manage multiple MDL applications simultaneously. In fact, there are no practical limitations placed on the number of MDL applications that can be loaded. Some MDL applications insert their own submenus in the Applications menu in MicroStation's main menu bar. (The Applications menu only appears in the menu bar when an MDL application has inserted a submenu in it.) For information about designing and programming MDL applications, see MicroStation Development Tools in MicroStation BASIC Help. Loading and Unloading MDL Applications Loading MDL Applications Automatically
Loading and Unloading MDL Applications

The MDL dialog box (Utilities > MDL Applications) can be used to load and unload MDL applications.
To load an MDL application
3/24/2010
1. From the Utilities menu, choose MDL Applications. The MDL dialog box opens.
Page 5 of 41
MDL dialog box
2. In the Available Applications list box, select the application. 3. Click Load.
Alternative Method To load an MDL application
1. From the Utilities menu, choose MDL Applications. The MDL dialog box opens. 2. Click the Browse button. The Select MDL Application dialog box opens. 3. Key in or select the desired MDL application, and click the OK button.
1. Key in MDL LOAD <application_name>. For example, to load the MDL application MERGE (merge.ma), key in MDL LOAD MERGE.
MDL applications that are part of standard MicroStation are not listed in the Available Applications list box in the MDL dialog box. However, upon loading, they are listed in the Loaded Applications list box.
To view technical details about an MDL application
1. From the Utilities menu, choose MDL Applications. The MDL dialog box opens. 2. In the Loaded Applications list box, select the desired application. 3. Click the Detail button.
To view key-ins for an MDL application
From the Utilities menu choose MDL Applications
3/24/2010
The MDL dialog box opens. 2. In the Loaded Applications list box, select the desired application. 3. Click the Key-ins button. The Key-in window opens, displaying the key-ins that are associated to the selected MDL application.
To unload an MDL application
Page 6 of 41
1. From the Utilities menu, choose MDL Applications. The MDL dialog box opens. 2. In the Loaded Applications list box, select the application. 3. Click the Unload button.
Alternative Method To unload an MDL application
1. Key in MDL UNLOAD <application_name>.
Loading MDL Applications Automatically

You can have selected MDL applications load automatically every time you open a DGN file.
To specify MDL applications for automatic loading
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Design Applications. The controls for selecting applications for automatic loading are shown to the right in the dialog box.
3/24/2010
Page 7 of 41
Configuration dialog box
3. In the Available Applications list box, select an MDL application that you want to load automatically upon start-up. 4. Click the Add button. The application's name is shown in the Applications to Load list box. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the desired applications' names appear in the Applications to Load list box. 6. Click OK.
MDL applications that require more control over MicroStation are referred to as initapps after the name of the configuration variable (MS_INITAPPS) that specifies them. Using the Design Applications configuration variable is the preferred way to load MDL applications automatically.
Batch Process Utility

The Batch Process utility lets you create and run a script that can be performed on individual files or entire directories of files. The script is a text file that contains a series of MicroStation key-ins that can run commands, MicroStation BASIC macros, VBA Macros, or MDL applications. Using this utility, you can easily run a series of commands on a group of files. For example, you could use the Batch Process utility to quickly remove the unused levels from many design files. The Batch Process utility also lets you define and save a batch process job file that defines the script (command file) and the files to be processed with it. Later, you can open the job file and rerun the batch process.
3/24/2010
Setting up and running a batch process Saving and recalling batch process jobs Command Line Batch Processing
Page 8 of 41
Setting up and running a batch process

Before you run a batch process, you must create a script, then identify the files to process.
General Procedure To set up and run a batch process
1. Create the command file, and enter the key-in commands. 2. Select the files to process. 3. Run the batch process on the selected files.
To create the command file
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Batch Process. The Batch Process dialog box opens.
Batch Process dialog box
2. Click the Create a New Command File icon. The Create Command File dialog box opens.
3/24/2010
Page 9 of 41
Create Command File dialog box
3. Enter a name for the command file, and click OK. If the command file uses the default .txt extension, the text file opens in a text editor window. 4. Enter the MicroStation key-ins. Most MicroStation commands have key-ins. You can also use key-ins to run MicroStation BASIC macros, VBA macros, and MDL applications.
Command file in text editor To pause the script so that you can modify the design file interactively, key in BATCHPROCESS PAUSE. Later, when the batch process is running, it will pause at this point. To restart the process, click the Continue button in the Files to Process dialog box. For details, see To process a batch process job.
Save and exit the text file
3/24/2010
To select the files to process
Page 10 of 41
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Batch Process. The Batch Process dialog box opens. 2. From the Initial Model list box in the Batch Process dialog box, choose the models to process in each file: All Models, or Default Model Only.
After you select the files and directories to process, you can modify the Model setting for any of the files.
3. In the dialog box's icon bar, click Add Files or Directories to Process. The Select Files and Directories to Process dialog box opens. This dialog box allows multiple selection of both files and directories.
Select Files and Directories to Process dialog box
4. Select individual files or directories to process.

You can drag and drop files from Windows Explorer into the Process Tasks list in the Batch Process dialog box. Similarly, you can drag and drop models into the list box from the Models dialog box of the current session, or another open session of MicroStation.
5. Click Add. The specifications for the selected directories or files are listed in the Selected Files list box.
3/24/2010
6. (Optional) To remove a selected directory or file, select it in the list box and click Remove. 7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all directories and files to process.
Page 11 of 41
8. Click Done. The Select Files and Directories to Process dialog box closes, and the Process Tasks list box in the Batch Process dialog box updates to reflect your selections. Now you can edit individual task entries in the Conversion Tasks list box. 9. (Optional) To remove a task, select the task and click the Remove Files icon. 10. (Optional) Use drag and drop to reorder tasks. or (Optional) With the tasks sorted by the # column in ascending order, use menu items on the Edit menu to reorder tasks. 11. (Optional) In the File column, add the wildcard string "*\" to the end of a directory to indicate that subdirectories will be included. In the File column, designate that specific file types in the subdirectories will be included. For example, to process all files with the extension ".dgn" from directory "c:\projects\" and its subdirectories, edit the entry to read "c:\projects\*\*.dgn". 12. (Optional) Set the Initial Model setting for an individual task by changing the setting, selecting the task in the list, and clicking Apply to Selection.
Using drag and drop to select files from Windows Explorer
1. From the Initial Model list box in the Batch Process dialog box, choose the models to process in each file: All Models, or Default Model Only.
After you select the files and directories to process, you can modify the Model setting for any of the files.
2. Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the directory containing the files to be processed. 3. In Windows Explorer, select the file that you want to process. or Press and hold down the <Ctrl> key, then select multiple files. 4. Drag the selected files to the Process Tasks list in the Batch Process dialog box, releasing the <Ctrl> key to complete the task. If you want the files to be dropped between two existing tasks, position the pointer between them prior to dropping the files.
Using drag and drop to select models for batch processing
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Batch Process. 2. In either the open DGN file or from a second session of MicroStation, open the Models dialog box. 3. In the Models dialog box, select the model that you want to process. or Press and hold down the <Ctrl> key, then select multiple models. 4. Drag the selected files to the Process Tasks list in the Batch Process dialog box, releasing the <Ctrl> key to complete the task. If you want the files to be dropped between two existing processing tasks, position the pointer between them prior to dropping the files.
To run the batch process
1. (Optional) To process specific files or directories, select them in the Batch Process dialog box's Process Tasks list box, and turn on Process Selection Only. 2. In the Batch Process dialog box, click the Process Batch Process Job icon. The Files to Process dialog box opens. The individual files to process are listed.
3/24/2010
Page 12 of 41
Files to Process dialog box
3. Click Process. The Process button label automatically changes to Pause, and the Status column identifies the file being processed. Click Pause to pause processing between commands. Click Continue to restart processing. When processing is complete, the Pause button label changes to Done. 4. To return to the Batch Process dialog box, click Done.
Saving and recalling batch process jobs

If you plan to reuse the job setup in future jobs, you should save it to a batch process job file. This text file is similar to a Windows initialization file. It contains the log file name, the list of files to process, and the command file name. You can edit it in a text editor if desired.
To save the job setup to a batch process job file
1. In the Batch Process dialog box's icon bar, click the Save icon. The Save Batch Process Job File dialog box opens. 2. In the Files field, key in the desired filename. The default extension is .bprc. 3. Click OK. The file is created, the dialog box closes, and the focus returns to the Batch Process dialog box. If you change the job setup in MicroStation, you can save the modified setup to the same batch process job file by clicking the Save icon, or to a new file by choosing File > Save As.
To load a saved batch process job setup
1. In the Batch Process dialog box's icon bar, click the Open icon. The Open Batch Process Job File dialog box opens. 2. In the Files list box, select the desired batch process job file. 3. Click OK. The dialog box closes, and the focus returns to the Batch Process dialog box. In that dialog box, the Process Tasks list box updates to show the tasks specified in the file.
3/24/2010
Command Line Batch Processing
You can run a job saved in a batch process job file directly from the system command line.
To run a saved batch process job from the system command line
Page 13 of 41
1. If MicroStation is running, exit. 2. In the MicroStation program group, open the MicroStation Development Shell program item. This causes a MicroStation Development Shell window to open on your desktop. or In a system console window, set the current working directory to the directory in which the MicroStation executable program is installed for example, "Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation" 3. At the system command prompt, enter: msbatch batchprocess <batch_process_job_file_specification>. For example: msbatch batchprocess c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\General\my_batch_process.bprc MicroStation starts without its normal graphical interface, and processing of the job begins. A MicroStation console (Text) window opens so you can monitor the progress of the job. The text displayed in this window is also written to the log file specified in the job setup. When the job is completed, the console window closes.
Utilities
This chapter contains information on and usage of key-ins and MDL applications. You can load the MDL applications from the Utilities menu. Special Key-ins ACTIVE ORIGIN (GO=) DEFINE NORTH FREEZE FENCE FREEZE THAW FENCE THAW SET COMPATIBLE ATTACH MENU (AM=) SET PARSEALL SET PROMPT SET TPMODE ! $ (EXPAND KEYIN) % %% DELETE UNUSED EXPAND ECHO EXPAND SET EXPAND SETSAVE NEWSESSION NULL SET AUTOPAN SET UNDO TRESET WINDOW CHANGESCREEN MDL Applications Merge Calculator/Preprocessor Font Character Mapping Alias Manager ASCII Group Alternate Text Editors Text Editor dialog box WYSIWYG Text Editor window
3/24/2010
Special Key-ins
Special key-ins are, for the most part, utilities that cannot be categorized as drawing tools or view controls.

Page 14 of 41
Design file coordinates Menu activation Status bar and Key-in window usage Other
Design file coordinates These key-ins are used to relocate the global origin and define true North.
To Define true North. Key-in DEFINE NORTH
Relocate the global origin or assign coordinates to the global origin. ACTIVE ORIGIN (GO=)
Menu activation This key-in is used to activate menus.

To Key-in
Activate a paper, cursor button, or screen menu. ATTACH MENU (AM=)
Status bar and Key-in window usage These key-ins are used to set how the Key-in Window key-ins are interpreted, to change the prompt, and to control the information that is displayed when you snap a tentative point.
To Toggle parsing of Key-in Window input. Change the Key-in Window prompt. Key-in SET PARSEALL SET PROMPT
Control information that is displayed in the Key-in Window whenever you snap a tentative point. SET TPMODE
Other These key-ins are used to perform miscellaneous tasks.

To Open a command prompt and optionally execute a system command or batch file. Enter a key-in that contains a configuration variable. Start another Windows application. Exit and start another Windows application. Purge unused data resources from the open DGN file. Check the value of a configuration variable. Set the value of a configuration variable. Set the value of a configuration variable and save it in the user configuration value. Open a specified file and model in a new session. Deselect all controls. Reset the digitizing tablet. ! $ (EXPAND KEYIN) % %% DELETE UNUSED EXPAND ECHO EXPAND SET EXPAND SETSAVE NEWSESSION NULL TRESET Key-in
Display a window (such as a view window) in the second application window, if one is open. WINDOW CHANGESCREEN
3/24/2010
MDL Applications
These utilities are MDL applications.
To Evaluate expressions in MicroStation key-ins. Display the contents of MicroStation fonts and edit character mapping Associate database information with cells. Allow users to key in and activate the equivalent tool in MicroStation. Read a settings group specification from a text file and create a settings file. To load an MDL application Use this utility Calculator/Preprocessor Font Character Map Editor Cell Link Alias Manager ASCII Group
Page 15 of 41
Copy all displayable elements from one design file or cell library into another. Merge
1. From the Utilities menu, choose MDL Applications. The MDL dialog box opens. 2. In the Available Applications list box, select the application. 3. Click the Load button.
1. Key in MDL LOAD <application> where application, by convention, is the MDL application filename without the .ma extension for example, MDL LOAD MERGE.
Merge
The Merge utility (merge.ma) is used to copy all models from one or more DGN files (the source file[s]) to another (the destination file). All element associations are resolved during the merge, and the following processing is also performed:

Tag set definition elements (type 66, level 24) are copied from the source file to the destination. Graphic group numbers, text node numbers, element ID numbers, and line style numbers in the source file are mapped to available numbers in the destination file. (Duplicate cell definitions and tag set definitions from the source file are not transferred.)
To merge a DGN file with the open DGN file
1. With the Merge utility loaded in MicroStation, key in MERGE <source_filename>. If source_filename is a DGN file, its contents are merged into the open DGN file.
You also can merge cell libraries by importing models into a DGN file.
Multiple source files You can merge multiple source files into a single destination file by running Merge from the system command line (on systems that have one) or from MicroStation Manager.
To run Merge from the system command line
1. At the system command prompt, enter: msbatch merge <destination_filename> <source_filename_1> [ <source_filename_n>] Example
3/24/2010
msbatch merge destination.dgn source1.dgn source2.dgn source3.dgn
To merge DGN files with MicroStation Manager
Page 16 of 41
1. In the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences), Look and Feel category, turn off Use Windows File Open Dialogs and click OK. 2. Choose File > Close. 3. From MicroStation Manager's File menu, choose Merge. The Merge dialog box opens.
Merge dialog box
4. In the Files to Merge section, click the Select button. The Select Files to Merge dialog box opens. 5. In the list box, select the first (or only) source file. 6. (Optional) Use <Ctrl-click> to select additional source files. 7. Click the Add button. The file(s) is listed in the File List. 8. Click the Done button. The Select Files dialog box closes and focus returns to the Merge dialog box, where the selected files are displayed in the Files to Merge list box. 9. In the Merge Into section, click the Select button. The Select Destination File dialog box opens. 10. In the list box, select the destination file. 11. Click OK. The Select Destination File dialog box closes, and focus returns to the Merge dialog box. 12. Click the Merge button. When merge processing completes, the Merge dialog box closes and focus returns to MicroStation Manager.
You may experience a limit to the number of files that can be included in one batch when using MSBATCH. This limit is related to the amount of system resources available and will vary from system to system. Typically, the more physical memory and swap space available, the more files you can include in a single batch process.
3/24/2010
Page 17 of 41
Calculator/Preprocessor
The Calculator/Preprocessor utility (calculat.ma) is used to evaluate expressions in MicroStation key-ins. The syntax used is that of C.
The calculator displays the result of an expression in the Status Bar. For example, if Calculator/Preprocessor is loaded, when you key in CALCULATOR 3*sin(90) the result, 3, is displayed in the Status Bar. The preprocessor replaces an expression with the result and passes the key-in to MicroStation. For example, if Calculator/Preprocessor is loaded, when you key in AA={asin(1)} the active angle is set to the result, 90.
C expression handling Both the calculator and preprocessor handle standard C syntax for expressions. The most significant difference between C expression handling and Calculator/Preprocessor expression handling is in integer division. With C expression handling, integer division produces an integer result. With Calculator/Preprocessor expression handling, integer division produces a floating point result. For example, in C the result of 1/4 is 0. With Calculator/Preprocessor, the result of 1/4 is 0.25. The functions cos, acos, sin, asin, atan, atan2, tan, cosh, tanh, sinh, exp, ldexp, log, log10, pow, and sqrt are supported. These functions are the same as the standard C functions except that angles are expressed in degrees rather than radians. Variables and functions can be declared for use with Calculator/Preprocessor. See Customizing Calculator/Preprocessor for information. Preprocessor/MicroStation interaction The interaction between the preprocessor and MicroStation while Calculator/Preprocessor is loaded is described here. The preprocessor examines all MicroStation key-ins and looks for text enclosed in designated delimiter characters. The default delimiters are braces {}. When the preprocessor finds a delimited text string, it evaluates the string. If the string is a valid C expression, the preprocessor replaces the delimiters and the expression with the result and re-examines the entire key-in string. The preprocessor loops in this manner until it completes a pass without replacing any text. The key-in is then passed to MicroStation for processing as a normal key-in. The preprocessor handles key-in strings resulting from custom menu selections or simulated by other applications (MDL applications and user commands) in addition to key-ins. The preprocessor expects the result of an expression to be an integer, floating point value, or character string.
To prevent preprocessing while Calculator/Preprocessor is active
1. Use the backward quotation mark (`) as the first character in the key-in string or key in PREPROCESSOR OFF. If a backward quotation mark is the first character, MicroStation ignores the character when processing the key-in. Output format The calculator and preprocessor each have a format string that controls integer result display and another that controls floating point result display. These format strings are standard C printf strings (%w for working units format is valid as well). The calculator does not process character string results. If the calculator evaluates an expression that generates a character pointer result, the calculator displays an error message. If the preprocessor evaluates an expression that generates a character pointer result, the preprocessor replaces the expression with the string to which the result points. Calculator commands While Calculator/Preprocessor is active, these calculator commands can be keyed-in the same way as MicroStation key-ins:
CALCULATOR [C_expression] calculates the result of a C expression. The result of the expression is displayed in the Status Bar. CALCULATOR alone directs the calculator to interpret all key-ins as expressions. This mode remains active until another di ti t d
3/24/2010
Page 18 of 41
CALCULATOR DECLARE DOUBLE [variable_name] declares a floating point variable for the calculator and preprocessor. The initial value for the variable is 0. The value's definition and value are saved between MicroStation sessions in uservrbl.dat. CALCULATOR DECLARE INT [variable_name] declares an integer variable for the calculator and preprocessor. The initial value for the variable is 0. The value's definition and value are saved between MicroStation sessions in uservrbl.dat. CALCULATOR FORMAT DOUBLE [format_string] specifies the format string used to display the result of floating point expressions. The default is %.10f. For example, to calculate the value of 9000.10 in working units format, key in CALCULATOR FORMAT DOUBLE %w and then key in CALCULATOR 9000.10.
CALCULATOR FORMAT INT [format_string] specifies the format string used to display the result of integer expressions. The default is %d. For example, to calculate the hexadecimal value of decimal 100:, key in CALCULATOR FORMAT INT %#X and then key in CALCULATOR 100. For example, to calculate the decimal value of hexadecimal 100, key in CALCULATOR FORMAT INT %d and then key in CALCULATE 0x100.
UCCALC [C_expression] calculates the result of a C expression, but does not display the result. This command is intended for use in key-in strings generated in user commands with KEY statements.
Preprocessor commands While Calculator/Preprocessor is active, these preprocessor commands can be keyed in the same way as MicroStation key-ins:
PREPROCESSOR [OFF|ON|TOGGLE] used to disable and enable preprocessing. PREPROCESSOR alone opens the Preprocessor dialog box. PREPROCESSOR FORMAT DOUBLE [format_string] specifies the format string used to substitute for floating point expressions. The default is %.10f. PREPROCESSOR FORMAT INT [format_string] specifies the format string used to substitute for integer expressions. The default is %d. PREPROCESSOR START [start_character] used to specify the character used to delimit the start of key-in strings for preprocessing. The default start delimiter is {. PREPROCESSOR END [end_character] used to specify the character used to delimit the end of key-in strings for preprocessing. The default end delimiter is }. PREPROCESSOR STATUS displays the current status of the preprocessor in the Status Bar.
Customizing Calculator/Preprocessor You can customize Calculator/Preprocessor as follows:

Add variables through the uservrbl.dat file. Add additional functions and variables from MDL programs. Declare variables with CALCULATOR DECLARE commands. Completely replace the preprocessor with another MDL program.
During its initialization, Calculator/Preprocessor reads uservrbl.dat. It looks for the file in the directory assigned to the MS_DATA configuration variable. Each variable definition in the file has the following format :<type_name> <variable_name> <initial_value>
3/24/2010
Page 19 of 41
The possible values for type_name are double and int. The variable names defined in uservrbl.dat are restricted to a maximum of 16 characters. The initial value of the string begins with the first non-blank character after the variable name. It continues until the end of the line. An example of a standard initialization file follows:
int baseValue 1 double baseUor 1.0 When Calculator/Preprocessor is being unloaded, it updates uservrbl.dat. While updating, it records the types, names, and values of the variables defined in the uservrbl.dat file and those defined with CALCULATOR DECLARE commands. It does not save information about variables published from MDL programs. MDL programs can add functions and variables to the calculator by publishing them with the mdlCExpression_symbolPublish function. Using a symbol set that has a VISIBILITY_CALCULATOR visibility makes the function or variable available to the calculator. This is the only way to add functions to the calculator.
Preprocessor dialog box

The Preprocessor dialog box lets you disable and enable preprocessing and adjust the following preprocessor settings:

Expression delimiters Output format strings
Preprocessor dialog box
Key-in: PREPROCESSOR
Font Character Mapping

The Font Character Mapping utility is used to view the contents of MicroStation fonts and edit character mapping. The Text Styles dialog box displays only ASCII characters used in English and digits (ABCXYZ, abcxyz, and 012789). Therefore, it is difficult to tell if a font includes symbols and accented characters used in foreign languages. When fonts are imported using the Font Installer utility, the positions of characters often do not match with the standard MicroStation fonts. The positions of individual characters can be changed with this program.
To use the Font Character Mapping utility
1. Key in: MDL L FONTEDIT 2. The Open Font Library dialog box opens. 3. Display the path of the font library you wish to edit. The Character Mapping dialog box displays.
3/24/2010
4. In the Font option menu, select the name of the font you wish to load. 5. After you have completed your edits, click Save to save the changes. Editing character mapping
Page 20 of 41
MicroStation uses a character mapping called DEC Multinational ASCII, which is very similar to ANSI Windows encoding used by Microsoft Windows and ISO-88591 . AutoCAD under MS-DOS often uses MS-DOS code page 437 for character mapping. The Font Installer utility does not adjust character encoding when importing a font from the MS-DOS version of AutoCAD to MicroStation format. The Font Character Mapping utility enables you to correct the encoding. PostScript fonts use Adobe standard character encoding. The Font Installer utility changes their character encoding to DEC Multinational ASCII. Because the encoding methods described above do not exactly have the same characters, it may be necessary to adjust the position of individual characters.
To change the position of individual characters
1. From the Mode option menu, choose Manual. 2. In the From field, type the value of character you wish to move. 3. In the To field, type the value of the destination. The values you enter need to match with the current display mode. If the display mode is hexadecimal, values such as bc, and 9f can be entered. In Screen Font mode, you can enter values as x, and Z. 4. After you enter the appropriate values, click the Change button. The position of the two characters will be swapped.
To correct the character mapping of AutoCAD.shx fonts from the DOS version of AutoCAD
1. From the Mode option menu, choose DOS (437)uStn. 2. Repeat steps 2 and 3 from the above procedure for all the characters you wish to remap. 3. Click the Change button. 4. To convert character mapping from ANSI Windows (Latin-1) to DEC Multinational encoding, select the ANSI Windows uStn mode. 5. Click the Save button to save the changes. 6. Click Done to close the dialog box.
Character Mapping dialog box

Used to edit characters in a selected font.
3/24/2010
Page 21 of 41
The character display reflects the characters available with the font selected. You can see a magnified version of a character by holding down the Data button while selecting the corresponding key.
Font
Used to select the font whose characters you wish to display/edit.

Display Mode
Used to select the mode in which the font's characters are displayed. They can be displayed in Decimal, Hex, or Screen Font. By default, decimal values are displayed.
Edit Character Map Mode
Used to select the mode in the character map that is to be edited.

From
The value of the character from where you want to move the character.
To
The value of the character where you want to move the character. Key-in: MDL L FONTEDIT
3/24/2010
Page 22 of 41
Alias Manager
The Alias Manager application (aliasmgr.ma) assists you in making the transition from other software packages to MicroStation by aliasing one command set to another. For general information about customizing MicroStation's user interface, see Customizing the User Interface. Once you understand how to set up Alias Manager to alias one command set to another, you can type in a command and activate the equivalent tool in MicroStation. You can load the Alias Manager MDL application from MicroStation's Utilities menu, or you can key in MDL LOAD ALIASMGR <filename>. Once loaded, the following dialog box displays:
Open Alias Manager File dialog box
You can activate the tracking mechanism in online help to help you understand the settings and operation of the tools that are activated. Translation Examples Alias Manager references an ASCII text file that contains two records for each alias. The first record is the command that the user is familiar with in the software package that they are coming from. The second record (or the aliased input), is the equivalent MicroStation tool. For example, the supplied file ACAD.ALM contains the following information:
LINE . . dialog palette 50line ; place line constrained . .
3/24/2010
Page 23 of 41
The first record, LINE is a familiar command for AutoCAD users. The second record, dialog palette 50line;place line constrained, if typed in at the MicroStation Key-in window, will activate the 50line subpalette and then start the Place Line Constrained tool. Note that if you simply go to the line icon in the Main palette and tear it off, the same operation is accomplished. In addition, if the Main palette is open, the appropriate icon is activated. New MicroStation users can take advantage of this ability to familiarize themselves with the locations of the icons in the various palettes. Since MicroStation operation emphasizes, but is not limited to, tool activation via palette icons and menus in the user interface, most of the key-ins used as aliased input may seem lengthy. As a result, please recognize that this application is intended solely as a transition aid and not a recommended alternative to normal MicroStation operation. Alias Manager uses files that contain clean ASCII text, so they can be created or edited using a wide variety of editors. The files must be created and modified using the Edit tools available in the Alias Manager's bar menu. Alias Manager uses any unparsed data on the key-in window as a filename. If a filename is not supplied, the configuration variable ALIASMGR_DATA is then searched for. If it is set (to a specific filename), ALIASMGR automatically attempts to open the file. If this configuration variable is not set, then the user is prompted to select an appropriate file from an Open File dialog box. The file selected can be automatically saved for future reference via the ALIASMGR_DATA configuration variable. The application attempts to open the selected data file and then read its contents into memory. The status bar informs you how many aliased commands are read. All aliases found in the ACAD.ALM file might not be assigned, either because the shortened command might already be in the command list, or because the full command name may not be found in the existing alias list. You can then use aliased commands that are more commonly used.
The aliases that are added through this process only exist for the current session of MicroStation, or until you open another Alias Manager data file.
You must execute a File > Save (or File > Save As) for the additions to become permanent.
To create an Alias Manager data file inside MicroStation
1. From the Alias Manager dialog box, choose File > Open to open an existing Alias Manager data file. 2. Add new entries to the list of aliases as needed. 3. In the Command field, type in the command for which you want to create an alias. At any time, you can either press the <space bar> or the <Enter> key to complete the unfinished portion of the command. Alias Manager either activates the aliased MicroStation tool or continues with additional portions to the command. For example:
Command line<Enter> Key-in Line Result Place line constrained
z<space>w<space> Zoom window Window area extended
4. In the Aliased Input field, type the MicroStation key-in that is to be aliased to this Command. If you allowed Alias Manager to complete your command, it automatically provides an entry for the Aliased Input field. The respective aliased input is displayed in the appropriate text field. Any commands that are not aliased in the text file produces two beeps.
To create an alias file
1. In the Alias Manager dialog box, choose File > Open. 2. Select the directory that contains the ACAD.ALM file that you want to use. 3. In the Filter field, type in ACAD.ALM 4. From the Files list box, select ACAD.ALM to open it. The application attempts to open the file and then read its contents into memory. MicroStation displays information on how many aliased commands are successfully processed.
Ali
di l
3/24/2010
Opens when the Alias Manager MDL application is loaded.
Page 24 of 41
Alias Manager dialog box
File > New
Clears out the current list of aliased commands (if any exist). This allows you to start building a new Alias Manager data file using the tools provided in the application. You are prompted to save any changes before the list of commands is cleared.
File > Open
Prompts you to enter the name of a file to open and use in the application. You are then prompted to save the selection in the ALIASMGR_DATA configuration variable. Once a file is selected, Alias Manager displays information on how many records were read and are currently available.
File > Save
The Alias Manager data file that was last read is overwritten with the current commands and their equivalencies. All Commands are in upper case and all Aliased Input is in lower case. The commands are sorted in ascending order. Commands that had been commented out, those statements starting with `#' characters, appear towards the beginning of the file. Any additional aliases that were imported from an ACAD.ALM file are also output to the file. Any general comments, those statements starting with `;' characters, will not be written to the new file. However, the Alias Manager does place a filename and time and date stamp at the beginning of the file. In addition, the status of the AutoQueue flag is output to the file. See Options > Auto Queue for more information.
File > Save As
Similar to the previous option, but allows you to create a new file or overwrite an existing file via a dialog box.
File > Info
Opens a modal dialog box that contains the current data filename and the number of commands that are currently aliased.
File > List
Lists the entire contents of the currently open Alias Manager (ALM) data file in a window that has controls for scrolling. This allows you to view the list of commands that are available to the user as well as the respective aliased input for each of the commands. This list does not include any deletions, modifications, or insertions that have made to the existing commands until the file is saved.
File > Exit
Exits the application and unloads it from memory.

Edit > Delete
Deletes the command and the aliased input that is currently displayed in the Alias Manager dialog box. You are prompted to verify the deletion. You must have an entry in both the Command and the Aliased Input text fields.
Edit > Modify
Changes the aliased input that is currently displayed in the Alias Manager dialog box. You are prompted to verify the modification. You must have an entry in both the Command and the Aliased Input text fields and the Command must already exist in the list of available
3/24/2010
commands.
Edit > Insert
Page 25 of 41
Inserts the Command and the Aliased Input that is currently displayed in the Alias Manager dialog box into the list of available entries. You are prompted to verify the insertion. You must have an entry in both the Command and the Aliased Input text fields, and the Command must already exist in the list of available commands.
Options > Auto Queue
If enabled, commands are automatically submitted after they are entered completely. A <space> or <Enter> is not required to start the input that is aliased with the command. When an Alias Manager data file is saved (using File > Save or File > Save As), the status of this toggle is output to the data file. The result will be +autoqueue if it is enabled and -autoqueue if it is not.
Options > Extracting Icon > Menu Key-ins
This option, when enabled, speeds up the creation of Alias Manager data files by appending key-ins associated with user selected palette and subpalette icons as well as menu items to any existing text that currently exists in the Aliased Input text item. A semicolon is automatically added to separate multiple key-ins. The input queue is not affected by this option being enabled or disabled, which must be done manually. The Aliased Input text item is not altered if this option is disabled. The user is notified that this option is enabled when <<extracting key-ins>> is appended to the title of the Alias Manager dialog box.
Help > About Alias Manager
Selection of this menu item activates MicroStation's online help utility. The user is presented with the same information that is contained in this document.
ASCII Group
The ASCII Group utility (ascgroup.ma) reads a settings group specification from a text file and creates a settings file. If you used earlier editions of MicroStation you can import data from one or more settings files (STG files) into element templates. Keep the following in mind when using ASCII Group:

Any text following a # sign is considered a comment. Keywords are case sensitive. Each keyword must be placed with its value on a separate line (there cannot be a line feed between the keyword and its value). Maximum line length is 255 characters. Each add or set group or component keyword must have a matching end keyword. Keywords between the add and end group or component keyword apply only to that group or component.
To load the ASCII Group utility
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Key-in. 2. In the Key-in window, key in MDL LOAD ASCGROUP ASCII Group Commands All ASCII Group utility commands display a File Open dialog box if filenames are not keyed in.
Key-in Description Creates a new .stg file from the input settings or scales text file. ASCGROUP CONVERT SETTINGS t t fil tti fil
3/24/2010
ASCGROUP CONVERT SCALES <text filename> <settings filename> ASCGROUP EXPORT SETTINGS <settings filename> <text filename> Creates a new text file from the input .stg file. ASCGROUP EXPORT SCALES <settings filename> <text filename> ASCGROUP MERGE SETTINGS <text filename> <settings filename>
Page 26 of 41
Merges the settings or scales in the input text file into the output .stg file. ASGCROUP MERGE SCALES <text filename> <settings filename>
Supported Keywords Values listed in quotations indicate that only the listed values apply. In the input file, the quotations around the values should be omitted.
Keyword Value Modifies an existing settings group Adds a new settings group Ends specifications/modifications to the group named by the last setGroup or addGroup statement Modifies an existing linear settings component Adds a new linear settings component (must be inside a setGroup or addGroup block) Ends specifications/modifications to the linear settings component named in by the last setLinear or addLinear statement Modifies an existing text settings component Adds a new text settings component (must be inside a setGroup or addGroup block) Ends specifications/modifications to the text settings component named by the last setText or addText statement Modifies an existing cell settings component Adds a new cell setting component (must be inside a setGroup or addGroup block) Ends specifications/modifications to the cell settings component named in the last setCell or addCell statement Description
setGroup group name addGroup group name endGroup none setLinear component name component name
addLinear
endLinear none setText addText endText setCell addCell endCell component name component name none component name component name none
Generic Settings These apply to all components and must be contained within a set<X> or add<X> component block.
Keyword setLevel setColor setWeight setStyle setName Value integer integer integer style name Description Sets active level Sets active color Sets active weight Sets the active line style Sets the active command Sets the active line style scale
component name Changes the component's name/description
setCommand key-in string setStyleScale double
Linear Settings These apply only to linear settings components and must be contained within a setLinear or addLinear component block.
Keyword setArea setFill Value solid, hole Description Sets the active area for the linear component Sets the active fill color for the linear component
none, filled, boundary Sets the active fill type for the linear component
setFillColor integer
3/24/2010
Text Settings These apply only to text settings components and must be contained within a setText or addText component block.
Keyword setTextHeight setTextWidth setLineSpacing setCharSpacing setUnits setTextAngle Value double double double double double double Description Sets the active text height Sets the active text width Sets the active line spacing Sets the active character spacing Sets the active units name (e.g., mm or ') Sets the active angle
Page 27 of 41
Possible values: Sets the single line text justification: LT LC LB CT setTextJust CC CB RT RC RB CC - center center CB - center bottom RT - right top RC - right center RB - right bottom LT - left top LC - left center LB - left bottom CT - center top
Possible values: Sets the multi-line text justification: LT LC LB LMT LMC LMB setNodeJust CT CC CB RT RC RB RMT RMC CT - center top CC - center center CB - center bottom RT - right top RC - right center RB - right bottom RMT - right margin top RMC i ht i t LT - left top LC - left center LB - left bottom LMT - left margin top LMC - left margin center LMB - left margin bottom
3/24/2010
RMB setFont setFractions setLineLength setSlant setVertical setUnderline font name on, off integer double on, off on, off RMB - right margin bottom Sets the active font Sets fractions on or off Sets the active line length Sets the amount of slant Sets vertical text setting on or off Sets the underline text setting on or off Sets the paper size setting on or off
Page 28 of 41
setUsePaperSize on, off
Cell Settings These apply only to cell settings components and must be contained within a setCell or addCell component block.
Keyword setCellXScale setCellYScale setCellZScale setAllowSharedCells setCellLibrary setCellName setCellAngle setCellType setSharedCell double double double on, off library name cell name double enabled, disabled Value Description Sets the active scale in the X direction Sets the active scale in the Y direction Sets the active scale in the Z direction Sets the apply drawing scale setting on or off Sets the use shared cells setting on or off Sets the active cell library Sets the active cell name Sets the active angle in degrees Indicates whether cells should be placed as shared
setApplyDrawing Scale on, off
placement, terminator Indicates whether the component refers to a placement or terminator cell
Alternate Text Editors

The Text Editor dialog box and the WYSIWYG Text Editor window are alternate text editors to the default Word Processor Text Editor. To select either of these for usage, adjust the Text Editor Style preference in the Text category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Command Line Arguments and Exception Logs

The following sections contain information about installation, command line arguments you can run at startup, and exception logs management. Setting Parameters for MicroStation Silent Installation Command Line Arguments Managing Exception Logs
Setting Parameters for MicroStation Silent Installation

The following command line parameters can be set for a customized silent installation for MicroStation. These parameters allow you to set the installation directory, the location of your workspaces and the information necessary to obtain licenses via SELECT Server.
Parameter Name INSTALLDIR Description The directory where the MicroStation program and associated files will be installed. This value must be quoted if it contains spaces or other characters that are reserved by the command shell.
3/24/2010
BSI_USTN_HOMEROOT
Page 29 of 41
The directory where the MicroStation workspaces and associated files will be installed. This value must be quoted if it contains spaces or other characters that are reserved by the command shell.
For example, the command: msiexec /l*v c:\silent.log /qn INSTALLDIR="C:\silent install\Program\" BSI_USTN_HOMEROOT="C:\Silent install\homeroot\" /i "MicroStation 08.09.00.62.msi" invokes a silent (/qn) MicroStation installation (/i "MicroStation 08.09.00.62.msi"), producing an install log file into "c:\silent.log" (/l*v c:\silent.log ), placing the program files (INSTALLDIR="C:\silent install\Program\") and workspaces (BSI_USTN_HOMEROOT="C:\Silent install\homeroot\") into the specified directories.
Command Line Arguments

You can use the following command line arguments to start MicroStation in various modes.
Argument -Debug -Help or -? -I<parameters> -M<model_name> -O -QP<password> -R -RestoreDefaults -RestoreDefaultsQuiet -S<startup_file> -WA<mdl_application> Passes parameters to MS_INITAPPS, which is the list of initial startup MDL applications. Specifies the model to open at startup. Does not open any references. Specifies a password for a protected file. Opens the DGN file in read-only mode. Restores the default settings and exits. Restores the default settings and exits, with no output. Writes text in the startup file to the command queue after startup. Specifies an MDL application to initialize at startup. (This is the same as MS_INITAPPS.) Displays the entire list of command line arguments for ustation.exe. Result Writes the configuration variables and their settings to a debugging variable definition file and exits.
Specifies the configuration file to use at startup, and the path to this file. Example: -wcC:\Program WC<path_to_configuration_file> Files\Bentley\MicroStation\config\MyConfig.cfg -WD<database> -WI<interface> -WP<project> -WS<configuration_variable> -WU<user> -WR<path> Specifies the database configuration. Specifies the interface configuration. Specifies the project configuration. Specifies a configuration variable to be defined. Example: -wsMS_SECURITY_LEVEL=HIGH Specifies the user configuration. Specifies the path to the workspace's root (_USTN_WORKSPACEROOT). Example: -wrC:\Bentley\Workspace
Managing Exception Logs

When a program exception occurs, MicroStation appends technical details of the exception to the Exception.log file and writes a binary "MiniDump.dmp" file. By default, MicroStation maintains a history of the last 20 program exceptions in the "ManageExceptionLogs.vbs" file. Both the "Exception.log" file and "MiniDump.dmp" files provide valuable information to Bentley for diagnosing the cause of program breakdowns. The information recorded contains, but is not limited to, details such as CPU register values, call stack history, loaded DLLs and MDL applications. An exception log can generate approximately 150K bytes in the Exception.log file and 80K bytes to the "MiniDump.dmp" file. After generating these files, MicroStation attempts to launch an external process to operate on these files. Normally, there is no need to customize this process. However, there may be circumstances where a CAD manager might want additional processing to be performed. For example:

Sending an exception notification e-mail to the CAD Manager or CAD support staff Centrally harvesting exception information from workstations to servers
3/24/2010
Page 30 of 41
Notifying in-house software developers that their applications are failing

Since "MiniDump.dmp" is a snapshot of MicroStation's process memory, the size of the file can vary widely based on the setting of $(MS_MiniDumpType) and the amount of virtual memory consumed by MicroStation at the time of the fault. The valid hexadecimal values for MS_MiniDumpType are those accepted by the Windows API function MiniDumpWriteDump. In practice, there are two useful values:
Value 7
Description records the full user mode address space of MicroStation
4 (default) records minimal exception information
Managing exception logs via the ManageExceptionLogs.vbs script The script "ManageExceptionLogs.vbs" is written in Visual Basic Script so it can be easily customized to be site specific. "ManageExceptionLogs.vbs" performs the following steps: 1. Deletes "$(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-20" (or whatever "g_maxLogsToKeep" is set in the script). 2. Shifts any existing subdirectories to the next higher value. For example:
Move from Move to
$(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-19 $(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-20 $(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-18 $(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-19 $(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-1 $(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-2
3. Creates $(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-1\. 4. Moves the most recently created Exception.log and MiniDump.dmp into $(MS_TEMP)ExceptionHistory-1\. 5. Optionally, sends e-mail to the CAD manager with the name of the computer where the exception occurred. This can be particularly useful for initial deployment of pre-release editions of MicroStation. The script variables "g_emailHostName", "g_emailCADAdministrator", and "g_emailUserDomain" must be populated with company or site specific values. 6. Implements or invokes any other user specific processing near the end of the "Sub Main" routine of the script.
MicroStation's exception processing can be completely replaced with user specific processing if needed. After recording the exception information, MicroStation examines the variable $(MS_ProcessExceptionLog) and parses both a "window display control" (see SW_xxxx constants in the Microsoft Windows API documentation of "ShowWindow") value and an executable with optional arguments. For example, the default MicroStation processing configuration sets, in "msfiles.cfg":
This indicates that wscript should run "manageExceptionLogs.vbs" in a hidden window.

" MS_ProcessExceptionLog 0 "$(windir)\system32\wscript.exe" "$(MSDIR)manageExceptionLogs.vbs"
Bentley Digitizer Interface for Windows Information

Bentley's Digitizing Tablet Interface is compliant with the WINTAB interface specification as published by LCS/Telegraphics. This interface enables MicroStation users to operate with a variety of digitizer tablets in various Windows environments without requiring a WINTAB driver from the digitizer vendor.
To be notified by e-mail of future Bentley Digitizer Tablet Interface enhancements, send e-mail to wintab@bentley.com with the word Register on the subject line. Please include the brand and model of tablet you are using and the version of Windows that you are running.
Requirements Installation Configuring the Driver Compatibility with other WINTAB Drivers Trouble Shooting Mouse emulation buttons and MicroStation's Command button Assigning the Mouse Emulation Button Screen Savers
3/24/2010
Mouse emulator default button assignments Smart Puck Filter
Page 31 of 41
Requirements
In order to install and run Bentley's Digitizing Tablet Interface, you must have the following loaded:

MicroStation A supported digitizer tablet A serial port Approximately 300 KB of available disk space
Installation
Enabling the Bentley DTI WINTAB option, under the Utilities component, during product installation, will create the following files in the same directory/folder as the main program's executable: wintab.exe Installation program and wintab32.dll Windows drivers.
Configuring the Driver

Configuration and setup of the software to access the appropriately configured tablet consists of selecting four fields in the Bentley Tablet Driver dialog box.
To configure and set up a tablet
1. Double-click "wintab.exe" in File Manager or Explorer, or start wintab from a Command Prompt window. 2. Select the specific tablet. 3. Select the tablet dimensions. 4. Select the number of buttons on your tablet's puck. 5. Select the COM port that the tablet is attached. 6. Click OK. Testing the tablet and configuration Double-click wintab.exe. Move the puck around the tablet. The screen pointer should track the motion of the puck. If the screen pointer does not track the puck motion, see Trouble Shooting.
Compatibility with other WINTAB Drivers

Only one WINTAB driver can control a serial port at a time. If you wish to use this driver in conjunction with any other Windows pointing device, plug your digitizer into another serial port. You will be able to use either driver by plugging your digitizer into the appropriate serial port. Some drivers attempt to probe both serial ports. If your current driver does this, it must be completely disabled or removed from your system.
3/24/2010
Page 32 of 41
Trouble Shooting
The vast majority of problems reported with this driver are actually machine specific configuration errors. You must insure that no other software is using the serial port that you want to use with the digitizer. You must disable other applications such as FAX drivers, other WINTAB drivers, dial-up+ networking, serial mouse drivers, and terminal emulators from accessing the serial port that is connected to the digitizer. Conflicts with other software To insure that no other software is using the serial ports, Stop and Startup any other tablet driver software in Control Panel. It is usually a device beginning with wt. Check that the Serial device status is Started and Automatic. Check that the Sermouse device status is Disabled, unless you have a serial mouse connected to any of the COM ports. Windows system without a mouse This driver is not intended to be used in systems as the only system pointing device. A mouse must be attached to the computer to insure that the system cursor is visible in all windows on the desktop. This is a limitation of Windows and not the Bentley Digitizer Tablet Driver. Individual tablet peculiarities Most tablets with wireless pucks tablets will go to sleep if the puck is temporarily unused. This includes CalComp DrawingBoard series and SummaSketch series tablets. Pressing any button on the puck while in proximity will wake the tablet. If this does not work, and you are using a CalComp DrawingBoard series tablet, try pressing the 0 button twice while the crosshair is over the Config/Exit area on the tablet. The Summagraphics SummaSketch Professional Plus line of digitizers have a variety of internal firmware that implements neither accurately nor completely the UIOF command standard. To improve this situation, this driver provides the following choices for UIOF protocol tablets:

Summagraphics MM 1812 (UIOF Format) Summagraphics SummaSketch series with 12 or 16 button puck Summagraphics SummaSketch II Professional Plus Summagraphics Microgrid and Summagrid Tablet Altek AC30 (Alternate ROM)
There is no way to automatically determine all variations in tablet firmware and which configuration will yield the best results with your particular tablet. You may have to try each tablet option until you achieve satisfactory operations.
Mouse emulation buttons and MicroStation's Command button

If a button on the puck is assigned a function such as Right-Click or Left-Click in System Mouse Emulation context, you cannot use that button for MicroStation's Command button. It is best to set one button on the puck to Left-Click, another to Right-Click, and the rest to Application Defined. This is the default button mapping. We recommend that you select the button that you want to use for the Data button in MicroStation to Left-Click and the button you want to use for the Reset button in MicroStation to the Right-Click function. The following cases are specific scenarios and instructions for making sure that things work properly. Case 1 Suppose that WINTAB is told that the digitizer has a four-button puck. WINTAB knows by the tablet name and the number of buttons that the buttons are arranged as:
3/24/2010
Page 33 of 41
If the operator sets the screen mapping portion of the tablet (using MicroStation's Digitizer Partition command) to the entire surface of the digitizer. The operator also attaches a MicroStation command menu. Notice that the two areas overlap. The screen mapping portion of the tablet utilizes the System Mouse Emulation context, which has the highest priority for buttons that are mapped to system buttons like Left and Right. Therefore, when such buttons are pressed, they come to MicroStation as Windows events in screen coordinates in the System Mouse Emulation context. Since MicroStation does not get the digitizer coordinates, it cannot determine if you have a command in your menu at the cursor position or not. Since the System Mouse Emulation context (screen mapping portion) overlaps the entire menu, the menu appears not to work at all.
Case 2 Partial overlap: In this configuration, if a button assigned to a system function is designated as the Command button, it will work fine outside of the area marked 1 in the figure below, but will fail to select commands from the tablet while in that area.
Case 3 No overlap: Assume that the screen mapping region is area 1, and the MicroStation menu is attached in area 2. These areas do not overlap. Therefore, even if you have designated a button assigned to a system function as the Command button, it will work OK. However, if you move either the menu or the screen mapping region such that they overlap, you will have problems as mentioned in Case 1 and Case 2 above.
3/24/2010
Page 34 of 41
Assigning the Mouse Emulation Button

This example demonstrates reassigning the mouse emulation functions. Although this example uses a 12-button puck the sequence presented is applicable to all cursor arrangements. Perhaps you have a puck with a circular button arrangement. The default arrangement is:
However, you have traditionally used the following arrangement:
D is the Data command R is the Reset command C is the Command command T is the Tentative command The rest of the buttons are either assigned other commands or unassigned.
To change the assignments from the default configuration to your preferred configuration
1. You must first assign the buttons in the Wintab dialog box and then in MicroStation. 2. Start the Bentley Tablet Driver. 3. Select Configure Mouse Emulator.
3/24/2010
5. Click Button #1 in the Physical Button list box. 6. Click Application defined function in the Action list box. 7. Click Button #3 in the Physical Button list box. 8. Click Application defined function in the Action list box. A Bentley B precedes each line in the Physical Button list box. 9. Click Button #2 in the Physical Button list box. 10. Click Left-click in the Action list box. 11. Click Button #5 in the Physical Button list box. 12. Click Right-click in the Action list box . There should not be a Bentley B on the lines for buttons number 2 and 5. 13. Click OK in the Wintab Button Configure dialog box. 14. Turn on Save as default in the Configure Tablet Context dialog box. 15. Click OK in the Configure Tablet Context dialog box. 16. Click OK on Bentley Tablet Driver dialog box. 17. Start the Bentley Tablet Driver. 18. Click Close on Bentley Tablet Driver dialog box. You have successfully changed the Right-click and Left-click events from buttons 1 and 3 to 2 and 5. 19. Start MicroStation. 20. Select Workspace > Button Assignments. The Button Assignments dialog box opens. 21. Click Default. 22. Select Tentative from the list box. 23. Press button #8 on the puck when the cursor is in the Button Definition Area . 24. Select Command.
Page 35 of 41
25. Press button #11 on the puck when the cursor is in the Button Definition Area. Due to the large variety of tablets, pucks, and drivers combinations MicroStation does not attempt to display the actual button number. MicroStation will display a synthesized button number in the Invoked by column. 26. Repeat steps 23 and 24 for each button and function pair that you wish to set and click OK when you are finished.
Screen Savers
If you are using the Bentley Digitizer Tablet Interface and have a Window's screen saver enabled, you may have to press <Shift> or <Enter> in order to return control of the computer from the screen saver.
Mouse emulator default button assignments

D simulates the left mouse button or data button. R simulates the right mouse button or reset button. All other buttons are available to MicroStation. The following are common cursors/puck arrangements:
3/24/2010
3 Button Stylus D (tip) R (barrel ) 2 (barrel ) 4 Button Cursor (diamond layout)
Page 36 of 41
12 Button Cursor
D 2 4 7 5 8 R 6 9
10 11 12
16 Button Cursor
D 2 5 9 6 3 7 R 8
10 11 12
13 14 15 16
Altek AC30 (Alternate ROM)

Sizes Cursors/puck arrangements
24 x 36 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 28 x 28 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 36 x 48 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 44 x 60
Altek ACD30 (Standard ROM)

24 x 24 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 24 x 36 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 28 x 28 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 26 x 28 44 x 60
Altek AC40 Controller

Sizes 12 x 12 18 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 36 28 x 28 36 x 48 42 x 60 44 x 60 48 x 60 60 x 120 Cursors/puck arrangements 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
3/24/2010
Calcomp DrawingBoards, 9000 and 9100 Series
Page 37 of 41
12 x 12 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 12 x 18 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 18 x 24 4 Button Cursor-(in line format) D23R 24 x 36 4 Button Cursor-(diamond layout) 36 x 48 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 44 x 60
GTCO Digipad, accuPad, Super L and Roll-Up Series

11 x 11 2 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 11 x 17 3 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 16 x 24 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 17 x 24 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 20 x 20 20 x 24 24 x 36 28 x 28 30 x 36 36 x 48 42 x 60 44 x 60
GTCO MD-7
Sizes 6x6 Cursors/puck arrangements 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
12 x 12 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout
GTCO Ultima and SketchMaster

12 x 12 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 12 x 18 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
Intergraph (Kurta) Menu Tablet 1813 and XLC Series

12 x 18 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 18 x 24 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 24 x 36 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 36 x 48 42 x 60
See Kurta, data format 2, classic button numbering for information on the Intergraph Menu Tablet, alternate puck.
3/24/2010
Kurta Series TWO, IS/ONE, IS/THREE, ADB and XGT Series
Sizes 6x8 Cursors/puck arrangements 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout
Page 38 of 41
12 x 12 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 12 x 17 4 Button Cursor-(diamond layout) 18 x 24 12 Button Cursor- (circular layout) 24 x 36 36 x 48
44 x 60
12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
Kurta, data format 2, classic button numbering and Kurta, data format 2B, classic button numbering and Intergraph Menu Tablet, alternate puck
Sizes 6x8 Cursors/puck arrangements 4 Button Stylus-Standard Layout
12 x 12 4 Button Cursor-(diamond layout) 12 x 17 12 Button Cursor-(circular layout) 12 x 18 18 x 24 24 x 36 36 x 48
44 x 60
12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
Numonics 2200 Series

12 x 12 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 12 x 18 3 Stylus Cursor-Standard Layout 20 x 24 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 24 x 36 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 36 x 48 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 44 x 60
Scriptel SPD or SPC Series
3/24/2010
Page 39 of 41
12 x 12 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 12 x 18 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
Summagraphics Bit Pad Series

Sizes Cursors/puck arrangements 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
12 x 12 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout
Summagraphics MicroGrid and SummaGrid Tablet

12 x 12 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 18 x 24 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 24 x 36 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 24 x 24 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 36 x 48 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 44 x 60
Summagraphics MM 1812 (MM Format) and FX Series

12 x 12 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 12 x 18 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
Summagraphics MM 1812 (UIOF Format)

12 x 12 2 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 12 x 18 3 Button Stylus-Standard Layout 4 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 12 Button Cursor-Standard Layout 16 Button Cursor-Standard Layout
Smart Puck Filter

You can control the Smart Puck Filter by selecting Advanced or Smart Puck Filter from the Bentley Tablet Driver dialog box. The Bentley Tablet Driver dialog box provides a way to change the five entries in the WINTAB32.INI that control the Smart Puck Filter's behavior. NoMotionXFilter NoMotionYFilter The distance that the puck must move to switch the driver from filtered mode to normal mode. While in filtered mode, any puck movement within the area defined by these settings is ignored. These numbers represent a distance in the X and Y coordinates and are valued in digitizer resolution units. Digitizer resolutions expected by this driver are 200, 500, or 1000 units per inch. The following list of digitizers report in 200 units per inch:
3/24/2010

Page 40 of 41
GTCO MD-7 Summagraphics Bit Pad Series
The following list of digitizers report in 500 units per inch:

Altek AC30 (Alternate ROM) Altek AC30 (Standard ROM) GTCO Ultima and SketchMaster Summagraphics MicroGrid and Summagrid Tablets Summagraphics MM 1812 (MM Format) & FX Series Summagraphics MM 1812 (UIOF Format) Summagraphics SummaSketch series with 12 or 16 button puck Summagraphics SummaSketch II and III Professional Plus series
The following list of digitizers report in 1000 units per inch:

Altek AC40 Controller Calcomp DrawingBoards & 9000, 9100 Series GTCO Digipad Series and Roll-Up Series Intergraph Menu Tablet Intergraph Menu Tablet 1813 & XLC Series Kurta Series TWO, IS/ONE, ADB and XGT Series Numonics 2200 Series Scriptel SPD or SPC Series Summagraphics MM 1201 and Compatibles
If you have a 1000 units per inch digitizer and you want the mode switch to occur when you move the puck 1/2 inch in any direction, set both NoMotionXFilter and NoMotionYFilter to 500.
NoMotionTimerFilter The minimum time that must pass before filtered mode is entered. This time is in milliseconds. Therefore a fivesecond delay will be entered as 5000. NoMotionIconChange NoMotionTitleChange These variables control the effects on the driver's icon when a mode switch occurs. Normally, the driver's icon will switch from blue to red to indicate filtered mode. Setting NoMotionIconChange=0 disables this notification. Setting NoMotionTitleChange=0 disables the title change of the icon. Normally the default behavior is desired and these variables are not set in the WINTAB32.INI file. Example modification: You should issue the command notepad %windir%\wintab32.ini to modify the file. Suppose that your existing WINTAB32.INI file consists of the following:
3/24/2010
[Config] window=1 tablet=DP5 [DP5] cursor=16 arrangement=0 width=17 height=11 [COM Port] PORT=2
Page 41 of 41
To enable a one-inch filter zone that activates no sooner then three seconds after the puck stops moving, add the following:
[Config] window=1 tablet=DP5 [DP5] NoMotionXFilter=500 NoMotionYFilter=500 NoMotionTimerFilter=3000 cursor=16 arrangement=0 width=17 height=11 [COM Port] PORT=2 To enable a 0.05 inch filter zone to remove puck jitter, add the following:
[Config] window=1 tablet=DP5 [DP5] NoMotionXFilter=5 NoMotionYFilter=5 NoMotionTimerFilter=3 cursor=16 arrangement=0 width=17 height=11 [COM Port] PORT=2
3/24/2010
Technical Information Resources
Page 1 of 3
docs.bentley.com Bentley Services Bentley Discussion Groups Bentley Library Bentley on the Web TechNotes/Frequently Asked Questions BE Magazine BE Newsletter Client Server BE Careers Network MicroStation ReadMe
Technical Technical Information Information Resources Resources
docs.bentley.com
docs.bentley.com is your repository of product help files and books. You can browse through online help for specific information or download it to ensure you have the most recent help available on your computer. Also through this site, many product books are available as free, downloadable PDFs, or can be purchased pre-bound with a credit card.
Bentley Services
There are a variety of Bentley Services, including Bentley SELECT priority services, one-on-one consulting, training programs, MicroStation resellers, as well as your local technical support provider.
U.S./Canada/Latin America support@bentley.com Europe/Middle East/Africa Asia/Pacific support@bentley.nl support@bentley.com.au
Bentley SELECT Bentley Professional Services Bentley Institute
Bentley SELECT
Bentley SELECT is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads and MySELECT CD, around-the-clock technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training and consulting services, as well as technical information and support channels. For more detailed information go online at http://selectservices.bentley.com.
Bentley Professional Services

Bentley Professional Services is a team of project managers, technical managers, application specialists, and developers organized regionally and assigned by skill sets. By adding their extensive knowledge to your project, they provide customized services on a one-toone basis to help you maximize your investment in Bentley technology.
Bentley Institute
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent, high quality, user training for a variety of Bentley products and varying levels of application experience
file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh8CDA.htm
3/24/2010
Page 2 of 3
Bentley Institute training is developed to maximize your productivity by using examples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is developed concurrently with software applications to provide knowledge of the latest tools and features. Additionally, all Bentley Institute faculty meet rigorous certification requirements. To access the Bentley Institute home page directly from MicroStation, choose Help > Bentley Institute Training.
Bentley Discussion Groups

Meet other users of Bentley products, exchange ideas, and discuss a wide range of technical subjects in Bentley's discussion groups. They can be accessed via most common discussion group newsreaders or Web browsers and are a good source of how-to tips, technical information, and programming techniques from Bentley employees and professionals who use our products. A current list of discussion groups as well as helpful information regarding them can be found at http://discussion.bentley.com/help/.
Bentley Library
Bentley Library, your window to the online world of MicroStation, provides access to online resources such as industry-specific cells, line styles, and visualization patterns, as well as documentation and other information, including tips and tricks. To access Bentley Library, click on the Bentley Library icon in the Standard tool box (Tools > Standard) or point your Web browser to http://selectservices.bentley.com/en-US/Support/Downloads+And+Updates/Bentley+Library/
Bentley on the Web

Here you will find links to products, services, industries, events and training, community information, and the latest corporate news announcements pertaining to Bentley Systems, Incorporated, your global provider of collaborative software solutions.
TechNotes/Frequently Asked Questions

TechNotes, FAQs and other technical support information are available online at Bentley's MicroStation V8 Technical Support Documentation page.
BE Magazine
The BE Magazine is a quarterly e-magazine focused on the Bentley community of users. It serves as a showcase for Bentley users and their work improving the world's infrastructure. Each issue is an open forum for the world community of architecture, engineering, and construction professionals and owner-operators.
BE Newsletter
Th BE N l tt i il l tt i i d t B tl d t d t t h i l ti d
3/24/2010
Page 3 of 3
Client Server
Client Server is an online newsletter for Bentley SELECT subscribers. This online resource is filled with the latest technical news and information. Archives of Client Server provide an abundant resource of technical information in the form of book excerpts, case studies, commentary and analysis, and productivity tips.
BE Careers Network
The BE (Bentley Empowered) Careers Network is a program dedicated to supporting accredited academic institutions by providing the latest releases of Bentley products, as well as world-renowned support, online communities, and the latest engineering news and information. For details about the BE Careers Network go online at http://www.becareers.org/.
MicroStation ReadMe
The product ReadMe document in your MicroStation directory contains important information about setting up and using the product.
3/24/2010

Micro Station V8 XM Users Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micro Station V8 XM Users Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What's New?

What's What's New? New?

New in SELECT Update #2

Conceptual Modeling Tools Enhancements

Additional options for full dynamics and extrude faces

Extrude Faces Lets you extrude a selected face of a solid. F ll D i L t d fi h th th difi d l t di l i t ti l (F ll D i ) d i t h

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Microsoft Windows Vista Logo Certification

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

New in SELECT Update #1

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Direct manipulation of solids

Identify the vertex (left) and move it (right).

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Identify the edge (left) and move it (right).

Identify the face (left) and move it (right).

Deleting a vertex: Identify the vertex (left) and accept (right).

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Deleting an edge: Identify the edge (left) and accept (right).

Deleting faces: Identify the face (left) and accept (right).

Surface created with the Loft Block to Circle tool.

Construct Surface by Section tool I th C t S f t k th C t tS f b S ti N t kt li l d b th C t tS f b N t k d

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

The Lock Index (<L>) shortcut is changed to <L>,<I>

Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS) Enhancements

Other features include an icon bar menu that lets you:

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

B-spline Curves Enhancements

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Design History Enhancements

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Distributed DGN Support

Design History is enhanced to accommodate distributed DGN functionality.

Drawing Scale Window Enhancements

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Element Information Enhancements

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Google 3D Warehouse Interface

Google Earth Tools Enhancements

Google Earth KML v2.1 files are supported.

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

License Management Enhancements

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Additional unit options for measuring area and volume

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

When measuring volumes, you can choose from:

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

OBJ File Support

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Place Note Enhancements

file://C:\Documents and Settings\fin060470\Local Settings\Temp\~hh3FFF.htm

Thumbnail preview time-out

Two settings are added to the Print Preferences dialog box:

Show print status dialog Thumbnail preview timeout (sec.)

Color mode and plot to 3D